Konica Minolta Ineo 1052 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

 

Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14

Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12 User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12 User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6

Instructions de remplacement ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Unité de développement (YMCK) . Unité de développement (JMCN) Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M ......................................... 2-3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN)................................................................................................... 3-3 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs..................................................... 4-3 Table des matières-2 Unité de développement (JMCN) 1 Introduction Unité de développement (JMCN) 1-3 1 1 Introduction Objectifs de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Le système ORU-M permet aux utilisateurs de remplacer eux-mêmes certains composants de la machine. Il contribue aussi à réduire la durée d'immobilisation de la machine. Note à l'intention des utilisateurs d'ORU-M Assurez-vous de suivre des formations pour obtenir un certificat d'agrément avant d'utiliser l'ORU-M. Lors du remplacement des composants (ou unités) de la machine, veuillez suivre les instructions figurant dans les INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management). Pour effectuer les opérations de remplacement en toute sécurité et fiabilité, conservez soigneusement INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management), afin de ne pas les égarer. Si cela arrivait malgré tout, veuillez contacter votre SAV. 1 1-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-3 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Lors du remplacement des unités ORU-M, accédez au mode ORU-M, puis remplacez les unités ORU-M conformément aux procédures indiquées à l'écran. Ce guide explique les différentes rubriques dans l'ordre où elles apparaissent à l'écran. Veuillez vous reporter à "2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M" en ce qui concerne les préparatifs à effectuer une fois que vous avez accédé au mode ORU-M, mais avant de remplacer les unités, "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui est des procédures de remplacement de chaque unité, et "4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui traite des procédures de réglages après remplacement des unités. Imprimez ce guide et conservez-le pour le consulter avant de commencer l'opération de remplacement. 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Avant de remplacer les unités ORU-M, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour passer en mode ORU-M. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. L'écran Utilitaire s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [M-RUO (Rpl.Unité)]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. Cet écran affiche la liste des noms d'unité, des cycles de vie, et des dates de remplacement des unités ORU-M. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Imprimez un exemplaire concernant la machine. % Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-5 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 5 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 6 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. REMARQUE Il ne vous sera pas possible d'imprimer la totalité de la sortie-test si vous spécifiez un autre format que A3 ou 11 e 17. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. 8 Répétez les étapes 3 à 7 pour imprimer les deux sorties, de [Type1] et [Type2]. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 9 Appuyez sur [Lancer Remplacement]. 10 Appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine s'éteint automatiquement. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-7 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 11 Si vous voulez procéder aux travaux de remplacement, appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine passe automatiquement en mode Remplacement ORU-M, et affiche à nouveau l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. 12 Veuillez vous reporter à "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour remplacer les unités. REMARQUE Lors du remplacement, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-3 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) REMARQUE Lors du remplacement de l'unité, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 2 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 3 Desserez la vis [1] (1 pièce) et ouvrez le capot avant du ventilateur [2]. 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 4 Tirez la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] vers le haut et vers l'avant, puis tirez l'unité de traitement [3]. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 5 Débranchez le connecteur [1] à côté de l'étiquette bleu lavande après avoir libéré le loquet. REMARQUE L'illustration donne un exemple de la manière de remplacer l'unité de développement Jaune. 6 Enlevez les vis [1] (6 pièces). Poussez et faites glisser la pièce de pression [2] vers l'intérieur puis déposez-la. 7 Enlevez l'unité de développement [1] à remplacer de l'unité de traitement [2]. Enlevez la face arrière de l'unité de développement [1] de la machine, puis enlevez l'unité de développement complète de l'unité de traitement [2]. REMARQUE Lorsque vous enlevez l'unité de développement, veillez à ne pas toucher le rouleau de développement ou à ne pas l'endommager. Veillez aussi à maintenir l'unité de développement à l'horizontale. (Sinon du toner pourrait se répandre par le capot supérieur de l'unité de développement.) 8 Déballez l'unité de développement neuve puis enlevez la bande extérieure. Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-5 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 9 Insérez l'unité de développement par son côté entrée toner [1] et installez l'unité de développement complète [1] dans l'unité de traitement [2]. 10 Insérez l'extrémité inférieure [1] de la pièce de pression dans l'orifice [2] de l'unité de traitement, placez l'extrémité supérieure [3] de la pièce de pression dans la rainure [4] de l'unité de traitement, puis fixez-la à l'unité en la positionnant en face du logement de la vis. REMARQUE Vérifiez que le ressort de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement n'est pas courbé lors de la repose. Si le ressort est tordu lors l'installation de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement, cela peut réduire la pression d'appui de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement. 11 Serrez les vis [1] (6 pièces). 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 12 Branchez le connecteur [1] autour de l'étiquette de couleur lavande. 13 Replacez l'unité de traitement à sa position d'origine en tenant la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] et en poussant l'unité de traitement [3]. Replacez ensuite la poignée de droite et la poignée de gauche dans leur position d'origine. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 14 Refermez le capot supérieur droit [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (1 pièce). 15 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 16 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-3 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, chargez le développeur selon les procédures suivantes et réglez les unités de développement. 1 Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, appuyez sur [Effectuer Remplacem.] sur l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. La machine s'allume automatiquement et l'écran Enregistrer Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer la trémie de toner avec les vis et de fermer la porte avant. Sinon, la machine ne s'éteindra pas automatiquement. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 2 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. % Si l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée n'est pas affichée à l'écran, appuyez sur [+] [,] pour la faire apparaître. % Lorsque vous remplacez plusieurs unités de développement, vous pouvez configurer les unités en une seule fois en les sélectionnant et en définissant un motif de remplacement pour ces unités. 3 Appuyez sur [Raison Remplac] afin d'afficher une boîte de dialogue demandant la raison du remplacement. Sélectionnez une raison, et appuyez sur [Valider]. REMARQUE N'oubliez pas de spécifier une raison pour les unités de développement remplacées. Sinon, cela ne réinitialisera pas le compteur Cycle Vie des unités de développement. En outre, il ne sera pas possible de charger les développeurs ou de procéder à un réglage correct lors des étapes suivantes. Une fois que le motif a été défini, la case de gauche apparaît cochée. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-5 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue permettant de spécifier les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. REMARQUE Définissez l'unité de développement usagée et l'unité de développement neuve comme A et B. Veillez à bien identifier les unités A et B, et appuyez sur [Unité Développement A] ou [Unité Développement B] pour sélectionner l'unité de développement neuve. Lors de l'installation d'une unité de développement neuve, assignez la lettre (A ou B) qui était associée à l'ancienne unité de développement (celle que vous n'utiliserez plus) à l'unité de développement neuve. Appuyez sur [Enreg. Nouv. Unité Dével.] pour sélectionner [Unité Dév. A] ou [Unité Dév. B]. 6 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue demandant de remettre le compteur de l'unité de développement sélectionnée à zéro s'affiche. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 7 Appuyez sur [Oui]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité s'affiche. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'écran Exécuter Chargement Automatique Développeur s'affiche. Éléments de réglage • Charge Développeur Automatique • Réglage Initial Capteur Densité Toner • Ajustement Gamma • Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-7 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 9 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 10 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 11 Enlevez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis déposez le capot supérieur [2]. REMARQUE Le remplissage du développeur se fait en mode réglage une fois que le remplacement des unités de développement est achevé. La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. 12 Desserrez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis enlevez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2]. Desserez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [4]. 13 Insérez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur les vis à épaulement [1] sur le dessus de l'unité de développement de la couleur dont vous chargez le développeur et fixez la plaque en la faisant coulisser vers la droite. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 REMARQUE Pour fixer la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur l'unité de développement Jaune, veillez à utiliser les vis à épaulement (2 pièces). Lors de la fixation de la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur une autre unité de développement que la Jaune, utilisez la vis à épaulement (1 pièce) et la vis (1 pièce) située en haut à gauche de la vis à épaulement. Lorsque vous fixez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2], faites attention à ne pas pincer les câbles. 14 Fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2] en insérant les broches (gauche et droite) de l'entonnoir dans les orifices situés sur la plaque de chargement du développeur [1]. Lorsque vous fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir), placez-le sur le fond de la plaque de chargement du développeur. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer fermement l'embout de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) sur l'entrée toner de l'unité de développement. Pour la durée du chargement, placez du papier A4 ou 8,5 e 11 sur la plaque qui se trouve sous l'unité de traitement. 15 Placez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] fourni dans le kit développeur, à l'intérieur de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE L'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) est fourni avec chaque kit développeur. Ne réutilisez pas l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Utilisez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) après l'avoir utilisé pour chaque couleur. Faute de nettoyage, les couleurs pourraient se mélanger. Vérifiez que l'obturateur de sortie du développeur est bien fermé avant de charger le développeur. Le développeur peut s'écouler par le fond. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-9 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 16 Appuyez sur la touche de la couleur dont vous êtes prêt à charger le développeur et appuyez sur [Départ]. Le moteur de l'unité de développement se met à tourner. 17 Versez le développeur neuf [1] dans l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [2]. Le développeur s'écoule dans l'unité de développement. % Le moteur qui s'est mis à tourner lorsque vous avez appuyé sur la touche [Départ] s'arrêtera automatiquement après un certain temps. S'il reste du développeur dans l'entonnoir lorsque le moteur s'arrête, appuyez sur [Départ] une nouvelle fois. Si le moteur continue à tourner alors que le développeur s'est complètement écoulé et qu'il n'en reste plus dans l'entonnoir, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Le moteur s'arrête. 18 Chargez les développeurs pour toutes les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées, en effectuant les étapes 9 à 18. 19 Enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] et l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir). Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-10 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 20 Faites glisser la plaque de chargement du développeur [1] vers la gauche tout en tirant vers l'extérieur la lame-ressort de la plaque de chargement du développeur [1], puis enlevez la plaque. 21 Serrez la vis [1] (2 pièces), puis ramenez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) à sa position d'origine. Serrez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis ramenez la plaque de chargement du développeur [4] à sa position d'origine. 22 Tirez la vitre antipoussière [1]. 23 Nettoyez la vitre antipoussière avec un chiffon nonpelucheux et un aérosol d'air sec, puis ramenez la vitre antipoussière à sa position d'origine. 24 Installez le capot supérieur [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (2 pièces). REMARQUE La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-11 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 25 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 26 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 27 Appuyez sur [Retour]. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-12 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Une fois que l'[Ajustement Gamma] s'est achevé automatiquement, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante s'affiche. 28 Écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante. (1) Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour sélectionner l'écran de l'élément que vous voulez régler sur l'écran Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante. (2) [Appuyez sur Rajuster.] Si vous voulez refaire un ajustement, appuyez sur [Oui]. Sinon, appuyez sur [Non]. d Pour info Si le dégradé de la zone sélectionnée dans l'image est largement divergent, appuyez sur Réinit. DonnRégl pour remettre le décalage gamma de l'imprimante à 0 (zéro), et appuyez ensuite sur [Rajuster]. (3) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. Sur l'écran Mode d'impression, sélectionnez un magasin pour du papier A4 (8,5 e 11), appuyez ensuite sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. Les mires tests sont imprimées. Une fois que la mire test est imprimée, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante réapparaît automatiquement. (4) Place la mire test imprimée [1] sur la vitre d'exposition en plaçant la mire avec précision sur le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Lt [3] et le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Rr [4]. d Pour info Placez la mire de manière à ce que le repère triangulaire vert [2] soit orienté vers la gauche (face imprimée dessous). Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-13 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 29 Appuyez sur [ Fermer ]sur l'écran L'ajustement après remplacement unité est terminé. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 30 Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. Procédez à une sortie test à l'issue du réglage. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 31 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. (5) Placez 10 feuilles de papier (blanc) sur la mire test, et fermez l'ADF ou le couvre-original. d Pour info N'utilisez que du papier copie blanc, car il n'est pas possible de régler correctement le gamma de l'imprimante avec du papier qui n'est pas blanc. (6) Appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran. La mire test est numérisée et les données actuelles JMCN sont mises à jour. d Pour info L'évaluation Accepté/Rejeté des données de réglage n'a pas lieu lors du premier balayage, par conséquent le message "Terminé normalement" ne s'affiche pas. Du fait que évaluation Accepté/Rejeté n'a lieu qu'après la deuxième lecture, effectuez plusieurs fois cette opération d'ajustement jusqu'à ce que le message "Terminé normalement" s'affiche. (7) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.] sur l'écran Réglage décalage gamma imprimante auto. (8) Répétez les étapes 3 - 6. (9) Vérifiez que le message "Terminé normalement" s'est affiché. Si un autre message que "Terminé normalement" s'affiche, répétez les étapes 7 à 8. (10) Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-14 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 32 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 33 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. 34 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 35 Répétez les étapes 31 à 35 pour imprimer les deux sorties test, [Type1] et [Type2]. 36 Confirmez le résultat du réglage en comparant les exemplaires test d'avant et d'après réglage. 37 Appuyez sur [Fermer] sur l'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité. L'écran Machine réapparaît. Guide de l‘utilisateur D 131F/191F Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte....................2-3 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution .............................2-3 2.1.2 Signification des symboles ........................................................2-4 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT ......................................................................2-4 2.1.4 ATTENTION................................................................................2-5 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre................................................................2-7 2.1.6 Divers .........................................................................................2-7 2.2 Termes et symboles .....................................................................2-8 2.3 Précautions ...................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation...........................................................2-9 2.3.2 Alimentation ...............................................................................2-9 2.3.3 Espace requis ..........................................................................2-10 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation...........................................................2-11 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie .......................................2-13 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage ..........3-3 3.2 Nomenclature................................................................................3-4 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle ........................................3-5 3.4 Préparation de votre machine.....................................................3-8 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile .......................................................3-8 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux ................................................3-9 3.4.3 Raccordements........................................................................3-10 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner ................3-11 3.4.5 Mise sous tension ....................................................................3-14 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport.............................................3-15 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier.........3-15 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur ........................................3-16 Table des matières-2 D 131F/191F 3.5 Réglages initiaux ........................................................................3-17 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés ...................................... 3-17 3.5.2 Premières opérations............................................................... 3-18 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial ................................................................... 3-18 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie....................................................... 3-23 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner...................3-24 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local)......................... 3-24 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows ................................... 3-25 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) ................ 3-36 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote........................................................... 3-37 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation....................................................................4-3 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères .................................................................. 4-4 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD]............................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] .................................................... 4-6 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD]........................................................ 4-6 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents .................................... 4-7 4.2.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 4-7 4.2.2 Traitement du papier................................................................ 4-10 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies .........................................................5-3 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents.................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie ............................ 5-3 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie............................................... 5-3 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 5-4 5.2 Opérations de copie..................................................................... 5-5 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF ................................................. 5-5 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition .............................5-5 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires .................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document................................................. 5-6 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 5-6 5.3.3 Taux zoom ................................................................................. 5-7 D 131F/191F Table des matières-3 5.3.4 Nombre de copies......................................................................5-7 5.3.5 Tri de copies ..............................................................................5-8 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier....................................................5-8 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document .............................................5-9 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie....................................................5-10 5.4.1 Combiné...................................................................................5-11 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso ....................................................................5-13 5.4.3 Définition de copie ...................................................................5-15 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document..........................................................6-3 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ............................................6-4 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante .......................................6-4 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante...............................6-6 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression .......................................6-12 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine ..6-12 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN ................................7-3 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner ........................7-3 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner ..........................................7-3 7.1.3 Numériser une image .................................................................7-4 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN...........................................................7-4 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD]........................................................7-4 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD]........................................................7-4 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique .......................8-3 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques .......................................................8-3 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel ........................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique ..............................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation.......................................8-4 Table des matières-4 D 131F/191F 8.2 Touches 1-Touche........................................................................ 8-5 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche.......................... 8-5 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche................................ 8-7 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche ........................................... 8-9 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche............................... 8-10 8.3 Numéros abrégés .......................................................................8-12 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé .................. 8-12 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé ............................................. 8-14 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé............................................. 8-14 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]..................................8-16 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD].............................................8-16 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission ................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation ..................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 9-4 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages....................................................................9-4 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission .................................................................. 9-5 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 9-6 9.2 Emission de fax............................................................................. 9-7 9.2.1 Émission mémoire ..................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)................... 9-11 9.3 Rappel [CD].................................................................................9-13 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]...................9-13 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] ....................................................9-13 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax ..............................................................................10-3 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception.............................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle ................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique ............................................. 10-4 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement ........................................... 10-6 D 131F/191F Table des matières-5 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ..............................................10-6 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax ..............10-7 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] ......................................10-8 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] ....................................10-8 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux...................................................15-3 15.2 Journal d'activité ........................................................................15-5 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité .................................................15-5 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité................................15-6 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité .....................15-6 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission ........................................15-7 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission ...................15-7 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire....................................................15-8 15.5 Notification de perte de document ...........................................15-9 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien ......................................................................................16-3 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage .............................................................16-3 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation ....................................16-3 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF ............................................16-4 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED.....................................................................16-5 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner.................................16-6 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ................................16-8 Table des matières-6 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents....................................................................................16-10 16.2.1 Serrage document ................................................................. 16-10 16.2.2 Serrage papier ....................................................................... 16-15 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran .................................................... 16-20 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés ................................................ 16-25 16.2.5 Code d'erreur......................................................................... 16-26 16.2.6 Problèmes machine ............................................................... 16-28 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie ......................................................... 16-28 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie............................................................... 16-29 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur .................. 16-29 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner .......................................................... 16-30 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression ....................................... 16-31 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème................. 16-34 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques .........................................................................17-3 17.1.1 Autres....................................................................................... 17-3 17.1.2 Fax ........................................................................................... 17-5 17.1.3 Copie........................................................................................17-5 17.1.4 Imprimante............................................................................... 17-6 17.1.5 Scanner.................................................................................... 17-6 17.1.6 Consommables........................................................................ 17-6 18 Index 1 Introduction Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-3 1 Introduction Bienvenue Merci d'avoir choisi le Develop 131F/191F. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement, les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du Develop 131F/191F. Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, il y a lieu de lire entièrement le manuel utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Une fois que vous avez lu le manuel, conservez-le à portée de main pour le consulter en cas de besoin. Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur votre machine. Label CE (déclaration de conformité) Ce produit est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes : 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC. Cette déclaration est valide pour les pays de l'Union Européenne. Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible d'entraîner des perturbations de radiocommunication et elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. Cet appareil a été autorisé conformément à la Décision du Conseil 1999/5/ EC pour connexion individuelle d'un terminal au réseau téléphonique public commuté pan-Européen. Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les PSTN (réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés) de chaque pays, cette autorisation ne constitue pas en elle-même l'assurance inconditionnelle que cette machine fonctionnera d'égale manière sur chaque point desservi par les divers réseaux téléphoniques publics. 1 Introduction 1-4 D 131F/191F Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous devriez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de votre appareil. 2 Note Le fabricant devrait s'assurer que le vendeur et l'utilisateur de l'appareil sont clairement avisés des informations ci-dessus, par le biais de l'emballage et/ou des manuels d'utilisation ou autres formes d'instructions à l'intention de l'utilisateur. Vous pourrez obtenir une déclaration de conformité complète auprès de Develop aux numéros suivants Fax. : +49-511-7404-346, Tél. : +49-511-7404-367 en nous indiquant le numéro de série de votre produit. Ce produit n'est agréé que pour la numérotation par Double Tonalité Multi- Fréquence (DTMF). Lorsqu'il est raccordé directement au réseau téléphonique commuté public (mode PSTN), la numérotation par impulsions ne peut pas être utilisée. Émission d'ozone 7ATTENTION Placer l'appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée % Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, de santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore Utilisateurs européens Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : le niveau de pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70dB(A) conformément à la norme européenne EN ISO 7779. Ergonomische Grundlagen für die GS-Prüfung von IT-Geräten in Verbindung mit Bildschirmgeräten Cet appareil n'est pas destiné une utilisation sur une régie vidéo conformément à BildscharbV. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen. Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-5 Energy Star En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Super G3 Super G3 est une extension des normes de la technologie fax de Groupe 3, permettant d'utiliser des modems haut débit ITU-T V.34 pour la transmission à 33,6 Kbps et à protocoles accélérés pour négociation rapide. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, la dernière méthode de l'ITU-T pour la compression des données images. Etant donné que le JBIG compresse les données plus efficacement que le MMR, il se révèle particulièrement efficace pour l'émission de documents comportant des images en demi-teintes (niveaux de gris). 1 Introduction 1-6 D 131F/191F 2 Conseils de sécurité Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-3 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions y figurant. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans ce guide. Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution 7AVERTISSEMENT Négliger cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 7ATTENTION Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-4 D 131F/191F 2.1.2 Signification des symboles 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT Symbole Signification Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'appareil. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'appareil. Symbole Signification • Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne pas essayer d'enlever les volets et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cet appareil et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique ou toute autre machine. Le dépassement de la puissance nominale d'une prise murale peut provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. Ne pas brancher ou débrancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains humides : il y a risque d'électrocution. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne. Si l'une de ces conditions devait apparaître, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après-Vente. • Evitez d'utiliser une rallonge électrique. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-5 2.1.4 ATTENTION • Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou un corps étranger tombait à l'intérieur de l'appareil, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après- Vente. • Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. • Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Symbole Signification Symbole Signification • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. • Ne laissez pas les unités toner ou les unités tambour de fixation à portée des enfants. Le fait de lécher ou d'ingérer ces produits pourrait porter atteinte à votre santé. • Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-6 D 131F/191F Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures, susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement "ATTENTION – TRÈS CHAUD". Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à débrancher en cas d'urgence. La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de l'appareil et facilement accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire de la prise. • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Manuel d'Utilisation et dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plusieurs fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. • Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Symbole Signification Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-7 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre 2.1.6 Divers Symbole Signification • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner, les photoconducteurs et autres fournitures et consommables dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil, à des températures élevées ou à l'humidité, au risque d'un dysfonctionnement et d'une mauvaise qualité d'image. • Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée. Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou d'autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer les performances. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un environnement dont la température est en dehors de la plage spécifiée dans le manuel utilisateur, sinon une panne ou un dysfonctionnement peut se produire. • NE PAS essayer d'alimenter cet appareil avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement ou un feu. Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes. Symbole Signification • Ne pas s'appuyer contre le tableau de commande, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. • Selon l'état des lignes du réseau téléphonique, il se peut que les communications internationales normales ne soient parfois pas possibles. • Si l'on utilise de l'eau du robinet ou d'un puits dans un humidificateur, il se peut que les impuretés contenues dans l'eau se disséminent dans l'air et se redéposent ensuite à l'intérieur de l'imprimante, avec pour effet une détérioration de la qualité d'image. Il est donc recommandé de n'employer que de l'eau pure dans l'humidificateur. • Le ventilateur de refroidissement peut se déclencher automatiquement, mais ce n'est en rien un symptôme de problème. • Des batteries Ni-MH (Nickel Métal Hybride) sont installées à l'intérieur de l'appareil afin de servir de batteries de secours pour sauvegarder la mémoire. Veuillez les mettre au rebut conformément à la législation locale, nationale ou fédérale. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-8 D 131F/191F 2.2 Termes et symboles Terme, symbole Signification 7 Ce symbole attire votre attention pour éviter tout risque de blessure. IMPORTANT Cette instruction décrit les conditions ou les opérations incorrectes susceptibles d'endommager votre machine. Note Les notes contiennent des conseils, précisent les restrictions et la manière d'éviter les dysfonctionnements. [Valider] Le texte entre [ ] identifie des touches spécifiques sur le panneau de contrôle (par exemple, la touche Valider). LCD Il s'agit de l'afficheur (ou écran) à cristaux liquides. Il affiche les messages, sélections et suggestions lors d'une opération. "XXXXX" Ce sont les éléments qui s'affichent sur l'écran LCD. Document Il s'agit de l'original (ou des originaux papier) que vous envoyez, copiez ou numérisez sur la machine. Papier Papier destiné à l'impression. Tx Indique l'émission. Rx Indique la réception. š, › Montre le sens du papier et du document. Repère de direction Document placé dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Papier chargé dans le magasin papier › ou Néant Ex. A4 š Ex. A5 š Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-9 2.3 Précautions Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans les meilleures conditions possibles. 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation Site d'installation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables - dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides - dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil - dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées - dans un endroit bien ventilé - dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations - sur un support stable et horizontal - dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents émanant de l'appareil. - dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage 2.3.2 Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Fluctuation de tension : AC 220-240 V ± 10 Hz - Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ± 3 Hz - Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation en tension ou en fréquence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-10 D 131F/191F 2.3.3 Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l'intervention du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable d'assurer les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous. 2 Note Afin de faciliter l'entretien de la machine et le remplacement des consommables, ménagez un espace suffisant tout autour de la machine. Pour soulever la machine, veillez à saisir celle-ci par l'arrière à l'aide des poignées situées sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche. Si l'on soulève la machine par l'avant, celle-ci peut être déséquilibrée et tomber. 40 cm 10 cm 30 cm 40 cm 10 cm Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-11 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C à 32°C (50°F à 89,6°F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront pas 10°C (18°F) en une heure. - Humidité : 20% à 80% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions ci-dessous. - NE posez JAMAIS d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservezla des chocs. - N'ouvrez jamais les volets de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime, un serrage papier pourrait en résulter. - Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques, ni utiliser d'aérosols ou de liquides inflammables près de l'appareil. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de courant en permanence. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible. - Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. 7IMPORTANT Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celuici est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. % Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. 7IMPORTANT Le pourtour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que celles indiquées dans ce manuel. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-12 D 131F/191F Transport de l'appareil Si vous devez déplacer l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez votre Service Après-Vente. Conservation des consommables Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de la manipulation des consommables (toner, papier, etc.). - Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : à l'abri du soleil loin d'un appareil de chauffage non exposé à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux - Le papier qui a été déballé mais pas chargé dans le magasin sera conservé dans un sac en plastique, dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner. - Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants. 7IMPORTANT Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. % Si vos mains entrent en contact avec le toner, lavez-les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-13 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur Documents officiels - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété Autres - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-14 D 131F/191F 3 Implantation et installation Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-3 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage 2 Note L'aspect du cordon d'alimentation AC et du cordon téléphonique peut différer selon les pays. La cartouche toner livrée avec votre machine est une cartouche toner qui vous permet de d'utiliser immédiatement votre appareil mais qui est prévue pour 3000 tirages ou impressions. Par la suite, vous trouverez chez votre revendeur les cartouches normales et complètement chargées. Câble téléphonique Documentation & étiquettes - Guide de l'utilisateur (le présent manuel) - Etiquette de format papier - Etiquette Numéro 1-Touche - Etiquette Touche de fonction Noyau de ferrite Cartouche tambour Unité principale avec magasin de 500 feuilles Plateau document Imprimante & Scanner CD ROM pilote Câble d'alimentation AC Cartouche toner programmable 3 Implantation et installation 3-4 D 131F/191F 3.2 Nomenclature LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 2ème volet latéral 1er volet latéral Introducteur automatique Guides de document Plateau de docuement Plateau de sortie de docuement Plateau d'introduction Panneau de contrôle Témoin de niveau papier Volet frontal 2ème magasin papier (en option) Magasin papier Couvre-original Vitre d'exposition Magasin de sortie Connecteurs téléphone Connecteur parallèle (en option) Connecteur USB Connecteur réseau (en option) Prise d'alimentation AC Interrupteur general de document du papier manuelle Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-5 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle 1. Bouton de changement de Mode Une pression sur ce bouton permet de changer le mode de la machine. 2. Voyant Source papier Indique la source de papier sélectionnée. 3. Voyant Alarme S'allume en cas de problème. 4. Comm./Récep. Mémoire - Clignote quand la machine est en communication avec un autre appareil. - S'allume en continu quand la machine a reçu un document en mémoire. 5. Voyant Mode machine Indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 6. Format papier/Doc. suivant - En mode copie : Permet de sélectionner le papier que vous voulez utiliser. - Pendant la numérisation d'un document : Permet de commander à la machine de numériser un ou plusieurs documents une fois que la numérisation en cours sera terminée. 7. LCD (Afficheur à cristaux liquides) Affiche les messages et sélections et suggestions pendant une opération. 8. Format Doc. Indique à la machine qu'elle doit numériser un document de format A4, A5 š ou F4. 9. Définition Doc. Sélectionner la définition fax et la définition de la copie. 10.Contraste Règle le niveau de contraste de la numérisation. 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3 Implantation et installation 3-6 D 131F/191F 11.Menu/Retour Permet d'accéder aux paramètres permettant de personnaliser l'utilisation de votre machine. Permet aussi de revenir au précédent niveau du menu. 12.Touches Curseur Permet de naviguer dans les sous-menus, de déplacer le curseur à l'écran et de sélectionner divers éléments et paramètres. - En mode fax : + (Renum.) : Rappelle les numéros que vous avez composés. (Voir page 9-13.) , (Index Tél) : Affiche par ordre alphanumérique les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés, comme dans un répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) - En mode copie et numérisation : ,+ : Permet de choisir le taux zoom. 13.Valider Permet de sélectionner ou de confirmer les réglages. 14.Annuler Efface les caractères sur l'afficheur LCD et annule les commandes données à la machine. 15.Touches programmables Les fonctions que vous utilisez fréquemment peuvent être assignées à ces trois touches. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) Dans leur paramétrage par défaut, ces touches permettent d'activer ou de désactiver les fonctions suivantes : - Touche de fonction programmable 1 : Tri– Active ou désactive la fonction Tri. - Touche de fonction programmable 2 : Intro.Manuelle – Définit le format de papier pour l'introducteur manuel. - Touche de fonction programmable 3 : 2en1– Active ou désactive la fonction 2en1. 16.Fonctions Avancées Vous pouvez choisir parmi toutes les fonctions qui n'ont pas été assignées aux touches de fonction programmables. Les éléments de fonction qui s'affichent peuvent varier en fonction du mode dans lequel se trouve la machine. 17.Num.Abrégée/Groupes Appuyez une fois sur cette touche et tapez un numéro à trois chiffres pour composer un numéro de fax ou de téléphone préalablement enregistré. Si vous appuyez deux fois sur cette touche, vous pouvez taper un numéro Groupe pour effectuer une numérotation groupée. 18.Confirm Job./Abandon Fax Annule ou permet de revoir les tâches de télécopies et les résultats de la communication fax. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-7 19.Touches numériques Permettent d'entrer des valeurs numériques, des numéros de fax ou de téléphone, et des caractères. 20.Réinit. Restaure les paramètres par défaut, ou permet aussi de revenir au mode attente. 21.Début Lance l'opération. 22.Stop Arrête la machine. Cependant, pour arrêter la télécopie, appuyez sur la touche [Confirm.Job/Abandon Fax]. 23.Touches Macro Permet d'effectuer une suite d'opérations enregistrées sous une seule touche. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) 24.Touches 1-Touche Permettent de composer un numéro de téléphone ou de fax préalablement enregistré. 23 24 3 Implantation et installation 3-8 D 131F/191F 3.4 Préparation de votre machine 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile 7IMPORTANT % Ne mettez pas l'appareil sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. Cela pourrait endommager la machine. 1 Faites coulisser le curseur de verrouillage en position déblocage comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Après avoir débloqué l'unité scanner, désactivez le mode transport. (Voir page 3-15.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-9 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux Fixez le plateau pour originaux en insérant ses ergots dans les orifices correspondants, comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous. 3 Implantation et installation 3-10 D 131F/191F 3.4.3 Raccordements Raccordement de la ligne téléphonique Fixez le connecteur téléphonique sur le câble de la ligne téléphonique, comme illustré ci-dessous. Enfichez une extrémité du fil téléphonique dans la prise marquée LINE et l'autre dans la prise téléphonique murale. Raccordement d'un téléphone externe Si vous désirez que votre machine permette à la fois la réception de fax et de communications vocales, connectez un combiné téléphonique externe (ou un répondeur) sur votre machine. LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 Connecteur téléphonique Prise téléphonique Téléphone externe ou Répondeur (Exemple donné pour l'Allemagne) Noyau de ferrite murale Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-11 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. 2 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 3 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée) 4 Sortez la cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. 3 Implantation et installation 3-12 D 131F/191F 2 Note Protégez la cartouche tambour de la lumière et spécialement de la lumière vive. 5 Déballez la cartouche de toner de départ. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez-la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. 2 Note Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 6 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 7 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-13 8 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Note La machine ne fonctionnera pas tant que toutes les volets ne sont pas correctement fermés. 3 Implantation et installation 3-14 D 131F/191F 3.4.5 Mise sous tension 1 Branchez la fiche femelle du cordon d'alimentation dans la prise AC de la machine et la fiche mâle dans une prise murale reliée à la terre. 7IMPORTANT % Assurez-vous de ne pas mettre la machine sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. (Voir page 3-8.) 2 Actionnez l'interrupteur. Il porte des symboles internationaux : [I] pour Marche, [O] pour Arrêt. Le préchauffage de la machine ne dure que quelques secondes. La machine indique : Puis : Pour utiliser la machine, désactivez le mode transport. 2 Note Tant que la machine est sous tension, la lampe du scanner reste allumée ; ce n'est pas une anomalie, mais une nécessité pour la longévité de la lampe du scanner de votre machine. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-15 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport Quand la machine est en mode transport, celle-ci indique : Pour désactiver le mode transport : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [4]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'unité scanner se déplace alors dans sa position de repos et la machine est prête à fonctionner. 7IMPORTANT % Si vous devez réexpédier la machine, il faudra réactiver ce mode transport, mettre la machine hors tension et verrouiller l'unité scanner en repoussant le système de blocage. 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier Veuillez vous reporter à la section "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10. 3 Implantation et installation 3-16 D 131F/191F 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Une tonalité de numérotation se fera entendre. 4 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour régler le volume. 5 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] pour sélectionner "Moniteur" et appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-17 3.5 Réglages initiaux 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés Avant d'utiliser votre machine, effacez de la mémoire intégrée les réglages utilisateur. Ainsi la mémoire ne contiendra que vos propres paramètres. 7IMPORTANT % Après avoir défini les réglages initiaux, ne videz plus la mémoire sauf si un technicien autorisé vous demande de le faire. Pour effacer la mémoire : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [0], [2]. 2 Si vous voulez effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne voulez pas effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Implantation et installation 3-18 D 131F/191F 3.5.2 Premières opérations Dans certains pays, il est obligatoire que votre nom et numéro de fax figurent sur tous les fax que vous envoyez. Il faut par conséquent enregistrer dans la machine votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) et numéro de fax avant toute utilisation. Chacune des pages que vous envoyez comporte à l'arrivée sur la machine réceptrice, une ligne unique en haut de page. Elle indique un nom (désigné aussi Identifiant Terminal Emetteur ou TTI) et un numéro de fax. L'étape suivante "Paramétrage initial" montre comment enregistrer les éléments suivants, dont votre nom et votre numéro de fax. - Langue du LCD et listes - Date et heure - Mode de réception fax - Détection de tonalité - Votre numéro de fax - TTI 1/TTI 2/TTI 3 - TTI usuel - Délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie Vous pourrez toujours changer plus tard les réglages que vous définissez ici. 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial Si vous appuyez sur [Réinit.] pendant le réglage préalable, la machine passe en mode attente. Mais elle conservera les paramètres que vous aurez validés par la touche [Valider] comme indiqué ci-après. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. Langue 2 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. La machine indique la langue d'affichage actuellement en vigueur. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] jusqu'à afficher la langue voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-19 Date & Heure 4 La machine affiche le réglage actuel des heures et de la date. 5 Sur le clavier numérique tapez la date et l'heure correctes, au format JJMMAA pour la date et au format 24 heures pour l'heure. Par exemple, pour le 16 Juillet 2007, 1:30 de l'après-midi, appuyez sur [1] [6] [0] [7] [0] [7] [1] [3] [3] [0]. 6 Pour modifier un chiffre, appuyez sur [*] pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, ou sur [)] pour le déplacer vers la droite. Tapez ensuite le chiffre voulu. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le paramètre date et heure, et poursuivre. Heure d'été Permet de régler l'heure d'été. Si ce réglage est sur "Oui", la machine tient automatiquement compte de l'heure d'été. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. 2 Sélectionnez "Heure d'été" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Sélectionnez "Oui" ou "Non" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. Mode de réception fax 4 La machine indique à présent le mode de réception fax en vigueur. 5 Pour l'instant, sélectionnez Mode Fax : prêt. (Pour la description du mode de réception, voir "Sélection du mode de réception" à la page 10-3.) 6 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Jour Mois Année Heure 3 Implantation et installation 3-20 D 131F/191F Détection de tonalité 7 La machine vous demande si une tonalité doit être détectée avant la numérotation. 8 Normalement, ce paramètre reste sur "Non". Si vous avez besoin de détecter une tonalité lors de la numérotation, sélectionnez "Oui", il sera cependant impossible d'envoyer un fax en l'absence de tonalité. 9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Votre numéro de fax 10 La machine vous demande ensuite de saisir votre numéro de fax tel que vous voulez qu'il apparaisse sur l'afficheur ou les télécopies reçues par les autres machines. 11 Entrez votre numéro de fax à l'aide du clavier numérique. Ce nombre peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères. Pour insérer le signe "+" devant le code de votre pays, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt." sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Pour insérer un trait d'union "–", en vue de faciliter la lecture des noms longs, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt.", puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure pour insérer à l'écran un caractère "–". En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le chiffre voulu. Retapez ensuite le numéro de fax correct. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le numéro. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) 13 La machine vous demande à présent d'entrer votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) tel que vous voulez le voir apparaître en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. Vous pouvez introduire trois noms différents. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 22 caractères. Introduisez les caractères à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. (Veuillez vous reporter à "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4.) En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul caractère, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le caractère voulu. Retapez ensuite le caractère correct. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 2, passez à l'étape 19. 15 Introduisez le nom du TTI 2 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 16 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 3, passez à l'étape 21. 17 Introduisez le nom du TTI 3 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 18 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Sélection du TTI usuel 19 La machine vous demande à présent de définir le TTI usuel qui apparaîtra en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. 20 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner TTI 1, TTI 2 ou TTI 3. 21 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-22 D 131F/191F Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie 22 La machine vous demande de spécifier le délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Votre machine passera automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie une fois que le délai que vous avez spécifié sera écoulé. 23 Introduisez la durée (en minutes) à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 24 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 25 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour revenir au mode attente. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-23 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie Pour économiser l'énergie, votre machine est réglée au départ de manière à passer automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie après un délai d'inactivité d'environ 5minutes. En mode Economie d'énergie, la machine arrête le préchauffage pour l'impression et affiche à l'écran "Mode Economie d'énergie". Cependant, les voyants LED du panneau de contrôle et la lampe scanner ne s'éteindront pas lorsque la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie. Pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle. Lorsque votre machine reçoit un fax alors qu'elle est en mode Economie d'énergie, la machine repasse automatiquement en mode d'activité. Pour changer le paramètre mode Economie d'énergie : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Il reste possible de modifier le réglage spécifiant le délai d'inactivité avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Voir "Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie" à la page 3-22 dans "Paramétrage initial" à la page 3-18. Si vous assignez la fonction "Economie d'énergie" à une touche de fonction programmable, vous pouvez basculer immédiatement la machine en mode Economie d'énergie en appuyant sur cette touche de fonction programmable, indépendamment du réglage Oui/Non et du réglage du délai d'inactivité. Pour plus de détails sur les touches de fonction programmables, voir page 12-3. 3 Implantation et installation 3-24 D 131F/191F 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner Pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine comme imprimante ou scanner, installez sur votre ordinateur les pilotes contenus dans le CD livré avec la machine. 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local) Systèmes d'exploitation - Windows Vista Ultimate - Windows Vista Ultimate Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Entreprise - Windows Vista Entreprise Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Business - Windows Vista Business Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Premium - Windows Vista Home Premium Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Basic - Windows Vista Home Basic Edition 64-bit - Windows Serveur 2003 - Windows XP Professionnel - Windows XP Edition familiale - Windows 2000 Professionnel - Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a ou ultérieur) - Windows Me - Windows 98 Deuxième Edition(SE) - Windows 98 Espace disque L'installation nécessite au moins 10 Mo d'espace disque disponible. 2 Note Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne sont pris en charge qu'au moyen d'une interface parallèle. Pour l'interface réseau, voir le manuel de la "Carte Interface Réseau". Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-25 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows 2 Note Une interface USB ne fonctionnera qu'avec Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 et Windows XP, Windows Serveur 2003 et Windows Vista. Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne prennent pas en charge l'USB. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous aviez déjà installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F vous devez d'abord le désinstaller (voir page 3-37.) 1 Allumez votre ordinateur, mais pour le moment, ne connectez pas encore la machine sur le port USB de l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista : Si la boîte de dialogue "Exécution auto" apparaît, cliquez sur [Lancer Setup. ses]. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue "Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur" apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] pour permettre l'installation du pilote. Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre comportant le contrat de licence de logiciel apparaît, cliquez sur [Oui] après en avoir lu et acceptés les termes. 3 Implantation et installation 3-26 D 131F/191F 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "USB". 8 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 9 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 10 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista: Pendant l'installation du pilote, la boîte de dialogue "Sécurité Windows" apparaît deux fois. Cliquez sur [Installer ce pilote quand même]. 11 Quand la fenêtre ci-dessous apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, ou si vous avez précédemment installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F il faudra d'abord le désinstaller. (Voir page 3-37.) - Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me % Passez à la page suivante. - Utilisateurs Windows 2000 Professionnel % Passez à la page page 3-30. - Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 % Passez à la page page 3-32 - Utilisateurs Windows Vista % Passez à la page page 3-34. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-27 Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez l'appareil et l'ordinateur. 2 Note Les images suivantes sont tirées de l'Assistant Windows Me. 3 Implantation et installation 3-28 D 131F/191F 3 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" apparaît. Sous Windows Me, sélectionnez "Spécifier l'emplacement du pilote (avancé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sous Windows 98SE, cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sélectionnez ensuite "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel.(Recommandé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sous Windows ME, sélectionnez "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel" et "Définir un emplacement". Sous Windows 98SE, sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et effacez tout autre choix. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre jusqu'à ce que vous puissiez cliquer sur [Terminer]. 7 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" réapparaît. Répétez trois fois encore la même procédure, de l'étape 3 à 6 jusqu'à ce que l'installation soit complètement terminée. Une fois le pilote installé, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, soit les deux ensemble. (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir à cet effet "Activer les options du périphérique)" sur la page suivante. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-29 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-30 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs de Windows 2000 Professionnel 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Rechercher un pilote approprié pour mon périphérique" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Emplacement spécifique" et désactivez toutes les autres options,E enfin cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. Si la boite de dialogue "Signature numérique non trouvée" s'affiche, cliquez sur [Oui] pour installer le pilote. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-31 8 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" réapparaît. Répétez la même procédure, de l'étape 12 à 16. 9 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-32 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Matériel Détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche" et désactivez toutes les autres options. Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si la boite de dialogue "test Logo Windows" apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] pour installer le pilote. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-33 9 L'"Assistant Matériel détecté" pour un autre matériel Develop 131F/ 191F apparaît, répétez alors la même procédure, de l'étape 4 à 8. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. 3 Implantation et installation 3-34 D 131F/191F Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer le composant en option : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop 131F/191F puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Utilisateurs de Windows Vista 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Branchez le câble USB sur votre appareil et branchez-le ensuite à votre ordinateur. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-35 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 Le logiciel du pilote va s'installer automatiquement. 4 Une fois que les pilotes ont été correctement installés, le message "Vos matériels sont prêts à être utilisés" apparaît. 2 Note Après l'installation du pilote, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option Périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, ou les deux ensemble (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir "Activer les options du périphérique" sur la page suivante. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration]. 2 Cliquez sur [Matériel et audio]. 3 Cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 4 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression...]. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 6 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-36 D 131F/191F 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) 2 Note Cette procédure nécessite une interface parallèle, en option. Une interface parallèle n'est disponible que pour une utilisation avec Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me et Windows NT 4.0 workstation. Sous Windows NT 4.0, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous avez précédemment installé le "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop", vous pouvez le mettre à jour simplement en cliquant sur le bouton [Mettre à jour] de la fenêtre de maintenance. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 La fenêtre "Contrat de licence du logiciel" s'affiche. Après avoir lu et accepté le contenu, cliquez sur [Oui]. 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "Parallèle" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Confirmez le récapitulatif qui s'affiche. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 8 Quand la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, vous devrez procéder à une désinstallation. (Voir page 3-37.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-37 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Voir page 3-29 pour les instructions à ce sujet. 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote Il est nécessaire de procéder à la désinstallation si vous mettez le logiciel à jour ou si la procédure d'installation échoue. 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Utilisateurs de Windows 98/98SE et Windows Me 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer, Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes", puis sur l'onglet "Installation/Désinstallation". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows 2000 Professionnel 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajouter/Supprimer des Programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des Programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-38 D 131F/191F Sous Windows XP et Windows Serveur 2003 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows Vista 1 Sélectionnez [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Programmes], [Programmes et fonctionnalités]. 2 Sélectionnez le pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop et cliquez sur le bouton [Désinstaller]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 4 Premières opérations Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-3 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine Pour modifier le mode de la machine, appuyez sur le bouton"Copie/Fax/ Scan". Le voyant Mode machine indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 2 Note Il n'est pas possible de changer de mode dans les cas suivants : Pendant la numérisation d'un document. Pendant la transmission en temps réel. Pendant la programmation de tout réglage de fonction. 4 Premières opérations 4-4 D 131F/191F 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères Certains réglages nécessitent la saisie de caractères, par exemple votre TTI (votre nom), le nom d'un fax distant ou autres. Pour introduire des lettres ou autres caractères, voici quelques conseils : En appuyant plusieurs fois sur une touche numérique, vous pouvez accéder aux caractères suivants, comme représenté dans le tableau ci-dessous. Tableau des caractères Pour introduire l'un des caractères réunis sous la même touche numérique, appuyez sur [)] pour déplacer le curseur vers la droite. Clavier numérique Caractères 1 . @ - _ , / : & ‘ o ! ? Note : o représente une espace A B C 2 D E F 3 G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 P Q R S 7 T U V 8 W X Y Z 9 0 Caractères spéciaux Verrouillage majuscules Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-5 Pour introduire des majuscules ou des minuscules Appuyez sur la touche [#] pour basculer entre majuscule et minuscule. L'indication "Majusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en majuscules. L'indication "Minusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en minuscules. Introduction de caractères spéciaux Vous pouvez introduire également des caractères spéciaux ou des symboles. 1 Lorsque la machine vous invite à entrer un nom, appuyez sur la touche [1]. L'écran affiche alors : 2 Sélectionnez le caractère que vous désirez à l'aide des touches [*], [)], [+] ou [,]. 3 Pour entrer le caractère, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Si vous désirez entrer un autre caractère, répétez les étapes 1 à 3, sinon passez à l'étape suivante. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour l'enregistrer. Correction de caractères Si vous avez saisi une lettre ou un chiffre incorrects, appuyez sur la touche [Annuler] pour effacer vers la gauche. Pour ne modifier qu'un seul caractère ou chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur sur ce caractère ou chiffre. Appuyez ensuite sur [Annuler] pour l'effacer. Enfin, retaper correctement le caractère ou le chiffre. 4 Premières opérations 4-6 D 131F/191F 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-7 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents 4.2.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer à télécopier, copier ou numériser, veuillez lire les instructions suivantes. Document acceptables ADF * En émission en temps réel en mode Super fin, 216 x 356mm. Vitre d'exposition Mono-feuille Multi-feuilles Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 900 mm* Min. 120 × 100 mm Max. 216 × 356 mm Min. 216 × 139,5 mm Quantité 1 feuille Max. 80 feuilles A4, A5, ou F4 (papier de 75 g/m2 ou 20lb) Poids 35,0 à 128,0 g/m2 52,0 à 105,0 g/m2 Epaisseur 0,05 à 0,15 mm 0,07 à 0,12 mm Type de document Papier ordinaire Papier ordinaire Sous-menu Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 356 mm Quantité 1 feuille Poids – Epaisseur Max. 28 mm Type de document Documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits par l'ADF. 4 Premières opérations 4-8 D 131F/191F Objets à ne pas mettre dans votre machine Pour éviter tout serrage dans l'ADF ou détérioration de l'ADF, n'insérez pas les objets suivants : - Feuilles gondolées, pliées, froissées ou très fines - Documents comportant agrafes, colle, bande adhésive, trombones ou liquide de correction humide - "Notes adhésives" (ou documents sur lesquels sont collées des "notes adhésives") - Carton, papier journal ou tissu - Feuilles comportant du carbone-copie sur l'une ou l'autre face - Cartes de crédit ou objets petits et fins - Transparents de rétroprojection Zone de numérisation La zone de numérisation est représentée ci-dessous. Fax : 208 mm (8,2 in.) Copie : 210 mm (8,3 in.) Fax : 2,5 mm (0,1 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Fax : 2,0 mm (0,08 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Zone de numérisation A4 Letter Legal F4 Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-9 Chargement des documents dans l'ADF 1 Introduisez les documents, face orientée vers le haut, bord supérieur en premier. 2 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document. Chargement du document sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas de document dans l'ADF. 2 Relevez le couvre-original. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. Veillez à aligner le document dans le coin supérieur gauche. 4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original. 7IMPORTANT % Lors de la copie d'un document relié, un livre par exemple, l'image copiée peut présenter quelques zones sombres. Pour réduire cet effet, maintenez le document à plat pour empêcher sa partie reliée de se relever. Cependant, il convient de ne pas appuyer trop fort. Cela pourrait briser la vitre d'exposition et causer des blessures. 4 Premières opérations 4-10 D 131F/191F 4.2.2 Traitement du papier Formats papier acceptable Magasin papier Plateau d'introduction manuelle Impression Recto-verso - Le papier de format personnalisé ne peut être utilisé que pour l'impression à partir d'un PC. - Le papier de format A5 ne peut pas être utilisé pour l'impression commandée par PC, mais A5 š est disponible. - N'utilisez pas d'enveloppes à double rabat ou des fermetures à pression car leur introduction est problématique. - Pour les transparents, assurez-vous que leur verso ne comporte pas de papier de protection ou de bande amorce. Si c'est le cas, enlevez le papier de protection ou la bande amorce. Seul le transparent nu doit être introduit. Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-90 g/m2) A4, A5 š, F4 500 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-120 g/m2) A4, A5, A5 š, A6, F4, Letter, Legal, Half-letter š, Executive 50 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Format personnalisé • Largeur : 97 à 216 mm • Longueur : 140 à 356 mm 1 feuille Enveloppes DL (110 × 220) Com#10 (4,125 in. × 9,5 in.) Monarch (3,875 in. × 7,5 in.) 1 enveloppe Carte postale 100 × 148 mm 20 feuilles Transparent A4 20 feuilles Type de papier Format du papier Papier ordinaire (grammage : 60-90 g/m2) A4, F4, Letter, Legal Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-11 Papier à ne pas utiliser Pour éviter tout serrage ou détérioration de votre machine, n'utilisez pas le papier suivant : - Papier avec marque de pliage - Papier froissé - Papier plié - Papier gondolé - Papier déchiré - Papier carbone - Papier humide - Papier très fin - Papier très épais - Papier déjà imprimé sur imprimante - Papier perforé - Enveloppes avec fermeture à pression - Papier très glacé ou très texturé 4 Premières opérations 4-12 D 131F/191F Zone imprimable La zone imprimable est représentée ci-dessous. Chargement du papier dans le magasin papier 2 Note Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier que vous avez chargé. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 1 Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin. 2 Appuyez sur la plaque élévatrice jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") Zone imprimable Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-13 3 Ajustez le guide papier arrière pour l'adapter à la longueur du papier. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. - Avant le chargement, égalisez les bords de la ramette de papier. - Ne chargez pas au-delà du repère situé à l'intérieur du magasin. 2 Note Pour éviter les serrages papier, ne rechargez jamais du papier sans avoir préalablement enlevé du magasin tout le papier qui pourrait s'y trouver. En d'autres termes, n'ajoutez pas de feuilles de papier à celles qui se trouvent déjà dans le magasin. 5 Pincez le guide papier latéral puis ajustez-le à la largeur du papier. 4 Premières opérations 4-14 D 131F/191F 6 Fermez le magasin papier. 7 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 8 Apposez sur le devant du magasin l'étiquette indiquant le format papier (fournie avec la machine). Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-15 Chargement de papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si vous devez utiliser un format de papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le magasin, ou si vous désirez imprimer une enveloppe, un transparent, ou un papier de format personnalisé, vous pouvez charger le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. 2 Note Utilisez toujours les supports d'impression préconisés dans la section "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10 pour éviter les serrages papier et des problèmes de qualité d'impression. 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur manuel situé sur le côté droit de la machine. Déployez le plateau d'extension. 2 Pour installer le papier, levez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (1) et chargez le papier (2) jusqu'à ce qu'il soit en butée. 4 Premières opérations 4-16 D 131F/191F 3 Ajustez les guides papier (1) au format du papier, puis abaissez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (2). 4 Une fois le papier chargé dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 5 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Il est possible de programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Voir l'étape 6 de la section "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-17 Programmation du format papier Sélection par défaut : Magasin 1 : A4, Magasin 2 (en option) : A4, Introducteur manuel : A4 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 1. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous disposez du deuxième magasin en option, poursuivez à l'étape 4 ; sinon, passez à l'étape 6. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 2. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 Vous pouvez aussi programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser dans l'introducteur manuel. Après avoir chargé du papier de format différent dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct du papier à utiliser en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 4 Premières opérations 4-18 D 131F/191F 5 Copie Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-3 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents Avant de commencer à réaliser des copies, veuillez lire les informations relatives au traitement des documents et du papier, figurant en page 4-7. 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Copie s'allume. 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. Quand la machine est en mode Copie, celle-ci indique : - Pour modifier les paramètres, voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6. Nombre de copies Taux zoom Format du document Enregistrement du format papier 5 Copie 5-4 D 131F/191F 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire Si vous avez enregistré trop d'informations dans la mémoire de votre machine, le message "Dépassement mémoire" s'affichera à l'écran. La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de copier en mémoire un maximum de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer de la mémoire toutes les pages conservées en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci imprimera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-5 5.2 Opérations de copie 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF, face imprimée vers le haut, et ajustez les guides document au format de votre document. 3 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) 4 Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Vérifiez qu'aucun document ne se trouve dans l'ADF. Si l'ADF contient un document, celui-ci est prioritaire sur celui qui se trouve sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée contre la vitre d'exposition et alignez- le sur le coin supérieur gauche. Puis refermez le couvre-original. 4 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 5 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-6 D 131F/191F 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document - Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des lettres. - Photo/Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents contenant des photos ou des dessins comportant des lettres. - Photo Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des photos ou des dessins. Pour sélectionner le type de document : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour sélectionner le type de document. 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste de numérisation vous permet de compenser toute luminosité ou obscurité excessive des pages du document que vous voulez copier. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-7 5.3.3 Taux zoom Vous pouvez entrer le taux zoom avec l'une des 3 méthodes ci-dessous. 2 Note Pour une copie agrandie, utilisez la vitre d'exposition. Utilisation de taux prédéfinis 1 Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner l'un des taux zoom prédéfinis suivants. - 50% : Min. - 70% : A4 % A5 - 81% : B5 JIS % A5 - 86% : A4 % B5 JIS - 100% - 115% : B5 JIS % A4 - 122% : A5 % B5 JIS - 141% : A5 % A4 - 200% : Max. Réglage du taux par pas de 1% 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Zoom" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable (page 12-3) assignée à la fonction "Zoom". 2 Réglez le taux avec [+] ou [,]. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) Saisie directe du taux zoom 1 Appuyez sur [#]. 2 Entrez le taux zoom avec les touches numériques. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) 3 Appuyez sur [#] une nouvelle fois. 5.3.4 Nombre de copies Vous pouvez réaliser 99 copies maximum. % Avec les touches numériques tapez le nombre de copies désiré (01–99). 5 Copie 5-8 D 131F/191F 5.3.5 Tri de copies 2 Note Le tri de copies n'est possible qu'avec l'ADF. Les copies peuvent être regroupées en jeux consécutifs. % Pour activer le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri]. Le voyant de la touche tri s'allume pour confirmer que le tri de copies est activé. % Pour désactiver le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri] une nouvelle fois ; le voyant s'éteint. 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier Par défaut, la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du papier. La machine indique le format "Auto" lorsque vous chargez du papier à la fois dans le magasin et l'introducteur manuel ou dans le second magasin, en option. D'autre part, le voyant de la source papier disponible s'allume. Toutefois, s'il n'y a pas de papier dans l'introducteur manuel ou que le second magasin en option n'est pas installé la machine affiche le "(Format papier)" à la place de "Auto". Vous pouvez également sélectionner manuellement la source papier en appuyant sur [FormatPapier/DocSuiv]. L'écran affiche le format de papier contenu dans le premier magasin, dans le second magasin (si installé) et dans l'introducteur manuel. Si l'introducteur manuel ne contient pas de papier, la machine indique "Sans" pour l'introducteur manuel. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-9 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.] plusieurs fois jusqu'à afficher le format voulu. Vous pouvez choisir entre A4, A5 š ou F4 : 2 Note Lorsque la sélection du format document est réglée sur "Auto" (voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. Dans ce mode, la machine choisira automatiquement le format du document selon le format papier et le taux zoom qui ont été sélectionnés. [Format Document] indique que la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du document. En fonction du taux zoom choisi, il se peut que la machine ne puisse pas afficher le véritable format du document et dans ce cas l'écran indique : 5 Copie 5-10 D 131F/191F 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie Lorsque les fonctions copie suivantes ne sont pas assignées à des touches programmables, il est possible de les sélectionner avec la touche Fonctions Avancées. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3.) Pour sélectionner une fonction copie à l'aide de la touche Fonctions Avancées : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie.. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+], ou [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la fonction voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. Le tableau ci-dessous énumère les fonctions avancées disponibles en mode copie et la séquence d'affichage. Reportez-vous aux pages indiquées pour les détails des fonctions. Fonction Avancée Description Page de référence Zoom Ajuste le taux zoom par pas de 1%. page 5-7 Copie Recto-Verso Active ou désactive la copie recto-verso. (Cette fonction n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) page 5-13 Compteur pages Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées et numérisées. page 12-3 Economie d’énergie Sélection Oui/Non pour le mode économie d'énergie. page 3-23 En ligne Annule l'impression à partir du PC. page 6-12 Switch Mode Permet de changer le mode de la machine. page 4-3 Tri copies Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie avec tri. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 1".) page 5-8 Intro-Manuelle Définit le format papier de l'introducteur manuel. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 2".) page 4-15 Combiné Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie combinée. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 3".) page 5-11 Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-11 5.4.1 Combiné Cette fonction vous permet de copier deux documents recto sur une seule feuille de papier A4. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Pour effectuer une copie combinée : Appuyez sur [Combiné]. La touche COMBINER s'allume pour indiquer que la fonction est activée. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Image obtenue en copie combinée 5 Copie 5-12 D 131F/191F 4 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies - Taux Zoom (25 à 400% pour la vitre d'exposition, 25 à 100% pour l'ADF) - Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-13 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso Cette fonction vous permet de copier 2 documents recto sur les 2 faces d'une feuille. 2 Note Avec l'ADF, l'agrandissement de la copie n'est pas disponible. Cette machine ne dispose pas de la fonction rotation d'image. L'unité Copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso G&D Haut G&D Haut G&D Haut 5 Copie 5-14 D 131F/191F Copie recto-verso d'un document recto 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Copie Rectoverso" et appuyez sur [Valider]. Choisissez l'un des éléments suivants et appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche de fonction programmable "Copie Rectoverso " et choisissez l'un des éléments suivants. - Non : Annule la copie recto-verso. - G&D : Pour relier la copie recto-verso à gauche ou à droite. - Haut : Pour relier la copie recto-verso en haut. 4 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter l'opération de copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. G&D Haut Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-15 5.4.3 Définition de copie Cette fonction offre la meilleure qualité copie disponible. Elle demande cependant plus de mémoire que la définition copie ordinaire. Donc si vous tentez de copier de nombreuses pages à la fois avec ce réglage, une saturation de la mémoire peut se produire. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut, ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] ou [Définition Doc.] pour sélectionner "600dpi". 5 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-16 D 131F/191F 6 Impression PC Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-3 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document 1 Vérifiez que vous avez préalablement installé le pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner" à la page 3-24. 2 A partir de votre application logicielle, sélectionnez la commande d'impression. Assurez-vous de sélectionner le pilote d'imprimante "Develop 131F/ 191F GDI". 3 Si vous désirez procéder à des réglages relatifs à l'impression du document, cliquez sur [Propriétés] ou [Configurer]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante," ci-dessous. 4 Après avoir éventuellement modifié les paramètres d'impression, cliquez sur [OK] pour lancer la tâche d'impression. 5 Votre ordinateur envoie à votre machine une commande d'impression ainsi que les données à imprimer. 6 Impression PC 6-4 D 131F/191F 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante Pour ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante, il y a deux méthodes : - A partir de votre application logicielle - Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Lorsque vous changez les propriétés de l'imprimante depuis une application logicielle, les nouveaux paramètres ne seront pris en compte que pour la tâche d'impression en cours. Pour changer les réglages par défaut de l'imprimante, procédez depuis le dossier "Imprimantes". Ce changement peut affecter tout utilisateur qui partage la même imprimante. A partir de l'application logicielle L'ouverture des propriétés de l'imprimante à partir de l'application logicielle dépend du type d'application que vous utilisez. Voir le manuel de votre logiciel pour plus de détails. L'exemple suivant utilise Microsoft Word 2000. 1 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu Fichier. 2 La boîte de dialogue Imprimer s'affiche. Dans le champ Nom, sélectionnez votre imprimante GDI Develop, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-5 Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Paramètres], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. - Windows Vista, cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration] % [Matériel et audio] % [Imprimantes]. - Sous Windows XP Professionnel, cliquez sur [Démarrer] puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. - Sous Windows XP Home edition, cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Imprimantes et autres périphériques], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Faites un clic droit sur l'icône Develop GDI, et cliquez sur [Propriétés] (Windows 98/98SE/Me), [Document, options par défaut...] (Windows NT4.0), ou [Préférences d'impression] (Windows 2000/XP/Server2003/ Vista). 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. 6 Impression PC 6-6 D 131F/191F 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante 2 Note La fenêtre représentée dans cette section se rapporte à Windows XP. La fenêtre affichée sur votre ordinateur peut être différente en fonction de votre système d'exploitation Windows. Onglet Papier Remplir page Choisissez cette option pour mettre votre tâche d'impression à l'échelle du format de papier sélectionné indépendamment du format logique du document. Si vous voulez que votre document soit ajusté au format de papier sélectionné, cochez la case "Adapter". 2 Note Quand l'option "Combiner" de l'onglet "Mise en page" est activée, il n'est pas possible de spécifier l'option "Remplir page". Echelle(%) Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire le document par pas de 1%, de 25% à 400%. 2 Note Lorsque l'option "Adapter" ou "Combiner" est activée, l'option "Echelle(%)" ne peut pas être spécifiée. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-7 Copies Tapez le nombre de copies (1 à 99) à imprimer. Tri Si vous sélectionnez "Oui" pour activer la fonction tri, une tâche de plusieurs pages sera imprimée en jeux assemblés. Si vous sélectionnez "Non", elle sera imprimée page par page. Format papier Sélectionne le format papier dans la liste déroulante qui indique les formats pris en charge par le paramétrage en vigueur du pilote d'imprimante. Les formats papier indiqués sur la liste déroulante découlent des contraintes provenant des paramètres "Source papier" et "Combiner". Si vous ne trouvez pas le format voulu dans cette liste, modifiez les paramètres de la source papier. 2 Note Pour plus de détails sur les formats papier pris en charge par votre machine, voir "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10. Orientation L'option Portrait permet d'obtenir une impression verticale sur le papier. L'option Paysage permet d'obtenir une impression horizontale sur le papier. Personnaliser % Cliquez sur ce bouton si vous voulez ajouter, modifier ou supprimer votre format de papier personnalisé. Il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à 50 formats papier personnalisés. 2 Note Ce bouton n'est disponible que si "Intro. Manuelle" a été sélectionné comme source papier et que l'option "Combiner" n'est pas activée. 6 Impression PC 6-8 D 131F/191F Pour ajouter un format papier personnalisé : 1 Cliquez sur [Personnaliser]. 2 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 3 Tapez le nom utilisé pour identifier votre papier personnalisé. Ce nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. 4 Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur de votre format papier personnalisé. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Pour supprimer un format papier personnalisé : 1 Sélectionnez le nom de papier que vous voulez supprimer. 2 Cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Résolution Permet de sélectionner la définition d'impression. Source papier Ce paramètre spécifie le magasin ou l'introducteur manuel dans lequel le papier enregistré est chargé. Type papier Cette option vous permet de choisir le type papier. Economie Toner Sélectionnez cette option pour économiser le toner, sachant que cela diminue la qualité de l'impression. Paramètre Densité % Cliquez pour ouvrir la fenêtre de réglage de la densité et ajuster le niveau de la densité d'impression. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-9 Onglet Mise en page Recto-verso 2 Note La fonction de copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Imprimer les 2 faces Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de la feuille. La position de reliure doit être spécifiée pour l'impression recto-verso afin d'harmoniser l'orientation des deux faces (livre), sélectionnez "Reliure gauche" ou "Reliure droite". Pour inverser l'orientation (dépliant), sélectionnez "Reliure Haut". Régalage de Duplex Sélectionnez ce bouton pour ajuster la marge. Combiner Sélectionnez le nombre de pages par feuille que vous voulez imprimer (2, 4 ou 8). 2 Note Avant de régler cette fonction, assurez-vous que l'échelle est réglée sur 100%. Une fois que le paramètre "Combiner" est réglé, la mise à l'échelle sera automatiquement déterminée et ne peut pas être modifiée manuellement. Si l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages avec cette option donne un résultat qui ne répond pas à votre attente, désactivez l'option "Tri" et réessayez. 6 Impression PC 6-10 D 131F/191F Ligne séparatrice Vous pouvez imprimer une ligne de séparation autour de chaque page imprimée sur la feuille. Détail de Combiner Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte Détail de Combiner vous permettant de spécifier l'ordre des pages combinées sur le papier. Livret La fonction "Livret" n'est disponible que pour D 191F équipé de l'unité rectoverso. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages pour former un livre en pliant ensemble les feuilles de papier en deux par leur milieu. Pour sélectionner cette fonction, cochez la case "Imprimer les 2 faces" et sélectionnez "N-2" pour "Combiner". Impression de livret Permet de définir la position de reliure d'un livret. La position de reliure que vous spécifier dépend de l'orientation d'impression définie dans "Orientation" sous l'onglet "Papier". Si vous sélectionnez "Portrait", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Gauche" ou "Droite" et si vous avez sélectionné "Paysage", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Supérieur" ou "Inférieur". Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-11 Onglet Option périph. Utiliser le ou les périphérique(s) Pour activer le 2ème magasin papier et/ou l'unité Recto-verso, cochez la case correspondante dans la fenêtre "Option Périphérique". 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 6 Impression PC 6-12 D 131F/191F 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine Pendant l'impression PC, l'écran se présente comme ci-contre. Si vous voulez annuler la tâche d'impression en cours, suivez la procédure ci-dessous : 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] et appuyez sur [+] jusqu'à afficher "En ligne" sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non". ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable assignée à la fonction "En ligne". (Veuillez vous reporter à page 12-3.) 2 La machine affichera l'écran suivant : 3 Pour annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne souhaitez pas annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 7 Numérisation Numérisation 7 D 131F/191F 7-3 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Scan s'allume. 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Scanner. Quand la machine est en mode Scanner, celle-ci indique : - Pour changer le réglage initial, voir "Numérisation" à la page 7-3. Résolution Largeur de numérisation Taux zoom 7 Numérisation 7-4 D 131F/191F 7.1.3 Numériser une image Il y a deux manières de numériser une image : Mode de numérisation en temps réel (mode RS) Si vous choisissez le mode Numérisation en temps réel, votre machine numérise un document et le transfère immédiatement sur votre ordinateur. Le mode RS est le mode utilisé par la plupart des scanners de documents. Mode Boîte Analyse (mode SB) Si vous choisissez le mode Boîte Analyse, les données numérisées seront enregistrées dans la boîte d'analyse de votre machine. Vous pouvez la télécharger à partir de votre application logicielle pour peu qu'elle soit compatible TWAIN. 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder au pilote TWAIN depuis votre application logicielle. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Lancez l'application logicielle qui prend en charge la numérisation TWAIN. 3 Sélectionnez le Scanner Develop 131F/191F comme périphérique de numérisation. 2 Note La procédure de sélection d'un périphérique scanner peut varier selon le logiciel employé. En cas de doute, consultez le manuel du logiciel. 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8 Numéroteur automatique Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-3 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique Le numéroteur automatique de votre machine conserve en mémoire les numéros de fax et de téléphone le plus fréquemment appelés et vous permet de les composer immédiatement. 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques Il y a deux sortes de numérotations automatiques. Leur différence réside dans la manière de composer les numéros : 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel Les groupes d'appel sont des groupes de numéros de fax et permettent de faciliter l'envoi d'un même message vers un grand nombre de destinations. Votre machine peut enregistrer 200 numéros dans 32 groupes d'appel max. Voir également "Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]" à la page 8-16. 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique Au moment d'enregistrer les numéros dans le numéroteur automatique, vous pouvez leur donner des noms évocateurs ou descriptifs, par exemple "Chicago office" ou "Bureau de facturation". Le répertoire téléphonique trie ces noms par ordre alphabétique. Grâce à la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique, vous pouvez rechercher ces numéros par leurs noms comme vous le feriez avec un simple répertoire téléphonique. Voir également "Numérotation par répertoire [CD]" à la page 8-16. Type Procédure de numérotation Quantité mémorisée Touche 1-Touche Appuyez sur des touches marquées de 1 à 40 situées sur le côté gauche du panneau de contrôle 40 Numéro abrégé Appuyez sur Num. Abrégée/Groupes, suivi d'un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160 160 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-4 D 131F/191F 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation Lors de l'enregistrement dans le numéroteur, la machine vous permet d'introduire des caractères spéciaux. Le tableau ci-dessous décrit brièvement chacun de ces caractères. Il indique aussi les touches à manipuler pour enregistrer ces caractères dans le numéroteur automatique. 2 Note Pour assigner "Pause/Numérot.Opt." à une Touche de fonction programmable, voir page 12-3. Caractères Effet Procédure /P Chaque pause dure 2 secondes. Si vous devez attendre une autre tonalité ou signal à n'importe quel stade de la séquence de numérotation, introduisez une pause dans le numéro. (Vous pouvez modifier la durée de la pause. Voir page 14-3.) Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot. Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez 1 fois sur une touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/Numérot.Opt." a été assigné – Facilite la lecture des numéros longs. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "-" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 2 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. /N Introduit un "Préfixe" pour accéder à un autre réseau téléphonique. "/N" doit être tapé avant le premier chiffre du numéro à appeler. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Préfixe (/N)" apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "/N" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 4 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-5 8.2 Touches 1-Touche 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche A l'aide des touches étiquetées 1 à 40, vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 40 numéros 1-Touche. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro 1-Touche vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro 1-Touche vide suivant s'affiche. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-6 D 131F/191F 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez cette procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Pour quitter et revenir au mode attente, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 9 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [7], [Valider]. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-7 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode attente fax. 2 Appuyez sur la touches 1-Touche vide que vous désirez enregistrer. L'écran affiche : Pour annuler cette opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Pour enregistrer le numéro 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques, introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. La machine revient en mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-8 D 131F/191F 8 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-9 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour effacer un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-10 D 131F/191F 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche Numérotation fax par 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 5 Ouvrez le panneau 1-Touche et appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro enregistré. Touches 1-Touche Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-11 Numérotation téléphonique par 1-Touche 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez sur la touche 1-Touche correspondant au numéro programmé voulu. 3 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-12 D 131F/191F 8.3 Numéros abrégés 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé Vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 160 numéros abrégés, désignés par un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro abrégé vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner à l'aide des touches numériques un numéro abrégé en tapant directement l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant (001-160). 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom du numéro abrégé. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro abrégé vide suivant s'affiche. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-13 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [8], [Valider]. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-14 D 131F/191F 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un numéro abrégé en tapant directement son identifiant à 3 chiffres. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour entrer un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé 1. Appuyez 1 fois sur cette touche 2. Introduire l'identifiant à 3 chiffres 3. Appuyez sur [Début] Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-15 Numérotation fax par numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 4 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 5 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé que vous voulez ; la machine indique le nom (ou le numéro fax) que vous avez enregistré : 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. Téléphoner par numéro abrégé 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 3 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé voulu ; le numéro s'affiche à l'écran pendant que la machine le compose. 4 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-16 D 131F/191F 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-3 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission 9.1.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer, veuillez lire les informations concernant les documents que vous pouvez envoyer et sur la manière de les charger, figurant en page 4-7. 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation - Normal convient à la plupart des types de documents et aux dessins simples. - Fin est idéal pour les cartes routières, les dessins moyennement complexes, les plans de sol et les documents manuscrits. - Super fin ("S-Fin" à l'écran) reproduit les détails de dessins au trait ou de plans extrêmement compliqués. - Echelle de gris ("Gris" à l'écran) reproduit les nuances des photos et des dessins. Pour changer la définition de numérisation : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [*], [)] ou [Définition Doc.] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la définition. 9 Emission de fax 9-4 D 131F/191F 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste vous permet, le cas échéant, de compenser tout excès de luminosité ou d'obscurité des pages de document que vous envoyez. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages Vous pouvez changer la définition document et le contraste pour chacune des pages de vos documents. 1 Sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la première page. 2 Lancez l'émission. 3 Avant de commencer à numériser la page suivante, sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la page suivante. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-5 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission La machine permet trois méthode d'émission. Émission mémoire En émission mémoire normale, la machine : 1. fait l'acquisition en mémoire de la totalité de votre document, 2. compose le numéro du fax de destination, puis 3. envoie le document. Emission mémoire rapide L'émission mémoire rapide se caractérise par le fait que la machine n'attend pas d'avoir numérisé tout le document pour composer le numéro. Une fois la première page numérisée, la machine compose le numéro du fax de destination. Après la négociation, votre machine transmet le document enregistré tout en continuant à numériser en mémoire les pages suivantes du document. Par défaut, l'émission mémoire rapide est active. Vous pouvez néanmoins la désactiver par défaut. (Voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3.) Émission en temps réel La machine n'utilise pas sa mémoire pour envoyer un fax dans les cas suivants : - Quand l'émission mémoire a été désactivée. - Quand vous envoyez un fax par numérotation avec prise de ligne (en appuyant sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis sur [Valider]) ou en utilisant un combiné externe. - Quand la mémoire de la machine est saturée. En émission en temps réel, la page suivante n'est pas numérisée avant que la page en cours ne soit entièrement transmise. Notez qu'en émission en temps réel : - Un seul numéro de destination peut être composé - La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans le mode d'émission en temps réel. 9 Emission de fax 9-6 D 131F/191F 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire En émission mémoire normale, l'enregistrement d'une trop grande quantité d'informations dans la mémoire de la machine conduit à l'affichage à l'écran du message "Dépassement mémoire". La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour spécifier à la machine de conserver un maximum de pages en mémoire, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Diviser un document volumineux en plusieurs liasses moins importantes vous permettra d'éviter ce problème. Une autre solution consiste à envoyer les documents sans mémoire. (Voir "Émission en temps réel" à la page 9-5 et "Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)" à la page 9-11.) 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci effacera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-7 9.2 Emission de fax 9.2.1 Émission mémoire Emission de fax avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 9 Emission de fax 9-8 D 131F/191F 6 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-9 Emission d'un fax avec la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 5 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 7 Une fois la numérisation terminée, l'écran de la machine indique : 9 Emission de fax 9-10 D 131F/191F 8 Placez la page suivante, et appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc. suivant]. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer l'émission. 9 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-11 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire) Votre machine compose simplement le numéro du fax de destination, et après négociation, votre machine introduit le document et effectue la numérisation et l'émission au fur et à mesure. En émission en temps réel, vous pouvez voir chaque page être numérisée puis envoyée. Pour effectuer une émission en temps réel : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. 2 Note La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans ce mode d'émission. 3 Recherchez l'obtention d'une tonalité, soit : - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou - Décrochez le combiné, sous réserve qu'un téléphone externe soit connecté à votre machine. Dans tous les cas, la machine indique : ou - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Emission mémoire" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Puis sélectionnez "Non " et appuyez sur [Valider] pour désactiver l'émission mémoire. ou - Si vous avez assigné "Emission Mémoire" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), vous pouvez désactiver l'émission mémoire par une simple pression sur cette touche. 9 Emission de fax 9-12 D 131F/191F 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 2 Note En émission en temps réel, un seul numéro de destination peut être composé. 5 Lorsque vous percevez les tonalités émises par le télécopieur de destination, appuyez sur [Début]. Si quelqu'un répond, décrochez le combiné pour indiquer à cette personne que vous êtes en train de lui envoyer un fax. Lorsque vous entendez les tonalités du fax, appuyez sur [Début]. Si l'appel échoue, et que vous avez numéroté avec la fonction "Moniteur", appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Si vous utilisez le combiné, raccrochez après avoir appuyé sur [Début]. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-13 9.3 Rappel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax 9-14 D 131F/191F 10 Réception de télécopies Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-3 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], et appuyez 4 fois sur [Valider]. La machine indique le mode de réception fax dans lequel elle se trouve actuellement. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le mode de réception fax désiré. Votre machine offre cinq différents modes de réception : - Tél Prêt (voir "Mode de réception manuelle" ci-après) - Mode Fax : prêt (voir "Mode de réception automatique" ci-après) - Fax/Tél Prêt (voir page 10-4) - Tél/Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) - Répond./Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). 10 Réception de télécopies 10-4 D 131F/191F 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle Mode Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous recevez principalement des appels vocaux et moins fréquemment des télécopies. Dans ce mode : Votre machine ne décroche jamais automatiquement. Vous devez prendre chaque appel, comme décrit dans la section "Prendre les appels manuellement" à la page 10-6. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique Mode Fax : prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Votre machine dispose d'une ligne indépendante sans la partager avec un téléphone ou un répondeur. Dans ce mode: Votre machine décroche à chaque appel et envoi de fax. Mode Fax/Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des fax. Dans ce mode : Votre machine reçoit les télécopies de manière silencieuse mais vous alerte aussi si un appel vocal se présente. (La machine émet un signal sonore à la fin de chaque réception.) Lorsqu'un appel vocal arrive, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale (en revanche le téléphone connecté à votre machine ne sonnera pas). Si vous entendez cette sonnerie, répondez en décrochant le combiné. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-5 Mode Tél/Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des appels vocaux. Dans ce mode Votre machine fait entendre le nombre de sonneries que vous avez défini (le nombre de sonneries par défaut est 2 fois). Si vous ne décrochez pas pendant que la machine sonne, celle-ci décrochera et prendra automatiquement l'appel. S'il s'agit d'un fax entrant, la machine effectue la réception du fax. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale pour vous indiquer de décrocher le combiné. (Mais le téléphone raccordé à la machine ne sonnera pas.) Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Mode Répond./Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Vous utilisez un répondeur qui est connecté à votre machine. Dans ce mode : Le répondeur connecté à votre machine prend chaque appel. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, le répondeur enregistre le message. Si la machine détecte une tonalité fax, elle effectue la réception de la télécopie. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un répondeur téléphone. (Voir page 3-10.) Utilisation d'un répondeur avec votre machine : 1 Réglez la machine sur Répond./Fax Prêt. (Voir page 10-3.) 2 Configurez votre répondeur pour qu'il ne décroche après 2 sonneries max. 3 Enregistrez un nouveau message sortant sur votre répondeur. Le message sortant de votre répondeur ne devrait pas durer plus de 10 secondes. Voici une suggestion de message : "Bonjour ! Vous êtes bien au [votre nom ou numéro de téléphone]. Pour laisser un message de vive voix, attendez le signal sonore. Pour envoyer un fax, appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre télécopieur. Merci de votre appel !" 10 Réception de télécopies 10-6 D 131F/191F 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement 2 Note Pour prendre un appel manuellement, vous devez raccorder un téléphone externe à votre machine. Vérifiez que le document n'est pas chargé dans l'ADF. Réception manuelle d'un appel par téléphone externe En mode "Tél Prêt" ou "Tél/Fax Prêt", décrochez le combiné dès que le téléphone externe sonne : - Si vous entendez votre interlocuteur, vous pouvez lui répondre. - Si ce sont des tonalité fax que vous entendez, ("beep – beep – beep"), posez le combiné mais ne raccrochez pas. Appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre machine. Après avoir appuyé sur [Début], raccrochez le combiné. Du fait que les télécopieurs distants attendront plusieurs secondes la réception des tonalités de négociation de la part de votre machine, vous disposez de 30 secondes environ pour appuyer sur la touche [Début]. 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode Fax. Sinon, appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Réception auto" s'affiche à l'écran et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. - Pour passer en mode de réception manuelle, sélectionnez "Non" - Pour passer en mode de réception automatique, sélectionnez "Oui" 4 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-7 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax Lorsque la machine manque de papier, elle émet un signal sonore, le voyant [Alarme] s'allume et l'écran indique quelle est le magasin qui n'a plus de papier – Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (en option) ou l'introducteur manuel. Dans cet exemple, c'est le Magasin 1 qui est vide. Réception sans papier Au cas où votre machine venait à manquer de papier, elle peut néanmoins enregistrer en mémoire jusqu'à 250 réceptions fax. C'est la "réception sans papier". Dès que vous l'avez rechargée en papier, la machine lance automatiquement l'impression des messages conservés en mémoire. 2 Note Le nombre de pages (et non de réceptions) que votre machine peut enregistrer en mode réception sans papier est variable. Cela dépend de Ia capacité mémoire de votre machine, des types de documents qu'elle a reçus ainsi que de leur définition fax. 10 Réception de télécopies 10-8 D 131F/191F 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11 D 131F/191F 11-3 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11-4 D 131F/191F 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12 D 131F/191F 12-3 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12-4 D 131F/191F 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13 D 131F/191F 13-3 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13-4 D 131F/191F 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14 D 131F/191F 14-3 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14-4 D 131F/191F 15 Rapports & Listes Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-3 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux Le tableau suivant décrit les rapports et les listes que votre machine peut imprimer. Nom Description Référence Liste Fonctions Enumère les fonctions disponibles sur votre machine ainsi que la séquence des touches nécessaire pour les exécuter. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 1, [Valider]. page 4-6 Liste Param. Machine Enumère les paramètres machine en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 2, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Fax Enumère les paramètres fax en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 3, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Copie Enumère les paramètres copie en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 4, [Valider]. page 14-3 Journal Imprime la liste des transactions fax effectuées par votre machine. Pour imprimer le jourrnal d'activité, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 5, [Valider]. Si vous le souhaitez, un réglage permet à la machine d'imprimer automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions fax. page 15-5 Liste commandes Enumère les éléments suivants : • Le numéro de commande • Le numéro ou le nom de la destination • L'heure de début (format jj,hh:mm) • Une note précisant si la commande concerne une opération relève ou F-code. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Une-Touche Enumère pour chaque numéro 1-Touche, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 7, [Valider]. page 8-5 Liste Num. Abrég. Enumère pour chaque numéro, l'identifiant à 3 chiffres, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 8, [Valider]. page 8-12 Liste Groupe Enumère les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés que vous avez enregistrés sous un numéro groupe. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [9], Valider, puis sélectionnez le numéro de groupe et appuyez sur [Valider]. page 8-16 List N° bloqués Enumère les numéros de téléphone bloqués. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 0, [Valider]. page 10-8 Page de garde Imprime un spécimen de la page de garde. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 1, [Valider]. page 9-13 15 Rapports & Listes 15-4 D 131F/191F Liste des codes comptes Indique pour chaque code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre d'impressions des fax reçus, la charge d'impression des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages copiées, la charge copie et la somme de la charge copie et de la charge d'impression des fax reçus. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 2, [Valider]. page 13-3 Liste Authentification Utilisateur Fait apparaître le nom de l'utilisateur enregistré, le code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des copies, le nombre total pages numérisées, et la somme du prix des copies et du prix d'impression des fax reçus pour chaque code compte. Pour imprimer la liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [5]. page 13-3 ListBoîteF-Code Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu) l'adresse secondaire, le mot de passe, le type de boîte et le paramétrage de chaque boîte. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 3, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste doc. F-CODE Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu), le type de boîte et chaque numéro de fichier (ou de document) enregistré. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 4, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste Boîte ENV. GR. Indique l'identifiant, le nom de destination, le numéro de fax et la date et l'heure programmée pour l'émission. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 5, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Doc. ENV. GR. Indique les numéros de fichiers des documents. Pour imprimer les numéros de fichiers des documents, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste trnsfrt fax Indique pour chaque règle de transfert, l'identifiant, le numéro du fax distant vers lequel vous désirez que vos documents soient transférés, le réglage activé/désactivé, la programmation horaire et le réglage d'impression automatique. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 7, [Valider]. page 10-8 Liste Macros Enumère pour chaque macro, le numéro de touche et le nom de la tâche programmée dans la touche macro. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 8, [Valider]. page 12-3 Liste Param. scanner Enumère les paramètres scanner en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 9, [Valider]. page 7-4 Liste Mém. doc. Imprime la quantité de mémoire utilisée par chaque document. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], 0, [Valider]. page 15-8 Rapport de confirmation d'émission S'imprime après l'émission de documents. page 15-7 Nom Description Référence Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-5 15.2 Journal d'activité Tout comme un relevé de compte qui enregistre vos transactions financières au jour le jour, votre machine tient un journal d'activité qui enregistre les 100 dernières transactions fax. Le journal d'activité fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque transaction : - Numéro assigné, commençant chaque jour à 001 - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Code compte (voir page 13-3) - Résultat de l'appel Si cette mention est précédée d'un astérisque (*), cela indique une communication ECM. Si elle précédée par le signe (#), cela indique une communication via un modem haut débit V.34. - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité Votre machine fax imprime automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions. Pour activer ou désactiver l'impression automatique du journal : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Oui" ou "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-6 D 131F/191F 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité Pour imprimer immédiatement un journal d'activité sans attendre les 100 transactions : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le type de journal que vous voulez imprimer. - L'option "Em. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport d'émission. - L'option "Réc. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport de réception. - L'option "Em./Réc. Rapport" imprime le rapport d'émission et le rapport de réception. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité Votre machine imprime sur le journal d'activité l'historique de chaque transaction fax. Par exemple, si votre machine doit rappeler un numéro, ces rappels figureront sur le journal. Si vous voulez énumérer ces activités dans l'ordre des numéros qui leur ont été assignés, vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité. Pour changer l'ordre d'impression : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. Si vous voulez imprimer le journal dans l'ordre des numéros assignés, choisissez "Oui". Sinon, la machine énumérera chaque transaction fax par commande et par destination. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-7 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission Votre machine peut imprimer un rapport de confirmation d'émission (TCR) après chaque envoi de fax à un télécopieur de Groupe 3. Le TCR fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque communication : - Date et heure d'impression du TCR - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Résultat de l'appel - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". - Aperçu du document Image de la première page du document En cas d'erreur, le TCR indique le numéro de la destination concernée, le code d'erreur (page 16-26) et le message d'erreur (page 16-20). Pour définir l'impression du TCR : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [3], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou +] jusqu'à afficher le paramètre désiré et appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Si vous activez ou désactivez fréquemment cette fonction, vous pouvez l'assigner à une Touche de fonction programmable (voir page 12-3) pour accélérer la commande. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-8 D 131F/191F 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire Votre machine peut imprimer la liste des documents conservés en mémoire. Elle indique aussi la quantité de mémoire occupée par chaque document. Cette liste indique : - Type Affiche le type de document, "Boîte envoi groupé" par exemple. - Données (en Ko) Affiche la quantité de mémoire utilisée par le document. - Page Affiche le nombre de pages. - Note Autres informations, comme le numéro de boîte par exemple. Pour imprimer la liste des documents enregistrés en mémoire : % Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [0], [Valider]. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-9 15.5 Notification de perte de document - Quand les données image conservées en mémoire sont effacées par accident, la machine imprime dès la restauration du courant électrique, une notification de perte de document avec des informations relatives aux données image effacées. - Voici un exemple d'un fichier reçu qui a été effacé. La machine peut également imprimer une notification pour "Commande effacée", "Doc. relève supprimés" et "Doc. Boîte F-code effacé". 1. No. Numéro de la communication 2. Nom Enregistré dans l'ordre suivant - Numéro TTI enregistré pour le nom de destination - Espace 3. Mode Définition pendant la communication 4. Départ Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé 5. Durée Heure programmée pour la communication 6. Page Nombre de pages reçues 7. Dep. Quand la fonction "Code département" a été définie, le numéro de compte figure dans cette rubrique. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-10 D 131F/191F 8. Résult. Résultats des communications. - OK : Achevé avec succès - * : Communication en mode ECM - # : Communication via Super G3 - Code d'erreur : Terminé anormalement Pour plus d'informations sur les codes d'erreur, voir page 16-26. 9. Note - Relève : Réception par relève - Manuel : Réception manuelle - F-Relève : Indique une relève F-code - Sécurité : Réception dans une boîte F-code sécurisée - Relais : Réception en relais F-code - Bulletin : Réception dans une boîte bulletin F-code 16 Entretien et dépannage Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-3 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage Quelques recommandations pour le nettoyage de votre machine : - Il est important de nettoyer la machine. La poussière, en s'accumulant notamment autour des orifices de ventilation, est susceptible de réduire la longévité de votre machine. - Débranchez toujours la machine avant de la nettoyer. - Ne jamais pulvériser un détergent en direction de la machine. Le liquide déposé peut en s'écoulant à l'intérieur de la machine en détériorer des composants internes. - Ne tentez jamais de nettoyer à l'intérieur de la machine des composants scellés. C'est pour protéger l'utilisateur et la machine qu'ils sont obturés. - Pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine, utilisez un chiffon non pelucheux humidifié avec une solution détergente douce. - Dans les zones inaccessibles même avec des coton-tiges, utilisez de l'air comprimé sec et propre pour chasser la poussière et autres particules. 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation 1 Essuyez la vitre d'exposition, la vitre de l'ADF et le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux humidifié à l'eau. 2 Puis essuyez avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux et sec jusqu'à séchage complet des surfaces. Couvre-document Vitre d'exposition Vitre de l'ADF 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-4 D 131F/191F 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'introduction avec vos documents, essayez la procédure suivante : 1 Mettez la machine hors tension et débranchez la prise. 2 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 3 Nettoyez la surface des rouleaux à l'aide d'une lame pour rouleau caoutchouc humidifiée sur un chiffon. Faites tournez les rouleaux à la main pour nettoyer la totalité de leur surface. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-5 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED Si le message suivant apparaît à l'écran LCD ou que l'impression donne un résultat de qualité médiocre, c'est le signe qu'il faut nettoyer le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour. 2 Note La machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais lorsque le message "Imprimante hors service" s'affiche, il n'est plus possible d'imprimer tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant. 2 Tirez vers vous puis repoussez dans la machine la tige bleue, doucement et à plusieurs reprises. Cette opération permet aussi de nettoyer en même temps la tête d'impression LED. 3 Refermez le volet frontal. Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-6 D 131F/191F 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner Lorsque le toner est épuisé, la machine indique "Toner Vide" et plus aucune page ne peut être imprimée avant l'installation d'une nouvelle cartouche de toner. Pour remplacer la cartouche toner : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 2 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée). 3 Tirez la cartouche usagée pour la sortir. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez- la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-7 7ATTENTION % Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 5 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 6 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. 7 Nettoyez le fil de charge et de la tête d'impression LED. (Voir "Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED" à la page 16-5.) 8 Refermez le volet frontal. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-8 D 131F/191F 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour La cartouche tambour se remplace environ toutes les 30 000 pages. Lorsque le tambour approche de sa date limite, la machine indique "Prévoir Photocond.". A ce moment-là, il faudra vous procurer une nouvelle cartouche tambour. Lorsque la machine indique "Remplacer Photocond.", elle ne peut plus imprimer tant que la cartouche n'est pas remplacée. Pour remplacer la cartouche tambour : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage de la cartouche toner vers la gauche (position ouverture) puis sortez la cartouche. Il est nécessaire de déposer la cartouche de toner pour remplacer la cartouche tambour. 3 Tirez la cartouche tambour usagée pour la sortir. 4 Sortez la nouvelle cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-9 5 Réinstallez la cartouche toner puis tournez le levier de verrouillage vers la droite jusqu'à enclenchement complet. 6 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-10 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents 16.2.1 Serrage document Situation 1 Si un serrage document se produit dans l'ADF, le message suivant s'affiche : Par ailleurs, si le serrage document se produit pendant une émission mémoire rapide ou pendant une émission en temps réel, le message d'erreur suivant s'imprimera pour indiquer quelle page le serrage a affecté. Situation 2 Si le serrage d'un document se produit pendant la numérisation en mémoire pour un tri de copies ou pour une émission mémoire normale, la machine indique : 1 Si vous voulez continuer l'opération, appuyez sur [Valider] et passez à l'étape 2. Pour abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine abandonnera automatiquement l'opération. 2 La machine indique quelle page (plus précisément, son numéro) a été serrée dans la machine. Dégagez le document serré et réinstallez toutes les pages restantes du document dans l'ADF en commençant par la page qui a été serrée, et appuyez sur Début. Retransmettre. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-11 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine lancera l'émission ou la copie du ou des documents chargés. Si vous voulez abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Stop]. La machine efface toutes les pages de sa mémoire et revient en mode attente. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-12 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'entrée 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 2 Tirez doucement sur le document pour l'extraire de l'ADF. Si l'opération est infructueuse, tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 3 Refermez le volet de l'ADF, en veillant à ce que les 2 côtés soient bien fermés. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-13 Serrage dans la zone d'introduction 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-14 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone de sortie 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Tirez doucement le document serré. Si cela n'est pas possible, ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-15 16.2.2 Serrage papier En cas de serrage papier, le message suivant s'affiche : Pour dégager un serrage papier, appliquez la procédure suivante. En cas de serrage papier pendant une réception fax, la machine enregistre en mémoire le document reçu et l'imprimera une fois que le papier serré aura été dégagé. 7ATTENTION % Attention à NE PAS toucher le rouleau de fixation en ouvrant le volet latéral pour dégager le papier. L'unité de fixation est très chaude. % Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche du tambour. Cela pourrait provoquer des rayures ou des traces qui détérioreront la qualité d'impression. Dégagement d'un serrage papier 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. Si le deuxième magasin, en option, est installé, ouvrez aussi le volet latéral de celui-ci. 2 Avec précaution, tirez le papier serré dans la direction indiquée. 2 Note Attention à ne pas tâcher vos mains ou vos vêtements en dégageant le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-16 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'introduction Serrage dans la zone de fixation Serrage dans la zone de sortie papier Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-17 Si le serrage s'est produit alors que le papier a été introduit partiellement mais qu'il est difficile à saisir : 1 Ouvrez le magasin papier. Après l'avoir tiré à fond, levez légèrement l'avant du magasin pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Avec précaution, enlevez le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-18 D 131F/191F 3 Refermez le volet latéral et réinsérez le magasin papier. Abaissez l'arrière du magasin pour l'aligner avec les rainures de la machine, puis repoussez- le à fond. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-19 Dégagement d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si l'introduction du papier dans l'introducteur manuel pose problème, la machine affiche le message suivant : 1 Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour effacer le message de l'écran. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-20 D 131F/191F 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran De temps à autre, il se peut que votre machine rencontre des problèmes pour envoyer ou recevoir des documents. Dans de tels cas, elle vous en informe par une alarme. Pour vous aider à identifier le problème, la machine affiche des messages à l'écran et imprime des messages d'erreur. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Commande indisponib. La totalité des 99 commandes différées (le rappel automatique compte pour une) est enregistrée en mémoire et la machine ne peut plus en accepter d'autre. Attendez qu'une des commandes différées ait été exécutée par la machine, ou supprimez une des commandes enregistrées (voir "Consultation ou annulation de commandes" en page 9-13). Déjà mémorisé Vous avez tenté d'introduire un numéro de fax ou de téléphone qui est déjà introduit dans la machine. Tapez un numéro de téléphone ou de fax différent. Boîte utilisée Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte F-Code qui contient au moins un document. Effacer le ou les documents, puis réessayez. Appel SAV La lampe scanner est faible ou ne fonctionne pas. Réalisez plusieurs copies pour favoriser l'évaporation de l'humidité interne. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. Passer en mode Fax Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document pour relève (ou pour boîte F-code) alors que la machine est en mode copie. L'enregistrement du document fax n'est possible que lorsque la machine est en mode fax. Vérif. émission mém. Vous avez tenté d'activer la fonction Fax&Copie mais le paramètre d'émission mémoire est réglé sur Non. Pour utiliser la fonction Fax&Copie, l'émission mémoire doit être réglée sur Oui. Activez l'émission mémoire (voir page 14-3), puis réessayez. Vérif.format pap.Rec Ouvr&FermerCarterAv. La machine est chargée avec du papier différent du format que vous avez spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié ou modifiez le paramètre format papier (voir page 4-17). Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Fermer volet XXX Le volet indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Fermer magasin XXX Le magasin indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Err. communication Une erreur de communication a perturbé l'émission ou la réception. S'il s'agit d'une émission, appuyez sur [STOP] pour effacer le message d'erreur puis réessayez l'émission. S'il s'agit d'un fax en cours de réception, essayez se contacter l'autre personne et demandez-lui de recommencer l'émission du fax. (Il se peut que le problème vienne de sa machine, de sa ligne téléphonique, etc.) Copie impossible La protection copie est activée. Désactivez la protection de la copie (voir page 13-3). Comptes complets Vous avez tenté de créer un code compte de trop car votre machine ne peut enregistrer que 100 codes comptes. Boîte pleine Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-Code, mais la machine a atteint sa capacité maximale (30 documents). Supprimez un document inutile qui pourrait se trouver dans la boîte F-Code ou utilisez une autre boîte F-code. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-21 Serrage original Cont. Enreg. Val/Ann Un document a serré dans l'ADF. Voir page 16-10 pour dégager le document serré. Document en mémoire Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé qui contient au moins un document. Pour effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé, il faut effacer tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Prog. Nº (0-32) Vous avez essayé d'enter un numéro de groupe supérieur à 32. Votre machine peut conserver 32 groupes d'appel, de 1 à 32 (le groupe d'appel 0 rassemblant tous les groupes). Tapez le numéro identifiant le groupe d'appel. Entrer Réd./Agrand. Vous avez tenté de copier votre document sur papier d'un format autre que A4, A5 ou F4 avec l'introducteur manuel, ou le taux zoom calculé est en dehors de la plage admissible (25 – 400%). Tapez manuellement le taux zoom bien qu'il puisse manquer une partie de l'image, ou changez le papier copie. Prog.format Analyse Lorsque vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, vous devez entrer manuellement le format de numérisation de votre document. Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format. Entrer le nom Vous n'avez rien introduit en mode Saisie du nom utilisateur. Entrez le nom utilisateur. Chargeur utilisé La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'ADF lequel est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'utiliser l'ADF, puis recommencez. Raccrocher téléphone Le combiné externe n'est pas correctement raccroché. Boîte relais ou boîte sécurisée Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-code qui est configurée pour être une boîte relais ou une boîte de réception sécurisée. Sélectionnez la boîte F-code qui est configurée comme boîte bulletin. Code I.D incorrect Le code I.D. de la boîte F-code que vous avez tapé n'est pas valide. Essayez de retaper le code I.D. de votre boîte F-code. Numéro incorrect Vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui n'a aucune fonction pendant l'opération en cours. Code accès incorrect Le code de protection (voir page 13-3) que vous avez entré, n'est pas valide. Réintroduisez le code de protection correct. MotPass invalide Le code d'accès que vous avez introduit n'est pas valide. (Voir page 13-3.) Entez le code correct. Ligne occupée Vous avez tenté d'effacer un document que quelqu'un est en train de relever sur votre machine. Attendez la fin de l'opération de relève. Utilisée par macro Vous avez tenté de changer la fonction d'une Touche de fonction programmable, mais cette touche contient déjà une macro-commande. La fonction de la Touche de fonction programmable ne peut être changée que si la macro est d'abord effacée de la touche. Effacez la macro, puis réessayez. Mémoire pleine Depart ou Annuler Vous avez tenté d'introduire plus de pages que la mémoire ne peut en contenir. Appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de conserver en mémoire le nombre maximal de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-22 D 131F/191F Dépassement mémoire Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, la machine a reçu plus de données que sa mémoire ne peut contenir. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler la tache d'impression. Effacez les documents inutiles, et réessayez une fois qu'un peu plus de mémoire devient disponible, ou bien divisez l'impression en deux opérations. Erreur scanner Le chariot du miroir de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Miroir bloqué Le mode transport n'est pas déverrouillé. Déverrouillez le mode de transport (voir page 3-15). Pas de commande stockée Vous avez appuyé sur [Confirm. Job/Abandon Fax] pour revoir les commandes à venir, mais votre machine n'en a enregistré aucune. – ou – Vous avez appuyé sur touche macro à laquelle aucune commande n'a été assignée. Aucun compte de créé Vous avez tenté d'activer le paramètre code compte mais aucun code compte n'est enregistré dans la machine. Enregistrez au moins un code compte. – ou – Vous avez entré un code compte incorrect lors de l'émission d'un fax alors que la fonction compte est active. Tapez le code compte correct. Pas de doc. en mém. Vous avez tenté d'imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire, mais votre machine n'a rien enregistré. Absence photocond. La cartouche tambour est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche tambour. Vide Vous avez sélectionné un numéro du numéroteur auto, d'une boîte d'envoi groupé, ou d'une boîte F-code pour lequel aucun numéro de téléphone ou de fax n'a été programmé. Choisissez un autre numéro ou composez-le directement sur les touches numériques. Pas de code d'accès Vous avez tenté de programmer une fonction de sécurité (voir page 13-3), mais aucun code de protection n'est enregistré dans votre machine. Enregistrez un code de protection (voir page 13-3). Pas de code PIN Vous avez sélectionné "Mode1" pour le masque PIN et tenté d'appeler un numéro du numéroteur auto dans lequel aucun PIN n'a été enregistré, ou d'appeler en composant le numéro sur les touches numériques sans entrer le PIN. Tapez le PIN correspondant. Pas de rapport Vous avez demandé une journal d'activité ou un rapport de confirmation, mais aucune transaction fax n'a été effectuée. Abs. cartouche toner La cartouche de toner est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche de toner. Aucune donée util. Vous avez tenter d'exécuter les programmes N° 384 "Activation de l'Authentification Utilisateur", 385 "Remise à zéro du compteur utilisateur", ou 5125 "Impression de la liste Authentification Utilisateur" sans que des informations utilisateur soient enregistrées. Enregistrez d'abord les informations utilisateur. (Voir page 13-3.) Impossible en macro Pendant l'enregistrement de la macro, vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui ne peut pas être enregistrée comme macro. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-23 Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A Le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour est encrassé. Nettoyez le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) Votre machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais une fois que le message "Imprimante hors service" est apparu, aucune page ne pourra plus être imprimée tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. Ouvrir volet lat. 1 Retirer le Papier Un serrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez le volet latéral et dégagez le serrage papier avec précaution et en douceur. (Voir page 16-15) Ouv&Ferm volet charg Replacer Original Votre document n'a pas été introduit correctement, ou bien le télécopieur appelé ne peut pas gérer la longueur de page de votre document. Réintroduisez la page et réessayez. Erreur papier Charger papier XXX Appuyer sur Stop En impression PC, le format du papier chargé dans le magasin ne correspond pas au format de papier spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler une tâche d'impression. Chargez le papier de format approprié et relancez l'impression. Erreur papier Rotation papier Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, l'orientation du papier A5 chargé dans l'introducteur manuel n'est pas correcte. Le format A5 n'est pas disponible pour l'impression PC. Réinstallez le papier A5 dans l'introducteur manuel. Appeler le SAV XXX La section imprimante de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Ajouter du papier La magasin ou l'introducteur manuel n'a plus de papier. Rechargez le magasin et/ou l'introducteur manuel. Attendre SVP L'imprimante intégrée à votre machine est en cours de préchauffage ou occupée. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'impression puis renouvelez votre commande ou votre opération. Relève en cours Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer dans votre machine, un document pour relève ordinaire, mais un document a déjà été enregistré. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'opération de relève ordinaire ou supprimez le document enregistré. Imprimante utilisée La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'imprimante, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'imprimer. Doc. protégé en mém. Un document reçu se trouvait dans la mémoire de la machine quand vous avez tenté de désactiver le code de réception sécurisée. Imprimez le document reçu pour vider la mémoire, puis recommencez l'opération voulue. Protection active Lorsque l'Authentification Utilisateur est active, la machine rejette l'opération concernée par l'enregistrement d'une restriction d'accès. Pour annuler cette limitation, réglez l'Authentification Utilisateur sur "Non". (Voir page 13-3.) Prévoir Photocond. Le tambour devra être bientôt remplacé. Contactez votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche tambour, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Remplacer Photocond. Imprim. Inutilis. Votre cartouche tambour ne fonctionne pas. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Vider Intro Manuelle Ouvr& FermerCarterAv. Une feuille n'a pas été correctement introduite dans l'introducteur manuel. Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. Puis, ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-24 D 131F/191F Lecture en cours La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation du scanner, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait achevé la numérisation puis réessayez la commande désirée. Réc non sécurisée Vous avez tenté de commander la réception sécurisée en appuyant sur une touche programmée avec la fonction "Sécurité", mais le paramètre réception sécurisé n'est pas activé. Pour activer le paramètre réception sécurisée, voir page 13-3. Chois. format papier Vous avez tenté d'effectuer une copie dans les conditions suivantes : • La sélection du format papier est réglée sur "Auto". • L'introducteur manuel contient du papier autre que A4, A5 ou F4. • Le magasin papier est vide. Appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc.suivant] pour sélectionner le papier voulu. Adresse Utilisée Vous avez tenté d'entrer une adresse secondaire qui est la même que celle qui est utilisée par une autre boîte F-code. Entrez une adresse secondaire différente. Toner Presque Vide La machine va bientôt manquer de toner. Contactez prochainement votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche toner, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Toner Vide Imprim. Inutilis. La cartouche toner est vide. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Trop de caractères Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros ou de caractères pour l'opération en cours. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les caractères surnuméraires, puis réessayez. Trop de destinations Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros pour une diffusion. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 200 numéros du numéroteur auto et jusqu'à 30 numéros composés avec les touches numériques. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les numéros en trop. Trop d'étapes Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop d'étapes pour une macro. Une touche macro peut enregistrer jusqu'à 60 étapes. Réduction impossible En copie réduite avec l'ADF, si le ratio calculé est inférieur au ratio minimum de réduction, ce message apparaît et la copie réduite n'est pas possible. Utilisez la vitre d'exposition, il se peut cependant que des portions de l'image ne soit pas copiée. Tri impossible Début/ Stop En Impression PC, les données sont trop volumineuses pour permettre le tri. Appuyez sur [Début], et la machine effectue l'impression sans assemblage. Appuyez sur [Stop], et le travail d'impression PC en cours sera annulé. Util. Analyse à plat Vous avez tenté une copie agrandie avec l'ADF. La machine n'est pas prévue pour réaliser un agrandissement avec l'ADF. Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition pour réaliser la copie agrandie. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-25 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés En cas de problème avec un fax et que la machine détecte une erreur, elle imprime un message intitulé "Message d'erreur". Ce tirage papier fournit les informations suivantes sur la transaction fax : - Code d'erreur spécifique (Voir "Code d'erreur" à la page 16-26.) - Message d'erreur de communication (Voir "Signification des messages d'erreur" ci-dessous.) - Le TTI (ou le numéro de téléphone) du télécopieur distant avec lequel votre machine a tenté de communiquer. Signification des messages d'erreur Les messages d'erreur imprimés notifient diverses anomalies. En voici un bref résumé. Message d'erreur Causes possibles Vérifier appareil distant. • Anomalie appareil distant • Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant • Mauvais numéro appelé Retransmettre. • Ligne téléphonique médiocre Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant Mauvaise introduction ou comptage du document Impossibilité de contacter l'appareil distant à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié. Ligne occupée. • La ligne de l'appareil distant était occupée • L'appareil distant n'a pas décroché Conf. réception documents. • Le signal de confirmation n'a pas été reçu de l'appareil distant. • Une ligne de qualité médiocre a causé une image de basse qualité. Mémoire Pleine. • La mémoire de l'appareil distant est saturée N° de téléphone non défini. • Echec de la composition d'un numéro enregistré Arrêté. • Quelqu'un a appuyé sur [Stop] sur l'appareil distant au milieu de la négociation 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-26 D 131F/191F 16.2.5 Code d'erreur Erreurs de numérotation D.0.3, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou la touche Stop a été activée D.0.8 pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Si vous obtenez le même message de la machine, appelez le destinataire pour vérifier que son appareil fonctionne correctement. D.0.2 L'appareil distant est occupé. Renouvelez l'appel. D.0.6, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, ou l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou D.0.7 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Erreurs de réception R.1.1 L'appareil distant initiateur de l'appel n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Ceci peut se produire si l'appareil distant a composé un mauvais numéro ou s'il est paramétré pour filtrer les appels par un code d'accès. R.1.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. R.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée sur la machine réceptrice. R.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Contactez le destinataire. R.3.1 La machine émettrice a détecté de trop nombreuses erreurs de la part de la machine réceptrice. R.3.3 La machine émettrice est incompatible avec la machine réceptrice ou a rencontré un problème d'introduction du document pendant l'émission. R.3.4 Une mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a empêché votre machine d'imprimer correctement toutes ou partie des pages reçues. R.4.1 La machine a reçu des données de longueur trop importante excédant la limite de la machine. R.4.2 La ligne a été coupée avant l'émission ou le télécopieur émetteur a besoin d'une révision. R.4.4 La machine a atteint la limite de sa capacité mémoire. R.5.1, R.5.2 La réception ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). R.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. R.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. R.8.11 Le fax a dépassé le délai imparti alors qu'il attendait le signal d'apprentissage. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-27 Erreurs d'émission T.1.1 L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Contactez le destinataire. T.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant l'émission. T.2.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission ou la communication fax est devenue impossible en raison de la mauvaise qualité de la ligne. Renouvelez l'appel. T.2.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. T.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Les conditions peut changer rapidement, rappelez un peu plus tard. T.3.1 Le compteur pages de votre machine a détecté une erreur d'introduction pendant l'émission. Réintroduisez soigneusement le document dans l'introducteur et renouvelez l'appel. T.4.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission à cause de nombreuses erreurs du modem ou parce que le fax distant n'avait plus de papier. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.2 La qualité de la ligne s'est détériorée au cours de l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.4 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne ont empêché l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.5.1, L'émission ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). Les conditions peuvent changer T.5.2, T.5.3 rapidement, renouvelez l'appel. T.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. T.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. T.8.11 Le fax distant n'a pas achevé la phase apprentissage d'égalisation. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-28 D 131F/191F 16.2.6 Problèmes machine 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie Symptôme Suggestions L'écran n'affiche rien et les touches sont inopérantes. Vérifiez que la machine est sous tension. La machine ne s'allume quand on manoeuvre l'interrupteur. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché. La machine affiche un message d'erreur et émet un signal sonore. Voir page "Message d'erreur à l'écran" à la page 16-20. Serrage fréquent de documents • Vérifiez que le capot de l'ADF est correctement fermé. • S'il y a un corps étranger dans l'ADF, enlevez-le. • Vérifiez que le papier du document présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement des documents" à la page 4-7.) • Nettoyez les rouleaux de l'ADF (voir page 16-4.) Serrages fréquents de papier • Vérifiez que le papier présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10.) Symptôme Suggestions Emission impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que le numéro enregistré dans votre numéroteur auto est correct. • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. Impossible d'arrêter l'émission • La touche [Stop] ne permet pas d'arrêter une émission. Pour annuler une émission, appuyez sur [Abandon Fax] et sélectionnez la tâche que vous voulez annuler, et appuyez sur [Valider]. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13 pour plus de détails.) Réception automatique impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que la machine est en mode réception automatique (page 10-3). • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Réception manuelle impossible • Pour recevoir des fax manuellement, vérifiez que le téléphone externe est bien raccordé à votre machine. • En mode réception manuelle, vous devez appuyez sur [Début] avant de raccrocher le téléphone. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Impossible d'enregistrer un document en mémoire • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. • Le nombre limite de documents qui peuvent être conservés est atteint. Supprimez un document inutile. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-29 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur Symptôme Suggestions Copie impossible • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode copie en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • Vérifiez que le document est correctement chargé. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le bas. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le haut. Qualité copie médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 Symptôme Suggestions Impression impossible d'un ordinateur • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Le paramétrage du port est incorrect. Vérifiez le paramétrage du port d'imprimante dans le Panneau de configuration Windows. • Il se peut que le pilote de l'imprimante ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. • Vérifiez le paramétrage du mode du port parallèle dans le BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) de votre ordinateur. Si le mode du port parallèle est réglé sur ECP (Extended Compatibilities Port), modifiez les paramètres sur mode Standard et Bidirectionnel. (Il se peut que le BIOS de votre ordinateur présente l'option Standard en tant que "Normal".) L'impression est trop lente • L'ordinateur n'a peut-être pas assez de mémoire. Installez plus de mémoire vive sur votre ordinateur. • La tâche d'impression est trop volumineuse ou complexe. Les tâches d'impression "lourdes" demandent beaucoup de temps pour être traitées par la machine. Attendez que la tâche en cours soit terminée. Qualité d'impression médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 L'option d'impression n'affecte pas les tirages imprimés. Certaines applications logicielles écrasent l'option définie dans la page des propriétés de l'imprimante. Sélectionnez les options d'impression à partir de l'application. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-30 D 131F/191F 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner Symptôme Suggestions Impossible de numériser un document Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Le Scanner Develop 131F/ 191F n'apparaît pas dans la liste des périphériques disponibles de votre application. Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Impossible de récupérer le document dans la boîte d'analyse. • Vérifiez qu'une application de numérisation est installée sur votre ordinateur. • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. L'image numérisée présente un aspect sale • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la vitre (voir page 16-3). • Modifiez le contraste de numérisation en appuyant sur [Contraste]. • Modifiez la définition de numérisation en appuyant sur [Définition Doc.]. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-31 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression Problème Cause possible Les pages restent blanches • Le document n'est pas correctement chargé. Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. Les pages sont noires • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'impression sur papier est trop claire • Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop clair. Sélectionnez un réglage plus foncé. • La cartouche toner est peut-être vide, ou le niveau de toner est peut-être très bas. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouezla plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. L'impression sur papier est trop foncée Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop foncé. Sélectionnez un réglage plus clair. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-32 D 131F/191F Les tirages imprimés présentent un arrière-plan flou. • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Les tirages imprimés présentent une densité irrégulière • Le toner est peut-être mal réparti dans la cartouche. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouez-la plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. • Il se peut que la cartouche tambour soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche tambour et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche tambour. Les tirages imprimés présentent des irrégularités Le papier que vous utilisez peut avoir absorbé de l'humidité, peutêtre en raison d'une condensation ou parce que de l'eau a tout simplement été renversée sur le papier. Le toner n'adhère pas bien sur le papier humide. Remplacez le papier par du papier sec. Les tirages imprimés présentent des lignes blanches et/ou des lignes noires • La vitre ou les rouleaux de l'ADF sont peut-être sales. • Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF et/ou les rouleaux de l'ADF. (Voir page 16-3.) • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez le volet frontal, puis tirez et repoussez la tige bleue pour nettoyer le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE BBBBB AAAAA CDE CDE CDE CDE CDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-33 Les tirages imprimés sont maculés de toner • La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Le tapis du presse-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Si le verso des tirages imprimés est maculé de toner, il se peut que le rouleau de transport soit sale. Normalement le rouleau de transport est autonettoyant. Si d'autres remèdes ne règlent pas le problème, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'image n'est pas correctement alignée sur le papier • Le document n'est pas correctement positionné. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, ajustez soigneusement les guides document au format du document. • La vitre de l'ADF est sale (si utilisation de l'ADF). Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF avec un chiffon doux et sec. (Voir page 16-3.) • Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords du document. • Le magasin a été chargé avec du papier gondolé. Restaurez la planéité du papier avant de le recharger. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-34 D 131F/191F 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème Si vous rencontrez un problème machine que les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre, contactez votre SAV. 7ATTENTION % Si la machine fait un bruit inhabituel, dégage de la fumée ou une odeur bizarre, débranchez-la immédiatement et contactez votre SAV. N'essayez pas de démonter ou de réparer vous-même la machine. % Toute intervention non autorisée sur la machine peut frapper votre garantie de nullité. 17 Annexe Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-3 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques 17.1.1 Autres Caractéristiques Multitâches Accès Quad Méthode d'analyse CCD à plat Méthode d'impression Analyse LED, impression électrophotographique Formats originaux acceptables (Voir page 4-7) Poids du document (Voir page 4-7) Format papier d'impression (Voir page 4-7) Caractéristiques électriques 220 à 240V AC, 50 à 60Hz Consommation de courant • Mode Economie d'énergie : 12 W • Veille : 41 Wh (D 131F), 48 Wh (D 191F) • Maximum : 940 W Température ambiante 10°C à 32°C Humidité relative 20 à 80% RH LCD 20 caractères × 2 lignes Capacité mémoire image* 8 Mo (650 pages environ) plus 32 Mo, en option, (environ 2720* pages de plus) (* Avec le document test 1 ITU-T à définition normale) Autonomie de l'alimentation de secours de la mémoire image * • 8 Mo : 72 heures* • 40 Mo : 24 heures* (* Doit être chargée pendant au moins 24 heures pour obtenir une charge complète) Poids Environ 22,9 Kg (avec les consommables) Capacité de l'ADF 80 feuilles max. (A4, 75 g/m2) Capacité du magasin papier • Magasin : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) • Introducteur manuel : 50 feuilles (80 g/m2) Capacité du plateau de sortie papier 250 feuilles (60 à 90 g/m2) 17 Annexe 17-4 D 131F/191F Dimensions (lxPxH) 520 × 450 × 446 (mm) Caractéristiques 350 mm 450 mm 446 mm 520 mm Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-5 17.1.2 Fax 17.1.3 Copie Caractéristiques Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3 et Super Groupe 3 Réseau applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (PSTN) ou équivalent Méthode de codage MMR, MR, MH et JBIG de la norme ITU-T Vitesse modem 33 600, 31 200, 28 800, 26 400, 24 000, 21 600, 19 200, 16 800, 14 400, 12 000, 9 600, 7 200, 4 800, 2 400 bps Débit de repli automatique Numéro 1-Touche 40 destinations Numéros abrégés 160 destinations Groupes d'appel 32 groupes Diffusion 230 destinations Vitesse d'émission Environ 2 secondes/page.* (* Sur la base d'une émission mémoire à mémoire du document test 1 ITU-T à destination d'un télécopieur Develop. Les durées d'émission sont variables, mais votre machine assurera toujours la plus haute vitesse de transmission possible dans le cadre des directives ITU-T et en fonction des conditions de la ligne téléphonique.) Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Définition de numérisation • Normal (8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm) • Fin (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) • Super fin (16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm) • Gris (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) (* Au cas où l'appareil distant est capable d'une définition de 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm. Sinon, la définition Super fin est de 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm.) Réduction sur réception Auto (50% à 100%) ou Fixe (100%) Caractéristiques Définition de numérisation 600 dpi. × 300 lpi. Largeur de numérisation 210 mm Délai avant 1ère copie Environ 12 secondes (avec du papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Taux zoom • ADF : 25% à 100% • Vitre d'exposition : 25% à 400% Taux prédéfinis • ADF : 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% • Vitre d'exposition : 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% 17 Annexe 17-6 D 131F/191F 17.1.4 Imprimante 17.1.5 Scanner 17.1.6 Consommables * Avec une couverture du document de 6% document et l'impression de 2 pages A4 à intervalles. 2 Note Les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. Caractéristiques Définition d'impression 600 dpi Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Couleur/Mono Monochrome Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Pilote d'imprimante GDI, PCL (option) Interface Port USB Port parallèle IEEE-1284 (en option) Port Ethernet (en option) Caractéristiques Compatibilité TWAIN (Version 1.9) Couleur/Mono Couleur ou monochrome Définition de numérisation 600 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Boîtes d'analyse 20 boîtes Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Caractéristiques Longévité de la cartouche tambour Environ 30 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner Environ 16 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner de départ Environ 3 000 pages* 18 Index Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-3 18 Index A Alimentation .............................2-9 B Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ............10-6 C Caractères Correction ...........................4-5 Saisie ..................................4-4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation ............................8-4 Chargement des documents ....4-9 Chargement du papier Dans l'introducteur manuel ...........................................4-15 Dans le magasin ...............4-12 Code .....................................16-26 Code d'erreur .......................16-26 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents .....9-4 Combiné .................................5-11 Commandes ...........................9-13 Contraste de numérisation .......................................... 5-6, 9-4 Copie recto-verso ..................5-13 D Date & Heure ..........................3-19 Définition de la langue ............3-18 Définition de numérisation ........9-4 Détection de tonalité ..............3-20 E Emission mémoire rapide ........ 9-5 Emission sans mémoire ......... 9-11 Environnement ....................... 2-11 Espace requis ........................ 2-10 É Émission en temps réel ...9-5, 9-11 Émission mémoire ................... 9-7 Émission avec l'ADF .......... 9-7 Émission par la vitre d’exposition ........................ 9-9 F Fonctions Avancées Copie ................................ 5-10 Émission fax ..................... 9-13 Réception fax ................... 10-8 I Incidents .............................. 16-10 Installation du pilote ............... 3-24 J Journal ................................... 15-5 Journal d'activité ................... 15-5 L Listes Liste .................................. 15-3 Liste de réacheminement fax .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes d'envoi groupé .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes F-code ... 15-3 Liste des codes comptes . 15-3 Liste des commandes ...... 15-3 Liste des documents enregistrés .................................15-3, 15-8 18 Index 18-4 D 131F/191F Liste des documents envoi groupé ...................................... 15-3 Liste des documents F-code ........................................... 15-3 Liste des fonctions ........... 15-3 Liste des groupes ............. 15-3 Liste des macro-commandes ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touche ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touches ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros abrégés ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros bloqués ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres copie ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres fax .. 15-3 Liste des paramètres machine ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scan ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scanner ........................................... 15-3 M Message de dépassement mémoire ...........................................5-4, 9-6 Messages d'erreur ............... 16-20 Mode de numérisation Mode Boîte Analyse ........... 7-4 Mode de numérisation en temps réel ........................... 7-4 Mode de réception fax ........... 10-3 Mode Economie d'énergie ..... 3-22 Mode transport ...................... 3-15 N Nettoyage Fil de charge ..................... 16-5 Rouleaux de l'ADF ............ 16-4 Zone de numérisation ....... 16-3 Numérisation ............................7-3 Numéros abrégés ...................8-12 Numérotation par répertoire ...8-16 Numérotation pour groupe d’appel ....................................8-16 O Onglet Mise en page ................6-9 Onglet Option périph. .............6-11 Onglet Qualité ...........................6-9 Onglet Sortie ...........................6-11 P Propriétés de l'imprimante .......6-4 R Rappel ....................................9-13 Rapport ...................................15-7 Rapport de confirmation .........15-7 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner ..................................16-6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ..................................16-8 Réception sans papier ............10-7 Réglage délai d'inactivité ........3-22 Réglages initiaux Date & Heure .....................3-19 Détection de tonalité .........3-20 Langue ..............................3-18 Mode de réception fax ......3-19 Réglage délai d'inactivité ..3-22 Sélection du TTI usuel ......3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) .................3-21 Votre numéro de fax .........3-20 Réglementation en matière de copie ..................................2-13 Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-5 S Saisie de caractères spéciaux ..4-5 Sélection du TTI usuel ............3-21 Site d'installation ......................2-9 T Tableau des fonctions ..............4-6 Taux zoom ................................5-7 Téléphone externe ..................3-10 Touches 1-Touche ...................8-5 Traitement des documents ......4-7 Document acceptables .......4-7 Traitement du papier Papier acceptable ...............4-7 Spécification du format papier ................................4-17 Tri ...........................................5-15 TTI (Votre Nom) ......................3-21 Type de document ...................5-6 V Volume haut-parleur ...............3-16 Votre numéro de fax ...............3-20 18 Index 18-6 D 131F/191F User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] 751/601 x-1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. The bizhub 751/601 User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] contains details on the operation of the various functions available in the Enlarge Display mode of the bizhub 751/601 and on the various operating precautions. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read the Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide before using the machine. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide. Explanation of manual conventions 7 CAUTION CAUTION % Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of this machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner indicates operation precautions. Carefully read and observe this type of information. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner provides more detailed information concerning operating procedures and other descriptions. 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner indicates sections containing additional information. If necessary, refer to the indicated sections. [ ] Names highlighted as shown above indicate keys on the control panel and buttons in the touch panel. x-2 751/601 Contents 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions...............................................................................1-3 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..............................................................................................1-5 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel...................................................................................................1-5 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode .........................................................................................................1-7 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode ...........................................................................................1-7 1.4 Touch panel ............................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.1 Touch panel operation .............................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.3 Paper type icons ......................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.4 Paper supply icons...................................................................................................................................1-9 1.5 Feeding the original..............................................................................................................................1-10 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF...........................................................................................................1-10 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass................................................................................................1-11 1.6 Specifying original settings .................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)...................................................................1-12 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) ...........................................................................1-13 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)................................................................1-15 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) ....................................................................................................................................1-17 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation .........................................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings .................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) .................................................................2-5 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...............................................................................................2-6 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting.....................................................................................................................2-7 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio..............................................................................................................................2-8 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings ....................................................................................................2-9 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies......................................................................................2-10 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting ....................................................................................................2-12 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings ................................................................................................................2-14 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method...............................................................................................................2-15 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings ............................................................................................................2-16 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting.....................................................................................................2-18 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image .......................................................................................................2-20 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original ....................................................................................................2-21 2.9 Selecting the density settings.............................................................................................................2-23 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .........................................................................................2-23 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) ......................................................2-24 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings ...............................................................................................................2-26 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray ...............................................................................2-26 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray ................................................................................2-28 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation)....................................................................................................2-31 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing...................................................................................................................2-32 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .........................................................................2-33 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation...................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Specifying a destination ........................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book .......................................................................................3-6 751/601 x-3 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search .......................................................................................... 3-8 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number ................................................................................................................. 3-11 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) ................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex...................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.2 Original Type.......................................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.3.3 Resolution .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.3.4 Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17 3.3.5 File Type................................................................................................................................................. 3-18 3.3.6 Background Removal ............................................................................................................................ 3-20 3.3.7 Scan Size ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.3.8 Original Settings..................................................................................................................................... 3-23 3.4 Using a program................................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5 Checking the destinations .................................................................................................................. 3-27 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears .............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears..................................................... 4-5 x-4 751/601 1 Before use 751/601 1-3 Before use 1 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations], the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 12 11 8 13 14 15 16 10 9 17 18 19 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Programmed fax/scan settings can be recalled to be used again. (p. 3-26) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during an operation temporarily stops the operation. 8 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. (p. 2-33) 1 Before use 1-4 751/601 9 [Start] key Press to start the operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. 10 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job or fax is being received. Lights up in blue while a print job or fax is queued to be printed or is being printed. 11 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 12 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 13 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter or exit Enlarge Display mode. 14 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. 15 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 16 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 17 Brightness dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 18 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. 19 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the standard-sized Copy mode screen is displayed.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 751/601 1-5 Before use 1 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to either of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you to raise or lower the control panel. ➀ Upper position (base position) ➁ Middle position ➂ Lower position ➃ Left tilt position 1 Before use 1-6 751/601 2 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. – Do not grab the touch panel when turning the control panel to the left or right. 751/601 1-7 Before use 1 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode 1 Press the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel to display the desired screen. 2 Press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. – Depending on the settings specified in Accessibility mode, a message appears, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. For details on specifying settings in the Accessibility screen, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The screen is displayed in Enlarge Display mode. While screens are displayed in Enlarge Display mode, pressing the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key displays the normal screen. 3 To return to the standard-sized screens from the screens in Enlarge Display mode, press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. ! Detail The default settings for Enlarge Display mode can be changed. To change the default settings, specify desired settings in Enlarge Display mode, and then press the [Accessibility] key. On the Accessibility Setting screen 2/2, touch [Default Enlarge Display Settings], press the [Copy] key or the [Fax/Scan] key, and then specify "Current Setting". The default settings can be also changed in Utility mode. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 Before use 1-8 751/601 1.4 Touch panel 1.4.1 Touch panel operation To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the button in the touch panel for the desired function or setting. 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen 1.4.3 Paper type icons 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. If paper other than plain paper is specified for the selected paper tray when using a copy function, the icon indicating the paper type appears under "Paper" in the Basic screen. Paper type icons that appear Icon Description This button appears when there is a message indicating that a print error occurred. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the necessary steps. Touch this button to display the message at an enlarged size. This button appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Transparency Special Paper Thick Paper 751/601 1-9 Before use 1 1.4.4 Paper supply icons The amount of paper remaining is indicated in the Copy mode screen where the paper size is selected. For details about the screen for selecting the paper size, refer to "Selecting the Paper settings" on page 2-5. Paper supply icons that appear Letterhead Colored Paper Trace User Paper1 User Paper2 User Paper3 Thin Paper Tab paper Fine Recycled Labels Icon Description This icon indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. This icon indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. 1 Before use 1-10 751/601 1.5 Feeding the original 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The original can be fed in either of the following ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being scanned. - Using the ADF - Using the original glass 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Slide the guides against the edges of the original. A A 751/601 1-11 Before use 1 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass 1 Lift open the ADF. – When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size will not be detected. 2 Place the original on the original glass with the side to be scanned faces down. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. 4 Close the ADF. Original scales 1 Before use 1-12 751/601 1.6 Specifying original settings 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. For details on selecting the original type when using fax/scanning functions, refer to "Original Settings" on page 3-23. 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 1 Slide the lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Slide the guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the left side of the machine. 751/601 1-13 Before use 1 4 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 2 Note Load the original into the ADF. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 2 Reminder Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. 1 Before use 1-14 751/601 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 751/601 1-15 Before use 1 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise, touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 Before use 1-16 751/601 3 Touch [Original Direction]. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen The Original Direction screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 751/601 1-17 Before use 1 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Left Bind Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. Right Bind Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Auto With this setting, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the original is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the original is selected. 1 Before use 1-18 751/601 3 In the Duplex/Combine screen, touch [Original Binding Pos.]. Otherwise, touch [Binding Position] in the Original Settings screen. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen 751/601 1-19 Before use 1 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. From the Original Binding Position screen From the Binding Position screen – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 1 Before use 1-20 751/601 2 Using copy functions 751/601 2-3 Using copy functions 2 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation 2 Note For details on the copy operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Copy mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – For details on specifying original settings, refer to page 1-12. – For details on selecting the Paper settings, refer to page 2-5. – For details on selecting the Zoom setting, refer to page 2-7. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 2-9. – For details on selecting a Combine setting, refer to page 2-12. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 2-14. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 2-20. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 2-21. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 2-23. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. 2 Using copy functions 2-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. 751/601 2-5 Using copy functions 2 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 2 Note The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-6 751/601 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size The paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size can be selected manually. By also selecting the Auto Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 2 Note Load the papers of the appropriate size into the paper tray in advance. For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-7 Using copy functions 2 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. The zoom ratio can be specified in any of the following ways. *1 The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. Touch the button for the desired paper. *2 When selecting a Reduce setting or a programmed zoom ratio, "Minimal" can be selected. Touch [Minimal] to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced (93.0%) and centered in the paper. The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. *3 The programmed zoom ratios can be changed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Follow the procedure described below to specify the Zoom setting. Setting Description Auto Zoom*1 The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size A copy that is the same size as the original (100.0%) is produced. Enlarge The most suitable enlargement zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Reduce*2 The most suitable reduction zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Zoom By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. Set Zoom Ratio*2*3 Programmed zoom ratios can be recalled to be used again for copying. 2 Using copy functions 2-8 751/601 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – If "Enlarge", "Reduce" or "Set Zoom Ratio" was selected, select the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – If "Zoom" was selected, use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-9 Using copy functions 2 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings The type of original and copy can be specified. The following original and copy settings are available. *1 If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, specify the binding margin position for the copy and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. *2 If "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" is selected, select the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. For details on specifying the binding margin position of the original, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings)" on page 1-17. ! Detail When the original is scanned from the original glass using the "1 > 2", "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" settings, the scanned pages are stored and printed together. Follow the procedures described below to select original and copy settings. Setting Description 1 > 1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1 > 2*1 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided originals. 2 > 1*2 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided original. 2 > 2*1*2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 2 Using copy functions 2-10 751/601 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Original > Copy]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Duplex Settings screen appears. 751/601 2-11 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [OK]. – If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, touch [Output Bind Direction], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. The binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-12 751/601 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting Two original images can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Combine]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Combine screen appears. 751/601 2-13 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [2in1], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-14 751/601 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the output tray. The following Finishing settings are available. *1 If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. *2 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. *3 The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. *4 The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. *5 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold and Tri-Folding settings are available only if the optional Finisher FS- 610 is installed. *6The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. 2 Note Certain finishing settings cannot be used together. Follow the procedures described below to select Finishing settings. Setting Description Collate (By Set) Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. Offset*1 Select this setting to feed out and sort printed copies in an alternating crisscross pattern if the sorting conditions are met when no finisher is installed. Select this setting to feed out and stack the printed copies on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it when a finisher is installed. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Staple*2 Select one of these settings to bind the printed copies with staples. "Corner" or "2 Position" can be selected. Punch*3*4 Select one of these settings to punch holes in the copies for filing them. Half-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. Center Staple & Fold*5 Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center before feeding them out. Tri-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. Z-Fold*6 Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out. 751/601 2-15 Using copy functions 2 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Select the desired Finishing settings. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-16 751/601 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Staple/Punch]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Staple/Punch screen appears. 751/601 2-17 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [Position Setting]. 4 Select the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling or hole-punching position according to the orientation of the loaded original. The paper is stapled or holes are punched along the long side of the paper if the original length is 297 mm or less or along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 297 mm. When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. 2 Using copy functions 2-18 751/601 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Select the desired settings. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 751/601 2-19 Using copy functions 2 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-20 751/601 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. Follow the procedure described below to select the setting to not rotate the image. 1 Touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. – To cancel the setting for not rotating the image, touch [Auto Rotate OFF] again. 751/601 2-21 Using copy functions 2 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original Select an original quality setting. Select the setting for the original type to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. Follow the procedure described below to select an Original Type setting. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and photos. Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing only photos (halftones). 2 Using copy functions 2-22 751/601 4 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 5 Touch [OK]. The Original Settings screen appears again. 751/601 2-23 Using copy functions 2 2.9 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following density adjustments are available. Follow the procedures described below to select the density settings. 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 2 Touch [Density]. The Density screen appears. Parameter Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 2 Using copy functions 2-24 751/601 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 751/601 2-25 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch [Background Removal]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-26 751/601 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or label sheets, is loaded in the bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting as described below. 2 Note A paper type for the other trays than the bypass tray can be selected in the User setting. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – To specify a special paper for any paper tray other than the bypass tray, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected for the bypass tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. 751/601 2-27 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [Paper Type]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. Touch the button for the desired paper type. – To print on thin paper, tab paper, fine paper, recycled paper and label sheets, touch [ ] or [ ]. – [Tab Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Size" is set to "Standard Size", "Custom Size" or "Wide Paper". 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-28 751/601 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. 2 Note For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The paper size can be selected for the bypass tray in any of the following ways. *1In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Note For details on specifying a paper size for the other trays than the bypass tray, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. Setting Description Auto Detect Select this setting to automatically detect the size of the paper loaded into the bypass tray. Standard Size A standard paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Custom Size*1 A custom paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Wide Paper A wide paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. 751/601 2-29 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [Paper Size]. 4 Touch either [Auto Detect] or select the desired paper size. 2 Using copy functions 2-30 751/601 – If a button other than [Auto Detect] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. [Standard Size], [Custom Size] or [Wide Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Type" is set to "Tab Paper". 751/601 2-31 Using copy functions 2 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. ! Detail Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be queued. A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 1 If the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while printing the current job, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] in the screen that appears during printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current job is finished, the next copy job begins. 2 Using copy functions 2-32 751/601 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. – Scanning/printing temporarily stops. – If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key temporarily stops scanning. The message "Job has stopped." appears. 2 To continue all temporarily stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. – To delete a temporarily stopped job, select the job that you wish to delete, and then touch [Delete]. – Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 751/601 2-33 Using copy functions 2 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 2 Note When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. This feature cannot be used if the "Group" setting is selected. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 4 Check the proof copy. – To change the copy settings, press the [C] (clear) key or the [Reset] key, and then change the settings. 5 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. 2 Using copy functions 2-34 751/601 3 Using fax/scan functions 751/601 3-3 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation 2 Note For details on performing fax and scan operations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ! Detail Specify the fax settings and network settings and register destinations before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. This section contains information on the general operation for sending faxes and scans. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 1-10. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to page 3-5. – To erase the entered destination, press the [C] (clear) key. 4 Specify the necessary scanning settings. – For details on specifying scanning settings, refer to page 3-13. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the machine is set to display the transmission result report screen, a screen appears, requesting confirmation to print the transmission result report. To print the transmission result report, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. Scanning of the original begins, and then the fax is sent. ! Detail If the "Destination Check Display Function" parameter was set to "ON", the Destination Settings screen appears. Check the destinations, and then touch [Send]. If the machine is set to print the transmission result report, the transmission result report is printed if the transmission could not be completed. Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 751/601 3-5 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.2 Specifying a destination ! Detail Destinations must first be registered in Utility mode. Fax transmission destinations can also be registered. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The scan data can be sent in any of the following ways. Network Scan operations Fax operations Network Fax operations ! Detail Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. To send or receive faxes manually, touch [Off-Hook]. When this button is touched, the dial tone can be heard from the speaker. For more details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. Also, if "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, [Off-Hook] cannot be used. The procedure for specifying the destination where scan data is to be sent is described below. Method Description Scan to E-mail The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send scan data to a specified E-mail address as a file attachment. Scan to FTP In a network environment with an FTP server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the FTP server on the network. This function is suitable for transmitting large-sized data, such as high-resolution data. Scan to SMB Scan data can be sent directly to a specific computer on the network. In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, first specify shared file settings in Windows on the computer receiving the data. Scan to File (WebDAV) In a network environment with a WebDAV server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the WebDAV server on the network. WebDAV is based on extended specifications of HTTP, and therefore the security technology of HTTP can be used. These settings ensure safer file transmission by encrypting communication with the WebDAV server using SSL. Method Description Fax transmission The scan data can be sent to the fax number specified for the destination. Method Description Internet fax transmission The scan data can be sent as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) through an intranet (company network) or the Internet. IP address fax transmission Faxes can be sent on an IP network. Scan data can be sent to the IP address or host name specified for the destination. This operation can only be used through an intranet. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-6 751/601 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to select an already registered destination. Touch the button for the desired destination in the Address Book screen to select a destination. A destination can be searched for by the destination type or the destination name. 1 In the Address Book screen, touch [Other Dest.]. The Other Destinations screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired destination type. 751/601 3-7 Using fax/scan functions 3 – To select the index characters, touch [Next ]. – To select a destination from registered group, touch [Group] in Address Type. To select all destinations registered with the selected group, touch [Select All] in the Group Details screen. To cancel all of the selected destinations, touch [Reset]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 4 Touch [Close]. 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log Follow the procedure described below to select a destination from the job log. 2 Note This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, Job History tab cannot be used. For details on the settings of "Confirm Address (TX)", refer to the User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-8 751/601 1 Touch the Job History tab. The Job History list appears. 2 Select the desired destination. – The last five destinations where a transmission was sent are displayed. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search Follow the procedure described below to search in the LDAP server and select the destination. ! Detail In order to perform an LDAP search, LDAP must be enabled and an LDAP server must be registered. For details on specifying LDAP settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", the LDAP search function cannot be used. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User's Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 751/601 3-9 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch the Address Search tab. – If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK]. 2 Select the search method. – To specify a search word, touch [Search]. To specify multiple search conditions, touch [Advanced Search]. – When there is only one LDAP server 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-10 751/601 – When there are multiple LDAP servers – Authentication may be necessary, depending on the LDAP server that is specified. 3 Specify the search conditions, and then touch [Start Search]. For a simple search For an advanced search The search results are displayed. 751/601 3-11 Using fax/scan functions 3 4 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number Follow the procedure described below to directly type in the fax number or the registration number for an address book destination during a fax transmission. 2 Note If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", a fax number cannot be entered. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. In Enlarge Display mode, SIP faxes cannot be transmitted by directly typing in the number. 1 Touch [Fax Number]. The Fax Number screen appears. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keypad that appears in the touch panel, type in the fax number. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-12 751/601 – Otherwise, touch [Enter Registered No.], use the keypad to type in destination registration number, and then touch [Apply]. – To specify an additional recipient, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the number. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. – When typing in a fax number: [Tone]: If pulse dialing is being used, touch this button to send a push-button tone. This is used when a fax information service is being used. "T" appears in the screen. If pulse dialing is being used, use [ ] to switch to a push-button tone. [Pause]: Touch this button to insert a pause when dialing. Touch [Pause] once to insert a 1-second pause. In addition, multiple pauses can be entered. "P" appears in the screen. If the PBX (private branch exchange) connection is enabled, touch [Pause] after the outside line access code (for example, "0") for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. "P" appears in the screen. [–]: Touch this button to insert the dash as separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing. "–" appears in the screen. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, and then touch [Delete]. 3 Touch [OK]. – If a destination registration number is entered, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 2 Note If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified to enter fax number directly, a screen appears prompting you to enter the fax number again. 751/601 3-13 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen, and then specify the original scanning settings. 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex Select the appropriate ADF scanning method according to your original. The following scanning methods are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. Setting Description 1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided original. 2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided original. Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan an original where the first page is single-sided and the remaining pages are double-sided. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-14 751/601 3 Select the scanning method. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.2 Original Type Select the appropriate Original Type setting according to your original. The following Original Type settings are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when scanning originals consisting only of text. If an original containing photos is scanned using this setting, the halftones of the photo will not be reproduced and the entire photo will appear black. Text/Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones). This setting should be selected for originals containing text and photos combined in a single page or over multiple pages. Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of only photos (halftones). Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when scanning originals with faint text (such as that written in pencil). 751/601 3-15 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Original Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.3 Resolution Select the detailedness for scanning originals. The following Resolution settings are available. Setting Description 200 × 100 (Standard) Select this setting to reduce the transmission time. 200 × 200 (Fine) Select this setting when scanning regular originals. 300 × 300 dpi Select this setting to scan originals at a higher resolution than that of regular originals. 400 × 400 (Super Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with small print or with illustrations. 600 × 600 (Ultra Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with particularly fine print or with detailed illustrations. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-16 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Resolution]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Resolution screen appears. 751/601 3-17 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Select the resolution. – A more finely scanned original has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. – If "600 × 600 (Ultra Fine)" or "400 × 400 (Super Fine)" is selected, the fax is sent with a resolution appropriate for the recipient’s machine if it cannot receive a fax with the specified resolution. – "300 × 300 dpi" is not available with fax functions. "300 × 300 dpi" can be selected; however, the setting will change to 200 × 200 dpi when the fax is sent. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.4 Density Select the appropriate Density setting according to your original. The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-18 751/601 2 Touch [Density]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Density screen appears. 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.5 File Type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following file formats are available. 2 Note For fax transmissions and Internet fax transmissions, the file type is fixed to the TIFF format. In order to save the data in the XPS format, the optional hard disk is required. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. 751/601 3-19 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [File Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The File Type screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-20 751/601 3 Select the file format and the page setting. – If "Single Page" under "Scan Setting" is selected, a file is created for each page of the original. – If "Multi Page" is selected under "Scan Setting", a single file is created from the entire scanned original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.6 Background Removal The scanning density of the original background can be adjusted. When originals printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 751/601 3-21 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Background Removal]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Adjust the density as desired. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the original being copied. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.7 Scan Size Specify the size of paper to be scanned. The scan size can be specified with any of the following methods. Settings Description Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded original. Full Scan Select this setting to scan the entire page of the original. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be scanned without being cut off. Metric Sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation. Inch Sizes Select a preset paper size and orientation in inch sizes. Other Select a preset paper size and orientation in a size other than metric or inch sizes. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-22 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Scan Size]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Scan Size screen appears. 3 Select the desired size and orientation. 751/601 3-23 Using fax/scan functions 3 – If [Metric Sizes], [Inch Sizes] or [Other] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. – To scan the entire page of the original, touch [Full Bleed Scan]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.8 Original Settings Select the binding position and orientation of the original. These functions can be used together. 2 Note [Original Direction] is not available with fax function. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Parameter Description Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the original is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. Binding Position Select the binding position, for example, when holes are punched in the original or the original is stapled. In addition, specify the binding position when a double-sided original is loaded. This adjusts the scan of double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed. Left: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin on the left side. Top: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin at the top. Auto: The binding margin is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-24 751/601 2 Touch [Original Settings]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Select the original settings. – Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK]. 751/601 3-25 Using fax/scan functions 3 – Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the desired original binding position, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-26 751/601 3.4 Using a program "Program" refers to the set of destinations and scan settings that are registered together. These are convenient for frequently sending transmissions with the same settings. The following procedure describes how to send data by selecting a program that has been registered in advance. 2 Note If no destinations are registered with programs, destinations cannot be selected. For details on registering programs, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 With the Fax/Scan mode screen displayed, press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired program. – Touch [Page List] to select the page of programs to be displayed. – Touch [ Previous Page] or [Next Page ] to display the previous or next page of programs. – To scroll through the page, touch [ ] or [ ]. – To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it. – Only one program can be selected. 3 Touch [OK] or [Main Screen]. – To specify multiple destinations, add a destination. For details, refer to "Specifying a destination" on page 3-5. 751/601 3-27 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.5 Checking the destinations The specified destinations can be checked. In addition, destinations can be removed or their information can be checked. 1 In the Fax/Scan mode screen, touch [Dest. Settings]. The Destination Settings screen appears, and the specified destinations can be checked. 2 Select the desired destination from the list of destinations. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-28 751/601 3 Touch [Details], and then check the destination details. – To delete a destination, select a destination, and then touch [Delete] to display a message requesting confirmation to delete the destination. 4 Touch [Close]. 4 Logging on and logging off 751/601 4-3 Logging on and logging off 4 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears If the message "Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, user authentication settings have been specified on this machine. If user authentication settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their user name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the user name and password. For a user name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. 1 Touch [User Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. – If an authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed, place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type) to display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (biometric type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed, place the IC card on the authentication unit (IC card type) to complete authentication and display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (IC card type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If [ User Name List] appears, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Continue with step 3. – If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", users with no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears. Touch [Server Name], and then select the desired server. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-4 751/601 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 751/601 4-5 Logging on and logging off 4 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. – If account track settings have been applied in Administrator mode, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" in Administrator mode has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The main screen appears again. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears If the message "Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, account track settings have been specified on this machine. If account track settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their account name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the account name and password. For an account name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. ! Detail The "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only "Password" is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-6 751/601 1 Touch [Account Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ]and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 751/601 4-7 Logging on and logging off 4 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-8 751/601 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – The original screen appears again. The screen that appears differs depending on the Administrator mode settings that have been specified. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. User’s Guide Copy Operations . bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Available features............................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions .............................................................................................. 1-9 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper ............................................................................................ 1-10 1.4 User manuals................................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.4.1 Printed manual ................................................................................................................................ 1-11 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD.............................................................................................. 1-11 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration.................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Options.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.2 External ............................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.1.3 Internal............................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405............................................................................................................ 2-10 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406............................................................................................................ 2-11 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-12 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-14 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-16 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 ....................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 ........................................................................................................................ 2-21 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 ............................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 ................................................................................. 2-23 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 .................................................................................... 2-23 2.1.15 Control panel................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.1.16 Basic settings screens .................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen....................................................................................................... 2-28 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel.......................................................................................... 2-29 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power.................................................................. 2-31 2.3.1 Turning on the machine................................................................................................................... 2-31 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up............................................................................................................... 2-32 2.3.3 Turning off the machine .................................................................................................................. 2-33 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 2-34 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset)..................................................... 2-34 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) ..................................................................... 2-34 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) .............................................................................. 2-35 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy............................................................................................................ 2-36 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer)............................................................... 2-36 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)................................................. 2-38 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) ................................................... 2-42 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) .................................... 2-45 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) ................................. 2-47 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2................................................................................................ 2-50 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 ............................................................................................... 2-51 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406)............................................................................. 2-52 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray ............................................................................................. 2-55 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays ..................................................................... 2-59 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded ...................................................................................... 2-59 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray.......................................... 2-60 Contents-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ............................................................. 3-6 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority............................................................. 3-8 3.3 Feeding the original ......................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass ......................................................................................... 3-10 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) ............................................. 3-11 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass ................................................................... 3-15 3.4 Specifying original settings .......................................................................................................... 3-19 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) ...................................................................... 3-19 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) ............................................................ 3-21 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals.................................................................................................. 3-23 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) ........................................................................................ 3-24 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)...................................................... 3-26 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting.............................................................................................. 3-27 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) ..................................... 3-29 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting................................................................................................. 3-30 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original ........................................................................................ 3-32 3.5 Selecting a paper setting .............................................................................................................. 3-36 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) ........................................................ 3-36 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...................................................................................... 3-38 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting............................................................................................................. 3-39 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)........................................................ 3-39 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting).......................................................... 3-40 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) ..................................................................................... 3-41 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)................................................................................. 3-43 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) .......................................................... 3-44 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) ................................................ 3-45 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio.......................................................................................................... 3-47 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio ........................................................................................................ 3-48 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting............................................................................................. 3-50 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies.......................................................................................................... 3-51 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies ........................................................................................................ 3-52 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting.............................................................................................. 3-55 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) ............................. 3-57 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original ............................................................................................. 3-59 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)........................................... 3-59 3.9.2 To select an original type setting..................................................................................................... 3-60 3.10 Selecting the density settings ...................................................................................................... 3-61 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .................................................................................. 3-62 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) ................................................. 3-63 3.11 Selecting finishing settings........................................................................................................... 3-64 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)....................................................................................... 3-66 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)................................................................................ 3-67 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray................................................................................................................ 3-68 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) ............................................. 3-69 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) ..................................................................................................... 3-71 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ...................................................................................... 3-74 3.12 Selecting a folding setting ............................................................................................................ 3-77 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) ...................................................................................... 3-78 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)......................................................... 3-79 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)....................................................................................... 3-81 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) ........................................................................ 3-83 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-3 3.13 Manually using the finisher........................................................................................................... 3-86 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image ................................................................................................ 3-89 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) .................................................................................................................... 3-90 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing..................................................................................... 3-91 3.17 Deleting a paused job ................................................................................................................... 3-92 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) ...................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 To check the settings ........................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 To change the settings...................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .................................................................... 4-6 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) .......................................... 4-9 4.3.1 Preview screen.................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview..................................................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)..................................................................................... 4-15 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory).............................................................................. 4-16 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)....................................................... 4-20 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) ...................................................................................... 4-22 4.7.1 Overview of help screens ................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens.......................................................................................................... 4-25 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)............................................................. 4-27 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen...................................................................................... 4-27 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function.............................................................................. 4-27 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions .................................................................. 4-29 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function ................................................................ 4-31 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function ............................................................................. 4-33 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function ............................................................ 4-35 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function................................................................................. 4-37 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions ............................................................................................ 4-38 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears........................................................................ 5-5 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration........................................................................................ 5-6 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" .............................................................................................. 5-8 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" ............................................................................................ 5-11 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" ...................................................................... 5-12 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5"....................................................... 5-14 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6"............................................................................. 5-15 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" ....................................................... 5-15 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8"................................................................................. 5-16 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9"................................................................................. 5-18 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10"............................................................................... 5-20 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11"............................................................................... 5-21 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12"............................................................................... 5-23 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13"............................................................................... 5-25 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" ...................................................................................... 5-27 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" ...................................................................................... 5-28 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18"..................................................... 5-29 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18".................................................................. 5-34 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16".............................................................................. 5-38 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17"......................................................................... 5-39 Contents-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" ....................................................................... 5-39 5.3 Simple troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 5-43 5.4 Main messages and their remedies............................................................................................. 5-47 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Main unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614................................................................................................ 6-4 6.2 Option specifications ...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 ................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 ................................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 ................................................................................................................................. 6-8 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505................................................................................................................. 6-9 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605.......................................................................................................... 6-9 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504......................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602............................................................................................................................. 6-10 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................................. 6-11 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201..................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.13 Other options................................................................................................................................... 6-12 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment ................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.2 Paper weight...................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity ...................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.4 Paper size .......................................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.5 Special paper..................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.6 Precautions for paper ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.1.7 Paper storage .................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function ................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray ................................................................................ 7-9 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting)......................................................... 7-9 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) .................................................................................... 7-10 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) ........................................................ 7-12 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings).............................................................. 7-14 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) ........................................................ 7-17 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray.......................................................................................... 7-19 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray ......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen ......................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) ....................................................... 7-23 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings)................................. 7-24 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)......................................................... 7-25 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper ........................................................................................... 7-27 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type................................................................................................................... 7-29 7.4 Originals.......................................................................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF....................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF ................................................................................ 7-32 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass .......................................................................... 7-33 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-5 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) .............................. 8-3 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function).............................................................................. 8-6 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)................................................. 8-10 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) .............................................................................................................. 8-14 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function).................................. 8-17 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)............................................................................................................ 8-21 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) ........... 8-26 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) ............. 8-27 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) ........................................................................... 8-33 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)........................................................................................................ 8-38 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)................................................... 8-41 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) ................................................ 8-44 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) .............................................. 8-47 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase)..................................................................................... 8-50 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function).................................................................... 8-51 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) ................................................... 8-53 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)....................................... 8-55 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)............... 8-56 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) ................................................................................. 8-57 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function)...................................................................... 8-60 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) .............................................................. 8-63 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function).................................................................. 8-66 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) .................................................................... 8-73 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) 8-78 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ......................... 8-81 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ............................................................ 8-85 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) ....................................................................... 8-87 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function)......................... 8-89 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function)........................................................... 8-91 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)................................ 8-93 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ........................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge........................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge....................................................................................................... 9-7 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 ........................................................................... 9-8 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 ......................................................................... 9-11 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 ......................................................................... 9-15 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes.............................................................................................. 9-18 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher ........................................................................ 9-20 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit ............................................................. 9-21 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass....................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass .............................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad............................................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller.................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit..................................................................................................................... 10-4 Contents-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel............................................................................................................... 10-5 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101..................................................................... 10-6 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201........................................................................ 10-7 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count)................................................................................................... 10-8 10.2.1 Viewing counters ............................................................................................................................. 10-8 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears ............ 10-9 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen ......................................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Jobs................................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.2 Multi-job feature .............................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.3 Job List screens .............................................................................................................................. 11-4 11.1.4 Left panel Job List ........................................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2 Performing operations on jobs..................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.1 Deleting a job................................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.2 Checking job settings .................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.3 Checking job details ...................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) ...................................................... 11-12 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list ....................................................................................................... 11-13 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job............................................................................................. 11-14 11.2.7 Printing a stored job ...................................................................................................................... 11-15 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority ............................................................................................................. 11-17 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters .......................................................................................... 12-3 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters .............................................................................. 12-3 12.2 Registering a destination.............................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination ........................................................................................................ 12-8 12.2.2 Create User Box .............................................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations ...................................................................................................... 12-8 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen............................................................................... 12-16 12.3 Specifying user settings.............................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-19 12.3.3 Copier Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-21 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.5 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.6 Change Password ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.8 Toner Supply ................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.9 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen.............................................................................................. 12-24 12.4 Specifying administrator settings .............................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings .................................................................................................... 12-32 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................................................................................................ 12-32 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................... 12-33 12.4.5 Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 12-36 12.4.6 Copier Setting................................................................................................................................ 12-37 12.4.7 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-37 12.4.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.9 System Connection ....................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.10 Security Settings............................................................................................................................ 12-38 12.4.11 License Settings ............................................................................................................................ 12-41 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-7 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting ............................................................................. 12-41 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ............................................................................... 12-42 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................................................................. 12-44 12.6 Finisher Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position.......................................................................................................................... 12-47 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-49 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment ...................................................................................... 12-51 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.......................................................................................... 12-53 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment .................................................................................. 12-55 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................. 12-56 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ................................................ 12-58 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment......................................................................................................... 12-60 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-62 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-63 12.7 Header/Footer Settings .............................................................................................................. 12-64 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers ........................................................................................................... 12-64 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers ................................................................................................................. 12-66 12.8 Authentication Method ............................................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.1 User authentication and account track ......................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized................................................... 12-67 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately ............................................... 12-68 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method.............................................................................................. 12-69 12.9 User Authentication Setting ....................................................................................................... 12-72 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List ........................................................................................................ 12-72 12.9.2 Default Function Permission ......................................................................................................... 12-73 12.9.3 Public User Access ....................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.4 User Registration........................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.5 User Counter ................................................................................................................................. 12-78 12.9.6 Viewing user counters ................................................................................................................... 12-79 12.10 Account Track Setting ................................................................................................................ 12-80 12.10.1 Account Track Registration........................................................................................................... 12-80 12.10.2 Account Track Counter ................................................................................................................. 12-83 12.10.3 Viewing account counters ............................................................................................................. 12-84 12.11 Password Rules........................................................................................................................... 12-85 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules ................................................................................................. 12-85 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode............................................................................................................ 12-87 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................. 13-5 13.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 13-6 13.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 13-8 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 13-20 13.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 13-22 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 ..................................................................... 14-5 14.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 14-5 14.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 14-8 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 14-22 14.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 14-24 Contents-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text................................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard.................................................................................................................... 15-5 15.1.2 To type text...................................................................................................................................... 15-6 15.1.3 List of available characters .............................................................................................................. 15-6 15.2 Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 15-7 16 Index 1 Introduction bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual as needed. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment. 1.1 Available features Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified zoom ratio. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting)" on page 3-36. Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the original can be resized as desired. For details, refer to "Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings)" on page 3-45. Scanning the original in separate batches An original with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the original pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11 and "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. Carrying out half-fold/center staple & fold/tri-fold/Z-fold finishing process Copies can be folded at their center ("Half-Fold" setting) or bound with staples after being folded in half ("Center Staple & Fold" setting). In addition, the copies can be folded in three ("Tri-fold" setting) or Z-folded ("Z-fold" setting). For details, refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. ABC ABC ABC Half-Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected. For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)" on page 3-66, "Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)" on page 3-67. Stapling copies Multi-page originals can be copied and stapled together. For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 3-71. Punching holes in copies Holes for filing can be punched in the copies. For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the original can be printed together on a single page. For details, refer to "Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings)" on page 3-57. Copying an original containing various page sizes An original with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together. For details, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5 Introduction 1 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the original. For details, refer to "Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)" on page 3-59. Inserting paper between copies of OHP In order to prevent OHP from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency copies. For details, refer to "Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function)" on page 8-3. Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages. For details, refer to "Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)" on page 8-6. Inserting different paper into copies Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)" on page 8-10. Inserting pages from a different original at specified locations in a copy An original scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in an original scanned earlier for copying. For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. ABDCEF DEF ABC ABC COVERABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. Copying with reversed colors An original can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the original image inversed. For details, refer to "Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function)" on page 8-26. Separately copying a page spread A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages. For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function)" on page 8-27. Repeating copy images An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. For details, refer to "Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)" on page 8-33. 2 4 4 25 3 1 3 1 1 12 5 2 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 ABC ABC ABC DEF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-7 Introduction 1 Splitting an original page into two copies A single original page can be divided in two and each half can be printed on separate copies. For details, refer to "Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)" on page 8-38. Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. For details, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original, copies can be printed so that the original image fills the paper. For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)" on page 8-44. Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)" on page 8-47. Erasing sections of copies Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes, bindings/edges of books, and transmission information in received faxes, can be erased in copies. For details, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. ABC DEF ABC DEF DEGFHI GHI ABC ABCDEF ABC ABC 11 12 2 11 12 1 2 1 ABC ABC 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked. For details, refer to "Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)" on page 4-6. Printing date/time or page number on copies The date/time, page number, copy protect (hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying) or account track number per set can be printed on copies. For details, refer to "Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)" on page 8-56. Managing jobs The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs. For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 4-16. Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also be changed. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens. For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 4-22. Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed. For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 4-15. DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-9 Introduction 1 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration. 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper The descriptions used in this manual for originals and paper are explained below. Whenever original and paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the value shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width, and the value shown as X refers to the length. Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w. Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-11 Introduction 1 1.4 User manuals This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User manual DVD. 1.4.1 Printed manual Quick Guide – Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used. In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this manual before using the machine. 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD The user manual DVD is included with this machine. In the initial screen, select the user manual to be viewed, and then check the details for the various functions. User manual – Copy Operations (this manual) This user manual contains descriptions of Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this user manual for details on paper and originals, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing consumables and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual – Enlarge Display Operations This user manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. Refer to this manual for details on using copy, scanner, G3 fax and network fax operations in Enlarge Display mode. User manual – Print Operations (IC-208) This user manual contains details on the printing functions that can be specified with the optional image controller. Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the printer functions. User manual – Box Operations This user manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the optional hard disk. Refer to this user manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data. User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This user manual contains details on the network scan, G3 fax, and network fax operations. Refer to this manual for details on using network scan function by E-Mail or FTP, G3 fax, Internet fax and IP address fax operations. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Fax Driver Operations This user manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer. Refer to this user manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Network Administrator This user manual contains descriptions on setting methods for each function utilizing network connection, mainly using the PageScope Web Connection. Refer to this user manual for details on using network functions. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) User manual – Advanced Function Operations This manual describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications. In order to use the functions effectively, please read this manual. 2 Before making copies bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3 Before making copies 2 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration 2.1.1 Options 18 19 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 13 10 10 9 14 9 15 16 17 20 21 22 2 Before making copies 2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) * Parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in the illustration. No. Part name Description 1 Main unit Consists of a scanner, a printer, an ADF, and paper trays (4 trays and 1 bypass tray). 2 Large capacity unit LU-405 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 3 Large capacity unit LU-406 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 4 Local Interface Kit EK-703 Installed when using the machine as a printer connected directly with a PC. 5 Security Kit SC-506 Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely. 6 Hard Disk HD-510 Installed to increase the scanning capacity or enabling scanning of multiple jobs. 7 Output Tray OT-505 Collects printed sheets. 8 Shift Tray SF-602 Separates copies fed out at an offset. 9 Z Folding Unit ZU-605/ ZU-604 Installed with the finisher to enable Z-folding and hole punching. 10 Post Inserter PI-504 Installed with the finisher to enable insertion of the cover sheet into the printed sheets. In addition, you can operate the finisher manually. 11 Finisher FS-610 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, staple, face up, center staple & fold, half-fold, and trifold. 12 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 Installed with the finisher to enable hole punching. 13 Finisher FS-525 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 14 Finisher FS-524 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 15 Image Controller IC-208 Installed when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 16 Fax Kit FK-502 Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine. 17 Mount Kit MK-716 Used to install the Fax kit. 18 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Scans vein patterns in the finger to verify user authentication. 19 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Reads the information stored on an IC card to verify user authentication. 20 Working Table WT-504 Provides an area to temporarily place originals and other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 21 Key Counter Socket Required for installing the key counter. 22 Key Counter Installed onto this machine to make the counter function available for printed sheets. 23 i-Option LK-101* Allows the Web Browser and Image Panel functions to be used from the control panel. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 24 i-Option LK-102* Allows PDF encryption, digital signatures and properties to be specified when transmitting PDF documents with Scan mode or User Box mode operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 25 Upgrade Kit UK-202* Required in order to use i-Option LK-101 or i-Option LK-102. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-5 Before making copies 2 2.1.2 External 2 Reminder Do not grab the control panel to move the machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 18 20 21 2 Before making copies 2-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Left partition glass Scans the original loaded into the ADF. 2 Document scales Use as a guide when placing the original on the original glass. 3 Document pad Presses down on the original positioned on the original glass. 4 Original glass Scans the original placed face down. 5 Adjustable paper guides Used to align the loaded original. 6 Paper tray Load with the originals to be scanned facing up. 7 Original output tray Feeds out scanned originals. 8 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting. 9 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Turns on/off the copying and scanning functions. Turning it off will terminate all the functions other than printing, and receiving and outputting facsimile data, and then enter the sleep mode. 10 Adjustable document guides Used to align the loaded paper. 11 Bypass tray Opened and used when printing onto paper that is not or cannot (such as thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, envelopes or label sheets) be loaded into a paper tray. 12 Release lever for the vertical transport door of the main unit Used to open the vertical transport door when clearing paper misfeeds. 13 Tray 4 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 14 Tray 3 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 15 Tray 2 A maximum of 1,100 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 16 Tray 1 A maximum of 1,650 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 17 Right front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 18 Left front door Opened when turning the main power switch on and off and when clearing paper misfeeds. 19 Toner cartridge door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Machine status indicator Indicates machine status by combining the color (blue or red) and the state (steady on or blinking). 21 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting external memory (USB memory device). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-7 Before making copies 2 22 23 24 25 27 26 28 29 No. Part name Description 22 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T) Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 23 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit (biometric type) or the authentication unit (IC card type). 24 RS-232C port Used for connecting the modem for CS Remote Care. 25 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. 26 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This jack is used when the optional fax multi line kit has been installed. 27 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 28 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 29 Power cord Supplies power to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.3 Internal 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-9 Before making copies 2 No. Part name Description 1 Drum section Forms the copy image. 2 Vertical transport door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the vertical transport section. 3 Dial M1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 4 ADU unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Cover M12 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 6 Dial m2 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 7 Cover M3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 8 Cover M11 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 9 Lever M4 Lowered to the left in order to pull out the ADU unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Transport lever Switched when printing on A5-size or 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 thick paper. 11 Dial M9 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 12 Dial M7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 13 Lever M5 Lowered to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 14 Cover M8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 15 Cover M6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 16 Fusing unit Fuses the image that was formed onto the paper. 17 Dial M10 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 18 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off. 19 Toner-cartridge-securing lever Pull toward you to remove the toner unit when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Toner cartridge Replaced when the toner is empty. 2 Before making copies 2-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-405 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-11 Before making copies 2 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-406 1 3 2 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. 2 Before making copies 2-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-13 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-524 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-524. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-15 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-525 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-525. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 17 14 18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-17 Before making copies 2 15 16 2 Before making copies 2-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finisher FS-610 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 2 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 3 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 9 Guide lever FN9 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Stacker unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 11 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 12 Misfeed-clearing dial FN7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 13 Handle FN6 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 14 Booklet tray Collects copies printed using a Fold/Bind setting. 15 Guide lever FN10 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 16 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. No. Part name Description 17 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-610. 18 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-19 Before making copies 2 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 2 Before making copies 2-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Z folding/transport unit Pulled out when removing jammed paper. 2 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 3 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 4 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or punch scraps. 5 Guide lever FN6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Guide lever FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Handle FN2 Grabbed when removing and inserting the unit. 9 Misfeed-clearing dial FN5 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. 10 Guide lever FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN4 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-21 Before making copies 2 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 2 1 3 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Post inserter control panel Operate when manually using the finisher. (See p. 3-86.) 2 Lower tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 3 Lower tray Load with cover sheets. 4 Upper tray Load with cover sheets. 5 Upper tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 6 Upper unit release lever Raised to slide the upper unit to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Before making copies 2-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-23 Before making copies 2 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Precautions for using the finisher: - Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 1 Top view Rear view 2 3 No. Part name Description 1 Status indicator Indicates the status of the authentication unit. 2 Security slot Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts. (complies with the security cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group) 3 USB port (type mini-B) Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B plug). 1 2 No. Part name Description 1 Card scanning area Position the IC card on this area. 2 USB cable Used for connecting this device to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.15 Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. (See p. 4-16.) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. (Only when a hard disk is installed.) (See p. 4-6.) 10 [Start] key Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Overview of Job List screen" on page 11-3. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-25 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. 12 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [Help] key Press to display the Help Menu screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 4-22.) 15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. 16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode. 17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 18 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the Brightness of the touch panel. 20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For more details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. 22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 2 Before making copies 2-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.16 Basic settings screens When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel. Basic screen Quick Copy screen 6 5 8 9 1 7 3 2 4 5 9 1 7 3 2 4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-27 Before making copies 2 Touching displays Density settings, Background Removal settings, and [Finishing] in the left panel. ! Detail The basic settings screen (Basic screen or Quick Copy screen) that appears can be set with the "Copier Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and Quick Copy screen; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "Basic" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "Basic" is selected. The Quick Copy screen displays all of the settings from the Basic screen so that many settings can easily be specified. ! Detail For details on switching the basic settings screen, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. No. Item Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. 2 Functions/settings display area Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. 4 [Auto Rotate OFF] button Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 5 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the original in separate batches. An original scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. 6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. 7 Left panel When the [Job List] button is pressed, a screen showing the jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed is displayed. When the [Check Job] button is pressed, a screen showing the result of the specified settings is displayed. 8 [Check Job] button The result of the specified settings is displayed. 9 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available. 2 Before making copies 2-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a green line. The green line can be changed to another color with the "Color Selection Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that data is being received from the machine, regardless of the current mode. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Appears when a USB drive is connected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-29 Before making copies 2 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, to release the positioning lock. 2 Move the control panel to the desired position, then release the lever. 2 Before making copies 2-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. 2 Reminder When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel or the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-31 Before making copies 2 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. 2.3.1 Turning on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 1 Open the left front door, and then set the main power switch to "n". 2 Close the left front door. 3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned on. ! Detail When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For more details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory. 2 Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on. For details, refer to "Scanning during warm-up" on page 2-32. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. Refer to "Main unit" on page 6-3 for warm up time. 2 Before making copies 2-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. – For details on turning on the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-33. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 2 Check that the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel. 3 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. – For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 3-3. 6 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] to display the Basic screen. – After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed. ? How can the job being printed be stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-33 Before making copies 2 ! Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and an original can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current Jobs list in the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. 2.3.3 Turning off the machine 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned off. 2 Open the front door, and then set the main power switch to "o". 3 Close the front door. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted. ! Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed 2 Before making copies 2-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time (even if the [Reset] key is not pressed), settings that have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings. This is the automatic panel reset operation. As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute. ! Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority. This is the System Auto Reset operation. As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute. ! Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the System Auto Reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is the Low Power mode. The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes. To recover from Low Power mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator Settings mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-35 Before making copies 2 ! Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and page 12-26. 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes. To recover from Sleep mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail As a default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes have elapsed. The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and "System Settings" on page 12-26. Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as mains power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or when the sub power switch is turned off. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2 Before making copies 2-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode). % Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key). – As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode. ! Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator Settings mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer) The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the machine’s use can be limited. This is the Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. ! Detail As the factory default, the Weekly Timer is not set. For details on setting the Weekly Timer, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-37 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours. – For details on setting the password for non-business hours, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 3 Touch [OK]. The message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." appears. 4 Using the keypad, again type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode. – Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes. ? How can a single digit be entered? % First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified. 5 Touch [OK]. The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel. 2 Note If the message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." or "It is now non-business hour. To use the device, enter password using the keyboard or keypad and then touch [OK]." appears after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the Weekly Timer is set. 2 Before making copies 2-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual. From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "No" (the screen is not displayed). 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication) If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. In addition, the number of printed pages can be managed for each user. 0 When user authentication settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified users can use this machine. 0 Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name. 0 If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [User Name]. – If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. – Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 and "Public User Access" on page 12-74. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-39 Before making copies 2 – If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [User Name List] do not appear. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers, and then select the desired server. For details on specifying settings for an external server authentication, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. 2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-41 Before making copies 2 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The user authentication screen appears. ! Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. 2 Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. 2 Before making copies 2-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 When account track settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 If you do not know the account name or password, contact your administrator. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [Account Name]. – If [Password Only] is specified in the Administrator Settings, the following screen appears. Touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – If the "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only [Password] is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. – If the password consists of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols, touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – After entering numerals using the keypad, touching [Password] allows alphabet characters or symbols to be entered in succession. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-43 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The account track screen appears. ! Detail The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator Settings mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-45 Before making copies 2 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) An authentication unit (biometric type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (biometric type) authenticates the user by scanning the vein patterns in the finger. 2 Note 1-to-many authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Authentication is performed by typing in the user name and positioning the finger. ! Detail To use biometric authentication, register the vein patterns in the finger in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (biometric type) and on registering finger vein patterns, refer to chapter 12, "Authentication unit (Biometric Type AU-101)" of this manual. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified % Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). 2 Before making copies 2-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The basic screen appears. When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-47 Before making copies 2 The basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (biometric type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a [User name] and [Password]. 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) An authentication unit (IC card type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (IC card type) authenticates users by reading the information registered on their IC card. 2 Note Card Authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Authentication is performed by positioning the IC card and entering the password. ! Detail To use card authentication, register the card information in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (IC card type) and on registering IC card information, refer to chapter 13, "Authentication unit (IC Card Type AU-201)" of this manual. When "Card Authentication" has been specified 2 Before making copies 2-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) % Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). The Basic screen appears. When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-49 Before making copies 2 1 Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). 2 Type in the password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (IC card type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a user name and password. 2 Before making copies 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2 To load paper (tray 1 or 2) 1 Pull out the tray 1 or 2. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-51 Before making copies 2 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 To load paper (tray 3 or 4) 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Slide the lateral guide to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 2 Reminder Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper or if the trailing-edge guide is not correctly positioned, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected or the punched holes will not be correctly positioned. If custom-sized paper is loaded, there may be some space between the paper and the trailing-edge guide. When loading the paper, make sure that it fits well against the right side of the paper tray, not the trailing-edge guide. 2 Before making copies 2-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406) 2 Note LCT is the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/LU-406. 2 Reminder If the machine is turned off, the bottom plate cannot be raised. In addition, the bottom plate cannot be lowered, even after the tray bottom plate lower button is pressed. When loading paper into the LCT, be sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the auxiliary power key. To load paper (LCT) 1 Open the upper cover. 2 Press the tray bottom plate lower button. – The tray bottom plate is lowered. (LU-405) (LU-406) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-53 Before making copies 2 3 Load the paper into the tray. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the tray bottom plate cannot be lowered any further. 5 Close the upper cover. (LU-405) (LU-406) ) (LU-405) (LU-406) 2 Before making copies 2-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not load the LCT with paper of other sizes than previously specified. Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack does not exceed the , mark. Make sure that the trailing edge stopper is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing edge stopper and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-55 Before making copies 2 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, thin paper, tracing paper, tab paper, OHP transparencies, label sheets, etc. 1 Open the bypass tray. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. 2 Before making copies 2-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the paper type. – To display a different list of paper types, touch . 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-57 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder When loading OHP transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load OHP transparencies in the w orientation. Load OHP transparencies one sheet at a time. When loading tab papers, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load tab papers in the w orientation. Load label sheets one sheet at a time. 2 Before making copies 2-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up, and select [Letterhead] for the paper type of the bypass tray. 2 Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. ! Detail For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 7-3. For details on selecting a setting for standard size paper, refer to "Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting)" on page 7-10. For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-12. For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings)" on page 7-17. ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-59 Before making copies 2 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays The paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 can be changed to that of a different size. 2 Note To load paper of a different size into the tray 1 and 2 and the LCT, contact your service representative. 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Remove the trailing-edge guide, and then insert it at the position for the desired paper size. – Press the button to remove the trailing-edge guide. – Insert the trailing-edge guide into the hole corresponding to the size indicated on the bottom plate. 4 Load paper of the new size, and then slide the lateral guide to fit the size of the paper. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. – If paper other than standard-size paper or thick paper was loaded, specify the settings for the loaded paper in the Paper Type screen. Refer to "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. 2 Before making copies 2-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to insert the trailing-edge guide at the position for the specified size. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray, the bypass tray or the LCT, the transport lever must be correctly set in order to prevent paper misfeeds. To set the transport lever 1 Open the front doors (left and right). 2 Turn lever M4 to the left, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Set the transport lever to "5-1/2 e 8-1/2, A5 Thick paper". 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Close the front doors (left and right). 2 Note After using 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper, be sure to reset the transport lever to "NORMAL". M4 Transport lever 3 Basic copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3 Basic copy operations 3 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided original using basic copy operations. 2 Note The maximum loading capacity of the output trays for the optional finisher may be limited depending on the paper size and selected Finishing settings. With continuous printing (multiple jobs), the warning "The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the tray indicated by %." may appear, even if the paper was removed from the output trays. For details on multiple jobs, refer to "Multi-job feature" on page 11-3. Interrupting a print job resets the loading capacity of the output tray. For details on the limitations of the loading capacity for the output trays, refer to "Specifications" on page 6-3. Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 3-6. 1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 3-9. 3 Basic copy operations 3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – The factory default settings for this machine are listed below. [Density]: Auto [Background Removal]: Standard [Paper]: Auto (Auto Paper Select) [Zoom]: Full Size (100.0%) [Duplex/Combine]: 1 > 1 [Original Type]: Text/Photo – For details on selecting settings in the Original Setting screen, refer to page 3-19. – For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to page 3-36. – For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to page 3-39. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 3-50. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 3-59. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 3-61. – For details on specifying combined copy settings, refer to page 3-55. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 3-64. – For details on selecting the Fold/Bind settings, refer to page 3-77. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 3-89. – For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to page 8-3. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5 Basic copy operations 3 5 Press the [Start] key. – To stop the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to page 3-91. – The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed. For details, refer to page 3-90. 3 Basic copy operations 3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together. Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring. - The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.) 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described below. 1 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-7 Basic copy operations 3 2 Set the "Booklet" function. The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically canceled, and the "Booklet" function is set. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be specified together. The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described below. 1 Set the "Booklet" function. 2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. The message "Cannot be set with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected. The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-9 Basic copy operations 3 3.3 Feeding the original The original can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being copied. 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF 0 Do not load originals that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. 0 For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, a original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 0 If the original is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the original toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the original orientation. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the original. – For details on loading originals of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed automatically, one page at a time. This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double-sided originals. Using the original glass Place the original directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned. This method is best with books and other originals that cannot be fed through the ADF. A A 3 Basic copy operations 3-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass 0 For details on the types of originals that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size may not be detected. 0 Do not place objects weighing more than 6.8 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the ADF. When an original is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. 1 Lift open the ADF or the original cover. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. – For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. – For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. Original scales bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-11 Basic copy operations 3 – For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales, as shown. 4 Close the ADF. 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) A large original can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 original pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by specifying the "Separate Scan" setting, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. 0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). Do not allow the original to be loaded over the limit mark (,), even though the original count is less than 100. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to the description for "Separate Scan Output Method" in "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. – To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it. 3 Basic copy operations 3-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Press the [Start] key. After the original has been scanned, the following message appears. – Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the original is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5 – If the original cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-13 Basic copy operations 3 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-15 Basic copy operations 3 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page original on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided original pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Position the first page or the first side of the original face down onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Placing the original on the original glass" on page 3-10. 3 Close the ADF. 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. 6 Touch [Binding Position], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "Selecting double-sided copies" on page 3-52. 7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-17 Basic copy operations 3 9 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 10 Position the second page or second side of the original onto the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. – To scan the remaining pages in the original, repeat step 10. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 12 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-19 Basic copy operations 3 3.4 Specifying original settings The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) Copies can be produced after specifying the original scanning size if the original size cannot be detected automatically or if you wish to specify a certain original size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Size]. The Original Size screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the original size, and then touch [OK]. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a standard size, touch the button for the desired original size. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [-] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-21 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, an original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. – The possible combinations of original sizes differ depending on the widest original loaded (position of the adjustable lateral guides). – For details on the mixed original sizes that can be loaded in the ADF, refer to "Originals that can be loaded into the ADF" on page 7-31. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Basic copy operations 3-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-23 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 0 Load the original into the ADF. 0 The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) Using tab papers enables copying of an original including its index part. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Load tab papers into the bypass tray. – Tab papers can be loaded into the bypass tray. For details, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-25 Basic copy operations 3 3 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [Tab Original]. The Tab Original screen appears. 5 Select an original size, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 2 Note As the factory default, the first setting (with the top of the original at the top (toward the back of the machine)) is selected. Original loading orientation Using the ADF Using the original glass Icon Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-27 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Direction]. The Original Direction screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-29 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto" is selected as the position of the binding margin. Original binding margin position Original binding margin Icon Description Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. When the original length is 297 mm or less: When the original length is more than 297 mm: Auto Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm: a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 2 Note If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. ABC AB ABCBC ABC ABC ABC AB ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC AB 3 Basic copy operations 3-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When loading an original with a binding margin, position the top of the original toward the back of the machine. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. The Binding Position screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-31 Basic copy operations 3 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original When scanning an original while using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page originals are scanned from the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each original. The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-33 Basic copy operations 3 5 Touch the button of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK]. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Binding Position screen Density/Background screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Original Type screen Frame Erase screen Zoom screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-35 Basic copy operations 3 – For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 3-39. For details on specifying "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" settings, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. – The Original Size screen appears only when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 6 Touch [OK]. Original Size screen Center Erase screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. As the factory default, "Auto" is selected. 2 Note If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected with single-sided printing.) Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper tray. For details, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. The "Auto" Paper setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Zoom setting. For details on specifying the priority of paper trays, refer to "Specifying user settings" on page 12-17. 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-37 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size 0 By also selecting the "Auto" Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto" Zoom setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. 0 Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-39 Basic copy operations 3 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting. 2 Note The "Auto" Zoom setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Paper setting. 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 0 If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. 0 If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting) A copy that is the same size as the original (100%) is produced. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Full Size]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-41 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-43 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting) An original image can be printed slightly smaller (93.0%) than the original size and centered in the copy. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting or programming custom zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Minimal]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside "Enlarge" and "Reduce", depending on the original and paper sizes. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-45 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%) and for the vertical direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%). By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown below. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the X direction. 4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the Y direction. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-47 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed. 0 As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio under "Set Zoom Ratio". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between 90.0% and 99.9%. 0 The default zoom ratios (400.0%, 200.0% and 50.0%) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button. If a button stored with a zoom ratio is not touched before [OK] is touched, no setting is changed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-49 Basic copy operations 3 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [Set Zoom]. 5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The specified zoom ratio is stored. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting The following four Original > Copy setting combinations are possible. The following procedures describe how to select Original and Copy setting. Original > Copy setting Description 1-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two singlesided originals. 2-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one doublesided original. 2-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-51 Basic copy operations 3 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [1-Sided > 1-Sided] or [2-Sided > 1-Sided]. – If "2-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Bind Direction", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. 3 Basic copy operations 3-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, touch [Binding Position], select the binding position of the original, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 4 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-53 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided] or [2-Sided > 2-Sided]. – Specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Binding Position", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. – For a single-sided original, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, select the binding positions for the original and the copy, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-55 Basic copy operations 3 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting Original images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. The following three combined copy settings are available. ! Detail When select the combined copy setting, copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio (recommended zoom ratio) selected for the original and paper size. The zoom ratio that is selected can be changed manually. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto Display Zoom Ratio" is selected. The "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not used. In that case, specify the zoom ratio manually. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. Setting Description 2in1 Select this setting to print two original pages on one page. 4in1 Select this setting to print four original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 3 Basic copy operations 3-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting. 8in1 Select this setting to print eight original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical Setting Description 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 3 3 5 5 7 7 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 1 1 5 5 2 2 6 6 3 3 7 7 4 4 8 8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-57 Basic copy operations 3 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) If a combined copy setting is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the original, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement. For details on specifying the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Select the desired combined copy setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined pages. If "4in1 / 8in1" is selected, whether the "Horizontal" or "Vertical" paper arrangement is selected can be viewed in the touch panel. However, this appears only if the "Left Pane Display Default" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Check Job Settings". If "2in1" was selected, the pages will be arranged as shown below. – If "4in1 / 8in1" the 4in1/8in1 screen appears. Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] to select the combination order of the original, and press [OK]. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Vertical Horizontal bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-59 Basic copy operations 3 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. 2 Note As the factory default, "Text/Photo" is selected. The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting. Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and images. Photo Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. 3 Basic copy operations 3-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.9.2 To select an original type setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-61 Basic copy operations 3 3.10 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following two density adjustments are available. The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings. Function Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Lighter] or [Darker] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. 3 Basic copy operations 3-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-63 Basic copy operations 3 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the middle setting of the nine levels (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11 Selecting finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 2 Note As the factory default, "Group" is selected. ! Detail If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 2 Note From Administrator Settings mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher is installed. As a factory default, the machine is set to shift the copies that are fed out. For details on specifying settings for shifting copies that are fed out when the finisher is installed, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. For details on "Fold/Bind", refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. When the post inserter is installed with the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually. For details, refer to "Manually using the finisher" on page 3-86. Available Finishing Settings Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-65 Basic copy operations 3 The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings. 2 Reminder The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. Offset If no finisher is installed If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. If a finisher is installed The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Fold/Bind Select this setting to fold copies. The copies can also be bound with staples at the same time. The "Fold/Bind" setting can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Output Tray The copies are output to the specified paper tray. Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples. Punch Holes are punched (2 or 4 holes) in the copies for filing them. Setting Description 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 Basic copy operations 3-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Sort]. – To separate each set of copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-67 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Group]. – To separate each set of pages, touch [Yes] under "Offset". – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray 0 The output tray can be selected only if the optional finisher is installed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Output tray]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-69 Basic copy operations 3 3 Select the output tray where copies are to be fed, and then touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) The copies are output with their front sides facing up. ! Detail This can be specified for both sort output and group output. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch [Face Up]. – To cancel the settings, touch [Face Up] again. – As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. The copies are output with their back sides facing up. – The following settings cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. Booklet Double-sided copying Center Staple & Fold Half-Fold – When "Face Up" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Offset Staple Punch Tri-Fold Z-Fold 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-71 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 314 mm. The paper length must be between 139 mm and 458 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. 2 Reminder Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed. Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is between 150 mm and 417 mm. The value will be 50 sets if the paper length is not within this range. *3 This is the loading capacity when Finisher FS-525 has been installed Maximum number of bound pages: Finisher FS-524:50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Finisher FS-525:100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is 417 mm or less. The value will be 50 sets if the length exceeds 418 mm. Maximum number of bound pages: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Tray Paper weight Paper size Loading capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) FS-524: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 FS-525: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 51 sheets to 60 sheets binding: 15 sets*3 61 sheets to 100 sheets binding: 10 sets*3 Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 3 Basic copy operations 3-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position]. – To cancel the Staple setting, touch [None]. – When a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. – The following settings cannot be used together with a Staple setting. Offset Face Up bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-73 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Position Setting]. – Select the stapling position, and then touch [OK]. – When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected. – When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected. 3 Basic copy operations 3-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 314 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the original length is more than 314 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ! Detail In order to be punch holes in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 2 Note The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2-Hole: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4-Hole: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-75 Basic copy operations 3 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Punch", touch [2-Hole] or [4-Hole]. – To cancel the Punch setting, touch [None]. – A Punch setting cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. 3 Touch [Position Setting]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the punched hole position, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the original length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-77 Basic copy operations 3 3.12 Selecting a folding setting By installing optional equipments, copies can be folded, or folded and bound with staples at the same time, and then fed out. Available settings differ depending on the optional equipments installed. 2 Note Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if Finisher FS-610 is installed. Z-folding is available when the Z folding unit is installed with the finisher. For details, refer to "Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting)" on page 3-83. Setting Description Compatible models Half-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-78.) FS-610 Center Staple & Fold Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-79.) FS-610 Tri-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-81.) FS-610 Z-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountain-fold one of the halves before feeding them out. FS-524 FS-525 FS-610 3 Basic copy operations 3-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4Ww, 11 e 17W w,8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Maximum number of folded sheets Paper capacity 3 sheets When folding 3 sheets (80 g/m2): 25 sets or less (with a paper length of 299 mm or less) 33 sets or less (others) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-79 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Half-Fold]. – As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when "Half-Fold" is selected. – To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic Screen appears again. 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 Maximum number of sheets that can be bound in the center - 20 or more sheets (60 - 80 g/m2) or 19 + 1 sheets (200 g/m2) Capacity - 20 copies or less - 15 copies or less (paper length: 299 mm or less) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of bound sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 16 sheets 3 Basic copy operations 3-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Staple & Fold]. – If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (200 g/m2) can be stapled. – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following factory default settings are automatically selected. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio (64.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-81 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 ! Detail When copies are to be folded in three, settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside. For details on selecting the setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of tri-folded sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 1 sheet Number of folded sheets Maximum number of sets 1 sheet 50 sets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Tri-Fold]. – When the "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Tri-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-83 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) Copies can be Z-folded and output. In addition, originals of mixed sizes can be Z-folded and output in the same specified paper size. ! Detail The Z-folding function is not available in the following cases. When the original size and output paper size are the same. When a paper size on which a part of the original image will be lost is selected. 2 Note Punching or stapling can be carried out with Z-folding before feeding the copies out. ! Detail For details on setting the mixed (size) originals, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 and Z folding unit * Can be specified when the output paper size is A3 w, 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w. 2 Note Z-folding multiple overlapped papers as one unit is not possible. When the finished size is A4 Item Description Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Paper size A3 w, B4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w Z-folded & stapled copies* 5 sheets Paper capacity 30 sheets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail When loading the originals into ADF, load them in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the right. When placing the original on the original glass, place it in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the left. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-85 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Z-Fold]. – To cancel the "Z-Fold" setting, touch [Z-Fold] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.13 Manually using the finisher If the post inserter is installed onto the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually by using the control panel of the post inserter. The following Finishing settings are available with each of the option configurations. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 and post inserter "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Finisher FS-610 and post inserter - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold Finisher FS-524/FS-525, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Punch settings Finisher FS-610, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold - Punch settings 2 Reminder Only load paper into the lower tray. Do not use the upper tray. Corner Staple 2 Position Staple Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Punch Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Finisher FS-525 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v 200 sheets Main finishing tray (Tray 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-87 Basic copy operations 3 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 Can be used only with Finisher FS-610. ! Detail When manually performing the hole-punching operation from the post inserter control panel, only two holes can be punched. Names of control panel parts Center Staple & Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Tri-Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 1 sheet (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray [Punch] key [Start/stop] key Tri-Fold 2 Position Staple Corner Staple Center Staple & Fold [Finishing] key 3 Basic copy operations 3-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finishing 1 Load the paper into the lower tray of the post inserter. – If the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings are to be used, load the paper face up – If a Punch setting is to be used, load the paper face up. – If the paper is to be stapled and folded at the center, load the paper so that the side that is to be the front when bound is face up. – If the paper is to be folded in three, load the paper so that the side that is to be the outside when folded in three is face up. – The loaded paper will be finished into one set. 2 Slide the paper guides to fit the size of the paper. 3 Press the [Finishing] key or [Punch] key, and then select the desired Finishing settings. – When the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings, or the "Center Staple & Fold" or "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, press the [Finishing] key, and the indicator lights up. When a Punch setting is selected, press the [Punch] key, and the indicator lights up. – A Punch can be selected at the same time as the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple setting. If the settings are selected at the same time, the indicator lights up when the [Finishing] key is pressed. When only a Punch setting is selected, all indicators except the one on the [Punch] key go off. 4 Press the [Start/Stop] key. – Press the [Start/Stop] key during an operation to stop the operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-89 Basic copy operations 3 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. % In the Basic screen, touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. Original Auto Rotate OFF Auto Rotate 3 Basic copy operations 3-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a copy job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. 0 Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved. 0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 0 To delete a reserved copy job, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. 1 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while the current job is being printed, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] while printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on specifying the screen that appears while printing, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-91 Basic copy operations 3 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 0 If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. 0 For details on deleting a temporarily stopped job, refer to "Deleting a paused job" on page 3-92. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.17 Deleting a paused job Follow the procedure described below to delete a temporarily stopped job. 0 For details on temporarily stopping a job being scanned or printed, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 0 To continue a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. 4 Additional copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3 Additional copy operations 4 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) From the Check Job Details screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 4.1.1 To check the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5 Additional copy operations 4 2 After checking the settings, touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail There are seven Check Job Settings screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. If the setting for a function has been changed from the default, the button for that function appears with a colored box around it. 4.1.2 To change the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. 2 Touch [ Back] or [Forward ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed. 3 Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed. The screen for specifying the setting appears. 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting. 4 Additional copy operations 4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Select the desired copy settings. – When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, go to step 6. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, the Select Proof Copy Method screen does not appear. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Print] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7 Additional copy operations 4 5 Press the [Start] key. 6 If the original was placed on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. – If the original was loaded into the ADF, printing of the proof copy begins without the screen appearing confirming that scanning of the original is finished. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. – If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 8. – To change the copy settings, continue with step 6. 8 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the proof copy was printed. – To stop copying while the proof copy screen is displayed, press the [Reset] key or the [C] (clear) key. Otherwise, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the job, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If no operation is performed within the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job being proofed is registered as a stored job and the Basic screen appears again. Jobs are registered as stored jobs under the following conditions. When the automatic system reset operation is performed After one minute (when "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF") For details on stored jobs, refer to page 11-14. If "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF", the job is stored if no operation is performed for 1 minute. – For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. – The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of sets printed as proof copies/total Number of Sets specified. – The number under "Total # of Pages Printed" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of copies printed as proof copies/the number of pages printed in the proof copy. 4 Additional copy operations 4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 In the screen allowing you to change the settings, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Next, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings. – To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings in the screen for changing the settings, press the [Reset] key while the screen for changing the settings is displayed to reset the settings to those specified in step 2. – The number beside "Copies" in the screen for changing the settings is the number of copies that will be printed when [Finish] is touched. 10 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another proof copy. – To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 11 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9 Additional copy operations 4 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. This prevents print errors from occurring. If an optional hard disk is not installed, print image cannot be checked with the Preview screen displayed. 4.3.1 Preview screen In the Preview screen, originals that have been scanned in a wrong direction can be rotated and settings specified before scanning can be changed. Screen Layout 3 6 1 2 4 7 5 8 No. Item Name Description 1 [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] Moves to the previous or next page from the current page. 2 - The preview image appears. Press [View Finishing] to apply the finishing status to the preview image. 3 Scroll bar If the preview image is enlarged, use the scroll bar to scroll up or down, or to the left or right of the image. 4 Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image. For details, refer to "Zoom" on page 4-10. 5 Page Rotation Rotates the preview image by 180 degrees. For details, refer to "Page Rotation" on page 4-10. 6 [View Finishing] Applies the finishing state to the preview image. Touching [View Finishing] again cancels the finishing preview. For details, refer to "View Finishing" on page 4-11. 7 [Change Setting] Settings for the scanned originals can be changed. For details, refer to "Change Setting" on page 4-12. 8 [View Status]/[View Pages] Switches the Preview screen between the status view and the page view. Images can be rotated and settings can be changed in [View Pages]. Loading of the image is finished in [View Status]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Zoom In Zoom, the preview image can be enlarged to check the original in detail. By touching [+] or [-], the zoom ratio can be changed between the full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. ! Detail If the display size is changed, the finishing status cannot be viewed. Page Rotation In Page Rotation, a preview image can be rotated by 180 degrees to correct wrong original direction. % Touch [Rotate current page] to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees. % Touch [Select page(s) to rotate] to display the list of scanned pages. Up to 8 scanned pages can be displayed, and touching the arrows switches between the pages. % Touch [Select Odd] to rotate the odd pages among the scanned pages. % Touch [Select Even] to rotate the even pages among the scanned pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11 Additional copy operations 4 % Touch [Select All ]to rotate all the scanned pages. Directly selecting a scanned page rotates the selected page. View Finishing % Touch [View Finishing] to display the finishing settings in the preview image with icons and texts, and finishing status can be checked. – Press [View Finishing] again to cancel the finishing view of the preview image. 4 Additional copy operations 4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Change Setting In Change Setting, settings for the original to be scanned next can be changed. 2 Note For details on the setting method, refer to the appropriate description section. Touching [Preview] in the left pane displays the preview image. The settings displayed in the preview image are limited to those apply to all original pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13 Additional copy operations 4 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview In Preview, finishing image of copies can be checked before printing. 1 Place the original on the original glass, or load the original into the ADF. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Preview on Screen] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: 5 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the original starts, and the Preview screen (View Status) appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the preview image. – To change the settings, touch [View Pages]. Go to step 7. – To start printing, press the [Start] key. – To scan more originals, touch [Finish], place (or load) the originals, and then press the [Start] key. – Press the [Stop] key to cancel the preview. 7 Change the settings, and then touch [View Status]. – For details on the View Pages screen, refer to "Preview screen" on page 4-9. 8 Press the [Start] key. – Start printing. ! Detail When originals are scanned using the Program Jobs function, the finishing image can be previewed after all the originals are scanned and [Finish] is touched. For details on the Program Jobs function, refer to "Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)" on page 8-21. When originals are scanned with the insert pages specified, the finishing image can be previewed both after the originals are scanned first and after the insert pages are scanned. For details on the insert pages, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. When the Book Copy function or Booklet function is specified, the finishing status cannot be checked. Print and check the finishing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-15 Additional copy operations 4 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so an original can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. ! Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. – If a job is being printed, the message "The job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. ? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults. ? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? % The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned. 3 Select the desired copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. Printing for the interrupting job begins. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off. The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted. 2 Note If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts. 4 Additional copy operations 4-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled. A maximum of 30 programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs. 2 Note If the optional hard disk is installed, a maximum of 100 copy programs can be registered. 1 Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program. ? Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen, touch the button where you wish to store the copy settings, and then touch [Register Program]. – There are three Recall Copy Program screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – If 30 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on deleting copy programs, refer to "Deleting a copy program" on page 4-19. The Register Copy Program screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-17 Additional copy operations 4 4 Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. – The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 5 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. – To stop specifying the name of the copy program, touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears. ? Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure to change the copy program name. ? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? % To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Program Settings]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 4-20. 6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key. ! Detail To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. The settings of a copy program cannot be changed. If the copy program that was selected has been locked, [Edit Name] and [Delete] do not appear. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-19 Additional copy operations 4 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 2 Touch [Delete]. A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program. 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased. 4 Additional copy operations 4-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, continue with step 8. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 4 Press the [Check Program Settings] key. – The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-21 Additional copy operations 4 The Check Job Settings screen appears. There are four Check Job Settings screens. The number to the right of the screen title indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. 6 Touch [Close]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. 7 Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program being recalled. 8 Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings. 2 Note To stop recalling a copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key or touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. - Main Help screens (from the Basic screen) - Help screens for settings (from screens other than the Basic screen) 4.7.1 Overview of help screens The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen. Help Menu screen (1st level) ! Detail The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display] Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [Close]. Touch [Exit] to exit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed. Item Description [Function] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function types and names. [Search by Operation] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the operations. [Function Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings. [Other Functions] Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. [Name and Function of Parts] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part. Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. [Service/Admin. Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator. [Replace Consumables] Use to view the maintenance procedures for the machine. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-23 Additional copy operations 4 Help screen (2nd level) (Example: Function) ! Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Function % Copy % Density/Background % Density) Item Description [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Job List], [Print], [Customize], [Image Panel], [Web Browser] Displays the first Help screen for each description. 4 Additional copy operations 4-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Search by Operation % Copying % Copying Special Documents) % Touch [Shortcut to Function] to set the selected function. ! Detail If you are viewing the Help screen of a different function from the one that is currently selected, [Shortcut to Function] cannot be selected. For example, if you are in the Fax/Scan mode, [Shortcut to Function] on the Help screen for the Copy mode, which is a different function from the Fax/Scan mode, cannot be selected. Function Map screen (Example: Copy) A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. % Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view. ! Detail There are 12 Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the 12 screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch . To display the next screen, touch . Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To display the Help screen for "Function" that contains the selected item, touch [Close] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. To quit the Help mode, press the [Help] key or touch [Exit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-25 Additional copy operations 4 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens As an example, the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations by using "Function". 1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Help Menu screen appears. 2 Touch [Function] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Help screen for "Function" appears. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of help screens" on page 4-22. 4 Additional copy operations 4-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Copy] or [Open], or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Copy Help screen appears. 4 Touch [Open] or the right of the desired information, or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen. 5 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-27 Additional copy operations 4 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel. 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen % Press the [Accessibility] key. The Accessibility Setting screen appears. ! Detail To exit the Accessibility Setting screen and return to the Basic screen, press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key, or touch [Close]. When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Touch Panel Adjustment] or press the [1] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears. ? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel Adjustment.] is touched? The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel. % Press the [1] key in the keypad. 3 Touch the four check points [+], making sure that a sound is produced with each. – The check points [+] can be touched in any order. – To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points [+]. If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 4 Press the [Start] key. The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative. ! Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-29 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified. 0 The settings specified for the Key Repeat Start/Interval Time functions are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [+] and [-] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature. – To extend the time, touch [+]. – To reduce the time, touch [-]. – Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1-second increments. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "Time To Start" is set to 0.8 second and "Interval" is set to 0.3 second. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-31 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the Basic screen. In addition, it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode. Yes: Enlarge Display mode is not exited. No: Enlarge Display mode is exited, and the Basic screen is displayed. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. 2 Touch [System Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [3] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The System Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "No" is selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-33 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "No" is selected. Yes: The current settings are not reset. No: The current settings are reset to the default settings. 2 Note For details on the automatic panel reset operation, refer to "Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset)" on page 2-34. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [4] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-35 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. Yes: The settings that cannot be displayed are cancelled, and the Enlarge Display mode is entered. No: The Enlarge Display mode is not entered. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation] or press the [5] key in the keypad. The Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen appears 4 Additional copy operations 4-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If "OFF" is selected in the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen, the screen is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-37 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. As the factory default, "3 seconds" is selected. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Message Display Time screen appears. 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed. – Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to select how long messages are displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Additional copy operations 4-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions With the Sound Setting functions, The sound level can be adjusted by selecting on from 16 levels provided for the sounds that are produced, for example, when a key is pressed. Specified sound can also be muted in this setting. For details, see the table below. As the factory default, "8" is selected for all operation sounds. Operation Confirmation Sound Sound ON/OFF Settings All Sounds Select to turn on/off all sounds in Sound Setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Operation Confirmation Sound setting. Successful Completion Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Successful Completion Sound setting. Completed Preparation Sound Select to turn on/off the Completed Preparation Sound setting. Caution Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Caution Sound setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Input Confirmation Sound When pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Invalid Input Sound When incorrectly pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Basic Sound When switching settings and the default setting is selected Successful Completion Sound Completed Operation Sound When an operation is completed successfully Completed Transmission Sound When a communication operation is completed successfully Completed Preparation Sound When a device has finished setting up Caution Sound Simple Caution Sound (Level 1) When it is almost time to replace supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel Simple Caution Sound (Level 2) When a user has performed an operation incorrectly Simple Caution Sound (Level 3) When an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the user manual Severe Caution Sound When an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-39 Additional copy operations 4 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Sound Setting screen appears. 3 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting (2-5). – Sound settings 2 through 5 are available only if the corresponding sound setting on the Sound ON/OFF Settings screen is set to "ON". The screen for selected sound setting appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting. The screen for adjusting sound level appears. 5 Adjust the sound level. – To produce the sound, touch [Yes]. The sound level can be selected from 16 levels. Every touching [Lower]/[Higher] increases/decreases a single level. To mute the sound, touch [No]. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 6 Touch [OK], then touch [Close]. The Sound Setting screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-41 Additional copy operations 4 7 To enable/disable the sound setting collectively from 2 to 5, touch [Sound ON/OFF Settings] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Sound ON/OFF Settings screen appears. 8 Select [On] or [No] for the desired setting item. 9 Touch [OK]. The sound Setting screen appears again. 10 Touch [Close]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 11 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Additional copy operations 4-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Troubleshooting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3 Troubleshooting 5 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears There are three types of errors; errors that can be cleared by opening and closing the front door, errors that can be cleared by turning the power off/on, and errors that cannot be cleared. Clear the error by following the on-screen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code. The phone number and fax number for the usual service representative appear in the center of the screen. Example: Error that can be cleared by turning the power off/on (C-E0002) Display in Enlarge Display mode If the internal error occurs, the screen shown below appears. 2 Reminder Since the machine may be damaged, contact the service representative according to the procedure described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears. 5 Troubleshooting 5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Write down the trouble code (for example, C-E0002) in the call service representative screen. 2 Turn the machine off by using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key and the main power switch. 3 Unplug the machine. 4 Contact the service representative, and inform them of the trouble code. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5 Troubleshooting 5 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message "A paper misfeed has been detected. Remove the paper according to the guide or illustration." appears, and the location of the misfeed is indicated by a number accompanied with the procedure for clearing misfed paper on the screen. At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared. Misfeed Location screen 5 Troubleshooting 5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration If paper misfeeds have occurred at multiple locations, multiple numbers appear or flash. The flashing number indicates the location where the paper misfeed should be cleared first. Touching the [Illustration] key on the Misfeed Location screen displays another screen with the message "Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration.", and also with a description and illustration for clearing misfed paper. If the description extends over multiple pages, the [Next%] key is displayed. Touch [Next] to proceed to the next screen. Touching [JAM Location Display] returns to the Misfeed Location screen. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional Finisher FS-610, Z folding unit, post inserter and Large Capacity Unit LU-405 installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional shift tray installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional output tray installed. 5 Troubleshooting 5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 1. – If the misfed paper extends over tray 1 and tray 2, also pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. No. Description 1 Paper misfeed in tray 1 2 Paper misfeed in tray 2 3 Paper misfeed in tray 3 4 Paper misfeed in tray 4 5 Paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit LU-405/LU-406) 6 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray 7 Paper misfeed in the vertical transport section 8 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 9 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 10 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 11 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 12 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 13 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 14 Paper misfeed in the ADF 15 Paper misfeed in the ADF 16 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 or shift tray 17 Paper misfeed in the post inserter 18 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 20 Paper misfeed in the Z folding unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Pull out tray 2, and then pull out the horizontal transport unit. 6 Open the horizontal transport unit cover. 7 Remove any misfed paper in the horizontal transport unit. 8 Return the horizontal transport unit and tray 2 to their original positions. 5 Troubleshooting 5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 10 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 11 Close the vertical transport door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 3 or tray 4. 2 Remove any misfed paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the large capacity tray front door. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Open the upper cover. 4 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-15 Troubleshooting 5 5 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the upper cover. 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray. 2 Load the paper into the tray again. 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 2 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 5 Troubleshooting 5-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M2 M2 M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-17 Troubleshooting 5 4 Raise lever M3, and then remove any paper. 5 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 6 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M1 and M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 4 Raise cover M12, and then remove any paper. M2 M1 M2 M1 M4 M12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-19 Troubleshooting 5 5 Raise cover M3, and then remove any paper. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Remove all paper from the ADU unit. 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-21 Troubleshooting 5 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M9 and M10 to feed out the paper. 3 Remove all paper from the outlet. – If the finisher, shift tray or Z folding unit is installed, clear paper misfeeds from each unit. M9 M10 M9 M10 5 Troubleshooting 5-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 5 Lower lever M5. 6 Open covers M6 and M8. 7 Turn dial M7, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise the lever for cover M6, and then close cover M6. 9 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 10 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. M4 M5 M8 M6 M7 M7 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-23 Troubleshooting 5 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M4 5 Troubleshooting 5-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Open cover M11. 4 Turn dial M9, and then remove any paper. 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M11 M9 M9 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-25 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Open cover M11. 4 Remove any paper. M4 M11 5 Troubleshooting 5-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-27 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Open the left-side cover, and then remove any original pages. 3 Open the paper feed unit, and then remove any original pages. 4 Close the paper feed unit and the left-side door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Lift up the paper tray, and then remove any original pages. 6 Return the paper tray to its original position. 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Lift open the ADF. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-29 Troubleshooting 5 3 Open the document pad. 4 Open the original exit guides, and then remove any original pages. 5 Close the document pad. 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. The method for clearing paper misfeeds in Finisher FS-524 is the same as that for FS-525. Here, the method for FS-524 is described as an example. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-31 Troubleshooting 5 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 8 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 5 Troubleshooting 5-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Remove any misfed paper from the stacker unit. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 10 Return the stacker unit to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-33 Troubleshooting 5 – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-35 Troubleshooting 5 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 9 Lower guide lever FN9, and then remove any paper. 10 Open guide lever FN8, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-37 Troubleshooting 5 11 Lower guide lever FN10, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. 12 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched.Return the stacker unit to its original position. 13 Close the front door. 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16" 1 Open the shift tray cover, and then slowly remove any misfed paper. 2 Close the shift tray cover. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-39 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17" ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7 1 Raise the upper unit release lever, and then slide the upper unit to the left. 2 Slowly remove any misfed paper. 3 Return the upper unit to its original position. 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the Z folding unit where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Raise guide lever FN1, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN1 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN8 and guide lever FN2 of the finisher, and then remove any paper. 5 Grab handle FN2, and then pull out the Z folding/transport unit. – Slowly pull out the Z folding/transport unit as far as possible. 6 Lower guide lever FN3, and then remove any paper. FN1 FN8 FN2 FN2 FN3 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-41 Troubleshooting 5 – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN4 to feed out the paper. 7 Lower guide lever FN6, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise guide lever FN7, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN5 to feed out the paper. 9 Return guide lever FN6 to its original position FN4 FN4 FN6 FN7 FN5FN5 FN5 5 Troubleshooting 5-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Return the Z folding/transport unit to its original position. – When returning the Z folding/transport unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN2, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. FN2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-43 Troubleshooting 5 5.3 Simple troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy Main unit The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on. Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [Power] (auxiliary power) key been turned on? Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Copying does not start. Is the right front door of the machine open? Securely close the upper right-side door of the machine. Is there no paper that matches the original? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light. Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-61.) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The printed output is too dark. Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-63.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) The printed output is blurry. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output. There are streaks in the printed output. Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the left partition glass dirty? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the original printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original. (See p. 3-10.) Is a double-sided original being copied? If a thin double-sided original is being copied, the print on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Touch [Light] on the Background Removal screen to select a lighter background density. (See p. 3-52.) 5 Troubleshooting 5-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The image is not aligned properly on the paper. Is the original incorrectly positioned? Correctly position the original against the original scales. (See p. 3-10.) Load the original into the ADF, and slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the size of the original. (See p. 3-9.) Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the original on the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) Is the left partition glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the original? Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace the paper with paper that is not damp. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The edge of the printed output is dirty. Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the selected paper size larger than the original (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Is the orientation of the original different from the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-39.) Even though the paper misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced. Are there paper misfeeds at other locations? Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations. (See p. 5-7.) Printing with the "2-Sided > 1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided" settings are not possible. Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentication/ account track settings specified. Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. ADF The original is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the original one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF. (See p. 7-31 and p. 7-32.) Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (See p. 3-9.) Symptom Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-45 Troubleshooting 5 Finisher The finisher cannot be used. Is no power supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. The pages cannot be stapled. Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90 degrees. Is the staple position correctly specified? Specify the desired position for stapling. (See p. 3-71.) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned. Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap. Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes are not punched. (when the punch unit is installed on the finisher) Did the message "Empty the holepunch scrap box." appear? Empty the hole-punch scrap box. (See p. 9-18) Symptom Possible cause Remedy Trouble Possible cause Remedy Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the machine may be malfunctioning. Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the computer, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the computer may be malfunctioning. Restart the computer. Is the authentication unit correctly installed? Refer to "Registering from Data Administrator", and check if the driver is correctly installed on the computer. (p. 13-9) A tone does not sound from the machine when scanning begins and when authentication is completed. Has the tone setting on the machine been set to "OFF"? Refer to "Registering users", and set the tone setting to "ON". (p. 13-15) The message "Failed to register". appears on a machine where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the limited period of time. For details on the scanning time, consult with the technical representative. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. The message "Failed to read data. Place your finger once again and click the [Start reading] button." appears on a computer where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to five seconds for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the five-second time period. 5 Troubleshooting 5-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative. Scanning does not begin. Is the finger correctly positioned? Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to 10 seconds. This message appears if scanning was not possible within the limited period of time. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) and check how to position the IC card in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. The message appears on a computer where registration failed Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. If "Card Authentication + Password" was selected: Is the password typed in correctly? Check the password, and type it in correctly. Scanning does not begin. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Trouble Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-47 Troubleshooting 5 5.4 Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass. The original was left on the original glass. Remove the original from the original glass. Paper of matching size is not available. Select the paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size. Load paper into the bypass tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. The original size cannot be detected. Select the paper size. 1: The original is not positioned correctly. 2: An original with a non-standard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. 1: Position the original correctly. 2: Select the correct paper size. The image will not fit on selected paper. Change the direction of the original. The image does not fit in the paper. Load the original turned 90 degrees. Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove all paper from the tray indicated by %. Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher output tray has been exceeded, the machine is unable to make copies. Remove all paper from the indicated tray. Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-38.) Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. Account track settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-42.) Your account has reached its maximum allowance. The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached. Contact the administrator of the machine. The part indicated by % is open. Ensure that it is properly closed. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly. Install toner cartridge, and close all doors. The toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall the supplies or parts, or contact your service representative. Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Load paper into the indicated tray. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51, and p. 2-55.) No more staples. Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel stapling. The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the paper misfeed. (See p. 5-5.) Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated original pages into the ADF. An internal error occurred. Open and then close the front door. If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Clear the error by following the onscreen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code displayed on the screen. Malfunction detected. Please call your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your service representative of the code displayed on the touch panel. Now Downloading Program Data from Firmware server. 1: CS Remote Care was activated by the service representative. 2: Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while this message is displayed. After turning off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off the main power switch, and then contact the service representative. 5 Troubleshooting 5-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized access. Please contact your administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again. Message Cause Remedy 6 Specifications bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3 Specifications 6 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications 6.1.1 Main unit Item Description Name bizhub 751/601 Type Console Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Laser electrostatic copy method Developing system Dry-type dual-component reverse magnetic brush developing Fusing system Heat roller fixing Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi e 600 dpi, Printing: 2400 dpi e 600 dpi Document Types: sheets, books (spread), three-dimensional objects Size: Max. A3, 11 e 17 Thickness: Max. 30 mm, Weight: 6.8 kg Detectable sizes for original glass: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Detectable sizes for ADF: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 Paper types Normal paper: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, thin paper*1: 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2, thick paper: 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2, overhead projector transparencies*1, labels*1, tab paper*1, trace paper*1, special paper*1, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Paper sizes Tray 1 and tray 2: A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Tray 3 and tray 4: Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8/1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W w/v,11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Image blank Single-sided copying: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Double-sided copying: Front side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 4 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Back side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Paper tray capacity Tray 1: 1650 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 2: 1100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 3 and tray 4: 550 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Bypass tray: 100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Warm-up time bizhub 751: within 300 seconds, bizhub 601: within 270 seconds First copy bizhub 751: within 2.9 seconds, bizhub 601: within 3.3 seconds Copy speed bizhub 751: 75 sheets/min. (A4 v), 35 sheets/min. (A3 w) bizhub 601: 60 sheets/min. (A4 v), 30 sheets/min. (A3 w) 6 Specifications 6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Can only be fed through the bypass tray. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *3 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray. In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice. 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Magnification ratios Full size: e 1.000 ± 1.0% or less Enlargement (Fixed Zoom): e 1.154, e 1.224, e 1.414, e 2.000 Reduction (Fixed Zoom): e 0.500, e 0.707, e 0.816, e 0.866 Minimal Copy: 0.930 Zoom with Constant × and Y Ratio: e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) Independent Zoom: vertical e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments), horizontal e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) User-set zoom ratio: 3 Multiple copies/sets 1 to 9999 copies/1 to 9999 sets Density adjustment Copy Density: Automatic and manual (9 levels) Background adjustment: Manual (9 levels) Power requirements AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50 - 60Hz Noise 75 dB or less (bizhub 751/601) Power consumption Max. 2,000 W (including options) Dimensions 886 (W) e 859 (D) e 1140 (H) mm (main unit, ADF and control panel) Space requirements *3 1275 (W) e 791 (D) mm (main unit and ADF) Memory 1 GB Weight Approx. 224 kg (Main unit and ADF) Item Description Item Description Name DF-614 Document feed methods Standard original: Single-sided, double-sided Mixed original: Single-sided, double-sided Original paper types 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original sizes 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Detectable sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap* Capacity of document feeder Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 53 W or less Dimensions 625 (W) e 576 (D) e 154 (H) mm Weight Approx. 12.9 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5 Specifications 6 6.2 Option specifications 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name LU-405 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 82 W or less Dimensions 430 (W) e 639 (D) e 690 (H) mm Weight Approx. 30 kg Configuration 1 paper tray Item Description Name LU-406 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 100 W or less Dimensions 670 (W) e 639 (D) e 695 (H) mm Weight Approx. 42 kg Configuration 1 paper tray 6 Specifications 6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-524 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 1), sub finishing tray (Tray 2) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,13 e 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800 when trays are pulled out) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7 Specifications 6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-525 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/ v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/ v, 13 × 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/ v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge 6 Specifications 6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 Item Description Name FS-610 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple, half-fold, center staple & fold, tri-fold Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1), Booklet tray Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), tab paper Booklet tray: Half-fold, tri-fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Center staple & fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main output tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 2500 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub output tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Booklet tray: Half-fold (3 sheets): 25 to 33 sets Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Maximum number of sheets bound with center staple & fold: 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9 Specifications 6 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Weight Approx. 65 kg Consumables Staple cartridge Item Description Item Description Name PK-505/PK-504 Function Hole-punches for filing. Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) Paper sizes 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 148 (W) e 509 (D) e 122 (H) mm Weight Approx. 3 kg Item Description Name ZU-604/ZU-605 Function Hole-punches for filing. Z-fold Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper type for outputting hole-punched paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting hole-punched paper 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w to A4 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Fold type Z-fold Paper type for outputting zfolded paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting zfolded paper A3 w, B4 w Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 169 (W) e 660 (D) e 930 (H) mm Weight Approx. 38 kg 6 Specifications 6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 × 13 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8 × 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name PI-504 Configuration 2 (upper and lower) paper trays Cover sheet type Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Cover sheet size Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2v, 16Kw/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v, A3W w to A5W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper capacity 200 sheets for each of the upper and lower trays Power requirements Supplied from finisher Maximum power consumption 30 W or less Dimensions 511 (W) e 620 (D) e 220 (H) mm Weight Approx. 10.5 kg Item Description Name SF-602 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset stack (sort and offset, group and offset) Amount of shift 30 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 216 g/m2), thin paper (52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies*1, trace paper*1, tab paper*1 Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm × 139 mm to 305 mm × 458 mm*1, 139 mm × 139 mm to 314 mm × 458 mm Output tray capacity A4 to B5: 1250 sheets B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 400 (490) (W) × 600 (D) × 480 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 14 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11 Specifications 6 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 Item Description Name OT-505 Function Paper output tray for main unit Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Output tray capacity Max. 150 sheets Dimensions 215 (335) (W) × 365 (D) × 70 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 0.56 kg Item Description Name AU-101 Compatible finger width 10 mm to less than 25 mm Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 78 mm (W) × 95 mm (D) × 55 mm (H) Weight Approx. 150 g (not including the USB cable) Power consumption DC 5 V, 500 mA Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 10 to 35 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -10 to 60 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 6 Specifications 6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 6.2.13 Other options Image Controller IC-208 Mount Kit MK-716 Fax Kit FK-502 Hard Disk HD-510 Staple Kit SK-602 Staple MS-10A Staple MS-5C Key Counter Kit Key Counter Socket Security Kit SC-506 Working Table WT-504 Local Interface Kit EK-703 i-Option LK-101 i-Option LK-102 Upgrade Kit UK-202 Item Description Name AU-201 Dimensions Approx. 92 mm (W) × 64 mm (D) × 16 mm (H) Weight Approx. 120 g Power consumption Through USB port Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 0 to 40 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -20 to 50 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Radio waves classification Induced reading/writing communication equipment Compatible card Processor Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and FeliCa Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 7 Copy paper/originals bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3 Copy paper/originals 7 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper Available paper size/type is restricted in each equipment. 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. - Main unit trays: Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4 - Bypass tray - Large capacity unit LU-405/406 Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies. - ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (built in to the main unit) - Finisher FS-524 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-525 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-610 (built-in stable unit and folding unit) - Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 (built-in punch kit) - Post Inserter PI-504 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Shift Tray SF-602 (for the machine without finisher) - Output Tray OT-505 (for the machine without finisher) 7.1.2 Paper weight Paper trays Paper Weight Main unit trays (Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Select "thick paper" when loading 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 paper. Select "thin paper" when loading 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 paper. Large capacity unit LU-405 Large capacity unit LU-406 Bypass tray Post Inserter PI-504 Equipment Paper Weight Automatic Duplex Unit 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Finisher FS-524 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-525 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-610 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Half-fold, Tri-fold: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Center staple & fold: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 Z-fold: 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Shift Tray SF-602 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 Output Tray OT-505 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 7 Copy paper/originals 7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity 7.1.4 Paper size Paper trays Capacity Main unit paper tray (Tray 1) 1650 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 2) 1100 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) 550 sheets (64 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-405 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-406 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Bypass tray Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Special paper: 1 sheet Post Inserter PI-504 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Equipment Capacity Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 2500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Booklet tray: Half-fold (tri-fold): 25 to 33 sets (80 g/m2) Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets (80 g/m2) Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets (80 g/m2) Shift Tray SF-602 A4 to B5: 1250 sheets (80 g/m2) B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Output Tray OT-505 150 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper Trays Available Size Main unit paper tray (Tray 1/2) A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Large capacity unit LU-405 Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5 Copy paper/originals 7 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Large capacity unit LU-406 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray Standard sizes: A3 v to B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Post Inserter PI-504 Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 216 mm e 297 mm Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size Automatic Duplex Unit Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 105 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper Trays Available Size 7 Copy paper/originals 7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 7.1.5 Special paper When loading the paper except normal (overhead projection transparent film, thick paper, colored paper etc.), select the appropriate name from 10. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the Auto Paper Select setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Available paper types depend on the paper tray. For details on the paper setting for bypass tray, see "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. For details on paper type setting for "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Shift Tray SF-602 Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm e 139 mm to 305 mm e 458 mm*1, 139 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output Tray OT-505 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4v, B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, B5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size No. Paper type/Icon Description 1 OHP Select this setting when overhead projection transparent films are loaded. 2 Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-7 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Thick Paper Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight to 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2. 4 Thin Paper Select this setting when the Thin paper that is loaded has a weight of 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2. 5 Letterhead Select this setting when plain paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and is already printed with a company name or preset text. 6 Colored Paper Select this setting when plain colored paper weighing from 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 is loaded. 7 Tab Paper 1 Select this setting when tab paper is loaded. 8 Trace Paper Select this setting when trace paper is loaded. 9 User Paper 1 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 10 User Paper 2 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 11 User Paper 3 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Recycled Select this setting when using recycled paper. 13 Fine Select this setting when high-quality paper is loaded. 14 Labels Select this setting when label sheets are loaded. No. Paper type/Icon Description 7 Copy paper/originals 7-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.6 Precautions for paper Do not use the following types of paper. Otherwise, decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage may result. - OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still blank) - Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached 7.1.7 Paper storage Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity. Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds. Keep paper out of the reach of children. 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the optional large capacity unit LU-203 is installed, a maximum of 5,650 copies can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "ATS Permission parameter" in the Utility mode is set to "Permit".) Operating Conditions (Set the following condition at "1 System Setting>3 Paper Tray Setting" of User Setting.) - Select the paper trays to be selected automatically by "Auto Tray Select Setting", if Auto paper select is functioned. Tray Priority is available. - Select "Allow" at "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF" - Select the same paper type at "Paper Type". Load the following paper into the paper trays. - The same size in the same orientation. - The same paper type. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-9 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in bypass tray. ! Detail For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting) The size of the paper loaded into bypass tray can be detected automatically. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Auto Detect]. As the factory default, "Auto Detect" is selected. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for 8-1/2 e 11 w loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-11 Copy paper/originals 7 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Standard Size]. The Standard Size screen appears. 5 Touch [8-1/2 e 11 w]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the bypass tray is set. 2 Reminder If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected. 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If paper other than standard-size paper is loaded into the bypass tray, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-13 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to reenter the setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-15 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Specify the × and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. – To change the name of a memory key, touch [Change Custom Size Name], and then touch the key to be renamed. Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-17 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the bypass tray, specify a setting for wide paper. ! Detail By specifying paper one size larger than the document as wide paper, the document can be copied at the center so that there is no loss of the document image. When specifying wide paper for the bypass tray, non-standard-sized paper can be specified. When using non-standard-sized paper, enter the paper size. For details on the setting for tray 3 and tray 4, refer to "To select a setting for oversized paper" on page 7-27 For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Wide Paper]. The Wide Paper screen appears. 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. 6 To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. 7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for "X" and "Y", "Input error" appears, even if the values are within the allowable range. In addition, do not enter the same size for "X" and "Y". – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-19 Copy paper/originals 7 To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without being typed in. In addition, the size can be changed. 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or special paper, is loaded in bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected, the bypass is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. – The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. – Touch the button for the desired paper type. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-21 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size of paper loaded in the tray 3 and 4 and the type of paper loaded in each paper tray. 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Paper Tray Setting screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. – For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad. 3 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [3 Paper Tray Setting]. The Paper Tray Setting screen appears. 2 Note To change the paper size for paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 and the LCT, contact your service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-23 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) A standard paper size can be set for the tray 3 and 4. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Standard Size 1] under "Paper Size". 3 Touch [OK]. If standard-sized paper is loaded into a paper tray, the paper size is automatically detected. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings) If standard centimeter-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for standard specialsized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard special-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Special Size] under "Paper Size". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-25 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. 4 Touch [OK]. 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If custom-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for custom-sized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for custom-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on changing the paper size for the tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Custom Size] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 3 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (182.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the length. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-27 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for wide paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Wide Paper] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch [X] or [Y] in "Change size", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Select the desired image position. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-29 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type This section describes the procedure for specifying a type of paper loaded in each tray. 2 Note Selecting "Letterhead" will change the print side to the reverse side. If a special paper type is selected, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. The auto tray switch feature applies only to the trays specified with the same paper type setting. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter]. 2 Touch [2 User Settings], [1 System Settings], [3 Paper Tray Settings], and [5 Paper Type/Size Settings] in sequence. The Paper Type Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under "Paper Tray" in the left side area of the screen, then touch [Paper Type] on the right side. The Paper Type screen appears. 4 Touch the desired paper type key to highlight it. 5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting. – To cancel the change, touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-31 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4 Originals When making copies, load the original into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy originals that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF There are two methods for using the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned in the ADF, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. There are limits on the types of original that can be positioned with each method. - Normal method - For originals of mixed sizes - For Z-folded original Normal method Mixed Original Setting The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard- size paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting. Z-Folded Original Setting Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Auto original size detect Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width. Width of A3 w/A4 v: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v Width of B4 w/B5 v: B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v Width of A4 w/A5 v: A4 w, B5 w, A5 v Width of A5 w: A5 w, B6 w Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) 7 Copy paper/originals 7-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Tab Original Setting 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds, damage to the original or the machine trouble may occur. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn original - Highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper - Coated original such as carbon-backed paper - Original printed on paper thicker than 201 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thinner than 50 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g/m2 during double-sided copying - Original that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Original that are bound in a book or booklet - Original that are bound together with glue - Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Original with binder holes - Original that have just been printed with this machine Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-33 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the ADF, or when setting copying conditions incompatible with the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned on the original glass with ADF closed, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Observe the following precautions when placing the original on the original glass. - The size of original printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. - If a custom-sized original is positioned, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be used since the original size cannot be detected automatically. If a custom-sized original is positioned, select the size of the paper to be copied. - If highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper, are positioned, the original size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the original. - Do not place objects exceeding 6.8 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. - If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Item Description Original type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Original Size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto Original Size Detect A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v Maximum original weight 6.8 kg Maximum original thickness 30 mm 7 Copy paper/originals 7-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Application functions bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3 Application functions 8 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies. The interleaf can be kept blank, or copied from the same original as the transparency. 0 No Finishing setting can be used. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For details on loading OHP transparencies, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 2 Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray, and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. – Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 3 Select [Transparency] as the paper type for the bypass tray, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. 8 Application functions 8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 5 Touch [OHP Interleave]. The OHP Interleave screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5 Application functions 8 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [No]. 7 Select [Copy] or [Blank]. – Selecting [Copy] will copy the original image also onto interleaves. To leave the interleaves blank, touch [Blank]. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function) Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the original (excluding the cover pages), and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy. The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available. 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, outer front and back cover pages can be inserted from the post inserter. Cover page settings can be specified for paper loaded in the post inserter and in the paper trays. Paper loaded in the post inserter is added at the front when it is specified as the outer front cover or it is added at the back when it is specified as the outer back cover. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the original into separate paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. Setting Description Front Cover Front (Copy) The first page of the original is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the original is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. Back Cover Back (Copy) The last page of the original is copied onto the back cover page. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the original is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the original contains an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 Touch [Cover Sheet]. The Cover Sheet screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select the desired cover page settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Cover Sheet" function, touch [No]. – The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. – If the optional post inserter has been installed, [Outer Cover Sheet] appears. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in the main unit, continue with step 6. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 9. 6 If desired, touch [Paper] under "Front Cover" or "Back Cover". The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages, and then touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-9 Application functions 8 8 Touch [Outer Cover Sheet], and then specify the tray loaded with paper for the outer front cover or the outer back cover. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function) Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When page 2 is specified Copy If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. When page 3 is specified Blank Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and the 2nd sheet of the original is copied onto it. Double-sided copies The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the original are printed onto it. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORT Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy. Double-sided copies The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 3rd sheet of the copy. 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-11 Application functions 8 ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 60 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, paper can be inserted from the post inserter. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the original into the desired paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Insert Sheet]. – To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [No]. The Insert Sheet screen appears. 5 Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Insert Sheet screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. – [Post Inserter] appears if the optional post inserter has been installed. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a paper tray of the main unit, continue with step 6. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 10. 6 Under "Insert Type", touch either [Copy] or [Blank]. – If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. 7 Touch [Insert Paper]. The Insert Paper Settings screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-13 Application functions 8 8 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Touch [Post Inserter]. – Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Post Inserter screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. 11 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 12 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 13 Specify any other desired copy settings. 14 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 15 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) A multi-page original later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in an original first scanned with the ADF. The inserted original is added after the specified pages. ! Detail A separate original can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 1 Load the original into the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 3 4 B 2 1 A 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-15 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Insert Image]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [No]. The Insert Image screen appears. 4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted. – There are two Insert Image screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – The inserted original is added after the specified page. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the original scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the extra pages of the insertion original are printed at the end of the original. – If the original scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages are not printed. – If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. – If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the original copy. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Application functions 8-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 9 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 10 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 11 Touch [Finish]. – To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-17 Application functions 8 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function) When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the original was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper. ! Detail A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 3 7 7 38 6 2 6 4 4 25 3 3 3 7 7 38 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 3 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 12 2 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 8 Application functions 8-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Chapters]. The Chapter screen (for editing) appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-19 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters. – There are two Chapter screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – Under "Original > Copy", select "1-Sided > 2-Sided". – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, that page number is ignored. 5 Under "Chapter Paper", touch [Copy Insert] or [None]. – If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [No]. 8 Application functions 8-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK]. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-21 Application functions 8 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function) Loaded original pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 2 Note 100 original batches can be set. The "Group" Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs. Instead, select "Sort". 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When saving scanned data in a user box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 10,000 pages are saved in the box. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001REPORT Original 2 Original 1 Original 3 8 Application functions 8-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Program Jobs], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins. 5 Touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. – If "Retry" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-23 Application functions 8 6 Position the next original, and then touch [Change Setting]. 7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. – Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition, the number of original batches can be checked beside "Scanned Batches". – When the memory is full, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the original data. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 8 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. 8 Application functions 8-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If "No" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Touch [Print List], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned original. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-25 Application functions 8 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Touch [Start] or press the [Start] key. – If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 8 Application functions 8-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. ? To cancel the "Neg./Pos. Reverse" function % Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-27 Application functions 8 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding front and back covers. 0 Place the original on the original glass. Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job. 1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the front cover is scanned before the back cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. ? How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the original. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. Setting Description Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page. Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the original page order. The original is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the original page order. Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 4 Touch [Book Copy]. The Book Copy screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-29 Application functions 8 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If "Separation", "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, [Binding Position] appears. Select the binding position of the original. – If desired, specify a Book Erase function. Touch the button for the erasing method, touch [-] and [+] to specify the width of the area to be erased, and then touch "OK". – Touch [<-->] on the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen to switch between the integer and the fraction, specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Application functions 8-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [No]. ? What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. ? How are settings specified for the "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions. % Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. In addition, if the "Frame Erase" or "Center Erase" function in the Application screen is previously specified, [Frame Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase" appears highlighted. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. Frame Erase screen Center Erase screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-31 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. – Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the original are scanned. Scanning begins. If "Book Spread" or "Separation" is selected, printing begins. If "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, continue with step 11. 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 12 Press the [Start] key. SURVEYOR’S REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-33 Application functions 8 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original, the specified paper size and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. 2/4/8 Repeat A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper. The number of repeating copies can be set to 2, 4 or 8 times. However, any part of the image that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off. Original With Margin Without Margin 8 Application functions 8-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Image Repeat]. The Image Repeat screen appears. 5 Under "Layout", touch [With Margin] or [Without Margin], or touch [2/4/8 Repeat]. – To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [No]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-35 Application functions 8 – Touching [2/4/8 Repeat] displays the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, where the number of repeats and the interval can be selected. – When selecting [2 Repeat], touch [2 Repeat Detail Settings] to specify Image Direction and Repeat Interval Settings. 8 Application functions 8-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. – If the original size does not appear under "Scan Range" or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can sizes in metrics be displayed? % Touch or to display a different list of sizes. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<-->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the document. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Set Range screen Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-37 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. – If settings were specified in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, touch [Zoom] in the Basic screen, and then specify the zoom ratio setting. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function) A page spread image scanned from the ADF can be divided into two separate images of right and left pages. A page spread image can be divided with the left and right halves copied onto separate pages. With singlesided copying, the two halves are printed on two separate pages. With double-sided copying, the two halves are printed on the front and back sides of a single page. 1 Load the original in the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 80 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load paper of size A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v into the desired paper tray. – Available paper sizes are A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v. Auto Paper Select will not function. 3 Touch [Paper]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-39 Application functions 8 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the tray loaded with A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v paper. 5 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the Reset key, All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 6 Touch [Page Separation]. The Page Separation screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the binding position of the spread original. – For the spread original to read from the left page to the right page, touch [Left Bind] to highlight it. On the contrary, if the spread original reads from the right page to the left page, touch [Right Bind]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 In the Basic screen, touch Paper, and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Auto Zoom will not function. The magnification can be changed as desired. – To cancel the setting and select the default press the [Reset] key. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-41 Application functions 8 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function) Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can be adjusted by specifying the position of the binding margin. In addition, the image orientation can be adjusted without creating a binding margin. ! Detail If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Page Margin screen appears. 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF "Right" setting "Left" setting "Top" setting 8 Application functions 8-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the position of the binding margin. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [No]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If "Auto" is selected for the binding position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the correct position will not be selected. ? What happens when "Auto" is selected? % The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [-] or [+] to specify the binding margin width. – If "None" is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a binding margin. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? How can the entered margin position be corrected? % Without changing the margin width, change the margin position. 5 If necessary, touch [Image Shift]. The Image Shift screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-43 Application functions 8 6 Adjust the position of the image, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Left], [Right], [Top] or [Bottom] to select the direction to be adjusted, and then use the keypad or touch [-] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount. – To cancel the shift, touch [No Shift]. – To adjust the position of the image on the back side of the paper when printing double-sided copies, touch [Change Back Shift]. 7 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) Use this function to make a copy adjusting the position of printed image. The Centering function centers the original image on copy paper. ! Detail Normally, images are trimmed by 3 mm at the top, 4 mm at the bottom, and 2 mm on each side (left/right) from the paper size. If [Full Scan] is selected, images are not trimmed but copied to the edge of the sheet. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjust]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Image Adjust screen appears. Setting Description Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged. Full Scan The full image is scanned without triming to create margins. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be copied without being cut off. Centering Full Scan bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-45 Application functions 8 3 Select the image adjusting method. – To cancel the "Setting", touch [No]. 4 Check the original size, and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and use the keypad to specify the desired value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) 8 Application functions 8-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appeared or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-47 Application functions 8 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. Stapling is possible only when optional saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed. ! Detail Generally, a multiple of 4 original pages is required with a single-sided original, and a multiple of 2 original pages is required with a double-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. The width of the binding margin is automatically specified. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2REPORT 7 “Left Bind” setting “Right Bind” setting 8 Application functions 8-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. – If the original contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [No]. – To adjust the image position widthwise and lengthwise as desired, touch [Image Shift], specify the shift amount, then touch [OK]. – For details of shift amount setting, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-49 Application functions 8 – To make the specified amount of blank space in the center between the two images on a page, touch [Page Spacing]. Select [Front/Back] to make the same amount of blank space, or [Front Side]/[Back Side] to specify the different amount for each, then use [-], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desired amount. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase) When the original is scanned from the original glass, black copy marks may be produced along borders and center line, and also around punch holes. Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner consumption at the same time. The following three settings are provided for the Erase function. These are compatible with each other. Setting Description Frame Erase This function erases black marks along the borders of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along borders. Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51 Center Erase This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. Refer to "Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function)" on page 8-53 Non-Image Area Erase This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside area of the original. Refer to "Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)" on page 8-55 Frame Erase Center Erase Non-Image Area Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-51 Application functions 8 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function) Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the original, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Frame Erase]. The Frame Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the desired position to be erased. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Frame Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when [Frame] is selected? % The same width is erased on all four sides of the original. The factory default setting is "Frame". ? Can the settings be combined? % "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom"). 5 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for "Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom". – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-53 Application functions 8 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Erase]. The Center Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Center Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The massage "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-55 Application functions 8 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function) This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside areas of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Non-Image Area Erase], then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Non-Image Area Erase" function, touch the key again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions) The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp/Composition functions are available and can be combined. ! Detail The [Registered Overlay] key appears only when the machine is equipped with in HDD. To use Header/Footer function, a header/footer should be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. ! Detail For details on printing a date/time stamp, refer to page 8-57. For details on printing a page number stamp, refer to page 8-60. For details on printing a stamp, refer to page 8-63. For details on printing a copy protection stamp, refer to page 8-66. For details on printing a repeating stamp, refer to page 8-73. For details on printing an overlay, refer to page 8-78. For details on printing a registered overlay, refer to page 8-81. Function Description Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Page Number Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Stamp • Preset Stamp Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages. • Registered Stamp Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility overlapping pages. Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Stamp Repeat Print copies with text (such as registered stamps, preset stamps or the date) repeating throughout the page. Overlay Copies can be printed with the contents of the first original page overlapped by (as an overlay image) the remaining original pages. Registered Overlay A previously scanned image can be stored on the HDD (Register Overlay Image) and recalled when needed to printed overlapping a document (Recall Overlay Image). Header/Footer The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. This function is available only when specified by the administrator. Distribution Control Number Print four-digit distribution number to fill the background of each copied set. Watermark Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center of printed page background. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 0001REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-57 Application functions 8 For details on printing a header/footer, refer to page 8-87. For details on printing a distribution control number, refer to page 8-89. For details on printing a watermark, refer to page 8-91. 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. The Date/Time screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch buttons under "Date Format", "Time Format" and "Pages" to specify the various settings. – To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [No]. – To print the date/time only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. ? Can the time be omitted? % If "None" is selected, the time is not printed. 5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-59 Application functions 8 – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Page Number]. The Page Number screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-61 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number for printing. – If desired, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. The entered chapter number is printed if "1-1, 1-2...." is selected under "Page Number Type". – The setting for "Page Number" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100. – When specifying a setting for "Starting Page Number", switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the key. – If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. – To print multiple chapters, specify the first page of each chapter using the "Chapters" function. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. – To cancel the "Page Number" function, touch [No]. 5 Select a setting under "Page Number Type". 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. 8 Application functions 8-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustment be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 7 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To also specify settings for the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" Application functions, touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed. – Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. – If "Print on Back Cover Only" or "Do Not Print Page Number" is selected under "Cover Sheet", page numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided copies. – If "Do Not Print #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. If "Skip the Page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-63 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size. The factory default is 10 pt. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Stamp]. – To cancel the "Stamp" function, touch [No]. The Stamp screen appears. 4 Select the desired stamp under "Stamp Type/Preset Stamps" or "Stamp Type/Registered Stamps". – Touch or to display a different list of preset or registered stamps. – Only one stamp can be selected. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the stamp only on the front cover, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-65 Application functions 8 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 8 Application functions 8-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the desired settings for "Text Size". – As the factory default, the following setting is selected. Text Size: Std. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function) ! Detail If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent unauthorized copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The pages cannot be specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-67 Application functions 8 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Copy Protect]. 8 Application functions 8-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of copy protection text. – To cancel the Copy Protect function, touch [No]. – Touching [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] displays a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-69 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Copy Protect > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Format" and "Time Format", and then touch [OK]. – The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each copy protection settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Copy Protect Pattern: Emboss Text; Text Size: Std.; Background Pattern: Pattern 1 – The setting under "Pattern Contrast" in the Copy Protect Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between –2 and +2. Density screen Copy Protect Pattern screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-71 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified copy protection text type, and then touch [Insert]. Text Size screen Background Pattern screen 8 Application functions 8-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. Insert Space scrren Delete scrren bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-73 Application functions 8 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, press the [Reset] key. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Stamp Repeat]. The Stamp Repeat screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of repeating stamp. – To cancel the "Stamp Repeat" function, touch [No]. – Touch [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] to display a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected repeating stamp formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-75 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Stamp Repeat > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK]. – The repeating stamp date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each repeating stamp settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Text Size: Std. Density screen Text Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-77 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the repeating stamp text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the repeating stamp, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified repeating stamp type, and then touch [Insert]. Change Position screen Insert Space screen 8 Application functions 8-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the repeating stamp text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the repeating stamp text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) Copies can be printed with the contents of the first scanned original page overlapped by the remaining original pages. In addition, a scanned original can be stored as a registered overlay and recalled and used later. Delete screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-79 Application functions 8 1 Position the original for the overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Overlay]. – To cancel the "Overlay" function, touch [No]. The Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired settings for "Pages". – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. ! Detail If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-81 Application functions 8 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original to be stored as overlaying image. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Register Overlay Image]. – To cancel the Registered Overlay function, touch [No]. The Register Overlay Image screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. – To overwrite the registered overlay with the new image, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Overwrite]. – To delete a registered overlay, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-83 Application functions 8 – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. The Image Name Registration screen appears. 6 Type in the image name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the buttons in the keyboard that appears in the screen to type. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Application functions 8-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the original size of [Original Size], and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-85 Application functions 8 11 The original is scanned, then saved as a registered overlay. 2 Note With the "Restrict User Access" parameter in Administrator mode, changes to a registered overlay without administrator permission can be prevented. 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original for overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the "Registered Overlay" to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Registered Overlay" function, touch [OK]. – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-87 Application functions 8 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) 0 In order to use headers/footers, a header/footer must be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. 3 Touch [Header/Footer]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. – If no header/footer is registered in Administrator mode, [Header/Footer] does not appear. The Header/Footer screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Under "Recall Header/Footer", touch the button of the header/footer to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To check or temporarily change the header/footer settings, touch [Check/Change Temporarily]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-89 Application functions 8 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Distribution Control Number]. The Distribution Control Number screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting distribution control number for printing. – To cancel the Distribution Control Number function, touch [No]. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the distribution control number only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The distribution control number will not be printed on blank pages inserted using "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet", and "Chapters" functions. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Standard, Text Size: Standard – To specify the density, touch [Density], and then select the desired density. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-91 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the desired size. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Watermark]. The Watermark screen appears. 4 Select the desired watermark. – To cancel the Watermark function, touch [No]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-93 Application functions 8 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function) A scanned original can be saved in a user box. Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when necessary. ! Detail For details on the user box settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Save in User Box]. 3 Touch [User Box]. A screen for selecting a user box appears. 8 Application functions 8-94 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. – Touch the tab containing the desired user box, and then button for the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. – It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box. – Touching [Search User Box] displays the Search User Box screen. User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name. Touch [etc] or the button that includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected letter. A user box can be selected from this screen. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-95 Application functions 8 6 Check the name of the document to be saved. To change the name that is automatically specified, touch [Document Name]. 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] beside "Save & Print". 8 Application functions 8-96 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Save in User Box" function, touch [No]. The Application screen appears again. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Press the [Start] key. If [Yes] beside "Page Print" was selected, the scanned original is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. If [No] beside "Page Print" was selected, the data for the scanned original is saved in the specified user box. ! Detail For details on using documents saved in user boxes, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. ! Detail When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. 2 Note After the message appears, the machine stops operating. Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 9-5. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears. 7 WARNING Precaution for the empty toner cartridge If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. % DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner cartridge into a fire! 7 CAUTION Precaution for storing and handling the toner cartridge If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may be affected. % Keep the toner cartridge away from children. % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge 0 Use the same number toner cartridge as described on the label applied on the upper left side of the toner cartridge cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur. 1 Open the toner cartridge door. 2 Pull out the cartridge holder. – While pulling the toner unit lever toward you, pull the cartridge holder out toward you as far as possible. 3 Withdraw and pull up the used toner cartridge to remove it. 4 Remove the new toner cartridge form the box. – The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. Be sure to handle steps 5 until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge. 5 Shake the new toner cartridge by turning it over about five times. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove the cover from the new toner cartridge. 7 Set the toner cartridge, making sure that it is correctly oriented. – With the label at the end of the toner cartridge facing up, insert the bottom of the cartridge into the slot in the cartridge holder. 8 Return the cartridge holder to its original position 9 Close the toner cartridge door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge When the staple cartridge is empty, the message "Replace staple cartridge." appears. Replace the staple cartridge. Display in Enlarge Display mode When staples are about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder down to remove it. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 8 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder to pull it up, and then pull it downward and out to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Push the portion of the staple cartridge holder indicated by "PUSH" to open the cover of the staple cartridge holder. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 6 Load a new staple cartridge. 7 Remove the tape from the staple cartridge, and then close the cover of the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-13 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 10 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-15 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder up to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Slowly peel off the stopper tape. 7 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-17 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 9 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes If the hole-punch scrap box of the punch kit installed with the finisher becomes full, the message shown below appears (if the box can be emptied by the user). 2 Note The setting for emptying the hole-punch scrap box should be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-19 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 ! Detail When performed by user If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch scrap box. To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. When performed by service representative If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. However, the continued job is printed without holes being punched. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-21 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Care of the machine bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3 Care of the machine 10 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part. Be sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it. 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the ADF, and clean the left partition glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the left partition glass. 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the surface of the original glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass. 10 Care of the machine 10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad Keep the pad clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the document pad by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad. 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller Keep the roller clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper take-up roller. 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit Clean the surface of the main unit by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the main unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5 Care of the machine 10 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. Never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzin or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel. 10 Care of the machine 10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Care of the housing Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the housing with a soft, dry cloth. If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the housing is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Clean the scanner with a soft cloth used to wipe eyeglass lenses. If it is extremely dirty, clean it with an eyeglass lens cleaner. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7 Care of the machine 10 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the authentication unit with a soft, dry cloth. If the authentication unit cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the authentication unit is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. 10 Care of the machine 10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) 10.2.1 Viewing counters The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed. In addition, the list of counters can be printed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Meter Count], and then touch [Check Details] in the left panel. 3 The Meter Count screen appears. ? Can the list of counters be printed? % Touch [Print List], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9 Care of the machine 10 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears A periodic maintenance will be required after 250,000 copies for bizhub 751/601. If the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears, contact your service representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection. 10 Care of the machine 10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Managing jobs bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3 Managing jobs 11 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen 11.1.1 Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs. - Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screens. - Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list. - Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed). 2 Note The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number does not change until the job is deleted. By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed first. 11.1.2 Multi-job feature While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 250 jobs can be queued. The number of jobs possible for each operation is listed below. * The values listed above are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings. When one job is finished being printed, the next queued job automatically begins. 2 Note Up to 250 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received fax/save jobs, can be queued. Operation Number of jobs Copy 5 Interrupted copy 1 Scan 5 Print 10 Fax (Off Hook TX) 1 Fax (Memory TX) 50 Fax (Timer TX) 20 Fax RX 100 Fax (Polling RX) 1 Fax (Polling TX) 1 Sharing 56 Total 250 11 Managing jobs 11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.1.3 Job List screens From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. ! Detail To display the Job List screen, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. From the Job List screen, the following tabs for the various functions can be displayed. - Print Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. - Send Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs. - Receive Lists fax transmission jobs. - Save Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes. 2 Note As the factory default, the Current Jobs list on the Print tab is displayed in the Job List screen. The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if a different tab is selected while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled. A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function. - Current Jobs: Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the machine. - Job History: Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing you to check the history and result of all jobs. The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example, the lists of stored jobs and active jobs can be displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs can be displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab. The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-5 Managing jobs 11 *1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed. Button name Description [Print] button Touch to display the Print tab of the Job List screen. [Send] button Touch to display the Send tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Receive] button Touch to display the Receive tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Store] button Touch to display the Store tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. [Current Jobs] button A selected button indicates which job list is currently displayed. Touch to switch from the Job History list to the Current Jobs list. This lists the jobs that are currently being performed and the jobs that are queued (waiting) to be performed. [Job History] button Touch to switch from the Current Jobs list to the Job History list. This list the jobs that have been performed. [Delete] button*1 A job can be deleted from the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. [Increase Priority] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) The next job to be printed after the current job is finished can be changed. For details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Release Held Job] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Touch to display the list of stored jobs. The settings of a stored job can be changed, or the job can be printed or deleted. [Check Job Set.] button*1 The settings for a job in the Current Jobs list can be checked. For details, refer to "Checking job settings" on page 11-10. [Deleted Jobs] button [Finished Jobs] button [All Jobs] button (displayed on the Job History list of the Print tab) Touch to select the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen. Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button. [Detail] button Touch to display screens for checking the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Current Jobs and Job History lists. For details, refer to "Checking job details" on page 11-10. and buttons When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or lower in the printing order). [Close] button Touch to quit Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched. 11 Managing jobs 11-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following information is listed in the Print tab. Item Name Description No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs. Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer. If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users. The name of confidential documents is not displayed. Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued. Org. Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies Displays the number of Copies to be printed. With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of Copies printed is displayed. Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-7 Managing jobs 11 11.1.4 Left panel Job List The job list or the job status can be displayed in the left panel of the main screen. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel. A list of jobs appears in the left panel. – If the "Job Display Setting" parameter (available from the User Setting screen) is set to "Status Display", the job status is displayed in the left panel. – To display the Job List screen, touch [Job Details]. – To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. – When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch and to display other jobs. ! Detail As the factory default, the display for the sub display area is that when "Job Display Setting" is set to "List Display". For details on specifying the default display for the left panel and the display method for the left panel Job List, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 11 Managing jobs 11-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2 Performing operations on jobs 11.2.1 Deleting a job A queued job or job being printed (job on the Current Jobs list) can be deleted. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted. – Jobs on the Job History list cannot be deleted. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. – If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-9 Managing jobs 11 4 Check the information that is displayed, touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated, and then touch [OK]. – To quit deleting the job, touch [No], and then touch [OK]. The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. A job being performed can also be deleted by selecting the job in the sub display area, then touching [Delete]. 11 Managing jobs 11-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.2 Checking job settings Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked. 3 Select the job to be checked, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – The contents and number of Job Settings screens differ depending on the job that was selected. – The upper number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. The lower number indicates the total number of screens. – To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 After checking the settings, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job Set.] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. 11.2.3 Checking job details The following information can be checked from the Job List screen. - Print tab Status (Receiving, Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Job End*2), Prints (Original, # of Sets), External Server Information - Send tab Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User)*2, User Name, Document Name, Address Type (E-Mail, FTP, File (SMB), TWAIN, Fax, WebDAV, Others), Dest (Detail*3), hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), External Server Information - Receive tab Status (Receiving, Dialing (only with polling reception), Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), box number, box name, External Server Information - Save tab Status (Receiving, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due to Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, User Box (box number/box name), hours (Job Start), Prints (Original) *1 Displayed only for jobs on the Current Jobs list *2 Displayed only for jobs on the Job History list bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-11 Managing jobs 11 *3 Displayed only for jobs on the Currently Jobs list transmitted to multiple destinations 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The Detail screen appears. 4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Job Details] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. ! Detail To delete the job, touch [Delete] in the Detail screen. If [Detail] appears in the Detail screen for a job selected from the Send tab, detailed information is available on the multiple destinations that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view the information, touch [Detail]. 11 Managing jobs 11-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) The Current Jobs list of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired list. – To display the stored jobs, touch [Release Held Job] to display the Release Held Job screen. To return to the Job List screen, touch [Cancel]. ! Detail For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job List screens" on page 11-4. From the Release Held Job screen, proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Current Jobs list. For more details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-13 Managing jobs 11 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch [Job History]. The Job History list of the Print tab appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired list. – Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. – Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed. – All Jobs: Displays all jobs. 11 Managing jobs 11-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked. The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset operation was performed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 From the job list, select the job whose proof copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Copy] key. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – After the single proof copy is printed, check the print result. ? How is printing of a proof copy stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. ! Detail To change the settings, touch [Check Job Set.] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-15 Managing jobs 11 11.2.7 Printing a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – To continue without changing the specified copy settings, continue with step 5. 3 Touch [Change Setting]. The Change Setting screen appears. 11 Managing jobs 11-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. ? Can a proof copy be printed? % For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. 5 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK] or press the [Start] key. The stored job appears in the Current Jobs list and is printed. ? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-17 Managing jobs 11 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected. If an Administrator mode parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished. 1 Display the Job History list of the Print tab. – For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 2 Touch [Increase Priority]. The Increase Priority screen appears. 3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK]. – If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins. ? How can the change in the printing priority be stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. 11 Managing jobs 11-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Utility mode bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-3 Utility mode 12 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed. 2 Note The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings. List of Utility mode parameters First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details [1] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination [1] Address Book (Public) Refer to "Create One- Touch Destination" on [2] Address Book (Person- page 12-8. al) [3] Group [4] E-mail Settings [2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal User Box* Refer to "Create User Box" on page 12-8. [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [3] Limiting Access to Destinations [1] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Refer to "Limiting Access to Destinations" on page 12-8 [2] User Settings [1] System Settings [1] Language Selection Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. [2] Measurement Unit Settings [3] Paper Tray Settings [4] Power Save Settings [5] Output Settings [6] Blank Page Print Settings [7] Density for Original Type [8] Page Number Print Position [2] Custom Display Settings [1] Copier Settings Refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. [2] Scan/Fax Settings [3] Copy Screen [4] Fax Active Screen [5] Color Selection Settings [6] Left Panel Display Default [7] Search Option Settings 12 Utility mode 12-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [2] User Settings [3] Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple (Machine with SD-507 only) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Auto Sort/Group Selection Default Copy Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings When AMS Direction is Incorrect Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [4] Scan/Fax Settings Black Compression Level Refer to "Scan/Fax Settings" on page 12-23. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings [5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-37. [2] Paper Setting [3] PCL Settings [4] PS Setting [5] XPS Settings [6] TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting [7] Print Reports [8] Image Shift Settings [9] Stamp Settings [6] Change Password Changes the password for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change Password" on page 12-23. [7] Change E-Mail Address E-Mail Address Changes the e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change E-Mail Address" on page 12-23 [8] Toner Supply Refer to "Toner Supply" on page 12-24. [8] Change Icon Changes the icon for the user who is currently logged on. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-5 Utility mode 12 [3] Administrator Settings [1] System Settings [1] Power Save Settings Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. [2] Output Settings [3] Date&Time Settings [4] Daylight Saving Time [5] Weekly Timer Settings [6] Restrict User Access [7] Expert Adjustment [8] List/Counter [9] Reset Settings [0] User Box Settings (next screen) [1] Size Settings For details of [1] Size Settings, contact your service [2] Stamp Settings representative. [3] Blank Page Print Settings [4] Page Number Print Position [5] Skip Job Setting [6] Application Key Settings [8] Advanced Preview Setting [2] Administrator/Machine Settings [1] Administrator Registration Refer to "Administrator/ Machine Settings" on page 12-32. [2] Input Machine Address [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination Refer to "One-Touch/User Box Registration" on page 12-32. [2] Create User Box [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration List [4] Maximum Number of User Boxes [4] User Authentication/ Account Track [1] General Settings Refer to "User Authentication/ Account Track" on [2] User Authentication page 12-33. Settings [3] Account Track Settings [4] Print without Authentication [5] Print Counter List [6] External Server Settings [7] Limiting Access to Destinations [8] Authentication Device Setting [9] Auth/Acct Track Common Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [3] Administrator Settings [5] Network Settings [1] Network Setting Refer to "Network Settings" on page 12-36. [2] TCP/IP Settings [3] NetWare Settings [4] HTTP Server Settings [5] FTP Settings [6] SMB Settings [7] LDAP Settings [8] E-Mail Settings [9] SNMP Settings [0] AppleTalk Settings (next screen) [1] Bonjour Setting [2] TCP Socket Settings [3] Network Fax Settings [4] WebDAV client Settings [5] Web Service Settings [7] SSDP Settings [8] Detail Settings [9] IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings [6] Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri-Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [7] Printer Settings USB Timeout Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-23. Network Timeout Print XPS Errors [8] Fax Settings [1] Header Information Refer to "Fax Settings" on page 12-38. [2] Header/Footer Position [3] Line Parameter Setting [4] TX/RX Settings [5] Function Settings [6] PBX Connection Setting [7] Report Settings [8] Job Settings List [9] Multi Line Setting [0] Network Fax Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-7 Utility mode 12 * If an optional hard disk is not installed, [Confidential RX User Box] appears. [3] Administrator Settings [9] System Connection [1] Open API Settings Refer to "System Connection" on page 12-38. [2] Admin. transmission [3] Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting [0] Security Settings [1] Administrator Password Refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. [2] User Box Administrator Setting [3] Administrator Security Levels [4] Security Details [4] Security Detail provides [Audit Log Setting]. For details, please contact your service representative. [5] Enhanced Security Mode [6] HDD Settings [7] Function Management Settings [8] Stamp Settings [0] Driver Password Encryption Setting (next screen) [1] Flash Memory Lock Password (next screen) [1] License Settings [1] Get Request Code Refer to "License Settings" on page 12-41. [2] Install License [3] List of Enabled Functions [2] OpenAPI Certification Management Setting [1] Restriction Code Settings Refer to "OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting" on page 12-41. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2 Registering a destination This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination 2 Note If user authentication settings have been specified, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] cannot be selected when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] appears. Items for registering fax destinations appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.2.2 Create User Box 2 Note [2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. If an optional hard disk is not installed, the [Confidential RX User Box] key appears instead of the [Public/Personal] key. 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations Access Level Using the Access Level settings on this machine, the security of registered destinations can be managed by permitting/prohibiting viewing of the destination information or fax transmissions to the destination. Access permission levels can be set to one of six levels between 0 and 5, with the higher number indicating higher security. 2 Note The access level that is set for user, destination, and group level on the Limiting Access to Destinations can be used when user authentication settings have been specified. Parameter Description Address Book (Public) Specify settings for registering fax and scan destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Address Book (Personal) Group E-mail Settings Parameter Description Public/Personal User Box Specify settings for registering user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations and the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Opera- Bulletin Board User Box tions. Relay User Box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-9 Utility mode 12 Level settings The access permission level can be specified for each user and destination. The destinations that can be accessed by users can be limited according to the access permission levels specified for the user and destination. For example, a level 2 user can access destinations in levels 0 through 2, but cannot access destinations in levels 3 through 5. A level 5 user can access all destinations in levels 0 through 5. 2 Note For details on the access permission level settings for user, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. As a default, the access permission level specified for public users is level 0. Group In addition to users and destinations, groups with access permissions can be created and given a name. When users and destinations are registered in these groups, a destination registered in a group can be accessed by users registered to the same group. In addition, by applying access permission levels to groups, users not registered in a group can be given access permissions according to the conditions of the specified level. A destination can be registered in only one group. However, a user can be registered in multiple groups. Level 2 user access range Level 5 user access range Destinations Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User 3 Destination 1 Destination 2 User 1 User 2 Access Allow Level 3 12 Utility mode 12-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a group setting 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Create Group]. – A maximum of 20 groups can be registered. – In the Create Group screen, touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. The Create Group screen appears. 5 Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen appears. 6 Touch [Group Name]. The Group Name screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-11 Utility mode 12 7 Type in the group name (up to 24 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The group name is specified. 8 Select the desired access permission level. The access permission level for the group is specified. 9 Touch [OK]. Specifying a destination level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch the button for the desired destination. – For an address book destination, touch the index button for the first letter of the destination, and then search for the destination. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-13 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Either an access permission level or an access permission group can be specified for each destination. – Only one access permission group can be specified for a single destination. – To specify the destination group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the destination level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a user level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Users screen appears. 5 Select either "Public User Box" or "Personal User Box" as the user type, and then touch the button for the desired User. – The "Public User Box" and "Personal User Box" settings appear only when access by a public user is permitted. – If use by a public user is permitted, "Public" appears as the user name. As the default, level 0 is specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-15 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Both an access permission level and an access permission group can be specified for each user. – A single user can be registered in multiple access permission groups. – To specify the user group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the user level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen Follow the procedure described below to display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press the [1] key in the keypad. The One-Touch/User Box Registration screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-17 Utility mode 12 To exit the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Or, repeat touching [Close] until the Copy, Fax/Scan, or Box screen appears. With an optional i-Option LK-101 installed in the machine, the Utility mode can also be terminated by touching [Close] repeatedly until the screen specified in Application Key Settings appears. 12.3 Specifying user settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [User Settings]. 12.3.1 System Settings Language Selection Measurement Unit Settings Paper Tray Settings * Appears when the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/406 is installed. Description Default Setting Select the language of the touch panel message. English Description Default Setting Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel. mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction) mm (Numericial Value) Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. In addition, specify the priority of the paper trays when the auto tray switch operation is performed. Tray priority order: Tray 1 % Tray 2 % Tray 3 % Tray 4 % Bypass % LCT* Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray. • Stop Printing (Tray Fixed): The machine stops operating. • Switch Trays (Tray Priority): When the corresponding size or type of paper is not loaded in the specified paper tray, a different paper tray is selected if it contains paper of the corresponding size. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Tray 1, 1-Sided Paper Type/Size Settings Specify the paper type to be use for each tray. Plain Paper Post Inserter Alert Display Setting Specify whether to display the paper size and paper orientation during the tray display or an alarm indication for the post inserter. Yes 12 Utility mode 12-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Power Save Settings 2 Note [Low Power Mode Settings] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to [Level 1], [Level 2]. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Output Settings 2 Note The "Output Tray Settings" parameter is available only if the optional finisher is installed. Blank Page Print Settings Density for Original Type Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Setting Select the copy output tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 6 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text/Photo: 3 Text: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-19 Utility mode 12 Page Number Print Position 2 Note [Output Settings], [Blank Page Print Settings], [Density for Original Type], and [Page Number Print Position] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings Copier Settings Scan/Fax Settings Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the same Parameter Description Default Setting Default Tab Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy mode. • Basic: This is the normal basic display. • Quick Copy: Displays all selectable items for the "Paper" function, "Zoom" function and "Duplex/Combine" function. The normal Basic screen appears as a different tab. Basic Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions can be added to the Basic screen of Copy mode. OFF Shortcut Key 2 Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing and scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Program Default Address Book Index Default Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Default Address Book Default Address Type Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing. • Yes: A screen for reserving a copy job appears while printing and, if [Program Next Job] is touched, a job can be reserved. • No: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed. No Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. RX Display 12 Utility mode 12-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Color Selection Settings Left Panel Display Default Search Option Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Select Color Select the color that indicates that the button is selected. Green Parameter Description Default Setting Left Panel Display Default Select the information displayed as the default in the left panel. • Job List: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Check Job Settings: The currently specified copy settings are displayed. Job List Job Display Setting Select the job list information displayed in the left panel. • List Display: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Status Display: The progress of the job being performed is displayed. List Display Parameter Description Default Setting Uppercase and Lowercase Letters Select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters. Differentiate Search Option Screen Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the advanced search. OFF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-21 Utility mode 12 12.3.3 Copier Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically when the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected. This parameter is available only if optional finisher is installed. Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected and a combined copy setting or the "Booklet" function is selected. • Auto Display Zoom Ratio: The following zoom ratios are specified. 2in1, Booklet: 64.7% 4in1: 50.0% 8in1: 32.3% • Off: The zoom ratio is not selected automatically. Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single job. • Yes: When an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of only one page, and the "Sort" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of two or more pages. • No: The "Sort" or "Group" setting is not selected automatically. Yes Default Copy Settings Specify the default settings for Copy mode. The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") or the [Reset] key is pressed can be specified. • Current Setting: The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for Copy mode. Factory Default Default Enlarge Factory Default Specify the default settings for Enlarge Display mode. • Current Setting: The settings specified in the Enlarge Display mode before Utility mode was entered are set as default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Select whether or not printing continues when the paper and original orientations are different with the "Auto Paper Select" setting selected. • Print: The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation. • Delete Job: The job is deleted, and no copies are printed. Print Separate Scan Output Method Select whether copies are printed as the original is being scanned or after the entire original has been scanned when scanning an original in separate batches or when scanning a multiple-page document from the original glass. • Page Print: Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. • Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Page Print 12 Utility mode 12-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note [Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert Sheet], and [Automatic Image Rotation] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set. [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". Enlargement Rotation Select whether an image that exceeds 297 mm in the main scanning direction (left/right direction on the original glass and ADF) is rotated when the copies are printed. • Allow: An enlargement rotation is performed. • Restrict: The enlargement rotation is prohibited. Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Inside Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description Default Setting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-23 Utility mode 12 When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to page 2-31. To change the default settings for Fax/Scan mode, press the [Fax/Scan] key, enter Utility mode, and then select a setting for this parameter. 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings 12.3.5 Printer Settings 12.3.6 Change Password 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address 2 Note [Change E-Mail Address] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2" Parameter Description Black Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings Parameter Description Basic Settings Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Paper Settings PCL Settings PS Setting XPS Settings TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Image Shift Settings Make adjustment on Image Shift function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Stamp Settings Specify settings for Stamp function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Available paper types depend on the paper tray. Description The password for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. After typing in the current password, type in the new password. This parameter is available when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)". Description The e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. 12 Utility mode 12-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.3.8 Toner Supply 12.3.9 Change Icon 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the User Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [2 User Settings], press the [2] key in the keypad. Description When the toner density becomes low, the density level can be restored while the machine is stopped. Description The icon registered for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-25 Utility mode 12 The User Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy or Box mode appears. 12 Utility mode 12-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [Administrator Settings]. 12.4.1 System Settings Power Save Settings * This item appears when an optional fax kit, hard disk or the image controller IC-208 is not installed, the USB memory is not connected, and the weekly timer is set to [OFF]. Output Settings Date/Time Settings Daylight Saving Time Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Hibernation Setting* Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as the main power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or the sub power switch is turned off. ON Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power Save] key is pressed. • Low Power: The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy. • Sleep: Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Power Save mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than Power Save mode. Low Power Enter Power Save Mode Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Normal Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Settings Select the finishing tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Printer: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Shift Output Each Job Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed. • Yes: Pages are fed out shifted. • No: Pages are fed out without being shifted. Yes Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00 and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments). Time Zone: +00:00 Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If "Yes" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set. The length of time applied for daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments. No bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-27 Utility mode 12 Weekly Timer Settings ! Detail If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer. Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Settings screen can be combined. For details on the various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 12-44. Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Select whether or not the weekly timer is used. OFF Time Settings Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. - Date Settings Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine is turned on/off. - Select Time for Power Save If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified. No Password for Non- Business Hours If the machine is turned off with the weekly timer function, select whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if "Yes" is selected, specify the password that must be entered. No Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Program Lock Settings Select the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. - Delete Saved Copy Program Select the registered copy programs to be deleted. - Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Select whether or not to allow the print priority of jobs to be changed. Allow Delete Other User Jobs Select whether or not jobs from other users can deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified. Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Select whether or not to allow registered destinations to be changed. Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios to be changed. Allow Change the "From" Address Select whether or not to allow the specified From address to be changed. Allow Change Registered Overlay Select whether or not to allow registered image overlays to be changed. Allow Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from being specified for fax transmissions. OFF 12 Utility mode 12-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting Density for Original Type Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 5 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text: 3 Text/Photo: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Select the condition for Non-Image Area Erase to function. Except Original Glass e1.0 Non-Image Area Erase Setting Select the setting method, erasing mode, and original density for the Non-Image Area Erase function. Erase Setting: Specify How to Erase: Rectangular Original Density: Standard ADF Frame Erase Specify the erasing width for the ADF Frame Erase function. 3 mm Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0.0 mm Centering Adjust the starting print position between -6.4 mm and +6.3 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the paper feed speed and printing speed can be synchronized to adjust the distortion of the copy image between -1.35 and +5.00. 0.0% Horizontal Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the transverse feed direction of the original can be adjusted between - 1.0% and +1.0%. 0.0% 2nd-Side Size Adjustment Adjust the zoom ratio for the back side of double-sided copies for each paper tray. Adjust Ratio:[No Selection], [-0.1%], [-0.2%], [-0.3%] No Selection bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-29 Utility mode 12 *1 Appears only when Finisher FS-610 is installed. *2 Appears only when finisher is installed with punch kit. *3 Appears only when Z folding unit is installed. *4 Appears only when post inserter is installed. ! Detail [Finisher Adjustment] appears only when an optional finisher is installed. The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the model of the installed finisher. Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position* 1 Adjust the stapling position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Half-Fold Position* 1 Adjust the folding position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Punch Vertical Position Adjustment*2 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment* 2 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment*2 Adjust the hole-punching shift for double-sided printing and outputting cover pages between -16.0 mm and 16.0 mm. 0.0 mm 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 1st folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 2nd folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Tri-Fold Position Adjustment*1 Adjust the folding positions (between -12.8 mm and 12.7 mm) when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting. 0.0 mm 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment*1 Adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold"). 128 mm Post Inserter Feeder Size Adjustment*4 Adjust the sensor for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the post inserter. - Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjust the starting scan position between -2.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Scanner Adjustment: Centering Adjust the starting scan position between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm at the left edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the scanned image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the feed direction of the original in the scanner area can be adjusted between -2.0% and +2.0%. 1.00% ADF Centering Adjust the center position in the transverse feed direction of the original between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm. 0.0 mm Copy Protect Density Adjustment Adjust the density of hidden text printed as copy protection. 200 to 255: 219 Parameter Description Default Setting 12 Utility mode 12-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) List/Counter Reset Settings 2 Reminder Even if the System Auto Reset Time is [OFF], the System Auto Reset function is activated after 1 minute of no operation of the machine during the User Authentication or Account Track. However, when in the Enlarge Display mode, the System Auto Reset function is not activated. If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON", the logoff from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the "System Auto Reset Time" parameter. Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed. Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be counted. Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. • Priority Mode: Select the setting ("Box", "Copy" or "Scan/Fax") for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset operation is performed. • System Auto Reset Time: Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. Priority Mode: Copy System Auto Reset Time: 1 Minute Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode (Copy, Scan/Fax and Box). Copy: 1 Minute Scan/Fax: 1 Minute Box: 1 Minute Job Reset When Account is changed Select whether or not the settings are reset (initialized) when the user has changed. This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the user has logged off if user authentication or account track settings are specified. Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder. Do Not Reset Next Job Staple Setting: Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Original Set/Bind Direction: Select whether the same Original Direction and Binding Position settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Reset Data After Job: Select whether or not to reset the address and other settings after scanning or fax transmission. When "Confirm with User"* is specified, whether or not to hold the address and other settings can be selected after scanning or fax transmission. Reset All System Auto Reset for Proof Copy Select whether or not to activate the automatic system reset after the proof copy operation is performed. Yes bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-31 Utility mode 12 When the optional i-Option LK-101 is registered, the setting can be specified from Priority Mode: [Application Menu], [Fax/Scan], [Copy]. When LK-101 is registered, [Auto Reset] can be used to configure the Web Browser settings. Factory default: 1 minute If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", "Confirm with User" in [Job Reset] - [Next Job] - [Reset Data After Job] cannot be used. User Box Settings Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Page Number Print Position Skip Job Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 day Encrypted PDF Delete Time 1 day ID & Print Delete Time 1 day Document Hold Setting ON External Memory Function Settings Save Document OFF Print Document ON ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Confirm with User Document Delete Time Setting 1 day Parameter Description Default Setting Header/Footer Settings Program or delete header/footer settings. - Fax TX Settings Select whether or not the stamp settings are canceled when a fax is sent. Cancel Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages when a Stamp/Composition function is set. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the Same Parameter Description Default Setting Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for the fax transmission. ON other than Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for other functions than fax transmission. ON 12 Utility mode 12-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Application Key Settings 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings 2 Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system. 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration Description Default Setting Functions can be assigned to Key 1 and Key 2. Key 1: Scan/Fax Key 2: Copy Parameter Description Default Setting Original Direction Confirmation Screen Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. ON Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service Representative/ Administrator Information screen of the Help screen and the From address for sending e-mail from the machine. Input Machine Address Register the name of the machine and its e-mail address. The registered machine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to originals saved in user boxes. As the factory default, the machine name is specified as "KMBT_751/601". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing. Parameter Description Create One-Touch Destination Specify settings for registering fax, scan and user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the Create User Box User manual – Box Operations. One-Touch/User Box Registration List The lists of address book destinations, group destinations, program destinations and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of user boxes for each user. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-33 Utility mode 12 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track General Settings User Authentication Settings Description Default Setting Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. • User Authentication: Select either "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF". • Public User Access: Select whether or not the machine can be used by an unauthenticated user. This cannot be selected if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". • The machine can be used without authentication if [ON (Without Login)] is touched when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. • Account Track: Select whether or not account tracking is used to control the machine. • Account Track Input Method: To authenticate using an account name and password, touch [Account Name & Password]. To authenticate using only a password, touch [Password Only]. No setting can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication and account track settings are specified, "Account Name & Password" cannot be selected. • Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Select whether or not user authentication and group authentication are synchronized. This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "On". • When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached, touch [Skip Job]. To stop the all jobs when the limit is reached, select [Stop Job]. • Number of User Counters Assigned: Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered. Example: When "Number of User Counters Assigned" is set to "50", 950 accounts can be registered. • Ticket Hold Time Setting: Specify the desired length of holding time (between 1 and 60 minutes) of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. User Authentication: OFF Public User Access: Restrict Account Track: OFF Account Track Input Method: Account name & password Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Synchronize When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned: 500 Ticket Hold Times Settings: 60 min Parameter Description Default Setting Administrative Settings User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed in the user authentication screen. OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an external server. Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow Save to External Memory: Allow ID & Print Settings Whether or not to use the ID & Print function can be selected. Also, whether to print unauthorized jobs or public user jobs immediately or to save them in the ID & Print User Box can be selected. ID & Print: OFF Public User: Print Immediately ID & Print Operation Settings Specify the printing method when using the ID & Print function. • Print All Jobs: All the jobs are printed with a single authentication operation. • Print Each Job: The stored jobs are printed one at a time. Print All Jobs User Registration Register the users of this machine. In addition, the password, number of prints allowed, authentication information and function permissions can be specified for each user. - User Counter The copy, print and fax/scan use for each user can be checked. - 12 Utility mode 12-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The user authentication parameters appear only if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to any setting other than "OFF". [Save to External Memory] appears if "Save Document" is set to ON (displayed by touching [User Box Settings] on the System Settings screen, then [External Memory Function Settings]). If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [User Registration] does not appear. ! Detail When user authentication is performed using an optional authentication unit by placing your finger or IC card on the authentication unit, jobs saved in the ID & Print User Box can be printed. Account Track Settings 2 Note The account track parameters appear only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON". If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [Account Track Settings] does not appear. Print Without Authentication Print Counter List External Server Settings Parameter Description Account Track Registration Register the accounts using this machine. In addition, the password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account. Account Track Counter The copy, print and scan/fax use for each account can be checked. Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing is permitted, prints are counted for public users. Restrict Description Default Setting This parameter appears only if user authentication or account track settings have been specified. The use for each user or account can be checked. Paper Tray: Tray 1 Simplex/Duplex: 1-sided Print Item: All Info. Description Specify the external server that performs user authentication. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-35 Utility mode 12 Limiting Access to Destinations Authentication Device Settings ! Detail The Authentication Device Settings parameters are available only if the optional authentication unit is installed. The authentication units of the IC card type and the biometric type cannot be installed at the same time. If [SSFC] is selected for the IC card type, specify company code and company identification code. For details, refer to the manual provided with the authentication unit. Auth/Acct Track Common Setting Parameter Description Create Group Groups for permitting access to destinations can be registered and edited. Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each destination. Apply Levels/Groups to Users The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each user. Parameter Description Default setting General Settings Specify the settings for the installed authentication unit. • Card Authentication: Select the IC card type and operation settings. • Bio Authentication: Select the beep and operation settings. When the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed: IC Card Type: FeliCa Operation Settings: Card Authentication When the authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed: Beep Sound: ON Operation Settings: 1-tomany authentication Logoff Settings Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy original is scanned. Do not log off Parameter Description Default setting Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Select whether or not to display the logging-off confirmation screen after pressing the [Access] key. ON 12 Utility mode 12-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.5 Network Settings Parameter Description Network Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings HTTP Server Settings FTP Settings SMB Settings LDAP Settings E-mail Settings SNMP Settings AppleTalk Settings Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Settings WebDAV Client Settings Web Service Settings SSDP Settings Detail Settings IEEE 802.1x Authentication Settings Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-37 Utility mode 12 12.4.6 Copier Setting 12.4.7 Printer Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Outside Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description USB Timeout Specify settings for registering print destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Network Timeout Print XPS Error 12 Utility mode 12-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.8 Fax Settings 2 Note [8 Fax Settings] appears only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.4.9 System Connection 2 Note [2 Administrator Settings] is displayed when the machine is managed by CS Remote Care. 12.4.10 Security Settings Administrator Password User Box Administrator Setting Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for registering fax destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Header/Footer Position Line Parameter Setting TX/RX Settings Function Settings PBX Connection Setting Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Setting Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Parameter Description Open API Settings Specify settings for registering network connections. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Admin. transmission The administrator can send the machine status to the service representative. For details, contact your service representative [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number. If [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits (characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "Enabled", only an administrator password with 8 digits can be specified. 12345678 Description Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-39 Utility mode 12 Administrator Security Levels Security Details Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users. • Level 1: Low Power Mode Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation are available to users. • Level 2: Low Power Mode Settings, Output Settings, Density for Original, Page Number Print Position, Blank Page Print Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation, Copy Operating Screen, Change E-Mail Address are available to users. • Prohibit: None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are available. Prohibit Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not password rules are applied. Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed. • Mode 1: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time. • Mode 2: When authentication has failed repeatedly, the control panel can no longer be operated. The number of times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. • Users & Accounts: Operations for user authentication and account track • Secure Print: Operations for confidential documents • User Box: Operations for password-protected boxes • SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication • Release Time Settings: Specify the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically unlocked. The time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes. Mode 1 Release Time Settings: 5 min. Confidential Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be viewed. If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2". Mode 1: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document. Mode 2: Enter the Secure Print ID, select the document, and then enter the password for authentication. Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in a recipient input screen. Allow Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF Hide Personal Information Select whether or not the file name and destination are hidden in the job log. OFF Display Activity Log Select whether or not the communication log is displayed. ON Delete Job Log The entire job log can be cleared. - Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Web browser contents access This setting is for the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 12 Utility mode 12-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail The operation of the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter applies to the following passwords. User passwords, account passwords, user box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and the administrator password If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. Restart the machine, wait for the time specified in "Release Time Settings", and then perform the administrator authentication. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Enhanced Security Mode HDD Settings Description Settings necessary for applying enhanced security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode settings when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your service representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed. Overwrite Temporary Data Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data saved on the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning, faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. By specifying a setting to overwrite temporary data, the area of the hard disk where image data is saved after printing or sending can be overwritten, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk. NO Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data on the entire hard disk in the specified patterns for mode 1 through mode 8 when returning the machine from lease or disposing the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Before performing this operation, contact your service representative. Mode 1 HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Format HDD Format the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. HDD Encryption Setting This setting appears when the optional Security kit is installed. Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt data in the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. When a setting is specified, all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be reformatted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-41 Utility mode 12 Function Management Settings ! Detail The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF". PC-FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.) Stamp Settings Driver Password Encryption Setting Flash Memory Lock Password 12.4.11 License Settings 2 Note For details on Install License, refer to the Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Usage Settings Specify settings for network functions that are difficult to count when managing operations. ON Parameter Description Apply Stamps Select whether or not a stamp is added when printing or sending. Delete Registered Stamp Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted. Description Default setting The encryption password for the printer driver can be changed. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Use Factory Default Description Default setting The lock password of flash memory can be changed or released. Use Factory Default Parameter Description Get Request Code Issues the request code for this machine that registers in the License Management Server (LMS). Install License Select the function to be enabled, and then type in the license code acquired from the License Management Server (LMS). List of Enabled Functions Enabled functions can be checked. Parameter Description Restriction Code Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the Administrator Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Setting], press the [3] key in the keypad. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-43 Utility mode 12 3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The Administrator Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. 2 Reminder The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password. Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is described below. 0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off. 0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [Administrator Settings], then [System Settings], then [Weekly Timer Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings. 1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings" to "ON". 2 Specify times for "Time Settings". 3 Specify dates for "Date Settings". 4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours". The weekly timer is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-45 Utility mode 12 12.6 Finisher Adjustment 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Center Staple Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For the procedure on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Half-Fold Position" on page 12-47. 0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-47 Utility mode 12 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position The folding position when printing with the "Half-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 2 Note [Half-Fold Position] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Half-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position]. The Half-Fold Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The center folding position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Half-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-49 Utility mode 12 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-51 Utility mode 12 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-53 Utility mode 12 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. A A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-55 Utility mode 12 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Unit Horizonal Position Adjustment] appears only if optical Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. A 12 Utility mode 12-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment When printing with a Punch setting, the angle of punched holes along the side of the paper can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-57 Utility mode 12 5 Touch [7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment]. The Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired adjustment parameter. 7 Check the angle of the punched holes. – If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [-] to change the adjustment. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The angle of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment The first and second folding position when printing with the "Z-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] and [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment] do not appear if optional Z folding unit is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Z-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. In addition, to adjust both the 1st and 2nd folding positions for Z-folding, be sure to adjust the 1st folding position first. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] or [9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-59 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). – Adjust values so that the distance between the left edge of the paper and the 2nd Z-folding position is 2 mm or more. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 2 mm or more 12 Utility mode 12-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Use the "Z-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment The folding position when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [10 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-61 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment The distance between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold") can be adjusted. 2 Note [2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [1 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment]. The Adjust Spacing of 2 Staples screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the setting to be adjusted. 7 Check the stapling positions in the sample copy. – Touch [+] or [-] under "Adjust Value" to adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between the staples. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. The distance between the staples is adjusted. If no adjustment of the distance between the staples was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print another sample copy. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-63 Utility mode 12 10 Check the print result. – Check that the distance between the staples was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment The sensors for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the optional post inserter can be adjusted. 2 Note [Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment] appears only if optional post inserter is installed. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment]. The Post Inserter Tray Size Adj. screen appears. 6 Load the selected paper in the paper tray for the post inserter, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.7 Header/Footer Settings Follow the procedures described below to specify headers/footers used with the Stamp/Composition functions available from the Application tab. 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Stamp Settings]. The Stamp Settings screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Header/Footer Settings]. The Header/Footer Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. The Header/Footer Settings > New screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-65 Utility mode 12 6 Touch [Name]. The New > Name screen appears. 7 Type in the header/footer name (up to 16 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The header/footer name is specified. 12 Utility mode 12-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Under "Header Settings" or "Footer Settings", touch [Print], and then select the type of header/footer to be printed. Touch [Close]. 9 Select the desired setting under "Pages", and specify the desired settings for "Text Size" and "Print Position". 10 Touch [OK]. ! Detail To print the header/footer only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers 1 In the Header/Footer Settings screen, touch the button of the header/footer to be edited. 2 Touch [Check/Edit]. – To delete the header/footer, touch [Delete]. The Check/Edit screen appears. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-67 Utility mode 12 12.8 Authentication Method Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each account can be managed for each individual user. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)" on page 2-38. User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing. 12.8.1 User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings. - User Authentication – Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations, printing, document storing operations, transmitted document printing and saving document to the external memory) – Counters for printing/scanning by each user – Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner – Management of the level and the group with permissions to access destinations by each owner – Delete jobs of other users - Account Track – Counters for printing/scanning from each account – Operates the group box 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department. With this setup, statistics can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account). To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Group A Group B Account Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize". Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected. 12 Utility mode 12-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, statistics can be maintained for each employee (each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different employees. To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Group C Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-69 Utility mode 12 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. The General Settings screen appears. 4 Specify a setting for "User Authentication". – To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF]. – To use an external server to perform user authentication, touch [External Server Authentication], and then select the server type. – In order to use an external server, the external server must first be registered. – To use this machine’s authentication system to perform user authentication, touch [ON (MFP)] 5 Specify a setting for "Public User Access". – To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict]. – To allow this machine to be used by touching [Public User Access] in the authentication screen without entering a user name or password even though user authentication settings have been applied, touch [Allow]. – "ON (Without Login)" allows the machine to be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. 6 Specify a setting for "Account Track". – To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF]. – To use the account track function, touch [ON]. 7 Specify a setting for "Account Track Input Method". – To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen, touch [Account Name & Password]. – To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch [Password Only]. 12 Utility mode 12-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Specify a setting for "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track". – Synchronize "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration. When "External Server Authentication" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information by being synchronized with the authenticated account. – Do Not Synchronize This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used. 9 Touch . The second screen is displayed. 10 Specify a setting for "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum". – To skip the job when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Skip Job]. – To stop all jobs when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Stop Job]. 11 Specify a setting for "Number of User Counters Assigned". – Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value (between 1 and 999). – If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled. 12 Specify "Ticket Hold Time Setting". – Use the keypad to type in the time. (1 to 60 minutes) – Specify the holding time of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. 13 Touch [OK]. – If the setting for "User Authentication", "Account Track" or "Number of User Counters Assigned" was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-71 Utility mode 12 14 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop clearing the usage data without changing the settings, touch [No]. – If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access", "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" or "Ticket Hold Time Setting" – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The authentication method is set. Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track. 2 Reminder Do not use a name including uppercase and lowercase of the same character for the user name of the external server. Since bizhub 751/601 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, the operation may not be performed correctly. 2 Note "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict". "Number of User Counters Assigned for Users" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered. ! Detail For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public user is not permitted. If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Name & Password" is selected. A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted, it is recommended that limitations be placed on the machine functions that can be used. For details, refer to "User Registration" on page 12-74. If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)" or "ON (External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen. When "ON (MFP)" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, the authenticated account is registered to the account name. The machine can be used simply by entering user authentication information from the next time. 12 Utility mode 12-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9 User Authentication Setting User authentication settings can be specified. 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [User Name List]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. Whether or not a user name list button appears is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-73 Utility mode 12 12.9.2 Default Function Permission If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".) The following operations can be limited. - Copy operations - Scan operations - Fax operations - Printing from a printer - Saving documents on the hard disk - Printing the transmitted document - Saving the document to the external memory - Manual destination input 2 Note To limit machine use by registered users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [Default Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired settings. 7 Touch [OK]. The default function permissions are set. 12 Utility mode 12-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.3 Public User Access If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, there are two methods for authenticating the public user. Allow: Touch [Public User] in the authentication screen to display the Basic Screen and operate the machine. ON (Without Login): The machine can be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. (The default setting is "Restrict".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. 4 Touch [Public User Access]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. The public user authentication method is set. ! Detail [Public User Access] is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". To log on as a general user when "Public User Access" is set to "On (Without Login)", press the [Access] key to display the Basic screen. 12.9.4 User Registration The password, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine. In addition, if an authentication unit is installed on this machine, the user’s IC card or the vein patterns of their finger can be registered. As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added. Function limitations can be specified for the public user. 0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "Number of User Counters Assigned" can be registered. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [2 User Registration]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-75 Utility mode 12 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the user appears. 6 Touch [User Name]. The User Name screen appears. 7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. – A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. The user name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. The Password screen appears. ? Why is [Password] not available? % [Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON (External Server)". 9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. For confirmation, the Password screen appears again. Retype the same password, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 10 Touch [E-Mail Address]. The E-Mail Address screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK]. The e-mail address is set. If the e-mail address exceeds 69 characters, [Detail] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch [Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address. 12 To use the account track function, touch [Account Name]. – [Account Name] appears only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen been set to "ON". The Account Name screen appears. 13 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK]. – Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered. For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account Track Registration" on page 12-80. The account is set. 14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 15 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for prints, touch [No Limit]. 16 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 17 To use authentication unit (biometric type) or authentication unit (IC card type), touch [Register Auth. Info.]. – [Register Auth. Info.] appears only if an authentication unit is installed on this machine. The Register Auth. Info. screen appears. 18 Touch [Edit]. – When using authentication unit (biometric type), place a finger on the authentication unit and register the vein patterns. – When using authentication unit (IC card type), place an IC card on the authentication unit and register the card information. 19 Touch [Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-77 Utility mode 12 20 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation. – To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. – With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. – Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy % Scan % Fax % Box. – If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed. 21 Touch [OK]. The function permissions are set. 22 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [Icon]. The Select Icon screen appears. 23 Select an icon to display in the user list, and then touch [OK]. The icon is set. 24 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the settings in the current screen, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete] in the User Registration screen. 12 Utility mode 12-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.5 User Counter The following data for each user can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during user registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX - Fax TX: Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note Counting automatically continues with user counters when using external server authentication. The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. The user box administrator access is counted as "BoxAdmin" of the counter. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-79 Utility mode 12 12.9.6 Viewing user counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [3 User Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the user appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed user, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all users, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10 Account Track Setting 12.10.1 Account Track Registration The password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the account appears. If “Account Name & Password” was selected: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-81 Utility mode 12 – If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than once. – The screen that appears differs depending on the setting selected for "Account Track Input Method". 6 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. 7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Account Name & Password", the same account name cannot be registered more than once. The account name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. 9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. If “Password Only” was selected: 12 Utility mode 12-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 11 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 12 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for color and black prints, touch [No Limit]. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears in order to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 13 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 14 Touch [OK]. – To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-83 Utility mode 12 12.10.2 Account Track Counter The following data for each account can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during account registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX Count - Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. 12 Utility mode 12-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10.3 Viewing account counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the account appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed account, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-85 Utility mode 12 12.11 Password Rules If password rules have been applied, the following limitations are applied to the passwords in order to increase security. If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, ask the administrator to change the passwords to meet the following conditions. ! Detail The following conditions apply to the characters used in passwords. Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. Symbols other than the plus sign (+) and quotation mark (") can be used. 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules Administrator password 2 Note Use when specifying administrator settings. User passwords 2 Note Use when specifying user authentication settings. Account passwords 2 Note Use when specifying account track settings. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. 12 Utility mode 12-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Box passwords 2 Note Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes. Confidential document passwords 2 Note If any password not following the Password Rules, Secure Print cannot be performed. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-87 Utility mode 12 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode When enhanced security mode is applied on this machine, various security settings are set in order to increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited. There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings for the security functions. 2 Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security Mode, "Enhanced Security Mode" cannot be set to "ON". ! Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security features to be applied. For details, contact your service representative. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON". ! Detail If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to "Account Name & Password". [SSL] appears when a certificate is registered with PageScope Web Connection. Administrator mode parameters Settings User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". System Connection—Open API Settings—SSL The button must be displayed. Security Settings—Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the password rules. Security Settings—HDD Settings—HDD Lock Password *Otherwise, install the optional security kit. Specify the hard disk locking password. Security Settings/Security Details/Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error/Release Time Settings Specify 5 minutes or longer. Security Settings/Flash Memory Lock Password Specify the flash memory locking password. 12 Utility mode 12-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". 2 Note The number of times for checking for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" can be changed to a number between 1 and 3. A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF". When "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", a password that does not meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password Rules" on page 12-85. When "Overwrite Temporary Data" is set to "Mode 2", it cannot be changed to "Mode 1" even if "Enhanced Security Mode" is "ON". For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. User operation limitations When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations. - A public user cannot use this machine. - The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen. - When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. - The destination cannot be changed by the user. - This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER. - An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected. - Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated. 2 Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Administrator mode parameters Changed settings System Settings—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Addresses Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— Public User Access Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication Settings—Administrative Settings—User Name List Set to "OFF". User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—User Box Administrator Setting Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "Enable". Security Settings—Security Details—Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking. Security Settings—Security Details—Confidential Document Access Method Set to "Mode 2". Security Settings—HDD Setting—Overwrite Temporary Data Set to "Mode 1". 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-3 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-101 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-5 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 The Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 is a biometric authentication system that performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in a finger. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with finger vein patterns when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. The status of the authentication unit is indicated by a status indicator and tone. In order to use the authentication unit, user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their finger vein patterns. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Note Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner, and then position the finger so that the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner. Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold the authentication unit in place on both sides, and avoid moving the index finger being used for authentication. 2 Reminder Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of the authentication unit while scanning, otherwise the device may malfunction. Do not disconnect the cable connecting the authentication unit to the computer while scanning, otherwise the system may become unstable. Status indicator Device status Lit (green) Standing by/authentication completed Flashing (green) Authenticating/scanning Lit (red) Authentication failed/scanning failed Off The authentication unit is not detected. Tone Device status One short beep Starting to scan One short beep Retrying after authentication failed One short beep Authentication completed Two short beeps Authentication failed 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on the machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of the multifunctional product, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Bio Authentication]. 4 Select the desired settings under "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Beep Sound", select whether or not a beep is produced when scanning of the finger vein pattern is completed successfully. – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. 1-to-many authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Logon is possible by entering a user name and positioning the finger. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-7 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 13-20. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 7 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to the machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of the machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 Authentication System], then [2 User Registration]. – [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-9 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger, and touch [OK] after each time. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator Bio Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 7 Click [Finish]. 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7. The installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed. 9 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 10 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 11 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 12 Click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. 14 Click [Install]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-15 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 15 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and this machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, the authentication unit may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 5 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-17 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 6 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 7 Type in the user name and password, click the Vein Authentication tab, and then click [Import]. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Position the finger on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger each time. – After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and press [Authentication Test]. – If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. 9 Click [Register]. 10 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-19 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 11 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. 12 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 13 Click [OK]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 15 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with finger vein patterns. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified 1 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-21 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on the machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with finger vein patterns. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of the machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with the machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", "Hardware and Sound", and "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu in Windows XP/Server 2003, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista/Server 2008, if the control panel is in the classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "ON (Device)" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-23 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-25 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-27 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-29 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-31 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-33 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 8 Touch [Print] under "Action". – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-3 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-201). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-201 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-5 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 is an IC card authentication system that performs user authentication by IC cards. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with IC cards when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. In order to use the authentication unit, user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their IC card IDs. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Reminder Do not disconnect the USB cable while the authentication unit is being used, otherwise the system may become unstable. Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on this machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying settings for "Public User Access" and "Account Track", refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Card Authentication]. 5 Select the desired settings under "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. Card Authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Logon is possible by positioning the IC card and entering the password. – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 14-22. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-7 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 8 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to this machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of this machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 User Authentication Settings], then [2 User Registration]. 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-9 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then touch [OK]. 6 After the message "Registered" appears, touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 3.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-11 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-13 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Click [Finish]. The installation of IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 9 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 11 Click [Next]. 12 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-15 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 13 Click [Install]. 14 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to this machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, Authentication unit (IC Card Type) may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. – If the data have already been read out, proceed to 7. 4 Find this device in the window, then double-click it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-17 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 5 Click [Import]. 6 Click [Yes]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for this machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 8 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-19 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 10 Type in the user name and password, click the IC card authentication tab. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 11 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – The card ID can also be registered by selecting "Input the card ID directly". 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 8 through 12 until all users have been registered. 13 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-21 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on the multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 15 Click [OK]. 16 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 17 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the this machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with IC card IDs. When "Card Authentication” has been specified" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-23 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit, and then type in the password. 2 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note The notification beep sounds while scanning. The notification beep is canceled by touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key to complete authentication. This is a normal operation of the device. If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on this machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with IC card IDs. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of this machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with this machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel", then "Hardware and Sound", then "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – If Control Panel in Windows Vista/Server 2008 is displayed in the Classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "Device" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-25 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-27 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. – Make sure that "Begin Printing" is selected. – To select the print job to be printed, touch [Screen Operation]. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-29 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-31 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit when IC card authentication has been specified. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit and enter the password when IC card authentication + password has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-33 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. 8 Touch [Print] under "Action", and then touch [OK]. – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 15 Appendix bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-3 Appendix 15 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size Password input screen 15 Appendix 15-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-5 Appendix 15 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read. 1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 Note The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged. 15 Appendix 15-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15.1.2 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch and to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. 15.1.3 List of available characters Type Characters Alphanumeric characters/ symbols bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-7 Appendix 15 15.2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below. Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the original ADU Automatic duplex unit; used to print automatically on both sides of paper. APS "Auto Paper Select" setting ATS Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch) LCT Large capacity tray; can be loaded with a large amount of paper to feed it into the copier main body. A Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after an original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected. Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the same size if "e1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio. B Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the original to one of nine levels. C Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size or type not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than normal paper. Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies. Combine Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1". Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page. D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels. Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned original and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides. F Fold & Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center. Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the finishing tray. 15 Appendix 15-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) G Group (Copy/Finishing) Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the original. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished. Group (reference permission) Use this feature to limit the addresses that each user can reference and to manage security. I Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in an original scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together. Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages. M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from singlesided original or when making single-sided copies from double-sided originals. Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced. Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each original page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when an original with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF. N Neg-/Pos. Reverse Set this function to copy the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. O Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out. OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between OHP that are being copied.This prevents OHP from sticking together. Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF. P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on. Preview Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing. S Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Separate Scan Scans an original exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the original in separate batches. The original can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-9 Appendix 15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Select a setting to staple copies together. X XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded original. Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy. 15 Appendix 15-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-3 Index 16 16 Index Symbols [Power] (auxiliary power) key 2-31 Numerics 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment 12-58 2in1 3-55 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 12-62 4in1 3-55 8in1 3-55 A Accessibility 4-27 Account track 2-42 Account Track Settings 12-80 ADF 3-9, 7-31, 15-7 Administrator Settings 12-26 Administrator/Machine Setting 12-32 Authentication method 12-67 Authentication unit 2-45, 2-47 Authentication unit (biometric type) 2-45 Authentication unit (IC card type) 2-47 Auto Paper setting 3-36 Auto Reset Confirmation 4-33 Auto Zoom setting 3-39 Automatic panel reset 2-34 B Background Removal 3-61, 3-63 Basic screen 2-26 Binding Position 3-29 Biometric authentication 2-45 Book Copy 8-27 Booklet 8-47 Bypass tray 2-6, 2-55 C Call service representative 5-3 Center Staple & Fold 3-77, 3-79 Center Staple Position 12-45 Change Icon 12-24 Chapters 8-17 Check Job 4-3 Cleaning 10-3 Combined pages 3-55 Conserving energy 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Consumables 9-3 Control panel 2-24, 2-29 Copier Settings 12-21, 12-37 Cover Sheet 8-6 Create One-Touch Destination 12-8 Create User Box 12-8 Current Jobs list 11-12 Custom Display Settings 12-19 Custom Size settings 7-14, 7-25 D Deleting jobs 11-8 Density 3-61, 3-62 Destination registration 12-8, 12-32 Double-sided copying 3-52 E Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes 9-18 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation 4-35 Enlarge/Reduce settings 3-44 Entering text 15-3 Erase 8-50, 8-51, 8-53, 8-55 F Face Up 3-64, 3-69 Fax Settings 12-38 Fax/Scan Settings 12-23 Features 1-3 Finisher FS-524 2-12 Finisher FS-525 2-14 Finisher FS-610 2-16 Finishing 3-64 Folding 3-77 Full Size 3-40 Fusing unit 2-9 G Glossary 15-7 Glossy 3-61 Group 3-64, 3-67 H Half-Fold 3-77, 3-78 Half-Fold Position 12-47 Header/Footer 12-64 Help 4-22 I IC card authentication 2-47 Icons 2-28 Image Adjustment 8-44 Image Repeat 8-33 Increase Priority 11-17 Individual Zoom 3-45 Insert Image 8-14 Insert Sheet 8-10 Internal 2-8 Interrupt 4-15 16-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index J Job History list 11-13 Job List screen 11-3 K Key Repeat Start/Interval Time 4-29 L Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2-10 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2-11 Left panel Job List 11-7 Lever M4 2-60 License Settings 12-41 Limiting Access to Destinations 12-8 Loading paper 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-55 Low power mode 2-34 M Machine Configuration 2-3 Main messages and their remedies 5-47 Main power switch 2-31 Manual conventions 1-9 Message 10-9 Message Display Time 4-37 Meter Count 10-8 Minimal 3-43 Mixed Original 3-21, 15-8 Mode Memory 4-16, 4-20 N Neg./Pos. Reverse 8-26 Network Setting 12-36 Non-standard-sized paper 7-12 O Offset 3-64 OHP Interleave 8-3 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration 12-32 Options 2-3 Original > Copy settings 3-50 Original Direction 3-26, 15-8 Original feeding 3-9 Original glass 3-10 Original orientation 1-10 Original Type 3-59, 15-8 Originals 7-31 Output Tray OT-505 2-22 Oversized paper 7-17 Oversized paper settings 7-27 P Page Margin 8-41 Paper misfeed 5-5 Paper misfeed indications 5-7 Paper storage 7-8 Paper take-up roller 2-50 Password Rules 12-85 Periodic maintenance 10-9 Post Inserter PI-504 2-21, 3-86, 5-39 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment 12-63 Power save 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting 12-38 Preview 4-9 Printer Settings 12-23, 12-37 Program Jobs 8-21 Proof Copy 4-6 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-53 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 2-12, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16 Punch Resist Loop Adjustment 12-56 Punch settings 3-64, 3-74 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-55 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment 12-51 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 12-49 Q Queuing copy jobs 3-90 Quick copy screen 2-26 R Recall Copy Program 4-20 Replacing the staple cartridge 9-7 S Save in User Box 8-93 Security Settings 12-38 Selecting the output tray 3-68 Separate Scan 3-11 Set Zoom 3-48 Shift Tray SF-602 2-22 Simple troubleshooting 5-43 Single-sided copying 3-51 Sleep mode 2-35 Sort 3-64, 3-66 Sound Setting 4-38 Special Size settings 7-24 Stamp/Composition 8-56 Standard Size 1 settings 7-23 Staple cartridge 9-7 Staple settings 3-64, 3-71 Stored jobs 11-14, 11-15 System Auto Reset 2-34 System Auto Reset Confirmation 4-31 System Connection 12-38 System Settings 12-17, 12-26 T Tab Original Settings 3-24 Temporarily stopping 3-91 Text Enhancement 3-61 Text entry 15-3 Toner cartridge 9-3 Touch panel 2-26, 4-27 Transport lever 2-60 Tray 1 2-5, 2-50 Tray 2 2-5, 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-5 Index 16 Tray 3 2-5, 2-51 Tray 4 2-5, 2-51 Tri-Fold 3-77, 3-81 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 12-60 Trouble code 5-3 Trouble shooting 5-3 U User authentication 2-38 User Authentication Setting 12-72 User Authentication/Account Track 12-33 User manuals 1-11 User Settings 12-17 Utility mode 12-3 W Warm-up 2-32 Weekly timer 2-36, 12-44 Wide Paper settings 7-17 X XY Zoom 3-41 Z Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 2-19 Z-Fold 3-77, 3-83 Z-Folded Original 3-23 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-6 Index 16 Guide de l’utilisateur Opérations de numérisation avancée . bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5 Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9 Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9 Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9 Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10 Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13 1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7 2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8 Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3 Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7 3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9 Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12 Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13 Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14 Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26 Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26 Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37 Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3 Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3 Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9 4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11 Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14 Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15 Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26 Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29 4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37 Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3 Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4 Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4 Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7 Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8 Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13 Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13 Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19 Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19 Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31 FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37 Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37 Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43 Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43 Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47 Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58 Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58 5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59 Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59 Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3 Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12 Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15 Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16 Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32 Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection......................................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3 Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5 Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7 Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7 Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8 Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10 Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12 Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12 Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29 Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29 Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3 Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3 Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3 8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7 Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11 Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3 9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4 Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4 Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5 Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6 Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7 Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9 Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3 Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3 Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3 Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4 Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5 Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5 Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6 10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282 et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de l'utilisation de la machine. Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement réel de manière légèrement différente. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 362/282/222 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-5 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Information de licence Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 362/282/222 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 362/282/222 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective licensee(s). NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents, copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-9 1.3 A propos de ce manuel Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222. Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des noms de produit, etc. Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants. Structure du Guide Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants. Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Fonctions Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Chapitre 5 Scanner IP Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes Chapitre 10 Annexe Notation Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou 362/282/222 Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus sont mentionnés tous ensemble Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Images présentées De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été installé. Précautions d'utilisation Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de ces fonctions. - Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une ligne téléphonique normale. - Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas être utilisés. - L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic Internet/Intranet. - En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de pages ou d'images. Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé. - Emission par lots - Réception d'appel sélectif - Emission d'appel sélectif - Emission de numérisation rapide - Emission du mot de passe - Copie à distance - Emissions de boîtes confidentielles - Inscription au bulletin - Composition mains libres - Interrogation à distance du bulletin - Réglage "Pas de réduction" 2 Remarque L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-11 Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées. - Réglages de la qualité - Réglages de la densité - Réglage du Format Original - Rapport d'émission - 2en1 - Emission recto-verso - Tampon (en option) - Informations relatives à l'identifiant* - Emission prioritaire - Émission différée - Emission rotative* *Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par Internet et par adresse IP 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 362/282/222 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax Internet. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement des documents dans des boîtes. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel) Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur l'utilisation du scanner IP. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-13 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option est installé. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 362/282/222 1.5 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à exécuter. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-15 ? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir que les résultats souhaités sont atteints. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Fonctions Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-3 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la page 3-3. Intranet AdresseIP Terminal Fax (Même type d’unité que cette machine) 2 Fonctions 2-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2.2 Scan vers PC Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé. Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les données peuvent être enregistrées. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. - S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner IP pour enregistrer les données. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la page 4-3. Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-5 Intranet Ordinateur client 2 Fonctions 2-6 bizhub 362/282/222 2.3 Scanner IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré. Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton de numérisation. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. - Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par l'administrateur. Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-7 2.4 Relais IP Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local. Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne téléphonique. Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 6, "Opérations Relais IP" à la page 6-3. Terminal Transmission de télécopie de télécopie Ligne Téléphonique Machine de relais Machine d'où part la commande 2 Fonctions 2-8 bizhub 362/282/222 2.5 PageScope Web Connection L'ordinateur peut être utilisé pour vérifier l'état d'émission/d'impression de la machine et si oui ou non la télécopie est imprimée. Différents éléments peuvent en outre être enregistrés, à l'exemple de boutons à touche unique. PageScope Web Connection dispose d'un mode pour les opérations exécutées par les utilisateurs communs et d'un mode pour celles exécutées par l'administrateur. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 7, "Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection" à la page 7-3. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-3 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un destinataire est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ou un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Ajouter un destinataire" à la page 3-29. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-6 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-8 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-9 3.2 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm.]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-10 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode email]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode email, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" or "11 × 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-11 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-12 bizhub 362/282/222 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-13 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-15 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-16 bizhub 362/282/222 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-17 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'impression pour les informations d'émission et appuyez ensuite sur [Sélection Identifiant]. 4 Sélectionnez l'identifiant, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. DE : NEWYORK Des données d'image ont été jointes à l'e-mail. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-19 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [Annul.]. ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-23 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-24 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-26 bizhub 362/282/222 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-27 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : la résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 bizhub 362/282/222 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP Si une télécopie par adresse IP est envoyée à cette machine, la réception et l'impression en sont automatiques. Il faut tout d'abord spécifier l'adresse IP de cette machine sur l'écran Paramètres réseau. ! Détails La méthode de réception spécifiée sur l'écran Paramètres fax (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1) ne s'applique que si la télécopie est reçue par le biais d'une ligne téléphonique ordinaire. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas dans le cas de la réception d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-29 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. Taille Emission (max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-31 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-32 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Suite]. 8 Tapez l'adresse IP du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-33 9 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode e-mail]. 10 Sur l'écran mode E-mail, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-37 Donner un nom à un index Pour faciliter la recherche du bouton de numérotation 1-touche désiré, vous pouvez classer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche dans des index que vous appellerez par exemple, "Bureaux" ou "Clients". ! Détails Le nom d'index entré peut contenir huit caractères au maximum. Il est possible d'enregistrer 36 index et 15 boutons de numérotation 1-touche au maximum dans chaque index. Pour nommer un index 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 3 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur [Index]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton d'index à programmer. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-38 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom d'index, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-39 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique Si les fonctions utilisées lors de l'émission sont enregistrées avec les informations relatives au destinataire, une émission peut avoir lieu avec les paramètres enregistrés en appuyant tout simplement sur un bouton. C'est ce que l'on appelle programmes de courrier électronique. Ceux-ci sont pratiques quand il s'agit d'envoyer une émission à un destinataire spécifique et avec des paramètres spécifiques. ! Détails Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes mail. Cependant, le nombre total de boutons de numérotation 1-touche et de programmes de courrier électronique est limité à 540. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 300 destinataires avec un seul programme de courrier électronique. Certaines fonctions ou paramètres enregistrés dans un programme de courrier électronique peuvent être sans effet en fonction de l'opération effectuée, comme l'illustre le tableau ci-dessous. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction et paramètre, voir la page appropriée. o : A un effet + : A un effet sous certaines conditions - : N'a aucun effet Fonctionnement Fonction/Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Relais IP Qualité o o o Densité o o o Zoom - - - Réglage du Format Original o o o Sélection Identification o - o Rapport EM o o o 2en1 o o o Emiss. R/V o o o Emission Rotation + - + Priorité EM o o o Param. TX horloge o o o Tampon + + + Sélection Objet - - - Adresse E-mail de réponse - - - Nom du fichier - o - Notification email - - - 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-40 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des opérations suivantes, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Scan vers Email - Scan vers FTP - Scan vers SMB - Scan vers HDD - Fax Internet 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-41 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [Prog. Mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option, a été installé, appuyez sur [Prog. FAX]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-42 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 6 Tapez le programme qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. – Le nom de programme peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher un écran et y sélectionner un programme. Sélectionnez le programme désiré et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Spécifiez de destinataire. – Pour spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur [1-Touche], appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche pour sélectionner un destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour rechercher un bouton 1-touche, appuyez sur [Recherche], spécifiez le destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si aucun destinataire n'est à enregistrer, appuyez sur [Aucune destination]. 8 Appuyez sur [Suite]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-43 9 Appuyez sur [Param.Transmission]. 10 Spécifiez les fonctions à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur [Qualité] pour spécifier les paramètres de "Qualité", "Densité", "Zoom" et "Réglage format orig.". – Appuyez sur [Menu 1] pour spécifier les paramètres pour "Identif. EM", "Rapport EM", "Priorité EM", "Param. TX horloge", "2en1", "Emiss. R/V", "Rotation EM" et "Tampon". – Appuyez sur [Menu 2] pour spécifier les paramètres "Objet", "Adresse E-mail de réponse", "Nom fich.", et "Notification E-mail". 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton 1-touche du programme de courrier électronique que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. Pour effacer le Programme E-mail, appuyez sur [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur Lorsque Scanner IP est installé, deux utilitaires (scanner IP et ImageReceiver) sont installés. Lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après l'installation des utilitaires, ImageReceiver est lancé automatiquement et son icône s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows. Lors de l'exécution d'une opération Scan vers PC, assurez-vous que ImageReceiver a démarré normalement. L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. ! Détails Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes"), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". Vérifier les paramètres réseau S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que les données ne soient pas envoyées correctement étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifiez une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser Scanner IP. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'installation et l'utilisation du scanner IP et la vérification de l'image numérisée, voir chapitre 5 "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un ordinateur est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être enregistrées sur l'ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer une destination" à la page 4-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinations et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom de la destination Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-11 4.3 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer des données en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données doivent être enregistrées. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-13 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-14 bizhub 362/282/222 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-17 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Réseau *(Rés.) Nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données enregistré. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-19 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Identif. EM" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Rotation Em" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut :Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-23 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-27 Spécifier le nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données joint à un message électronique. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Réseau. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Rés. 3 Tapez le Nom de fichier, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de taper l'extension de fichier. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [NON]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Information sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-30 bizhub 362/282/222 4.7 Enregistrer une destination Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur où les données doivent être enregistrées. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Suite]. 8 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données sont censées être enregistrées, puis appuyez sur [Suivant]. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 10 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement. adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-38 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-3 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses informations que vous devez vous assurer de comprendre avant d'utiliser Scanner IP. Scanner IP et ImageReceiver Scanner IP et ImageReceiver sont décrits dans les lignes suivantes. - Ces utilitaires sont disponibles uniquement lorsqu'un document est numérisé. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une télécopie reçue et transférée vers Scanner IP, voir "Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP" à la page 5-59. - Les données numérisées avec cette machine et envoyées vers un ordinateur sont reçues avec ImageReceiver et enregistrées comme fichier image avec Scanner IP. Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP, vous devez démarrer ImageReceiver. - L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. Normalement, ImageReceiver démarre automatiquement avec le démarrage de Windows. - Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". - Lorsque ImageReceiver commence à recevoir les données image, son icône clignote dans la barre des tâches de Windows. - En fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver spécifiés, les données image peuvent être reçues avec ImageReceiver, même si Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. ! Détails Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être lus avec Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique Avant d'utiliser un scanner IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte de cette machine. Vous devez être particulièrement prudent au cas où Scanner IP est utilisé dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique. Si vous spécifiez une adresse IP incorrecte dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique, ce dernier risque de composer inutilement. En outre et en fonction des paramètres réseau spécifiés sur l'ordinateur, le routeur téléphonique risque de composer inutilement même si l'adresse IP spécifiée est correcte. Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal Si vous utilisez un ordinateur avec modem (ou connecté à un adaptateur de terminal) le modem (ou l'adaptateur de terminal) risque de composer. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "Ne jamais établir de connexion" or "Connecter à chaque fois qu'une connexion réseau n'est pas établie" sous "Paramètres accès modem et réseau privé virtuel" sur l'onglet Connexions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Internet. Pour plus de détails, consulter le manuel du système d'exploitation. Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista Avec Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista, la transmission effectuée par ImageReceiver risque d'être affectée par les fonctions de sécurité avancée (le pare-feu Windows est activé par défaut). Pour utiliser ImageReceiver, cliquez sur [Débloquer] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows. Toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver passent, par défaut, par le pare-feu Windows, et toutes les fonctions ImageReceiver peuvent être utilisées normalement. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-5 ! Détails Si vous avez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] (Toujours bloquer), toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver sont bloquées par le pare-feu Windows, et les fonctions ImageReceiver ne peuvent plus être utilisées. Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver voir "Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver" à la page 5-6. ! Détails Le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows s'affiche lorsque ImageReceiver démarre sous les conditions suivantes. - Lorsque Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista est installé alors qu'ImageReceiver est déjà installé - Lorsqu'ImageReceiver est réinstallé sur un ordinateur équipé de Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista 5 Scanner IP 5-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver Si vous aviez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows, ImageReceiver ne peut plus être utilisé. Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessus pour autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver. 1 Ouvrir le panneau de commande et double-cliquez sur "Centre de sécurité" installé avec Windows XP SP2. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Centre de sécurité Windows, cliquez sur "Pare-feu Windows". 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Pare-feu Windows, cliquez sur l'onglet Exceptions. (Pour Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Autoriser un programme via le Pare-feu Windows".) 4 Dans la liste "Programmes et services", vérifier si "MGS" avec le nom du programme ImageReceiver est enregistré. 5 Cochez la case "MGS". 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. ! Détails Seul un utilisateur jouissant des privilèges de l'administrateur peut modifier les paramètres de pare-feu. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-7 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver Si un serveur de courrier électronique est installé sur un ordinateur équipé d'un scanner IP, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Si Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) et le serveur de courrier électronique sont utilisés sur le même ordinateur, cliquez sur [Change ImageReceiver port] (Changer port ImageReceiver). Toutefois, pour utiliser cette fonction, les paramètres doivent correspondre aux Paramètres port du bouton de numérotation 1-touche utilisé avec Scan vers PC. Le numéro du port peut être vérifié après la modification en cliquant sur "Help", ensuite sur "Computer Information" dans scanner IP. Lorsque vous utilisez Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) sans avoir modifié le numéro du port, arrêtez le serveur de courrier électronique, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. Si le numéro de port a été modifié par inadvertance, désinstallez et réinstallez Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Emissions SSL - Les émissions pour l'utilisation de Scanner IP pour programmer/supprimer des boutons de numérisation peuvent être cryptées. - Si cette machine est configurée pour les émissions SSL, la boîte de dialogue suivante apparaît. Si cette boîte de dialogue apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate] et installez un certificat. Une fois que le certificat est installé, ce boîte de dialogue ne doit pas s'afficher pendant la période de validité du certificat. A l'expiration du certificat, cette boîte de dialogue va réapparaître et il faudra réinstaller le certificat. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des certificats, voir "Installation des certificats" à la page 5-10. - Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour créer des certificats. Pour plus de détails sur la création de certificats, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Si Scanner IP communique avec un périphérique utilisant SSL, l'icône d'un cadenas s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-9 ! Détails Pour que Scanner IP communique avec cette machine utilisant SSL, vous devez installer Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur. Pour la communication SSL, il faut un niveau de cryptage Internet Explorer de 56 bits ou plus. Si le niveau de cryptage n'est pas de 56 bits ou plus, procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site Internet Microsoft et installez-le. Pour activer les émissions SSL et utiliser Scanner IP, utilisez la version 1.55.x ou supérieure de Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Installation des certificats 1 Quand la boîte de dialogue Security Alert apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate]. 2 Cliquez sur [Install Certificate]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-11 3 Cliquez sur [Next]. 4 Sélectionnez la case "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" et cliquez ensuite sur [Next]. 5 Scanner IP 5-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Cliquez sur [Yes]. Le certificat est installé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-13 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires Scanner IP est disponible sur le disque utilitaires livré avec cette machine. Près de 35 Mo d'espace disque dur libre sont requis pour l'installation du scanner IP. Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver Utilisez l'une des méthodes d'installation de ImageReceiver suivantes, en fonction de votre environnement de travail. Méthode d'installation Description Installer comme application Cette méthode est la méthode d'installation normale. Les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP peuvent être utilisés Installer comme service Sélectionnez cette méthode lorsque vous travaillez sur un serveur ou un terminal partagé. L'utilitaire peut être installé sur des ordinateurs équipés de Windows Server 2003, XP, ou 2000. ImageReceiver peut être utilisé même dans le cas où l'utilisateur ne s'est pas connecté ; toutefois, les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés. 5 Scanner IP 5-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Installer les utilitaires 1 Démarrer l'ordinateur et insérez ensuite le CD-ROM. L'installeur démarre. 2 Sélectionnez "Install IP Scanner". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-15 3 Vérifiez le contenu de la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Next]. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer l'installation. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'installation, cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 5 Scanner IP 5-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque La communication avec ImageReceiver est affectée dans un environnement dans lequel Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista est utilisé avec les fonctions de sécurité avancée. Voir "Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista" à la page 5-4. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-17 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) Avant de désinstaller Scanner IP, quittez ImageReceiver. 1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez "Démarrer" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. – Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur "Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes". – Sous Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur "Ajout/Suppression de programmes". 3 Sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Changer/Supprimer]. – Sous Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Désinstaller]. 5 Scanner IP 5-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Cliquez sur [Yes] (Oui). 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer la désinstallation. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-19 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP La fenêtre et le menu du scanner IP sont décrits ci-dessous. Fenêtre principale Cette fenêtre s'affiche au démarrage du scanner IP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Bouton Fermer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Bouton Contrôler réception maintenant Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. 3 Boutons Grandes icônes, Petites icônes, Liste et Détails Cliquez sur ces boutons pour modifier l'affichage des icônes. 4 Bouton Imagettes Cliquez sur ce bouton pour démarrer FenêtreVisionner et afficher une liste d'imagettes pour tous les fichiers TIFF, PDF et JPG dans le dossier ouvert. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. 5 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'ordinateur de destination des données. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. Si la case "Same as Previous" est sélectionnée, le bouton sera programmé avec les mêmes paramètres que le bouton précédemment programmé. Si une machine n'est pas connectée, son illustration est floue. 5 Scanner IP 5-20 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Bouton [Delete Scanner Key] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. 7 Case "Save folder as a key" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est automatiquement créé lorsqu'un bouton de numérisation est programmé. 8 Case "Delete the key after image is saved" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé dès l'enregistrement de l'image numérisée dans un dossier. 9 Case "Delete the key on exit" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé lorsque vous quittez Scanner IP. 10 Barre de menus Cliquez sur les commandes des menus pour spécifier divers paramètres. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commandes disponibles" à la page 5-21. 11 Barre d'état Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de l'application. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-21 Commandes disponibles Les commandes des différents menus sont décrits ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Menu Commande Description 1 File View file Sélectionnez cette commande pour visionner le fichier image sélectionné. New folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour créer un nouveau dossier dans le dossier affiché. Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour supprimer le fichier ou le dossier sélectionné. Rename Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le nom du fichier ou du dossier sélectionné. Exit Sélectionnez cette commande pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Edit Cut Sélectionnez ces commandes pour sélectionner, déplacer ou copier les fichiers ou les Copy dossiers. Paste Select All 3 View Large Icons Sélectionnez ces commandes pour changer l'affichage des icônes. Small Icons List Details Thumbnails Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les imagettes des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. Refresh Sélectionnez cette commande pour mettre à jour l'affichage des fichiers et des dossiers. 4 Go To Saving folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le dossier où les données ont été enregistrées. 5 Scanner IP 5-22 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner Scanner Key Registration Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer un bouton de numérisation sur la machine. Scanner Key Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. Reg. Same as Previous Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer le bouton avec les même paramètre que le bouton précédemment programmé. 6 Image Check Check now Sélectionnez cette commande pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. Automatic Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle automatique de la réception des données numérisées. Manual Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle manuel de la réception des données numérisées. No. Menu Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-23 7 Settings Connection Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier l'adresse IP de la machine. Image Folder Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel l'image est enregistrée. 2 Remarque Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. Viewer Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer la visionneuse ouverte depuis Scanner IP. Sort Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document))" à la page 5-27. Divided Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. Receive Notify Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Selected folder as saving location Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme destination pour l'enregistrement. Configure Arrival Notification Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme dossier de notification pour la réception de notifications sur l'ordinateur. Show dialog after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher un message de notification de la réception de l'image. Notify other PC after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour envoyer une notification informant un ordinateur différent de la réception de l'image 8 Aide Computer Information Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur et le port de ImageReceiver. Help Topics Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le menu Aide du scanner IP. About This Product Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les informations sur la version du scanner IP. No. Menu Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation sur la machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 7 9 10 14 15 11 13 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Scanner Key Name" Entrez le nom du bouton de numérisation qui s'affichera sur l'écran tactile de la machine. Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est créé sur l'ordinateur. 2 Champ "Scan Area" Sélectionnez la surface à numériser. Si "Auto Detect" est sélectionné, la zone de numérisation est automatiquement déterminée conformément au format du document. 3 Champ "Quality" Sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation. 4 Curseur "Contrast" Spécifiez la densité de la numérisation. 5 Case "Drop Out Color" Cette rubrique n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-25 6 Champ "File Type" Sélectionnez "TIFF" ou "PDF" pour le format dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. 7 Paramètre "B/W Coding Method" Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR" comme méthode de codage pour l'enregistrement des fichiers. Certaines images ne peuvent pas être visionnées sur l'ordinateur ; cela dépend du codage. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "MH" pour augmenter la possibilité de visionnage de l'image. La taille des données codées dépend des données image ; toutefois, les données MH sont généralement plus importantes que les MMR. 8 Paramètre "Specify File Name" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer les données image avec le nom de fichier spécifié. "No" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer le fichier avec un nom composé du nom du périphérique et de la date de numérisation de l'image. 9 Champ "File Name" Entrez le nom avec lequel le fichier sera enregistré si "Specify File Name" est réglé sur "Yes". 10 Champ groupé "2in1" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer un document de deux pages sous la forme d'une image numérisée d'une page. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si un introducteur automatique de document est utilisé. 11 Champ groupé "Original" Sélectionnez si le document est recto ou recto-verso. Si vous sélectionnez "2 sided", l'emplacement de la marge de reliure et le sens du document peuvent être spécifiés. 12 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement des données. 13 Champ groupé [Automatic Print] Si "Yes" est sélectionné, "Automatic Print Settings" devient disponible dans ImageReceiver. 14 Bouton [Printer Setting] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Printer Setting. Ce bouton est disponible quand "Automatic Print" est réglé sur "Yes". 15 Bouton [Default] Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, tous les paramètres retournent à leurs valeurs par défaut. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) 2 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation programmé est automatiquement créé. Lors de l'envoi d'une émission Scan vers PC depuis cette machine, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le même nom que la destination du bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Si une émission est envoyée avec l'adresse entrée directement, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le nom "(Input)". Cette case est connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi de l'image depuis cette machine. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)) 1 2 3 5 4 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 3 Case "Sort by FAX information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont triées, par exemple à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire du fax, puis enregistrées dans un dossier. 4 Liste "FAX Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations fax à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. 5 Case "Create new folder" Si vous cochez cette case, le document (les données image) est enregistré dans un nouveau dossier créé à partir des informations de l'expéditeur s'il n'existe aucun dossier créé avec les informations de l'expéditeur du document reçu. 5 Scanner IP 5-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document envoyé vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Sender Information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont enregistrées dans un fichier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur (nom utilisateur ou nom de compte) du document envoyé. 3 Champ "Sender Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations expéditeur à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. Si aucun compte ne doit être spécifié, définir "Group Name" "Public". 4 Case "Create new folder by Communication mode" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec le numéro correspondant au mode de communication du document envoyé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-29 5 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 6 Case "Create new folder by TX Destination Information" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur du document envoyé. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de spécifier les paramètres de division et d'enregistrement de documents numérisés. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Divide a scanned document to save" Si vous cochez cette case, un document numérisé peut être divisé et enregistré dans des fichiers séparés. Un document à diviser et enregistrer peut être numérisé en une étape. 2 Paramètre "Divide by short separator" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de longueurs différentes numérisé, ces pages sont identifiées comme intercalaires, et le document est divisé par ces intercalaires et enregistré dans des fichiers différents. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les côtés gauches des pages (marges) soient alignés. Les formats des pages pouvant être mixées ne sont soumis à aucune restriction. Voir "Formats papier originaux mixtes". Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 3 Case "Files separator" Si vous cochez cette case, les pages insérées comme intercalaires sont également enregistrées comme données image. 4 Paramètre "Divide by width" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de largeurs différentes numérisées, les pages de largeur identique sont enregistrées dans un fichier séparé. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les bords supérieurs des pages (bords orientés vers l'arrière de la machine) soient alignés. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 5 Paramètre "Divide document as single pages" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné, chaque page du document numérisé est enregistrée dans un fichier séparé. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Destination de l'enregistrement Un ordinateur différent peut être notifié lors de la réception d'une image dans un dossier spécial. Dans le cas présent, sélectionnez le dossier de destination dans lequel l'image est reçue et l'autre ordinateur notifié. 2 "Notify List" Affiche les informations sur la destination de notification spécifiée pour le dossier sélectionné. Une icône floue à proximité du dossier indique la destination de notification est définie pour un dossier conteneur. 3 Bouton [Add] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ajouter une destination de notification. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui recevra la notification, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Si un numéro de port est spécifié, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro de port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). 5 Scanner IP 5-32 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour éditer ou changer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Edit] n'est pas disponible. 5 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Delete] n'est pas disponible. 6 Case "Apply to Sub-Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres de notification s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 7 Bouton [Test] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour envoyer une notification test à la destination de notification sélectionnée. Le message suivant s'affiche sur l'ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. ImageReceiver doit démarrer sur une ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. En outre, une notification de test ne peut pas être envoyée vers une destination de notification spécifiée comme dossier conteneur (icône floue). No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-33 FenêtreVisionner Si vous aviez cliqué sur l'affichage imagettes, une image réduite de toutes les images enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné s'affiche. Cliquez sur une image pour visionner le fichier. 2 Remarque Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être affichés. Il se peut que les images créées avec un périphérique autre que cette machine (par ex. un ordinateur) ne s'affichent pas. No. Description 1 S'affiche lorsque le fichier contient plusieurs pages. Cliquez sur la barre pour changer de page. 1 5 Scanner IP 5-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 1 2 3 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 2 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. 3 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Paper Select Method" Spécifiez la méthode de sélection du papier pour l'impression automatique. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Selected Paper", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation spécifiée dans cette boîte de dialogue, sans tenir compte de la taille de l'image. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation correspondant à celle de l'image, sans tenir compte des paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue. Si vous sélectionnez "Select When Printing", la boîte de dialogue Print Select s'ouvre avant l'impression. "Select When Printing" n'apparaît pas si ImageReceiver avait été installé en tant que service. 2 Case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée agrandie/réduite pour s'adapter au format du papier. 3 Case "Minimal" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée en taille réduite pour ne perdre aucune partie de l'image. 5 Scanner IP 5-36 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est pivotée avant l'impression quand l'orientation de l'image diffère de cette du papier. 5 Paramètre "Position" Sélectionnez comment les images sont disposées sur le papier lors de l'impression. 6 Champ "Paper Size" Sélectionnez le format du papier. Les formats de papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupés sous forme de liste. 7 Paramètre "Orientation" Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'impression. 8 Champ "Paper Source" Sélectionnez la méthode d'alimentation du papier. Les méthodes d'alimentation papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. 9 Champ "Copies" Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Spécifiez un nombre ne dépassant pas le nombre maximal de copies que vous pouvez spécifier avec l'imprimante sélectionnée. 10 Bouton [Properties] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher les propriétés de l'imprimante sélectionnée. 11 Champ "Resolution" Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. Les résolutions utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-37 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver Icône ImageReceiver Après l'installation du scanner IP, l'icône ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si cette icône ne s'affiche pas, l'ordinateur ne peur pas recevoir l'image numérisée. L'icône change comme illustré ci-dessous, en fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver. Icône Description Une image est ouverte dans Scanner IP. (verte) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver. (bleue) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver (si l'utilitaire a été installé comme service). (bleue) 5 Scanner IP 5-38 bizhub 362/282/222 Commandes ImageReceiver Avec le bouton droit de la souris, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches pour afficher un menu. 1 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 10 No. Commande Description 1 Save received images Si cette commande est cochée, les données images sont ouvertes dans ImageReceiver au moment de la réception, même si Scanner IP n'a pas encore démarré. Si vous cliquez sur "Enregistrer les images reçues" un message permettant de confirmer si oui ou non le paramètre spécifié dans Scanner IP ou dans ImageReceiver doit être accepté s'affiche. Pour accepter le paramètre, cliquez sur [Oui]. 2 Automatic Print Settings Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings" à la page 5-41. 3 "Settings for saved images"–" Image Folder Setting" Cliquez sur cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel les données image sont enregistrées. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. 4 "Settings for saved images"–" Sort Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)" à la page 5-26. 5 "Settings for saved images"–" Divided Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. 6 "Notify Settings"–"Receive Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-39 7 "Notify Settings"–"Error Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Error Notify Settings. Pour envoyer des notifications d'erreur à un autre ordinateur, sélectionnez la case "Error notify to other PC", tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur censé recevoir la notification et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour spécifier un numéro de port, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro du port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). Cliquez sur [Test]. Une notification test est envoyée au destinataire spécifié. 8 "Receive Settings"–"RX Display" Si cette commande est cochée, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour notifier l'utilisateur de la réception de données image. Il est possible de démarrer la visionneuse depuis la boîte de dialogue Confirmation de l'image et de voir le dossier spécifié comme destination d'enregistrement des images. Il est en outre possible de supprimer ou de renommer des fichiers de données image dans cette boîte de dialogue. No. Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-40 bizhub 362/282/222 9 "Receive Settings"– "Connection Filter" Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Connection Filter (Filtre de connexion). Si vous cochez la case "Filter", vous pouvez restreindre la destination de la connexion en cliquant sur [Add] pour enregistrer une adresse IP. Sur la liste "Allowed IP Address", enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui reçoit les notifications envoyées entre cette machine et l'ordinateur. Si vous cochez la case "Display Received Image Notify" la notification de réception de l'ordinateur est reçue à partir d'un ordinateur différent. Si la case "Display Error Notify" est sélectionnée, les notifications d'erreur informatiques provenant d'un autre ordinateur sont reçues. 10 Help Affiche le menu Aide de ImageReceiver, les informations relatives à sa version, le journal de réception et le journal d'erreurs. No. Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 6 2 3 4 5 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Liste "Folder For Printing" Cette liste montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Si la liste comporte plusieurs dossiers, les paramètres d'impression sont prioritaires, en commençant par le haut. Cliquez sur [Up] et [Down] pour spécifier la priorité des dossiers d'impression automatique. 2 [Add] Bouton Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers d'impression automatique. 3 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des dossiers d'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 5 Bouton [Copy] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez reproduire les paramètres pour le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 6 Champ "Print Settings" Ce champ contient les paramètres du dossier figurant sur la liste "Folder For Printing". 5 Scanner IP 5-42 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Folder" Ce champ montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour sélectionner un autre dossier, cliquez sur [Browse] et sélectionnez le dossier voulu. 2 Case "Apply to Sub- Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres d'impression automatique s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 3 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 5 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-43 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation Fonctionnement général Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour numériser à l'aide du scanner IP. 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) 2 Programmez un bouton de numérisation. (depuis l'ordinateur) 3 Numérisez le document. (depuis la machine) 4 Visionnez l'image numérisée. (depuis l'ordinateur) 5 Quittez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) Démarrer Scanner IP 1 Cliquez sur "Démarrer", allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite sur "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "Scanner IP". 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK]. – Si l'adresse IP de la machine est déjà spécifiée, vous pouvez sauter cette étape. La fenêtre principale s'affiche. 5 Scanner IP 5-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation machine à partir du scanner IP, transférez-les ensuite vers la machine et enregistrez-les comme bouton de numérisation. Assurez-vous que ImageReceiver est en marche. 0 Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). 0 Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si six boutons ont déjà été programmés, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] pour afficher "Scanner Key Registration". 1 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-45 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 5 Scanner IP 5-46 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. – Pour vérifier l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur "Help", puis sur "Computer Information". Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-47 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus] sur le panneau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-48 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Le document est numérisé et envoyé à l'ordinateur spécifié. Si vous aviez spécifié "Show dialogue after received", une boîte de dialogue indiquant que les données ont été reçues s'affiche à l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-49 Visionner l'image numérisée 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel les données sont enregistrées, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier image. Le logiciel relié au fichier démarre et l'image est affichée. ! Détails Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le même nom que le bouton. Si vous aviez sélectionné [Thumbnails], une image réduite des fichiers TIFF et PDF enregistrés dans le dossier ouvert peut être visionnée. Cliquez sur une imagette pour ouvrir la FenêtreVisionner et pour visionner les images. 5 Scanner IP 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-51 3 Spécifiez le nom de la touche Scanner dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres "Scan Area", "Quality" et "Contrast". 5 Sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" et cliquez ensuite sur [Printer Setting]. 5 Scanner IP 5-52 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting" à la page 5-34. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-53 9 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-54 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé pour l'impression automatique. – Appuyez sur le bouton du même nom que celui enregistré à partir de l'ordinateur. – Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). Le bouton apparaît en évidence. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. ! Détails Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si le nombre maximal de boutons de numérisation est déjà programmé, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Si cette situation survient, cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran jusqu'à ce que [Scanner Key Registration] s'affiche. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-55 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver 1 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône ImageReceiver et cliquez ensuite sur "Automatic Print Settings". – Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations ImageReceiver" à la page 5-37. 2 Cliquez sur [Add] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-56 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires au champ groupé "Folder Setting" de la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. – Assurez-vous que les paramètres de dossier spécifiés ici correspondent aux paramètres de tri. 4 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-57 5 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 6 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-58 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur spécifié pour l'impression automatique. – Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche" à la page 4-4. – Pour plus de détails sur la programmation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Programmer un bouton 1-touche" à la page 4-30. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. Quitter Scanner IP % Dans le menu "Fichier", cliquez sur "Sortie". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-59 5.6 Autres opérations Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP Les données image reçues peuvent être converties vers des fichiers image TIFF ou PDF pour ensuite être transférées vers Scanner IP sur l'ordinateur. Les étapes suivantes doivent être spécifiées si vous voulez transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Si vous cochez la case "Sort by FAX information" dans l'onglet Réception document de la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur "Sort Settings" dans le menu "Settings" du scanner IP, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de l'identifiant (numéro de téléphone, etc.) pour le document fax reçu. Si les informations sur le destinataire contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans des noms de dossier (\ / : * ? " < > or |), aucun dossier n'est créé à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire. Dans ce cas, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le nom du bouton ou la date. (Si des caractères ne pouvant être utilisés dans un nom de fichier sont utilisés pour enregistrer le nom du bouton, les caractères sont remplacés par "_" (souligner).) Toutefois, si vous ne cochez pas la case "Folder by key name" ou la case "Create new folder by Date", les données sont enregistrées dans le dossier "My Images". Si l'ordinateur de destination du transfert n'est pas en marche ou si ImageReceiver n'a pas encore démarré, le document transféré ne peut pas être reçu. Dans ce cas, le document reçu est imprimé et le fichier image est supprimé après l'impression. S'il est difficile d'identifier le destinataire à partir d'un nom de dossier créé uniquement avec les informations sur le destinataire, par exemple, si les informations sur le destinataire (identifiant) contiennent seulement un numéro de téléphone, il est possible d'ajouter un nom plus facilement identifiable devant les informations sur le destinataire. Pour changer le nom du dossier, cliquez sur "Renommer" dans Windows. Exemple : "Ventes $ 123456789" Entrez le nom comme suit : $ (Assurez-vous d'entrer.) Paramètre Référence de page Pour la gestion de documents F-Code Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Port Traitement Doc. reçus Destination pour faire suivre Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Pour enregistrer l'adresse IP d'une destination de distribution à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche "Enregistrer une destination" (p. 4-30) 5 Scanner IP 5-60 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Les données d'un même destinataire peuvent être enregistrées dans le même dossier, même si le nom du dossier est changé après. Transférer vers Scanner IP Spécifiez les paramètres suivants pour enregistrer les données de document reçues dans le dossier ordinateur spécifié. 1 Dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur vers lequel les données seront transférées. – Sélectionnez Scan vers PC comme mode d'émission. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de transfert de l'écran Gestion de document (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1). – Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de gestion de document, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de tri (onglet Réception document) du scanner IP, spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées. 6 Opérations Relais IP Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-3 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction relais IP. Spécifiez les paramètres suivants si vous voulez utiliser cette machine pour envoyer la commande d'émission d'une télécopie relayée par une autre machine. Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" Réglez "Passerelle TX" sur l'écran Paramètres Réseau (affiché en appuyant sur [Admin. 2] – [Paramètres réseau] – [Paramètres réseau 1]) sur "Restreindre". ! Détails Si vous voulez utiliser cette machine comme machine de relais, définir "Autoriser" sous "Passerelle émission". Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de cette machine comme machine de relais, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Vous pouvez empêcher les émissions incorrectes vers des destinataires non visés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais Spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. Sélectionnez les machines de relais connectées à la ligne téléphonique normale. Pour plus de détails, voir les pages qui suivent. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis le panneau de commande de cette machine, voir "Paramètres relais IP" à la page 8-6. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis PageScope Web Connection, voir "Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)" à la page 7-29. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-4 bizhub 362/282/222 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire" à la page 6-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton une touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire - Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-11 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Si l'adresse du destinataire compte plus de 64 caractères, on peut spécifier l'adresse en combinant des adresses enregistrées sous des boutons 1-touche et une adresse introduite manuellement. Appuyez sur [Num. en Chaîne], et sélectionnez des boutons 1-touche ou entrez une adresse. ! Détails La chaîne de numérotation ne peut servir qu'à un seul destinataire par émission. Dans le cadre de la chaîne de numérotation, l'adresse peut comporter jusqu'à 192 caractères (64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'une adresse introduite manuellement). 2 Remarque Les boutons 1-touche à utiliser dans la chaîne de numérotation doivent être programmés à l'avance. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-12 bizhub 362/282/222 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax Le numéro de fax d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement le numéro de fax. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer un numéro de fax 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-13 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. 7 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. – Cliquez sur "Paramètres relais IP" (page 8-6) à l'écran Paramètres réseau pour enregistrer la machine de relais d'avance. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-14 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-15 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-17 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-19 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-20 bizhub 362/282/222 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-21 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emis. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-24 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-25 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installez, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-27 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-28 bizhub 362/282/222 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Rouleau 2 1 3 5 4 Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-30 bizhub 362/282/222 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. Paramètres station de relais IP Sélectionnez la station de relais. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 8 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-38 bizhub 362/282/222 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-3 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques pris en charge par le serveur HTTP intégré à la machine. À partir d'un navigateur Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. Il est commode de spécifier les paramètres avec l'utilitaire parce que le texte peut ainsi être facilement saisi depuis votre ordinateur au lieu du panneau de commande de la machine. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de fonction de réseau et de numérisation suivante. PageScope Web Connection propose un mode Utilisateur, accessible à tous les utilisateurs, et un mode Administrateur, accessible seulement après introduction du code d'accès Administrateur approprié. Les paramètres suivants peuvent être spécifiés dans chaque mode. Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, l'onglet Lecture se transforme en Fax/Lecture. Paramètre Description Enregistrement adresse 1-touche Programmez les enregistrements 1-touche pour les destinataires du document envoyé en utilisant la fonction de télécopie par adresse IP et les opérations Scan vers PC et relais IP. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Il est également possible de changer le nom d'index. Enregistrement d'un Programme FAX Enregistrer des programmes fax comme enregistrements 1-touche. Contrairement aux enregistrements 1-touche où seuls les destinataires sont enregistrés, il est possible d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation et plusieurs destinataires. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion Administrateur) est réglé sur "Oui", l'onglet Scan (2) est ajouté à la page du mode Administrateur pour que les destinataires 1-Touche puissent être enregistrés, modifiés et supprimés. L'onglet Lecture n'apparaît pas sur la page du mode Utilisateur. Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur) Pour plus de détails sur les autres paramètres réseau requis pour l'utilisation de cette machine, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-5 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Configuration minimale requise ! Détails PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au périphérique. À l'aide d'un navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. 2 Rappel Ne pas utiliser de serveur proxy en cas d'accès à partir de PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Si cette machine a été réglée pour interdire l'utilisation de TCP/IP, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser PageScope Web Connection. Rubrique Environnement Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Pour Windows NT 4.0 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 4.73 ou 7.0 Pour Windows 2000 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows Vista/Server 2008 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 * Avec Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, il se peut que les boutons 1-touche ne soient correctement exportés. Utilisez Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection Vous pouvez accéder à PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre d'adresses, tapez l'adresse IP de cette machine et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Détails Si SSL/TLS est activé, l'URL devient : https:/// Même si "http://" est saisi, l'accès à l'URL sur "https://" est automatique. (Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", SSL est activé de manière forcée.) Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-7 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Si les paramètres d'Authentification Utilisateur ou d'Authentification serveur externe ont été appliqués, la page suivante apparaît. Tapez le Nom Utilisateur et le mot de passe et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Pour obtenir un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, contactez l'Administrateur réseau. Lorsque vous êtes connecté en mode Authentification Utilisateur, la connexion est soumise à un délai ; vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode Administrateur si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant 10 minutes. Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui" ou si des verrouillages d'accès sont spécifiés par l'intermédiaire des paramètres de commutation logicielle, la saisie incorrecte trois fois de suite d'un mot de passe verrouille la machine pour empêcher toute opération. Si cette machine est verrouillée, contactez l'administrateur de la machine. Pour vous déconnecter, cliquez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de la page. Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués, il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le numéro de compte pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Structure des pages La page qui apparaît immédiatement après l'accès à PageScope Web Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur. Tous les utilisateurs peuvent voir cette page. ! Détails Si vous saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ "Mot de passe administrateur", vous pouvez afficher la page administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion en mode Administrateur" à la page 7-10. Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont structurées comme illustré ci-dessous. 7 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 2 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-9 2 Remarque Pour restaurer l'afficheur d'état et des messages, cliquez sur [Actualiser] dans le navigateur. No. Rubrique Description 1 Logo Konica Minolta Cliquez sur le logo pour accéder au site Konica Minolta Web à l'adresse suivante. http://konicaminolta.com 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur le logo PageScope Web Connection pour afficher les informations de version. 3 Champ de connexion mode administrateur Entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter au mode administrateur. 4 Affichage des états Les états des sections Imprimante et scanner de la machine s'affichent sous forme d'icônes. 5 Affichage des messages Si une erreur survient sur la machine, l'état du défaut/de l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur s'affichent. 6 Nom périphérique Affiche le nom du périphérique en cours d'accès. 7 Bouton [Déconnexion] Ce bouton apparaît une fois que vous êtes connecté lorsque les paramètres Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vous déconnecter. 8 Onglets Sélectionnez la catégorie des pages à afficher. Les onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Système • Tâche • Impression • Lecture 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax, en option, a été installé, l'onglet Fax/Lecture apparaît. 9 Menu Liste des informations et paramètres de l'onglet sélectionné. Le menu qui s'affiche varie en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné. 10 Informations et paramètres Affiche des détails du point de menu sélectionné. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Connexion en mode Administrateur Vous pouvez passer du mode utilisateur au mode administrateur. Mais, pour définir des paramètres système ou réseau, vous devez être connecté en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé. 0 En fonction de l'état de la machine, vous pouvez ne pas pouvoir vous connecter en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant une durée de 10 minutes, une temporisation survient et vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode administrateur. 1 Tapez le code d'accès administrateur et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-11 La page du mode administrateur s'affiche. 2 Pour retourner au mode Utilisateur, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations toutes récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les pages de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. En outre, les problèmes suivants risquent de survenir lors de l'utilisation du cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. ! Détails Si vous utilisez le programme avec le cache activé et que le mode administrateur a été désactivé, la page de désactivation risque d'apparaître même si vous réaccédez à PageScope Web Connection. En outre, comme le panneau de contrôle de la machine reste verrouillé et qu'il est inutilisable, il faut redémarrer la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactivez le cache. 2 Remarque Les menus et les commandes peuvent varier en fonction de la version du navigateur Internet. Pour plus de détails, voir l'Aide du navigateur Internet. Avec Internet Explorer 1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur "Options Internet". 2 Sur l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet temporaires". 3 Sélectionnez "A chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. Avec Netscape 1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur "Préférences". 2 Dans le champ "Catégorie" sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur "Avancées", puis sur "Cache". 3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page sur le réseau", sélectionnez "A chaque fois que je visite la page". Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-13 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur) Enregistrer les destinataires de données numérisées comme enregistrements 1-touche. Il est également possible de spécifier le nom d'index. ! Détails Cette machine accepte l'enregistrement de 36 index, chacun pouvant contenir un maximum de 15 boutons 1-touche et Programmes Fax. Vous pouvez enregistrer les types de destinataires suivants. Type Description Emission : PC (Scanner) Permet d'enregistrer un destinataire pour une opération Scan vers PC. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Réception IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une émission par relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Les paramètres suivants sont disponibles sur la page de chaque mode de communication. Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-15 Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Taille Emission (Max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (Max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Si vous aviez sélectionné "TX : Internet FAX (relais IP)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Numéro de destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. STA relai (Station de relais) Sélectionnez la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-17 Donner un nom à un index 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur un nom d'index (centre du tableau). Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom de l'index, puis appuyez sur [Appliquer]. – Ce champ peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. Une liste des index s'affiche en haut de la page. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-19 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index où le destinataire 1-touche est censé être enregistré. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur un enregistrement 1-touche pas encore programmé. – Les enregistrement 1-touche qui ne sont pas encore programmés s'affichent comme "---". 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-20 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Sélectionnez le mode communication à enregistrer, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. 7 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Le destinataire 1-touche est désormais enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-21 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)", "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" ou "Emission : Internet FAX (Relais IP)", vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - Emission : PC (E-mail) - Emission : PC (Scanner) - Emission : FaxInternet (Emission IP) - Emission : FaxInternet (E-mail) - Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) - FAX (G3)* * Vous pouvez spécifier le mode de communication si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire 1 Cliquez sur le champ du destinataire 1-touche à programmer avec une adresse secondaire. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 3 Cliquez sur [Enreg. adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-23 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication pour le destinataire secondaire, et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-24 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifiez les divers paramètres, et cliquez sur [Appliquer]. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. 2 Remarque Le nom qui apparaît à côté de "Nom 1-touche" est le même que celui qui a été spécifié pour le destinataire principal. Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier tous les autres paramètres. Pour supprimer le destinataire secondaire enregistré, cliquez sur [Effacer adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-25 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur le destinataire 1-touche dont les valeurs sont à modifier. – Ceci est normal, car il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un Programme Fax, même par un clic. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-26 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour changer le mode de communication, sélectionnez celui qui convient et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, "Emission : PC (Serveur FTP)" et "Emission : PC (SMB)" n'apparaissent pas. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-27 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez la case du destinataire une touche à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur [Effacer]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-29 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur) Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser Sélectionner une station de relais IP depuis les machines de relais IP enregistrées au préalable. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une station de relais IP, voir "Enregistrer une station de relais IP" à la page 7-32. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Destination de relais IP L'adresse IP de la station de relais actuellement sélectionnée s'affiche. Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Sélectionner]. Port de résultat de relais Entrez le numéro du port qui recevra les résultas. Si vous changez ce numéro, il sera appliqué après l'arrêt et le redémarrage de la machine. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner une station de relais 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Select]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-31 4 Sélectionnez une station de relais enregistrée et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer]. 5 Modifiez les Paramètres de port si cela s'avère nécessaire. 6 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 2 Rappel Si vous modifiez le numéro du port, veillez à éteindre la machine et à la remettre en marche après la spécification des paramètres. Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP ou de modifier ses paramètres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-33 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Enregistrement destination relais IP]. 3 Pour enregistrer une nouvelle station de relais, cliquez dans un champ dans lequel aucune adresse de station de relais n'a encore été enregistrée ("---"). – Pour modifier les paramètres enregistrés, cliquez sur une adresse IP qui s'affiche. – Pour supprimer une station de relais, sélectionnez la case de la station IP à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Effacer]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-34 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de la station de relais, puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-3 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur Les paramètres Gestion Administrateur suivants se rapportent aux informations contenues dans ce manuel. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Liste des paramètres réseau requis Il est recommandé de spécifier les paramètres réseau comme indiqué cidessous afin de pouvoir utiliser les opérations décrites dans le présent manuel. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres réseau autres que ceux disponibles sur l'écran Paramètres relais IP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. o : Requis / : Disponible + : Nécessaire en fonction de l'environnement - : Pas disponible avec l'opération Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Commutation logicielle A utiliser pour spécifier les paramètres de l'appareil. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-4 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Lorsque vous utilisez les opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et de relais IP, ne spécifiez pas de paramètre pour "Nom de domaine propre". Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP Paramètres de base DHCP + + + + Paramètre adresse IP o o o o Masque Sous-Réseau o o o o Passerelle + + + + Nom Domaine Propre - - - - Paramètres Carte réseau + + + + Configuration DNS OUI/NON + + - + Nom hôte + + - + Nom de domaine + + - + Adresse serveur DNS + + - + Nom Equipement Nom Equipement / / / - Configuration SMTP Adresse du serveur SMTP - - - - Adresse E-mail - - - - Nom Utilisateur Authentification SMTP - - - - Mot de passe Authentification SMTP - - - - Configuration POP3 Adresse serveur POP3 - - - - Nom d'utilisateur POP3 - - - - Mot de passe POP3 - - - - Contrôle Réception Auto - - - - Niveau compression prioritaire Mode E-mail / - - - Mode Numérisation - / - - Scanner Settings (Paramètres Scanner) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-5 Rapport d'activité - - - - Impr.En-tête Doc. Reçu - - - - Texte En-tête E-mail - - - - Passerelle Emission - - - + Objet - - - - Paramètres Fractionnement - - - - Ping : spécifiez selon les besoins. Définir le type de cadre : spécifier un type de cadre pour la connexion au serveur NetWare et l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression PC. Paramètres LDAP : spécifier pour effectuer une recherche LDAP. Filtrage IP : spécifier quand vous utilisez la fonction de filtrage IP. Paramètres relais IP Enregistrement station de relais IP - - - o Paramètres station de relais IP - - - o Port de résultat de relais - - - o Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 8.2 Paramètres relais IP Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement Station relais IP]. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-7 4 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro de l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement de la station de relais. 5 Appuyez sur [Adresse relais IP]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la station de relais. – Pour enregistrer la station de relais en utilisant le nom d'hôte, appuyez sur [Nom Host] et tapez ensuite le nom d'hôte. [Nom Host] s'affiche uniquement si "Paramètres DNS" est sur "OUI". 7 Pour modifier le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port], puis entrez le numéro de port souhaité. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Appuyez sur [Nom Domaine]. 10 Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais IP, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-9 Sélectionner une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [STA relais IP définie]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de la station de relais à utiliser et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Port résultat relais]. 4 Entrez le numéro de port où le résultat est censé être reçu, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour changer le paramètre actuel, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le paramètre souhaité. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-11 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) La spécification des paramètres de logiciel ("Sélection Mode", "Sélection Bit" et "Sélection HEXA") permet de modifier différentes fonctions de l'appareil en fonction de vos besoins spécifiques. 2 Rappel Ne changez aucun mode ou aucun bit qui n'est pas indiqué dans ce manuel. 2 Remarque Quand "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "OUI", vous ne pouvez pas modifier les paramètres de commutation logicielle. Paramètres de logiciel SW Paramètre Description Sélection Mode Le paramètre à spécifier est exprimé par un nombre à trois chiffres. Utilisez le clavier pour saisir la valeur. Sélection Bit Les bits sont des nombres à 8 chiffres qui construisent l'état du mode. Vous pouvez spécifier une valeur pour chaque paramètre en attribuant un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) à chacun des bits (0 à 7). Sélection HEXA Spécifiez un paramètre pour chaque mode sous forme d'un nombre hexadécimal (0 à 9 et A à F). Le réglage de bit "0011 0000" est exprimé comme paramètre hexadécimal "30". Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous trouverez ci-dessous des exemples de paramètres pour "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaires) et "Sélection HEXA" (nombres hexadécimaux). Nombre décimal Paramètre "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaire) Paramètre "Sélection HEXA" (nombre hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 16 0001 0000 10 17 0001 0001 11 18 0001 0010 12 19 0001 0011 13 20 0001 0100 14 ··· ··· ··· 252 1111 1100 FC 253 1111 1101 FD 254 1111 1110 FE 255 1111 1111 FF Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-13 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Logiciel SW]. 3 Appuyez sur [Sélection Mode] et servez-vous ensuite du clavier pour taper le numéro du mode. 4 Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. – Pour spécifier les bits, appuyez sur [Sélection Bit], puis sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le bit à changer, spécifiez le bit sur le clavier numérique, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Pour spécifier la valeur hexadécimale, appuyez sur [Sélection HEXA], spécifiez la valeur en vous servant du clavier numérique ou en appuyant sur les touches [A] à [F] et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-14 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour modifier le paramètre pour un mode différent, répétez les étapes 3 et 4. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 7 Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-15 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018) Spécifiez si les émissions de radiodiffusion et la numérotation pour spécifier les destinations sont limitées ou non. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. *1 Interdit quand le bit 6 du mode 477 de commutation logicielle est réglé de manière à ce que les paramètres ne puissent être modifiés qu'en mode Administrateur Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEXA : 01) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ---------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non la numérotation pour spécifier une destination est interdite. *1 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non les émissions de radiodiffusion sont interdites. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1, 0 ---------------------- 01 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) Spécifiez si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : F8) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ----------------------- 1111 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. 0 N'est pas ajoutée p. 3-20, p. 4-20, p. 6-21 1 Est ajoutée 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-17 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) Spécifiez si oui ou non l'émission fax est envoyée après avoir vérifié le signal CSI (ID de l'abonné appelé) de la machine du destinataire. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (HEX : 04) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4 Spécifie si oui ou non la machine effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée si le numéro appelé ne contient pas de caractères spéciaux pour une émission de récepteur vérifié. 0 N'effectue pas d'émission de récepteur vérifiée ---------- 1 Effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie le nombre de chiffres du signal CSI qui sera comparé lors de l'exécution d'une émission de récepteur vérifiée. (Si le numéro appelé ne comporte pas le nombre de chiffres spécifiés ici, une comparaison sera faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro appelé. En cas de comparaison avec un numéro de comparaison utilisant des caractères spéciaux, la comparaison est faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro de comparaison, sans tenir compte du nombre de chiffres spécifié pour ce paramètre.) 0000 Annuler ---------- 0001 1 chiffre 0010 2 chiffres 0011 3 chiffres 0100 4 chiffres 0101 5 chiffres 0110 6 chiffres 0111 7 chiffres 1000 8 chiffres 1001 9 chiffres 1010 10 chiffres 1011-1111 *Ne pas spécifier ce réglage pour cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Elément comparé et réglage du nombre de chiffres comparé dans le signal CSI Exemple : quand le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI est réglé sur 6 et qu'un signal CSI de 10 chiffres est reçu Elément comparé Relation de comparaison Fonctionnement Numéro de téléphone du destinataire Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue en fonction du réglage de nombre de chiffres comparé au signal CSI. (avec un numéro appelé de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 6 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro appelé. (avec un numéro appelé de 4 chiffres, le chiffre 4 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Numéro de comparaison Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 10 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 11 chiffres ou plus, le chiffre 11 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Par conséquent, comme le signal CSI ne contient que 10 chiffres, il ne coïncidera pas, ce qui provoquera une erreur d'émission.) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-19 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) Spécifiez l'identification de la télécopie directe ou le transfert de documents fax reçus par adresse IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 18) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 000110 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si le nom du périphérique de l'identifiant ou l'adresse IP est ajouté à la ligne Objet lors du transfert d'un document fax reçu par adresse IP. 0 Le nom du périphérique est prioritaire ---------- 1 L'adresse IP est prioritaire ---------- 0 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) Spécifier comment les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : D0) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie où les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe et d'opérations de relais IP. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 5 Pour spécifier si oui ou non des informations d'identification sont ajoutées aux documents reçus transférés. 0 Pas d'insertion ---------- 1 Insertion 4 Pour spécifier le mode d'ajout des informations d'identification dans le cas du transfert d'un document reçu. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-21 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366) Spécifier l'écran par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 08) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifier l'écran de saisie de l'adresse par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. 0 Priorité à l'introduction de l'adresse IP p. 4-30 1 Priorité à l'introduction du nom d'hôte 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 001000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) Spécifiez si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP figurent sur le rapport de réception. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEXA : C2) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie la plage valide des mots de passe administrateur. *Sans tenir compte du réglage spécifié pour ce bit, cette machine est configurée pour demander le mot de passe administrateur pour la machine et avec PageScope Web Connection. 1 Le mot de passe administrateur est demandé pour la machine et avec Pagescope Web Connection. ---------- 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si oui ou non les résultats des émissions de document numérisé doivent figurer sur le rapport d'émission. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication 0 Pour spécifier si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP sont indiqués dans le rapport de réception. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-23 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) Spécifiez les paramètres par défaut de la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 80) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, -------------------------- 10000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 2, 1, 0 Pour spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. 000 MH ---------- 001 MR 010 MMR 011 JBIG Autres *Ne pas spécifier d'autres paramètres que ceux mentionnés ci-dessus lors du paramétrage de cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) Spécifiez le délai des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP et l'opération exécutée lorsque le délai se produit. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 40) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Pour spécifier l'opération exécuté en cas de délai du retour des résultats d'émission d'une émission par relais IP. 0 Erreur d'émission ---------- 1 Emission normale 6, 5, 4, 3 Pour spécifier le délais des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP.* 0000 0 minute ---------- 0001 5 minutes 0010 10 minutes 0011 15 minutes 0100 20 minutes 0101 30 minutes 0110 40 minutes 0111 50 minutes 1000 1 heure 1001 2 heures 1010 3 heures 1011 4 heures 1100 5 heures 1101 6 heures 1110 7 heures 1111 8 heures 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-25 * Si le délai spécifié est court, par exemple 5 ou 10 minutes, l'état d'un document en attente d'envoi à partir d'une machine de relais ou l'heure d'émission G3 de la machine de relais et du destinataire risquent de provoquer un délai (erreur d'émission). 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCP/IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de LPD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un port RAW est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SLP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de Scan vers FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-27 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un serveur FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SNMP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 ---------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'impression SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de la télécopie G3 est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers HDD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-29 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers E-Mail est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax Internet est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de relais IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax par adresse IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. Spécifiez si oui ou non les adresses Fax peuvent être enregistrées et si les rapports peuvent être imprimés par des utilisateurs et spécifiez si les informations de numérotation 1-Touche doivent figurer sur les écrans et les rapports. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-31 Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Scanner) est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si les paramètres d'enregistrement des adresses Fax ou d'impression des rapports peuvent être spécifiés par l'utilisateur ou uniquement par l'administrateur. 0 Les utilisateurs peuvent aussi spécifier les paramètres. ---------- 1 Les paramètres peuvent uniquement être spécifiés en mode Administrateur. 5 Spécifie si oui ou non les noms de destinataire sont affichés (sans affichage du numéro de fax ou de l'adresse) sur les rapports et les écrans de Liste Travaux et lors de la pression sur un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. *1, *2 0 Affichés ---------- 1 Non affichés 4 ----------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCPSocket est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-32 bizhub 362/282/222 *1 Si le bit 6 est réglé sur "1", les paramètres ne s'appliqueront pas si le bit 5 est réglé sur "1" (non affichés). Si vous ne voulez pas afficher le numéro de fax ni l'adresse du destinataire, il faut aussi régler le bit 6 sur "1" (paramètres uniquement réglables en mode Administrateur). *2 Si le destinataire est spécifié directement depuis l'onglet Entrée adresse, le destinataire s'affichera, même si vous sélectionnez "1" (non affichés). Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-33 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. Sélectionnez s'il faut supprimer ou non le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur ou le caractère à la gauche du curseur. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 2 Remarque Réglage par défaut : 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. 0 Supprime le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur p. 10-5 1 Supprime le caractère à la gauche du curseur 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 ---------------------- 0000000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) Spécifiez s'il faut ou non procéder à l'authentification utilisateur seulement en cas de pression sur la touche [Fax/Scanner] ou [Scanner plus]. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le réglage Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. 2 Rappel Ne pas spécifier de réglages pour le mode 479 autres que ceux décrits dans "Spécifier le réglage". ! Détails Si l'authentification utilisateur se limite aux fonctions de Numérisation, appuyez sur [Authentif. cpte/utilis] dans l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1 et sélectionnez ensuite "Serveur externe" comme méthode d'authentification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres d'authentification serveur externe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ---------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie s'il faut ou non limiter l'authentification aux fonctions de Fax et de Numérisation. 11001 Limitée ---------- 00000 Illimitée 9 Localisation de pannes Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-3 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran Si l'écran suivant apparaît, procéder à l'opération décrite ci-dessous. L'administrateur est connecté sur l'appareil à partir d'un ordinateur du réseau. Attendez que l'administrateur ait terminé son opération et se soit déconnecté. Si l'administrateur quitte le navigateur sans se déconnecter, l'administrateur doit se connecter à nouveau avant de se déconnecter. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-4 bizhub 362/282/222 9.2 Codes d'erreur Si une erreur s'est produite au cours de l'émission, un code d'erreur s'affiche dans la Liste des tâches ou dans un rapport. Procédez aux opérations décrites ci-dessous. Opérations Scan vers PC Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX L'adresse IP spécifiée par le destinataire est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP du destinataire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver. Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-5 Opérations de scanner IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion". Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion", spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations relais IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède E53XXX Emission impossible parce que le destinataire spécifié pour l'émission passerelle est incorrect. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. E65XXX Une tentative d'envoi de données ne pouvant pas être envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle a été faite. Une tentative d'envoi de message électronique avec un fichier joint dans un format autre que TIFF-F ou contenant du texte dont une ligne comporte plus de 1000 caractères, a été faite. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. EBXXXX Impossible de recevoir les données envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle. Vérifiez si le serveur de courrier électronique est en mesure d'émettre et si les paramètres réseau sont corrects. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-7 9.3 Localisation de pannes Ci-après la description de quelques problèmes possibles et leurs solutions. Télécopie par adresse IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. Les connexions sont incorrectes. Vérifiez le témoin LED sur le hub et contrôlez les raccordements. Un temps mort s'est produit en fin de réception en raison de la taille trop importante des données image. • Augmenter la valeur de temps mort en fin de réception. • Réduire la taille des données image et procédez une nouvelle fois à l'émission. Les paramètres nécessaires au périphérique ne sont pas enregistrés. Spécifiez les paramètres réseaux nécessaires. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. Autres origines Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations Scan vers PC Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-9 Opérations de scanner IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les paramètres ne sont pas spécifiés correctement dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Vérifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. Deux cartes LAN sont installées. Cette configuration ne peut pas être utilisée si deux cartes LAN sont installées. Changez l'ordre de priorité dans les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur (Windows). L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Un autre programme de courrier électronique a été lancé. Quittez le programme de courrier électronique. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si la résolution de l'image est haute, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant de procéder à la numérisation. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Le message "Erreur de connexion à la machine" s'affiche. La machine n'est pas en marche. Mettez la machine en marche. L'adresse IP du périphérique entrée dans Scanner IP est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP. Le paramètre TCP/IP de l'ordinateur est incorrect. Vérifiez les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de TCP/IP à partir de cette machine est interdite. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur n'est pas connecté à un réseau. Vérifiez les connexions réseau de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, aucun certificat n'est installé. Installez un certificat. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, vous utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer antérieure à 5.0. Utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieure. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, le niveau de cryptage pour Internet Explorer est inférieur à 56 bits. Procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site de Microsoft et installez-le. Un message Security Alert s'affiche. Installez un certificat. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver. Voulez- vous démarrer ImageReceiver ?" s'affiche. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-11 Le message "ImageReceiver détecté par XXX" s'affiche. Un autre logiciel utilise ce port. • Le serveur de courrier électronique et Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés simultanément. Ne démarrez pas le serveur de courrier électronique. En outre, si un autre logiciel en est la cause, quittez le logiciel qui est la source du problème. • suivez les instructions pour le changement de port. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver." s'affiche. Scanner IP ou ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si le problème persiste, désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallez-le ensuite. Le message "Erreur de création de fichiers image." s'affiche. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Quittez ImageReceiver, redémarrez-le, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Lorsque vous quittez ImageReceiver, les données reçues n'ayant pas encore été traitées avec Scanner IP sont supprimées. L'ordinateur a été provisoirement soumis à une charge élevée. L'ordinateur n'est pas en mesure d'exécuter des processus complexes lors de la réception de l'image numérisée. Le format du fichier des données reçues est important. Les données reçues ont peut-être dépassé la taille utilisable par cet ordinateur. Réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant une nouvelle numérisation et émission. Il n'existe pas de répertoire de stockage. Créez un répertoire. Le répertoire est à mémoire morte. Activez la fonction d'écriture du répertoire. Le message "Impossible de trouver la clé scanner sélectionnée." s'affiche. Le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine. Vérifiez si le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine et reprogrammez un bouton de numérisation. Bien que le bouton ait été supprimé de la machine, l'icône indiquant que l'émission peut être effectuée s'est transformée en une icône de programmation d'un bouton de numérisation. Supprimez le bouton de numérisation de la machine. Sinon, éteignez et rallumez la machine. Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer clé scanner]. Même si vous aviez cliqué sur [Check now] rien ne s'est produit. Aucun fichier n'a été reçu. Procédez à une nouvelle numérisation. Impossible d'ouvrir les fichiers image. Le fichier n'est pas un fichier image reçu depuis le périphérique. Utilisez une visionneuse compatible avec les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-12 bizhub 362/282/222 L'image du fichier image n'est pas affichée correctement. Affichez l'image dans la visionneuse dans un format réduit. Visionnez l'image avec un taux zoom de 100%. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Numérisez le document à nouveau. Impossible de démarrer Scanner IP. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Scanner IP a déjà démarré. Il est impossible d'utiliser simultanément deux copies de l'utilitaire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Puisque vous avez démarré ImageReceiver pendant la désinstallation précédente, pour ensuite le réinstaller alors que vous n'aviez pas redémarré l'ordinateur, il se peut que ImageReceiver ait été supprimé après le redémarrage. Désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallezle ensuite. Le message "Le nombre de clés scanner a atteint le maximum." s'affiche. Six boutons de numérisation par Scanner IP ont déjà été programmés. Supprimez tous les boutons inutiles. Le message "Le nom de la clé scanner comporte des caractères invalides." s'affiche. Des caractères autres que les caractères standard ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans les noms de boutons. Spécifiez un nom de bouton qui ne comporte que des caractères standard. Le message "Adresse IP incorrecte" s'affiche. Des lettres sont saisies dans l'adresse IP. Spécifiez l'adresse IP dans le format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Le message "Cette commande n'est pas acceptée actuellement." s'affiche. L'émission suivante est exécutée pendant la communication avec le copieur, par exemple, pendant la programmation ou la suppression d'un bouton. Attendre que la connexion actuelle soit coupée (jusqu'à ce que le message "Cette fonction n'est pas disponible actuellement. Réessayez plus tard." disparaisse de la barre des tâches au bas de la fenêtre) avant d'exécuter l'opération suivante. Le message "Erreur d'écriture du fichier image" s'affiche. Il n'y pas assez d'espace dans la destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement ou bien créez plus d'espace libre sur le disque. Il y a un problème de disque ou de destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-13 Le message "Impossible de trouver le dossier image" s'affiche. Le dossier spécifié n'existe pas. • Vérifiez le nom du dossier de stockage. • Changez le nom du dossier de stockage. Le message "Correspondance de l'imprimante illicite" apparaît. Vous utilisez une ancienne version de Scanner IP. Installez la version la plus récente de Scanner IP. Les données ne s'impriment pas automatiquement. Le réglage de l'impression automatique n'est pas spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Pour imprimer automatiquement par numérisation avec un bouton de Scanner IP, sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Les données ne sont pas triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, vérifiez que les données sont triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Le réglage d'ouverture de fichiers dans ImageReceiver n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez "Save received images" dans ImageReceiver. Le message "-impossible d'imprimer la page" apparaît. L'espace mémoire disponible est insuffisant sur l'ordinateur. • Fermez toutes les applications non utilisées et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Changez la taille de la mémoire virtuelle de l'ordinateur et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le format de papier spécifié n'est pas supporté par l'ordinateur. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Select Method" et au champ groupé "Paper Settings". Le message "Echec de l'impression parce que l'imprimante sélectionnée est introuvable" apparaît. L'imprimante spécifiée pour l'impression automatique n'est pas enregistrée. Vérifiez que l'imprimante spécifiée au champ "Printer Name" est bien enregistrée (installée). Vous utilisez la mauvaise imprimante pour l'impression. D'autres paramètres ont un caractère prioritaire plus élevé. Vérifiez la priorité sur la liste "Folder For Printing" dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour l'impression. Le réglage au champ "Paper Select Method" n'est pas spécifié correctement. Vérifiez le réglage spécifié au champ "Paper Select Method". Les paramètres du champ groupé "Paper Settings" ne sont pas spécifiés correctement. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Settings". Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour la numérisation. Spécifiez un réglage à côté de "Scan Area" et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le réglage de rotation automatique de l'image n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez la case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a une perte au niveau des bords sur le résultat de l'impression. Le réglage dédié à la zone imprimable de l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionné. En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords, sélectionnez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Top Left" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords supérieur et gauche, sélectionnez "Center" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat d'impression ne s'imprime pas entièrement sur le papier. Le réglage de réduction de l'image pour s'ajuster au format du papier n'est pas sélectionné. Sélectionnez la case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat de l'impression n'est pas au même format que l'image d'origine. Vous avez sélectionné un papier différent. Sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size" à côté de "Paper Select Method" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. La case "Minimal" est cochée. Décochez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Center" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". Sélectionnez "Top Left" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a un motif (motifs moiré) sur le résultat d'impression. Un motif peut apparaître avec certaines imprimantes. Changez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. L'opération d'impression automatique est lente. Les données d'image sont volumineuses. Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-15 Opérations de relais IP et autres Problème Origine Remède Impossible d'envoyer un fax à partir de cette machine. Le mode de communication pour les émissions par passerelle n'est pas correctement spécifié. Vérifiez les paramètres des émissions passerelle. [Paramètres réseau] n'apparaît pas à l'écran Gestion Administrateur. Le périphérique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Veuillez contacter le S.A.V. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-16 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Annexe Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-3 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP Caractéristiques Scan vers PC Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission Emission d'e-mail : SMTP (IETF RFC2821 et RFC2822) et TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF-F Méthode de codage MH, MR, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP d'un destinataire ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. 10 Annexe 10-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Caractéristiques scanner IP Caractéristiques de relais IP Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de la destination inutile (notification automatique de l'adresse IP envoyée depuis l'ordinateur lors de l'attente de numérisation) : spécifiez les dossiers pour six boutons maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. Rubrique Caractéristiques Stations de relais Huit stations de relais maximum Destinataire Fax Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-5 10.2 Saisir du texte Cette section apporte des détails sur l'utilisation du clavier qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile pour permettre la saisie des mots de passe et l'introduction du texte pour l'enregistrement des destinations 1-touche. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le clavier pour taper des chiffres. La procédure suivante décrit comment entrer les caractères sur l'écran Nom Utilisateur lors de l'enregistrement des utilisateurs pour l'Authentification Utilisateur. Pour taper du texte % Sur le clavier qui s'affiche, appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au caractère désiré. – Vous pouvez aussi taper des chiffres avec le clavier. – Pour taper des caractères en majuscules, appuyez sur [Caps.]. – Pour annuler le mode majuscule, appuyez de nouveau sur [Caps]. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction). ! Détails Pour passer de la saisie de lettres à celle de symboles, appuyez sur le bouton de changement de mode. Pour modifier un caractère du texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur au niveau du caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Supp] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres de commutation logicielle pour changer le mode de suppression des caractères. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse la limite autorisée, le dernier caractère est remplacé par le dernier caractère saisi. 10 Annexe 10-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères Caractères alphanumériques/symboles Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-7 10.3 Glossaire Terme Définition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T Une norme pour Ethernet, connecté via un câble constitué de paires de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse de transmission de 10Base-T est de 10 Mo, celle de 100Base-TX est de 100 Mo et celle de 1000Base-T est de 1000 Mo. Active Directory Un service qui gère toutes les informations comme les ressources matérielles pour les serveurs, les clients et les imprimantes sur un réseau supporté par Microsoft ainsi que les attributs et les droits d'accès des utilisateurs Adresse IP Un code (une adresse) utilisé pour identifier les différents périphériques réseau sur Internet. Comprend au maximum trois chiffres pour quatre nombres, comme 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont attribuées à des périphériques (ordinateurs compris) connectés à Internet. Aperçu Fonction permettant de visionner une image avant d'effectuer une opération d'impression ou de numérisation APOP Abréviation de Authenticated Post Office Protocol. Une méthode d'authentification par mots de passe cryptés, entraînant une plus grande sécurité, comparé aux mots de passe non cryptés habituels utilisé par POP pour récupérer les messages électroniques Auto IP Une fonction d'acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP. En cas d'échec de l'acquisition de l'adresse IP avec DHCP, une adresse IP est acquise à partir de l'adresse 169.254.0.0. Bit Abréviation pour Binary Digit. La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche les données à l'aide de 0 ou 1. BMP Abréviation pour Bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données d'image et utilisant l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde. Client Un ordinateur utilisant les services fournis par un serveur par l'intermédiaire d'un réseau Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation clair/foncé). On dit qu'une image possédant peu de variations clair/foncé possède un faible contraste et qu'une image possédant de fortes variations clair/foncé possède un contraste élevé. Demi-teinte Méthode de production des parties claires et foncées d'une image en variant les tailles des points noirs et blancs Densité Une indication de la quantité de noircissement dans l'image. Désinstaller Supprimer un logiciel installé sur un ordinateur DHCP Abréviation pour Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres de réseau à partir du serveur. Grâce à la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter la duplication d'une adresse et construire aisément un réseau. 10 Annexe 10-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de mise hors tension. DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition des adresses IP supportées à partir de noms d'hôtes dans un environnement réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur un réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôte à la place d'adresses IP difficiles à mémoriser et à comprendre. DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch. (points par pouce). Une résolution utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la résolution est importante. Ethernet Norme de ligne de transmission LAN Extension de fichier Les caractères ajoutés au nom de fichier pour différentier les formats de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image Gradation Les niveaux clairs et foncés d'une image. Plus le nombre augmente, plus la reproduction des variations de luminosité est douce. GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/ Digest MD5 Méthodes d'authentification pour se connecter sur le serveur LDAP. La méthode d'authentification (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5) pour le serveur LDAP diffère en fonction du serveur utilisé et des paramètres du serveur. HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (Navigateur Internet). Vous pouvez échanger des documents contenant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec les informations de forme expressive. IMAP Abréviation pour Internet Message Access Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques avec la fonction de gestions des boîtes électroniques sur le serveur. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent IMAP4 (la quatrième version de IMAP). Installer Installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur. IPP Abréviation pour Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de réception de données d'impression et contrôlant des imprimantes sur Internet dans le cadre d'un réseau TCP/IP. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer des données à des imprimantes dans des zones distantes pour imprimer via Internet. LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Abréviation pour Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Sur un réseau TCP/IP, comme l’Internet ou un réseau Intranet, ce protocole sert à accéder à une base de données de gestion des informations d'environnement et des adresses électroniques des utilisateurs du réseau. Masque Sous-Réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Il sert à identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau supérieurs à l'adresse IP. Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-9 Mémoire Périphérique de stockage pour sauvegarder temporairement les données. Lors de la mise hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non. MH Abréviation pour Modified Huffman. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/10 de leur taille d'origine. MIB Abréviation pour Management Information Base. Lors d'une émission TCP/IP, elle utilise SNMP pour définir le format des informations de gestion pour un groupe de périphériques réseau. Il existe deux formats : le MIB spécifique au fabricant et le MIB normalisé. MMR Abréviation pour Modified Modified Read. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/20 de leur taille d'origine. Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour afficher les pages Internet NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau développé par Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication. Niveaux de gris Forme monochrome d'expression de l'image utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir Nom hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau Numérisation L'opération de numérisation d'un scanner permet de lire une image pendant le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs. La direction dans laquelle les capteurs d'image se déplacement s'appelle le sens de lecture principal et la direction selon laquelle sont disposés les capteurs d'image s'appelle le sens de lecture auxiliaire. Numéro de port Le numéro identifiant le port d'émission pour chaque processus exécuté sur un ordinateur sur le réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Configurée comme 1 octet étant égal à 8 bits. OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur. Par défaut Les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres premièrement sélectionnés lors de la mise sous tension de la machine ou les paramètres premièrement spécifiés lors de la sélection de la fonction. Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau à un autre réseau. Une passerelle modifie également les formats de données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique tel qu'un ordinateur ou un routeur, utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant sur le même réseau LAN PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Sur base du format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour afficher des documents. Terme Définition 10 Annexe 10-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Pïlote Logiciel fonctionnant comme une passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pixel Un pixel d'image. La plus petite unité d'image. POP Abréviation de Post Office Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques sur un serveur de messagerie. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent POP3 (la troisième version de POP). Propriété Informations d'attribut Lors de l'utilisation d'un pilote d'imprimante, vous pouvez spécifier diverses fonctions dans les propriétés du fichier. Dans les propriétés de fichier, vous pouvez vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règles permettant aux ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images et des documents imprimés. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour agir en tant que connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et les différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le système pour les connexions Internet SMTP Abréviation pour Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de transfert de messages électroniques. SNMP Abréviation pour Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de gestion dans un environnement réseau sous TCP/IP. SSL/TLS Abréviation pour Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. Méthode de codage de transfert en toute sécurité de données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau. TIFF Abréviation de Tagged Image File Format. L'un des formats de fichier pour enregistrer les données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".tif".) En fonction du tag indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF simple page Un seul fichier TIFF file ne contenant qu'une seule page Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-11 10.4 Index 2en1 3-16, 3-21, 4-18, 4-21, 6-19, 6-22 A Accès 7-6 Adresse destination 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Authentification Groupe 7-7 Authentification Utilisateur 7-7 B Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 5-42 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Scanner settings 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings 5-26, 5-27, 5-28 Bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-3, 4-4, 6-4 Boutons de numérisation 5-43 C Cache 7-12 Chaîne de numérotation 6-11 Check RX now 5-19 Codes d'erreur 9-4 Configuration requise 7-5 Conflits de ports 5-7 Connection setting 5-23 D Delete scanner key 5-20 Densité 3-14, 4-16, 6-17 Destinataire 3-29, 6-30 Destinataire secondaire 3-36, 4-37, 6-37, 7-21 Destination relais IP 8-6 Désinstallation 5-17 Divided settings 5-23 E Emiss. R/V 3-16, 3-22, 4-18, 4-22, 6-19, 6-23 Emission SSL 5-8 Enregistrement des Programmes Fax 7-3 Enregistrer des destinataires 1-Touche 7-3, 7-13 Entrer des adresses 3-9, 4-11 F FenêtreVisionner 5-33 Fermer 5-19 I Identifiant 3-16, 3-18, 6-19 Image folder setting 5-23 ImageReceiver 5-3, 5-37 Impression automatique 5-54, 5-58 Index 3-37, 7-17 Installation 4-3, 5-14 10 Annexe 10-12 bizhub 362/282/222 M Méthode de codage 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 4-12, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Mode Administrateur 7-10 Modem/adaptateur de terminal 5-4 N Nom de destination 3-30, 4-31, 6-31, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16 Nom du fichier 4-18, 4-27 Notify settings 5-23 Numéro bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-5, 4-7, 6-7 Numéro de destination 6-31, 7-16 Numéro de fax 6-12 Numéro de port 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 P PageScope Web Connection 2-8, 7-3 Param. TX horloge 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-25, 6-20, 6-26 Paramètres de commutation logicielle 8-3, 8-11 Paramètres relais IP 8-6 Paramètres relais IP 7-4, 7-29, 8-3 Paramètres réseau 8-3 Passerelle Emission 6-3 Port de résultat de relais 8-10 Priorité EM 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-24, 6-20, 6-25 Programme de courrier électronique 3-39 Programmer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-31, 4-30, 6-30 Q Qualité 3-12, 4-14, 6-15 Qualité Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 R Rapport d'émission 3-16, 3-20, 3-26, 4-18, 4-20, 4-28, 6-19, 6-21, 6-28 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 Recherche de boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-7, 4-9, 6-9 Relais IP 2-7 Réglage de l'impression automatique 5-50, 5-55 Réglage du Format Original 3-15, 4-17, 6-18 Routeur téléphonique 5-4 S Scan vers PC 2-4 Scanner IP 2-6, 4-3, 5-3 Scanner Key Registration 5-19 Sélectionner les stations de relais 6-31 Sort settings 5-23 Station relais IP 8-9 Stations de relais 6-3, 7-16 T Taille Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 Tampon 3-17, 3-25, 4-18, 4-26, 6-20, 6-27 Télécopie par adresse IP 2-3 Thumbnails 5-19 Transférer 5-59 Type de fichier 4-12, 4-31, 7-14 Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-13 V Viewer settings 5-23 10 Annexe 10-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Guide de l’utilisateur GDI Printer Controller Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur final .......... 1-5 1.2 Explication des conventions............................................................ 1-9 Recommandations de sécurité ...................................................... 1-9 Séquence d'actions ....................................................................... 1-9 Conseils ....................................................................................... 1-10 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-10 1.3 Environnement d'exploitation........................................................ 1-11 Configuration minimale requise ................................................... 1-11 Environnement d'exploitation recommandé ................................ 1-11 1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante ............................................... 1-11 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ................. 2-3 Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres....................................... 2-3 Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression ................................. 2-5 Boîte de dialogue Propriétés.......................................................... 2-7 2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options ..................................................... 2-9 Caractéristiques options .............................................................. 2-10 Mémoire ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Opérations communes................................................................... 2-11 Eléments communs ..................................................................... 2-11 Conf. aisée ................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Onglet Installation .......................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Format doc. original ..................................................................... 2-15 Personnaliser ............................................................................... 2-17 Format papier sortie..................................................................... 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copie............................................................................................ 2-21 Assembler .................................................................................... 2-22 Source papier............................................................................... 2-23 Type de média ............................................................................. 2-24 Méthode de sortie........................................................................ 2-24 Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée............................................ 2-25 Table des matières-2 GDI Printer Controller Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante.... 2-25 Impression depuis la machine ...................................................... 2-27 2.5 Onglet Mise en page ....................................................................... 2-29 Combinaison................................................................................. 2-30 Détails Combinaison..................................................................... 2-31 Impression recto-verso................................................................. 2-32 2.6 Onglet Réglages par page.............................................................. 2-33 Couverture recto........................................................................... 2-34 Source Papier Couverture ............................................................ 2-34 Type de média .............................................................................. 2-34 2.7 Onglet Filigrane ............................................................................... 2-35 Sélection filigrane.......................................................................... 2-35 Créer un nouveau filigrane............................................................ 2-36 Modifier un filigrane ...................................................................... 2-38 2.8 Onglet Qualité .................................................................................. 2-41 Définition ....................................................................................... 2-41 Réglages ....................................................................................... 2-42 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3.1 Opérations d'impression .................................................................. 3-3 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................... 3-3 Témoin Imprimante......................................................................... 3-5 Commencer une opération d'impression ....................................... 3-5 Annulation d'un travail d'impression............................................... 3-6 Utilise l'introducteur manuel ........................................................... 3-8 Mode Eco Energie ........................................................................ 3-10 4 Dépannage 4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur................................................. 4-3 4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur ......................................................... 4-4 4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur ................. 4-5 En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE"....................................... 4-5 Erreurs temporaires ........................................................................ 4-5 5 Spécifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Ce manuel fournit les informations nécessaires à l'utilisation de cette machine comme imprimante GDI. Veuillez prendre connaissance du contenu de ce manuel avant d'effectuer toute opération. En ce qui concerne les précautions relatives à l'utilisation et à la sécurité de cet appareil, veuillez vous reporter au Guide de l'utilisateur livré avec la machine. Rangez en lieu sûr le CD-ROM et le Guide de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent la machine. Marques commerciales et Copyright - Netscape est une marque déposée de Netscape Communications Corporation aux U.S.A. et d'autres pays. - Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. aux U.S.A. et d'autres pays. - Microsoft, Windows, et Windows NT sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux U.S.A. et/ou d'autres pays. - Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux U.S.A. et/ou d'autres pays. - Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. - PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés. Remarque - Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. - Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel utilisateur. - Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. - Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur final VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LA CONVENTION D'UTILISATION CIDESSOUS AVANT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE DU LOGICIEL ("LOGICIEL"), DE LE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. LE FAIT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE, DE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL IMPLIQUE QUE VOUS ACCEPTEZ LEGALEMENT LES TERMES ET LES CONDITIONS CI-DESSOUS. SI VOUS PREFEREZ NE PAS LES ACCEPTER, N'OUVREZ PAS L'EMBALLAGE, ET NE TELECHARGEZ PAS, N'INSTALLEZ PAS ET N'UTILISEZ PAS LE LOGICIEL ; 1. DROITS DE REPRODUCTION ET DROITS LIES A LA PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE Ceci constitue une licence d'utilisation et non un contrat de vente. Develop GmbH ("Develop") détient, ou dispose d'une licence correspondante accordée par d'autres détenteurs ("Concédant de Develop"), les droits de reproduction et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle concernant le Logiciel, et tous les droits et titre de propriété du Logiciel et de toute copie qui en est tirée restent la propriété de Develop ou du Concédant de Develop. en aucun cas, cette convention ne sera réputée transférer en votre faveur un droit de reproduction ou un droit lié à la propriété intellectuelle du Logiciel de la part de Develop ou d'un Concédant de Develop. Le Logiciel est protégé par les lois sur le copyright et par les dispositions des traités internationaux. 2. LICENCE Par la présente, Develop vous accorde une licence non-exclusive et limitée qui vous autorise à : (i) installer et utiliser le Logiciel seulement sur votre ou vos ordinateurs raccordés à un produit Develop pour lequel ce Logiciel a été conçu ; (ii) permettre aux utilisateurs des ordinateurs susmentionnés d'utiliser le Logiciel, à condition que vous fassiez en sorte que ces utilisateurs respectent les termes de cette convention ; (iii) utiliser le Logiciel seulement pour votre activité professionnelle habituelle ou vos besoins personnels ; (iv) effectuer une copie du Logiciel à seule fin de sauvegarde et d'assistance à l'utilisation normale et prévue du Logiciel. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller (v) céder le Logiciel à une partie tierce en transférant avec le Logiciel un exemplaire de cette convention et toute la documentation correspondante, dans la mesure où dans le même temps, (a) vous transfériez à cette tierce partie ou détruisiez toutes vos copies du Logiciel, (b) que cette cession de détention met un terme à votre accord de licence Develop, et que (c) vous vous assuriez que ladite tierce partie a accepté les termes et conditions de cette convention. Si la partie tierce n'accepte pas ces termes et conditions, il ne vous est pas possible de céder une quelconque copie du Logiciel. 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) Sauf avec l'autorisation écrite de Develop, il ne vous est pas permis de : (i) utiliser, copier, modifier, fusionner ou transférer des copies du Logiciel sauf dans les cas prévus dans les présentes ; (ii) démonter, rétro-assembler, rétro-compiler ou analyser de toute autre manière le Logiciel ; ou (iii) donner en licence secondaire, louer à bail ou en location-vente, ou distribuer le Logiciel ou une copie. (iv) enlever, utiliser ou altérer toute marque, logo, mention de copyright ou de propriété, légende, symboles ou étiquettes figurant sur le Logiciel. (2) Vous acceptez aussi de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous une forme ou une autre, en violation des lois et des règles relatives au contrôle des exportations de tout pays. 4. EXCLUSIONS DE GARANTIE (1) Si le Logiciel est fourni sur un ou plusieurs CD-ROM ou autre support permettant le stockage de données numériques (collectivement désigné "Support de stockage"), Develop garantit que le support de stockage est exempt de vices matériels ou de fabrication dans les conditions normales d'utilisation, et ce pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jour à compter de la date où il vous a été livré. A L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES APPLICABLES AU SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE SEULEMENT, CE LOGICIEL VOUS EST FOURNI "EN L'ETAT" SANS AUTRE GARANTIE ; DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE REJETTENT TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION, L'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NON-VIOLATION DES DROITS DES TIERS. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 (2) EN AUCUN CAS DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIENT ETRE TENUS RESPONSABLES DE PERTE DE BENEFICES, PERTE DE DONNEES, OU DE TOUS DOMMAGES INTERÊTS, SPECIAUX, MAJORES, ACCESSOIRES OU CONSECUTIFS RESULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBILITE D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES DOMMAGES INTERÊTS POUR PERTE DE CLIENTELE, PANNE OU DYSFONCTIONNEMENT D'ORDINATEUR, AINSI QUE TOUS DOMMAGES OU AUTRES PERTES COMMERCIALES, MÊME SI DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE ETAIENT INFORMES DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES, OU POUR TOUTE RECLAMATION QUE VOUS PRESENTERIEZ A LA SUITE D'UNE PLAINTE EMANANT D'UNE AUTRE PARTIE TIERCE. (3) L'exclusion de garantie ci-dessous n'affecte pas vos droits réglementaires. Au cas où cette exclusion dans son intégralité n'est pas autorisée par la loi, elle s'appliquera dans toute la mesure permise par la loi. 5. RESILIATION Vous pouvez à tout moment mettre un terme à cette convention de licence en détruisant le Logiciel ainsi que toutes les copies qui en auraient été faites. Cette convention prendra également fin si vous ne respectez pas l'un de ses termes. Dès que cette convention s'éteint pour une telle raison, vous devez immédiatement détruire toutes les copies du Logiciel qui sont en votre possession. 6. NATIONALITE DU CONTRAT Cette convention est régie par les lois du Japon. 7. DIVISIBILITE Au cas où une ou des parties de cette convention seraient jugées illégales, ou nulles et non avenues par un tribunal ou l'autorité administrative de juridiction compétente, cette décision sera sans effet sur les autres dispositions de cette convention, lesquelles resteront en vigueur et applicables comme si les parties déclarées nulles ou illégales n'avaient pas été intégrées à la convention. 8. AVIS AUX UTILISATEURS DE L'ADMINISTRATION U.S. Le Logiciel est un "produit commercial," selon la définition donnée dans le 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Octobre 1995), se composant d'un "logiciel informatique commercial" et "de la documentation logiciel informatique commercial," selon l'acception qui figure dans le 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Septembre 1995). Conformément au 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et au 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4 (Juin 1995), tous les utilisateurs finals de l'administration U.S. devront acquérir le Logiciel accompagné des seuls droits établis dans les présentes. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller VOUS DECLAREZ AVOIR PRIS CONNAISSANCE DE CETTE CONVENTION, L'AVOIR COMPRISE, ET ACCEPTER D'ÊTRE LIE PAR SES TERMES ET CONDITIONS. LES PARTIES NE SERONT LIEES PAR AUCUNE AUTRE DECLARATION OU ENGAGEMENT QUI NE SERAIT PAS CONFORME AVEC LES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DE CETTE CONVENTION. TOUTE MODIFICATION DE CETTE CONVENTION NE SAURAIT ÊTRE EFFECTIVE A MOINS D'ÊTRE ECRITE ET DUMENT SIGNEE PAR LES REPRESENTANTS AUTORISES DE CHAQUE PARTIE. PAR L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE, LE TELECHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL, VOUS RECONNAISSEZ ACCEPTER LES TERMES DE CETTE CONVENTION. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants présentés ainsi indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte présenté ainsi décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Conseils 2 Remarque Le texte présenté ainsi contient des informations utiles et des conseils pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des informations qu'il convient de mémoriser. ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Stop] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. RÉGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-11 1.3 Environnement d'exploitation Configuration minimale requise L'environnement d'exploitation est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser le pilote d'imprimante. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur), Windows Me, ou Windows 98 SE - 128 Mo RAM (Windows XP/Serveur 2003), 64 Mo RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - Port USB compatible USB 2.0 - Lecteur CD-ROM/DVD 2 Remarque Le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas compatible avec Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Environnement d'exploitation recommandé Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 Mo RAM 1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante % Référez-vous au dossier "Installation" sur le CD-ROM. 1 Introduction 1-12 GDI Printer Controller 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles pour l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur sont décrits ci-dessous. 2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Sélectionnez l'imprimante dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (fenêtre Imprimantes sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE), et affichez ensuite la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. Les paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue sont effectifs pour toutes les applications. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). – Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer], et cliquez sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs". – Sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer] pointez sur "Paramètres", et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes". 2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes), sélectionnez l'icône d'imprimante pour cette machine. 3 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez la commande qui permet d'afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. – Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Préférences d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier". – Sous Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier". 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-4 GDI Printer Controller La boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ci-dessous apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour modifier les paramètres pour chaque tâche d'impression, cliquez sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou le bouton [Préférences]) dans la boîte de dialogue Impression qui apparaît quand on clique sur "Imprimer" depuis l'application. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche à partir de la boîte de dialogue Impression n'ont qu'un effet temporaire, et dès que l'on quitte l'application, les paramètres reviendront à la valeur qui figure dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. Grâce à la fonction Configuration aisée, il est possible d'enregistrer et de rappeler selon les besoins un programme contenant des paramètres spécifiés particulièrement. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Configuration aisée, voir "Conf. aisée" à la page 2-12. Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression Les paramètres d'impression peuvent être spécifiés depuis la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Onglet Sous-menu Description Installation Orientation Sélectionnez l'orientation papier du document. Format doc. original Spécifiez le format du papier pour le document. Bouton [Personnaliser] Spécifiez un format papier personnalisé. Format papier sortie Spécifiez le format du papier qui sera imprimé. Si ce format est différent du format document original, l'image sera automatiquement agrandie ou réduite. Zoom Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. Copie Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Assembler Sélectionnez si de multiple copies d'un document de plusieurs pages doit être imprimé par jeux de documents ou par groupe de pages identiques. Source papier Sélectionnez le magasin dans lequel le papier doit être prélevé. Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser. Méthode de sortie Sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. Mise en page Combinaison Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule feuille de papier. Bouton [Détails Combinaison] Des paramètres tels que le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page et l'ordre d'impression peuvent être spécifiés comme détails de combinaison. Recto-verso Sélectionnez si les pages doivent être imprimées sur les deux faces de la feuille. Position de reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure. Réglages par page Couverture recto Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une page sur la couverture. Source Papier Couverture Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier à couverture. Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la couverture. Filigrane Filigrane Sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé pardessus un filigrane (tampon texte). Premier page uniquement Sélectionnez si le filigrane doit être imprimé seulement sur la première page. Bouton [Nouveau] Permet de créer de nouveaux filigranes. Bouton [Edition] Permet de modifier les filigranes. Bouton [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un filigrane. Qualité Définition Pour spécifier la résolution d'impression. Bouton [Réglages] Spécifiez la luminosité et le contraste. A propos - Affiche les informations sur la version du logiciel. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Boîte de dialogue Propriétés Les options installées peuvent être sélectionnées depuis la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Onglet Sous-menu Description Caractéristiques options Caractéristiques options Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins installés. Mémoire Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options % Spécifiez si les options sont ou non installées afin que les options installées sur la machine puissent être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées. 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Caractéristiques options % Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins installés. – Dans la liste "Caractéristiques options", double-cliquez sur les noms des magasins installés afin d'indiquer s'ils sont installés. Double-cliquez une fois encore sur le nom si vous voulez restaurer le réglage "Non installé". Mémoire % Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée. – Cliquez sur [,] à droite de la case "Mémoire", et sélectionnez ensuite la taille de la mémoire installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Opérations communes Cette section décrit les boutons et les fonctions qui sont communs à tous les onglets de la boîte de dialogue. Les boutons affichés à l'écran peuvent présenter un aspect différent selon le système d'exploitation utilisé. Eléments communs Bouton Description Bouton [OK] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Bouton [Annuler] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les réglages spécifiés (et ne pas les appliquer) et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Bouton [Appliquer] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Ce bouton ne s'affiche pas sur l'écran de configuration qui apparaît lorsque l'on clique sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou sur le bouton [Préférences]) dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer de l'application. Bouton [Aide] Ce bouton permet de faire apparaître des informations d'aide sur les réglages actuellement affichés à l'écran. Aperçu Affiche un aperçu du papier spécifié ou indique l'état de l'imprimante. Cliquez sur le bouton situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre d'aperçu pour passer alternativement de la [Aperçu Page] à la [Aperçu Imprimante] et sélectionner l'affichage de l'aperçu. Si la vue [Aperçu Page] a été sélectionnée, un aperçu de la mise en page s'affiche d'après les réglages sélectionnés afin que puisse être vérifié sur cette image le résultat attendu. Si la vue [Aperçu Imprimante] a été sélectionné, c'est une représentation de la configuration de l'imprimante, avec les options, comme les magasins actuellement installés, qui s'affiche. Les magasins papier sélectionnés dans la liste "Source papier" de l'onglet Installation s'affichent en bleu clair. Conf. aisée Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés en tant que programmes pour être éventuellement rappelés ultérieurement. Aperçu Imprimante Aperçu Page 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Conf. aisée Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés comme programmes pour être rappelés lorsque vous voudrez réutiliser ces réglages par la suite. 1 Changez les paramètres du pilote dans les onglets Configuration et Mise en page. 2 Dans la case "Conf. aisée", tapez le nom du programme. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Enregistrer]. Le programme des réglages est enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Remarque Pour rappeler un programme enregistré, il suffit de le sélectionner dans la liste. Pour changer le nom d'un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le programme dans la liste, puis entrez le nouveau nom du programme. Le bouton laisse la place au bouton [Renommer]. Pour changer le nom du programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Renommer]. Pour supprimer un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le programme dans la liste. Le bouton laisse la place au bouton [Supprimer]. Pour effacer le nom du programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Si on sélectionne "Réglage d’usine par default" dans la liste, tous les réglages reprennent leur valeur par défaut. Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. On peut enregistrer un maximum de 31 programmes. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Onglet Installation L'onglet Installation permet de spécifier les réglages concernant le document et le papier sur lequel il sera imprimé. Le nombre de copies à imprimer ainsi que l'orientation de l'image d'impression peuvent aussi y être spécifiés. Orientation % Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer le document selon l'orientation portrait ou l'orientation paysage. Portrait Paysage Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Format doc. original % Dans la liste déroulante, cliquez sur le format papier correspondant au document pour sélectionner le format. Les formats standard suivants sont disponibles. Réglage Format réel Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Enveloppe 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque Si "Hagaki" a été sélectionné, sélectionnez le réglage papier "Hagaki" pour le Magasin 1 depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Pour sélectionner "Hagaki" ainsi que les enveloppes et les formats nonstandard, "Source papier" doit être réglé sur "Auto", "Mag 1" ou "Introd. manuel". Si "Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", seuls les formats "Letter" et "A4" seront disponibles. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Personnaliser Un format papier qui n'apparaît pas dans la liste peut être enregistré comme format personnalisé. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Personnaliser] sur l'onglet Installation. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau]. La boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé s'agrandit pour afficher les paramètres permettant de spécifier le format de papier. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 Dans la case "Nom", tapez le nom du format papier. 4 Dans la case de groupe "Dimensions", spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du papier. – Si vous désirez changer d'unité de mesure pour spécifier le format de papier, sélectionnez le réglage voulu dans la case de groupe "Unité". 5 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit de la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé. Les réglages de format papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé sont masqués. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé. Le format non-standard est enregistré et peut alors être sélectionné dans la liste des formats papier. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Remarque Pour changer la largeur et la longueur d'un format non-standard enregistré, sélectionnez le format dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé, cliquez sur le bouton [Edition], et modifiez ensuite les réglages. Il n'est pas possible de changer le nom. Pour effacer un format non-standard enregistré, sélectionnez le format papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé, et cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. On peut enregistrer un maximum de 32 formats. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Format papier sortie % Sélectionnez le format de papier à utiliser pour imprimer. – Les formats Papier ordinaire sont les mêmes que ceux qui sont disponibles dans la liste "Format doc. original". – Si le format papier est différent du format sélectionné dans la liste Format doc. original, l'image du document sera agrandie ou réduite lors de l'impression de manière à ce qu'elle puisse occuper la totalité de la page du format sélectionné. – Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour l'impression peut être vérifié dans l'aperçu Mise en page. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "Manuel" dans la case groupe "Zoom", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie". Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Disattivo" dans la liste "Combinaison" de l'onglet Mise en page, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie". Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour l'impression. 2 Sélectionnez "Manuel", puis tapez un taux compris entre 25% et 400%, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour spécifier un réglage. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Identique au format Original" dans la liste "Format papier sortie", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Manuel". Copie 1 Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. 2 Tapez un nombre compris entre 1 et 99, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour spécifier un réglage. Réduction Original Agrandissement 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Assembler % Si vous désirez imprimer plusieurs copies d'un même document, sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé par jeux entiers successifs ou par groupes de copies de chaque même page. – Si la case "Assembler" est cochée, le document sera imprimé par jeux entiers successifs. Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", le document entier (de la première à la dernière page) sera imprimé cinq fois. – Si la case "Assembler" n'est pas cochée, le nombre d'exemplaires spécifié sera imprimé en totalité pour chaque page du document. Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", la première page du document sera imprimée cinq fois, puis la seconde cinq fois aussi et ainsi de suite. L'impression s'achèvera lorsque la dernière page aura été imprimée cinq fois. 2 Remarque En fonction de l'application utilisée, la fonction Assembler peut ne pas être applicable. Si la fonction Assembler a été spécifiée dans le pilote d'imprimante, elle ne peut pas être sélectionnée depuis l'application. En outre, si vous spécifiez "1" dans la case "Copie", la fonction Assembler n'est pas disponible. Case cochée Case non cochée Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Source papier % Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier. – Si vous sélectionnez "Auto", c'est le magasin qui contient le papier spécifié dans la liste "Format papier" qui sera utilisé. – Les réglages disponibles diffèrent en fonction des options qui sont installées. – Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "Hagaki" ou un format d'enveloppe ou de papier non-standard dans la liste "Format doc. original", seuls les réglages "Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" seront disponibles. Seuls les réglages "Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" sont disponibles quand "Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", "Papier épais" ou "Enveloppe". Magasin Introd. manuel 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Type de média % Sélectionnez le type de papier qui sera imprimé. – Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe 2 Remarque Il n'est possible de sélectionner un réglage que si "Source papier" est réglé sur "Mag 1" ou "Introd. manuel". Le réglage "Transparent" ne peut être sélectionné que si "Format doc. original" est réglé sur "Letter" ou "A4". Méthode de sortie % Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression. – Les données peuvent être imprimées directement, mais elles peuvent l'être aussi par "Impression verrouillée", un mot de passe étant alors nécessaire pour réaliser l'impression sur cette machine. – Réglages : Impression, Impression verrouillée 2 Remarque Le réglage "Impression verrouillée" n'est disponible que si l'extension mémoire est installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée L'impression du document est subordonné à l'introduction du mot de passe correspondant préalablement spécifié. Le document destiné à être imprimé à partir d'un ordinateur est temporairement enregistré dans la mémoire de la machine, puis sera imprimé dès que le mot de passe approprié est entré sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous désirez imprimer des documents confidentiels. Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Installation. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Méthode de sortie", sélectionnez "Impression verrouillée". L'écran qui apparaît vous permet de taper le mot de passe. 3 Introduisez le mot de passe, et cliquez sur le bouton [OK]. – Spécifiez le mot de passe composé d'un nombre compris entre 0000 et 9999. Introduction du mot de passe 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-26 GDI Printer Controller 4 La tâche d'impression démarre. – L'impression normale a lieu quand l'impression est demandée depuis une application. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 Impression depuis la machine Il est nécessaire d'entrer le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine pour pouvoir imprimer un document assorti d'un mot de passe si "Impression verrouillée" est sélectionné dans le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que le voyant "Imprimante" clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante]. L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît. 2 Vérifiez que l'icône représentant une clé s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. – Cette icône apparaît si un document confidentiel se trouve en mémoire. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. MODE IMPRIMANTE ATTENTE IMPRESSION 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 4 Quand "MOT DE PASSE : – – – –" apparaît, tapez le mot de passe. – Tapez les même chiffres que ceux qui ont été spécifiés comme mot de passe dans le pilote d'imprimante. 5 Vérifiez que le document peut être imprimé. Si le mot de passe est correct, l'écran suivant apparaît, et la tâche d'impression est effectuée. 2 Remarque S'il y a plusieurs tâches qui ont le même mot de passe, toutes ces tâches seront alors imprimées. MODE IMPRIMANTE MOT DE PASSE :---- _________ACCEPTE________ MOT DE PASSE :**** Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 2.5 Onglet Mise en page % Dans l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combinaison Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule feuille de papier. L'impression combinée permet de réduire le nombre de pages imprimées et d'économiser le papier. % Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. – Par exemple, si "2 en 1" est sélectionné, ce sont deux pages qui seront imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. Si "Off" est sélectionné, une page sera imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier. – Réglages : Off, 2 en 1, 4 en 1, 6 en 1, 9 en 1, 16 en 1 2 en 1 4 en 1 6 en 1 9 en 1 16 en 1 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Détails Combinaison % Cliquez sur le bouton [Détails Combinaison] pour spécifier l'ordre d'impression et s'il faut ou non imprimer les limites de page. Sous-menu Description Combinaison Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. Il s'agit du même réglage qui a été sélectionné dans la liste "Combinaison" sur l'onglet Mise en page. Ordre Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier, sélectionnez l'orientation et l'ordre d'impression des pages. Réglages : Bordure Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier, cochez cette case pour imprimer autour de chaque page réduite les limites de page. Colonnes Gauche Colonnes. Haut- Droite Rangées Gauche Rangées Droite Haut- Haut- Haut2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-32 GDI Printer Controller Impression recto-verso Cette fonction permet d'imprimer des pages du document sur les deux faces de la feuille de papier. Si vous voulez relier un document de plusieurs page, il est judicieux d'imprimer les feuilles en recto-verso. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Mise en page. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Recto-verso", sélectionnez "Recto double". 2 Remarque Dans la liste déroulante "Position de reliure", sélectionnez la position de reliure désirée. 2 Remarque L'impression Recto-verso n'est disponible que si l'unité recto-verso automatique, en option, est installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 2.6 Onglet Réglages par page % Dans l'onglet Réglages par page, spécifiez si une page de couverture doit ou non être ajoutée. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-34 GDI Printer Controller Couverture recto % Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non ajouter une couverture, et dans l'affirmative, si la couverture doit ou non être imprimée. – Réglages : Source Papier Couverture % Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier destiné aux couvertures. – Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel Type de média % Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la couverture. – Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe Sous-menu Description Sans Aucune couverture n'est ajoutée, le document tout entier sera imprimé sur du papier prélevé dans le même magasin. Vierge Une feuille vierge sera prélevée dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste "Source papier Couverture" et ajoutée comme couverture. Imprimé La première page du document est imprimée sur du papier prélevé dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste "Source Papier Couverture" et ajoutée comme couverture. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 2.7 Onglet Filigrane L'onglet Filigrane permet d'imprimer en arrière-plan un texte spécifique. Sélection filigrane 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Dans la liste Filigrane, sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer. – Réglages : Sans Filigrane, Confidentiel, Copie, Ne pas copier, Brouillon, Final, Epreuve, TOP SECRET 3 Pour n'imprimer le filigrane que sur la première page, cochez la case "Premiere page uniquement". – Décochez cette case si vous voulez que le filigrane apparaisse sur toutes les pages. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-36 GDI Printer Controller Créer un nouveau filigrane Il est possible d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau]. La boîte de dialogue Nouveau apparaît. 3 Dans la case "Texte du filigrane", tapez le texte qui doit figurer sous forme de filigrane. – Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. – Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum 32 filigranes (y compris "Sans Filigrane"). Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés. – Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur. – Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras. – Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique. – Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points. – Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°. – Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10° à 100°. – Position : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et verticale de l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100. – Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous et à droite de l'image d'aperçu. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter]. Le filigrane est ajouté à la liste "Sélection Filigrane". Sens horizontal : La réduction de la valeur déplace le texte vers la gauche. Sens vertical : L'augmentation de la valeur déplace le texte vers le haut. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-38 GDI Printer Controller Modifier un filigrane Vous pouvez éditer un filigrane enregistré et en changer le texte, la taille et la position. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Dans la liste, sélectionnez le filigrane à éditer. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Edition]. La boîte de dialogue Edition apparaît. 4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés. – Texte du filigrane : Tapez le texte qui apparaîtra sous forme de filigrane. – Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur. – Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras. – Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique. – Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points. – Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°. – Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10° à 100°. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – Décaler à partier du centre : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et verticale de l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100. – Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-40 GDI Printer Controller – Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous et à droite de l'image d'aperçu. 5 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. Le filigrane est ainsi modifié. 2 Remarque Pour effacer un filigrane enregistré, sélectionnez le filigrane dans la liste, et cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Sens horizontal : La réduction de la valeur déplace le texte vers la gauche. Sens vertical : L'augmentation de la valeur déplace le texte vers le haut. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 2.8 Onglet Qualité L'onglet Qualité permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la qualité d'impression. Définition % Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez "600 e 600 dpi" ou "300 e 300 dpi" comme résolution d'impression. 2 Remarque Lorsque "600 × 600 dpi" est sélectionné, la qualité d'impression est améliorée, mais la durée de l'impression est plus longue que si "300 × 300 dpi" est sélectionné. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-42 GDI Printer Controller Réglages % Cliquez sur le bouton [Réglages] pour spécifier le contraste et la luminosité. Sous-menu Description Brillance Permet d'agir sur la luminosité de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50. Plus grande sera la valeur, et plus l'image sera contrastée et distincte. Contraste Permet d'agir sur le contraste de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus l'image sera lumineuse. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle Les opérations d'impression accessibles par le panneau de contrôle de la machine sont décrites ci-dessous. 3.1 Opérations d'impression Le mode par défaut de la machine est le mode Copie. Normalement, quand l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante, l'impression commence automatiquement. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commencer une opération d'impression" à la page 3-5. Si vous désirez imprimer en sélectionnant "Introducteur manuel" dans la liste "Source papier" de l'onglet Installation, veuillez vous reporter à "Utilise l'introducteur manuel" à la page 3-8. Panneau de contrôle 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque La touche [Fax] et les touches de fonction fax ne peuvent être utilisées que si le kit Fax, en option, est installé sur la machine. La touche [Numérisation] ne peut être utilisée que si le kit Fax, en option, et la carte réseau NC-503 ou le contrôleur image IC-206, en option, sont installés sur la machine. No. Sous-menu Description 1 Afficheur • Pendant la réception des données, l'indication, ">>IMPRIMANTE :Impress." apparaît sur l'écran. • En outre, si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante] pendant que la machine reçoit des données d'impression (le témoin Imprimante est allumé), les réglages Source papier et Format papier, ainsi que le nom de l'utilisateur pour la tâche d'impression en cours s'affichent. 2 Touche OK • Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la fonction affichée à l'écran. 3 Flèche (haut, bas, gauche et droite) • Appuyez sur ces touches pour changer le menu affiché à l'écran. 4 Voyant Imprimante • Ce témoin clignote que la machine reçoit des données d'impression. • Ce témoin s'allume quand la machine est en train d'imprimer les données. (Il s'allume en revanche si, en même temps, la machine reçoit des données.) • Ce témoin s'éteint s'il n'y a pas de données d'impression. • Voir "Témoin Imprimante" à la page 3-5. 5 Touche Imprimante • Appuyez sur cette touche quand la machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression (le témoin Imprimante est allumé) pour afficher l'écran du mode Imprimante. • Pour revenir au mode précédant le passage au mode Imprimante, appuyez sur cette touche pendant que l'écran du mode Imprimante est affiché. • Si la mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée d'impression, l'écran du mode Impression PC n'apparaît pas même si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante]. 6 Touche Arrêt/Annul. • Pour annuler la tâche d'impression en cours pendant la réception des données d'impression, appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante] et appuyez sur cette touche lorsque l'écran du mode Imprimante apparaît. Voir "Annulation d'un travail d'impression" à la page 3-6. 7 Témoin Départ • Ce témoin s'allume en orange pendant que la machine reçoit des données d'impression. 8 Témoin Alerte • Ce témoin s'allume lorsqu'une erreur ou une anomalie se produit. Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Témoin Imprimante Le témoin "Imprimante" indique l'état des données transmises par l'ordinateur. Commencer une opération d'impression Normalement, l'impression commence si l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante. - Normalement, quand l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante, l'impression commence automatiquement. - Si une opération d'impression est commandée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à la machine alors qu'une tâche de copie est déjà en cours, l'impression commencera automatiquement 30 secondes après que la dernière copié ait été réalisée. - Avec le lit Fax en option : Si des données d'impression sont reçues alors que des données fax sont en cours de réception, ce sont les données d'impression qui sont prioritaires. Une fois que la réception en mode Fax est achevée, les données d'impression sont imprimées, puis le fax est imprimé à son tour. - Pendant l'impression, il est possible de spécifier les réglages copie et de réaliser des opérations Fax. (Copies et fax sont traitées après les données d'impression.) Voyant Imprimante Etat de l'impression Clignotant • La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Ce témoin clignote aussi dans d'autres modes. • Une erreur s'est produite sur la machine. Allumé • Les données sont en cours d'impression. Ce témoin, au lieu de clignoter, reste allumé si des données sont reçues pendant que des données sont en cours d'impression. Off (Dés.) • La mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée d'impression. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Annulation d'un travail d'impression On peut annuler l'impression d'une tâche depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Cependant, cela ne peut se faire que si la machine est en mode Imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que le voyant Imprimante clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante]. 2 Vérifiez que "MODE IMPRIMANTE IMPRESSION" apparaît sur l'écran de la machine. – Le message qui s'affiche dépend du statut (état) de la machine. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Arrêt/Annul.]. Le message de confirmation "ABANDON TRAVAIL" apparaît. MODE IMPRIMANTE Utilisateur 01 Impression LTR ABANDON TRAVAIL NON OUI Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Appuyez sur la touche [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner "OUI", et appuyez sur la touche [OK]. – Pour continuer l'impression, sélectionnez "Non". – Si aucune touche n'est activée au bout de cinq secondes, l'impression reprend. "ACCEPTE" apparaît à l'écran et la tâche d'impression est annulée. Si l'un des messages suivants apparaît à l'écran, on peut aussi annuler la tâche d'impression en répétant les étapes 2 et 3 de la procédure décrite cidessus. - MAGASIN VIDE - SERRAGE PAPIER - ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER - REINSER. PAPIER - PAPIER NON CONFORME - RECEPTACLE SUP PLEIN - ENLEVER PAPIER EN INTRO MANUEL - CHARGER PAP. - FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. - ERREUR TYPE MEDIA - *RECEPTION* - PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE - PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE - PORTE R/V OUVERTE - TONER VIDE _________ACCEPTE________ NON OUI 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Utilise l'introducteur manuel La procédure ci-dessous indique comme utiliser l'introducteur manuel pour imprimer une page à la fois. 1 Sur l'ordinateur, affichez l'onglet Installation du pilote d'imprimante, et sélectionnez ensuite "Introd. manuel" dans la liste "Source papier" (page 2-23). 2 Lancez l'opération d'impression à partir de votre ordinateur. 3 Quand le message "MODE IMPRIMANTE CHARGER PAPIER" apparaît, Insérez le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. – Insérez une feuille de papier, recto vers le bas, aussi loin que possible dans la fente de l'introducteur. – Faites coulisser les guides papier pour les ajuster au format du papier inséré. MODE IMPRIMANTE Utilisateur 01 CHARGER PAP. ( ) Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Répétez l'étape 3 autant de fois que nécessaire pour que le document soit complet. 2 Remarque Veillez à insérer le papier dans l'introducteur manuel une fois que l'opération d'impression a été commandée depuis l'ordinateur. Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous si vous avez inséré le papier dans l'introducteur manuel avant que l'opération d'impression n'ait été commandée depuis l'ordinateur. Enlevez le papier de l'introducteur manuel. Appuyez sur la touche [Réinitialiser]. Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante]. Exécutez l'étape 3 de la procédure. Ne chargez qu'une feuille à la fois dans l'introducteur manuel. Si le multi introducteur manuel (en option) est installé, l'impression s'effectue de la même manière qu'avec tout autre magasin car il peut être chargé avec 100 feuilles de papier. Cet introducteur multi-feuilles peut recevoir 10 enveloppes, 20 transparents, 20 cartes postales, 20 planches d'étiquettes, ou 100 feuilles de papier standard. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Mode Eco Energie Si des données sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie, ce mode est alors automatiquement annulé. Lorsque les données d'impression sont reçues, elles sont imprimées une fois que la machine a terminé son cycle de préchauffage. 4 Dépannage Dépannage 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Dépannage Les erreurs qui peuvent se produire au cours de l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur, et les procédures de correction sont décrites ci-dessous. Si un problème se produit pendant l'impression depuis un ordinateur, vérifiez les points suivants. 4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur Si une erreur d'impression depuis un ordinateur se produit alors que tout autre écran que celui du mode Imprimante est affiché, le témoin Alerte s'allume et le message "Contrôle Mode Impr." apparaît à l'écran de la machine. Dans ce cas, appliquez la procédure suivante. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante]. L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît. 2 Vérifiez le message d'erreur affiché à l'écran, puis effectuez l'opération voulue pour corriger l'erreur. PAPIER: TEXTE/PHOTO ZOOM:100% Contrôle Mode Impr. LTR _______ATTENTION________ CHARGER PAP.( ) PAPIER NON CONFORME 4 Dépannage 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur Les principaux messages d'erreur qui s'affichent sur l'écran du mode Imprimante sot décrits ci-dessous. Messages d'erreur Cause Remède ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER Le format papier spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante est différent du format du papier chargé dans le magasin. Ouvrez le magasin concerné par l'erreur de format, puis refermez- le. Vérifiez si un format personnalisé a été entré, et corrigez le format depuis le mode Utilitaire. PAPIER NON CONFORME "Auto" est sélectionné dans la liste "Source papier" du pilote d'imprimante, mais ce n'est pas le papier du format spécifié qui est chargé. Chargez du papier au format désiré dans un magasin. FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. Le papier du format spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin spécifié. Changez le format papier depuis le mode Utilitaire, puis chargez le papier du format approprié dans un magasin. Si vous utilisez l'introducteur multi-feuilles en option, l'impression commence dès que le papier approprié est chargé. MAGASIN VIDE Le magasin spécifié ne contient pas le papier spécifié ou il n'est pas installé sur la machine. Chargez du papier du format spécifié dans le magasin indiqué. ERREUR TYPE MEDIA Le papier du type spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin spécifié. Chargez le papier approprié dans un magasin, puis changez le type de papier depuis le mode Utilitaire. Si vous utilisez l'introducteur multi-feuilles en option, l'impression commence dès que le papier approprié est chargé. MEM PRESQUE PLEINE Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur excèdent la capacité de la mémoire. Presser une touche Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. IMPRESS. VERROUILLEE NON DISPONIBLE L'extension mémoire n'étant pas installée, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Impression verrouillée". La tâche est annulée. MOT DE PASSE REFUSE Le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée étant erroné, il n'est pas possible d'imprimer le document. Introduisez le mot de passe correct. Dépannage 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur L'opération effectuée avec les données d'impression diffère selon le type d'erreur qui s'est produite. En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE" Cette erreur indique une grave anomalie sur la machine. Si ce message d'erreur apparaît à l'écran, la machine ne peut recevoir aucune des données d'impression. Contactez votre S.A.V. Erreurs temporaires Si les erreurs facilement remédiables suivantes se produisent, les données d'impression en mémoire sont sauvegardées. L'impression reprend automatiquement dès que l'erreur est corrigée. - SERRAGE PAPIER - FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. - ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER - PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE - PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE - PORTE R/V OUVERTE - PAPIER NON CONFORME - MAGASIN VIDE - ERREUR TYPE MEDIA 2 Remarque Si l'une des erreurs énumérées ci-dessus apparaît, il est possible d'annuler la tâche d'impression en mémoire. Pour plus de détails, voir "Annulation d'un travail d'impression" à la page 3-6. 4 Dépannage 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Spécifications Spécifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Spécifications * La vitesse d'impression est mesurée dans les conditions d'impression suivantes. Le papier est prélevé dans le Magasin 1. Caractéristiques Vitesse d'impression* ineo 163 16 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi) ineo 211 21 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (impression sur papier Letter v à 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi) Mémoire Partagée avec la machine Port Interface Compatible USB Révision 2.0 Langage de l'imprimante GDI Police Windows Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE ou Windows Terminal Serveur (Windows 2000 Serveur/Windows Serveur 2003) 5 Spécifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Box operations www.develop.eu ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9 Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10 Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 Contents-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-3 6.1.3 Save Document window.................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Contents-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-5 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-48 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-50 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 Contents-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-7 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94 Contents-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100 Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101 Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101 Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101 Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108 7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-9 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-13 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29 Contents-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-11 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list ......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 Contents-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 1 Introduction ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides User's guide Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine and describes details on trademarks and copyrights. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on User Box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using Web Connection 1 Welcome 1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.2 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7 1.3 To check the function you want to use 1 1.3 To check the function you want to use This manual contains details on setting up the functions. Understanding Operation Flow This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more detail. Using Menu Tree Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages, there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more details. 1 To check the function you want to use 1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.3 2 User Box Function Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3 2.1 User Box functions 2 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by Email, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer. Reference - A Hard Disk must be installed in order to use the functions described in this manual. - Some User Boxes are available even when no Hard Disk is installed. - If no Hard Disk is installed, data is saved in the internal memory (SSD: Solid State Drive) installed in this machine. - A Hard Disk is installed as a standard feature in ineo 423. A hard disk is installed as a standard feature or offered as an option for ineo 363 depending on the area they are sold in. A hard disk can be installed as an option in ineo 223/283. - The following shows whether or not each function is available when no Hard Disk is installed. For details, refer to the explanation of each function. Functions Available o / Unavailable e with no HDD installed Note User Box - Public/Personal/Group User Boxes e Bulletin Board User Box o Polling TX User Box o Secure Document User Box e Memory RX User Box o Annotation User Box e Fax Retransmit User Box o Password Encrypted PDF User Box e ID & Print User Box e External Memory o Unavailable for some operations Cellular Phone/PDA o Unavailable for some operations Confidential RX User Box o 2 User Box functions 2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.1 Available User Box functions Saving documents Data can be saved to the following boxes. *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Computer 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Original 6 External Memory User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 6-3 Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image of the date/time or an annotation number to documents saved in Scan mode. p. 6-3 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. • You can save all scanned documents directly in an external memory connected to this machine. • You can save a document stored in a User Box in an external memory. • You can save a file stored in an external memory in a User Box. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-107 Confidential RX User Box Save a document that was sent from the destination machine by confidential transmission. p. 7-108 2 4 5 6 1 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5 2.1 User Box functions 2 Using documents Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows: *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. *3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the Web Connection online help. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group, Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for Cellular Phone/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 7-10 Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. p. 7-82 Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print documents sent via polling. p. 7-83 Secure Document User Box (*3) Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for printing. p. 7-84 Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can confirm and print the fax document received though the memory RX setting. p. 7-87 Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 7-89 Fax Retransmit User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or print it for confirmation. p. 7-95 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (*4) Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password is required for printing. p. 7-97 ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. You can log in as a user and print a document sent for print jobs from the printer driver. p. 7-98 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. You can print documents saved in an external memory connected to this machine. p. 7-100 Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-106 Confidential RX User Box Print a document that was received by confidential reception. p. 7-108 2 User Box functions 2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 1 Fax 2 Computer 3 E-mail, etc. 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Cellular phone or PDA 6 External memory 7 Printout 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7 2.1 User Box functions 2 Organizing documents Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. * The function for saving a document in a User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 External Memory User Box Delete Edit Name Move Copy Save in User Box Save in USB memory (when external memory is connected) Document Details Public/Personal/Group User Boxes o o o o − o o Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − − Polling TX User Box o − − − − − − Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o Annotation User Box o o − − − − o Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o Password Encrypted PDF User Box o − − − − − o ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o External Memory, Mobile/ PDA − − − − o * − o Confidential RX User Box o o − − − − o 2 1 2 User Box functions 2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured. Registering a User Box Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. Reference - The following User Boxes are configurable. – Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-5) – Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-6) – Annotation User Box (p. 8-16) – Confidential RX User Box (p. 8-17) When using this machine as a relay device If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-8) To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations. The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory reception settings. dReference For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9 2.2 Information 2 2.2 Information This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions. 2.2.1 User authentication To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator. MFP authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. External server authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. 2 Information 2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.2 Account track authentication Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. Reference - When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed. For details, refer to page 2-12. - If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. - When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] for the login procedure. 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration Public/Personal/Group User Boxes The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account. The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes: - Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data. - Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Bulletin Board User Box Reference - Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box. Polling TX User Box Only one document can be saved in a single User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11 2.2 Information 2 Memory RX User Box Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box. - If no Hard Disk is installed, the maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. Relay User Box Reference - Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box. Confidential RX User Box The following lists the limitations on this User Box: - Up to 20 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 180 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 180 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 180 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - The maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. 2.2.3 Restriction of file name Name document data to be saved. Reference - The names can contain up to 30 characters. - You can edit the names after the documents have been saved. - Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data. If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements. The following describes elements of an example document name "SMFP11102315230". Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Box functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description S This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan, User Box P: Print R: Received fax MFP This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. This item displays the name that is entered in [Device Name] under [Input Machine Address] of [Administrator/Machine Setting] in Administrator Settings. When changing the displayed name, specify it with up to 10 characters. 11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file names. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes. - User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes. - Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings. 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes. Create and access Public User Box User 1 User 2 Access allowed Personal User Box of user 2 Personal User Box of user 1 Public User Box User Box administrator ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs to. - If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods, all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts that they do not belong to. Account B Public User Box Account A Access allowed Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B Account A Account B User 1 User 2 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different account by as a member of the account. User 1 User 2 Account A Account B Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Personal User Box of user 2 Group User Box of account B Access allowed User Box administrator Account A Account B User 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password of the account when logging in. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. User 1 Access allowed Access permitted through entry of account name and password User Box administrator Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3 3.1 Control panel 3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the control panel. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy conservation state. 4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power Save key again. 5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/scan program. 6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel and touch panel. 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22 3 Control panel 3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.1 7 CAUTION - Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying. • This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the User Box key. • To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be started. Press this key to restart a stopped job. 12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various other settings. 15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations. 16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available. 17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. 18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well. 19 Brightness adjustment dial Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green. 21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. No. Name Description ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5 3.2 Touch panel 3 3.2 Touch panel 3.2.1 Screen component Icons that appear in the touch panel Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be displayed. No. Name Description 1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures. 2 Functions/settings display area Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings. 3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine, and shortcut keys. 4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to page 3-6. 5 Toner supply indicators Displays the remaining toner level. 4 5 1 2 3 Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that there is an error with the printing or scanning function. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to display the warning screen again. 3 Touch panel 3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled. Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Description No. Name Description 1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job log. 2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various settings of the scan, print and transmission functions. 3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document. 1 2 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7 3.2 Touch panel 3 Job List A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Job List - Delete Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job. No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted. 3 Touch panel 3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Job List - Job Details Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following four types of jobs: Reference - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, received faxes, or reports. [Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs. [Receive] Lists fax reception jobs. [Save] Lists User Box saving jobs. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: The status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory) is displayed. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job. • If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict", you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs. • If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job given priority is finished. [Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. [Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages, number of copies, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Detail] Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, completed time, number of original pages, number of copies, number of pages to be printed, or external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial/deleting). Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete]. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, transmission, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for broadcasting. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: The number of original pages that were received. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by entering directly. [Detail] Press this button to check the state, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. [Received Image] Select the job to display the received image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving, saving to memory, sending). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name, document name, User Box, stored time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-13 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view saved images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, document name, User Box, stored time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Saved Image] Select the job to display the saved image. 3 Touch panel 3-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 User Box information Displays the User Box information when you select a User Box. Use/File - Detail Press [Detail] on the lower left of the Use Document screen to check the time stored, user name, document name, the number of pages, and job number of the selected document. Reference - When you select multiple documents, use [ ][ ] to switch pages. dReference For checking preview image, refer to page 3-16. Use/File - Check Job Settings Select [Send] or [Bind TX] in the Send tab to display the address entry screen. [Check Job Settings] is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Reference - Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings. – Destination Settings – Document Setting Contents – Communication Settings (Not displayed when Combine is enabled.) – Check E-Mail Settings ineo 223/283/363/423 3-15 3.2 Touch panel 3 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine. Reference - To add a directly entered destination to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Address]. - To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details]. - To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents View the list of resolution, file type, and color settings. 3 Touch panel 3-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings Check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages. Preview Check the preview image of the selected document when using or filing documents. Press [Preview] to select one document. The image of the first page is displayed in the left panel. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-17 3.2 Touch panel 3 Preview Press [Detail] to enlarge the preview image. Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. Preview (Print/Combine) Preview the page image of printing result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Print] or [Combine]. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, images of all pages can be viewed. Item Description [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [View Finishing] Displays the specified settings as icons and text in the preview image. Cancel [View Finishing] to erase the icons and text so that only the image appears in the screen. 3 Touch panel 3-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Preview (Send/Bind TX) Preview the page image of sending result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Send] or [Bind TX]. Item Description [Scan] Displays the preview for E-mail TX/PC (FTP)/File TX (SMB)/File TX (WebDAV) operations. [Fax] Press this button to display the preview for G3 fax, IP address fax, or Internet fax operations. [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] When [Scan] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees anti-clockwise to show the image. : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees clockwise to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°], [Right 90°], or [180°] as the rotation angle. When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at 180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected in [Rotation Angle] and at 0° if [Right 90°] is selected. If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read a long original, the rotation mode may not be specified. When [Fax] is selected in [Preview] A finishing page image is displayed in black and white. : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [Delete Page] Displayed when the saved document contains multiple pages while [Send] is selected. You can select multiple images in the page to be deleted. [Odd Pages]: Select images in the odd numbered pages to delete them. [Even Pages]: Select images in the even numbered pages to delete them. All pages cannot be deleted. [View Finishing] View the finishing image with the configured settings, including printing the data, applied. When you cancel [View Finishing], only the image appears in the screen. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-19 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - If you select [Bind TX], the delete page function becomes unavailable. - If you select [Send] for multiple documents, the rotate page and delete page functions become unavailable. 3 Touch panel 3-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 4 User Box Operation Flow ineo 223/283/363/423 4-3 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes 4 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes This section describes the steps for saving documents in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Save Document] Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) 4 Saving documents in User Boxes 4-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.1 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-5 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Print] tab Select documents 4 Printing documents from a User Box 4-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.2 If you have selected a single document, press [Print] (p. 7-6) When selecting multiple documents and printing them using added functions, press [Combine] (p. 7-7) Configure the printing order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-17) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-7 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for sending documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Send] tab Select documents ineo 223/283/363/423 4-9 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box 4 If you have selected a single document, press [Send]. (p. 7-34) When selecting multiple documents and specifying the file type or stamp, press [Bind TX] (p. 7-34) Configure the sending order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Specify the destination Address Book Direct Input Job History (The job history of fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax is not displayed when Bind TX is selected.) Address Search Also specify a scan/fax program. For details on scan/fax programs, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-48) Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-48) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-18) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-11 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory 4 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory This section describes the steps for saving scanned images in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document to External Memory.] Press [Save Document] Press [User Box] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [OK] 4 Saving a document in an external memory 4-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.4 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-13 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in the external memory to a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document from External Memory to a User Box.] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [Use/File] Press the [Filing Settings] tab Select a document, and then press [Save to User Box] 4 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.5 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Specify the User Box and document name (p. 7-104) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-15 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory 4 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Print a document from External Memory.] Select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory] Press [Use/File] Select a file, and then press [Print] (p. 7-101) 4 Printing a document from an external memory 4-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.6 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Configure print settings (p. 7-102) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-17 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box 4 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box This section describes the steps for filing documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Filing Settings] tab Select documents, and then select a function (p. 7-64) 4 Filing documents in a User Box 4-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.7 dReference To delete the documents, refer to page 7-65. To rename the documents, refer to page 7-65. To move the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-65. To copy the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-66. To save a document in the external memory, refer to page 7-66. To check information of the documents or preview the documents, refer to page 7-69. ineo 223/283/363/423 4-19 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA This section describes the steps for printing a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Print List] To check printing preferences, press [Check Print Settings] 4 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.8 dReference To configure print settings from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 8-12. Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-105) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-21 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA to a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Save in User Box] Select the desired User Box, and then press [OK] 4 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.9 Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-106) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-23 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode This section describes the configuration and settings for the functions available in the User Box mode. 4.10.1 Save Document Public, Personal, or Group User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 System User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in System User Boxes. [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Top] [Left] [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Annotation User Box] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-25 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Reference - The [Annotation User Box] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for [Mobile/PDA] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [External Memory] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Save in User Box] (p. 7-105) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 4.10.2 Use/File Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the menu tree for using or filing documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes, and configuring print settings. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] (p. 7-11) [Group] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-12) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-27 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Front Cover] [Back Cover] [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Insert Paper] [Insert Type] [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Chapter Paper] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Insert Sheet Setting] (p. 7-23) [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Print Position] [Copy Security] [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-30) [Position] (p. 7-30) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Combine] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-12) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Continuous Print] (p. 7-15) [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Print Position] [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-30) [Position] (p. 7-30) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-29 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Send menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Send] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [Fax] (p. 7-41) [Fax Number] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [Internet Fax] (p. 7-42) [RX Ability (Destination)] (p. 7-42) [IP Address Fax] (p. 7-42) [Address] [Port Number] [Destination Machine Type] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Encryption] (p. 7-50) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-52) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-52) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-53) [Color] (p. 7-53) [Use Existing Color Setting] [Full Color] [Gray Scale] [Black] [Communication Settings] [Line Settings] (p. 7-54) [Overseas TX] (p. 7-54) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-55) [V.34 OFF] (p. 7-55) [Check Dest. & Send] (p. 7-55) [Select Line] (p. 7-55) [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [Document Name] (p. 7-56) [Subject] (p. 7-56) [From] (p. 7-57) [Body] (p. 7-57) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [Communication Method Settings] (p. 7-59) [Timer TX] (p. 7-59) [Password TX] (p. 7-60) [F-Code TX] (p. 7-60) First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-31 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Fax Header Settings] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-62) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] (p. 7-63) [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Bind TX] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [File Type] (p. 7-49) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Encryption] (p. 7-50) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-52) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-52) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-53) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Filing Settings menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Communication Settings] [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [Document Name] (p. 7-56) [Subject] (p. 7-56) [From] (p. 7-57) [Body] (p. 7-57) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-62) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Delete] (p. 7-65) [Edit Name] (p. 7-65) [Move] (p. 7-65) [Copy] (p. 7-66) [Save to External Memory.] (p. 7-66) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-33 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the File/Use - Application menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Edit Document] [Delete Page] (p. 7-71) [Rotate Page] (p. 7-72) [Move Page] (p. 7-74) [Preview] (p. 7-77) [Preview /Set Range] (p. 7-76) [Register Overlay] (p. 7-78) [Overlay Image] [Edit] [New] (p. 7-79) [Overwrite] (p. 7-80) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-81) [Density] [Document Details] [Preview] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 System User Box The following shows the Use/File menu tree for System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 7-82) [Polling TX User Box] (p. 7-83) [Secure Document User Box] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-85) [Print] (p. 7-85) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] (p. 7-17) [Cover Sheet] [Insert Sheet] [Chapters] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-35 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] [Page Number] [Stamp] [Copy Security] [Stamp Repeat] [Header/Footer] [Registered Overlay] [Filing Settings] (p. 7-86) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-87) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-88) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Annotation User Box] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Chapters] (p. 7-20) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Send] − [Send] [Address Book] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [FTP] (p. 7-44) [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Color] (p. 7-53) [Communication Settings] [E-mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-62) [Send & Print] (p. 7-63) [Stamp Element] (p. 7-92) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-94) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Application] [Register Overlay] (p. 7-78) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Fax Retransmit User Box] [Print] [Proof Print] (p. 7-95) [Send] [Fax] (p. 7-95) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-96) [Document Details] [Preview] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-37 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Reference - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - The Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for Mobile/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] [Print/Save] [Print/Save] (p. 7-97) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-97) [Document Details] [ID & Print User Box] [Print] [Print] (p. 7-99) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-99) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [External Memory] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-102) [Print] (p. 7-102) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Binding Position] (p. 7-102) [Top] [Left] [Right] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] [Paper] (p. 7-103) [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Filing Settings] [Save to User Box] [User Box] [Document Name] [Document Details] [Mobile/PDA] [Print List] [Check Print Settings] (p. 7-106) [Save in User Box] (p. 7-107) [Confidential RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-108) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-109) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 5 Accessing the User Box mode ineo 223/283/363/423 5-3 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode 5 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode Before starting this procedure, turn this machine on. When this machine is ready to copy data, the basic settings screen appears. To access the User Box mode, press the User Box key in the control panel. The User Box mode window appears. Lightly press the desired button in the window to display menus or functions. Then select the target one. 5 User Box Operation Menu 5-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 5.2 5.2 User Box Operation Menu Accessing the User Box mode enables you to select the operation menus below. 5.2.1 Save Document Scan the original loaded on this machine and save it in a User Box. You can specify the name or image quality of an original when saving it. dReference For details on the Save Document function, refer to page 6-4. For details on the Save Document menu structure, refer to page 4-23. 5.2.2 Use/File Print or send a document saved in a User Box. When printing a document, you can specify the number of sets or page margins. When sending a document, you can specify the file type. If necessary, you can rename or move a document saved in a User Box, or copy a document to another User Box. dReference For details on the Use/File function, refer to page 7-3. For details on the Use/File menu structure, refer to page 4-26. 6 Save Document ineo 223/283/363/423 6-3 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview 6.1.1 Functions Save Document enables you to directly specify a destination User Box when saving a document in the User Box mode. Using Save Document, document are saved in the same way as when scanned data is saved. Public/Personal/Group User Boxes You can save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings limit users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Annotation User Box If you want to print or send a document with the date and time or filing number image, save the document in the Annotation User Box. To use this box, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [Annotation User Box]. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. External Memory You can directly save a scanned document in the external memory connected to this machine. To use this function, check that the external memory is connected to the USB connector of this machine, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory]. Otherwise, on the screen that is displayed when the external memory device has been connected to the USB connector, press [Save a document to External Memory.]. Reference - A function to save a document to the external memory or to save a document stored in the external memory to a User Box is set to OFF (cannot be saved) in the factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. The function to save a document in external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. dReference For information on the available external memory, refer to page 7-100. 6 Save Document Overview 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.1 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document Public/Personal/Group User Boxes Select the [Public], [Personal], or [Group] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. System User Box Select the [System User Box] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. Reference - If [Annotation User Box] is selected, further specify the desired User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-5 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6.1.3 Save Document window The available setting items in the Save Document screen are as follows. Reference - For the external memory, you cannot change the destination User Box. - To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Item Description [User Box] For Public, Personal, Group and Annotation User Boxes, you can change the destination User Box for saving a document. To change the User Box, press [User Box] and select a User Box. • If there is no User Box with the specified number, a new Public User Box is automatically created. [Document Name] Press this button to display a keyboard to enter a document name. Enter the document name in the control panel. [Scan Settings] Configure detailed settings for scanning the document. For details, refer to page 6-6. [Original Settings] Configure the detailed settings for the original type and original direction. For details, refer to page 6-19. 6 Scan Settings 6-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2 Scan Settings Press [Scan Settings] in the Save Document tab to configure the detailed scan settings. 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type Select the original type based on the original contents. The available original types are as follows. If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type. Item Description [Text] Original that consists of only text. [Text/Photo] Original that consists of both text and photos (halftone). [Photo] Original that consists of only photos (halftone). [Dot Matrix Original] Original with faint-printing in whole. [Copied Paper] Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer. Item Description [Photo Paper] Select this setting for a photo printed on printing paper. [Printed Photo] Select this setting for printed photos such as in books or magazines. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-7 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one or both sides of the original. 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. Reference - The amount of data increases depending on the selected resolution, and you may not be able to save data in an external memory. If you cannot save data, reduce the resolution and retry saving it. Item Description [1-Sided] Scans one side of the original. [2-Sided] Scans both sides of the original. [Cover + 2-Sided] Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also scans the remaining pages in the double-sided mode. 6 Scan Settings 6-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.4 Basic - File Type Select the file type to save scanned data. File Type The available file types are as follows. dReference You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. You cannot specify some file formats depending on the Color settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Reference - Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file type when downloading the data of the document. - If you select [JPEG], [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. This format is useful when saving a scanned full color data. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-9 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Reference - You cannot check the contents of an encrypted document in the preview screen. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified on the Encryption screen. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. [Password] Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 6 Scan Settings 6-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-11 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Outline PDF Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Scan Setting Specify whether to save all pages of a document to one file, or to save each page to one file. Reference - If you select [Page Separation] when saving a document in a User Box, the selection of Page Separation is stored, and then the document is saved as a [Multi Page] file. - The selection of Page Separation is enabled when sending data to an E-Mail, PC (SMB), or FTP destination. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with [JPEG]. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. 6 Scan Settings 6-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.5 Basic - Density Adjust the density for the scanned document. 6.2.6 Basic - Color Specify whether to scan original in color or black-and-white. Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Item Description [Auto Color] Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting. [Full Color] Scans the original in full color. [Gray Scale] Select this setting for originals with high-level halftone such as black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as line drawings. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-13 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.7 Scan Size Select the paper size of the original to be scanned. Standard size Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. To scan the original with a predetermined paper size, select that size. Custom Size Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes. Reference - X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 7 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm). - Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11-11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm). Photo Size Select the 3 e 5 or 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 size for photographs. 6 Scan Settings 6-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.8 Image Adjustment Adjust the background density or sharpness for the scanned document. Background Removal Adjust the background density of the scanned original. When scanning a colored-paper original, the background color may be scanned resulting in the entire image becoming dark. To avoid this, you can adjust the background density. Select the background removal method, and specify the level. To automatically adjust the density, press [Auto]. Reference - To prevent the dark part in the back side from being scanned as shade, select [Bleed Removal]. - To scan an original with the colored background such as a map, select [Paper Discoloration Adj]. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-15 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Sharpness This settings allows you to sharpen character edges or other borders for the scanned document. 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase setting of the Book Copy function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. 6 Scan Settings 6-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. Settings include scanning method, binding positions and erasing unwanted areas. For paper size of the original, select the size of the spread. Book copy method Select the scanning method. Book Erase - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] setting of the Book Copy function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. Item Description [Book Spread] Scans a two-page spread as a single page. [Separation] Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right). [Front Cover] Scans the first page as a front cover. [Front + Back Covers] Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third and subsequent pages as a body. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-17 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Book Erase - Center Erase Configure settings to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original. Reference - Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and 30.0 mm). Binding Position If you have selected Separation, Front Cover, or Front + Back Covers, press [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 6 Scan Settings 6-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.11 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when singlesided originals and double-sided originals are mixed. Press [Separate Scan] to highlight the display. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-19 6.3 Original Settings 6 6.3 Original Settings Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals. Under Original Settings, you can select two or more items at the same time. 6.3.1 Special Original The available setting items are as follows. 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Item Contents [Mixed Original] Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF. The scanning speed will be lowered because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. [Z-Folded Original] Select this setting to detect the size of a Z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF. [Long Original] Select this setting for originals that are longer than the standard size. 6 Original Settings 6-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.3 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. When a double-sized original is scanned, the binding position is corrected on the back side. 6.3.4 Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon the scanned image when loading an original in the ADF. Reference - Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed. - If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Auto] Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise. [Top] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. [Left] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. 7 Use/File ineo 223/283/363/423 7-3 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File Printing a document You can print a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Fax reception mode. You can add finishing settings such as the number of copies or 2-sided print settings during printing the document. In addition, you can specify Combine to print two or more documents at the same time. Sending You can distribute a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Receive mode, for example, by E-mail or fax. You can add finishing or transmission settings when distributing the document. You can also specify Bind TX to select two or more documents and distribute them at the same time. Filing You can perform various document filing operations such as moving or copying documents between User Boxes. You can also save a document stored in a User Box in the external memory. Application settings You can move or rotate pages in saved documents, or register overlay images. 7 Overview of the Use/File operations 7-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.1 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen Select the User Box where you want to print and distribute documents. The following screen is displayed. This section describes the setting items, pointing to the Public User Box as an example. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. (p. 7-6) 2 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. (p. 7-34) 3 [Filing Settings] Rename, move, or copy the selected documents. (p. 7-64) 4 [Application] Edit the selected document on a page-basis or register overlay images. (p. 7-70) 5 [Save Document] Select this tab to display the Save Document screen. The Use/File settings you have configured are canceled. 6 − Displays the number and name of the specified User Box. 7 − Displays a list of the documents saved in the User Box. 8 [ ][ ] If the specified User Box contains seven or more documents, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up or down the list. 9 [Select All] Press this button to select all documents in the specified User Box. 10 [Reset] Press this button to reset all documents in the User Box. 11 [Detail View]/[Thumbnail View] Press this button to switch the display format of saved documents. [Thumbnail View]: A reduced image of the first page, number of pages, and document name of each document are displayed. [Detail View]: The time stored, user name, and document name of each document are displayed. Every time you press the [Time Stored] column header, the documents are sorted in ascending or descending order of the time stored alternately. 12 Print Settings/Transmission Settings/ Filing Settings/ Application Settings Configurable items for the selected tab are displayed. 13 [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the document. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-5 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box If a password is specified for a User Box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password, and press [OK]. 7 Print 7-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2 Print This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab Description of the Print tab Select the [Print] tab to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Print] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, the document print setting function is not available. (p. 7-8) 2 [Combine] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-8) 2 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-7 7.2 Print 7 Print Press [Print] to display the following screen. In the Print screen, the two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. Combine Press [Combine], and then configure Combine settings to display the following screen. In the Combine screen, two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 7 Print 7-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2.2 Print In the Print - Print Details screen, configure or change the following functions. Reference - The staple function is available when the optional Finisher FS-527 or Finisher FS-529 is installed. - The Punch settings is available when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - The Fold/Bind function is available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher FS- 527. 7.2.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Combine] to display the document order selection screen. Documents will be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. If a document has a watermark at the head, the same watermark is also printed for the second and subsequent documents. If a document does not have a watermark at the head, no watermark is printed even when it is specified for some of the second and subsequent documents. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Combine] Configure settings to print multiple (2, 4, or 8) pages on one page when printing a multi-page document. Specify the number of sheets per page and the combination order. [Zoom] Configure settings to enlarge or reduce an image when printing documents. Select the magnification. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] Configure settings to insert a cover sheet, insert sheets between selected pages, or insert sheets for separating chapters. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-9 7.2 Print 7 Configurable items to combine and print documents In the Combine - Print Details screen, configure or change the settings for the following functions. Reference - The staple function is available when the optional Finisher FS-527 or Finisher FS-529 is installed. - The Punch settings is available when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - The Fold/Bind function is available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - When combining and printing document, you cannot select the Sort, or Group function. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for offsetting, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Continuous Print] Configure this item when [2-Sided] is selected in [Print]. Specify whether, after printing an odd-page document, to print the first page of the next document on the back side of the last page of the first document. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.3.1 Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable range is 1 to 9999. Reference - To reset the setting to 1, press the [C] key on the control panel. 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether to print one side or both sides of sheets of paper. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-11 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3.3 Finishing Configure sorting, grouping, finishing and other settings. The number of punched holes varies depending on the country you are in. dReference When the finisher is installed, you can change the ejection method in Administrator Settings. For the Offset function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Sort/Group Selecting Sort feeds copies by set. Selecting Group feeds copies by page. Offset Select Yes to sort sheets by set or page so that the user knows where the document is separated. When the finisher is installed, the printed sheets are fed while shifting them for each separation. When the finisher is not installed, the printed sheets are fed while alternately sorting them. Staple Printed sheets are stapled at a corner or two points. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 Staple - Position Setting If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. The following screen shows an example of [2 Position]. Punch Printed sheets are punched for filing. Punch - Position Setting Specify hole positions. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-13 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Fold/Bind The following settings are available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the Finisher FS-527. Select the desired function. Item Description [Half-Fold] Folds printed sheets of paper before being fed. [Center Staple & Fold] Staples printed sheets of paper at two center points and folds them in two before being fed. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3.4 Combine A multi-page original is combined and printed on one page. 7.3.5 Zoom The images can be enlarged or reduced when they are printed. Specify the magnification. Item Description [2in1] Combines a 2-page original into one page. [4in1] Combines a 4-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. [8in1] Combines An 8-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. Item Description [Existing Setting] Prints A document with the magnification that was specified when it was saved. [Manual] Specify the magnification between 25.0% and 400.0% on a 0.1% basis. Use the keypad to directly enter the magnification. [Full Size] Prints a document with the size specified when it was saved, without being enlarged or reduced. [Minimal] Reduces a document slightly to leave margin around the image. [+][-] Press this button to adjust the zoom ratio of the image on a 0.1% basis. [Fixed Zoom] Specify the fixed magnification that is preset in this machine. This setting is useful when enlarging or reducing documents to a standard size. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-15 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Regardless of the Use Existing Color Setting or Original Type setting, you can print documents saved in A4v size in enlarged A3w size. To rotate and enlarge the image as shown in the example, you must previously set [Enlargement Rotation] to [Allow] in the Utility menu. For details on the enlargement rotation, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 7.3.6 Continuous Print You can select this setting if you have selected 2-Sided printing when combining and printing documents. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined and printed. When printing in 2-Sided mode, select whether, if printing a document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. Reference - [Yes]: The next document is printed continuously from the back side of the last page of the previous document. - [No]: The next document is printed from the front side of a new sheet. [User Preset Zoom] In addition to fixed magnifications, preset frequently used magnifications in advance and use them later. • You can preset up to three magnifications. dReference For details on presetting magnifications, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.4.1 Page Margin The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. It can assure a punching or stapling space. Page Margin Image Shift When a page margin is created, the image can be shifted according the position of the margin. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. Item Description [Margin Position] Select the margin position. [Auto Zoom]: A page margin position along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or less. A page margin is created along the short side of the paper if the original length exceeds 11-11/16 inches (297 mm). [Top]: Select this setting to position a margin on the top. [Left]: Select this setting to position a margin on the left. [Right]: Select this setting to position a margin on the right. [Adjust Value] Specify the width of a page margin between 1/16 and 3/4 inches (0.1 and 20.0 mm). To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [None]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-17 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Image Shift - Change Back Shift To create a page margin in 2-Sided printing mode, press [Change Back Shift] to specify the image shift length on the back side. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert You can configure the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet, or Chapters function. Item Description [Cover Sheet] Prints documents with front and back covers. [Insert Sheet] Inserts colored sheets or other type of paper before the specified pages when documents are printed. [Chapters] Configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet Documents are printed with front and back covers. The available setting items are as follows. The following shows the front and back cover settings. Item Description [Front Cover]/ [Back Cover] Configure settings for front and back covers. For details, refer to the table below. [Paper] Select a paper tray in the following cases. • When [Front (Copy)] or [Front (Blank)] is selected for [Front Cover] • When [Back (Copy)] or [Back (Blank)] is selected for [Back Cover] Item Description Front Cover None A front cover is not attached to a document. Front (Copy) The first page of a document is printed on the front cover sheet. The second page is printed on the back side of the front cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Front (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted before the first page of a document. Back Cover None A back cover is not attached to a document. Back (Copy) The last page of a document is printed on the back cover sheet. The last two pages are printed on the front and back sides of the back cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Back (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted after the last page of a document. ABC COVERABC ineo 223/283/363/423 7-19 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Load the front and back cover sheets in the tray in advance. - To add cover sheet setting when printing the document that you copied and saved in a User Box, either one of the following conditions must have been satisfied when you saved the document. – A paper tray was specified – Cover Sheets were configured 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet Colored sheets or other type of paper are inserted before the specified pages when documents are printed. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. Select [Copy] or [Blank] in Insert Type. Configure the setting as follows depending on whether you select 1- Sided or 2-Sided printing. Example: When page "6" is specified Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify a page you want to insert a sheet into. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Insert Paper] Select a tray to load the sheets to be inserted. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. [Insert Type] Specify whether to print a document on the inserted sheets (Copy) or leave them blank (Blank). For details, refer to the table below. Item Description [Copy] (when 1- Sided is selected) A sheet is inserted as the sixth sheet and the sixth page of the document is printed on that sheet. [Copy] (when 2- Sided is selected) The back side of the third sheet is left blank. A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet and the sixth and seventh pages of the document are printed on that sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters You can configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. [Blank] (when 1- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted after the sixth page. [Blank] (when 2- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet. When you specify an odd pages, the back side of the inserted sheet is left blank. Item Description Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify front-sided pages. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Chapter Paper] To copy document data on chapter sheets, select [Copy Insert] and select a chapter paper tray. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-21 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition In Stamp/Composition screen, you can configure the following functions. 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. Item Description [Date/Time] The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. [Page Number] A page number is printed on all pages of a document. [Stamp] A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. [Copy Protect] Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Copy Guard] A stamp is printed on all pages as a copy guard. [Password Copy] A document is printed with an embedded password on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Stamp Repeat] Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. [Header/Footer] A header or footer is printed on pages. • This item is not displayed when the header or footer is not registered. dReference For details on how to register a header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] or [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. [Registered Overlay] A registered image is overlaid on printed pages. • This item is not displayed when no overlay image is registered. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Date Format] Select the format for the date. [Time Format] Specify whether to add the time, and select the format to display the time. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number The page number is printed on all pages of the document. Settings Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. Item Description [Starting Page Number] Specify the starting page number. [Starting Chapter Number] Specify the starting chapter number. [Page Number Type] Select the format to display a page number. [Insert Sheet Setting] Specify whether to print a page number on an inserted sheet. For the available settings, refer to page 7-23. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-23 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Insert Sheet Setting Specify whether to print a page number on inserted sheets. 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Cover Sheet] [Print on Front and Back Cover] A page number is printed on the front and back covers. [Print on Back Cover only] A page number is not printed on the front cover. [Do not print Page Number] A page number is printed on neither the front cover nor the back cover. [Insert Sheet (Copy)] [Print Page #] A page number is printed on inserted copy sheets. [Do Not Print #] A page number is not printed on inserted copy sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted copy sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. [Insert (Blank)] [Do Not Print #] Page numbers are not printed on inserted blank sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted blank sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Configure the setting for the copy protect to be applied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Copy Protect screen, you can configure the following settings. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). Item Description Item Description [Copy Protect Type] Select a type of copy protect to be printed. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify the density and text size of copy protect to be printed. [Position] Press this button to specify the angle and printing order of copy protect to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-25 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Copy Protect Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the density, background pattern, and other items. Position In the Copy Protect setting screen, press [Position] to specify the print position by angling the selected stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the copy protect within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/-45 degrees) - Inserting a space between copy protects - Reordering printing order of copy protect - Deleting the copy protect or space Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Copy Protect Pattern] Select the pattern and contrast to be applied when the copy is reproduced. Select the patter from Emboss Text or Emboss Background. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from Front (Overwrite) or Back. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select a copy protect to be changed, and then press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete]. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard To prevent unauthorized copying, this function prints a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper as a copy guard (copy inhibit information) when printing. A page with a copy guard printed on it cannot be copied or saved in a User Box. Configure the setting for the copy guard to be applied. You can apply up to 6 copy guards. For Copy Guard, you can configure the following settings. Copy Guard Type Item Description [Copy Guard Type] Select a type of copy guard. [Detail Settings] Specify the pattern and text size of the selected copy guard. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-27 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy To prevent unauthorized copying, this function configures stamp settings for a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper, and prints with an embedded password. When a sheet of paper with an embedded password is copied, scanned, or saved in a User Box, the currently running job is suspended, and the password entry screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password to carry out the desired operation. To enable Password Copy, select [Yes], and press [Password] to specify the password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice in the control panel. If a password is specified, you can configure a stamp. You can apply up to 6 stamps. Item Description [Copy Guard Pattern] Specify the contrast of a copy guard. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Type] Select the type of stamps. [Detail Settings] Specify the pattern and text size of the selected password copy. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Stamp Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. Copy Protect stamps are used to prevent recopying. However, Stamp Repeat stamps can be recopied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Stamp Repeat screen, you can configure the following settings. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Password Copy Pattern] Specify the contrast of a pattern. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Repeat Type] Select a type of stamp repeat to be printed. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, density, and text size of stamp repeat to be printed. [Position] Select the angle or printing order of stamp repeat to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-29 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Repeat Type Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the density, character size, and other items. Position In the Stamp Repeat setting screen, press [Position] to determine the print position of the stamp, for example, by angling the stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the stamp repeat within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/45 degrees) - Inserting a space between stamp repeats - Reordering printing order of stamp repeat - Deleting the stamp repeat or space 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer Configure settings to insert the header or footer. To insert the header or footer, you must register their contents in Administrator Settings in advance. Press Check/Change Temporarily to temporarily change and print the contents of the registered header and footer. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from [Front (Overwrite)], [Transparent], or [Back]. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select Stamp Repeat to be changed, and press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete] to specify. Item Description [Recall Header/ Footer] Select the desired ones from the registered headers and footers. [Check/Change Temporarily] Press this button to check or change the selected header or footer. For details, refer to page 7-31. [Reset] Press this button to cancel the use of the temporarily changed header or footer. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-31 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Check/Change Temporarily In the Header/Footer setting screen, press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered header or footer. Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. Item Description [Header Settings], [Footer Settings] Specify whether to print the header and footer. Press [Print] to configure the following setting. • [Text]: Specify a header or footer text in the touch panel. • [Date/Time]: Configure the date and time settings for the header or footer. • [Other]: Configure setting to add the distribution control number, job number, or serial number to the header or footer. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. [Pages] Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or the first page only. [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay Settings A registered image is overlaid and printed on the specified pages. Select [Yes] to use an overlay image. Reference - Overlay images can be registered in Copy mode as well as in User Box mode. An overlay image that was registered in Copy mode can be used for printing a document in the User Box. An overlay image that was registered from an image in the User Box can be used in Copy mode. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Recall Overlay Image] Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. For details, refer to page 7-33. [Pages] Select whether to print the selected overlay image on all pages or the first page only. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-33 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Overlay Setting Select an overlay image and configure it settings. You can also preview the image. Reference - The following shows three methods for composing an overlay. – [Transparent]: Increases the brightness of the overlay image to be superimposed. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. – [Background Composition (Original)]: Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. – [Back]: Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Item Description [Thumbnail View]/[Display Name] In the thumb-nail view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify how to compose an overlay image. • [Density]: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). • [Composition]: Select Transparent, Background Composition (Original) or Back to specify how to compose an overlay image. [Image Details] Press this button to check the details of the overlay image including the preview image, size, and color. 7 Send 7-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5 Send This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings You can use the following functions to send a document saved in a User Box. Using these functions enables you to easily send data by only registering destinations in this machine without transferring data via computers. Description of the Send tab Press [Send] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Transmission Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Fax Sends document data by fax. E-mail Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail. Internet Fax Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail via an intranet or Internet. IP Address Fax Sends document data to the destination specified with the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. PC (SMB) Sends document data to the shared folder in the specified computer. FTP Sends document data to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Sends document data to the specified server via network. No. Item Description 1 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, [Document Settings] and [Application] are not available. (p. 7-36) 2 [Bind TX] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-37) 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-35 7.5 Send 7 Send Press [Send] to display the following screen. You can configure transmission destination and additional functions. Bind TX Press [Bind TX] to display the following screen after specifying the bind order. Some destination types or function are not displayed since multiple documents are sent. No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 7 Send 7-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5.2 Transmission Settings Press [Send] to specify destinations and functions that can be added when transmitting documents. Reference - [Direct Input] is not displayed when Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings. No. Item Description 1 [Address Book] Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-registered destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press this button to directly enter unregistered destinations. 3 [Job History] Select the recipients from the transmission log. 4 [Address Search] Press this button to search for the registered address when the LDAP server is used. 5 [Group] Press this button to list the registered group addresses. 6 [Search] Press this button to search the address book for destination. 7 [Document Settings] Press this button to specify the resolution, file type, or color when sending a document. 8 [Communication Settings] Press this button to configure communication settings. 9 [Application] Press this button to specify additional functions such as Stamp or Page Print. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-37 7.5 Send 7 7.5.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Bind TX] to display the binding order selection screen. Documents will be sent in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.6.1 Address Book - Search Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered destinations. Address Type Press this button to search for the destination by address type that was specified when the destination is registered. dReference For details on the [Default Address Book] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The [Search] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. No. Item Description 1 [Address Type] Registers addresses by registered type. 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-39 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Index The Index screen appears by index that was specified when they were registered. The [Index] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. Detail Search Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Address], and enter an index. No. Item Description 1 [Index] Displays destinations for each registered index. 1 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Detail Search - Search options In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the additional search conditions, and press [OK]. Reference - To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use [Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.2 Direct Input Directly enter an unregistered destination as a recipient. Reference - When Manual Destination Input is set to Individual Management in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings, Direct Input is not available except for Fax. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-41 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: You are prompted to enter the fax number again after pressing [OK]. Enter the fax number, and press [Start]. Reference - [Next Destination] can be selected on the second input screen. dReference For details on the Confirm Address (TX) function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Receiver RX Ability Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. You can select multiple receivable settings. 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax Enter the IP Address Fax destination. Item Description [Compression Type] Select JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH. [Paper Size] Select A3, B4 or A4. [Resolution] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or 200e100 dpi (Standard). Item Description [Address] Enter the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-43 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) Directly enter the PC (SMB) address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Reference Check the folder information on the destination computer. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. [Port Number] Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535). [Destination Machine Type] Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing. [Next Destination] Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP Directly enter the FTP address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Press [Anonymous] to enter "anonymous". Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [PASV] Specify whether to use the PASV mode. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-45 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV Directly enter the WebDAV destination. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. [SSL Settings] Specify whether to use SSL for sending. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-46 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.10 Job History Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select destinations from this history. 7.6.11 Address Search The [Address Search] tab is displayed when the LDAP server is configured in Administrator Settings. Reference - For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - Enabling LDAP. - The display position of [Address Search] tab varies depending on user settings. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-47 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for the destination address in the specified LDAP server. 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search Specify multiple search conditions to search for the target address. Name Enter the name in the touch panel. E-mail Addr. Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Fax Number Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Last Name Enter the last name in the touch panel. First Name Enter the first name in the touch panel. City Enter the city name in the touch panel. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-48 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Company Name Enter the company name in the touch panel. Department Enter the department in the touch panel. OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH. When not specifying any conditions, press [No]. 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings Configure document settings such as the resolution or file type. 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution for sending faxes. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-49 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type Specify the file type of data being transmitted. File Type The available file types are as follows. Reference - JPEG cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. - If you select JPEG, [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. - You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-50 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in [Encryption]. Item Description [Encryption Level] Select the encryption level. [Password] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-51 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-52 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Stamp Composition Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition. Outline PDF Outline PDF can be selected when Compact PDF is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Image] Select this setting to insert the text as an image. [Text] Select this setting to insert the text as text. • The date, time, page number, header, or footer is composed as text. • The stamp is composed as an image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-53 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Scan Setting Specify a collection of data. 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color Configure color settings to send documents. Data that has been saved using this machine contains the full color data even if it is saved in gray scale or black and white; therefore, it can be changed to full color when it is sent. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. - A document that has been saved in gray scale or black and white using a different machine does not contain the full color data; therefore, it cannot be changed to full color when it is sent. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with the JPEG file type. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. • [Page Separation] cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. Item Description [Use Existing Color Setting] Sends documents with the color setting used when they were saved. [Full Color] Sends documents in full color. [Gray Scale] Sends documents in gray scale. [Black] Sends documents in black and white. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-54 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings Configure communication lines, digital signature, and other communication settings. 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting Description of Line Settings Configure line settings for fax transmission. Overseas TX Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling TX – Polling RX – Bulletin board ineo 223/283/363/423 7-55 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 ECM OFF The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON. Reference - This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified. - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – V.34 OFF – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception V.34 OFF V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions. In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send data. After sending has been completed, this machine automatically returns to the V34 mode. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception – ECM OFF Check Dest. & Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error. Reference - To use the Check Dest. & Send, you must register the local fax number in the remote machine in advance. Select Line You can specify [Line 1] or [Line 2] for sending data when two optional Fax Kit are installed. Specify the line used for transmission. If you select [Not Set], either Line 1 or Line 2 whichever is not busy is used for transmission. If both lines are idle, Line 1 is used first. Reference - You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings]. For details on the Multi Line Usage function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not Set], a sending failure may occur. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-56 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings E-mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in the [File Document] screen. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can enter up to 30 characters. Subject The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 64 characters. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-57 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 From Displays the E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu. Reference - The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing. - You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings]. For details on the [Change the "From" Address] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Body The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 256 characters. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-58 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting URL Notification Use the URL Notification function to specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job and data location. The URL contains information for linking to a User Box. Click the link in the text to directly move to the User Box screen. Reference - A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified for the destination in URL Notification Setting. - URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails or faxes. - If the authentication mode or User Box password is enabled, the password input screen corresponding to each respective authentication status appears. On completion of all authentication processing, the User Box screen appears. Detail Search You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index. Direct Input Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-59 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings Specify how to send or receive data. Timer transmission (Timer TX) Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time. Reference - It is specified in hours and minutes. - You cannot specify the date. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-60 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Password transmission (Password TX) Use this function to send a document by attaching a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network reception. Reference - You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network reception (with password) function. - Use the keypad to enter the password. F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB address and the password. F-Code TX can be used for the confidential transmission and relay transmission functions. Reference - To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function. Item Description Confidential TX Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box. Relay TX Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the SUB Address box and the password in the Password box. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-61 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this machine. Reference - You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depending on the S/MIME communication settings. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from the sender name list. Reference - To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-62 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings Configure the other settings (Stamp/Composition, and Send & Print) that are available for sending documents. 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. Pages Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Text Color] Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) ineo 223/283/363/423 7-63 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-30. 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also configure print settings. Item Description [Copies:] Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. [Simplex/Duplex] Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. [Staple] Select whether to staple the printed sheets. [Staple] - [Position Setting] If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-64 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings You can rename or delete documents saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box so that the documents in the box are organized. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Filing Settings tab Press [Filing Settings] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Filing Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Delete Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed or sent. Edit Name Renames a saved document. Move Moves the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Copy Copies the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Save in external memory Saves a document from a User Box into the external memory, which is connected to this machine. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Delete] Deletes the selected document. 2 [Edit Name] Renames the selected document. 3 [Move] Configure settings to move the selected document. 4 [Copy] Configure settings to copy the selected document. 5 [Save to External Memory.] Saves the selected document in the external memory. 2 3 4 5 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-65 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.2 Deleting documents You can delete unnecessary files, for example the files you have already printed. You can select multiple files and delete them at the same time. After checking document details, press [Delete]. 7.7.3 Edit Name Renames a saved document. Enter a new name in the touch panel. Reference - The new document name will be used as the file name when it is set. Note that when you rename the document that you plan to send, consider the naming and other conditions forced by the destination server. - If necessary, you can rename the document just before you send it. 7.7.4 Moving documents Move a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-66 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7.5 Copy Copy the data of a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. 7.7.6 Save in external memory You can save a document stored in a User Box to the external memory. Pressing [Document Settings], to configure the settings of a document to be saved. Reference - For information on the external memory, refer to page 7-100. - Multiple documents can be saved collectively. - A document cannot be renamed while it is being saved. Before saving a document, change the file name as appropriate. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-67 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 Document Settings You can specify the resolution, file type, and color of the document to be saved. If you select multiple documents, settings are reflected in all documents. Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution of the document to be saved. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-68 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 Document Settings -File Type When specifying the file type, select [Yes]. The available setting items are as follows. Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-53. Item Description [File Type] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Encryption] If the PDF or Compact PDF is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. For details, refer to page 7-50. [Outline PDF] Configure this item when you select Compact PDF for the file type. For details, refer to page 7-52. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-69 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.7 Document Details Check the details of a saved document in the touch panel. Displaying detailed information Select a document, and press [Document Details] to check. The following information is displayed. Preview In the Document Details screen, press [Preview] to check the preview image of the saved document. You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. Item Description [Registered Time] Displays the date and time the document was registered. [User Name] Displays the user name or mode (SCAN, COPY, or PRINT) by which the document was registered. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [No. of Pages] Displays the number of pages in the document. [Job No.] Displays the job number when the document was registered. [ ][ ] If multiple documents are selected, use [ ] or [ ] to switch them. [Preview] Press this button to change to the Preview screen. For details, refer to page 7-69. 7 Application 7-70 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 7.8 Application This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings You can edit a document saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box by changing the order of or delete pages in the document. You can also register the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Application tab Press [Application] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Application Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Edit Document Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. Register Overlay Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Edit Document] Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. 2 [Register Overlay] Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-71 7.8 Application 7 7.8.2 Edit Document Select a document and press [Edit Document]. The Edit Document screen is displayed. To view the image of a document page before editing it, press the [Preview /Set Range]. For details, refer to page 7-76. Edit Document - Delete Page You can delete a specific page from a saved document. For example, you can delete blank pages to reduce the amount of data. 0 If you delete the only page of a document, the whole document will be deleted. 0 You will be unable to undo the deletion or restore the deleted pages because they are overwritten when they are deleted. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 1 Select a page to be deleted, and then press [Delete Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. 2 Check that the specified page has been deleted from the screen. % At this time, the specified page is not deleted from document data. % In this example, the specified pages (pages 1, 3, and 4) have been deleted. 3 To completely delete the pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % To cancel the deletion, press [Cancel] to return to the Application screen. 7 Application 7-72 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 4 Check the information of the displayed screen. To delete the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the deletion, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are deleted and the document is saved. Edit Document - Rotate Page You can rotate the specified pages in a saved document. When a double-sided original has been scanned, the top and bottom may be reversed page by page or the orientation may be different depending on the original orientation. In this case, you can rotate selected pages so that the whole document will be viewed more easily. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are rotated. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 1 Select a page to be rotated, and then press [Rotate Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. The preview images of the selected pages are displayed together with the rotation setting screen. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-73 7.8 Application 7 2 While checking the preview image, select the rotation angle. % You can select a rotation angle from left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. % In this example, [Left 90°] is selected. 3 Press [OK]. 4 If you are sure to rotate the selected pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % In the example, the specified pages (pages 1 and 2) have been rotated. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To rotate the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the rotation, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are rotated and the document is saved. 7 Application 7-74 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Edit Document - Move Page You can change the order of the pages within a saved document by moving the specified pages. 0 You cannot rotate the only page of a document. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are moved. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 0 You can directly enter the page number you want the selected page move to. This is useful when a document consists of many pages. For details, refer to page 7-77. 1 Select a page to be moved, and then press [Move Page]. % Only one page can be moved at a time. To move two or more pages, repeat the above steps for each of the pages you want to move. % The example demonstrates how to move page 6 to between pages 2 and 3. The destination setting screen is displayed. 2 While checking the screen, select the moving position. % To move the selected page to the beginning of the document, press [Top]. % To move the selected page to the end of the document, press [Last Page]. % To move the selected page to between pages, press between them. 3 Press [OK]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-75 7.8 Application 7 4 If you are sure to move the selected page, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To move the page, select [Save]. % To cancel the movement, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected page is moved and the document is saved. 7 Application 7-76 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Preview/Set Range You can specify a range of pages and check preview images when the selected document consists of multiple pages. You can also change the display size. Item Description [ Prev. Page] Moves to the previous page. [Next Page ] Press this button to move to the next page. [Zoom] You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. [Set Page Range] Specify the range of pages to be checked. Use the keypad to enter a number in [From:] and [To:] respectively. Then press [Display Page] to preview the specified starting or ending page. To set [From:] or [To:] to the page being previewed, select the button and then press [Match Display]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-77 7.8 Application 7 Preview/Specify by Input This item is displayed when [Move Page] is selected. When too many pages are saved, specify the destination page by entering the page number. The following shows a procedure to specify the destination of the move operation. 1 In the Move Page screen, press [Preview]. The Preview/Specify by Input screen is displayed. 2 Display the previous or next page of the destination. % Press [ Prev. Page] or [Next Page ], or use the keypad to enter a page number and press [View]. % You can use [Zoom] to view the selected pages at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. 7 Application 7-78 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 3 Specify the insertion position. % To move before the displayed page, press [Before]. % To move after the displayed page, press [After]. 4 Press [OK]. 7.8.3 Register Overlay Register a document saved in a User Box as an overlay image. You can overlay the selected image to a printed document using [Stamp/Composition] in the Print tab. This function is useful when you want to print the images (such as company or product logos) that are not provided by this machine (stamps and page numbers are those provided by this machine). Reference - You can register up to 100 overlay images. - When you select a multi-page document, the first page is registered as an overlay image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-79 7.8 Application 7 Register Overlay - New Register a new overlay image. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press an unregistered image button and press [New]. 3 Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered, and press [OK]. % You can enter up to 16 characters. 4 Press [Start]. 7 Application 7-80 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Register Overlay - Overwrite You can overwrite the registered overlay image with new one. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press the image button to be overwritten, and press [Overwrite]. 3 Check the displayed message, and press [Overwrite]. 4 Press [Start]. The overlay image is overwritten. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-81 7.8 Application 7 Detail Settings Configure the density of the newly registered or overwritten overlay image. % Select the button of a target overlay image, and press [Detail Settings]. After configuring settings, press [OK]. Item Description [Density] Specify the density of the image. Use the keypad to enter the density using a value between 20 and 100%. 7 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7-82 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.9 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes The Bulletin Board User Box is used to register a browsing document. A document registered in the Bulletin Board User Box is sent by the polling transmission function when a polling request is issued from the remote machine. 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen Select the [Bulletin Board User Box] in the [System] tab to display registered Bulletin Board User Boxes. Select the Bulletin Board User Box that contains the document registered in this machine. 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box You can save only one document in one Bulletin Board User Box. To register a new document in the Bulletin Board User Box, delete the existing document, and send a new document to the Bulletin Board User Box. To delete the document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-83 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes The Polling TX User Box is used to save a document to be sent in response to a request from a receiver. The process of saving a specific document in the Polling TX User Box is called polling transmission. 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box You can print a document saved in the Polling TX User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - You can register a document in the Polling TX User Box as an overlay image. For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-79. 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box You can save only one document in the Polling TX User Box. To register a new document in the Polling TX User Box, delete the existing document, and perform polling transmission of a new document. To delete the document saved in the Polling TX User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. dReference For details on the polling transmission procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box The Secure Document User Box is used to save a document that was printed with the specified ID and password. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. The authentication procedure varies depending on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error setting in Administrator Settings - [Security Settings] - [Security Details]. For details, contact the administrator of this machine. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. dReference For details on how to save a secure document, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 1] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 2] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. Reference - If [Mode 2] is selected, enter the password for each document even when the ID is the same. This is because you need to select the document first before entering the password. Therefore, the security level in this mode is higher than mode 1. Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document Enter the password of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and configure print settings Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and enter the password of the secure document ineo 223/283/363/423 7-85 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11.4 Print - Printing You can add some functions to a document saved in the Secure Document User Box when printing the document. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-11. Combine For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Zoom For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-17. Stamp/Composition For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-86 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11.5 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Secure Document User Box. Reference - To delete all documents in the Secure Document User Box at a time, select [User Box Settings] - [Delete Secure Print Documents] in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-19. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-87 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box The Memory RX User Box is used to save a received document in the memory and print it as required. When memory reception is enabled, a received document is automatically saved in the Memory RX User Box. To check a document saved in the Memory RX User Box, select [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and then enter the password that was specified when memory reception was enabled. dReference For details on how to specify the password for memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.12.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. After the specified document has been printed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7-88 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.12 7.12.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Memory RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-89 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box Annotation User Boxes are used to automatically assign a number to a saved documents and add the number when printing or sending the document. You can pre-register the number to be assigned when creating the User Box and change it when printing or sending documents. For the functions you can configure when printing or sending documents, refer to page 7-10 and the sections that follow. Select [Annotation User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Annotation User Boxes are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-16. - For the types of numbers that can be printed in Annotation User Boxes, refer to page 7-92. - To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a document in the User Box, set Auto Document Delete Time to [Do Not Keep]. This is useful for managing the numbers that are added to the copied documents. Specify the Auto Document Delete Time when you create an Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-16. If you open a User Box, you can configure print and transmission settings. 7.13.2 Print - Basic For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-90 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-18. 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-19. 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-20. 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-32. 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-34. 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-41. 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB) For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-43. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-91 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-44. 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-45. 7.13.20 Send - Job History For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-48. 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-49. 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-53. 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-56. 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-58. 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-92 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-63. 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element Secondary Field Add text to a number to be printed. You can enter up to 20 characters. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-93 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 Density Select the density for the annotation numbers to be printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers to be printed. Print Position Select the printing position. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-94 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.35 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in an Annotation User Box. The available setting items are as follows. 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-95 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box The Fax Retransmit User Box is used to save a document, which was unable to be sent after the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter Settings because the remote machine was busy when sending the fax for a predetermined time period. With this User Box, you can print for conformation or resend a saved document later. Select [Fax Retransmit User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Before you can save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must enable the Fax Retransmit User Box in the [Fax Settings] of Administrator Settings. For details on settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print Before retransmitting a saved document, you can print the document for conformation. Data is not deleted after being printed. Select a document to be printed, and press [Proof Print]. Check document information, and press [Start]. 7.14.3 Send - Fax Retransmit a saved document. Select a document, select the [Send] tab, and press [Fax]. Reference - You can specify a new destination when retransmitting a document. You can specify the new destination in Address Book, Direct Input, or Job History. - You can configure transmission settings when you retransmit a saved document. You can also configure line and fax header settings. For details, refer to page 7-54 and page 7-61. - After document sending has been completed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7-96 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete Stop retransmission and delete the target document. Select a document, select the [Filing Settings] tab, and press [Delete]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-97 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box When you use Web Connection or Direct Print to print a PDF file that has been saved with a password configured, or you print an encrypt PDF data that has been saved in the external memory, the data is automatically saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box. Select [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - Only password encrypted PDF data saved by the user who is logged in is displayed when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save Select a document to be printed or saved, and press [Print/Save]. When printing or saving a document, enter the password assigned to the PDF file. After printing or saving has been completed, documents in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box are deleted automatically. Reference - Whether to print or save is specified in the direct print instruction issued from your computer. You cannot change a print instruction to a save instruction or vice versa. 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete You can delete a saved document if it does not need to be printed. Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7-98 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.16 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box Viewing documents This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. A document saved in this User Box can be printed by the user of the document when the user is logged in to the machine. When you print a document from a computer over the network to this machine by entering the user name and password, the document is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. % Select [ID & Print User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - When there are documents saved in the ID & Print User Box, the following buttons are displayed in the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and press the desired button. – [Begin Printing]: Press this button to print documents saved in the ID & Print User Box without logging in to this machine. – [Print & Login]: Press this button to login to this machine and print the documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. – [Login]: Press this button to log in to this machine but not print the documents. After you are logged in, you can print or delete documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. - Documents can be saved in the ID & Print User Box even when user authentication is not enabled. In addition, jobs saved by public users can be saved in the ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to page 8-24. - After printing documents has been completed, the data in the ID & Print User Box is deleted automatically. A confirmation screen for confirming if you are sure to delete the data appears depending on the settings in Administrator Settings. dReference For details on how to print a document from a computer to the ID & Print User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-99 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7 7.16.2 Print - Print 1 Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. 2 Select whether to delete the document after printing. 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-100 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7.17.1 External memory device Reference - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function and the encrypted PDF document printing function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Supported external memory devices Requirements for external memory devices of this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory device that supports the USB (1.1/2.0) interface - FAT32-formatted memory device Connecting the external memory device 0 Use the USB connector on the side that is near the control panel. Do not use the USB connector near the rear side because it is used for optional devices. 0 Do not disconnect the external memory device while saving a document in the external memory device or printing a document saved in the external memory device. 0 Do not use the USB device (hard disk or USB hub) other than the USB flash memory device. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory when the hourglass is being displayed in the control panel while this machine is active. 0 Do not disconnect the USB memory just after connecting it. % Connect the external memory device to the USB connector on the side of this machine. When the external memory device is connected, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen and the following screen is displayed. If you will immediately use the external memory, select the intended purpose. When not using the exert memory, select [Close]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-101 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Reference - The intended purpose of the external memory to be displayed varies depending on the administrator settings. 7.17.2 External memory screen When the external memory device is connected, select [External Memory] to display the folder structure. Entering a file path In the touch panel, you can specify the file path to the folder containing the document to be printed. Press [File Path], and enter the file path. Reference - Make sure that the total length of the file path and file name do not exceed 250 characters. If the number of characters exceeds the limit, the file list is not displayed. Selecting a file You can print the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS. Select a document of one of these types from the list. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. - Printing is not possible when printing is restricted by Security Settings of a PDF file. - This machine supports printing of PDF Version 1.6 or earlier. - Only the files of printable file types are displayed in the list. - File access fails when the total length of the file path and file name exceeds 250 characters. - Up to 200 printable files are displayed in the folder of the specified file path. If the folder contains 200 or more files, it may take time to display the file list screen. - When no Hard Disk is installed, it may be impossible to print a large-size file. In this case, you should install a Hard Disk. Printing encrypted PDF data To print the encrypted PDF data saved in the external memory device, select the data in the External Memory screen and print the data. When the print command is issued, the encrypted PDF data in the external memory is saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine. Access the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine, and then print the data. dReference For the Password Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to page 7-97. Moving to the parent folder To move to the parent folder, press [Up]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-102 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 Opening a folder To check the contents of a specific folder, press [Open]. Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. The Print Details screen is displayed. Document Details You can check the modification date, file name, and other properties of the selected document. 7.17.3 Print - Basic Press [Print] to display the following screen. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Binding Position When you select 2-Sided in [Print], select the binding position. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-103 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-11. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. Paper Select a tray to load printing paper. 7.17.4 Print- Application Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-104 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box This function saves a document stored in the external memory in a User Box. Specify the User Box and document name, and press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Item Description [User Box] Select the Public, Personal, or Group User Box to save data in. [Document Name] Specify the name of the document to be saved. • If you select multiple files, you cannot specify the document name. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-105 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) This function enables you to print a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA via a Bluetooth communication or to save such a document in a User Box. Reference - [Save in User Box] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.18.1 Operating environment The cellular phones and PDAs that can be connected to this machine and the printable file must satisfy the following conditions. Reference - To print documents from a cellular phone or PDA, the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 is required. The settings for enabling a Bluetooth communication are also required. Contact your service representative in advance. - If you cannot access the link file when attempting to print an XHTML file, the document will either not be printed or will be printed in a black frame depending on the setting in [User Settings] − [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] − [Link File Error Notification]. - To access the link file for printing an XHTML file, [WebDAV Settings] of this machine is required. - To use a proxy for connection, register a proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Host Address], and set [User Settings] - [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] - [Proxy Server Use] to [ON]. - The communication speed may drop or communication may be interrupted due to obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Protected documents and image data may not be sent depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • For XHTML file types, the machine supports the character code of UTF-8/Shift- JIS/ISO-8859 and the link file extensions of JPEG/JPG/PNG. • This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-106 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print Reference - To save a file stored in a cellular phone or PDA in a User Box, or to print such a file, configure the appropriate setting in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to page 8-24. To use a Bluetooth communication, the Bluetooth setting must be enabled in this machine. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - When user authentication is specified on this machine, even a registered user cannot print a document unless printing from a cellular phone or PDA is allowed in the machine setting. For user authentication, contact the administrator of this machine. Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be printed. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. Check printing preferences You can check the overview of the settings to print the received data. dReference To configure print settings, select [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to page 8-12. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-107 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be saved in a User Box. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. 7 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7-108 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box The Confidential RX User Box is used to store a document, which is received from the destination machine by confidential reception, and print it as required. Select [Confidential RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Confidential RX User Boxes are displayed. Reference - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Confidential RX User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. 7.19.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press Print. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-109 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.19.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in a Confidential RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. 7 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7-110 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 8 User Box Settings 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.1 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings The following shows the menus and items used to configure User Box settings in the Utility menu. 8.1.1 User mode Reference - *1 The Confidential RX User Box is displayed when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - *2 This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-5) 1 [Public/Personal User Box]*1 (p. 8-5) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-8) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [User Settings] 2 [Custom Display Settings] 3 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-10) [Default Tab] *2 [Shortcut Key 1] [Shortcut Key 2] [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] [Link File Error Notification] (p. 8-11) [Proxy Server Use] (p. 8-11) [Print] (p. 8-12) [Print] [Paper] [Finishing] [Page Margin] [Stamp/Composition] ineo 223/283/363/423 8-3 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 8.1.2 Administrator Settings First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [System Settings] 0 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-19) 1 [Delete Unused User Box]*2 (p. 8-19) 2 [Delete Secure Print Documents]*2 (p. 8-19) 3 [Auto Delete Secure Document]*2 (p. 8-20) 4 [Encrypted PDF Delete Time]*2 (p. 8-20) 5 [ID & Print Delete Time]*2 (p. 8-21) 6 [Document Hold Setting] (p. 8-21) 7 [External Memory Function Settings] (p. 8-22) [Save Document] [Print Document] [External Memory Document Scan] *2 8 [Allow/Restrict User Box] (p. 8-22) 9 [ID & Print Delete after Print Setting]*2 (p. 8-23) 0 [Document Delete Time Setting]*2 (p. 8-23) 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.1 Reference - *1 The Confidential RX User Box is displayed when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - *2 This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. - *3 This item is not displayed when a Hard Disk is installed. 3 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-15) 1 [Public/Personal User Box]*1 (p. 8-5) [New] [Edit] [Delete] [Delete Empty User Box(es)] (p. 8-6) 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-8) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Annotation User Box]*2 (p. 8-16) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Maximum Number of User Boxes]*2 (p. 8-18) [Max. No. of Use Boxes] [Maximum Number of User Boxes] 4 [User Authentication/ Account Track] 2 [User Authentication Settings] 1 [Administrative Setting] [ID & Print Settings]* 2 (p. 8-24) 9 [System Connection] 5 [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] (p. 8-24) 0 [Security Settings] 2 [User Box Administrator Setting]*2 (p. 8-25) 4 [Security Details] [Secure Print Only]*2 (p. 8-26) 6 [HDD Settings]*2 1 [Check HDD Capacity]*2 (p. 8-26) 2 [Overwrite HDD Data]*2 (p. 8-27) [Overwrite Method] [Encryption Priority] [Overwrite Priority] 3 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-28) 4 [HDD Lock Password]*2 (p. 8-29) 5 [Format HDD]*2 (p. 8-30) 6 [HDD Encryption Setting]*2 (p. 8-31) 6 [SSD Settings]*3 1 [Check SSD Capacity]*3 (p. 8-27) 2 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-28) 3 [Format SSD]*3 (p. 8-31) 8 [Stamp Settings] 1 [Apply Stamps] (p. 8-32) [Printing] [Sending] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 8-5 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2 User mode settings 8.2.1 Creating a User Box Public, Personal, or Group User Box Create a Public, Personal, or Group User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Register a Confidential RX User Box when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. For details, refer to page 8-8. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Index] Select the index type. [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner screen. 8 User mode settings 8-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Page (2/2) Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) Automatically searches for and deletes an empty User Box if the Public, Personal, or Group User Box is created in Administrator Settings. Press [Delete Empty User Box(es)] in the Create User Box screen. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Bulletin Board User Box Create a Bulletin Board User Box. You can create up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • Depending on the settings in Administrator Settings, you may not be able to operate. [Confidential RX] This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Select whether to add the confidential RX function to a User Box. When adding the confidential RX function, enter the confidential RX password. • For confirmation, enter the confidential RX password again. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-7 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [User Box Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 User mode settings 8-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Relay User Box You can create up to five Relay User Boxes. The creation and editing setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Confidential RX User Box You can register up to 20 Confidential RX User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - The Confidential RX User Box is available when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Relay Destination] Select a relay destination to send data from the Relay User Box. Pre-register the relay destination as a group destination. • When registering a group destination as a relay destination, be sure to set Abbreviation Dial in the group destination in advance. [Relay TX Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Relay TX Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). ineo 223/283/363/423 8-9 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [User Box Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 User mode settings 8-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting You can customize the User Box screen to fit your operating environment. Default Tab Specify the User Box page to be displayed after pressing [User Box] key on the control panel. Reference - [Public]: Displays the Public User Box page. - [Personal]: Displays the Personal User Box page when User Authentication is enabled. - [System]: Displays the System User Box page. - [Group]: Displays the Group User Box page when Account Track is enabled. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Shortcut key This function enables you to add up to two shortcut keys in the area on the lower right of the page. It is available when registering the frequently used System User Box as a shortcut key. Reference - A shortcut key is displayed only in the User Box mode after pressing the [User Box] key. Switching to the Fax/Scan or Copy mode does not display the target User Box shortcut key. - If Shortcut Key 1 is configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed. [Comm. Password] Specify a confidential RX password. Press [Comm. Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). • For confirmation, enter the communication password twice. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 8-11 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification This function enables you to specify processing to be performed if you cannot access a link file when attempting to print an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [ON]) - [ON]: Prints a link file part in a black frame. - [OFF]: Does not print a link file part. 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use This function enables you to specify whether to use a proxy server to access a link file when printing an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [OFF]) - [ON]: Uses a proxy server. - [OFF]: Does not use a proxy server. Reference - When using a proxy server for connection, select [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [Web- DAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Proxy Server Address] to register the desired proxy server. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 8 User mode settings 8-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings When using a cellular phone or PDA to print a document through this machine, configure print settings. Basic - Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Basic - Paper Select the printing paper size if the sent data does not contain paper size information. Basic - Finishing Specify Fold/Bind, Staple, or Punch. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-13 8.2 User mode settings 8 Reference - The number of punched holes varies depending on the country you are in. Application - Margin Select the margin position. Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 8 Administrator Settings 8-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3 Administrator Settings 8.3.1 User Box permissions User types This machine is intended for users of various positions. The User Box function therefore provides "User Box Administrator" in addition to the administrator of this machine. The following shows the users and their available User Box types. Reference - To log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, execute the following steps when setting User Authentication. – Enter "boxadmin" in the User Name box. – Enter the password specified in page 8-25 in the Password box. Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box The following shows the available functions of the (1) Public User Box that can be accessed by all users and the (2) Personal or Group User Box that can be accessed only by specific users. *1 The registered users can handle only the User Boxes that were created by them. *2 The User Box administrator and administrator can handle User Boxes without entering the password even if it is specified for the User Boxes. Item Description Public user When user authentication is disabled, every user is logged in as a public user. Registered user User registered by the administrator when User Authentication is enabled. User Box administrator User who logs in as the User Box administrator when User Authentication is enabled. This user can access all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Administrator User who manages this machine. This user can create, change, or delete all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Function Create User Box Check, download, or delete a document Change User Box setting Delete User Box User Box type Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public user o − o − o − o − Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 User Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 ineo 223/283/363/423 8-15 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.2 Creating a User Box You can register a new User Box. The following describes the types of the User Boxes that can be registered. Reference - Disabling User Authentication or Account Track saves the User Box registered as a Personal or Group User Box as a Public User Box. The User Box name however remains unchanged. - When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, enter the ID and password when logging in to this machine. After this, be sure to press [Login] or the Access key in the control panel to complete authentication processing. If authentication is not completed, you cannot create a Personal or Group User Box. - When a Hard Disk is installed while the optional Fax Kit is installed, you can configure confidential RX (F-Code TX) settings as the Public, Personal, or Group User Box extension function. The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. For details on the confidential RX function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - When the setting for User Authentication is configured, you can specify a User Box administrator. A User Box administrator can access all Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes. Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling Password Rules. For details on Password Rules, refer to [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The Public/Personal/Group and Annotation User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box For details, refer to page 8-5. 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box For details, refer to page 8-6. 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box For details, refer to page 8-8. Item Description Public User Box Public User Box that can be accessed by everyone. Personal User Box Personal User Box that can be accessed by only the login user when User Authentication is enabled. Group User Box User Box that can be accessed by only the user in the login account when Account Track is enabled. Bulletin Board User Box User Box used to perform Bulletin Polling TX or RX with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Relay User Box User Box used to save relay data when using this machine as a relay distribution station to perform relay distribution with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Annotation User Box User Box used to print or send a saved document with the date/time or filing number image. Specify the type of the text to be added when using this User Box. When registering this User Box, specify the administrator mode. Confidential RX User Box User Box used to save and print a document that was sent from the destination machine by confidential transmission. This item is available when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box Create an Annotation User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/3) Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling Password Rules. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). ineo 223/283/363/423 8-17 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Page (2/3) Page (3/3) 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box For details, refer to page 8-8. Item Description [Count Up] Select whether to count the annotation number by job or by page. [Secondary Field] Add text to the number to be printed (up to 20 characters). [Date/Time] Select the format to display the date and time to be printed. [Density] Select the density of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Number Type] Select the output format (number of digits) of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Print Position] Select the printing position. [Primary Field] Add any text (up to 40 characters). Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • To use a document to give an annotation only without saving or using it for copying, select [Do Not Keep]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created for each user. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Public, Personal, or Group User Box Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. Max. No. Of Use Boxes To specify the maximum number of User Boxes, select [ON]. To not specify the limit and allow users to create an infinite number of User Boxes, select [OFF]. Maximum Number of User Boxes The allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes is 0 to 1000. Use the keypad to enter the maximum number of User Boxes, and press [Apply] to determine it. Reference - If the maximum number of User Boxes is set to "0", you cannot create new ones. - When the selected user already sets the number of User Boxes to 3, the allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes changes 3 to 1000. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-19 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.9 User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box Delete a User Box with no document saved, as an unnecessary User Box. To delete a User Box, confirm the message that appears and select [Yes]. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Delete Secure Print Documents This function deletes all documents saved in the Secure Document User Box. To delete the User Box, confirm the message and select [Yes]. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Auto Delete Secure Document Specify the period from the date/time when a secure document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Encrypted PDF Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when an encrypted PDF document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-21 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved from the ID & Print User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Document Hold Setting Specify whether to save a document in a User Box when sending or printing it. Reference - When deleting a document after printing or sending, select [Yes]. To display a deletion confirmation screen when printing or sending, select [ON] on the deletion selection screen. - To delete a document after printing or sending the document, select [No]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 External Memory Function Settings Set the function of the external memory connected to this machine to ON or OFF. Reference - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. It is also set to OFF (not saved) in the user function setting when User Authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. Allow/Restrict User Box Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box. Reference - To enable the user to handle those functions, select [Allow]. - When not enabling the user to handle those functions, select [Prohibit]. Only the administrator can then create, edit, or delete a User Box. Item Description [Save Document] Select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) scanned documents or documents stored in a User Box to the external memory. [Print Document] Select whether to print (ON) or not print (OFF) documents saved in the external memory using the [Use/File] function. [External Memory Document Scan] Scan a document in the external memory and select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) it in a User Box. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-23 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed. Reference - To check with the user whether to delete the target document, select [Confirm with User]. - To delete the target document without checking with the user after printing, select [Always Delete]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Document Delete Time Setting This function enables the administrator to specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or retrieved from a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically when the user cannot specify the document deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and sec the deletion time. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 ID & Print Settings Configure settings for ID & Print User Box. Reference - A public user job is printed or saved when public user printing is enabled. - A user-unauthorized job is printed or saved when Print without Authentication is enabled. - For details on printing by public users and Print without Authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Select whether to allow or restrict the function for using a cellular phone or PDA. Item Description [ID & Print] [ON]: Saves all the Normal Print and Authentication & Print jobs, which were requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. [OFF]: Saves the Authentication & Print job, which was requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. The Normal Print job is output without being saved in the User Box. [Public User] [Print Immediately]: Outputs a public user job or user-unauthorized job without saving it in the User Box. [Save]: Saves a public user job or user-unauthorized job in the ID & Print User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-25 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting The User Box administrator is available when User Authentication is enabled. If you log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, you can reference the contents of all the created User Boxes regardless of whether the password is specified. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Setting User Box administrator To set a User Box administrator, select [Allow], and press [Password Setting] to register the User Box administrator's password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice. - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator Enter the following items in the login screen. User name: boxadmin Password: Password determined in the User Box Administrator Setting screen Administrator's available functions The following functions are available when you log in as the User Box administrator. - Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box - Checking, downloading, or deleting documents saved in all User Boxes - Changing all User Box settings - Deleting all User Boxes 8 Administrator Settings 8-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.12 Security Details Security Print Only Use this setting to specify to enable only Secure Print when issuing the print command from the printer driver. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings Check HDD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the HDD. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-27 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Check SSD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the SSD. Reference - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. Overwrite HDD Data You can specify how to overwrite and delete HDD data. When image data saved in the HDD becomes unnecessary, this function overwrites meaningless data in all areas that contain the image data to destroy the original data. This function also destroys the non-image data structure to prevent a data leak when the installed HDD has been stolen. The available setting items are as follows. (Default: Mode 1) Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with letter "A" (0x61) Verified [Encryption Priority] Performs encryption processing at a higher security level. In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed unlike [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. Always specify [Encryption Priority]. [Overwrite Priority] In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed based on [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. 8 Administrator Settings 8-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - When changing Encryption Priority or Overwrite Priority setting, format the HDD after rebooting this machine. However, be careful that data is erased by formatting the HDD. - For the data erased by formatting the HDD, refer to page 8-30. Overwrite All Data This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, and press [Delete]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - It takes approximately 40 minutes to execute Mode 1. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified ineo 223/283/363/423 8-29 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the SSD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To perform the overwrite and delete function, press [Yes] Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. HDD Lock Password You can specify the password to lock the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified password carefully so that you will never forget it. Forgetting the password will require a large amount of recovery work. % Specify the password, and reboot this machine. The HDD password is specified. Reference - Enter the HDD password using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - If you have already specified the HDD password, [Change] and [Release] appears. You can change or release the HDD password. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Format HDD This function formats the HDD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-31 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Format SSD This function formats the SSD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential RX User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. HDD Encryption Setting You can configure HDD encryption setting. Specifying a 20-character encryption passphrase for the HDD prevents the user from easily reading the data saved in the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified encryption passphrase carefully so that you will never forget it. 0 The encryption passphrase setting must be configured by the administrator of this machine. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % Specify the encryption passphrase, and reboot this machine. The encryption passphrase setting then becomes available. Reference - Enter the encryption passphrase using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - Encryption passphrase setting becomes available after this machine has been rebooted. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.14 Stamp Settings Apply Stamps This function applies the predetermined stamp to all documents to be output from this machine, ensuring security. Specify whether to apply a stamp when printing or sending. To apply stamps, select [Apply], and then configure settings for the stamp to be added continuously. Reference - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the printed data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Copy Security (Copy Protect, Copy Guard, Password Copy) – Stamp Repeat – Header/Footer – Registered Overlay - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the transmitted data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Header/Footer dReference For details on the stamp setting, refer to page 7-21. 9 Web Connection ineo 223/283/363/423 9-3 9.1 Using Web Connection 9 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters. 9.1.1 Operating environment 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection 0 Start the Web browser to access Web Connection. 0 If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 9-11. 0 For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 0 Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 9-9. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter]. http:/// Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20: - http://192.168.1.20/ When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used: - Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 address of the machine]/ Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16: - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - If IPv6 is set to "ON" while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the domain name. The main menu or login page appears. Network Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications on computer Web browser: • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) Adobe® Flash® Player: • Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format. • Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility (font/macro data management). 9 Using Web Connection 9-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.1 9.1.3 Web browser cache The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page displayed using Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure. When using Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser. Reference - Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help for the Web browser. - With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked, and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again. To avoid this problem, disable the cache function. For Internet Explorer 1 Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings]. 3 Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu. 2 In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache]. 3 In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time]. For Mozilla Firefox 1 Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section. 3 Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox] check box under [Settings], and then click [OK]. 9.1.4 Online help function You can display the online help regarding the function being configured after logging in to Web Connection and clicking . Reference - To display the online help, connect your computer to the Internet. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-5 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2 Login and logout 9.2.1 Login and logout flows Accessing with Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and log in again. When user authentication or account track is not enabled You are automatically logged in as a public user. To log in as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Login as an administrator again. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-7 9.2 Login and logout 9 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in. To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 9.2.2 Logout Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears. Click [OK] to return to the login page. Reference - The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine. - When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. - If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if authentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will automatically log out of the mode. - For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 9-37. Log in again. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-9 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2.3 Login Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or User Box administrator setting. Reference - A User Box administrator can be specified only when a Hard Disk is installed. - You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. For details on the User Box administrator setting, permissions, and password, refer to the page 8-25. - Logging in to the user mode as an administrator enables you to perform job deletion processing, which is not available in the administrator. - In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Login options You can select items as required when logging in. Reference - If Flash is selected in View Mode, the following items are displayed using Flash. – Status icons and messages – Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information] – Status of [Job] Item Description Language Select the language to display information in. View Mode Select Flash or HTML. • To use the read-out software, select HTML. • In the IPv6 environment, select HTML. • To select Flash, prepare Flash Player. User Assist Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login. 9 Login and logout 9-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in as a public user If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page, select [Public User], and click [Login]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-11 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a registered user Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. % In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login]. Reference - If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password. - To select a user name from a list, click [User List]. - If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no longer be able to use the machine. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - [User List] is available only when User Name List is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 9 Login and logout 9-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in to administrator mode To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode. 1 Select [Administrator], and then click [Login]. 2 Enter the administrator password, and then click [OK]. % To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. % Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be able to use it. % Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode. % If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. % The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. % You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-13 9.2 Login and logout 9 Display mode in administrator mode In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. In either display mode, the available items are the same. In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display]. In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu. In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box. Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display]. 9 Login and logout 9-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in as a User Box administrator You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. % In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login]. % To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter the User Box administrator's password. Reference - A User Box administrator can be specified only when a Hard Disk is installed. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. - You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. – [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. – [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-15 9.3 Page Configuration 9 9.3 Page Configuration Logging in to Web Connection displays the page that is configured as shown below. This example shows the items in Information - Device Information. Reference - The contents of the Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or the settings of this machine. No. Item Description 1 Login user name Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click the user name to display the login user name. 2 Status display Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper Tray, or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable you to check the status. 3 Message display Displays the operating status of this machine. 4 [To Login Screen]/ [Logout] Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 9 Page Configuration 9-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.3 5 [Change Password] Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in as a registered user. 6 Help You can display the online help for the currently configured function. For the specified pages, refer to "Online Assistance" in page 9-17. 7 Refresh Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page. 8 Icon Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons are displayed in the user mode. • Information • Job • User Box • Direct Print • Store Address • Customize 9 Menu Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected. 10 Information and settings Displays the details of the item selected in the menu. No. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-17 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4 User Mode Overview Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions. 9.4.1 Information dReference You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the Web Connection online help or Web Connection manual included in the application DVD-ROM. For details on the online help, refer to page 9-4. Item Description [Device Information] Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of this machine. [Online Assistance] Enables you to check the online assistance about this product. [Change User Password] Changes the password of the login user. [Function Permission Information] Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account. [Network Setting Information] Enables you to check the network settings of this machine. [Print Setting Information] Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine. [Print Information] Prints font or configuration information. 9 User Mode Overview 9-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.2 Job 9.4.3 User Boxes dReference For details on how to handle User Boxes, refer to page 9-22. Item Description [Current Jobs] Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs. [Job History] Enables you to check the executed jobs. [Communication List] Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs. Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) to enable you to print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change the User Box setting. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-19 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 Reference - [Open User Box] and [Create User Box] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. 9.4.4 Direct Print Reference - [Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. - A colored original is converted to black and white for printing even if Direct Print is specified. - [Save in User Box] and [Secure Print] in [Application Setting] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. - If the following original is downloaded while no Hard Disk is installed, memory overflow may occur, resulting in a printing failure. – Large volume original – Original that contains complicated figures and requires a large amount of memory to process it [Open System User Box] This function opens the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Compulsory Memory RX, Confidential RX, or Relay User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Compulsory Memory RX, and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. [Create System User Box] Enables you to create a new Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, or Relay User Box. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. Item Description Item Description [Direct Print] Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary, you can select Application to save a document in the specified User Box. 9 User Mode Overview 9-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.5 Store Address [Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-21 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.6 Customize This function enables you to specify the initial screen after logging in. Item Description [Option] Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to this machine. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. The [Open User Box] menu supports the following functions. - Listing the documents saved in a User Box - Printing a document - Sending a document to another machine - Downloading and saving document data in your computer - Moving or copying a document to another User Box - Deleting a document 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box Logging in displays a list of the User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) created in the accessed MFP. Open User Box Select the target User Box name in the User Box list. Otherwise, enter the User Box number and password, and click [OK]. Reference - Selecting a User Box name with a password displays the password entry page. "Open User Box" is displayed as shown below depending on the User Authentication or Account Track settings. - [Open User Box(Public)]: Displayed when User Authentication is not enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group)]: Displayed when Account Track is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication and Account Track are enabled. Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the number of the User Box to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-23 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 File List Selecting a User Box displays its basic information and also lists the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Search from Index] Displays a list of User Boxes for each index, which was selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. [User Box List] Displays the User Box number, User Box name, User Box type, and creation date and time. A User Box with a password is displayed by a keyshaped icon. Item Description [User Box Settings] Click this button to change the User Box name, index, extension, or password setting. [Delete User Box] Click this button to delete the displayed User Box. • Deleting a User Box erases all the documents saved in the User Box. Thumbnail View To view a thumbnail image for each document, click [ON]. When you do not view thumbnail images, click [OFF]. Specify operation Select the target operation, for example, printing, moving, copying, or deleting a document, sending to another machine, or downloading to your computer. For details, refer to page 9-24. [Changes the display] Select the target operation, and click this button to display the "Select" check box for the document that can be handled by the target function. Select Displays a check box for the document that can be handled by the selected function. Thumbnail Displays the image of the first page when the thumbnail image display function is enabled. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 Reference - If 11 or more documents are saved, [Page (Display by 10 cases)] is displayed. 9.5.2 Printing a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Print], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for printable documents. Document Name Displays a document name. Number of Originals Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Click this button to rename a document. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-25 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Print Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configure print settings. % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], Basic Setting and Application Setting will become unavailable. % [Save Print Settings] is not displayed when multiple documents are selected. 4 Click [OK]. Printing starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the printing order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Combine] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function prints the selected documents as one. [Basic Setting] Specify Number of Copies, 2-Sided Print, Continuous Print, and Finishing settings. • Continuous Print is displayed when multiple documents are selected. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Page Margin or Stamp. When using this function, click [Display]. [Save Print Settings] Select whether to save print setting. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-27 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Send to other device], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for documents that can be sent. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [TX Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configure send settings. Item Description [Specify destination] Click [Search from List] to select the destination in the address book. When checking the destination list, click [Check Destination]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-29 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Bind TX is set to [OFF], File Type or Application Setting will become unavailable. 4 Click [OK]. Sending starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Download to PC], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box for selecting an available document is displayed. [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the sending order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Bind TX] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function sends the selected documents as one. [File Type] Specify the file type and encryption contents for a file to be sent. [Communication Setting] Configure E-mail settings or specify the URL notification destination. When using this function, click [Display]. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Stamp or Send & Print. When using this function, click [Display]. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Download Setting]. 3 Configure settings. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-31 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 4 Click [OK]. 5 When [Preparation for download has been completed] has appeared, click [Download]. The File Download page appears. 6 Click [Save]. 7 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. 8 Click [Back]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function collects pages in the order in which they are displayed, and prints them as one document. If necessary, you can change that order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [File Format] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Page Range] Download all pages or specify the range of successive pages. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Move/Copy], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Move/Copy Setting]. % You cannot select multiple documents. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-33 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 3 Configure settings. 4 Click [OK]. This moves or copies the document. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.6 Deleting a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Delete], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. Item Description [User Box Number] Select the User Box to move or copy a document from the User Box List. [Copy] Select this check box to copy a document to the target User Box. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Delete]. % To select or unselect all documents, select the [Check/Uncheck] check box. 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and click [OK]. % When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. 4 Click [OK]. This deletes a document(s), and returns you to the File List page. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-35 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions. Reference - For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set. For details, refer to page 9-13. 9.6.1 Maintenance Item Description [Meter Count] Enables you to check the meter count of this machine. [ROM Version] Enables you to check the ROM version. [Import/Export] Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports) it from a file to this machine. [Status Notification Setting] Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has occurred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a registered user of an error. [Total Counter Notification Setting] Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and register the E-mail address of the destination. [Date/Time Setting] Specify the date and time displayed in this machine. [Timer Setting] Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine. [Network Error Code Display Setting] Specify whether to display the network error code. [Reset] Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [License Settings] – [Edit Font/Macro] (This item is displayed, but cannot be specified.) – [Job Log] 9.6.2 System Settings Reference - To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driver software TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together with this machine. [License Settings] Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code can be issued. [Edit Font/Macro] Adds font or macro. [Job Log] Allows you to create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this machine. Item Description Item Description [Machine Setting] Changes the registration information of this machine. [Register Support Information] Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online Assistance]. [Network TWAIN] Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scanning). If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [Stamp Settings] Register a header or footer. In addition, in [Fax TX Settings], specify whether to cancel the stamp setting for fax transmission. [Blank Page Print Settings] Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on blank pages. [Skip Job Operation Settings] Specify whether to skip a job. [Flash Display Setting] Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-37 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [Delete Unused User Box], [Delete Secure Print File], [Delete Time Setting], [Document Delete Time Setting], and [ID & Print Delete Time ] in [User Box Setting] – [User Box Setting] - [External Memory Function Settings] - [USB to User Box] – [System Connection Setting] - [Application Connection Setting] 9.6.3 Security [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when: - The SSL certificate is not installed - Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON" - [Mode Using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device certificate is already registered [System Connection Setting] Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a cellular phone. In [Application Connection Setting], specify whether to cancel a connection from this machine to My Panel Manager. [Display Setting] Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. [Outline PDF Setting] Specify whether to outline text. Item Description Item Description [PKI Settings] Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external certificate settings. • [Protocol Setting] is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify the items to validate a certificate. [Address Reference Setting] When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group name or access allowed level. [Restrict User Access] Specify the function to restrict user operations. [Copy Security] Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function. [Auto Logout] Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode. [Administrator Password Setting] Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track Item Description [General Settings] Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting. [User Authentication Setting] When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure user setting. [Account Track Settings] When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account. [External Server Settings] When enabling external server authentication, register the external server. [Public User Box Setting] Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Scan to Home Settings] Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder. [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] Configure settings to restrict manual transmission destinations. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-39 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.5 Network Item Description [TCP/IP Setting] Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network. [E-mail Setting] Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax), and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication. [LDAP Setting] Configure the settings to register the LDAP server. [IPP Setting] Configure the IPP print setting. [FTP Setting] Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server. [SNMP Setting] Configure SNMP settings. [SMB Setting] Configure the SMB client, WINS, SMB print, or Direct Hosting setting. [Web Service Settings] Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services. [Bonjour Setting] Configure Bonjour settings. [NetWare Setting] Configure NetWare settings. [AppleTalk Setting] Configure AppleTalk settings. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings. [WebDAV Settings] Configure the WebDAV settings. [OpenAPI Setting] Configure the OpenAPI settings. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [S/MIME] in [E-mail Setting] – [Network Fax Setting] 9.6.6 User Boxes Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when opening it. [TCP Socket Setting] Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this machine and the application software in your computer. [IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting] Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings. [LLTD Setting] Select whether to enable or disable LLTD. [SSDP Settings] Configure the SSDP settings. [Bluetooth Setting] Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth. • To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in advance. Item Description Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User Box) to enable you to change the User Box setting. • Document operations are not available in the administrator mode. • User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for the target User Box. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. [Open System User Box] Open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, Relay, or Annotation User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. • The Annotation User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-41 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 Reference - [Open User Box] and [Create User Box] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. 9.6.7 Printer Settings [Create System User Box] Enables you to create a new Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, Relay, or Annotation User Box. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. • The Annotation User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description Item Description [Basic Setting] Specify the default values of the printer. [PCL Setting] Specify the default values in the PCL mode. [PS Setting] Specify the default values in the PS mode. [TIFF Setting] Specify the paper to print TIFF images. [XPS Settings] Configure the XPS print settings. [Interface Setting] Specify the timeout period of the interface. [Direct Print Settings] Configure the settings to enable direct printing using Web Connection. [Assign Account to Acquire Device Info] Select whether to specify a password to acquire device information through the printer driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.8 Store Address Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails. [Application Registration] Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected application. • [Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Prefix/Suffix] Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when Emailing. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-43 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.9 Fax Settings Item Description [Header/Footer Position] Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information. [Line Parameter Setting] Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method. [TX/RX Settings] Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data. [Function Setting] Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax. [PBX Connection Setting] Specify the outside line at PBX connection. [Report Settings] Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when sending or receiving data. [Multi Line Settings] Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line. • This item is displayed when a line is extended. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the setting to use network fax. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Header Information] Registers sender information and fax number when sending data. [Fax Print Quality Settings] Specify whether to correct a received G3 fax according to the resolution. • The low resolution means 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e 200 dpi, or 300 dpi e 300 dpi, and the high resolution means 400 dpi e 400 dpi. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose For an item with multiple settings required, configure them according to the instructions shown in the window. The available setting items are as follows. - Configure the settings for sending a scanned document - Configure the network print settings - Restrict users using this machine Reference - As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left. - If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose screen after the items that were configured before cancellation have been applied. 10 Appendix ineo 223/283/363/423 10-3 10.1 Error message list 10 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list If an error message appears, perform the corresponding operation described below. dReference For details on the network settings, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Message Cause and remedy Unable to connect to the network. Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make sure that Network Settings in Administrator Settings have been correctly configured. The address for the communication method cannot be selected since the number of addresses has exceeded the maximum allowed for broadcasting. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Document could not be saved in user box due to insufficient HDD capacity. Check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of registered user boxes has reached the max. allowance. The number of registered user boxes has reached the maximum allowed. The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the maximum number possible. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 10 Glossary 10-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 10.2 Glossary Term Description 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vectorgraphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. Anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering anonymous as the account name. Authentication & print A function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver during user authentication. Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0". bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous for the larger size Bitmap Font characters. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. Compact PDF A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used for digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation. Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function is activated. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. Density The amount of density of an image. Density Compensation A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors. This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness on the image. ineo 223/283/363/423 10-5 10.2 Glossary 10 DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet A standard for LAN transmission lines. File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network. Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce smoother transition of the shading. Gray scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black and white dots. Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32-bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet. JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, One of the file formats used to save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is generally 1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other natural images. Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network. Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS. PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission. PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is based on the PostScript format. You can use the free Adobe Reader software to view PDF documents. Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image. Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. It indicates how many pixels are contained per inch. Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced precisely on an image or a print matter. Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image. Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page. SMB The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and printers mainly over the Windows network. SSD The acronym for Solid State Drive. This is a memory device installed in this machine. This drive is used to store a document saved or received from the fax function when no Hard Disk is installed. SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Thumbnail A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image (image displayed when the file is opened). Term Description ineo 223/283/363/423 10-7 10.2 Glossary 10 TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required. Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 11 Index ineo 223/283/363/423 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-10 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-38 Address search 7-46 Address type 7-38 Administrator settings 8-3, 8-14 Allow/restrict user box 8-22 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-62, 7-70 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-20 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-35 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-57 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-82, 8-6 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-24 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-55 Check HDD capacity 8-26 Check printing preferences 7-106 Check SSD capacity 8-27 Check/change temporarily 7-31 City 7-47 Color 7-68 Combine 7-7, 7-14 Communication method settings 7-59 Communication settings 7-54 Company name 7-48 Compulsory memory RX user box 7-87 Confidential RX user box 8-8 Confidential RX user box (System user box) 7-108 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-3 Copies 7-10 Copy 7-66 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-5, 8-15 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-21 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-6 Delete page 7-71 Delete secure print documents 8-19 Delete unused user box 8-19 Deleting documents 7-65 Density 7-93 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-12 Detail search 7-39, 7-58 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Digital signature 7-61 Direct input 7-40, 7-58 Direct print 9-19 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-69 Document delete time setting 8-23 Document details 7-69, 7-102 Document hold setting 8-21 Document name 7-56 Download 9-29 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit document 7-71 Edit name 7-65 E-mail 7-41 E-mail addr. 7-47 E-mail encryption 7-61 E-Mail settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF data 7-101 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-20 11-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by item 11.1 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-50 Entering the PIN code 7-106 Error message list 10-3 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100 External memory function settings 8-22 F Fax 7-41 Fax header settings 7-61 Fax number 7-47 Fax retransmit user box 7-95 Fax settings 9-43 F-code transmission 7-60 File list 9-23 File name 2-11 File path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101 File type 6-8, 7-49, 7-68 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-64 Finishing 7-11 First name 7-47 Fold/bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 From 7-57 FTP 7-44 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-29 HDD settings 8-26 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I Icons 3-5 ID & print delete after print setting 8-23 ID & print delete time 8-21 ID & print settings 8-24 ID & print user box 7-98 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-39 Information 9-17 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-42 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-18 Job history 7-46 Job list 3-7 Job list - delete 3-7 Job list - job details 3-8 L Last name 7-47 LDAP search - advanced search 7-47 LDAP search - search 7-47 Left panel 3-6 Line setting 7-54 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-35 Maximum number of user boxes 8-18 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-2 Mobile/PDA 7-105 Move page 7-74 Move/copy 9-32 Moving documents 7-65 N Name 7-47 Network 9-39 New 7-79 Next destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Number type 7-93 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Organizing documents 2-7 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-52 Overlay setting 7-33 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite all data 8-28 Overwrite HDD data 8-27 P Page configuration 9-15 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 Paper 7-103 Password 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 PC (SMB) 7-43 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-83 Position 7-25, 7-30 Preview 3-16, 3-17, 7-69 Preview/set range 7-76 Preview/specify by input 7-77 Print 7-7, 7-8, 9-24 Print - application 7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-5 11.1 Index by item 11 Print - basic 7-10, 7-102 Print position 7-93 Print/save 7-97 Printer settings 9-41 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-12 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-42 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-78 Registered overlay 7-32 Relay user box 8-8 Resolution 7-48, 7-67 Rotate page 7-72 S Save in external memory 7-66 Save in user box 7-104 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-4, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-53 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-40 Secondary field 7-92 Secure document user box 7-84 Security 9-37 Security details 8-26 Security print only 8-26 Select line 7-55 Send 7-34, 7-35, 9-27 Send & print 7-63 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-44 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 SSD settings 8-26 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-52 Stamp element 7-92 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-12 Store address 9-20, 9-42 Subject 7-56 System settings 9-36 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-59 Touch panel 3-5 U URL notification setting 7-58 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-15 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-15 Use/file - details 3-14 User authentication 2-9 User authentication/account track 9-38 User box administrator setting 8-25 User box setting 8-10, 8-19 User boxes 9-18, 9-40 User name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Using documents 2-5 V V.34 OFF 7-55 W Web browser cache 9-4 Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-45 Z Zoom 7-14 11-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-14 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-14 8in1 7-14 A Address Type 7-38 Advanced Search 7-47 All Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-22 Annotation User Box 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-36 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-20 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-34 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-53 Blank 7-20 Body 7-57 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-82, 8-6 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-13 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-30 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-26 Check Job 3-6 Check Job Set. 3-8, 3-10 Check Job Settings 3-14 Check SSD Capacity 8-27 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-47 Color 6-12, 7-53 Combine 7-6, 7-8, 7-14 Comm. List 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Communication Method Settings 7-59 Communication Settings 7-36 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-49 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-49 Company Name 7-48 Confidential RX User Box 4-37 Continuous Print 7-9, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-64, 7-66 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92, 8-17 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-64, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109 Delete Page 3-18 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-19 Delete Unused User Box 8-19 Deleted Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Deleting 7-65 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-30, 7-81, 7-93, 8-17 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Detail Search 7-39 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-33, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-61 Display Name 7-33 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-23 Document Details 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109 Document Hold Setting 8-21 Document Name 6-5, 7-56 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-50 Document Settings 7-36 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit Document 7-70 Edit Name 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109 E-mail 7-41 E-mail Addr. 7-47 E-mail Encryption 7-61 E-Mail Settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption Priority 8-27 Existing Setting 7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-7 11.2 Index by button 11 External Memory 7-100 External Memory Document Scan 8-22 External Memory Function Settings 8-22 F Fax 3-18, 7-41, 7-95 Fax Header Settings 7-61 Fax Number 7-47 F-Code transmission 7-60 File Path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 File Type 6-8, 7-49 Finished Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Finishing 7-8, 7-9 First Name 7-47 Fold/Bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 Forward 3-11 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-57 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-44 Full Color 6-12, 7-53 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-53 Group 7-36 H Half-Fold 7-13 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-29 HDD Settings 8-26 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-23 ID & Print Delete Time 8-21 ID & Print Settings 8-24 ID & Print User Box 7-98 Image 7-52 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-33 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-8 Index 7-39, 8-5 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-42 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-8 Job List 3-6, 3-7 JPEG 6-8, 7-49 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Last Name 7-47 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-54 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-18 Memory RX User Box 7-87 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Move 7-64 Moving documents 7-65 Multi Page 6-11, 7-53 N Name 7-47 New 7-79 Next Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Next Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Number Type 7-93, 8-17 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite All Data 8-28 Overwrite Priority 8-27 P Page Margin 7-8, 7-9, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-53 Paper 7-103 Password 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-5, 8-7, 8-16 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-30 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF 6-8, 7-49 Photo 6-6 11-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by button 11.2 Photo Size 6-13 Polling TX User Box 7-83 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-28, 7-30 Position Setting 7-12 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Preview 3-6, 3-16, 7-69 Preview/Set Range 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input 7-77 Primary Field 8-17 Print 7-6, 7-99, 7-102 Print Document 8-22 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-17 Proof Print 7-95 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-5 R Receiver RX Ability 7-42 Redial 3-10, 3-11 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-70, 7-78, 7-94 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-32 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-8 Relay TX Password 8-8, 8-9 Relay User Box 8-8 Release Held Job 3-8 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-48 S Save Document 7-4, 8-22 Scan 3-18 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-36, 7-38, 7-47 Secondary Field 7-92, 8-17 Secure Document User Box 7-84 Security Print Only 8-26 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-63 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-8 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 SSD Settings 8-26 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-52 Stamp Element 7-92 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-8, 7-9, 7-62 Subject 7-56 T Text 6-6, 7-52 Text Color 7-62 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-62 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-33 TIFF 6-8, 7-49 Timer transmission 7-59 Timer TX Job 3-10 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-58 Use Existing Color Setting 7-53 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-25 User Box Name 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box No. 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box Setting 8-19 User Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 V V.34 OFF 7-55 View Finishing 3-17, 3-18 W WebDAV 7-45 X XPS 6-8, 7-49 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Zoom 7-8, 7-14 1-1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9 Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10 Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 1-2 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 1-3 6.1.3 Save Document window .................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption.......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment ............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 1-4 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41 1-5 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Company Name ............................................................................................................................... 7-48 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Encryption........................................................................................................................................ 7-50 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 1-6 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 1-7 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters ................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings.......................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94 1-8 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100 Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101 Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101 Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101 Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108 7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5 1-9 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat......................................................................... 8-13 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29 1-10 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44 1-11 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 1-12 1-1 Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-10 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-38 Address search 7-46 Address type 7-38 Administrator settings 8-3, 8-14 Allow/restrict user box 8-22 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-62, 7-70 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-20 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-35 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-57 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-82, 8-6 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-24 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-55 Check HDD capacity 8-26 Check printing preferences 7-106 Check SSD capacity 8-27 Check/change temporarily 7-31 City 7-47 Color 7-68 Combine 7-7, 7-14 Communication method settings 7-59 Communication settings 7-54 Company name 7-48 Compulsory memory RX user box 7-87 Confidential RX user box 8-8 Confidential RX user box (System user box) 7-108 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-3 Copies 7-10 Copy 7-66 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-5, 8-15 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-21 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-6 Delete page 7-71 Delete secure print documents 8-19 Delete unused user box 8-19 Deleting documents 7-65 Density 7-93 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-12 Detail search 7-39, 7-58 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Digital signature 7-61 Direct input 7-40, 7-58 Direct print 9-19 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-69 Document delete time setting 8-23 Document details 7-69, 7-102 Document hold setting 8-21 Document name 7-56 Download 9-29 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit document 7-71 Edit name 7-65 E-mail 7-41 E-mail addr. 7-47 E-mail encryption 7-61 E-Mail settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF data 7-101 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-50 Entering the PIN code 7-106 Error message list 10-3 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100 External memory function settings 8-22 F Fax 7-41 Fax header settings 7-61 Fax number 7-47 Fax retransmit user box 7-95 Fax settings 9-43 F-code transmission 7-60 File list 9-23 File name 2-11 1-2 File path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101 File type 6-8, 7-49, 7-68 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-64 Finishing 7-11 First name 7-47 Fold/bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 From 7-57 FTP 7-44 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-29 HDD settings 8-26 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I Icons 3-5 ID & print delete after print setting 8-23 ID & print delete time 8-21 ID & print settings 8-24 ID & print user box 7-98 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-39 Information 9-17 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-42 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-18 Job history 7-46 Job list 3-7 Job list - delete 3-7 Job list - job details 3-8 L Last name 7-47 LDAP search - advanced search 7-47 LDAP search - search 7-47 Left panel 3-6 Line setting 7-54 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-35 Maximum number of user boxes 8-18 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-2 Mobile/PDA 7-105 Move page 7-74 Move/copy 9-32 Moving documents 7-65 N Name 7-47 Network 9-39 New 7-79 Next destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Number type 7-93 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Organizing documents 2-7 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-52 Overlay setting 7-33 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite all data 8-28 Overwrite HDD data 8-27 P Page configuration 9-15 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 Paper 7-103 Password 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 PC (SMB) 7-43 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-83 Position 7-25, 7-30 Preview 3-16, 3-17, 7-69 Preview/set range 7-76 Preview/specify by input 7-77 Print 7-7, 7-8, 9-24 Print - application 7-16 Print - basic 7-10, 7-102 Print position 7-93 Print/save 7-97 Printer settings 9-41 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-12 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-42 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-78 Registered overlay 7-32 Relay user box 8-8 1-3 Resolution 7-48, 7-67 Rotate page 7-72 S Save in external memory 7-66 Save in user box 7-104 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-4, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-53 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-40 Secondary field 7-92 Secure document user box 7-84 Security 9-37 Security details 8-26 Security print only 8-26 Select line 7-55 Send 7-34, 7-35, 9-27 Send & print 7-63 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-44 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 SSD settings 8-26 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-52 Stamp element 7-92 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-12 Store address 9-20, 9-42 Subject 7-56 System settings 9-36 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-59 Touch panel 3-5 U URL notification setting 7-58 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-15 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-15 Use/file - details 3-14 User authentication 2-9 User authentication/account track 9-38 User box administrator setting 8-25 User box setting 8-10, 8-19 User boxes 9-18, 9-40 User name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Using documents 2-5 V V.34 OFF 7-55 W Web browser cache 9-4 Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-45 Z Zoom 7-14 1-4 1-1 Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-14 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-14 8in1 7-14 A Address Type 7-38 Advanced Search 7-47 All Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-22 Annotation User Box 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-36 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-20 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-34 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-53 Blank 7-20 Body 7-57 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-82, 8-6 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-13 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-30 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-26 Check Job 3-6 Check Job Set. 3-8, 3-10 Check Job Settings 3-14 Check SSD Capacity 8-27 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-47 Color 6-12, 7-53 Combine 7-6, 7-8, 7-14 Comm. List 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Communication Method Settings 7-59 Communication Settings 7-36 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-49 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-49 Company Name 7-48 Confidential RX User Box 4-37 Continuous Print 7-9, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-64, 7-66 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92, 8-17 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-64, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109 Delete Page 3-18 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-19 Delete Unused User Box 8-19 Deleted Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Deleting 7-65 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-30, 7-81, 7-93, 8-17 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Detail Search 7-39 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-33, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-61 Display Name 7-33 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-23 Document Details 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109 Document Hold Setting 8-21 Document Name 6-5, 7-56 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-50 Document Settings 7-36 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit Document 7-70 Edit Name 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109 E-mail 7-41 E-mail Addr. 7-47 E-mail Encryption 7-61 E-Mail Settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption Priority 8-27 Existing Setting 7-14 External Memory 7-100 External Memory Document Scan 8-22 External Memory Function Settings 8-22 F 1-2 Fax 3-18, 7-41, 7-95 Fax Header Settings 7-61 Fax Number 7-47 F-Code transmission 7-60 File Path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 File Type 6-8, 7-49 Finished Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Finishing 7-8, 7-9 First Name 7-47 Fold/Bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 Forward 3-11 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-57 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-44 Full Color 6-12, 7-53 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-53 Group 7-36 H Half-Fold 7-13 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-29 HDD Settings 8-26 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-23 ID & Print Delete Time 8-21 ID & Print Settings 8-24 ID & Print User Box 7-98 Image 7-52 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-33 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-8 Index 7-39, 8-5 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-42 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-8 Job List 3-6, 3-7 JPEG 6-8, 7-49 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Last Name 7-47 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-54 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-18 Memory RX User Box 7-87 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Move 7-64 Moving documents 7-65 Multi Page 6-11, 7-53 N Name 7-47 New 7-79 Next Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Next Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Number Type 7-93, 8-17 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite All Data 8-28 Overwrite Priority 8-27 P Page Margin 7-8, 7-9, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-53 Paper 7-103 Password 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-5, 8-7, 8-16 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-30 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF 6-8, 7-49 Photo 6-6 Photo Size 6-13 Polling TX User Box 7-83 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-28, 7-30 Position Setting 7-12 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 1-3 Preview 3-6, 3-16, 7-69 Preview/Set Range 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input 7-77 Primary Field 8-17 Print 7-6, 7-99, 7-102 Print Document 8-22 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-17 Proof Print 7-95 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-5 R Receiver RX Ability 7-42 Redial 3-10, 3-11 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-70, 7-78, 7-94 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-32 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-8 Relay TX Password 8-8, 8-9 Relay User Box 8-8 Release Held Job 3-8 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-48 S Save Document 7-4, 8-22 Scan 3-18 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-36, 7-38, 7-47 Secondary Field 7-92, 8-17 Secure Document User Box 7-84 Security Print Only 8-26 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-63 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-8 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 SSD Settings 8-26 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-52 Stamp Element 7-92 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-8, 7-9, 7-62 Subject 7-56 T Text 6-6, 7-52 Text Color 7-62 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-62 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-33 TIFF 6-8, 7-49 Timer transmission 7-59 Timer TX Job 3-10 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-58 Use Existing Color Setting 7-53 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-25 User Box Name 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box No. 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box Setting 8-19 User Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 V V.34 OFF 7-55 View Finishing 3-17, 3-18 W WebDAV 7-45 X XPS 6-8, 7-49 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Zoom 7-8, 7-14 1-4 Guide de l’utilisateur Opérations de numérisation avancée . bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5 Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9 Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9 Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9 Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10 Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13 1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7 2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8 Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3 Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7 3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9 Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12 Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13 Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14 Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26 Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26 Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37 Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3 Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3 Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9 4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11 Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14 Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15 Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26 Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29 4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37 Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3 Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4 Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4 Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7 Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8 Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13 Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13 Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19 Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19 Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31 FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37 Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37 Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43 Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43 Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47 Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58 Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58 5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59 Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59 Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3 Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12 Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15 Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16 Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32 Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection......................................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3 Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5 Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7 Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7 Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8 Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10 Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12 Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12 Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29 Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29 Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3 Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3 Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3 8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7 Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11 Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3 9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4 Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4 Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5 Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6 Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7 Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9 Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3 Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3 Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3 Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4 Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5 Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5 Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6 10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282 et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de l'utilisation de la machine. Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement réel de manière légèrement différente. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 362/282/222 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-5 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Information de licence Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 362/282/222 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 362/282/222 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective licensee(s). NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents, copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-9 1.3 A propos de ce manuel Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222. Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des noms de produit, etc. Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants. Structure du Guide Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants. Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Fonctions Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Chapitre 5 Scanner IP Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes Chapitre 10 Annexe Notation Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou 362/282/222 Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus sont mentionnés tous ensemble Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Images présentées De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été installé. Précautions d'utilisation Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de ces fonctions. - Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une ligne téléphonique normale. - Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas être utilisés. - L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic Internet/Intranet. - En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de pages ou d'images. Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé. - Emission par lots - Réception d'appel sélectif - Emission d'appel sélectif - Emission de numérisation rapide - Emission du mot de passe - Copie à distance - Emissions de boîtes confidentielles - Inscription au bulletin - Composition mains libres - Interrogation à distance du bulletin - Réglage "Pas de réduction" 2 Remarque L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-11 Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées. - Réglages de la qualité - Réglages de la densité - Réglage du Format Original - Rapport d'émission - 2en1 - Emission recto-verso - Tampon (en option) - Informations relatives à l'identifiant* - Emission prioritaire - Émission différée - Emission rotative* *Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par Internet et par adresse IP 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 362/282/222 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax Internet. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement des documents dans des boîtes. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel) Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur l'utilisation du scanner IP. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-13 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option est installé. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 362/282/222 1.5 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à exécuter. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-15 ? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir que les résultats souhaités sont atteints. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Fonctions Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-3 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la page 3-3. Intranet AdresseIP Terminal Fax (Même type d’unité que cette machine) 2 Fonctions 2-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2.2 Scan vers PC Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé. Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les données peuvent être enregistrées. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. - S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner IP pour enregistrer les données. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la page 4-3. Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-5 Intranet Ordinateur client 2 Fonctions 2-6 bizhub 362/282/222 2.3 Scanner IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré. Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton de numérisation. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. - Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par l'administrateur. Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-7 2.4 Relais IP Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local. Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne téléphonique. Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 6, "Opérations Relais IP" à la page 6-3. Terminal Transmission de télécopie de télécopie Ligne Téléphonique Machine de relais Machine d'où part la commande 2 Fonctions 2-8 bizhub 362/282/222 2.5 PageScope Web Connection L'ordinateur peut être utilisé pour vérifier l'état d'émission/d'impression de la machine et si oui ou non la télécopie est imprimée. Différents éléments peuvent en outre être enregistrés, à l'exemple de boutons à touche unique. PageScope Web Connection dispose d'un mode pour les opérations exécutées par les utilisateurs communs et d'un mode pour celles exécutées par l'administrateur. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 7, "Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection" à la page 7-3. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-3 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un destinataire est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ou un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Ajouter un destinataire" à la page 3-29. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-6 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-8 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-9 3.2 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm.]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-10 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode email]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode email, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" or "11 × 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-11 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-12 bizhub 362/282/222 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-13 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-15 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-16 bizhub 362/282/222 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-17 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'impression pour les informations d'émission et appuyez ensuite sur [Sélection Identifiant]. 4 Sélectionnez l'identifiant, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. DE : NEWYORK Des données d'image ont été jointes à l'e-mail. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-19 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [Annul.]. ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-23 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-24 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-26 bizhub 362/282/222 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-27 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : la résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 bizhub 362/282/222 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP Si une télécopie par adresse IP est envoyée à cette machine, la réception et l'impression en sont automatiques. Il faut tout d'abord spécifier l'adresse IP de cette machine sur l'écran Paramètres réseau. ! Détails La méthode de réception spécifiée sur l'écran Paramètres fax (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1) ne s'applique que si la télécopie est reçue par le biais d'une ligne téléphonique ordinaire. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas dans le cas de la réception d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-29 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. Taille Emission (max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-31 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-32 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Suite]. 8 Tapez l'adresse IP du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-33 9 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode e-mail]. 10 Sur l'écran mode E-mail, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-37 Donner un nom à un index Pour faciliter la recherche du bouton de numérotation 1-touche désiré, vous pouvez classer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche dans des index que vous appellerez par exemple, "Bureaux" ou "Clients". ! Détails Le nom d'index entré peut contenir huit caractères au maximum. Il est possible d'enregistrer 36 index et 15 boutons de numérotation 1-touche au maximum dans chaque index. Pour nommer un index 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 3 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur [Index]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton d'index à programmer. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-38 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom d'index, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-39 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique Si les fonctions utilisées lors de l'émission sont enregistrées avec les informations relatives au destinataire, une émission peut avoir lieu avec les paramètres enregistrés en appuyant tout simplement sur un bouton. C'est ce que l'on appelle programmes de courrier électronique. Ceux-ci sont pratiques quand il s'agit d'envoyer une émission à un destinataire spécifique et avec des paramètres spécifiques. ! Détails Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes mail. Cependant, le nombre total de boutons de numérotation 1-touche et de programmes de courrier électronique est limité à 540. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 300 destinataires avec un seul programme de courrier électronique. Certaines fonctions ou paramètres enregistrés dans un programme de courrier électronique peuvent être sans effet en fonction de l'opération effectuée, comme l'illustre le tableau ci-dessous. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction et paramètre, voir la page appropriée. o : A un effet + : A un effet sous certaines conditions - : N'a aucun effet Fonctionnement Fonction/Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Relais IP Qualité o o o Densité o o o Zoom - - - Réglage du Format Original o o o Sélection Identification o - o Rapport EM o o o 2en1 o o o Emiss. R/V o o o Emission Rotation + - + Priorité EM o o o Param. TX horloge o o o Tampon + + + Sélection Objet - - - Adresse E-mail de réponse - - - Nom du fichier - o - Notification email - - - 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-40 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des opérations suivantes, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Scan vers Email - Scan vers FTP - Scan vers SMB - Scan vers HDD - Fax Internet 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-41 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [Prog. Mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option, a été installé, appuyez sur [Prog. FAX]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-42 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 6 Tapez le programme qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. – Le nom de programme peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher un écran et y sélectionner un programme. Sélectionnez le programme désiré et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Spécifiez de destinataire. – Pour spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur [1-Touche], appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche pour sélectionner un destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour rechercher un bouton 1-touche, appuyez sur [Recherche], spécifiez le destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si aucun destinataire n'est à enregistrer, appuyez sur [Aucune destination]. 8 Appuyez sur [Suite]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-43 9 Appuyez sur [Param.Transmission]. 10 Spécifiez les fonctions à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur [Qualité] pour spécifier les paramètres de "Qualité", "Densité", "Zoom" et "Réglage format orig.". – Appuyez sur [Menu 1] pour spécifier les paramètres pour "Identif. EM", "Rapport EM", "Priorité EM", "Param. TX horloge", "2en1", "Emiss. R/V", "Rotation EM" et "Tampon". – Appuyez sur [Menu 2] pour spécifier les paramètres "Objet", "Adresse E-mail de réponse", "Nom fich.", et "Notification E-mail". 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton 1-touche du programme de courrier électronique que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. Pour effacer le Programme E-mail, appuyez sur [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur Lorsque Scanner IP est installé, deux utilitaires (scanner IP et ImageReceiver) sont installés. Lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après l'installation des utilitaires, ImageReceiver est lancé automatiquement et son icône s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows. Lors de l'exécution d'une opération Scan vers PC, assurez-vous que ImageReceiver a démarré normalement. L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. ! Détails Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes"), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". Vérifier les paramètres réseau S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que les données ne soient pas envoyées correctement étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifiez une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser Scanner IP. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'installation et l'utilisation du scanner IP et la vérification de l'image numérisée, voir chapitre 5 "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un ordinateur est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être enregistrées sur l'ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer une destination" à la page 4-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinations et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom de la destination Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-11 4.3 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer des données en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données doivent être enregistrées. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-13 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-14 bizhub 362/282/222 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-17 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Réseau *(Rés.) Nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données enregistré. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-19 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Identif. EM" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Rotation Em" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut :Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-23 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-27 Spécifier le nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données joint à un message électronique. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Réseau. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Rés. 3 Tapez le Nom de fichier, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de taper l'extension de fichier. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [NON]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Information sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-30 bizhub 362/282/222 4.7 Enregistrer une destination Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur où les données doivent être enregistrées. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Suite]. 8 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données sont censées être enregistrées, puis appuyez sur [Suivant]. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 10 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement. adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-38 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-3 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses informations que vous devez vous assurer de comprendre avant d'utiliser Scanner IP. Scanner IP et ImageReceiver Scanner IP et ImageReceiver sont décrits dans les lignes suivantes. - Ces utilitaires sont disponibles uniquement lorsqu'un document est numérisé. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une télécopie reçue et transférée vers Scanner IP, voir "Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP" à la page 5-59. - Les données numérisées avec cette machine et envoyées vers un ordinateur sont reçues avec ImageReceiver et enregistrées comme fichier image avec Scanner IP. Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP, vous devez démarrer ImageReceiver. - L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. Normalement, ImageReceiver démarre automatiquement avec le démarrage de Windows. - Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". - Lorsque ImageReceiver commence à recevoir les données image, son icône clignote dans la barre des tâches de Windows. - En fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver spécifiés, les données image peuvent être reçues avec ImageReceiver, même si Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. ! Détails Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être lus avec Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique Avant d'utiliser un scanner IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte de cette machine. Vous devez être particulièrement prudent au cas où Scanner IP est utilisé dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique. Si vous spécifiez une adresse IP incorrecte dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique, ce dernier risque de composer inutilement. En outre et en fonction des paramètres réseau spécifiés sur l'ordinateur, le routeur téléphonique risque de composer inutilement même si l'adresse IP spécifiée est correcte. Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal Si vous utilisez un ordinateur avec modem (ou connecté à un adaptateur de terminal) le modem (ou l'adaptateur de terminal) risque de composer. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "Ne jamais établir de connexion" or "Connecter à chaque fois qu'une connexion réseau n'est pas établie" sous "Paramètres accès modem et réseau privé virtuel" sur l'onglet Connexions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Internet. Pour plus de détails, consulter le manuel du système d'exploitation. Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista Avec Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista, la transmission effectuée par ImageReceiver risque d'être affectée par les fonctions de sécurité avancée (le pare-feu Windows est activé par défaut). Pour utiliser ImageReceiver, cliquez sur [Débloquer] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows. Toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver passent, par défaut, par le pare-feu Windows, et toutes les fonctions ImageReceiver peuvent être utilisées normalement. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-5 ! Détails Si vous avez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] (Toujours bloquer), toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver sont bloquées par le pare-feu Windows, et les fonctions ImageReceiver ne peuvent plus être utilisées. Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver voir "Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver" à la page 5-6. ! Détails Le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows s'affiche lorsque ImageReceiver démarre sous les conditions suivantes. - Lorsque Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista est installé alors qu'ImageReceiver est déjà installé - Lorsqu'ImageReceiver est réinstallé sur un ordinateur équipé de Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista 5 Scanner IP 5-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver Si vous aviez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows, ImageReceiver ne peut plus être utilisé. Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessus pour autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver. 1 Ouvrir le panneau de commande et double-cliquez sur "Centre de sécurité" installé avec Windows XP SP2. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Centre de sécurité Windows, cliquez sur "Pare-feu Windows". 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Pare-feu Windows, cliquez sur l'onglet Exceptions. (Pour Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Autoriser un programme via le Pare-feu Windows".) 4 Dans la liste "Programmes et services", vérifier si "MGS" avec le nom du programme ImageReceiver est enregistré. 5 Cochez la case "MGS". 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. ! Détails Seul un utilisateur jouissant des privilèges de l'administrateur peut modifier les paramètres de pare-feu. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-7 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver Si un serveur de courrier électronique est installé sur un ordinateur équipé d'un scanner IP, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Si Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) et le serveur de courrier électronique sont utilisés sur le même ordinateur, cliquez sur [Change ImageReceiver port] (Changer port ImageReceiver). Toutefois, pour utiliser cette fonction, les paramètres doivent correspondre aux Paramètres port du bouton de numérotation 1-touche utilisé avec Scan vers PC. Le numéro du port peut être vérifié après la modification en cliquant sur "Help", ensuite sur "Computer Information" dans scanner IP. Lorsque vous utilisez Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) sans avoir modifié le numéro du port, arrêtez le serveur de courrier électronique, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. Si le numéro de port a été modifié par inadvertance, désinstallez et réinstallez Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Emissions SSL - Les émissions pour l'utilisation de Scanner IP pour programmer/supprimer des boutons de numérisation peuvent être cryptées. - Si cette machine est configurée pour les émissions SSL, la boîte de dialogue suivante apparaît. Si cette boîte de dialogue apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate] et installez un certificat. Une fois que le certificat est installé, ce boîte de dialogue ne doit pas s'afficher pendant la période de validité du certificat. A l'expiration du certificat, cette boîte de dialogue va réapparaître et il faudra réinstaller le certificat. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des certificats, voir "Installation des certificats" à la page 5-10. - Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour créer des certificats. Pour plus de détails sur la création de certificats, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Si Scanner IP communique avec un périphérique utilisant SSL, l'icône d'un cadenas s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-9 ! Détails Pour que Scanner IP communique avec cette machine utilisant SSL, vous devez installer Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur. Pour la communication SSL, il faut un niveau de cryptage Internet Explorer de 56 bits ou plus. Si le niveau de cryptage n'est pas de 56 bits ou plus, procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site Internet Microsoft et installez-le. Pour activer les émissions SSL et utiliser Scanner IP, utilisez la version 1.55.x ou supérieure de Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Installation des certificats 1 Quand la boîte de dialogue Security Alert apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate]. 2 Cliquez sur [Install Certificate]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-11 3 Cliquez sur [Next]. 4 Sélectionnez la case "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" et cliquez ensuite sur [Next]. 5 Scanner IP 5-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Cliquez sur [Yes]. Le certificat est installé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-13 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires Scanner IP est disponible sur le disque utilitaires livré avec cette machine. Près de 35 Mo d'espace disque dur libre sont requis pour l'installation du scanner IP. Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver Utilisez l'une des méthodes d'installation de ImageReceiver suivantes, en fonction de votre environnement de travail. Méthode d'installation Description Installer comme application Cette méthode est la méthode d'installation normale. Les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP peuvent être utilisés Installer comme service Sélectionnez cette méthode lorsque vous travaillez sur un serveur ou un terminal partagé. L'utilitaire peut être installé sur des ordinateurs équipés de Windows Server 2003, XP, ou 2000. ImageReceiver peut être utilisé même dans le cas où l'utilisateur ne s'est pas connecté ; toutefois, les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés. 5 Scanner IP 5-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Installer les utilitaires 1 Démarrer l'ordinateur et insérez ensuite le CD-ROM. L'installeur démarre. 2 Sélectionnez "Install IP Scanner". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-15 3 Vérifiez le contenu de la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Next]. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer l'installation. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'installation, cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 5 Scanner IP 5-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque La communication avec ImageReceiver est affectée dans un environnement dans lequel Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista est utilisé avec les fonctions de sécurité avancée. Voir "Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista" à la page 5-4. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-17 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) Avant de désinstaller Scanner IP, quittez ImageReceiver. 1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez "Démarrer" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. – Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur "Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes". – Sous Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur "Ajout/Suppression de programmes". 3 Sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Changer/Supprimer]. – Sous Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Désinstaller]. 5 Scanner IP 5-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Cliquez sur [Yes] (Oui). 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer la désinstallation. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-19 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP La fenêtre et le menu du scanner IP sont décrits ci-dessous. Fenêtre principale Cette fenêtre s'affiche au démarrage du scanner IP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Bouton Fermer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Bouton Contrôler réception maintenant Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. 3 Boutons Grandes icônes, Petites icônes, Liste et Détails Cliquez sur ces boutons pour modifier l'affichage des icônes. 4 Bouton Imagettes Cliquez sur ce bouton pour démarrer FenêtreVisionner et afficher une liste d'imagettes pour tous les fichiers TIFF, PDF et JPG dans le dossier ouvert. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. 5 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'ordinateur de destination des données. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. Si la case "Same as Previous" est sélectionnée, le bouton sera programmé avec les mêmes paramètres que le bouton précédemment programmé. Si une machine n'est pas connectée, son illustration est floue. 5 Scanner IP 5-20 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Bouton [Delete Scanner Key] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. 7 Case "Save folder as a key" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est automatiquement créé lorsqu'un bouton de numérisation est programmé. 8 Case "Delete the key after image is saved" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé dès l'enregistrement de l'image numérisée dans un dossier. 9 Case "Delete the key on exit" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé lorsque vous quittez Scanner IP. 10 Barre de menus Cliquez sur les commandes des menus pour spécifier divers paramètres. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commandes disponibles" à la page 5-21. 11 Barre d'état Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de l'application. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-21 Commandes disponibles Les commandes des différents menus sont décrits ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Menu Commande Description 1 File View file Sélectionnez cette commande pour visionner le fichier image sélectionné. New folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour créer un nouveau dossier dans le dossier affiché. Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour supprimer le fichier ou le dossier sélectionné. Rename Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le nom du fichier ou du dossier sélectionné. Exit Sélectionnez cette commande pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Edit Cut Sélectionnez ces commandes pour sélectionner, déplacer ou copier les fichiers ou les Copy dossiers. Paste Select All 3 View Large Icons Sélectionnez ces commandes pour changer l'affichage des icônes. Small Icons List Details Thumbnails Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les imagettes des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. Refresh Sélectionnez cette commande pour mettre à jour l'affichage des fichiers et des dossiers. 4 Go To Saving folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le dossier où les données ont été enregistrées. 5 Scanner IP 5-22 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner Scanner Key Registration Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer un bouton de numérisation sur la machine. Scanner Key Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. Reg. Same as Previous Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer le bouton avec les même paramètre que le bouton précédemment programmé. 6 Image Check Check now Sélectionnez cette commande pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. Automatic Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle automatique de la réception des données numérisées. Manual Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle manuel de la réception des données numérisées. No. Menu Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-23 7 Settings Connection Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier l'adresse IP de la machine. Image Folder Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel l'image est enregistrée. 2 Remarque Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. Viewer Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer la visionneuse ouverte depuis Scanner IP. Sort Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document))" à la page 5-27. Divided Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. Receive Notify Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Selected folder as saving location Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme destination pour l'enregistrement. Configure Arrival Notification Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme dossier de notification pour la réception de notifications sur l'ordinateur. Show dialog after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher un message de notification de la réception de l'image. Notify other PC after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour envoyer une notification informant un ordinateur différent de la réception de l'image 8 Aide Computer Information Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur et le port de ImageReceiver. Help Topics Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le menu Aide du scanner IP. About This Product Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les informations sur la version du scanner IP. No. Menu Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation sur la machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 7 9 10 14 15 11 13 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Scanner Key Name" Entrez le nom du bouton de numérisation qui s'affichera sur l'écran tactile de la machine. Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est créé sur l'ordinateur. 2 Champ "Scan Area" Sélectionnez la surface à numériser. Si "Auto Detect" est sélectionné, la zone de numérisation est automatiquement déterminée conformément au format du document. 3 Champ "Quality" Sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation. 4 Curseur "Contrast" Spécifiez la densité de la numérisation. 5 Case "Drop Out Color" Cette rubrique n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-25 6 Champ "File Type" Sélectionnez "TIFF" ou "PDF" pour le format dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. 7 Paramètre "B/W Coding Method" Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR" comme méthode de codage pour l'enregistrement des fichiers. Certaines images ne peuvent pas être visionnées sur l'ordinateur ; cela dépend du codage. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "MH" pour augmenter la possibilité de visionnage de l'image. La taille des données codées dépend des données image ; toutefois, les données MH sont généralement plus importantes que les MMR. 8 Paramètre "Specify File Name" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer les données image avec le nom de fichier spécifié. "No" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer le fichier avec un nom composé du nom du périphérique et de la date de numérisation de l'image. 9 Champ "File Name" Entrez le nom avec lequel le fichier sera enregistré si "Specify File Name" est réglé sur "Yes". 10 Champ groupé "2in1" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer un document de deux pages sous la forme d'une image numérisée d'une page. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si un introducteur automatique de document est utilisé. 11 Champ groupé "Original" Sélectionnez si le document est recto ou recto-verso. Si vous sélectionnez "2 sided", l'emplacement de la marge de reliure et le sens du document peuvent être spécifiés. 12 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement des données. 13 Champ groupé [Automatic Print] Si "Yes" est sélectionné, "Automatic Print Settings" devient disponible dans ImageReceiver. 14 Bouton [Printer Setting] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Printer Setting. Ce bouton est disponible quand "Automatic Print" est réglé sur "Yes". 15 Bouton [Default] Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, tous les paramètres retournent à leurs valeurs par défaut. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) 2 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation programmé est automatiquement créé. Lors de l'envoi d'une émission Scan vers PC depuis cette machine, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le même nom que la destination du bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Si une émission est envoyée avec l'adresse entrée directement, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le nom "(Input)". Cette case est connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi de l'image depuis cette machine. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)) 1 2 3 5 4 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 3 Case "Sort by FAX information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont triées, par exemple à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire du fax, puis enregistrées dans un dossier. 4 Liste "FAX Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations fax à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. 5 Case "Create new folder" Si vous cochez cette case, le document (les données image) est enregistré dans un nouveau dossier créé à partir des informations de l'expéditeur s'il n'existe aucun dossier créé avec les informations de l'expéditeur du document reçu. 5 Scanner IP 5-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document envoyé vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Sender Information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont enregistrées dans un fichier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur (nom utilisateur ou nom de compte) du document envoyé. 3 Champ "Sender Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations expéditeur à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. Si aucun compte ne doit être spécifié, définir "Group Name" "Public". 4 Case "Create new folder by Communication mode" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec le numéro correspondant au mode de communication du document envoyé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-29 5 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 6 Case "Create new folder by TX Destination Information" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur du document envoyé. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de spécifier les paramètres de division et d'enregistrement de documents numérisés. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Divide a scanned document to save" Si vous cochez cette case, un document numérisé peut être divisé et enregistré dans des fichiers séparés. Un document à diviser et enregistrer peut être numérisé en une étape. 2 Paramètre "Divide by short separator" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de longueurs différentes numérisé, ces pages sont identifiées comme intercalaires, et le document est divisé par ces intercalaires et enregistré dans des fichiers différents. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les côtés gauches des pages (marges) soient alignés. Les formats des pages pouvant être mixées ne sont soumis à aucune restriction. Voir "Formats papier originaux mixtes". Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 3 Case "Files separator" Si vous cochez cette case, les pages insérées comme intercalaires sont également enregistrées comme données image. 4 Paramètre "Divide by width" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de largeurs différentes numérisées, les pages de largeur identique sont enregistrées dans un fichier séparé. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les bords supérieurs des pages (bords orientés vers l'arrière de la machine) soient alignés. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 5 Paramètre "Divide document as single pages" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné, chaque page du document numérisé est enregistrée dans un fichier séparé. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Destination de l'enregistrement Un ordinateur différent peut être notifié lors de la réception d'une image dans un dossier spécial. Dans le cas présent, sélectionnez le dossier de destination dans lequel l'image est reçue et l'autre ordinateur notifié. 2 "Notify List" Affiche les informations sur la destination de notification spécifiée pour le dossier sélectionné. Une icône floue à proximité du dossier indique la destination de notification est définie pour un dossier conteneur. 3 Bouton [Add] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ajouter une destination de notification. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui recevra la notification, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Si un numéro de port est spécifié, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro de port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). 5 Scanner IP 5-32 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour éditer ou changer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Edit] n'est pas disponible. 5 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Delete] n'est pas disponible. 6 Case "Apply to Sub-Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres de notification s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 7 Bouton [Test] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour envoyer une notification test à la destination de notification sélectionnée. Le message suivant s'affiche sur l'ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. ImageReceiver doit démarrer sur une ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. En outre, une notification de test ne peut pas être envoyée vers une destination de notification spécifiée comme dossier conteneur (icône floue). No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-33 FenêtreVisionner Si vous aviez cliqué sur l'affichage imagettes, une image réduite de toutes les images enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné s'affiche. Cliquez sur une image pour visionner le fichier. 2 Remarque Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être affichés. Il se peut que les images créées avec un périphérique autre que cette machine (par ex. un ordinateur) ne s'affichent pas. No. Description 1 S'affiche lorsque le fichier contient plusieurs pages. Cliquez sur la barre pour changer de page. 1 5 Scanner IP 5-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 1 2 3 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 2 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. 3 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Paper Select Method" Spécifiez la méthode de sélection du papier pour l'impression automatique. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Selected Paper", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation spécifiée dans cette boîte de dialogue, sans tenir compte de la taille de l'image. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation correspondant à celle de l'image, sans tenir compte des paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue. Si vous sélectionnez "Select When Printing", la boîte de dialogue Print Select s'ouvre avant l'impression. "Select When Printing" n'apparaît pas si ImageReceiver avait été installé en tant que service. 2 Case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée agrandie/réduite pour s'adapter au format du papier. 3 Case "Minimal" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée en taille réduite pour ne perdre aucune partie de l'image. 5 Scanner IP 5-36 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est pivotée avant l'impression quand l'orientation de l'image diffère de cette du papier. 5 Paramètre "Position" Sélectionnez comment les images sont disposées sur le papier lors de l'impression. 6 Champ "Paper Size" Sélectionnez le format du papier. Les formats de papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupés sous forme de liste. 7 Paramètre "Orientation" Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'impression. 8 Champ "Paper Source" Sélectionnez la méthode d'alimentation du papier. Les méthodes d'alimentation papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. 9 Champ "Copies" Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Spécifiez un nombre ne dépassant pas le nombre maximal de copies que vous pouvez spécifier avec l'imprimante sélectionnée. 10 Bouton [Properties] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher les propriétés de l'imprimante sélectionnée. 11 Champ "Resolution" Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. Les résolutions utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-37 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver Icône ImageReceiver Après l'installation du scanner IP, l'icône ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si cette icône ne s'affiche pas, l'ordinateur ne peur pas recevoir l'image numérisée. L'icône change comme illustré ci-dessous, en fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver. Icône Description Une image est ouverte dans Scanner IP. (verte) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver. (bleue) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver (si l'utilitaire a été installé comme service). (bleue) 5 Scanner IP 5-38 bizhub 362/282/222 Commandes ImageReceiver Avec le bouton droit de la souris, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches pour afficher un menu. 1 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 10 No. Commande Description 1 Save received images Si cette commande est cochée, les données images sont ouvertes dans ImageReceiver au moment de la réception, même si Scanner IP n'a pas encore démarré. Si vous cliquez sur "Enregistrer les images reçues" un message permettant de confirmer si oui ou non le paramètre spécifié dans Scanner IP ou dans ImageReceiver doit être accepté s'affiche. Pour accepter le paramètre, cliquez sur [Oui]. 2 Automatic Print Settings Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings" à la page 5-41. 3 "Settings for saved images"–" Image Folder Setting" Cliquez sur cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel les données image sont enregistrées. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. 4 "Settings for saved images"–" Sort Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)" à la page 5-26. 5 "Settings for saved images"–" Divided Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. 6 "Notify Settings"–"Receive Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-39 7 "Notify Settings"–"Error Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Error Notify Settings. Pour envoyer des notifications d'erreur à un autre ordinateur, sélectionnez la case "Error notify to other PC", tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur censé recevoir la notification et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour spécifier un numéro de port, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro du port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). Cliquez sur [Test]. Une notification test est envoyée au destinataire spécifié. 8 "Receive Settings"–"RX Display" Si cette commande est cochée, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour notifier l'utilisateur de la réception de données image. Il est possible de démarrer la visionneuse depuis la boîte de dialogue Confirmation de l'image et de voir le dossier spécifié comme destination d'enregistrement des images. Il est en outre possible de supprimer ou de renommer des fichiers de données image dans cette boîte de dialogue. No. Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-40 bizhub 362/282/222 9 "Receive Settings"– "Connection Filter" Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Connection Filter (Filtre de connexion). Si vous cochez la case "Filter", vous pouvez restreindre la destination de la connexion en cliquant sur [Add] pour enregistrer une adresse IP. Sur la liste "Allowed IP Address", enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui reçoit les notifications envoyées entre cette machine et l'ordinateur. Si vous cochez la case "Display Received Image Notify" la notification de réception de l'ordinateur est reçue à partir d'un ordinateur différent. Si la case "Display Error Notify" est sélectionnée, les notifications d'erreur informatiques provenant d'un autre ordinateur sont reçues. 10 Help Affiche le menu Aide de ImageReceiver, les informations relatives à sa version, le journal de réception et le journal d'erreurs. No. Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 6 2 3 4 5 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Liste "Folder For Printing" Cette liste montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Si la liste comporte plusieurs dossiers, les paramètres d'impression sont prioritaires, en commençant par le haut. Cliquez sur [Up] et [Down] pour spécifier la priorité des dossiers d'impression automatique. 2 [Add] Bouton Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers d'impression automatique. 3 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des dossiers d'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 5 Bouton [Copy] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez reproduire les paramètres pour le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 6 Champ "Print Settings" Ce champ contient les paramètres du dossier figurant sur la liste "Folder For Printing". 5 Scanner IP 5-42 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Folder" Ce champ montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour sélectionner un autre dossier, cliquez sur [Browse] et sélectionnez le dossier voulu. 2 Case "Apply to Sub- Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres d'impression automatique s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 3 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 5 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-43 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation Fonctionnement général Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour numériser à l'aide du scanner IP. 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) 2 Programmez un bouton de numérisation. (depuis l'ordinateur) 3 Numérisez le document. (depuis la machine) 4 Visionnez l'image numérisée. (depuis l'ordinateur) 5 Quittez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) Démarrer Scanner IP 1 Cliquez sur "Démarrer", allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite sur "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "Scanner IP". 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK]. – Si l'adresse IP de la machine est déjà spécifiée, vous pouvez sauter cette étape. La fenêtre principale s'affiche. 5 Scanner IP 5-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation machine à partir du scanner IP, transférez-les ensuite vers la machine et enregistrez-les comme bouton de numérisation. Assurez-vous que ImageReceiver est en marche. 0 Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). 0 Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si six boutons ont déjà été programmés, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] pour afficher "Scanner Key Registration". 1 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-45 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 5 Scanner IP 5-46 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. – Pour vérifier l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur "Help", puis sur "Computer Information". Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-47 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus] sur le panneau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-48 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Le document est numérisé et envoyé à l'ordinateur spécifié. Si vous aviez spécifié "Show dialogue after received", une boîte de dialogue indiquant que les données ont été reçues s'affiche à l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-49 Visionner l'image numérisée 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel les données sont enregistrées, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier image. Le logiciel relié au fichier démarre et l'image est affichée. ! Détails Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le même nom que le bouton. Si vous aviez sélectionné [Thumbnails], une image réduite des fichiers TIFF et PDF enregistrés dans le dossier ouvert peut être visionnée. Cliquez sur une imagette pour ouvrir la FenêtreVisionner et pour visionner les images. 5 Scanner IP 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-51 3 Spécifiez le nom de la touche Scanner dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres "Scan Area", "Quality" et "Contrast". 5 Sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" et cliquez ensuite sur [Printer Setting]. 5 Scanner IP 5-52 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting" à la page 5-34. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-53 9 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-54 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé pour l'impression automatique. – Appuyez sur le bouton du même nom que celui enregistré à partir de l'ordinateur. – Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). Le bouton apparaît en évidence. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. ! Détails Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si le nombre maximal de boutons de numérisation est déjà programmé, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Si cette situation survient, cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran jusqu'à ce que [Scanner Key Registration] s'affiche. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-55 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver 1 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône ImageReceiver et cliquez ensuite sur "Automatic Print Settings". – Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations ImageReceiver" à la page 5-37. 2 Cliquez sur [Add] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-56 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires au champ groupé "Folder Setting" de la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. – Assurez-vous que les paramètres de dossier spécifiés ici correspondent aux paramètres de tri. 4 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-57 5 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 6 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-58 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur spécifié pour l'impression automatique. – Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche" à la page 4-4. – Pour plus de détails sur la programmation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Programmer un bouton 1-touche" à la page 4-30. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. Quitter Scanner IP % Dans le menu "Fichier", cliquez sur "Sortie". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-59 5.6 Autres opérations Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP Les données image reçues peuvent être converties vers des fichiers image TIFF ou PDF pour ensuite être transférées vers Scanner IP sur l'ordinateur. Les étapes suivantes doivent être spécifiées si vous voulez transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Si vous cochez la case "Sort by FAX information" dans l'onglet Réception document de la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur "Sort Settings" dans le menu "Settings" du scanner IP, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de l'identifiant (numéro de téléphone, etc.) pour le document fax reçu. Si les informations sur le destinataire contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans des noms de dossier (\ / : * ? " < > or |), aucun dossier n'est créé à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire. Dans ce cas, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le nom du bouton ou la date. (Si des caractères ne pouvant être utilisés dans un nom de fichier sont utilisés pour enregistrer le nom du bouton, les caractères sont remplacés par "_" (souligner).) Toutefois, si vous ne cochez pas la case "Folder by key name" ou la case "Create new folder by Date", les données sont enregistrées dans le dossier "My Images". Si l'ordinateur de destination du transfert n'est pas en marche ou si ImageReceiver n'a pas encore démarré, le document transféré ne peut pas être reçu. Dans ce cas, le document reçu est imprimé et le fichier image est supprimé après l'impression. S'il est difficile d'identifier le destinataire à partir d'un nom de dossier créé uniquement avec les informations sur le destinataire, par exemple, si les informations sur le destinataire (identifiant) contiennent seulement un numéro de téléphone, il est possible d'ajouter un nom plus facilement identifiable devant les informations sur le destinataire. Pour changer le nom du dossier, cliquez sur "Renommer" dans Windows. Exemple : "Ventes $ 123456789" Entrez le nom comme suit : $ (Assurez-vous d'entrer.) Paramètre Référence de page Pour la gestion de documents F-Code Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Port Traitement Doc. reçus Destination pour faire suivre Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Pour enregistrer l'adresse IP d'une destination de distribution à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche "Enregistrer une destination" (p. 4-30) 5 Scanner IP 5-60 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Les données d'un même destinataire peuvent être enregistrées dans le même dossier, même si le nom du dossier est changé après. Transférer vers Scanner IP Spécifiez les paramètres suivants pour enregistrer les données de document reçues dans le dossier ordinateur spécifié. 1 Dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur vers lequel les données seront transférées. – Sélectionnez Scan vers PC comme mode d'émission. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de transfert de l'écran Gestion de document (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1). – Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de gestion de document, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de tri (onglet Réception document) du scanner IP, spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées. 6 Opérations Relais IP Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-3 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction relais IP. Spécifiez les paramètres suivants si vous voulez utiliser cette machine pour envoyer la commande d'émission d'une télécopie relayée par une autre machine. Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" Réglez "Passerelle TX" sur l'écran Paramètres Réseau (affiché en appuyant sur [Admin. 2] – [Paramètres réseau] – [Paramètres réseau 1]) sur "Restreindre". ! Détails Si vous voulez utiliser cette machine comme machine de relais, définir "Autoriser" sous "Passerelle émission". Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de cette machine comme machine de relais, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Vous pouvez empêcher les émissions incorrectes vers des destinataires non visés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais Spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. Sélectionnez les machines de relais connectées à la ligne téléphonique normale. Pour plus de détails, voir les pages qui suivent. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis le panneau de commande de cette machine, voir "Paramètres relais IP" à la page 8-6. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis PageScope Web Connection, voir "Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)" à la page 7-29. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-4 bizhub 362/282/222 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire" à la page 6-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton une touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire - Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-11 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Si l'adresse du destinataire compte plus de 64 caractères, on peut spécifier l'adresse en combinant des adresses enregistrées sous des boutons 1-touche et une adresse introduite manuellement. Appuyez sur [Num. en Chaîne], et sélectionnez des boutons 1-touche ou entrez une adresse. ! Détails La chaîne de numérotation ne peut servir qu'à un seul destinataire par émission. Dans le cadre de la chaîne de numérotation, l'adresse peut comporter jusqu'à 192 caractères (64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'une adresse introduite manuellement). 2 Remarque Les boutons 1-touche à utiliser dans la chaîne de numérotation doivent être programmés à l'avance. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-12 bizhub 362/282/222 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax Le numéro de fax d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement le numéro de fax. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer un numéro de fax 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-13 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. 7 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. – Cliquez sur "Paramètres relais IP" (page 8-6) à l'écran Paramètres réseau pour enregistrer la machine de relais d'avance. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-14 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-15 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-17 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-19 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-20 bizhub 362/282/222 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-21 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emis. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-24 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-25 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installez, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-27 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-28 bizhub 362/282/222 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Rouleau 2 1 3 5 4 Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-30 bizhub 362/282/222 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. Paramètres station de relais IP Sélectionnez la station de relais. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 8 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-38 bizhub 362/282/222 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-3 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques pris en charge par le serveur HTTP intégré à la machine. À partir d'un navigateur Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. Il est commode de spécifier les paramètres avec l'utilitaire parce que le texte peut ainsi être facilement saisi depuis votre ordinateur au lieu du panneau de commande de la machine. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de fonction de réseau et de numérisation suivante. PageScope Web Connection propose un mode Utilisateur, accessible à tous les utilisateurs, et un mode Administrateur, accessible seulement après introduction du code d'accès Administrateur approprié. Les paramètres suivants peuvent être spécifiés dans chaque mode. Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, l'onglet Lecture se transforme en Fax/Lecture. Paramètre Description Enregistrement adresse 1-touche Programmez les enregistrements 1-touche pour les destinataires du document envoyé en utilisant la fonction de télécopie par adresse IP et les opérations Scan vers PC et relais IP. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Il est également possible de changer le nom d'index. Enregistrement d'un Programme FAX Enregistrer des programmes fax comme enregistrements 1-touche. Contrairement aux enregistrements 1-touche où seuls les destinataires sont enregistrés, il est possible d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation et plusieurs destinataires. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion Administrateur) est réglé sur "Oui", l'onglet Scan (2) est ajouté à la page du mode Administrateur pour que les destinataires 1-Touche puissent être enregistrés, modifiés et supprimés. L'onglet Lecture n'apparaît pas sur la page du mode Utilisateur. Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur) Pour plus de détails sur les autres paramètres réseau requis pour l'utilisation de cette machine, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-5 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Configuration minimale requise ! Détails PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au périphérique. À l'aide d'un navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. 2 Rappel Ne pas utiliser de serveur proxy en cas d'accès à partir de PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Si cette machine a été réglée pour interdire l'utilisation de TCP/IP, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser PageScope Web Connection. Rubrique Environnement Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Pour Windows NT 4.0 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 4.73 ou 7.0 Pour Windows 2000 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows Vista/Server 2008 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 * Avec Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, il se peut que les boutons 1-touche ne soient correctement exportés. Utilisez Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection Vous pouvez accéder à PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre d'adresses, tapez l'adresse IP de cette machine et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Détails Si SSL/TLS est activé, l'URL devient : https:/// Même si "http://" est saisi, l'accès à l'URL sur "https://" est automatique. (Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", SSL est activé de manière forcée.) Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-7 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Si les paramètres d'Authentification Utilisateur ou d'Authentification serveur externe ont été appliqués, la page suivante apparaît. Tapez le Nom Utilisateur et le mot de passe et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Pour obtenir un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, contactez l'Administrateur réseau. Lorsque vous êtes connecté en mode Authentification Utilisateur, la connexion est soumise à un délai ; vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode Administrateur si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant 10 minutes. Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui" ou si des verrouillages d'accès sont spécifiés par l'intermédiaire des paramètres de commutation logicielle, la saisie incorrecte trois fois de suite d'un mot de passe verrouille la machine pour empêcher toute opération. Si cette machine est verrouillée, contactez l'administrateur de la machine. Pour vous déconnecter, cliquez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de la page. Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués, il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le numéro de compte pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Structure des pages La page qui apparaît immédiatement après l'accès à PageScope Web Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur. Tous les utilisateurs peuvent voir cette page. ! Détails Si vous saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ "Mot de passe administrateur", vous pouvez afficher la page administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion en mode Administrateur" à la page 7-10. Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont structurées comme illustré ci-dessous. 7 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 2 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-9 2 Remarque Pour restaurer l'afficheur d'état et des messages, cliquez sur [Actualiser] dans le navigateur. No. Rubrique Description 1 Logo Konica Minolta Cliquez sur le logo pour accéder au site Konica Minolta Web à l'adresse suivante. http://konicaminolta.com 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur le logo PageScope Web Connection pour afficher les informations de version. 3 Champ de connexion mode administrateur Entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter au mode administrateur. 4 Affichage des états Les états des sections Imprimante et scanner de la machine s'affichent sous forme d'icônes. 5 Affichage des messages Si une erreur survient sur la machine, l'état du défaut/de l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur s'affichent. 6 Nom périphérique Affiche le nom du périphérique en cours d'accès. 7 Bouton [Déconnexion] Ce bouton apparaît une fois que vous êtes connecté lorsque les paramètres Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vous déconnecter. 8 Onglets Sélectionnez la catégorie des pages à afficher. Les onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Système • Tâche • Impression • Lecture 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax, en option, a été installé, l'onglet Fax/Lecture apparaît. 9 Menu Liste des informations et paramètres de l'onglet sélectionné. Le menu qui s'affiche varie en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné. 10 Informations et paramètres Affiche des détails du point de menu sélectionné. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Connexion en mode Administrateur Vous pouvez passer du mode utilisateur au mode administrateur. Mais, pour définir des paramètres système ou réseau, vous devez être connecté en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé. 0 En fonction de l'état de la machine, vous pouvez ne pas pouvoir vous connecter en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant une durée de 10 minutes, une temporisation survient et vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode administrateur. 1 Tapez le code d'accès administrateur et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-11 La page du mode administrateur s'affiche. 2 Pour retourner au mode Utilisateur, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations toutes récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les pages de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. En outre, les problèmes suivants risquent de survenir lors de l'utilisation du cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. ! Détails Si vous utilisez le programme avec le cache activé et que le mode administrateur a été désactivé, la page de désactivation risque d'apparaître même si vous réaccédez à PageScope Web Connection. En outre, comme le panneau de contrôle de la machine reste verrouillé et qu'il est inutilisable, il faut redémarrer la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactivez le cache. 2 Remarque Les menus et les commandes peuvent varier en fonction de la version du navigateur Internet. Pour plus de détails, voir l'Aide du navigateur Internet. Avec Internet Explorer 1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur "Options Internet". 2 Sur l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet temporaires". 3 Sélectionnez "A chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. Avec Netscape 1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur "Préférences". 2 Dans le champ "Catégorie" sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur "Avancées", puis sur "Cache". 3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page sur le réseau", sélectionnez "A chaque fois que je visite la page". Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-13 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur) Enregistrer les destinataires de données numérisées comme enregistrements 1-touche. Il est également possible de spécifier le nom d'index. ! Détails Cette machine accepte l'enregistrement de 36 index, chacun pouvant contenir un maximum de 15 boutons 1-touche et Programmes Fax. Vous pouvez enregistrer les types de destinataires suivants. Type Description Emission : PC (Scanner) Permet d'enregistrer un destinataire pour une opération Scan vers PC. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Réception IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une émission par relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Les paramètres suivants sont disponibles sur la page de chaque mode de communication. Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-15 Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Taille Emission (Max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (Max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Si vous aviez sélectionné "TX : Internet FAX (relais IP)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Numéro de destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. STA relai (Station de relais) Sélectionnez la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-17 Donner un nom à un index 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur un nom d'index (centre du tableau). Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom de l'index, puis appuyez sur [Appliquer]. – Ce champ peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. Une liste des index s'affiche en haut de la page. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-19 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index où le destinataire 1-touche est censé être enregistré. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur un enregistrement 1-touche pas encore programmé. – Les enregistrement 1-touche qui ne sont pas encore programmés s'affichent comme "---". 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-20 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Sélectionnez le mode communication à enregistrer, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. 7 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Le destinataire 1-touche est désormais enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-21 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)", "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" ou "Emission : Internet FAX (Relais IP)", vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - Emission : PC (E-mail) - Emission : PC (Scanner) - Emission : FaxInternet (Emission IP) - Emission : FaxInternet (E-mail) - Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) - FAX (G3)* * Vous pouvez spécifier le mode de communication si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire 1 Cliquez sur le champ du destinataire 1-touche à programmer avec une adresse secondaire. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 3 Cliquez sur [Enreg. adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-23 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication pour le destinataire secondaire, et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-24 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifiez les divers paramètres, et cliquez sur [Appliquer]. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. 2 Remarque Le nom qui apparaît à côté de "Nom 1-touche" est le même que celui qui a été spécifié pour le destinataire principal. Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier tous les autres paramètres. Pour supprimer le destinataire secondaire enregistré, cliquez sur [Effacer adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-25 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur le destinataire 1-touche dont les valeurs sont à modifier. – Ceci est normal, car il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un Programme Fax, même par un clic. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-26 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour changer le mode de communication, sélectionnez celui qui convient et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, "Emission : PC (Serveur FTP)" et "Emission : PC (SMB)" n'apparaissent pas. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-27 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez la case du destinataire une touche à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur [Effacer]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-29 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur) Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser Sélectionner une station de relais IP depuis les machines de relais IP enregistrées au préalable. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une station de relais IP, voir "Enregistrer une station de relais IP" à la page 7-32. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Destination de relais IP L'adresse IP de la station de relais actuellement sélectionnée s'affiche. Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Sélectionner]. Port de résultat de relais Entrez le numéro du port qui recevra les résultas. Si vous changez ce numéro, il sera appliqué après l'arrêt et le redémarrage de la machine. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner une station de relais 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Select]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-31 4 Sélectionnez une station de relais enregistrée et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer]. 5 Modifiez les Paramètres de port si cela s'avère nécessaire. 6 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 2 Rappel Si vous modifiez le numéro du port, veillez à éteindre la machine et à la remettre en marche après la spécification des paramètres. Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP ou de modifier ses paramètres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-33 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Enregistrement destination relais IP]. 3 Pour enregistrer une nouvelle station de relais, cliquez dans un champ dans lequel aucune adresse de station de relais n'a encore été enregistrée ("---"). – Pour modifier les paramètres enregistrés, cliquez sur une adresse IP qui s'affiche. – Pour supprimer une station de relais, sélectionnez la case de la station IP à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Effacer]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-34 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de la station de relais, puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-3 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur Les paramètres Gestion Administrateur suivants se rapportent aux informations contenues dans ce manuel. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Liste des paramètres réseau requis Il est recommandé de spécifier les paramètres réseau comme indiqué cidessous afin de pouvoir utiliser les opérations décrites dans le présent manuel. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres réseau autres que ceux disponibles sur l'écran Paramètres relais IP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. o : Requis / : Disponible + : Nécessaire en fonction de l'environnement - : Pas disponible avec l'opération Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Commutation logicielle A utiliser pour spécifier les paramètres de l'appareil. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-4 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Lorsque vous utilisez les opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et de relais IP, ne spécifiez pas de paramètre pour "Nom de domaine propre". Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP Paramètres de base DHCP + + + + Paramètre adresse IP o o o o Masque Sous-Réseau o o o o Passerelle + + + + Nom Domaine Propre - - - - Paramètres Carte réseau + + + + Configuration DNS OUI/NON + + - + Nom hôte + + - + Nom de domaine + + - + Adresse serveur DNS + + - + Nom Equipement Nom Equipement / / / - Configuration SMTP Adresse du serveur SMTP - - - - Adresse E-mail - - - - Nom Utilisateur Authentification SMTP - - - - Mot de passe Authentification SMTP - - - - Configuration POP3 Adresse serveur POP3 - - - - Nom d'utilisateur POP3 - - - - Mot de passe POP3 - - - - Contrôle Réception Auto - - - - Niveau compression prioritaire Mode E-mail / - - - Mode Numérisation - / - - Scanner Settings (Paramètres Scanner) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-5 Rapport d'activité - - - - Impr.En-tête Doc. Reçu - - - - Texte En-tête E-mail - - - - Passerelle Emission - - - + Objet - - - - Paramètres Fractionnement - - - - Ping : spécifiez selon les besoins. Définir le type de cadre : spécifier un type de cadre pour la connexion au serveur NetWare et l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression PC. Paramètres LDAP : spécifier pour effectuer une recherche LDAP. Filtrage IP : spécifier quand vous utilisez la fonction de filtrage IP. Paramètres relais IP Enregistrement station de relais IP - - - o Paramètres station de relais IP - - - o Port de résultat de relais - - - o Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 8.2 Paramètres relais IP Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement Station relais IP]. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-7 4 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro de l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement de la station de relais. 5 Appuyez sur [Adresse relais IP]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la station de relais. – Pour enregistrer la station de relais en utilisant le nom d'hôte, appuyez sur [Nom Host] et tapez ensuite le nom d'hôte. [Nom Host] s'affiche uniquement si "Paramètres DNS" est sur "OUI". 7 Pour modifier le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port], puis entrez le numéro de port souhaité. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Appuyez sur [Nom Domaine]. 10 Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais IP, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-9 Sélectionner une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [STA relais IP définie]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de la station de relais à utiliser et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Port résultat relais]. 4 Entrez le numéro de port où le résultat est censé être reçu, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour changer le paramètre actuel, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le paramètre souhaité. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-11 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) La spécification des paramètres de logiciel ("Sélection Mode", "Sélection Bit" et "Sélection HEXA") permet de modifier différentes fonctions de l'appareil en fonction de vos besoins spécifiques. 2 Rappel Ne changez aucun mode ou aucun bit qui n'est pas indiqué dans ce manuel. 2 Remarque Quand "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "OUI", vous ne pouvez pas modifier les paramètres de commutation logicielle. Paramètres de logiciel SW Paramètre Description Sélection Mode Le paramètre à spécifier est exprimé par un nombre à trois chiffres. Utilisez le clavier pour saisir la valeur. Sélection Bit Les bits sont des nombres à 8 chiffres qui construisent l'état du mode. Vous pouvez spécifier une valeur pour chaque paramètre en attribuant un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) à chacun des bits (0 à 7). Sélection HEXA Spécifiez un paramètre pour chaque mode sous forme d'un nombre hexadécimal (0 à 9 et A à F). Le réglage de bit "0011 0000" est exprimé comme paramètre hexadécimal "30". Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous trouverez ci-dessous des exemples de paramètres pour "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaires) et "Sélection HEXA" (nombres hexadécimaux). Nombre décimal Paramètre "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaire) Paramètre "Sélection HEXA" (nombre hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 16 0001 0000 10 17 0001 0001 11 18 0001 0010 12 19 0001 0011 13 20 0001 0100 14 ··· ··· ··· 252 1111 1100 FC 253 1111 1101 FD 254 1111 1110 FE 255 1111 1111 FF Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-13 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Logiciel SW]. 3 Appuyez sur [Sélection Mode] et servez-vous ensuite du clavier pour taper le numéro du mode. 4 Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. – Pour spécifier les bits, appuyez sur [Sélection Bit], puis sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le bit à changer, spécifiez le bit sur le clavier numérique, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Pour spécifier la valeur hexadécimale, appuyez sur [Sélection HEXA], spécifiez la valeur en vous servant du clavier numérique ou en appuyant sur les touches [A] à [F] et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-14 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour modifier le paramètre pour un mode différent, répétez les étapes 3 et 4. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 7 Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-15 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018) Spécifiez si les émissions de radiodiffusion et la numérotation pour spécifier les destinations sont limitées ou non. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. *1 Interdit quand le bit 6 du mode 477 de commutation logicielle est réglé de manière à ce que les paramètres ne puissent être modifiés qu'en mode Administrateur Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEXA : 01) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ---------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non la numérotation pour spécifier une destination est interdite. *1 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non les émissions de radiodiffusion sont interdites. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1, 0 ---------------------- 01 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) Spécifiez si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : F8) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ----------------------- 1111 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. 0 N'est pas ajoutée p. 3-20, p. 4-20, p. 6-21 1 Est ajoutée 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-17 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) Spécifiez si oui ou non l'émission fax est envoyée après avoir vérifié le signal CSI (ID de l'abonné appelé) de la machine du destinataire. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (HEX : 04) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4 Spécifie si oui ou non la machine effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée si le numéro appelé ne contient pas de caractères spéciaux pour une émission de récepteur vérifié. 0 N'effectue pas d'émission de récepteur vérifiée ---------- 1 Effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie le nombre de chiffres du signal CSI qui sera comparé lors de l'exécution d'une émission de récepteur vérifiée. (Si le numéro appelé ne comporte pas le nombre de chiffres spécifiés ici, une comparaison sera faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro appelé. En cas de comparaison avec un numéro de comparaison utilisant des caractères spéciaux, la comparaison est faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro de comparaison, sans tenir compte du nombre de chiffres spécifié pour ce paramètre.) 0000 Annuler ---------- 0001 1 chiffre 0010 2 chiffres 0011 3 chiffres 0100 4 chiffres 0101 5 chiffres 0110 6 chiffres 0111 7 chiffres 1000 8 chiffres 1001 9 chiffres 1010 10 chiffres 1011-1111 *Ne pas spécifier ce réglage pour cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Elément comparé et réglage du nombre de chiffres comparé dans le signal CSI Exemple : quand le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI est réglé sur 6 et qu'un signal CSI de 10 chiffres est reçu Elément comparé Relation de comparaison Fonctionnement Numéro de téléphone du destinataire Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue en fonction du réglage de nombre de chiffres comparé au signal CSI. (avec un numéro appelé de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 6 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro appelé. (avec un numéro appelé de 4 chiffres, le chiffre 4 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Numéro de comparaison Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 10 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 11 chiffres ou plus, le chiffre 11 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Par conséquent, comme le signal CSI ne contient que 10 chiffres, il ne coïncidera pas, ce qui provoquera une erreur d'émission.) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-19 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) Spécifiez l'identification de la télécopie directe ou le transfert de documents fax reçus par adresse IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 18) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 000110 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si le nom du périphérique de l'identifiant ou l'adresse IP est ajouté à la ligne Objet lors du transfert d'un document fax reçu par adresse IP. 0 Le nom du périphérique est prioritaire ---------- 1 L'adresse IP est prioritaire ---------- 0 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) Spécifier comment les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : D0) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie où les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe et d'opérations de relais IP. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 5 Pour spécifier si oui ou non des informations d'identification sont ajoutées aux documents reçus transférés. 0 Pas d'insertion ---------- 1 Insertion 4 Pour spécifier le mode d'ajout des informations d'identification dans le cas du transfert d'un document reçu. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-21 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366) Spécifier l'écran par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 08) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifier l'écran de saisie de l'adresse par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. 0 Priorité à l'introduction de l'adresse IP p. 4-30 1 Priorité à l'introduction du nom d'hôte 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 001000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) Spécifiez si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP figurent sur le rapport de réception. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEXA : C2) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie la plage valide des mots de passe administrateur. *Sans tenir compte du réglage spécifié pour ce bit, cette machine est configurée pour demander le mot de passe administrateur pour la machine et avec PageScope Web Connection. 1 Le mot de passe administrateur est demandé pour la machine et avec Pagescope Web Connection. ---------- 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si oui ou non les résultats des émissions de document numérisé doivent figurer sur le rapport d'émission. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication 0 Pour spécifier si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP sont indiqués dans le rapport de réception. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-23 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) Spécifiez les paramètres par défaut de la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 80) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, -------------------------- 10000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 2, 1, 0 Pour spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. 000 MH ---------- 001 MR 010 MMR 011 JBIG Autres *Ne pas spécifier d'autres paramètres que ceux mentionnés ci-dessus lors du paramétrage de cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) Spécifiez le délai des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP et l'opération exécutée lorsque le délai se produit. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 40) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Pour spécifier l'opération exécuté en cas de délai du retour des résultats d'émission d'une émission par relais IP. 0 Erreur d'émission ---------- 1 Emission normale 6, 5, 4, 3 Pour spécifier le délais des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP.* 0000 0 minute ---------- 0001 5 minutes 0010 10 minutes 0011 15 minutes 0100 20 minutes 0101 30 minutes 0110 40 minutes 0111 50 minutes 1000 1 heure 1001 2 heures 1010 3 heures 1011 4 heures 1100 5 heures 1101 6 heures 1110 7 heures 1111 8 heures 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-25 * Si le délai spécifié est court, par exemple 5 ou 10 minutes, l'état d'un document en attente d'envoi à partir d'une machine de relais ou l'heure d'émission G3 de la machine de relais et du destinataire risquent de provoquer un délai (erreur d'émission). 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCP/IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de LPD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un port RAW est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SLP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de Scan vers FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-27 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un serveur FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SNMP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 ---------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'impression SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de la télécopie G3 est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers HDD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-29 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers E-Mail est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax Internet est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de relais IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax par adresse IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. Spécifiez si oui ou non les adresses Fax peuvent être enregistrées et si les rapports peuvent être imprimés par des utilisateurs et spécifiez si les informations de numérotation 1-Touche doivent figurer sur les écrans et les rapports. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-31 Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Scanner) est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si les paramètres d'enregistrement des adresses Fax ou d'impression des rapports peuvent être spécifiés par l'utilisateur ou uniquement par l'administrateur. 0 Les utilisateurs peuvent aussi spécifier les paramètres. ---------- 1 Les paramètres peuvent uniquement être spécifiés en mode Administrateur. 5 Spécifie si oui ou non les noms de destinataire sont affichés (sans affichage du numéro de fax ou de l'adresse) sur les rapports et les écrans de Liste Travaux et lors de la pression sur un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. *1, *2 0 Affichés ---------- 1 Non affichés 4 ----------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCPSocket est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-32 bizhub 362/282/222 *1 Si le bit 6 est réglé sur "1", les paramètres ne s'appliqueront pas si le bit 5 est réglé sur "1" (non affichés). Si vous ne voulez pas afficher le numéro de fax ni l'adresse du destinataire, il faut aussi régler le bit 6 sur "1" (paramètres uniquement réglables en mode Administrateur). *2 Si le destinataire est spécifié directement depuis l'onglet Entrée adresse, le destinataire s'affichera, même si vous sélectionnez "1" (non affichés). Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-33 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. Sélectionnez s'il faut supprimer ou non le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur ou le caractère à la gauche du curseur. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 2 Remarque Réglage par défaut : 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. 0 Supprime le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur p. 10-5 1 Supprime le caractère à la gauche du curseur 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 ---------------------- 0000000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) Spécifiez s'il faut ou non procéder à l'authentification utilisateur seulement en cas de pression sur la touche [Fax/Scanner] ou [Scanner plus]. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le réglage Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. 2 Rappel Ne pas spécifier de réglages pour le mode 479 autres que ceux décrits dans "Spécifier le réglage". ! Détails Si l'authentification utilisateur se limite aux fonctions de Numérisation, appuyez sur [Authentif. cpte/utilis] dans l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1 et sélectionnez ensuite "Serveur externe" comme méthode d'authentification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres d'authentification serveur externe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ---------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie s'il faut ou non limiter l'authentification aux fonctions de Fax et de Numérisation. 11001 Limitée ---------- 00000 Illimitée 9 Localisation de pannes Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-3 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran Si l'écran suivant apparaît, procéder à l'opération décrite ci-dessous. L'administrateur est connecté sur l'appareil à partir d'un ordinateur du réseau. Attendez que l'administrateur ait terminé son opération et se soit déconnecté. Si l'administrateur quitte le navigateur sans se déconnecter, l'administrateur doit se connecter à nouveau avant de se déconnecter. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-4 bizhub 362/282/222 9.2 Codes d'erreur Si une erreur s'est produite au cours de l'émission, un code d'erreur s'affiche dans la Liste des tâches ou dans un rapport. Procédez aux opérations décrites ci-dessous. Opérations Scan vers PC Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX L'adresse IP spécifiée par le destinataire est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP du destinataire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver. Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-5 Opérations de scanner IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion". Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion", spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations relais IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède E53XXX Emission impossible parce que le destinataire spécifié pour l'émission passerelle est incorrect. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. E65XXX Une tentative d'envoi de données ne pouvant pas être envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle a été faite. Une tentative d'envoi de message électronique avec un fichier joint dans un format autre que TIFF-F ou contenant du texte dont une ligne comporte plus de 1000 caractères, a été faite. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. EBXXXX Impossible de recevoir les données envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle. Vérifiez si le serveur de courrier électronique est en mesure d'émettre et si les paramètres réseau sont corrects. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-7 9.3 Localisation de pannes Ci-après la description de quelques problèmes possibles et leurs solutions. Télécopie par adresse IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. Les connexions sont incorrectes. Vérifiez le témoin LED sur le hub et contrôlez les raccordements. Un temps mort s'est produit en fin de réception en raison de la taille trop importante des données image. • Augmenter la valeur de temps mort en fin de réception. • Réduire la taille des données image et procédez une nouvelle fois à l'émission. Les paramètres nécessaires au périphérique ne sont pas enregistrés. Spécifiez les paramètres réseaux nécessaires. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. Autres origines Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations Scan vers PC Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-9 Opérations de scanner IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les paramètres ne sont pas spécifiés correctement dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Vérifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. Deux cartes LAN sont installées. Cette configuration ne peut pas être utilisée si deux cartes LAN sont installées. Changez l'ordre de priorité dans les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur (Windows). L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Un autre programme de courrier électronique a été lancé. Quittez le programme de courrier électronique. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si la résolution de l'image est haute, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant de procéder à la numérisation. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Le message "Erreur de connexion à la machine" s'affiche. La machine n'est pas en marche. Mettez la machine en marche. L'adresse IP du périphérique entrée dans Scanner IP est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP. Le paramètre TCP/IP de l'ordinateur est incorrect. Vérifiez les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de TCP/IP à partir de cette machine est interdite. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur n'est pas connecté à un réseau. Vérifiez les connexions réseau de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, aucun certificat n'est installé. Installez un certificat. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, vous utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer antérieure à 5.0. Utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieure. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, le niveau de cryptage pour Internet Explorer est inférieur à 56 bits. Procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site de Microsoft et installez-le. Un message Security Alert s'affiche. Installez un certificat. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver. Voulez- vous démarrer ImageReceiver ?" s'affiche. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-11 Le message "ImageReceiver détecté par XXX" s'affiche. Un autre logiciel utilise ce port. • Le serveur de courrier électronique et Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés simultanément. Ne démarrez pas le serveur de courrier électronique. En outre, si un autre logiciel en est la cause, quittez le logiciel qui est la source du problème. • suivez les instructions pour le changement de port. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver." s'affiche. Scanner IP ou ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si le problème persiste, désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallez-le ensuite. Le message "Erreur de création de fichiers image." s'affiche. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Quittez ImageReceiver, redémarrez-le, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Lorsque vous quittez ImageReceiver, les données reçues n'ayant pas encore été traitées avec Scanner IP sont supprimées. L'ordinateur a été provisoirement soumis à une charge élevée. L'ordinateur n'est pas en mesure d'exécuter des processus complexes lors de la réception de l'image numérisée. Le format du fichier des données reçues est important. Les données reçues ont peut-être dépassé la taille utilisable par cet ordinateur. Réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant une nouvelle numérisation et émission. Il n'existe pas de répertoire de stockage. Créez un répertoire. Le répertoire est à mémoire morte. Activez la fonction d'écriture du répertoire. Le message "Impossible de trouver la clé scanner sélectionnée." s'affiche. Le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine. Vérifiez si le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine et reprogrammez un bouton de numérisation. Bien que le bouton ait été supprimé de la machine, l'icône indiquant que l'émission peut être effectuée s'est transformée en une icône de programmation d'un bouton de numérisation. Supprimez le bouton de numérisation de la machine. Sinon, éteignez et rallumez la machine. Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer clé scanner]. Même si vous aviez cliqué sur [Check now] rien ne s'est produit. Aucun fichier n'a été reçu. Procédez à une nouvelle numérisation. Impossible d'ouvrir les fichiers image. Le fichier n'est pas un fichier image reçu depuis le périphérique. Utilisez une visionneuse compatible avec les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-12 bizhub 362/282/222 L'image du fichier image n'est pas affichée correctement. Affichez l'image dans la visionneuse dans un format réduit. Visionnez l'image avec un taux zoom de 100%. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Numérisez le document à nouveau. Impossible de démarrer Scanner IP. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Scanner IP a déjà démarré. Il est impossible d'utiliser simultanément deux copies de l'utilitaire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Puisque vous avez démarré ImageReceiver pendant la désinstallation précédente, pour ensuite le réinstaller alors que vous n'aviez pas redémarré l'ordinateur, il se peut que ImageReceiver ait été supprimé après le redémarrage. Désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallezle ensuite. Le message "Le nombre de clés scanner a atteint le maximum." s'affiche. Six boutons de numérisation par Scanner IP ont déjà été programmés. Supprimez tous les boutons inutiles. Le message "Le nom de la clé scanner comporte des caractères invalides." s'affiche. Des caractères autres que les caractères standard ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans les noms de boutons. Spécifiez un nom de bouton qui ne comporte que des caractères standard. Le message "Adresse IP incorrecte" s'affiche. Des lettres sont saisies dans l'adresse IP. Spécifiez l'adresse IP dans le format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Le message "Cette commande n'est pas acceptée actuellement." s'affiche. L'émission suivante est exécutée pendant la communication avec le copieur, par exemple, pendant la programmation ou la suppression d'un bouton. Attendre que la connexion actuelle soit coupée (jusqu'à ce que le message "Cette fonction n'est pas disponible actuellement. Réessayez plus tard." disparaisse de la barre des tâches au bas de la fenêtre) avant d'exécuter l'opération suivante. Le message "Erreur d'écriture du fichier image" s'affiche. Il n'y pas assez d'espace dans la destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement ou bien créez plus d'espace libre sur le disque. Il y a un problème de disque ou de destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-13 Le message "Impossible de trouver le dossier image" s'affiche. Le dossier spécifié n'existe pas. • Vérifiez le nom du dossier de stockage. • Changez le nom du dossier de stockage. Le message "Correspondance de l'imprimante illicite" apparaît. Vous utilisez une ancienne version de Scanner IP. Installez la version la plus récente de Scanner IP. Les données ne s'impriment pas automatiquement. Le réglage de l'impression automatique n'est pas spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Pour imprimer automatiquement par numérisation avec un bouton de Scanner IP, sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Les données ne sont pas triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, vérifiez que les données sont triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Le réglage d'ouverture de fichiers dans ImageReceiver n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez "Save received images" dans ImageReceiver. Le message "-impossible d'imprimer la page" apparaît. L'espace mémoire disponible est insuffisant sur l'ordinateur. • Fermez toutes les applications non utilisées et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Changez la taille de la mémoire virtuelle de l'ordinateur et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le format de papier spécifié n'est pas supporté par l'ordinateur. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Select Method" et au champ groupé "Paper Settings". Le message "Echec de l'impression parce que l'imprimante sélectionnée est introuvable" apparaît. L'imprimante spécifiée pour l'impression automatique n'est pas enregistrée. Vérifiez que l'imprimante spécifiée au champ "Printer Name" est bien enregistrée (installée). Vous utilisez la mauvaise imprimante pour l'impression. D'autres paramètres ont un caractère prioritaire plus élevé. Vérifiez la priorité sur la liste "Folder For Printing" dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour l'impression. Le réglage au champ "Paper Select Method" n'est pas spécifié correctement. Vérifiez le réglage spécifié au champ "Paper Select Method". Les paramètres du champ groupé "Paper Settings" ne sont pas spécifiés correctement. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Settings". Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour la numérisation. Spécifiez un réglage à côté de "Scan Area" et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le réglage de rotation automatique de l'image n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez la case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a une perte au niveau des bords sur le résultat de l'impression. Le réglage dédié à la zone imprimable de l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionné. En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords, sélectionnez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Top Left" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords supérieur et gauche, sélectionnez "Center" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat d'impression ne s'imprime pas entièrement sur le papier. Le réglage de réduction de l'image pour s'ajuster au format du papier n'est pas sélectionné. Sélectionnez la case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat de l'impression n'est pas au même format que l'image d'origine. Vous avez sélectionné un papier différent. Sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size" à côté de "Paper Select Method" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. La case "Minimal" est cochée. Décochez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Center" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". Sélectionnez "Top Left" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a un motif (motifs moiré) sur le résultat d'impression. Un motif peut apparaître avec certaines imprimantes. Changez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. L'opération d'impression automatique est lente. Les données d'image sont volumineuses. Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-15 Opérations de relais IP et autres Problème Origine Remède Impossible d'envoyer un fax à partir de cette machine. Le mode de communication pour les émissions par passerelle n'est pas correctement spécifié. Vérifiez les paramètres des émissions passerelle. [Paramètres réseau] n'apparaît pas à l'écran Gestion Administrateur. Le périphérique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Veuillez contacter le S.A.V. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-16 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Annexe Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-3 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP Caractéristiques Scan vers PC Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission Emission d'e-mail : SMTP (IETF RFC2821 et RFC2822) et TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF-F Méthode de codage MH, MR, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP d'un destinataire ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. 10 Annexe 10-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Caractéristiques scanner IP Caractéristiques de relais IP Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de la destination inutile (notification automatique de l'adresse IP envoyée depuis l'ordinateur lors de l'attente de numérisation) : spécifiez les dossiers pour six boutons maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. Rubrique Caractéristiques Stations de relais Huit stations de relais maximum Destinataire Fax Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-5 10.2 Saisir du texte Cette section apporte des détails sur l'utilisation du clavier qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile pour permettre la saisie des mots de passe et l'introduction du texte pour l'enregistrement des destinations 1-touche. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le clavier pour taper des chiffres. La procédure suivante décrit comment entrer les caractères sur l'écran Nom Utilisateur lors de l'enregistrement des utilisateurs pour l'Authentification Utilisateur. Pour taper du texte % Sur le clavier qui s'affiche, appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au caractère désiré. – Vous pouvez aussi taper des chiffres avec le clavier. – Pour taper des caractères en majuscules, appuyez sur [Caps.]. – Pour annuler le mode majuscule, appuyez de nouveau sur [Caps]. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction). ! Détails Pour passer de la saisie de lettres à celle de symboles, appuyez sur le bouton de changement de mode. Pour modifier un caractère du texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur au niveau du caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Supp] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres de commutation logicielle pour changer le mode de suppression des caractères. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse la limite autorisée, le dernier caractère est remplacé par le dernier caractère saisi. 10 Annexe 10-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères Caractères alphanumériques/symboles Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-7 10.3 Glossaire Terme Définition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T Une norme pour Ethernet, connecté via un câble constitué de paires de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse de transmission de 10Base-T est de 10 Mo, celle de 100Base-TX est de 100 Mo et celle de 1000Base-T est de 1000 Mo. Active Directory Un service qui gère toutes les informations comme les ressources matérielles pour les serveurs, les clients et les imprimantes sur un réseau supporté par Microsoft ainsi que les attributs et les droits d'accès des utilisateurs Adresse IP Un code (une adresse) utilisé pour identifier les différents périphériques réseau sur Internet. Comprend au maximum trois chiffres pour quatre nombres, comme 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont attribuées à des périphériques (ordinateurs compris) connectés à Internet. Aperçu Fonction permettant de visionner une image avant d'effectuer une opération d'impression ou de numérisation APOP Abréviation de Authenticated Post Office Protocol. Une méthode d'authentification par mots de passe cryptés, entraînant une plus grande sécurité, comparé aux mots de passe non cryptés habituels utilisé par POP pour récupérer les messages électroniques Auto IP Une fonction d'acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP. En cas d'échec de l'acquisition de l'adresse IP avec DHCP, une adresse IP est acquise à partir de l'adresse 169.254.0.0. Bit Abréviation pour Binary Digit. La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche les données à l'aide de 0 ou 1. BMP Abréviation pour Bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données d'image et utilisant l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde. Client Un ordinateur utilisant les services fournis par un serveur par l'intermédiaire d'un réseau Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation clair/foncé). On dit qu'une image possédant peu de variations clair/foncé possède un faible contraste et qu'une image possédant de fortes variations clair/foncé possède un contraste élevé. Demi-teinte Méthode de production des parties claires et foncées d'une image en variant les tailles des points noirs et blancs Densité Une indication de la quantité de noircissement dans l'image. Désinstaller Supprimer un logiciel installé sur un ordinateur DHCP Abréviation pour Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres de réseau à partir du serveur. Grâce à la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter la duplication d'une adresse et construire aisément un réseau. 10 Annexe 10-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de mise hors tension. DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition des adresses IP supportées à partir de noms d'hôtes dans un environnement réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur un réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôte à la place d'adresses IP difficiles à mémoriser et à comprendre. DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch. (points par pouce). Une résolution utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la résolution est importante. Ethernet Norme de ligne de transmission LAN Extension de fichier Les caractères ajoutés au nom de fichier pour différentier les formats de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image Gradation Les niveaux clairs et foncés d'une image. Plus le nombre augmente, plus la reproduction des variations de luminosité est douce. GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/ Digest MD5 Méthodes d'authentification pour se connecter sur le serveur LDAP. La méthode d'authentification (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5) pour le serveur LDAP diffère en fonction du serveur utilisé et des paramètres du serveur. HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (Navigateur Internet). Vous pouvez échanger des documents contenant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec les informations de forme expressive. IMAP Abréviation pour Internet Message Access Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques avec la fonction de gestions des boîtes électroniques sur le serveur. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent IMAP4 (la quatrième version de IMAP). Installer Installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur. IPP Abréviation pour Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de réception de données d'impression et contrôlant des imprimantes sur Internet dans le cadre d'un réseau TCP/IP. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer des données à des imprimantes dans des zones distantes pour imprimer via Internet. LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Abréviation pour Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Sur un réseau TCP/IP, comme l’Internet ou un réseau Intranet, ce protocole sert à accéder à une base de données de gestion des informations d'environnement et des adresses électroniques des utilisateurs du réseau. Masque Sous-Réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Il sert à identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau supérieurs à l'adresse IP. Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-9 Mémoire Périphérique de stockage pour sauvegarder temporairement les données. Lors de la mise hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non. MH Abréviation pour Modified Huffman. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/10 de leur taille d'origine. MIB Abréviation pour Management Information Base. Lors d'une émission TCP/IP, elle utilise SNMP pour définir le format des informations de gestion pour un groupe de périphériques réseau. Il existe deux formats : le MIB spécifique au fabricant et le MIB normalisé. MMR Abréviation pour Modified Modified Read. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/20 de leur taille d'origine. Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour afficher les pages Internet NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau développé par Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication. Niveaux de gris Forme monochrome d'expression de l'image utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir Nom hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau Numérisation L'opération de numérisation d'un scanner permet de lire une image pendant le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs. La direction dans laquelle les capteurs d'image se déplacement s'appelle le sens de lecture principal et la direction selon laquelle sont disposés les capteurs d'image s'appelle le sens de lecture auxiliaire. Numéro de port Le numéro identifiant le port d'émission pour chaque processus exécuté sur un ordinateur sur le réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Configurée comme 1 octet étant égal à 8 bits. OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur. Par défaut Les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres premièrement sélectionnés lors de la mise sous tension de la machine ou les paramètres premièrement spécifiés lors de la sélection de la fonction. Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau à un autre réseau. Une passerelle modifie également les formats de données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique tel qu'un ordinateur ou un routeur, utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant sur le même réseau LAN PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Sur base du format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour afficher des documents. Terme Définition 10 Annexe 10-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Pïlote Logiciel fonctionnant comme une passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pixel Un pixel d'image. La plus petite unité d'image. POP Abréviation de Post Office Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques sur un serveur de messagerie. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent POP3 (la troisième version de POP). Propriété Informations d'attribut Lors de l'utilisation d'un pilote d'imprimante, vous pouvez spécifier diverses fonctions dans les propriétés du fichier. Dans les propriétés de fichier, vous pouvez vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règles permettant aux ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images et des documents imprimés. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour agir en tant que connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et les différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le système pour les connexions Internet SMTP Abréviation pour Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de transfert de messages électroniques. SNMP Abréviation pour Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de gestion dans un environnement réseau sous TCP/IP. SSL/TLS Abréviation pour Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. Méthode de codage de transfert en toute sécurité de données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau. TIFF Abréviation de Tagged Image File Format. L'un des formats de fichier pour enregistrer les données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".tif".) En fonction du tag indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF simple page Un seul fichier TIFF file ne contenant qu'une seule page Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-11 10.4 Index 2en1 3-16, 3-21, 4-18, 4-21, 6-19, 6-22 A Accès 7-6 Adresse destination 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Authentification Groupe 7-7 Authentification Utilisateur 7-7 B Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 5-42 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Scanner settings 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings 5-26, 5-27, 5-28 Bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-3, 4-4, 6-4 Boutons de numérisation 5-43 C Cache 7-12 Chaîne de numérotation 6-11 Check RX now 5-19 Codes d'erreur 9-4 Configuration requise 7-5 Conflits de ports 5-7 Connection setting 5-23 D Delete scanner key 5-20 Densité 3-14, 4-16, 6-17 Destinataire 3-29, 6-30 Destinataire secondaire 3-36, 4-37, 6-37, 7-21 Destination relais IP 8-6 Désinstallation 5-17 Divided settings 5-23 E Emiss. R/V 3-16, 3-22, 4-18, 4-22, 6-19, 6-23 Emission SSL 5-8 Enregistrement des Programmes Fax 7-3 Enregistrer des destinataires 1-Touche 7-3, 7-13 Entrer des adresses 3-9, 4-11 F FenêtreVisionner 5-33 Fermer 5-19 I Identifiant 3-16, 3-18, 6-19 Image folder setting 5-23 ImageReceiver 5-3, 5-37 Impression automatique 5-54, 5-58 Index 3-37, 7-17 Installation 4-3, 5-14 10 Annexe 10-12 bizhub 362/282/222 M Méthode de codage 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 4-12, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Mode Administrateur 7-10 Modem/adaptateur de terminal 5-4 N Nom de destination 3-30, 4-31, 6-31, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16 Nom du fichier 4-18, 4-27 Notify settings 5-23 Numéro bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-5, 4-7, 6-7 Numéro de destination 6-31, 7-16 Numéro de fax 6-12 Numéro de port 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 P PageScope Web Connection 2-8, 7-3 Param. TX horloge 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-25, 6-20, 6-26 Paramètres de commutation logicielle 8-3, 8-11 Paramètres relais IP 8-6 Paramètres relais IP 7-4, 7-29, 8-3 Paramètres réseau 8-3 Passerelle Emission 6-3 Port de résultat de relais 8-10 Priorité EM 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-24, 6-20, 6-25 Programme de courrier électronique 3-39 Programmer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-31, 4-30, 6-30 Q Qualité 3-12, 4-14, 6-15 Qualité Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 R Rapport d'émission 3-16, 3-20, 3-26, 4-18, 4-20, 4-28, 6-19, 6-21, 6-28 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 Recherche de boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-7, 4-9, 6-9 Relais IP 2-7 Réglage de l'impression automatique 5-50, 5-55 Réglage du Format Original 3-15, 4-17, 6-18 Routeur téléphonique 5-4 S Scan vers PC 2-4 Scanner IP 2-6, 4-3, 5-3 Scanner Key Registration 5-19 Sélectionner les stations de relais 6-31 Sort settings 5-23 Station relais IP 8-9 Stations de relais 6-3, 7-16 T Taille Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 Tampon 3-17, 3-25, 4-18, 4-26, 6-20, 6-27 Télécopie par adresse IP 2-3 Thumbnails 5-19 Transférer 5-59 Type de fichier 4-12, 4-31, 7-14 Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-13 V Viewer settings 5-23 10 Annexe 10-14 bizhub 362/282/222 163/211 GDI User Manual GDI Printer Controller Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Software end user license agreement............................................ 1-5 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions................................................ 1-8 Safety advices................................................................................ 1-8 Sequence of action ........................................................................ 1-8 Tips ................................................................................................ 1-9 Special text markings..................................................................... 1-9 1.3 Operating environment .................................................................. 1-10 System requirements ................................................................... 1-10 Recommended operating environment ....................................... 1-10 1.4 Installing the printer driver ............................................................ 1-10 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box.................................................... 2-3 Displaying the settings dialog box ................................................. 2-3 Printing Preferences dialog box..................................................... 2-5 Properties dialog box..................................................................... 2-7 2.2 Device Options tab ........................................................................... 2-9 Device Options............................................................................. 2-10 Memory ........................................................................................ 2-10 2.3 Common operations....................................................................... 2-11 Common items............................................................................. 2-11 Easy Set ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Setup tab ......................................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Original Size ................................................................................. 2-15 Edit Custom ................................................................................. 2-17 Output Size .................................................................................. 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copy............................................................................................. 2-21 Collate .......................................................................................... 2-22 Paper Source ............................................................................... 2-23 Paper Type................................................................................... 2-24 Contents-2 GDI Printer Controller Output Method.............................................................................. 2-24 Using secure printing .................................................................... 2-25 Specifying secure printing from the printer driver ........................ 2-25 Printing from the machine............................................................. 2-26 2.5 Layout tab ........................................................................................ 2-28 Combination ................................................................................. 2-29 Combination Details...................................................................... 2-30 Double-sided printing ................................................................... 2-31 2.6 Per Page Setting tab ....................................................................... 2-32 Front Cover Page.......................................................................... 2-33 Front Cover Paper Source ............................................................ 2-33 Media Type ................................................................................... 2-33 2.7 Watermark tab ................................................................................. 2-34 Watermark Select ......................................................................... 2-34 Creating a new watermark............................................................ 2-35 Editing a watermark ...................................................................... 2-37 2.8 Quality tab ........................................................................................ 2-40 Resolution ..................................................................................... 2-40 Adjustment.................................................................................... 2-41 3 Control panel operations 3.1 Printing operations............................................................................ 3-3 Control panel .................................................................................. 3-3 Printer indicator .............................................................................. 3-5 Starting the print operation............................................................. 3-5 Canceling a print job....................................................................... 3-6 Using the manual bypass tray ........................................................ 3-8 Power Save mode......................................................................... 3-10 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 Checking error messages ................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Main error messages ........................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Print data when an error occurs ...................................................... 4-5 With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error ............................................... 4-5 Temporary errors ............................................................................ 4-5 5 Specifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing this machine. This manual provides the information required to use this machine as a GDI printer. Be sure to read this manual before performing any operations. For precautions concerning the use and safety of the machine, refer to the User manual provided with the machine. Store the CD-ROM and User manual provided with the machine in a safe place. Trademarks and copyright - KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. - PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. - Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. - Novell and Novell NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. - Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. - Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. - Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. - PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Note - This User manual may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. will not be held liable for any incidents caused by using this printing system or User manual. - Information included in this User manual is subject to change without notice. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. maintains the copyright of the printer drivers. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Software end user license agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THE PACKAGE, OR DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THEM, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, USE THE SOFTWARE, NOR OPEN THE PACKAGE. 1. COPYRIGHT AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.("Konica Minolta") owns, or has been licensed from other owners ("Konica Minolta Licensor"), copyrights and other intellectual property rights of the Software, and any and all rights and title to the Software and any copy made from it are retained by Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor. In no event, this Agreement shall be deemed to assign any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of the Software from Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor to you. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. 2. LICENSE Konica Minolta hereby grant to you a non-exclusive and limited license, and you may: (i) install and use the Software only on your computer(s) connected with Konica Minolta product for which this Software is designed; (ii) allow users of the computers described above to use the Software, provided that you assure that all such users comply with the terms of this Agreement; (iii) use the Software only for your own customary business or personal purpose; (iv) make one copy of the Software only for backup purpose in the support of the normal and intended use of the Software. (v) transfer the Software to other party by transferring a copy of this Agreement and all documentation along with the Software, provided that (a) you must, at the same time, either transfer to such other party or destroy all your other copies of the Software, (b) such transfer of possession terminates your license from Konica Minolta, and (c) you must assure that such other party has agreed to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If such other party does not accept such terms and conditions then you shall not transfer any copy of the Software. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) You shall not without the written consent of Konica Minolta: (i) use, copy, modify, merge or transfer copies of the Software except as provided herein; (ii) reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or any other way analyze the Software; or (iii) sublicense, rent, lease or distribute the Software or any copy thereof. (iv) remove, use, or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Software. (2) You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any country. 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES (1) If the Software is furnished on CD-ROM(s) or other tangible object that is used for storage of digital data (hereinafter collectively "Storage Medium"), Konica Minolta warrants the Storage Medium to be free from the defects in material and workmanship under normal use, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO STORAGE MEDIUM ONLY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES AND KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. (2) IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES NOR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM. (3) The disclaimer of warranty hereunder does not affect your statutory rights. In case of the disclaimer is not allowed by applicable law, the disclaimer shall only apply to you to the maximum extent permitted by the law. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 5. TERMINATION You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and all your copies of it. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms hereof. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession. 6. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan. 7. SEVERABILITY In the event that any part or parts of this agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court or administrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not effect the remaining parts of this agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegal or void had not been included. 8. NOTICE TO US GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (October 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (September 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY OTHER STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. NO AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY OPENING THE PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller 1.3 Operating environment System requirements The following environment is required so that the printer driver can be used. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, or Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - 128 MB RAM (Windows XP/Server 2003), 64 MB RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - USB port compliant with USB Revision 2.0 - CD-ROM/DVD drive 2 Note The printer driver is not compatible with Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Recommended operating environment Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 MB RAM 1.4 Installing the printer driver % Please refer to the folder "Installation" of the CD. 2 Specifying printer driver settings Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Specifying printer driver settings Descriptions on the printer driver settings available when printing from a computer are provided below. 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box Displaying the settings dialog box Select the printer in the Printers and Faxes window (the Printers window in Windows Vista/2000/Me/98 SE), and then display the printer driver settings dialog box. The settings specified in this dialog box are applied to all applications. 1 Open the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window). – For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, click "Control Panel", click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Printers". – For Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". 2 In the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), select the printer icon for this machine. 3 Select the command for displaying the printer driver settings dialog box. – With Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click "Printing Preferences". – With Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-4 GDI Printer Controller The following printer driver settings dialog box appears. 2 Note To change the settings for each job to be printed, click the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) in the Print dialog box, which appears when "Print" is clicked in the application. The settings specified in the dialog box displayed from the Print dialog box are only applied temporarily, and the settings return to those in the printer driver settings dialog box when the application is exited. A program containing specified driver settings can be registered and recalled when needed by using the Easy Set function. For details on the Easy Set function, refer to "Easy Set" on page 2-12. To display the Device Options tab in Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/ 2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Printing Preferences dialog box Printing settings can be specified from the printer driver settings dialog box. 2 Note To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows XP/ Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Printing Preferences". To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu of the Printers window. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Tab Item Description Setup Orientation Select the paper orientation of the document. Original Size Specify the paper size for the document. [Edit Custom] button Specify a user-defined paper size. Output Size Specify the size of paper to be printed on. If this size is different from the original document size, the image will automatically be enlarged or reduced. Zoom Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio. Copy Specify the number of copies to be printed. Collate Select whether multiple copies of a multi-page document is to be printed by set or by page. Paper Source Select the paper drawer that is to be used. Paper Type Select the type of paper that is to be used. Output Method Select the output method. Layout Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. [Combination Details] button Settings such as the number of pages printed on a single sheet of paper and the printing order can be specified as combination details. Double Sides Select whether pages are printed double-sided. Binding Position Select the binding position. Per Page Setting Front Cover Page Select whether a document page is printed on the front cover. Front Cover Paper Source Select the paper drawer loaded with paper for the front cover. Media Type Select the type of paper used for the front cover. Watermark Watermark Select Select whether the document is printed overlapping a watermark (text stamp). 1st Page Only Select if the watermark is printed only on the first page. [New] button Create new watermarks. [Edit] button Change the watermarks. [Delete] button Delete a watermark. Quality Resolution Specify the print resolution. [Adjustment] button Specify the brightness and contrast. About - Shows the software version information. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Properties dialog box Installed options can be selected from the Properties dialog box for the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Tab Item Description Device Options Device Options Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. Memory Specify the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Device Options tab % Specify whether or not options are installed so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Device Options % Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. – From the "Device Options" list, double-click the names of installed paper drawers to specify that it is installed. Double-click the name again to return the setting to "Not Installed". Memory % Specify the size of the installed memory. – Click [,] on the right side of the "Memory" box, and then select the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Common operations This section contains descriptions of buttons and functions common to all tabs of the dialog box. The actual buttons may appear differently depending on the operating system. Common items Button Description [OK] button Click this button to apply the specified settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] button Click this button to cancel the specified settings (not apply them) and close the dialog box. [Apply] button Click this button to apply the specified settings without closing the dialog box. This button is not displayed on the setting screen that appears when the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) is clicked in the Print dialog box of the application. [Help] button When this button is clicked, help information for the currently displayed settings appears. Preview Shows a preview of the specified paper settings or shows the printer status. Click the button in the lower-left corner of the preview to change it between [Paper View] and [Printer View] and to select the preview display. When the [Paper View] preview is selected, a sample page layout for the currently selected settings is displayed so that an image of the print result can be checked. When the [Printer View] preview is selected, an image of the printer configuration, including the options, such as the paper drawers, currently installed on the machine, is displayed. The paper drawers selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab appear in light blue. Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later. Paper View Printer View 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later when you wish to use those settings again. 1 Change the driver settings on the Setup and Layout tabs. 2 In the "Easy Set" box, type the name of the program. 3 Click the [Save] button. The settings program is registered. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Note To recall a registered program, select it from the list. To change the name of the registered program, select the program from the list, and then type in the new program name. The button changes to the [Rename] button. To change the program name, click the [Rename] button. To delete a registered program, select the program from the list. The button changes to the [Delete] button. To delete the program name, click the [Delete] button. If "Factory Default" is selected from the list, all settings return to their defaults. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 31 programs can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Setup tab From the Setup tab, settings can be specified for the document and paper to be printed on. The number of copies to be printed and the orientation of the printed image can also be specified. Orientation % Select whether to print the document in the portrait or landscape orientation. Portrait Landscape Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Original Size % From the drop-down list, click the paper size for the document to select it. The following standard paper sizes are available. Setting Actual size Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Envelope 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note If "Hagaki" is selected, select the "Hagaki" paper setting for Tray 1 from the control panel of the machine. "Hagaki" and the envelope and non-standard sizes can be selected when "Paper Source" is set to "Auto", "Tray 1" or "Bypass". When "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", only "Letter" and "A4" are available. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Edit Custom A paper size that does not appear in the list can be registered as a custom size. 1 Click the [Edit Custom] button on the Setup tab. The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears. 2 Click the [New] button. The Custom Size Settings dialog box enlarges to display settings for specifying the paper size. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 In the "Name" box, type the name of the paper size. 4 In the "Dimensions" group box, specify the width and length of the paper. – To change the units for specifying the paper size, select the desired setting in the "Unit" group box. 5 Click the [OK] button in the lower-right corner of the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The paper size settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box are hidden. 6 Click the [OK] button in the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The non-standard size is registered and can be selected from the list of paper sizes. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Note To change the width and length of a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click the [Edit] button, and then change the settings. The name cannot be changed. To delete a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, and then click the [Delete] button. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 32 sizes can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Output Size % Select the size of paper that is to be used for printing. – The available standard paper sizes are same as those available in the "Original Size" list. – If the paper size is different from the size selected in the Original Size list, the document image will be printed enlarged or reduced so that it fits in the selected paper size. – The enlargement/reduction ratio to be used for printing can be checked in the Paper preview. 2 Note If "Manual" is selected in the "Zoom" group box, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. If any setting other than "Off" is selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio to be used for printing. 2 Select "Manual", and then type in a number between 25% and 400%, or click the arrows to specify a setting. 2 Note If any setting other than "Same as Original Size" is selected in the "Output Size" list, "Manual" cannot be selected. Copy 1 Specify the number of copies to be printed. 2 Type in a number between 1 and 99, or click the arrows to specify a setting. Reduced Original Enlarged 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Collate % When printing multiple copies of the same document, select whether the entire document is printed one copy at a time or whether the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. – When the "Collate" check box is selected, the entire document is printed one copy at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the entire document (from the first page to the last page) is printed five times. – When the "Collate" check box is cleared, the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the first page of the document is printed five times, and then the second page is printed five times. Printing continues until the last page is printed five times. 2 Note Depending on the application being used, the Collate setting may not be applied. If Collate is specified from the printer driver, Collate cannot be used in the application. If "1" is specified in the "Copy" box, Collate is not available. Check box selected Check box cleared Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the paper drawer loaded with paper of the size specified in the "Output Size" list is used. – The available settings differ depending on the options that are installed. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass 2 Note If "Hagaki" or an envelope or non-standard size is selected in the "Original Size" list, only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available. Only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available when "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", "Thick Paper" or "Envelope". Tray Bypass tray 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Paper Type % Select the type of paper to be printed on. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope 2 Note A setting can be selected only when "Paper Source" is set to "Tray 1" or "Bypass". "OHP" can be selected only when "Original Size" is set to "Letter" or "A4". Output Method % Select the printing method. – Not only can data be printed directly, but "Secure Print" is also available, which requires a password for printing from this machine. – Settings: Print, Secure Print 2 Note "Secure Print" is available only if the optional expanded memory unit is installed. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Using secure printing A password can be specified for a document. The document printed from a computer is temporarily saved in the machine’s memory and is printed when the password is entered with the machine’s control panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential documents. Specifying secure printing from the printer driver 1 Click the Setup tab. 2 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Secure Print". A screen appears, allowing you to type in the password. 3 Type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. – Specify the 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999. 4 The print job is sent. – Normal printing is performed when printing is specified from an application. Entering the password 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-26 GDI Printer Controller Printing from the machine The password must be entered from the control panel of the machine in order to print a document with a password specified when "Secure Print" is selected in the printer driver. 1 Check that the "Printer" indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check that the key icon appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. – The key icon appears if the memory contains a secure print document. 3 Press the [Access] key. PRINTER MODE PRINT WAITING Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 4 When "PASSWORD: – – – –" appears, type in the password. – Type in the same numbers specified as the password from the printer driver. 5 Check that the document can be printed. If the password is correct, the following screen appears, and the job is printed. 2 Note If there are multiple secure print jobs with the same password, all of those secure print jobs are printed. PRINTER MODE PASSWORD:---- ______ACCEPTED_____ PASSWORD:**** 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 2.5 Layout tab % From the Layout tab, select the number of document pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. Use combined printing to economize on the number of printed pages. % From the drop-down list, select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. – For example, if "2 in 1" is selected, two pages will be printed on a single sheet of paper. If "Off" is selected, one page is printed on a single sheet of paper. – Settings: Off, 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 6 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 6 in 1 9 in 1 16 in 1 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combination Details % Click the [Combination Details] button to specify the printing order and whether or not to print page outlines. Item Description Combination Select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. This is the same setting selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab. Order When multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper, select the direction and order for printing the pages. Settings: Border Line Select this check box to print an outline around each page when multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper. Upper Left- Columns Upper Right- Columns Upper Left- Rows Upper Right- Rows Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Double-sided printing Document pages can be printed on both sides of the paper. Print on both sides when binding a multi-page document. 1 Click the Layout tab. 2 From the "Double Sides" drop-down list, select "Double Sided". 2 Note From the "Binding Position" drop-down list, select the desired binding position. 2 Note Double sided printing is available only when the optional automatic duplex unit is installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-32 GDI Printer Controller 2.6 Per Page Setting tab % From the Per Page Setting tab, specify whether or not a cover page is added. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 Front Cover Page % Select whether or not a cover page is added and whether or not a document page is printed on the cover page. – Settings: Front Cover Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper for the cover pages. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass Media Type % Select the type of paper to be used for the cover page. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope Item Description None No cover page is added, and the entire document is printed on paper from the same paper drawer. Blank A blank sheet of paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list is added as a cover page. Printed The first page of the document is printed on paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list and is added as a cover page. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-34 GDI Printer Controller 2.7 Watermark tab From the Watermark tab, specific text can be printed in the background as a watermark. Watermark Select 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the Watermark Select list, select the watermark to be printed. – Settings: No Watermark, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, FINAL, PROOF, TOP SECRET 3 To print the watermark only on the first page, select the "1st Page Only" check box. – To print the watermark on all pages, clear the check box. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 Creating a new watermark A new watermark can be registered. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 Click the [New] button. The New dialog box appears. 3 In the "Watermark Text" box, type in the text to be used as the watermark. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. – A maximum of 32 watermarks can be registered (including "No Watermark"). 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-36 GDI Printer Controller 4 Specify the desired settings. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [Add] button. The watermark is added to the "Watermark Select" list. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 Editing a watermark A registered watermark can be edited to change the text, size and position. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the list, select the watermark to be edited. 3 Click the [Edit] button. The Edit dialog box appears. 4 Specify the desired settings. – Watermark Text: Type in the watermark text. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-38 GDI Printer Controller – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [OK] button. The watermark is changed. 2 Note To delete a registered watermark, select the watermark from the list, and then click the [Delete] button. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-40 GDI Printer Controller 2.8 Quality tab From the Quality tab, settings for the print quality can be specified. Resolution % From the drop-down list, select "600 e 600 dpi" or "300 e 300 dpi" as the print resolution. 2 Note When "600 × 600 dpi" is selected, the print quality is increased, but the printing time is longer than if "300 × 300 dpi" is selected. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 Adjustment % Click the [Adjustment] button to specify the brightness and contrast. Item Description Brightness Adjust the brightness of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the higher the contrast and the more distinct the image. Contrast Adjust the contrast of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the brighter the image. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-42 GDI Printer Controller 3 Control panel operations Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Control panel operations Descriptions on the printing operations that can be performed from the control panel of the machine are provided below. 3.1 Printing operations The default mode of the machine is the Copy mode. Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. For details, refer to "Starting the print operation" on page 3-5. To print with "Bypass" selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab, refer to "Using the manual bypass tray" on page 3-8. Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 No. Item Description 1 Display • While print data is being received, ">>PRINTER:Printing" appears in the display. • In addition, if the [Printer] key is pressed while the machine is receiving print data (the Printer indicator is lit), the paper source and paper size settings and the user name for the current print job appear. 2 [OK] key • Press this key to select the function shown in the display. 3 [+], [,], [*] and [)] keys • Press these keys to change the menu shown in the display. 3 Control panel operations 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note The [Fax] key and the fax function keys can be used only if the optional fax kit is installed on the machine. The [Scan] key can be used only if the optional fax kit and optional network interface card NC-503 or image controller IC-206 are installed on the machine. 4 Printer indicator • This indicator flashes when the machine is receiving print data. • This indicator lights up when the machine is printing the print data. (The indicator lights up if data is being received at the same time.) • This indicator goes off if there is no print data. • Refer to "Printer indicator" on page 3-5. 5 [Printer] key • Press this key when the machine is receiving print data (Printer indicator is lit) to display the Printer mode screen. • To return to the mode before entering Printer mode, press this key while the Printer mode screen is displayed. • If there is no print data in the machine’s memory, the Printer mode screen does not appear, even if the [Printer] key is pressed. 6 [Clear/Stop] key • To cancel the current print job while print data is being received, press the [Printer] key, and then press this key when the Printer mode screen appears. Refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 7 Start indicator • This indicator lights up in orange when the machine is receiving print data. 8 Caution indicator • This indicator lights up when an error or malfunction has occurred. No. Item Description Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Printer indicator The "Printer" indicator shows the status of the printer data sent from the computer. Starting the print operation Normally, printing begins when printing is performed from a connected computer. - Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. - If a print operation is performed from a connected computer while the machine is copying, printing begins automatically when no copy operation is performed for 30 seconds. - When using the optional fax kit: If print data is received while fax data is being received, the printing of print data has priority. After the reception job is completed in Fax mode, the print data is printed, and then the fax is printed. - While printing, copy settings can be specified and fax operations can be performed. (Copies and faxes are printed after printouts are printed.) Printer indicator Printing status Flashing • The machine is receiving print data. The indicator also flashes in other modes. • An error has occurred in the machine. Lit • Print data is being printed. Instead of flashing, the indicator remains lit when data is being received during printing. Off • There is no print data in the machine’s memory. 3 Control panel operations 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Canceling a print job Printing of a print job can be canceled from the control panel of the machine’s control panel. However, a print job can only be canceled from the control panel while the machine is in Printer mode. 1 Check that the Printer indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. 2 Check that "PRINTER MODE PRINTING" appears in the machine’s display. – The message that appears differs depending on the status of the machine. 3 Press the [Clear/Stop] key. The confirmation message "JOB CANCEL" appears. PRINTER MODE User01 PRINTING LTR JOB CANCEL NO YES Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Press the [+] or [,] key to select "YES", and then press the [OK] key. – To continue printing, select "No". – If no key is pressed within five seconds, printing continues. "ACCEPTED" appears in the display and the print job is canceled. If any of the following messages appear in the display, the print job can also be canceled by repeating steps 2 and 3 from the procedure described above. - PAPER EMPTY - PAPER JAM - PAPER SIZE ERROR - RESET PAPER - NO SUITABLE PAPER - UPPER TRAY FULL - REMOVE PAPER IN BYPASS TRAY - LOAD PAPER - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - MEDIA TYPE ERROR - *RECEIVING* - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - TONER EMPTY ______ACCEPTED______ NO YES 3 Control panel operations 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Using the manual bypass tray Follow the procedure described below when using the manual bypass tray to print one page at a time. 1 From the computer, display the Setup tab for the printer driver, and then select "Bypass" in the "Paper Source" list (page 2-23). 2 Perform the print operation from the computer. 3 When the message "PRINTER MODE LOAD PAPER" appears, load paper into the manual bypass tray. – Insert one sheet of paper with the front side facing down, lightly sliding the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. – Slide the paper guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. PRINTER MODE User01 LOAD PAPER( ) Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Repeat step 3 as often as necessary until printing of the document is finished. 2 Note Be sure to load the paper into the manual bypass tray after the print operation is performed from the computer. Follow the procedure described below if the paper is loaded into the manual bypass tray before the print operation is performed from the computer. Remove the paper from the manual bypass tray. Press the [Reset] key. Press the [Printer] key. Perform step 3 of the procedure. Load the paper into the manual bypass tray one sheet at a time. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is installed, printing from it can be performed in the same way as with any other paper drawer since the multi bypass tray can be loaded with 100 sheets of paper. The multi bypass tray can be loaded with 10 envelopes, 20 OHP transparencies, 20 postcards, 20 label sheets or 100 sheets of plain paper. 3 Control panel operations 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Power Save mode If print data is received while the machine is in Power Save mode, the mode is canceled. When print data is received, the data is printed after the machine has finished warming up. 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Troubleshooting Descriptions of the errors that may occur while printing from a computer and the procedures for correcting the error are provided below. If a problem occurs during computer printing, check the following. 4.1 Checking error messages If a computer printing error occurs while any screen other than the Printer mode screen is displayed, the Caution indicator lights up and the message "Check Printer Mode" appears in the machine’s display. In this case, perform the following procedure. 1 Press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check the error message that currently appears in the display, and then perform the desired operation to correct the error. PAPER: TEXT/PHOTO ZOOM :100% Check Printer Mode LTR ______CAUTION_______ LOAD PAPER( ) NO SUITABLE PAPER 4 Troubleshooting 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Main error messages The main error messages that appear in the Printer mode screen are described below. Error message Cause Remedy PAPER SIZE ERROR The size of paper specified with the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Pull open the paper drawer with the size error, and then close it again. Check if a custom paper size has been entered, and correct the paper size from Utility mode. NO SUITABLE PAPER "Auto" is selected in the "Paper Source" list in the printer driver, but paper of the specified size is not loaded. Load paper of the specified size into a paper drawer. INCORRECT PAPER SIZE Paper of the size specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Change the paper size from Utility mode, and then load paper of the appropriate size into a paper drawer. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. PAPER EMPTY Either no paper is loaded in the specified paper drawer or the specified paper drawer is not installed on the machine. Load paper of the specified size into the specified paper drawer. MEDIA TYPE ERROR Paper of the type specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Load the appropriate paper into a paper drawer, and then change the paper type from Utility mode. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. MEMORY NEAR FULL The image data received from the computer has exceeded the capacity of the memory. Press any key. Turn the machine off, then on again. SECURE PRINT IS NOT AVAILABLE Since the expanded memory unit is not installed, the "Secure Print" setting cannot be selected. The job is cancelled. NOT ACCEPTED PASSWORD Since the secure print password is incorrect, the document cannot be printed. Type in the correct password. Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Print data when an error occurs The operation performed with the print data when an error occurs differs depending on the type of error that occurred. With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error This error indicates that a severe operating malfunction occurred. When this error message appears in the display, the machine cannot receive any print data. Contact your technical representative. Temporary errors When the following easily corrected errors occur, the print data currently in the memory is saved. Printing automatically restarts as soon as the error is corrected. - PAPER JAM - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - PAPER SIZE ERROR - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - NO SUITABLE PAPER - PAPER EMPTY - MEDIA TYPE ERROR 2 Note If any of the errors listed above appears, the print job in the memory can be canceled. For details, refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 4 Troubleshooting 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Specifications Specifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Specifications * The print speed is measured under the following printing conditions. Paper is fed from Tray 1. Specification Print speed* bizhub 163: 16 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) bizhub 211: 21 ppm (when printing on A4 v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (when printing on Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) Memory Shared with machine Interface port Compliant with USB Revision 2.0 Printer language GDI Font Windows Supported operating systems Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows Terminal Server (Windows 2000 Server/ Windows Server 2003) 5 Specifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Instruction booklet 252988361A_ENG LFF/LFFn Dear customer Dear customer For your security and comfort, we urge you to carefully read the chapter Security, page 1 before attempting use. In buying this multifunction machine, you have opted for a quality product. Your device satisfies all of the different needs of a modern office automation tool. This machine allows you to scan and fax in color and black and white, to print and copy in black and white. You can connect the multifunction device to your PC (Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP/Vista 32-bit). Install the software included to use the multifunction device as a printer. Besides, you can scan, edit and save documents through your PC. If you have a WLAN adaptor (optional) you can communicate with a personal computer wirelessly. WLAN is an optional working only with a specific adaptor that you can obtain from your retailer. Thanks to its navigator and its multitask access, it is powerful, user-friendly and easy to use. The multifunction machines, come with a 600 dpi scanner and a black and white laser printer offering a printing speed of 16 ppm. The Companion Suite Pro LL software provided allows you to use your multifunction machine as a scanner and a printer from a personal computer. It also gives you the ability to manage your multifunction machine. - I - Contents Contents Dear customer I Security 1 Security directives 1 Positions of Safety labels on the machine 2 Symbols for the main power switch 2 Declaration of conformity 2 Notice to Users in EU Countries 2 Environment 3 The packaging 3 Batteries and rechargeable batteries 3 The product 3 Software use license 4 Definition 4 License 4 Property 4 Duration 4 Warranty 4 Responsibility 4 Development 4 Applicable law 5 Registered trademarks 5 Prohibited reproductions 5 Installation 6 Location conditions 6 Cautions of use 6 Paper recommendations 7 Loading paper in the main unit tray 7 Handling of paper 7 Humidity control 7 Use of envelopes 7 EP Cartridge recommendations 7 Terminal description 8 Command panel 9 Accessing terminal menus 9 Packaging contents 10 Device installation (depending on model) 10 Installing the document feeder 10 Feed cassette paper insertion 10 Cartridge installation 11 Paper delivery stop 12 Starting your device 12 Device connection 12 Paper insertion in the manual input tray 13 Copy 14 Simple copy 14 ECO mode copy 14 Advanced copying 14 Special setup for the copying 15 Resolution setup 15 Zoom setup 15 Assembled copy setup 15 Analysis origin setup 15 Contrast setup 15 Brightness setup 15 Paper type setup 16 Paper tray selection 16 Sheet-feed analysis margins setup 16 Analysis margins setup 16 Left and right printing margins setup 16 Top and bottom printing margins setup 16 Format paper setup 16 Fax 17 Fax transmission 17 Print a header page (depending on model) 17 Immediate transmission 17 Delayed transmission 17 Transmission with auto redial 18 Fax reception 18 Relay broadcast 18 Fax answering machine 19 Saving an access code 19 Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 19 Printing fax messages stored in the memory 19 Fax rerouting 19 Activating rerouting 19 Setting the re-direction contact 19 Printing rerouted documents 19 Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key 20 Activating rerouting 20 Printing rerouted documents 20 Transmission waiting queue 20 Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 20 Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 20 Deleting a transmission on hold 20 Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 20 Printing the waiting queue 20 Cancelling a transmission in progress 21 MailBoxes (MBX Fax) 21 Creating an MBX 21 Modifying the features of a MBX 21 Printing the contents of a MBX 21 Deleting a MBX 22 Printing the MBX list 22 MBX deposit in your fax 22 MBX deposit in a remote fax 22 MBX polling from a remote fax 22 Deposit and Polling 22 Placing a document in deposit 22 Polling a deposited document 23 SMS 24 SMS Parameters 24 Presentation of the sender 24 SMS Center transmission number 24 Sending an SMS 24 Parameters/Setup 25 Date/Time 25 Your fax number/Your name 25 Type of network 25 Geographical settings 25 Country 25 Network 25 Language 26 Local prefix 26 Prefix 26 Transmission report 26 Document feed type 26 Economy period 26 Reception Mode 27 Reception without paper 27 - II - Contents Number of copies 27 Fax or PC reception 27 Received faxes reduction mode 27 Technical Parameters 28 Printing the functions guide 30 Printing the logs 30 Print the list of setups 30 Font printing 30 Lock the machine 30 Lock the keyboard 30 Lock the numbers 31 Lock the SMS service 31 Read the counters 31 Sent pages counter 31 Received pages counter 31 Scanned pages counter 31 Printed pages counter 31 Display the consumables status 31 Calibrate your scanner 31 Directory 32 Creating subscribers record 32 Creating subscribers list 32 Modifying a record 32 Deleting a record or a list 33 Printing the directory 33 Games and entertainment 34 Sudoku (depending on the model) 34 Print a grid 34 Print the solution to a grid 34 Local network settings 35 Selecting the type of your local network 35 Ethernet network settings (model network) 35 Automatic configuration 35 Manual configuration 35 IP address 35 Sub-network mask 35 Gateway address 35 IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 35 NetBIOS names 35 Name servers 35 WLAN network 36 Type of radio network 36 Radio infrastructure network 36 Radio ad-hoc network 36 Radio networks (WLAN) 36 Connect your WLAN adaptor 36 Configure your network 37 Creating or rejoining a network 37 Referring to or changing your network parameters 37 An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up 39 Setting up a multifunction machine 39 Setting up the PC 39 Message service (model network) 40 Information required to set up message service 40 Configuring initialisation parameters 40 Access to servers parameters 40 Access to SMTP authentification parameters 40 Sending an E-Mail 40 Sending an E-mail text 40 Scan to FTP 41 Simply put the file in an FTP server 41 Connection configuration 41 Standard settings 41 Selecting the connection type 41 Selecting the transmission type 41 Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 41 Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 42 Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 42 Printing the Internet settings 42 Mail sorting 42 F@X Only mode 42 PC Only mode 42 PC share mode 42 USB memory key 43 Use of the USB memory key 43 Print your documents 43 Print the list of files located in the key 43 Print the files located in the key 43 Delete your files located in the key 44 Analyse the USB memory key content 44 Save a document on a USB memory key 44 Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key 45 PC Features 46 Introduction 46 Configuration requirements 46 Installation 46 Install the software on your PC 46 Connections 48 USB Connection 48 Network connection 48 Uninstall the software from your PC 49 Multifunction Terminal's Supervision 50 Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine 50 MF Director 50 Graphical presentation 50 Utilities and applications activation 50 MF Monitor 51 Graphical presentation 51 Display the consumable status 51 Scan To 51 Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities 51 Document analysis 51 Analysis with Scan To 52 Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 52 Character recognition software (OCR) 52 Printing 52 Printing with the multifunction machine 52 Address book 53 Add a contact to the terminal address book 53 Add a group to the terminal address book 53 Manage the address book 54 Modify the information related to a contact 54 Modify a group 54 Delete a contact or a group from the address book 54 Print the address book 54 Import or export a directory 54 Import a directory 54 Save your address book 54 Fax communications 54 - III - Contents Presentation of the Fax window 54 Send a fax 55 Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 55 Send a fax from application 55 Receive a fax 56 Follow-up of fax communications 56 The outbox 56 The send memory (items sent) 56 The outbox log 56 The inbox log 57 Fax parameters 57 Access to fax parameters 57 Description of the tab Log and Report 57 Description of the tab Fax Parameters 57 Cover sheet 58 Creating a cover sheet 58 Description of the tab Cover page 59 Creating a cover page template 59 SMS Communication 60 Presentation of the SMS window 60 Send an SMS 61 Follow-up of SMS 61 The outbox 61 The outbox log 62 The sent item memory (items sent) 62 SMS Parameters 62 Access to SMS parameters 62 Description of the tab Logs and reports 62 Maintenance 63 Service 63 General information 63 Toner cartridge replacement 63 Issues with smart cards 63 Cleaning 64 Scanner reading system cleaning 64 Printer cleaning 64 Printer external cleaning 64 Printer issues 64 Error messages 64 Paper jam 64 Scanner issues 65 Miscellaneous issues 65 Communication errors 65 Transmission from the feeder 66 Transmission from memory 66 Communication error codes 66 General codes 66 Specifications 67 Physical specifications 67 Electrical specifications 67 Environmental specifications 67 Peripheral specifications 67 Consumable specifications 68 - 1 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Security Security directives Before turning on your device, check that the outlet that you are going to plug it into conforms to the indications shown on the information plate (voltage, current, power network frequency) located on your device. This device shall be connected to a single phase power network. The device shall not be installed on bare ground. Batteries and rechargeable batteries, packaging and electric and electronic equipment (EEE), shall be thrown away, as specified by the Instructions of the ENVIRONMENT chapter of this manual. Because of the device model, the power connector is the only way to disconnecting the device from the power network, that is why it is imperative to apply the following safety measures: your device shall be connected to a power outlet located nearby. The outlet shall be easily accessible. Your device is delivered with a grounded power cord. It is imperative to connect a grounded connector to a grounded outlet connected to the building earthing. For installation conditions and safe use precautions, refer to chapter Installation, page 6. Repairs-maintenance: Repairs and maintenance should only be carried out by a qualified technician. No user serviceable parts inside the machine. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, you shall not proceed with these operations yourself, because by opening or removing the lids, you could expose yourself to two hazards: - The laser beam can cause irreversible eye damage. - Avoid contact with powered parts because it can lead to electrical shock with unfortunate consequences. APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 APARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 - 2 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Positions of Safety labels on the machine The device has warning labels at the positions shown below. For your safety, you must never touch these surfaces when you remove a paper jam or when you replace the EP cartridge. Symbols for the main power switch In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: - means POWER ON. - means POWER OFF. Declaration of conformity Notice to Users in EU Countries The tagging attests to the product's compliance with the demands of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. For users security, in accordance with the 73/23/CE directive. For electromagnetic disturbances, in accordance with the 89/336/CE directive. The manufacturer declares that the products are manufactured in accordance with the APPENDIX II of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. - 3 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Environment The preservation of the environment is of importance to the manufacturer. The manufacturer wishes to service the installations with respect to the environment and has chosen to integrate the environmental performance in the whole lifecycle of its products, throughout manufacturing, release, use and disposal. The packaging The (green point) logo indicates that a contribution is given to an approved national organization to improve the packaging salvage and recycling infrastructures. To make recycling easier, follow local rules and regulations concerning sorting and disposal of such waste. Batteries and rechargeable batteries If your product contains batteries or rechargeable batteries, these shall be disposed of at the designated collecting centers. The product The crossed bin symbol on the product indicates that it belongs to the electric and electronic equipment family. Therefore, according to European regulations you are requested to dispose of it at the selected collection areas: - to distribution centers in case of equivalent equipment purchase, - to the available local collecting centers (dump, selective collection, etc.). In doing so, you will participate in the "Waste of Electric and Electronic Equipment reuse and development scheme" which will help prevent potential effects on the environment and human health. The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, the manufacturer has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. - 4 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Software use license CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE PRESENT LICENSE BEFORE OPENING THE SEALED ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THIS ENVELOPE INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. In case you should not accept the terms of this license, the CD-ROM packaging should be returned to the retailer unopened, along with the other components of the product. The purchase price of this product will be refunded. No refunds will be made for products if the CD-ROM packaging have been opened, if components are missing or if the reimbursement request is made after ten (10) days from the purchase date, your receipt is the proof of purchase. Definition The Software designates programs and associated documentation. License - This license allows you to use this Software on personal computers on a local network. You only have permission to use this Software to print on one multifunction machine; you can not lend the Software or authorize anyone to use it. - You are allowed to make a back up copy. - This license is non-exclusive and non-transferable. Property The manufacturer or its providers hold the Software property right. You only become the owner of the CD-ROM. You shall not modify, adapt, decompile, translate, create any derived piece, rent or sell the Software or the documentation. Any rights not explicitly approved are reserved by the manufacturer or its providers. Duration This license remains valid until cancelled. You can cancel it by destroying the program and the documentation as well as any other copies of them. This license will automatically be canceled in case you do not respect the terms of this license. If the license is rendered invalid, you agree to destroy all copies of the program and the associate documentation. Warranty The Software is provided "as is" with no warranties what so ever, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose; all the risks concerning the results and performance of this Software are assumed by the buyer. In case the program should appear defective, all the repair and service expenses will be covered by the buyer. Nevertheless, the license holder benefits from the following warranty: we guarantee that the CD-ROM on which the Software is recorded is free from hardware or manufacturing faults if used in normal conditions, the guarantee is valid for ninety (90) days from the delivery date, the copy of the receipt being the proof of purchase. In case of a CD-ROM fault that due to accident or misuse, the CD-ROM will not be replaced as per the warranty. Responsibility If the CD-ROM is not working properly, send it to the retailer together with a copy of the receipt. It is the retailer's sole responsibility to replace the CD-ROM. Nobody, not even the manufacturer who is involved in the creation, realization, merchantability and delivery of this program would be responsible for direct, indirect or immaterial damages, such as, but not limited to, loss of information, loss of time, execution loss, loss of revenue, loss of customers, due to the use or inability to use the program. Development With a constant concern for improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the Software specifications without any notice. In case of modification, your user right does not give you access to free updates. - 5 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Applicable law This license is under the French law. Any dispute following the interpretation or execution of this license will be submitted to the Paris Court. Given the continuous technology development, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications indicated for this product, at any time, without prior notice, and/or to stop manufacturing of the product. All the names of the products and brands that could be trademarks registered by their respective owners are recognized in the present document. Registered trademarks Given the technical evolution, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications of this product and/or to stop its manufacturing at any time and without notice. Companion Suite Pro is a registered trademark of Sagem Communication. Adobe® and the Adobe® products referred to here are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PaperPort11SE is a registered trademark of ScanSoft. Microsoft® Windows® 98, Microsoft® Windows® Millennium®, Microsoft® Windows NT®, Microsoft® Windows 2000®, Microsoft® Windows XP®, Microsoft® Windows Vista® and any other Microsoft® product referred to here are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation registered and/or used in the United States and/or in other countries. All the other brands or products referred to as examples or in order to give additional information are registered trademarks of their respective owners. The informations contents of this user manual are subject to change without notice. Prohibited reproductions Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law. Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law : - bank notes; - checks; - bonds; - stock certificates; - bank drafts; - passports; - driver's licenses. The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor. - 6 - 2 - Installation Installation Location conditions By choosing an appropriate location, you preserve the longevity of the machine. Check that the selected location has the following characteristics: - Choose a well ventilated location. - Make sure not to obstruct the ventilation grids located on the left and right sides of the device. During the installation, make sure to place the machine thirty centimeters away from the surrounding objects so all the lids can be easily opened. - Make sure that this location does not present any ammonia nor any other organic gasses emission hazard. - The ground outlet (refer to the security notices presented in the Security chapter) to which you plan to connect the machine must be located close to this one and have an easy access. - Make sure that the machine is not directly exposed to sun light. - Make sure not to place the machine in an area exposed to an air flow generated by an air conditioning, heating or ventilation system, nor in an area subject to large temperature or humidity variations. - Choose a solid and horizontal surface on which the machine will not be exposed to intense vibrations. - Keep the machine away from any object that could obstruct its ventilation ports. - Do not place the machine close to hangings or any other flammable objects. - Choose a location where splashes of the water and other liquids are limited. - Make sure that this location is dry, clean and dust free. Cautions of use Take into account the important precautions below when using the machine. Running environment: - Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C with a maximum amplitude of 10 °C per hour. - Humidity: 15 to 80 % of ambient humidity (without condensation), with a maximum amplitude of 20 % per hour. Terminal: The section below describes the precautions to be taken when using the machine: - Never turn the machine off and never open the lids while printing. - Never use gas or flammable liquids, or objects generating magnetic field close to the machine. - When you unplug the power cord, always hold the connector without pulling the cord. A damaged cord presents a potential fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Never touch the power cord with wet hands. You risk getting an electric shock. - Always unplug the power cord before moving the machine. Otherwise, you could risk having the cord damaged and create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always unplug the power cord when you plan not to use the machine for a long period of time. - Never put objects on the power cord, never pull it and never fold it. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that the machine is not sitting on the power cord or any other electric device communication cables. Make sure also that neither cord nor cable is introduced to the machine inner mechanism. This would expose you to a machine malfunction risk or to a fire hazard. - Make sure that the printer is unplugged from the power outlet before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to the printer (use a shielded interface cable). - Never try to remove any fixed pane or hood. The machine contains high voltage circuits. Any contact with these circuits can cause an electric shock risk. Make sure to place the machine in well ventilated premises. When in operation, the printer generates a small amount of ozone. An unpleasant smell can come from the printer if it is used intensively in poorly ventilated premises. For a secure use, make sure you place the machine in well ventilated premises. - 7 - 2 - Installation - Never try to modify the machine. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that paper clips, staples or other small metallic items do not get inside the machine via the ventilation ports or other ports. Such items create fire hazards or electric shock hazards. - Prevent water and any other liquid from spilling on the machine or near to it. Any contact of the machine with water or liquid can cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - If liquid or metallic item gets accidentally inside the machine, turn it off immediately, unplug the power cord and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - In case of heat, smoke, unusual smell or abnormal noise emissions, turn the machine off, unplug the power cord immediately and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Avoid using the machine during an "electric storm", this can cause an electric shock hazard due to lightning. - Never move the terminal during printing. - Always lift the terminal when you wish to move it. Paper recommendations Loading paper in the main unit tray - Insert paper with the face down, and adjust paper guides to the paper format to avoid feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Amount of loaded paper must not exceed the loading mark. If the loading mark is exceeded, this may cause feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Adding paper in the pile must be avoided because it may cause double feeding. - When withdrawing the cassette from the main unit, always support it with both hands to avoid doing drop it. - If you use paper already printed by your machine or another printer, the printing quality may not be optimal. Handling of paper - Curling must be corrected before printing. Curls must not exceed 10 mm. - Care must be taken with storage to prevent feed faults and image defects due to leaving the paper in conditions of high humidity. Humidity control - Paper which has become damp, or paper which has been left unused for a very long time. - After opening the paper, it must be kept in a plastic bag. - Paper with waved ends, paper which is creased, paper with crumples, and any other non-normal paper must not be used. Use of envelopes - Feeding can be done only through the manual feed. - Recommended area should be the area which excludes 15 mm from the leading edge, 10 mm from and both the left and right edges, and the rear edge. - A few lines may be given in solid print at the part of being overlapped. - Envelopes which are not recommended may lead to improper printing (refer to the paragraph Peripheral specifications, page 67). - Curled envelope after printing should be fixed manually. - Small crumples on the edge of the wide side of envelopes. Smearing, or less clear printing may appear on the reverse side. - Set envelope by pressing the folding line of four edges properly after releasing air inside. Set envelope in a proper position after aligning in case it is bent or warped. EP Cartridge recommendations - Must not be stood on the side, or held upside down. - 8 - 2 - Installation Terminal description Front side Back side Control panel Document feeder Paper output Manual Paper tray Master USB Cartridge access cover Manual paper feed setup guides input tray (USB key) Smart card insertion point Fold-down stop for paper delivery connection Slave USB connection (for PC) On/Off switch Power supply cord connection Paper jam cover Telephone cable socket Additional telephone cable socket Master USB connection (USB key) (model network) LAN Connection (model standard) - 9 - 2 - Installation Command panel Accessing terminal menus All terminal functions and settings are available via the menu and are associated to a specific menu command. For example, the menu command 51 launches the printing of the functions list (the functions list stores the list of all terminal menus, sub-menus and their identification number). Two methods are available to access menu items : the step by step method or the shortcut method. To print the functions list whitch details the Step by step method: 1 Press 􀀙. 2 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu and select 5 - PRINT. Confirm with OK. 3 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu PRINT and select 51-FUNCTIONS LIST. Confirm with OK. To print the functions list with with the shortcut method: 1 Press on 􀀙. 2 Enter 51 with the numerical keypad to directly print the functions list. COL 1 2 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3 23 24 25 4 5 6 7 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 1. Screen. 2. Digital keypad. 3. Alphabetical keypad. 4. Key 􀃍: deletes the character to the left of the cursor. 5. Key : input or line feed. 6. Key : access to special characters. 7. Key : Shift. 8. Key SCAN: document analysis to the PC or a media (USB key). 9. Key COPY: local copy. 10. Key STOP PRINT: stops the current PC printing. 11. Key : sending of an SMS (Short Message Service). 12. Key : sending of a fax. 13.Key : access to directory and quick dial numbers. 14. Key : line manual connection, listen for tone during fax sending. 15. Key : multiple contact sending (fax, e-mail or SMS). 16. Key : Validation. 17. Key OK: confirms the displayed selection. 18. Key 􀀙: menu access and navigation down the menus. 19. Key C: back to the previous menu and input correction. 20. Key 􀀘: navigation up the menus. 21. Key : stops the current operation. 22. Key ECO: sets up the activation delay. 23. Key : color analysis mode selection. 24. Key : analysis resolution setup. 25. Key : contrast setup. 26. Icon : Superfin resolution. 27. Icon : Photo resolution. 28. Icon : Fin resolution. 29. Icon : colour mode. 30. Icon : activity on the telephone line. 31. Icon : Fax mode. 32. Icon : external answering machine mode. - 10 - 2 - Installation Packaging contents The packaging contains the items listed below: Multifunction device Control panel (depending on model) 1 toner cartridge 1 installation guide and 1 PC installation CD ROM 1 power cord 1 telephone cord 1 initialisation card (depending on model) Device installation (depending on model) 1 Unpack the device. 2 Install the device respecting the security notices stated at the beginning of this booklet. 3 Remove all stickers from the machine. 4 Remove the plastic protection film from the screen. 5 Place the control panel in front of the machine, insert the control panel in its back slots (A). 6 Push the front side of the control panel (B) to clip it. Installing the document feeder 1 Secure the document feeder by fitting the two clips (B) in the notches (A) provided for this purpose. Feed cassette paper insertion Your device accepts a number of formats and types of papers (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. A B B A B - 11 - 2 - Installation 1 Remove the paper feed cassette completely. 2 Push the lower panel down until it clicks. 3 Setup the back side feed cassette stop by pushing the "PUSH" lever (A). Then adjust the lateral paper guides to the paper format by pushing lever (B) located on the left guide. Adjust the length paper guide to the paper format by pushing lever (C). 4 Take a paper stack, pull the paper off and align it on a flat surface. 5 Put the paper stack in the feed cassette (ex: 200 sheets of 80 g/m² paper). 6 Put the feed cassette back in its location. Cartridge installation 1 Stand in front of the machine. 2 Push the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you at the same time. 3 Unpack the new cartridge. Gently roll the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum copies per cartridge. 4 Insert the cartridge in its slot by pushing it until it clicks (last move down) as shown on the picture below. 5 Close the cover. You can use paper weighing between 60 and 105 g/m2. PUSH B A C - 12 - 2 - Installation Paper delivery stop Adjust the paper delivery stop, depending on the format of the document to be printed. Do not forget to raise the flap to prevent the sheets from falling down. Starting your device Device connection 1 Plug the end of the telephone line into the terminal socket and the other end into the wall telephone socket. 2 For the model network, plug end of the LAN cord (as provided by your network administrator) into port of your fax machine and the other end into your local network port dedicated to your fax machine. 3 Make sure that the On/Off switch is on Off (O position). 4 Connect the power cord to the device. Plug the power cord to outlet on the wall 5 Press the On/Off button to turn on the device (I position). 6 (*) After initialisation, "WAITING FOR INIT CARD" appears on the screen. Insert the initialisation card provided in the card reader as indicated on the picture. 7 (*) After an analysis phase, "INIT. OK - REMOVE CARD" appears on the screen. Remove the initialisation card from the drive. Before plugging the power cord, it is imperative to refer to the Security directives, page 1. - 13 - 2 - Installation 8 By default, the machine is set to operate in the UK in English. To modify this parameter, refer to Country, page 25. 9 Set the date and time, refer to Date/Time, page 25. (*) depending on model Paper insertion in the manual input tray The manual input tray allows you to use various paper formats with greater weightings than the one used in the paper feed cassette (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Only one sheet or envelope can be fed at a time. 1 Spread the manual feed guides to the maximum. 2 Insert a sheet or an envelope in the manual input tray. 3 Adjust the paper guides against the right and left edges of the sheet or the envelope. Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. You can use paper, which weights between 52 and 160 g/m². Before printing, check that the paper format you are using matches the paper format set on the printer (refer to Copy, page 14). - 14 - 3 - Copy Copy Your machine has the function to make one or more copies. You can also setup several parameters in order to make copies at your will. Simple copy In this case, the default parameters are applied. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button twice. The copy is made using the default parameters. ECO mode copy The ECO mode enables you to reduce the amount of toner consumed on the page so as to save your printing costs. When the ECO mode is used, the toner consumption is reduced and the print density becomes lighter. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Press the button. Advanced copying The sophisticated copy allows to do custom setups for the current copy. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Enter the number of copies that you want and confirm with the OK button. 4 Choose the paper tray AUTOMATIC or MANUAL with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 5 Choose with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 the printing option (see examples below) depending on the copy mode that you want: - Combined mode (document feeder): 1 Page onto 1, 2 Pages onto 1, or 4 Pages onto 1. - Poster mode (flat-bed scanner): 1 Page to 1, 1 Page to 4 or 1 page to 9. Confirm with the OK button. 6 Adjust the desired zoom level, from 25% TO 400% with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, confirm with the OK button (only available in 1 Page to 1 copy mode). 7 Adjust the desired origin values with the digital keyboard buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 then confirm with the OK button. 8 Choose the resolution depending on the printing quality that you want DRAFT, AUTO, QUALITY TEXT or PHOTO with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. After step 1, you can directly enter the number of copies with the numerical keypad and press the OK button to validate. Then refer to step 4. COPY COPY ECO COPY Analyzed sheets 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 pages to 1 4 pages to 1 MOSAÏC Copy mode 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 1 page to 1 1 Output POSTER Copy mode Analyzed sheets 1 page to 4 1 page to 9 1 page to 1 Output A A A A - 15 - 3 - Copy 9 Adjust the contrast level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 10 Adjust the desired brightness level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 11 Choose the paper type NORMAL, THICK with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. Special setup for the copying Setups done through this menu become the device default setups after you confirm. Resolution setup The RESOLUTION parameter allows you to setup the photocopy resolution. 􀀙 841 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/RESOLUTION 1 Choose the resolution with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Zoom setup The ZOOM parameter allows you to reduce or enlarge an area of a document by choosing the origin and the zoom level to apply to the document, from 25 to 400 %. 􀀙 842 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ZOOMING 1 Enter the desired zoom level with the Alpanumerical keyboard or choose among predefined values with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Assembled copy setup 􀀙 843 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ASSEMBLED The ASSEMBLED parameter allows you to assemble or disassemble your copies. Enter the desired setting and confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Analysis origin setup If you want, you can change the origin of the scanner. By entering new values for X and Y in mm (X < 209 and Y < 280), you move the analysed area as shown on the diagram below. 􀀙 844 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ORIGIN 1 Select the X and Y coordinates with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙. 2 Setup the desired coordinates with the digital keyboard or the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm your choice by pressing on the OK button. Contrast setup The CONTRAST parameter allows to choose the photocopy contrast. 􀀙 845 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/CONTRAST 1 Setup the desired level of contrast with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm by pressing the OK button. 2 You can also directly setup the desired contrast with the button, press several times on this button until the desired setup without using the Menu 845. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Brightness setup The BRIGHTNESS parameter allows to lighten or darken your original document. 􀀙 846 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/LUMINOSITY 1 Setup the desired brightness with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. When the quality of the printing is not satisfying, you can proceed to a calibration (see Calibrate your scanner, page 31). Parameter Signification DRAFT Low resolution. AUTO Standard resolution for documents containing text and graphics. QUALITY TEXT Optimal resolution for documents containing text. PHOTO Optimal resolution for documents containing photographies. You can also change the resolution by pressing the button. y DEBUT FEUILLE FIN FEUILLE x Analysed area BEGIN. OF SHEET END OF SHEET - 16 - 3 - Copy Paper type setup 􀀙 851 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/PAPER TYPE 1 Select the paper NORMAL or THICK that you use with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your setup by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Paper tray selection The Automatic selection can have two meanings depending on the paper format defined on the paper trays. The following table describes the different cases. 􀀙 852 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TRAY PAPER 1 Select the default paper tray to use, AUTOMATIC or MANUAL, with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Sheet-feed analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your sheet-feed scanner. 􀀙 853 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ S.F. MARGINS 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your flat-bed scanner. 􀀙 854 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ FLATBED MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Left and right printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during printing. 􀀙 855 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PRINTER MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Top and bottom printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document towards the top or the bottom during printing. 􀀙 856 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TOP PRINT. 1 Setup the top / bottom margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Format paper setup This menu allows you to define the default paper format of the manual tray and the main tray. You can also setup the default scanning width. 􀀙 857 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PAPER FORMAT 1 Select the paper tray for which you want to define a default paper format with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Choose the paper format with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 4 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Default tray Tray used for copy Same paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC Selection between the main tray and the manual tray. MANUAL The manual tray is used. Different paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC The main tray is used MANUAL The manual tray is used. Paper tray Available paper format MAN. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter AUTO. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter SCANNER LTR/LGL and A4 - 17 - 4 - Fax Fax This chapter describes all the fax processing and configuration functions. You will also find a section describing fax mailboxes. Fax transmission Print a header page (depending on model) A header page is stored in your terminal. To send your fax using this header page, you can print it at any time and fill in your details. 1 Select 􀀙30 - FAX /HEADER PAGE. 2 Select : 301 - LOCAL, to print a header page according to the country configured on the terminal, 302 - INTERNAT, to print a bilingual header page, the language of the country configured on the terminal and English. The separator between the two languages is "/". Example of the international header page: Immediate transmission 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the fax number or choose your dialling mode then press . The icon flashes during the call phase, it stays lit when both faxes are in communication. 3 At the end of transmission the initial screen is displayed. Delayed transmission This function allows you to transmit a document at a later time. To program a postponed transmission you need to identify the subscriber number, transmission time, feeder type and number of pages. To delay the transmission time of your document : 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Select 􀀙31 - FAX / TRANSMISSION. 3 Enter the subscriber number you wish to program at a different time or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 4 Next to the current time, enter the new time and confirm with OK. 5 Choose B & W SCAN or COLOR SCAN. 6 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 7 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 8 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. 9 Confirm postponed transmission by pressing key . Your document is stored and will be sent at the new time. If English is the language configured on the terminal. The header page will only be printed in English. When sending in "Deferred Send" mode, make sure that the document is located in the right direction. - 18 - 4 - Fax Transmission with auto redial This function allows you to monitor the dialling operation during a fax transmission. In this case, the maximum transmission rate will be 14400 bps. This function allows for example: • to hear if the subscriber’s fax is engaged and if so, choose the moment when the line is clear to start the document transmission. • to control the communication progress in case of uncertain numbers, etc. To take the line manually: 1 Place the document in the fax feeder. 2 Press . 3 If necessary, set the sound level with navigator 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 4 If not already done, enter the subscriber number. As soon as you hear the remote fax tone, the line is clear and you can start the transmission. 5 Press to start the document transmission. Fax reception Fax reception depends on the parameter settings of your machine. The following parameters let you customize the printing of received faxes : - Reception Mode, page 27; - Reception without paper, page 27; - Number of copies, page 27; - Fax or PC reception, page 27; - Received faxes reduction mode, page 27; - Technical Parameters, page 28. The following tables gives which tray is used to print received fax depending on the default tray and the paper format in both trays. Default tray set to Manual: Default tray set to Automatic: Relay broadcast Your fax machine (initiator) can relay a document, in other words, transmit a document to your subscribers via a remote fax and with a precise relay list. To do this the initiator fax and the remote fax must both have the relay function. To relay you need to supply the remote fax with the document and the relay list number. The remote fax will then transmit this document to all subscribers on the list. Once the relay is activated by your fax and as soon as the document is received by the remote fax, the document is printed before relaying to all subcribers on the list. To activate relay from your fax machine: 1 Insert the document to relay. 2 Select 􀀙37 - FAX / BROADCAST. 3 Enter the remote fax number where you will relay to or choose your dialling mode and press OK. 4 Enter the relay list number used by the remote fax and press OK. If your machine is set in order to print a transmission report (Transmission report, page 26), the reduced copy of the document first page will not be printed and it notifies you that the communication is manual. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on manual tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 The fax is printed on manual tray. A5 A4,Letter and Legal An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed with an automatic selection of tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. A5 A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on the main tray. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. - 19 - 4 - Fax 5 You may enter the time you wish to transmit the document next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, then press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your documents before transmitting. 8 Activate relay by pressing key . The document in the feeder will be relayed either immediately or at a later time (according to your choice) to the remote fax which will relay the document. Fax answering machine The Fax answering machine allows you to keep confidential documents in storage and to avoid printing them as you receive them. The indicator light lets you know the state of your Fax answering machine: • Light on: the answering machine is on. • Blinking: your fax has documents in storage or is in the process of receiving faxes. • Light off: memory full, the terminal cannot receive any more documents. You can assure document confidentiality by using the 4 digit access code. Once saved, you will require this access code for: • printing fax messages in memory, • activating or deactivating the fax answering machine. Saving an access code 􀀙383 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ANSWER CODE 1 Enter the code (4 digits) and confirm with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 􀀙382 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ACTIVATION 1 If you saved an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and validate with OK. 2 Select the required option WITH or WITHOUT answering machine and confirm you choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing fax messages stored in the memory 􀀙381 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / PRINT 1 If you have defined an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and press OK. Documents received and stored in the memory are printed. Fax rerouting This function is used to reroute faxes received to a directory contact. To use this function, you have to perform two operations: 1 Activate rerouting. 2 Set the rerouting address of the fax. Activating rerouting 􀀙391 - FAX / REROUTING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Setting the re-direction contact 􀀙392 - FAX / REROUTING / CALL NUMBER 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the subscriber from the directory. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙393 - FAX / REROUTING / COPY 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the COPY option (local printout of the information relayed to your device) either WITH or WITHOUT. 2 Confirm with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If the function WITHOUT is selected, the menus 392 and 393 will not be included in the functions overview, when it is printed out (see Setting the re-direction contact, page 19, Printing rerouted documents, page 19 and Printing the functions guide, page 30). Make sure that the subscriber exists in the directory (Directory, page 32 ). - 20 - 4 - Fax Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key This function allows you to reroute received fax messages to a USB memory key connected to your terminal. The USB memory key then becomes the terminal reception memory. Fax messages that are rerouted are therefore saved on the USB memory key with format Tiff and are named as follows : "FAXYYMMDDHHMMSS" where YYMMDDHHMMSS corresponds to the fax reception date and time. You can also print fax messages rerouted to your USB memory key automatically by activating menu 052 PRINT. Activating rerouting 􀀙051 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH and confirm your choice with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙052 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / PRINT 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘, select the copy option WITH to print all rerouted documents automatically. 2 Confirm your choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Transmission waiting queue This function lets you obtain a recap of all documents queuing, for transmission, including those in deposit or in delayed transmission, etc. It allows you to: • Consult or modify the waiting queue. In this waiting queue the documents are coded the following way: Order number in the queue / document status / subscriber’s telephone number. Documents may have the following status: - TX: transmission - REL: relay - DOC: in deposit - POL: polling - MBX: send to mailbox - PMB: mailbox polling - TR: ongoing commands - SMS: SMS transmission • Immediately perform a transmission from the waiting queue, • Print a document in storage, waiting to be transmitted or in deposit, • Print the waiting queue, in order to get the status of each document in the queue, by either: - queue order number, - document name or number, - scheduled transmission time (fax), - operation type regarding the document: transmission from memory, delayed transmission, deposit, - number of pages of the document, - document size (percentage of space stored in memory) • Cancel a transmission request in the waiting queue. Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 􀀙 61 - COMMANDS / PERFORM 1 Select the document in the waiting queue and confirm your choice with OK or to immediately perform the selected transmission. Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 􀀙 62 - COMMANDS / MODIFY 1 In the waiting queue select the required document and confirm your choice with OK. 2 You may now modify the parameters of the given document then confirm your modifications by pressing . Deleting a transmission on hold 􀀙 63 - COMMANDS / CANCEL 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 􀀙 64 - COMMANDS / PRINT 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing the waiting queue 􀀙65 - COMMANDS / PRINT LIST A document called ** COMMAND LIST ** is printed. Before activating this function, connect the USB memory key to the terminal. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 21 - 4 - Fax Cancelling a transmission in progress Cancelling a transmission in progress is possible no matter what the type of transmission but varies depending on whether the transmission is a single call number or a multi-call number. • For a single call number from the memory, the document is erased from the memory. • For a multi-call number, only the call number in progress at the time of the cancellation is erased from the transmission queue. To cancel transmission in progress: 1 Press . A message will ask you to confirm cancellation by pressing a second time. 2 Press to confirm cancellation in progress. If your machine is set to print a transmission report, it will print that the communication was cancelled by the user. MailBoxes (MBX Fax) There are 32 mailboxes (MBX), enabling you to transmit documents in complete confidence using an access code (named MBX code), to all subscribers equipped with a fax compatible to yours. MBX 00 is public. It is handled directly by the terminal to record the messages of the fax TAD as soon as this is put into service. MBX’s 01 to 31 are private. Each is password-protected. They can be used to receive documents confidentially. The use and access to MBX 01 - 31 are conditioned by the initialisation, defined by a MBX code (if needed) and a mnenonic (its S.I.D.). Later you may: • modify the features of an MBX, • print the contents of an MBX, only possible if the MBX contains one or more documents (with a star next to the MBX). When the contents of an MBX have been printed it becomes empty, • delete an MBX, only if the MBX is initialised and empty, • print the the list of your fax machine’s MBX’s. You may receive and send through an MBX in complete confidentiality. When depositing a document into your MBX, the access code is not needed. All documents deposited in a MBX are added to the ones already present. In polling, the MBX’s are only accessible with an MBX code. You may perform MBX deposits or polls by: • depositing a document in a fax MBX, • transmitting to deposit a document in a remote fax MBX, • performing document poll from a remote fax. Creating an MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select a free MBX out of the 31 MBX or directly enter the number of a free MBX and confirm with OK. 2 Select option MAILBOX CODE and press OK. Value 0000 is always displayed. 3 Enter the code of your choice, if needed, and press OK. 4 Select option MAILBOX NAME and press OK. 5 Enter this MBX’s S.I.D. (20 characters max.) and press OK. The MBX is initialised. If you wish to initialise another, press C and repeat the same procedure. 6 To exit the MBX, press . Modifying the features of a MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Select the menu MAILBOX CODE or MAILBOX NAME, then confirm your choice with OK. 4 Perform data modification of the menu and confirm with OK. If needed, repeat the last two steps for the other menu. Printing the contents of a MBX 􀀙 73 - MAILBOXES / PRINT MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. All documents found in the MBX are printed and the MBX is emptied. - 22 - 4 - Fax Deleting a MBX Before deleting an MBX, you need to make sure it is empty, by printing its content. 􀀙 74 - MAILBOXES / DELETE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Press OK to confirm the MBX deletion. The MBX is deleted and will appear as a free MBX in the list. Printing the MBX list 􀀙75 - MAILBOXES / PRT MBX LIST The list gives the status of each MBX. MBX deposit in your fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙72 - MAILBOXES / DEPOSIT MBX and confirm with OK. 3 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. The document is placed in the feeder and saved in the selected MBX. MBX deposit in a remote fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙35 - FAX / MBX SENDING and confirm with OK. 3 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX deposit or choose your dialling mode and validate with OK. 4 Enter the subscriber’s MBX number and confirm with OK. 5 If you wish to delay transmission, enter the new transmission time next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, and press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your document before transmitting and confirm with OK. 8 Confirm the transmission request to a remote MBX fax by pressing key . In the case of an immediate transmission, the document is sent immediately. If the document is set for a postponed transmission, the document will be stored in the memory and sent at the requested time. MBX polling from a remote fax 􀀙36 - FAX / MBX POLLING 1 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX polling or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the subscriber MBX number and press OK. 3 Enter this MBX access code and press OK. 4 If you wish to delay the poll time, enter the departure time next to the current time and press OK. 5 Confirm the MBX poll request by pressing . As soon as the remote fax is subscribed, either immediately or later, the document(s) in the remote fax MBX are receveid in your fax. Deposit and Polling You may deposit a document in your fax and keep it available to one or more subscribers who can obtain a fax of this document by calling your fax with the POLL function. Setting the machine for document deposits, you must define the type: • SIMPLE- it may be polled only once from the memory or feeder, • MULTIPLE- it may be polled as many times as necessary from the memory. Setting the machine for polled documents, you must define the poll number, then depending on the type of poll you may: • launch an immediate poll, • program a delayed poll with a chosen time, • launch a multi-poll, either immediately or later. Placing a document in deposit 1 Insert the document to deposit in the feeder. 2 Select 􀀙34 - FAX / POLLING TX and confirm with OK. 3 Choose the deposit type, according to the table below: Please check for remote fax compatibility. - 23 - 4 - Fax 3 Confirm deposit by pressing OK. Polling a deposited document 􀀙33 - FAX / POLLING RX 1 Enter the number of the party whose document you want to poll or choose your dialling mode. You can poll several documents using the key . 2 Depending on the type of poll, you should: Menu Procedure Simple 1 Select FEEDER or MEMORY. 2 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 3 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Multiple 1 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Menu Procedure Immediate poll 1 Press . Delayed poll 1 Press OK. 2 Next to the current time, enter the time you wish to poll the document and press . - 24 - 5 - SMS SMS Thanks to the SMS button, you can send an SMS to subscribers all over the world. An SMS (Short Message Service) is a service which permits short written messages to be sent to mobile phones or other SMScompatible devices. The number of characters you can send per message is dependent upon the service provider and the country you are sending your SMS from (e.g. France 160 characters, Italy 640 characters). The SMS service is dependent upon the country and the service provider. SMS Parameters Presentation of the sender This setting allows you to show the name or the number of the sender when sending an SMS. 􀀙 41 - SMS SERVICE / SENDER 1 Select the option WITH or WITHOUT presentation of the sender using the 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 2 Validate with OK. SMS Center transmission number This setting allows you to enter the transmission number for the SMS Server. Your Internet provider will provide you with this number. 􀀙 421 - SMS SERVICE / INIT. SMS / SERVER 1 Enter the number of the transmission server using the digital keypad. 2 Validate with OK. Sending an SMS 1 Press the key. 2 Write your SMS using the alphabetical keypad. To do so, an editor is at your disposal: • for upper case letters, use the 􀃏 key, • to move inside the data entry field, use 􀀙 and 􀀘, • to move in the text from one word to another, press CTRL and one of the navigator keys (􀀙 or 􀀘). • to go to the next line, use , • to delete a character (by moving the cursor to the left), use 􀃍 or C. 3 Validate with OK. 4 Dial the number of the recipient (mobile phone or any other SMS-compatible device) in one of the following ways: • dial the number using the digital keypad, • enter the first letters of the recipient name, • press the key until the required name appears (names are classified in alphabetical order). Your SMS may be sent to only one person or to several people. To send an SMS: • to only one person, press OK to confirm, • to several people: 5 Press the key and enter the next recipient's number. 6 Repeat the operations as many times as required (10 persons max.). Press OK to validate the last recipient; "SENDING SMS" is displayed as the SMS is being sent. • If SMS appears, then the SMS has been put on hold and a further attempt will take place a couple of minutes later. To immediately execute or cancel transmission, refer to paragraph Transmission waiting queue, page 20. • To check the SMS has been sent properly, you may print the transmission/reception log (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). There is a special scale of charges for the SMS service. - 25 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Parameters/Setup You can setup your machine as you like depending on the use. You will find in this chapter description of the functions. You can print the functions guide and the available setup of your multifunction machine. Date/Time At any moment you may change the date and time on your multifunction machine. 􀀙21 - SETUP / DATE/TIME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 21 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter the numbers of the required time and date one after another (for example November 8 2004 at 9h33, press 0 8 1 1 0 4 0 9 3 3) and press OK to confirm. 3 To exit this menu, press . Your fax number/Your name Your multifunction machine will print out your fax number and your name on each document it transmits if you save these settings. 􀀙22 - SETUP / NUMBER/NAME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 22 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter your fax number (20 digits max.) and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter your name (20 characters max) then press OK to confirm. For example, if you want to type the letter C, press the key C until it appears on the screen. 4 To exit this menu, press . Type of network You can connect your fax to either a PSTN or a private network such as private automatic branch exchange (PABX). You must select the network which is in use. To select the type of network: 􀀙251 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / NETWORK TYPE 1 Select option PABX or PSTN then confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Geographical settings These settings will enable you to use your machine in different preset countries using different languages. Country By choosing a country, you initialise: • the settings for the public telephone network, • the language by default. To select the country: 􀀙201 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / COUNTRY 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Network This setting enables you to manually set the type of public telephone network (PSTN) for a country, so that your machine can communicate over the public telephone network in compliance with the applicable standards. By default, setting a country using the 􀀙201 OK command automatically sets the type of PSTN to use in the selected country. To manually select the type of public telephone network: 􀀙202 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / NETWORK 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . To benefit from this feature, you must set SENDING HEADER to WITH (Technical Parameters, page 28). If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. These settings are different from the NETWORK TYPE, which allows you to choose between public and private network. - 26 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Language This setting enables you to choose the menu language of your choice. By default, the multifunction machine is set to English. 􀀙203 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / LANGUAGE 1 Select the required language using 􀀙 and 􀀘, then press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Local prefix This function is used when your fax is installed with a private network, behind a company’s PABX. It allows you to program an additional automatic local prefix (to be defined), enabling you to automatically exit the company’s telephone network system, but only under certain conditions: • the company’s internal numbers, where a prefix is not required, must be short numbers less than the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits), • the outside numbers requiring a prefix, must be long numbers greater or equal to the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits). Programming your fax with the local prefix consists of two steps: 1 defining the minimal size (or equal) of the company’s outside numbers, 2 defining the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network. This prefix will automatically be added as soon as an external number is dialled. Prefix 􀀙252 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / PREFIX 1 You can change the default value for the minimal size of the company’s outside numbers and validate with OK. The minimal size will range between 1 and 30. 2 Enter the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network (maximum 5 characters) and validate with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Transmission report You may print a transmission report for all communications over the telephone network (PSTN). You may choose between more than one criteria for printing reports: • WITH: a report is given when the transmission was properly performed or when it is completely abandoned (but there is only one report per request), • WITHOUT: no transmission report, however, your fax will note all transmissions that took place in its log, • ALWAYS: a report is printed with each transmission, • ON ERROR: a report is printed only if the transmission failed or is abandoned. With each transmission report from memory, a reduced version of the first page is automatically reproduced. To select the report type: 􀀙231 - SETUP / SEND / SEND REPORT 1 Select the required option WITH, WITHOUT, ALWAYS or ON ERROR and confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Document feed type You may choose the way you want to feed your documents: • from memory, transmission will take place only after memory storage of the document and dialling. It allows you to get your originals back quickly to free up the machine. • from the feeder of the sheet-feed scanner, transmission will occur after dialling and paper scanning. It allows transmission of larger documents. To select the way you want to feed your documents: 􀀙232 - SETUP / SEND / MEMORY SEND. 1 Select the option MEMORY or FEEDER and validate your choice with OK. In feeder mode, reduced images will not appear on the transmission report. 2 To exit this menu, press . Economy period This function allows you to defer a fax transmission to "offpeak hours" and thus reduce the cost of your communications. The economy period, via the telephone network (at offpeak hours), is preset by default from 7.00 pm to 7.30 am. Nevertheless you may change this time slot. If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. If you define a local prefix, do not add it to the numbers stored in the directory, it will be automatically dialled with each number. - 27 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To modify the economy period: 􀀙233 - SETUP / SEND / ECO PER. 1 Enter the hours of the new economy period and confirm your selection with the key OK. To use the economy period: 􀀙32 - FAX / ECO TRANS. 1 Enter the call number and confirm with OK. 2 Choose SCAN B & W or COLOR SCAN. 3 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 4 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 5 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. Reception Mode This function enables you, if you have an external device (telephone, answering machine) plugged in to the EXT socket on your terminal or to the telephone plug adapter, to select the device receiving faxes and/or voice messages. You may choose between the following reception modes : • MANUAL : the terminal does not receive any documents automatically. When you answer your telephone and realise that you are receiving a fax, you should press the button on the terminal to receive the fax. • FAX : the Fax reception mode is launched on the terminal systematically. • FAX-ANSWER. : the terminal handles reception of fax messages automatically, the external device handles reception of telephone communications automatically. Press the #0 buttons on your telephone to cancel fax detection. To set the reception mode: 􀀙241 - SETUP / RECEPTION / MODE 1 Select the required option and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Reception without paper Your fax offers you the possibility to either accept or refuse document reception if your printer is unavailable (no paper...). If your fax printer is unavailable, you may choose between two modes of reception: • reception mode WITHOUT PAPER, your fax saves the incoming messages in the memory, • reception mode WITH PAPER, your fax refuses all incoming subscribers. To select the reception mode: 􀀙242 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REC. PAPER 1 Select the option WITH PAPER or WITHOUT PAPER and confirm your choice with OK. Number of copies You may print incoming documents more than once (1 to 99). To set the number of each document received: 􀀙243 - SETUP / RECEPTION / NBR OF COPIES 1 Enter the wanted number of copies and confirm with OK. At each document reception, your fax will print the number of copies requested. Fax or PC reception This menu, combined with a software program installed on your PC will enable you to select the machine you wish to receive the documents on: • fax, • PC, • PC if available, fax otherwise. 􀀙244 - SETUP / RECEPTION / PC RECEPT. For more details, please refer to PC Features, page 46. Received faxes reduction mode This menu allows you to reduce received faxes for printing. This adjustment can be automatic or manual. Automatic mode: This mode automatically resizes received faxes. If you have connected a telephone to the EXT socket on your terminal or to a telephone plug adaptor, we recommend that you set the reception mode to MANUAL. When you receive a call, you pick up using this telephone and you hear the particular fax tone. You can: - press the button on your terminal or buttons #7 on your telephone to receive the fax Paper out is indicated by a beep and a message on the screen. Received faxes are then stored in memory (icon flashing) to be printed as soon as you add paper into the feeder. - 28 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To set automatic mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select Automatic and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Manual mode: The machine proposes a 70 to 100 % reduction. Outside these values, the machine beeps for error. This fixed reduction will be used when printing received documents, regardless of the used paper format. To set the manual mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select FIXED and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the reduction value (between 70 and 100) and confirm with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Technical Parameters As delivered your machine is preset by default. However, you may adjust it to meet your requirements by resetting the technical parameters. To set the technical parameters: 􀀙29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS 1 Select the desired parameter and confirm with OK. 2 With the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘, modify the parameter settings by following the table below and press OK. Parameter Signification 1 - Scanning mode Default value of the scan mode resolution for the documents to be transmitted. 2 - TX header If this parameter is on, your header will appear on all documents sent to your subscribers with your name, number, date and number of pages. Warning: If you send a fax from the document loader, the transmission header will not appear on the document your correspondent receives. 3 - TX speed Transmission speed for outgoing documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 4 - Echo protect If this parameter is on, the on-line echo will be reduced during long distance calls. 6 - EPT mode For some long distance calls (satellite), the on-line echo may disturb the call. 7 - COM. display Choice between transmission speed displayed or number of the page in progress. 8 - Eco energy Choosing the printer standby delay: the printer will switch to standby after a delay (in minutes) of NONoperation or during the period of time of your choice. 10 - RX header If this parameter is on, all documents received by your fax will include the subscriber’s header with his name, number (if available) fax print date and the page number. 11 - RX speed Transmission speed for incoming documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 12 - Rings Number of rings to automatically start your machine. 13 - Discard size The Discard Size parameter only defines the printing of received faxes . The number of lines of a document can be too high for the printing paper format. This parameter defines the threshold beyond which the extra lines are printed on a second page. Bellow this threshold, extras lines are deleted. If you choose With, the threshold is set on 3 centimeters. If you choose Without, the threshold is set on 1 centimeter. Parameter Signification - 29 - 6 - Parameters/Setup 20 - E.C.M. This parameter helps correct the calls made on disturbed telephone lines. It is used when the lines are weak or too noisy. Transmission times may be longer. 25 - TEL Impedance This parameter lets you choose between a complex impedance and a 600 Ohm impedance, depending on the telephone network your terminal is connected to. 73 - Improve rep @ This parameter lets you automatically register the Internet address of your subscribers fax during a call (if available). 74 - Erase mailbox When the fax machine receives an e-mail with an attachment and cannot open it, it erases the message from the ISP MBX, prints and transmits with a notice of uncomprehension to the message sender. At E-mail reception, the fax does not destroy the MBX message, it prints a notice of uncomprehension asking you to recuperate this message with your computer equipment. This parameter is useful only if you have PC equipment. The memory capacity is limited, you need to empty your MBX or else new messages may not be received. 75 - Text Attchmt. Editing YES / NO and printing the received Internet documents. 76 - Attchmt format Default format of document sent on the Internet: PDF : monochrome or colour IMAGE : monochrome (TIFF) or colour (JPEG) 77 - LAN speed To define the communication speed of the peripheral units in relation to the implemented Local Area Network (LAN). 80 - Toner save Makes printing lighter to save toner cartridge ink. 81 - Font number Starts the printing of the log list. This parameter lets you set the default PCL font. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 0 (Courier). Parameter Signification 82 - Form lines This parameter lets you set the number of lines per page. This variable is linked to the PJL variables: PAPER and ORIENTATION. If you modify one of these variables, the Form Lines variable is automatically updated (only for the print job in progress) to respect the same spacing. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 60. 83 - Font pitch This parameter lets you set the default font spacing, in characters per inch (the default font must be of type non-proportional). The possible values are included between 0,44 and 99,99 inclus. The default value is 10,00. 84 - Ptsize This parameter lets you set the default font height, in points (the default font must be of type proportional). The possible values are included between 4,00 and 999,75 (by step of 0,25). The default value is 12,00. 85 Line termin. This parameter lets you define line breaks conversion: , and . The possible values are included between 0 and 3. The default value is 0. 86 Orientation This parameter lets you set the page orientation: portrait or landscape. The default value is "portrait". 90 - RAW Port RAW network print port connection. 91 - Printer error timeout Time-out before document being printed is deleted following a print error in PC print mode. 92 - Printer wait timeout Wait time-out for data from PC before the task is deleted in PC print. 93 - Replace format Page format change. This parameter allows you to print a LETTER format document on A4 pages using the LETTER/A4 setting. 94 - Printer class Printing in PCL-/Postscript Mode Printing in GDI mode Parameter Signification - 30 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Printing the functions guide 􀀙 51 - PRINT / FUNCTIONS LIST 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 51 with the digital keypad. The printing of the functions guide starts. Printing the logs The incoming and outgoing logs list the last 30 transmissions (incoming and outgoing) made by your machine. An automatic print out will take place after every 30 transmissions. However, you may request a print out at any time. Each log (incoming or outgoing) contains a table with the following information: • date and time of the incoming or outgoing document, • subscriber’s number or E-mail address, • transmission mode (Normal, Fine, SFine or Photo), • number of pages sent or received, • call duration, • incoming or outgoing results: noted CORRECT if properly transmitted, or information codes for special calls (polling, manual subscribers, etc.) • reason for call error (example: your subscriber does not answer) To print the logs: 􀀙52 - PRINT / LOGS 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 52 with the digital keypad. The printing of the logs starts. Print the list of setups To print the list of setups: 􀀙54 - PRINT / SETUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 54 with the digital keypad. The printing of the list of setups starts. Font printing You can print the list of fonts installed on your terminal at any time. To print PCL fonts: 􀀙57 - PRINT / PCL FONTS To print SG Script fonts: 􀀙58 - PRINT / SGSCRIPT FONTS Lock the machine This function prevents non-authorized people from accessing the machine. An access code will be required every time someone wants to use the device. After each use, the device will lock automatically. Before that you have to enter a lock code. 􀀙811 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCKING CODE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 811 with the digital keyboard. 2 Enter your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 3 Enter again your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the keyboard Everytime you use your machine, you will have to enter your code. 􀀙812 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK KEYBD. 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 812 with the keyboard. 2 Enter the lock code and confirm with OK. 3 With the buttons 􀀙 or 􀀘, choose WITH and confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. 95 - Symbol set This parameter lets you set the default character set. The possible values are included between CS1 and CS30 inclus. The default value is CS1 (Roman8). 96 - NBR. WEP Keys Number of WEP keys allowed (from 1 to 4). The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The incoming and outgoing logs are printed on the same page. Parameter Signification The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If a code is already registered, enter the old code before typing the new one. - 31 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Lock the numbers This function locks dialling and the numerical keypad is disabled. Transmissions are only possible from numbers included in the directory. To access the number interlocking option: 􀀙813 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK NUMBER 1 Enter the four-digit interlock code with the keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 With keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 of the navigator, select the option DIRECT ONLY. 4 Press key OK to confirm. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the SMS service This function prevents access to the SMS service. To access the SMS service locking menu: 􀀙815 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK SMS 1 Enter the four-digit locking code with the numerical keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 Enter the four-digit locking code again to confirm it. 4 Press key OK to confirm. When a code is already registered in the machine, you will have to enter this registered code first before you can type and register a new one. Read the counters This function allows you to view the activity counters for your machine at any time. According to your needs, you can read the counters for: • sent pages, • received pages, • scanned pages, • printed pages. Sent pages counter To view the number of pages sent from your machine: 􀀙821 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SENT PAGES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 821 with the keyboard. 2 The number of sent pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Received pages counter To view the number of pages received on your machine: 􀀙822 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / RECEIVED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 822 with the keyboard. 2 The number of received pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Scanned pages counter To view the number of pages scanned on your machine: 􀀙823 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SCANNED PAGE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 823 with the keyboard. 2 The number of scanned pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printed pages counter To view the number of pages printed on your machine: 􀀙824 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / PRINTED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 824 with the keyboard. 2 The number of printed pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Display the consumables status You can read at any time the remaining toner in the cartridge. This level appears in percentage. 􀀙86 - ADVANCED FCT / CONSUMABLES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 86 with the keyboard. 2 The available toner percentage appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Calibrate your scanner You can do this operation when the quality of photocopied documents is not satisfactory anymore. 􀀙80 - ADVANCED FCT / CALIBRATION 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 80 with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 2 The scanner is triggered and a calibration is done automatically. 3 At the end of the calibration, the machine comes back to the screen saver. - 32 - 7 - Directory Directory Your multifunction machine lets you create a directory by memorising subscriber records and subscriber lists. Your machine can store up to 250 subscriber records, which you can group in 20 subscriber lists. For all subscriber records or subscriber lists you may create, consult, modify or delete contents. You can also print the directory. Furthermore, your machine lets you create and manage your phone directory from your PC Kit. For more information on this feature, refer to chapter PC Features. Creating subscribers record To create subscribers record: 􀀙 11 - DIRECTORY / NEW CONTACT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 11 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the NAME of your contact with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 Enter the TEL number of your contact with the digital keypad (30 digits maximum), confirm with OK. 4 Choose the RECORD NO from your directory with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. At this stage, you may associate an e-mail address or an FTP address to your subscriber. If you do not wish to do so, confirm with OK and refer to step 5. To associate an e-mail address: • Enter the E-Mail address of your subscriber and confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. Or to associate an FTP address : • Do not enter the e-mail address and confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP address of the contact (for example: 134.1.22.9), then confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP user name (for example: Durand) then confirm with OK. • Enter the password of the FTP user, then confirm with OK.. • If necessary, enter the file destination directory (when this field is not completed, the files are stored directly under the root) of the FTP server (for example: server name / Durand). Confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. 5 Select W. ASSOC. KEY if you want to assign a shortcut key (letter) to your subscriber record. The first available letter appears, use 􀀙 or 􀀘 to choose another letter. Confirm with OK. 6 Select the appropriate transmission RATE to send faxes among the values 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400 and 33600 using 􀀙 or 􀀘. Confirm with OK. The maximum speed can be used if the telephone line is of good quality, meaning appropriate, without echo. Creating subscribers list To create subscribers list: 􀀙 12 - DIRECTORY / NEW GROUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 12 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the LIST NAME with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 CALLED NUMBER: use 􀀙 ou 􀀘 to select from existing records the contacts of your list and confirm with OK. Repeat this operation for each subscriber you want to add to your list. 4 Enter the GROUP NUMBER assigned to your list with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. Modifying a record To modify a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 13 - DIRECTORY / MODIFY 1 Press 􀀙, enter 13 with the digital keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to modify by pressing OK. 3 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the entries of the selected record or list. Press on OK when the entry you want to modify appears on screen. 4 The cursor appears at the end of the line. Press on C to delete characters. 5 Enter the new entry and confirm with OK. 6 Repeat the operations for each line you want to modify. If your multifunction machine is connected to a PABX, you may insert a pause for dial tone after the outgoing local prefix dialling. To do so, insert the character "/" after the local prefix. In the directory, the letter G placed next to a name identifies a subscribers group. - 33 - 7 - Directory Deleting a record or a list To delete a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 14 - DIRECTORY / CANCEL 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 14 with the keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to delete by pressing OK. 3 Press on OK to confirm the deletion. 4 Repeat the operations for each record or list you want to delete. Printing the directory To print the directory: 􀀙 15 - DIRECTORY / PRINT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 15 with the keypad. The printing of the directory starts, in alphabetical order. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 34 - 8 - Games and entertainment Games and entertainment Sudoku (depending on the model) Sudoku is a Japanese puzzle. The game is in a grid format of three squares by three squares to be distributed in fields in zones of 3 × 3. Depending on the level of difficulty, more or fewer numbers are already entered at the start of the game. The aim of the game is to distribute the numbers 1 to 9 between the boxes in such a way that each number appears only once in each row, column and in each of the nine grids. There is only one solution. Print a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 3 Confirm with OK. 4 Select PRINT GRID using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the grid requested is printed. Print the solution to a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 3 Confirm withOK. 4 Select PRT SOLUT using the 􀀙 ou 􀀘. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the solution to the grid requested is printed. - 35 - 9 - WLAN network Local network settings You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network. However, practical knowledge of your computer configuration is required to set up a network. Selecting the type of your local network This parameter allows you to configure your terminal accordingly to the type of network you will install it in. 􀀙 26 - SETUP/LOCAL NETWORK 1 Select the desired network type using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons - WLAN if using a wireless network - LAN ETHERNET if using a wired network 2 Confirm with OK. Ethernet network settings (model network) Automatic configuration We recommend that you carry out a manual configuration of your terminal. The automatic configuration of the local network settings may be considered, if your local network features a DHCP or BOOTP server that can dynamically assign addresses to the peripheral devices present on the LAN. To automatically configure the local network settings: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 1 Choose Automatic and press OK to confirm. The terminal scans the local network for a DHCP or BOOTP server that can assign it its settings dynamically (the message Self-conf is displayed). 2 Once the message Self-conf has disappeared, check for the IP Address, Sub-network mask and Gateway address. If these are missing, you should carry out a manual configuration (see below). Manual configuration To configure your terminal manually, you should obtain the usual information used to set a peripheral device (IP address, sub-network mask, network and gateway address). To configure the local network setting manually: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 3 Choose Manual and press OK to confirm. IP address 􀀙 272 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP ADDRESS 1 Enter the IP address of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Sub-network mask 􀀙 273 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/SUBNET MASK 1 Enter the sub-network mask of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Gateway address 􀀙 274 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/GATEWAY 1 Enter the IP address of the network gateway and press OK to confirm. IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 􀀙 275 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IEEE ADDRESS The Ethernet card of your terminal already has an unmodifiable, yet consultable, IEEE address. NetBIOS names These names, which can be used with the network options, are used to identify your terminal machine from a PC connected to a local network (for instance with the name "IMP-NETWORK-1"). 􀀙 276 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 1 􀀙 277 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 2 1 Enter the selected name (15 characters max) and press OK to confirm. Name servers The WINS1 and WINS2 servers, used with the network options, allow access to terminals on other sub-networks by means of their NetBIOS name. 􀀙 278 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 1 􀀙 279 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 2 1 Enter the IP address of each server, then validate with OK. If the terminal is set up in Automatic configuration mode (menu 􀀙271), these addresses can be filled in automatically by certain DHCP servers. - 36 - 8 - WLAN network WLAN network You can connect your machine to a PC using a USB cable or make a wireless connection (via radio) with a PC or network. If you have a WLAN adaptor, you can incorporate your machine as a network printer into a radio network. Type of radio network A radio network or WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) is created when at least two computers, printers or other peripheral devices communicate with each other in a network via radio waves (high frequency waves). The transmission of data in the radio network is based on the standards 802.11b and 802.11g. According to how the network is set up, it may be described as an infrastructure network or an ad-hoc network. Radio infrastructure network In an infrastructure network, several devices communicate via a central access point (a gateway or router). All data is sent to the access point (gateway or router) from where it is re-distributed. Radio ad-hoc network In an ad-hoc network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. Radio networks (WLAN) Three steps are necessary to incorprate your machine into a radio network (WLAN): 1 Configure the network to your PC. 2 Set up the parameters for your machine so that it can function in a network. 3 Having set up the parameters your device, install the Companion Suite LL software onto your PC with the necessary printer drivers. Connect your WLAN adaptor Your machine belongs to a new generation of terminals that you can incorporate into a WLAN network using a WLAN USB key. Beware, when you are using a wireless connection, that certain items of medical equipment, sensitive or security systems may be affected by the radio transmissions of your device; in all cases, please follow safety guidelines closely. The PC and all other devices must have their parameters set up to the same network as the multifunction machine. All the details needed for setting up the device, such as the network names (SSID), type of radio network, WEP key, IP address or subnetwork mask, must match the specifications of the network. You will find these details on your PC or on the Access Point. To find out how to set up the parameters for your PC, please consult the users’ manual for your WLAN adaptor. For large networks, please seek the advice of your network administrator. - 37 - 9 - WLAN network 1 Plug your WLAN USB key into the USB port of your machine. Configure your network Creating or rejoining a network Before attempting to use a WLAN adaptor on your machine, you must enter the parameters that will allow a WLAN network to recognise your machine. On your machine you will find simple instructions that guide you step by step through the set-up of your network. Just follow them! 􀀙 281 - SETUP / WLAN / CONFIG. ASS. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 SSID appears on the screen, enter the name of your network using the numerical keypad, pressing the keys one after the other until you obtain the name you want (32 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 AD-HOC MODE or INFRA. MODE appear on the screen. Go back to the beginning of the chapter and make your choice. Select one of these modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose AD-HOC mode, the sub-menu CHANNEL appears, enter a figure between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 WITHOUT SECURITY or WITH SECURITY appear on the screen. Select the option you want and confirm with OK. - If you choose WITH SECURITY the sub-menu WEP KEY 1 appears, enter the key number (1 to 4 maximum) that you are using on your network. 8 IP CONF.: MANU or IP CONF.: AUTO appear on the screen. If you choose to set up the system manually, go to the next paragraph and enter the parameters IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY. 9 At the end of this procedure, you return to the main menu of CONFIG. ASS. 10 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Referring to or changing your network parameters Each of the parameters of your network may be changed as your network develops. 􀀙 2822 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / IP ADDRESS 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select IP ADDRESS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. Your machine’s network radio adaptor transmits data using the radio protocol IEEE 802.11g; it can also be incorporated into an existing IEEE 802.11b network. When connecting to your machine, only use the approved adaptor. Other transmitting or receiving adaptors may damage your device. Irrespective of whether you use your machine in an infrastructure or ad-hoc network, you must set up certain network and security parameters (for example, the Service-Set-ID (SSID) and the WEP key). These must match the network’s specifications. We recommend that the settings of your WLAN network should only be changed by a person with a good knowledge of the configuration of your computer. If you choose and exisiting network, steps 5 and 6 ( and possibly 7) are carried out automatically. The WEP key number may be configured in the menu: 􀀙 29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS / WEP KEYS NBR - 38 - 8 - WLAN network 5 The dumber of your IP address will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new IP address for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2823 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SUBNET MASK 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SUBNET MASK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your subnet mask will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new submask of your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2824 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / GATEWAY 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select GATEWAY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your gateway will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new gateway for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2825 - SETUP /WLAN / PARAMETERS / SSID 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SSID using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The name of your network will appear on the screen. Enter the new name of your network and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2826 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / MODE 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select MODE using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The symbol >>, tells you that your network is in active mode. 6 Select one of the modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose the AD-HOC MODE, the submenu CHANNEL will appear; enter a number between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2827 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SECURITY This parameter allows you to make your network secure. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SECURITY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Choose WITH or WITHOUT and confirm by OK. If you choose WITH, enter a password: - In a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain five characters exactly. - In a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain 13 characters exactly. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2828 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / HOSTNAME In an AD-HOC network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole AD-HOC radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. You may also enter the password using the hexadecimal system, if this is the case: - For a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 10 hexadecimal characters. - For a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 26 hexadecimal characters. - 39 - 9 - WLAN network The machine name allows you to identify your machine on the network via a PC (for example with the name "PRINTNETWORK- 1"). 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select HOSTNAME using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Type in the desired name (15 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once your connection has been set up, you must install the network printer driver "Laser Pro LL Network" on your PC so that you can print your documents. Refer to the paragraph Network connection, page 48. An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up An example of how to configure an Ad-hoc network without security protection using the following parameters: • network name: "house" • radio type: "ad-hoc" • channel: "1" • PC’s IP address: "169.254.0.1" • PC’s subnetwork mask: "255.255.0.0" • PC’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" • IP address of the multifunction machine: "169.254.0.2" • subnetwork mask of the multifunction machine: "255.255.0.0" • multifunction machine’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" Setting up a multifunction machine 1 Plug the WLAN USB key into the USB connector of the multifunction machine. 2 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 6 SSID appears on the screen, enter "house" using the numerical keypad and confirm with OK. 7 Select the mode AD-HOC MODE and confirm with OK. 8 Enter "1" in the field CHANNEL and confirm with OK. 9 Select WITHOUT SECURITY and confirm with OK. 10 Select IP CONF.: MANU and confirm with OK. 11 Enter "169.254.0.2" in the field IP ADDRESS and confirm with OK. 12 Enter "255.255.0.0" in the field SUBNET MASK and confirm with OK. 13 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the field GATEWAY and confirm with OK. 14 At the end of this process, you return to the main menu of ASS. CONFIG. 15 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once the network has been set up, the LED of the WLAN USB key should be on. You must now set up the PC. Setting up the PC For this section, refer to the instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the WLAN USB key to help you to find and join the "house" network. 1 You may need to install the software for the WLAN USB key on the PC, if this has not already been done. 2 Plug WLAN USB key into a USB port on the PC. 3 Use the software of the WLAN USB key to detect the network. 4 Join the network "house" once this has been detected. 5 Now set up the WLAN network connection of your PC. To do this, you must configure the element Protocol Internet (TCP/IP) for the WLAN connection that has been created. If this element is set up in such a way as to obtain an IP address automatically, you must change it to manual mode to set up the TCP/IP address ("169.254.0.1" in our example), the subnet mask ("255.255.0.0" in our example) and the default gateway ("0.0.0.0" in our example). 6 Enter OK. To guide you through this stage, refer to the paragraph “Setting the parameters for a connection” in the manufacturer’s instructions. - 40 - 10 - Message service (model network) Message service (model network) Your terminal lets you send and receive emails via your local network. To do so, you must connect your terminal to a local network. You must also configure the message service settings. Information required to set up message service Your network administrator must provide you the following elements: • message service identifier • message service password • email address • servers’identifiers (SMTP, POP, DNS1 and DNS2) Configuring initialisation parameters 􀀙91 - E-MAIL / SUPPLIER 1 Select the LOCAL NETWORK from the list and confirm with OK. 􀀙921 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / MESS. SERV 1 Enter Email Identifier, press OK. 2 Enter Email Password, press OK. 3 Enter E-mail Adr, press OK. Access to servers parameters 􀀙922 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SERVERS 1 Enter Smtp, press OK. 2 Enter Pop3, press OK. 3 Enter Dns 1 (primary), press OK. 4 Enter Dns 2 (secondary), press OK. Access to SMTP authentification parameters 􀀙923- E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SMTP AUTHENT. 1 In the ACTIVATION menu, select WITH to activate SMTP authentification then validate with OK key. 2 In the SETTINGS menu, select ID.MESS.SERV to keep the same identification parameters as in the messaging service or AUTHENT. SPEC. to define other identification parameters, then validate by pressing OK key. 3 When you select AUTHENT. SPEC, carry out the two following operations: 4 Enter the IDENTIFIER then validate with OK key. 5 Enter the PASSWORD then validate with OK key. Sending an E-Mail 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 3 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 4 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 5 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . 6 Press OK to confirm. 7 Select B&W SCAN to send a black and white document or COLOUR SCAN to send a color document, and validate with OK key (this setting can be changed at any time during the send procedure, using the colour key). 8 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 9 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. 10 If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. 11 Press OK to confirm. 12 Set contrast and resolution if necessary. The document is scanned and the mail sent to memory. It will be sent during the next connection to the local network. Sending an E-mail text You can send a typed message to an E-mail mailbox. Access through the menu. : 􀀙95 - E-MAIL /SEND EMAIL 1 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 2 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 4 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . Choosing No Access disables access to local network functions. - 41 - 10 - Message service (model network) 5 Press OK to confirm. The mail is memorised and will be sent at the next connection to the local network. Scan to FTP The scan to FTP function enables you to put your TIFF, JPEG and PDF files in an FTP server, for example, for archiving. To connect to the FTP server, you must know the name of the FTP user and the PASSWORD. When sending files, the machine connects to the FTP server using the defined connection parameters. Simply put the file in an FTP server 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press key SCAN. A choice screen is displayed. 3 Select Scan to FTP with keys 􀀘 or 􀀙 then press OK key OK. 4 Enter the FTP address of the server or select it from the directory by pressing the key. 5 Enter the name of the FTP user (operation prohibited when the address is in the directory). 6 Enter the password of the FTP user (operation not necessary when the address is selected in the directory). 7 Validate with OK key. 8 Select B&W SCAN to send a document in black and white or COLOUR SCAN to send a document in colour. Validate with OK key (this setting may be changed at any time during the send procedure with the colour key). 9 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 10 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. Connection configuration The settings are divided into several categories: • the standard settings define the connection type and frequency to the local network as well as the transmission type for your documents, • the E-mail sorting defines treatment for all stored Email messages received. Standard settings Your machine has two types of settings that let you define: • The type and frequency of the connection to your ISP. • Type of transmission over the Internet. At any moment you may print the settings of your machine to know their status. Selecting the connection type 􀀙941 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / CONNEC. TYPE 1 Select one of the connection options among Set Times, Periodic or On Demand and press OK to confirm. Selecting the transmission type 􀀙942 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / SEND TYPE 1 Select one of the send options Immediate or During cnx then press OK to validate. Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PERIOD 1 With the Periodic mode, enter the new connection period by means of the numerical keypad (between 00:01 am and 11:59 pm) and press OK to confirm. A local network connection will be established every three hours (default value). SET TIMES an Internet connection is established every day at 9:00 am, 12:30 am and 5:00 pma. a. To avoid Internet access saturation, the automatic connection will occur in reality 12 minutes, give or take, around the requested time. PERIODIC an Internet connection is established every 3 hours1 (default value). ON DEMAND an Internet connection is established at your request by IMMED. ACCESS. IMMEDIATE document transmission will occur immediately at each transmission request. DURING CONNECTIONS transmissions will only occur at programmed connections of SET TIMES or PERIODIC TYPE. - 42 - 10 - Message service (model network) Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / TIME STTINGS 1 After selecting the Set Times mode, use the 􀀘 and 􀀙 keys to place the cursor under the figure to be modified. Enter the new connection time(s) by means of the numeric keypad (value between 00:01 and 23:59) and validate with the OK key. Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 􀀙944 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / DEPOSIT NOTICE 1 Select one of the deposit notice options With, Without, Always or On Error and press OK to confirm. Printing the Internet settings 􀀙946 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PRINT The Internet settings are printed. These settings may also be printed together with all the other settings of your machine (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). Mail sorting This function lets you choose the mode for all Internet documents stored in your mail box. You have three choices:. Vous avez le choix entre trois possibilités : • F@x only, lets you poll and print E-Mails in your machine. • PC only, lets you keep your E-Mails in you mailbox for later use with a computer (no E-Mail poll), • PC share lets you: - if your PC and fax have two different addresses, transfer all mails or only those with attachments to a PC, - if your PC and fax share the same address, use the fax as a printer for E-Mails for the PC. 􀀙 96 - E-MAIL / SORT MESSAGES F@X Only mode 1 Select option F@x only and press OK to confirm. All E-Mails are polled and printed. PC Only mode 1 Select option PC only and press OK to confirm. The E-mails are neither polled nor printed and they may be used with a computer. At each connection, the number of E-mails in your mailbox is displayed on the screen. PC share mode 1 Select option PC share and press OK to confirm. You may choose to transfer your E-mails to a PC or use the fax as an E-mail printer. To transfer the E-Mails to a PC: 2 Select option With PC Trans. and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the E-Mail address of the computer you wish to transfer your E-Mail and press OK to confirm. 4 Select your option from the table below and press OK to confirm. To use the fax as an E-Mail printer: 1 Select option W/O PC Trans and press OK to confirm. 2 Select your option from the table below and validate with OK. At each connection, the number of E-mails still present in your mailbox are displayed on the screen. Menu Description SEND ALL MAILS All E-Mails are sent to the PC. UNUSABLE ATTAC The fax machine polls and prints the usable E-mails and transfers to the PC mailbox all the E-mails containing attachments it cannot use. Menu Description DELETE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax (w/o attachment) are erased after the fax has printed. SAVE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax are not erased. - 43 - 11 - USB memory key USB memory key You can connect a USB memory Key on the front side of your machine. The files stored in TXT, TIFF and JPEG formats will be analysed and you will be able to use the following actions: - print the stored files contained in your USB memory key1, - delete the files contained in your USB memory key, - run an analysis on the contents of the inserted USB memory key, - digitalise a document on your USB memory key, - fax archiving (see section Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key, page 20). Use of the USB memory key Print your documents You can print the stored files or a list of the files located in the USB memory key. Print the list of files located in the key To print the list of files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / LIST 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting theinsertion way. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select LIST with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 The list is shown in a table with the following information: - the analyzed files are indexed in an incremental 1 by 1 order, - the files name with their extension, - the date of the files last save, - the files size in Kbytes. Print the files located in the key To print the files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / FILE 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select FILE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to print your files: - ALL, to print all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. The printing is started automatically. - SERIES, to print a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIES with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of the series to print and confirm with OK. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 1. It may be possible that some TIFF files of your USB memory key cannot be printed due to data format limitation. Always respect the insertion way when you connect a USB memory key to the machine. Do not disconnect your USB memory key while the machine is reading its contents or writing contents. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 44 - 11 - USB memory key - SELECTION, to print one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to print. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Delete your files located in the key You can delete files located in your USB memory key. 􀀙 06 - MEDIA / DELETE / MANUAL 1 Insert your USB memory key on the front side of your machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select DELETE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select MANUAL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to delete your files: - ALL, to delete all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. You come back to the previous menu. - SERIE, to delete a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen, select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of teh series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. - SELECTION, to delete only one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to delete. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analyse the USB memory key content After a period of inactivity, your machine will return to the main menu. To view the USB memory key again please proceed as follows: 􀀙 07 - MEDIA / MEDIA ANALYSIS 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 07 with the keyboard. 2 The USB memory key analysis is started. 3 You can print or delete the detected files located in your USB memory key. Refer to the previous chapters. Save a document on a USB memory key This function allows you to digitise and save a document directly in the folder SCAN on a USB memory key. The folder SCAN is created by the application. 1 Place the document to be copied face down on the glass. 2 Insert the USB memory key in the USB connector of your multifunction device. The USB memory key analysis is started. When the analysis is finished, the MEDIA menu is displayed. 3 Select SCAN TO with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. Before digitalising a document, make sure that your USB memory key has sufficient disk space. If not, you can: • delete manually the files, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44, or • activate the option that deletes automatically the oldest files located in the SCAN folder, see section Activate/ deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key, page 45. - 45 - 11 - USB memory key 4 Choose the COLOUR between BLACK&WHITE and COLOUR with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons and the button OK. 5 With the alphanumeric keyboard, give a name to the scan file (up to 20 characters) and confirm with OK. 6 Choose the scan format between IMAGE and PDF, and confirm to start the scan and the recording of the document. IMAGE allows to have the same kind of file as a photo. PDF is a format for the digital documents creation. The beginning button immediately starts the scan and sends a file to the support with the parameters defined in the analysis format. Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key This option, when activated, deletes automatically the oldest files in the folder SCAN on the USB memory key, in order to save a new digitalised document when the disk space is insufficient. To activate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITH with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. To deactivate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITHOUT with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. You can also access this function in two other ways: • by pressing the SCAN button of the machine deck then by selecting SCAN-TOMEDIA. • By pressing the 􀀙 button from the screen saver then by typing 03 on the digital keyboard. With the IMAGE format, if you have selected: • BLACK&WHITE, the picture will be saved in TIFF format. • COLOUR, the picture will be saved in JPEG format. You can choose the image resolution that will be digitized to the USB memory key; the default resolution is DRAFT. Press the button several times and select the resolution you require • Scanning in BLACK&WHITE : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: photo resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. • Scanning in COLOUR : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. This option is ineffective when the SCAN folder is empty and the USB memory key is full. You must then delete manually the files in order to free up disk space, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44. - 46 - 11 - PC Features PC Features Introduction The Companion Suite Pro software allows the connection of a personal computer with a compatible multifunction machine. From the PC, you can: - manage the multifunction machine, allowing you to set it up according to your needs, - print your documents on the multifunction machine from your usual applications, - scan colour, grey scale or black and white documents and edit them on your PC, or process them into text using the character recognition software (OCR), Configuration requirements The minimum configuration requirements for your personal computer are: Supported operation systems: - Windows 98SE, - Windows Millennium, - Windows 2000 with at least Service Pack 3, - Windows XP (Home and Pro), - Windows Vista 32-bit. Processor: - 500 MHz for Windows 98SE, - 800 MHz for Windows Me or 2000, - 1 GHz for Windows XP (Home and Pro), - 1 GHz for Windows Vista 32-bit. A CD-ROM drive A free USB port 600 Mbytes of available disk space for the installation RAM memory: - 128 Mbytes minimum for Windows 98, Me, and 2000, - 192 Mbytes minimum for Windows XP (Home and Pro). - 1 GByte for Windows Vista 32-bit. Installation Install the software on your PC Turn your PC on. Open an ADMINISTRATOR account session unless working in 98SE and ME environments. 1 Open the CD-ROM drive, insert the installation CDROM and close the drive. 2 An installation procedure is automatically run (Auto run). 3 A screen titled COMPANION SUITE PRO LL appears. This screen allows you to install and uninstall the software, access the product's user guides or browse the CD-ROM contents. 4 Place your cursor on PRODUCT INSTALLATION and confirm with left-click of the mouse. 5 The Products Installation screen appears. Place your cursor on FULL and confirm by left-click with the mouse. The multifonction machine components only appear if your Windows Installer version is older than 2.0. The installation resumes, a progress bar appears. You can stop the program's installation by clicking on the STOP THE INSTALL button. After search and analysis of the PC components and the multifunction machine's components, you need to restart your PC for the modifications to take effect. Click on the OK button. The FULL installation copies on your hard disk the software required for the good execution of the Companion Suite Pro kit, which is: - Companion Suite Pro (machine management software, printer drivers, scanner, ...), - Adobe Acrobat Reader, - PaperPort (OS > Windows 2000). You may already be the owner of a version of the software available in the installation CDROM. In this case use the CUSTOM installation, select the software that you want to install on your hard drive and confirm your choice. - 47 - 11 - PC Features 6 After restart, the InstallShield Wizard screen shows the progress of the assistant preparation. You can stop the procedure at any time by clicking on the CANCEL button. 7 The welcome screen appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button to launch the installation of the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit on your PC. 9 To continue, you need to accept the proposed license agreement. 10 Click on the YES button. 11 Click on the NEXT button. 12 The final installation is ready to be executed. 13 Click on the INSTALL button. 14 A screen informs you of the installation progress. 15 The Companion Suite Pro software is installed on your PC. 16 Click on the CONTINUE button to copy the utilities and PaperPort SE software that come along with the kit. 17 At the end of the installation, you need to restart your PC to update the system files. - 48 - 11 - PC Features 18 Select your choice and click on the FINISH button. 19 Your "Companion Suite Pro" kit is successfully installed on your PC. You can start the multifunction machine's management software from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR or by clicking on the icon MF DIRECTOR located on your desktop. Connections Make sure that your multifunction machine is powered off. USB Connection The connection between the PC and the machine requires a USB 2.0 shielded cable no more than 3 meters long. 1 Locate your USB cable connectors and connect as shown below on the picture. 2 Power on your multifunction machine. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 3 Click on the NEXT button to finish the installation. 4 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 5 Select the location where the system has to look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 6 A window informs you that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 7 A screen informs you that the XML interface software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button. 9 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 10 Select the location where the system shall look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 11 A window informs that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 12 A screen informs you that the COMPANION SUITE PRO F@X ACTIVITIES software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. You can now use the multifunction machine to print or scan your documents. Network connection You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network (model network only). 1 Run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > ADD PRINTER. 2 Click on the NEXT button to run the installation procedure. It is possible to add LAN printers without installing the Companion Suite Pro software on Windows 2000, XP, and Vista. From the Windows menu Start > Parameters > Printers and faxes, select "Add Printer" and follow the instructions on screen. It is recommended to install the Companion Suite Pro software first and then to connect the USB cable to your machine. If you connect the USB cable before installing the Companion Suite Pro software the recognition system (plug and play) identifies automatically that new hardware has been added. To start your machine drivers installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a window asking about the location of the drivers pops up, then indicate the installation CD-ROM. 0 The Companion Suite Pro LL software shall be installed to perform this operation. - 49 - 11 - PC Features 3 The next screen shows the list of compatible hardware found on the network. You can make another search on the network by clicking on the REFRESH button. Remark: A hardware device may not appear in the list in which case click on the NOT IN THE LIST button. The next window appears. Type the IP address or the NetBIOS name of the hardware that you wish to add. You can test the connection between the PC and the hardware by clicking on the TEST button. Click on the OK button. 4 Select what you wish to add from the hardware list. Click on the NEXT button. 5 For the model network, with a LAN connection, you must choose one printer among the list. Nota: the PCL printer is more fast in the most case. 6 The next window lists the different features of the printer that are about to be installed. Click on the NEXT button. 7 The window indicating that the installation procedure was successful pops up. Click on the FINISH button. Uninstall the software from your PC Run the programs removal from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > UNINSTALL. 1 A preparation screen appears. 2 Select REMOVE and confirm your choice by clicking on the NEXT button. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Click on OK button to continue the COMPANION SUITE PRO LL program removal. 4 A preparation screen appears. You can cancel the removal by clicking on CANCEL. - 50 - 11 - PC Features 5 You need to restart your system at the end of the procedure. Close all open programs, select YES, I WANT TO RESTART MY COMPUTER NOW and click on the FINISH button. Multifunction Terminal's Supervision The software that you have installed contains two multifunction machine management applications, MF DIRECTOR and MF MONITOR, which allow you to: - check whether the multifunction machine is connected to your PC, - monitor the multifunction machine activitie, - monitor the status of the multifunction machine consumables from the PC, - quickly access the graphic editor applications, OCR etc. To manage the multifunction machine, run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine To check if the connection between the devices is good, run the MF MONITOR software from the icon located on the desktop and check that the same information is displayed on the multifunction machine (for instance the date). MF Director This graphical Interface allows you to run the utilities and the software to manage your multifunction machine. Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. By default, MF DIRECTOR is displayed with dark blue rounded shape. You can modify its shape and color by right-clicking with the mouse. Utilities and applications activation The COMPANION SUITE PRO graphical interface allows you to run the following utilities and software: - get HELP from the current documentation, - run the PaperPort software (Doc Manager). To run a software or utility contained in the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit, place the cursor on it and left-click with the mouse. - 51 - 11 - PC Features MF Monitor Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Monitor icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > COMPANION MONITOR. From this screen you can monitor the information or configure your multifunction machine from the tabs: - COMPANION: Presents the multifunction machine screen. - CONSUMABLES: Displays the consumables status. - SCAN TO: Scan Mode and Resolution parameters setup, these parameters will be taken into account when clicking on the SCAN button from the machine. Display the consumable status The following information will be available from the Consumables tab: - current consumables status, - number of printed pages, - number of scanned pages. Scan To The setup of this tab, becomes the default setup for the scanner. Remark: The function SCAN TO can only be used if the application is running. If this is not the case, activate it. 1 Select the Scan To tab. 2 Select one of the possible choices: - colour, - grayscale, - black and white. 3 Select the scanner resolution (72 dpi to 4800 dpi). 4 Confirm your choices by clicking on the OK button. Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities Document analysis The document analysis can be carried out in two ways: • either by the SCAN TO function (application accessible from the MF Director window or from the SCAN button from the machine), • or directly from a TWAIN standard compatible application. - 52 - 11 - PC Features Analysis with Scan To Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. 1 Left-click with the mouse on the SCAN TO graphical image or click the SCAN button from your machine. 2 You can follow the ongoing digitisation on a screen. 3 At the end of the digitisation, the scanned picture appears in the PaperPort window. Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 1 Run the picture editor application and then run the acquisition command. The document analysis window appears. 2 Setup the parameters (contrast, resolution, ...) before starting the digitisation. 3 Once the document is digitised, you can archive it or edit it. Character recognition software (OCR) The character recognition function allows to create a usable data file for desktop applications from a hardcopy document or from a picture. The character recognition only works for printed characters, such as printer outputs or typed text. Nevertheless you can request for a handwritten text block to be kept intact (a signature for instance) by outlining it. Given your machine environment and the character recognition from your machine, the OCR is done with a Drag&drop of a document from the PaperPort to the Notepad icon. Printing You have the possibility to print your documents via the USB connection or the Wifi connection. During the installation of the software, the LASER PRO LL printer driver will be installed automatically onto your pc. This will allow you to print your documents on the machine via the USB connection. The LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer driver allows to print via the wireless connection. This driver is installed when you add a network printer. Printing with the multifunction machine To print a document with the machine from your PC is like printing a document in Windows (use the PRINT command from the FILE menu of the currently open application on the screen). Select the LASER PRO LL printer to print via the USB connection or the LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer to print via the Wifi connection. If the PaperPort software is not installed on your hard drive, the scanned picture will appear on your desktop in TIFF format. For more details about the usage of this software, check the on-line help of the product. The LASER PRO LL printer becomes the default printer when the Companion Suite Pro software is installed. - 53 - 11 - PC Features Address book The address book enables you to store the numbers of the contacts you call the most frequently. The purpose of this function is to facilitate dialing your contact’s number when you want to send an SMS or fax. If you want, you can print the list of numbers stored in the Directory. You also have the possibility of creating groups of contacts from the Address book. Like this, you can group together all contacts from, for example, a given company or the same service, etc, to which you frequently send common documents. Add a contact to the terminal address book 1 Click on the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. The address book is displayed on the screen. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click on NEW and select CONTACT in the displayed menu. The input window for the contact data is displayed.. 4 Enter the contact name as well as the fax or GSM telephone number, the fax transmission rate with this person, the associated quick dial key, the E-mail address and the default transmission format (Pdf or Image). Click on OK. The new contact is added to the list. Add a group to the terminal address book 1 Click the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click NEW and select GROUP in the displayed menu. 4 Enter the name of the group. The group may consist of contacts from the address book or new contacts. 1st case: group members are from the address book. Click SELECT THE MEMBERS. The selection window is displayed. Select a contact or a group in the zone ADDRESS BOOK, click on (to add a contact to the group you can also double click on it). Click on OK. 2nd case: adding new contacts. Click on NEW then add the personal data of the new contact, as in the procedure for adding a contact. 5 As soon as the group is complete, click on OK. The new group is added to the list. - 54 - 11 - PC Features Manage the address book When you are working in the directory, you can perform different operations: - print a list of contacts in your address book, - delete a contact or a group in your address book, - search for a contact or a group of contacts in the address book using the first letters of the name, - check the datasheet of a contact or a group in order to modify it. Modify the information related to a contact 1 Select the contact whose data you want to modify, using the mouse. 2 Click on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes in the window ADDRESS BOOK. 4 Click on OK. Modify a group 1 Select the group in the address book list. 2 Cllick on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes. 4 Click on OK. Delete a contact or a group from the address book 1 Select the name of the contact or the name of the group you want to delete, using the mouse. 2 Click on DELETE. Print the address book 1 Click on PRINT. The list of the address book is printed on the terminal (if no contact is selected). Import or export a directory Import a directory Importing a directory makes it possible to exchange address book entries between two devices without having to enter contacts one by one manually. Directories can be imported from files in EAB format. EAB files are automatically generated during export. 1 Select IMPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Select the file to import, click on OPEN. Save your address book This operation lets you save your address book to a file in EAB format. 1 Select EXPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Enter the name of the file and select the destination directory, then click on SAVE. Fax communications The fax communication enables you to: - send documents as faxes from one of the scanners of your terminal, from the hard disk or from the screen of your PC, - to receive fax documents, - to monitor communications through various services: the inbox, the outbox, the sent items, the outbox log and the inbox log. Parameters are available to modify the way your terminal works with regard to fax communications. You can modify these parameters to adapt the fax communications to your requirements. For this procedure, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Presentation of the Fax window When a contact is deleted from the directory, it is automatically deleted from any group in which it may be included. Item Action 1 Create a new fax to send. 2 Delete a fax using one of the fax manager directories. Except for directories SENT LOG and RECEPTION LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log 3 Print a fax from one of the Fax manager directories. 4 Display a fax with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 123456789 - 55 - 11 - PC Features Send a fax Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 1 Click the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click NEW then click FAX. 3 Select no zone SOURCES, SCANNER if your document is in paper format or MEMORY if the document is a computer file located on your hard disk (this file must be in TIFF or FAX format). 4 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click on or select a contact (or group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click on the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 6 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 7 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Send a fax from application This method is used to directly send a document you have created using a desktop software without printing it beforehand. 1 From your desktop software, select FILE > PRINT. 2 Select the printer COMPANION SUITE FAX and click OK. The fax oubox window is displayed. 6 Stop sending a fax (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Display all faxes in the selected directory in the Fax manager. 8 Fax preview. 9 Fax manager directories. Item Action - 56 - 11 - PC Features 3 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click the button or select a contact (or a group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button Erase to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 4 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 5 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 6 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. 7 Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Receive a fax The window MF Manager and MF Director show, using different messages, the reception of a fax. The icon is displayed at the bottom of the window MF Manager and the icon appears in the task bar. You can automatically print faxes on reception. To do this, you have to define this parameter, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Follow-up of fax communications Follow-up of fax communications is by means of: - an outbox, - an inbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log, - an inbox log. These services enable you to always know exactly what communications are taking place on the terminal, whether sending or receiving. The outbox and inbox logs are automatically printed when their contents fill an A4 page. After automatic printout, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox In the fax outbox, there are the following: - the requests being sent, - the send later requests, - the requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - the rejected requests (calls not put through). The requests are classed in the order in which they are executed. The rejected requests are filed at the end of the list so that they are more accessible if you want to work with them (request a new send) or delete them. The send memory (items sent) The sent memory is used to keep all faxes you have sent. The information in the send memory is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was created, - the date the fax was sent, - the size of the fax. The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep a history of all fax communications (successful or rejected) that your Terminal processes. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the log is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was sent, - the status (sent, rejected ...). The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). - 57 - 11 - PC Features The inbox log The inbox log is used to keep a history of all faxes received by your Terminal. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the inbox log is: - the sender of the fax, - the date and reception of the fax, - the status. Fax parameters Access to fax parameters 1 Click on the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTION > FAX. 3 Make the adjustments require, referring to the description of parameters below and click OK. Description of the tab LOG AND REPORT Description of the tab FAX PARAMETERS The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). Field Description Automatic printing of a received document The fax is automatically printed when received. Printing of a inbox report A report is printed out for each fax received. Printing of inbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Automatic printing of a sent document The fax is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of an outbox report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Field Description Transmission speed Fax default transmission speed. Line number Number of the line where your terminal is connected. Dialling prefix This dialing prefix shall be automatically inserted in front of the number before sending on this line. Type of dialing Must be parametered according to the type of switchboard your terminal is connected to. Header Displays a Communication Identification Line (LIC) on the documents you send or on the documents you receive. ECM Corrects communication errors due to line disturbance. This option ensures that received documents are integral. On the other hand, communication times may be longer if the line is bad. Number of attempts Number of attempts the Terminal must make if send fails. Interval between attempts Duraton between two send attempts. - 58 - 11 - PC Features Cover sheet The cover sheet is part of a fax document automatically generated by your terminal, on which there is information concerning the sender, the recipient, the date, the time sent, comments, etc... This page may be sent alone or in front of a fax document, but always at the same time as the document. A document may be sent with a cover sheet from the multifunction terminal or from the central processing unit. In the latter case, some of the information in the cover sheet may be provided by yourself when making the send request. It is necessary to create model cover sheets before sending a document using them. On the other hand, once the cover sheet is created, a model cover sheet may be used for all documents sent. Your terminal offers the possibility of creating and customizing some model cover sheets which you can choose when sending a fax. Creating a cover sheet 1 From the tab COVER PAGE, click on the button NEW. 2 Select the model cover sheet you have created using the menu FILE. A window with the model cover sheet you have created is displayed: 3 Click on the icon to display the available fields. To add a field, proceed as follows: - Select the field you want to insert by clicking the field palette. A stamp replaces the cursor of your mouse. - Click the location where you want to put the field on the model. - You can move or enlarge the field as you like. 4 As soon as fields are inserted, save the cover sheet. This cover sheet can be selected in the tab COVER PAGE of the fax send window. It is necessary to create a model cover sheet before sending a fax with it. Adjust the size of your field so that the text is readable. - 59 - 11 - PC Features Description of the tab COVER PAGE Creating a cover page template Creating a cover page creates a template which fields (fax number, comment, subject and so on) will be automatically filled by the Fax Application depending on the information provided for each recipient of a document. To create this cover page template, there are two major steps: • First step : Create a background image with the logos and the layout that you wish. • Second step : Add the field that you want to be displayed in the cover page: fax number, comment, subject and so on. As mentioned before, these fields will be filled by Fax application at emission time. For the first step, there are two methods to create the background image. You can either • Option (A): Draw this background image in your preferred application (such as Word, Excel,...), OR • Option (B): Scan a sheet of paper containing the layout of the cover page. Details about Option A and B: • Option (A): Open the application that you want to use to edit the background (Word, Wordpad...). Draw the background image then print this document in the printer named "Companion Suite Fax". At that point the MFSendFax dialog is displayed: Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax Field Description Name of the cover sheet Either the name of the page selected by default or the page you have selected to use. Sender You can enter information concerning the sender. Destination: Name, Company, Department You can enter information concerning the recipient. If the word Auto is entered in one of the fields, the field is updated during sending if the recipient is listed in the directory, favorites, a group or a distribution list. Comments This is an editing window with all the basic functions of a text editor so that you can enter a text which will be sent in the cover sheet. Preview of the model The preview enables you to see the cover sheet you are going to send. - 60 - 11 - PC Features • Option (B): Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, select the scanner source as shown below : Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax. Whether you choose Option A or B, you end up with a background image with extension .fax, which is located in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary. You can now proceed to the second step right below. For the second step: Now that the background image is created in directory in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary, you can add the fields on top of the background image. Please follow the procedure below: (a)Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, click on the tab COVER PAGE, and check the check box named WITH THE COVER PAGE. (b)Click on the button NEW, this displays a new window with the title CREATION OF THE COVER PAGE. (c)Press the button OPEN in the toolbar, change the file filter to *.fax and browse to the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary that contains the background image that you have created in the First step. (d)Click on the button FIELDS in the toolbar, a window pops up allowing you to add the fields on top of the background image. (e)Click on the button SAVE to save the Cover Page template and exit this window. (f)The window NEW FAX is displayed, you can now choose the Cover Page template that you want to use. When you double click the preview image in the lower right corner, another window pops up giving you a preview of the cover page with the fields filled with the recipient's information. SMS Communication Sending SMSs is via the modem of your Multifunction Laser. For more details, refer to the User Manual of your Multifunction Laser. Your PC Kit can be used to easily send faxes to a single recipient or to multiple recipients using the distribution groups. Communications being sent are monitored by means of the outbox, the outbox log and the outbox memory (items sent). Presentation of the SMS window 􀃎 The SMS service is available depending on the countries and the operators. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 61 - 11 - PC Features Send an SMS 1 Click on the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click on NEW then on SMS. 3 Enter your message in the field CONTENT OF MESSAGE provided for this purpose. You can use the buttons and the "smiley" located to the left of the input field to customize your message, or to automatically insert the date and time. 4 To send your SMS to a contact, enter his / her number in the field TELEPHONE NUMBER of the part CONTACTS and click on or select a recipient (or group) from one of the directories in the field CONTACT LIST and click on . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button REMOVE to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced parameters (to send later or give priority to the SMS) by pressing the button ADVANCED PARAMETERS. 6 Click on OK to send your SMS to all contacts in the field LIST OF RECIPIENTS. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Follow-up of SMS SMS communications are monitored by means of: - an outbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log. These services make it possible to have complete information on the terminal activity with regard to communications. The outbox log is automatically printed when its contents fill an A4 page. After this automatic printing, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox The following is grouped in the SMS outbox: - requests being sent, - send later requests, - requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - requests which have been rejected. Item Action 1 Write an SMS. 2 Delete an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. Except for the directory SEND LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log. 3 Print an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. 4 Display an SMS with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 6 Stop SMS sending (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Displays all SMSs in the directory selected in the Fax manager. 8 SMS preview. 9 SMS manager directories. - 62 - 11 - PC Features The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep the entire history of SMS communications (successful or rejected) that have been processed by your terminal. The log is automatically printed as soon as an A4 page is complete. The information in the sent box is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the status (sent, rejected, etc...). The sent item memory (items sent) The sent item memory is used to keep a copy of all SMS messages you have sent. The information in the sent item memory is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of creation of the SMS, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the size of the SMS. SMS Parameters Access to SMS parameters 1 Click the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTIONS > SMS. 3 Make any adjustments required in relation to the description of the parameters above and validate with OK. Description of the tab LOGS AND REPORTS The button DELETE deletes the entire log and not simply the message(s) selected. Field Description Automatic printing of a sent document The SMS is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of a send report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent. Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. - 63 - 12 - Maintenance Maintenance Service General information To ensure that your machine is kept in the best conditions, it is recommended that you periodically clean the inner parts. Please respect the following rules while using this machine: - Do not leave the scanner cover open. - Do not try to lubricate the device. - Do not close the scanner cover violently or do not apply vibrations to the machine. - Do not open the cartridge access cover while printing. - Do not try to disassemble the machine - Do not use paper which would has stayed in the tray for too long. Toner cartridge replacement Your machine comes with a current consumable management system. It tells you if your toner cartridge is close to its end of cycle. The following message will appear on your machine screen. To quit this screen, press OK. To replace the toner cartridge, proceed as shown below. When the following message is displayed on the screen: 1 Press OK. 2 Stand in front of the device. 3 Push on the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you. 4 Raise and remove the toner cartridge from the machine. 5 Unpack the new cartridge and insert it into the slot as indicated in the diagram below. 6 Close the cover. The following message appears: 7 Press OK. 8 When this message appears, insert the smart card provided with the new toner cartridge as shown on the picture below. 9 A wait message appears. The smart card is read. Remove the smart card from the reader, your machine is ready to print again. Issues with smart cards If you use a smart card that has already been used, the machine will display: then, If you use a defective smart card, the machine will display: For your safety, it is imperative to refer to the security directives presented in chapter Security, page 1. TONER NEAR END After this message has been displayed, you are able to change the cartridge. TONER EMPTY REPLACE OPEN FRONT COVER REPLACE TONER HAVE YOU CHANGED THE TONER? INSERT THE TONER CARD PLEASE WAIT NEW TONER REMOVE CARD PLEASE WAIT REMOVE CARD ALREADY USED PLEASE WAIT - 64 - 12 - Maintenance then, If the C button is pressed while the smart card is being read, the machine displays: Cleaning Scanner reading system cleaning When one or more vertical lines appear on the copies, clean the glass of the scanner. 1 Open the scanner cover until it is standing in vertical position. 2 Wipe the glass with a soft lint-free cloth soaked with mild alcohol. 3 Close the scanner cover. 4 Make a copy to check that the symptoms have disappeared. Printer cleaning Dust, dirtiness and paper debris on the external and internal surfaces of the printer can affect its operation. We advise that it is cleaned regularly. Printer external cleaning Clean the external part of the printer with a soft cloth soaked in mild detergent. Printer issues Error messages When the printer encounters any of the problems described below, the corresponding message is shown on the machine display. Paper jam When printing, a sheet of paper may get stuck in the printer or the paper tray and cause a paper jam. In case of a paper jam in the machine, the following message appears: 1 Open the paper jam cover located at the back of the machine. 2 Remove the jammed sheet of paper and close the cover. 3 Open and close the consumable cover. The printer starts again automatically. UNKNOWN CARD REMOVE CARD ACTION CANCELLED REMOVE CARD Message Action CHECK TONER Check the presence of a toner cartridge in the machine. TONER NEAR END Indicates that your consumable will need changing soon. REPLACE PAPER Add paper in tray. HEATING Message displayed when starting the machine. CLOSE COVER PRINTER The printer front cover is open, close it. TONER EMPTY REPLACE Replace the toner cartridge. PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Take out the toner cartridge and remove the jammed paper sheet. Take out the paper tray and remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Open the paper jam cover. Remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER EMPTY Add paper in the paper tray. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY The fusion unit can reach a very high temperature during the operation. To prevent any harm, do not touch this area. Message Action - 65 - 12 - Maintenance In case of paper jam, the following message appears: 1 Remove the toner cartridge and check if a sheet is jammed. 2 Remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 3 Put the toner cartridge in the machine, or remove the paper tray and remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 4 Check that the paper sheets in the paper tray are correctly placed. 5 Replace the paper tray in the machine. Scanner issues When a paper jam occurs, the following message appears: 1 Open the scanner cover. 2 Remove the jammed paper without tearing it. The following message appears: 3 Close the scanner cover. Miscellaneous issues When turning on the terminal, nothing is displayed on the screen. Check the connection between the power cord and the outlet. The terminal does not detect the presence of the document inserted in the scanner document feeder. The message READY does not appear on the screen. At the start and during scanning, REMOVE DOCUMENT appears on the screen. 1 Remove the document or press key . 2 Check the thickness of the document (50 sheets of paper of 80 g/m2). 3 Iron out the sheets if needed. 4 Help the sheets along. The terminal does not receive any faxes. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check that there is a tone signal on the telephone line by means of the key . You receive a blank page. 1 Make a photocopy of a document; if it is correct then your fax is functioning normally. 2 Call back the subscriber and have him resend the document. It was probably sent with the sheet inserted backwards. You cannot send a fax. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check the tone by pressing the key . 3 Check the prefix is correctly programmed and used. Communication errors If the communication fails, the terminal advises you of an automatic retry later. Example of what is displayed: PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER REMOVE DOCUMENT CONFIRM CLOSE COVER SCANNER 1 2 Current time FRI 12 DEC 20:13 Time of next try 0142685014 20:18 - 66 - 12 - Maintenance Transmission from the feeder You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission immediately by pressing , • abandoning transmission by pressing . To eject the document, press again. Transmission from memory You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission using the transmission queue. In this case, for a document composed of several pages, the transmission will take place from the page where the error occured, • abandoning the transmission by deleting the corresponding command in the transmission line. The terminal makes at most 5 automatic redials. The nontransmitted document is automatically deleted from the memory and a transmission report is then printed together with an error code and the cause for transmission failure (see the communication error codes). Communication error codes The communication error codes appear in the logs and transmission reports. General codes Code 01 - Busy or no fax answer This code appears after 6 unsatisfactory attempts. Call later. Code 03 - User break A communication has been stopped by the user pressing the key . Code 04 - Non programmed number A number saved as a one-touch key or abbreviated number is not valid, check it. (Example: a delayed transmission was programmed with a one-touch key and this key has been deleted in the meantime). Code 05 - Scanning default An incident occurred with the scanner, for example, the sheet is jammed. Code 06 - Printer default An incident occurred in the printer: no paper, paper jam, opened cover... In the reception mode, this incident appears only if the reception parameter is switched to WITHOUT PAPER. Code 07 - Disconnected The link has been cut (bad line). Check the number and try again. Code 08 - Quality The document you sent was not well received. Contact your subscriber to see if you need to send again. Code 0A - No document to be polled You tried to poll a document from a subscriber who had not prepared his document (no deposit) or the password entered was incorrect. Code 0B - Wrong number of pages There is a difference between the number of pages indicated during preparation for the transmission and the number of pages sent. Check the number of pages in the document. Code 0C - Received document error Ask the subscriber who called you to check the length of his document (it may be too long to be completely received). Code 0D - Transmission failed Ask the sender to resend the document. Code 13 - Memory full Your fax can no longer receive since its memory is full. There are too many received unprinted documents or too many documents in the transmission line. Print the received documents and delete or transmit immediately the documents in the transmission line. Code 14 - Memory full Received document memory full. Print all received documents. Code 15 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to deposit a document in a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 16 - No Relay Bcst list Nr x You requested a document relay from a remote fax but the fax has not programmed the list of subscribers requested. Code 17 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to recover a document from a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 18 - Relay Bcst impossible You requested a document relay from a remote fax which does not have the relay broadcast function. Code 19 - Subscriber has stopped The communication has been stopped by your subscriber. (Example: a fax wanted to poll your fax but there is no document deposited). Code 1A - Disconnected The transmission has not started. The telephone line is busy. Code 1B - Transmission failed During transmission: start again. During reception: ask your subscriber to resend the document. Code 50 - Server error Check the number configured for the SMS server or a communication error occured during data transmission. - 67 - 12 - Maintenance Specifications Physical specifications Electrical specifications Environmental specifications Peripheral specifications Printer Copier Scanner Printing supports PC connection Dimensions: 412 x 447 x 386 mm Weight: 13 kg Power supply: Single phase 220-240 V - 50/60 Hz - 4.5 A Electric consumption: 12 W typical in powersave 16 W typical in standby 340 W average during printing Operating temperature: In operation: + 10 °C to 32 °C Acceptable humidity level: In operation: 15 % to 80 % HR (without condensation) Type: Laser (on normal paper) Resolution: 600 dpi Speed: 16 ppm maximuma a. Printing speed may vary depending on used operating systems, computer specifications, software applications, connection modes (LAN, USB or WLAN), paper formats as well as file types and sizes. Preheating time: 21 sec. First page out time: 13 sec. Type: Autonomous Black and White Copy speed: 16 ppm maximum Resolution: 600 dpi Multiple copies: 99 pages maximum Zoom range: 25 % to 400 % Type: Color scanner Color depth: 36 bits Resolution: 600 dpi (optical) 2400 dpi (interpolated) Software compatibility: TWAIN Maximum paper format: Letter Main paper tray capacity: 250 sheets maximum (60 g/m²), 200 sheets maximum (80 g/m²) Output tray capacity: 50 sheets Main tray paper format: A4, A5, Legal, Letter 60 to 105 g/m² paper Paper format for manual printing: A4, A5, Legal, Letter, B5, exec, A6 52 to 160 g/m² paper Slave USB 2.0 port (PC connection) Master USB 2.0 port (Wlan connection, reader, USB memory key reader) Operating System: Windows 98 SE, 2000, ME, XP, Vista 32-bit - 68 - 12 - Maintenance Consumable specifications Reference paper Specifications are subject to changes for improvement without notice. Guide de l‘utilisateur . bizhub 164 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star® ................................................................................................................................... 1-3 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®........................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights.................................................................................................. 1-4 Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Remarque........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL........................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conseils de sécurité ....................................................................................................................... 1-6 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution ..................................................................................... 1-6 Signification des symboles ................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires........................................................................................................ 1-10 Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) . 1-10 À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B.................... 1-10 Sécurité laser ................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Rayonnement laser interne .............................................................................................................. 1-10 Pour les utilisateurs européens........................................................................................................ 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs danois .............................................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois............................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens ....................................................................................................... 1-11 Étiquette de sécurité laser ............................................................................................................... 1-12 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................. 1-12 Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) ............................................................... 1-12 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution .............................................................................. 1-14 1.6 Espace requis................................................................................................................................ 1-15 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................................................................... 1-16 Alimentation ..................................................................................................................................... 1-16 Environnement ................................................................................................................................. 1-16 Stockage de copies ......................................................................................................................... 1-16 Précautions à prendre pour le transport .......................................................................................... 1-16 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie .......................................................................................................... 1-17 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ....................................................................................... 1-18 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel................................................................................................... 1-18 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................. 1-18 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................. 1-18 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................. 1-19 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ................................................................................... 1-19 Format papier................................................................................................................................... 1-19 Indication papier .............................................................................................................................. 1-19 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Unité principale ............................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale............................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale.............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Table des matières-2 bizhub 164 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine..................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Opérations de base......................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Charger du papier .............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1................................................................................................ 3-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle....................................................... 3-5 Configurer un format personnalisé .................................................................................................... 3-6 3.2.2 Placer les originaux............................................................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie ..................................................................................................... 3-7 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions ............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran....................................................................................................... 4-4 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Paramètres de base........................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) ................................................................................. 5-7 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ]...................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES]........................................................................................................................ 5-8 [2en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-8 [4en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.3.3 [TRI].................................................................................................................................................. 5-10 [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] ................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] ................................................................................................................................ 5-11 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE]......................................................................................... 5-13 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE]............................................................................................................... 5-15 Enregistrer les réglages Copie ......................................................................................................... 5-15 Rappeler un programme de copie ................................................................................................... 5-15 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions .......................................................................................... 5-16 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation............................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Environnement ................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Installation Plug and Play............................................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 ........................................................................... 6-4 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation ................................................................................... 6-7 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7...................................................................................................... 6-7 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote ....................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante..................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner ............................................................................................................. 6-9 bizhub 164 Table des matières-3 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression ................................................................................................................... 7-3 Annuler une tâche d'impression ........................................................................................................ 7-3 Mode Veille ........................................................................................................................................ 7-3 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante............................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.1 Paramètres communs........................................................................................................................ 7-4 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] ........................................................................................................................ 7-6 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] ............................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] .................................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] ............................................................................................................................... 7-9 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN..................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN................................................................................................ 8-4 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA.......................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA .................................................................................................... 8-5 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] ................................................................... 8-6 9 [MENU] 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE]......................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE]........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] .................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] ........................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ......................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE]................................................................................................................................ 9-9 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES]............................................................................................................................. 9-10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier ............................................................................................................................... 10-3 Message de rechargement .............................................................................................................. 10-3 Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier .................................................................................. 10-3 Stockage du papier.......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Charger du papier ............................................................................................................................ 10-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1.............................................................................................. 10-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle..................................................... 10-5 10.2 Toner .............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner ................................................................................................................................. 10-6 Message de Remplacement ............................................................................................................ 10-6 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner......................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage............................................................................................................... 10-9 Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel ..................................................................................................... 10-9 Parois externes, Presse-original ...................................................................................................... 10-9 Table des matières-4 bizhub 164 11 Dépannage 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) ......................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Tableau de dépannage ................................................................................................................. 11-4 Dépannage élémentaire ................................................................................................................... 11-4 Principaux messages et leurs solutions........................................................................................... 11-7 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier .................................................................................................. 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical ................................. 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier .......................................... 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie................................................ 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) .............. 11-12 12 Caractéristiques 12.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 12-3 Types papier et capacités................................................................................................................ 12-3 12.2 Caractéristiques machine ............................................................................................................ 12-4 bizhub 164 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-4 12.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 12-6 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 .................................................................................. 12-6 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 14-5 1 Introduction bizhub 164 1-3 1.1 Energy Star® 1 1 Introduction Merci d'avoir acheté cette machine. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. Les illustrations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent représenter l'équipement réel avec de légères différences. 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que Partenaire ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. 1 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 bizhub 164 1.2 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA, et "The essentials of imaging" sont des marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub est une marque déposée de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits réservés. Remarque Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. ne pourra être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce guide de l'utilisateur. Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reste le détenteur du copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que de la documentation écrite explicative ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'accord de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants : 1. Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices associés pour reproduire des images sur le ou les périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, uniquement pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions cidessus, vous pouvez installer le logiciel sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies du dit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de son concédant de licence. 8. Les marques commerciales seront utilisées conformément aux pratiques en cours, y compris en ce qui concerne l'identification du nom du propriétaire de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. L'utilisation d'une quelconque marque commerciale ne vous accorde aucun droit de propriété sur cette dernière. bizhub 164 1-5 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights 1 9. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation tel que décrit ci-dessus. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGE-INTERÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 bizhub 164 1.3 1.3 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire la section suivante avant de brancher la machine au secteur. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez-vous observer impérativement toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce guide. Référence - Certaines parties du contenu de ce chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans les guides pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. Signification des symboles AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de cet avertissement peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ATTENTION Négliger cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole vous avertit des risques de brûlures. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle plein indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. Démontage et modification AVERTISSEMENT • N'essayez jamais d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'effectuez aucune modification sur ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Cordon d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni avec le produit, n'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation et la fiche préconisés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un incendie ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil, et jamais avec un autre appareil, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-7 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Veillez à ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, à ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon endommagé (conducteur partiellement à nu, conducteur cassé, etc.) peut entraîner un incendie ou une panne. En présence de l'un de ces symptômes, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. Alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez exclusivement la tension d'alimentation spécifiée, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. • Branchez directement la fiche dans la prise murale de même configuration que la fiche. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur entraîne le branchement de la machine à une source d'alimentation inadéquate (tension, capacité électrique, mise à la terre) et risque de provoquer un incendie ou causer une électrocution. En l'absence d'une prise murale appropriée, le client doit en demander l'installation par un électricien qualifié. • En règle générale, ne pas utiliser d'adaptateur multi-prises ni de rallonge. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. • Consultez votre technicien de maintenance agréé avant de brancher un autre équipement sur la même prise murale. Une surcharge pourrait entraîner un incendie. ATTENTION • La prise électrique doit se trouver à proximité de l'équipement Sinon, vous ne pourrez pas débrancher la fiche d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. Fiche d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le câble avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. • Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. ATTENTION • Ne pas tirer sur le cordon d'alimentation pour le débrancher. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. Cordon d'alimentation 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-8 bizhub 164 1.3 Mise à la terre AVERTISSEMENT • Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Installation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne posez jamais de vase ou autre récipient contenant de l'eau, d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. De l'eau ou des objets métalliques qui tomberaient à l'intérieur de la machine sont susceptibles de causer une électrocution, un incendie, ou une panne. Si un objet métallique, de l'eau, ou un corps étranger similaire tombe à l'intérieur de la machine, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. ATTENTION • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • N'installez pas ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Cela pourrait engendre un incendie, une électrocution ou une panne. • Ne placez pas ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Ne laissez pas le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur de la machine et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. Ventilation ATTENTION • L'utilisation prolongée de ce produit dans un local mal ventilé ou pour la production d'un grand nombre de copies ou d'impression risque degénérer une odeur d'air de ventilation de la machine. Ventilez correctement la pièce. En cas de problèmes AVERTISSEMENT • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il devient exceptionnellement chaud, s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-9 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION • Certaines zones à l'intérieur de l'appareil sont soumises à des températures élevées susceptibles de causer des brûlures. Si vous devez accéder à l'intérieur de la machine pour dégager un serrage papier par exemple, ne toucher pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement "Caution HOT". Consommables AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne stockez pas les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Déplacement de la machine ATTENTION • Lorsque vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cette machine, tenez-la toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Guide de l'utilisateur ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. Avant plusieurs congés successifs ATTENTION • Débranchez la machine si vous ne devez pas l'utiliser pendant une période prolongée. En cas de problèmes 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 bizhub 164 1.4 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) Ce produit satisfait aux directives UE suivantes : Directives 2006/95/CEE, 2004/108/CEE et 2009/125/CEE. Cette déclaration est valable pour les pays de la Communauté Européenne. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B AVERTISSEMENT Cette machine est un produit de Classe A. Dans un environnement domestique, ce produit peut être la cause de parasites, auquel cas l'utilisateur pourra être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. Sécurité laser Ceci est une machine numérique fonctionnant avec un laser. Le laser ne présente aucun danger à condition que la machine soit utilisée conformément aux instructions fournies dans les guides. Comme les radiations émises par le laser sont totalement confinées dans le boîtier de protection, le faisceau laser ne peut pas s'échapper de la machine lors des phases de fonctionnement. Cet appareil est un produit laser de Classe 1 : en d'autres termes, cela signifie qu'elle n'émet pas de rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Puissance maximum de rayonnement moyen : 5,3 μW au niveau de l'ouverture laser du bloc de la tête d'impression. Longueur d'onde : 770-800 nm Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3B émettant un faisceau laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. Le bloc de tête d'impression N'EST PAS UN ÉLÉMENT RÉPARABLE SUR SITE. Par conséquent, le bloc de tête d'impression ne doit être ouvert en aucune circonstance. Ouverture Laser du bloc de tête d'impression Tête d'impression bizhub 164 1-11 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les utilisateurs européens Ceci est un laser semi-conducteur. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 7mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs danois Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 7mW og bølgelængden er 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 7mW ja aallonpituus on 770-800 nm. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 7mW och våglängden är 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 7mW og bølgelengde er 770-800 nm. ATTENTION L'utilisation de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures d'exploitation autres que celles spécifiées dans ce guide peuvent entraîner une exposition dangereuse aux radiations. ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. VARO! Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej strålen. ADVARSEL Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-12 bizhub 164 1.4 Étiquette de sécurité laser Une étiquette sécurité laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d'ozone Installez la machine dans un local bien ventilé Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage au cours du fonctionnement normal de cette machine. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, d'hygiène et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Placer l'appareil dans une pièce bien ventilée Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779. bizhub 164 1-13 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce symbole signifie : ne pas jeter avec les déchets domestiques. Veuillez vous reporter aux informations de votre collectivité locale ou contactez nos revendeurs pour savoir comment traiter les appareils électriques et électroniques usagés. Le recyclage de ce produit contribuera à préserver les ressources naturelles et à prévenir les potentiels effets néfastes à l'environnement et à la santé humaine qui découleraient d'un rebut inadapté. Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce produit est conforme à la Directive RoHS (2002/95/EC). Ce produit n'est pas destiné à être utilisé dans le champ de vision direct sur des postes de travail à terminal vidéo. Afin d'éviter les reflets désagréables sur les postes de travail à terminal vidéo, il ne faut pas placer cet appareil dans le champ de vision direct. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden. 1 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 bizhub 164 1.5 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution Les avertissements et étiquettes de précaution sont apposés sur la machine, aux endroits suivants. Redoublez de prudence lorsque vous effectuez des opérations comme le dégagement d'un bourrage papier. REMARQUE Ne pas retirer les étiquettes ou les avis de mise en garde. Si une de ces étiquettes devient sale, veuillez la nettoyer afin qu'elle reste lisible. Si vous ne pas les rendre lisibles, ou si l'étiquette ou l'avis de mise en garde est détérioré, veuillez contacter votre technicien S.A.V. Ne pas altérer ou enlever les capots ou panneaux fixés sur cette machine, sinon cela pourrait vous exposer à un rayonnement laser. Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. Ne pas brûler les cartouches toner. Sous l'effet du feu les projections de toner sont dangereuses. AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION ATTENTION bizhub 164 1-15 1.6 Espace requis 1 1.6 Espace requis Pour permettre et faciliter le fonctionnement, le rechargement en consommables, le remplacement de composants et l'entretien périodique de la machine, respectez les dimensions de dégagement ci-dessous. REMARQUE Veillez à ménager un dégagement de 200 mm (8 pouces) ou plus à l'arrière de cette machine. 570 (22-7/16) bizhub 164 Unité : mm (pouce) 530 (20-7/8) 449 (17-11/16) bizhub 164 + MB-503 Unité : mm (pouce) 928 (36-9/16) 449 (17-11/16) 783 (30-13/16) 607 (23-7/8) 570 (22-7/16) 856 (33-11/16) 927 (36-1/2) 1 Précautions d'utilisation 1-16 bizhub 164 1.7 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, observez les précautions ci-dessous. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Utiliser une source de tension la plus basse possible ou avec un minimum de variations de fréquence. – Variation de tension : Maximum ±10% (à 110 V/120 à 127 V/220 à 240 V AC) – Variation de fréquence : Maximum ±3 Hz (à 50 Hz/60Hz) Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C (50°F) à 30°C (86°F) avec une variation de 10°C (50°F) maximum en une heure - Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une variation de 10% au maximum par heure Stockage de copies Pour conserver les copies, suivre les recommandations ci-dessous. - Si les copies doivent être conservées pendant une longue période, les stocker dans un endroit protégé de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. - Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. Précautions à prendre pour le transport Désigner 2 personnes ou plus pour déplacer la machine en la tenant par les endroits indiqués. bizhub 164 1-17 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie 1 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie Certains types d'originaux ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies de tels originaux pour les originaux. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère, ou de copier des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature d'un original, consultez un conseiller juridique. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-18 bizhub 164 1.9 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque susceptible d'endommager la machine ou les originaux. Suivez les instructions pour éviter les dommages matériels. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Ce numéro au format "1" représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du Control Panel pour accéder à un élément de menu souhaité. L'Écran correspondant apparaît. dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Les procédures d'opération sont décrites par des illustrations. bizhub 164 1-19 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 Symboles clés [ ] Les noms des touches sur l'Afficheur ou sur l'écran de l'ordinateur sont placés entre des parenthèses du format suivant. Texte en gras Les noms des touches du Control Panel, les noms de pièces, de produits et d'options sont tous imprimés en gras. 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Format papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indication papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-20 bizhub 164 1.9 2 Nomenclature et fonctions bizhub 164 2-3 2.1 Options 2 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale L'original est numérisé par la section scanner, puis l'image numérisée est imprimée par la section imprimante. Désigné dans tout ce manuel par les termes "machine", "unité principale", ou "bizhub 164". 2 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 (Option) Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles. Désigné dans ce guide sous le terme Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 1 2 2 Unité principale 2-4 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2 Unité principale 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Couvre-original 2 Presse-original 3 Control Panel 4 Capot côté 1 5 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle (Option) 7 Magasin 1 8 Porte frontale 9 Bac de sortie 10 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 11 Cordon d'alimentation 12 Port USB (Type A) USB2.0/1.1 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 12 11 10 bizhub 164 2-5 2.2 Unité principale 2 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Vitre d'exposition 2 Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation 3 Unité de fixation 4 Tambour 5 Rouleau prise papier 6 Cartouche toner 7 Réglette Original 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 2 Unité principale 2-6 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2.3 Control Panel N° Nom 1 Écran 2 Quick Settings 3 + , , , * , ) 4 Menu/Select 5 Back/Stop/Reset 6 Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 Découvrir cette machine bizhub 164 3-3 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 3 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 0 Les réglages par défaut sont les paramètres qui sont immédiatement actifs juste après la mise sur Marche de l'Interrupteur et avant que toute sélection soit effectuée sur le Control Panel, ainsi que ceux qui sont immédiatement actifs après que la touche Back/Stop/Reset a été actionnée en vue d'annuler toutes les sélections effectuées sur le Control Panel. Il est possible de modifier les sélections par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps spécifié, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'a lieu pendant le délai spécifié, la machine passe automatiquement en mode d'économie d'énergie. Ceci caractérise ce que l'on désigne par mode Veille. Quand la machine est en mode Veille, le voyant de la touche Start reste allumé en vert, mais l'Écran s'éteint. La machine quitte le mode Veille lorsqu'une quelconque touche du Control Panel est actionnée. 0 [Préchauffage] apparaît à l'Écran lorsque l'Interrupteur est mis en position Marche ou que la machine quitte le mode Veille. Charger un original et presser la touche Start lorsque la touche Start est allumée en vert permet de mettre en réserve une tâche de copie. Une fois que la machine a fini de chauffer, l'original est numérisé. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsqu'une tâche ou des données stockées sont en attente d'impression. Les tâches qui restent à imprimer seraient supprimées. 0 Les réglages qui n'ont pas été enregistrés et les tâches qui se trouvent dans la file d'impression sont effacés dès que l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Arrêt. 0 Avant de remettre l'Interrupteur sur Marche lorsqu'il vient d'être mis sur Arrêt, il faut attendre au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsque des images sont en cours de numérisation, d'envoi ou de réception. Les données en cours de numérisation, d'émission ou de réception seraient supprimées. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt pendant le processus de copie ou d'impression. Cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 1 Pour mettre la machine sous tension, n appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Marche. Vérifier que l'Écran s'allume. 2 Pour mettre la machine hors tension, o appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Arrêt. dPour info Pour changer les réglages par défaut du mode Copie : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Pour changer le délai avant de passer au mode Veille : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [MODE VEILLE]. Pour changer le délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [INIT. P de CONTROL]. 3 Opérations de base 3-4 bizhub 164 3.2 3.2 Opérations de base 3.2.1 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide document jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Spécifiez le format et le type papier pour Magasin 1. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MAG. PAPIER 1]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. bizhub 164 3-5 3.2 Opérations de base 3 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Ouvrez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle et faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager plus d'espace entre elles. % Pour charger du papier de grand format, tirez l'Extension plateau. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. L'écran Réglage papier intro manuel apparaît. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Permet de spécifier le type et le format du papier pour le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. % Pour spécifier le papier en utilisant la fonction Menu, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [PAPIER INTRO MANU]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. 3 Opérations de base 3-6 bizhub 164 3.2 Configurer un format personnalisé 1 Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Magasin 1, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORMAT PAPIER MAG 1] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORM.PAP. INTRO MANU] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. 2 Spécifiez la longueur [X] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. 3 Spécifiez la largeur [Y] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. Le format papier spécifié apparaît à l'Écran. 3.2.2 Placer les originaux 0 Ne placez pas un original d'un poids supérieur à 2kg (4-7/16 lb) sur la Vitre d'exposition. De plus, n'appuyez que modérément pour maintenir un livre ou tout autre original ouvert sur la Vitre d'exposition Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 0 Pour numériser des livres épais ou des objets volumineux, procédez à la numérisation sans refermer le Couvre-original. Lorsqu'un original est numérisé avec le Couvre-original ouvert, veillez à ne pas regarder directement la surface de la Vitre d'exposition d'où provient une lumière de forte intensité. La lumière émise à travers la Vitre d'exposition n'est pas un rayon laser, cela n'expose donc pas l'utilisateur aux risques associés. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Relevez le Couvre-original. pour l'ouvrir. 2 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Chargez l'original de manière à ce que le bord haut soit en face de l'arrière ou du côté gauche de la machine. X Y bizhub 164 3-7 3.2 Opérations de base 3 3 Alignez l'original sur le repère situé dans le coin arrière gauche de la Réglette Original. % S'il s'agit de documents transparents ou translucides, placez une feuille blanche de même format par-dessus le document. % Pour la Copie carte d'identité, éloignez l'original de 4mm (3/16 pouces) de Réglette Original. % Pour des originaux en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert, orientez le haut de l'original vers l'arrière de la machine et alignez l'axe médian de l'original avec le repère de la Réglette Original. 4 Refermez le Couvre-original. 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie 1 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. 2 Sur le Control Panel, sélectionnez les réglages Copie voulus. % Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Copie, voir page 5-5. % Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être facilement rappelés. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes, voir page 5-15. 3 Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour augmenter ou diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois. % Pour effacer le nombre de copies spécifié, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset ö [QUANTITÉ]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start. L'original est numérisé et copié. % Pour interrompre l'opération Copie en cours d'exécution, appuyez sur la Back/Stop/Reset touche. % Si l'écran suivant apparaît, placez le nouvel original sur la Vitre d'exposition, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select pour le numériser. Pour lancer l'impression, appuyez sur la touche Start. 3 Opérations de base 3-8 bizhub 164 3.2 4 Touches du Control Panel bizhub 164 4-3 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions 4 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions N° Nom Description 1 Écran Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. 2 Quick Settings Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'écran du mode Copie. 3 +, ,, *, ) Appuyez sur la touche correspondante pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'Écran ou changer son réglage. 4 Menu/Select Appuyez sur cette touche pour valider l'écran du menu. Appuyez également pour appliquer l'élément de menu ou le réglage précédemment sélectionné. 5 Back/Stop/Reset Pendant les opérations Copie/Impression : Suspend l'opération en cours. Écran de Menu : Appuyez pour revenir à l'écran précédent. Écran mode Copie : Appuyez pour effacer les réglages. 6 Start Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer l'opération Copie. 7 Voyant LED S'allume en continu pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Veille ou est disponible pour recevoir une tâche. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-4 bizhub 164 4.2 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran <Écran de base> <Écran de menu> N° Indication à l'écran Description 1 Nombre de copies Indique le nombre de copies qui a été spécifié. 2 Magasin papier Indique le magasin papier qui est sélectionné. 3 Format papier Indique le format papier sélectionné. 4 Type Papier Indique le type de papier sélectionné. Indique que du papier ordinaire est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier ordinaire est sélectionnée. Indique que du papier carte est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier carte est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier recyclé est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier recyclé est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier dédié est sélectionné. bizhub 164 4-5 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4 5 Taux Zoom Indique que le taux zoom fixe/manuel a été sélectionné. 6 Qualité Indique le réglage Qualité sélectionné. 7 Densité Indique le niveau de densité pour le réglage Densité sélectionné. 8 Icône/Message Affiche l'icône qui représente un état spécifique de la machine ou une fonction activée. Affiche également un message qui indique l'état de la machine. [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] est actif. [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] est actif. [TRI] est actif. [EFFACEMENT] est actif. [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est actif. Plus de papier. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 10-4. Toner presque épuisé. Pour la procédure de remplacement des cartouches toner, voir page 10-6. Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Une opération de maintenance est requise et le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Les données d'impression sont en attente dans une file avant impression. N° Indication à l'écran Description 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-6 bizhub 164 4.2 9 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour spécifier le nombre de copies à réaliser. Appuyez sur la touche + , , , * , ou ) pour spécifier le nombre de copies. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour spécifier le nombre de copies. 10 Menu ou fonction Affiche le menu, la fonction ou le réglage. 11 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour sélectionner et spécifier les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour sélectionner un menu et changer les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Indication à l'écran Description 5 Fonction Copie bizhub 164 5-3 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles Voici les fonctions Copie qui peuvent être utilisées sur cette machine. Paramètres Copie taille réelle Copie agrandie/réduite [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] [2en1] (Portrait) [2en1] (Paysage) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 1]) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 2]) 5 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5-4 bizhub 164 5.1 [TRI] [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT SUP.] [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFFAC. CENTRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [CENTRE + EFF. DES BORDS] Paramètres bizhub 164 5-5 5.2 Paramètres de base 5 5.2 Paramètres de base Permet de configurer les réglages élémentaires nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. 0 La touche + ou , permet d'augmenter ou de diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois indépendamment de l'élément de menu sélectionné. 0 Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. 0 Si les conditions suivantes sont remplies, l'autre magasin papier remplace automatiquement le magasin sélectionné qui viendrait à manquer de papier au cours de l'impression des copies. - Installez Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Chargez du papier de même type et format dans le Magasin 1 et Plateau d'introduction manuelle, en veillant à respecter l'orientation du papier. 1 L'élément de menu change en appuyant sur la touche Quick Settings comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Nom Description 1 Nombre de copies Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour changer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois et sur la touche * ou ) pour changer le nombre de copies de dix unités à la fois. 2 Magasin papier Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. 3 Format papier Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. A3w, A4w, A4 v, A5w, A5v, B4w, B5w, B5 v, FLSw, 8Kw, 16Kw, 16Kv, 11 e 17w, LGLw, LTRw, LTRv, INVw, INVv, MEM1w, MEM2w MEM1 et MEM2 sont des formats personnalisés. 5 Paramètres de base 5-6 bizhub 164 5.2 dPour info Pour configurer des formats personnalisés : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 4 Taux Zoom Définissez le taux zoom de l'image à copier. Zoom fixe Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom prédéfini pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. : 50%, 70% (A4%A5, A3%A4), 81% (B4%A4), 100%, 115% (B4%A3), 141% (A5%A4, A4%A3), 200% : 50%, 64% (11 e 17%LTR), 78% (LGR%LTR), 100%, 121% (LGL%11 e 17), 129% (LTR%11 e 17), 200% Zoom manuel Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 200%. Il faut d'abord sélectionner un zoom fixe, cela permet ensuite de régler le zoom manuel. 5 Qualité Permet de sélectionner le réglage du type d'image de l'original de manière à optimiser la qualité et la densité de la copie. [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. 6 Densité Permet de régler la densité de la copie. [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. Manuelle : Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. L'image reproduite est plus claire lorsque la densité est réglée du côté et plus sombre lorsque la densité est réglée du côté . N° Nom Description bizhub 164 5-7 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour chaque image copie finie, voir page 5-3. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. Pour revenir à l'écran de base une fois que les réglages Application ont été définis, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset jusqu'à ce que l'écran de base s'affiche. 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. L'image du recto issue de la première passe de numérisation est temporairement enregistrée, puis l'image du verso est numérisée puis placée à côté de la première image afin de produire une copie des deux images sur une seule page. 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté gauche de la machine. 0 Positionnez l'original à 4mm (3/16 pouces) de la Réglette Original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] ö [ACTIVÉ]. Sous-menu [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. p. 5-7 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. p. 5-8 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. p. 5-10 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies sur lesquelles ont été effacées les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. p. 5-11 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes. p. 5-12 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-8 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. La fonction Originaux mixtes permet d'économiser le nombre de feuilles utilisées pour la copie. [2en1] Permet de copier les images de deux pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A3, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : 11 e 17, Format papier : 8-1/2 e 11, Taux zoom : 50% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 70% (Pouce : 64%). Sélectionnez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [2en1]. bizhub 164 5-9 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [4en1] Permet de copier les images de quatre pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Deux présentations sont disponibles pour l'ordre de combinaison 4en1 de l'original. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : A5, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 100% Format original : 5-1/2 e 8-1/2, Format papier : 11 e 17, Taux zoom : 100% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 50% (Pouce : 50%). Chargez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. 0 Si des originaux sont placés comme illustré ci-dessous, les images ne sont pas copiées dans l'ordre. Format original : A3, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 50% % Appuyez sur al touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [4en1]. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-10 bizhub 164 5.3 dPour info Pour changer l'ordre de copie 4en1 : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [4en1 ORDRE COPIE]. 5.3.3 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] Lorsque des copies triées doivent être réalisées dans les conditions suivantes, chaque jeu de copies est automatiquement trié en sortie selon une disposition croisée. - Installez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Du papier de même type et de même format doit être chargé dans le sens w dans un magasin papier et dans le sens v dans l'autre magasin papier. - Spécifiez [MODE CROISÉ]. 0 Sélectionnez le magasin papier chargé dans le même sens que l'original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. dPour info Pour spécifier le mode Croisé : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ö [MODE CROISÉ] ö [MODE CROISÉ]. bizhub 164 5-11 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies en effaçant l'ombre des perforations et des agrafes, ainsi que les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT HAUT] [EFF. DES BORDS] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Paramètres [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [EFFACEMENT HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [EFF. DES BORDS] Efface les quatre côtés de l'original. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-12 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes, l'image de l'original étant divisée environ au niveau du repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. [RELIURE GAUCHE] [RELIURE DROITE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216mm (8-1/2 pouces). % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [RELIURE GAUCHE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à gauche. La page de gauche de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. [RELIURE DROITE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à droite. La page de droite de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. bizhub 164 5-13 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE] La Séparation Livre permet de produire des copies sur lesquelles l'ombre du pli intérieur de reliure et les zones indésirables autour du texte de l'original ont été effacées. [EFF. DES BORDS] [EFFAC. CENTRE] [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216 mm (8-1/2 pouces). 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. 0 Spécifiez préalablement [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-14 bizhub 164 5.3 % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Pour spécifier la Séparation Livre : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [EFF. DES BORDS] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC. CENTRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles a été effacé le pli interne de la reliure de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page et aussi le pli interne de la reliure. bizhub 164 5-15 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] 5 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. Les réglages Copie suivants peuvent être enregistrés. - Nombre de copies - Magasin papier - Taux zoom - Fonctions disponibles avec [FONCTION COPIE] (Copie car.identité, Originaux mixtes, Tri, Effacement, Séparation livre) - Qualité - Densité Enregistrer les réglages Copie Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. 1 Configurez les réglages Copie à enregistrer. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [ENREGISTREMENT] 3 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme sous lequel vous voulez enregistrer les réglages. Les réglages Copie en cours sont enregistrés. Rappeler un programme de copie Permet de rappeler un programme enregistré. 1 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [RAPPEL]. 2 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme à rappeler. L'Écran indique les réglages Copie enregistrés sous le numéro du programme. 5 Tableau d'association des fonctions 5-16 bizhub 164 5.5 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions Matrice de combinaison des fonctions pour le bizhub 164. Codes de combinaison de fonctions o : Les fonctions peuvent être associées. e : Quand on sélectionne le mode B, le mode A est automatiquement annulé. - : Les fonctions ne peuvent être associées. Le mode B ne peut pas être sélectionné. \ : Cette possibilité de combinaison ne peut exister pendant le fonctionnement de la machine. (1) : [SÉPARATION LIVRE] peut être combiné à [TRI]. Cependant, indépendamment du réglage Tri sélectionné, le résultat final est le même. (2) : Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. (3) : Après avoir sélectionné le réglage Qualité [PHOTO], la densité passe en mode Manuel. (4) : La fonction est disponible seulement si [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est Activé. (5) : Lorsque le mode B est sélectionné, le taux zoom change pour passer à 100%. Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x xx xx x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x - - o(1) o(1) Mode B: Définir en dernier Mode A: Définir en premier Papier Zoom Qualité Densité Nen1 Effacement Tri Tri Effacement Nen1 Densité Qualité Zoom Papier o(1)o(1) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(2) x(3) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier (4) (4) (4) (4) 6 Installer le pilote bizhub 164 6-3 6.1 Précautions d'installation 6 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation La section ci-dessous apporte des informations nécessaires à l'installation du pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.1 Environnement Voici les critères d'environnement d'exploitation pour utiliser le pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur Connectez cette machine à l'ordinateur par un câble USB. Utilisez un câble USB avec une extrémité de type A (4 broches, mâle) et l'autre de type B (4 broches, mâle). Environnement Système d'exploitation 32bit Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur) Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 64bit Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 UC Tout processeur de spécifications égales ou supérieures selon les recommandations applicables à votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire Capacité de mémoire recommandée pour votre système d'exploitation Votre système d'exploitation et les applications à utiliser nécessitent des ressources mémoire suffisantes. Interface USB2.0 (Haute vitesse) Lecteur Lecteur CD-ROM Langue Arabe, Catalan, Tchèque, Danois, Néerlandais, Anglais, Finnois, Français, Allemand, Italien, Coréen, Norvégien, Portugais, Espagnol, Suédois, Chinois (traditionnel), Chinois (simplifié), Thaï, Hongrois, Lituanien, Polonais, Roumain, Russe, Slovaque, Turc 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 bizhub 164 6.2 6.2 Installation Plug and Play Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installée par Plug and Play. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. Si le pilote est installé par Plug and Play, le pilote scanner est installé en premier, et le pilote d'imprimante en dernier. La procédure décrite dans ce manuel concerne l'installation du pilote scanner, puis du pilote d'imprimante. Référence - Le Plug and Play est un moyen facile d'installer le pilote. Cependant, il est possible de recourir à un assistant supplémentaire pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. Pour utiliser cet assistant d'imprimante, sélectionnez le port USB port à raccorder en cliquant sur [Sélectionner un port imprimante]. - Sous Windows 7, utilisez le programme d'installation pour installer le pilote. 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Cliquez sur [Rechercher et installer le pilote (recommandé)]. La boîte de dialogue demandant d'insérer le disque (CD-ROM) apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] ou [Continuer]. 4 Cliquez sur [Je ne possède pas ce disque. Indiquez-moi d'autres options]. 5 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 6 Sélectionnez [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)], puis spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 3 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-5 6.2 Installation Plug and Play 6 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. % Si une boîte de dialogue contenant le message [Windows Update] apparaît, sélectionnez [Non]. 4 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (avancé)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 6 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur la touche [Suivant >], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Test d'obtention du logo Windows] ou [Signature numérique] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Continuer] ou sur [Oui]. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 4 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sélectionnez [Chercher le pilote adapté à mon matériel (recommandé)], et cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Sélectionnez [Spécifier un emplacement], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-6 bizhub 164 6.2 7 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 8 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 9 Cliquez sur [OK], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 10 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 13 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-7 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installé avec le programme d'installation. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Ne connectez pas le câble USB à la machine avant que l'instruction correspondante ne soit apparue. 0 Le cas échéant, quittez toutes les applications en cours. 1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. % Double-cliquez sur [Setup.exe] sur le CD-ROM, puis passez à l'étape 2. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser], [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez la langue voulue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 4 Pour accepter tous les termes de l'accord de licence, sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du Contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez le modèle approprié, puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 L'installation du pilote commence. % Si la fenêtre de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 7 Une fois seulement que l'instruction s'est affichée, connectez la machine à l'ordinateur par le câble USB. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 bizhub 164 6.4 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote La section ci-dessous explique la procédure de désinstallation du pilote. 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante Lorsque vous devez enlever le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du pilote d'imprimante est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes], [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de l'imprimante à désinstaller. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] de l'ordinateur pour désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante. % Sous Windows 7, faites un clic droit sur l'icône, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer matériel]. 4 Suivez ensuite les instructions des pages suivantes. Lorsque le pilote d'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône disparaît de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 5 Ouvrez [Propriétés du serveur] ou [Propriétés du serveur d'impression]. % Sous Windows 7, ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Cliquez sur une icône dans la liste [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] et les [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] apparaissent sur le menu. Cliquez sur [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] dans le menu. % Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, faites un clic droit dans la zone vierge de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], cliquez sur [Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur] - [Propriétés du serveur]. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur le menu [Fichier], puis sur [Propriétés du serveur]. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Pilote]. % Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Changer les paramètres du pilote] situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre pour opérer en disposant des droits d'administration. 7 Dans la liste [Pilotes d'imprimante installés :], sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante à supprimer, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer...]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, passez à l'étape 8. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, passez à l'étape 9. 8 Dans la boîte de confirmation des élément à supprimer, sélectionnez [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.], puis cliquez sur [OK]. 9 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer l'imprimante, cliquez sur [Oui]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, la boîte de dialogue apparaît pour vous permettre de confirmer votre décision. Cliquez sur [Désinstaller]. 10 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. bizhub 164 6-9 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote 6 Référence - Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, même si le pilote d'imprimante est supprimé par la méthode précédente, le fichier d'information sur le modèle sera conservé sur l'ordinateur. Pour cette raison, le pilote d'imprimante risque de ne pas pouvoir être écrasé lors de la réinstallation de la même version. Dans ce cas, enlevez également le fichiers suivants. – Vérifiez le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" (dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\e64" dans le dossier e64 system, et "C:\WINNT\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" de Windows 2000), et s'il y a un dossier (fichier décrit dans "oem*.inf" représenté ci-dessous dans Windows 2000) du modèle correspondant, supprimez-le. – Dans le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\inf" (dossier "C:\WINNT\inf" dans Windows 2000), supprimez "oem*.inf" et "oem*.PNF" ("*" inclus dans le nom de fichier indique un numéro différent en fonction de l'environnement de l'ordinateur). Avant de supprimer ces fichiers, ouvrez le fichier inf et vérifiez le nom de modèle décrit dans les toutes dernières lignes pour confirmer qu'il s'agit bien du modèle voulu. Le numéro du fichier PNF est le même que celui du fichier inf. – Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, cette opération est inutile si vous avez sélectionné [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.]. 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner Lorsque vous devez supprimer le pilote scanner, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du scanner est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Tous les programmes] (ou [Programmes]) - [KONICA MINOLTA :*** Scanner] - [UnInstScan]. ("***" indique un nom de modèle.) % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, lorsque la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer le scanner, cliquez sur [Oui]. 4 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 5 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote scanner est terminée. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-10 bizhub 164 6.4 7 Fonctions Imprimante bizhub 164 7-3 7.1 Opérations Impression 7 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression Les tâches d'impression sont spécifiées depuis le programme d'application. 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, et cliquez sur [Fichier]. Cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimer] dans le menu. 2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante a été sélectionné dans [Nom de l'imprimante] (ou [Sélectionner une imprimante]). % Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez l'étendue d'impression et le nombre de copies à imprimer. 4 Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) pour changer les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon les besoins. % Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) dans la fenêtre [Impression] pour afficher la page d'[Options d'impression] du pilote d'imprimante d'où vous pouvez configurer plusieurs fonctions. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-4. 5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'impression commence. % Si aucune opération Copie n'a lieu pendant 30 secondes lorsque [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] est réglé sur [PRIORITÉ COPIE], l'impression commence automatiquement. Annuler une tâche d'impression Il est possible d'annuler une tâche d'impression depuis le Control Panel si la machine est en mode Imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que [MODE IMPRIMANTE] apparaît sur l'Écran de la machine et appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset. 2 Le message de confirmation [ABANDON TRAVAIL] apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez [OUI]. Mode Veille Si des données d'impression sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Veille, ce mode est annulé. Lorsque les données d'impression ont été reçues, elles sont imprimées dès que le préchauffage de la machine est terminé. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Voici une description des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles permettant d'imprimer depuis un ordinateur. Référence - L'écran de configuration du pilote d'imprimante peut être invoquée depuis la fenêtre [Imprimantes], la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] pour ouvrir le [Panneau de configuration], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes] dans [Matériel et audio]. Sous Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Paramètres] - [Imprimantes]. Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 7.2.1 Paramètres communs Cette section décrit les réglages et les touches communs aux divers onglets. Nom d'élément Fonctions [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour activer les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour désactiver (annuler) les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Appliquer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans refermer la fenêtre Propriétés. [Aide] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher l'Aide relative aux éléments de la fenêtre affichée. [Aperçu] Affiche un aperçu des paramètres papier spécifiés ou affiche l'état de l'imprimante. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Page] affiche la mise en page découlant des réglages en vigueur afin de vérifier l'image du résultat en sortie. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Imprimante] affiche une représentation de l'imprimante. Les magasins sélectionnés dans [Source papier] sur l'onglet [Installation] apparaissent en bleu clair. [Conf. aisée] Cliquez sur cette touche pour enregistrer les réglages actuels afin de pouvoir les rappeler ultérieurement. Si [Réglages d'usine par défaut] est sélectionné, tous les réglages reviendront à leurs valeurs par défaut. Un maximum de 32 programmes peut être enregistré (y compris [Réglages d'usine par défaut]). Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. bizhub 164 7-5 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] Permet de configurer les fonctions élémentaires d'impression comme le format et le type de papier ainsi que la méthode de sortie. Il est possible de sélectionner les même formats et types de papier utilisés avec la machine. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Nom Fonction Description [Orientation] Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. [Format doc. original] Sélectionnez le format papier de l'original. [Personnaliser...] Les formats personnalisés souvent utilisés peuvent être enregistrés pour être rappelés ultérieurement lors de la sélection du format de papier. Un nom peut être assigné au format de papier défini pour l'enregistrer. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 32 formats. Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. [Format papier sortie] Spécifiez le format de papier en sortie. S'il est différent du format de l'original et que le zoom est réglé sur [Auto], l'image en sortie sera agrandie ou réduite pour s'adapter au format. [Zoom] Sélectionner un taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. [Copie] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. [Assembler] Cochez cette case pour assembler les pages séquentiellement lors de l'impression de plusieurs jeux de copies. [Source papier] Sélectionnez un magasin papier à utiliser. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. Si [Auto] est sélectionné, le magasin papier contenant du papier au format sélectionné dans [Format doc. original] sera utilisé. [Type de média] Sélectionnez un type papier à utiliser pour l'impression. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-6 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] Sélectionnez le nombre de pages de document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. Nom Fonction Description [Combinaison] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être imprimés sur une seule feuille de papier. [Détails Combinaison...] Spécifiez l'ordre des pages et l'utilisation de la bordure. [Combinaison] Sélectionnez la condition de combinaison. Il s'agit du même réglage sélectionné dans la liste [Combinaison] de l'onglet [Mise en page]. [Ordre] Sélectionnez le sens et l'ordre des pages à imprimer. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. [Bordure] Cochez cette case pour imprimer un cadre autour de chaque page. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. bizhub 164 7-7 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non ajouter une page pour la face de couverture. Nom Fonction Description [Couverture recto] Sélectionnez s'il faut joindre une page face de couverture. Vous pouvez choisir d'imprimer la face de couverture comme page vierge ou comme page contenant une image. [Source Papier Couverture] Sélectionnez le magasin papier pour la feuille destinée à la face de couverture. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. [Type de média] Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la face de couverture. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-8 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] Permet d'imprimer le document avec un filigrane (Tampon texte) en surimpression. Nom Fonction Description [Sélection Filigrane] Sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer. [Nouveau...] / [Édition...] Permet d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane. Un filigrane enregistré peut aussi être modifié ainsi que ses paramètres. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 32 filigranes (y compris [Sans Filigrane]). [Texte du filigrane] Entrez le texte à imprimer en filigrane. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. [Police] Sélectionnez la police. [Gras] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en gras. [Italique] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en italique. [Format] Spécifiez la taille. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage entre 7 et 300 points. [Angle] Spécifiez l'angle selon lequel le texte doit être imprimé sur le papier. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 0° à 359°. [Noirceur] Indiquez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10% à 100%. [Décaler à partir du centre] Sélectionner la position verticale et la position latérale. Vous pouvez spécifier les positions à l'aide des barres de défilement situées sous et à droite de l'image. [Supprimer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer le filigrane sélectionné. [Premiere page uniquement] Cocher cette case pour imprimer le filigrane sur la première page uniquement. bizhub 164 7-9 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] Spécifiez la qualité d'impression. 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] Affiche les informations sur la version du pilote d'imprimante. Nom Fonction Description [Définition] Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. [600 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 600 e 600 dpi. [300 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 300 e 600 dpi. [Réglages] Cliquez sur cette touche pour corriger la qualité d'image. [Brillance] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image imprimée. [Contraste] Permet de régler la balance de densité de l'image imprimée. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-10 bizhub 164 7.2 8 Fonction de numérisation bizhub 164 8-3 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner TWAIN. 8.1.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles TWAIN. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Acrobat 7.0 Professionnel qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [File]. 4 Pointez sur [Create PDF], puis cliquez sur [From Scanner]. 5 Sélectionnez le périphérique dans la boîte de dialogue, spécifiez les réglages voulus, et cliquez sur [Scan]. 6 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-4. 7 Cliquez sur [Scan]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Cancel] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 bizhub 164 8.1 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN Paramètres [Document Size] Sélectionnez le format papier à numériser. [Scan Mode] [Text] Convient à la plupart des documents texte. [Photo] Convient à la plupart des documents photographiques. [Resolution] [150 dpi e 150 dpi] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300 dpi e 300 dpi] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600 dpi e 600 dpi] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Brightness] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Help] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les fichiers d'aide. [About] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les informations sur la version. [Scan] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Close] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. bizhub 164 8-5 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA 8 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner WIA. 8.2.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles WIA. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Photoshop 7.0 qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [Fichier]. 4 Pointez sur [Importer], puis cliquez sur [Support WIA]. % Si un message apparaît dans une boîte de dialogue, vérifiez son contenu et cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-5. 6 Cliquez sur [Numériser]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Annuler] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA Paramètres [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] L'image est numérisée avec la qualité prédéfinie. [Résolution] : 300 [Luminosité] : 0 [Paramètres personnalisés] Permet de régler la qualité de l'image numérisée. [Aperçu] Une image numérisée apparaît. Faites glisser le rectangle de sélection sur l'image pour déterminer une zone. [Numériser] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. 8 Pilote scanner WIA 8-6 bizhub 164 8.2 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] % Sélectionnez [Paramètres personnalisés], puis cliquez sur [Ajuster la qualité de la photo numérisée]. Paramètres [Apparence] Affiche une image test. [Résolution] [150] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Luminosité] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] est actif. [Remise à zéro] Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les réglages précédents. [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages modifiés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. Réglage usine [Résolution] [300] [Luminosité] [0] [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] 9 [MENU] bizhub 164 9-3 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] 9 9 [MENU] Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de multiples fonctions Copie sur le Control Panel. La section suivante décrit le [MENU] qui apparaît à l'Écran ainsi que les fonctions qui peuvent être sélectionnées. 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-7. Paramètres [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. p. 9-3 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin ainsi que la qualité et la densité voulues pour réaliser des copies. p. 9-4 [MODE UTILITAIRE] Configurez les fonctions et réglages de cette machine. p. 9-5 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. p. 9-10 9 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] 9-4 bizhub 164 9.2 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin papier. Spécifiez aussi la qualité et la densité pour régler la qualité de l'image sur la copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TAUX ZOOM] [FIXE] Permet de sélectionner un zoom constant pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. [MANUEL] Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 400%. [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [MODE MÉMOIRE] Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être rappelés aisément. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 2 programmes. [RAPPEL] Permet de rappeler un programme. [ENREGISTREMENT] Permet d'enregistrer un programme. bizhub 164 9-5 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] La section suivante décrit les fonctions Copie/Impression qui peuvent être sélectionnés dans le [MODE UTILITAIRE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Paramètres [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. p. 9-6 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. p. 9-7 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Permet de procéder aux opérations de maintenance nécessaires au bon fonctionnement de la machine. p. 9-7 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. p. 9-8 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. p. 9-9 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-6 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE]. Paramètres [INIT. P de CONTROL] Spécifiez un délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle interviendra, si aucune opération n'a été effectuée pendant ce délai. Lorsque la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages initiaux. [MODE VEILLE] Spécifiez le délai à l'issue duquel le mode Veille interviendra si aucune opération n'est effectuée. [VEILLE RAPIDE] Spécifiez si le mode Veille doit être immédiatement restauré après l'exécution d'une tâche d'impression effectuée alors que la machine est en mode Veille. [DÉSACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille lorsque le délai spécifié dans le réglage du [MODE VEILLE] s'est écoulé. [ACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille immédiatement après que la tâche d'impression a été réalisée. [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] Permet de régler le niveau de densité de l'image. [MODE1] Dans ce mode, les copies sont effectuées avec la même densité que l'original. [MODE2] Dans ce mode, la densité de la copie est éclaircie avec pour avantage de réduire les tâches sur la copie. [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] Sélectionnez l'un des 7 niveaux de densité pour imprimer depuis un ordinateur. [CONTRASTE LCD] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'Écran. [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] Spécifiez un délai avant que la valeur ne commence à changer lorsqu'une touche est maintenue enfoncée. [INTERVALLE] Spécifiez le délai avant que la valeur ne change pour le nombre suivant. [LANGUE] Spécifiez la langue de dialogue à l'Écran. Réglage usine [INIT. P de CONTROL] [1 min] [MODE VEILLE] [15 min] [VEILLE RAPIDE] [ACTIVER] [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] [MODE1] [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] [CONTRASTE LCD] [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] : [1s] [INTERVALLE] : [0.1s] [LANGUE] [FRANÇAIS] bizhub 164 9-7 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Les formats de papier personnalisés fréquemment utilisés peuvent être enregistrés et rappelés en cas de besoin. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Lorsque la température ambiante change de manière considérable (quand le chauffage est allumé en hiver par exemple) ou lorsque la machine fonctionne dans un endroit très humide, de la condensation peut se former sur la surface du Tambour à l'intérieur de la machine, avec pour effet une dégradation de la qualité d'impression de la machine. Utilisez cette fonction pour sécher le Tambour et éliminer la condensation. 0 L'opération de séchage du tambour prend environ 1 minute. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [GESTION UTILISAT.]. Paramètres [MÉMOIRE 1] Permet d'enregistrer les formats papier personnalisés. La longueur du papier [X] peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432mm. [MÉMOIRE 2] La largeur du papier [Y] peut être réglée entre 90mm et 297mm. Réglage usine [MÉMOIRE 1] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm [MÉMOIRE 2] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm Paramètres [DÉHUM. PHOTOCOND.] Permet de démarrer le séchage du tambour. 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-8 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages papier pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Spécifiez le magasin papier à afficher pour le réglage initial. [MAG.1] Affiche Magasin 1 comme magasin papier par défaut. [INTRO MULTI MAN.] Affiche le Plateau d'introduction manuelle comme magasin papier par défaut. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] Spécifiez s'il faut donner la priorité aux tâches d'impression lorsque la machine reçoit une tâche d'impression alors que des copies sont en cours d'impression. [COPIE] L'opération Copie devient prioritaire 30 secondes après l'impression des copies. Si aucune opération n'est effectuée dans les 30 secondes qui suivent l'impression des copies ou la dernière opération Copie, la machine exécutera la tâche d'impression éventuelle. [IMPRIMER] Si les tâches d'impression ont été définies comme prioritaires, la machine exécute une tâche d'impression immédiatement après l'impression des copies. [MODE CROISÉ] Spécifiez si les copies doivent ou non être délivrées en mode décalé alternatif lorsque les conditions nécessaires au mode Croisé sont remplies. bizhub 164 9-9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] [COPIE] [MODE CROISÉ] [OFF] Paramètres [RÉGLAGE QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte texte et photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Sélectionnez l'un des 3 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [AUTO]. [MANUEL] Sélectionnez l'un des 9 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [MANUEL]. [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Spécifiez la largeur d'effacement entre 5 mm et 20mm (par pas de 1mm) lorsque des copies sont à réaliser avec le réglage [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE], [EFFACEMENT HAUT] ou [EFF. DES BORDS] sélectionné pour le paramètre [EFFACEMENT]. [GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [CADRE] Efface les quatre bords autour de l'original. [PRIORITÉ TRI] Spécifiez si les copies doivent être triées au moment où elles sont éjectées dans le bac de sortie. 9 [TOTAL PAGES] 9-10 bizhub 164 9.4 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [TOTAL PAGES]. [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] Spécifiez l'ordre de combinaison de l'original pour la fonction 4en1. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] Réglage usine [PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] : [MANUEL] : [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Réglage Effacement : [GAUCHE] Largeur d'effacement : [GAUCHE] : 10mm [HAUT] : 10mm [CADRE] : 10mm [PRIORITÉ TRI] [OFF] [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] [MODÈLE 1] Paramètres Paramètres [TOTAL COMPT] Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées depuis la mise en service de la machine. [COMPT FORM] Indique le nombre total de copies ou d'impressions réalisées sur le format de papier spécifié. C'est le technicien SAV qui devrait configurer la machine pour déterminer le format papier qui fait l'objet du comptage. [TOTAL SCAN] Affiche le nombre total de pages numérisées depuis la mise en service de la machine. (Les numérisations effectuées dans le cadre de la copie ne sont pas prises en compte.) 10 Entretien bizhub 164 10-3 10.1 Papier 10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier Message de rechargement Si un magasin papier manque de papier au cours de l'impression, le message [MAGASIN VIDE CHARG.PAP] apparaît. Vérifiez le magasin papier, puis chargez du papier dans le magasin papier. Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier Ne pas utiliser les types de papier suivants. Négliger ces précautions peut conduire à une réduction de la qualité d'impression, de bourrage ou de détérioration de la machine. - Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre - Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré - Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps - Papier humide, papier perforé, ou papier présentant des trous de perforation - Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal - Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible - Papier torsadé ou gaufré - Papier de forme non-standard (papier non rectangulaire) - Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones - Papier étiqueté - Papier avec rubans, crochets, boutons, etc. - Transparent Stockage du papier Rangez le papier dans un endroit frais, sombre et peu humide. Si le papier devient humide, cela peut entraîner un bourrage. Rangez le papier à plat et non sur le côté. Du papier gondolé peut entraîner un bourrage. 10 Papier 10-4 bizhub 164 10.1 10.1.2 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Si l'impression s'arrête parce que le magasin papier est vide, chargez du papier dans le magasin. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 bizhub 164 10-5 10.1 Papier 10 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager un espace entre eux. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 10 Toner 10-6 bizhub 164 10.2 10.2 Toner 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner Message de Remplacement Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, un message d'avertissement apparaît en bas de l'Écran. Quand ce message apparaît, préparez-vous à remplacer la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions de votre contrat d'entretien. Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, le message ci-dessous apparaît et la machine s'arrête. Remplacez la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions figurant dans votre contrat d'entretien. Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 0 N'utilisez que des cartouches toner prévues spécifiquement pour cette machine. L'utilisation de tout autre type de cartouches peut endommager la machine. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. 7 ATTENTION Maniement du toner et des bouteilles de toner - Ne pas brûler le toner ni les cartouches de toner. - Des projections de toner peuvent causer des brûlures. bizhub 164 10-7 10.2 Toner 10 1 Ouvrez le Panneau avant de la machine. 2 Faites tourner la cartouche vide en sens anti-horaire pour la déverrouiller. 3 Tirez la cartouche toner vers l'extérieur. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner, et secouez-la en effectuant de 5 à 10 mouvements de va-et-vient. 5 Insérez légèrement la cartouche dans la machine. Tout en maintenant la protection de la cartouche vers le haut, enlevez l'adhésif de protection. 10 Toner 10-8 bizhub 164 10.2 6 Insérez la cartouche toner dans la machine. % Veillez à ce que la flèche sur le fond de la cartouche soit en face du repère , figurant sur la machine, comme illustré ci-contre. 7 Faites tourner la cartouche toner en sens horaire pour la verrouiller. 8 Fermez le Panneau avant de la machine. % Quand le Panneau avant est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. bizhub 164 10-9 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage 10 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage REMARQUE Assurez-vous d'éteindre la machine avant de la nettoyer. Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel REMARQUE N'appuyez trop fort pas sur le Control Panel cela pourrait endommager les touches et l'Écran. % Nettoyez la surface avec un chiffon doux et sec. Parois externes, Presse-original REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de dissolvants ou de solvants comme le benzène pour nettoyer le Presse-original. % Essuyez la surface avec un chiffon doux humidifié avec un détergent ménager neutre. 10 Procédure de nettoyage 10-10 bizhub 164 10.3 11 Dépannage bizhub 164 11-3 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) 11 11 Dépannage Ce chapitre décrit les procédures de dépannage. 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) Si l'incident qui s'est produit ne peut pas être corrigé par l'utilisateur, le message [PROBLÈME MACHINE APPEL S.A.V. (C####)] (écran Appel services techniques) apparaît. Normalement le code d'incident commençant par "C" apparaît sur l'écran Appel services techniques. REMARQUE Quand ce message apparaît, éteignez la machine, et attendez environ 10 secondes avant de la rallumer. Si le message reste affiché, il se peut que la machine soit endommagée. Dans ce cas, il convient de contacter immédiatement votre SAV selon la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Notez pas écrit le code d'incident affiché sur l'écran Appel SAV. 2 Mettez l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt. 3 Débranchez la machine. 4 Contactez le S.A.V. et indiquez le code d'erreur que vous avez noté. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 bizhub 164 11.2 11.2 Tableau de dépannage Dépannage élémentaire Voici les procédures de dépannage élémentaire. Si le problème subsiste à l'issue de l'opération décrite, contactez votre S.A.V. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède La machine ne démarre pas quand l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Marche L'alimentation électrique est-elle présente à la sortie de la prise murale ? Insérez correctement la prise de courant dans la prise murale. La protection du circuit électrique ne s'est-elle pas déclenchée ? Réarmez le disjoncteur du circuit électrique. Rien ne s'affiche à l'Écran Le voyant de la touche Start estil allumé en vert ? La machine est passée en mode Veille. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du Control Panel pour annuler le mode Veille. (p. 3-3) L'opération de copie ne démarre pas. Le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine est-il ouvert ? Refermez soigneusement le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine. La machine vient d'être allumée et se trouve encore en préchauffage. Le préchauffage de la machine prend environ 30 secondes après qu'elle a été mise sous tension. Attendez la fin du cycle de préchauffage. Un message d'erreur ou une icône sont-ils affichés à l'Écran ? Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'Écran. L'impression est trop claire. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus clair ? Appuyez sur la touche ) (foncé) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'impression est trop foncée. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus foncé ? Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) L'image est partiellement obscurcie ou floue. Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) bizhub 164 11-5 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Il y a des taches ou des points sombres sur toute la page imprimée. Les sorties imprimées présentent des rayures. La Vitre d'exposition est-elle sale ? Essuyez la surface de la Vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. (p. 10-9) Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) L'original a-t-il été imprimé sur un support très translucide, comme du papier photosensible diazo ou des transparents de rétroprojection ? Placez une feuille de papier vierge par-dessus l'original. (p. 3-6) La copie concerne-t-elle un original recto-verso ? Si vous copiez un original fin recto-verso, le contenu du verso risque par transparence d'être reproduit sur le recto de la copie. Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour régler le niveau de densité. (p. 5-5) L'image est imprimée en biais. L'original est-il correctement positionné ? Positionnez correctement l'original contre la Réglette Original. (p. 3-6) Les Guides latéraux sont-ils correctement positionnés contre le bord du papier ? Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le bord du papier. Du papier recourbé a-t-il été chargé dans le plateau ? Aplatissez le papier avant de le charger. La page imprimée est gondolée. Le papier utilisé se gondole-t-il facilement (le papier recyclé, par exemple) ? Enlevez la ramette de papier du magasin papier, retournez-la et rechargez-la dans le magasin. Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) Le bord de l'image imprimée est sale. Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) Le format papier sélectionné est-il plus grand que l'original ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie agrandie par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Le format ou l'orientation de l'original sont-ils différent de ceux du papier ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez une orientation papier identique à celle de l'original. La copie a-t-elle été réduite à un format plus petit que l'original ? (lorsqu'un taux zoom réduit a été spécifié) Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui ajuste le format de l'original au format de papier souhaité. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie réduite par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-6 bizhub 164 11.2 Apparition du message "Imprimante non connectée" ou "Erreur d'impression" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Mémoire insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Le processus d'impression sur l'ordinateur est terminé mais l'impression ne démarre pas. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Tâches encore en attente de traitement. Attendez que le traitement de la tâche en cours soit terminé. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Impossible de sélectionner des éléments dans le pilote d'imprimante. Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas se combiner. Les éléments qui apparaissent en gris ne peuvent pas être configurés. Apparition d'un message de "conflit" indiquant "Configuration impossible" ou "La fonction va être annulée". Vous essayez de configurer des fonctions qui ne peuvent pas être combinées. Vérifiez les fonctions spécifiées, et ensuite spécifiez des fonctions qui peuvent être combinées. Impression impossible à partir des paramètres configurés. Le paramétrage est peut-être incorrect. Vérifiez le réglage de chaque élément du pilote d'imprimante. Les fonctions sélectionnées peuvent être combinées dans le pilote d'imprimante, mais pas forcément sur cette machine. Il se peut que le format papier et l'orientation spécifiés dans l'application priment sur les réglages du pilote d'imprimante lors de l'impression. Configurez les réglages correctement dans l'application. La combinaison échoue ; les pages ne sont pas combinées, mais imprimées séparément. Des originaux de différentes orientations ont été combinés. Rectifiez les orientations des originaux. Les images ne sont correctement imprimées. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Simplifiez les images pour réduire le volume des données. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée si cette source papier contient du papier de format ou d'orientation différents. Chargez du papier de format ou d'orientation appropriés dans la source papier désirée. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède bizhub 164 11-7 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Principaux messages et leurs solutions En cas d'affichage d'un message autre que ceux mentionnés ci-dessous, suivez les instructions données dans le message. "#" indique le magasin papier. 1 représente le Magasin 1, et représente le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. "XXX" indique le format papier. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner pas prêt" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. La machine n'a pas démarré. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Il se peut qu'un "crash" système se soit produit sur l'ordinateur ou sur la machine pendant la transmission. Le câble USB n'était pas correctement connecté pendant la transmission. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner occupé" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Si une tâche de numérisation TWAIN est envoyée en même temps qu'une tâche de copie, la machine risque de s'arrêter pendant la numérisation. Attendez que l'opération Copie/ Numérisation soit terminée. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur en lecture données" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur machine" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Il pourrait y avoir un problème avec la transmission des commandes entre le pilote TWAIN et la machine. Vérifiez le câble USB connecté à la machine. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède Message Origine Remède [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE CÔTÉ 1] Un bourrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) Tout le papier coincé n'a pas été retiré de l'intérieur de la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez tout le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) [MÉMOIRE PLEINE] Le volume des données de l'image numérisée a dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque du Control Panel ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Les données numérisées et/ou les données image reçues seront effacées.) Diminuez la résolution et réessayez. (p. 7-9, p. 8-4, p. 8-6) Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur ont dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. [MÉM. FICHIER PLEINE] Le nombre des fichiers de données image numérisées par le scanner a atteint le maximum. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-8 bizhub 164 11.2 [ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER RÉINSÉR.PAP. (#XXX)] Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui de l'original. Recharger du papier d'un format approprié dans le magasin papier, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 10-4) Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. [PAPIER NON CONFORME CHARGER PAPIER (XXX)] [Auto] est sélectionné dans la liste [Source papier] du pilote d'imprimante, mais le papier du format spécifié n'est pas chargé. [FORMAT PAP.INCORRECT (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du format spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. [MAGASIN VIDE CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX)] Le magasin a manqué de papier pendant la copie/impression. [ERREUR TYPE MÉDIA (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du type spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié dans le magasin papier et changez le type papier dans le mode Menu, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 9-4) [PORTE AVANT OUVERTE FERMER PORTE AVANT] Le Panneau avant de la machine est ouvert ou mal fermé. Fermez correctement le Panneau avant de la machine. [PORTE COTÉ1 OUVERTE FERMER PORTE COTÉ 1] La Porte côté 1 de la machine est ouverte ou mal fermée. Fermez correctement la Porte côté 1 de la machine. [TONER VIDE REMPLACER TONER] Le toner est épuisé. La copie ou l'impression ne sont plus possibles. Remplacez la cartouche vide par une cartouche de toner neuve. (p. 10-6) [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M1) APPEL SAV] Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M2) APPEL SAV] Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [ÉCHEC CONNEXION PC] Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Si l'erreur subsiste, contactez votre service après vente. Message Origine Remède bizhub 164 11-9 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier Si un bourrage papier se produit, le message [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE COTÉ 1] apparaît. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour dégager le bourrage papier. 7 ATTENTION - La zone autour de l' Unité de fixation est extrêmement chaude. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux qui sont indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. % 1. Unité de fixation 7 ATTENTION - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. REMARQUE Toucher la surface du Tambour peut causer une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du Tambour. % 1. Tambour 1 1 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-10 bizhub 164 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Ouvrez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. % Relevez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en position. 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. 5 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Retirez lentement le papier. 3 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 4 Tirez le Magasin 1. 5 Enlevez tout le papier du Magasin 1, et rechargez le magasin à nouveau. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-12 bizhub 164 11.3 6 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que les Guides latéraux sont bien poussés contre les bords du papier chargé. 7 Fermez le Magasin 1. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 1 Retirez lentement le papier. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) 1 Enlevez tout le papier du Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 2 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-13 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 5 Rechargez le papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-14 bizhub 164 11.3 12 Caractéristiques bizhub 164 12-3 12.1 Papier 12 12 Caractéristiques Ce chapitre décrit les spécifications du papier, de la machine, et des options. Dans un souci d'amélioration constante, cette spécification produit est susceptible de modification sans préavis. 12.1 Papier Types papier et capacités * Papier fin et autres papiers spéciaux. En ce qui concerne le grammage du papier, contactez votre SAV. REMARQUE Si le format papier ou le type papier n'est pas correctement spécifié, cela peut entraîner un bourrage ou une dégradation de l'image. Assurez-vous de spécifier correctement les réglages papier. Si vous devez charger du papier ordinaire, du papier recyclé, carte 1, ou carte 2, et dont une face comporte des images imprimées, sélectionnez [***-R] pour chaque type papier dans le paramètre Papier. ("***" indique un type papier.) Type papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier Papier ordinaire Papier recyclé Papier spécial* 64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 250 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 100 feuilles Carte 1 91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles Carte 2 121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles 12 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 bizhub 164 12.2 12.2 Caractéristiques machine bizhub 164 Caractéristiques Type Imprimante/Scanner de bureau Porte-document Fixe Photo conducteur OPC Source lumineuse LED Système copie Copie laser électrostatique Système développement Système de développement HMT bi-composant à sec Système de fixation Rouleau de fixation Définition 600 dpi e 600 dpi Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. A3 (11 e 17) Poids 2 kg (4-7/16 lb) (Objets en 3 dimensions) Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2(121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Magasin 1 Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 250 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Capacité Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire/ Papier recyclé/ Papier spécial 250 feuilles (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 125 feuilles (Sauf A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Carte 10 feuilles Temps de préchauffage 29 sec. ou moins (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) La durée de préchauffage peut varier en fonction de l'environnement d'exploitation et de l'utilisation. Largeur de rognage d'image Bord supérieur, Bord inférieur, Bord droit, Bord gauche : 4mm (3/16) Première copie (en impression sur A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 8,0 sec. ou moins Le délai avant production de la première copie dépend du mode utilisé. Vitesse de copie (Avec impression A4v (8-1/2 e 11v)) Papier ordinaire : 16 feuilles/min. Carte 1/2 : 7 feuilles/min. Agrandissement copie : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 115%, 141%, 200% Réduction : 81%, 70%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 121%, 129%, 200% Réduction : 78%, 64%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) bizhub 164 12-5 12.2 Caractéristiques machine 12 Nombre de copies réalisées en continu 1 à 99 feuilles Réglage de la densité Réglage automatique de densité, Réglage manuel de densité (9 niveaux) Alimentation AC 220 V à 240 V, 3,5 A, 50/60Hz Consommation électrique max. 800W ±10% Dimensions Largeur 570mm (22-7/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) Encombrement machine Largeur 928mm (36-9/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) (Lorsque le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est utilisé) Taille mémoire 32Mo Poids Approx. 23,5 kg (Approx. 51-13/16 lb) Caractéristiques 12 Option 12-6 bizhub 164 12.3 12.3 Option Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 Caractéristiques Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2 (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 100 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 8W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 446mm (17-9/16) Profondeur 469 mm (18-7/16) Hauteur 82 mm (3-1/4) Poids Approx. 1,6 kg (Approx. 3-1/2 lb) 13 Annexe bizhub 164 13-3 13.1 Glossaire 13 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire Les termes utilisés pour les fonctions Copie, Impression, et Numérisation sont expliqués ci-dessous. Terme Description Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension de fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les platesformes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format compressé. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée. Désinstaller Désinstaller. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Pouce (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier, précédée par un point, est ajoutée à la suite du nom d'un fichier. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine, ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement et présente l'extension de fichier ".pdf". Le PDF est basé sur un format PostScript, et il peut être affiché grâce au logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pilote Scanner Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un scanner. Pixel La plus petite unité constitutive d'une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Propriétés Informations d'attribut. Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Système d'exploitation Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows est un OS. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. 13 Glossaire 13-4 bizhub 164 13.1 TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. WIA Acronyme de Windows Imaging Acquisition. Fonction permettant d'importer les données image depuis des périphériques d'acquisition d'image, y compris les scanners et appareils photo numériques. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible WIA, il faut installer le pilote WIA approprié Terme Description 14 Index bizhub 164 14-3 14.1 Index des éléments 14 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Affichage 2-6, 4-3 Alimentation 1-16 Appel S.A.V. 11-3 Avec mode mémoire 5-15 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 B Bac de sortie 2-4 Back/Stop/Reset 2-6, 4-3 C Capacités papier 12-3 Capot côté 1 2-4 Caractéristiques 12-3 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 Cartouche toner 2-5 Chargement du papier 3-4, 10-4 Chargement du papier dans l'introducteur manuel 3-5 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d'introduction manuelle 10-5 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 3-4, 10-4 Combinaison 7-6 COMPT FORM 9-10 Configurer un format personnalisé 3-6 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 Copie 7-5 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 Cordon d'alimentation 2-4 Couvercle supérieur de l'unité de fixation 2-5 Couvre-original 2-4, 10-9 Curseur 4-6 D Densité 4-5, 5-6 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 Définition 7-9 Déhum. photocond. 9-7 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote scanner 6-9 E Effacement 5-11 Effacement + Séparation livre 5-13 Enregistrer les réglages Copie 5-15 Entretien 10-3 Environnement 1-16, 6-3 Espace requis 1-15 Extérieur de l'unité principale 2-4 F Face 2-4 Fonction Copie 5-3, 5-7, 9-3 Fonction de numérisation 8-3 Fonctions Imprimante 7-3 Format de l'original 7-5 Format de sortie 7-5 Format papier 4-4, 5-5 G Gestion Utilisateur 9-7 I Icône/Message 4-5 Incidents 11-3 Indications affichées 4-4 Init. P de Control 3-3 Initialisation automatique 9-6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6-7 Installer le pilote 6-3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 6-5 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 6-7 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/ Server 2008 6-4 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/ Server 2003 6-5 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 2-4 Intérieur de l'unité principale 2-5 L Langue 9-6 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 2-4 M Magasin 1 2-4 Magasin papier 4-4, 5-5 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 Menu 9-3 Menu ou fonction 4-6 Menu/Select 2-6, 4-3 Message de rechargement 10-3 Message de Remplacement 10-6 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 9-8 Mode Veille 3-3, 7-3, 9-6 14-4 bizhub 164 14 Index des éléments 14.1 N Nombre de copies 4-4, 5-5 Numérisation d'un document 8-5 Numériser un document 8-3 O Onglet À propos de 7-9 Onglet Configurer 7-5 Onglet Disposition 7-6 Onglet Filigrane 7-8 Onglet Qualité 7-9 Onglet Réglages par page 7-7 Opérations Impression 7-3 Option 12-6 Options 2-3 Ordre copie 4en1 9-10 Orientation 7-5 ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P Page face de couverture 7-7 Panneau de contrôle 2-4, 2-6, 4-3, 10-9 Papier 10-3, 12-3 Param. base 5-5 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA 8-5 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-3 Pilote scanner WIA 8-5 Placer les originaux 3-6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle 2-4 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles 2-3, 12-6 Port USB (type A) USB2.0/1.1 2-4 Priorité Tri 9-9 Procédure de nettoyage 10-9 Programmes 9-4 Q Qualité 4-5, 5-6 Quick Settings 2-6, 4-3 R Raccordement à l'ordinateur 6-3 Rappeler un programme de copie 5-15 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau du Plateau d'introduction manuelle 11-12 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 10-6 Revêtement 10-9 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglage Travail Copie 9-4 Réglages Application 5-7 Régler la qualité depuis les Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglette Original 2-5 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 Rouleau prise papier 2-5 S Séparation Livre 5-12 Source papier 7-5 Start 2-6, 4-3 T Tableau d’association des fonctions 5-16 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 Tambour 2-5 Taux zoom 4-5, 5-6 Tâches copie en file d'attente 3-3 Toner 10-6 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 Tri 5-10, 7-5 Tri+ Mode croisé 5-10 Type papier 4-4, 7-5 Types de papier 12-3 U Unité de fixation 2-5 Utilitaires 9-5 V Veille rapide 9-6 Vitre d'exposition 2-5, 10-9 Voyant LED 4-3 Vue 7-4 Z Zoom 7-5 bizhub 164 14-5 14.2 Index des touches 14 14.2 Index des touches 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Ajustement 7-9 C COMPT FORM 9-10 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 D DEHUM. PHOTOCOND. 9-7 Densité 9-4 DENSITÉ (LIVRE) 9-6 DENSITÉ IMPRESS. 9-6 Définition 8-4, 8-6 Départ 2-6, 4-3 Détails Combinaison... 7-6 Disposition Copie 4en1 9-10 E EFF. DES BORDS 5-11, 5-14 EFFAC. CENTRE 5-14 EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE 5-14 EFFACEMENT 5-11, 5-13 EFFACEMENT GAUCHE 5-11 EFFACEMENT SUP. 5-11 ENREGISTREMENT 5-15 F FONCTION COPIE 5-7, 9-3 I INIT. P de CONTROL 9-6 L Langue 9-6 Luminosité 8-4, 8-6 M MAG. PAPIER 1 9-4, 9-8 Menu 9-3 Menu/Sélect. 2-6, 4-3 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 5-10, 9-8 MODE MÉMOIRE 5-15, 9-4 Mode Scanner 8-4 Mode Utilisateur 9-7 Mode Veille 9-6 Modifier format personnalisé... 7-5 N NIVEAU DENSITÉ 9-9 O ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P PAPIER INTRO MANU 9-4, 9-8 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ IMPRESS 9-8 PRIORITÉ MAG 9-8 PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ TRI 9-9 Q Qualité 9-4 R RAPPEL 5-15 Relié gauche 5-12 RELIURE DROITE 5-12 Retour/Arrêt/Réinitialiser 2-6, 4-3 RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE 9-4 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglages rapides 2-6, 4-3 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 S SÉLECTION MAGASIN 9-4 Séparation Livre 5-12, 5-13 T TAUX ZOOM 9-4 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 TRI 5-10 U Utilitaires 9-5 V VEILLE RAPIDE 9-6 14 Index des touches 14-6 bizhub 164 14.2 Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) User’s Guide . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Contents-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-3 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9 Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-11 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Use conditions 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-3. Web Browser Image panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Overview of each function 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Page- Scope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-3 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-3 My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-3 My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-3 3 Assigning Application Keys bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-4. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. 1 2 3 3 Overview 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. No. Name Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function. 3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key. 4 Web Browser Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. dReference For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Overview 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings] ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings] ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2 4 Basic operation 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list. 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. dReference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16. 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon. 4 Toolbar 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. 4 Toolbar 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. 4 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-11. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]). bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information]* Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log]* Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries. 5 Screen components 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta. com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again. 5 Using the User Box function 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-8. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name. 5 Using the User Box function 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility]. 5 Using the User Box function 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted. 5 Using the User Box function 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6 Displaying the Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Operating Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-11. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-16. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-18. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. dReference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Operating Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Description 6 Operating Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings] ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytes 6 Registering a photo in the address book 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted. 7 PDF Processing Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-5). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8). dReference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. 7 PDF document properties 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level. 7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description 7 Direct Print 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8 Searchable PDF function bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. dReference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt 8 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. dReference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. 8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 My Panel Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information dReference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9 Overview 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. dReference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. dReference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-16. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-9. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-11. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-13. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-14. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-15. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-16. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. dReference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. dReference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing]. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. 10 My Address function bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel. 10 Overview 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.]. 10 Registering and editing a destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. dReference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. dReference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10 Copying destinations between address books 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. 10 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing 5-3 Acquiring my panel 9-4 Address book 10-5 Application key 3-3, 3-5 Application menu 3-4 C Cache 5-3 Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18 Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6 D Deleting 5-10 Display mode of web browser 4-11 Displaying 4-20 E Entering text in web browser 4-10 External memory 6-16 F Flash player 4-4 G Group 10-6 I Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22 Image panel operation 6-6 J Just-fit rendering 4-11 L Logging in 5-5 Logging out 5-5 M Main menu 9-5 My address 2-4, 10-3 My address book 10-3, 10-10 My address book acquisition 10-4 My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5 My panel settings 9-6 O OCR 8-4 Opening user boxes 5-6 Operating web browser 4-10 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 PDF processing 2-4, 7-3 Photo 6-19 PIN code 6-18 Print 6-15 Printing 4-18, 5-8 Public address book 10-3 R Restriction of web browser 4-6 Restrictions on my address 10-4 Restrictions on my panel 9-4 S Saving 4-21 Scanning 6-8 Screen components of image panel 6-5 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Screen components of web browser 4-9 Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Send tray 6-17 Smart-fit rendering 4-11 Speaker 4-11 Specifications 4-4, 6-19 Specifications for web browser 4-4 T Toolbar 4-12 U Upload 4-22 User box 5-6, 6-9 W Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Web browser information 4-17 Web browser settings 4-16 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button A Access log 4-17 Address 4-14 Address Book (Personal) 10-5 Address Book Index Default 9-11 Application key 1 3-3 Application key 2 3-4 Application Key Settings 3-5 Application menu 3-4 Application menu key 3-3 Authentication information 4-17 C Cache 4-17 Cellular Phone 6-11 Color Selection Settings 9-14 Combine Documents 6-13 Cookie 4-17 Copier Settings 9-9 Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8 Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9 D Default Address Book 9-12 Default Address Type 9-12 Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13 Default Tab Density Settings 9-10 Destination List 6-16 Digital ID 7-6 Direct Print 7-8 Display 4-16 Document Settings 6-14 Document Source List 6-9 Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14 E Edit Document 6-12 Encryption 7-5 External memory 6-10, 6-16 F Favorites (Add) 4-13 Favorites (List) 4-13 Function Permission 4-7 G Group 10-6 H History 4-14 I Initial Screen Settings 9-16 L Language Setting 9-8 M Main Menu Settings 9-15 Manage windows 4-17 Measurement Unit Settings 9-8 Menu 4-16 My Panel Settings 9-6 O OCR operation setting 8-4 P Page Operation 4-16 Password 7-5 PDF Document Properties 7-4 Photo/Icon 6-20 Preview 6-12 Print 4-15, 6-15 Proxy 4-17 Q Quick Settings 9-10 R Return to Scan Dest. 6-14 S Scan 6-8 Scan/Fax Settings 9-11 Security 4-17 Settings 4-17 Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-13 U User Box Settings 9-13 W Web browser contents access 4-8 Web browser setting 4-6 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option) Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge ............................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles ................................................................................................. 2-4 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Application] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2...................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] ............................................................................................................ 3-5 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web................................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................. 4-4 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web................................................................................................. 4-4 Restrictions avec Flash Player ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web ........................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web ........................................ 4-6 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction...................................... 4-6 [Réglage Navigateur Web] ................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée................................................................ 4-7 [Autoriser Fonction]............................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux.......................................................................................... 4-8 [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] .......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Fonctionnement de base................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation ................................................................................................................... 4-10 Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile ................................................................................................. 4-10 Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique............................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.3 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran ............................................................................................................ 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Rendu Parfait] ................................................................................................................................. 4-11 [Rendu intelligent] ............................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils ........................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................ 4-13 Liste des favoris ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.4 [Adresse] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [Histor.]............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 [Afficher Historique].......................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Impr.] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web............................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Opération Page] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.3 [Gérer fenêtres] ................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.4 [Réglages] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-18 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document ............................................ 4-19 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document.......................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document............................................................................................................ 4-21 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document ....................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.2 Chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ............................................................................ 4-23 4.8.3 Chargement d'un fichier de document dans une boîte ................................................................... 4-25 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 5-3 5.1.1 Vérification préalable.......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Modalité d'accès................................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.2 Composition de l'écran .................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte ................................................................................................................. 5-6 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte............................................................................................................................ 5-6 [Connexion de boîte].......................................................................................................................... 5-6 [Liste de fichiers] ................................................................................................................................ 5-7 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document .............................................................................................................. 5-8 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Opérations générales......................................................................................................................... 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document...................................................................................................................... 6-8 Numérisation d'un document ............................................................................................................ 6-8 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur .................................................................................................. 6-9 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe ............................................................................ 6-10 Utilisation de données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA ................................... 6-11 6.3.4 Editer le document........................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Aperçu]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] – [Modifier document] ......................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] – [Combiner Documents] .................................................................................... 6-14 [Document/Page] – [Réglages Document] ....................................................................................... 6-14 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] ................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination ................................................................................................................. 6-16 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Spécifier des destinations................................................................................................................ 6-17 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe...................................................................... 6-18 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi ............................................................................................................... 6-18 Magasin Envoi.................................................................................................................................. 6-18 [Vérifier Mag. EMI]............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA............................................................... 6-20 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses...................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo .................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo........................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel .......................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données ................................................................................ 6-24 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document ................................................................................. 6-25 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée................................................................................ 6-26 7 Fonction de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF.................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique ................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe ............................................................................................ 7-5 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique ............................................................................................ 7-6 7.4 Impression directe .......................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables................................................ 8-3 Taille de caractère reconnaissable .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR....................................................... 8-4 [Réglage Opération ROC] .................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable ................................................................................... 8-5 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) 9.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec My Panel.............................................................................................. 9-3 Eléments personnalisables ................................................................................................................ 9-3 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web .................................................................................... 9-4 Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Panel ................................................................................................ 9-5 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Panel .............................................................................. 9-5 9.2 Afficher My Panel ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.2.1 Menu principal ................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal .............................................................................................................. 9-6 Table des matières-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] ................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] ............................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] ............................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure]................................................................................................................. 9-9 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-10 [Régl. rapides 1] – [Régl. rapides 4] ................................................................................................. 9-11 [Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité] ........................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] ....................................................................................................... 9-12 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut]........................................................................................................ 9-12 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-13 [Carnet d'adresses par défaut] ........................................................................................................ 9-13 [Type adresse par défaut] ................................................................................................................ 9-13 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] ............................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] .............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] ............................................................................................................... 9-15 Touche Menu principal .................................................................................................................... 9-15 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal ............................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran par défaut] .............................................................................................................. 9-16 10 Fonction My Address 10.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses ............................................................................................. 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................. 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Address Book ................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Address........................................................................ 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination .................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet d'adresses............................................................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses.................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-8 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-9 10.4 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document............................................................ 10-10 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations.............................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations ......................................................................................................... 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option sur la machine. Il décrit aussi les fonctions disponibles dès qu'une application est connectée. La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux chacune de ces fonctions. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Manuel sur papier Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. Ce manuel fournit des informations détaillées sur les marques commerciales et les droits de reproduction. • Marques de fabrique et copyrights Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions Boîte. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission WebDAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC 1 Conditions d'utilisation 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à tous les types d'utilisateurs, depuis les utilisateurs novices jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Veuillez noter qu'une connaissance de base du produit est requise afin de permettre aux utilisateurs d'effectuer les opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. En cas de problèmes, veuillez contacter le SAV. 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation L'activation de l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le Panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. Les contenus auxquels les utilisateurs ont accès et qu'ils téléchargent et transmettent à l'aide du navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction ou par tout autre moyen restent de leur responsabilité. Les utilisateurs doivent respecter les règles de l'entreprise et les lois en vigueur dans le pays d'implantation de la machine. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. et les sociétés du groupe n'assumeront aucune responsabilité pour l'exploitation d'Internet par les utilisateurs. [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Respectez les consignes afin d'éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Le chiffre "1" ainsi formaté représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle pour accéder à l'élément de menu souhaité. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures opératoires sont décrites à l'aide d'illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Les noms de touches du panneau de contrôle, de pièces, de modèles et d'options sont tous indiqués en texte gras. 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 2 Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Présentation des fonctions 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Référence - La disponibilité de la fonction avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau UK-203 fourni en option. - Un Disque dur doit être installé dans le MFP (Produit multifonctions) pour pouvoir utiliser les fonctions avancées. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement du kit de licence et sur l'activation de fonctions sur les imprimantes multifonction, reportez-vous au [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/ Numérisation]. - Pour associer la fonction à l'application, vous devez l'activer depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, reportez-vous au manuel relatif à l'application. 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions prises en charge pour les kits licence et les applications. 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel modifie l'utilisation des touches Boîte, Fax/Numérisation et Copie du panneau de contrôle. - La touche Boîte fonctionne comme une touche du Menu Application et les touches Fax/Numérisation et Copie fonctionnent comme des touches d'application. - Appuyez sur Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application] qui vous permet de basculer vers la fonction ajoutée. - Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier la fonction qui doit être assignée à la touche d'application. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-3. Navigateur Web Image Panel Traitement PDF PDF adressable Option Internet LK-101 v2 o o − − Option Internet LK-102 − − o − Option Internet LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Présentation des fonctions 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous à la référence décrite ci-dessous. Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de compte est installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible. Fonction Présentation Référence Navigateur Web Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. p. 6-3 Traitement PDF Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-102 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Exécute le cryptage de PDF commandé par mot de passe ou ID numérique, ajoute une signature numérique et configure les réglages des propriétés pour la distribution de documents au format PDF à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. p. 7-3 PDF adressable Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en collant les données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF à l'aide des fonctions Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. p. 8-3 My Panel (Mon Panneau) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur en fonction de l'application (My Panel), puis obtention de My Panel sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 9-3 My Address (Mon adresse) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée du carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) par le serveur, puis obtention de My Address Book sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 10-3 3 Attribution des touches d'application bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Présentation 3 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation La description suivante présente la distribution des touches et le [menu Application] du panneau de contrôle. 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel permet à la touche Boîte de fonctionner comme une touche Menu Application et à Fax/Numérisation et Copie comme des touches d'application. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel de l'imprimante multifonction. - La fonction My Panel est utilisée en association avec PageScope My Panel Manager. N°. Nom Description 1 Menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous ajoutez une fonction, fixez un autocollant Menu Application (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour modifier le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-4. 3 Présentation 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Application] Appuyez sur la touche Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Si vous désirez utiliser une fonction qui n'est pas affectée à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez permuter les fonctions de la touche concernée dans le [Menu Application]. 2 Touche d'application 1 La fonction Fax/Numérisation est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. 3 Touche d'application 2 La fonction Copie est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. N°. Nom Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier les fonctions qui doivent être assignées aux touches d'application 1 et 2. 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] Pour attribuer une fonction aux touches d'application 1 et 2, utilisez [Réglage Touche Application]. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Système]. 5 Dans [Réglage Système] (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. 6 Sélectionnez une touche d'application ([Touche 1] ou [Touche 2]) pour y attribuer une fonction. 3 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. La fonction est attribuée à la touche d'application. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Présentation 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web imprime, affiche et enregistre des contenus Internet ou Intranet en y accédant depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Afficher et imprimer les contenus Web sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Afficher, imprimer et enregistrer un fichier document sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Téléchargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ou d'un fichier de document enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur sur un serveur sur Internet ou l'Intranet. - Partager les documents des boîtes utilisateur des imprimantes multifonction sur le réseau à l'aide PageScope Web Connection. - Lorsque la fonction My Panel est disponible, vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à My Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection depuis le panneau de contrôle, voir page 5-3. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Présentation 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction sont les suivantes. Restrictions avec Flash Player Les restrictions liées au module Flash Player installé dans le Navigateur Web. - La fonction permettant de générer un événement par une pression de touche n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant de coller ou d'obtenir des données telles que des chaînes de caractères du presse-papier ne sont pas prises en charge. - Le menu contextuel n'est pas pris en charge. - La fonction d'impression de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou d'exploiter Flash depuis JavaScript ne sont pas prises en charge. - Les écrans ne comportant pas de fenêtres instantanées ne sont pas pris en charge. - La fonction Signet de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction de communication via XMLSocket n'est pas prise en charge. Élément Caractéristiques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Langage de balisage pris en charge HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/De base Feuille de style prise en charge Partie de CSS1 et 2 Langage script pris en charge Partie de JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3e édition, Ajax (limité au contenu pris en charge par JavaScript) DOM pris en charge Partie du niveau 1 et 2 Format pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 et antérieur Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Maj_JIS), japonais (ISO-2022-JP), japonais (EUC-JP), chinois simplifié (GB2312), chinois traditionnel (Big5), Europe occidentale (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Mode d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web 4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Navigateur Web]. La page spécifiée comme page d'accueil apparaît. Référence - Si un utilisateur connecté utilise le navigateur Web associé à My Panel et que cet utilisateur appuie sur [Navigateur Web], le réglage Navigateur Web et les informations associées à l'utilisateur sont téléchargés du serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction. Si l'utilisateur a défini une page d'accueil personnelle, celle-ci s'affiche. - Au lancement du navigateur Web, vous pouvez spécifier l'affichage de la page d'accueil ou de la dernière page visitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-18. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. Vous pouvez également interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. [Réglage Navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Réseau]. 5 Dans [Réglages Réseau] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Navigateur Web]. 6 Sélectionnez [Non valide] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Si [Réglage Navigateur Web] est réglé sur [Non valide], [Navigateur Web] est masqué dans le [Menu Application]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée Si la gestion des utilisateurs est effectuée sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. [Autoriser Fonction] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]. 5 Dans [Système d'Authentification], appuyez sur [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 6 Sélectionnez l'utilisateur auquel vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web et appuyez sur [Modifier]. % Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web aux utilisateurs publics, appuyez sur [ ] et sélectionnez [Public]. 7 Appuyez sur [Autoriser Fonction]. 8 Dans [Autoriser Fonction] (3/3), réglez [Navigateur Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Le réglage n'est pas disponible si [Non valide] est spécifié dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglage Navigateur Web]. - La configuration de l'autorisation de la fonction aux utilisateurs publics est disponible lorsque l'accès utilisateur public est autorisé dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte]ö[Système d'authentification]ö[Accès Util. Public]. - Si la gestion des utilisateurs est réalisée sur le serveur externe, vous pouvez configurer les réglages par défaut d'autorisation de la fonction pour les utilisateurs qui se connectent à l'imprimante multifonction en utilisant l'Authentification Serveur Externe la première fois. Pour procéder à cette configuration, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Identification Utilisateur]ö[Param. admin.]ö[Autoris. par défaut Fonction]ö[Navigateur Web]. Pour plus d'informations sur [Autoris. par défaut Fonction], reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux Si le navigateur Web est utilisé en interaction avec une application, vous pouvez accéder par le navigateur Web aux fichiers (contenus préinstallés, fichiers d'images, fichiers d'aide, etc.) enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction. L'administrateur peut interdire l'utilisation des fichiers enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction depuis le navigateur Web selon les besoins. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur l'interaction de l'application avec le navigateur Web, contactez le SAV. [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Sécurité]. 5 Appuyez sur [Détails Sécurité]. 6 Dans [Détails Sécurité] (4/4), réglez [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants. Référence - Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Vous pouvez régler le son du haut-parleur avec l'icône. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. N°. Nom Description 1 Barre d'outils Permet d'exploiter le Navigateur Web ou de configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Elle est affichée en permanence sur l'écran Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. 2 Barre de défilement Apparaît à droite de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran verticalement. Apparaît en bas de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran horizontalement. 3 Fenêtre En cas d'affichage de plusieurs fenêtres, vous pouvez changer de fenêtre en vous servant des onglets situés au bas de l'écran. Appuyez sur [e] de l'onglet actif pour fermer la fenêtre. 4 Icône L'icône qui représente l'état de connexion apparaît au chargement du contenu. L'icône apparaît si le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction. 1 4 3 2 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations à partir du pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Le stylet procure un confort d'utilisation sur l'écran tactile. Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. - Pour sélectionner un élément, il suffit d'appuyer dessus. - Si un lien figure dans le contenu, appuyez dessus pour y accéder. - Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Tapez les caractères sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur [ ], [ ], [ ] ou sur [ ] de la barre de défilement. Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique Vous pouvez utiliser le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour entrer des valeurs numériques ou sélectionner des articles dans la liste. 4.4.3 Saisie de texte Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Saisie de texte Appuyez sur le caractère que vous voulez saisir sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. - Vous pouvez aussi saisir des nombres à l'aide du pavé numérique. Référence - Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, puis appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. - Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle. - Pour annuler le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. - Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. - Si la saisie de codes de caractères sur plusieurs lignes est autorisée, le bouton de saut de ligne apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran Il existe trois types de mode d'affichage de l'écran Navigateur Web. [Normal] Ce mode d'affichage correspond à celui d'un navigateur Web normal. L'affichage du contenu n'est pas ajusté à la taille de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. (Le défaut est réglé sur [Normal]). [Rendu Parfait] La disposition du contenu est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. [Rendu intelligent] Le tableau est divisé et redistribué verticalement pour correspondre à la largeur de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. La disposition peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir page 4-17. 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Si un haut-parleur est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction, l'icône haut-parleur s'affiche en bas à gauche du navigateur Web. Appuyez sur l'icône haut-parleur pour afficher l'écran Volume qui vous permet de régler le volume du haut-parleur. - Pour augmenter le volume au niveau supérieur, appuyez sur [Plus clair] ou sur la touche # du panneau de contrôle. - Pour réduire le volume au niveau inférieur, appuyez sur [Plus foncé] ou sur la touche * du panneau de contrôle. - Une pression sur [Sourdine] coupe le son. De plus, l'icône de haut-parleur se change en icône de hautparleur muet. 4 Barre d'outils 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer différentes opérations et de configurer différents paramètres. 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions des touches de la barre d'outils. Icône Nom Description Verso Retour à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/ Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche pendant que vous chargez une page, le chargement est interrompu. Home Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" est la page enregistrée par défaut. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir page 4-16. [Signet] – [Affichage] Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Signet] – [Ajout] Ajoute l'URL de la page actuellement affichée à la liste des favoris. L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Adresse] Affiche l'écran de saisie des URL. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Histor.] Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Impr.] Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. [Menu] Configuration des paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] Appuyez sur [Liste] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés à l'aide de vignettes. La sélection d'un favori permet d'accéder à l'URL correspondante. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des favoris de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Liste des favoris Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] (L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur). En appuyant sur [Ajout], vous êtes invité(e) à entrer le mot de passe administrateur. Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'écran d'enregistrement apparaît. Vérifiez le contenu et appuyez sur [OK]. L'URL de la page affichée est ajoutée à la liste des favoris. L'imprimante multifonction peut gérer 100 favoris au maximum. - Pour enregistrer les vignettes de la pages à ajouter aux favoris, cochez la case [Enregistrer Vignette] dans l'écran d'enregistrement. - L'enregistrement est effectué sous le titre donné précédemment au contenu. Pour changer le titre, appuyez sur le champ de saisie du titre dans l'écran d'enregistrement et modifiez le titre. Référence - L'accès au navigateur Web en association avec My Panel ne nécessite pas l'autorité administrateur. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 favoris par utilisateur. Élément Description [Vue Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Permet de choisir entre afficher la liste des favoris ou leurs vignettes. [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher les favoris en visualisant au choix leur adresse ou leur titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme la liste des favoris. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Ouvre le favori sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Editer] Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. La modification de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Haut] Vous positionne au-dessus du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Bas] Vous positionne au-dessous du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Supprimer] Supprime le favori sélectionné. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. 4 Barre d'outils 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Adresse] Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie de l'adresse. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. Entrez l'URL de la page à afficher et appuyez sur [Valider] or [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste de l'historique de saisie. Vous pouvez référencer les saisies précédentes. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique de saisie. Référence - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrées de données. - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique de saisie de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique de saisie par utilisateur. 4.5.5 [Histor.] Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran Afficher Historique. Dans la liste d'affichage de l'historique, sélectionnez la page que vous voulez afficher à nouveau. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique d'affichage. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique d'affichage de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique d'affichage par utilisateur. [Afficher Historique] Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. Élément Description [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher l'historique en visualisant au choix l'adresse ou le titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime toutes les entrées enregistrées dans l'affichage de l'historique. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Ferme la liste d'affichage de l'historique. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Charge l'affichage d'historique sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Supprimer] Supprime l'affichage d'historique sélectionné. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.6 [Impr.] Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le contenu affiché est imprimé. Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer une page Web ou une image JPEG ou autre qui utilise une grande partie de la mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4.5.7 [Menu] Appuyez sur [Menu] pour configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-16. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le [Titre], l'[URL], la [Date/Heure], ainsi que le [Numéro Page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web Le fait d'appuyer sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils permet d'afficher le menu de l'utilisateur. Les utilisateurs peuvent seulement visualiser les réglages opératoires et les informations du navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer l'environnement d'exploitation et les paramètres sécurité en plus des réglages opératoires du navigateur Web. Pour afficher le menu administrateur, appuyez sur [Administrateur] dans l'écran du menu, puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. 4.6.1 [Opération Page] Configurez les réglages opération page sous l'onglet [Opération Page]. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - L'élément [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil] ne s'affiche uniquement que pour les utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en association avec My Panel. Élément Description [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil]* Enregistre la page affichée comme page d'accueil. [Mémo Page] Affiche la page enregistrée comme mémo page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page correspondante. Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. [Enreg. comme Mémo Page] Enregistre la page affichée telle quelle. [Affichage Zoom] Appuyez sur [Affichage Zoom] pour faire apparaître la touche permettant d'agrandir ou réduire le format d'affichage de la page. Appuyez sur la touche pour modifier le format d'affichage de la page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6.2 [Affichage] Sous l'onglet [Affichage], configurez les réglages d'affichage des contenus. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages afin de masquer ou non les images ou animations, activer ou désactiver JavaScript et effectuer des réglages détaillés d'affichage des contenus. 4.6.3 [Gérer fenêtres] L'onglet [Gérer fenêtres] permet de gérer l'affichage des fenêtres. Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq fenêtres. Élément Description [Mode d'affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre [Normal], [Rendu Parfait] et [Rendu intelligent]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. [Codage] Spécifiez le type de codage à utiliser pour l'affichage des contenus. [Paramètres Détaillés] Configurez les paramètres d'affichage des contenus. • [Image] : cochez cette case pour afficher les images. • [Animation] : cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. • [Tableau] : cochez cette case pour identifier le tableau en HTML et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. • [JavaScript] : cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript du contenu. • [CSS] : cochez cette case pour activer le CSS du contenu. • [Retour ligne auto] : cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto du contenu. • [Contrô Conto Ligne Caract] : cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle de délimitation du nombre de caractères par ligne dans le contenu. • [Rendu Rapide] : cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. • [Fenêtre instantanée] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'affichage de la fenêtre instantanée. • [Autorisation hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'utilisation des contenus hors ligne. • [Lecture Auto Flash] : cochez cette case pour lire automatiquement un contenu Flash. • [Activer Affichage hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour activer la visualisation des contenus hors ligne. Cette commande est affichée lorsque l'[Autorisation hors ligne] est accordée par l'administrateur. [Réglage Sélection des couleurs] Déterminez une couleur pour l'élément sélectionné ([Vert], [Bleu], [Jaune], or [Orange]). Élément Description [Créer nouvelle fenêtre] Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Ouvrir ds nlle fenêtre] Affiche la liste de liens dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Fermer la fenêtre active] Ferme la fenêtre active. [Fermer les autres fenêtres] Ferme toutes les fenêtres. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'une seule fenêtre d'ouverte. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6.4 [Réglages] L'onglet [Réglages] vous permet de vérifier et de réinitaliser les informations concernant le navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages opératoires et de sécurité du navigateur Web. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - Les réglages suivants sont accessibles aux utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en se connectant à My Panel. – [Réglage Démarrage] – Réglage de suppression des [Cookies] – Réglage de suppression des [Informations d'authentification] - My Panel peut contenir jusqu'à 20 éléments de cookies et d'informations d'authentification par utilisateur. Élément Description [Réglage Démarrage]* Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée en fin de session. [Sécurité]* Configure le paramètre SSL ou TLS ou afficher un certificat racine ou un certificat CA. [Cookies]* Permet de configurer les réglages de réception et de suppression des cookies. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les cookies enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Cache]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation et de suppression des caches. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les caches enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Proxy]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation du serveur proxy. Enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy, utilisez-le. Si l'authentification proxy est nécessaire, enregistrez l'ID et le code d'accès à utiliser dans l'authentification proxy. [Informations d'authentification]* Spécifiez le délai au bout duquel supprimer les informations d'authentification entrées dans les contenus. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer toutes les informations d'authentification enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Journal Accès]* Permet d'établir l'historique des accès de tous les utilisateurs. Vous pouvez vérifier par [ID], [Nom d'utilisateur], [URL] et par [Accès]. [Infos Navigateur Web] Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web [Réinitialiser] Redémarrez le navigateur Web. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document Vous pouvez imprimer, afficher ou enregistrer un fichier document si le lien d'accès vers ce document figure dans le contenu affiché. - Les formats PDF et XPS sont pris en charge pour les fichiers documents. - Vous ne pouvez pas afficher un fichier XPS. Appuyez sur le lien du fichier document dans le contenu pour afficher le premier écran du fichier document. 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le fichier document est téléchargé et imprimé. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] En appuyant sur cette touche vous pouvez préciser si vous souhaitez imprimer la [date et l'heure] et les [numéros de page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer un fichier document qui utilise une grande quantité de mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - Si le PDF téléchargé est crypté, il est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF crypté sans être imprimé. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher le fichier PDF de destination. La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, réduire, imprimer ou enregistrer le fichier PDF. Touche Description Retour à la première page. Retour à la page précédente. Affiche la page suivante. Affiche la dernière page. Rotation de l'affichage de 90° dans le sens horaire. Augmente le taux de zoom. Réduit le taux de zoom. Affiche en fonction de la largeur de la zone d'affichage. Affiche la page entière. Sélection de la Boîte Utilisateur pour enregistrer le fichier document. Configure les réglages d'impression et imprime le fichier document. Affiche la fenêtre Splash (affichage momentané pendant l'activation du logiciel). Ferme l'écran. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Enregistr.]. L'écran de sélection des boîtes est affiché. Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier, appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Départ] ou Départ. Le fichier document est alors enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur. Référence - La boîte doit être enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction préalablement à l'enregistrement d'un fichier document. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. - Pendant l'impression d'un fichier document (en couleur) enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur à partir du navigateur Web, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier la commande [Zoom] ou [Combinaison]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document Si des fichiers de document sont partagés sur le serveur, vous pouvez charger un fichier de document numérisé ou un fichier de document dans une Boîte utilisateur sur le serveur via un navigateur Web. Cette section explique comment charger un fichier de document en utilisant le site de chargement suivant à titre d'exemple. Exemple 4.8.1 Restrictions Notez que l'utilisation de cette fonction est liée aux restrictions suivantes. - PDF, TIFF ou XPS est le type de fichier de document qu'il est possible de charger. Un document ne peut pas être divisé pour chargement. - Plusieurs fichiers de document peuvent être chargés simultanément. - L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier manuellement la zone de texte du nom de fichier. - Si vous procédez à l'une des opérations suivantes après avoir sélectionner un fichier de document à charger, la tâche est supprimée en même temps que le fichier de document sélectionné. – La fonction Réinitialisation Auto Système a été lancée. – Le Navigateur Web a été fermé. – Le site de chargement a été mis à jour par actionnement de la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. – Le Navigateur Web a été relancé. – L'utilisateur s'est déconnecté pendant le traitement de la procédure de connexion. – L'Interrupteur auxiliaire d'alimentation a été coupé. – Initial. a été actionné pour réinitialiser l'écran. 4.8.2 Chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé Ce qui suit explique la procédure de chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs désactivés pour la numérisation de données. - Le format de fichier ne peut pas être réglé sur JPEG lors de la numérisation d'un original à charger. 1 Affichez le site de chargement à l'aide du navigateur Web du MFP. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. Élément Description [Parcourir] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. "type" est réglé sur "fichier" dans le tag d'entrée de HTML. [OK] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour charger un fichier de document. "type" est réglé sur "soumettre" dans le tag d'entrée de HTML. 4 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Appuyez sur [Numérisation]. 4 Placer l'original à charger sur le MFP. 5 Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Démarrer. % Si Épreuve est sélectionné, vous pouvez vérifier la finition. Une fois la numérisation terminée, le nom de fichier s'affiche dans la zone de texte. 6 Appuyez sur le bouton pour commencer à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Le chargement d'un fichier de document commence alors. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-25 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4 4.8.3 Chargement d'un fichier de document dans une boîte Ce qui suit explique la procédure de chargement d'un fichier de document récupéré dans une boîte. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs pour lesquels l'accès aux documents enregistrés a été désactivé. - Avant de charger un fichier de document dans une boîte, créez une boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier de document. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que la Boîte Public et une Boîte Privée. - Le format de fichier ne peut pas être réglé sur JPEG en cas de sélection d'un fichier de document à charger depuis une boîte. Lors de la sélection d'un fichier de document JPEG enregistré dans une boîte, le format de fichier est changé en PDF. Si nécessaire, spécifiez le format de fichier approprié avant de charger un fichier de document. - Lors du chargement d'un fichier de document enregistré dans une boîte alors que la Séparation de page est activée, cette fonction est annulée et changée en Multi-pages. 1 Affichez le site de chargement à l'aide du navigateur Web du MFP. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Boîte Utilis.]. 4 Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur et appuyez sur [Utiliser document] 5 Sélectionnez un fichier de document à charger et appuyez sur [Réglages fichier]. % Sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers de document et appuyez sur [Combiner] ; ils peuvent être combinés en un seul fichier. L'ordre de combinaison peut être modifié à loisir. % Sélectionnez un fichier de document et appuyez sur [Détails document] pour vérifier la date et l'heure à laquelle le fichier de document a été enregistré et pour afficher un aperçu de l'image. 6 Configurez les paramètres du fichier et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Démarrer. % Appuyez sur [Application] pour configurer le paramètre d'impression du tampon ou de numéro de page. Le nom de fichier apparaît dans la zone de texte. 4 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 7 Appuyez sur le bouton pour commencer à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Le chargement d'un fichier de document commence alors. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP incorpore à la machine. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire, accédez directement à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau à l'aide de Navigateur Web. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire à l'aide du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, seule la fonction Boîte est disponible. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser les documents de la boîte de l'imprimante multifonction sur le réseau en exploitant PageScope Web Connection au moyen du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. - L'Option Internet LK-101 v2 doit être enregistrée également dans la destination d'accès de l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, voir page 4-3. - Pour utiliser PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un Navigateur Web installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs fonctions de l'imprimante multifonction telles que les fonctions de vérification d'état, de modification de réglages et de paramétrage du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 5.1.1 Vérification préalable Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les écrans de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - La modification des réglages du cache nécessite l'autorité administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du Navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages] et sélectionnez [Cache]. 5 Décochez la case [Utiliser cache] et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5.1.2 Modalité d'accès Lancez le navigateur Web et spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre. 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 5 Composition de l'écran 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 Référence - Si vous avez dénié la réception de cookies dans les paramètres du navigateur Web, l'écran de PageScope Web Connection n'apparaît pas. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages cookies, voir page 4-18. - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrée URL. 5.2 Composition de l'écran La conception de l'écran PageScope Web Connection est la suivante. N°. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, utilisateur ou compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode en cours. 5 Affichage du contenu Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion 5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si vous avez spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran de connexion apparaît après l'affichage de PageScope Web Connection. Référence - Si vous n'avez pas spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. - Lorsque vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection à l'aide du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, le mode administrateur n'est pas disponible. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. Si vous avez précisé une authentification par serveur externe, sélectionnez un serveur externe d'identification. Entrez les informations requises et appuyez sur [Connexion]. Sélectionnez le cas échéant une langue d'affichage. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte département connecté. 5.3.2 Déconnexion Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran pour afficher un écran de confirmation de déconnexion. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran de connexion réapparaît. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Exploitation des documents de la boîte utilisateur de l'imprimante multifonction en cours d'utilisation par une différente imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. - Utilisation des types de boîte publique, privée ou de groupe. - Affichage, impression et suppression d'un document de la boîte utilisateur. 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte La connexion avec PageScope Web Connection affiche la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et de groupes) enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction à laquelle on accède. [Connexion de boîte] Sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) dans la liste de boîtes. Alternativement, vous pouvez saisir directement un numéro de boîte ([N° Bte Ut.]) et un mot de passe de boîte ([Mot de passe de boîte]), puis appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Lorsque vous sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) pour laquelle il est spécifié un mot de passe dans la [Liste des boîtes], l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. [Connexion de boîte] [Liste des boîtes] Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Change l'affichage de l'index selon les index sélectionnés lors de la création d'une boîte utilisateur. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. Liste des boîtes Affiche le [N° Bte Ut.], le [Nom Bte Util.], le [Type] et le l'[Heure enregistrée]. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté de chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 [Liste de fichiers] Sélectionnez une boîte dans [Connexion de boîte]. Les informations de base de la boîte s'affichent ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes] Permet d'afficher les vignettes des documents. Réglez sur [OFF (NON)] pour l'affichage de liste. [Spécifiez l'opération] Permet la sélection d'une opération. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8. [Modifier l'affichage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la case [Sélectionner] à côté de tous les documents pour lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Sélectionner] Affiche une case à côté de tous les documents avec lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Vignette] Affiche le document sous forme de vignette. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [Nombre d'originaux] Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Le document sélectionné peut être imprimé ou supprimé. Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Impression] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît en regard de tous les documents imprimables. 2 Cochez la case du document à imprimer et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 3 Configurez les réglages nécessaires et appuyez sur [OK]. % Dans la [Plage de pages], sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifier les pages à imprimer. % Dans [Changer l'ordre], vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression en cas d'impression de plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. % En cas de pression sur [Voir], un fichier PDF s'affiche. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . 6 Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Si la [Version de fonction] de la destination MFP n'est pas [Version 3], appuyez sur [Ouvrir fichier] à l'étape 4 pour afficher le fichier PDF sur l'écran. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . Pour vérifier la version de fonction du MFP, sélectionnez [Infos périphérique] sous [Utilitaire]. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Supprimer] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. % Cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)] pour sélectionner tous les documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et appuyez sur [OK]. Le document est supprimé. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Présentation 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. - L'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible si [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] ö [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] est réglé sur [Limiter] dans [Réglages Administrateur]. Fonctions Image Panel divise le processus d'opération en trois séquences, à savoir la "lecture d'un document", la "modification d'un document" et la "spécification d'un destinataire", qui peuvent être exécutées sur un seul écran. Ceci permet d'appréhender facilement à la fois le processus dans son ensemble et l'opération en cours. Image Panel se concentre sur l'opérabilité. Pour cette raison, les fonctions disponibles dans Image Panel sont limitées en comparaison avec le panneau conventionnel. Lorsque les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Panel, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. 6 Afficher Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Image Panel] pour afficher le premier écran Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants. N°. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone de lecture des données Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. 3 Zone Desktop Les documents lus dans la zone de lecture des données sont affichés en vue Vignettes ou en vue Liste. 4 Echange Affichage Liste/Vue Vignettes Permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone bureau en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche un message auxiliaire tel que les instructions d'utilisation. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. En cas d'alerte, une icône d'alerte apparaît. 7 Zone Outil d'édition Modifie la page, combine et modifie les paramètres du document après numérisation. 8 Echange Magasin Envoi/Affichage Outil d'édition Permet d'interchanger l'affichage Magasin Envoi et Outil d'édition. Pour plus de détails sur le magasin envoi, voir page 6-18. 9 Zone Destinataire Document Spécifiez une destination du document lu dans [Impression] ou [Liste destination]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 Opérations générales Cette section décrit le processus des opérations depuis la lecture du document jusqu'au traitement d'envoi en présentant les séquences d'Image Panel en commençant par la "lecture d'un document", puis la "modification d'un document" et enfin la "spécification d'un destinataire". Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire avant de lire le document. La zone Lecture des données permet de numériser ou de récupérer un document. • Pour numériser un document, placez-le et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation souhaités et lancez la lecture du document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-8. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-9. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-10. • Pour utiliser des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-11. Sélectionnez [Numéris.] Sélectionnnez [Liste Source Document]. Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-12. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Dans la zone Destinataire Document, sélectionnez le destinataire du document numérisé. • Pour imprimer, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-16. • Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez un destinataire dans [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. • Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] sur l'écran Liste destination. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-18. Sélectionnez [Impression]. Sélectionnez [Liste Destinat.] Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 6-18. Appuyez sur Départ pour envoyer le document. • Pour envoyer les données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, appuyez sur Départ pour afficher un code PIN. Entrez le code PIN dans le téléphone cellulaire ou le PDA pour envoyer les données à l'imprimante multifonction. Les données sont envoyées à la destination spécifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-20. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. Numérisation d'un document Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran des paramètres de numérisation. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Référence - Vous ne pouvez numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Élément Description [Type original] Sélectionnez la qualité d'image dans [Texte], [Texte/Photo], [Photo], [Original Tramé] et [Papier copié] en fonction du contenu de l'original à numériser. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Permet de spécifier un original recto ou recto-verso. [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [200 e 100 dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Contraste] Réglez la densité de numérisation. [Couleur] Sélection de la couleur de numérisation entre [Couleur Auto], [Couleurs], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document. [Numér. Séparée] Appuyez sur cette touche pour diviser la numérisation du document en plusieurs fois. Utile dans les cas suivants. • Lorsque le nombre de pages du document dépasse la capacité du chargeur ADF. • En cas d'utilisation de la vitre d'exposition • En cas d'originaux mixtes recto et recto-verso bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher l'écran Utiliser document. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte sélectionnée, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. - Vous pouvez récupérer jusqu'à 10 documents à la fois. - Si vous spécifiez une boîte utilisateur comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier comme destination la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle vous avez récupéré le document. Élément Description [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher la liste des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Pour récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe, vous devez configuer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction en fonction du propos du document à utiliser. – Pour imprimer un document récupéré, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Système]ö [Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Imprimer document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö[Impression] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. – Pour enregistrer un document récupéré dans une boîte utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Réglages Système]ö[Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Les formats de fichiers disponibles pour l'impression sont PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. - Il est possible de récupérer jusqu'à 200 documents provenant d'une mémoire externe. - Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. - La spécification simultanée d'un document JPEG et d'un autre format est impossible. - Vous ne pouvez pas lire un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez seulement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre qu'une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Utilisation de données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA Sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Après sélection de [Mobile/PDA] et pression de la touche [OK], l'icône téléphone cellulaire s'affiche dans la zone du bureau. Référence - Pour connecter l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA, installez l'option Kit d'interface locale EK-605 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez également les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction. – Réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglage Bluetooth] sur [Activer]. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Connexion Système]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA] sur [Permis]. – Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö[Téléphone cellulaire/PDA] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous sélectionnez [Mobile/PDA], vous ne pouvez pas lire un document à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre que [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mobile]. - Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - Pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, vous devez configurer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante au préalable, dans la mesure où un fichier de liaison est récupéré à l'aide de la fonction client WebDAV. – Réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglages WebDAV]ö[Réglages Client WebDAV] sur [ON (OUI)]. – Pour établir la connexion via un serveur mandataire, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Adresse du serveur proxy] des [Réglages Client WebDAV]. Réglez aussi [Réglages Utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Oui]. – Dans [Réglages Utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Notification Erreur Fichier Liaison], spécifiez l'opération que la machine doit exécuter lorsqu'elle est incapable de récupérer un fichier de liaison. Élément Caractéristiques Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier de support PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Fichier XHTML de support Code de caractère : UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension du fichier de liaison : JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, voir page 6-20. La fonction permettant la connexion de l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA est disponible même si le kit de licence n'est pas enregistré. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] et au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 6.3.4 Editer le document Editer le document en lecture. Référence - Lorsque vous utilisez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, vous ne pouvez pas vérifier l'image d'aperçu ni modifier les données. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. Référence - La fonction [Aperçu] n'est pas disponible dans le cas de documents récupérés d'une mémoire externe. - Dans le cas de combinaison de documents, la fonction d'aperçu est disponible uniquement pour le premier document. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] – [Modifier document] Editer les pages d'un document sélectionné. Vous avez la possibilité de pivoter les pages numérisées dans le mauvais sens ou de supprimer les pages inutiles. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre des pages d'un document composé de plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez également faire un aperçu des pages pour vérifier leur contenu. Référence - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible en cas de combinaison de documents. Élément Description [Pg Impaire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages impaires. [Page paire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages paires. [Aperçu/Déf. Plage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour faire visualiser les pages. [Suppr. page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la page sélectionnée. [Pivoter Page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour pivoter la page sélectionnée. Les angles de rotation autorisée sont 90° à gauche, 90° à droite et 180°. [Déplacer Page] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier l'ordre de pagination en déplaçant la page sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner la position désirée en déplaçant la vignette de la page correspondante à l'endroit voulu. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] – [Combiner Documents] Cette fonction permet de combiner plusieurs documents sélectionnés. Vous pouvez utiliser la touche [Déplacer] pour modifier l'ordre de combinaison. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner [Impression] ou [Liste Destinat.] comme destination d'un document combiné. - Vous pouvez combiner un maximum de 10 documents à la fois. - Vous ne pouvez combiner un document numérisé à un document récupéré d'une boîte utilisateur. [Document/Page] – [Réglages Document] Permet de configurer les réglages pour l'envoi du document sélectionné. Vous pouvez modifier la résolution du document, le type de fichier et ajuster les couleurs. Référence - La fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - Si vous avez sélectionné un document provenant d'une mémoire externe, la fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible. Élément Description [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre Réglages pendant l'enregistrement, [][200 e 100 dpi (Par défaut),][200 e 200 dpi (Fin),] [300 e 300] dpi, [400 e 400 dpi (Super fin) et][600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin).] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] Appuyez sur [Retour à Dest. Numér.] pour restaurer la localisation source du document sélectionné. - Le document numérisé est supprimé de l'imprimante multifonction. - Le document provenant d'une boîte retourne dans la boîte source. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Couleur] Sélection des couleurs de numérisation entre [Utiliser réglage couleur existant], [Couleur], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. Élément Description 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination Spécifie le destinataire du document en lecture. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer des données directement de l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - La fonction Réglage impression n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas compatibles avec l'impression de documents combinés. - Lorsque vous imprimez un document à mot de passe intégré à l'aide de la fonction Copie via mot de passe, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier [Combinaison] ni [Zoom]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Copie via mot de passe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - Les options [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas disponibles à l'impression d'un document provenant d'une mémoire externe. - L'option [Recto-Verso] n'est pas disponible à l'impression d'un document au format JPEG, XPS ou XPS Compact XPS provenant d'une mémoire externe. Les paramètres Agrafage et Perforation sont également inaccessibles dans les réglages de finition.[] - Lorsque vous imprimez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, seuls les réglages d'impression vous sont accessibles. Pour changer les réglages d'impression, sélectionnez [Réglages utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Impression]. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer à l'aide du pavé numérique. [Impression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Finition] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages Assemblé, Groupe, Agrafage ou Perforation. [Combinaison] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la combinaison de pages. Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule page. [Zoom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le taux de zoom du document. [Impression continue] Cette fonction est disponible à l'impression de documents combinés en mode recto-verso. Les documents combinés sont imprimés en continu. En cas d'impression en mode recto-verso, précisez si vous souhaitez démarrer l'impression du document suivant au verso ou au recto d'une nouvelle page lorsque la dernière page du document en cours d'impression figure au recto. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Référence - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction de l'option installée. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. - [Impression continue] s'affiche lorsque vous combinez plusieurs documents avec l'outil d'édition et que vous sélectionnez [Impression] comme destination. Spécifier des destinations Dans [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez une adresse à laquelle vous souhaitez envoyer un document. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recher simple] pour vous reporter aux destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées dans l'unité principale. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Groupe] pour vous reporter à la liste des groupes enregistrés dans l'unité principale. Référence - En cas de lecture de plusieurs documents, la fonction Boîte n'est pas disponible. - Si la fonction My address est disponible, vous pouvez visualiser votre carnet d'adresses en appuyant sur [My Address]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. - Si vous avez spécifié une adresse, vous pouvez vérifier le magasin d'envoi en appuyant sur [Vérifier Réglage Bac Adresse/Adresse distante]. - Les adresses E-mail pour lesquelles un certificat est enregistré, sont affichées avec une touche à icône. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier des boîtes utilisateur comme destination de carnet d'adresse d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe ou d'un document enregistré sur un téléphone cellulaire ou sur un PDA. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Destinat.] et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Système]ö[Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Enregistre document] sur [ON (Oui)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification utilisateur]ö [Enregistrement utilisateur], réglez [Autoiser Fonction]ö[Enregistrer dans Mémoire Externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous choisissez [Impression] ou un destinataire comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi Magasin Envoi Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Le magasin d'envoi affiche l'icône de la destination spécifiée. N°. Nom Description 1 Icône Paramètre Destination Appuyez sur l'icône Vérifier Adresse pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. 2 Icône Destination Affiche les icônes des destinations. Appuyez sur l'icône de la destination désirée pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Envoi dans lequel vous pouvez vérifier les informations détaillées de la destination. 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Vérifier Mag. EMI] Appuyez sur l'icône du magasin d'envoi pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. Si la destination spécifiée est une adresse E-mail, vous pouvez spécifier les réglages de cryptage E-mail et d'insertion de signature numérique. Référence - Pour crypter un message E-mail et joindre une signature numérique à l'aide de S/MIME, réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglages E-Mail]ö[Réglages Communication S/MIME] sur [ON (Oui)]. - Un certificat doit être enregistré dans l'adresse E-mail pour pouvoir crypter un E-mail. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique à un message E-mail, le certificat de périphérique doit être enregistré sur cette machine. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö [Réglages E-Mail]ö[Réglages Communication S/MIME]ö[Signature numérique] sur [Toujours signer] ou [Sélect. à l'envoi]. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Élément Description [Réglages Adresse Distante] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour configurer les réglages de cryptage selon le protocole S/MIME et de la signature numérique. Ce réglage est disponible si vous sélectionnez [ON (Oui)] pour [Réglages Communication S/MIME] des [Réglages Administrateur] et si vous sélectionnez E-mail. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées de l'adresse. [Eff.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA La sélection d'une destination et la pression de la touche Départ affichent le code PIN sur le panneau de contrôle. Spécifiez les données que vous voulez utiliser et l'imprimante multifonction où envoyer les données du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. Entrez ensuite le code PIN pour envoyer les données sur l'imprimante multifonction. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. – Pour plus d'information sur la manière de créer une boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - À propos du fonctionnement d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du téléphone ou du PDA correspondant. - La vitesse de communication peut être réduite ou la communication peut être interrompue par des obstacles, la qualité des signaux, un champ magnétique ou l'électricité statique. - Les documents et les données d'image peuvent ne pas être envoyés correctement en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Le navigateur Web de votre ordinateur vous permet d'accéder à PageScope Web Connection pour ajouter des données photo à des destinations enregistrées en numérotation abrégée. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la [Liste Destinat.] d'Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo Les spécifications nécessaires à l'enregistrement des données photo sont indiquées ci-dessous. Référence - Pendant le processus d'enregistrement des données photo, celles-ci ne sont pas agrandies ni réduites. Élément Caractéristiques Type Fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6966 octets 6 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo Enregistrer des données photo en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir du navigateur Web de votre ordinateur. Référence - Pour ajouter des données photo au carnet d'adresses, vous devez enregistrer à l'avance des destinations en numérotation abrégée. - Lorsque la fonction My Address est disponible, vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée dans My Address Book. - Vous devez être connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré pour pouvoir ajouter des données photo dans My Address Book. 1 Connectez-vous en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez [Enr. Dest.]. 3 Sélectionnez [Photo/Icône.] 4 Sélectionnez la destination en numérotation abrégée à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des données photo, puis cliquez sur [Editer]. % Lorsque les données photo sont enregistrées, [Photo/Icône] est affiche dans [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 5 Sélectionnez [Enregistrer photo]. 6 Cliquez sur [Browse] et spécifiez le dossier où sont enregistrées les données photo que vous souhaitez ajouter. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les données photo sont ajoutées à la destination en numérotation abrégée. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel Lorsque les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, les conditions requises sont les suivantes. - Les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré dans l'authentification utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Panel, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone de lecture des données pour les boîtes fréquemment utilisées. 1 Dans [Source Données], appuyez sur [Liste Source Document]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur que vous voulez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de lecture des données. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une boîte utilisateur déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-25 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone Destinataire Document pour les destinations fréquemment utilisées. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.] [dans la zone Destin. Données.] 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination que vous souhaitez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de destination des documents. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'icône de raccourci est supprimée. 7 Fonction de traitement PDF bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Présentation 7 7 Fonction de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet de spécifier le niveau de sécurité pour la distribution de documents numérisés et enregistrés dans une boîte utilisateur, comme le cryptage du document ou l'ajout de signature numérique s'il y a lieu. Référence - Il est possible d'utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée. Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Configuration des réglages des propriétés du document pour sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-4). - Cryptage d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique (touche Public) lors de sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-5). - Ajout d'une signature numérique lors d'une distribution sous forme de document PDF crypté (p. 7-5). - Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe (p. 7-8). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 7 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte vous permet de configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande [Enregistrer document] de la fonction Boîte, vous ne pouvez pas configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. - Lorsque vous envoyez un document de boîte au format PDF dans un autre périphérique à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Élément Description [Titre] Si vous sélectionnez [Non] pour [Appliq. Nom fichier], spécifiez le titre du document PDF (jusqu'à 64 caractères). [Appliq. Nom fichier] Permet d'appliquer le nom de fichier comme nom du document PDF. [Auteur] Entrée de l'auteur du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). Lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est exécutée, le nom de connexion est entré comme nom d'auteur. [Sujet] Entrée du sous-titre du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). [Mots-clés] Entrée ds mots-clés du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte permet d'améliorer la sécurité des documents PDF en les cryptant à l'aide du mot de passe ou de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (touche Public). L'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur l'imprimante permet d'ajouter une signature numérique aux documents PDF distribués. L'ajout d'une signature numérique certifie l'auteur (imprimante multifonction) du document envoyé et garantit que le document n'a pas été modifié après la signature. Référence - Avec PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez procéder au cryptage d'un document et y ajouter une signature numérique pour l'envoyer dans une boîte utilisateur vers un autre périphérique au format PDF. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique, il est nécessaire de crypter le document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique. 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe Pour crypter un document par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] [exclut l'élément spécifié dans Propriétés Document PDF de la cible de cryptage.] La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] ne vous permet pas de sélectionner un [niveau faible] de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau faible] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits), gérée par Acrobat 3.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur [Code d'accès] Entrez le mot de passe requis pour ouvrir un document PDF. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le même mot de passe que celui spécifié sous [Code d'accès]. Après avoir configuré les permissions du document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour configurer les réglages détaillés des autorisations. Les valeurs définies dépendent du niveau de cryptage. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Paramètres Détaillés] 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique Configurez les réglages suivants pour crypter un document à l'aide de l'ID numérique d'un utilisateur. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Permettre seulement Basse résolution] peut être sélectionné si le niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé 1] ou [Niveau élevé 2]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Spécifier Mise en page, Entrer Texte + Insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter les pages, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à faible niveau de sécurité. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner des destinations. L'écran de sélection d'adresse affiche la liste des adresses E-mail dotées d'ID numériques enregistrés pour l'envoi S/MIME. Spécifiez l'ID numérique à utiliser pour le cryptage en sélectionnant une adresse E-mail. La sélection de [Même que destination] utilise l'ID numérique de l'adresse ; vous n'avez pas besoin de spécifier un ID numérique sur cet écran. La spécification de cet ID numérique est indépendante de la spécification d'une adresse ; vous devez donc spécifier une adresse séparément. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 [Paramètres Détaillés] Référence - Le cryptage commandé par ID numérique nécessite l'enregistrement préalable du certificat de l'utilisateur dans l'adresse E-mail. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat d'utilisateur dans une adresse E-mail, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. - L'ID numérique spécifiable dépend du niveau appliqué à l‘utilisateur. - Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans une boîte, il n'est pas possible de le crypter par un ID numérique. - Lors du cryptage d'un document PDF et de la création simultanée d'un document PDF recherchable, les paramètres suivants ne sont pas disponibles si [Ajuster rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le réglage du PDF recherchable. Par défaut [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster]. Modifiez le réglage en fonction des besoins. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction PDF adressable, voir page 8-3. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. Le cryptage d'un document avec un ID numérique ne permet pas de sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour le niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Élément Description 7 Impression directe 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Impression directe Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe. Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour imprimer les documents en mode d'impression directe. Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez [Impression directe]. Cliquez sur [Browse] pour localiser le fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 8 Fonction PDF adressable bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Présentation 8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation PDF adressable renvoie à une fonction qui crée un fichier PDF adressable en collant des données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF ou PDF compact à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. La fonction PDF adressable prend en charge plusieurs langues. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF adressable, sélectionnez la langue appropriée à l'original pour permettre un traitement de lecture optique correct. Vous pouvez aussi améliorer la précision du traitement de lecture optique en corrigeant automatiquement l'orientation des pages. Si vous souhaitez gérer des documents papier au format électronique, il est recommandé d'utiliser la fonction PDF adressable pour convertir les documents en fichier PDF adressable. Référence - Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables Selon l'état des originaux, la reconnaissance du texte peut être problématique, le texte risque d'être tronqué ou d'autres problèmes peuvent se produire. Exemple - Les caractères qui ne sont pas pris en charge par l'imprimante multifonction ne seront pas reconnus correctement. - Si une langue différente de celle de l'original est sélectionnée à la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, le texte ne sera pas reconnu correctement. - Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de correction automatique d'orientation des pages, voir page 8-5. Taille de caractère reconnaissable Référence - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF recherchable, il est impossible de spécifier une résolution supérieure à 300 dpi pour la numérisation. Japonais Langue européenne Langue asiatique Définition 200 dpi 12 pt à 142 pt 9 pt à 142 pt 20 pt à 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt à 96 pt 6 pt à 96 pt 12 pt à 96 pt 8 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR Avant de créer un fichier PDF adressable, vous pouvez spécifier si vous donnez la priorité à la précision ou la vitesse d'exécution pour le traitement OCR. [Réglage Opération ROC] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaires/Compteur. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax]. 4 Dans [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Opération ROC]. 5 Sélectionnez le traitement OCR et appuyez sur [Valider]. % [Priorité Qualité] : priorité est donnée à la précision de reconnaissance d'un texte original. L'inclinaison des originaux est aussi réglée automatiquement. % [Priorité Vitesse] : priorité est donnée à la vitesse d'exécution du traitement OCR. L'inclinaison des originaux n'est pas réglée automatiquement. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en sélectionnant [PDF] ou [PDF compact] comme type de fichier lorsque vous enregistrez ou envoyez un original au format PDF en utilisant les fonctions Numérisation et Boîte Utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Boîte Utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [PDF compact] comme [Type Fichier] pour créer un fichier PDF adressable, la vitesse de traitement OCR peut être plus grande que lorsque vous sélectionnez [PDF]. - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, [Définition] ne peut pas être réglé sur [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] ou [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. - Pour créer un fichier PDF recherchable et crypter simultanément un fichier PDF, si l'un des paramètres suivants est spécifié, [Ajuster rotation] ne peut pas être réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre de cryptage PDF. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus de détails sur la manière de crypter un fichier PDF, voir page 7-5. - Pour le [Japanese], le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], l'orientation du texte (écriture verticale ou horizontale) est reconnue automatiquement. Toutefois, pour le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], si les deux orientations de texte verticale et horizontale sont utilisées sur la même page, le traitement de l'original repose sur l'une ou l'autre orientation. - Le téléchargement ou l'envoi d'un document configuré comme fichier PDF recherchable et enregistré dans une Boîte Utilisateur avec PageScope Web Connection entraîne l'annulation du réglage PDF et l'abandon de la recherche du texte. Élément Description [Sélection Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser pour créer un fichier PDF adressable. Pour une reconnaissance correcte du texte, la langue sélectionnée doit être appropriée à l'original. [Ajuster Rotation] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez la rotation automatique de chaque page pour corriger l'orientation en fonction de l'orientation du texte détectée par la reconnaissance optique OCR. Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. 8 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Présentation 9 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) 9.1 Présentation La fonction My Panel permet la gestion centrale de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur conformément à l'application (My Panel) et la mise à disposition de My Panel sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. L'utilisation de My Panel procure la même opérationnalité sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction en réseau. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages My Panel à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec My Panel My Panel vous permet de personnaliser le panneau de contrôle pour afficher de préférence les fonctions les plus fréquemment utilisées. Par ailleurs, si le navigateur Web ou Image Panel est disponible, vous pouvez l'associer à PageScope My Panel Manager pour gérer les réglages du navigateur Web et les informations de chaque utilisateur et personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. Eléments personnalisables My Panel vous permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Spécification de la langue affichée sur le panneau de contrôle - Spécification d'une unité de mesure à afficher lors de la saisie de nombres - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Spécification de la couleur des touches sélectionnées du panneau de contrôle - Affichage du menu principal de My Panel - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle 9 Présentation 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web Vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à My Panel. My Panel vous permet de gérer les réglages suivants et les informations de chaque utilisateur. - Page d'accueil - Favoris - Historique d'affichage des contenus - Historique de saisie URL - Cookie - Informations d'authentification dPour info Enregistrez une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide du navigateur Web. L'historique d'affichage et de saisie, les cookies et les informations d'authentification sont automatiquement sauvegardées dans le serveur au fur et à mesure que l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du navigateur Web, voir page 4-3. Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'enregistrement d'une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel En associant Image Panel à My Panel ou My Address Book, vous pouvez enregistrer des raccourcis de source document et de destination dans l'écran de base d'Image Panel afin de personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation d'Image Panel. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à My Address Book pour spécifier une destination à laquelle envoyer des données. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation de l'écran, voir page 6-24. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.1 Présentation 9 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Panel Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Panel à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de My Panel pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Panel n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Panel Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à l'utilisation de My Panel. - Les fonctions d'enregistrement, d'édition et de suppression de My Panel sont uniquement accessibles aux utilisateurs disposant de My Panel. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur My Panel. - Lorsque vous accédez à My Panel pour la première fois, les réglages de langue, d'unité de mesure et de couleur sont conformes aux réglages de l'imprimante multfonction. - Lorsque vous accédez à My Panel pour la première fois, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de My Panel. - Seule la mémoire de réglage (programme Copie et programme Fax/Numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction que vous utilisez est disponible. - Selon les fonctions ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction sur laquelle My Panel est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que My Panel ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de My Panel peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. My Panel est disponible My Panel est disponible Serveur (gestion de Mon Panneau) (3) Obtention de My Panel (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification My Panel n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de My Panel,etc. 9 Afficher My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.2 9.2 Afficher My Panel 9.2.1 Menu principal Le menu principal apparaît en premier lorsque My Panel s'ouvre. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages. Dans le menu principal, vous pouvez enregistrer 12 types de touches de raccourci. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des réglages du menu principal, voir page 9-15. 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé à la fonction My Panel, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. Pour afficher le menu principal de My Panel depuis un écran initial différent, utilisez le [Menu Application]. Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [My Panel] pour afficher le menu principal de My Panel. dPour info L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans les réglages [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel Personnalisez My Panel dans [Réglages Mon Panneau] des [Utilitaires]. 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] Les éléments personnalisables sont les suivants. Élément Description [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure à utiliser pour afficher les valeurs dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-10. [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-12. [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-14. [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglages Menu Principal] Enregistrez les touches du menu principal sur l'écran Menu principal de My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] Lorsque la fonction My Panel est disponible, [Réglages Mon Panneau] figure dans [Utilitaires]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans My Panel parmi les langues disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de longueur à utiliser dans My Panel. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut pour l'écran De base en mode Copie. [De base] propose un affichage normal de base. [Copie rapide] affiche les éléments de réglage de l'écran des réglages de base sur un seul écran. Cette commande peut servir à spécifier plusieurs réglages à la fois. [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application copie les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction sous [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2], [NON] s'affiche pour indiquer que cette fonction n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. (Exemple : [Densité], [Suppression Fond]) De plus, l'affichage d'une page permettant d'enregistrer une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2] alors que cette fonction n'est pas disponible, entraîne la sélection de [NON]. Si [OK] est sélectionné, le réglage [NON] est imposé à [Touche Raccourci 1] et [Touche Raccourci 2]. Il en résulte que les touches de raccourci ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 [Régl. rapides 1] – [Régl. rapides 4] Attribuent les valeurs de réglage des touches de programme de copie et de la fonction Copie dans l'écran de base. L'attribution des valeurs de réglages les plus fréquemment utilisées et des touches de programme copie dans l'écran de base vous permet de configurer facilement les réglages copie par une simple pression de la touche. Vous pouvez attribuer un maximum de quatre touches. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction sous [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4], [OFF] s'affiche pour indiquer que cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec cette machine. (Exemple : [Couleur]) L'affichage d'une page permettant d'enregistrer une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4] alors que cette fonction n'est pas disponible, entraîne la sélection de [NON].Si [OK] est sélectionné, le réglage [NON] est imposé à [Régl. Rapides 1] et [Régl. Rapides 4]. Il en résulte que les touches Réglages rapides ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle. dPour info Pour attribuer un programme copie dans l'écran de base, vous devez enregistrer ce programme au préalable. Pour plus d'information sur l'enregistrement d'un programme copie, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité] Placez la touche pour ajuster la densité de copie sur l'écran de base. Référence - Lors du transfert de la touche de réglage de densité vers l'écran de base, [Régl. rapides 3] et [Régl. rapides 4] ne sont pas disponibles. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation. [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut] Pour utiliser le carnet d'adresse public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher initialement dans [Carnet Adresses]. Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application fax/numérisation les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. [Carnet d'adresses par défaut] Configurez les réglages de l'écran par défaut de [Carnet Adresses]. [Type adresse par défaut] Pour afficher un carnet d'adresses par type d'adresse, spécifiez un type d'adresse à afficher par défaut. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut de l'écran de base (après pression de la touche Boîte sur le panneau de contrôle) en mode Boîte. [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Disposez les touches de raccourci des boîtes fréquemment utilisées pour les documents boîtes sur l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans My Panel. 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] Personnalise le menu principal de My Panel. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages (programmes Copie et programmes Fax/Numérisation). Touche Menu principal La touche de raccourci affichée dans le menu principal est appelée touche du menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types. Pour enregistrer la mémoire des réglages (programmes copie et programmes fax/numérisation) comme touches du menu principal, appuyez sur la touche [Icône] pour sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal [Fonction], [Réglages Fonction Copie], [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax], [Réglage Programme Copie] et [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] peuvent constituer des touches du menu principal. 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Par défaut, le menu principal My Panel est affiché comme écran initial. Référence - L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans l'écran initial n'est possible que si elles sont activées. Élément Description [Fonction] Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions [Copie], [Numéris./Fax], [Boîte Utilis.], [Image Panel] et [Navigateur Web]. L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans le menu principal n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Fonction Copie] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci dans les réglages Fonction Copie pour chaque réglage [Réglage Papier], [Zoom], [R-Verso/ Combin.] et [Finition]. [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci des réglages de la fonction Numérisation/Fax pour chaque réglage [Réglages Numérisation], [Réglages Original] et [Réglages Comm.]. [Réglage Programme Copie] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages de fax/ numérisation (programme fax/numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages de fax/numérisation (programme fax/numérisation), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Fonction My Address bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Présentation 10 10 Fonction My Address 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction My Address, le carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel My Address Book de l'imprimante sélectionnée. L'utilisation de My Address Book vous permet de vous servir du même carnet d'adresses sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction de votre réseau sans avoir à enregistrer les adresses individuellement sur chacune des imprimantes. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des entrées à My Address Book à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses Lorsque la fonction My Address est disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les deux sortes de carnets d'adresses suivantes. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresse public propose les fonctions suivantes. - Dans le carnet d'adresses public, il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations en numérotation abrégée, des groupes et des programmes. - Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré dans l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction, les destinations disponibles dépendent de l'imprimante sélectionnée. - L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer le carnet d'adresses public. - Si l'administrateur a activé l'interdiction des fonctions d'enregistrement et d'édition de destinations par les utilisateurs, l'enregistrement ou l'édition du carnet d'adresses public est impossible. My Address Book My Address Book est un carnet d'adresses géré par le serveur et accessible uniquement par l'utilisateur. My Address Book propose les fonctions suivantes. - Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans My Address Book. - Du fait que la fonction My Address est retournée par le serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, elle est disponible sur n'importe quelle imprimante multifonction pour peu qu'elle dispose de la fonction My Address. - Seul l'utilisateur spécifié peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer My Panel. 10 Présentation 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Address Book Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Address Book à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de My Address Book pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Address Book n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Address Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à My Address Book. - Seul l'utilisateur qui dispose de My Address Book peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer My Address Book. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur My Address Book. - My Address Book peut contenir 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée et 10 groupes maximum (100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe maximum). - Si le nombre de destinations enregistrées dans My Address Book correspond à la valeur maximale autorisée, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer une nouvelle destination. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans My Address Book. - La recherche de destinations par index est impossible dans My Address Book. - L'opération Boîte est disponible uniquement sur les imprimantes multifonction sur lesquelles des destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction laquelle My Address Book est utilisés, l'émission spécifiée dans le carnet d'adresses peut ne pas être possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de My Address Book peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. My Address Book est disponible My Address Book est disponible Serveur (Gestion de My Address Book) (3) Obtention de My Address Book (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification My Address Book n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination My Address Book permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Vous pouvez enregistrer les adresses au moyen de l'une des méthodes suivantes. - Par le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction - Par PageScope Web Connection depuis un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans My Address Book. Cette section décrit la modalité d'enregistrement des adresses sur le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. 10.2.1 Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer les numéros de fax et les adresses E-mail f ainsi que les boîtes enregistrées fréquemment utilisés en numérotation abrégée. Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses jusqu'à 100 destinataires en numérotation abrégée. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. % Pour ajouter des destinations en numérotation abrégée au carnet d'adresses partagé, appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 10 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier une destination enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches]. 7 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à enregistrer, puis configure les réglages des éléments requis. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les entrées du carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10.2.2 Groupe Vous pouvez regrouper et enregistrer plusieurs destinations en numérotation abrégée du carnet d'adresses en tant que groupe. My Address Book permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 groupes (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des groupes apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches.]. % Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les groupes publics. 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner un groupe privé comme destination d'enregistrement, puis configurez les réglages des éléments requis. % Sélectionnez [Régl. Groupe Destina]. Les adresses enregistrées dans My Address Book sont affichées. Sélectionnez une destination en numérotation abrégée à inclure dans un groupe. dPour info [Pour plus de détails sur le contenu d'enregistrement du groupe, reportez-vous au Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses Les destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées peuvent être copiées de My Address Book vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. Référence - Les groupes ne peuvent pas être copiés de My Address Book d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book Les adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées dans My Address Book. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à copier. La liste des carnets d'adresses enregistrés du type d'adresse sélectionné apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book Les destinations enregistrées dans My Address Book peuvent être copiées dans le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document Utilisez My Address Book pour spécifier une destination lorsque vous envoyez un document avec les fonctions Fax/Numérisation ou lorsque vous envoyez un document dans une boîte. 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations Si vous utilisez les fonctions My Address, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans My Address Book apparaissent par type d'adresse. Sélectionnez la destination souhaitée. Pour sélectionner une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations Si vous ne trouvez pas une adresse, vous pouvez lancer une recherche. Dans l'écran de spécification d'adresse, appuyez sur [Recher simple]. Pour rechercher des destinations d'après le type d'adresse enregistrée, appuyez sur [Type d'adresse]. Pour effectuer une recherche de destinations sur le nom et une partie du contenu d'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Recherche détaillée]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 5-3 Accès aux boîtes 5-6 Acquérir My Panel 9-5 Acquisition de My Address Book 10-4 Affichage 4-21 B Barre d'outils 4-12 Boîte utilisateur 5-6, 6-9 C Cache 5-3 Caractéristiques 4-4, 6-21 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web 4-4 Carnet d'adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Charger 4-23 Code PIN 6-20 Composition de l'écran d'Image Panel 6-5 Composition de l'écran de PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Composition de l'écran Navigateur Web 4-9 Connexion 5-5 D Déconnexion 5-5 E Enregistrement 4-22 F Flash Player 4-4 G Groupe 10-6 H Haut-parleur 4-11 I Image Panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-24 Impression 4-19, 5-8, 6-16 Infos Navigateur Web 4-18 Interdiction du navigateur Web 4-6 M Magasin Envoi 6-18 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Comm 9-6 Mémoire externe 6-18 Mode d'affichage du Navigateur Web 4-11 My Address 2-4, 10-3 My Address Book 10-3, 10-10 My Panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-6 N Navigateur Web 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Numérisation 6-8 O OCR 8-4 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 Paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 PDF adressable 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Personnalisation 3-5, 6-24, 9-7 Photo 6-21 R Rendu intelligent 4-11 Rendu Parfait 4-11 Restrictions dans My Address 10-4 Restrictions sur My Panel 9-5 Réglages My Panel 9-7 S Saisie de texte dans Navigateur Web 4-10 Suppression 5-10 T Téléphone cellulaire/PDA 6-11, 6-20 Touche d'application 3-3, 3-5 Traitement PDF 2-4, 7-3 U Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 Utiliser le Navigateur Web 4-10 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches A Accès au contenu du navigateur Web 4-8 Affichage 4-17 Aperçu 6-12 C Cache 4-18 Carnet Adresses (Privé) 10-5 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut 9-12 Carnet d'adresses par défaut 9-13 Combiner Documents 6-14 Cookie 4-18 Copier vers Carnet partagé 10-9 Copier vers Carnet privé 10-8 Cryptage 7-5 D Destinataire 4-14 Document/Page 6-13, 6-14 G Gestion des fenêtres 4-17 Groupe 10-6 H Histor. 4-14 I ID numérique 7-6 Impression 4-15, 6-16 Impression directe 7-8 Informations d'authentification 4-18 J Journal Accès 4-18 L Lecture 6-8 Liste des destinations 6-17 Liste Source Document 6-9 M Menu 4-16 Menu Application 3-4 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-18 Modifier document 6-13 Mot de passe 7-5 O Onglet par Défaut 9-10, 9-12, 9-14 Opération Page 4-16 P Param. Sélection Couleur 9-15 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-12 Permission Fonction 4-7 Photo/Icône 6-22 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 Proxy 4-18 R Retour à Dest. Numér. 6-15 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 9-14 Réglage Ecran par défaut 9-16 Réglage Langue 9-9 Réglage Navigateur Web 4-6 Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 Réglage Touche Application 3-5 Réglage Unité de mesure 9-9 Réglages 4-18 Réglages Copieur 9-10 Réglages Document 6-14 Réglages Menu Principal 9-15 Réglages My Panel 9-7 Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité 9-11 Réglages rapides 9-11 S Sécurité 4-18 Signet (Affichage) 4-13 Signet (Ajout) 4-13 T Téléphone cellulaire 6-11 Touche d'application 1 3-4 Touche d'application 2 3-4 Touche de raccourci 9-10, 9-13, 9-14 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Type d'adresse par défaut Guide du scanner réseau pour le Fiery S300 50C-KM Prenez connaissance du contenu de ce manuel avant d'imprimer. Conservez-le à portée de la main afin de pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin. 1 Introduction Merci d’avoir acheté le S300 50C-KM. Ce Guide du scanner réseau comprend des instructions relatives à l’utilisation des fonctions et à la sécurité. Lisez-le attentivement. Lisez attentivement ce manuel avant d'effectuer des opérations de numérisation ou d'utiliser l'équipement de quelle manière que ce soit. MARQUES : • Fiery et le logo Fiery sont des marques déposées de Electronics For Imaging, Inc. au Bureau américain des marques et des brevets et dans d’autres juridictions étrangères. • Command WorkStation, WebTools, WebScan et EFI sont des marques de Electronics For Imaging, Inc. • Microsoft, MS, Windows et MS-DOS sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats- Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • Macintosh et PowerMac sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Apple Computer, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • Adobe, Adobe Logo, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées d'Adobe Systems, Inc. • Les autres noms de sociétés et de produits employés dans ce manuel sont des marques commerciales ou déposées de leurs sociétés respectives. Copyright © 2005 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. DISPENSE • Aucune partie de ce manuel ne peut être utilisée ou reproduite sans autorisation. • Le fabricant et le fournisseur déclinent toute responsabilité quant à des incidents résultant de l'utilisation du système d'impression et de ce manuel. • Les informations contenues dans ce Guide du scanner réseau sont soumises à des modifications sans préavis. 2 TABLE DES MATIERES Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1 À propos de ce manuel .................................................................................................... 4 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation.....................................6 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation............................................................... 7 Fonctions de numérisation : définition .................................................................................. 7 Numérisation vers e-mail ...................................................................................................... 7 Disque dur............................................................................................................................. 9 FTP ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE.................................................................................. 11 1-2 Avant utilisation ............................................................................................................. 12 Position/Description du tableau de commande................................................................... 12 Ecran à cristaux liquides ..................................................................................................... 13 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................................................... 13 Structure ............................................................................................................................. 13 Ecran [Sélect. objet émission]............................................................................................. 14 Écran [Réglages de base du scanner]................................................................................ 15 Saisie de texte .................................................................................................................... 16 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation................................18 2-1 Présentation.................................................................................................................... 19 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)...................................................................... 19 Enregistrement d’une adresse e-mail ................................................................................. 19 Révision et suppression de l’adresse e-mail....................................................................... 20 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) ...................................... 20 Enregistrement d’un numéro de boîte................................................................................. 21 Révision et suppression du numéro de boîte...................................................................... 22 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) ......................................................................... 22 Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP....................................................................................... 22 Révision et suppression d’un serveur FTP ......................................................................... 25 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation ....................................... 26 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation ................................................................................ 27 3-2 Sélection de la destination ............................................................................................ 27 Sélection de la destination (E-Mail) .................................................................................... 27 Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur) ....................................................... 31 Sélection de la destination (FTP)........................................................................................ 33 Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE) .................................................................. 35 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine....................................................................... 35 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner ............................................................................ 35 NOM DE FICHIER .............................................................................................................. 36 MODE COULEUR............................................................................................................... 37 FORMAT DE FICHIER ....................................................................................................... 37 MODE NUMERISATION..................................................................................................... 37 FORMAT NUMERIS. .......................................................................................................... 37 QUALITE............................................................................................................................. 38 AGR./RED........................................................................................................................... 38 TABLE DES MATIERES (suite) 3 DENSITÉ NUMÉR. ............................................................................................................. 39 RÉGLAGE COULEUR........................................................................................................ 39 AUTRES ............................................................................................................................. 40 Pleine page......................................................................................................................... 41 Direction de l’original........................................................................................................... 41 Type de document d’origine................................................................................................ 41 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation...................................................................................... 42 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner ........................................................ 42 Affichage du statut de fonctionnement................................................................................ 42 Vérification des paramètres de numérisation...................................................................... 42 Modifiez les paramètres actuels ......................................................................................... 43 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées.............................................. 44 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur ............................................................................. 45 Comment lire des données numérisées ............................................................................. 45 Comment supprimer des données numérisées .................................................................. 45 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail....................................................................... 46 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE.................................................................. 46 Comment utiliser des données numérisées........................................................................ 46 Comment supprimer des données numérisées .................................................................. 47 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable .............................................................................. 48 5-1 Mode responsable.......................................................................................................... 49 Passage en mode responsable .......................................................................................... 49 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination ................................................................ 49 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage ..........................................................................................50 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner .................................................................................... 51 Lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter au scanner............................................ 51 Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser ............................................................................. 51 Annexe......................................................................................................................52 Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit............................................................................. 53 Caractéristiques des fonctions de numérisation du produit ................................................ 53 Index .........................................................................................................................54 4 À propos de ce manuel Ce manuel présente les fonctions du scanner réseau de ce serveur couleur S300 50C-KM. Ce chapitre explique la composition du manuel et les conventions utilisées. Ce manuel part du principe que l’utilisateur sait utiliser les fonctions de base d’un ordinateur et d’un copieur. Pour connaître les fonctions plus avancées des ordinateurs Windows et Macintosh, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation de ces systèmes d’exploitation. Pour connaître les autres fonctions de ce serveur couleur S300 50C-KM, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation correspondants. Composition du manuel Ce manuel se compose des 6 chapitres suivants : Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre présente les fonctions du scanner et indique comment utiliser le tableau de commande. Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre explique les opérations effectuées précédemment pour enregistrer les destinations afin de transmettre/stocker les données de numérisation. Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser les fonctions du scanner réseau. Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées Ce chapitre explique comment importer depuis les destinations les données numérisées à transmettre/stocker dans un ordinateur. Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable Ce chapitre porte sur le mode Responsable utilisé avec les paramètres des fonctions du scanner. Chapitre 6 : Dépannage Ce chapitre explique les procédures à suivre en cas de défaillance du scanner. Annexe Décrit les caractéristiques du contrôleur d’impression. Conventions employées dans ce manuel Les abréviations suivantes sont employées dans ce manuel : Dénomination de chaque produit • S300 50C-KM Serveur couleur S300 50C-KM → contrôleur d’impression Autres • Fonctions du scanner réseau → Fonctions du scanner Utilitaires de ce produit Le système de numérisation et le système d’impression utilisent les utilitaires suivants : Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. • Command WorkStation Utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. Cette application permet de gérer les données de numérisation stockées par la fonction Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE (p.11). • Application Fiery Remote Scan Application permettant d’exécuter la fonction de numérisation à distance du contrôleur d’impression. Cette application permet d’accéder à des données numérisées sur le disque dur du copieur et de les transférer sur un serveur FTP ou vers une adresse e-mail sous forme de pièce jointe. À propos de ce manuel (suite) 5 • Fiery Remote Scan Plug-in Plug -in compatible TWAIN. Cette application permet d’accéder depuis un ordinateur du réseau aux données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur du copieur grâce à des applications compatibles. • Fiery WebTools - WebScan Utilitaires Web à utiliser avec votre navigateur. Cet utilitaire permet de récupérer les données numérisées sur le contrôleur d’impression. Comment lire ce manuel 3-2 Selecting the Destination When you press [SCAN] button, scanning features is activated and the screen appears. On the screen, yo , or and set items corresponded with your selection. You can select multiple destinations. In this ter setting of items for the destination already selected and omit the proced ear the settings for the destination already selected. E-Mail:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (E-Mail)” on page 46. HDD:Å@ “Selecting the Storage Location (HDD)” on page 55. FTP:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (FTP)” on page 60. QUEUE:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (QUEUE)” on page 66. mmended to activate the printer mode or copy mode by pressing the tton of the control panel. Control Panel screen (E-Mail) screen screen Reference Reference Reference Reference 1. ol panel. The yed on the LCD screen. 2. cted once by touching the same transmission r you have selected an E-Mail address / Box No. / , please operate it after removing selections of those by touching the same. MEMO Ce document contient des boîtes de légende. Les types de boîtes de légende affichées ainsi sont les suivants : Explique les mesures de précaution et les restrictions qui s'appliquent au matériel et au logiciel. Explique les principes des fonctions ainsi que d'autres fonctions qui ne sont pas compatibles entre elles. Indique des points importants sur les procédures d'utilisation. Explications destinées à compléter le texte du document. Indique une page à consulter pour plus d'informations. Consultez cette page, le cas échéant. Astuces et conseils sur les procédures d'utilisation. Attention Cette page n'existe pas dans le document. [ ] sont utilisés pour les termes affichés à l'écran. Décrit les procédures d'utilisation. Affiche un objet et la fonction d'une procédure. Décrit le statut du matériel et du logiciel à la fin d'une opération. [Select [Select Tran ssion Object] ], [FTP] [QUEUE] [Select Transmission Object] [Select Tran ssion Object] [Select Transmission Object] mission Object] Important MEMO Référence Conseils 6 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation ............................7 1-2 Avant utilisation...........................................................................12 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................13 7 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation ●Fonctions de numérisation : définition Les fonctions de numérisation permettent de numériser un document original sous forme de données image (données numérisées) depuis le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression, puis de transmettre/stocker les données numérisées. Tous les documents originaux peuvent être copiés et numérisés grâce aux fonctions de numérisation. Vous pouvez également numériser et transmettre/stocker immédiatement des documents d’origine de plusieurs formats. “Type de document d’origine” à la page 41. IMPORTANT Pour utiliser les fonctions de numérisation, vous devez configurer les paramètres réseau du contrôleur d’impression. Veuillez consulter le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression pour des informations sur les paramètres réseau. Quatre types de fonctions de numérisation Les fonctions de numérisation sont classées dans quatre groupes en fonction de l’objet d’émission : • Numérisation vers e-mail : Transmettez un e-mail avec un fichier joint (travail numérisé) à l’adresse spécifiée. • Numérisation vers disque dur : Enregistrez les données numérisées sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. • Numérisation vers FTP : Téléchargez les données numérisées sur le serveur FTP désigné. • Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE : Stockez les données numérisées sous forme de file d’attente sur le contrôleur d’impression. Lors de la numérisation, vous pouvez sélectionner l’objet d’émission. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs objets en une seule opération. MEMO Vous pouvez récupérer les données numérisées enregistrées avec la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur sur un ordinateur du réseau. “Récupération depuis un disque dur” à la page 45. ●Numérisation vers e-mail Vous pouvez transmettre les données image (données numérisées) numérisées depuis le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur sous forme de fichier joint par e-mail ou envoyer un e-mail comportant un lien URL vers l’emplacement de stockage des données numérisées. Référence Référence Original Numérisation vers e-mail Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Serveur FTP Serveur de messagerie Numérisation vers FTP Numérisation vers disque dur Numérisation vers FILE D'ATTENTE Internet 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 8 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail permet de garantir que votre message atteint votre serveur interne (SMTP). Vous pouvez toutefois rencontrer des problèmes sur Internet ou avec le serveur du destinataire. Il est toutefois recommandé de demander un accusé de réception indépendant. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. Transmission d’un fichier joint La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail transmet les données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint d’un e-mail. Transmission de l’URL La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail permet d’envoyer un e-mail comportant un lien URL vers les données numérisées figurant sur le disque dur du copieur si la taille des données numérisées dépasse une limite prédéfinie. Les données numérisées sont alors stockées sur le disque dur d’un contrôleur d’impression et l’URL indiquant l'emplacement est automatiquement envoyée dans un e-mail. MEMO Pour des informations sur les restrictions appliquées à la taille des fichiers à transmettre, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression. Options à définir avec la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail Adresse e-mail Définissez les adresses e-mail en sélectionnant une adresse e-mail dans les adresses enregistrées ou en la saisissant manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’une adresse, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. Titre Le mot par défaut du titre est “Le nom de fichier a été numérisé”. Vous pouvez toutefois le modifier lorsque le copieur effectue des opérations. Pour des informations sur la modification du titre, reportez-vous à la section “Définition du titre” à la page 30. Format de fichier Changez la première phrase par “Les pièces jointes et les données numérisées peuvent être enregistrées sous forme de fichiers JPEG, TIFF ou PDF. Pour des informations sur la modification du format de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT DE FICHIER” à la page 37. Nom de fichier Le nom d’un fichier joint/d’un fichier à stocker est automatiquement généré, mais vous pouvez le modifier à votre convenance. Pour des informations sur la modification du nom de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “NOM DE FICHIER” à la page 36. Contrôleur d'impression Serveur SMTP Serveur POP Internet Original Numérisation Copieur 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 9 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Texte d’un e-mail La phrase suivante figure automatiquement dans le texte d’un e-mail lorsque vous transmettez un message sous forme de fichier joint. “Les documents suivants ont été numérisées sur le Fiery et joints à cet e-mail : Pièce(s) jointe(s) (Nom de fichier)” Les phrases suivantes figurent automatiquement dans le texte d'un e-mail lors de la transmission d'une URL. “Les documents suivants ont été numérisés sur le Fiery et peuvent être téléchargés depuis : URL(s) Téléchargez le document dans le jour qui suit. (Remarque : cette restriction s’applique uniquement si la fonction de suppression automatique est définie sur 1 journée) Téléchargez le document dans les 7 jours qui suivent. (Remarque : cette restriction s’applique uniquement si la fonction de suppression automatique est définie sur 7 jours. La durée pendant laquelle le fichier réside sur le Fiery n’est pas indiquée si la fonction de suppression automatique n’est pas activée.)” ATTENTION • Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le texte d’un e-mail depuis le tableau de commande. Pour des informations sur la modification du texte, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. • La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail peut endommager les données numérisées du fait de l’état du réseau ou pour toute autre raison. Vérifiez si les données numérisées ne sont pas corrompues. ●Disque dur Vous pouvez stocker les données image (données numérisées) sur le disque dur du contrôleur d'impression. Des boîtes agissent sur le disque dur comme des dossiers et les données numérisées sont sauvegardées dans la boîte sélectionnée. Vous pouvez récupérer les données stockées dans une boîte grâce à un ordinateur du réseau. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. MEMO Aucune limite de taille ne s’applique aux données numérisées pouvant être stockées dans chaque boîte. La limite maximale de fichiers dépend de l’espace disponible sur le disque dur. Original Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Disque dur 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 10 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Options à définir pour la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur Numéro de boîte Définissez un numéro de boîte avec des nombres de moins de quatre chiffres ou sélectionnez un numéro de boîte parmi ceux déjà enregistrés. “Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 31. ●FTP Vous pouvez transmettre les données image (données numérisées) vers un serveur FTP. Vous pouvez accéder aux données numérisées que vous avez transmises au serveur FTP depuis un ordinateur distant, puis les télécharger. MEMO • Le fichier journal sur la transmission des données numérisées vers FTP est stocké sur le contrôleur d’impression. • Vous pouvez imprimer un fichier journal à l’aide de Command WorkStation. Pour des informations sur l’impression, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. Options à définir pour la fonction Numérisation vers FTP Nom de profil Définissez le nom du profil en sélectionnant un nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés ou en le saisissant manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un nom de profil, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner/enregistrer un profil contenant des informations nécessaires pour établir une connexion vers un serveur FTP. “Sélection de la destination (FTP)” à la page 33. Adresse d’hôte Lorsque vous ne trouvez pas le profil enregistré de votre choix, saisissez manuellement l’adresse d’hôte. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’une adresse d’hôte (nom du serveur FTP/adresse IP), veuillez vous reporter à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Chemin d’accès aux fichiers Lorsque vous ne trouvez pas le profil enregistré de votre choix, saisissez manuellement le chemin d’accès aux fichiers. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un chemin d’accès aux fichiers, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Référence Contrôleur d'impression Serveur FTP Internet Original Numérisation Copieur Référence 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 11 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Numéro de port Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port manuellement. Pour des informations sur le paramétrage d’un numéro de port, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Connexion (nom d’utilisateur) Sélectionnez un nom d’utilisateur parmi ceux préenregistrés afin de vous connecter au serveur FTP ou définissez la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un nom d’utilisateur, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Mot de passe Sélectionnez le mot de passe requis pour la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) ou définissez le mot de passe correspondant à la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un mot de passe, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. ATTENTION La fonction Numérisation vers FTP peut endommager les données numérisées du fait de l’état du réseau ou pour toute autre raison. Vérifiez si les données numérisées ne sont pas corrompues. ●Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE Vous pouvez stocker les données image (données numérisées) sous forme de fichier PDF (Portable Document Format) dans le contrôleur d’impression et les utiliser pour un travail d’impression (file d’attente). Vous pouvez modifier ou imprimer les données numérisées stockées sous forme de file d’attente à l’aide de Command WorkStation. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. MEMO • La version du PDF est 1.4. • Pour des informations sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Original Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur FILE D'ATTENTE 12 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-2 Avant utilisation ●Position/Description du tableau de commande MEMO Pour des informations sur les détails de chaque fonction, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 1. Ecran à cristaux liquides L’écran à cristaux liquides affiche le statut du contrôleur d’impression, les menus utilisés pour les réglages, les options de sélection et autres informations similaires. Pour procéder aux réglages, appuyez sur la touche affichée à l’écran. 2. Touche [CONTROLE] Cette touche permet d’afficher l’écran [MODE CONTROLE]. 3. Touche [AIDE] Cette touche permet d’afficher un écran d’aide sur la fonction sélectionnée. 4. Touche [IMPRIMANTE] Cette touche permet de passer en mode imprimante. (inutilisable à partir d’août 2003.) 5. Touche [SCANNER] Cette touche permet de passer en mode scanner. 6. Touche [COPIEUR] Cette touche permet de passer en mode copie. 7. Voyant [PROGRAMMATEUR] Ce voyant s'allume s’allume lorsque le programmateur est activé. 8. Touche [ECONOMIE D’ENERGIE] Cette touche permet d’activer le mode d’économie d’énergie lorsque le copieur est inactif ou d’activer le mode interruption du programmateur lorsque le programmateur est activé. 9. Touche [INTERRUPTION] L’impression en cours est arrêtée pour lancer la copie. 10.Touche [EPREUVE] Cette touche permet d’imprimer une copie afin de confirmer les réglages effectués. 11.Touche [ARRET] Cette touche permet d’arrêter la copie ou l’impression. 1 23 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 19 20 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 13 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 12.Touche [DEPART] L’impression mise en attente reprend ou la numérisation commence. 13.Touche [ANNUL.] Cette touche permet de supprimer les caractères numériques saisis. 14.PAVE NUMERIQUE Permet de saisir des valeurs numériques. 15.Touche [COMPTEUR] Cette touche permet d'afficher l'écran Compteur ou d'accéder à des modes de programmation afin de définir des fonctions spéciales. 16.Touche [AUTO] Cette touche permet de réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. 17.Touche [PROGRAMME] Cette touche affiche l’écran permettant de sélectionner les fonctions de stockage/rappel de programme. 18.Touche [CODE] Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas effectuer de copie en raison des limitations imposées sur le mot de passe ECM, appuyez sur Cette touche. Cette touche permet d’afficher l’écran dans lequel vous pouvez saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le mot de passe approprié afin d’effectuer la copie. 19.Touche de réglage du contraste Cette touche permet de régler le contraste de l’écran à cristaux liquides. 20.Voyant de l’indicateur d’alimentation Ce voyant s’allume/s’éteint selon l’état de l’alimentation électrique. ●Ecran à cristaux liquides Sélectionnez des options en appuyant sur la touche correspondante qui apparaît sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche ou ouvrez un écran de paramétrage, la touche sélectionnée est affichée et ses couleurs sont inversées (noir sur blanc) ou interverties (blanc sur noir). Touches communes à tous les écrans de paramétrage [OK] : Les résultats de l’opération sont appliqués. [ANNULER] : Les résultats de l’opération sont annulés. Lorsque le copieur est sous tension, si vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande, l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] est affiché sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO L’affichage de l’écran à cristaux liquides est différent entre les Etats-Unis et les autres pays. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ●Structure L’opération de numérisation fait appel au tableau de commande du photocopieur. Les opérations de base sont les suivantes. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 14 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement des destinations, reportez-vous aux pages suivantes. • Numérisation vers e-mail : “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. • Numérisation vers disque dur : “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. • Numérisation vers FTP : “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ●Ecran [Sélect. objet émission] L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande, la touche [E-Mail] est sélectionné dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] permet de sélectionner l’objet d’émission à appliquer aux données numérisées en appuyant sur les touches [E-Mail], [Disque dur], [FTP] ou [FILE D’ATTENTE]. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets d’émission pour transmettre/stocker les données numérisées. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets d’émission. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] bascule vers un écran différent selon la destination à chaque pression sur [E-Mail], [Disque dur] ou [FTP]. MEMO • A l’inverse, aucun autre écran n’apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE]. • Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ADRESSE] dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage revient à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] avec les paramètres que vous avez saisis. Vous pouvez également rechercher une adresse e-mail, un numéro de boîte ou un serveur FTP et répertorier toutes les destinations enregistrées. Référence Référence Référence 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 15 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Les adresses e-mail enregistrées sont affichées. • Lorsque plus de 12 adresses e-mail sont enregistrées, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO • Les numéros de boîte enregistrés sont affichés. • Lorsque plus de 12 numéros de boîte sont enregistrés, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO • Les noms de profil enregistrés sont affichés. • Lorsque plus de 12 noms de profil sont enregistrés, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO A l’inverse, lorsque vous appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE], l’écran ne change pas. ●Écran [Réglages de base du scanner] L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de définir différents réglages de base pour numériser les données image. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ADRESSE], l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] réapparaît avec les réglages effectués. MEMO Lorsque l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît, vous pouvez retourner à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] en procédant comme suit : • Appuyez sur [ANNULER] sur l’écran à cristaux liquides • Appuyez sur la touche [AUTO] du tableau de commande la touche [AUTO] annule tous les réglages que vous avez effectués et affiche l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. Pour lancer une numérisation et transmettre/stocker des données, appuyez sur la touche [DEPART] du tableau de commande. MEMO Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages actuels dans l’écran [Mode contrôle réglages] qui apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [CONTROLE] du tableau de commande. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de régler les options suivantes : NOM DE FICHIER Lorsque vous appuyez sur [NOM DE FICHIER], l’écran [Entrer le nom de fichier] apparaît. Le nom de fichier peut comporter 26 caractères. Pour des informations sur un nom de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “NOM DE FICHIER” à la page 36. MODE COULEUR Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode couleur pour la numérisation en [NOIR], [COULEUR] ou [AUTO]. Pour des informations sur le mode couleur, reportez-vous à la section “MODE COULEUR” à la page 37. FORMAT DE FICHIER Vous pouvez sélectionner le format de fichier utilisé pour les pièces jointes d’un e-mail, enregistré sur le disque dur ou téléchargé sur un serveur FTP. Pour des informations sur le format de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT DE FICHIER” à la page 37. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 16 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MODE NUMERISATION Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le document original est en mode recto verso ou recto seul. Pour des informations sur le mode de numérisation, reportez-vous à la section “MODE NUMERISATION” à la page 37. FORMAT NUMERIS. Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le format de numérisation est détecté automatiquement ou si l’utilisateur le définit manuellement à chaque numérisation. Pour des informations sur le format de numérisation, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT NUMERIS.” à la page 37. QUALITE Cette fonction permet de sélectionner la résolution de numérisation. Pour des informations sur la qualité, reportez-vous à la section “QUALITE” à la page 38. AGR./RED. Cette fonction permet de définir ou non le taux de restitution. Pour des informations sur l’agrandissement/la réduction, reportez-vous à la section “AGR./RED.” à la page 38. Pleine page (FONCTION) Normalement, l'image numérisée est entourée d'une marge en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, où les données sont supprimées. Cette fonction permet de numériser le document jusqu'aux bords. Pour des informations sur la numérisation pleine page, reportez-vous à la section “Pleine page” à la page 41. ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION) Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX], l’écran [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX] apparaît. Pour des informations sur les originaux spéciaux, reportez-vous aux sections “Direction de l’original” à la page 41 et “Type de document d’origine” à la page 41. RÉGLAGE IMAGE (FONCTION) L'image de l'original peut être modifiée après sa lecture. Pour plus d'informations, voir “DENSITÉ NUMÉR.” à la page 39, “RÉGLAGE COULEUR” à la page 39 et “AUTRES” à la page 40. ●Saisie de texte Saisissez le nom de l’entrée ou une adresse e-mail dans l’écran [Entrée au clavier] qui apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Ecran [Entrée au clavier] L’écran [Entrée au clavier] permet de saisir des lettres et des lettres spéciales. Utilisez le PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande pour saisir des nombres. MEMO Pour modifier la disposition par défaut du clavier, contactez votre service après-vente. Il existe trois sortes d'écrans Clavier : • L’écran [Entrée minuscules] L’écran [Entrée minuscules] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée majuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée minuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Capital/ Minuscule]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée symboles] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée minuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Alphabet]. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 17 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation • L’écran [Entrée majuscules] Lorsque l’écran [Entrée minuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée majuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Capital/ Minuscule]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée symboles] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée majuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Alphabet] puis sur [Capital/Minuscule]. • L’écran [Entrée symboles] Lorsque l’écran [Entrée minuscules] ou [Entrée majuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée symboles] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Signe]. Saisie de texte MEMO Utilisez le PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande pour saisir des nombres. 1. Confirmez l’apparition de l’écran [Entrée au clavier] (Minuscule/Majuscule/Symbole) souhaité. Si vous souhaitez travailler dans un autre écran, appuyez sur [Alphabet] / [Capital/Minuscule] / [Signe] 2. Appuyez sur les touches alphabétiques de l’écran à cristaux liquides pour entrer les lettres. Les lettres entrées apparaissent en haut de l’écran. MEMO • Un signe “|” représentant une position d’entrée clignote en plus des lettres affichées en haut de l’écran. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Supprimer], une lettre placée avant le signe est supprimée. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur , le signe se déplace vers la gauche. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur , le signe se déplace vers la droite. 3. Confirmez les lettres saisies, puis appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran à cristaux liquides. L’affichage retourne à l'écran qui était affiché avant que vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Les lettres saisies apparaissent à l’écran. 18 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 2-1 Présentation.................................................................................19 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail) ...................................19 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) ...20 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)....................................... 22 19 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 2-1 Présentation Cette section indique les procédures d’enregistrement des destinations des données numérisées à suivre avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer les éléments suivants : • Numérisation vers e-mail : Adresse e-mail “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. • Numérisation vers disque dur : Numéro de boîte “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. • Numérisation vers FTP : Nom de profil “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. Adresse d’hôte Chemin d’accès aux fichiers Connexion (nom d’utilisateur) Mot de passe Numéro de port MEMO Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE ne nécessite aucune information pour enregistrer des données numérisées. 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des destinations pour Numérisation vers e-mail. La destination utilisée avec Numérisation vers e-mail est une adresse e-mail. Vous pouvez enregistrer une adresse e-mail avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment enregistrer depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. ●Enregistrement d’une adresse e-mail 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [E-Mail] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et l’adresse e-mail que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. Référence Référence Référence 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) (suite) 20 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse e-mail]. [Adresse e-mail] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse e-mail saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Saisissez l’adresse e-mail (54 caractères alphanumériques). Vous ne pouvez utiliser que les symboles suivants : @, - (trait d’union), _(trait de soulignement), (espace) • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 10.Vérifiez les éléments saisis, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail). Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Si vous ne saisissez aucun nom d’entrée lors de l’enregistrement, l’adresse e-mail tient lieu de nom d’entrée. ●Révision et suppression de l’adresse e-mail. Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer une adresse e-mail enregistrée. “Modification/Suppression de la destination” à la page 49. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des emplacements de stockage pour Numérisation vers disque dur. L’emplacement de stockage utilisé avec Numérisation vers disque dur est une boîte sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez enregistrer des numéros de boîte avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment entrer des numéros de boîte depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. Vous pouvez sélectionner des numéros de boîte compris entre 0000 et 9999. Référence 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) (suite) 21 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation Il est recommandé d’attribuer un numéro de boîte (de 0001 à 9999) aux utilisateurs et de leur communiquer ces numéros à l'avance. ●Enregistrement d’un numéro de boîte 1. Appuyez sur [SCANNER] sur le tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. Si des emplacements de stockage sur le disque dur sont déjà enregistrés, leur nom d’entrée apparaît. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [Disque dur] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et le numéro de boîte que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Numéro de boîte]. [Numéro de boîte] est mis en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez le numéro de boîte au PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande, puis appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran à cristaux liquides. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. Le numéro de boîte saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. MEMO • Entrez 4 chiffres du numéro de boîte dans l’espace correspondant au numéro de boîte. Si vous entrez « 1 », le numéro de boîte est "0001". • Lorsque vous entrez des nombres, ces nombres se déplacent vers la gauche un par un. 10.Confirmez le réglage, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur). Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 22 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO Si vous ne saisissez aucun nom d’entrée lors de l’enregistrement, le numéro de boîte tient lieu de nom d’entrée. ●Révision et suppression du numéro de boîte Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer un numéro de boîte enregistré. “Modification/Suppression de la destination” à la page 49. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des destinations pour Numérisation vers FTP. La destination utilisée avec Numérisation vers FTP est le serveur FTP. Vous pouvez enregistrer le serveur FTP avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment enregistrer un serveur FTP depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. ●Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP 1. Appuyez sur le la touche [SCANNER] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. Si la destination (FTP) est déjà enregistrée, le nom de profil s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [FTP] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers FTP sans quitter le mode numérisation, les lettres que vous avez saisies sont affichées. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de profil] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de profil] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de profil]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de profil, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Le nom de profil est le nom qui apparaît à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP). L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de profil saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 23 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le nom de profil ne doit pas comporter plus de 10 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse d’hôte]. [Adresse d’hôte] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse d’hôte, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’adresse d’hôte est l’adresse du serveur FTP. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse d’hôte saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • L’adresse d’hôte ne doit pas comprendre plus de 63 caractères. • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 10.Appuyez sur [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers]. [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers] est mis en surbrillance. 11.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 12.Saisissez le chemin d’accès aux fichiers, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers est le chemin d’accès au répertoire figurant sur le serveur FTP. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers ne doit pas comprendre plus de 127 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 13.Appuyez sur [Connexion]. [Connexion] est mise en surbrillance. 14.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. MEMO La touche [Anonyme] affichée n’apparaît pas sur un écran de clavier type. 15.Saisissez l’ID de connexion ou appuyez sur [Anonyme] si le serveur FTP n’est pas configuré pour authentifier l'utilisateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’ID de connexion est l’ID dont a besoin l’utilisateur pour accéder au répertoire figurant sur le serveur FTP. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Anonyme], le mot “Anonyme” apparaît en haut de l’écran à cristaux liquides. Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’ID de connexion saisi ou « Anonyme » apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 24 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO • L’ID de connexion ne doit pas comprendre plus de 47 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 16.Appuyez sur [Mot de passe]. [Mot de passe] est mis en surbrillance. 17.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 18.Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Saisissez le mot de passe correspondant à l’ID de connexion. Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le mot de passe saisi apparaît en astérisques (*) à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le mot de passe ne doit pas comprendre plus de 25 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 19.Appuyez sur [NUMERO DE PORT], le cas échéant. L’écran [Entrer numéro de port] apparaît. “21” est le numéro de port par défaut. IMPORTANT Une modification incorrecte du numéro de port peut créer des embouteillages sur le réseau. Ne changez pas le numéro de port sans consulter l’administrateur réseau. MEMO • Vous pouvez définir le numéro de port sur 65565. • Changez-le uniquement si cela s’avère nécessaire. 20.Saisissez le NUMERO DE PORT à l’aide des touches numériques de l’écran à cristaux liquides, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le [Numéro de port] peut comprendre jusqu’à cinq caractères. • Lorsque vous saisissez le premier chiffre, la valeur par défaut (“21 ») est effacée. • “21” et “00021” correspondent à la même valeur. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur [AUTO], la valeur par défaut est restaurée. 21.Appuyez sur [PARE-FEU], le cas échéant. 22.Pour utiliser le pare-feu lors de la transmission, activez-le, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO Veuillez contacter votre administrateur réseau pour savoir comment utiliser le [Pare-feu]. 23.Confirmez les réglages, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP). Le nom de profil saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 25 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO L’[ENTREE] devient effective lorsque vous avez appuyé sur toutes les touches ([Nom de profil], [Adresse d’hôte], [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers], [Connexion] et [Mot de passe]). ●Révision et suppression d’un serveur FTP Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer un serveur FTP enregistré. “Modification/Suppression Référence de la destination” à la page 49. 26 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation.............................................. 27 3-2 Sélection de la destination .........................................................27 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine....................................35 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner .........................................35 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation................................................... 42 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner .....................42 27 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation Pour numériser des documents, appuyez sur [SCANNER] sur le tableau de commande du copieur. Vous ne pouvez pas activer le mode numérisation si : • Un message d’erreur apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Pour des informations sur les messages d’erreur, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 3-2 Sélection de la destination Lorsque vous appuyez sur [SCANNER], la numérisation est activée et l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] permet de sélectionner les touches [E-Mail], [Disque dur], [FTP] ou [FILE D’ATTENTE] et de définir les options correspondantes. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs destinations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez la destination suivante après avoir paramétré les options de la destination déjà sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [SCANNER] pour conserver et modifier les paramètres de la destination déjà sélectionnée. • E-Mail : “Sélection de la destination (E-Mail)” à la page 27. • Disque dur : “Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 31. • FTP : “Sélection de la destination (FTP)” à la page 33. • FILE D’ATTENTE : “Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE)” à la page 35. Une fois l’opération de numérisation terminée, appuyez sur la touche [COPIEUR] du tableau de commande pour activer le mode copie. ●Sélection de la destination (E-Mail) [E-Mail] est sélectionné lorsque l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît après que vous ayez sélectionné la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. Lorsque vous sélectionnez [E-Mail] (Numérisation vers e-mail), vous pouvez définir le titre et l’adresse e-mail, puis transmettre les données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint. MEMO Si la taille des données numérisées excède une limite prédéfinie, l’URL menant à l’emplacement des données numérisées est envoyée par e-mail. Pour des informations sur les restrictions appliquées à la taille des fichiers joints, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression. Vous pouvez également sélectionner d’autres destinations pour [HDD], [FTP] et/ou [FILE D’ATTENTE] lors d’une numérisation. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations (adresse e-mail) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 28 • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche Page 28 • Définissez la destination en la saisissant manuellement Page 29 Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 28 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Pour des informations sur le titre, reportez-vous à la section “Définition du titre” à la page 30. MEMO Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères, "," et "(espace)" compris. Sélection parmi des destinations déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée (adresse e-mail) dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée (adresse e-mail) dans la liste des adresses enregistrées sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. MEMO Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. 4. Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 5. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection de destinations déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 29 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom d’entrée à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom d’entrée correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des résultats de la recherche sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. MEMO • Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. • Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms d’entrée enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 8. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [E-Mail] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et l’adresse e-mail que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 30 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse e-mail]. [Adresse e-mail] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse e-mail saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Saisissez l’adresse e-mail (54 caractères alphanumériques). Vous ne pouvez utiliser que les symboles suivants : @, - (trait d’union), _(trait de soulignement), (espace) • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. • Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. • Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom d’entrée que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. 10.Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 11.Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ATTENTION Une adresse e-mail saisie manuellement n’est pas enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK]. Une adresse email souvent utilisée doit être enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [ENTREE]. “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. Définition du titre Le titre de l’e-mail est “Le nom de fichier a été numérisé”. (Par défaut). Toutefois, lorsque vous sélectionnez de nouveau [EMail] après avoir utilisé Numérisation vers e-mail sans avoir quitté le mode numérisation, le titre saisi précédemment n’est pas effacé. Modifiez le titre en procédant comme suit : 1. Appuyez sur [TITRE] à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) ou [Entrer adresse émission]. L’écran [Entrée titre] apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 3. Saisissez le titre de l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] ou [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 31 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le titre ne doit pas comporter plus de 45 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. Définitions de plusieurs destinations Vous pouvez définir plusieurs destinations avec la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail. MEMO Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. 1. Appuyez sur [OK] à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail), [Entrer adresse émission] ou [Résultats de la recherche]. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [ADRESSE]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. 3. Définition d’une autre adresse e-mail avec les procédures suivantes : • sélection dans la liste d’adresses enregistrées Page 28 • sélection dans la liste d’adresses enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche Page 28 • définition de l’adresse par saisie manuelle Page 29 ●Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Disque dur] (Numérisation vers disque dur), vous pouvez stocker les données numérisées en désignant le numéro de boîte du contrôleur d’impression grâce au PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande du copieur. Vous pouvez sélectionner la destination (numéro de boîte) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 31 • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche Page 32 • Définissez la destination par saisie manuelle Page 32 ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule destination (Numéro de boîte). Sélection de la destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 32 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des numéros de boîte enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. 4. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection d’une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom d’entrée à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom d’entrée correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des résultats de la recherche sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms d’entrée enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle 1. Suivez la même procédure (étape 1 à 9) de la section “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 2. Confirmez les éléments saisis. MEMO Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez alors enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom d’entrée que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 33 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ●Sélection de la destination (FTP) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [FTP] (Numérisation vers FTP), vous pouvez télécharger les données numérisées sur un serveur FTP. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations (serveur FTP) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 33 • Sélectionnez des destinations parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche Page 33 • Définissez la destination par saisie manuelle Page 34 ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule destination (serveur FTP). Pour des informations sur le réglage d’un numéro de port, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Pour des informations sur le pare-feu, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Sélection parmi des destinations déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste figurant sur l'écran à cristaux liquides. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. 4. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 5. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection de destinations parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 34 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom de profil à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom de profil correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste figurant sur l'écran à cristaux liquides. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms de profil enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 8. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle 1. Suivez la même procédure (étape 1 à 18) de la section “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 2. Confirmez les éléments saisis. MEMO Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez alors enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom de profil que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. Référence Référence 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine (suite) 35 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 4. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ATTENTION Une adresse e-mail saisie manuellement n’est pas enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK]. Une adresse email souvent utilisée doit être enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [ENTREE]. “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ●Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [FILE D’ATTENTE] (Numérisation vers file d’attente), vous pouvez stocker les données numérisées sous forme de données de travaux d’impression dans le contrôleur d’impression. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine Après avoir procédé aux réglages dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission], placez le document d’origine sur le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur. Direction des originaux La direction dans laquelle les applications liront les images varie selon le sens dans lequel vous placez les originaux. MEMO Les formats de papier admis pour la numérisation et le mode de chargement des originaux sont identiques à ceux du mode Copie. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. Å @Å@ 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner Lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] après avoir placé le document d’origine sur le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur, l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît. Référence Référence Référence 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 36 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] pour retourner à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de régler divers paramètres de numérisation. • NOM DE FICHIER Page 36 • MODE COULEUR Page 37 • FORMAT DE FICHIER Page 37 • MODE NUMERISATION Page 37 • FORMAT NUMERIS. Page 37 • QUALITE Page 38 • AGR./RED. Page 38 • DENSITÉ NUMÉR. Page 39 • RÉGLAGE COULEUR Page 39 • AUTRES Page 40 • Pleine page (FONCTION) Page 41 • Direction de l’original (ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION)) Page 41 • Réglages spéciaux (ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION)) Page 41 ●NOM DE FICHIER Le nom de fichier est automatiquement saisi lors de la numérisation. Vous pouvez toutefois définir/modifier le nom de fichier dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les caractères suivants dans les noms de fichier. Ces caractères peuvent endommager gravement le réseau ou le système de fichiers. Caractères inutilisables : \ / : ;, * ? '' < > | 1. Appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [NOM DE FICHIER]. L’écran [Entrer le nom du fichier] apparaît. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 37 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 4. Saisissez le nom de fichier, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. MEMO • Le nom de fichier ne doit pas comporter plus de 26 caractères alphanumériques. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser de symboles autres que "-", "_", ".", “(espace)”. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 5. Vérifiez les éléments saisis, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. ●MODE COULEUR Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode Couleur [ÉCHELLE DE GRIS], [NOIR] ou [COULEUR]). MEMO JPEG ne prend pas en charge le [NOIR]. ●FORMAT DE FICHIER Vous pouvez choisir le format de fichier [JPEG], [TIFF] ou [PDF]. Lorsque vous numérisez plusieurs documents à la fois, vous ne pouvez pas changer le format des fichiers un par un. MEMO JPEG ne prend pas en charge le [NOIR]. ●MODE NUMERISATION Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le document original est en mode recto-verso ou recto seul. Si le chargeur RADF n'est pas installé, il est impossible de sélectionner [Recto verso]. ●FORMAT NUMERIS. Utilisez cette fonction pour définir le format du papier pour la numérisation. Vous pouvez sélectionner [AUTO] ou [REGLAGE FORMAT]. La valeur par défaut est [AUTO]. Lorsque [AUTO] est sélectionné, le format du document d’origine à lire est le même que le format par défaut en mode copie. Pour procéder au [REGLAGE FORMAT] : 1. Appuyez sur [REGLAGE FORMAT]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez le format de papier, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Par exemple, si un original A3 est chargé et que vous sélectionnez B5, la numérisation s'effectue dans une zone en format B5. Formats de papier disponibles : • Etats-Unis A3 / A4R / A4 / A5R / A5 / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 11x17 / 8,5x14 / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5R / 5,5x8,5 / PAGE ENTIERE • Autres A3 / A4R / A4 / A5R / A5 / A6R / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 11x17 / 8,5x14 / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5R / 5,5x8,5 / F4 / PLEINE PAGE 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 38 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation ●QUALITE Cette fonction permet de sélectionner la résolution. Vous pouvez sélectionner [600 ppp], [400 ppp], [300 ppp] ou [200 ppp]. MEMO Si vous devez changer la valeur [QUALITE] par défaut, contactez votre service après-vente. MEMO Le tableau suivant indique le nombre d’originaux pouvant être numérisés. (Format de fichier ; JPEG, TIFF, PDF) MEMO La taille des données et le nombre d'originaux pouvant être lus dépendent des données numérisées. Notez que les chiffres indiqués dans le tableau ne sont fournis qu'à titre indicatif. ●AGR./RED. Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier le taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction du document numérisé. Vous pouvez sélectionner [ZOOM] ou [1:1]. La valeur par défaut est [1:1]. Pour effectuer un [ZOOM] ; taux de restitution définis : 1. Appuyez sur [ZOOM]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez les taux de restitution définis dans les groupes [RE], puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. MEMO La valeur des taux de restitution définis est identique à la celle de la valeur par défaut en mode copie. Pour effectuer un [ZOOM] ; taux de restitution optionnels : 1. Appuyez sur [ZOOM]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur , ou . Vous pouvez sélectionner pour zoomer avec le même taux. Vous pouvez sélectionner pour définir le zoom avec un taux de direction verticale. Vous pouvez sélectionner pour définir le zoom avec un taux de direction horizontale. 3. Saisissez le taux, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Qualité Taille des données pages possibles à lire 200 ppp 420KB environ 110 000 pages 300 ppp 810KB environ 58 000 pages 400 ppp 1200KB environ 37 000 pages 600 ppp 2300KB environ 20 000 pages 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 39 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Les taux de restitution optionnels changent selon la résolution de lecture. Pour 200 ppp : 75-400 % Pour 300 ppp : 75-400 % Pour 400 ppp : 38-400 % Pour 600 ppp : 25-400 % ●DENSITÉ NUMÉR. Une fois l'image lue, sa densité peut être modifiée (plus claire ou plus foncée). Lorsque vous numérisez une page de journal, de papier recyclé ou de tout autre original dont le fond n'est pas très blanc, vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer la densité de l'image avec la fonction Réglage fond. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [DENSITÉ NUMÉR.]. L’écran Densité numérisation apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer la densité ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 4. Pour régler la densité du fond, appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE FOND]. 5. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour augmenter la densité ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour la diminuer. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 6. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglage image. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 7. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de [DENSITÉ NUMÉR.] et de [FOND] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. ●RÉGLAGE COULEUR Le rouge, le vert et le bleu de l'image numérisée peuvent être réglés individuellement. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE COULEUR]. L'écran Réglage couleur s'affiche. 3. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque. 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 40 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 4. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer la densité de la couleur ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. (par exemple, pour régler la couleur rouge) MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage couleur réapparaît. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 6. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de [RÉGLAGE COULEUR] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. ●AUTRES La netteté du profil de l'image ("PRÉCISION") et l'opposition entre les zones claires et foncées de l'image ("CONTRASTE") peuvent être modifiées. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [AUTRES]. L’écran Autres apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur [PRÉCISION] et réglez la netteté de l'image. 4. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour adoucir le profil de l'image ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour augmenter sa précision. MEMO Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran Autres réapparaît. 6. Appuyez sur [CONTRASTE] et réglez le contraste de l'image. 7. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer le contraste ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. MEMO Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 8. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran Autres réapparaît. 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 41 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 9. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de la [PRÉCISION] et du [CONTRASTE] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. ●Pleine page Normalement, l'image numérisée est entourée d'une marge en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, où les données sont supprimées. Cette fonction permet de numériser le document jusqu'aux bords. Utilisez cette fonction pour numériser le document jusqu’aux bords. ●Direction de l’original Utilisez cette fonction pour choisir le sens de chargement des originaux. MEMO Il est possible que le format de fichier ne permette pas de définir la direction de l'original. PDF : Définissable JPEG : Non définissable TIFF : Non définissable 1. Appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez l’orientation du document à numériser, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. 3. Pour lire les données à l'écran, sélectionnez [RELIURE], puis [RELIURE DROITE&GAUCHE] ou [RELIURE EN HAUT] et appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. ●Type de document d’origine Utilisez cette fonction pour définir le type du document d’origine. 1. Appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur [REGLAGES SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 3. Lorsque vous numérisez plusieurs originaux de formats différents, appuyez sur [Formats différents]. Lorsque vous numérisez des originaux pliés en Z, appuyez sur [Originaux pliés en Z]. Si tous les originaux ou quelques-uns des originaux sont du même format, vérifiez que [Normal] est sélectionné. MEMO Le compagnon TWAIN ne peut pas traiter des originaux de formats différents. 4. Lorsque les originaux sont épais, appuyez sur [Epais]. Lorsque les originaux sont fins, appuyez sur [Fin]. Pour du papier normal, vérifiez que [Normal] est sélectionné. 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation (suite) 42 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 5. Si le format de l'original n'est pas standard ou s'il s'agit d'un intercalaire avec index, sélectionnez le format [Non STD] ou [Intercalaire]. 6. Vérifiez les éléments sélectionnés, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran mentionné dans la procédure 1. 7. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation Après avoir procédé aux réglages nécessaires dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], appuyez sur [DEPART] sur le tableau de commande pour lancer la numérisation. Une fois la numérisation lancée, l’écran à cristaux liquides affiche de nouveau l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] ([Mode de numérisation de base]). Lorsque le tableau de commande du copieur se trouve en mode numérisation, aucun travail d'impression n'est envoyé et, par conséquent, aucune page n'est imprimée. Passez le tableau de commande en mode copie en appuyant sur la touche [COPIEUR] lorsque vous n’avez pas besoin d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. MEMO Si AUTO est activé, l’écran à cristaux liquides retourne automatiquement en mode copie après avoir défini le temps écoulé. 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner ●Affichage du statut de fonctionnement Les messages suivants sont affichés afin d'indiquer le déroulement du processus de numérisation : NUMERISATION EN COURS DE LECTURE Un travail de numérisation est en cours de lecture. NUMERISATION EN COURS D'ENVOI Un travail de numérisation est envoyé au contrôleur d'impression. IMPRESSION DU TRAVAIL DE NUMERISATION EN ATTENTE Un travail de numérisation a été effectué, mais son impression est en attente, car un travail d'impression est en cours de traitement. NUMERISATION INTERROMPUE La lecture d'un travail de numérisation a été interrompue. INCIDENT PAPIER PENDANT LA NUMERISATION Un incident papier est survenu pendant la lecture d'un travail de numérisation. MEMO Lorsque le tableau de commande du copieur se trouve en mode numérisation, aucun travail d'impression n'est envoyé et, par conséquent, aucune page n'est imprimée. Passez le tableau de commande en mode copie en appuyant sur la touche [COPIEUR] lorsque vous n’avez pas besoin d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. Si AUTO est activé, l’écran à cristaux liquides retourne automatiquement en mode copie après avoir défini le temps écoulé. ●Vérification des paramètres de numérisation Vous pouvez vérifier les paramètres de numérisation afin d’afficher chaque réglage du scanner à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner (suite) 43 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Vous pouvez les vérifier lorsque l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] est affiché en procédant comme suit : MEMO Lorsqu’un écran autre que l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] est affiché, vous ne pouvez pas contrôler les réglages du scanner. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [CONTROLE] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [MODE CONTROLE] apparaît. Cet écran présente les paramètres de numérisation actuels. [MODIFIER PARAMETRES] permet de modifier les paramètres actuels. ●Modifiez les paramètres actuels 1. Appuyez sur l’élément pour modifier les paramètres. L’élément sélectionné est modifié. 2. Appuyez sur [MODIFIER PARAMETRES]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 dont les réglages apparaissent dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît. Si vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 qui ne comporte aucun paramètre dans l'écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’écran de réglage d’un élément apparaît. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez [Adresse e-mail], l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît et [E-Mail] est sélectionné. 3. Modifiez les réglages, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 dont les réglages apparaissent dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage retourne à l’écran [MODE CONTROLE]. Vous pouvez alors confirmer les réglages que vous avez modifiés à la procédure 2 dans cet écran. Si vous sélectionnez un élément lors de la procédure 1 qui ne comporte aucun paramètre dans l'écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Dans ce cas, procédez comme à l’accoutumée et numérisez le document. Vous pouvez également retourner à l’écran [MODE CONTROLE] en appuyant sur la touche [CONTROLE] du tableau de commande. MEMO Lorsque vous modifiez les autres paramètres un par un, suivez la même procédure (étapes 1 à 3). 4. Pour quitter l’écran [MODE CONTROLE], appuyez sur [QUITTER]. 44 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur ..........................................45 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail....................................46 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE ...............................46 45 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur Comment lire des données numérisées Utilisez l’utilitaire du copieur pour lire des données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez importer les données numérisées selon les méthodes suivantes : • Lire des données numérisées avec WebScan • Lire des données numérisées avec l’application Fiery Remote Scan • Lire des données numérisées avec le compagnon Fiery Remote Scan compatible TWAIN Dans ces utilitaires “Boîte aux lettres” signifie “(Numéro de) Boîte” lors de l’importation des données numérisées. MEMO Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. WebScan WebScan est l’un des “Fiery WebTools” qui permettent d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation du contrôleur d'impression dans votre navigateur. Lancez WebScan et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Zone Boîte aux lettres” qui contient les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées). Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste pour le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). Application Fiery Remote Scan Fiery Remote Scan est une application qui permet d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation à distance du contrôleur d’impression. Lancez l’application Fiery Remote Scan, connectez-vous au contrôleur d’impression et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Boîte aux lettres”. Les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées) sont répertoriés dans cette colonne. Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste. Vous pouvez l’envoyer sous forme de fichier joint à un e-mail, le télécharger sur un serveur FTP et le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). Fiery Remote Scan compatible Le Fiery Remote Scan est compatible TWAIN et vous pouvez donc l’utiliser depuis une application compatible TWAIN. Lancez une application compatible TWAIN, sélectionnez [Fichier] - [Lire] - [Fiery Remote Scan 5] (le nom de commande diffère selon les applications), connectez-vous au contrôleur d’impression à partir de la boîte de dialogue affichée et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Boîte aux lettres” qui contient les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées). Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste, puis cliquez sur la touche [IMPORTER]. Vous pouvez le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). ●Comment supprimer des données numérisées Les données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur sont automatiquement supprimées chaque jour ou chaque semaine selon le paramètre défini dans le contrôleur d’impression. MEMO Pour des informations sur la fonction de suppression automatique, consultez l’administrateur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez les supprimer manuellement en procédant comme suit : • Suppression des données numérisées avec WebScan • Suppression des données numérisées avec l’application Fiery Remote Scan • Suppression des données numérisées avec le Fiery Remote Scan compatible TWAIN • Suppression des données numérisées avec Command WorkStation Dans ces utilitaires “Boîte aux lettres” signifie “(Numéro de) Boîte” lors de la suppression des données numérisées. 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail (suite) 46 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées MEMO Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. WebScan Application Fiery Remote Scan Fiery Remote Scan compatible Etablissez la liste des travaux de numérisation en utilisant les mêmes procédures que celles utilisées pour la lecture des travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées), sélectionnez un travail de numérisation à supprimer, puis cliquez sur la touche [SUPPRIMER]. Command WorkStation Command WorkStation est un utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. L’administrateur du contrôleur d’impression peut supprimer toutes les données numérisées stockées dans toutes les boîtes en même temps. 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail Vous pouvez recevoir des données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint à un e-mail par l’intermédiaire d’une application de messagerie. Vous pouvez télécharger des données numérisées téléchargées sur un serveur FTP grâce à un client FTP. Pour connaître les fonctions plus avancées de ces applications, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation de ces applications. 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE ●Comment utiliser des données numérisées Vous pouvez modifier, imprimer et sauvegarder des données numérisées enregistrées sous forme de file d’attente du contrôleur d’impression depuis un ordinateur sur un réseau grâce à Command WorkStation. MEMO Pour des informations détaillées sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Original Numérisation vers e-mail Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Serveur FTP Serveur de messagerie Numérisation vers FTP Internet 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE (suite) 47 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées Command WorkStation Command WorkStation est un utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. Lancez Command WorkStation, connectez-vous au serveur, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une file d’attente enregistrée en tant que fichier PDF dans la liste [Travail actif] afin de d’éditer, d’imprimer ou de sauvegarder des travaux d’impression. MEMO Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE stocke les données numérisées sous forme de fichier PDF (Portable Document Format). ●Comment supprimer des données numérisées Vous pouvez supprimer des données numérisées enregistrées sous forme de file d’attente du contrôleur d’impression depuis un ordinateur sur un réseau grâce à Command WorkStation. MEMO Pour des informations détaillées sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Command WorkStation Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une file d’attente enregistrée en tant que fichier PDF dans la liste [Travail actif], puis sélectionnez [SUPPRIMER]. 48 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable 5-1 Mode responsable....................................................................... 49 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination ............................. 49 49 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable 5-1 Mode responsable L’administrateur peut utiliser le mode responsable pour modifier ou supprimer la destination déjà enregistrée dans ce mode. ●Passage en mode responsable 1. Appuyez sur la touche [COPIEUR] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [Mode de copie de base] apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur la touche [AIDE] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [MODE AIDE] apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur [MODE RESPONSABLE]. 4. Si un mot de passe a été défini, saisissez le mot de passe de responsable. Si aucun mot de passe n’a été défini, passez à l’étape 5. MEMO Pour plus d'informations sur les mots de passe, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran [Mode responsable] qui apparaît permet de passer en mode responsable. 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination L’administrateur peut modifier ou supprimer la destination. MEMO Vous pouvez utiliser l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur afin de réviser et de supprimer un numéro de boîte enregistré. 1. Affichez l’écran [Mode responsable]. 2. Appuyez sur puis sur [18. Réglages émission numérisation]. L’écran [Réglages émission numérisation] apparaît. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur , l’écran suivant/précédent apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur la destination pour la modifier ou la supprimer. 4. Appuyez sur [MODIFIER] ou [SUPPRIMER]. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [MODIFIER], vous pouvez modifier et enregistrer manuellement la destination en suivant les mêmes procédures que celles utilisées pour un enregistrement courant. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [SUPPRIMER], la destination sélectionnée est supprimée. 5. Appuyez sur [OK] pour fermer l’écran [Modifier/Supprimer adresse]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Mode responsable]. 50 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner ................................................. 51 51 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner ●Lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter au scanner Lorsqu’un message d’erreur apparaît lorsque vous tentez d’accéder au scanner, effectuez les contrôles suivants : MEMO Consultez votre administrateur réseau pour tout problème ou question relatif à vos paramètres réseau. 1. Vérifiez si l’adresse IP du scanner a été correctement saisie. Si l’adresse IP n’est pas correcte, entrez l’adresse qui convient. Si l’adresse IP saisie est correcte, passez à l’étape 2. 2. A l’invite DOS, exécutez un test ping par l’intermédiaire de l’hôte de destination sur l’adresse IP du scanner. par exemple : C:\>ping 192.168.101.152 Si le test ping échoue, vérifiez si l’alimentation principale du copieur est en position marche et vérifiez également les connexions du câble réseau. Si le test ping réussit, passez à l’étape 3. 3. Vérifiez si le routeur IP est correctement défini. Si ce n’est pas le cas, définissez-le correctement. Si le routeur IP est correctement configuré, passez à l’étape 4. 4. Effectuez le routage jusqu’au scanner pour vérifier si le réseau fonctionne. Résolvez les défaillances rencontrées. En l’absence d’erreur et si la connexion au scanner ne peut toujours pas être établie, contactez votre service aprèsvente. ●Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser, vérifiez si [3. Réglage de la fonction ECM] ([3. Réglage de la fonction ECK]) - [Allumer/Eteindre le scanner] est positionné sur [ECM Activé] ([EKC Activé]) en mode responsable. Pour des informations détaillées sur le [3. Réglage de la fonction ECM] ([3. Réglage de la fonction ECK]), veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur ou celui du contrôleur d’impression. 52 Annexe Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit .............................................53 53 Annexe Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit Pour connaître les caractéristiques du copieur et du contrôleur d’impression, veuillez vous reportez au manuel d’utilisation correspondant. ●Caractéristiques des fonctions de numérisation du produit • Protocole pris en charge TCP/IP • Résolution de numérisation 200 ppp, 300 ppp, 400 pppi, 600 ppp • Vitesse de numérisation 37 pages/minute (A4/8,5 x 11) • Plage de numérisation Identique au copieur • Fonction Numériser vers e-mail/Numériser vers disque dur/Numériser vers FTP/ Numériser vers FILE D’ATTENTE • Tau de restitution Change selon la résolution de lecture. Pour 200 ppp : 75 – 400 % Pour 300 ppp : 75 – 400 % Pour 400 ppp : 38 – 400 % Pour 600 ppp : 25 – 400 % • Formats de papier lisibles A3 / A4R / A4 / A5 / A5R / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5 / 5,5x8,5R / 8,5Rx14 / 11x17 / POSTC / PLEINE PAGE • Nombres de pages pouvant être stockées sur le disque dur Dépend de la résolution et du contenu du document (documents A4, format de fichier ; JPEG, TIFF, PDF) Pour 200 ppp : environ. 110 000 pages Pour 300 ppp : environ. 58 000 pages Pour 400 ppp : environ. 37 000 pages Pour 600 ppp : environ. 20 000 pages • Zone imprimable La zone imprimable diffère entre le recto et le verso d’une feuille de papier • Standard (non “Pleine page”) Recto : Sup. 3 mm / Faces 2 mm / Inf. 3 mm Verso : Sup. 4 mm / Faces 2 mm / Inf. 4 mm • Pleine page (format de papier standard uniquement) Recto : Sup. 0 mm / Faces 0 mm / Inf. 0 mm Verso : Sup. 0mm / Faces 0mm / Inf. 0mm • Fonctions spéciales Page par page, Formats différents, Original plié en Z, Pleine page 54 Index A Adresse d’hôte............................................ 10, 19 Adresse e-mail............................................... 8, 19 AGR./RED................................................... 16, 38 Application Fiery Remote Scan .......... 4, 45, 46 C Chemin d’accès aux fichiers..................... 10, 19 Command WorkStation........................ 4, 46, 47 Connexion ................................................... 11, 19 D Direction de l’original ......................................... 41 Disque dur ................... 7, 9, 19, 20, 27, 31, 45 E ECM (EKC) ......................................................... 51 Ecran à cristaux liquides........................... 12, 13 E-Mail .................................................... 19, 27, 46 E-mail .............................................................. 7, 19 F Fiery Remote Scan .............................................. 5 Fiery Remote Scan compatible................ 45, 46 Fiery S300 50C-KM ............................................. 4 Fiery WebTools .................................................... 5 FILE D’ATTENTE........................ 11, 27, 35, 46 Fonctions du scanner réseau............................. 4 FORMAT DE FICHIER.............................. 15, 37 Format de fichier .................................................. 8 FORMAT NUMERIS.................................. 16, 37 FTP............................ 7, 10, 19, 22, 27, 33, 46 I IMPRESSION DU TRAVAIL DE NUMERISATION EN ATTENTE................. 42 INCIDENT PAPIER PENDANT LA NUMERISATION........................................... 42 M MODE COULEUR...................................... 15, 37 MODE NUMERISATION........................... 16, 37 Mode responsable ............................................. 49 Modification de la destination........................... 49 Mot de passe .............................................. 11, 19 N NOM DE FICHIER ..................................... 15, 36 Nom de fichier....................................................... 8 Nom de profil ............................................... 10, 19 NUMERISATION EN COURS D'ENVOI ........ 42 NUMERISATION EN COURS DE LECTURE.... 42 NUMERISATION INTERROMPUE................. 42 Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE ........ 7, 19 Numéro de boîte ......................................... 10, 19 Numéro de port ........................................... 11, 19 O ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX .................................. 16 P PAVE NUMERIQUE.......................................... 13 Pleine page .................................................. 16, 41 Q QUALITE...................................................... 16, 38 R REGLAGE FORMAT......................................... 37 S Serveur couleur Fiery S300 50C-KM................ 4 Suppression de la destination.......................... 49 T Titre ................................................................. 8, 30 Touche................................................................. 12 Touche [AIDE] .................................................... 12 Touche [ANNUL.]............................................... 13 Touche [ARRET]......................................... 12, 13 Touche [AUTO] .................................................. 13 Touche [CODE].................................................. 13 Touche [COMPTEUR]....................................... 13 Touche [CONTROLE] ....................................... 12 Touche [COPIEUR] ........................................... 12 Touche de réglage du contraste...................... 13 Touche [ECONOMIE D’ENERGIE]................. 12 Touche [EPREUVE] .......................................... 12 Touche [IMPRIMANTE] .................................... 12 Touche [INTERRUPTION] ............................... 12 Touche [PROGRAMME]................................... 13 Touche [SCANNER].......................................... 12 Type de document d’origine............................. 41 V Vérification des paramètres de numérisation .. 42 Voyant de l’indicateur d’alimentation .............. 13 Voyant [PROGRAMMATEUR]......................... 12 Index (suite) 55 W WebScan................................................ 5, 45, 46 Z ZOOM .................................................................. 38 2005.6 Fiery S300 50C-KM_scn_ug_fr_v20 Page 1 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc Cleaning the PagePro 1300W/1350W Exterior Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. Pick-up Roller 1. Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. 2. Grab the front cover grip and open the front cover. 3. Pull the handle of the imaging cartridge toward you, and then pull out the imaging cartridge. Do not expose the imaging cartridge to light for a long period of time. If the drum cartridge is exposed to light, decreased image quality may result. Page 2 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc The fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part near the fusing unit may result in burns. Do not touch the image transfer roller inside the printer, otherwise decreased image quality may result. 4. Wipe the pick-up roller with a soft, dry cloth. 5. Align the imaging cartridge with the guides in the printer, and then insert the cartridge. Do not insert the imaging cartridge at an angle or with extreme force, otherwise the printer may be damaged. Page 3 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc 6. Press on the front cover grip and close the front cover. Page 1 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc Cleaning the PagePro 1300W/1350W Exterior Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. Pick-up Roller 1. Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. 2. Grab the front cover grip and open the front cover. 3. Pull the handle of the imaging cartridge toward you, and then pull out the imaging cartridge. Do not expose the imaging cartridge to light for a long period of time. If the drum cartridge is exposed to light, decreased image quality may result. Page 2 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc The fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part near the fusing unit may result in burns. Do not touch the image transfer roller inside the printer, otherwise decreased image quality may result. 4. Wipe the pick-up roller with a soft, dry cloth. 5. Align the imaging cartridge with the guides in the printer, and then insert the cartridge. Do not insert the imaging cartridge at an angle or with extreme force, otherwise the printer may be damaged. Page 3 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc 6. Press on the front cover grip and close the front cover. C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option) Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Fonctions LK-101 ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.3 Fonctions LK-102 ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................... 2-5 Enregistrement du LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................................... 2-5 Achat du Certificat-clé ...................................................................................................................... 2-5 Envoyer un code-requête ................................................................................................................. 2-6 Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) ............................................................... 2-8 Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102 ........................................................................................ 2-10 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application....................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3 Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Opération par l'écran tactile.............................................................................................................. 4-6 Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.4 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Signet (Affichage) .............................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 Signet (Ajout) ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.4 Adresse ............................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 Table des matières-2 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr.................................................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.7 Menu................................................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Présentation....................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-8 Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-8 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................... 6-9 Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-10 6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-11 Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-11 Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-12 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-12 Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-13 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-14 6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-15 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-15 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données ........................................................................................... 6-17 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-19 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses ........................................................................ 7-3 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo...................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo ........................................................................................................................ 7-4 Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-3 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.1 Présentation ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par ID numérique............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11 Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11 Enregistrer les touches de menu principal...................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-13 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................ 10-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses.......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses.............................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre ........................................................... 10-9 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public......................... 10-10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse.................................................................................................................... 10-11 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse ............................................................................................................... 10-11 11 Index Table des matières-4 Advanced Function Operations 1 Introduction Advanced Function Operations 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces fonctions. Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Afin d'utiliser cette machine correctement et en toute sécurité, assurez-vous de lire le guide de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous souhaitez consulter les marques déposées et les copyrights, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur. Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la machine réelle. 1.1 À propos de ce guide Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions MFP. Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs. 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants : Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Présentation Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Chapitre 6 Image Panel Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Chapitre 11 Index 1 Introduction 1-4 Advanced Function Operations 1.1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles, en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique. % Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes suivantes de la procédure. ? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. Advanced Function Operations 1-5 Introduction 1 Texte avec format spécial Touche [Arrêt] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-6 Advanced Function Operations 2 Présentation Advanced Function Operations 2-3 Présentation 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la section correspondante. ! Détails La disponibilité des fonctions avancées est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-201 fourni en option. 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 2.1.2 Fonctions LK-101 L'enregistrement du LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du LK-101 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer le LK-101. Si l'identification est effectuée par PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction de navigation Web n'est pas disponible. 2.1.3 Fonctions LK-102 L'enregistrement du LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du LK-102 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. p. 6-3 Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. p. 7-3 Fonction Présentation Page de référence Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. p. 8-3 2 Présentation 2-4 Advanced Function Operations 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application. ! Détails Ces fonctions ne sont disponibles que si elles sont combinées à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 9-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 10-3 Advanced Function Operations 2-5 Présentation 2 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102 Pour utiliser les fonctions des LK-101/LK-102, ces derniers doivent être enregistrés sur la MFP. Cette section décrit la procédure permettant d'enregistrer le LK-101/LK-102 sur une MFP. 1 Achetez le certificat-clé relatif au LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Achat du Certificat-clé" à la page 2-5. 2 Envoyez depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, un code requête. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer un code-requête" à la page 2-6. 3 Depuis l'ordinateur, procédez à l'enregistrement auprès du License Management Server (LMS). – Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS)" à la page 2-8. 4 Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, activez les fonctions des LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-10. Enregistrement du LK-101/LK-102 Il existe deux méthodes pour enregistrer le LK-101/LK-102 sur la MFP. - Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection C'est la procédure d'enregistrement depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP qui est décrite ici. Achat du Certificat-clé % En préparant le Certificat-clé du LK-101/LK-102 à l'avance, vous l'aurez sous la main au moment voulu. Le certificat-clé se compose des éléments suivants : - Numéro de clé - Nom de la fonction - URL du site Web du License Management Server (LMS) ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'achat du certificat-clé du LK-101/LK-102, contactez votre technicien SAV. 2 Présentation 2-6 Advanced Function Operations Envoyer un code-requête 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Suivt]. 5 Appuyez sur [Paramètres de Licence]. Advanced Function Operations 2-7 Présentation 2 6 Appuyez sur [Obtenir Code Requête]. 7 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer le code-requête. 2 Présentation 2-8 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) 1 Accédez au site Web du License Management Server (LMS). 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Tapez le numéro de série et le code-requête obtenu après l'envoi d'un code-requête, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. 4 Tapez le numéro de clé contenu dans le certificat-clé, sélectionnez les options d'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. Advanced Function Operations 2-9 Présentation 2 5 Confirmez les informations d'enregistrement, et cliquez sur la touche [Generate License Code]. 6 Le Code de Licence est établi. L'activation des fonctions du LK-101/LK-102 est subordonnée au Code de Licence. 2 Présentation 2-10 Advanced Function Operations Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102 1 Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Installer Licence]. 2 Appuyez sur [Sélectionner Fonct.], puis sélectionnez chaque fonction pour indiquer si elle doit être activée ou non. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Code de Licence], et entrez le code de licence qui a été émis. Advanced Function Operations 2-11 Présentation 2 5 Appuyez sur [Installer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Après avoir activé la fonction, placez l'interrupteur en position Arrêt, puis patientez 10 secondes environ avant de le ramener en position Marche. Sinon, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Liste fonctions activées] pour consulter la liste des fonctions activées. 2 Présentation 2-12 Advanced Function Operations 3 Affectation des touches d'application Advanced Function Operations 3-3 Affectation des touches d'application 3 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP. 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application Touche d'application Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application. 2 Remarque Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les indications d'origine selon les besoins. 1 2 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Touche du menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la page 3-4. 2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-4 Advanced Function Operations Menu Application % Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour afficher le menu Application. – Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application. 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches d'application. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. 5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. Advanced Function Operations 3-5 Affectation des touches d'application 3 6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction. 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. – Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être assignée aux touches d'application. 8 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-6 Advanced Function Operations 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Advanced Function Operations 4-3 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes : - Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet. - Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet. - Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Langages de balisage/ script pris en charge HTML, CSS, JavaScript Formats image pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié (GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent Option Adobe® Reader® LE 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-4 Advanced Function Operations 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page d'accueil. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 4-5 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants : 2 Remarque Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile. 2 1 4 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8. 2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de défilement apparaît sur le côté droit. Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement apparaît en bas de l'écran. 3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour fermer ce dernier. 4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-6 Advanced Function Operations 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation Opération par l'écran tactile Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. - Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un élément. - Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point. - Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran. Opération par le panneau de contrôle Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste. 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. % Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran. – Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. – Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres. ! Détails Pour enregistrer un historique de formulaire, appuyez sur "Saisie" dans la liste déroulante Historique Saisie afin d'afficher un clavier à l'écran. Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C]. Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît. Advanced Function Operations 4-7 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants. Normal L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu. Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal. Rendu Parfait La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. Rendu intelligent Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-8 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations. 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils : Icône Nom du composant Description Retour Revient à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page. Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11. Signet (Affichage) Affiche la liste des signets enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Signet (Affichage)" à la page 4-9. Signet (Ajout) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des signets. Pour plus de détails, voir "Signet (Ajout)" à la page 4-9. Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher. Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9. Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9. Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10. Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10. Advanced Function Operations 4-9 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.4.2 Signet (Affichage) % Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des signets enregistrés. Sélectionnez le signet permettant d'accéder à l'URL désirée. – Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. 4.4.3 Signet (Ajout) % Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des signets. Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez le titre depuis la liste des signets après l'avoir ajouté à la liste. 4.4.4 Adresse 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 4.4.5 Histor. 1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage. – Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois. 2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le signet sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du signet sélectionné. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des signets par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des signets par intitulé. Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le signet sélectionné. Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le signet sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime le signet sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les signets enregistrés. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre. Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-10 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr. 1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. 4.4.7 Menu % Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL. Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en pied de page. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 4-11 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web % Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. 4.5.1 Opération Page L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page. 4.5.2 Vue L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus. 4.5.3 Activer Onglet L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets. ! Détails Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets. Rubrique Description Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil. Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée. Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran. Rubrique Description Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre "Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent". Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7. Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus. Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus. Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images. Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu. CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu. Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu. Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures en Japonais dans un contenu. Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées. Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu, Jaune ou Orange. Rubrique Description Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet. Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée. Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif. Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul onglet d'ouvert. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-12 Advanced Function Operations 4.5.4 Réglages L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur. Rubrique Description Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer le certificat client. Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies. Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache. Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy. Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé. Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web. Advanced Function Operations 4-13 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou d'afficher ce fichier PDF. % Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître l'écran suivant. 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF. 2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF. ! Détails Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être imprimé. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-14 Advanced Function Operations 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié. – La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Advanced Function Operations 5-3 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Il est nécessaire également que le LK-101 soit enregistré sur la MFP de destination. 5.1.1 Présentation PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Grâce au navigateur Web vous pouvez accéder directement à la MFP connectée au réseau, et utiliser PageScope Web Connection. On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP. Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles. En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP. 2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse]. 3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-4 Advanced Function Operations 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache". 3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Advanced Function Operations 5-5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.2 Organisation de l'écran Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous. 6 3 4 5 1 2 No. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne. 6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-6 Advanced Function Operations 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. ! Détails Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le navigateur Web de la MFP. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. % Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion]. – Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu. 2 Remarque Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté. Advanced Function Operations 5-7 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.3.2 Déconnexion % Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran. Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît. – Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-8 Advanced Function Operations 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre MFP connectée au réseau. - Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe. - Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte. 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée. % Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe. Connexion de boîte Liste des boîtes Rubrique Description N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un. Rubrique Description Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors de sa création. Page (affichage par 50 boîtes) Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur. Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. Advanced Function Operations 5-9 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 Liste de fichiers % Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Rubrique Description Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures. Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document. Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10. [Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée. Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être effectuée. Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures. Nom Document Affiche le nom du document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux. [Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-10 Advanced Function Operations 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés. Impression 1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. Advanced Function Operations 5-11 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK]. – Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer. – "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-12 Advanced Function Operations Suppression 1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous les documents. Advanced Function Operations 5-13 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-14 Advanced Function Operations 6 Image Panel Advanced Function Operations 6-3 Image Panel 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents", "édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles. Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. 6 Image Panel 6-4 Advanced Function Operations 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 6-5 Image Panel 6 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants : 1 3 4 5 6 2 8 7 9 No. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents. 3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de la zone Numérisation des données. 4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par exemple. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant un avertissement. 7 Zone Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin. Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône. L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés. 8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la zone Outil d'édition. 9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. 6 Image Panel 6-6 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination". 2 Remarque Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents. 1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données. – Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.]. – Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-8. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-9. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-10. Advanced Function Operations 6-7 Image Panel 6 2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins. Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-11. 3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données. – Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la page 6-12. – Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-13. 6 Image Panel 6-8 Advanced Function Operations – Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-14. Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-14. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des données. 6.3.3 Numériser des documents Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents. Numéris. 1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins. 3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Rubrique Description Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original. Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux faces de l'original. Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Couleur Précisez si l'original doit être numérisé en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation. [Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso. Advanced Function Operations 6-9 Image Panel 6 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document. % Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si toute destination autre que "Boîte Utilis." est spécifiée comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner des documents à copier. Une sélection multiple peut comporter un maximum de 10 documents. Rubrique Description [Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Image Panel 6-10 Advanced Function Operations Charger depuis la mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se trouvent en mémoire externe. 2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir]. – Les fichiers qui peuvent être chargés depuis la mémoire externe sont les fichiers de type PDF, TIFF, JPEG et XPS. 3 Sélectionnez le document à charger. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Il n'est pas possible de charger en même temps plusieurs documents. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir, "Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être spécifiée comme destination. Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé comme serveur d'identification et que l'identification s'effectue par l'unité d'identification (type biométrique) AU-101 ou par l'unité d'identification (type carte IC) AU-202, il n'est pas possible d'imprimer depuis une mémoire externe. Advanced Function Operations 6-11 Image Panel 6 6.3.4 Modifier Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins. Aperçu Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. Combiner Documents Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document. % Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. Retour à Dest. Numér. % Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source. Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur. 6 Image Panel 6-12 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.5 Spécifier destination Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. 2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression. 3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation, Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 6-13 Image Panel 6 Spécifiez un destinataire 1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer. 2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées sur la machine. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. Si vous avez chargé des documents à copier, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner une autre destination que "Boîte Utilis.". 6 Image Panel 6-14 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. Seuls les documents numérisés et chargés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous avez spécifié "Impression", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média] comme destination. 6.3.6 Envoyer vers Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées. Advanced Function Operations 6-15 Image Panel 6 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. ! Détails Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant. Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP. L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte utilisateur souvent utilisée. 1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 6 Image Panel 6-16 Advanced Function Operations 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur. Advanced Function Operations 6-17 Image Panel 6 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination souvent utilisée. 1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 6 Image Panel 6-18 Advanced Function Operations 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination. Advanced Function Operations 6-19 Image Panel 6 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci. 6 Image Panel 6-20 Advanced Function Operations 7 Enregistrement Photo Advanced Function Operations 7-3 Enregistrement Photo 7 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes : ! Détails Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6 966 octets 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-4 Advanced Function Operations 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest. 3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône". Advanced Function Operations 7-5 Enregistrement Photo 7 4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier]. – Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône". 5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo". 6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-6 Advanced Function Operations 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Advanced Function Operations 8-3 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1.1 Présentation Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes : - Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. - Lors de l'envoi de documents au moyen des fonctions de numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, il est possible de crypter le fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique. - Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le certificat de la MFP. - La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-102 est enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour chaque fonction. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-4 Advanced Function Operations 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier "PDF" ou "PDF compact", vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF. Rubrique Description Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom fichier". Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF. Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est spécifié pour le nom d'auteur. Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF. Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF. Advanced Function Operations 8-5 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur, si vous sélectionnez "PDF" ou "PDF compact" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique personnel. Si un certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF avant de transmettre les données. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Cryptage par mot de passe % Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage". Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits) Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de cryptage. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-6 Advanced Function Operations Paramètres Détaillés Cryptage par ID numérique % Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi [Permettre seulement Basse résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez [Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination. Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. ! Détails Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage. Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données. L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage". Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Advanced Function Operations 8-7 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.4 Impres. dir. La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet Impres. dir. 2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-8 Advanced Function Operations 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Advanced Function Operations 9-3 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si elle est combinée à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle. - Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la page 6-15. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-4 Advanced Function Operations 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Panneau est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP sont disponibles. - Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. (1) Identification utilisateur Serveur (Gestion de Mon Panneau) Mon Panneau activé Mon Panneau activé (3) Envoi de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur Mon Panneau désactivé Advanced Function Operations 9-5 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. % Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. 2 Remarque L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-13. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-6 Advanced Function Operations 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau % Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires". 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants. 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Rubrique Description Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7. Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7. Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8. Paramètres Numérisation/ Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9. Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11. Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-13. Advanced Function Operations 9-7 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. 9.3.3 Réglage Langue % Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure % Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-8 Advanced Function Operations 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie rapide. L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base. En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin de faciliter les réglages multiples. Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Advanced Function Operations 9-9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut % Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif. histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir". Carnet d'adresses par Défaut % Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Sélect. d''adresse enregis.". Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-10 Advanced Function Operations Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Carnet adresses par défaut Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse". Advanced Function Operations 9-11 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez "Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon". 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Écran Réglages Menu Principal Les touches de raccourci à afficher sur l'écran Menu Comm s'appellent touches de menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types de touches. Pour enregistrer en mémoire l'icône de raccourci comme touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône]. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-12 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer les touches de menu principal Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à des touches de menu principal. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies sur l'écran Menu Comm. Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être assignée aux touches de menu principal. Rubrique Description Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Réglage Fonction Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction du mode couleur, paramètre papier, réglage zoom, recto-verso/combinaison, et finition. Réglage Fonction Numérisation/Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/ Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage communication. Réglage Programme Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Réglage Progr. Numéris./ Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Advanced Function Operations 9-13 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut % Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié comme écran initial. Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être spécifiée comme écran initial. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-14 Advanced Function Operations 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Advanced Function Operations 10-3 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si elle est combinée à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées. Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur. ! Détails Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur. Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe fréquemment appelées. Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-4 Advanced Function Operations 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe). - Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index. - Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Sélect. d’adresse enregis.] ne soit pas possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses) (2) Accès au serveur (3) Obtention de Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses activé (1) Identification utilisateur Advanced Function Operations 10-5 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles : - Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP. 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. – Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses privé. – Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-6 Advanced Function Operations 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. 7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-7 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2.2 Groupe On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. – Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. – Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-8 Advanced Function Operations 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. – Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-9 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. ! Détails En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de carnets d'adresses. 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu. La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-10 Advanced Function Operations 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. Advanced Function Operations 10-11 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination. Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée. % Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche. % Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse. – [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type. – [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des données qu'elle contient. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-12 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index Advanced Function Operations 11-3 Index 11 11 Index A Activer Onglet 4-11 Adresse 4-9 Animation 4-11 B Barre d'outils 4-8 Boîte 5-8 C Cache 4-12, 5-4 Caractéristiques techniques 4-3 Carnet Adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Certificat-clé 2-5 Codage 4-11 Code d'accès 8-5 Code-requête 2-6 Connexion 5-6 Connexion à une boîte 5-8 Conventions du manuel 1-4 Cookies 4-12 Cryptage 8-5 CSS 4-11 D Déconnexion 5-7 E Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3 Envoyer vers 6-14 É Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11 F Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11 G Groupe 10-7 H Histor. 4-9 Historique Formulaire 4-12 I ID numérique 8-6 Image 4-11 Image Panel 2-3, 6-3 Impres. dir. 8-7 Impression 4-10, 5-10 Infos Navigateur Web 4-12 J JavaScript 4-11 L License Management Server (LMS) 2-5, 2-8 Liste 4-11 Liste de fichiers 5-9 LK-101 2-3, 2-5 LK-102 2-3, 2-5 M Menu 4-10 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Principal 9-5 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-14 Mémos Page 4-11 Mode Affichage 4-11 Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3 N Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11 O Opération Page 4-11 P Page d'accueil 4-11 PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4 PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9 Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11 Paramètres Touche Application 3-4 PDF 4-13, 8-5 Personnaliser 3-3, 6-15, 9-3 Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4 Proxy 4-12 R Rendu intelligent 4-7 Rendu Parfait 4-7 Rendu Rapide 4-11 Retour ligne auto 4-11 Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-13 Réglage Langue 9-7 Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12 Réglage Programme Copie 9-12 Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7 Réglages Copieur 9-8 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6 S Sécurité 4-12 Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11 11-4 Advanced Function Operations Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Nous voulons faire de vous un client satisfait...........................1-1 1.2 Explication des conventions........................................................1-2 1.3 Explication des concepts de base et symboles.........................1-3 Alimentation Papier ....................................................................1-3 “Largeur” et “Longueur” ..............................................................1-3 Orientation papier .......................................................................1-4 Portrait et Paysage.....................................................................1-4 Icônes d'affichage.......................................................................1-5 Icône de niveau de papier ..........................................................1-5 1.4 Energy Star® .................................................................................1-6 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® ...................................1-6 1.5 Les composants et leurs fonctions.............................................1-7 1.6 Nomenclature et fonctions.........................................................1-11 Copieur .....................................................................................1-11 Accessoires ..............................................................................1-14 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Symboles d’avertissement et de précaution ..............................2-1 2.2 Signification des symboles..........................................................2-1 AVERTISSEMENT .....................................................................2-2 ATTENTION ...............................................................................2-3 2.3 Précautions en utilisation quotidienne.......................................2-5 2.4 Instructions destinées à l’utilisateur...........................................2-6 Label CE (déclaration de conformité) .........................................2-6 For New Zealand Users:.............................................................2-6 2.5 Sécurité laser.................................................................................2-7 Rayonnement laser interne ........................................................2-7 CDRH Regulation .......................................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs européens ..................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs danois.........................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois .......................................2-9 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens..................................................2-9 Etiquette Sécurité Laser ..........................................................2-10 Émission d'ozone .....................................................................2-10 Niveau sonore ..........................................................................2-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.6 Précautions d’installation ......................................................... 2-11 Lieu d'implantation ................................................................... 2-11 Alimentation ............................................................................. 2-11 Espace requis .......................................................................... 2-12 2.7 Précautions d’utilisation............................................................ 2-13 Environnement......................................................................... 2-13 Utilisation correcte ................................................................... 2-13 Transport du copieur................................................................ 2-15 Manipulation des consommables............................................. 2-15 Stockage de copies.................................................................. 2-15 2.8 Cadre juridique de la copie........................................................ 2-16 3 Fonctions disponibles 3.1 Fonctions utiles ............................................................................ 3-1 Copier un livre ou un magazine ................................................. 3-1 Copie pour Livret........................................................................ 3-4 Agrafage automatique des pages pendant la copie................... 3-6 Imprimer des copies multiples de tickets ................................... 3-8 Copier tout en effaçant une zone autour du document ........... 3-12 Economiser le papier ............................................................... 3-15 Economiser l'électricité ............................................................ 3-17 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4.1 Noms des pièces du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions ....................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Vérifier les réglages ..................................................................... 4-3 Pour vérifier les réglages ........................................................... 4-3 Pour modifier les réglages ......................................................... 4-4 4.3 Opérations Accessibilité Utilisateur ........................................... 4-5 Modifier le réglage de l'affichage de l'écran (fonction “Mode Ecran”) ............................................................. 4-6 Modifier le paramétrage des touches (fonction “Vitesse Touche”)........................................................ 4-7 Modifier le délai d'Initialisation automatique (fonction “Ecran Confirmation”) .................................................. 4-8 Changer la durée d'affichage de l'écran “Travail enregistré” (fonction “Ecran Notification”) ..................... 4-9 Modifier le volume des bips et des alarmes (fonction “Paramétrage Sons”)................................................. 4-10 4.4 Agrandir les fenêtres de l’écran tactile..................................... 4-11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.5 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension .......................4-12 Mise en route du copieur ..........................................................4-12 Quand le copieur est mis sous tension.....................................4-12 Arrêt du copieur ........................................................................4-13 Quand le copieur est mis hors tension .....................................4-14 Initialisation automatique ..........................................................4-14 Mode Economie d'énergie........................................................4-15 Mode Veille...............................................................................4-15 4.6 Régler l’inclinaison du panneau de contrôle............................4-16 4.7 Utilisation de l’écran tactile........................................................4-17 Description de l'écran tactile.....................................................4-17 Sélections par défaut................................................................4-17 Utilisation de l'écran tactile .......................................................4-18 Description des écrans .............................................................4-19 Écran Liste Tâches...................................................................4-20 Vérifier l'état d'une tâche ..........................................................4-21 Vérifier l'ordre d'impression ......................................................4-22 Contrôler/supprimer des éléments figurant sur la liste de l'écran Impression ..............................................4-23 Rappel Mémoire .......................................................................4-24 Utiliser la fonction Rappel Mémoire..........................................4-25 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5.1 Réalisation de copies ...................................................................5-1 5.2 Arrêter une opération de copie ...................................................5-3 Arrêter/Reprendre/Supprimer une tâche de copie......................5-3 5.3 Interrompre une tâche de copie...................................................5-4 Interrompre une opération de copie ...........................................5-4 5.4 Effectuer des copies sur comptes ..............................................5-6 Utiliser le paramètre “Contrôle Département” ............................5-6 Pour réaliser des copies sur des comptes validés ....................5-6 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6.1 Fonction “Couverture” .................................................................6-1 Ajouter des pages de couverture................................................6-1 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Couverture”....................6-3 6.2 Fonction “Intercalaires” ..............................................................6-4 Insérer des pages (Intercalaires) entre les copies......................6-4 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Intercalaires” .................6-5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.3 Fonction “Encart transparent”.................................................... 6-6 Insérer des pages entre des copies de transparents................. 6-6 Procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Encart transparent” ............................................................................... 6-7 6.4 Fonction “Marge” ......................................................................... 6-8 Réaliser des copies avec marge de reliure ............................... 6-8 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Marge” ............... 6-9 6.5 Fonction “Effacement bords” ................................................... 6-10 Effacer des portions de copies................................................. 6-10 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Effacement bords” ................................................................. 6-11 6.6 Fonction “Multi-image” ............................................................. 6-12 Impression multicopie du même original sur une seule feuille ....................................................................... 6-12 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Multi-image” ........................................................................... 6-12 6.7 Fonction “Diffusion” ................................................................. 6-14 Imprimer des numéros de diffusion sur les jeux de copies.................................................................................. 6-14 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Diffusion” .................... 6-14 6.8 Fonction “Filigrane” .................................................................. 6-16 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Filigrane” ..................... 6-16 6.9 Fonction “Tampon” ................................................................... 6-17 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Tampon” ....................... 6-17 6.10 Fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” .............................................. 6-19 Inverser les zones noires et les zones blanches sur les copies ........................................................................... 6-19 Procéder au réglage de la fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” ............................................................................... 6-19 6.11 Fonction “Lecture fragmentée” ................................................ 6-20 Numériser un document en plusieurs fois................................ 6-20 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”.............................................................................. 6-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Ecrans du mode Utilitaires...........................................................7-1 Écran Utilitaires ..........................................................................7-1 Ecran Choix utilisateur................................................................7-1 Ecran Compteurs........................................................................7-2 Ecran Rappel programme ..........................................................7-2 Ecran Mode utilisateur................................................................7-2 Ecrans Mode Gestion Administrateur.........................................7-3 7.2 Fonctions du Choix utilisateur ....................................................7-4 7.3 Procédure de configuration standard.........................................7-6 Pour définir la fonction “Rappel mémoire” ..................................7-6 Pour définir la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” ..................7-7 Pour définir la fonction “Langue d'Affichage”..............................7-8 Pour définir la fonction “Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut” ............7-9 Pour définir la fonction “Papier Auto / Taux Auto” ...................7-10 Pour définir la fonction “Magasin prioritaire” ............................7-11 Pour définir la fonction “Papier dédié” ......................................7-12 Pour définir la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret”.....................................................................................7-14 Pour définir la fonction “Economie d'énergie” ..........................7-15 Pour définir la fonction “Mise en veille” ....................................7-16 Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran”.................................7-17 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation automatique”...................7-18 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé” .............7-19 Pour définir la fonction “Disposition copie 4en1” .....................7-20 Pour définir la fonction “Mode densité” ....................................7-21 Pour définir la fonction “Densité copie”.....................................7-22 Pour définir la fonction “Densité impression” ...........................7-23 Pour définir la fonction “Priorité finition” ...................................7-24 Pour définir la fonction “Tri sélectif” .........................................7-25 Pour définir la fonction “Réceptacle” (en option) ......................7-26 Pour définir la fonction “Originaux plus petits”..........................7-27 Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner”................7-28 Pour définir la fonction “Agrafage centre/Marquage pli” (seulement si le module de finition ou le kit agrafage à cheval est installé) .................................................................7-29 Pour définir la fonction “Densité (ADF)” (uniquement si l'introducteur/retourneur de document est installé) ...............7-30 7.4 Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image ........................7-31 Enregistrer un tampon-image...................................................7-31 7.5 Voir les compteurs (fonction “Compteurs”).............................7-33 Pour voir les compteurs............................................................7-33 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.6 Utiliser les programmes Copie.................................................. 7-34 Pour mémoriser un programme de copie ................................ 7-34 Pour supprimer un programme de copie ................................. 7-35 Pour utiliser un programme de copie ....................................... 7-36 7.7 Fonctions du Mode utilisateur .................................................. 7-37 Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”)................ 7-37 Pour nettoyer l'écran tactile (fonction “Nettoyage écran”)........ 7-39 Pour déshumidifier l'introducteur/retourneur de document (fonction “Déshumidification”) ................................. 7-40 Pour faire l'appoint en toner (fonction “Apport toner”).............. 7-41 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8.1 Ecrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur................................... 8-1 Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur......... 8-1 8.2 Réglages préalables..................................................................... 8-3 Spécifier la date et l'heure.......................................................... 8-3 Pour régler la date et l'heure...................................................... 8-3 Pour définir le fuseau horaire ..................................................... 8-5 Pour définir le fuseau horaire ..................................................... 8-5 8.3 Paramètres administrateur .......................................................... 8-6 Modifier le code d'accès administrateur..................................... 8-6 Pour définir le code d'accès administrateur ............................... 8-6 Restriction du nombre de copies ............................................... 8-8 Pour spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé ............................................................................... 8-8 Désactiver Mode Veille .............................................................. 8-9 Pour désactiver le mode Veille .................................................. 8-9 8.4 Paramètres Contrôle Département ........................................... 8-10 Mode Contrôle Département.................................................... 8-10 Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département ............................ 8-11 Données d'information sur le compte....................................... 8-13 Pour imprimer les données d'informations sur les comptes..... 8-13 Effacer tous les compteurs ...................................................... 8-14 Modifier les informations sur les comptes................................ 8-15 8.5 Configurer l’enregistrement de comptes ................................. 8-16 Enregistrement de comptes ..................................................... 8-16 Pour enregistrer des comptes.................................................. 8-16 Compteur Département ........................................................... 8-19 Pour vérifier le nombre de tirages effectué par chaque compte ..................................................................................... 8-19 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.6 Paramétrer l’accès à la machine................................................8-20 Verrouillage d'accès (Access Lock)..........................................8-20 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Access Lock” ...............8-20 8.7 Configurer les fonctions logicielles (Soft Switch) ...................8-21 Paramétrage de la réinitialisation du mode Copie avec introducteur/retourneur de document installé (Mode 429) ..............................................................................8-22 8.8 Lever le verrouillage ...................................................................8-23 Déverrouillage ..........................................................................8-23 9 Papier Copie 9.1 Caractéristiques papier ................................................................9-1 Types de papier..........................................................................9-1 Formats papier ...........................................................................9-2 Capacité de papier .....................................................................9-3 9.2 Papier à éviter................................................................................9-4 9.3 Zone d’impression ........................................................................9-5 9.4 Stockage du papier.......................................................................9-5 9.5 Sélection automatique de la source papier ................................9-6 Conditions préalables .................................................................9-6 Ordre de sélection d'un magasin alternatif .................................9-6 9.6 Chargement du papier..................................................................9-7 Chargement du papier dans le 1er, 2ème, 3ème et 4ème magasin........................................................................9-8 Chargement du papier dans le magasin grande capacité ....................................................................................9-10 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles..............................................................................9-11 Pour charger du papier ordinaire .............................................9-11 Pour charger des cartes postales.............................................9-12 Pour charger des enveloppes...................................................9-13 Pour charger des transparents de rétroprojection ....................9-14 Pour charger des planches d'étiquettes ...................................9-14 Pour définir un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-15 Pour enregistrer un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-17 Pour sélectionner un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-19 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.7 Sélectionner le réglage Papier .................................................. 9-20 Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin .............. 9-20 Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles....................................................... 9-20 10 Documents originaux 10.1 Introduction du document......................................................... 10-1 Utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document................ 10-1 Types de document ................................................................ 10-1 Document de formats uniformes.............................................. 10-1 Documents pour le mode Détection originaux mixtes.............. 10-1 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ................................................... 10-2 Précautions relatives aux originaux ......................................... 10-3 10.2 Chargement de l’original dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document .............................................................................. 10-4 Chargement du document ....................................................... 10-4 Pour charger un document de formats mixtes (fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”).................................... 10-6 10.3 Positionnement des documents sur la vitre d’exposition...... 10-8 Pour positionner des documents en feuilles ............................ 10-9 Pour positionner des documents transparents ou translucides............................................................................ 10-10 Pour positionner des livres ou des magazines ...................... 10-11 10.4 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques................................................................................ 10-12 Description du tableau ........................................................... 10-12 Originaux rectos..................................................................... 10-13 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure à gauche ......................... 10-19 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure en haut ............................ 10-25 10.5 Documents de grand format ................................................... 10-31 Précautions concernant les copies A3 L/B4 L ....................... 10-31 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11.1 Spécifier les paramètres de finition ......................................... 11-1 Réglages Finition disponibles .................................................. 11-1 Considérations sur l'utilisation des paramètres “Tri” et “Groupe”............................................................................... 11-4 Tri décalé ................................................................................. 11-4 Tri croisé .................................................................................. 11-4 Groupe décalé ......................................................................... 11-5 Groupe croisé .......................................................................... 11-5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre Agrafage.....................11-6 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre “Perforation” ...............11-8 Marquage pli et Pliage..............................................................11-9 Notes relatives à la position d'agrafage..................................11-10 Notes sur le nombre de jeux qu'il est possible d'agrafer ........11-12 Notes sur la position de perforation........................................11-12 11.2 Spécifier une sélection Zoom..................................................11-13 Sélectionner un taux Zoom.....................................................11-14 Spécifier un taux zoom personnalisé (“Taux Perso”) ............11-15 Pour entrer un taux zoom personnalisé..................................11-15 Pour mémoriser les taux zoom personnel et minimal.............11-16 Pour rappeler un taux zoom personnalisé enregistré en mémoire.............................................................................11-16 Pour spécifier des échelles verticales et horizontales différentes (réglage “Zoom X/Y”) ............................................11-17 11.3 Sélectionner les réglages Orig. > Copie .................................11-18 Paramètres Orig. > Copie.......................................................11-18 Pour spécifier les paramètres Orig. > Copie...........................11-21 Copier un document relié .......................................................11-23 Copier un livre ........................................................................11-25 Copier des pages d'un livre sur deux pages recto/verso........11-28 Sélection rapide des paramètres par défaut...........................11-30 11.4 Spécifier une densité copie......................................................11-31 Sélectionner un paramètre de densité....................................11-31 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte” .............................................11-31 Sélectionner le réglage “Photo” .............................................11-32 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte/Photo” ...................................11-33 12 Messages de l’écran tactile 12.1 Quand le message “Prêt à copier. Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche........................................................................................12-1 12.2 Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche .....................12-2 Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner ......................................12-2 12.3 Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche .......................12-5 Pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes destinée au module de finition ...............................................................12-5 Pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes du kit agrafage à cheval ....................................................................................12-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12.4 En cas de serrage papier ......................................................... 12-11 Localisation des serrages papier ........................................... 12-11 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document .......................................................................... 12-12 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans la section de fixation .......... 12-14 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso............... 12-18 Retrait d'un serrage dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles .......................................................................... 12-18 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier ...................................................................... 12-19 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier ...................................................................... 12-20 Pour retirer un serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité ..................................................................... 12-21 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré ........................................................................ 12-22 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier ............... 12-24 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval.................................................................................. 12-26 12.5 Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” s’affiche ........... 12-27 Retrait des agrafes coincées ................................................. 12-27 12.6 Quand le message “Le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein.” s’affiche............................................... 12-31 Pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation................. 12-31 13 Incidents 13.1 Principaux messages et leurs solutions .................................. 13-1 13.2 En cas de copies incorrectes .................................................... 13-3 13.3 Dysfonctionnement du copieur................................................. 13-6 14 Annexe 14.1 Caractéristiques techniques ..................................................... 14-1 Copieur Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 ............................................... 14-1 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 ......................... 14-3 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ................................................... 14-3 Unité recto/verso AD-16........................................................... 14-4 Module alternateur SB-1 .......................................................... 14-4 Magasin d'alimentation papier PF-124..................................... 14-4 Magasin d'alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 ........... 14-5 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 ............................................ 14-5 Module de finition intégré FN-117............................................ 14-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 ...................................................14-7 Kit bac courrier MK-1................................................................14-7 Kit de perforation PK-6 .............................................................14-7 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1.......................................................14-8 Séparateur travaux JS-203.......................................................14-8 14.2 Entretien du copieur ...................................................................14-9 Nettoyage .................................................................................14-9 Revêtement ..............................................................................14-9 Vitre d'exposition ......................................................................14-9 Panneau de contrôle ................................................................14-9 Vitre d'exposition ....................................................................14-10 14.3 Table d’association des fonctions ..........................................14-11 Codes de combinaison de fonctions.......................................14-14 14.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom .....................................14-16 Formats papier .......................................................................14-16 Taux de zoom.........................................................................14-17 14.5 Consommables .........................................................................14-20 Papier .....................................................................................14-20 Cartouche de toner.................................................................14-20 Cartouche d'agrafes ...............................................................14-21 14.6 Index...........................................................................................14-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-1 1 Introduction 1.1 Nous voulons faire de vous un client satisfait Merci d'avoir porté votre choix sur Konica Minolta. Pour une performance optimale et une utilisation efficace de votre copieur, le présent manuel vous apporte des informations sur les sujets suivants :  Éléments et accessoires du copieur  Premiers pas . . .  Les fonctions en détail  Combiner les fonctions  Réglages Utilitaires  Incidents : cause et action Veuillez lire ce manuel attentivement et le conserver à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y reporter en cas de besoin. Rangez-le dans son logement à l'arrière du copieur. Les services ci-dessous restent à votre disposition pour vous fournir des informations supplémentaires et une assistance concrète en cas de panne :  le service après-vente Konica Minolta Lorsque vous demandez de l'assistance, munissez-vous du numéro de série (voir la plaque d'identification de votre photocopieur) et de la date d'achat du photocopieur : nous pourrons ainsi vous dépanner rapidement et efficacement en cas d'anomalie de fonctionnement. . . . Car nous voulons que vous soyez un client satisfait. 1 Introduction 1-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles.  Pour une utilisation sûre du copieur, il y a lieu de prendre en compte tous les avertissements. ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels.  Pour une utilisation sûre du copieur, il y a lieu de prendre en compte tous les avertissements.  Note* (*Peut aussi apparaître sous “Important” ou “Conseil”) Le texte mis en valeur de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des conseils destinés à une utilisation sûre du copieur. 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire.  Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. L'illustration figurant ici indique quelles opérations doivent être effectuées. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-3 1.3 Explication des concepts de base et symboles On trouvera ci-dessous la signification des mots et symboles utilisés dans le présent manuel. Alimentation Papier En impression, l'alimentation papier se fait du côté droit du copieur et le papier sort dans le plateau de sortie du haut ou dans l'option de sortie à gauche, face imprimée vers le bas. Le sens d'introduction du papier est illustré par les flèches dans le schéma ci-dessous. “Largeur” et “Longueur” En ce qui concerne les dimensions mentionnées dans le présent manuel, la première valeur fait toujours référence à la largeur du papier (“Y” dans l'illustration) et la deuxième valeur à la longueur (“X”). 1 Introduction 1-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Orientation papier Orientation longitudinale ( ) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est inférieure à la longueur (X), l'orientation du papier est dite verticale ou “en portrait”, indiquée par “L” ou . Orientation transversale ( ) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est supérieure à la longueur (X), l'orientation du papier est horizontale ou “en paysage”, indiquée par, “C” ou . Portrait et Paysage Portrait En orientation “portrait” le papier disposé verticalement, comme un portrait. Paysage En orientation “paysage” le papier est disposé horizontalement, comme un paysage. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-5 Icônes d’affichage Papier ordinaire Papier épais Transparents de rétroprojection Enveloppe Icône de niveau de papier Les icônes représentées ici peuvent s'afficher pour indiquer qu'un manque papier effectif ou imminent. La réserve de papier est épuisée. 1 Introduction 1-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1.4 Energy Star® En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d’un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en “mode d'économie d'énergie” à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-7 1.5 Les composants et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 (en option) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numérisation du recto, puis retourne automatiquement la feuille du document pour la numérisation du verso. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “introducteur/ retourneur de document”. 2 Kit couvre-original OC-6 (en option) Permet de maintenir en place le document chargé. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “couvre-original”. 3 Meuble copie CD-4M (en option) On peut installer le copieur sur le meuble copie. L'utilisation du meuble copie permet d'installer le copieur au sol. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “meuble copie”. 4 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 (en option) Cassette de grande contenance pour 2500 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin grande capacité”. 5 Magasin d'alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 (en option) Magasin d'approvisionnement papier à deux niveaux. Chaque bac d'alimentation peut contenir 500 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin d'alimentation papier”. 6 Séparateur travaux JS-203 (en option) Permet de séparer les pages imprimées Tirez le levier pour retirer le papier. • Pour pouvoir utiliser le séparateur travaux, le module alternateur doit être installé. 7 Unité recto/verso AD-16 Retourne automatiquement les pages et les imprime sur chaque face. Désignée dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto/verso”. Pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso, le module alternateur est nécessaire. 8 Module alternateur SB-1 Il permet de retourner la page lors d'une copie recto-verso. Il est nécessaire pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso. 1 Introduction 1-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11 10 9 13 12 No. Nom de la pièce Description 9 Magasin d'alimentation papier PF124 (en option) Equipé d'un magasin papier qui peut contenir 500 feuilles (pour unité d'alimentation papier supérieure seulement). Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin d'alimentation papier”. 10 Module de finition intégré FN-117 (en option) Assure la finition des pages imprimées, selon le mode de finition choisi (tri ou agrafage), puis éjecte les pages Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “module de finition”. 11 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, elle permet d'augmenter le nombre de bacs pour la séparation des pages imprimées. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “3ème plateau de sortie papier”. 12 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, les sélections Agrafage, Perforation, Marque de pliage et Livret sont disponibles comme fonctions de Finition. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit agrafage à cheval”. 13 Kit bac courrier MK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, les pages imprimées peuvent être séparées et éjectées dans le bac approprié assigné à une personne ou un groupe spécifique. • Cette option ne peut être utilisées qu'avec les impressions commandées par l'ordinateur. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit bac courrier”. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-9 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 14 Kit de perforation PK-6 (en option)* Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, la perforation devient possible. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit de perforation”. 15 Mémoire 32 Mo/64 Mo/ 128 Mo M32-4/M64-2/M128-3 (en option)* Augmente la mémoire du copieur jusqu'à 192 Mo maximum (64 Mo de mémoire standard + 32/64/128 Mo de mémoire supplémentaire). L'extension de la mémoire permet d'augmenter le nombre de pages qui pourront être conservées en mémoire. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “extension mémoire”. 16 Kit disque dur HDD6 (en option)* Permet de stocker un plus grand nombre de pages. Augmente le nombre de pages qui peuvent être numérisées. Permet aussi de multiples tâches de numérisation. • Pour bénéficier de l'extension des fonctions grâce au kit disque dur HDD-6, les contrôleurs d'imprimante, en option, Pi3505e ou Pi3505e/PS, doivent être installés. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “disque dur”. 17 Contrôleur d'imprimante Pi3505e, Pi3505e/PS (en option) Contrôleur d'imprimante interne. Il permet d'utiliser ce copieur comme une imprimante informatique. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilisateur du contrôleur d’imprimante. 18 Kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau SU-3 (en option)* Kit interne Internet fax & numérisation réseau. Vous pouvez utiliser ce copieur comme scanner réseau ou comme télécopieur Internet. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner. 19 Kit numérisation réseau SU-2 (en option)* Kit de de numérisation réseau interne. Vous pouvez utiliser ce copieur comme scanner réseau. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner. 20 Carte interface réseau NC-4 (en option)* Elle est nécessaire pour utiliser ce copieur comme imprimante, scanner, ou comme fax Internet. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner ou le manuel du contrôleur d’imprimante. 21 Kit interface parallèle (en option)* Utilisé comme imprimante, ce copieur reçoit les données d'impression au moyen d'une connexion parallèle (IEEE1284). • Quant le kit interface parallèle est installé, il faut lui adjoindre le contrôleur d’imprimante Pi3505e ou Pi3505e/PS, en option, ainsi que la carte interface réseau NC-4. No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Introduction 1-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Comment utiliser le séparateur travaux (JS-203) ? Permet de séparer les pages imprimées. Tirer le levier pour retirer le papier. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-11 1.6 Nomenclature et fonctions Copieur 9 8 6 3 1 2 4 10 5 11 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Porte droite Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 2 Levier de déverrouillage de la porte droite Permet de débloquer la porte droite. 3 Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles Sert à l'alimentation manuelle du papier pour effectuer des copies ou des impressions. Peut recevoir 150 feuilles de papier. Peut aussi recevoir du papier spécial. Voir page 9-11. 4 Extension plateau Tirez l'extension plateau pour charger du papier de grand format. 5 Guide papier S'ajuste à la largeur du papier. 6 Levier de déverrouillage Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 7 Indicateur de niveau papier A mesure que diminue la quantité de papier contenue dans le magasin papier, la zone en rouge augmente. 8 Porte frontale Ouvrir pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. Voir page 12-2. 9 Plateau de sortie papier Reçoit les pages éjectées du copieur, face imprimée orientée vers le bas. 10 Butée papier Empêche les pages imprimées de tomber du plateau de sortie papier. Utilisation subordonnées à l'installation du module de Tri (en option). 11 Écran tactile Afficheur à cristaux liquides sur le panneau de contrôle. Permet de spécifier divers paramètres de copie ou de changer de fonctions. 1 Introduction 1-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 20 19 18 17 12 13 16 15 No. Nom de la pièce Description 12 Couvre-document Permet de maintenir le document bien plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. 13 Vitre d’exposition Pour scanner un document en introduction manuelle, le placer sur la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d’exposition. 14 Module alternateur * Intégré à l'imprimante pour retourner le papier lors de l'impression de pages recto-verso. 15 Unité recto-verso Retourne les pages imprimées et permet ainsi l'impression automatique de pages recto-verso. Pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso, le module alternateur est nécessaire. Désignée dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto/ verso”. 16 Porte de l'unité recto-verso Ouvrir pour remédier à un serrage à l'intérieur de l'unité recto-verso. 17 1er magasin papier Contient jusqu'à 500 feuilles de papier. Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier, voir page 9-8. 18 2ème magasin papier Contient jusqu'à 500 feuilles de papier. Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier, voir page 9-8. 19 Panneau de contrôle Permet de démarrer la copie ou de spécifier diverses sélections. 20 Réglette document Sert à aligner le document. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-13 21 22 23 No. Nom de la pièce Description 21 Connecteur de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Utilisé pour connecter le segment d'interconnexion de l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 22 Interrupteur d’alimentation Sert à mettre le copieur sous et hors tension, voir page 4-12. 23 Prise pour cordon d'alimentation Utilisée pour connecter le câble d'alimentation de l'imprimante. 1 Introduction 1-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Accessoires Introducteur/retourneur de document Magasin d'alimentation papier (PF-124/PF-210)* * PF-210: Equipé d'un magasin papier qui peut contenir 500 feuilles (pour unité d'alimentation papier supérieure seulement). 2 5 1 6 8 9 10 11 3 13 4 12 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Guide document S'ajuste à la largeur du document. 2 Plateau d'introduction documents Charge, face imprimée vers le haut, les documents à copier. 3 Plateau sortie document Récupère les documents copiés. 4 Témoin d'impression S'allume en continu ou clignote pour indiquer l'état du copieur. 5 Butée papier Empêche les documents de tomber du plateau sortie document. No. Nom de la pièce Description 6 Levier de déverrouillage du battant inférieur droit Permet de débloquer le battant inférieur droit. 7 3ème magasin papier Chaque bac d'alimentation peut contenir 500 feuilles de papier. 8 4ème magasin papier Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-15 Module de finition intégré (FN-117) Kit bac courrier (MK-1) Précautions pour l'utilisation du module de finition, du kit agrafage à cheval et du kit bac courrier.  Ne placez pas d'objets sur le kit agrafage à cheval et sur le kit Bacs à courrier.  Ne placez pas d'objets sous les plateaux de sortie papier du module de finition. No. Nom de la pièce Description 9 2ème plateau de sortie papier (plateau copies triées) Recueille les pages qui ont été triées. 10 1er plateau de sortie papier (plateau copies non-triées) Reçoit les pages imprimées qui ne sont pas triées (réalisées avec la sélection “Non-Tri”). No. Nom de la pièce Description 11 Bac courrier Récupère les copies triées. 12 Couvercle du plateau de sortie papier Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 13 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 1 Introduction 1-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Magasin grande capacité (PF-122) Kit bac supplémentaire (AK-1 ) Kit agrafage à cheval (SK-1) 15 18 14 16 17 19 No. Nom de la pièce Description 14 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) Contient jusqu'à 2500 feuilles de papier. 15 Battant inférieur droit Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 16 Bouton de déverrouillage du magasin Appuyez sur ce bouton pour charger le papier. No. Nom de la pièce Description 17 3ème plateau de sortie papier Récupère les pages imprimées. No. Nom de la pièce Description 18 Plateau de sortie papier Récupère les pages imprimées. 19 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier Ouvrir pour dégager les serrages papier qui se produisent dans le module de finition. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-1 2 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. * Ver06 Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. 2.1 Symboles d’avertissement et de précaution 2.2 Signification des symboles Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans ce guide. La négligence de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole avertit d'un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne pas essayer d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Un incendie ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique ou toute autre machine. L'utilisation d'une prise d'alimentation acceptant une valeur de courant supérieure à celle indiquée peut déclencher un feu ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le câble avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne. Dès que l'une de ces conditions apparaît, placez immédiatement l'interrupteur sur Arrêt (OFF), débranchez la fiche de la prise murale, puis appelez le S.A.V. • En principe, n'utilisez pas de prolongateur. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger tombe à l'intérieur du produit, couper immédiatement l'alimentation, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation de la prise et contacter le technicien du Service Aprèsvente. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-3 ATTENTION • Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. • Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures, susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement “ATTENTION - TRÈS CHAUD”. Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à débrancher en cas d'urgence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de la machine et facilement accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire de la prise. • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Manuel d'Utilisation ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. • Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-5 2.3 Précautions en utilisation quotidienne • Les cartouches toner, les unités tambour PC, ainsi que d'autres composants ou consommables ne doivent pas être stockés à la lumière directe du soleil ni à température élevée et/ou à l'humidité; cela pourrait dégrader la qualité de l'image et des dysfonctionnements pourraient en résulter. • Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée. Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou d’autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer les performances. • N'utilisez pas ce produit dans un environnement dont la température excède la plage spécifiée dans le Manuel d'Utilisation, cela pourrait provoquer une panne ou un dysfonctionnement. • NE PAS essayer d'alimenter ce copieur avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement ou un feu. Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.4 Instructions destinées à l’utilisateur Label CE (déclaration de conformité) Ce produit est conforme aux Directives de l'UE suivantes : 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC, et 1999/5/EC. Cette déclaration concerne la zone de l'Union Européenne. Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. For New Zealand Users: The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network service. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service. The call log incorporated in this equipment does not record all answered calls. The call log, therefore may not agree with the Telecom account which may include calls not shown on the log. This equipment should not be used under any circumstances which may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers. Not all telephones will respond to incoming ringing when connected to the extension socket. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-7 2.5 Sécurité laser Ceci est un appareil numérique qui fonctionne au moyen d'un laser. Ce laser ne présente aucun risque à condition d'être utilisé conformément aux instructions de ce manuel. Du fait que les rayonnements émis par le laser sont entièrement confinés à l'intérieur d'une enceinte de protection, les rayons laser ne peuvent fuir de la machine à aucune phase de toute opération relevant de l'utilisation normale. Cet appareil est certifié Produit laser de Classe 1, ce qui signifie qu'il ne génère aucun rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Puissance maximale de rayonnement moyen : 28,9 μW à l'ouverture laser de l'unité de tête d'impression. Longueur d'onde : 770-795 nm Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3b qui émet un rayon laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. L'unité de tête d'impression n'est PAS UN ÉLÉMENT NÉCESSITANT UN ENTRETIEN SUR PLACE : Par conséquent, l'unité de tête d'impression ne doit être ouverte en aucune circonstance. L'illustration ci-dessus indique l'emplacement de l'ouverture laser, au travers de laquelle l'utilisateur ne doit JAMAIS regarder directement. Tête Ouverture laser de l'unité de tête d'impression d'impression 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 CDRH Regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 2-10 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs européens Ceci est un laser à semi-conducteurs. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 5 mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs danois Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 5mW og bølgelængden er 770-795 nm. CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. ATTENTION L'utilisation de commandes ou de réglages, l'application de procédures autres que celles spécifiées dans ce manuel peuvent entraîner une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement. ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-9 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5 mW ja aallonpituus on 770-795 nm. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 5 mW och våglängden är 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW og bølgelengde er 770-795 nm. LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. VARO! Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej strålen. ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Etiquette Sécurité Laser Une Etiquette Sécurité Laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d’ozone ATTENTION Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée.  Une quantité d’ozone négligeable se dégage pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque l’appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. Niveau sonore Pour les utilisateurs européens Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : Le niveau de pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70 dB(A) conformément à la norme européenne EN 27779. MINOLTA CO., LTD 2, Higashiakatsuchi, Yawata-cho, Toyokawa-shi Aichi-ken 442-8585, Japan MANUFACTURED: THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I, SUBCHAPTER J. 0946-7101-14 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT For United States For Europe For 3rd Area Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-11 2.6 Précautions d'installation Lieu d'implantation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre copieur, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables. - dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides. - dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil. - dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées. - dans un endroit bien ventilé. - dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux. - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations. - sur un support stable et horizontal. - dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique. - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux émanations se dégageant du copieur. - dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante :  Fluctuation de tension : Maximum ±10%  Variation de fréquence : maximum ±0,3 Hz  Utiliser une source de tension la plus basse possible ou avec un minimum de variations de fréquence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l’intervention du Service Après-vente, il est souhaitable d’assurer les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous.  Remarque Veillez à conserver un dégagement de 100 mm (4 pouces) ou davantage au dos du copieur pour la canalisation de ventilation. Unité : mm (pouce) 1500 (59) 328 710 (28) 100 1116 (44) 384 422 1138 (44-3/4) (15) (13) (16-1/2) (24-1/4) 1312 (51-3/4) 1757 (69-1/4) (12-3/4) 324 (4-3/4) 121 616 (4) Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-13 2.7 Précautions d’utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour le copieur est le suivant :  Température : 15°C (59°F) à 35°C (95°F) avec une fluctuation de 10°C (18°F) au maximum par heure  Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales du copieur, suivre les précautions ci-dessous. - Ne jamais poser d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et la préserver des heurts. - Ne jamais ouvrir les portes du copieur ni éteindre le copieur pendant la production de copies ; cela entraînerait un serrage papier. - Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques ni utiliser un liquide inflammable près du copieur.  S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de courant en permanence. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur du copieur est toujours visible.  Toujours débrancher le copieur de la prise de courant lors de longues périodes d'inutilisation.  Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. ATTENTION Si un orifice de ventilation est obstrué en surface, la chaleur s’accumule à l’intérieur du copieur et peut provoquer un dysfonctionnement ou un feu.  Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 ATTENTION Le tour de l’unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud.  Veiller à ne pas toucher les pièces entourant l'unité de fixation, à l'exception de celles mentionnées dans le présent manuel, afin de réduire les risques de brûlures. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité.  En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consulter un médecin. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-15 Transport du copieur Si vous devez faire transporter le copieur sur une longue distance, veuillez préalablement consulter votre S.A.V. Manipulation des consommables Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de l'utilisation des consommables (cartouche de toner, papier, etc.).  Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : à l'abri du soleil loin d'un appareil de chauffage non soumis à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux  Stocker le papier qui a été extrait de son emballage mais qui n'a pas été chargé dans le magasin dans un sac en plastique dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utiliser exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour ce copieur. Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner. - Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants. ATTENTION Précautions relatives à la manipulation de toner :  Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans le copieur, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains.  Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon.  En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consulter un médecin. Stockage de copies  Si les copies doivent être conservées pendant une longue période, les stocker dans un endroit protégé de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. - Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.8 Cadre juridique de la copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers  Chèques personnels  Chèques de voyage  Mandats  Certificats de dépôt  Obligations ou autres titres de dettes  Titres de valeur Documents officiels  Coupons alimentaires  Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non)  Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales  Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non)  Passeports  Papiers d'immigration  Permis de conduire et carte grise  Actes et titres de propriété Divers  Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes  Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-1 3 Fonctions disponibles 3.1 Fonctions utiles L'installation des accessoires en option permet d'augmenter la fonctionnalité de ce copieur. Copier un livre ou un magazine Il est possible de dupliquer les pages individuelles d'un livre ou d'un magazine sur des copies recto-verso (une page par côté) et dans l'ordre original des pages. 1 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, en l'alignant sur le repère Livre de la réglette document.  Lancez la copie dans l'ordre croissant de pagination. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [Livre]. Original Copie 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3 Pour la reliure, appuyez sur [Livre Standard] ou [Livre Inversé], puis appuyez sur [Séparation]. Ensuite, appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Recto/Verso], puis appuyez sur [Ordre des pages]. 5 Appuyez sur [Livre], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-3 7 Lorsque le message indiqué cicontre apparaît, tournez la page du livre ou du magazine, repositionnez le document original sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 8 Répétez l'étape 7, et une fois que la dernière page a été numérisée, appuyez sur [Fin]. Puis, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copie pour Livret On peut copier un document à la manière d'un livre afin de pouvoir assembler facilement les pages pour en faire un livret.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [4en1/Livret]. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-5 3 Appuyez sur [Création Livret], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 5 Une fois que toutes les copies sont imprimées, pliez les pages en deux pour former un livret.  Conseil Si le kit Agrafage à cheval est installé, il est possible de sélectionner la marquage du pli ou le pliage. Pour plus de détails, voir “Marquage pli et Pliage” à la page 11-9. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Agrafage automatique des pages pendant la copie Chaque jeu de copies peut être facilement agrafé.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document et le module de finition, en option, doivent être installés. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition]. Original Copie Agrafage Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-7 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Tri]. 4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage 2 points]. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Imprimer des copies multiples de tickets On peut facilement réaliser des tickets pour un concert ou d'autres sortes de manifestations. A titre d'exemple, voici la procédure pour réduire de 50% un document de 210 mm × 74 mm et pour le copier sur du papier épais de format A4.  Important La copie de certains types de documents tombe sous le coup de la loi. Copier de tels documents est un délit sanctionné par la loi. (Pour plus de détails, voir “Cadre juridique de la copie” à la page 2-16.)  Remarque Si le document est placé directement sur la vitre d’exposition et que le format est détecté automatiquement, le document sera numérisé au format standard. Si le document n’est pas d’un format standard, mesurez d’abord le format du document. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-9 2 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles et chargez-le en papier.  Il peut contenir jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier épais. 3 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carte], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si c'est du papier d'un format non-standard qui est chargé, appuyez sur [Format personnel], puis spécifiez le format du papier. (Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15.) 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. 7 Appuyez sur [× 0,5]. 8 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Multi-image]. 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée format]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-11 10 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 11 Appuyez sur [X]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document.  Dans cet exemple, réglez la longueur du côté X à “210”. 12 Appuyez sur [Y]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document.  Dans cet exemple, réglez la longueur du côté Y à “74”. 13 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Vous obtenez seize tickets de 105 mm × 37 mm copiés sur une feuille de papier. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copier tout en effaçant une zone autour du document Afin de copier des documents qui présentent des marques, des en-têtes, ou des perforations indésirables, il est possible à l'impression de la copie, d'en effacer un cadre ou un côté.  Remarque La position et la largeur de la zone à effacer peuvent être spécifiées de manière à obtenir un effacement approprié au document à copier. La largeur de la zone effacée renvoie à la proportion du document qui sera effacée. Si l’on réalise des agrandissements ou des réductions, la même largeur sera effacée, et on obtiendra à l’impression une copie agrandie ou réduite. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-13 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 3 Sélectionnez la position voulue de la zone d'effacement. (Exemple : Effacer un cadre) 4 Appuyez sur les touches flèches haut et bas, pour spécifier la largeur de la zone d'effacement. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-15 Economiser le papier La copie recto-verso et la copie 2en1 sont très utiles pour économiser les tirages papier ou pour réduire l'épaisseur d'un document volumineux. Voici à titre d'exemple, la procédure permettant d'imprimer deux pages individuelles d'un document sur une copie recto-verso.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé.  Conseil La copie recto-verso 2en1 et la copie recto 4en1 réduisent à un quart l’utilisation du papier, et la copie recto-verso 4en1 la réduit à un huitième. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. Original Copie Copie recto-verso Copie 2en1 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [4en1/Livret]. 3 Appuyez sur [2en1 Recto/Verso]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-17 Economiser l’électricité Ce copieur peut être mis en mode Economie d'énergie. Pour cela, on peut utiliser le mode Economie d'énergie et le mode Veille pour que le copieur passe automatiquement dans un mode d'économie d'énergie lorsqu'il n'a pas été utilisé pendant une durée spécifiée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Paramètres Utilisat.]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6].  Pour spécifier les paramètres du mode Economie d'énergie, continuez à l'étape 4.  Pour spécifier les paramètres du mode Veille, passez à l'étape 7. 4 Appuyez sur [Economie d'énergie]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante, puis spécifiez sur le clavier la durée d'inactivité désirée à l'issue de laquelle le copieur passera en mode Economie d'énergie. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur [Mise en veille]. 8 Spécifiez sur le clavier la durée d'inactivité désirée à l'issue de laquelle le copieur passera en mode Veille. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-19 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-1 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4.1 Noms des pièces du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 8 17 16 15 14 13 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 1 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages. Appuyez sur les éléments affichés sur l'écran tactile pour sélectionner des fenêtres et spécifier des réglages. 2 Touche Numérisation + Appuyez pour utiliser les fonctions de Numérisation IP. (Le kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau ainsi que la carte interface réseau doivent être installés.) 3 Touche Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. (La carte interface réseau, et le kit de numérisation réseau ou le kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau doivent être installés.) 4 Touche Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. 5 Interrupteur secondaire Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le copieur. 6 Touche Code Appuyez sur cette touche lorsque vous devez entrer un code d'accès. • Si le paramètre “Mode Contrôle Dpt” est réglé sur “OFF”, une pression sur cette touche n'aura aucun effet. 7 Touche Interruption • Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. • Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption]. . . . suite à la page suivante 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Touche Initialisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour ramener tous les modes et toutes les fonctions à leurs valeurs par défaut. 9 Touche [C] (correction) • Appuyez pour remettre le nombre de copies sur “1”. • Appuyez pour effacer une sélection, comme le taux zoom ou le format, définie à l'aide du clavier numérique. 10 Touche Stop • Appuyez pour arrêter une opération de copie. • Appuyez sur cette touche pour arrêter la numérisation d'un document. 11 Touche Impression Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer une opération de copie ou de numérisation. 12 Clavier numérique Permet d'entrer une valeur numérique, le nombre de copies par exemple. 13 Touche [Utilitaires] Permet d'afficher l'écran Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir “7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires”. 14 Touche [Mode Contrôle] • Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste de tous les réglages spécifiés. A partir de cette liste, on peut afficher un écran permettant de modifier un paramètre correspondant. • A partir de cet écran, on peut aussi enregistrer les paramètres courants en tant que programme de copie. 15 Touche [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour activer ou désactiver les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 16 Touche [Zoom Ecran] Appuyez sur cette touche pour agrandir les fenêtres qui apparaissent sur l'écran tactile. 17 Molette [Contraste] Permet de régler le contraste de l'écran tactile. No. Nom de la pièce Fonction Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-3 4.2 Vérifier les réglages Les sélections courantes peuvent être revues. De plus, on peut modifier les paramètres spécifiés ou les sauvegarder pour utilisation ultérieure. Quatre écrans vous permettent de vérifier les réglages. Pour vérifier les réglages 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode contrôle] sur le panneau de contrôle. Le premier écran apparaît pour indiquer les réglages actuels. 2 Appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher le deuxième, troisième ou quatrième écran des réglages.  Appuyez sur [Retour] pour revenir au précédent écran des réglages. 3 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base.  Conseil Pour changer un réglage, appuyez sur le bouton de la fonction que vous voulez modifier. L’écran permettant de modifier le paramétrage de la fonction sélectionnée apparaît. Dans cet écran, vous pouvez modifier le paramétrage selon vos besoins. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour modifier les réglages 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode contrôle] sur le panneau de contrôle. Le premier écran apparaît pour indiquer les réglages actuels. 2 Affichez l'écran qui contient le paramètre que vous désirez modifier.  Pour passer d'un écran à l'autre, appuyez sur [Suite] et [Retour]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au paramètre que vous désirez modifier. L'écran permettant de spécifier le réglage apparaît. 4 Modifiez le paramétrage selon la procédure correspondante. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-5 4.3 Opérations Accessibilité Utilisateur Diverses fonctions, comme le mode d'écran et le volume des alarmes, peuvent être précisées afin de faciliter l'utilisation du copieur. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Valide] ou [Initialise].  Les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur peuvent être activées ou désactivées.  Lorsque les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur sont activées, la touche [Accessibilité] s'allume en vert. Lorsque les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur sont désactivées, la touche [Accessibilité] reste éteinte. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le réglage de l’affichage de l’écran (fonction “Mode Ecran”) Sélectionner l'affichage des fenêtres de l'écran tactile en noir sur fond blanc ou en blanc sur fond noir. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Ecran]. 3 Appuyez sur [Ecran Inversé] pour afficher les fenêtres en blanc sur fond noir. Pour restaurer l'affichage normal des fenêtres, appuyez sur [Ecran Normal]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Ecran Normal Ecran Inversé Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-7 Modifier le paramétrage des touches (fonction “Vitesse Touche”) En tenant une touche enfoncée, le caractère ou le chiffre correspondant peut être entré de manière répétée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Vitesse Touche]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour régler les durées et les intervalles.  Délai : Durée de maintien à l'issue de laquelle la répétition de la touche commence  Intervalle : Durée (en secondes) pendant laquelle une touche doit être maintenue appuyée avant que le caractère correspondant ne soit entré de manière répétée. Exemple: Quand la touche [1] est maintenue appuyée:  Conseil Appuyez sur [Contrôle] pour vérifier les réglages spécifiés. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 1 1 1 1 ... Intervalle Délai Heure 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le délai d’Initialisation automatique (fonction “Ecran Confirmation”) Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant le délai spécifié, l'affichage de l'écran tactile revient à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Pour de plus amples détails sur la manière de spécifier le délai d'initialisation automatique, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires”. Sur “Ecran Confirmation”, vous pouvez spécifier d'allonger ou non la durée d'affichage de l'écran de confirmation d'extension de l'initialisation pendant laquelle il s'affiche juste avant d'être automatiquement effacé.  Remarque Les fonctions Economie d’énergie, de Veille, et d’Extinction écran sont toujours accessibles et modifiables même quand la fonction Initialisation automatique est configurée. Lorsque vous paramétrez l’Initialisation automatique, il convient de définir un délai plus court que les durées définies pour les fonctions Economie d’énergie, Veille et Extinction écran. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Ecran Confirmation]. 3 Sélectionnez le délai désiré à l'issue duquel s'affichera la fenêtre demandant de confirmer l'initialisation du copieur.  Appuyez sur [30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] ou [120 sec.].  Pour restaurer immédiatement l'écran Fonctions de Base sans afficher la fenêtre demandant de confirmer l'initialisation du copieur, appuyez sur [Sans]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-9 Changer la durée d’affichage de l’écran “Travail enregistré” (fonction “Ecran Notification”) Cet écran permet de spécifier la durée d'affichage de l'écran “Travail enregistré.” qui invite à confirmer un numéro de réception ou un numéro de travail une fois que l'opération de copie est terminée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Ecran Notification]. 3 Sélectionnez la valeur désirée pour la durée.  Appuyez sur [3 sec.], [10 sec.] ou [60 sec.].  Pour laisser l'écran “Travail enregistrée” affiché tant que la touche [Entrée] n'a pas été activée, appuyez sur [Sans Limite]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le volume des bips et des alarmes (fonction “Paramétrage Sons”) Il est possible de spécifier le volume du bip qui retentit lors d'une pression sur les boutons de l'écran tactile, ainsi que le volume des alarmes qui se font entendre en cas d'anomalie. En temps normal, on spécifiera un faible volume sonore, mais cette fonction est pratique si les circonstances nécessitent une augmentation temporaire du volume. Le volume général peut se définir dans Gestion Utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”)” à la page 7-37. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramétrage Sons]. 3 Sélectionnez la valeur désirée pour le volume. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-11 4.4 Agrandir les fenêtres de l’écran tactile Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom Ecran] pour agrandir les fenêtres qui apparaissent sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Zoom Ecran] pour restaurer les fenêtres à leur taille standard. Les opérations habituelles peuvent être effectuées sur l'écran tactile, même lorsque les fenêtres sont agrandies. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin supérieur gauche. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers le haut. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin supérieur droit. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers la gauche. Quand le bord gauche de l'écran est atteint, l'écran défile d'une ligne vers le haut et fait apparaître le bord droit. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers la droite. Quand le bord droit de l'écran est atteint, l'écran défile d'une ligne vers le haut et fait apparaître le bord gauche. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin inférieur gauche. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers le bas. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin inférieur droit. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.5 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension Mise en route du copieur 1 Placez l'interrupteur en position “I”. 2 Assurez-vous que l'interrupteur secondaire est en position MARCHE (enfoncé). Quand le copieur est mis sous tension  Quelques secondes après que le copieur ait été mis sous tension, le message “Pré-chauffage en cours. Prêt en lecture.” apparaît sur l'écran tactile et le voyant de la touche [Impression] s'allume en vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Impression] s'allume en vert, il est alors possible de mettre une tâche en file d'attente. Si l'interrupteur général est sur Marche et que l'interrupteur secondaire est sur Arrêt, il n'est pas possible d'effectuer des copies. MARCHE ARRÊT Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-13 Arrêt du copieur 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] pour vérifier qu'il n'y a plus de travaux en attente. 2 Enlevez toutes les pages imprimées qui pourraient rester dans le plateau de sortie papier. 3 Appuyez sur l'interrupteur secondaire pour éteindre le copieur. 4 Placez l'interrupteur général en position “O”.  Conseil Normalement, il n’est pas nécessaire de mettre l’interrupteur général sur “O”.  Remarque Quand vous éteignez le copieur pour le rallumer aussitôt, attendez cinq secondes avant de le rallumer. Si ce délai n’est pas respecté entre la mise hors tension et la mise sous tension, il se peut que le copieur ne fonctionne pas correctement. N’éteignez pas le copieur pendant que des opérations de copie ou d’impression sont en cours, cela pourrait entraîner un serrage papier. N’éteignez pas le copieur pendant qu’il est en train de numériser ou d’envoyer ou de recevoir des données, sinon les données de numérisation ou de transmission seront perdues. N’éteignez pas le copieur alors qu’une tâche en file d’attente ou que des données mémorisées sont en attente d’impression, sinon les tâches seront effacées. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Quand le copieur est mis hors tension  Les paramètres qui n'ont pas été programmés seront effacés.  Les tâches en attente d'impression sont effacées.  Les données numérisées à l'aide de la fonction “Numérisation vers mémoire” sont effacées.  Les données de numérisation qui pourraient être imprimées à l'aide de la fonction “Rappel Mémoire” sont effacées. Initialisation automatique Une fois que le délai spécifié s'est écoulé, ces paramètres seront ramenés à leurs valeurs par défaut. Conditions à l'initialisation automatique  1 minute, ou un délai personnalisé à compter de la dernière opération effectuée sur la machine (le paramètre usine ou par défaut est de 1 minute).  La carte magnétique est enlevée du contrôleur de données, ou bien le compteur clé est retiré.  Remarque Les paramètres spécifiant si l’initialisation automatique doit avoir lieu ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel elle doit avoir lieu, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-15 Mode Economie d’énergie Afin d'économiser l'énergie, le copieur passera automatiquement en mode d'attente (mode Economie d'énergie) si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps spécifié. Lorsque le copieur passe en mode Economie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche [Impression] reste allumé en vert, mais l'écran tactile s'éteint. Dès lors, le copieur diminue la température de l'unité de fixation et passe en Mode Economie d'énergie. Conditions au passage en mode Economie d'énergie  15 minutes, ou un délai personnalisé à compter de la dernière opération effectuée sur la machine (le paramètre usine ou par défaut est de 15 minutes).  Remarque Pour quitter le mode Economie d’énergie, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, ou bien appuyez sur l’écran tactile. Tant que l’impression est en pause, le copieur ne passe pas en mode Economie d’énergie. Les paramètres spécifiant si le mode Economie d’énergie doit être utilisé ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel il doit commencer, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Mode Veille Dans le but d'économiser l'énergie, le chauffage du copieur s'éteint et le copieur passe automatiquement en mode Veille si aucune opération n'est effectuée après un laps de temps spécifié. Conditions au passage en mode Veille  Le copieur n'est pas utilisé pendant une minute.  Remarque Pour quitter le mode Veille, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, ou bien appuyez sur l’écran tactile. Les paramètres spécifiant si le mode Veille doit être utilisé ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel il doit commencer, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.6 Régler l’inclinaison du panneau de contrôle Le panneau de contrôle peut être réglé selon trois angles d'inclinaison. Réglez le panneau à l'inclinaison qui convient le mieux à l'utilisation.  Tirez le levier de déblocage du panneau de contrôle, puis réglez l'inclinaison de ce dernier. Position haute (position de base) Position intermédiaire Position inférieure 2 3 1 Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-17 4.7 Utilisation de l’écran tactile Description de l’écran tactile A la mise sous tension du copieur, l'écran représenté ci-dessous apparaît sur l'écran tactile. Cet écran s'appelle écran des Fonctions de Base. L'écran indique avec des messages et des graphiques, les paramètres actuellement sélectionnés, les réglages disponibles et l'état du copieur. Sélections par défaut Les paramètres actifs au moment où le copieur est mis sous tension s'appellent les paramètres par défaut. Ces paramètres par défaut servent de référence pour tous les paramètres qui doivent être spécifiés. Pour modifier les paramètres par défaut, veuillez vous reporter à “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6.  Nombre de copies : 1  Finition : Non-Tri  Zoom : 1,000 (Taille réelle)  Papier : Papier Auto  Densité: Exposition Auto (mode Texte/Photo)  Orig. Ö Copie : Recto Ö Recto 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Utilisation de l’écran tactile Pour activer une fonction ou sélectionner un réglage, appuyez légèrement sur la fonction ou le réglage souhaité apparaissant sur l'écran tactile. ATTENTION Veiller à ne pas endommager l’écran tactile.  Ne jamais appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une sélection sur l'écran tactile.  Conseil Il est possible de changer la langue d’affichage, à l’aide de la fonction “Langue d’Affichage” de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Les paramètres par défaut peuvent être modifiés au moyen des diverses fonctions de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-19 Description des écrans Écran Sélections 1. Onglets 2. Afficheur des messages 3. Fonctions et réglages 4. Paramètres 5. Zone additionnelle disponibles de message sélectionnés No. Nom d’élément Description 1 Touches écran Chaque écran permet d'accéder à des fonctions qui peuvent être spécifiées. Appuyer sur une touche pour afficher l'écran correspondant. 2 Afficheur des messages La position actuelle du copieur, les instructions, avertissements, conseils et autres données, notamment le nombre de copies sélectionné, sont indiqués ici. 3 Fonctions et réglages disponibles La sélection d'un écran permet d'afficher certaines fonctions qui peuvent être spécifiées. Appuyez sur un bouton de fonction pour afficher les paramètres correspondants. 4 Paramètres sélectionnés Les paramètres courants sont indiqués à l'aide de graphiques. 5 Zone additionnelle de message • L'état de la tâche est indiqué à l'aide de graphiques. • Cette zone indique la quantité de mémoire restante et comporte les avertissements graphiques relatifs au manque de toner ou au manque de papier dans un magasin papier. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Écran Liste Tâches Cet écran permet de visualiser l'état du fonctionnement du copieur ainsi que l'ordre d'impression des travaux en attente. L'écran Liste Tâches compte cinq onglets.  Tâche : Affiche une liste d'opérations en cours de réalisation  Ordre Impr. : Affiche l'ordre des documents qui sont en cours ou en attente d'impression ou de copie.  Impr. : Affiche l'état d'impression des documents en cours de copie ou d'impression.  Com. : Non utilisé  Doc. : Non utilisé Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-21 Vérifier l’état d’une tâche 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous désirez vérifier l'état.  Conseil L’écran affiche le statut de quatre tâches maximum. Pour voir l’état d’une tâche qui n’apparaît pas à l’écran, appuyez sur les flèches. 3 Vérifiez les détails, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Efface]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Vérifier l’ordre d’impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Ordre Impr.]. 3 Vérifiez l'ordre d'impression.  Pour voir d'autres parties de la liste, appuyez sur les flèches. L'écran permet d'afficher jusqu'à 8 éléments dans l'ordre d'impression. 4 Après avoir contrôlé les informations voulues, appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-23 Contrôler/supprimer des éléments figurant sur la liste de l’écran Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 3 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous désirez vérifier l'état.  Pour voir d'autres parties de la liste, appuyez sur les flèches. 4 Après avoir contrôlé les informations voulues, appuyez sur [Entrée].  Remarque Pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Efface]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Rappel Mémoire Une fois que l'impression d'une tâche de copie est terminée, l'image qui vient d'être copiée peut être réimprimée sans qu'il soit besoin de recharger l'original.  Remarque La fonction Rappel Mémoire n’est disponible que si la fonction “Rappel Mémoire” (Choix utilisateur du mode Utilitaires) est réglée sur “ON”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Ecran Choix utilisateur” à la page 7-1.  Conseil La fonction Rappel Mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée dans les cas suivants : Un nouveau document a été numérisé. (La touche [Impression] a été activée.) Le copieur a été éteint. La touche [Initialisation] a été activée pendant que l’impression était arrêtée. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-25 Utiliser la fonction Rappel Mémoire 1 Lorsque l'opération de copie est terminée, appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rappel Mémoire - en attente]. Les informations relatives à la tâche conservée en mémoire s'affichent. 3 Appuyez sur [Rappel Mémoire]  Pour supprimer la tâche conservée en mémoire, appuyez sur [Efface].  Conseil A ce stade, il est possible de modifier le réglage Finition ainsi que le nombre de copies. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Après avoir copié des documents confidentiels, appuyez sur la touche [Efface] pour supprimer les données de la mémoire. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-1 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5.1 Réalisation de copies Voici décrite ci-dessous la procédure permettant de réaliser des copies élémentaires. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Assurez-vous que le voyant de la touche [Copie] est allumé en vert et que le copieur est en mode Copie.  L'écran Fonctions de Base apparaît sur l'écran tactile. 3 Spécifiez tous les réglages copie nécessaires.  Pour modifier le format du papier (magasin papier), appuyez sur [Papier]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le réglage Papier” (page 9-20).  Pour changer le taux zoom, appuyez sur [Zoom]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier une Sélection Zoom” (page 11-13).  Pour trier, agrafer ou perforer les copies, appuyez sur [Finition]. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter à “Spécifier les paramètres de finition” (page 11-1).  Pour copier un livre ou effectuer une copie en utilisant moins de papier, appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Sélectionner les paramètres Orig. > Copie” (page 11-18). 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour modifier la densité, appuyez sur [Densité]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier une Densité copie” (page 11-31).  Pour effacer une marge sur la copie, insérer un intercalaire lors de la copie sur des transparents de rétroprojection, ou pour effectuer toute autre opération particulière, appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires]. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “6 Fonctions auxiliaires”. 4 Tapez sur le clavier numérique le nombre de copies désiré.  Le Di3510 permet d'imprimer jusqu'à 999 copies. Le Di3010 ou le Di2510 permettent d'imprimer jusqu'à 99 copies.  Pour modifier la valeur, appuyez sur la touche [C], puis tapez la valeur correcte.  Conseil Il est possible de limiter le nombre de copies au moyen de l’écran Gestion Administrateur du mode Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur”. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-3 5.2 Arrêter une opération de copie Pour annuler une tâche de copie, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous. Arrêter/Reprendre/Supprimer une tâche de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Stop] pendant que la tâche est en cours d'impression. L'opération de copie s'arrête. 2 Le message “Cycle copie temporairement suspendu.” s'affiche. 3 Pour reprendre un travail qui a été suspendu, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'opération de copie reprend. 4 Pour supprimer l'opération de copie suspendue, sélectionnez le bouton correspondant à la tâche que vous désirez supprimer. La tâche est supprimée. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5.3 Interrompre une tâche de copie Il est possible de suspendre la tâche de copie en cours afin de copier un autre document. Ceci est pratique pour effectuer rapidement des copies d'un petit document sans avoir à attendre la fin de l'impression d'un document volumineux.  Remarque Si certaines fonctions ont été spécifiées, il se peut que l’interruption de l’opération de copie ne soit pas possible. En outre, certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsqu’une tâche de copie est suspendue. Le copieur ne passera pas en mode Interruption (l’opération de copie peut être suspendue en activant la touche [Interruption]) pendant qu’un document est en cours de numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir “Table d’association des fonctions” à la page 14-11. Interrompre une opération de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption] pendant une tâche d'impression.  Le voyant de la touche [Interruption] s'allume.  Le message “Copieur en Mode Interruption de Cycle.” s'affiche.  Les paramètres de copie sont restaurés à leurs valeurs par défaut. (Les paramètres de copie en vigueur avant que la tâche ne soit interrompue ainsi que le nombre de copies restant sont sauvegardés.)  Si aucune opération n'est effectuée dans la minute qui suit l'activation de la touche [Interruption], le mode Interruption est automatiquement annulé. 2 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres copie désirés. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression].  La numérisation du document commence. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-5 5 Quand la copie effectuée en mode prioritaire est achevée, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant de la touche [Interruption] s'éteint et le mode Interruption est annulé. Les paramètres de copie en vigueur avant que la tâche ne soit interrompue sont restaurés et l'opération de copie qui avait été suspendue reprend automatiquement. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5.4 Effectuer des copies sur comptes Utiliser le paramètre “Contrôle Département” Il est possible de limiter le nombre de copies autorisé pour chaque compte enregistré. On peut gérer les comptes en appuyant sur la touche [Gestion comptes] de l'écran 1 Administrateur (qui s'affiche en appuyant sur [Gestion Administrateur] sur l'écran Utilitaires). Les paramètres de Gestion Administrateur devraient être spécifiés par l'administrateur.  Remarque Les paramètres du Mode Gestion Administrateur ne peuvent pas être définis sans entrer préalablement le code d’accès Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le code d’accès Administrateur, consultez votre S.A.V. Pour réaliser des copies sur des comptes validés Pour la gestion des comptes avec [100 Comptes 1] et [100 Comptes 2]. 1 Si vous avez spécifié [100 Comptes 1] l'écran ci-contre s'affiche.  Si vous avez spécifié [100 Comptes 2], une pression sur la touche [Code] fera apparaître l'écran ci-contre. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, introduisez le code d'accès à 6 chiffres. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-7 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Fonctions de Base apparaît. 4 Effectuez les copies avec les paramètres de copie désirés. 5 Lorsque vous avez terminé l'opération de copie, appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran de saisie du code d'accès réapparaît. Pour gérer des comptes avec [1000 Comptes]. 1 Si vous sélectionnez [1000 Comptes], l'écran de saisie Numéro de Compte s'affiche. 2 Introduisez le numéro de compte approprié (de 1 à 999) dans l'écran de Saisie du Numéro de compte, et appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche. 3 L'opération de copie peut se dérouler avec le mode Copie désiré. 4 Une fois la copie terminée, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Sélections est affiché sur l'écran de Saisie du Numéro de Compte. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-1 6 Fonctions auxiliaires Ce chapitre décrit la réalisation de copies à l'aide des Fonctions Auxiliaires. 6.1 Fonction “Couverture” Ajouter des pages de couverture Lorsque l'on copie deux feuilles ou plus, il est possible d'ajouter des pages de couverture réalisées sur du papier différent de celui qui est utilisé pour la copie du document.  Remarque Chargez le papier destiné aux pages de couverture dans un autre magasin que celui qui contient le papier destiné à la copie du document. Chargez le papier destiné aux pages de couverture en respectant la même orientation et le même format que le papier destiné à la copie du document. L’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. Paramètres du mode Couverture  Face : Non copiée Dos : Sans  Face : Non copiée Dos : Non copiée 3 2 1 3 2 1 Original Copie 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Face : Non copiée Dos de couverture : Copiée  Face : Copiée Dos : Sans  Face : Copiée Dos : Non copiée  Face : Copiée Dos : Copiée 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-3 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Couverture” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Couverture]. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres voulus pour la Face et pour le Dos, puis appuyez sur la touche située audessous de “Support couverture”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux pages de couverture, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.2 Fonction “Intercalaires” Insérer des pages (Intercalaires) entre les copies Lorsque l'on copie deux feuilles ou plus, il est possible d'insérer des intercalaires réalisés sur du papier différent de celui qui est utilisé pour la copie du document.  Conseil Aux endroits où vous désirez insérer des intercalaires, insérez du papier d’une orientation ou d’un format différent de l’original, puis chargez le document dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document. Chargez le papier destiné aux intercalaires dans un autre magasin que celui qui contient le papier destiné à la copie du document. Chargez le papier destiné aux intercalaires en respectant la même orientation et le même format que le papier destiné à la copie du document. Cette fonction en peut pas être utilisée en même temps que la fonction “Couverture”. Cette fonction en peut pas être combinée avec l’impression Livret et Originaux mixtes.  Remarque L’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. Paramètres d’Intercalaires  Non copiée  Copiée 5 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-5 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Intercalaires” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Intercalaires]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Intercalaire [Copiée] ou le paramètre [Non copiée], puis appuyez sur la touche située audessous “Support intercalaire”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux intercalaires, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.3 Fonction “Encart transparent” Insérer des pages entre des copies de transparents Lorsque l'on copie des transparents de rétroprojection, il est possible d'insérer du papier (encarts) entre les transparents.  Conseil Chargez le papier destiné aux encarts dans un magasin papier et chargez les transparents dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Paramètres Encart transparent  Non copiée  Copiée 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-7 Procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Encart transparent” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et appuyez sur [Encart transparent]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Encart transparent [Copiée] ou le paramètre [Non copiée], puis appuyez sur la touche au-dessous de “Support encart”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux transparents, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.4 Fonction “Marge” Réaliser des copies avec marge de reliure On peut réaliser des copies comportant des marges de reliure et dont l'image peut être décalée d'un côté afin que le texte reste apparent une fois que les copies sont reliées. Paramètres Marge  La marge peut être positionnée sur le côté gauche ou sur la tête de la feuille de papier.  Il est possible de spécifier la largeur de la marge de reliure. L'image du document est décalée vers la droite pour ménager une marge sur le bord gauche de la copie. L'image du document est décalée vers le bas pour ménager une marge sur le bord supérieur de la copie. Original Copie Original Copie Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-9 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Marge” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Marge]. 3 Sélectionnez le réglage Marge voulu.  Conseil Si le paramètre Position reliure à gauche est sélectionné, le recto et le verso de la copie seront imprimés dans le même sens. Si le paramètre Position reliure en haut est sélectionné pour copie recto-verso, le recto de la page sera imprimé tête en bas. 4 Appuyez sur les flèches pour spécifier la largeur de la marge de reliure, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.5 Fonction “Effacement bords” Effacer des portions de copies Lorsque l'on copie des documents qui comportent des perforations, il est possible d'imprimer les pages de sorte qu'une partie de l'original soit effacée. Paramètres Effacement bords  Effacement du bord gauche du document.  Effacement du bord supérieur du document.  Effacement d'un cadre autour du document. A A Original Copie A A A A Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-11 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Effacement bords” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Effacement bords désiré. 4 Appuyez sur les flèches pour spécifier la zone d'effacement, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.6 Fonction “Multi-image” Impression multicopie du même original sur une seule feuille La fonction “Multi-image” peut être utilisé de la manière indiquée cidessous.  Pour copier une page de format A4, taille réelle, sur une feuille de papier de format A3  Pour réduire une page de format A4 et imprimer plusieurs copies sur une feuille de papier A4 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Multi-image” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Multi-image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée format].  Pour activer la détection automatique du format de l'original, appuyez sur [Détection auto.]. A A A A A A A A Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-13 4 Sélectionnez le format du document.  Si l'original est d'un format nonstandard, appuyez sur [Format personnel], puis spécifiez le format du document. 5 Appuyez sur [X]. Sur le clavier numérique tapez la dimension du côté X du papier qui est chargé. 6 Appuyez sur [Y]. Sur le clavier numérique tapez la dimension du côté X du papier qui est chargé. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.7 Fonction “Diffusion” Imprimer des numéros de diffusion sur les jeux de copies Il est possible d'imprimer, en arrière-plan sur chaque jeu de copies, un numéro de diffusion.  Conseil Si la fonction “Diffusion” est utilisée, le paramètre de Finition “Tri” est sélectionné. Lorsque le numéro “999” a été imprimé, la numérotation reprend à “000”. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Diffusion” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Diffusion]. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-15 4 Spécifiez les paramètres désirés pour les N° de diffusion.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le premier numéro de diffusion à imprimer.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], le numéro de diffusion ne sera imprimé que sur la première page de chaque jeu de copies.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages], le numéro de diffusion sera imprimé sur toutes les pages de chaque jeu de copies.  Appuyez sur [+ Foncé], [Normal] ou [+ Clair] pour spécifier la densité d'impression du numéro de diffusion. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.8 Fonction “Filigrane” Il est possible d'imprimer un filigrane sur l'arrière-plan des copies. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Filigrane” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Filigrane]. 4 Sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer ainsi que les pages sur lesquelles le filigrane figurera.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], le filigrane ne sera imprimé que sur la première page de chaque jeu de copies.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages] le filigrane sera imprimé sur toutes les pages. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-17 6.9 Fonction “Tampon” Cette fonction permet d'imprimer sur les copies un filigrane réalisé avec une image numérisée apparaissant en arrière-plan. Voir “Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image” à la page 7-31 pour les méthodes d'enregistrement.  Remarque Le disque dur en option doit être installé. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Tampon” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Tampon]. 4 Appuyez sur [Régl.], sélectionnez le numéro d'enregistrement puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Vous pouvez vérifier ceci en sélectionnant [Visu.], en appuyant sur la touche [Impression], et en copiant l'image enregistrée. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Sélectionnez la position voulue pour l'impression.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], l'image ne sera imprimée que sur la première page.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages] l'image sera imprimée sur toutes les pages. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-19 6.10 Fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” Inverser les zones noires et les zones blanches sur les copies Il est possible d'imprimer des copies en inversant les zones blanches et les zones foncées de l'image originale.  Conseil La couleur du numéro de diffusion et du filigrane ne sera pas inversée. L’inversion noir/blanc ne peut plus avoir lieu une fois que l’original a été numérisé. Procéder au réglage de la fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Inversion Noir/ Blanc]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.11 Fonction “Lecture fragmentée” Numériser un document en plusieurs fois Lorsque l'on doit copier un document qui comprend de nombreuses pages, il est possible de le diviser et de le numériser en plusieurs lots, pour ensuite l'imprimer en un seul document.  Conseil Si la mémoire arrive à saturation pendant la numérisation, la numérisation est interrompue. Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche [Impression] pour imprimer les pages qui ont été numérisées avant l’arrêt de la numérisation. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Lecture fragmentée” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Lecture fragmentée]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le document est numérisé. 4 Une fois que le premier lot a été numérisé, chargez la deuxième partie du document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document, ou placez-la sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 5 Une fois que tous les lots du document ont été numérisés, appuyez sur [Fin]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-1 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Ecrans du mode Utilitaires Ce chapitre décrit les divers programmes de copie et les réglages disponibles dans le mode Utilitaires. Écran Utilitaires Cet écran apparaît lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Utilitaires]. Les écrans suivants apparaissent lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche correspondant. Ecran Choix utilisateur Cet écran propose des fonctions permettant de spécifier divers réglages par défaut pour le copieur. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Ecran Compteurs Cet écran indique le nombre total de copies qui ont été imprimées depuis l'installation du copieur. Ecran Rappel programme On peut rappeler à partir de cet écran une tâche de copie programmée. Ecran Mode utilisateur Cet écran propose diverses fonctions permettant d'utiliser le copieur de manière correcte et sûre. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-3 Ecrans Mode Gestion Administrateur Il y a deux écrans : Gestion Administrateur 1 et Gestion Administrateur 2. Avant de pouvoir afficher ces écrans, il faut entrer le code d'accès Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions disponibles dans les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur, veuillez vous reporter à “8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur”. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.2 Fonctions du Choix utilisateur Voici les fonctions disponibles dans l'écran Choix utilisateur. La modification des réglages des fonctions suivantes changera les paramètres par défaut (c'est-à-dire, les réglages automatiquement restaurés lorsque le copieur est mis sous tension ou quand on appuie sur la touche [Initialisation]). Les réglages en gras représentent les réglages par défaut. Onglet Fonction Paramètres 1/6 Rappel mémoire Oui, Non Détection originaux mixtes Oui, Non Langue d'Affichage Japonais, Anglais, Allemand, Français, Hollandais, Italien, Espagnol, Portugais, Norvégien, Danois, Suédois, Finnois 2/6 Mode Orig. Ö Copie par défaut Recto Ö R-V, R-V Ö R-V, Recto Ö Recto Papier Auto/Taux Auto Papier Auto, Taux Auto, Manuel Magasin prioritaire 1er magasin papier Papier dédié Normal, Recto seulement, Recyclé, Spécial Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret Oui, Non 3/6 Economie d'énergie 1 à 240 minutes, 15 minutes Mise en veille 1 à 240 minutes, 15 minutes Extinction écran 1 à 240 minutes, 1 minute Initialisation automatique Pas d’initialisation, 30 secondes, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min Initialisation / Retrait cmpt clé Oui, Non Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-5 4/6 Disposition copie 4en1 , Mode densité Auto, Manuel Texte, Photo, Texte/Photo Densité copie Auto + Clair, Normal, + Foncé Manuel Entre “+ Clair” et “+ Foncé”, neuf niveaux distincts peuvent être sélectionnés. Densité impression -2, -1, 0, 1, 2 Priorité finition Non-Tri, Tri, Groupe, Agrafage en coin*, Agrafage 2 points*, Perforation* *Options 5/6 Tri sélectif Oui, Non Réceptacle Spécifiez le réceptacle du module de finition (option). Originaux “Plus Petits” Oui, Non Déshum. scanner Spécifiez l'heure de déshumidification du scanner. Agrafage centre / Marquage pli Marque de pliage (-10 à +10, 0) Agrafage au centre (-10 à +10, 0) 6/6 Densité (ADF) Mode 1, Mode 2 Onglet Fonction Paramètres 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.3 Procédure de configuration standard Voici les procédures permettant de modifier chacun des paramètres du Choix Utilisateur. Pour définir la fonction “Rappel mémoire” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la dernière image copiée peut être ou non rappelée et imprimée une nouvelle fois. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], et puis appuyez sur [Rappel mémoire]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], les données de l'image précédemment copiée peuvent être réimprimées, même un fois que l'opération de copie est terminée ou que le copieur est en attente. 5 Appuyez sur [ENTRÉE] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-7 Pour définir la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” doit ou non être activée par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], puis appuyez sur [Détection originaux mixtes] 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Langue d’Affichage” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la langue des fenêtres qui s'affichent sur l'écran tactile. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], puis appuyez sur [Langue d'Affichage]. 4 Choisissez la langue souhaitée puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-9 Pour définir la fonction “Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut” Cette fonction permet de spécifier le paramétrage par défaut pour Orig. Ö Copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Papier Auto / Taux Auto” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si le paramètre Papier “Papier Auto”, le paramètre Zoom “Taux Auto” ou le paramètre “Manuel” seront définis comme paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Papier Auto / Taux Auto]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-11 Pour définir la fonction “Magasin prioritaire” Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier le papier qui est sélectionné en priorité (magasin papier). Par exemple, si vous spécifiez un magasin qui contient le papier utilisé le plus souvent (papier recyclé, papier une face, par exemple), ce magasin sera prioritaire en ce qui concerne l'alimentation en papier. Cependant, cette fonction sera inopérante avec la fonction Papier Auto, ou lorsque le papier est soumis à des limitations. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], et puis appuyez sur [Magasin prioritaire]. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier voulu puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Papier dédié” Cette fonction permet de spécifier le type de papier par défaut pour un magasin donné, lorsque par exemple, du papier recyclé est chargé dans un magasin particulier.  Conseil Si un magasin donné est réglé pour recevoir du papier spécial, le papier contenu dans ce magasin ne sera pas sélectionné par le mode Sélection automatique du papier. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], et puis appuyez sur [Papier dédié]. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier dédié, sélectionnez le type de papier, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  : Recyclé Ce mode implique que ce magasin ne sera pas sélectionné en mode Sélection automatique du papier. Par exemple, Lorsque l'on dispose à la fois de papier ordinaire et de papier recyclé dans des magasins respectifs, mais que le papier le plus utilisé est le papier ordinaire, la sélection de ce mode signifie que le papier ordinaire sera prioritaire sur l'autre.  : Recto seulement La sélection de ce mode signifie que la copie recto-verso sur le papier contenu de ce magasin ne sera pas possible. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-13  : Spécial La sélection de ce mode signifie que ce magasin ne sera pas pris en compte dans la Sélection automatique du papier. Si vous utilisez du papier de couleur pour les couvertures ou les encarts, cette option permet de réduire les risques d'erreur de manipulation. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si le paramètre Zoom prédéfini, approprié au document et au format du papier, sera activé ou non lorsque l'on sélectionne une copie 2en1 ou 4en1. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Non], spécifiez les paramètres Zoom pour la copie 2en1 et 4en1. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-15 Pour définir la fonction “Economie d’énergie” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment le copieur passera automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le copieur à l'issue d'un laps de temps défini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Economie d'énergie]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.) 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Mise en veille” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la durée d'inactivité à l'issue de laquelle le copieur éteint automatiquement le chauffage de l'imprimante. Pour afficher [Désactivé], vous devez d'abord afficher [Désactivé] dans Spécification des Paramètres Administrateurs. Pour plus de détails, voir “Paramètres administrateur” à la page 8-6. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Mise en veille]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.)  La sélection de la touche [Désactivé] signifie que les fonctions de mise en veille seront désormais inopérantes. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-17 Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment l'éclairage de l'écran s'éteindra automatiquement lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le copieur à l'issue d'un délai défini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Extinction écran]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.)  Conseil Si les paramètres de préchauffage et de veille sont courts parce que la fonction Extinction écran est désactivée, le rétro-éclairage sera éteint à l’issue de la durée de préchauffage ou de veille. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation automatique” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment l'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche automatiquement si aucune opération n'est effectuée sur le copieur pendant qu'un programme ou un paramétrage est en cours de spécification. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Initialisation automatique]. 4 Sélectionnez le délai souhaité avant que l'écran Fonctions de Base ne s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le délai à l'issue duquel l'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche, peut être réglé à 30 secondes, 1, 2, 3 ou 5 minutes, ou sur “Pas d’init”. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-19 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé” Une pression sur la touche [Code] pendant la spécification de paramètres utilisateur permet de définir si les paramètres par défaut doivent être ou non restaurés à leurs valeurs d'usine, sauf toutefois quand la carte magnétique du contrôleur de données est retirée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Disposition copie 4en1” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la disposition des pages pour les copies 4en1. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], puis appuyez sur [Disposition copie 4en1]. 4 Sélectionnez la disposition des pages pour les copies 4en1, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-21 Pour définir la fonction “Mode densité” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut pour la densité d'impression / mode copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Mode densité]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  La densité de sortie par défaut peut être réglée sur [Auto] ou sur [Manuel].  Le type image original peut être réglé sur [Texte], [Photo] ou sur [Texte/Photo]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Densité copie” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut pour le niveau de densité d'impression auto et manuelle. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], puis appuyez sur [Densité copie]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le niveau Auto de densité copie peut être réglé sur [+ Clair], [Normal] ou [+ Foncé].  Le niveau Manuel de densité copie peut être réglé par pas d'une unité à la fois. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-23 Pour définir la fonction “Densité impression” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut sur l'un des 5 niveaux de densité d'impression, de -2 à 2. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Densité impression]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Priorité finition” Ceci permet de spécifier les modes de finition par défaut qui s'appliqueront prioritairement. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Priorité finition]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-25 Pour définir la fonction “Tri sélectif” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si les sélections “Tri” et les sélections “Non-Tri” seront ou non automatiquement activées en fonction du nombre de pages que comporte le document. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Tri sélectif]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], le paramètre “Non-Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné lorsqu'un document ne comportant qu'une seule page est chargé dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document, et le paramètre “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné lorsqu'un document comprenant plusieurs pages est chargé dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Réceptacle” (en option) Cette fonction permet de spécifier comment les copies et les impressions à partir de l'ordinateur seront réparties et vers quel plateau de sortie elles seront dirigées.  Conseil [Réceptacle] ne s’affiche que si le module de finition ou le séparateur travaux est installé. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], et puis appuyez sur [Réceptacle]. 4 Sélectionnez les paramètres Réceptacle appropriés, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-27 Pour définir la fonction “Originaux plus petits” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si un original de petite dimension peut ou non être copié lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Originaux plus petits]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], la copie peut être réalisée en utilisant le papier spécifié.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Non], un message apparaît pour indiquer qu'il faut sélectionner le papier. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner” Il est possible d'activer la fonction de déshumidification automatique afin d'éviter la formation de condensation lors d'un changement soudain de température. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Déshum. scanner]. 4 Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'heure de début de la déshumidification, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Spécifiez l'heure en utilisant le format 24 heures.  Pour effacer la valeur, appuyez sur la touche [C]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-29 Pour définir la fonction “Agrafage centre/Marquage pli” (seulement si le module de finition ou le kit agrafage à cheval est installé) Lorsque le kit agrafage à cheval, en option, (y compris le module de finition), ceci permet de contrôler le décalage des marques de pliage créées en mode Création Livret, et de tout agrafage central spécifié. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Agrafage centre / marquage pli]. 4 Utilisez les flèches pour régler la position, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Densité (ADF)” (uniquement si l’introducteur/retourneur de document est installé) Cette fonction permet de régler le niveau de densité lorsque l'on utilise l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [6/6], et puis appuyez sur [Densité (ADF)]. 4 Choisissez le réglage par défaut souhaité puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le réglage de gauche est le plus indiqué pour numériser des documents ordinaires (par exemple, ceux qui sont créés avec une application de traitement de texte).  Le réglage de droite est le plus indiqué pour numériser des documents pâles (par exemple, ceux qui sont écrits au crayon). 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-31 7.4 Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image Avant de pouvoir utiliser la fonction auxiliaire “Tampon”, il faut d'abord enregistrer une image. On peut enregistrer cinq images maximum. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction “Tampon image”, voir “Fonction “Tampon”” à la page 6-17.  Remarque Le disque dur en option doit être installé. Enregistrer un tampon-image 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée mém. Image]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée], puis sur la touche d'enregistrement désirée.  Pour effacer une image déjà enregistrée, appuyez sur [Efface], et appuyez ensuite sur le numéro correspondant à l'image que vous voulez effacer. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour vérifier une image déjà enregistrée, appuyez sur [Visu], et appuyez sur le numéro correspondant à l'image que vous voulez contrôler. 5 Sélectionnez le format du document image. Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Pour continuer à numériser un document image de format normal, passez à l'étape 9.  Pour numériser un document image de format non-standard, appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante, puis saisissez sur le clavier numérique la dimension du côté X du document image (entre 25 et 432 mm). Appuyez sur [Y], puis appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante. Saisissez sur le clavier numérique la dimension du côté Y du document image (entre 25 et 297 mm). 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, puis sélectionnez l'orientation du document. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'image est numérisée. Le tampon image est enregistré. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-33 7.5 Voir les compteurs (fonction “Compteurs”) La fonction “Compteurs” permet de visualiser les compteurs suivants. Pour voir les compteurs 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Compteurs]. 3 Après avoir vérifié les divers compteurs, appuyez sur [Sortie].  Il y a deux écrans pour les compteurs. Pour voir le second écran, appuyez sur [Suite]. 4 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Compteur Fonction Compteur Total Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies et de tirages imprimante effectués depuis que le copieur a été installé. Compteur Total Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies qui ont été réalisées. Compteur Format Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies effectuées sur le format papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le Centre S.A.V.) Compteur Recto/Verso Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies recto/verso qui ont été réalisées. Compteur Total Imprimante Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante qui ont été réalisés. Compteur Imprimante Format Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante effectués, à partir de l'ordinateur, sur le format papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le Centre S.A.V.) Compteur Imprim. Recto/ Verso Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante recto/verso qui ont été réalisés. Compteur Scanner Ce compteur indique le nombre total de pages qui ont été numérisées. Compteurs Total départements Ces compteurs indiquent le nombre total de copies et de tirages imprimante réalisés pour chaque compte actuellement enregistré. (Un compteur distinct apparaît pour chaque compte enregistré.) 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-34 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.6 Utiliser les programmes Copie Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 ensembles de réglages copie en tant que programmes copie. Pour mémoriser un programme de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Entrée], et appuyez sur le numéro sous lequel vous désirez enregistrer le programme de copie.  Les touches numériques où le signe n'apparaît pas ont déjà reçu un programme de copie. Si l'on sélectionne une touche numérique qui comporte déjà un programme copie, ce dernier sera écrasé par le nouvel enregistrement. 3 Appuyez sur [Visu.], puis appuyez sur un bouton de numéro. 4 Vérifiez les paramètres programmés.  Pour afficher le second écran, appuyez sur [Suite]. Pour revenir à l'écran 1/2, appuyez sur [Retour]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Mode Contrôle, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-35 Pour supprimer un programme de copie Il est possible de supprimer individuellement les programmes copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Entrée mémoire]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche numérique correspondant au programme copie que vous voulez supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Efface].  Le programme copie est supprimé et le signe apparaît sur la touche. 4 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Mode Contrôle, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-36 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour utiliser un programme de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rappel programme]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro correspondant au programme copie que vous voulez utiliser.  Seuls ne s'affichent que les boutons qui comportent un programme copie. 4 Vérifiez les paramètres, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Placez le document et appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-37 7.7 Fonctions du Mode utilisateur A partir de l'écran Mode Utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier les paramètres suivants et aussi de réaliser les opérations suivantes.  Volume du bip de confirmation  Volume alarme  Nettoyage écran  Déshumidification  Apport toner Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”) Vous avez la possibilité de régler le volume du signal sonore qui accompagne toute action sur les touches du copieur et ou celui des alarmes. La procédure suivante indique comment régler le volume des ces deux types d'avertissements sonores. Il est possible en outre, de personnaliser aisément les volumes sonores selon les utilisateurs.  [Bip de confirm.] : Cette fonction permet de régler le volume du bip qui accompagne chaque pression sur un bouton de l'écran tactile. (Valeur par défaut : 3)  [Volume Alarme] : Cette fonction permet de régler le niveau sonore de l'alarme qui retentit en cas de serrage papier ou si l'on a spécifié une opération incorrecte. (Valeur par défaut : 3) 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-38 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Utilisateur] puis appuyez sur la touche correspondant au bip que vous désirez régler. 3 Utilisez les flèches pour sélectionner le volume désiré, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-39 Pour nettoyer l’écran tactile (fonction “Nettoyage écran”) L'activation de la fonction Nettoyage écran vous permet de nettoyer l'écran sans risque d'appuyer accidentellement sur les touches. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Nettoyage écran].  Pour annuler cette fonction, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation]. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-40 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour déshumidifier l’introducteur/retourneur de document (fonction “Déshumidification”) Lorsque le local est soumis à des changements rapides de température ou à une humidité élevée, de la condensation peut se former sur la surface du tambour photosensible ou du scanner du copieur, avec pour conséquence la production d'images floues. Si cela se produit, la fonction “Déshumid.” vous permettra d'éliminer la condensation (en 5 minutes environ). Si vous désirez programmer cette fonction à heure fixe chaque jour : Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner”” à la page 7-28.  Remarque Condensation : phénomène par lequel l’eau contenue dans l’air se dépose sur le tambour photosensible ou sur le scanner, sous la forme de gouttelettes d’eau. Tambour photosensible : élément du copieur qui est en contact avec copie film.  Remarque Si vous voulez éliminer la condensation du tambour photosensible, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La copie reste possible pendant la déshumidification. (Cependant, la déshumidification sera interrompue.) Pour spécifier le moment où la déshumidification doit commencer, veuillez vous reporter à page 7-28. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Déshumid.]. L'opération de déshumidification commence. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-41 Pour faire l’appoint en toner (fonction “Apport toner”) Cette fonction est à utiliser quand les copies présentent temporairement un aspect pâle malgré une quantité suffisante de toner dans le copieur, comme par exemple, juste après le remplacement de la cartouche de toner ou lorsque l'on vient de copier une grande quantité de documents comportant d'importantes zones imprimées. Dans de tels cas, on peut procéder à un apport de toner au moyen de cette fonction. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Apport toner]. L'apport toner est effectué. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-42 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-1 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8.1 Ecrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur La procédure suivante permet d'afficher les écrans du Mode Administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Administrateur]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code administrateur à 8 chiffres (mot de passe Admin.).  Remarque Si le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) tapé est incorrect, le message suivant “Code incorrecte, nouvel essai.” apparaît, accompagné par un signal sonore. Suivez les instructions du message qui s’affiche, puis tapez le code administrateur correct. Si le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) tapé est incorrect à trois reprises, le message “Le code Admin. est désactivé. Accés au mode Administrateur impossible.” s’affiche, l’accès au mode administrateur est refusé, et le mot de passe correspondant ne sera pas accepté. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Conservez le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) en lieu sûr et confidentiel. 4 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1] ou [Admin. 2] pour afficher l'écran désiré.  Pour plus de détails sur l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1, voir page 8-3. Pour plus de détails sur l'écran Gestion Administrateur 2, voir page 8-20. 5 A partir de l'écran qui s'affiche, appuyez sur la touche correspondant à l'opération que vous voulez effectuer ou à la fonction dont vous voulez modifier le paramétrage.  Remarque Si vous spécifiez [1000 Comptes] ou [OFF] dans le mode Contrôle dépt, la touche [Enregistrement Compte] et la touche [Compteurs Comptes] en s’affichent pas. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département” à la page 8-11. Gestion Administrateur 2 Gestion Administrateur 1 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-3 8.2 Réglages préalables Spécifier la date et l’heure Spécifiez la date et l'heure de manière à ce qu'elles figurent correctement sur les rapports. Pour régler la date et l’heure 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Paramètres Initiaux]. 3 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 5 Tapez sur le clavier numérique la date et l'heure courantes, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour taper à nouveau la valeur saisie, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Appuyez sur les boutons respectifs correspondant à l'année, le mois, le jour, l'heure et les minutes, et tapez les valeurs sur le clavier numérique. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Saisir 4 chiffres pour l'année.  Spécifiez l'heure en utilisant le format 24 heures. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-5 Pour définir le fuseau horaire Spécifiez la différence d'heure avec le fuseau du méridien de Greenwich (l'heure et la date figurent sur les bandeaux des courriers qui sont envoyés). Pour définir le fuseau horaire 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Paramètres Initiaux]. 3 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Fuseau]. 5 Utilisez les flèches pour régler la position, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  La différence d'heure peut se régler par pas de 30 minutes. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.3 Paramètres administrateur Modifier le code d’accès administrateur Voici la procédure permettant de définir ou de modifier le code d'accès Administrateur. Pour définir le code d’accès administrateur 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée Code Administrateur]. 4 Appuyez sur [Code Actuel], puis tapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du code administrateur en vigueur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi est incorrect, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez le code administrateur correct. Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “ON”, toute saisie incorrecte du code administrateur est comptée comme tentative non autorisée d’accéder à la machine. Après trois tentatives, l’écran Utilitaires apparaît, l’accès au mode administrateur est refusé, et le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) n’est plus Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-7 accepté. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. 5 Appuyez sur [Nouveau Code], puis tapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du nouveau code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi comporte moins de 8 chiffres, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez un code administrateur à 8 chiffres. 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau Code (idem)], puis retapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du nouveau code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi comporte moins de 8 chiffres, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez un code administrateur à 8 chiffres. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Restriction du nombre de copies Ceci permet de spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé. Pour spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Nbr de jeux maxi.]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le nombre maximal désiré, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  On peut spécifier des nombres compris entre 1 et 99. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-9 Désactiver Mode Veille Ce paramètre permet de désactiver la fonction Veille qui éteint automatiquement l'imprimante lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée à l'issue d'un délai défini. Pour désactiver le mode Veille 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Désactiv. veille]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], [Pas d’init] apparaît dans l'écran de la fonction “Mise en veille ”, qui est disponible dans l'écran Choix Utilisateur. 5 Sur l'écran Choix utilisateur [3/6], sélectionnez [Non] par le réglage du mode Veille. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.4 Paramètres Contrôle Département Mode Contrôle Département Il permet de gérer le nombre de copies et le nombre d'impression pour chaque compte. Le Contrôle Département permet aussi de limiter le nombre d'utilisateurs.  [100 Comptes 1] Tapez le code de sécurité pour effectuer des copies. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Nom de compte : pour programmer ou changer le nom de compte  Code Sécurité : pour programmer ou changer le code de sécurité  Numéro de compte : pour programmer le numéro de compte  Plafond impression : pour limiter le nombre maximal d'impressions qui peut être effectué pour chaque compte  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro.  [100 Comptes 2] Il est possible d'effectuer des copies que le code de sécurité ait été entré ou non. Ou bien, si le code d'accès enregistré est introduit, il est possible de configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Nom de compte : pour programmer ou changer le nom de compte  Code d'accès enregistré : pour programmer ou changer le code d'accès enregistré.  Numéro de compte : pour programmer ou changer le numéro de compte  Plafond impression : pour limiter le nombre maximal d'impressions qui peut être effectué pour chaque compte  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro.  [1000 Comptes] Tapez le numéro du compte pour faire des copies. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-11 Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département Vous pouvez contrôler le nombre de pages que chaque compte peut copier. 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mode contrôle dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez les méthodes d'information voulues et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. 5 Ceci permet de définir les informations par défaut sur le compte. Sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez sur [Entrée].  Remarque Pour programmer ou changer les données d’information sur un compte, veuillez définir les informations par défaut sur ce compte. Toutefois, en fonction de la méthode d’information sur le compte qui a été spécifiée, il se peut que l’écran par défaut ne s’affiche pas. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Remarque Lorsque vous choisissez [100 Comptes 1] ou [100 Comptes 2], veuillez programmer pour chaque compte, son nom et autres informations. Veuillez vous reporter à “Enregistrement de compte” pour plus de détails. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base.  Remarque C’est seulement si l’on choisit [100 Comptes 1] ou [100 Comptes 2] que [Enregistrement comptes] ou [Compteur Comptes] s’affiche sur l’écran Administrateur1. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-13 Données d’information sur le compte Lorsque vous procédez au paramétrage du Contrôle Département, vous pouvez confirmer l'utilisation faite par chaque compte ou remettre à zéro les compteurs. Ou bien, en mode de Gestion 100 Comptes, vous pouvez aussi changer les numéros de comptes, les plafonds d'impressions et les codes d'accès. Vous pouvez également remettre à zéro tous les compteurs en une seule fois. Pour imprimer les données d’informations sur les comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Données ctrl dpt]. 4 Chargez du papier A4 L dans le magasin 1, et appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les données de Contrôle Département s'impriment. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Effacer tous les compteurs 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Données ctrl dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez le numéro de page du compteur que vous désirez effacer.  Conseil Si vous voulez effacer en une seule fois tous les compteurs totaux des comptes, appuyez sur [RàZ tous les compteurs]. 5 Sélectionnez les touches des comptes que vous voulez remettre à zéro, et appuyez sur la touche [C].  Conseil Si vous désirez abandonner la remise à zéro des comptes, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Si vous voulez remettre à zéro les compteurs totaux d’autres comptes, répétez les étapes 4 et 5. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-15 Modifier les informations sur les comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mode contrôle dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez le numéro de page du compteur que vous désirez modifier. 5 Sélectionnez les comptes que vous voulez remettre à zéro, et appuyez sur la touche [C]. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la valeur de remplacement. 7 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.5 Configurer l’enregistrement de comptes Enregistrement de comptes On peut enregistrer des comptes pour les départements d'une entreprise ou pour des personnes individuelles. Il est possible de limiter le nombre d'impressions pour chaque compte, ou de spécifier un code d'accès, ou de contrôler l'utilisation non autorisée du copieur. En mode Gestion Administrateur, le Gestion 100 Comptes est nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département” à la page 8-11. Pour enregistrer des comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1] et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Compte]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de compte à programmer ou à modifier. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom du Compte]. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-17 5 Pour entrer le nom du compte, utilisez le clavier alphabétique qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur [Code d'Accès], et tapez le code d'accès correspondant au compte. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Appuyez sur [No.], et tapez le numéro du compte sur le clavier numérique. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11 Appuyez sur [Nb Pages Imp. Max.], et sur le clavier numérique, tapez le plafond (limite supérieure) des impressions autorisées. 12 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Conseil Si vous désirez modifier les informations programmées, répétez la procédure à partir de l’étape 3, et tapez les nouvelles informations. Pour supprimer des informations programmées, appuyez sur la touche [Efface]. 13 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-19 Compteur Département Il est possible de vérifier le nombre de tirages réalisé par chaque compte. Pour vérifier le nombre de tirages effectué par chaque compte 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Compteur dpt]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au compte que vous voulez visualiser, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Après avoir vérifié le compteur, appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.6 Paramétrer l’accès à la machine Verrouillage d’accès (Access Lock) La fonction “Access Lock” permet de spécifier si (“Oui”) ou (“Non”) l'accès au mode Administrateur, aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur est contrôlé. Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “Oui”, le nombre de tentatives infructueuses à accéder au mode Administrateur, aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur sera enregistré. Après trois tentatives infructueuses, l'accès à la machine est refusé. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode Administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. Toutefois, pour permettre de restaurer l'accès aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur, le verrouillage doit être levé. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Access Lock” 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 2], puis appuyez sur [Access Lock]. 3 Pour activer la fonction “Access Lock”, appuyez sur [Oui]. Pour désactiver la fonction Access Lock, appuyez sur [Non]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-21 8.7 Configurer les fonctions logicielles (Soft Switch) Ces commutateurs logiciels affectant les fonctions peuvent être réglés selon vos besoins.  Remarque Ne modifiez aucun mode ou bits qui ne soit pas mentionné dans ce manuel. Référence : le tableau ci-dessous donne des exemples d'équivalences en bits (binaire) et en hexadécimal (base 16). Réglages Soft Switch Mode spécification Spécifie le paramètre du réglage soft switch sur 3 chiffres. Spécification en bits Nombre à 8 chiffres comprenant le mode. Chaque bit de 0 à 7 est spécifié par un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) pour configurer les fonctions. Spécification HEX Permet de régler les fonctions au moyen de nombres hexadécimaux (combinaison de 0 à 9 et A à F). Par exemple, la spécification en bits “0011 0000” serait “30” en langage hexadécimal. Décimal Spécification en bits (binaire) Spécification HEX (hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Paramétrage de la réinitialisation du mode Copie avec introducteur/ retourneur de document installé (Mode 429) Il est possible de spécifier le délai à l'issue duquel le mode Copie est réinitialisé une fois qu'une copie réalisée avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document est terminée. Réglages d'usine Réglage Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 16 0001 0000 10 : : : 255 1111 1111 FF Décimal Spécification en bits (binaire) Spécification HEX (hexadécimal) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Valeur 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00) Bit Description Valeur Instruction 7, 6 00 * Ne changez pas ces bits. 5 Spécifie si le mode Copie sera ou non réinitialisé une fois qu'une tâche de copie réalisée avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document est terminée. 0 Ne pas effacer 1 Effacer 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 00000 * Ne changez pas ces bits. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-23 8.8 Lever le verrouillage Déverrouillage Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “Oui” et que le contrôleur d'imprimante, en option, est installé, le verrouillage doit être levé pour restaurer l'accès interdit après plusieurs tentatives infructueuses d'accéder aux travaux dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. De plus, pour restaurer l'accès après plusieurs tentatives d'accès infructueuses au mode Administrateur, éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-1 9 Papier Copie 9.1 Caractéristiques papier Utiliser du papier conforme aux caractéristiques suivantes. Types de papier * LCC : Magasin grande capacité 2 : Disponible— : Non disponible Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support spécial Papier recyclé Source papier, etc. 56 à 90 g/m2 91 à 210 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 2 2 2 1er magasin papier 2 — 2 2ème magasin papier 2 — 2 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) 2 — 2 3ème magasin papier 2 — 2 4ème magasin papier 2 — 2 Copie recto-verso 2 — 2 Type de papier Support spécial Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d’étiquettes Enveloppes Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 2 2 2 2 1er magasin papier — — — — 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — Copie recto-verso — — — — 9 Papier Copie 9-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Formats papier Papier de format non-standard * LCC : Magasin grande capacité — : Non disponible Papier de format standard * LCC : Magasin grande capacité 2 : Disponible— : Non disponible Source papier Largeur papier Longueur papier Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 1er magasin papier — — 2ème magasin papier — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — 3ème magasin papier — — 4ème magasin papier — — Format papier A3 L B4 L A4 L A4 C B5 L B5 C A5 L A5 C Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1er magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 2ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — 2 — — — — 3ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 4ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — Copie recto-verso 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — Format papier B6 L Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 2 1er magasin papier — 2ème magasin papier — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — 3ème magasin papier — 4ème magasin papier — Copie recto-verso 2 Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-3 Capacité de papier * LCC : Magasin grande capacité — : Non disponible  Remarque Le 3ème magasin papier (magasin grande capacité), le 3ème magasin papier et le 4ème magasin papier sont en option. Si l’unité recto-verso en option est utilisée pour effectuer des copies recto-verso, on peut seulement utiliser du papier ordinaire et du papier recyclé. Si l’on utilise le module de finition pour le tri/groupe, la perforation et l’agrafage, seul le papier ordinaire peut être utilisé. Le paramétrage du format papier pour le 3ème magasin papier (magasin grande capacité) peut être modifié pour permettre le chargement de papier de format Letter. Contactez votre technicien Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support spécial Papier recyclé Source papier, etc. 56 à 90 g/m2 91 à 210 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 150 feuilles 100 feuilles 150 feuilles 1er magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 2ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) 2.500 feuilles — 2.500 feuilles 3ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 4ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles Type de papier Support spécial Source papier, etc. Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d’étiquettes Enveloppes Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 10 feuilles 1er magasin papier — — — — 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 9 Papier Copie 9-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 S.A.V. pour modifier ce format de papier. 9.2 Papier à éviter Les types de papier suivants ne devraient pas être utilisés car cela pourrait entraîner une détérioration de la qualité d'impression, des serrages papier ou une détérioration de la machine.  Transparents de rétroprojection qui ont déjà été introduits dans la machine Même si le transparent est toujours vierge, ne le réemployez pas.  Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre  Papier extrêmement épais ou extrêmement fin  Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré  Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps  Papier humide  Papier perforé ou poinçonné  Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal  Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible  Papier torsadé ou gaufré  Papier de formats divers  Papier hors norme (non rectangulaire)  Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones  Papier étiqueté  Papier accolé de rubans, crochets, boutons, etc.  Papier gondolé ou froissé  Papier à dessin, papier couché ou papier pour imprimante jet d'encre Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-5 9.3 Zone d’impression Toute partie de l'image qui se trouve dans la zone indiquée ci-dessous ne peut être copiée.  Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) à partir du haut de page (A)  Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) à partir du bas de page (B)  Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) des deux côtés de la page (C) Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du copieur comme imprimante pilotée par un ordinateur sous réserve que le contrôleur d'imprimante soit installé, veuillez vous reporter au manuel du contrôleur d'imprimante. 9.4 Stockage du papier Prendre les précautions suivantes pour le stockage du papier.  Stocker le papier dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes :  A l'abri de la lumière directe du soleil  A l'abri des flammes  A l'abri de l'humidité excessive  A l'abri d'un environnement poussiéreux  Le papier sorti de son emballage devrait être placé dans un sac en plastique et entreposé dans un endroit frais et obscur.  Garder le papier hors de la portée des enfants. A : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) B : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) C : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) Sens sortie papier 9 Papier Copie 9-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.5 Sélection automatique de la source papier Si le magasin papier sélectionné manque de papier pendant l'impression d'une tâche de copie et qu'un magasin différent contient le papier répondant aux conditions suivantes, ce second magasin sera automatiquement sélectionné pour que l'impression puisse se poursuivre. Si le magasin grande capacité (LCC) est installé, on peut réaliser en continu un maximum de 3650 copies (avec du papier A4 C). C'est un avantage indéniable lorsque l'on imprime un grand nombre de pages ou pour réaliser de nombreuses copies en continu. Conditions préalables  Le papier est du même format.  Le papier est du même type.  Le papier est positionné selon la même orientation. Pour réaliser un grand nombre de copies en continu, chargez tous les magasins avec du papier répondant aux conditions ci-dessus. Ordre de sélection d’un magasin alternatif Lorsqu'un magasin différent est sélectionné automatiquement, c'est le magasin suivant dans la liste ci-après qui est choisi en priorité. 1er magasin A 2ème magasin A 3ème magasin A 4ème magasin A Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles  Remarque Lorsque vous placez un support spécial comme des transparents ou des planches d’étiquettes dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, la fonction de changement automatique de magasin peut démarrer et introduire du papier non désiré. Nous vous recommandons de procéder aux sélections Papier dédié dans les Paramètres Spécial du Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir Paramètres du Choix utilisateur, dans la section Utilisation Experte du Manuel d’utilisation. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-7 9.6 Chargement du papier Lors du chargement du papier veillez à observer les précautions suivantes.  Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger.  Chargez le papier de manière à ce que le haut de la ramette ne dépasse pas le repère Ä ou ne dépassez pas le nombre de feuilles spécifié dans les caractéristiques du magasin.  Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette.  Pour rajouter du papier, enlevez d'abord le papier restant dans le magasin, y adjoindre le nouveau papier, puis bien aligner le papier dans la pile nouvellement constituée avant de la charger dans le magasin.  Conseil Il est recommandé de remplir les magasins seulement après utilisation complète du papier chargé. 9 Papier Copie 9-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Chargement du papier dans le 1er, 2ème, 3ème et 4ème magasin Chargez du papier dans le 1er ou le 2ème magasin, ou dans le magasin d'alimentation à deux directions, en option et le magasin d'alimentation papier (3ème ou 4ème magasin) comme indiqué ci-dessous. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger en papier. 2 Faites coulisser les guides papier pour recevoir le papier à charger.  Remarque Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont fermement logés dans leurs rainures. 3 Chargez la ramette dans le magasin de sorte que le dessus du papier (la face orientée vers le haut lors de l'ouverture de l'emballage) soit tourné vers le haut.  Remarque Veillez à ne pas toucher la feuille de Mylar. Mylar Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-9 4 Réajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier. 5 Fermez le magasin papier. 9 Papier Copie 9-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Chargement du papier dans le magasin grande capacité Chargez le papier dans le magasin grande capacité selon les indications ci-dessous. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'ouverture du magasin.  Remarque Lorsque l’alimentation électrique est coupée, la cassette papier ne peut pas être libérée, même en manoeuvrant le bouton de déverrouillage du magasin. 2 Chargez la pile de papier dans le côté droit du magasin de manière à ce que le dessus de la ramette (la face orientée vers le haut lors de l'ouverture de l'emballage) soit placé vers le haut.  Remarque Veillez à ne pas toucher la feuille de Mylar. 3 Chargez la pile de papier dans le côté gauche du magasin, côté face vers le haut. Mylar Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-11 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles L'utilisation du plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles est indiquée pour imprimer sur papier ordinaire, cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes. Pour copier sur le bord inférieur du papier chargé.  Remarque Pour sélectionner un autre choix que papier ordinaire, les paramètres doivent être sélectionnés sur l’écran. Le format papier ne peut pas être sélectionné avec le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles lorsqu’une tâche d’impression est en cours ou en file d’attente. De plus, la fonction “Encart” ne peut pas être spécifiée en même temps. Pour charger du papier ordinaire 1 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Tirez l'extension plateau pour charger du papier de grand format. 2 Ajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier, puis introduisez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'exposition.  Remarque Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au -delà du repère de hauteur Ä. Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Extension plateau Guides papier 9 Papier Copie 9-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger des cartes postales  Chargez les cartes postales, côté court comme tête de page, comme indiqué sur l'illustration, et face à imprimer orientée vers le bas.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 cartes postales. Ne chargez pas les cartes postales dans le sens transversal. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-13 Pour charger des enveloppes  Chargez les enveloppes, rabat orienté vers le haut, comme représenté sur l'illustration.  Remarque Avant de charger une pile d’enveloppes, applatissez-la pour en évacuer tout l’air qu’elle contient, et veillez à ce que les rabats soient bien applatis, sinon les enveloppes pourraient se froisser ou provoquer un serrage papier. Ne chargez pas plus de 10 enveloppes. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles.  Remarque Ne chargez pas les enveloppes dans le sens transversal. Ne placez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le bas. 9 Papier Copie 9-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger des transparents de rétroprojection  Chargez les transparents dans le même sens que le document.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 transparents. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Pour charger des planches d’étiquettes 1 Chargez les planches d'étiquettes dans le même sens que le document. 2 Placez les documents face à imprimer orientée vers le bas.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 planches d’étiquettes. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-15 Pour définir un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) Si du papier de format non standard a été chargé, il est nécessaire de spécifier le format. Pour faciliter la sélection, il est possible de programmer deux formats nonstandard de papier. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter à la section suivante.  Remarque Si vous ne souhaitez pas spécifier de format non standard, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation], ou patientez jusqu’à ce que le délai de réinitialisation automatique soit écoulé, ce qui ramène ma machine à ses paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 3 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. L'écran Format personnel apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [X] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document. 9 Papier Copie 9-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Y] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-17 Pour enregistrer un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) Il est possible de mémoriser deux formats de papier non-standard. L'enregistrement des formats de papier fréquemment utilisés permet de les sélectionner rapidement.  Remarque Si vous ne souhaitez pas définir un format personnalisé, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation], ou patientez jusqu’à ce que le délai d’inactivité soit écoulé pour que l’initialisation automatique intervienne et ramène la machine à ses paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 2 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. L'écran Format personnel apparaît. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistr. Format Pap]. 9 Papier Copie 9-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4 Appuyez sur la touche [X] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Y] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document. 6 Appuyez sur [1] ou sur [2].  Si un format papier a déjà été enregistré sous la touche sélectionnée, le format précédemment assigné à cette touche sera effacé et le nouveau format de papier sera enregistré.  Pour enregistrer un autre format personnel de papier, répétez les étapes 4, 5 et 6. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Ceci achève l'enregistrement des formats personnels de papier. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-19 Pour sélectionner un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) On peut effectuer des copies en utilisant le format papier personnalisé de enregistré en mémoire. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 4 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 5 Appuyez sur [1] ou sur [2] pour sélectionner le format personnel de papier enregistré en mémoire, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 9 Papier Copie 9-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.7 Sélectionner le réglage Papier Pour effectuer des copies, il est possible de sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin ou dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier contenant le format papier désiré, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au type de papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-1 10 Documents originaux 10.1 Introduction du document Utilisation de l’introducteur/retourneur de document L'introducteur/retourneur de document introduit, numérise et éjecte une page à la fois d'un document multi-feuilles. Pour que l'introducteur/ retourneur de document puisse fonctionner correctement, il convient de charger le type correct de document. L'utilisation d'un document de type incorrect peut entraîner un serrage papier ou endommager le copieur. Types de document Document de formats uniformes Documents pour le mode Détection originaux mixtes Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Document de formats mixtes Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Type de papier Papier ordinaire (35 à 128 g/m2) Papier ordinaire (50 à 128 g/m2) Format du document A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L/C, B6 L Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Type de papier Papier ordinaire (50 à 128 g/m2) Format du document Veuillez vous reporter à “Originaux de largeurs mixtes”. 10 Documents originaux 10-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Originaux de largeurs mixtes 2 : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Largeur maximum du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 123 mm Détection des originaux de largeurs mixtes A3 L A4 C B4 L B5 C A4 L A5 C B5 L A5 L B6 L 297 mm A3 L 2 2 — — — — — — — A4 C 2 2 — — — — — — — 257 mm B4 L 2 2 2 2 — — — — — B5 C 2 2 2 2 — — — — — 210 mm A4 L 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — A5 C — — 2 2 2 2 — — — 182 mm B5 L — — 2 2 2 2 2 — — 148 mm A5 L — — — — — — 2 2 — 123 mm B6 L — — — — — — — 2 2 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-3 Précautions relatives aux originaux Les types de documents suivants ne devraient pas être chargés dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document, sinon l'original pourrait être endommagé ou un serrage papier pourrait se produire. Il vaut mieux placer ces documents sur la vitre d'exposition. Documents sur papier spécial  Documents pliés (pliés en deux ou en accordéon)  Documents très translucides ou transparents, comme du papier photosensible diazo  Documents comportant des perforations de reliure  Documents avec de nombreuses perforations de classeur, comme du papier volant  Documents revêtus, comme du papier thermosensible ou du papier carbone  Papier pour imprimante à jet d'encre  Documents qui viennent juste d'être imprimés avec ce copieur Documents sur du papier qui ne se prête pas à l'introduction  Documents gondolés  Documents froissés ou déchirés  Transparents de rétroprojection Si du papier de format non-standard présente un format proche d'un format standard, la copie est possible en utilisant la sélection “Papier Auto” ou “Taux Auto”. 10 Documents originaux 10-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.2 Chargement de l’original dans l’introducteur/ retourneur de document Chargement du document 1 Faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document. 2 Chargez les documents à faxer ou copier, face vers le haut.  Remarque Il est possible de charger un document de 80 pages maximum. La hauteur de la pile des pages du document ne doit pas dépasser le repère de hauteur. 3 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document.  Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d’être introduites de travers. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-5 4 Appuyez sur [Original Direction], puis sélectionnez le paramètre qui convient à votre document.  Remarque Si l’orientation du document est différente de celle qui est sélectionnée sous Original Direction, certaines opérations de copie, comme la copie 2en1 ou 4en1, ne seront pas imprimées correctement. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'introduction commence par la page qui se trouve en haut de la pile. 10 Documents originaux 10-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger un document de formats mixtes (fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”) Grâce à la détection des documents de largeurs mixtes, il est possible de numériser et de copier un jeu d'originaux de divers formats avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 1 Empilez les pages du document, face vers le haut, comme indiqué sur l'illustration, et veillez à ce que toutes les pages soient alignées contre le bord supérieur et contre le bord gauche. 2 Faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent à la page la plus grande. 3 Chargez le document de manière à ce que toutes les pages soient alignées le long du guide document vers l'arrière du copieur. 4 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document.  Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers.  Remarque Certaines combinaisons de formats de document ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”. Pour plus de détails, voir page 10-2. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-7 5 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Originaux Mixtes]. 6 Sélectionnez les paramètres de copie désirés, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 10 Documents originaux 10-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.3 Positionnement des documents sur la vitre d’exposition La méthode de positionnement dépend du type de document à copier, il convient donc de s'assurer que l'original est positionné correctement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, veuillez vous reporter à “Chargement de l'original dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document”, page 10-4. Pour placer le document directement sur la vitre d'exposition, relevez de 15° ou plus, le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, comme indiqué ci-dessous. 15 15 Chargement horizontal Chargement vertical Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-9 Pour positionner des documents en feuilles Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour copier du papier ordinaire ou des documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document. 1 Soulevez le couvre-original, ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document s'il est installé, puis placez le doucement sur la vitre d'exposition, face orientée vers le bas. 2 Placez le document de manière à l'aligner avec la flèche située dans le coin supérieur gauche des réglettes document. 3 Refermez doucement le couvreoriginal ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. 10 Documents originaux 10-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour positionner des documents transparents ou translucides Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous, pour copier des documents comme des transparents de rétroprojection ou du papier calque ou du papier photosensible diazo. 1 Soulevez le couvre-original, ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document s'il est installé, puis placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, face orientée vers le bas. 2 Placez le document de manière à l'aligner avec la flèche située dans le coin supérieur gauche des réglettes document. 3 Placez une feuille de papier vierge de même format au dessus de l'original. 4 Refermez doucement le couvreoriginal ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-11 Pour positionner des livres ou des magazines Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour copier des documents reliés, comme des livres ou des magazines. 1 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Orig > Copie] et appuyez sur [Livre]. Procédez ensuite aux autres sélections. 2 Ouvrez le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. 3 Placez le document face orientée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition, le haut du livre orienté vers l'arrière du copieur, et le milieu du livre aligné avec le repère Livre de la réglette document. 4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé.  Remarque Pour copier des documents épais, procédez à la copie dans refermer le couvre-original ou l’introducteur/retourneur de document. Pendant la numérisation du document, couvre-original ou introducteur/retourneur de document ouvert, ne regardez pas directement la lumière intense visible à travers la vitre d’exposition. Si le document n’est pas positionné correctement, les copies ne seront pas imprimées dans la séquence correcte. Soulevez, de 15° ou plus, le couvre-original ou l’introducteur/ retourneur de document s’il est installé. Ne posez pas d’objets de plus de 3 kg sur la vitre d’exposition. Si vous placez un livre sur la vitre d’exposition, n’appuyez pas trop fort dessus, cela pourrait endommager la vitre d’exposition.  Conseil Pour plus de détails, voir “Copier un livre” à la page 11-25. 10 Documents originaux 10-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.4 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques La méthode d'introduction de documents la plus appropriée et les paramètres copies pour des applications spécifiques sont décrits cidessous. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des divers paramètres copie, veuillez vous reporter à “11 Spécification des paramètres Copie”. Description du tableau * Un tiret (—) indique qu'aucun paramètre ne devrait être sélectionné. 1. Indique si l'original et la copie désirée sont recto ou recto/verso. 2. Indique à quoi ressemblera la copie. 3. Indique comment le document devrait être positionné (page 10-4). 4. Indique la sélection Copie en vigueur. (Recto, Recto-verso, 2en1 ou 4en1) sur l'écran Orig. Ö Copie (page 11-18). 5. Indique la sélection Finition en vigueur. (Agrafage en coin, Agrafage 2 points, ou Perforation) (page 11-1). 6. Indique le paramètre Marge sélectionné, à partir de l'écran Orig. Ö Copie, si une marge a été spécifiée pour le document (page 11-23). 7. Indique le paramètre Marge sélectionné, à partir de l'écran Auxiliaire si une marge de reliure a été spécifiée pour la copie (section Utilisation Experte). 8. Indique la position d'agrafage ou de perforation qui doit être sélectionnée (page 11-6 et page 11-8). 1. Original Recto Ö Copie Recto Copie désirée 4. Paramètre Copie 5. Paramètre Finition 6. Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) 7. Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) 8. Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — 3. 1 2 3 2. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-13 Originaux rectos Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-15 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-17 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-19 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure à gauche Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-21 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-23 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-25 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure en haut Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-27 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-29 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-31 10.5 Documents de grand format Précautions concernant les copies A3 L/B4 L Lorsque vous effectuez des copies de format A3 L ou B4 L, observez les précautions suivantes concernant l'orientation du document et les positions relatives à l'agrafage 2 points ou à la perforation. Si vous chargez l'un des types de document suivants, sélectionnez le paramètre Direction Original dans l'écran Orig. Ö Copie. A page 11-21 Pour la réalisation de copies A3 L ou B4 L, les paramètres “Agrafage 2 points” et “Perforation” ne sont pas disponibles avec les positions suivantes. A 10 Documents originaux 10-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-1 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11.1 Spécifier les paramètres de finition Divers paramètres de finition permettent de trier, de grouper, d'agrafer ou de perforer les copies. Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Fonctions de Base], puis appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Finition disponibles. Réglages Finition disponibles  Non-Tri Les copies sont éjectées et empilées les unes sur les autres à mesure qu'elles sont imprimées.  Tri Les copies sont automatiquement réparties en un nombre de jeux spécifié dont chacun comporte une copie de chaque page. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Groupe Les copies sont automatiquement réparties en piles contenant des copies de la même page. Seulement quand le module de finition est installé  Agrafage en coin Les copies imprimées avec le paramètre “Tri” ou “Groupe” sont automatiquement agrafées ensemble dans leur coin supérieur gauche.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’agrafer du papier épais, des enveloppes, ni des transparents de rétroprojection. Seulement quand le module de finition est installé  Agrafage 2 points Les copies imprimées avec le paramètre “Tri” ou “Groupe” sont automatiquement agrafées en deux endroits le long du bord gauche.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’agrafer du papier épais, des enveloppes, ni des transparents de rétroprojection. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-3 Seulement quand le module de finition est installé  Perforation Les copies sont perforées de manière à pouvoir les archiver dans un classeur. Ce paramètre peut être combiné à un paramètre “Non-Tri”, “Tri”, “Groupe” ou Agrafage.  Remarque Les enveloppes et les transparents de rétroprojection ne peuvent pas être perforés. Seulement quand le module de finition et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés  Marquage pli et Agrafage 2 points Marque automatiquement le pli du papier copie en mode d'impression Livret et effectue une agrafage en deux points du milieu.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’effectuer le marquage du pli et l’agrafage 2 points sur du papier épais et des enveloppes.  Conseil Par défaut, le paramètre “Non-Tri” ou “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné en fonction du nombre de pages que comporte le document. Le réglage par défaut est “Non-Tri”. Ce paramètrage par défaut peut être modifié à l’aide de la fonction correspondante dans l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Considérations sur l’utilisation des paramètres “Tri” et “Groupe”  Lorsqu'un document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition et que l'on utilise le paramètre “Tri”, la copie s'effectue automatiquement à l'aide de la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions auxiliaires” à la page 6-1.  Si le module de finition ou le kit bac courrier est installé, chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre.  Si le plateau travaux est installé, mais que le module de finition ou le kit bac courrier ne l'est pas, chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Conditions pour le tri croisé  Du papier de même type doit être chargé horizontalement dans un magasin papier et verticalement dans un autre magasin.  La fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes” ne doit pas être sélectionnée.  Aucune des fonctions suivantes ne doit être sélectionnée “Perforation”, “Intercalaires”, “Couverture” et “Multi-image”.  Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un magasin papier.  Le papier de format A4 ou B5 est chargé horizontalement ou verticalement.  Si un module de finition est installé, le tri croisé n'est pas possible. Tri décalé Chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. Tri croisé Chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-5 Groupe décalé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. Groupe croisé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre Agrafage 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Tri], et après avoir sélectionné le mode de tri désiré, appuyez sur l'une des deux touches d'agrafage.  Si “Agrafage en coin” a été sélectionné, passez à l'étape 6.  Si “Agrafage 2 points” était sélectionné, poursuivez à l'étape 3. 3 Appuyez sur [Choix position]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant à la position d'agrafage désirée. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible de sélectionner un paramètre d’agrafage si une autre tâche a été interrompue. Lorsque vous réalisez des copies avec un paramètre d’agrafage, veillez à la position d’agrafage sélectionnée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 11-10. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-7 Si “Agrafage en coin” a été sélectionné, la position d’agrafage ne peut pas être spécifiée. Cependant, si le paramètre “Agrafage en coin” est utilisé en même temps que le paramètre “Perforation”, la position d’agrafage ne peut pas être spécifiée. Lorsqu’un document est placé sur la vitre d’exposition et que l’on utilise un paramètre d’agrafage, la copie s’effectue automatiquement à l’aide de la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions auxiliaires” à la page 6-1. Lors de la copie avec un paramètre d’agrafage, assurez-vous de ne pas dépasser le nombre de pages qui peuvent être agrafées ensemble. Si vous ne définissez pas la position d’agrafage, celle-ci sera automatiquement spécifiée. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre “Perforation” 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Sélectionnez “Non-Tri”, “Tri” ou “Groupe”, puis appuyez sur [Perfo.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Choix position]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant à la position de perforation désirée.  Pour activer la spécification automatique de la perforation, appuyez sur [Sans]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Si l’opération de copie a été lancée sans que la position de perforation n’ait été spécifiée ou que “Sans” a été sélectionné, la position de perforation sera automatiquement spécifiée sur la base de l’orientation du document, comme représenté sur l’illustration. Pour ajuster la position des perforations, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-9 Marquage pli et Pliage Si les kits en option, c'est à dire le module de finition, et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés, vous pouvez définir une marque de pli permettant de plier le papier en deux. Vous pouvez en plus spécifier un agrafage 2 points au centre du papier. Avant de sélectionner le paramètre “Marquage Pli”, veillez à sélectionner le paramètre “Création Livret” dans l'écran Orig. Ö Copie. (Veuillez vous reporter à page 11-21.) 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Sélectionnez “Non-Tri”, “Tri” ou “Groupe”, puis appuyez sur [Marquage Pli].  Si vous utilisez l'Agrafage central, (pliage), sélectionnez la touche [Agrafage 2 points]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Remarque Le Marquage pli et l’Agrafage 2 points peuvent être réalisés sur du papier de format A3, B4, A4, et B5. Il est possible d’agrafer de 2 à 15 feuilles. Le Marquage pli et l’Agrafage 2 points ne sont possibles que sur du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Notes relatives à la position d’agrafage L'emplacement d'agrafage varie selon le format et l'orientation du papier. Veuillez vous reporter au tableau suivant pour sélectionner le papier en vue d'une opération de copie. Lorsque le paramètre “Agrafage en coin” est sélectionné : Quand le module de finition (FN-117) est installé Icône à l'écran Orientation document Position d'agrafage Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de papier : A3 L, B4 L Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-11 Lorsque le paramètre “Agrafage 2 points” est sélectionné : Quand le module de finition (FN-117) est installé Icône à l'écran Orientation document Position d'agrafage Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de papier : A3 L, B4 L 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Notes sur le nombre de jeux qu’il est possible d’agrafer Lors de la copie avec un paramètre d'agrafage, il se peut que des pages tombent ou ne soient plus alignées. Nous recommandons de ne pas dépasser le nombre de jeux agrafables indiqué ci-dessous. Notes sur la position de perforation Lors de la copie avec le paramètre “Perforation”, veillez à l'orientation du document. Nombre maximal de jeux Nombre de pages reliées Module de finition (A3 L à B6 C) 2 feuilles 100 jeux 3 à 5 feuilles 80 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles 60 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles 40 jeux 21 à 30 feuilles 33 jeux 31 à 40 feuilles 25 jeux 41 à 50 feuilles 20 jeux Quand le module de finition (FN-117) et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés Icône à l'écran Orientation document Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/ retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-13 11.2 Spécifier une sélection Zoom Il est possible de réaliser des copies réduites ou agrandies d'un document. Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Fonctions de Base], puis appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. Il existe huit sélections pour modifier le taux zoom.  Taux Auto Ce paramètre sélectionne automatiquement taux zoom le plus approprié en fonction du document chargé et du format de papier spécifié.  Pleine page (1/1) Cela définit une copie à la même échelle que l'original (× 1,000).  Agrandissement (Agran) Cette option propose des sélections zoom permettant de réaliser des copies agrandies à partir de formats ordinaires de documents sur des formats standard de papier. Par exemple :  Un document au format A4 peut être copié sur un papier de format supérieur A3.  Un document au format B4 peut être copié sur un papier de format supérieur A3.  Réduction (Réduc) Cette option propose des sélections zoom permettant de réaliser des copies réduites à partir de formats ordinaires de documents sur des formats standard de papier. Par exemple :  Un document au format A3 peut être copié sur un papier de format inférieur A4.  Un document au format B4 peut être copié sur un papier de format inférieur A4. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Minimal (Mini) Cette option permet de réduire légèrement la copie (× 0,930).  Le réglage “Mini” garantit que toute partie de l'original située au bord de la page ne sera pas tronquée sur la copie.  Le taux zoom du réglage “Mini” peut être modifié par l'un des facteurs compris entre × 0,900 et × 0,999.  Zooming Il est possible de spécifier n'importe quel facteur zoom compris entre × 0,250 et × 4,000.  Appuyez sur les flèches pour sélectionner le taux zoom voulu. A chaque pression sur une flèche, le taux zoom augmente ou diminue par pas de 0,001.  Taux Perso Il est possible de spécifier n'importe quel facteur zoom compris entre × 0,250 et × 4,000.  Tapez sur le clavier numérique le taux zoom voulu.  Il est possible de mémoriser deux taux zoom entrés sur le clavier numérique.  Zoom X/Y On peut changer le format de la copie en spécifiant diverses échelles (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000) pour les dimensions verticales et horizontales. Sélectionner un taux Zoom 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Sélectionnez le réglage Zoom désiré. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-15 Spécifier un taux zoom personnalisé (“Taux Perso”) Pour entrer un taux zoom personnalisé 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux perso]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le taux zoom voulu (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom que vous avez tapé s'affiche comme le taux zoom personnalisé. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour mémoriser les taux zoom personnel et minimal 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémorise Zoom]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le taux zoom voulu (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000).  Pour enregistrer un taux zoom Minimal, tapez le taux zoom voulu, compris entre × 0,900 et × 0,999. Le taux zoom saisi s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur [1], [2] ou [Réduc. minimale]. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est enregistré en mémoire. Pour rappeler un taux zoom personnalisé enregistré en mémoire 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur [1], [2] ou [Réduc. minimale]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est rappelé. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-17 Pour spécifier des échelles verticales et horizontales différentes (réglage “Zoom X/Y”) 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom X/Y]. L'écran Zoom X/Y apparaît. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur voulue pour le côté X (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur voulue pour le côté Y (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est appliqué. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11.3 Sélectionner les réglages Orig. > Copie Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages disponibles pour l'original et la copie. Paramètres Orig. > Copie  Recto Ö Recto Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original recto.  Recto Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto.  Recto Ö Recto 2en1 Une copie recto est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto.  Recto Ö Recto/verso 2en1 Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.  Recto/verso Ö Recto Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Deux copies recto sont réalisées à partir d'un original recto/verso.  Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original recto/verso. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-19  Recto/verso Ö Recto 2en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original recto/verso.  Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso 2en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso.  Recto Ö Recto 4en1 Une copie recto est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.  Recto Ö Recto/verso 4en1 Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de huit originaux recto.  Recto Ö Création Livret Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.  Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso -4en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso -4en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso.  Livre (Séparation) Ö Recto Deux copies recto sont réalisées à partir d'un original relié.  Livre (Double page) Ö Recto Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original relié.  Livre (Séparation) Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original relié.  Livre (Double Page) Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original relié. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-21 Pour spécifier les paramètres Orig. > Copie 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant au type de document à copier. (Pour l'exemple ci-contre, appuyez sur [Recto].) 4 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant au type de copie désiré. (Pour l'exemple ci-contre, appuyez sur [Recto/Verso].) 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour sélectionner les paramètres “2en1 Recto/Verso”, “Création Livret”, “4en1 Recto” ou “4en1 Recto/Verso”, appuyez sur [4en1/Livret].  Choisissez le type de copie souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Direction Original].  Sélectionnez un paramètre Direction Original si le document est chargé dans un sens différent de l'orientation standard. 6 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour l'orientation du document. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-23 Copier un document relié Il est possible de régler la position de numérisation pour les documents reliés. Il est possible de voir la largeur de la marge de reliure lorsque l'on réalise des copies en sélectionnant le paramètre “Recto > Recto/Verso” ou “Recto/Verso > Recto”. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [Marge]. 4 Sélectionnez la position appropriée pour la marge de reliure.  Il y a deux positions pour la reliure comme l'indique l'illustration ci-contre. Original avec marge de reliure Original sans marge de reliure Position reliure à gauche Position reliure en haut 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur les grandes flèches pour sélectionner la largeur désirée de la marge de reliure.  La marge de reliure peut être définie entre 0 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Si le paramètre Position reliure à gauche est sélectionné, le recto et le verso de la copie seront imprimés dans le même sens. Si le paramètre Position reliure en haut est sélectionné pour copie recto-verso, le recto de la page sera imprimé tête en bas. Pour régler la largeur de la zone effacée en bas de page sur le recto, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-25 Copier un livre 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [Livre]. 4 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour la position de reliure du livre (“Livre standard” ou “Livre inversé”). 5 Faites votre sélection selon que vous désirez copier deux pages du livre sur une seule page (“Double page”) ou sur deux pages distinctes (“Séparation”). 6 Pour effacer une zone autour du texte ou le long de la reliure, appuyez sur [Effacement livre]. Sur feuilles volantes En tableau 2 pages 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7 Sélectionnez le réglage Effacement désiré.  Conseil Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge encadrant le texte. Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge le long de la reliure. Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge encadrant le texte et le long de la reliure. 8 Appuyez sur les touches flèches haut et bas, pour spécifier la largeur de la zone d'effacement. Effacement Cadre Effacement Centre Effacement Cadre et Centre Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-27  Conseil La zone d’effacement peut être définie entre 5 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. Par défaut la largeur de la zone d’effacement le long de la reliure est de 12 mm. Pour modifier cette valeur par défaut, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 10 Sélectionnez les paramètres copie désirés.  Remarque Si vous appuyez sur [Livre], il n’est pas possible de sélectionner [2en1 Recto] ou [4en1 / Livret]. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copier des pages d’un livre sur deux pages recto/verso 1 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Orig > Copie], puis appuyez sur [Livre]. L'écran Livre apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour la position de reliure du livre (“Livre standard” ou “Livre inversé”). 3 Appuyez sur [Séparation], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Recto/Verso]. 5 Appuyez sur [Ordre des pages]. 6 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant à l'ordre des pages souhaité, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-29  Conseil Ordre des pages Livre Les deux côtés, droit et gauche, sont imprimés en recto/verso. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Sélection rapide des paramètres par défaut Le paramètre Orig. Ö Copie par défaut est “Recto > Recto”. Ce paramètre par défaut peut être modifié en “Recto > Recto/Verso” ou “Recto/Verso > Recto/Verso”.  Conseil Les paramètres par défaut peuvent être modifiés au moyen des diverses fonctions de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-31 11.4 Spécifier une densité copie Sélectionner un paramètre de densité Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Densité]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Densité disponibles. Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour le document à copier (“Texte”, “Photo” ou “Texte/Photo”). Ensuite, réglez la densité selon les besoins.  Conseil Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est le réglage par défaut. Ce paramètrage par défaut de la Densité peut être modifié à l’aide de la fonction correspondante dans l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Sélectionner le réglage “Texte” Sélectionnez le paramètre “Texte” si vous désirez faire ressortir les contours et reproduire avec netteté les documents comportant du texte. Densité “Auto” : La densité est automatiquement réglée en fonction du document. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Auto], ou appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Sélectionner le réglage “Photo” Sélectionnez le réglage “Photo” pour copier des documents comportant des demi-teintes comme des photographies par exemple. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Photo]. 4 Appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré.  Remarque Le paramètre Densité “Auto” ne peut pas être sélectionné si le paramètre “Photo” est sélectionné. La sélection du paramètre “Auto” sélectionne automatiquement le paramètre “Texte”. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-33 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte/Photo” Sélectionnez le réglage “Texte/Photo” pour copier des documents comportant à la fois des photos et du texte. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte/Photo]. 4 Appuyez sur [Auto], ou appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré..  Conseil Si le paramètre Densité “Auto” est sélectionné, la densité de la copie sera ajustée selon les besoins. Cependant, on peut éclaircir ou foncer la densité à l’aide de la fonction correspondante sur l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-34 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-1 12 Messages de l’écran tactile 12.1 Quand le message “Prêt à copier. Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche Lorsque le toner est sur le point de s'épuiser, le message “Ajouter du toner” apparaît. A compter de l'apparition de ce message, vous pouvez encore imprimer 1000 pages environ, mais il convient cependant de remplacer la cartouche de toner dès que possible. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner” à la page 12-2. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12.2 Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche Quand il n'y a plus de toner, le message ci-dessous s'affiche et l'impression ne peut plus se poursuivre. Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tirez le tiroir toner aussi loin que possible. 3 Relevez le support de la cartouche de toner. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-3 4 Avec précautions, retirez la cartouche vide.  Ne jetez pas la cartouche vide. Conservez-la pour la remettre à votre technicien S.A.V. 5 Tapez 4 ou 5 fois une des extrémités de la cartouche de toner contre une surface dure, un bureau ou une table par exemple, et répétez l'opération pour l'autre extrémité.  Il se peut que le toner contenu dans la cartouche se soit compacté, veillez par conséquent à ne pas négliger cette étape pour bien le décompacter. 6 Secouez la nouvelle cartouche de toner 5 fois environ. 7 Insérez la nouvelle cartouche, l'adhésif de protection étant orienté vers le haut. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Rabaissez le support de cartouche toner jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. Saisissez l'adhésif de protection situé sur la cartouche, et tirez-le lentement vers vous. 9 Repliez le support de cartouche toner, puis repoussez le tiroir toner. 10 Fermez la porte frontale FN4.  Remarque Quand la porte frontale est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. Pendant le réapprovisionnement en toner, n’éteignez pas le copieur et n’ouvrez aucune autre porte.  Conseil Si l’impression présente une certaine pâleur alors que la cartouche toner vient juste d’être remplacée, procédez à un apport toner. (Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions du Mode utilisateur” à la page 7-37.) Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-5 12.3 Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche Quand il n'y a plus d'agrafes, le message ci-dessous s'affiche et l'agrafage ne peut plus être poursuivi. Suivre la procédure suivante pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes.  Remarque Ne remplacez la cartouche d’agrafes que lorsque ce message s’est affiché. La machine pourrait être endommagée si la cartouche d’agrafes est retirée avant l’apparition de ce message. Pour remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes destinée au module de finition 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Tirez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes vers vous. 3 Appuyez sur la zone marquée “PUSH” pour déverrouiller le porteagrafes. 4 Retirez la cartouche vide du support de cartouche. 5 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support, puis retirez avec précaution la butée de maintien. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-7 6 Insérez le support de cartouche réapprovisionné jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. 7 Fermez la porte frontale FN4. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes du kit agrafage à cheval 1 Tout en maintenant le plateau de sortie papier, retirez la cartouche d'agrafes. 2 Appuyez sur la zone marquée “PUSH” pour déverrouiller le porteagrafes. 3 Retirez la cartouche vide du support de cartouche. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-9 4 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support de cartouche. 5 Retirez la butée de maintien avec précaution. 6 Insérez le support de cartouche réapprovisionné jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. ATTENTION Faites attention lors de l’installation du support de cartouche d’agrafes.  Assurez-vous que le support de cartouche d'agrafes est inséré dans le bon sens. 7 Rabaissez le plateau de sortie papier. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Ouvrez puis refermez la porte de dégagement de serrage papier. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-11 12.4 En cas de serrage papier Localisation des serrages papier 1 2 5 6 8 9 10 7 3 4 Message Description Message Description 1 Serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document (page 12-12) 6 Serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier (page 12-20) 2 Serrage papier dans la section de fixation (page 12-14) 7 Serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité (page 12-21) 3 Serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso (page 12-18) 8 Serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré (page 12-22) 4 Serrage papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles (page 12-18) 9 Serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier (page 12-24) 5 Serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier (page 12-19) 10 Serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval (page 12-26) 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document Suivez les instructions affichées sur l'écran tactile pour ouvrir le guide document et retirer tout papier coincé. 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de la porte de dégagement des serrages, puis ouvrez la porte. 2 Retirez avec soin tout document coincé. 3 Relevez le levier du guide document. 4 Tournez la molette pour éjecter tout document serré. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-13 5 Tout en soutenant de la main droite, le plateau d'introduction documents, retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé. 6 Ramenez le guide document à sa position d'origine, puis refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans la section de fixation ATTENTION Le tour de l’unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud.  Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de dégagement de la porte droite, et ouvrez la porte. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-15 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie.  Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Ouvrez le guide de l'unité de fixation. Rouleau de transfert image 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 5 Ouvrez le guide d'aiguillage et retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé dans le module alternateur. 6 Retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé dans l'unité de fixation  Remarque Si le serrage papier se présente de l’une des façons suivantes, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. : Le papier est enroulé autour du rouleau de transfert image. Le papier est plié ou déchiqueté par le rouleau de transfert image. Le papier s’est déchiré au moment du retrait et une partie est restée coincée dans l’unité de fixation. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-17 7 Retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé autour du rouleau de transfert image. 8 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 9 Fermez la porte droite. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans l’unité recto-verso 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité rectoverso. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Fermez la porte de l'unité rectoverso. Retrait d’un serrage dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 1 Retirez tout papier coincé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 2 Si le papier coincé ne peut être retiré, tirez le levier de la plaque coulissante du plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, puis tirez la plaque coulissante vers vous. 3 De la main gauche, appuyez vers le bas sur la plaque coulissante et retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé. 4 Ramenez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles à sa position initiale. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-19 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier 1 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 2 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 3 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 4 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. 5 Refermez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-21 Pour retirer un serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Abaissez le levier “FN1” puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Tournez la molette “FN2”. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-23 4 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 5 Abaissez le levier “FN3”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 6 Ramenez le levier “FN1” et le levier “FN3” à leur position d'origine. 7 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Repoussez le collecteur de déchets de perforation à sa position initiale. 8 Abaissez le levier “FN4”. 9 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé 10 Ramenez le levier “FN4” à sa position d'origine. 11 Fermez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Tout en appuyant vers le bas sur le levier “FN7”, retirez tout papier coincé. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-25 4 Tirez la poignée “FN8” pour ouvrir la porte de dégagement des serrages. 5 Retirez tout papier coincé dans le bac courrier. 6 Refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 7 Fermez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Retirez tout le papier du plateau de sortie papier. 4 Ouvrez la porte de dégagement des serrages, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 5 Refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 6 Fermez la porte frontale. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-27 12.5 Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” s’affiche Retrait des agrafes coincées Lorsque un module de finition est installé et que les agrafes sont coincées, le message ci-après apparaît. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour dégager les agrafes coincées. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour retirer le papier et les agrafes.  Remarque Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” apparaît, dégagez les agrafes coincées selon les indications ci-dessous. Négliger la procédure suivante et/ou tirer en force le papier pour le dégager peut endommager “l’unité d’agrafage”. 1 Retirez tout le papier du module de finition. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 3 Abaissez le levier “FN1” puis retirez tout papier coincé. 4 Tournez la molette “FN2”. 5 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-29 6 Abaissez le levier “FN3”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 7 Ramenez le levier “FN1” et le levier “FN3” à leur position d'origine. 8 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Repoussez le collecteur de déchets de perforation à sa position initiale. 9 Abaissez le levier “FN4”. 10 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 11 Ramenez le levier “FN4” à sa position d'origine. 12 Tournez la molette vers la gauche pour déplacer l'agrafeuse vers l'avant. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13 Tirez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes vers vous. 14 Remontez le guide porte-agrafes, puis extraire une bande d'agrafes. 15 Ramenez le guide à sa position d'origine. 16 Insérez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. 17 Fermez la porte frontale FN4.  Remarque S’il est toujours impossible de procéder à l’agrafage, même après avoir appliqué la procédure ci-dessus, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-31 12.6 Quand le message “Le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein.” s’affiche Si le kit de perforation est monté sur le module de finition, le message suivant s'affichera dès que le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation. Pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation Videz et réinstallez le collecteur de déchets de perforation de la manière décrite ci-dessous. 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 3 Videz le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 4 Insérez le collecteur de déchets de perforation et ramenez-le à sa position d'origine. 5 Fermez la porte frontale FN4. Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-1 13 Incidents 13.1 Principaux messages et leurs solutions Message Origine Remède Incident détectée. Appeler le S.A.V. et indiquer le code affiché ci-dessous : Un dysfonctionnement s'est produit et le copieur ne peut pas imprimer. Informez votre technicien S.A.V. du code affiché sur l'écran tactile. Ajouter du toner. Le toner est épuisé, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. (“Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche” à la page 12-2) Le tambour PC doit être remplacé. Appeler le S.A.V. Le tambour PC a atteint sa limite de vie opérationnelle, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. L'Unité Image doit être remplacée. Appeler le S.A.V. L'unité image a atteint sa limite de vie opérationnelle, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Agrafeuse vide. Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. Il n'y a plus d'agrafes. Remplacez la cartouche d'agrafes. (“Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche” à la page 12-5) La date de la révision périodique du copieur arrive à échéance. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Appuyez sur pour afficher le code. Quand vous contactez le technicien S.A.V., indiquez-lui le code. Remettre le nombre suivant des pages d'originaux : OO Après avoir dégagé un serrage papier, il est nécessaire de recharger certaines pages qui ont déjà été introduites dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. Chargez les pages du document indiquées dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. XXXXXXXX impossible (espace mémoire insuffisante). Presser Impression pour continuer. La mémoire étant saturée, aucune autre page ne peut être numérisée. Imprimez les pages ou supprimez des tâches en file d'attente afin de libérer une partie de la mémoire. Ce mode est incompatible avec le mode XXXXXXXX. Les fonctions sélectionnées ne peuvent être associées. Effectuez les copies à l'aide d'une de ces fonctions uniquement. 13 Incidents 13-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pause. Lors de la réalisation de copies 2en1 en numérisation manuelle, la seconde page du document n'a pu être numérisée. Positionnez la seconde page du document ou appuyez sur page [Fin]. Fermer correctement les sections indiquées par des flèches. La porte ou le capot indiqué par la flèche est ouvert. Vérifiez que tous les capots et les portes sont bien fermées. Le crédit copies de votre compte est épuisé. Contacter l'administrateur. Le nombre total de copies défini par l'administrateur a été atteint. Demandez à l'administrateur de réinitialiser la limite. Le travail sélectionné excède le crédit copies accordé. Le travail ne peut être effecué. Contacter l'administrateur. Le nombre total de copies de travaux à imprimer défini par l'administrateur a été atteint. Demandez à l'administrateur de réinitialiser la limite des travaux à imprimer. Message Origine Remède Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-3 13.2 En cas de copies incorrectes Symptôme Cause possible Remède L'impression est trop claire. Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est réglé trop clair. Réglez la fonction “Densité copie” sur l'écran Choix utilisateur. Vous pouvez aussi annuler le réglage Densité “Auto”, puis sélectionner le paramètre voulu. Un réglage Densité trop claire a été sélectionné. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez un réglage de Densité plus foncée. De nombreux documents contenant des grandes zones imprimées ou des photos ont été imprimées. La densité d'impression était foncée et a réduit l'approvisionnement en toner. Utilisez la fonction “Apport Toner” du mode Utilitaires pour faire l'appoint en toner. La cartouche de toner vient d'être remplacée. L'approvisionnement en toner a été réduit. Utilisez la fonction “Apport Toner” du mode Utilitaires pour faire l'appoint en toner jusqu'à ce que la densité de copie soit plus foncée. Le toner est épuisé et le message “Ajouter toner.” apparaît sur l'écran tactile. Remplacez la cartouche toner par une cartouche neuve. Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. L'impression est trop foncée. Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est réglé trop foncé. Réglez la fonction “Densité copie” sur l'écran Choix Utilisateur. Vous pouvez aussi annuler le réglage Densité “Auto”, puis sélectionner le paramètre voulu. Un réglage Densité trop foncée a été sélectionné. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez un réglage de Densité plus claire. La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Le document n'a pas été suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document de manière à ce qu'il touche étroitement la vitre d'exposition. 13 Incidents 13-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 L'impression est floue. Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. Le document n'a pas été suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document de manière à ce qu'il touche étroitement la vitre d'exposition. Il y a des taches ou des points sombres sur toute la page imprimée. Les copies présentent des rayures. La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Le tapis du couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvredocument avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. L'original est imprimé sur un support très translucide, comme du papier photosensible diazo ou des transparents de rétroprojection. Placez une feuille de papier vierge par dessus le document. La copie concerne un document recto-verso. En cas de copie d'un original recto-verso fin, l'information contenue au verso de l'original risque d'apparaître au recto de la copie. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez une densité d'arrière plan plus claire. L'image n'est pas alignée correctement sur le papier. Le document n'est pas correctement placé. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si l'introducteur/retourneur de document est installé, ajustez correctement les guides document au format de l'original. Le document n'est pas placé correctement dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. Ouvrez l'introducteur/ retourneur de document, et placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. La vitre d'exposition est sale (pendant l'utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document). Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords du document. Du papier gondolé a été chargé dans le magasin. Aplatissez le papier avant de le charger. Symptôme Cause possible Remède Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-5 * Si le problème persiste après avoir effectué les opérations décrites ci-dessus, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La page imprimée est gondolée. Le papier utilisé se gondole facilement (le papier recyclé, par exemple). Retirez la pile de papier du magasin, retournez-la et rechargez-la dans le magasin. Remplacer le papier par du papier non humide. Le bord de la page imprimée est sale. Le tapis du couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvredocument avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. Le format papier sélectionné est plus grand que le document (avec un zoom réglé sur “× 1,000”). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien réglez le zoom sur “Taux Auto” pour agrandir la copie au format de papier souhaité. L'orientation du document est différente de l'orientation de la copie (le paramètre Zoom étant réglé sur “× 1,000”). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien sélectionnez une orientation copie identique à celle du document. Le format de réduction copie est inférieur au format de papier copie (sélection zoom personnel). Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui ajuste le format du document au format de papier souhaité. Ou bien réglez le zoom sur “Taux Auto” pour agrandir la copie au format de papier souhaité. Symptôme Cause possible Remède 13 Incidents 13-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13.3 Dysfonctionnement du copieur Symptôme Cause possible Remède Rien ne s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. S'il n'y a que le voyant de la touche [Impression] d'allumé, le copieur est en mode Economie d'énergie ou en mode Veille. Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche sur l'écran tactile pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie. Le copieur n'a pas été allumé. Vérifiez que l'interrupteur général est réglé sur “I” et que l'interrupteur auxiliaire est en position enfoncée. Le réglage de la molette contrôle contraste de l'écran tactile est trop clair ou trop foncé. Tout en regardant l'écran tactile, ajustez la molette contrôle contraste. La fonction Extinction écran est-elle réglée sur Non? Veuillez appuyer sur une touche du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. Veuillez modifier les paramètres Extinction écran. Voir “Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran”” à la page 7-17. Le voyant vert de la touche [Impression] ne s'allume pas. Aucun code d'accès n'a été entré. Tapez le code d'accès selon la procédure décrite dans “Effectuer des copies sur comptes”. Aucune copie n'est produite même s'il l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. La tâche d'impression ou de copie est en file d'attente pour impression. Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] pour vérifier les tâches en file d'attente. Veuillez attendre que l'impression démarre. Le copieur vient juste d'être mis en route et est encore en préchauffage. Après la mise sous tension, il faut environ 17 secondes pour que le copieur chauffe. Veuillez attendre que le copieur est achevé son préchauffage. Le copieur ne fonctionne pas correctement. Prenez connaissance des messages affichés sur l'écran tactile. La machine ne peut pas être mise en mode Copie. Le copieur est en mode Interruption (le voyant “Interruption” est allumé). Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption] pour annuler le mode Interruption. Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-7 * Si le problème persiste bien que toutes les opérations décrites ci-dessus aient été effectuées, éteignez le copieur, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La machine ne peut pas être allumée. Le cordon d'alimentation est débranché de la prise murale. Insérez la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Le disjoncteur du circuit électrique s'est déclenché. Réenclenchez le disjoncteur du circuit électrique. Symptôme Cause possible Remède 13 Incidents 13-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-1 14 Annexe 14.1 Caractéristiques techniques Copieur Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Caractéristiques Type Bureau Plateau Plateau fixe (numérisation par miroir) Revêtement du tambour OPC Système copie Copie laser numérique Système développement Méthode de développement MTHG Système fixation Système de rouleaux chauffés Résolution 600 dpi Document Types : Feuilles, livres Format : Maximum A3 L, Poids : 3 kgs Types de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), • Papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2). • Papier dédié : papier épais (91 g/m2 à 210 g/m2) transparents de rétroprojection, cartes postales, enveloppes, planches d'étiquettes L'introduction n'est possible que par le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Le papier dédié ne peut être utilisé qu'avec le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Formats papier 1er magasin, 2ème magasin • Format métrique : A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L • En pouces : Ledger L (11 × 17 L ), Legal L (8-1/2 × 14 L), Letter L/C (8-1/2 × 11 L/C) (Largeur : 3-1/2 à 11-3/4", Longueur : 5-1/2 à 17") Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L/C, B6 L (Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm, Longueur : 140 mm à 432 mm) Capacité de papier 1er magasin, 2ème magasin • Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé : 550 feuilles chacun. (64 g/m2) Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles • Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé : 150 feuilles • Papier dédié : 50 feuilles • Enveloppes : 10 unités Temps de préchauffage Moins de 17 secondes quand l'interrupteur général est en position ON et moins de 115 secondes quand l'interrupteur secondaire est sur ON (à température ambiante (23°C)). 14 Annexe 14-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Première copie Di3510 moins de 4,8 secondes (avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin) Di3010/Di2510 moins de 5,3 secondes (avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin) Vitesse Di3510 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 35 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Di3010 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 30 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Di2510 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 25 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Taux • Taille réelle : x1,000 • Facteurs d'agrandissement : ×1,154, ×1,414, ×1,545 et ×2,000 • Taux de réduction : ×0,816, ×0,707 et ×0,500, minimal (×0,930) • Taux de Zoom : ×0,250 à ×4,000 (par pas de 0,001) Multicopie 1 à 999 feuilles Contrôle densité Automatique, manuel et photo manuel Image perdue Tête de page : 4 mm; Queue de page : 4 mm; Bord arrière : 4 mm; Bord avant : 4 mm Alimentation requise 220-240 V : 10 A 50/60 Hz Consommation de courant Moins de 1365 W+10% Dimensions 677 mm (largeur) × 710 mm (profondeur) × 718 mm (hauteur) Mémoire 64 MB Poids 74 kg Caractéristiques Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-3 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 Originaux de largeurs mixtes 2 : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Caractéristiques Méthodes introduction document Papier ordinaire : Documents originaux recto et rectoverso Fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes” : Divers formats de documents recto et recto/verso Type de papier document Méthode standard : Papier ordinaire • Recto : 35 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Recto-verso : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 Fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” : Papier ordinaire (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2) Format papier document Papier ordinaire : A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 C Documents de formats mixtes : Voir le tableau ci-dessous. Capacité alimentation documents Maximum 80 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 48 W Dimensions 582 mm (largeur) × 558 mm (profondeur) × 145 mm (hauteur) Poids Moins de 9,4 kg Largeur maximum du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 123 mm Détection des originaux de largeurs mixtes A3 L A4 C B4 L B5 C A4 L A5 C B5 L A5 L B6 L 297 mm A3 L 2 2 — — — — — — — A4 C 2 2 — — — — — — — 257 mm B4 L 2 2 2 2 — — — — — B5 C 2 2 2 2 — — — — — 210 mm A4 L 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — A5 C — — 2 2 2 2 — — — 182 mm B5 L — — 2 2 2 2 2 — — 148 mm A5 L — — — — — — 2 2 — 123 mm B6 L — — — — — — — 2 2 14 Annexe 14-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Unité recto/verso AD-16 Module alternateur SB-1 Magasin d’alimentation papier PF-124 Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, A5 L Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 10 W Dimensions 89 mm (largeur) × 419 mm (profondeur) × 358 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 2,2 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, A5 L Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 338 mm (largeur) × 481 mm (profondeur) × 148 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,7 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C Capacité de papier 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 548 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 22 kg Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-5 Magasin d’alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4L/C, B5L/C, A5 L Capacité de papier 500 feuilles × 2 magasins (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 548 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 27 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A4 C Capacité de papier 2.500 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 45 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 564 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 26 kg 14 Annexe 14-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Module de finition intégré FN-117 Plateaux de sortie 1er magasin, 2ème magasin Paramètres • Fonctions normales : Sélections “Non-Tri”, “Tri”, “Tri”/ “Agrafage”, “Groupe” et “Agrafage à cheval” • Fonctions Perforation : Réglages “Non-Tri”/ “Perforation”, “Tri”/“Perforation” et “Tri”/“Agrafage”/ “Perforation” Type de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), • Carte postale (190 g/m2) • Enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection, planches d'étiquettes. Format papier A3 L, A4 L/C Capacité de papier 1er magasin • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) (A4 L ou plus petit) : Maximum 200 feuilles • Cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles 2ème magasin • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) (A4 L ou plus petit) : Maximum 1000 feuilles • B4 L : Maximum 500 feuilles • Cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles Sélection “Agrafage” Sur papier avec impression dense : 2 à 50 feuilles Sélection “Perforation” (en option) Nombre de trous : 4 Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 66 W Dimensions 319 (435) mm (largeur) × 558 mm (profondeur) × 573 mm (hauteur) (Les valeurs entre parenthèses sont les mesures valables lorsqu'un plateau média est installé.) Poids Environ 21,4 kg (y compris l'unité de transport horizontale) Accessoires 1 cartouche d'agrafes MS-5D (5.000 agrafes) Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-7 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 Kit bac courrier MK-1 Kit de perforation PK-6 Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac Capacité de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) : Maximum 200 feuilles • cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection, planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles Dimensions 282 mm (largeur) × 368 mm (profondeur) × 57 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 0,7 kg Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 4 bacs Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A4 C Capacité de papier Maximum 125 feuilles (80 g/m2) × 4 Dimensions 624 mm (largeur) × 503 mm (profondeur) × 390 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 8 kg (poids de l'unité), moins de 12 kg (poids brut) Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Caractéristiques Nombre de trous 4 trous Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (60 g/m2 à 163 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, A4 C Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Dimensions 114 mm (largeur) × 461 mm (profondeur) × 136 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,9 kg 14 Annexe 14-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1 Séparateur travaux JS-203 Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, A4 L Capacité de papier Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) : 200 feuilles Sélection “Agrafage” Sur papier avec impression dense : 2 à 15 feuilles Dimensions 445 (576) mm (largeur) × 203 (281) mm (profondeur) × 478 mm (hauteur) (Les valeurs entre parenthèses sont les mesures valables lorsqu'un plateau média est installé.) Poids 9,3 kg Accessoires 1 cartouche d'agrafes MS-2C (2.000 agrafes) Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac (en considérant les bacs du copieur comme 2 bacs) Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Papier dédié : papier épais (91 g/m2 à 210 g/m2), transparents de rétroprojection, cartes postales, enveloppes, planches d'étiquettes) Format papier A3 L, A4 L/C Capacité de papier JS-203 100 feuilles (80 g/m2) Plateau de sortie copies 250 feuilles (80 g/m2) Dimensions 450 mm (largeur) × 443 mm (profondeur) × 75 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,7 kg Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-9 14.2 Entretien du copieur Nettoyage Mettez l'interrupteur en position “O” avant de nettoyer le copieur. Revêtement  Nettoyez la surface du copieur avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. Vitre d’exposition  Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Panneau de contrôle  Nettoyez la surface du panneau de contrôle avec un chiffon doux et sec.  Remarque De trop fortes pressions peuvent détériorer le panneau de contrôle ou l’écran tactile. De plus, pour nettoyer le panneau de contrôle ou l’écran tactile, ne jamais utiliser de détergent ménager ou de produit de nettoyage pour les vitres. 14 Annexe 14-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Vitre d’exposition 1 Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-11 14.3 Table d’association des fonctions 14 Annexe 14-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-13 14 Annexe 14-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Codes de combinaison de fonctions Icône Description Les fonctions peuvent être associées. — Les fonctions ne peuvent être associées. La deuxième fonction ne peut être sélectionnée. La fonction sélectionnée en dernier est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en premier sera annulée. Lorsque l'on effectue des copies recto/verso à partir de documents recto, les deuxièmes fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées et un message d'avertissement apparaît. \ Ceci n'est pas une association satisfaisante du fait que la première fonction est annulée quand des sélections différentes requises en même temps sont spécifiées. En outre, les autres réglages simultanés sont nécessaire pour le réglage sélectionné en second. La fonction sélectionnée en premier est prioritaire. Un message d'avertissement s'affiche. La deuxième fonction ne peut être sélectionnée. Le réglage Zoom “Taux Auto” est sélectionné. Le réglage “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné. Le réglage zoom spécifié à l'aide de la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret” du Choix utilisateur est rappelé. La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée. Le réglage zoom spécifié à l'aide de la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret” du Choix utilisateur est rappelé. Le réglage “Agrafage 2 points” est automatiquement modifié en “Agrafage centre”. Le réglage “Agrafage en coin” ne peut pas être sélectionné. Ces fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées si le document est introduit dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. La fonction sélectionnée en premier est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée. Ces fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées si le document est introduit dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. La fonction sélectionnée en second est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. Le réglage change selon le paramétrage spécifié dans l'écran Choix utilisateur. Les réglages peuvent être spécifiés mais la fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. La fonction peut être sélectionnée mais le réglage n'est pas appliqué. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Création Livret” n'est pas sélectionné. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-15 *a La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée si la copie concerne des originaux de formats mixtes. (*2) *b La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée si la copie concerne des originaux de formats mixtes. (*2) Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Création Livret” est sélectionné. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Livre” est sélectionné. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Livre” ne peut être sélectionné. ■ Un message d'avertissement devrait s'afficher. ■ Les réglages peuvent être sélectionnés, mais la fonction sera automatiquement annulée, ou elle ne sera pas effectuée. Icône Description 14 Annexe 14-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom Formats papier Format papier Format métrique Format anglais A3 + 311 mm × 457 mm 12-1/4" × 18" A3 297 mm × 420 mm 11-3/4" × 16-1/2" A4 210 mm × 297 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" A5 148 mm × 210 mm 5-3/4" × 8-1/4" A6 105 mm × 148 mm 4-1/4" × 5-3/4" B4 257 mm × 364 mm 10" × 14-1/4" B5 182 mm × 257 mm 7-1/4" × 10" B6 128 mm × 182 mm 5" × 7-1/4" Format papier Format anglais Format métrique Ledger 11" × 17" 279 mm × 432 mm 11" × 14" 11" × 14" 279 mm × 356 mm Computer 10-1/8" × 14" 257 mm × 356 mm 10" × 14" 10" × 14" 254 mm × 356 mm 9-1/4" × 14" 9-1/4" × 14" 236 mm × 356 mm Legal 8-1/2" × 14" 216 mm × 356 mm Foolscap Government Legal 8-1/2" × 13" 216 mm × 330 mm Foolscap 8" × 13" 203 mm × 330 mm Foolscap 8-2/3" × 13" 220 mm × 330 mm Foolscap Folio 8-1/4" × 13" 210 mm × 330 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" 210 mm × 301 mm Letter 8-1/2" × 11" 216 mm × 279 mm Government Letter 8" × 10-1/2" 203 mm × 267 mm Quarto 8" × 10" 203 mm × 254 mm Statement Invoice 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" 140 mm × 216 mm 4" × 6" 4" × 6" 102 mm × 152 mm Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-17 Taux de zoom Formats métriques Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom A3 297 mm × 420 mm 11-3/4" × 16-1/2" A4 × 0,707 A5 × 0,500 B4 × 0,866 B5 × 0,610 A4 210 mm × 297 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" A5 × 0,707 A6 × 0,500 B5 × 0,866 B6 × 0,610 A3 × 1,414 B4 × 1,224 A5 148 mm × 210 mm 5-3/4" × 8-1/4" A6 × 0,707 B6 × 0,866 A4 × 1,414 A3 × 2,000 B4 × 1,733 B5 × 1,224 A6 105 mm × 148 mm 4-1/4" × 5-3/4" A4 × 2,000 A5 × 1,414 B5 × 1,733 B6 × 1,224 B4 257 mm × 364 mm 10" × 14-1/4" A4 × 0,816 A5 × 0,577 B5 × 0,707 B6 × 0,500 A3 × 1,154 B5 182 mm × 257 mm 7-1/4" × 10" A5 × 0,816 A6 × 0,577 B6 × 0,707 A3 × 1,640 A4 × 1,154 B4 × 1,414 14 Annexe 14-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 B6 128 mm × 182 mm 5" × 7-1/4" A6 × 0,816 A4 × 1,640 A5 × 1,154 B4 × 2,000 B5 × 1,414 Formats métriques Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom Formats anglais Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom Ledger 11" × 17" 279,4 mm × 431,8 mm 11" × 14" × 0,823 Legal × 0,722 Foolscap × 0,764 Letter × 0,647 Invoice × 0,500 11" × 15" 279,4 mm × 381 mm 11" × 14" × 0,933 Legal × 0,772 Foolscap × 0,772 Letter × 0,733 Invoice × 0,500 11" × 14" 279,4 mm × 355,6 mm Legal × 0,772 Foolscap × 0,772 Letter × 0,772 Invoice × 0,500 Legal 8-1/2" × 14" 215,9 mm × 355,6 mm Foolscap × 0,928 Letter × 0,785 Invoice × 0,607 11" × 17" × 1,214 Foolscap 8-1/2" × 13" 215,9 mm × 330,2 mm Letter × 0,846 Invoice × 0,647 11" × 17" × 1,294 11" × 14" × 1,076 Letter 8-1/2" × 11" 215,9 mm × 279,4 mm Invoice × 0,647 11" × 17" × 1,294 11" × 14" × 1,272 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-19 Taux zoom = format papier copie/format document 1" (1 pouce) = 25,4 mm 1 mm = 0,0394" (pouce) Invoice 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" 139,7 mm × 215,9 mm 11" × 17" × 2,000 11" × 14" × 1,647 Legal × 1,545 Foolscap × 1,529 Letter × 1,294 Formats anglais Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom 14 Annexe 14-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.5 Consommables Afin que cette machine puisse fonctionner au mieux de ses capacités, elle nécessite les consommables suivants. Pour obtenir des copies de la meilleure qualité, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser les consommables spécifiés. Pour plus d'informations sur l'achat des consommables, veuillez contacter votre Service Après-vente. Papier En plus du papier ordinaire, du papier épais et des transparents de rétroprojection sont également disponibles.  Remarque Afin de protéger de l’humidité les ramettes de papier ouvertes, rangez le papier dans un sac en plastique et conservez-le dans un endroit frais et à l’abri de la lumière. Cartouche de toner Le toner est cette poudre noire qui permet de reproduire du texte et des lignes.  Remarque Utiliser exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour ce copieur. Ne jetez pas les cartouches vides. Veuillez plutôt les ranger dans leur boîte et remettez-les à votre Service Après-vente. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-21 Cartouche d’agrafes MS-5D pour le module de finition Agrafes pour reliure La cartouche contient 5 000 agrafes. MS-2C pour le kit agrafage à cheval Agrafes pour reliure La cartouche contient 2 000 agrafes. 14 Annexe 14-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.6 Index 1er magasin papier ........................................................................... 1-12 1er plateau de sortie papier .............................................................. 1-15 2ème magasin papier ....................................................................... 1-12 2ème plateau de sortie papier .......................................................... 1-15 3ème magasin papier ..............................................................1-14, 1-16 3ème plateau de sortie papier .......................................................... 1-16 4ème magasin papier ....................................................................... 1-14 A Accessibilité ........................................................................................ 4-5 Afficheur des messages .................................................................... 4-19 Agrafage 2 points .............................................................................. 11-2 Agrafage centre / Marquage pli ......................................................... 7-29 Agrafage en coin ............................................................................... 11-2 Agrandir les fenêtres de l'écran tactile .............................................. 4-11 Alimentation ...................................................................................... 2-11 Alimentation Papier ............................................................................. 1-3 Apport toner ...................................................................................... 7-41 Approvisionnement papier .................................................................. 1-5 Arrêter une opération de copie ........................................................... 5-3 B Bac courrier ....................................................................................... 1-15 Battant inférieur droit ......................................................................... 1-16 Bouton de déverrouillage du magasin .............................................. 1-16 Butée papier .............................................................................1-11, 1-14 C Cadre juridique de la copie ............................................................... 2-16 Caractéristiques papier ....................................................................... 9-1 Caractéristiques techniques .............................................................. 14-1 Cartouche de toner ......................................................................... 14-20 Cartouches d'agrafes ...................................................................... 14-21 Changer la cartouche de toner ......................................................... 12-2 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques ....... 10-12 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-23 Chargement du papier .........................................................................9-7 Magasin grande capacité .............................................................9-10 Magasin papier ..............................................................................9-8 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille ................................................9-11 Code Administrateur ............................................................................8-6 Compteur enfichable .........................................................................7-19 Compteurs .........................................................................................7-33 Connecteur de l'introducteur/retourneur de document ......................1-13 Consommables ................................................................................14-20 Contrôle Département .......................................................................8-10 Contrôleur d'imprimante ......................................................................1-9 Couvercle du plateau de sortie papier ...............................................1-15 Couverture ................................................................................... 6-1, 6-3 Couvre-document ..............................................................................1-12 D Date et heure .......................................................................................8-3 Densité .................................................................................... 7-21, 7-23 Déshumidification scanner ................................................................7-28 Détection originaux mixtes ........................................................ 7-7, 10-6 Déverrouillage ...................................................................................8-23 Diffusion .............................................................................................6-14 Disque dur ...........................................................................................1-9 Document relié ................................................................................11-23 E Effacement bords .................................................................... 6-10, 6-11 Effectuer des copies sur comptes .......................................................5-6 Encart transparent ...............................................................................6-6 Enregistrement de comptes ...............................................................8-16 Entretien du copieur ..........................................................................14-9 Environnement ..................................................................................2-13 Espace requis ....................................................................................2-12 Exposition ........................................................................................11-31 Extension plateau ..............................................................................1-11 Extinction écran .................................................................................7-17 14 Annexe 14-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 É Écran Liste Tâches ........................................................................... 4-20 Écran tactile .............................................................................1-11, 4-17 F Filigrane ............................................................................................ 6-16 Fonctions et réglages disponibles ..................................................... 4-19 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................... 3-1 Format Auto ...................................................................................... 7-10 Format personnel .............................................................................. 9-15 Formats papier ................................................................................ 14-16 Fuseau horaire .................................................................................... 8-5 G Groupe .............................................................................................. 11-2 Groupe croisé ................................................................................... 11-5 Groupe décalé .................................................................................. 11-5 Guide document ................................................................................ 1-14 Guide papier ..................................................................................... 1-11 I Indicateur de niveau papier ............................................................... 1-11 Initialisation automatique .........................................................4-14, 7-18 Intercalaire ...................................................................................6-4, 6-5 Interrompre une tâche de copie .......................................................... 5-4 Interrupteur d’alimentation ................................................................ 1-13 Introducteur/retourneur de document ........................................1-7, 14-3 Introduction du document ................................................................. 10-1 Introducteur/retourneur de document .......................................... 10-4 Inversion Noir/Blanc .......................................................................... 6-19 K Kit agrafage à cheval ....................................................... 1-8, 1-16, 14-8 Kit bac courrier ...........................................................................1-8, 14-7 Kit bac supplémentaire .................................................... 1-8, 1-16, 14-7 Kit couvre-original ............................................................................... 1-7 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-25 Kit de perforation ....................................................................... 1-9, 14-7 L Lecture fragmentée ...........................................................................6-20 Levier de déverrouillage de la porte droite ........................................1-11 Levier de déverrouillage du battant inférieur droit .............................1-14 Lieu d'implantation .............................................................................2-11 Livre ..................................................................................... 11-20, 11-25 M Magasin d’alimentation papier deux directions .......................... 1-7, 14-5 Magasin grande capacité .................................................1-7, 1-16, 14-5 Magasin prioritaire .............................................................................7-11 Marge ..................................................................................................6-8 Messages ..........................................................................................13-1 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension ..................................4-12 Meuble copie .......................................................................................1-7 Mémoire ...............................................................................................1-9 Mode Administrateur ...........................................................................8-1 Mode Contrôle Département ...............................................................5-6 Mode Economie d'énergie ....................................................... 4-15, 7-15 Mode utilisateur .................................................................................7-37 Mode Utilitaires ....................................................................................7-1 Mode Veille .............................................................................. 4-15, 7-16 Module alternateur ................................................................... 1-12, 14-4 Module de finition ................................................................................1-8 Module de finition intégré .......................................................... 1-8, 14-6 Multicopie Copie 2en1 ...................................................................................7-14 Copie 4en1 ......................................................................... 7-14, 7-20 Multi-Image ........................................................................................6-12 N Nettoyage écran ................................................................................7-39 Non-Tri ...............................................................................................11-1 14 Annexe 14-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 O Opérations élémentaires de copie ...................................................... 5-1 Orientation papier ............................................................................... 1-4 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ...................................................10-2, 14-3 P Panneau de contrôle ..................................................................1-12, 4-1 Clavier numérique ......................................................................... 4-2 Écran tactile ................................................................................... 4-1 Interrupteur secondaire ................................................................. 4-1 Molette Contraste .......................................................................... 4-2 Touche Accessibilité ...................................................................... 4-2 Touche Affichage large ................................................................. 4-2 Touche C (Correction) ................................................................... 4-2 Touche Code ................................................................................. 4-1 Touche Copie ................................................................................ 4-1 Touche Impression ........................................................................ 4-2 Touche Initialisation ....................................................................... 4-2 Touche Interruption ....................................................................... 4-1 Touche Mode Contrôle .................................................................. 4-2 Touche Numérisation .................................................................... 4-1 Touche Numérisation + ................................................................. 4-1 Touche Stop .................................................................................. 4-2 Touche Utilitaires ........................................................................... 4-2 Papier .............................................................................................. 14-20 Papier Auto ....................................................................................... 7-10 Papier de format non-standard ......................................................... 9-15 Papier dédié ...................................................................................... 7-12 Paramètre Agrafage .......................................................................... 11-6 Paramètre Perforation ....................................................................... 11-8 Paramètre Zoom ............................................................................. 11-13 Paramètre Zoom X/Y ...................................................................... 11-17 Paramètres Administrateur ................................................................. 8-6 Paramètres Orig.>Copie ................................................................. 11-18 Spécification .............................................................................. 11-21 Paramètres sélectionnés .................................................................. 4-19 Paysage .............................................................................................. 1-4 Perforation ........................................................................................ 11-3 Plateau d'introduction documents ..................................................... 1-14 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille ..................................................... 1-11 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-27 Plateau de sortie papier ........................................................... 1-11, 1-16 Plateau sortie document ....................................................................1-14 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier ................................. 1-15, 1-16 Porte de l'unité recto-verso ................................................................1-12 Porte droite ........................................................................................1-11 Porte frontale .....................................................................................1-11 Portrait .................................................................................................1-4 Positionnement des documents Vitre d’exposition ..........................................................................10-8 Précautions d'utilisation .....................................................................2-13 Prise pour cordon d'alimentation .......................................................1-13 Programme Copie .............................................................................7-34 R Rappel mémoire ........................................................................ 4-24, 7-6 Recto ...............................................................................................11-18 Recto 2en1 ......................................................................................11-18 Recto 4en1 ......................................................................................11-19 Recto/verso .....................................................................................11-18 Recto/verso 2en1 ............................................................................11-18 Recto/verso 4en1 ............................................................................11-19 Remplacement de la cartouche d’agrafes Kit agrafage à cheval ...................................................................12-8 Module de finition .........................................................................12-5 Retrait des agrafes coincées ...........................................................12-27 Réceptacle .........................................................................................7-26 Réglage Papier ..................................................................................9-20 Réglages préalables ............................................................................8-3 Réglette document ............................................................................1-12 S Serrage papier 1er ou 2ème magasin papier .....................................................12-19 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier .................................................12-20 Introducteur/retourneur de document ........................................12-12 Kit agrafage à cheval .................................................................12-26 Kit bac courrier ...........................................................................12-24 Magasin grande capacité ...........................................................12-21 Module de finition .......................................................................12-22 14 Annexe 14-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille .............................................. 12-18 Unité recto-verso ....................................................................... 12-18 Zone de fixation ......................................................................... 12-14 Serrages papier Emplacement ............................................................................ 12-11 Sélection automatique de la source papier ......................................... 9-6 Sélection Langue ................................................................................ 7-8 Sélections par défaut ........................................................................ 4-17 Séparateur travaux ....................................................................1-7, 14-8 Soft switch ......................................................................................... 8-21 Spécifier la date et l'heure ................................................................... 8-3 Stockage du papier ............................................................................. 9-5 T Table d’association des fonctions ................................................... 14-11 Tampon ............................................................................................. 6-17 Tampon image .................................................................................. 7-31 Taux de zoom ................................................................................. 14-17 Témoin d'impression ......................................................................... 1-14 Touche Identifiant ............................................................................. 7-19 Touches écran .................................................................................. 4-19 Transparents de rétroprojection .................................................9-1, 9-14 Tri ...................................................................................................... 11-1 Tri décalé .......................................................................................... 11-4 U Unité recto-verso ......................................................................1-12, 14-4 V Vérifier les réglages ............................................................................ 4-3 Vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation .................................. 12-31 Vitre d’exposition ............................................................................... 1-12 Z Zone additionnelle de message ........................................................ 4-19 Zone d’impression ............................................................................... 9-5 Guide de l'utilisateur magicolor 3730DN A0VD-9571-00B x-1 Remerciements Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté une magicolor 3730DN. Vous avez fait un excellent choix. Votre magicolor 3730DN est spécialement conçue pour atteindre des performances optimales dans les environnements Windows, Macintosh et Linux. Marques KONICA MINOLTA et le logo KONICA MINOLTA sont des marques ou marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. magicolor et PageScope sont des marques ou marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA PRINTING SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC. Toutes les autres marques ou marques déposées mentionnées sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japon. Tous droits réservés. Ce document ne peut être copié, en totalité ou en partie, ni transposé sur quel que support ou traduit dans quelle que langue que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite expresse de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Avis KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce guide ainsi que le matériel qu'il décrit sans avis préalable. Ce document a été rédigé avec toute la rigueur requise pour éviter inexactitudes et lacunes. Toutefois, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ne couvre en aucune manière toute forme de garantie, expresse ou implicite, de commercialisation et d'adaptation à des fins particulières que pourrait induire ce guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. décline toute responsabilité concernant des erreurs pouvant être contenues dans ce guide ou des dommages fortuits, particuliers ou indirects pouvant résulter de la fourniture de ce guide ou de son emploi pour utiliser le matériel ou être liés au fonctionnement du matériel ainsi utilisé. x-2 ACCORD DE LICENCE LOGICIEL Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : le logiciel faisant partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données numériques de contour lisibles par la machine, codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser avec le Logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel hôte"), et des instructions écrites connexes ("Documentation"). Le terme "Logiciel" s'emploie pour désigner le Logiciel d'impression, les Programmes de polices et/ou le Logiciel hôte, ainsi que toutes mises à jour, versions modifiées, compléments et copies du Logiciel. Le Logiciel vous est fourni sous licence selon les termes et conditions du présent Accord. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence d'exploitation non exclusive du Logiciel et de sa Documentation, à condition que vous acceptiez ce qui suit : 1.Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices associés pour imprimer sur le(s) périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, exclusivement à vos propres fins d'exploitation interne. 2.Outre la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés au paragraphe 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser des Programmes de polices Roman pour reproduire des tailles, styles et versions de lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Polices") à l'écran, pour répondre à vos propres besoins professionnels. 3.Vous pouvez faire une copie unique de sauvegarde du Logiciel hôte, à condition que cette copie ne soit pas installée ou utilisée sur un quelconque ordinateur. Nonobstant les restrictions ci-dessus, vous pouvez installer le Logiciel hôte sur un nombre illimité d'ordinateurs exclusivement destinés à être utilisés avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4.Vous pouvez attribuer tous les droits stipulés dans cet Accord à un dépositaire des droits et intérêts de tous les bénéficiaires de cette licence Logiciel et Documentation ("Dépositaire"), à condition de transférer au Dépositaire toutes les copies du Logiciel et sa Documentation associée. Le Dépositaire accepte d'être lié par tous les termes et conditions de cet Accord. 5.Vous acceptez de ne pas modifier, adapter ou traduire le Logiciel et sa Documentation. 6.Vous acceptez de ne pas tenter d'altérer, dissocier, décoder, contrefaire ou décompiler le Logiciel. 7.KMBT et ses concédants ayants droit conservera le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de sa Documentation ainsi que de toutes leurs éventuelles reproductions. 8.L'utilisation de noms de marques se fera conformément à la pratique courante, notamment avec mention du nom de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Les noms de marques ne peuvent être utilisés qu'à des fins d'identification de l'imprimé produit par le Logiciel. Cette utilisation ne vous confère aucun droit de propriété sur la marque citée dans ce contexte. 9.Vous ne pouvez pas louer, céder en bail, sous-licencier, prêter ou transférer des versions ou copies du Logiciel. Le Logiciel ne sera pas utilisé sur support inhabituel, sauf dans le cadre d'un transfert permanent de l'ensemble Logiciel et Documentation mentionné plus haut. 10.VOUS NE POURREZ EN AUCUN CAS TENIR KMBT OU AGRÉÉ POUR RESPONSABLE DE DOMMAGES CONSÉQUENTS, FORTUITS, INDIRECTS, PUNITIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, Y COMPRIS DE PERTES PÉCUNIAIRES, MÊME SI KMBT A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES, OU DE TOUTE PLAINTE ÉMANANT D'UNE TIERCE PARTIE. KMBT OU AGRÉÉ REJETTE TOUTES FORMES DE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS LIMITATION, DES GARANTIES DE x-3 COMMERCIALISATION ET D'ADAPTATION À DES FINS PARTICULIÈRES, ET DES DROITS DE TITRE ET D'EXCLUSIVITÉ DE TIERCES PARTIES. L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DE DOMMAGES FORTUITS, CONSÉQUENTS OU SPÉCIAUX N'EST PAS AUTORISÉE DANS CERTAINS ÉTATS OU SOUS CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS. PAR CONSÉQUENT, LES LIMITATIONS CI-DESSUS PEUVENT NE PAS VOUS CONCERNER. 11.Avis aux utilisateurs finaux dans l'Administration U.S. : Le Logiciel est un "objet commercial" tel que défini à l'article 48 C.F.R.2.101, consistant en un "logiciel informatique commercial" et en une "documentation de logiciel informatique commercial" comme mentionnés à l'article 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Conformément aux articles 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, le Logiciel est acquis par tout utilisateur final dans l'Administration U.S. avec les seuls droits stipulés dans le présent Accord. 12.Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous une forme quelconque contrevenant à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur pour le contrôle d'exportation dans tout pays. Pour les pays membres de l'UE seulement Ce symbole signifie : Ne jeter pas ce produit avec vos déchets ménagers ! Il convient de se conformer aux instructions de mise au rebut édictées par les autorités locales. En cas de remplacement du produit usagé, contacter notre distributeur qui en assurera la mise au rebut appropriée. Le recyclage de ce produit permettra de préserver les ressources naturelles et de prévenir les effets nuisibles à l'environnement et à la santé qui résulteraient d'une gestion inappropriée de ce déchet. Ce produit est conforme à la directive RoHS (2002/95/CE). Table des matières x-4 Table des matières Remerciements...........................................................................................x-1 Marques......................................................................................................x-1 Copyright Notice.........................................................................................x-1 Avis.............................................................................................................x-1 ACCORD DE LICENCE LOGICIEL..............................................................x-2 Pour les pays membres de l'UE seulement................................................x-3 1Introduction ....................................................................................................1-1 Présentation de l'imprimante .......................................................................1-2 Espace requis.............................................................................................1-2 Composants de l'imprimante......................................................................1-3 Vue avant..............................................................................................1-3 Vue arrière.............................................................................................1-4 Impression..................................................................................................1-4 2A propos du logiciel .......................................................................................2-1 CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante .......................................................2-2 Pilotes d'imprimante...................................................................................2-2 Utilitaires.....................................................................................................2-2 Documentation.....................................................................................2-3 Contents x-5 Configuration Système requise ....................................................................2-4 Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote (Windows) ........................2-5 Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000.......................2-5 Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) .....................................2-6 Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000.......................2-6 Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) ..................2-7 Windows 7............................................................................................2-7 Windows Vista/Serveur 2008................................................................2-7 Windows XP/Serveur 2003...................................................................2-7 Windows 2000......................................................................................2-7 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante ......................................................................2-8 Accessibles sur tous les onglets.................................................................2-8 OK.........................................................................................................2-8 Annuler..................................................................................................2-8 Appliquer...............................................................................................2-8 Aide.......................................................................................................2-8 Easy Set................................................................................................2-8 Aperçu de l'imprimante.........................................................................2-9 Aperçu du format..................................................................................2-9 Aperçu du filigrane................................................................................2-9 Aperçu de la qualité..............................................................................2-9 Par défaut.............................................................................................2-9 Onglet Paramètres de base......................................................................2-10 Onglet Mise en page.................................................................................2-10 Onglet Calque...........................................................................................2-10 Onglet Filigrane.........................................................................................2-11 Onglet Qualité...........................................................................................2-11 Onglet Version..........................................................................................2-11 Limitations des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante installé avec Point and Print..................................................................................2-12 3Panneau de commande et menu de configuration de l'imprimante .........3-1 Présentation du panneau de commande ....................................................3-2 Voyants et touches du panneau de commande.........................................3-3 Écran des messages...................................................................................3-4 Présentation du menu de configuration ......................................................3-5 Menu Principal............................................................................................3-5 PAGES SPÉCIALES....................................................................................3-6 LANGUE ..........................................................................................................3-7 MOTEUR .........................................................................................................3-9 RÉSEAU ........................................................................................................3-12 UTILIS. CONSOM. ........................................................................................3-16 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................3-17 USER SERVICE/SERVICE PERSON.........................................................3-17 x-6 Table des matières 4 Utilisation des supports ................................................................................4-1 Spécifications des supports .........................................................................4-2 Types de support ...........................................................................................4-4 Papier standard (Papier recyclé).................................................................4-4 Papier épais................................................................................................4-5 Enveloppes.................................................................................................4-6 Etiquettes....................................................................................................4-7 Papier à en-tête..........................................................................................4-8 Cartes..........................................................................................................4-9 Brillant.......................................................................................................4-10 Zone imprimable.......................................................................................4-11 Enveloppes...............................................................................................4-12 Marges de page........................................................................................4-12 Chargement des supports ..........................................................................4-13 Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle)..................................................................4-13 Charger du Papier ordinaire................................................................4-14 Autres supports..................................................................................4-15 Enveloppes.........................................................................................4-15 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/ de Supports Épais et Brillant..............................................................4-17 Bac 2.........................................................................................................4-18 Charger du Papier ordinaire................................................................4-18 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/ de Supports Épais et Brillant..............................................................4-21 Impression recto-verso ...............................................................................4-24 Bac de sortie ................................................................................................4-26 Stockage des supports ...............................................................................4-27 5Remplacement des consommables ............................................................5-1 Remplacement des consommables ............................................................5-2 A propos des cartouches de toner.............................................................5-2 Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner..................................................5-7 Remplacement du kit de toner usagé WB-P03........................................5-14 Remplacement du rouleau de transfert TF-P04.......................................5-17 Remplacement de l'unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05.......................5-20 Remplacement de l'unité de fixation FU-P02...........................................5-27 6Entretien de l'imprimante ..............................................................................6-1 Entretien de l'imprimante ..............................................................................6-2 Nettoyage de l'imprimante ...........................................................................6-4 Extérieur......................................................................................................6-4 Rouleaux d'entraînement papier.................................................................6-5 Nettoyage des rouleaux d'entraînement papier (Bac 2).......................6-5 Nettoyage des lentilles laser de l'imprimante.............................................6-6 Contents x-7 7 Résolution de problèmes ..............................................................................7-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................7-2 Impression d'une page de configuration .....................................................7-2 Prévention des bourrages papier .................................................................7-3 Description du chemin papier ......................................................................7-4 Suppression des bourrages papier ..............................................................7-5 Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives.....................................7-6 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 2...........................................7-7 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité Recto-verso........................7-11 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité de fixation...........................7-12 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) et le Rouleau de transfert..............................7-18 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage ......................................................7-21 Résolution d'autres problèmes ..................................................................7-25 Résolution de problèmes de qualité ..........................................................7-30 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance ..........................................7-36 Messages d'état standard........................................................................7-36 Messages d'erreur....................................................................................7-37 Messages de maintenance.......................................................................7-43 AAnnexe ...........................................................................................................A-1 Spécifications techniques ............................................................................A-2 Imprimante..................................................................................................A-2 Durée de vie des consommables...............................................................A-5 Protection de l'environnement ....................................................................A-7 Qu'est-ce qu'un produit ENERGY STAR ?...........................................A-7 x-8 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1-2 Présentation de l'imprimante Présentation de l'imprimante Espace requis Pour permettre une utilisation aisée de l'imprimante et faciliter les opérations de remplacement des consommables et de maintenance, il est recommandé de respecter les indications d'espace requis détaillées ci-dessous. Vue avant845 mm (33,3")200 mm (7,9")419 mm (16,5")226 mm (8,90")483 mm (19,0")346 mm (13,6")137 mm (5,4") Vue latérale1029 mm (40,5")200 mm (7,9")520 mm (20,5")309 mm (12,2") Présentation de l'imprimante 1-3 Composants de l'imprimante Les illustrations ci-dessous vous permettent de localiser les différents composants de l'imprimante auxquels il est fait référence dans ce guide. Vue avant67891011121345123 1—Panneau de contrôle 2—Bac de sortie 3—Butée papier 4—Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) 5—Bac 2 6—Capot d'éjection 7—Unité de fixation FU-P02 8—Capot latéral droit 9—Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 10—Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 11—Capot avant 12—Flacon de toner usagé WB-P03 13—Cartouche(s) de toner 1312910 1-4 Présentation de l'imprimante Vue arrière12345 1—Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 2—Prise du cordon secteur 3—Port USB 4—Port Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX 5—Grilles d'aération Impression 􀀕􀀢L'imprimante risque d'être endommagée si l'on tente d'imprimer alors que les cartouches de toner fournies ne sont installées; assurez-vous de bien installer les cartouches de toner fournies avant d'utiliser l'imprimante. 2 A propos du logiciel 2-2 CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante Pilotes d'imprimante Système d'exploitation Utilisation/Avantages Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 Ces pilotes permettent d'accéder à toutes les fonctions de l'imprimante, y compris les fonctions de finition et de mise en page avancée. Voir aussi "Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows)" à la page 2-7. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003 pour 64bit Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4/10.5/10.6) 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des pilotes d'imprimante Windows, consultez le Guide d'installation. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur les pilotes Macintosh, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Documentation. Utilitaires Utilitaires Utilisation/Avantages PageScope Net Care Device Manager Permet d'accéder à des fonctions de gestion de l'imprimante telles que l'écran d'état et les paramètres réseau. Pour plus de détails, consultez le Guide de l'utilisateur PageScope Net Care Device Manager sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante 2-3 Documentation Documentation Utilisation/Avantages Guide d'installation Ce guide fournit des détails sur les opérations initiales à exécuter pour utiliser cette imprimante, comme la configuration de l'imprimante et l'installation des pilotes. Guide de l'utilisateur (ce manuel) Ce guide fournit des détails sur les opérations quotidiennes générales, comme l'utilisation des pilotes et du panneau de commande et le remplacement des consommables. Guide de référence Ce guide fournit des détails sur l'installation le pilote Macintosh, sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, et sur l'utilitaire de gestion de l'imprimante. Guide de service et d'assistance La fiche Besoin d'aide ? fournit des informations sur l'assistance et l'entretien du produit. 2-4 Configuration Système requise Configuration Système requise 􀂄Un PC –Pentium 2 : 400 MHz (Pentium 3 : 500 MHz ou supérieur recommandé) –PowerPC G3 ou supérieur (G4 ou supérieur est recommandé) –Macintosh équipé d'un processeur Intel 􀂄Système d'exploitation –Microsoft Windows 7 Édition Familiale Premium/Professionnel/Ultimate, Windows 7 Édition Familiale Premium/Professionnel/Ultimate x64, Windows Serveur 2008 Standard/Entreprise, Windows Serveur 2008 Standard/Entreprise x64, Windows Vista Édition Familiale Basique/Édition Familiale Premium/Ultimate/Business/Entreprise, Windows Vista Édition Familiale Basique /Édition Familiale Premium /Ultimate/Business /Entreprise x64, Windows XP Édition Familiale/Professionnel (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows XP Édition Professionnel x64, Windows Serveur 2003, Windows Serveur 2003 x64, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur) –Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4/10.5/10.6; Il est recommandé d'installer le dernier correctif logiciel) 􀂄Espace requis sur le disque dur –Environ 20 Mo d'espace mémoire disponible pour le pilote d'imprimante –Environ 128 Mo d'espace mémoire disponible pour le traitement d'images 􀂄Capacité RAM recommandée pour le système d'exploitation 􀂄Lecteur de CD-ROM/DVD 􀂄Interface E/S –Port Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX –Port USB 2.0 compatible haute vitesse 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur le pilote d'imprimante Macintosh, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote 2-5 Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote (Windows) Avant d'utiliser l'imprimante, il est conseillé de vérifier/modifier les paramètres par défaut du pilote. En outre, si des options matérielles sont installées, il convient de les "déclarer" dans le pilote. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 1Sélectionnez les propriétés de l'imprimante comme suit: –(Windows 7) Dans le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Périphériques et imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier Périphériques et imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. –(Windows Vista/Serveur 2008) Depuis le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Matériel et audio et enfin sur Imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier des Imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. –(Windows XP/Serveur 2003) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. –(Windows 2000) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. 2Sélectionnez l'onglet De base. Sélectionnez les réglages par défaut de votre imprimante, par exemple le format de papier implicitement utilisé. 3Cliquez sur Appliquer. 4Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression. 2-6 Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Cette section décrit comment désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante si nécessaire. 􀀕􀀢Des droits d'administration sont nécessaires pour désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Si la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur apparaît lors de la désinstallation sous Windows Vista, cliquez sur la touche Permis ou sur la touche Continuer. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 1Fermez toutes les applications. 2Sélectionnez le programme de désinstallation comme suit : –(Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003) Depuis le menu Démarrer, choisissez Tous les programmes, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 3730, et enfin Désinstaller. –(Windows 2000) Depuis le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 3730, et ensuite Désinstaller. 3Dans la boîte de dialogue Désinstaller qui s'affiche, sélectionnez le nom du pilote à désinstaller, et cliquez sur le bouton Désinstaller. 4Le pilote d'imprimante sera désinstallé de votre ordinateur. Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-7 Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Windows 7 1Dans le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Périphériques et imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier Périphériques et imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. Windows Vista/Serveur 2008 1Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration, puis Matériel et audio et cliquez sur Imprimantes pour ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. Windows XP/Serveur 2003 1Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. Windows 2000 1Dans le menu Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres et cliquez ensuite sur Imprimantes pour afficher le répertoire Imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. 2-8 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Accessibles sur tous les onglets Les boutons décrits ci-dessous se trouvent sur tous les onglets. OK Cliquez sur Valider pour quitter la boîte de dialogue Propriétés en sauvegardant toutes les modifications effectuées. Annuler Cliquez sur Annuler pour quitter la boîte de dialogue Propriétés sans sauvegarder les modifications effectuées. Appliquer Cliquez sur Appliquer pour sauvegarder les modifications effectuées sans fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés. Aide Cliquez sur Aide pour ouvrir le fichier d'aide en ligne. Easy Set Permet de sauvegarder les paramètres courants. Pour sauvegarder les paramètres actuels, spécifiez les paramètres souhaités et cliquez ensuite sur Enregistrer. Spécifiez les paramètres décrits ci-dessous et cliquez ensuite sur OK. 􀂄Nom : saisissez le nom de la configuration de paramètres à enregistrer. 􀂄Commentaire : ajoutez un bref commentaire sur les paramètres à enregistrer. Ensuite, la configuration enregistrée peut être sélectionnée dans la liste déroulante. Pour modifier le paramètre enregistré, cliquez sur Éditer. Pour restaurer les paramètres sur tous les onglets à leurs valeurs par défaut, sélectionnez Par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 2-9 Aperçu de l'imprimante Cliquez sur ce bouton radio pour afficher une image de l'imprimante dans la zone graphique. Cette touche change en touche Aperçu du format (lorsqu'un onglet autre que Filigrane ou Qualité est sélectionné), en touche Aperçu du filigrane (lorsque l'onglet Filigrane est sélectionné) ou en touche Aperçu de la qualité (lorsque l'onglet Qualité est sélectionné). 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Version. Aperçu du format Cochez ce bouton radio pour afficher un aperçu de la mise en page. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Filigrane, l'onglet Qualité et l'onglet Version. Aperçu du filigrane Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher un aperçu du filigrane. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît que lorsque l'onglet Filigrane est sélectionné. Aperçu de la qualité Cliquez sur le bouton pour afficher un aperçu des paramètres sélectionnés sur l'onglet Qualité. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît que lorsque l'onglet Qualité est sélectionné. Par défaut Cliquez sur le bouton pour restaurer les paramètres à leurs valeurs par défaut. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Version. 2-10 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 􀀕􀀢Si cette touche est sollicitée, les valeurs par défaut des paramètres affichés dans la boîte de dialogue sont rétablies. Les paramètres des autres onglets ne sont pas modifiés. Onglet Paramètres de base Cet onglet propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Spécifier l'orientation du support d'impression 􀂄Spécifier le format du document original 􀂄Sélectionner le format papier en sortie 􀂄Enregistrer/modifier les formats papier personnalisé 􀂄Appliquer un facteur de zoom (agrandissement/réduction) aux documents 􀂄Spécifier le nombre de copies 􀂄Activer/désactiver l'assemblage des travaux 􀂄Spécifier la source d'alimentation papier 􀂄Spécifier le type de support d'impression 􀂄Sélectionner le papier utilisé pour la 1ère page Onglet Mise en page Cet onglet propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une même page (Miniatures) 􀂄Imprimer une copie agrandie et en imprimer plusieurs pages. 􀂄Spécifier l'impression Livret 􀂄Appliquer une rotation à 180 degrés de l'image imprimée 􀂄Spécifier l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) 􀂄Spécifier les paramètres de décalage d'image Onglet Calque 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ce que le format et l'orientation du calque à utiliser correspondent au format et à l'orientation de votre travail d'impression. De plus, si vous avez défini des paramètres "Miniatures" ou "Livret" dans le pilote, le calque ne pourra être ajusté en fonction de ces paramètres. L'onglet Calque propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Sélectionner la forme de calque à utiliser Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 2-11 􀂄Ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des fichiers calque 􀂄Sélectionner si la forme doit être imprimée sur toutes sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page Onglet Filigrane L'onglet Filigrane propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Sélectionner le filigrane à utiliser 􀂄Ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des filigranes 􀂄Ajuster la position du filigrane 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane sur l'arrière-plan 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane sur la première page seulement d'un document 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane de manière répétitive sur toutes les pages d'un document Onglet Qualité L'onglet Qualité propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Alterner l'impression couleur et l'impression noir et blanc 􀂄Spécifier la correspondance couleur pour imprimer les documents 􀂄Spécifier la résolution pour le tirage imprimé 􀂄Sélectionner si le mode Trait est utilisé ou non 􀂄Activer ou désactiver le mode Impression économique 􀂄Régler le contraste (Contraste) 􀂄Régler l'obscurité d'une image (Luminosité) 􀂄Régler la saturation de l'image imprimée (Saturation) 􀂄"Saturation" n'est disponible que si "Correspondance couleurs" a été activé. 􀂄Régler la netteté de l'image imprimée (Netteté) 􀂄"Netteté" n'est disponible que si "Correspondance couleurs" a été désactivé. Onglet Version 􀂄L'onglet Version permet de consulter les informations relatives au pilote d'imprimante. 2-12 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Limitations des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante installé avec Point and Print Si l'opération Point and Print est exécutée avec les combinaisons serveur/client suivantes, certaines fonctions du pilote d'imprimante seront limitées. 􀂄Combinaisons serveur/client Serveur : Windows Serveur 2003/XP/2000/Serveur 2008/Vista/7 Client : Windows Serveur 2003/XP/2000/Serveur 2008/Vista/7 􀂄Cependant si le serveur fonctionne sous Windows 2000, un client fonctionnant sous une Édition x64 ou Windows Serveur 2008 n'est pas compatible. 􀂄Les paramètres Serveur ne sont pas retournés dans les fonctions suivantes. Aperçu de l'imprimante, Calque 3 Panneau de commande et menu de configuration de l'imprimante 3-2 Présentation du panneau de commande Présentation du panneau de commande Au sommet, l'imprimante est équipée d'un panneau de commande qui vous permet d'intervenir sur son fonctionnement. Ce panneau comporte aussi un écran qui affiche son état d'activité ainsi que des messages d'avertissement.87345621Écran des messages Présentation du panneau de commande 3-3 Voyants et touches du panneau de commande N° Présentation Description 1 Ready Allumé, l'impression est possible. 2 Error Allumé ou clignotant, une erreur s'est produite une erreur ou il s'agit d'un avertissement. 3 􀂄Annule un menu ou un choix affiché 􀂄Permet d'annuler un travail en cours de traitement ou d'impression: 1.Appuyez sur la touche Cancel. 2.Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select. Le travail d'impression est annulé. 4 􀂄Pour entrer dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence 􀂄Pour appliquer le paramètre affiché 5 􀂄Pour monter dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Dans une option de menu pouvant être sélectionnée et modifiée caractère par caractère, cette touche permet de remonter dans la liste des caractères disponibles 6 􀂄Pour déplacer la curseur vers la droite 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence 7 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Dans une option de menu pouvant être sélectionnée et modifiée caractère par caractère, cette touche permet de remonter dans la liste des caractères disponibles 8 􀂄Pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche 􀂄Pour remonter dans l'arborescence 3-4 Présentation du panneau de commande Écran des messages Cet écran affiche l'état courant de l'imprimante, la quantité de toner restante, ainsi que tous les messages d'erreur pouvant survenirREADY12YKCM N° Détails 1 Affichage de l'état courant de l'imprimante. 2 􀂄Affichage des messages d'erreur. 􀂄Lors d'une mise à jour du firmware, le type de firmware mis à jour ainsi que la progression de la mise à jour s'affichent. . Présentation du menu de configuration 3-5 Présentation du menu de configuration Le menu de configuration, accessible sur le panneau de commande de l'imprimante, se présente comme suit. Menu PrincipalMENU LANGUEMENU MOTEURMENU INTERFACEPRÊTMENU RÉSEAUMENU PAGES SPÉCIALESMENU UTILIS. CONSOM. 3-6 Présentation du menu de configuration PAGES SPÉCIALES Ce menu permet d'imprimer les informations de l'imprimante comme la page de configuration.IMPRESSION PAGE CONFIGIMPRESSION PLAN MENUMENU PAGES SPÉCIALES 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. PAGE CONFIG Réglages IMPRESSION/ANNULER Imprime la page de configuration. PLAN MENU Réglages IMPRESSION/ANNULER Imprime l'arborescence des menus. LANGUE 3-7 LANGUE Ce menu permet de changer la langue d'affichage.LANGUE RÉGLÉE FRENCHLANGUE RÉGLÉE GERMANLANGUE RÉGLÉE SPANISHMENU LANGUELANGUE RÉGLÉE ITALIANLANGUE RÉGLÉE ENGLISHLANGUE RÉGLÉE PORTUGUESELANGUE RÉGLÉE JAPANESELANGUE RÉGLÉE SLOVAKLANGUE RÉGLÉE POLISHLANGUE RÉGLÉE HUNGARIANLANGUE RÉGLÉE CZECHLANGUE RÉGLÉE RUSSIAN 3-8 LANGUE 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. LANGUE RÉGLÉE Réglages ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/SPANISH/CZECH/JAPANESE/SLOVAK/HUNGARIAN/RUSSIAN/POLISH Sélectionnez la langue des écrans qui apparaissent dans la fenêtre des messages. MOTEUR 3-9 MOTEUR Ce menu permet de spécifier les réglages concernant les fonctions du moteur de l'imprimante (comme ÉCON. ÉNERGIE et MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM).MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOMRESTAURER PAR DÉF. UTILIS.REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS.REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS.REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATIONCPTE RECT. N/BECON. ÉNERGIECONTR AUTOMOTEUR SERVICEMENU MOTEURTOTAL RECTOSCPTE RECT. COUL.VER. BOOTVER. FPGACOULEUR CALIBRAGEVER. MOTEURVER. CONTRÔLEUR 3-10 MOTEUR 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. ECON. ÉNERGIE Réglages 120 minutes/60 minutes/30 minutes/15 minutes Pour spécifier le délai au bout duquel l'imprimante doit passer en mode Écon. énergie. 􀀕􀀢La machine ne passe pas en mode Écon. énergie si du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1. CONTR AUTO Réglages ON/OFF Pour définir si l'impression doit ou non se poursuivre lorsque que le format ou le type de papier chargé dans le bac sélectionné est différent de celui défini pour le travail d'impression. Si CONTR AUTO est réglé sur ON, l'impression continue automatiquement dans chacun des cas suivants. L'impression aura lieu même su le format du support est différent. Format/Type papier différent: DÉCALAGE FORMAT (page 7-38)/DÉCALAGE TYPE (page 7-38)/METTRE SUP.BAC X (page 7-42) MOTEUR SERVICE TOTAL RECTOS Affiche le compteur de pages. CPTE RECT. COUL. Affiche le compteur total pages pour l'impression couleur. CPTE RECT. N/B Affiche le compteur total pages pour l'impression noir et blanc. VER. BOOT Affiche la version boot. VER. FPGA Affiche la version FPGA. VER. CONTRÔLEUR Affiche la version du contrôleur. VER. MOTEUR Affiche la version du moteur. COULEUR CALIBRAGE Réglages OUI/NON Si OUI est sélectionné, le calibrage couleur est effectué. MOTEUR 3-11 MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur de la courroie de transfert. REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur du rouleau de transfert. REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur de l'unité de fixation. RESTAURER PAR DÉF. UTILIS. Réglages OUI/NON Permet de restaurer les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante. Quand cette option est sélectionnée, l'imprimante redémarre automatiquement. 3-12 RÉSEAU RÉSEAU Ce menu permet de définir les paramètres d'interface. 􀀕􀀢Redémarrez l'imprimante après avoir changé les réglages dans les menus DHCP,BOOTP et ARP/PING.ADR. IP ACTIVÉE AUTOM.ADR. IP ACTIVÉE SPÉCIFIC.ADRESSE IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxBOOTP:xxPORTAIL xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxADRESSE IPxxx.xxx.xxx.xxxMENU RÉSEAUIPP:xxSNMP:xxADRESSE MACDHCP:xxMASQUE S-RÉSEAU xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxARP/PING:xxHTTP:xxBONJOUR:xxVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. AUTO/AUTO/ONVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 100M/HALF/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 100M/FULL/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 10M/FULL/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 10M/HALF/OFFMODES FORCÉS xx/xx/xx RÉSEAU 3-13 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. ADR. IP ACTIVÉE Réglages AUTOM./SPÉCIFIC. Sélectionnez si l'adresse doit être automatiquement attribuée ou spécifiée manuellement (SPÉCIFIC.). Si SPÉCIFIC. est sélectionné, les paramètres de ADRESSE IP, MASQUE S-RÉSEAU et PORTAIL peuvent être spécifiés. Si l'adresse IP est spécifiée manuellement, DHCP, BOOTP et ARP/PING sont automatiquement réglés sur OFF. ADRESSE IP Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si ADR. IP ACTIVÉE est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. MASQUE S-RÉSEAU Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si RÉGL ADRESSE IP est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. PORTAIL Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si ADR. IP ACTIVÉE est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. 3-14 RÉSEAU DHCP: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. BOOTP: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. ARP/PING: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. ADRESSE MAC Affiche l'adresse MAC. HTTP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole HTTP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole HTTP est désactivé. BONJOUR: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole Bonjour est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole Bonjour est désactivé. IPP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole IPP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole IPP est désactivé. 􀀕􀀢Si HTTP est réglé sur OFF, l'IPP ne peut pas être sélectionné. RÉSEAU 3-15 SNMP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole SNMP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole SNMP est désactivé. MODES FORCÉS VITESSE/DUP/NÉG. Réglages AUTO/AUTO/ON, 100M/FULL/OFF, 100M/HALF/OFF, 10M/FULL/OFF, 10M/HALF/OFF Spécifiez la vitesse de transmission du réseau et la méthode de transmission en communication bidirectionnelle. 3-16 UTILIS. CONSOM. UTILIS. CONSOM. Ce menu permet d'afficher le niveau restant des consommables (comme TONER et ROUL. TRANSFERT).TONER C xx% RESTANTTONER M xx% RESTANTCOUR. TRANSFERT xxx% RESTANTMENU UTILIS. CONSOM.TONER Y xx% RESTANTTONER K xx% RESTANTROUL. TRANSFERT xxx% RESTANTUNITE FIXATION xxx% RESTANT 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. TONER K Affiche la quantité de toner noir restante. TONER C Affiche la quantité de toner cyan restante. TONER M Affiche la quantité de toner magenta restante. TONER Y Affiche la quantité de toner jaune restante. ROUL. TRANSFERT Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie du rouleau de transfert. COUR. TRANSFERT Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie de la courroie de transfert. UNITE FIXATION Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie de l'unité de fixation. INTERFACE 3-17 INTERFACE Ce menu permet de définir les paramètres de déconnexion de l'interface.DÉLAI RÉSEAUMENU INTERFACEDÉLAI USB 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. DÉLAI USB Réglages 300/60/15 Spécifiez le délai avant interruption de la communication avec via l'interface USB. DÉLAI RÉSEAU Réglages 300/60/15 Spécifiez le délai avant interruption de la communication via l'interface réseau. USER SERVICE/SERVICE PERSON Ce menu permet au technicien de maintenance de régler l'imprimante et d'effectuer des opérations d'entretien. L'opérateur ne peut pas à y accéder. 3-18 INTERFACE 4 Utilisation des supports 4-2 Spécifications des supports Spécifications des supports Quels types et formats de support peut-on utiliser ? Support Format Bac* Recto-verso (2 faces) Pouces Millimètres Letter 8,5 x 11,0 215,9 x 279,4 1/2 Oui Letter Plus 8,5 x 12,7 215,9 x 322,3 1 Oui Legal 8,5 x 14,0 215,9 x 355,6 1 Oui Statement 5,5 x 8,5 139,7 x 215,9 1/2 Non Executive 7,25 x 10,5 184,2 x 266,7 1/2 Oui A4 8,2 x 11,7 210,0 x 297,0 1/2 Oui A5 5,9 x 8,3 148,0 x 210,0 1/2 Non A6 4,1 x 5,8 105,0 x 148,0 1/2 Non B5 (JIS) 7,2 x 10,1 182,0 x 257,0 1/2 Oui B6 5,0 x 7,2 128,0 x 182,0 1/2 Non Folio 8,25 x 13,0 210,0 x 330,0 1 Oui SP Folio 8,5 x 12,69 215,9 x 322,3 1 Oui Foolscap 8,0 x 13,0 203,2 x 330,2 1 Oui Quarto R-U 8,0 x 10,0 203,2 x 254,0 1/2 Non Letter officiel 8,0 x 10,5 203,2 x 266,7 1/2 Oui Legal officiel 8,5 x 13,0 215,9 x 330,2 1 Oui Photo 4" x 6"/10 x 15 4,0 x 6,0 101,6 x 152,4 1/2 Non 16 K 7,7 x 10,6 195,0 x 270,0 1/2 Oui Kai 16 7,3 x 10,2 185,0 x 260,0 1/2 Oui Kai 32 5,1 x 7,3 130,0 x 185,0 1/2 Non Oficio Mexico 8,5 x 13,5 216,0 x 343,0 1 Oui Carte Japon 3,9 x 5,8 100,0 x 148,0 1 Non Carte Japon D 5,8 x 7,9 148,0 x 200,0 1 Non B5 (ISO) 6,9 x 9,8 176,0 x 250,0 1 Non Enveloppe #10 4,125 x 9,5 104,8 x 241,3 1 Non Enveloppe DL 8,7 x 4,3 220,0 x 110,0 1 Non Enveloppe C6 6,4 x 4,5 162,0 x 114,0 1 Non Enveloppe Monarch 7,5 x 3,875 190,5 x 98,4 1 Non Enveloppe Chou #3 4,7 x 9,2 120,0 x 235,0 1 Non Format personnalisé 3,6 à 8,5 x 5,8 à 14,0 92,0 à -216,0 x 148,0 à -356,0 1** Oui*** Format personnalisé 3,6 à 8,5 x 5,8 à 11,7 92,0 à 216,0 x 148,0 à 297,0 2 Oui*** Notes: *Bac 1= Alimentation manuelle **Bien que la largeur maximale prise en charge soit de 216,0 mm (8,5"), le format Enveloppe DL (largeur : 220 mm (8,7")) peut être chargé. ***Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 182,0 x 257,0 mm (7,2" x 10,1"). Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 216,0 x 356,0 mm (8,5" x 14,0"). ****Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 182,0 x 257,0 mm (7,2" x 10,1"). Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 216,0 x 297,0 mm (8,5" x 11,69"). Spécifications des supports 4-3 􀀕􀀢Pour des formats personnalisés, utilisez le pilote de l'imprimante pour définir les paramètres dans les plages indiquées en page précédente. 􀀕􀀢Si vous utilisez du papier de format personnalisé avec le Bac 2, la conception du bac permet de charger du papier d'une largeur supérieure à 210 mm (8,25") en laissant flotter la queue de feuille lorsque la largeur est supérieure à 279 mm (11,0") (longueur maximum : 297 mm (11,7")). Si vous utilisez ces formats de papier personnalisé, servez-vous de l'Alimentation manuelle; sinon, ne chargez pas plus de 100 feuilles dans le Bac 2. 4-4 Types de support Types de support Rangez les supports sur une surface plane et régulière, en les laissant dans leur emballage d'origine tant que vous n'êtes pas prêt à les utiliser. Pour obtenir la liste des supports homologués, visitez printer.konicaminolta.com. 􀀕􀀢Avant d'imprimer un grand nombre d'exemplaires sur du papier spécial (autre que le papier standard), imprimer une épreuve pour contrôler la qualité de l'impression. Papier standard (Papier recyclé) Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 250 feuilles, suivant le grammage utilisé. Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Papier standard (Papier recyclé) Poids 60–90 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Voir les formats acceptés en page 4-2. Conseils d'utilisation : Utilisez des supports adaptés pour imprimantes laser sur papier ordinaire, tels que du papier standard ou recyclé d'usage courant. N'utilisez pas les types de supports suivants : 􀂄Supports traités en surface (tels que papier carbone et papier couleur ayant subi un traitement) 􀂄Supports thermocollants non autorisés (comme le papier thermocollant et le papier-transfert thermocollant) 􀂄Supports pour transfert à froid 􀂄Supports pour presse d'imprimerie 􀂄Supports spécifiques pour imprimantes jet d'encre (papier ultra-fin, papier brillant, film brillant, cartes postales, etc.) 􀂄Papier pré-imprimé sur une autre machine : –Papier pré-imprimé sur une imprimante jet d'encre Types de support 4-5 –Papier pré-imprimé sur un système d'impression laser et de copie monochrome ou couleur –Papier pré-imprimé sur une imprimante thermique –Papier pré-imprimé sur une toute autre imprimante ou télécopieur 􀂄Supports poussiéreux 􀂄Papier mouillé (ou humide) 􀀕􀀢Stockez les supports dans un local où l'humidité relative se situe entre 35% et 85%. Le toner n'adhère pas sur supports humides. 􀂄Papier pelliculé 􀂄Papier adhésif 􀂄Papier plié, froissé, gondolé, gaufré, déformé ou plissé 􀂄Papier ajouré, perforé ou déchiré 􀂄Papier trop souple, trop rigide, trop fibreux 􀂄Papier avec recto et verso de texture (rugosité) différente 􀂄Papier trop fin ou trop épais 􀂄Supports chargés d'électricité statique 􀂄Supports laminés ou dorés; trop lumineux 􀂄Supports ne résistant pas à la température de fixation (180°C [356°F]) 􀂄Papier non découpé à angles droits ou de dimensions non uniformes 􀂄Papier avec colle, adhésif, agrafes, attaches, crochets ou oeillets 􀂄Papier acide 􀂄Et tout autre support non homologué Papier épais Le papier d'épaisseur supérieure à 90 g/m2 est considéré comme un support épais. Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur un support épais. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les feuilles une à une. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille papier épais. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles de papier épais, selon leur épaisseur. 4-6 Types de support Enveloppes Imprimez seulement sur le recto (face où doit figurer l'adresse du destinataire). Certaines zones de l'enveloppe sont en triple épaisseur (face+dos+rabat) L'impression risque de présenter des manques ou des caractères estompés. Vous pouvez imprimer en continu sur des enveloppes. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les feuilles une à une. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 enveloppe. Bac 2 Non supportée Orientation Face imprimable vers le bas Choix pilote Enveloppe Impression recto-verso Non supportée Utiliser des enveloppes : 􀂄de bureau courantes pour l'impression laser avec fermeture en diagonale, pliures et bords francs et rabats préencollés ordinaires 􀀕􀀢Les enveloppes à rabats gommés risquent de se coller en passant dans les rouleaux chauffants. Il vaut donc mieux utiliser des enveloppes à rabats enduits de colle émulsionnée. 􀂄Homologuées pour impression laser 􀂄Sèches Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Épais 1 (91–150 g/m2) Épais 2 (151–210 g/m2) Poids 91–210 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Voir page 4-2 pour connaître les formats pris en charge. Types de support 4-7 N'utilisez pas des enveloppes : 􀂄Avec rabats autocollants 􀂄Avec rubans adhésifs, attaches métalliques, clips ou bandes amovibles 􀂄Avec fenêtres transparentes 􀂄De texture trop grossière (ex. : enveloppes renforcées) 􀂄Composées de matière fusible, volatile, décolorante ou émettrice de vapeurs nocives 􀂄Pré-scellées Etiquettes Une planche d'étiquettes se compose d'une face recto (zone imprimable) et d'une face verso adhésive, recouverte d'une feuille de protection : 􀂄La face recto doit répondre aux spécifications Papier standard. 􀂄La face recto doit entièrement recouvrir la feuille de protection, et ne doit laisser apparaître aucune substance adhésive en surface. Il est possible d'imprimer des planches d'étiquettes en continu. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression d'étiquettes, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 planche d'étiquettes Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 planches d'étiquettes, selon leur épaisseur Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Étiquette Impression recto-verso Non supportée Utilisez des planches d'étiquettes comme suit : 􀂄Recommandées pour imprimantes laser 4-8 Types de support N'utilisez pas des planches d'étiquettes 􀂄Comportant des étiquettes facilement détachables ou des feuilles de protection décollées 􀂄Laissant apparaître toute substance adhésive en surface 􀀕􀀢Les étiquettes de ces planches peuvent rester collées dans l'unité de fixation et provoquer des bourrages. 􀂄Prédécoupées ou perforéesPlanche pleine page (sans étiquettes prédécoupées)N'utilisez pasUtilisezPlanche d'étiquettes avec feuille de protection siliconée Papier à en-tête Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur du papier à en-tête. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression sur papier à en-tête, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles, selon le format et l'épaisseur du support chargé Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Papier à en-tête Impression recto-verso Non supportée Types de support 4-9 Cartes Vous pouvez imprimer en continu sur des cartes. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toutes informations concernant l'impression de cartes, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 carte postale. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 cartes, selon leur épaisseur Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Cartes Impression recto-verso Non supportée Conseils d'utilisation : 􀂄Recommandé pour imprimantes laser Éviter d'utiliser des cartes : 􀂄Couchées 􀂄Conçues pour imprimantes jet d'encre 􀂄Pré-coupées ou perforées 􀂄Pré-imprimées ou multicolores 􀀕􀀢Si les cartes à imprimer sont déformées, aplanissez-les avant de les charger dans le bac 1/2. 4-10 Types de support 􀂄Pliée ou froissée Brillant Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur du support brillant. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression de supports brillants, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille de support brillant Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles de support brillant, selon leur épaisseur. Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Brillant 1 (100–128 g/m2 ) Brillant 2 (129–158 g/m2 ) Poids 100–158 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Non supportée Types de support 4-11 Zone imprimable Sur tous les formats de support la zone imprimable se situe à 4,2 mm (0,165") maximum des quatre bords.AAAAZoneimprimablea = 4,2mm (0,165") Chaque format de support a sa propre zone imprimable, zone maximale dans laquelle l'impression peut se faire clairement et sans distorsion. Cette zone est limitée par deux contraintes matérielles (la taille physique du support et les marges requises par l'imprimante) et logicielles (espace mémoire disponible pour le tampon de cadres pleine page). La zone imprimable garantie pour tous les formats de support correspond à la taille de la page moins une marge de 4,2 mm (0,165") tout autour de la feuille. 􀀕􀀢Lors de l'impression en couleur sur un support de format Legal, les limitations suivantes s'appliquent. 􀁺La zone imprimable est de 347,2 mm (13,7") depuis le bord avant du papier. (Toutefois, il existe une zone non imprimable de jusqu'à 4,2 mm (0,165") à partir du bord avant.) 􀁺La marge inférieure est de 14,2 mm (0,56"). 4-12 Types de support Enveloppes Les enveloppes ne peuvent être imprimées que sur le recto (côté où l'adresse du destinataire est rédigée). Par ailleurs, l'impression au recto dans la zone chevauchant le rabat arrière ne peut pas être garantie. L'emplacement de cette zone diffère selon le type de l'enveloppe.a = 4,2 mm (0,165")Zone non-imprimableZone imprimable non garantieZone imprimable garantieRecto (imprimable)Recto (non-imprimable)AAAA 􀀕􀀢L'orientation d'impression des enveloppes est définie par l'application utilisée. 􀀕􀀢Lorsque vous chargez des enveloppes, saisissez-les par le milieu pour les insérer. Marges de page Les marges se définissent dans votre application. Certaines applications permettent de personnaliser des tailles et marges de page, d'autres n'offrent qu'un choix de tailles et marges standard. Avec un format standard, une perte partielle de l'image est possible (due aux contraintes de la zone imprimable). Si votre application permet de personnaliser le format de page, utiliser les dimensions indiquées pour la zone imprimable afin d'obtenir les meilleurs résultats. Chargement des supports 4-13 Chargement des supports Comment charger les supports ? Remarque Ne pas mélanger les supports de types et de formats différents au risque de provoquer des problèmes d'alimentation ou des problèmes machine Remarque Les bords du papier sont coupants et peuvent causer des blessures. Pour recharger du papier, retirez tout d'abord les feuilles restantes du magasin. Joignez-les à celles qui sont à charger, puis égalisez les bords du paquet et placez celui-ci dans le bac. Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Pour des détails sur les types et formats de supports qui peuvent être imprimés à partir du Bac 1, voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est mise sous tension, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Veillez à enlever tout le papier du Bac 1 avant de mettre la machine sous tension. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Attendez que l'impression soit terminée avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. Pour introduire une seconde feuille de papier, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée, et que le voyant PRÊT s'allume en orange avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. 4-14 Chargement des supports Charger du Papier ordinaire 1Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez le papier dans le bac, face imprimable vers le bas. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. Chargement des supports 4-15 Autres supports Lors du chargement d'un autre support que du papier standard, réglez le mode du support (Enveloppe, Étiquettes, Épais 1, Épais 2, Brillant 1, Brillant 2 ou Carte) dans le pilote pour une qualité d'impression optimale. Enveloppes 1Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez l'enveloppe dans le bac avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Avant le chargement, aplatir les enveloppes pour chasser l'air qui s'y trouve et faites en sorte que les rabats soient bien pliés, sinon les enveloppes peuvent se froisser ou provoquer un bourrage. 􀀕􀀢Le bac ne peut contenir qu'une enveloppe à la fois. 4-16 Chargement des supports 􀀕􀀢Les enveloppes avec rabat sur le bord long (Enveloppes C6, Monarch et DL) doivent être chargées avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Lorsque vous chargez des enveloppes, saisissez-les par le milieu pour les insérer. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de l'enveloppe. 4Insérez le support aussi loin que possible et maintenez-le en place jusqu'à ce qu'il soit entraîné dans la machine. Chargement des supports 4-17 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/de Supports Épais et Brillant 1Faites glisser les guide papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez le support dans le bac avec la face imprimable orientée vers le bas. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du support chargé. 4-18 Chargement des supports 4Insérez le support aussi loin que possible et maintenez-le en place jusqu'à ce qu'il soit entraîné dans la machine. Bac 2 Charger du Papier ordinaire 1Ouvrez le Bac 2. 2Appuyez sur le volet de compression du papier afin de le verrouiller. Chargement des supports 4-19 3Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 4Chargez les feuilles dans le bac, face imprimable vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas dépasser le repère ,. Ce bac ne peut contenir que 250 feuilles de papier standard (80 g/m2 [22 lb]) à la fois. 4-20 Chargement des supports 5Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. 6Refermez le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. Chargement des supports 4-21 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/de Supports Épais et Brillant 1Ouvrez le Bac 2. 2Appuyez sur le volet de compression du papier afin de le verrouiller. 3Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 4-22 Chargement des supports 4Chargez les feuilles dans le bac, face imprimable vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Le magasin ne peut contenir que 20 feuilles de support à la fois. 5Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. Chargement des supports 4-23 6Refermez le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. 4-24 Impression recto-verso Impression recto-verso Sélectionnez du papier fortement opaque pour l'impression duplex (recto-verso). L'opacité se juge à la faculté du papier à cacher ce qui est écrit de l'autre côté de la page. Si le papier est de faible opacité (translucide), ce qui est imprimé sur un côté transparaîtra sur l'autre. Vérifiez les valeurs des marges dans votre application. Pour vérifier la qualité de l'opacité, imprimez seulement quelques feuilles. Remarque Seuls le papier standard et les supports épais, 60–210 g/m2 (16–55,9 lb bond) peuvent être automatiquement imprimés recto-verso. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. L'impression recto-verso des enveloppes, papiers à en-tête, étiquettes, cartes postales ou supports brillants n'est pas prise en charge. Comment imprimer automatiquement en recto-verso ? L'impression en mode recto-verso ne peut se faire que sur magicolor 3730DN. Dans votre application, vérifiez la manière de définir les marges pour une impression recto-verso. Les options de position de reliure sont les suivantes. 13121 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Bord court", les pages s'impriment de manière à être reliées au sommet et tournées de bas en haut. 111123 vous sélectionnez l'option "Bord long", les pages s'impriment de manière à être reliées sur le côté gauche et être tournées de droite à gauche. Impression recto-verso 4-25 En outre, si l'option "Miniatures" a été définie avec "Livret", une impression recto-verso automatique est exécutée. L'option "Livret" vous permet de définir les paramètres suivants : 1123 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Reliure gauche", les pages imprimées peuvent être pliées pour former un livret relié à gauche. 33112 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Reliure droite", les pages imprimées peuvent être pliées pour former un livret relié à droite. 1Chargez du papier standard dans le bac. 2Dans le pilote de l'imprimante, sélectionnez l'impression recto-verso (onglet Mise en page dans Windows). 3Cliquez sur OK. 􀀕􀀢En recto-verso automatique, la page verso s'imprime avant la page recto. 4-26 Bac de sortie Bac de sortie Tous les imprimés arrivent dans le bac de sortie au sommet de l'imprimante, face vers le bas. Ce bac contient 200 feuilles (A4/Letter) de 80 g/m2 (22 lb). 􀀕􀀢Ne laissez pas les imprimés s'accumuler dans le bac de sortie, car cela risque de provoquer des bourrages, de recourber excessivement le papier et de créer de l'électricité statique. 􀀕􀀢Si le papier se gondole et tombe hors du bac de sortie lors de l'impression de papier épais, déployez la butée papier à l'extrémité de l'extension du bac avant d'imprimer. Stockage des supports 4-27 Stockage des supports Comment stocker les supports ? 􀂄Rangez les supports sur une surface plane et régulière, en les laissant dans leur emballage d'origine jusqu'au moment de les utiliser. Des supports stockés depuis trop longtemps hors de leur emballage risquent d'être trop secs et de provoquer des bourrages. 􀂄Si les supports ont été déballés, les replacer dans leur emballage d'origine, et les stocker sur une surface plane, dans un local frais et à l'abri de la lumière. 􀂄Rangez-les en les préservant d'une trop grande humidité, des rayons du soleil, d'une chaleur excessive (supérieure à 35°C [95°F]) et de la poussière. 􀂄Évitez de les entreposer au contact d'autres objets ou de les ranger à la verticale. Avant d'utiliser des supports qui ont été stockés, effectuez un essai d'impression afin de vérifier la qualité du résultat. 4-28 Stockage des supports 5 Remplacement des consommables 5-2 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement des consommables Remarque La défaut d'observation des instructions décrites dans ce manuel peut entraîner l'annulation de votre garantie. Remarque Si un message d'erreur (REMETTRE TONER, FIN TRANSFERT, etc.) apparaît, imprimez la page de configuration, puis vérifiez l'état des autres consommables. Pour des détails sur les messages d'erreur, voir "Messages d'erreur" à la page 7-37. Pour imprimer la page de configuration, voir "Impression d'une page de configuration" à la page 7-2. A propos des cartouches de toner Votre imprimante utilise quatre cartouches de toner : noir, jaune, magenta et cyan. Manipulez les cartouches de toner avec précaution, en évitant de renverser du toner sur vous ou dans l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Lors du remplacement de cartouches de toner, n'installez que des cartouches neuves. En cas d'installation d'une cartouche de toner usagée, la quantité de toner risque de ne pas être clairement indiquée. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas ouvrir la cartouche de toner inutilement. Si du toner se répand, éviter de l'inhaler ou de le laisser entrer en contact avec la peau. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner entre en contact avec les mains, les laver immédiatement avec du savon et de l'eau. 􀀕􀀢En cas d'inhalation de toner, rechercher l'air frais et se gargariser abondamment à l'eau. En cas de toux ou autre manifestation, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner touche les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau pendant au moins 15 minutes. Si l'irritation persiste, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner pénètre dans la bouche, se rincer la bouche et boire ensuite 1 à 2 tasses d'eau. Si nécessaire, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Stocker les cartouches de toner hors de portée des enfants. Remplacement des consommables 5-3 􀀕􀀢Pour des informations de recyclage, visiter les sites suivants : États-Unis : printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp Europe : printer.konicaminoltaeurope.com/cleanplanet/ Autres régions : printer.konicaminolta.com Remarque L'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales peut entraîner des performances instables. De plus, tout dommage causé par l'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales n'est pas couvert par la garantie, même si ledit dommage survient pendant la période de garantie. (Bien qu'il ne soit pas certain que le dommage résulte de l'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales, nous recommandons vivement d'utiliser des cartouches de toner d'origine.) 5-4 Remplacement des consommables Pour remplacer une cartouche de toner, se reporter au tableau ci-dessous. Les cartouches KONICA MINOLTA indiquées sont homologuées pour une qualité et une vitesse optimales sur votre type d'imprimante. Le type de votre imprimante et les numéros de référence des cartouches figurent sur l'étiquette de renouvellement consommables (face interne du capot supérieur). Type Imprimante N° Référence Imprimante Type de cartouche de toner N° Référence Cartouche Toner AM A0VD 017 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01F Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06F Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CF Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HF Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02F Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07F Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DF Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JF EU A0VD 027 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01H Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06H Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CH Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HH Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02H Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07H Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DH Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JH AP A0VD 047 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01K Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06K Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CK Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HK Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02K Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07K Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DK Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JK Remplacement des consommables 5-5 􀀕􀀢Pour une qualité et une vitesse optimales, n'utiliser que les cartouches de toner KONICA MINOLTA authentiques correspondant au TYPE de votre imprimante. GC A0VD 087 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01N Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06N Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CN Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HN Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02N Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07N Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DN Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JN Type Imprimante N° Référence Imprimante Type de cartouche de toner N° Référence Cartouche Toner 5-6 Remplacement des consommables Stocker les cartouches de toner : 􀂄Dans leur emballage d'origine jusqu'au moment de les utiliser. 􀂄Dans un local sec et frais, à l'abri du soleil (et de la chaleur). La température de stockage ne doit pas dépasser 35°C (95°F) et l'humidité 85 % sans condensation. Lorsqu'une une cartouche de toner est déplacée d'un lieu frais en un lieu chaud et humide, une condensation, nuisible à la qualité d'impression, peut se former. Avant d'utiliser la cartouche, la laisser s'adapter au nouvel environnement pendant environ une heure. 􀂄Bien à plat. Ne pas renverser les cartouches ; le toner se trouvant à l'intérieur de la cartouche risque de se compacter ou d'être distribué de manière irrégulière. 􀂄A l'abri de l'air marin et de vapeurs corrosives (d'aérosols par exemple). Remplacement des consommables 5-7 Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner Remarque En remplaçant une cartouche, veiller à ne pas répandre du toner. Si cela se produit, essuyer aussitôt avec un chiffon doux et sec. Remarque Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche OPC car cela risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Le message TONER X BAS (où "X" représente la couleur du toner) apparaît lorsqu'une cartouche de toner devient vide. Suivez les instructions ci-après pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. 1Sur l'écran des messages, vérifiez la couleur de la cartouche de toner à remplacer. 5-8 Remplacement des consommables 2Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 3Tirez le flacon de toner usagé vers le haut pour le déverrouiller. Remplacement des consommables 5-9 4Sortez doucement le flacon de toner usagé de l'imprimante en le tirant par ses poignées. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas renverser le flacon de toner usagé retiré au risque de répandre du toner usagé. 5Tout en appuyant sur la zone marquée "Push" sur la cartouche de toner à remplacer, sortir entièrement la cartouche de l'imprimante en la faisant coulisser. Dans la procédure décrite, nous procédons au remplacement de la cartouche de toner jaune (Y). Remarque Mettre la cartouche de toner au rebut conformément à la réglementation en vigueur. Ne pas l'incinérer. Pour plus de détails, voir "A propos des cartouches de toner" à la page 5-2. 6Vérifiez la couleur de la nouvelle cartouche à installer. 􀀕􀀢Pour éviter de renverser du toner, laisser la cartouche de toner dans son sachet d'emballage jusqu'à la fin de l'étape 5. 5-10 Remplacement des consommables 7Retirez la cartouche de son emballage. 8Prendre la cartouche de toner aux deux extrémités et la secouer deux fois de suite comme indiqué ci-contre. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas saisir le corps de la cartouche de toner car cela risque de l'abîmer et de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Remplacement des consommables 5-11 9Retirez la bande de protection du côté droit de la cartouche de toner. 10Retirez le cache de protection de la cartouche de toner. Enlever la bande d'emballage de la cartouche de toner. 11Retirez le papier de la cartouche de toner. Retirez le cache de protection de la cartouche de toner. 5-12 Remplacement des consommables 12Veillez à ce que la nouvelle cartouche de toner soit de la même couleur que celle du compartiment dans lequel elle va être placée, puis l'introduire dans l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Insérez entièrement la cartouche de toner. 13Vérifiez que la cartouche de toner est bien installée et retirer son ruban et son étrier de protection. 14Enfoncez le flacon de toner usagé jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en place. Remplacement des consommables 5-13 15Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 5-14 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement du kit de toner usagé WB-P03 Lorsque le flacon de toner usagé est presque plein, le message BOUT. RÉCUP. PLEINE apparaît dans l'écran des messages. L'imprimante s'arrête et ne redémarre pas tant que ce réservoir n'est pas remplacé. 1Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 2Tirez le flacon de toner usagé vers le haut pour le déverrouiller. Remplacement des consommables 5-15 3Sortez doucement le réceptacle de l'imprimante en le tirant par ses poignées. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas renverser le flacon de toner usagé retiré au risque de répandre du toner usagé. 4Sortez le nouveau réservoir de toner usagé de son emballage. Mettre le réservoir plein dans le sachet plastique fourni et le placer dans la boîte d'emballage. Remarque Mettre le flacon de toner usagé au rebut conformément à la réglementation en vigueur. Ne pas s'en débarrasser en le brûlant. 5Enfoncez le flacon de toner usagé jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en place. 5-16 Remplacement des consommables 6Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 􀀕􀀢Si le flacon de toner usagé n'est pas intégralement inséré, le capot avant ne pourra pas se fermer. Remplacement des consommables 5-17 Remplacement du rouleau de transfert TF-P04 Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer le rouleau de transfert, le message FIN ROUL. TRANS. apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression est amoindrie, il est préférable de changer aussitôt le rouleau de transfert. 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Tout en enfonçant les leviers vers l'intérieur, déplacer le presse-rouleau dans votre direction. 5-18 Remplacement des consommables 3Tout en continuant à appuyer sur les leviers, déplacez le rouleau de transfert. 4Préparez un nouveau rouleau de transfert. 5Tout en appuyant sur les leviers, insérez l'axe du rouleau de transfert dans les roulements. 6Poussez sur les leviers jusqu'à ce qu'ils s'enclenchent en position. Remplacement des consommables 5-19 7Refermez le capot latéral droit. 8Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. 5-20 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement de l'unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 Quand il est temps de remplacer la courroie de transfert, le message FIN TRANSFERT apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression en est significativement affectée, il est préférable de changer immédiatement la courroie de transfert. 1Éteignez l'imprimante et débranchez le cordon secteur et les câbles d'interface. 2Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. Remplacement des consommables 5-21 3Retirez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur la dépose des cartouches toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 􀀕􀀢Couvrir la cartouche de toner retirée pour la protéger des rayons directs du soleil. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas pencher la cartouche de toner retirée au risque de répandre du toner. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas pencher le flacon de toner usagé sinon du toner usagé pourrait se répandre. 4Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 5-22 Remplacement des consommables 5Insérez la feuille de protection dans l'unité dans le sens de la flèche jusqu'à la butée. 6Actionnez les guides vers le bas. 7Tout en maintenant les poignées, sortir avec précaution l'unité de courroie de transfert. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à maintenir la courroie de transfert de niveau ; sinon la courroie de transfert risque d'être rayée. Remplacement des consommables 5-23 8Préparez une nouvelle courroie de transfert. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface de la courroie. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas enlever pas ce levier bleu. 9Retirez les caches de protection de la courroie de transfert. 10Introduire la nouvelle courroie de transfert sur ses rails. 􀀕􀀢Insérez l'unité intégralement jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche en position. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à maintenir la courroie de transfert de niveau ; sinon la courroie de transfert risque d'être rayée. 5-24 Remplacement des consommables 11Actionnez les guides vers le haut. 12Tirez la feuille de protection. 13Refermez le capot latéral droit. Remplacement des consommables 5-25 14Installez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des cartouches toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 15Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 5-26 Remplacement des consommables 16Rebranchez le cordon secteur et allumez l'imprimante. 17Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. Remplacement des consommables 5-27 Remplacement de l'unité de fixation FU-P02 Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer l'unité de fixation, le message FIN UNITÉ FUSION apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression en est significativement affectée, il est préférable de changer immédiatement l'unité de fixation. 1Éteignez l'imprimante. Remarque Certaines pièces à l'intérieur de la machine atteignent des températures très élevées pouvant provoquer de graves brûlures. Après avoir éteint l'imprimante, attendez environ 20 minutes et vérifiez que la section de l'unité de fixation est à température ambiante avant d'intervenir. 2Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 3Ouvrez le capot d'éjection. 5-28 Remplacement des consommables 4Ouvrez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 5Tirez les 2 leviers vers le bas. 6Sortez l'unité de fixation. Remplacement des consommables 5-29 7Préparez une nouvelle unité de fixation. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau. 8Actionnez vers le bas les 2 leviers d'une unité de fixation neuve. 9Insérez l'unité de fixation intégralement jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche en position. 5-30 Remplacement des consommables 10Relevez les deux leviers. 11Fermez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 12Refermez le capot d'éjection. Remplacement des consommables 5-31 13Refermez le capot latéral droit. 􀀕􀀢Si la porte du côté droit a du mal à se fermer, vérifiez que l'unité de fixation est bien insérée à fond. 14Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION. 5-32 Remplacement des consommables 6 Entretien de l'imprimante 6-2 Entretien de l'imprimante Entretien de l'imprimante ATTENTION Lisez attentivement toutes les étiquettes de sécurité (avertissements et consignes) et veillez à en respecter les instructions. Ces étiquettes se trouvent au dos des portes et à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Prenez soin de votre imprimante pour préserver sa durée de vie. Tout dégât causé par négligence n'est pas couvert par la garantie. Nettoyez l'intérieur et l'extérieur de l'imprimante régulièrement pour éliminer poussières et résidus de papier amoindrissant ses performances et la qualité d'impression. Gardez les directives suivantes à l'esprit. AVERTISSEMENT ! Avant tout, débranchez le cordon secteur et tous les câbles d'interface. Veillez à ne pas répandre de l'eau ou du détergent dans l'imprimante, au risque de provoquer des dégâts ou de vous électrocuter. ATTENTION L'unité de fixation est brûlante. Elle met environ une heure pour refroidir, le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante étant en position ouverte. 􀂄En nettoyant l'intérieur de l'imprimante ou en supprimant des bourrages, veillez à ne pas toucher l'unité de fixation ou d'autres pièces brûlantes. 􀂄Ne posez aucun objet sur l'imprimante. 􀂄Pour nettoyer l'imprimante, utilisez un chiffon doux. 􀂄Ne vaporisez jamais de produit détergent directement sur l'imprimante car il risque de s'infiltrer par les grilles d'aération et d'endommager les circuits internes. 􀂄Pour le nettoyage, évitez d'utiliser des solutions abrasives ou corrosives ou contenant des solvants (alcool ou benzène). 􀂄Commencez toujours par appliquer le produit de nettoyage (détergent doux) sur une petite surface de l'imprimante pour en vérifier le résultat. 􀂄N'utilisez jamais des tampons abrasifs ou rugueux (paille de fer ou matière plastique). 􀂄Fermez toujours les portes doucement. N'exposez jamais l'imprimante à des vibrations excessives. Entretien de l'imprimante 6-3 􀂄Ne recouvrez jamais l'imprimante avec un capot de protection tout de suite après l'avoir utilisée. Éteindre la machine et attendre qu'elle refroidisse. 􀂄Ne laissez pas les capots de l'imprimante ouverts pendant une durée prolongée, plus particulièrement dans les locaux bien éclairés ; la lumière risque d'endommager les cartouches de toner. 􀂄N'ouvrez pas les capots de l'imprimante quand elle est fonctionnement. 􀂄Ne tapotez pas les bords de vos paquets de feuilles sur l'imprimante. 􀂄L'imprimante ne doit jamais être démontée ou lubrifiée. 􀂄Ne basculez pas l'imprimante. 􀂄Ne touchez pas aux contacts électriques, engrenages ou dispositifs laser, au risque d'endommager l'imprimante et d'affaiblir la qualité d'impression. 􀂄Ne laissez pas les imprimés s'accumuler excessivement dans le bac de sortie car ils peuvent provoquer des bourrages et se recourber excessivement. 􀂄Assurez-vous que deux personnes sont disponibles pour soulever l'imprimante en cas de déplacement.27 kg60 lbs Maintenez l'imprimante à l'horizontale pour éviter de renverser du toner. 􀂄Pour soulever l'imprimante, procédez toujours comme représenté sur l'illustration de droite. 􀂄Si la peau entre en contact avec du toner, laver à l'eau froide ou à l'aide d'un détergent doux. ATTENTION Si du toner entre en contact avec les yeux, se rincer les yeux immédiatement à l'eau froide et consulter un ophtalmologiste. 􀂄Avant de rebrancher l'imprimante, assurez-vous de bien remonter toutes les pièces retirées pour le nettoyage. 6-4 Nettoyage de l'imprimante Nettoyage de l'imprimante ATTENTION Avant de procéder au nettoyage, éteignez l'imprimante et débranchez le cordon secteur. Extérieur Panneau de contrôleGrille d'aérationExtérieur de l'imprimante Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-5 Rouleaux d'entraînement papier L'accumulation de poussière de papier et autres débris sur les rouleaux d'entraînement peut provoquer des problèmes d'alimentation des feuilles. Nettoyage des rouleaux d'entraînement papier (Bac 2) 1Tirez le bac. 2Nettoyez les rouleaux de transfert papier en les essuyant avec un chiffon doux et sec. 6-6 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 3Fermez le bac. Nettoyage des lentilles laser de l'imprimante Cette imprimante est équipée de quatre lentilles laser. Nettoyez chacune d'elles comme indiqué ci-après. L'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser doit être fixé à l'intérieur du Bac 2. 1Tirez le Bac 2. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-7 2Retirez le capot. 􀀕􀀢Comme le capot sera réutilisé plus tard, ne le ramenez pas dans sa position d'origine. 3Sortez l'outil de nettoyage du Bac 2. 4Fermez le bac 2. 6-8 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 5Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 6Déposez le flacon de toner usagé et la cartouche de toner de la couleur de la lentille laser à nettoyer. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur la dépose d'une cartouche toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 􀀕􀀢Ne renversez pas la cartouche de toner retirée au risque de répandre du toner. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-9 􀀕􀀢Ne renversez pas le flacon de toner usagé sinon du toner usagé pourrait se répandre. 7Fixez le capot sur la cartouche de toner enlevée. 8Insérez l'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser dans l'ouverture de l'unité image, sortez-le et répétez ce mouvement d'avant en arrière 2 ou 3 fois. 9Installez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation d'une cartouche toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 6-10 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 10Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot qui présente de petites projections. 11Tirez le Bac 2. 12Remettez l'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser sur son support à l'intérieur du bac 2. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-11 13Fermez le capot. 14Fermez le bac 2. 15Effectuez ce nettoyage pour chaque lentille laser. 􀀕􀀢La barrette de nettoyage pour lentille laser est fournie avec l'imprimante. Rangez cet outil en lieu sûr afin de ne pas l'égarer. 6-12 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 7 Résolution de problèmes 7-2 Introduction Introduction Ce chapitre vous fournit des informations utiles pour résoudre des problèmes d'impression éventuels, ou pour le moins, vous indique où vous adresser pour obtenir de l'aide. Impression de la page de configuration page 7-2 Prévention des bourrages papier page 7-3 Description du chemin papier page 7-4 Suppression des bourrages papier page 7-5 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage page 7-21 Résolution d'autres problèmes page 7-25 Résolution de problèmes de qualité page 7-30 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance page 7-36 Impression d'une page de configuration Imprimez une page de configuration pour vérifier si l'imprimante fonctionne correctement ou afficher ses paramètres de configuration. Appuyez (1 fois) sur la touche Jusqu'à ce que l'écran affiche : PRÊT MENU PAGES SPÉCIALES IMPRESSION PAGE CONFIG PAGE CONFIG PRINT? La page de configuration s'imprime et l'écran des messages affiche à nouveau PRÊT. Prévention des bourrages papier 7-3 Prévention des bourrages papier S'assurer que... Le support répond aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Le support repose bien à plat dans le bac, notamment le bord avant. L'imprimante est installée sur une surface plane et robuste. Le support est stocké dans un endroit sec à l'abri de toute humidité. Vous ajustez toujours les guides papier après avoir chargé le support (un guide mal ajusté peut être à l'origine d'une mauvaise qualité d'impression, de bourrages, voire de dégât matériel). Le papier est chargé avec la face imprimable orientée vers le haut (le côté imprimable des feuilles est en général indiqué sur l'emballage du papier). Éviter... D'utiliser un support plié, froissé ou trop recourbé. De laisser des doubles feuilles s'alimenter dans l'imprimante (retirer le papier et aérer les feuilles pour supprimer toute adhérence). De charger différents types, formats, grammages de support à la fois dans le même magasin. De surcharger les bacs d'alimentation papier. De laisser les imprimés s'accumuler dans le bac de sortie (ce bac peut contenir 200 feuilles—un bourrage peut survenir si le remplissage du bac dépasse cette capacité). 7-4 Description du chemin papier Description du chemin papier Le schéma ci-dessous indique le chemin emprunté par le papier dans l'imprimante et facilite la localisation des bourrages.32185476 1Cartouche de toner 6Bac 2 2Bac de sortie 7Unité de tête d'impression 3Unité de fixation FU-P02 8Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 4Unité Recto-verso 5Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Suppression des bourrages papier 7-5 Suppression des bourrages papier Pour éviter tout dégât, retirer toujours les feuilles à l'origine du bourrage doucement, sans les déchirer. Tout morceau de papier restant dans l'imprimante, quelle que soit sa taille, peut obstruer le chemin papier et provoquer d'autres bourrages. Ne jamais recharger des feuilles retirées d'un bourrage. Remarque Avant son passage dans l'unité de fixation, l'image n'est pas 'fixée' sur le support. En retirant les feuilles d'un bourrage, il convient par conséquent de ne pas toucher la face imprimée, le toner pourrait salir les mains de l'opérateur. Veillez aussi à ne pas répandre du toner dans l'imprimante. ATTENTION Le toner non fixé peut salir vos mains, vos vêtements ou tout ce qu'il touche. Sur les vêtements, il suffit d'épousseter légèrement la poudre, et de nettoyer toute trace résiduelle à l'aide d'eau froide, et non chaude. Sur la peau, il se lave facilement à l'eau froide ou avec un savon doux. ATTENTION Si du toner entre en contact avec les yeux, se rincer les yeux immédiatement à l'eau froide et consulter un ophtalmologiste. Après avoir supprimé un bourrage, si le message de bourrage reste affiché sur l'écran du panneau de commande, ouvrez et refermez les capots de l'imprimante. Normalement, cela efface le message. 7-6 Suppression des bourrages papier Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives Message de bourrage... Voir procédure... BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 2 page 7-7 BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO INF. page 7-11 BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO SUP. page 7-11 BOURRAGE SUPP. UNITÉ FUSION page 7-12 BOURRAGE SUPP. SORTIE page 7-12 BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 1 page 7-18 BOURRAGE SUPP. ROUL. TRANSFERT page 7-18 BOURRAGE SUPP. NON DÉFINI page 7-7, page 7-11, page 7-12, page 7-18 Suppression des bourrages papier 7-7 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 2 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 7-8 Suppression des bourrages papier ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-9 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. 4Ouvrez le Bac 2 et retirez toutes les feuilles chargées dans ce magasin. 5Ventilez les feuilles et égaliser les bords du paquet. 7-10 Suppression des bourrages papier 6Rechargez le support face vers le haut dans le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢S'assurer qu'il repose bien à plat. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas charger du papier au-delà du repère ,. 7Refermez le Bac 2. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-11 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité Recto-verso 1Soulevez le loquet du capot latéral droit afin de l'ouvrir. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. 7-12 Suppression des bourrages papier Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité de fixation 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Ouvrez le capot d'éjection. 3Relevez les 2 leviers. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-13 4Ouvrez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 5Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 7-14 Suppression des bourrages papier 􀀕􀀢S'il n'est pas possible de dégager la feuille coincée en la tirant par le bas, tirez-la par le dessus de l'unité de fixation. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-15 ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. 7-16 Suppression des bourrages papier 6Fermez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 7Poussez les 2 leviers vers le bas. 8Refermez le capot d'éjection. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-17 9Refermez le capot latéral droit. 7-18 Suppression des bourrages papier Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) et le Rouleau de transfert 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est mise sous tension, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Veillez à enlever tout le papier du Bac 1 avant de mettre la machine sous tension. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Attendez que l'impression soit terminée avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. Pour introduire une seconde feuille de papier, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée, et que le voyant PRÊT s'allume en orange avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. 1Soulevez le loquet du capot latéral droit afin de l'ouvrir. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-19 ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. 7-20 Suppression des bourrages papier 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 7-21 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 􀀕􀀢Des bourrages fréquents dans une zone particulière signifient que cette zone nécessite d'être révisée, réparée ou nettoyée. Ils peuvent aussi se produire si vous utilisez un support non accepté. Symptôme Origine Solution Plusieurs feuilles s'alimentent en même temps dans l'imprimante. Les bords avant des feuilles ne sont pas alignés. Retirez les feuilles du magasin, aligner leurs bords avant et les replacer dans le bac. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le message de bourrage reste affiché. Le capot latéral droit doit être ouvert et refermé pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Ouvrez puis refermez capot latéral droit de l'imprimante. Une ou plusieurs feuilles sont restées coincées dans l'imprimante. Vérifiez à nouveau le chemin papier pour vous assurer d'avoir retiré toutes les feuilles coincées. Du papier était chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine a été mise sous tension ou le capot avant a été ouvert puis refermé. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1, puis ouvrez le capot de droite pour vérifier qu'il n'y a pas de papier coincé. 7-22 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage Bourrages dans l'unité recto-verso. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Seuls le papier standard et les supports épais, 60–210 g/m2 (16–55,9 lb) peuvent être automatiquement imprimés recto-verso. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir les types de support dans le Bac 1 ou 2. N'imprimez pas en recto-verso (2 faces) des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales ou du papier brillant. Des feuilles peuvent être restées coincées. Vérifiez à nouveau le chemin papier dans l'unité recto-verso et retirez toute feuille coincée pouvant encore s'y trouver. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 7-23 Les feuilles se coincent dans l'imprimante. Du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1 pendant que la machine était en train d'imprimer. Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1, puis ouvrez le capot de droite pour vérifier qu'il n'y a pas de papier coincé. Avant de charger la seconde feuille de papier dans le Bac 1, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée et que le voyant PRÊT se soit allumé en orange. Le support n'est pas correctement placé dans le bac. Retirez les feuilles coincées et rechargez le support dans le bac comme il convient. Le magasin contient des feuilles dépassant la limite de remplissage. Retirez les feuilles excédentaires et rechargez la quantité de feuilles appropriée. Les guides papier ne sont pas bien ajustés au format utilisé. Ajustez ces guides dans le bac papier en fonction du format utilisé. Le support chargé est gondolé ou froissé. Retirez les feuilles, les lisser puis les recharger. Si les bourrages persistent, ne pas utiliser ce support. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Les enveloppes se chargent dans le Bac 2. Les enveloppes se chargent exclusivement dans le Bac 1. La planche d'étiquettes recommandée est orientée dans le mauvais sens dans le Bac 1 ou 2. Chargez les planches d'étiquettes conformément aux instructions du fabricant. La face imprimable des enveloppes n'est pas tournée du bon côté dans le Bac 1. Chargez les enveloppes dans le Bac 1 avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-24 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Les rouleaux d'entraînement papier doivent être nettoyés. Nettoyez les rouleaux d'entraînement papier. Pour plus de détails, voir "Rouleaux d'entraînement papier" à la page 6-5. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-25 Résolution d'autres problèmes 􀀕􀀢Pour obtenir des informations sur les consommables, accédez au site www.q-shop.com. Symptôme Origine Solution L'imprimante ne s'allume pas. Le cordon secteur n'est pas bien branché sur la prise de courant. Éteignez l'imprimante, vérifiez le branchement du cordon secteur, et rallumez l'imprimante. La prise utilisée pour l'imprimante est défectueuse. Branchez un autre appareil électrique sur cette prise pour vérifier son fonctionnement. L'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt n'est pas sur la position (Marche). Basculez l'interrupteur sur la position O (Arrêt), puis sur la position I (Marche). La prise utilisée pour l'imprimante a une tension ou fréquence non conforme aux spécifications. Utilisez une prise de courant conforme aux spécifications mentionnées en Annexe A, "Spécifications techniques". L'imprimante n'imprime pas les données qui lui sont envoyées. Un message d'erreur est affiché sur l'écran du panneau de commande. Procédez selon les indications du message affiché. Le travail est annulé car des paramètres d'authentification utilisateur ou de suivi de compte sont définis. Cliquez sur le bouton Authentification Utilisateur/Suivi de compte dans le pilote de l'imprimante, et saisissez les informations requises avant d'imprimer. Le message TONER BAS s'affiche beaucoup plus tôt que prévu. Une cartouche de toner est défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Vous imprimez des pages avec un fort taux de couverture en toner. Reportez-vous aux spécifications fournies en Annexe A. 7-26 Résolution d'autres problèmes Impossible d'imprimer la page de configuration. Le magasin papier est vide. Vérifiez que le Bac 1 (au moins) est chargé, bien en place et fermé. Il y a un bourrage. Localisez et supprimez ce bourrage. L'impression est trop lente. L'imprimante est réglée sur un mode d'impression lente (par exemple supports épais). L'impression sur support spécial est plus lente. Si du papier standard est utilisé, s'assurer que le type de support approprié est défini dans le pilote. Le mode économie d'énergie est activé. Dans ce mode, le démarrage de l'impression prend quelque temps. Si vous ne désirez pas utiliser ce mode, contactez l'Assistance Technique. Le travail d'impression est très complexe. Patienter. Aucune action requise. Une cartouche de toner destinée à une autre région ou non homologuée est installée (T/C X INCORRECT est affiché sur l'écran des messages). Installez la cartouche de toner KONICA MINOLTA homologuée pour votre type d'imprimante. Des pages blanches sont produites en cours d'impression. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont vides ou défectueuses. Vérifiez les cartouches de toner. L'image ne s'imprime pas si les cartouches sont vides. Le support utilisé ne convient pas. Vérifiez que le type de support sélectionné dans le pilote est le même que celui chargé dans le bac. La machine ne passe pas en mode Écon. énergie. Du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-27 Impossible de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. La machine est passée en mode Écon. énergie. Lorsque la machine est disponible, chargez du papier dans le Bac 1. Les pages ne s'impriment pas toutes. Câble d'interface inapproprié ou imprimante non configurée pour le câble et le port utilisés. Vérifiez le câble d'interface. La touche Cancel a été activée. Vérifiez que la touche Cancel n'a pas été activée lors de votre impression. Le magasin papier est vide. Vérifiez que les bacs contiennent du support, et sont bien en place. Vous imprimez avec un fichier calque créé par un pilote incompatible. Imprimez le fichier calque à l'aide d'un pilote approprié. La machine a tenté de prélever du papier dans le Bac 2 alors que du papier était chargé dans le Bac 1. Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. L'imprimante se réinitialise ou s'éteint souvent. Le cordon secteur n'est pas bien branché sur la prise de courant. Éteignez l'imprimante, vérifiez le branchement du cordon secteur, et rallumez l'imprimante. Une erreur système est survenue. Communiquez l'erreur à votre Assistance technique. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-28 Résolution d'autres problèmes Vous rencontrez des problèmes d'impression duplex (recto-verso). Le support n'est pas approprié ou les paramètres ne sont pas correctement définis. S'assurer d'imprimer sur le support approprié. 􀂄Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. 􀂄N'imprimez pas en recto-verso (2 faces) des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales ou du papier brillant. 􀂄Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir les types de support dans le Bac 1 ou 2. Vérifiez que votre document comporte plus d'une page. Dans le pilote Windows (Mise en page/Type d'impression), sélectionnez "Recto-verso". Pour une impression de miniatures sur pages recto-verso, activez "Assembler" sur l'onglet Paramètres de base du pilote. Désactivez la fonction Assembler dans votre application. L'impression de miniatures en copies multiples ne se fait pas correctement. La fonction Assembler est activée à la fois dans le pilote de l'imprimante et dans votre application. Pour une impression de miniatures en copies multiples, activez "Assembler" sur l'onglet Paramètres de base du pilote. Désactivez la fonction Assembler dans votre application. L'imprimante émet un bruit inhabituel. Un objet se trouve coincé dans l'imprimante. Éteignez l'imprimante et retirez l'objet. En cas d'échec, contactez l'Assistance technique. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-29 Impossible d'accéder à l'utilitaire Web. Le mot de passe Administrateur pour PageScope Web Connection est incorrect. Le mot de passe Administrateur pour PageScope Web Connection doit comporter 0 caractères minimum et 16 caractères maximum. Pour des détails sur le mot de passe Administrateur de PageScope Web Connection, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. L'imprimé est froissé. Le support est humide ou a été mouillé. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Une défectuosité existe peut-être au niveau du rouleau de transfert ou de l'unité de fixation. Vérifiez l'état de ces pièces. Si nécessaire, contacter votre Assistance technique avec l'information d'erreur. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Les pages imprimées n'ont pas été chargées de manière uniforme. Le support chargé est très recourbé. Retirez le support chargé dans le bac, retournez-le et rechargez-le. Les guides papier dans le bac d'alimentation sont trop éloignés des bords de la pile de feuilles chargées. Plaquez les guides papier contre les bords de la pile de feuilles chargées dans le bac d'alimentation. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-30 Résolution de problèmes de qualité Résolution de problèmes de qualité Symptôme Origine Solution Rien ne s'imprime ou des points blancs apparaissent sur la page imprimée. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez la cartouche et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas endommagée. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Le support utilisé est humide. Vérifiez l'humidité ambiante dans le local de stockage des supports. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le type de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas à celui qui est chargé dans le bac. Chargez le support approprié dans le bac. La prise de courant ne répond pas aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Utilisez une prise de courant répondant aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Plusieurs feuilles s'alimentent en même temps dans l'imprimante. Retirez les feuilles du bac et vérifiez si elles adhèrent les unes aux autres. Aérer le papier standard ou tout autre support utilisé et le replacer dans le bac. Le support n'est pas correctement chargé dans le(s) bac(s). Retirez le paquet de feuilles chargées dans le bac et alignez-en les bords. Rechargez-le dans le bac et réajustez les guides papier. Impression tout en noir ou autre couleur. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-31 L'image est trop pâle ; sa densité est faible. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. L'une des cartouches de toner est presque vide. Remplacer la cartouche de toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Le type de support n'est pas bien défini. Pour imprimer des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales, du papier épais ou brillant, spécifiez le type de support approprié dans le pilote d'imprimante. L'imprimé est trop foncé. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . L'image est floue; le fond est légèrement maculé ; l'imprimé manque de brillant. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Symptôme Origine Solution 7-32 Résolution de problèmes de qualité L'impression ou la densité couleur n'est pas homogène. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont défectueuses ou presque vides. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . L'imprimante ne repose pas sur une surface plane. Placez l'imprimante sur une surface robuste et plane. L'impression n'est pas régulière ou l'image est mouchetée. Le support utilisé est humide. Vérifiez l'humidité ambiante dans le local de stockage des supports. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches de toner et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. L'image n'est pas assez fixée ou se gomme facilement. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Le type de support n'est pas bien défini. Pour imprimer des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales, du papier épais ou brillant, spécifiez le type de support approprié dans le pilote d'imprimante. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-33 Il y a des traces de toner ou des parasites sur l'imprimé. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont peut-être défectueuses ou incorrectement installées. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Il y a des traces de toner sur le verso de la page (qu'il soit ou non imprimé). Il y a du toner dans le chemin papier. Imprimer plusieurs pages blanches en série pour enlever le toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Des motifs anormaux (blancs, noirs ou en couleur) se répètent à intervalles réguliers. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Une cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches toner qui sont à l'origine de l'image anormal. Remplacez la cartouche par une cartouche neuve. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-34 Résolution de problèmes de qualité Défauts d'image. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Une cartouche de toner fuit. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Une cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches toner qui sont à l'origine de l'image anormal. Remplacez la cartouche par une cartouche neuve. Des lignes ou bandes latérales apparaissent sur l'image. L'imprimante ne repose pas sur une surface plane. Placez l'imprimante sur une surface robuste et plane. Il y a du toner dans le chemin papier. Imprimer plusieurs pages blanches à la suite pour enlever le toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Restitution des couleurs aberrante. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches toner et vérifiez que le toner est également réparti sur chaque rouleau de cartouche, et réinstaller les cartouches toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont vides ou presque vides. Vérifiez si le message TONER X BAS ou REMETTRE TONER X apparaît sur le panneau de commande. Si nécessaire, remplacer la cartouche de la couleur indiquée. Registration couleurs incorrecte : les couleurs se fondent et varient d'une page à l'autre. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-35 Si le problème persiste, même après avoir suivi toutes les instructions ci-dessus, contacter votre Assistance technique en lui communiquant l'information d'erreur. Pour savoir qui contacter, consultez la fiche Besoin d'aide. La couleur reproduite est médiocre ou très faible en densité. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Symptôme Origine Solution 7-36 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance Les messages d'état, d'erreur et de service s'affichent sur l'écran des messages du panneau de commande et vous fournissent des indications sur l'état de fonctionnement de l'imprimante et vous aident à identifier certains problèmes. Ils s'effacent dès que la condition ayant provoqué leur affichage est modifiée. Messages d'état standard Message : Signification : Action : CALIBRAGE Après remplacement d'une cartouche de toner ou après le redémarrage de l'imprimante pour cause de variations ambiantes, l'imprimante s'interrompt automatiquement pour effectuer un cycle AIDC (Contrôle Auto-Densité Image). Ce processus assure un fonctionnement sûr et fiable de l'imprimante et une qualité d'impression optimale. Aucune action requise. ANNULATION TÂCHE Le travail est en cours d'annulation. ÉCON. ÉNERGIE Le mode Économie d'énergie est activé afin de réduire la consommation électrique de l'imprimante durant ses périodes d'inactivité. Lors de la réception d'un travail d'impression, l'imprimante repasse en mode d'alimentation normal. FW CONTRÔLEUR MISE À JOUR Mise à jour du firmware en cours. FW MOTEUR MISE À JOUR FW CONTRÔLEUR TÉLÉCHARGEMENT Le firmware est en cours de téléchargement. FW MOTEUR TÉLÉCHARGEMENT Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-37 Messages d'erreur FW CONTRÔLEUR TÉLÉC. COMPLET Le téléchargement du firmware est achevé. Aucune action requise. FW MOTEUR TÉLÉC. COMPLET IMPRESSION L'imprimante est en train d'imprimer. TRAITEMENT L'imprimante traite des données. PRÊT L'imprimante est allumée et prête à recevoir des données. REDÉMARRER L'imprimante est en train de redémarrer. PRÉCHAUF. L'imprimante effectue son cycle de préchauffage. ATTENDRE Il y a eu une interruption d'au moins une seconde pendant le traitement des données. Message : Signification : Action : VIE FUS. COURTE Le remplacement du fixateur est imminent. Prévoyez le remplacement du fixateur. FIN UNITÉ FUSION L'unité de fixation est arrivée en fin de vie. Remplacez l'unité de fixation et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. T/C X INCORRECT La cartouche de toner X est de type non homologué. Installez une cartouche de toner KONICA MINOLTA de type adéquat (AM, EU, AP ou GC). Voir page 5-7. Message : Signification : Action : 7-38 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance DÉCALAGE FORMAT Le format de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de format correct. DÉCALAGE TYPE Le type de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de type correct. BAC 2 VIDE Le Bac 2 est vide. Chargez un support dans le bac indiqué. Le Bac 2 n'est pas correctement installé. Installez correctement le bac indiqué. REMETTRE TONER X La cartouche de toner X est vide. Remplacer la cartouche de toner. TONER X BAS Le niveau du toner X est bas et après l'impression de 1 200 pages Letter/A4 à un taux de couverture de 5%, la cartouche devra être remplacée. Préparez la cartouche de toner couleur indiquée. TRANSFERT FIN Il est bientôt temps de remplacer la courroie de transfert. Prévoyez de remplacer l'unité courroie de transfert. FIN TRANSFERT La courroie de transfert est arrivée en fin de vie. Remplacez l'unité courroie de transfert et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-39 ROUL. TRANS. FIN Il est bientôt temps de remplacer le rouleau de transfert. Prévoyez de remplacer le rouleau de transfert. FIN ROUL. TRANS. Le rouleau de transfert est arrivé en fin de vie. Remplacez le rouleau de transfert et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. RÉCUP. PLEIN Le flacon de toner usagé est presque plein. Préparez un nouveau kit de toner usagé à installer. ERR. DISP. USB Une erreur s'est produite sur le périphérique USB connecté. Vérifiez le périphérique. ERR. DISP. RES. Une erreur s'est produite sur le périphérique réseau connecté. Vérifiez le périphérique. ERR. TRAV. R/V Une erreur s'est produite pendant l'impression recto-verso (2 faces). Assurez-vous de charger le support correct. ERR. ALIMENTATION Le format de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de format correct. COUVERCLE OUVERT AVANT Le capot avant de l'imprimante est ouvert. Fermez le capot avant de l'imprimante. Message : Signification : Action : 7-40 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance COUVERCLE OUVERT CÔTÉ Le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante est ouvert. Fermez le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante. TIROIR OUVERT BAC 2 Le Bac 2 est ouvert. Installez correctement le Bac 2. ENLEVER PAPIER BAC 1 Il reste du papier dans le Bac 1. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. ERR. FORMAT/TYPE RECTO/VERSO Le support chargé est incompatible avec l'impression recto-verso (2 faces). Assurez-vous de charger le support correct. ERREUR VIDEO UNDER RUN L'image d'impression est trop détaillée pour la vitesse de transmission. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Réduisez la quantité de données à imprimer et réessayez d'imprimer. ERREUR FW TÉLÉCHARG. Le téléchargement du firmware a échoué. Essayez de télécharger à nouveau. ERREUR COULEUR REGIST.1 Une erreur d'enregistrement couleur s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR COULEUR REGIST.2 Une erreur d'enregistrement couleur s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR IDC SENSOR Une erreur de capteur IDC s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-41 ERREUR CAPTEUR ENV. Une erreur de capteur d'environnement s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR DÉPASSEM. MÉM. L'imprimante a reçu plus de données qu'elle ne peut en traiter avec la capacité mémoire installée. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Réduisez la quantité de données à imprimer et réessayez d'imprimer. BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO INF. Bourrage dans l'unité recto-verso. Reportez-vous à "Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives" à la page 7-6, et dégagez le support coincé. BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO SUP. Bourrage dans l'unité recto-verso. BOURRAGE SUPP. ROUL. TRANSFERT Bourrage au niveau du rouleau de transfert. La feuille alimentée dans l'imprimante est restée coincée juste avant d'être éjectée dans le bac de réception. BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 1 Bourrage dans le Bac 1. BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 2 Un support s'est coincé lors du prélèvement dans le Bac 2. BOURRAGE SUPP. SORTIE Un support s'est coincé dans la fente de sortie. BOURRAGE SUPP. NON DÉFINI Un support s'est coincé dans un emplacement non spécifié. Message : Signification : Action : 7-42 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance BOURRAGE SUPP. UNITÉ FUSION Bourrage en sortie de l'unité de fixation. Reportez-vous à "Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives" à la page 7-6, et dégagez le support coincé. Les cartouches de toner fournies ne sont pas installées. Veillez à installer les cartouches de toner fournies. TONER X NON INSTALLÉ La cartouche de toner X n'est pas installée ou n'est pas d'un type homologué. Installez une cartouche de toner homologuée par KONICA MINOLTA. METTRE SUP.BAC X "FORMAT" "TYPE" Le bac X (Bac 1 ou 2) a été défini dans le pilote d'imprimante pour l'impression mais le bac X est vide. Chargez le support approprié dans le bac indiqué. BOUT. RÉCUP. PLEINE Le flacon de toner usagé est plein. Installez un nouveau flacon de toner usagé. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-43 Messages de maintenance Ces messages signalent des défauts de fonctionnement plus graves qui ne peuvent être corrigés que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. Dans ce cas, éteignez l'imprimante et rallumez-la. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur local ou votre service de maintenance agréé. Message : Signification : Action : ERREUR FATALE CODE: XXXX Une erreur a été détectée au niveau du composant "XXXX" indiqué dans le message. Les informations d'erreur apparaissent au bas de l'écran des messages. Redémarrez l'imprimante. Cela a souvent pour effet d'effacer le message d'erreur et l'impression peut reprendre. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre Support technique. 7-44 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance A Annexe A-2 Spécifications techniques Spécifications techniques Imprimante Type Imprimante couleur de bureau, à double rayon laser, de format A4 Système d'impression Système d'impression électro-photographique Système d'exposition 4 diodes laser et 1 miroir polygonal Système de développement Toner SMT mono-composant Résolution 2 400dpi x 600dpi x 1bit 1 200dpi x 600dpi x 1bit 600dpi x 600dpi x 1bit Délai de sortie de la première impression Recto seul Monochrome/Couleur : 16,0 secondes pour format A4 (papier standard) 15,9 secondes pour format Letter (papier standard) Vitesse d'impression Recto seul Monochrome/Couleur : 24,0 pages par minute sur format A4 ou Letter (papier standard) 25,0 pages par minute sur format A4 ou Letter (papier standard) Recto-verso (2 faces) Monochrome/Couleur : 24,0 feuilles par minute pour format A4 (papier standard : 2 pages ou moins) 25,0 feuilles par minute pour format Letter (papier standard : 2 pages ou moins) Spécifications techniques A-3 Formats des supports d'impression Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) Largeur papier :92 à 216 mm (3,6 à 8,5") Longueur papier :148 à 356 mm (5,8 à 14,0") Bac 2 Largeur papier : 92 à 216 mm (3,6 à 8,5") Longueur papier : 148 à 297 mm (5,8 à 11,7") Types de papier/Support d'impression •Papier standard (60 à 90 g/m2) •Recyclé (60 à 90 g/m2) •Enveloppes •Papier à en-tête •Étiquette •Papier Épais 1 (91 à 150 g/m2) •Papier Épais 2 (151 à 210 g/m2) •Cartes •Brillant 1 (100 à 128 g/m2) •Brillant 2 (129 à 158 g/m2) Capacité d'alimentation Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) Standard/Recycl: 1 feuille Enveloppe:1 enveloppe Étiquette/Carte postale/Épais 1/Épais 2/Brillant 1/ Brillant 2/Papier à en-tête: 1 feuille Bac 2 Standard/Recycl: 250 feuilles Étiquettes/Carte/Épais 1/Épais 2/Brillant 1/ Brillant 2/En-tête : 20 feuilles Capacité de sortie Bac de sortie : 200 feuilles (papier standard 80 g/m2) Température ambiante (en fonctionnement) 10 à 30°C (50 à 86°F) 􀀕􀀢Fluctuations inférieures à 10°C (18°F) en l'espace d'une heure. Humidité ambiante (en fonctionnement) 15 à 85% 􀀕􀀢Fluctuations de plus de 10% en l'espace d'une heure. A-4 Spécifications techniques Préchauffage 120 V : 38 secondes en moy. 220 V : 41 secondes en moy. 240 V : 36 secondes en moy. 􀀕􀀢Délai avant que l'imprimante soit prête à imprimer après mise sous tension à température ambiante (23 °C) Alimentation électrique 120 V, 60 Hz 220 à 240 V, 50 à 60 Hz Consommation électrique 120 V : 1000 W ou moins 220 à 240 V: 1100 W ou moins Ampérage 120 V : 9,4 A ou moins 220 à 240 V : 5,2 W ou moins Niveau de bruit En fonctionnement : 52 dB ou moins En veille : 39 dB ou moins Dimensions externes de l'imprimante Hauteur : 330 mm (13,0") Largeur : 419 mm (16,5") Profondeur : 523 mm (20,6") En excluant certaines pièces saillantes et le bac d'alimentation manuelle Poids Environ 22,0 kg (48,5 lb) (sans consommables) Environ 26,8 kg (59,1 lb) (avec consommables) Interface Compatible USB 2.0 (High Speed), Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX Mémoire standard 32 Mo Durée de vie de la machine 400 000 pages max. et pas plus de 5 ans Spécifications techniques A-5 Durée de vie des consommables Remplaçables par l'utilisateur Élément Durée de vie moyenne Cartouche de toner Cartouche standard fournie: 2 000 pages (K)(en continu) 1 000 pages (Y,M,C)(en continu) Cartouche de remplacement (Capacité standard): 3 000 pages (en continu) Cartouche de remplacement (Grande capacité): 5 000 pages (en continu) Coefficient de rendement déclaré conforme à ISO/IEC 19798. 􀀕􀀢La longévité de la cartouche de toner est plus réduite en cas d'impression intermittente. Kit toner usagé WB-P03 36 000 pages (Monochrome) (en continu) 9 000 pages (Couleur) (en continu) Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) Unité de fixation FU-P02 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) 􀀕􀀢Les valeurs ci-dessus indiquent le nombre de pages imprimées en mode recto seul sur papier de format A4/Letter avec une couverture toner de 5%. La durée de vie effective peut varier (être plus courte) suivant les paramètres d'impression (taux de couverture toner, format papier, etc.), le mode d'impression continu ou intermittent (à savoir impression fréquente de travaux d'une seule page) ou le type de support utilisé (ex. : support épais). Elle peut en outre varier suivant les conditions d'utilisation ambiantes de température et d'humidité. 􀀕􀀢Qu'ils impriment en couleur ou en noir et blanc, les imprimantes couleurs consomment une faible quantité de chaque toner pendant l'opération d'initialisation lors de la mise sous et hors tension de la machine et durant les réglages automatiques pour préserver la qualité d'impression. Même si une erreur de manipulation survient pendant l'impression en noir et blanc, du toner couleur est consommé et risque de devoir être remplacé. A-6 Spécifications techniques Remplaçables par le service de maintenance Élément Durée de vie moyenne Entraînement papier 300 000 pages Protection de l'environnement A-7 Protection de l'environnement En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR®, nous avons fait en sorte que cette machine soit conforme aux Directives ENERGY STAR en matière de consommation d'énergie. Qu'est-ce qu'un produit ENERGY STAR ? Un produit ENERGY STAR est doté d'une fonction spéciale lui permettant de passer automatiquement en "mode de consommation d'énergie réduite" au bout d'un certain délai d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR utilise l'énergie plus efficacement, réduit la consommation et les factures d'électricité et contribue à la protection de l'environnement. Index Index A-8 B Bac de sortie ...............................4-26 Bourrages Bac 1 .........................................7-18 Bac 2 ...........................................7-7 Section d'entraînement papier .7-18 Unité de fixation ........................7-12 Unité recto-verso ......................7-11 Brillant .........................................4-10 C Cartes ............................................4-9 Chargement des supports .........4-13 Chemin papier ..............................7-4 Consommables Cartouche de toner .....................5-2 Kit toner usagé WB-P03 ...........5-14 Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 ....5-17 Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 .....................................5-20 Unité de fixation FU-P02 ..........5-27 E Entretien .......................................6-2 Enveloppes ...................................4-6 É Écran des messages ...................3-4 Étiquettes .....................................4-7 I Impression recto-verso .............4-24 Imprimante Composants ...............................1-3 Index A-9 M Menu de configuration .................3-5 Messages ....................................7-36 Messages d'erreur .....................7-37 Messages de maintenance ........7-43 P Panneau de contrôle ....................3-2 Papier à en-tête ............................4-8 Papier épais ..................................4-5 Papier standard ............................4-4 Pilote d'imprimante ......................2-8 Affichage .....................................2-7 Désinstallation ............................2-6 Onglet Calque ...........................2-10 Onglet Mise en page .................2-10 Onglet Paramètres de base ......2-10 Onglet Qualité ...........................2-11 Pilote d'imprimante (PPD) Affichage .....................................2-7 Désinstallation ............................2-6 Prévention des bourrages papier .....................................7-3 Problèmes de bourrage .............7-21 Chemin papier ............................7-4 Correction ...................................7-5 Prévention ...................................7-3 Q Qualité d'impression ..................7-30 R Résolution de problèmes .............7-1 S Stockage des supports ..............4-27 Support Chargement ..............................4-13 Chemin papier ............................7-4 Prévention des bourrages ...........7-3 Suppression des bourrages ........7-5 Zone imprimable .......................4-11 T Type de support Brillant ......................................4-10 Cartes .........................................4-9 Enveloppes ................................4-6 Étiquettes ...................................4-7 Papier à en-tête .........................4-8 Papier épais ...............................4-5 Papier standard ..........................4-4 Z Zone imprimable ........................4-11 C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option2) Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction Termes et conditions......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 .................................................................... 2-5 Enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................... 2-5 Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 .................................................................................................. 2-5 Envoyer un code-requête ................................................................................................................. 2-6 Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) ............................................................... 2-8 Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102.......................................................................... 2-10 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application....................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3 Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Opération par l'écran tactile.............................................................................................................. 4-6 Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7 Table des matières-2 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils.................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils.......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.4 Adresse.............................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.6 Impr.................................................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.7 Menu................................................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Présentation....................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-9 Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................. 6-10 Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-11 6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-12 Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-12 Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-14 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-15 6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-15 Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-3 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel........................................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données........................................................................................... 6-18 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-20 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses........................................................................ 7-3 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo ..................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo........................................................................................................................ 7-4 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.1 Présentation ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par ID numérique............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11 Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11 Enregistrer les touches de menu principal...................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-12 Table des matières-4 Advanced Function Operations 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public................................................................................................................. 10-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses .......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse ................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses .............................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe............................................................................................................................................. 10-7 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre............................................................ 10-9 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public ......................... 10-10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse .................................................................................................................... 10-11 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse................................................................................................................ 10-11 11 Index 1 Introduction Advanced Function Operations 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces fonctions. Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Afin d'utiliser cette machine correctement et en toute sécurité, assurez-vous de lire le guide de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous souhaitez consulter les marques déposées et les copyrights, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur. Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la machine réelle. Termes et conditions L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Les activités et le contenu auquel vous accédez, que vous téléchargez ou que vous communiquez grâce aux indications du présent manuel restent de votre responsabilité exclusive. Ces activités sont également soumises aux règles de votre entreprises ainsi qu'à toute réglementation nationale applicable. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. et toutes les sociétés KONICA MINOLTA rejettent toute responsabilité quant à l'utilisation faite de l'Internet. 1.1 À propos de ce guide Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions MFP. Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs. 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants : Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Présentation Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Chapitre 6 Image Panel Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Chapitre 11 Index 1 Introduction 1-4 Advanced Function Operations 1.1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles, en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique. % Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes suivantes de la procédure. ? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. Advanced Function Operations 1-5 Introduction 1 Texte avec format spécial Touche [Arrêt] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-6 Advanced Function Operations 2 Présentation Advanced Function Operations 2-3 Présentation 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la section correspondante. ! Détails La disponibilité des fonctions avancées est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-201 fourni en option. 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, Image Panel et les fonctions d'enregistrement de photos ne sont pas disponibles. 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. p. 6-3 Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. p. 7-3 Fonction Présentation Page de référence Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. p. 8-3 2 Présentation 2-4 Advanced Function Operations 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 9-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 10-3 Advanced Function Operations 2-5 Présentation 2 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 Pour utiliser les fonctions des i-Option LK-101/LK-102, ces derniers doivent être enregistrés sur la MFP. Cette section décrit la procédure permettant d'enregistrer l’i-Option LK-101/LK-102 sur une MFP. 1 Faites l'acquisition de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. 2 Envoyez depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, un code requête. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer un code-requête" à la page 2-6. 3 Depuis l'ordinateur, procédez à l'enregistrement auprès du License Management Server (LMS). – Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS)" à la page 2-8. 4 Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, activez les fonctions des i-Option LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-10. Enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 Il existe deux méthodes pour enregistrer l’i-Option LK-101/LK-102 sur la MFP. - Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection C'est la procédure d'enregistrement depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP qui est décrite ici. Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 % Faites l'acquisition de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 à l'avance. L'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 contient le certificat-clé. Le certificat-clé se compose des éléments suivants : - Numéro de clé - Nom de la fonction - URL du site Web du License Management Server (LMS) ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102, contactez votre S.A.V. 2 Présentation 2-6 Advanced Function Operations Envoyer un code-requête 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Suivt]. 5 Appuyez sur [Paramètres de Licence]. Advanced Function Operations 2-7 Présentation 2 6 Appuyez sur [Obtenir Code Requête]. 7 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer le code-requête. 2 Présentation 2-8 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) 1 Accédez au site Web du License Management Server (LMS). 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Tapez le numéro de série et le code-requête obtenu après l'envoi d'un code-requête, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. 4 Tapez le numéro de clé contenu dans le certificat-clé, sélectionnez les options d'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. Advanced Function Operations 2-9 Présentation 2 5 Confirmez les informations d'enregistrement, et cliquez sur la touche [Generate License Code]. Le Code de Licence est établi. L'activation des fonctions de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 est subordonnée au Code de Licence. 2 Présentation 2-10 Advanced Function Operations Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 1 Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Installer Licence]. 2 Appuyez sur [Sélectionner Fonct.], sélectionnez la fonction à activer, puis sélectionnez [Oui] pour "Activer". 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Advanced Function Operations 2-11 Présentation 2 4 Appuyez sur [Code de Licence], et entrez le code de licence qui a été émis. 5 Appuyez sur [Installer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Après avoir activé la fonction, placez l'interrupteur en position Arrêt, puis patientez 10 secondes environ avant de le ramener en position Marche. Sinon, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Liste fonctions activées] pour consulter la liste des fonctions activées. 2 Présentation 2-12 Advanced Function Operations 3 Affectation des touches d'application Advanced Function Operations 3-3 Affectation des touches d'application 3 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP. 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application Touche d'application Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application. 2 Remarque Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les indications d'origine selon les besoins. 1 2 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Touche du menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la page 3-4. 2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-4 Advanced Function Operations Menu Application % Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour afficher le menu Application. – Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application. 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches d'application. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. 5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. Advanced Function Operations 3-5 Affectation des touches d'application 3 6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction. 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-6 Advanced Function Operations 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Advanced Function Operations 4-3 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes : - Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet. - Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet. - Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes. Le module Flash Player installé sur la MFP ne prend pas en charge les éléments suivants: - La fonction permettant de déclencher un événement par une pression sur une touche. - La fonction permettant de coller ou d'acquérir depuis le presse-papier des données comme des chaînes de caractères - Le menu contextuel. - La fonction d'impression Flash. - La fonction permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou de d'utiliser Flash par JavaScript. - Les écrans ne comportant pas des fenêtres-éclair. - La fonction Flash Signet. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server. - La fonction permettant de communiquer via XMLSocket. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Langages de balisage/ script pris en charge HTML, CSS, JavaScript Formats pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié (GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-4 Advanced Function Operations 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page d'accueil. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 4-5 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants : 2 Remarque Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile. 2 1 4 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8. 2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de défilement apparaît sur le côté droit. Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement apparaît en bas de l'écran. 3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour fermer ce dernier. 4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-6 Advanced Function Operations 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation Opération par l'écran tactile Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. - Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un élément. - Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point. - Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran. Opération par le panneau de contrôle Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste. 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. % Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran. – Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. – Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres. ! Détails Pour enregistrer un historique de formulaire, appuyez sur "Saisie" dans la liste déroulante Historique Saisie afin d'afficher un clavier à l'écran. Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C]. Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît. Advanced Function Operations 4-7 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants. Normal L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu. Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal. Rendu Parfait La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. Rendu intelligent Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-8 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations. 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils : Icône Nom du composant Description Retour Revient à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page. Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11. Favoris (Écrans) Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Favoris (Ajouter) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher. Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9. Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9. Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10. Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10. Advanced Function Operations 4-9 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) % Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés. Sélectionnez le favori permettant d'accéder à l'URL désirée. – Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter) % Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez le titre depuis la liste des favoris après l'avoir ajouté à la liste. 4.4.4 Adresse 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 4.4.5 Histor. 1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage. – Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois. 2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le favori sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des favoris par adresse Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des favoris par titre. Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le favori sélectionné. Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le favori sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime le favori sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre. Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-10 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr. 1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. 4.4.7 Menu % Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL. Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en pied de page. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 4-11 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web % Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. 4.5.1 Opération Page L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page. 4.5.2 Vue L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus. 4.5.3 Activer Onglet L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets. ! Détails Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets. Rubrique Description Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil. Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée. Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran. Rubrique Description Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre "Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent". Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7. Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus. Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus. Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images. Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu. CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu. Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu. Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures en Japonais dans un contenu. Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées. Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu, Jaune ou Orange. Rubrique Description Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet. Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée. Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif. Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul onglet d'ouvert. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-12 Advanced Function Operations 4.5.4 Réglages L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur. Rubrique Description Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer le certificat client. Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies. Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache. Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy. Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé. Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web. Advanced Function Operations 4-13 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou d'afficher ce fichier PDF. % Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître l'écran suivant. 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF. 2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF. ! Détails Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être imprimé. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-14 Advanced Function Operations 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié. – La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Advanced Function Operations 5-3 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Il est nécessaire également que l’i-Option LK-101 soit enregistré sur la MFP de destination. 5.1.1 Présentation PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Grâce au navigateur Web vous pouvez accéder directement à la MFP connectée au réseau, et utiliser PageScope Web Connection. On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP. Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles. En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP. 2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse]. 3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. Si le navigateur Web est configuré de manière à ne pas accepter les Cookies, la page de PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas s'afficher. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration du navigateur en termes de Cookies, voir "Réglages" à la page 4-12. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-4 Advanced Function Operations 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache". 3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Advanced Function Operations 5-5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.2 Organisation de l'écran Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous. 6 3 4 5 1 2 No. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne. 6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-6 Advanced Function Operations 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. ! Détails Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le navigateur Web de la MFP. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. % Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion]. – Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu. 2 Remarque Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté. Advanced Function Operations 5-7 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.3.2 Déconnexion % Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran. Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît. – Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-8 Advanced Function Operations 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre MFP connectée au réseau. - Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe. - Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte. 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée. % Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe. Connexion de boîte Liste des boîtes Rubrique Description N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un. Rubrique Description Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors de sa création. Page (affichage par 50 boîtes) Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur. Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. Advanced Function Operations 5-9 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 Liste de fichiers % Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Rubrique Description Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures. Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document. Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10. [Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée. Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être effectuée. Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures. Nom Document Affiche le nom du document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux. [Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-10 Advanced Function Operations 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés. Impression 1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. Advanced Function Operations 5-11 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK]. – Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer. – "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-12 Advanced Function Operations Suppression 1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous les documents. Advanced Function Operations 5-13 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-14 Advanced Function Operations 6 Image Panel Advanced Function Operations 6-3 Image Panel 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents", "édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles. Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. 6 Image Panel 6-4 Advanced Function Operations 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 6-5 Image Panel 6 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants : 1 3 4 5 6 2 8 7 9 No. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents. 3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de la zone Numérisation des données. 4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par exemple. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant un avertissement. 7 Zone Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin. Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône. L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés. 8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la zone Outil d'édition. 9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. 6 Image Panel 6-6 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination". 2 Remarque Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents. 1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données. – Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.]. – Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-9. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-10. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-11. Advanced Function Operations 6-7 Image Panel 6 2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-12. 3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données. – Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la page 6-13. – Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-14. 6 Image Panel 6-8 Advanced Function Operations – Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-15. Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-15. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des données. Advanced Function Operations 6-9 Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents. Numéris. 1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins. 3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.]. ! Détails Le mode numérisation permet de ne numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Rubrique Description Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original. Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux faces de l'original. Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Couleur Précisez si l'original doit être numérisé en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation. [Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso. 6 Image Panel 6-10 Advanced Function Operations Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document. % Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. Il n'est possible de sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. Il est possible de sélectionner un maximum de 10 documents dans la boîte. Pour charger depuis l'écran Copie, un document enregistré dans une boîte, les seules destinations disponibles à la sélection sont "Impr." et "Boîte Utilis.". Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Rubrique Description [Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. Advanced Function Operations 6-11 Image Panel 6 Charger depuis la mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se trouvent en mémoire externe. 2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir]. – Les fichiers qui peuvent être chargés depuis la mémoire externe sont les fichiers de type PDF, TIFF, JPEG et XPS. 3 Sélectionnez le document à charger. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir, "Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Il n'est possible de charger qu'un seul document. Si un document a déjà été chargé par numérisation ou depuis une boîte, il n'est pas possible de charger un document contenu dans une mémoire externe. Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être spécifiée comme destination. 6 Image Panel 6-12 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.4 Modifier Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins. Aperçu Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. ! Détails Il n'est pas possible d'afficher l'aperçu d'un document chargé depuis une mémoire externe. S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, seul l'aperçu du premier document peut être affiché. Combiner Documents Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document. % Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. ! Détails S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, il est possible de sélectionner "Impr." ou "Liste Destinat." comme destination des données. Retour à Dest. Numér. % Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source. Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Advanced Function Operations 6-13 Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Spécifier destination Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. 2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression. 3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si plusieurs documents ont été numérisés, il n'est pas possible de spécifier les réglages d'impression. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation, Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation. 6 Image Panel 6-14 Advanced Function Operations Spécifiez un destinataire 1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer. 2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées dans les carnets d'adresses de la machine. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. Si un document est chargé depuis une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Liste Destinat.". Si l'on charge un document enregistré dans une boîte depuis l'écran Copie, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner une autre destination que "Boîte Utilis.". Advanced Function Operations 6-15 Image Panel 6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous spécifiez "Impr." comme destination, ou sélectionnez une destination dans "Liste Destinat.", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média]. Seuls les documents numérisés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. 6.3.6 Envoyer vers Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées. 6 Image Panel 6-16 Advanced Function Operations 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. ! Détails Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant. Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP. L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte utilisateur souvent utilisée. 1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. Advanced Function Operations 6-17 Image Panel 6 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur. 6 Image Panel 6-18 Advanced Function Operations 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination souvent utilisée. 1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. Advanced Function Operations 6-19 Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination. 6 Image Panel 6-20 Advanced Function Operations 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci. 7 Enregistrement Photo Advanced Function Operations 7-3 Enregistrement Photo 7 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes : ! Détails Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6 966 octets 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-4 Advanced Function Operations 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest. 3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône". Advanced Function Operations 7-5 Enregistrement Photo 7 4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier]. – Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône". 5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo". 6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-6 Advanced Function Operations 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Advanced Function Operations 8-3 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1.1 Présentation Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes : - Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. - Lors de l'envoi de documents au moyen des fonctions de numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, il est possible de crypter le fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique. - Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le certificat de la MFP. - La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-102 est enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour chaque fonction. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-4 Advanced Function Operations 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier "PDF" ou "PDF compact", vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF. Rubrique Description Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom fichier". Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF. Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est spécifié pour le nom d'auteur. Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF. Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF. Advanced Function Operations 8-5 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur, si vous sélectionnez "PDF" ou "PDF compact" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique personnel. Si un certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF avant de transmettre les données. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Cryptage par mot de passe % Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage". Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits) Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de cryptage. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-6 Advanced Function Operations Paramètres Détaillés Cryptage par ID numérique % Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi [Permettre seulement Basse résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez [Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination. Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. ! Détails Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage. Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données. L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage". Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Advanced Function Operations 8-7 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.4 Impres. dir. La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet Impres. dir. 2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-8 Advanced Function Operations 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Advanced Function Operations 9-3 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle. - Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la page 6-16. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-4 Advanced Function Operations 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Panneau est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP sont disponibles. - Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. (1) Identification utilisateur Serveur (Gestion de Mon Panneau) Mon Panneau activé Mon Panneau activé (3) Envoi de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur Mon Panneau désactivé Advanced Function Operations 9-5 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. % Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. 2 Remarque L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-6 Advanced Function Operations 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau % Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires". 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants. 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Rubrique Description Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7. Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7. Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8. Paramètres Numérisation/ Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9. Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11. Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. Advanced Function Operations 9-7 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. 9.3.3 Réglage Langue % Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure % Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-8 Advanced Function Operations 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie rapide. L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base. En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin de faciliter les réglages multiples. Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Advanced Function Operations 9-9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut % Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif. histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir". Carnet d'adresses par Défaut % Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Carnet Adresses". Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-10 Advanced Function Operations Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Carnet adresses par défaut % Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse". Advanced Function Operations 9-11 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur % Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez "Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon". 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Écran Réglages Menu Principal Les touches de raccourci à afficher sur l'écran Menu Comm s'appellent touches de menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types de touches. Pour enregistrer en mémoire l'icône de raccourci comme touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône]. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-12 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer les touches de menu principal Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à des touches de menu principal. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies sur l'écran Menu Comm. 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut % Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié comme écran initial. Rubrique Description Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Réglage Fonction Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction du mode couleur, paramètre papier, réglage zoom, recto-verso/combinaison, et finition. Réglage Fonction Numérisation/Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/ Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage communication. Réglage Programme Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Réglage Progr. Numéris./ Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Advanced Function Operations 10-3 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées. Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur. ! Détails Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur. Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe fréquemment appelées. Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-4 Advanced Function Operations 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe). - Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index. - Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Carnet Adresses] ne soit pas possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses) (2) Accès au serveur (3) Obtention de Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses activé (1) Identification utilisateur Advanced Function Operations 10-5 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles : - Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP. 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. – Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses privé. – Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-6 Advanced Function Operations 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. 7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-7 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2.2 Groupe On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. – Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. – Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-8 Advanced Function Operations 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. – Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-9 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. ! Détails En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de carnets d'adresses. 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu. La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-10 Advanced Function Operations 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. Advanced Function Operations 10-11 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination. Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée. % Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche. % Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse. – [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type. – [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des données qu'elle contient. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-12 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index Advanced Function Operations 11-3 Index 11 11 Index A Activer Onglet 4-11 Adresse 4-9 Animation 4-11 B Barre d'outils 4-8 Boîte 5-8 C Cache 4-12, 5-4 Caractéristiques techniques 4-3 Carnet Adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Codage 4-11 Code d'accès 8-5 Code-requête 2-6 Connexion 5-6 Connexion à une boîte 5-8 Conventions du manuel 1-4 Cookies 4-12 Cryptage 8-5 CSS 4-11 D Déconnexion 5-7 E Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3 Envoyer vers 6-15 É Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11 F Favoris 4-9 Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11 G Groupe 10-7 H Histor. 4-9 Historique Formulaire 4-12 I ID numérique 8-6 Image 4-11 Image Panel 2-3, 6-3 Impres. dir. 8-7 Impression 4-10, 5-10 Infos Navigateur Web 4-12 i-Option LK-101 2-3, 2-5 i-Option LK-102 2-3, 2-5 J JavaScript 4-11 L License Management Server (LMS) 2-5, 2-8 Liste 4-11 Liste de fichiers 5-9 M Menu 4-10 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Principal 9-5 Mémoire externe 6-11, 6-15 Mémos Page 4-11 Mode Affichage 4-11 Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3 N Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11 O Opération Page 4-11 P Page d'accueil 4-11 PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4 PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9 Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11 Paramètres Touche Application 3-4 PDF 4-13, 8-5 Personnaliser 3-3, 6-16, 9-3 Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4 Proxy 4-12 R Rendu intelligent 4-7 Rendu Parfait 4-7 Rendu Rapide 4-11 Retour ligne auto 4-11 Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-12 Réglage Langue 9-7 Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12 Réglage Programme Copie 9-12 Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7 Réglages Copieur 9-8 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6 11-4 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index S Sécurité 4-12 Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11 Signature numérique 8-5 Spécifications 7-3 Supprimer 5-12 T Touche d'application 2-3, 3-3 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Traitement PDF 2-3, 8-3 V Vérification césures Japonais 4-11 Vue Important ! En raison des modifications apportées à la spécification de l'interface utilisateur, les images de l'interface utilisateur illustrées dans les guides de l'utilisateur peuvent différer légèrement des descriptions qui en sont faites. Les boutons "Annul", "OK", "Ferm.", "Oui" et "Non" ont été remplacés par des icônes et le texte de leur description peut encore contenir les mots "Annul", "OK", "Ferm.", "Oui" et "Non". Précédente conception : Nouvelle conception : bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 1-3 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5 Intérieur .............................................................................................................................................. 1-6 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 2-3 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 2-5 Intérieur .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454)................................... 3-3 Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224)............................................................................................................. 3-10 Recto................................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Face arrière ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 .................... 3-18 3.4 Séparateur du travail JS-602........................................................................................................ 3-20 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606........................................................................................................................ 3-21 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 ................................................................................................................ 3-23 3.6.1 Nom et fonction de chaque pièce.................................................................................................... 3-23 3.6.2 Unité d'insertion ............................................................................................................................... 3-24 Touches sur le panneau de contrôle................................................................................................ 3-24 Finition en utilisant l'unité d'insertion............................................................................................... 3-25 3.7 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519................................................................... 3-26 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506........................................................................................................ 3-27 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 .................... 3-28 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 ....................................................................................... 3-31 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine Le type de cette machine .................................................................................................................. 5-3 Papier................................................................................................................................................. 5-3 Spécifications mécaniques ................................................................................................................ 5-5 Chargeur de document double numérisation (uniquement pour bizhub C554/C454)....................... 5-5 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 5-6 Spécifications communes.................................................................................................................. 5-6 Fonction Copie................................................................................................................................... 5-7 Fonctions de numérisation................................................................................................................. 5-8 Fonctions Imprimante ...................................................................................................................... 5-10 Fonction réseau ............................................................................................................................... 5-13 Table des matières-2 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels Fonction fax (Kit fax FK-511) ............................................................................................................. 6-3 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624....................................................................................... 6-4 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 ....................................................................... 6-4 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ............................................................................................... 6-5 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ............................................................................................... 6-5 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 ............................................................................................... 6-6 Unité grande capacité LU-301........................................................................................................... 6-6 Unité grande capacité LU-204........................................................................................................... 6-7 Unité de finition FS-535 ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512............................................................................................................... 6-10 Kit de perforation PK-521 ................................................................................................................ 6-11 Séparateur du travail JS-602 ........................................................................................................... 6-11 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606............................................................................................................ 6-12 Unité d'insertion PI-505 ................................................................................................................... 6-12 Unité de finition FS-534 ................................................................................................................... 6-13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511............................................................................................................... 6-15 Kit de perforation PK-520 ................................................................................................................ 6-16 Unité de finition FS-533 ................................................................................................................... 6-16 Kit de perforation PK-519 ................................................................................................................ 6-18 Séparateur du travail JS-506 ........................................................................................................... 6-18 Unité d'authentification AU-102....................................................................................................... 6-20 Unité d'authentification AU-201....................................................................................................... 6-21 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) .................................................................................. 7-3 7.2 État de l'unité d'authentification.................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) .................................. 7-5 7.3.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine.................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ........................................ 7-7 7.4 Connexion à cette machine ......................................................................................................... 7-10 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) ......................................................... 7-11 7.5.1 Data Administrator ........................................................................................................................... 7-11 7.5.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................. 7-11 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows 7) .......................................................................... 7-11 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) .................................................................... 7-12 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows XP)........................................................................ 7-13 Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 ....... 7-13 7.5.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ...................................... 7-14 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) ......................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) .................................. 8-4 8.2.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine.................................................. 8-4 8.2.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ........................................ 8-7 8.3 Connexion à cette machine ........................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) ......................................................... 8-10 8.4.1 Data Administrator ........................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.4.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................. 8-10 Installation du Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows 7) ............................................................. 8-10 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) ............................................................ 8-11 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows XP)................................................................ 8-12 Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 ....... 8-12 8.4.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ...................................... 8-13 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-3 1 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) Recto N° Nom Description 1 Chargeur de document double numérisation Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. Cette unité numérise un original recto-verso simplement en exigeant que le papier soit introduit une seule fois dans la machine sans inversion. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 2 Levier de déblocage du capot gauche Utilisé pour ouvrir le Capot gauche. 3 Capot gauche Ouvrez le Capot gauche pour éliminer le bourrage papier. 4 Réglette latérale Ajustez cette réglette le long de la largeur de l'original. 5 Bac des originaux Chargez l'original dans ce magasin face vers le haut. Ouvrez le Bac des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 6 Panneau de contrôle Utilisé pour configurer divers paramètres de cette machine. 7 Bac de sortie des originaux L'original numérisé sort dans ce bac. 8 Stylet Utilisé pour sélectionner un menu à l'Écran tactile, ou pour entrer des caractères. 9 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter une unité de mémoire externe (unité de mémoire USB) à cette machine. 1 1-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 10 Porte de droite Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. 11 Levier de déblocage de la porte de droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte de droite. 12 Introducteur manuel Utilisez ce magasin pour imprimer ou copier sur un papier au format irrégulier, des transparents, des cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), des enveloppes ou des planches d'étiquettes. L'introducteur manuel peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles d'Épais 1, 20 feuilles d'Epais 1+, 20 feuilles d'Épais 2, 20 feuilles d'Épais 3, 20 feuilles d'Épais 4, 20 feuilles de transparents, 20 feuilles de cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes ou papier à onglets et 10 feuilles d'enveloppes ou de papier bannière. 13 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 14 Magasin 1, Magasin 2 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ces magasins peuvent contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3, respectivement. 15 Porte frontale inférieure Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer le Réservoir de toner usagé ou l'Unité image et pour nettoyer la Vitre de la tête d'impression. 16 Porte frontale supérieure Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer une Cartouche de toner. 17 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu lorsque cette machine reçoit une tâche. Si une tâche est actuellement spoulée, ce voyant devient bleu. 18 Voyant d'état (voyant d'impression) Clignote en blanc durant l'impression normale. 19 Touche Alimentation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Lorsque l'alimentation est désactivée, la machine entre en mode économie d'énergie, et la LED de la touche Alimentation devient orange. 20 Voyant d'état (voyant d'avertissement ou d'arrêt) Indique l'état de cette machine en clignotant ou en s'allumant. Clignotant orange : Avertissement Allumé orange : La machine s'est arrêtée. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-5 1 Face arrière N° Nom Description 1 Cordon d'alimentation Utilisé pour alimenter cette machine. 2 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter l'Unité d'authentification AU-102 ou l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. 3 Port USB (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante USB. 4 Connecteur réseau (10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T) Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante réseau ou comme scanner réseau. 1 1-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Intérieur N° Nom Description 1 Vitre d'exposition Utilisée pour charger l'original. 2 Levier du capot de l'unité de fixation Ouvrez ce levier pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de fixation. 3 Unité de fixation Utilisé pour mélanger le toner au papier à l'aide de la chaleur et de la pression. 4 Unité recto-verso automatique Utilisée pour inverser le papier lors d'une impression recto-verso. 5 Unité tambour Utilisée pour créer une image imprimée. 6 Languette de déblocage Utilisée pour enlever l'Unité tambour. 7 Nettoyeur fil de charge Utilisé pour nettoyer le Fil de charge électrostatique lorsqu'une erreur d'image se produit. 8 Réservoir de toner usagé Utilisé pour récupérer les toners usagés. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-7 1 9 Nettoyeur tête d'impression Utilisé pour nettoyer la surface de la Vitre de la tête d'impression lors du remplacement de l'Unité tambour. 10 Interrupteur principal Actionner cet interrupteur pour mettre la machine en marche ou l'arrêter. 11 Cartouche de toner Cette machine utilise une Cartouche de toner en quatre couleurs : cyan (C), magenta (M), jaune (Y), et noir (K). Une image pleine couleur est créée par la combinaison des quatre couleurs de toner. 12 Compteur total Compte le nombre de pages imprimées jusqu'à ce jour. 13 Vitre de numérisation Utilisée pour numériser une image d'original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. 14 Réglette Original Charger l'original le long de cette réglette. Cette réglette est aussi utilisée pour mesurer le format de l'original chargé. 15 Guide d'ouverture et de fermeture Le levier qui verrouille le guide pour numériser le face arrière d'un original. Ouvrir ce guide pour dégager un bourrage papier ou pour nettoyer la Vitre de numérisation (arrière). 16 Vitre de numérisation (arrière) Utilisée pour nettoyer la face arrière d'un original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. N° Nom Description 1 1-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-3 2 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) Recto N° Nom Description 1 Panneau de contrôle Utilisé pour configurer divers paramètres de cette machine. 2 Stylet Utilisé pour sélectionner un menu à l'Écran tactile, ou pour entrer des caractères. 3 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter une unité de mémoire externe (unité de mémoire USB) à cette machine. 4 Porte de droite Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. 5 Levier de déblocage de la porte de droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte de droite. 6 Introducteur manuel Utilisez ce magasin pour imprimer ou copier sur un papier au format irrégulier, des transparents, des cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), des enveloppes ou des planches d'étiquettes. L'introducteur manuel peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles d'Épais 1, 20 feuilles d'Epais 1+, 20 feuilles d'Épais 2, 20 feuilles d'Épais 3, 20 feuilles d'Épais 4, 20 feuilles de transparents, 20 feuilles de cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes ou papier à onglets et 10 feuilles d'enveloppes ou de papier bannière. 7 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 2 2-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8 Magasin 1, Magasin 2 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ces magasins peuvent contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3, respectivement. 9 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer la Cartouche de toner, le Réservoir de toner usagé ou l'Unité tambour et pour nettoyer la Vitre de la tête d'impression. 10 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu lorsque cette machine reçoit une tâche. Si une tâche est actuellement spoulée, ce voyant devient bleu. 11 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 12 Voyant d'état (voyant d'impression) Clignote en blanc durant l'impression normale. 13 Touche Alimentation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Lorsque l'alimentation est désactivée, la machine entre en mode économie d'énergie, et la LED de la touche Alimentation devient orange. 14 Voyant d'état (voyant d'avertissement ou d'arrêt) Indique l'état de cette machine en clignotant ou en s'allumant. Clignotant orange : Avertissement Allumé orange : La machine s'est arrêtée. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-5 2 Face arrière N° Nom Description 1 Cordon d'alimentation Utilisé pour alimenter cette machine. 2 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter l'Unité d'authentification AU-102 ou l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. 3 Port USB (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante USB. 4 Connecteur réseau (10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T) Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante réseau ou comme scanner réseau. 2 2-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Intérieur N° Nom Description 1 Vitre d'exposition Utilisée pour charger l'original. 2 Levier du capot de l'unité de fixation Ouvrez ce levier pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de fixation. 3 Unité de fixation Utilisé pour mélanger le toner au papier à l'aide de la chaleur et de la pression. 4 Unité recto-verso automatique Utilisée pour inverser le papier lors d'une impression recto/verso. 5 Unité tambour Utilisée pour créer une image imprimée. 6 Languette de déblocage Utilisée pour enlever l'Unité tambour. 7 Nettoyeur fil de charge Utilisé pour nettoyer le Fil de charge électrostatique lorsqu'une erreur d'image se produit. 8 Réservoir de toner usagé Utilisé pour récupérer les toners usagés. 9 Nettoyeur tête d'impression Utilisé pour nettoyer la surface de la Vitre de la tête d'impression lors du remplacement de l'Unité tambour. 10 Interrupteur principal Actionner cet interrupteur pour mettre la machine en marche ou l'arrêter. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-7 2 11 Cartouche de toner Cette machine utilise une Cartouche de toner en quatre couleurs : cyan (C), magenta (M), jaune (Y), et noir (K). Une image pleine couleur est créée par la combinaison des quatre couleurs de toner. 12 Compteur total Compte le nombre total de pages imprimées jusqu'à ce jour. 13 Vitre de numérisation Utilisée pour numériser une image d'original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. 14 Réglette Original Charger l'original le long de cette réglette. Cette réglette est aussi utilisée pour mesurer le format de l'original chargé. N° Nom Description 2 2-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-3 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale Numérise l'original dans la section numérisation et imprime une image numérisée dans la section imprimante. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme "machine", "unité principale" ou "C554/C454" dans le manuel. 2 Kit Fax FK-511 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Ce kit permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 3 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La Table de travail WT-506 est requise pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-102. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 4 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. Le Kit de montage MK-735 est requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. Cette unité peut également être installée sur la Table de travail WT-506. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 5 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand Unité d'authentification est installée. 6 Support clavier KH-102 Installer ce support pour utiliser un clavier externe. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 7 Kit de sécurité SC-508 Supporte le pare-copie et les fonctions de copie du mot de passe afin de prévenir une copie non autorisée. 8 Kit de montage MK-730 Utilisé pour imprimer des données sur du papier bannière. 9 Contrôleur image IC-414 Contrôleur image intégré. Installez cette unité améliore la qualité de l'impression. Le Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 est requis pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. De même, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 10 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Permet de charger jusqu'à 3000 feuilles de format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité grande capacité. Pour installer l'Unité grande capacité, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 11 Unité grande capacité LU-204 Permet de charger jusqu'à 2500 feuilles de format SRA3 ou 11 e 17 (A3). Pour changer le format papier, contactez votre S.A.V. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité grande capacité. Pour installer l'Unité grande capacité, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-5 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 12 Bureau DK-510 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 13 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Cette unité est désignée sous le terme MGC (intégré) dans le manuel. 14 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et autant dans le magasin du bas. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble double d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 15 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et d'utiliser le plateau du bas comme casier de rangement. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble simple d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 16 Bureau DK-705 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 17 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 18 Unité de finition FS-534 Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-534, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 19 Kit de perforation PK-520 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 20 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 21 Unité de finition FS-535 Unité de finition installée dans bizhub C554. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-535, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 22 Kit de perforation PK-521 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 23 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535 pour permettre le pliage Z ou perforer des trous. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité de pliage en Z. 24 Séparateur du travail JS-602 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Récupère les pages imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. 25 Unité d'insertion PI-505 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535 pour permettre l'insertion d'une page de garde entre les feuilles copiées ou imprimées. Cette unité vous permet également une utilisation manuelle de l'unité de finition (seul le magasin inférieur est disponible). N° Nom Description Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 26 Bac de sortie OT-506 Récupère les pages imprimées. 27 Unité de finition FS-533 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. 28 Kit de perforation PK-519 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-533. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 29 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Cette unité trie les feuilles imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. Les options suivantes sont intégrées à cette machine et ne sont pas représentées sur la figure ci-dessus. 30 Unité Tampon SP-501 Tamponne un original numérisé lors de l'envoi d'un fax. Cette unité permet de vérifier si l'original a été numérisé. 31 Tampon de rechange Émission 2 Tampon de remplacement pour l'Unité Tampon SP-501. 32 Kit d'interface locale EK-606 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le clavier externe. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 33 Kit d'interface locale EK-607 Installez cette unité pour la connexion au clavier externe ou à un périphérique Bluetooth. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur et d'un récepteur pour la communication Bluetooth. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 34 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 Cette unité est requise pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. 35 Option Internet LK-101 v3 Supporte la fonction de navigateur Web qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 36 i-Option LK-102 v3 Supporte la fonction de traitement PDF qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 37 i-Option LK-105 v3 Supporte la fonction de PDF rechercheable qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 38 i-Option LK-106 Utilisée pour ajouter une police code à barres qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 39 i-Option LK-107 Utilisée pour ajouter une police unicode qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 40 i-Option LK-108 Utilisée pour ajouter une police OCR qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 41 Kit de mise à jour UK-204 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le navigateur Web, le traitement PDF, les PDF rechercheables, Mon Panneau, Mon Adresse, ou les polices spéciales. Les options ci-après ne sont pas représentées sur la figure. 42 Chauffage HT-509 Empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier. Pour installer le Chauffage HT-509, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 43 Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734 Met en marche/arrête le déshumidificateur/chauffage. 44 Kit de montage MK-735 Requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-7 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 Recto L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Bac de sortie OT-506 et du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410. L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ou du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 et du Bac de sortie OT-506. N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 3 MGC (intégré) Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 1 000 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 N° Nom Description 4 Porte inférieure droite Ouvrez cette porte pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de transport du Magasin 3 ou du Magasin 4. 5 Levier de déblocage de la porte inférieure droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte inférieure droite. 6 Magasin 3 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. 7 Magasin 4/Casier de rangement Utilisé comme Casier de rangement lors de l'installation du Meuble simple d'alimentation papier. Ce casier vous permet de charger jusqu'à 500 feuilles lorsque le Meuble double d'alimentation papier est installé. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-9 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 Face arrière L'illustration ci-dessous présente l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210, du Kit fax FK-511 et du Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734. N° Nom Description 1 Interrupteur d'alimentation du chauffage Utilisé pour mettre en marche ou arrêter le déshumidificateur/ chauffage. Cette fonction empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier lorsque le chauffage est mis en marche. Le déshumidificateur/chauffage est disponible lorsque vous achetez le Meuble simple/double d'alimentation papier, le MGC (intégré) ou le Bureau. 2 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT1) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. 3 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT2) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. 4 Prise téléphonique 2 (LINE PORT2) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. 5 Prise téléphonique 1 (LINE PORT1) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-11 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale Numérise l'original dans la section numérisation et imprime une image numérisée dans la section imprimante. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme "machine", "unité principale" ou "C364/C284/C224" dans le manuel. 2 Couvre-original OC-511 Utilisé pour fixer les originaux chargés. Il est désigné sous le terme Couvre-original dans le manuel. 3 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. De plus, cette unité retourne et numérise automatiquement les originaux recto-verso. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 4 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. Cette unité numérise un original recto-verso simplement en exigeant que le papier soit introduit une seule fois dans la machine sans inversion. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 5 Kit Fax FK-511 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Ce kit permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 6 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La Table de travail WT-506 est requise pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-102. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 7 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. Le Kit de montage MK-735 est requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. Cette unité peut également être installée sur la Table de travail WT-506. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 8 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand Unité d'authentification est installée. 9 Kit de sécurité SC-508 Supporte le pare-copie et les fonctions de copie du mot de passe afin de prévenir une copie non autorisée. 10 Support clavier KH-102 Installer ce support pour utiliser un clavier externe. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 11 Kit de montage MK-730 Utilisé pour imprimer des données sur du papier bannière. 12 Contrôleur image IC-414 Contrôleur image installé dans bizhub C364/bizhub C284. Installez cette unité améliore la qualité de l'impression. Le Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 est requis pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. De même, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 13 Bureau DK-705 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 14 Bureau DK-510 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 15 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Cette unité est désignée sous le terme MGC (intégré) dans le manuel. 16 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et autant dans le magasin du bas. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble double d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 17 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et d'utiliser le plateau du bas comme casier de rangement. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble simple d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 18 Unité de finition FS-534 Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-534, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 19 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 20 Kit de perforation PK-520 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 21 Unité de finition FS-533 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. 22 Kit de perforation PK-519 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-533. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 23 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Cette unité trie les feuilles imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. Les options suivantes sont intégrées à cette machine et ne sont pas représentées sur la figure ci-dessus. 24 Unité Tampon SP-501 Tamponne un original numérisé lors de l'envoi d'un fax. Cette unité permet de vérifier si l'original a été numérisé. 25 Tampon de rechange Émission 2 Tampon de remplacement pour l'Unité Tampon SP-501. 26 Kit d'interface locale EK-606 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le clavier externe. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 27 Kit d'interface locale EK-607 Installez cette unité pour la connexion au clavier externe ou à un périphérique Bluetooth. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur et d'un récepteur pour la communication Bluetooth. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 28 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 Cette unité est requise pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414 sur bizhub C364 ou bizhub C284. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-13 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 29 Option Internet LK-101 v3 Supporte la fonction de navigateur Web qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 30 i-Option LK-102 v3 Supporte la fonction de traitement PDF qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 31 i-Option LK-105 v3 Supporte la fonction de PDF rechercheable qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 32 i-Option LK-106 Utilisée pour ajouter une police code à barres qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 33 i-Option LK-107 Utilisée pour ajouter une police unicode qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 34 i-Option LK-108 Utilisée pour ajouter une police OCR qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 35 Kit de mise à jour UK-204 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le navigateur Web, le traitement PDF, les PDF rechercheables, Mon Panneau, Mon Adresse, ou les polices spéciales. Les options ci-après ne sont pas représentées sur la figure. 36 Chauffage HT-509 Empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier. Pour installer le Chauffage HT-509, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 37 Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734 Met en marche/arrête le déshumidificateur/chauffage. 38 Kit de montage MK-735 Requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. N° Nom Description Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 Recto L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 et du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410. L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ou du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 et du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624. N° Nom Description 1 Presse-original Permet de maintenir en place les originaux chargés. 2 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 3 MGC (intégré) Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 1 000 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. 4 Molette de dégagement de bourrage Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-15 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 N° Nom Description 5 Levier de déblocage du capot gauche Utilisé pour ouvrir le Capot gauche. 6 Capot gauche Ouvrez le Capot gauche pour éliminer le bourrage papier. 7 Réglette latérale Ajustez cette réglette le long de la largeur de l'original. 8 Bac des originaux Chargez l'original dans ce magasin face vers le haut. Ouvrez le Bac des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 9 Bac de sortie des originaux L'original numérisé sort dans ce bac. Ouvrez le Bac de sortie des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 10 Porte inférieure droite Ouvrez cette porte pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de transport du Magasin 3 ou du Magasin 4. 11 Levier de déblocage de la porte inférieure droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte inférieure droite. 12 Magasin 3 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-16 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 Face arrière L'illustration ci-dessous présente l'unité principale équipée du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624, du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210, du Kit fax FK-511 et du Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734. 13 Magasin 4/Casier de rangement Utilisé comme Casier de rangement lors de l'installation du Meuble simple d'alimentation papier. Ce casier vous permet de charger jusqu'à 500 feuilles lorsque le Meuble double d'alimentation papier est installé. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. N° Nom Description N° Nom Description 1 Interrupteur d'alimentation du chauffage Utilisé pour mettre en marche ou arrêter le déshumidificateur/ chauffage. Cette fonction empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier lorsque le chauffage est mis en marche. Le déshumidificateur/chauffage est disponible lorsque vous achetez le Meuble simple/double d'alimentation papier, le MGC (intégré) ou le Bureau. 2 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT1) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-17 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 3 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT2) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. 4 Prise téléphonique 2 (LINE PORT2) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. 5 Prise téléphonique 1 (LINE PORT1) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. N° Nom Description 3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 3-18 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.3 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-19 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 3 3 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 4 Capot de l'unité de transport horizontal Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans le sens horizontal de transport. 5 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS7] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 6 Levier de guidage [FS6] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Levier de guidage [FS8] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 8 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 9 Levier de guidage [FS3] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 10 Levier de guidage [FS4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 11 Kit de perforation L'installation de l'unité de perforation sur l'unité de finition permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées pour les archiver. 12 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 13 Levier de guidage [FS9] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 14 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche de l'unité de finition pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 15 Poignée [SD2] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 16 Poignée [SD1] Saisir cette poignée pour tirer ou repousser la Piqueuse à cheval. 17 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [SD3] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 18 Piqueuse à cheval Tirez cette unité pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 19 Bac de sortie Pliage Utilisé pour sortir le papier plié/relié. 20 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS2] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 21 Levier de guidage [FS1] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 22 Cartouche d'agrafes Tirez cette cartouche de la Piqueuse à cheval pour dégager des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 23 Levier de guidage [SD4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 24 Levier de guidage [SD5] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 25 Capot de sortie Ce capot s'ouvre automatiquement à la sortie du papier. N° Nom Description 3 Séparateur du travail JS-602 3-20 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.4 3.4 Séparateur du travail JS-602 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Couvercle du séparateur du travail Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-21 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606 3 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606 N° Nom Description 1 Pliage en z/Unité de transport Retirez cette unité pour dégager le bourrage papier. 2 Levier de guidage [FN1] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 3 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 4 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou pour éliminer les confettis de perforation. 5 Levier de guidage [FN6] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 6 Levier de guidage [FN7] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Levier de guidage [FN8] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 3 Pliage en Z ZU-606 3-22 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.5 8 Poignée [FN2] Utilisez cette poignée pour insérer et sortie le pliage en Z. 9 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FN5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité pliage en Z. 10 Levier de guidage [FN3] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 11 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FN4] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité pliage en Z. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-23 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3.6.1 Nom et fonction de chaque pièce N° Nom Description 1 Panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion Utilisez ce panneau en cas d'utilisation manuelle de l'unité de finition. Pour de plus amples détails sur la procédure d'utilisation de l'unité d'insertion, reportezvous à la page 3-24. 2 Guide papier du magasin inférieur Lors du chargement du papier à couverture, faites glisser ce guide pour le faire correspondre au format du papier. 3 Magasin inférieur Chargez le papier à couverture dans ce magasin. 4 Magasin supérieur Chargez le papier à couverture dans ce magasin. 5 Guide papier du magasin supérieur Lors du chargement du papier à couverture, faites glisser ce guide pour le faire correspondre au format du papier. 6 Levier de déblocage de l'unité supérieure Pour dégager un bourrage papier, levez ce levier et faites glisser l'unité supérieure vers la gauche. 3 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3-24 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.6 3.6.2 Unité d'insertion Touches sur le panneau de contrôle Quand l'Unité d'insertion PI-505 est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-535, vous pouvez commander manuellement l'Unité d'insertion FS-535 à l'aide du Panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion. N° Nom Description 1 Lampe d'agrafage en coin Indique que l'agrafage en coin est sélectionné. 2 Lampe agrafage centre + pliage Indique que l'agrafage au milieu est sélectionné. 3 Finition Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la finition. 4 Lampe 2 trous Indique que 2 trous est sélectionné. 5 Lampe 3 trous Indique que 3 trous est sélectionné. 6 Sélec. Perfo. Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le type de trou perforé. 7 Marche/Arrêt Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer les opérations d'insertion de feuilles. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche durant le fonctionnement, cette unité s'arrête. 8 Lampe 4 trous Indique que 4 trous est sélectionné. 9 Lampe pliage en trois Indique que Pliage en 3 est sélectionné. 10 Lampe agrafage en 2 points Indique que Agrafage 2 points est sélectionné. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-25 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3 Finition en utilisant l'unité d'insertion 0 Seul le magasin inférieur peut être utilisé comme magasin papier. Le magasin supérieur n'est pas disponible. 1 Mettre du papier dans le bac inférieur de l'unité d'insertion et ajuster la réglette latérale au format du papier. % Chargez l'original de manière à ce que le bord haut soit en face de l'arrière de la machine. % Pour utiliser l'agrafage en coin ou l'option en 2 points, chargez le papier face vers le haut. % Pour la perforation, chargez le papier face vers le haut. % Pour la reliure, chargez le côté rection du papier relié face vers le bas. % Pour le Pliage en 3, charger l'extérieur du papier plié en trois face vers le bas. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Finition et sur la touche Sélec. Perfo et sélectionnez la finition souhaitée. % Pour configurer les réglages de finition, appuyez sur la touche Finition pour allumer la LED. Pour configurer les réglages de perforation, appuyez sur la touche Sélec. Perfo. pour allumer la LED. % Les réglages de perforation sont disponibles en combinaison avec l'option d'agrafage en coin ou en deux points. 3 Appuyez sur la touche Marche/arrêt. % En cas d'actionnement de la touche Marche/Arrêt en cours d'opération, celle-ci sera interrompue. 3 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519 3-26 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.7 3.7 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519 N° Nom Description 1 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS1] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 2 Levier de déblocage du kit de perforation [FS2] Utilisé pour ouvrir le kit de perforation lors du retrait du bac à déchets de perforation. 3 Kit de perforation Vous pouvez perforer les feuilles imprimées afin de les archiver en installant le kit de perforation sur l'unité de finition. 4 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche de l'unité de finition pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 5 Levier de déblocage Utilisé pour débloquer et déplacer l'unité de finition et l'unité principale afin d'éliminer un bourrage papier. 6 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 7 Extension plateau Tirez ce magasin pour manipuler du papier de plus de 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) de long w. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-27 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506 3 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 3 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3-28 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.9 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-29 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. 3 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 4 Capot de l'unité de transport horizontal Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans le sens horizontal de transport. 5 Agrafeuse Déplacez cette unité vers l'avant pour dégager un bourrage papier. 6 Levier de guidage [FS2] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS1] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 3 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3-30 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.9 8 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 9 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 10 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche du kit de perforation pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 11 Levier de guidage [FS4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 12 Numérot Activez la numérotation pour déplacer l'agrafeuse vers l'avant pour dégager un bourrage papier. 13 Poignée [SD2] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 14 Piqueuse à cheval Tirez cette unité pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 15 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [SD3] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 16 Poignée [SD1] Saisir cette poignée pour tirer ou repousser la Piqueuse à cheval. 17 Unité de transport [FS3] Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de transport. 18 Kit de perforation L'installation de l'unité de perforation sur l'unité de finition permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées pour les archiver. 19 Capot supérieur Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 20 Cartouche d'agrafes Tirez cette cartouche de la Piqueuse à cheval pour dégager des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 21 Poignée [SD5] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 22 Poignée [SD4] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 23 Bac de sortie Pliage Utilisé pour récupérer les pages imprimées via la fonction pliage/reliure. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-31 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 3 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 N° Nom Description 1 Porte supérieure Ouvrez cette porte pour charger le papier. 2 Rouleau prise papier Tourne lorsque le papier est alimenté dans la machine. 3 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 4 Levier de déblocage Appuyez sur cette touche pour déconnecter le Unité grande capacité de l'unité principale. 3 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 3-32 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.10 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 4-3 4 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles Type de papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier Papier fin 13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2) Magasin 1 : 500 feuilles Magasin 2 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 2 500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 3000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2500 feuilles Papier ordinaire Papier recyclé Recto seul*1 Papier spécial*2 Papier à en-tête*3 Papier couleur*4 Papier Util. 1*5 Papier Util. 2*5 15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 150 feuilles Magasin 1 : 500 feuilles Magasin 2 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 2 500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 3000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2500 feuilles Épais 1 Papier Util. 3*5 24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Magasin grande capacité LU-301 : 2500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2000 feuilles Épais 1+ Papier Util. 4*5 32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1750 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 1450 feuilles Épais 2 Papier Util. 5*5 42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2 Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1550 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 1250 feuilles 4 4-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 *1 Papier qui n'a pas à être imprimé sur les deux faces (par exemple, lorsqu'une des faces est déjà imprimée). *2 Papier fin et autres papiers spéciaux. *3 Papier sur lequel est imprimé une raison sociale, du texte prédéfini ; etc. *4 Papier couleur. *5 Papier enregistré comme l'un des types fréquemment utilisés. Pour les réglages relatifs au grammage du papier et l'ajustement du support, contactez votre S.A.V. REMARQUE Tout papier autre que le papier ordinaire, comme les transparents et le papier de couleur, est appelé papier spécial. Lors du chargement de papier spécial dans le magasin, spécifiez le type de papier correct. Sinon, cela peut causer un bourrage papier ou une erreur image. Conseils - Pour les réglages relatifs au grammage du papier et l'ajustement du support, contactez votre S.A.V. - Pour imprimer sur le verso d'une feuille déjà imprimée, chargez le papier dans l'Introducteur manuel, et sélectionnez [Rect-Vers Face 2] dans le réglage papier, ce qui améliore la qualité d'impression de l'image. [Rect-Vers Face 2] est disponible lorsque le papier ordinaire, Épais 1, Épais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 ou Épais 4 est sélectionné pour une impression à partir de l'Introducteur manuel. - Si vous sélectionnez papier fin, Épais 3, ou Épais 4 pour l'impression, la qualité image qui en résulte pourrait ne pas être conforme aux attentes. - Ne pas utiliser de papier plus fin que 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5). - Pour charger de l'Épais 4 dans le magasin papier, placez le papier 8-1/2 e 11 ou A4 dans le sens v et le papier 11 e 17 ou A3 dans le sens w. - Lorsque vous chargez un transparent dans le magasin, placez-les dans le sens v. - Les transparents ne peuvent être imprimés qu'en noir. - Le Kit de montage MK-730 est nécessaire pour imprimer sur le papier bannière. Épais 3 Papier Util. 6*5 55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1300 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204: 1000 feuilles Épais 4 68-3/8 lb à 79-13/16 lb (257 g/m2 à 300 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Transparent - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6 - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Enveloppe - Introducteur manuel : 10 feuilles Planche d'étiquettes - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Papier à onglets - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Papier rouleau 33-13/16 lb à 55-7/8 lb (127 g/m2 à 210 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 10 feuilles Type de papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-3 5 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine Le type de cette machine Papier Élément Caractéristiques Type Scanner, imprimante, bureau ou autonome (avec le Bureau, le Meuble d'alimentation papier ou le MGC (intégré) installé) Porte-document Stationnaire (numérisation miroir) Photo conducteur OPC Source lumineuse Illumination via une source lumineuse LED Système copie Copie laser électrostatique Système de développement Système de développement HMT bi-composant à sec Système de fixation Fixation par courroie Type Port d'introduction du papier (nombre maximal de feuilles à charger) Unité recto-verso automatique Magasin 1 Magasin 2 Introducteur manuel Types de papier disponibles Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) - o Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) En-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier couleur (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier spécial recto (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) - Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o 5 5-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. *2 Papier bannière Largeur : 8-1/4 à 11-11/16 pouces (210 mm à 297 mm) Longueur : 18 à 47-1/4 pouces (457,3 mm à 1200 mm) Épais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 4 (68-3/8 lb à 79-13/16 lb (257 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) - - o (20 feuilles) - Transparent - - o (20 feuilles) - Cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) - - o (20 feuilles) o Papier à onglets - - o (20 feuilles) - Enveloppe - - o (10 feuilles) - Planche d'étiquettes - - o (10 feuilles) - Papier rouleau (33-13/16 lb à 55-7/8 lb (127 g/m2 à 210 g/m2)) - - o (10 feuilles) - Formats admissibles 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w 12-1/4 e 18 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w 12 e 18 w à 5- 1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, Papier bannière* 2, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) 12-1/4 e 18 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, ISO-B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-15/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (100 mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-13/16 à 18 pouces (148 mm à 457,2 mm) Type Port d'introduction du papier (nombre maximal de feuilles à charger) Unité recto-verso automatique Magasin 1 Magasin 2 Introducteur manuel bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-5 5 Spécifications mécaniques Chargeur de document double numérisation (uniquement pour bizhub C554/C454) Élément Caractéristiques Alimentation bizhub C554/C454 AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz (AC 220 V à 240 V, 9,0 A, 50/60 Hz) bizhub C364/C284/C224 AC 120 V, 12 A, 60 Hz (AC 220 V à 240 V, 8,0 A, 50/60 Hz) Consommation électrique max. bizhub C554/C454 1 920 W (2 000 W) bizhub C364/C284/C224 1 500 W (1 580 W) Dimensions bizhub C554/C454 Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 26-15/16 pouces (685mm) e Hauteur 36-1/4 pouces (921 mm) bizhub C364/C284/C224 Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 26-15/16 pouces (685mm) e Hauteur 30-11/16 pouces (779 mm) Encombrement machine bizhub C554/C454 Largeur 36-7/8 pouces (937mm) e Profondeur 49-1/16 pouces (1 246 mm) e Hauteur 51-7/16 pouces (1 307 mm) Montre les dimensions lorsque le Magasin papier est sorti et lorsque l'Extension magasin de l'Introducteur manuel et l'ADF sont ouverts. bizhub C364/C284/C224 Largeur 36-7/8 pouces (937 mm) e Profondeur 47-13/16 pouces (1 214 mm) e Hauteur 30-11/16 pouces (779 mm) Ceci montre les dimensions lorsque le Magasin papier est tiré et que l'Extension magasin de l'Introducteur manuel est ouverte. Poids bizhub C554/C454 Environ 220-7/16 lb (100 kg) bizhub C364/C284/C224 Environ 185-3/16 lb (84 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à A6 w Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 80 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5-9/16 pouces (142 mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) 5 5-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Environnement d'exploitation Spécifications communes Élément Caractéristiques Conditions ambiantes d'exploitation Température : 10 à 30°C (50 à 86°F) Humidité : 15% à 85% HR Élément Caractéristiques Temps de préchauffage Période comprise entre le moment où le mode Alimentation auxiliaire OFF est débloqué et le moment où cette machine est prête pour l'impression alors que l'Interrupteur principal est placé sur Marche (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) bizhub C554 Couleurs : 25 s ou moins Noir : 23 s ou moins bizhub C454 25 sec. ou moins bizhub C364 20 sec. ou moins bizhub C284/C224 18 sec. ou moins Période comprise entre le moment où l'Interrupteur principal a été placé sur Marche et le moment où cette machine est prête pour l'impression (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) bizhub C554 Couleurs : 25 s ou moins Noir : 23 s ou moins bizhub C454 25 sec. ou moins bizhub C364/C284/C224 20 sec. ou moins La durée de préchauffage peut varier en fonction de l'environnement d'exploitation et de l'utilisation. Temps de copie (impression) rapide (En impression lettre (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v bizhub C554 Couleurs : 4,6 s ou moins Noir : 4,1 s ou moins bizhub C454 Couleurs : 5,5 s ou moins Noir : 4,6 s ou moins bizhub C364 Couleurs : 6,9 s ou moins Noir : 5,3 sec. ou moins bizhub C284 Couleurs : 7,7 sec. ou moins Noir : 5,9 s ou moins bizhub C224 Couleurs : 8,3 s ou moins Noir : 6,9 s ou moins Taille mémoire (capacité disque dur) 2 048 Mo (250 Go) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-7 5 Fonction Copie Élément Caractéristiques Définition Numérisation 600 dpi e 600 dpi Écriture 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Poids 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0 mm)) En bas 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À droite 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À gauche 1/8 pouce (3,0mm) Zone imprimable maximum Pour papier 12-1/4 e 18 pouces (311,1mm e 457,2 mm) : 11-15/16 e 17-11/16 pouces (302,6mm e 448,7 mm) Vitesse de copie (En impression lettre (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v Couleurs (Recto/Recto- Verso) bizhub C554 Papier ordinaire : 55 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 51 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 28 feuilles /min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 27 feuilles/min) bizhub C454 Papier ordinaire : 45 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 44 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1 + : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 23 feuilles/min. bizhub C364 Papier ordinaire : 36 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 18 feuilles/min. bizhub C284 Papier ordinaire : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. bizhub C224 Papier ordinaire : 22 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. Noir (Recto/ Recto-Verso) bizhub C554 Papier ordinaire : 55 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 53 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 28 feuilles/min. (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 27 feuilles/min.) bizhub C454 Papier ordinaire : 45 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+ : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 23 feuilles/min. bizhub C364 Papier ordinaire : 36 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 18 feuilles/min. bizhub C284 Papier ordinaire : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. bizhub C224 Papier ordinaire : 22 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. 5 5-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Fonctions de numérisation Agrandissement copie Grandeur nature : 100,0% +/- 0,5% Agrandir la taille : Zone en pouces : 121,4%, 129,4%, 154,5%, 200,0% Zone en centimètres : 115,4%, 122,4%, 141,4%, 200,0% Réduire la taille : Zone en pouces : 78,5%, 73,3%, 64,7%, 50,0% Zone en centimètres : 86,6%, 81,6%, 70,7%, 50,0% Manuel : 25,0 à 400,0% (par pas de 0,1%) Nombre de copies réalisées en continu 1 à 9999 feuilles Réglage de la densité Densité copie Réglage manuel de la densité (9 niveaux) Densité du fond Réglage manuel ou automatique de la densité (9 niveaux), suppression du fond Nombre de feuilles chargées dans le Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire 250 feuilles Papier fin 100 feuilles Épais 10 feuilles Transparent 1 feuille Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Plage numérisable Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Poids 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) Format papier numérisable 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w/v, A3 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. (Par défaut : 8 e 13 w) Pour plus de détails, veuillez contacter votre S.A.V. Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0mm)) En bas 1/8 pouce (3,0mm) À droite 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À gauche 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) Résolution de numérisation Pousser : 200 dpi/300 dpi/400 dpi/600 dpi Tirer : 100 dpi/200 dpi/300 dpi/400 dpi/600 ppp Fonction Réglages E-Mail FTP PC (SMB) Boîte Utilisateur WebDAV Envoi serveur de numérisation PC (DPWS) Fonctions spéciales Originaux mixtes, Papier fin, Original plié en Z, Original bannière, Dépoussiérer, Retrait original vierge, Position de reliure, Effacement, Effacement centre, Original livre, Séparation livre, Direction original, Marge perdue, Tampon/Composition, Date/Heure, Tête/Pied de page, Netteté bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-9 5 SMB Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows Windows XP Familial/Professionnel Windows Serveur 2003, toutes éditions Windows Vista, chaque édition Windows Server 2008 La fonction DFS supporte seulement l'environnement configuré par les systèmes d'exploitation du serveur Windows ci-après. Windows Serveur 2003, toutes éditions Windows Server 2008 La fonction d'hébergement direct supporte les systèmes d'exploitation suivants. Windows XP Windows Vista (La fonction IPv6 est uniquement prise en charge dans Windows Vista.) Samba Série 2.2.x Série 3.x Novell Netware Netware 6.5 (SP6 ou ultérieur) Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Compatible avec les spécifications de l'OS. Mémoire Compatible avec les spécifications de l'OS. Réseau Ordinateur avec protocole TCP/IP correctement configuré Disque dur Requiert un espace mémoire de 20 Mo ou plus. TWAIN Pilote Pilote TWAIN, pilote HDD TWAIN Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows XP Édition familiale (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Business (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows 7 Home Basic* Windows 7 Home Premium* Windows 7 Professional* Windows 7 Enterprise* Windows 7 Ultimate* * Supporte l'environnement 32-bit (x86) ou 64-bit (x64). Élément Caractéristiques 5 5-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Fonctions Imprimante Élément Caractéristiques Type Contrôleur d'imprimante intégré Mémoire disponible 2048 Mo (commune à l'unité principale) Taille du disque dur 250 Go (commune à l'unité principale) I/F Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) USB 2.0/1.1 Langage de l'imprimante Émulation PCL5e/c Émulation PCL XL ver 2.1 Émulation (3016) PostScript 3 XPS ver.1.0 Définition 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0 mm)) En bas 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) À droite 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) À gauche 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) Zone imprimable maximum Pour papier 12-1/4 e 18 pouces (311,1mm e 457,2mm) : 11-15/16 e 17-11/16 pouces (302,6mm e 448,7 mm) Nombre de feuilles chargées dans le Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire 250 feuilles Papier fin 100 feuilles Épais 10 feuilles Transparent 1 feuille Polices (polices intégrées) Polices européennes 80 Japonais HG Mincho L HG P Mincho L HG Gothic B HG P Gothic B <Émulation Postscript 3> Polices européennes 137 Japonais HG Mincho L HG Gothic B Ordinateur compatible IBM PC et sa machine compatible Macintosh (PowerPC, Intel Processor : Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6/10.7 seulement) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-11 5 Pilote d'imprimante Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PCL (Pilote PCL) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Élément Caractéristiques 5 5-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Pilote d'imprimante Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PostScript (Pilote PS) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Pilote XPS KONICA MINOLTA (pilote XPS) Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Enterprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Server 2008 Standard * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise * Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Supporte l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Pilote PostScript PPD (PS-PPD) Mac OS 9.2 ou ultérieur Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6/10.7 Élément Caractéristiques bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-13 5 Fonction réseau *1 Requiert le Kit d'interface locale EK-607. *2 Lors de l'utilisation de Lotus Domino Server et du réglage de la condition de recherche sur "OU", la fonction ne marchera pas correctement. Pilote Fax Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PCL (Pilote PCL) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Type Incorporé Type de trame Ethernet 802.2 Ethernet 802.3 Ethernet II Ethernet SNAP Type de câble 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T Connecteur RJ-45 Performance Bluetooth *1 Protocole de communication : Bluetooth 2.0 + EDR Profiles supportés : OPP/BPP/SPP Protocoles pris en charge TCP/IP(IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP, FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP, NTP, SSL, IPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME, IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD, SSDP, SOAP Serveurs LDAP supportés OpenLDAP 2.1x, Active Directory, Exchange 5.5/2000/2003, serveur Sun Java Directory (serveur Netscape/iPlanet Directory), Novell NetWare 5.x/6.x NDS, Novell eDirectory 8.6/8.7, LotusDominoServer(5.x/6.x) *2 Protocole LDAP géré Protocole LDAP Version 3 (la version 2 n'est pas prise en charge) Versions SSL supportées SSL3.0 et TLS1.0 (Un certificat x.509 doit être installé sur le serveur.) Multiprotocole Autodétection Réglages Sauvegardée dans la mémoire non volatile 5 5-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-3 6 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels Fonction fax (Kit fax FK-511) Élément Caractéristiques Mémoire disponible 2048 Mo (standard) Nombre de pages stockées 10 000 pages (pour un original d'environ 700 caractères au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) enregistré en résolution [Fin]) Lignes éligibles Lignes téléphoniques d'abonnés (y compris les réseaux Fax) Lignes PBX Résolution de numérisation Ultra Fin : 600 dpi e 600 dpi Super Fin : 16 dot/mm e 15,4 line/mm, 400 dpi e 400 dpi Fin : 8 dot/mm e 7,7 line/mm, 200 dpi e 200 dpi Normal : 8 points/mm e 3,85 lignes/mm Les fax sont émis avec l'une des résolutions ci-dessus variant en fonction des capacités de la machine du destinataire. Vitesse de transmission (G3) 2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/ 28800/31200/33600 bps Format de numérisation maximal Vitre d'exposition : 11-11/16 pouces e 17 pouces (297mm e 431,8mm) (format 11 e 17 (A3)) Chargeur ADF : 11-11/16 pouces e 39-3/8 pouces (297mm e 1 000 mm) (Normal, Fin, Super fin) 11-11/16 pouces e 17 pouces (297mm e 432mm) (Ultra Fin, Transmission manuelle) Format d'enregistrement maximal 11-11/16 pouces e 16-9/16 pouces (297mm e 420mm) (format 11 e 17 (A3)) Un original de 39-3/8 pouces (1000mm) ou plus est imprimé sur la base du réglage de la page de séparation. 6 6-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à B6 w, cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 78 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611 mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5 pouces (127 mm) Poids Environ 19-13/16 lb (9 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à B6 w, cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 80 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611 mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5-9/16 pouces (142 mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-5 6 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Magasin 3 Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 15 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294 mm) Poids Environ 48-1/2 lb (22 kg) Configuration de l'unité Magasin papier, 1 niveau Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Magasin du haut (Magasin 3) Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Magasin du bas (Magasin 4) Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 15 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294 mm) Poids Approx. 52-15/16 lb (24 kg) Configuration de l'unité Magasin papier, 2 niveaux 6 6-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 2 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 1 000 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 45 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615 mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294mm) Poids Environ 50-11/16 lb (23 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 à 120 g/m2)), Épais1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 à 256 g/m2) Format papier 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier ordinaire : 3000 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) / 3300 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)), Épais 1 : 2500 feuilles, Épais 1+ : 1750 feuilles, Épais 2 : 1550 feuilles, Épais 3 : 1300 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 22 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 14-7/16 pouces (367 mm) e Profondeur 20-13/16 pouces (528 mm) e Hauteur 15-15/16 pouces (405 mm) Poids Approx. 39-11/16 lb (18 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-7 6 Unité grande capacité LU-204 * Le nombre maximal de feuilles qu'il est possible de charger pour chaque format de papier est de 2 500 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) ou 2 750 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)). Unité de finition FS-535 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 à 120 g/m2)), Épais1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 à 256 g/m2) Format papier* 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier ordinaire : 2 500 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2))/2 750 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)), Épais 1 : 2 000 feuilles, Épais 1+ : 1 450 feuilles, Épais 2 : 1 250 feuilles, Épais 3 : 1 000 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 22 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/4 pouces (629 mm) e Profondeur 21-7/8 pouces (556mm) e Hauteur 15-15/16 pouces (405 mm) Poids Approx. 55-1/8 lb (25 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1 (Bac auxiliaire), Bac de sortie 2 (Bac principal) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé*, Tri Décalé *, Agraf.* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Type de papier Groupe, Tri : papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)). Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier à onglets, Papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 1 Décalage Groupe, Décalage Tri : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Agrafer : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) 6 6-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/8 à 12-5/8 pouces (130 mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7 mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,15 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5 mm à 457,2 mm) Agrafage : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12 pouces (182mm à 304,8 mm), Longueur : 5-7/8 pouces à 18 pouces (148,5mm à 457,2mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 200 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Papier rouleau Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-1/2 pouces (38 mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Groupe/ Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A5 w ou plus 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planche d'étiquettes, papier à en-tête, papier à onglets Non spécifié Élément Caractéristiques bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-9 6 Capacité de chargement de papier Groupe Décalé/ Tri Décalé Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles B5 v ou moins 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Non spécifié Agrafer Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 2 à 9 feuilles 200 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 à 50 feuilles 20 copies 51 à 60 feuilles 15 copies 61 à 100 feuilles 10 copies 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 2 à 9 feuilles 50 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 à 50 feuilles 20 copies 51 à 60 feuilles 15 copies 61 à 100 feuilles 10 copies Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 14-1/2 pouces (369 mm) Nombre max. de feuilles agrafées Papier fin, Papier ordinaire, Papier recyclé (13-13/16 lb à 21-1/4 lb (52 g/m2 à 80 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Valeur de décalage 1-3/16 pouces (30 mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 105 W ou moins (quand toutes les options possibles sont installées) Dimensions Largeur : 28-1/2 pouces (724 mm) (Lorsque le magasin est sorti : 34-11/16 pouces (881 mm)) e Largeur : 27-15/16 pouces (709,5 mm) e Hauteur : 40-3/8 pouces (1025 mm) Poids Approx. 140 lb (63,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512 Consommables Agrafes MS-10A Pour EH-1028 (N° Produit 1002 fabriqué par MAX) (5 000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction Agraf. centre + Pliage, Pliage en 2 (Introduction par tapis roulant) Type de papier Pliage, Agrafage : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2))* * Ne peut être utilisé que comme page de couverture. Pliage en 2 : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2))* * Ne peut être utilisé que feuille à feuille. Pliage en 3 : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format papier Agrafage centre, Pliage central : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3 w, A4 w, B4 w, 8K w Largeur : 8-1/4 à 12-5/8 pouces (210 mm à 320mm), Longueur : 11 à 18 pouces (279,4 mm à 457,2 mm) Pliage en 3 : 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w, 16K w Nombre maximum de feuilles qui peuvent être agrafées au centre 20 feuilles Exemple de nombre de feuilles agrafables : Face de couverture (13-13/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (52 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) 1 feuille + Papier fin, Papier ordinaire (13-13/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) 19 feuilles Nombre max. de feuilles pliées Pliage en 2 : 5 feuilles Pliage en 3 : 3 feuilles Capacité du Bac de sortie Pliage Plier au centre Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou plus 1 à 5 feuilles agrafées 35 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles agrafées 30 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles agrafées 15 jeux Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou moins 1 à 5 feuilles agrafées 35 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles agrafées 25 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles agrafées 15 jeux Pliage en 2 Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou plus 1 à 5 feuilles pliées 35 jeux Quand la longueur du papier est inférieure à 13 pouces (330 mm) 1 à 5 feuilles pliées 35 jeux Pliage en 3 Une feuille pliée 50 jeux 2 feuilles pliées 40 jeux 3 feuilles pliées 30 jeux Dimensions Largeur 9-7/16 pouces (239 mm) e Profondeur 22-13/16 pouces (579 mm) e Hauteur 21 pouces (534 mm) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-11 6 Kit de perforation PK-521 Séparateur du travail JS-602 Poids Approx. 51-3/8 lb (23,3 kg), Approx. 7-1/16 lb (3,2 kg) (bac de sortie) Consommables Agrafes SK-602 Pour EH-280 (N° Produit 505 fabriqué par MAX) (5000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Dimensions Largeur 5-3/4 pouces (146,2 mm) e Profondeur 25-3/16 pouces (639,2 mm) e Hauteur 9-3/16 pouces (233,8 mm) Poids Approx. 9-15/16 lb (4,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 3 Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri Type de papier Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w à A5 w, SRA4 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/2 pouces à 7-3/16 pouces (139,7 mm à 182 mm), longueur : 11-11/16 pouces à 17 pouces (297 mm à 431,8 mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier ordinaire 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w 100 feuilles Autre que 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3 w 50 feuilles Dimensions Largeur 13-7/16 pouces (341mm) e Profondeur 21-1/8 pouces (537mm) e Hauteur 5-7/8 pouces (149 mm) Poids Approx. 3-7/8 lb (1,75 kg) 6 6-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 Unité d'insertion PI-505 Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier quand la perforation est sélectionnée Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format de papier quand la perforation est sélectionnée 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Type de pliage Pliage en Z Type de papier quand le pliage en Z est sélectionné Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format de papier quand le pliage en Z est sélectionné 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8K w Alimentation Alimentation depuis la prise de courant Dimensions Largeur 6-5/8 pouces (169 mm) e Profondeur 26 pouces (660 mm) e Hauteur 40-7/16 pouces (1027,5mm) Poids Approx. 99-3/16 lb (45 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Configuration 2 magasins (supérieur et inférieur) Type de papier couverture Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Format de papier couverture 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A4 w/v à A5 v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,1mm) Longueur : 5-1/2 pouces à 11-11/16 pouces (139 mm à 297 mm) 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à A5 v, B4, B5 w/v, SRA4 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,1mm) Longueur : 5-1/2 pouces à 18 pouces (139mm à 457,2mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier ordinaire 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2) 200 feuilles pour chaque magasin Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Dimensions Largeur 20-1/8 pouces (511 mm) e Profondeur 25 pouces (635 mm) e Hauteur 8-11/16 pouces (220 mm) Poids Approx. 23-1/8 lb (10,5 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-13 6 Unité de finition FS-534 Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1 (Bac auxiliaire), Bac de sortie 2 (Bac principale), Bac de sortie Pliage (Haut de l'unité RU) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé, Tri Décalé, Agrafage Type de papier Groupe, Tri : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6))*, Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à entête, Papier à onglets*, Papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 1 Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Agrafage : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (3-9/16 lb à 8-1/4 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90 mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/8 à 12-5/8 pouces (130 mm à 320mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (182mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5mm à 457,2 mm) Agrafage : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 11-11/16 pouces (182 à 297 mm), Longueur : 5-7/8 à 17 pouces (148,5mm à 431,8 mm) Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 200 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Papier rouleau Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-3/8 pouces (35mm) 6 6-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Qualité du papier accepté Groupe/Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins, B5 w/v ou plus 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A5 w/v ou plus 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Qualité du papier accepté Groupe Décalé/ Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, A4 w, B5 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles B5 v ou moins 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 20 feuilles Agrafer Papier fin (13- 13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 2 à 9 feuilles 100 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 feuilles ou plus 20 copies Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 20 copies Hauteur de charge : 14-3/4 pouces (375 mm) (8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins)/ 7-3/8 pouces (187,5 mm) (8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus) Qualité du papier accepté Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé, Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 500 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 250 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes, en-tête, papier bannière, papier à onglets 10 feuilles Capacité de chargement en papier du Agrafer Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 50 copies 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 30 copies Épais (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 2-7/8 pouces (73 mm) (8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins)/ 1-7/16 pouces (36 mm) (8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus) Nombre max. de feuilles agrafées 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins : 50 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus : 30 feuilles Exemple de nombres de feuilles agrafées : Épais (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2)) 2 feuilles + Papier ordinaire (23-15/16 lb (90 g/m2)) 48 feuilles Valeur de décalage 1-3/16 pouces (30 mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 40 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 18-5/8 pouces (472,5 mm) e Profondeur 23 pouces (583,5 mm) e Hauteur 7-11/16 pouces (194,7mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) Consommables Agrafes SK-602 Pour EH-590 (N° Produit 505 fabriqué par MAX) (5000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-18 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Kit de perforation PK-519 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-533. Dimensions Largeur 4-5/16 pouces (110,2mm) e Profondeur 19-1/16 pouces (483,5 mm) e Hauteur 8 pouces (203,2 mm) Poids Environ 7-1/16 lb (3,2 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1, Bac de sortie 2 (magasin de décalage) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe décalé*, Tri Décalé* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Type de papier Groupe, Tri : papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)*, enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes, en-tête, papier à onglets*, papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7 mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90 mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-1/4 pouces (182mm à 311,15 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5 mm à 457,2 mm) Qualité du papier accepté Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 7/8 pouces (22,5 mm) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-19 6 Qualité du papier accepté Groupe/Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 150 feuilles (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes 20 feuilles Enveloppe 10 feuilles Papier rouleau 1 feuille Qualité du papier accepté Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 150 feuilles (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-15/16 pouces (49,9 mm) Quantité de décalage : 1-3/16 pouces (30mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 24 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 19-3/8 pouces (491,9 mm) e Profondeur 18-1/2 pouces (469,5mm) e Hauteur 8-15/16 pouces (226,5 mm) Poids Environ 3-5/16 lb (1,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-20 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Élément Caractéristiques Nom Unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 Système à capteur biométrique Système optique de type transmission Durée de vérification Approx. 1 sec. ou moins Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Largeur 2-5/16 pouces (59mm) e Profondeur 3-1/4 pouces (82 mm) e Hauteur 2-15/16 pouces (74 mm) Poids Approx. 3/16 lb (96 g) (sans le câble USB) Consommation électrique max. (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA Conditions système (en fonctionnement) Température ambiante 5 à 35°C (41 à 95°F) Humidité 20% à 80% (non condensée) Conditions système (au repos) Température ambiante 0 à 50°C (32 à 122°F) Humidité 20% à 80% (non condensée) Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Machine compatible PC-AT UC Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire vive (RAM) Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Emplacement disponible sur disque dur 600 Mo ou plus Monitor 800 e 600 pixels ou plus Réseau Doit être configuré avec les paramètres du protocole TCP/IP ou IPX/SPX corrects. Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) ou ultérieur Windows XP : Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista : Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 intègre en standard .NET Framework nécessaire à l'utilisation de PageScope Data Administrator. Interface Compatible avec USB 2.0. Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Pour les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, voir le fichier Lisez-moi. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-21 6 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Élément Caractéristiques Nom Unité de carte d'authentification AU-201 Dimensions Largeur 3-5/8 pouces (92mm) e Profondeur 2 -1/2 pouces (64 mm) e Hauteur 5/8 pouces (16mm) Poids Approx. 1/4 lb (120 g) Alimentation Alimentation à partir du port USB Conditions système (en fonctionnement) Température ambiante 0 à 40°C (32 à 104°F) Humidité 20% à 85% (non condensée) Conditions système (au repos) Température ambiante -20 à 50°C (-4 à 122°F) Humidité 20% à 85% (non condensée) Division Législation Radio Dispositif de communication lecture/écriture autonome Cartes compatibles FeliCa, TypeA, FCF, FCF campus, FeliCa (carte privée), SSFC, HID (Prox) (nombre de bits : 26bit, 34bit, 35bit, 37bit, 40bit), HID (iClass), ExtraCardType_100 à ExtraCardType_255 Standard acquis VCCI classe B Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Machine compatible PC-AT UC Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire vive (RAM) Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Emplacement disponible sur disque dur 600 Mo ou plus Monitor 800 e 600 pixels ou plus Réseau Doit être configuré avec les paramètres du protocole TCP/IP ou IPX/SPX corrects. Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) ou ultérieur Windows XP : Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista : Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 intègre en standard .NET Framework nécessaire à l'utilisation de PageScope Data Administrator. Interface Compatible avec USB 1.1. Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Pour les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, voir le fichier Lisez-moi. 6 6-22 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-3 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) L'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) est un "système biométrique (authentification biométrique)" qui lit les empreintes digitales afin d'identifier des personnes. Elle offre un système qui rend difficile de se faire passer pour un utilisateur autorisé, ce qui renforce la sécurité. Si cette machine offre la fonction d'authentification utilisateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à la machine ou exécuter un travail d'impression à l'aide de la fonction d'authentification biométrique. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. 7 État de l'unité d'authentification 7-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.2 7.2 État de l'unité d'authentification L'état de l'unité d'authentification est indiqué par des LED d'indication d'état et des signaux sonores. LED d'indication d'état État Verte État prêt ou numérisation ou authentification achevée Clignotant vert Pendant l'authentification Rouge Échec de la numérisation ou de l'authentification Éteinte L'unité d'authentification n'est pas reconnue Son Bip État Un bip court La numérisation est terminée, le test de numérisation a réussi ou l'authentification est terminée Deux bips courts répétés trois fois Échec de la numérisation Deux bips courts Échec d'Authentification bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-5 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7.3.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine Configurez d'abord la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)). Conseils - Cette machine ne prend pas en charge l'authentification par serveur externe. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Identification utilisateur]. 2 Réglez [Réglages Généraux] sur [ON (MFP)], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Si vous voulez associer les réglages de suivi volume, appuyez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux], et réglez [Synchroniser Authentificat. Utilisateur&Compte Départem] sur [Activer synchronis.]. Si l'identification utilisateur et la gestion de compte doivent être gérés séparément, réglez sur [Ne pas Synchroniser]. 3 Tapez sur [Valider]. Opérations requises 7 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.3 4 Sélectionnez [Oui], puis tapez sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Réglages Périph d'authentification] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Authentification bio], et configurez le réglage suivant. 6 Tapez sur [Fermer]. Réglages Description [Signal sonore] Sélectionnez si un "signal sonore" doit intervenir lorsque l'empreinte digitale a été numérisée avec succès. [ON] est sélectionné par défaut. [Réglages Opérations] Sélectionnez le mode de connexion à cette machine. • [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs]: Placez simplement votre doigt pour vous connecter. • [Authentification 1 pour 1]: entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et positionnez son doigt pour la connexion. [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs] est spécifié par défaut. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-7 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 7 Au besoin, tapez sur [Régl.déconnexion] pour configurer les réglages de déconnexion automatique. % Sélectionnez s'il faut déconnecter automatiquement une fois que la numérisation de l'original est achevée (par défaut : [Ne pas déconnecter]. 8 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour quitter la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. 7.3.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Une fois que la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)) a été configurée, enregistrez les informations relatives à l'authentification utilisateur. Il y a deux méthodes pour enregistrer ces informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine, et utilisez l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à un ordinateur et utilisez Data Administrator sur un ordinateur pour enregistrer les informations. Cette section explique comment connecter l'unité d'authentification à cette machine et utiliser l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. Pour la manière d'utiliser Data Administrator pour l'enregistrement, voir page 7-14. REMARQUE Les informations utilisateur sont enregistrées sur le disque dur de cette machine. Si des changements sont apportés au système d'authentification de cette machine ou à la manière dont le disque dur est formaté, les informations utilisateur enregistrées sont effacées. 0 Avant de lancer cette procédure, connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Système d'Authentification] - [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 2 Sélectionnez un numéro d'enregistrement désiré, puis tapez sur [Modifier]. Opérations requises 7 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.3 3 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, puis tapez sur [Enregistrer Info Auth.]. % Pour interdire des fonctions accessibles aux utilisateurs, sélectionnez Fonctions autorisées. 4 Tapez sur [Modifier]. % Deux informations d'authentification peuvent être enregistrées pour chaque utilisateur. Pour [Authentification biométrique 1] et [Authentification biométrique 2], enregistrez des doigts différents. Il est conseillé d'enregistrer deux informations d'authentification au cas où vous vous blesseriez au doigt par la suite. 5 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification pour en numériser l'empreinte. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-9 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 % Procédez trois fois à la numérisation de l'empreinte digitale. Replacez une seule fois le même doigt sur l'unité d'authentification après la numérisation et tapez ensuite [Numérisation]. % Après avoir numérisé les empreintes digitales, placez le même doigt, et tapez ensuite [Test Authentificat]. Si le test d'authentification a réussi, tapez sur [Nouveau]. En cas d'échec du test d'authentification, réessayez la numérisation. REMARQUE Ne rien placer d'autre que le doigt dans la zone de lecture pendant l'opération de numérisation. Cela risque d'entraîner un dysfonctionnement. Ne pas déconnecter le câble USB de l'unité d'authentification durant la numérisation. Sinon, le système pourrait devenir instable. 6 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour terminer l'enregistrement des informations utilisateur. 7 Connexion à cette machine 7-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.4 7.4 Connexion à cette machine Les méthodes de connexion varient selon la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. - [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs] permet à l'utilisateur de se connecter simplement par positionnement de son doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. - [Authentification 1 pour 1] permet à l'utilisateur de se connecter en entrant son nom d'utilisateur et en plaçant son doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. 1 Vérifiez que [Périph. d'authentific.] est sélectionné dans [Méth. d'authentific.]. % Si [Authentification 1 pour 1] est sélectionnée, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur. 2 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. L'authentification démarre. En cas de réussite de l'authentification, vous pouvez vous connecter sur cette machine. Conseils - En cas d'échec répété de l'authentification, il se peut que les empreintes digitales ne soient pas correctement enregistrées. Faites une nouvelle tentative de numérisation des empreintes digitales. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-11 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7.5.1 Data Administrator Data Administrator est un outil de gestion permettant de modifier ou d'enregistrer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse du périphérique cible via un ordinateur du réseau. Avec cet outil vous pouvez importer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse depuis un périphérique et les réécrire sur le périphérique après modification. 7.5.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows 7) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installer le BioDriver (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Périphériques et imprimantes]. % Ouvrez le [Panneau de contrôle], sélectionnez [Matériel et audio], et cliquez sur [Afficher les périphériques et imprimantes]. Si le [Panneau de contrôle] s'affiche par icônes, double-cliquez sur [Périphériques et imprimantes]. 4 Faites un clic droite sur le nom de périphérique ou sur [Périphérique inconnu] de l'unité d'authentification affiché dans la catégorie [Non Spécifié], puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 5 Dans l'onglet [Matériel], cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 6 Dans l'onglet [Général], cliquez sur [Modifier les paramètres]. 7 Dans l'onglet [Pilote], cliquez sur [Mettre à jour le pilote ...]. 8 Dans l'écran permettant de sélectionner la méthode de recherche du pilote, cliquez sur [Rechercher un pilote sur mon ordinateur]. 9 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 10 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installer le BioDriver (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau matériel détecté] apparaît. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Rechercher et installer le pilote logiciel (recommandé)]. 4 Cliquez sur [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)]. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-13 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows XP) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Cette opération nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté]. % Si [Connexion Windows à mise à jour Windows] s'affiche, sélectionnez ["Non, pas pour cette fois"] puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (utilisateurs expérimentés)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 4 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 0 Le dernier PlugIn Data Administrator peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Cliquez sur setup.exe de PlugIn Data Administrator. 2 Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue d'installation et cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour continuer l'installation. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquer sur [Installer]. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Cela constitue l'étape finale de l'installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 et la fin de la configuration. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 7.5.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Pour enregistrer un utilisateur avec Data Administrator, connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de l'ordinateur, et connectez aussi l'ordinateur à cette machine via le réseau. 0 Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez préalablement l'environnement d'exploitation. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'installation, voir page 7-11. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Marche. 2 Démarrez Data Administrator, et importez les informations sur le périphérique de cette machine. % Recommencez la procédure cinq secondes ou plus après avoir connecté l'unité d'authentification. % Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'importer les informations sur le périphérique, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 3 Dans [Sélection de fonction], sélectionnez [Réglages d'authentification] - [Réglages authentification utilisateur], puis cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 4 Sélectionnez un profil utilisateur, et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour plus de détails sur les profils, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. L'écran enregistrement de l'utilisateur apparaît. 5 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, sélectionnez l'onglet [AU-102] et cliquez ensuite sur [Enregistrer Info. Auth.]. % Deux informations d'authentification peuvent être enregistrées pour chaque utilisateur. Pour [Emplacement d'enregistrement1] et [Emplacement d'enregistrement2], enregistrer des doigts différents. Il est conseillé d'enregistrer deux informations d'authentification au cas où vous vous blesseriez au doigt par la suite. 6 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification pour en numériser l'empreinte. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. % Procédez trois fois à la numérisation de l'empreinte digitale. Replacez une seule fois le même doigt sur l'unité d'authentification après la numérisation et appuyez ensuite sur [Commencer lecture]. % Après avoir numérisé les empreintes digitales, placez le même doigt et cliquez ensuite sur [Test Authentification]. Si le test d'authentification a réussi, cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. En cas d'échec du test d'authentification, cliquez sur [Réinitialiser] afin de renouveler l'opération de numérisation. 7 Cliquez sur [OK], et enregistrez les informations d'authentification de l'utilisateur suivant. 8 Une fois que l'enregistrement des informations d'authentification est terminé pour tous les utilisateurs, cliquez sur [Exporter vers le périphérique]. % Au besoin, sélectionnez un nom d'utilisateur, et cliquez sur [Éditer] pour changer les informations enregistrées. 9 Cliquez sur [Écriture]. % Data Administrator prend en charge la fonction de copie par lots. Au besoin, vous pouvez écrire en même temps sur plusieurs périphériques les informations d'authentification enregistrées. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-15 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 10 Lorsque l'écriture sur cette machine est terminée, cliquez sur [OK]. 11 Déconnectez l'unité d'authentification du port USB de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 12 Redémarrer cette machine. REMARQUE Au redémarrage de cette machine, éteignez l'Interrupteur principal puis attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de le rallumer. Ne pas respecter cette procédure peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. 13 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de cette machine. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-16 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-3 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) L'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) est un système d'"Authentification carte IC" qui lit la carte IC pour procéder à l'authentification des personnes. Si vous enregistrez une carte IC sans contact compatible comme la carte d'identification d'un employé, vous pouvez utiliser cette machine de manière synchrone avec des fonctions où, par exemple, l'utilisateur entre/quitte le système de gestion pour intégrer le système d'authentification. Si cette machine offre la fonction d'authentification utilisateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à cette machine ou exécuter un travail d'impression à l'aide de la fonction d'authentification carte IC. REMARQUE L'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) doit être installée dans la Table de travail ou dans le Kit de montage MK-735. Le Kit de mise à jour UK-204 ou l'i-Option LK-101 v3 est requis pour l'utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8.2.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine Cette section donne un exemple de paramétrage des réglages généraux sur [ON (MFP)]. dPour info Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres de sorte que l'authentification soit effectuée sur le serveur LDAP à l'aide de l'ID de carte enregistré dans la carte d'authentification (LDAP-Auth. Carte IC). La manière de configurer le réglage est expliquée en prenant Web Connection. comme exemple. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. Configurez d'abord la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)). 0 Pour configurer les paramètres d'authentification, le S.A.V. doit activer au préalable les paramètres IWS (Internal Web Server). Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Réglage Réseau] - [Réglages IWS]. 2 Sélectionnez [MARCHE], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Redémarrez cette machine en suivant les instructions à l'écran. 3 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Identification utilisateur]. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-5 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8 4 Réglez [Réglages Généraux] sur [ON (MFP)], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Si vous voulez associer les réglages de suivi volume, appuyez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux], et réglez [Synchroniser Authentificat. Utilisateur&Compte Départem] sur [Activer synchronis.]. Si l'identification utilisateur et la gestion de compte doivent être gérés séparément, réglez sur [Ne pas Synchroniser]. 5 Tapez sur [Valider]. 6 Sélectionnez [Oui], puis tapez sur [Valider]. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 7 Tapez sur [Réglages Périph d'authentification] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Authentificat. carte] et configurez le paramètre suivant. 8 Tapez sur [Fermer]. 9 Au besoin, tapez sur [Régl.déconnexion] pour configurer les réglages de déconnexion automatique. % Sélectionnez s'il faut déconnecter automatiquement une fois que la numérisation de l'original est achevée (par défaut : [Ne pas déconnecter]. 10 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour quitter la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. Réglages Description [Réglages détaillés carte IC] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier les informations concernant les paramètres du pilote chargeable pour les cartes IC enregistrées sur le navigateur Web de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de paramétrage, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Opérations de Fonction Avancée]. [Réglages Opérations] Sélectionnez le mode de connexion à cette machine. • [Authentificat. carte] : passez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification pour vous connecter. • [Authentificat. carte + Mot de passe] : Passez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification, et entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter. [Authentificat. carte] est spécifié par défaut. [Avis d'authentification carte ID] Indiquez s'il faut notifier l'authentification carte ID au compteur qui surveille l'état de cette machine. [Ignorer] est spécifié par défaut. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-7 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8 8.2.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Une fois que la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)) a été configurée, enregistrez les informations relatives à l'authentification utilisateur. Il y a deux méthodes pour enregistrer ces informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine, et utilisez l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à un ordinateur et utilisez Data Administrator sur un ordinateur pour enregistrer les informations. Cette section explique comment connecter l'unité d'authentification à cette machine et utiliser l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. Pour la manière d'utiliser Data Administrator pour l'enregistrement, voir page 8-13. REMARQUE Les informations utilisateur sont enregistrées sur le disque dur de cette machine. Si des changements sont apportés au système d'authentification de cette machine ou à la manière dont le disque dur est formaté, les informations utilisateur enregistrées sont effacées. 0 Avant de lancer cette procédure, connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Système d'Authentification] - [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 2 Sélectionnez un numéro d'enregistrement désiré, puis tapez sur [Modifier]. 3 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, puis tapez sur [Enregistrer Info. Auth.]. % Pour interdire des fonctions accessibles aux utilisateurs, sélectionnez Fonctions autorisées. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 4 Tapez sur [Modifier]. 5 Passez ou placez la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification, puis tapez sur [Valider]. REMARQUE Pendant la numérisation, ne laissez pas la carte IC à moins de 1-9/16 pouces (40 mm) du lecteur de cartes. 6 Lorsque [Enregistrement terminé] apparaît, tapez sur [Fermer] pour terminer l'enregistrement des informations utilisateur. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-9 8.3 Connexion à cette machine 8 8.3 Connexion à cette machine Les méthodes de connexion varient selon la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. - [Authentificat. carte] vous permet de vous connecter simplement en passant ou en plaçant la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification. - Pour [Authentification Carte + Mot de passe], vous pouvez vous connecter en passant ou en plaçant la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification et en saisissant le mot de passe. 1 Vérifiez que [Périph. d'authentific.] est sélectionné dans [Méth. d'authentific.]. 2 Passez ou placez la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification. % Pour [Authentification Carte + Mot de passe], saisissez le mot de passe et tapez sur [Connexion]. L'authentification démarre. En cas de réussite de l'authentification, vous pouvez vous connecter sur cette machine. Conseils - En cas d'échec répété de l'authentification, il se peut que les informations de la carte IC ne soient pas correctement enregistrées. Réenregistrez une nouvelle fois les informations de la carte IC. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8.4.1 Data Administrator Data Administrator est un outil de gestion permettant de modifier ou d'enregistrer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse du périphérique cible via un ordinateur du réseau. Avec cet outil vous pouvez importer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse depuis un périphérique et les réécrire sur le périphérique après modification. 8.4.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation Installation du Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows 7) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Périphériques et imprimantes]. % Ouvrez le [Panneau de contrôle], sélectionnez [Matériel et audio], et cliquez sur [Afficher les périphériques et imprimantes]. Si le [Panneau de contrôle] s'affiche par icônes, double-cliquez sur [Périphériques et imprimantes]. 4 Faites un clic droite sur le nom de périphérique ou sur [Périphérique inconnu] de l'unité d'authentification affiché dans la catégorie [Non Spécifié], puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 5 Dans l'onglet [Matériel], cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 6 Dans l'onglet [Général], cliquez sur [Modifier les paramètres]. 7 Dans l'onglet [Pilote], cliquez sur [Mettre à jour le pilote ...]. 8 Dans l'écran permettant de sélectionner la méthode de recherche du pilote, cliquez sur [Rechercher un pilote sur mon ordinateur]. 9 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 10 Sélectionnez le fichier IC CardDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-11 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le pilote Carte pilote IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau matériel détecté] apparaît. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Rechercher et installer le pilote logiciel (recommandé)]. 4 Cliquez sur [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)]. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows XP) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Cette opération nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Le Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté]. % Si l'écran [Connexion Windows à mise à jour Windows] apparaît, sélectionnez ["Non, pas pour cette fois"], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (avancé)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant>]. 4 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier IC CardDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 0 Le dernier PlugIn Data Administrator peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Cliquez sur setup.exe de PlugIn Data Administrator. 2 Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue d'installation et cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour continuer l'installation. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquer sur [Installer]. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Terminer]. Cela constitue l'étape finale de l'installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 et la fin de la configuration. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-13 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8 8.4.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Pour enregistrer un utilisateur avec Data Administrator, connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de l'ordinateur, et connectez aussi l'ordinateur à cette machine via le réseau. 0 Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez préalablement l'environnement d'exploitation. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'installation, voir page 8-10. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Marche. 2 Démarrez Data Administrator, et importez les informations sur le périphérique de cette machine. % Recommencez la procédure cinq secondes ou plus après avoir connecté l'unité d'authentification. % Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'importer les informations sur le périphérique, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 3 Dans [Sélection de fonction], sélectionnez [Réglages d'authentification] - [Réglages authentification utilisateur], puis cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 4 Sélectionnez un profil utilisateur, et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour plus de détails sur les profils, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. L'écran enregistrement de l'utilisateur apparaît. 5 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et code d'accès, et sélectionnez l'onglet [Authentification par carte IC]. 6 Placez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification, puis cliquez sur [Commencer lecture]. % En cas de besoin, cliquez sur [Entrer ID carte] pour enregistrer l'ID carte. 7 Cliquez sur [OK], et enregistrez les informations d'authentification de l'utilisateur suivant. 8 Une fois que l'enregistrement des informations d'authentification est terminé pour tous les utilisateurs, cliquez sur [Exporter vers le périphérique]. % Au besoin, sélectionnez un nom d'utilisateur, et cliquez sur [Éditer] pour changer les informations enregistrées. 9 Cliquez sur [Écriture]. % Data Administrator prend en charge la fonction de copie par lots. Au besoin, vous pouvez écrire en même temps sur plusieurs périphériques les informations d'authentification enregistrées. 10 Lorsque l'écriture sur cette machine est terminée, cliquez sur [OK]. 11 Déconnectez l'unité d'authentification du port USB de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 12 Redémarrer cette machine. REMARQUE Au redémarrage de cette machine, éteignez l'Interrupteur principal puis attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de le rallumer. Ne pas respecter cette procédure peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 13 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de cette machine. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser ........................................................................................................... 1-7 Comprendre le Flux d'opérations ...................................................................................................... 1-7 Utilisation de la structure des menus................................................................................................. 1-7 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte ............................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles.......................................................................................................... 2-3 Enregistrer des documents................................................................................................................ 2-3 Utilisation des documents ................................................................................................................. 2-4 Organisation des documents............................................................................................................. 2-6 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte .............................................................. 2-7 Enregistrement d'une boîte................................................................................................................ 2-7 Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais .......................................................................... 2-7 Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire............................................... 2-7 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur ................................................................................................................. 2-8 Authentification MFP.......................................................................................................................... 2-8 Authentification par un serveur externe ............................................................................................. 2-8 Authentification Compte Département .............................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes ..................................................................... 2-9 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 2-9 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. ............................................................................................................................ 2-9 Boîte Emission en relève.................................................................................................................... 2-9 Boîte Réception mémoire .................................................................................................................. 2-9 Boîte Relais ...................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles...................................................................... 2-11 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................. 2-11 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée.................................................................... 2-11 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé ................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés ........... 2-12 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés ............................................................................................................................. 2-14 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Écran tactile..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran ........................................................................................................................... 3-5 Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile..................................................................................... 3-5 Table des matières-2 bizhub 652/552 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche........................................................................................ 3-6 Liste Tâches....................................................................................................................................... 3-7 Liste Tâches - Supprimer................................................................................................................... 3-7 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche............................................................................................................... 3-8 Infos Boîte ........................................................................................................................................ 3-13 Utilis/Archiv - Détail ......................................................................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche ....................................................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse........................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document ...................................................... 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication ............................................................. 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail.......................................................................... 3-16 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-16 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-16 Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison)................................................................................................... 3-17 Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) ................................................................................................................... 3-17 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte ................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte.......................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe............................................................... 4-11 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte............................................. 4-13 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe ........................................................ 4-15 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte .................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique..................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique................................................................... 4-21 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte .......................................................................................... 4-23 4.10.1 Enregistrer document ...................................................................................................................... 4-23 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 4-23 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv ...................................................................................................................................... 4-26 Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)...................................................................... 4-26 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) .......................................................................... 4-29 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ....................................................... 4-32 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ..................................................................... 4-33 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-34 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte ......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte..................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîte Annotation ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 Mémoire externe ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document ......................................................................... 6-4 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-4 Système ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Param. Numéris............................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.1 De base - Type original ...................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso............................................................................................................ 6-7 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-3 6.2.3 De base - Définition ........................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier....................................................................................................................... 6-8 Type Fichier........................................................................................................................................ 6-8 Cryptage ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés........................................................................................................ 6-9 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 De base - Contraste......................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.6 De base - Couleur............................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.2.7 Format numérisation ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 Format standard .............................................................................................................................. 6-13 Format Perso ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Format Photo ................................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.2.8 Réglage image ................................................................................................................................. 6-14 Niveau Suppression Fond................................................................................................................ 6-14 Netteté ............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.2.9 Applications - Effacem Bords .......................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Applications - Page par page .......................................................................................................... 6-16 Méthode Page par page .................................................................................................................. 6-16 Effacem. livre - Effacem Bords ........................................................................................................ 6-16 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre..................................................................................................... 6-17 Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.2.11 Numérisation séparée ...................................................................................................................... 6-18 6.3 Réglages Original.......................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.1 Original spécial................................................................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.2 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original ......................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.3 Spécifier Direction - Position Reliure ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer.................................................................................................................................... 6-20 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv .................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv ....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Envoi .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Archivage ........................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Réglages Application ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document.................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte................................................................................. 7-4 7.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................. 7-5 Description de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................... 7-5 Impression ......................................................................................................................................... 7-5 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.2 Impression ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.3 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Ordre Document ................................................................................................................................ 7-7 Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents................................................ 7-7 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) ................................................................ 7-9 7.3.1 Copies................................................................................................................................................ 7-9 7.3.2 Recto seul/Recto-Verso..................................................................................................................... 7-9 7.3.3 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 Tri/Groupe........................................................................................................................................ 7-10 Décalage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Agrafage........................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Réglage Position - Agrafage ............................................................................................................ 7-11 Perforer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11 Perforation - Réglage Position......................................................................................................... 7-11 Pli/Reliure ......................................................................................................................................... 7-12 7.3.4 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-13 Table des matières-4 bizhub 652/552 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Impression continue......................................................................................................................... 7-15 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)......................................................... 7-16 7.4.1 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Décalage Image ............................................................................................................................... 7-16 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso .................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture .......................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ............................................................................................ 7-20 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure.............................................................................................. 7-21 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page .......................................................................................... 7-22 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-22 Param. Insert Feuille ........................................................................................................................ 7-23 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie -Protection Copie.............................................................. 7-24 Type Protection Copie ..................................................................................................................... 7-25 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie ...................................................................... 7-26 Type Pare-copie............................................................................................................................... 7-26 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-27 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP............................................................. 7-27 Type Tampon................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-28 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif...................................................................................... 7-28 Type Tampon répétitif...................................................................................................................... 7-29 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-29 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page.............................................................................. 7-30 Contrôle/Modif. temp....................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ...................................................................... 7-31 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-31 Réglage Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-32 7.5 Envoyer .......................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission ......................................................................................... 7-33 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-33 Envoyer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-34 Lier EMI............................................................................................................................................ 7-34 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission.................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.5.3 Combinaison .................................................................................................................................... 7-36 Ordre Document .............................................................................................................................. 7-36 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)..................................................................................... 7-37 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple .............................................................................................. 7-37 Type d'adresse ................................................................................................................................ 7-37 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-38 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche ........................................................................................ 7-39 7.6.2 Saisie directe.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax .......................................................................................................................... 7-40 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-40 Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : ............................................................ 7-40 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-Mail............................................................................................................................ 7-40 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet ............................................................................................................ 7-41 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41 Capacité Réception Récepteur........................................................................................................ 7-41 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-5 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adr. IP .............................................................................................................. 7-42 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................ 7-42 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-42 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-42 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Référence......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP.......................................................................................................................... 7-43 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-43 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-43 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV.................................................................................................................. 7-44 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-44 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.10 Vérif. histor ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.11 Recherche Adresse.......................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple ............................................................................................. 7-46 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée .......................................................................................... 7-46 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Adr. E-Mail ....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Numéro de Fax ................................................................................................................................ 7-46 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Prénom............................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Ville................................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Nom Entreprise ................................................................................................................................ 7-47 Département .................................................................................................................................... 7-47 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR ............................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document .............................................................................................. 7-47 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-48 Type Fichier...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Cryptage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés...................................................................................................... 7-49 Surimpression Tampon.................................................................................................................... 7-50 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 7-51 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 7-51 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-52 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication............................................................................... 7-52 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne .............................................................................. 7-53 Description des réglages Ligne ....................................................................................................... 7-53 EMI Outremer................................................................................................................................... 7-53 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-53 V.34 Désactivé ................................................................................................................................. 7-53 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer....................................................................................................................... 7-54 Sélection ligne.................................................................................................................................. 7-54 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-54 Paramètres E-Mail ........................................................................................................................... 7-54 Nom Document................................................................................................................................ 7-54 Titre .................................................................................................................................................. 7-55 De..................................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Corps de texte ................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Table des matières-6 bizhub 652/552 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Paramètres URL Dest. ................................................................... 7-56 URL Dest.......................................................................................................................................... 7-56 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-57 Saisie directe.................................................................................................................................... 7-57 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm................................................................. 7-58 Émission différée.............................................................................................................................. 7-58 Transmission par code (Mot Passe Émission) ................................................................................. 7-59 Transmission F-Code (FonctionTX Code F)..................................................................................... 7-59 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-60 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique...................................................................... 7-60 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax..................................................................... 7-60 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 7-61 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 7-61 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 7-61 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page....................................................... 7-62 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page..................................................................................................... 7-62 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)............................................................... 7-63 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage .............................................................................................. 7-63 Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage .................................................................................... 7-63 7.7.2 Suppression de documents............................................................................................................. 7-64 7.7.3 Modif. Nom ...................................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents .................................................................................................................. 7-64 7.7.5 Copie................................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe................................................................................................... 7-65 Réglages Document......................................................................................................................... 7-66 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-66 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-67 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-67 7.7.7 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-67 Affichage des Informations détaillées.............................................................................................. 7-67 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 7-68 7.8 Applications................................................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-69 Description de l'onglet Applications ................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8.2 Modif. document.............................................................................................................................. 7-70 Modifier document - Suppr. page.................................................................................................... 7-70 Modifier document - Pivoter Page................................................................................................... 7-71 Modifier document - Déplacer Page................................................................................................ 7-73 Aperçu/Définir Plage ........................................................................................................................ 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie ....................................................................................................... 7-75 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression ............................................................................................................ 7-76 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau........................................................................................... 7-77 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser............................................................................................. 7-78 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-79 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) ................................................................................... 7-80 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord............................................................................ 7-80 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord ............................................................................................................ 7-80 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin ........................................................................ 7-80 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin............................................................................ 7-80 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) .................................................................................................. 7-81 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève ........................................................................................... 7-81 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève ......................................................... 7-81 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève....................................................... 7-81 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) ........................................................................ 7-82 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................... 7-82 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1......................................................................................................... 7-82 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2......................................................................................................... 7-82 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-7 7.11.4 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-83 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-83 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-83 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-83 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-83 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-83 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-84 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système).................................................... 7-85 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig......................................................................... 7-85 7.12.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-86 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation .................................................................................. 7-86 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-86 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre- Couverture...................................................................... 7-87 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille ............................................................. 7-87 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ....................................................................... 7-87 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure......................................................................... 7-87 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page..................................................................... 7-87 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon.............................................................................. 7-87 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ................ 7-87 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie.......................... 7-87 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................ 7-87 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif................................................................. 7-87 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ................................................. 7-87 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail ................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB)............................................................................................................ 7-87 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP ..................................................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor............................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple......................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition............................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier ....................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur .............................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.26 Env. - Réglage communication - Réglages E-Mail .......................................................................... 7-88 7.13.27 Env. - Réglage communication - Paramètres URL Dest. ................................................................ 7-88 7.13.28 Env. - Réglage communication - Cryptage E-Mail .......................................................................... 7-88 7.13.29 Env. - Réglage communication - Signature numérique................................................................... 7-88 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure ............................................................ 7-88 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................ 7-88 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon ................................................................. 7-89 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page .......................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte................................................................................................ 7-89 Texte Numérotation ......................................................................................................................... 7-89 Date/Heure....................................................................................................................................... 7-89 Contraste ......................................................................................................................................... 7-89 Type Numéro ................................................................................................................................... 7-90 Position d'impression ...................................................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression ..................................................................................... 7-91 Table des matières-8 bizhub 652/552 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)................................................................................................ 7-92 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax....................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve....................................................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.3 Env. - Fax ......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-93 7.15 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) ................................................................................ 7-94 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe........................................................................ 7-94 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg .................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-94 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système)....................................................................................... 7-95 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer............................................................................................ 7-95 Voir documents................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.16.2 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-96 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-97 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe ......................................................................................................... 7-97 Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge ............................................................................... 7-97 Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe .................................................................................. 7-97 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe.................................................................................................................... 7-98 Entrer un chemin de fichier .............................................................................................................. 7-98 Sélectionner un fichier ..................................................................................................................... 7-98 Imprimer des données PDF cryptées .............................................................................................. 7-98 Déplacement vers le dossier parent ................................................................................................ 7-99 Ouvrir un dossier.............................................................................................................................. 7-99 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-99 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-99 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-99 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 7-99 Finition............................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Papier............................................................................................................................................. 7-100 7.17.4 Impression - Applications .............................................................................................................. 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure............................................................................................ 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................................................ 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................. 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie........................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie .................................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif.................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.5 Réglages Archivage - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur....................................................................... 7-101 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système)................................................................................................................ 7-101 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation ........................................................................................................ 7-101 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer .................................................................................................................. 7-102 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-102 Vérifier les préférences d'impression............................................................................................. 7-102 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer ............................................................................................................... 7-103 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-103 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte ........................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur................................................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.2 Réglages Administrateur.................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte .......................................................................................................................... 8-6 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe............................................................................................................ 8-6 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur)............................................................................... 8-7 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. ............................................................................................................................ 8-7 Boîte Relais ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-9 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte ........................................................................... 8-10 Onglet par Défaut............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Touche de raccourci ........................................................................................................................ 8-10 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier ............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression................................................................................... 8-12 De base - Impression....................................................................................................................... 8-12 De base - Papier .............................................................................................................................. 8-12 De base - Finition............................................................................................................................. 8-12 Applications - Marge........................................................................................................................ 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ..................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie............................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP...................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif............................................................... 8-13 8.3 Réglages Administrateur.............................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte ...................................................................................................................... 8-14 Types d'utilisateurs .......................................................................................................................... 8-14 Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe ............................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte ........................................................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe ......................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin ................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais........................................................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation.............................................................................................................. 8-16 8.3.7 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-17 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 8-17 Gestion Boîte maximum................................................................................................................... 8-18 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.8 Réglages Boîte................................................................................................................................. 8-19 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée............................................................................................................ 8-19 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée........................................................................................................... 8-19 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. ..................................................................................................... 8-20 Délai suppress PDF cryptés............................................................................................................. 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr................................................................................................................ 8-21 Réglage attente doc......................................................................................................................... 8-21 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe............................................................................................... 8-22 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. ................................................................................................................... 8-22 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression....................................................................... 8-23 Réglage Délai suppression Document............................................................................................. 8-23 Paramètres ID & Imprimer................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.9 Réglage Mobile/PDA........................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur ......................................................................................... 8-25 Réglage Administrateur de boîtes.................................................................................................... 8-25 Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes........................................................ 8-25 Fonctions Administrateur disponibles ............................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.11 DétailsSécurité ................................................................................................................................. 8-26 Impression sécurisée seulement...................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.12 Paramétrage HDD............................................................................................................................ 8-26 Vérifier Capacité HDD ...................................................................................................................... 8-26 Écraser données Disque Dur ........................................................................................................... 8-27 Écraser données .............................................................................................................................. 8-28 Mot de passe accès disque dur....................................................................................................... 8-29 Formatage DD.................................................................................................................................. 8-30 Réglage cryptage DD....................................................................................................................... 8-30 8.3.13 Réglages Tampon............................................................................................................................ 8-31 Réglages Horodatage ...................................................................................................................... 8-31 Table des matières-10 bizhub 652/552 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet............................................................................................................. 9-4 Pour Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Pour Netscape Navigator................................................................................................................... 9-4 Pour Mozilla Firefox ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne ....................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion.................................................................................... 9-5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................... 9-5 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé............................................. 9-7 9.2.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.2.3 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Options de Connexion ....................................................................................................................... 9-9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public ........................................................................................... 9-10 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ..................................................................................... 9-11 Se connecter en mode Administrateur ............................................................................................ 9-12 Affichage du mode en mode administrateur.................................................................................... 9-13 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte ................................................................................ 9-14 9.3 Organisation de la page ............................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur................................................................................................ 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Tâche ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Impression directe ........................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Personnaliser ................................................................................................................................... 9-21 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte............................................................................................. 9-22 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte........................................ 9-22 Connexion de boîte.......................................................................................................................... 9-22 Liste de fichiers ................................................................................................................................ 9-23 9.5.2 Imprimer un document..................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine .................................................................................... 9-27 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur................................................ 9-29 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur ................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 9-34 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur........................................................................................ 9-36 9.6.1 Entretien........................................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.2 Réglage Système ............................................................................................................................. 9-37 9.6.3 Sécurité ............................................................................................................................................ 9-38 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département ............................................................................ 9-39 9.6.5 Réseau ............................................................................................................................................. 9-40 9.6.6 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-41 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante ....................................................................................................................... 9-42 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-43 9.6.9 Réglage Fax ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44 9.6.10 Réglage pour chaque utilisation ...................................................................................................... 9-45 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-11 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur........................................................................................................ 10-3 10.2 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-6 Table des matières-12 bizhub 652/552 1 Introduction bizhub 652/552 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à suivre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine ainsi que des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Ecran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions de boîte recourant au disque dur. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission Web- DAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages avec PageScope Web Connection 1 Bienvenue 1-4 bizhub 652/552 1.1 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à des utilisateurs depuis ceux qui utilisent cette machine pour la première fois jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Noter toutefois que des connaissances techniques de base sur le produit sont nécessaires pour des travaux d'entretien ou des opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. En cas de problèmes, veuillez contacter notre représentant SAV. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions qui deviennent disponibles après enregistrement du kit de licence en option et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF recherchable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation bizhub 652/552 1-5 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Suivez les instructions pour éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Un chiffre présenté ainsi "1" représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle permettant d'accéder à un élément de menu désiré. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures de fonctionnement sont décrites par des illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 652/552 1.2 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle. 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Indication relative aux originaux et au papier décrits dans ce manuel. Lorsque l'on spécifie un format papier ou d'original, le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X représente la longueur. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). bizhub 652/552 1-7 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser Ce guide décrit en détail les réglages des fonctions. Comprendre le Flux d'opérations Ce manuel comporte un chapitre "Flux d'opérations Boîte" qui indique comment utiliser les principales fonctions de cette machine. Les tableaux de ce chapitre vous aideront à vous familiariser avec la séquence générale des opérations, comme par exemple, l'enregistrement et l'impression de données. Le lien intégré au tableau permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. Utilisation de la structure des menus Plusieurs fonctions peuvent être configurées sur cette machine. Pour plus d'informations sur la touche à sélectionner pour accéder à des éléments de réglage spécifiques et voir la liste des éléments configurables, voir les pages Structure des menus pages. Dans les pages de la Structure des menus, chaque touche fait apparaître des fonctions hiérarchisées. Le lien intégré à la Structure des menus permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. 1 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1-8 bizhub 652/552 1.3 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte bizhub 652/552 2-3 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte Les fonctions de boîte permettent de sauvegarder des données de document sur le disque dur interne de la machine pour les imprimer ultérieurement. Les documents que vous pouvez sauvegarder sont les données numérisées pour la copie et les données numérisées enregistrées. Pour enregistrer des données dans une boîte, créez la boîte et enregistrez les données dans la boîte indiquée. Les données enregistrées peuvent selon les besoins être imprimées, envoyées par E-mail, transférées via FTP, ou émises à destination d'un ordinateur. Les fonctions Boîte vous évitent aussi d'avoir à numériser des originaux de manière répétée ou d'enregistrer les données sur chacun des ordinateurs. 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles Enregistrer des documents Vous pouvez enregistrer des données dans les boîtes suivantes : *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations impression]. Boîte utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Permet d'enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 6-3 Boîte Annotation Permet d'enregistrer les données de document à imprimer et de les transmettre avec ajout de la date et de l'heure ou d'un numéro d'annotation sur les documents enregistrées en mode Numérisation. p. 6-3 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. • Vous pouvez enregistrer tous les documents numérisés directement sur une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur dans une mémoire externe. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier archivé dans une mémoire externe dans une Boîte utilisateur. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-103 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-4 bizhub 652/552 2.1 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Ordinateur 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Original 6 Mémoire externe Utilisation des documents Utilisation des données de document enregistrées dans les boîtes. En fonction de la boîte, les données sont utilisables comme suit : Boîte utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Pour imprimer et envoyer des documents enregistrés. Plusieurs documents peuvent être sélectionnés pour être imprimés ou envoyés. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 7-9 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. p. 7-80 Boîte Émission Dépôt (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer des documents envoyés par sent via Dépôt/Relève. p. 7-81 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (*3) Permet d'imprimer les documents enregistrés. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un ID et d'un code d'accès. p. 7-82 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Grâce au paramètre de réception mémoire obligatoire, il est possible de confirmer et d'imprimer le document fax reçu. p. 7-85 Boîte Annotation Permet d'imprimer ou d'envoyer les données de document enregistrées en y ajoutant la date et l'heure ou un numéro d'annotation. p. 7-86 Boîte Retransmission Fax (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. p. 7-92 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (*4) imprimez un document PDF enregistré et crypté par mot de passe. Les fichiers PDF cryptés enregistrés dans une mémoire externe et envoyés pour des travaux d'impression sont également enregistrés dans cette boîte. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un code d'accès prédéfini. p. 7-94 bizhub 652/552 2-5 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations impression]. *2 Pour plus de détails sur l'émission Dépôt, la réception Relève, la réception Mémoire obligatoire et la retransmission de fichiers, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. *3 Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de documents dans la boîte Utilisateur Document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. *4 À propos de l'instruction d'impression d'un PDF crypté, voir le manuel Impression directe PageScope ou la rubrique Impression directe dans l'aide en ligne PageScope Web Connection. 1 Fax 2 Ordinateur 3 E-mail, etc. 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Cellulaire ou PDA 6 Mémoire externe 7 Impression Bte Ut. ID & Impr. Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Une fois connecté comme utilisateur, vous pouvez imprimer un document envoyé comme tâche d'impression depuis le pilote d'imprimante. p. 7-95 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. Vous pouvez imprimer des documents enregistrés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. p. 7-97 Téléphone cellulaire ou PDA Imprimez un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. Vous pouvez enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-102 Boîte utilisateur Description Référence 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-6 bizhub 652/552 2.1 Organisation des documents Permet d'organiser des documents en renommant les documents enregistrés, en changeant les boîtes dans lesquelles ils sont enregistrés et en dupliquant ou en supprimant les documents. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Mémoire externe Boîte utilisateur Supprimer Modif. Nom Déplacer Copie Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Permet d'enregistrer dans une mémoire USB (si une mémoire externe est connectée). Détails Document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe o o o o - o o Bulletin Boîte Utilis. o - - - - - - Boîte Emission en relève o - - - - - - Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé o o - - - - o Boîte Réception mémoire o o - - - - o Boîte Annotation o o - - - - o Boîte Retransmission Fax o - - - - - o Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe o - - - - - o Bte Ut. ID & Impr. o - - - - - o Mémoire externe, mobile/PDA - - - - o - o bizhub 652/552 2-7 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte Avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte, il faut définir les paramètres suivants. Enregistrement d'une boîte Permet d'enregistrer la boîte dans laquelle les documents seront conservés. Permet de configurer des boîtes à partir de l'écran tactile de la machine ou en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur du réseau. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateurs suivantes peuvent être configurées. – Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (p. 8-6) – Boîte Bulletin (si la fonction Bulletin est utilisée) (p. 8-7) – Boîte Annotation (p. 8-16) Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais Si le Fax Kit en option est installé et que vous désirer utiliser cette machine pour l'émission Fax relais, créez une Boîte relais pour stocker temporairement les documents avant d'être réacheminés. (p. 8-9) Pour créer une Boîte relais, spécifiez préalablement le groupe contenant les numéros de fax des destinations relais. Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire Si le Fax Kit en option est installé et que nous ne désirez pas imprimer pendant la réception des données, configurez les réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 2 Information 2-8 bizhub 652/552 2.2 2.2 Information Cette section contient des informations dont il est nécessaire de prendre connaissance avant d'utiliser les fonctions boîte. 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur Pour l'utilisation de cette machine, certains périphériques ont été pré-configurés et nécessitent la saisie d'un nom de compte ou d'utilisateur, ainsi que la saisie d'un mot de passe. Contactez l'administrateur pour obtenir les informations de compte ou de nom d'utilisateur permettant d'utiliser les périphériques. Authentification MFP Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Authentification par un serveur externe Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. bizhub 652/552 2-9 2.2 Information 2 Authentification Compte Département Entrez le nom de compte et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, seules les boîtes accessibles aux utilisateurs connectés sont affichées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-11. - Si un utilisateur tape un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié lorsque Mode 2 est sélectionné dans Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur, cet utilisateur est bloqué et ne peut plus utiliser le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé pour l'authentification, demandez à votre administrateur serveur de vous indiquer la procédure de connexion. - Si vous utilisez l'Unité authentification en option pour l'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] pour la procédure de connexion. 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Les fonctions Boîte se décomposent en boîtes utilisateur de type Public, utilisables par plusieurs personnes, Privé, utilisables par une seule personne et enfin de type Groupe, accessibles par les utilisateurs connectés en tant que membres du compte propriétaire de la boîte. Voici la liste des limitations qui s'appliquent à ces boîtes utilisateur : - Avant d'enregistrer des documents, il convient de créer d'abord la boîte destinée à les conserver. - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 1 000 boîtes. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 200 documents dans une seule boîte. - Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 10 000 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 3 000 documents dans toutes les boîtes. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Référence - Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes utilisateur Bulletin Bord. - Chaque boîte de bulletin de bord ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Emission en relève Chaque boîte utilisateur ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Réception mémoire Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 500 documents dans la Boîte Réception Mémoire. 2 Information 2-10 bizhub 652/552 2.2 Boîte Relais Référence - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 5 boîtes Relais. - Chaque boîte Relais ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier Permet de nommer le document à enregistrer. Référence - Le nom peut contenir 30 caractères maximum. - Une fois les documents enregistrés, il est possible d'éditer le noms de fichiers. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le nom lors de l'enregistrement des données. Dans le cas contraire, un prédéfini est attribué. En cas d'enregistrement des données sans spécification d'un nom, un nom est créé par combinaison des éléments suivants. Vous trouverez ci-dessous une description des éléments contenu dans un nom de document, par exemple "SMFP11102315230". Élément Description S Ce caractère indique le mode au moment où le document est enregistré. "S" apparaît pour les documents enregistrés sur l'écran du mode Fax/Numérisation ou l'écran de la boîte Utilisateur. C : Copie S : Fax/Numérisation, Boîte utilisateur P : Impression R : Fax reçu MFP Cet élément représente le nom de la machine qui a numérisé les données. Cet élément affiche le nom saisi dans [Nom machine] sous [Entrer Adresse Machine] des [Réglages Administrateur/Machine] dans Réglages Administrateur. Si vous modifiez le nom affiché, saisissez 10 caractères maximum. 11102315230 Ceci indique l'année (2 derniers chiffres), le mois, le jour, l'heure et la minute de numérisation des données. Si une série de documents sont numérisés sont numérisées en même temps (même minute), les deux derniers chiffres sont alors suivis des numéros de série. _0001 Cet élément indique la page lorsque la numérisation porte sur plusieurs pages. Ce numéro n'apparaît pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, il figure automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. Cet élément de l'émission FTP ou autres est à prendre en compte lorsqu'un serveur présente une restriction sur les noms de fichiers. .TIF Ceci est l'extension du format du fichier spécifié pour les données. Ces caractères n'apparaissent pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, ils figurent automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. bizhub 652/552 2-11 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles et les permissions correspondantes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département est activée, sont décrites ci-après. Configurez les paramètres d'authentification utilisateur et de compte département selon les fonctions désirées. 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé Référence - Les utilisateurs peuvent accéder à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public. - Les boîtes créées par des utilisateurs et les administrateurs sont des boîtes Public. - Les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas créer de boîtes utilisateur si Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. est réglé sur Interdit dans les Réglages Administrateur. 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public et Utilisateur Privé. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Privé deviennent des boîtes Public. Création et accès Boîte Utilisateur Public Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Public Administrateur de boîtes Public 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-12 bizhub 652/552 2.3 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Publics et seulement aux boîtes Groupe du compte auxquels ils appartiennent. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres Compte Département ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés Du fait que le compte destiné aux utilisateurs a été préalablement enregistré, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas accéder aux boîtes Groupe des comptes auxquels ils n'appartiennent pas. Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Compte A Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 bizhub 652/552 2-13 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Public, aux seules boîtes Groupe du compte auquel ils appartiennent et aux seules boîtes Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Compte A Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Accès autorisé Administrateur de boîtes Public 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-14 bizhub 652/552 2.3 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés Si le compte de référence d'un utilisateur n'a pas été préalablement enregistré, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom de compte et le code d'accès pour se connecter. À chaque connexion, l'utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un autre compte s'il fait partie de ce dernier. Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Un utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un compte simplement en entrant lors de la connexion, le nom de compte et le code d'accès correspondant. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 1 Accès autorisé Accès autorisé par la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code d'accès Administrateur de boîtes Public Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Groupe de compte A Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides bizhub 652/552 3-3 3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle Le panneau de contrôle permet d'effectuer des opérations du mode Boîte Utilisateur. Voici les touches et interrupteurs du panneau de contrôle. No. Nom Description 1 Écran tactile Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. Configurez les divers réglages par une pression directe sur l'écran tactile. 2 Voyant Alimentation S'allume en bleu quand la machine est mise sous tension au moyen de l'interrupteur principal. 3 Interrupteur d'alimentation secondaire Actionnez cet interrupteur pour activer/désactiver les opérations machine, y compris Copie, Impression et Numérisation. En position Arrêt, la machine passe en mode Économie d'énergie. 4 Éco. Énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Quand la machine est en mode Économie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche Éco. Énergie s'éclaire en vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour quitter le mode Économie d'énergie, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Éco. Énergie. 5 Programmes Appuyez sur cette touche pour conserver les paramètres de copie/ numérisation souhaités en tant que programme ou pour rappeler un programme de copie/numérisation enregistré. 6 Utilitaire/Compteur Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires et l'écran Compteurs. 7 Initialiser Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) sélectionnés sur le panneau de contrôle et l'écran tactile. 3 Panneau de contrôle 3-4 bizhub 652/552 3.1 7 ATTENTION - N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'écran tactile, sinon vous pourriez le rayer ou l'endommager. Ne jamais appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une sélection sur l'écran tactile. 8 Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Quand la machine est en mode Interruption, le voyant de la touche Interruption s'éclaire en vert et le message "Mode Interruption activé." s'affiche à l'écran. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Interruption. 9 Arrêt Une pression sur la touche Arrêt pendant la numérisation a pour effet de suspendre momentanément l'opération. 10 Epreuve Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer un exemplaire d'essai avant l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies. Vous pouvez vérifiez la finition au niveau de l'écran tactile en appuyant sur cette touche avant de lancer la numérisation ou la copie. • Cette touche n'est pas disponible lors de l'enregistrement de documents avec la touche Boîte. • Pour contrôler l'aperçu de l'image en cas d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur, appuyez sur la touche Fax/Numérisation. Pour la procédure de vérification de l'aperçu, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 11 Départ Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer la numérisation. Dès que la machine est prête à commencer l'opération, le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en bleu. Si le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez sur cette touche pour reprendre une tâche arrêtée 12 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'éclaire en bleu pendant l'impression des données. 13 C Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (par exemple, le nombre de copies, un taux zoom, un format) introduite au moyen du clavier numérique. 14 Pavé numérique Utilisez cette touche pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux d'agrandissement, le numéro de fax et d'autres réglages. 15 Aide Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Guidage. À partir de cet écran, il est possible d'afficher des descriptions des différentes fonctions et détails des opérations. 16 Zoom Ecran Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Zoom Écran. En cas d'utilisation de PageScope Authentication Manager pour l'authentification, l'écran Zoom Écran n'est pas disponible. 17 Accessibilité Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de configurer les paramètres des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 18 Code Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département ont été appliqués, il faut appuyer sur cette touche après avoir introduit le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès (pour l'Authentification Utilisateur) ou bien le nom de compte et le code d'accès (pour le Compte Département), pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine. Cette touche permet également de se déconnecter de la machine. 19 Contraste Permet de régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile. 20 Boîte Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Lorsque la machine est en mode Boîte, le voyant de la touche Boîte s'éclaire en vert. 21 Fax/Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax/Numérisation. Lorsque la machine est en mode Fax/Numérisation, le voyant de la touche Fax/Numérisation s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Fax/Numérisation, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 22 Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. (Par défaut, la machine est en mode Copie.) Lorsque la machine est en mode Copie, le voyant de la touche Copie s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. No. Nom Description bizhub 652/552 3-5 3.2 Écran tactile 3 3.2 Écran tactile 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile Certaines icônes indiquant l'état de la machine peuvent apparaître dans la zone d'affichage des icônes. Ci-dessous figurent les icônes disponibles. No. Nom Description 1 Zone des messages C'est là que s'affichent l'état de la machine et le détail des procédures opératoires. 2 Zone d'affichage des fonctions/réglages L'écran affiche les onglets et les touches permettant d'accéder aux écrans des diverses fonctions. Utilisez cette zone pour la configuration des fonctions. Appuyez sur un onglet ou une touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de spécifier les réglages. 3 Zone d'affichage des icônes Affiche des icônes indiquant l'état des tâches et de la machine ainsi que des touches de raccourci. 4 Volet de gauche Affiche plusieurs touches telles que [Liste Tâches] pour afficher les tâches en cours ou mises en file d'attente et [Vérifier Tâche] pour afficher la configuration spécifiée. Pour plus d'information sur l'affichage et la description du volet de gauche, voir page 3-6. 5 Voyants d'alimentation en toner Affiche le niveau toner restant. 4 5 1 2 3 Icône Description Indique que des données sont en cours d'émission à partir de la machine, indépendamment du mode dans lequel elle se trouve. Indique que la machine est en train de recevoir des données, indépendamment du mode en cours. Indique qu'une erreur est survenue lors de l'impression ou de la numérisation. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher l'écran contenant un code d'avertissement. Si l'écran d'avertissement a été fermé pendant que l'avertissement s'affichait, appuyez sur cette touche pour ouvrir à nouveau l'écran d'avertissement. 3 Écran tactile 3-6 bizhub 652/552 3.2 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche Le volet de gauche de l'écran tactile propose des touches permettant de vérifier l'état des tâches et la configuration de la machine. Les touches suivantes sont disponibles sur le volet de gauche du mode Boîte. Apparaît en présence d'un message indiquant qu'il faut remplacer les consommables ou que la machine nécessite un entretien. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher le message, puis procédez au remplacement ou à la procédure d'entretien. S'affiche si une erreur survient lors de la connexion avec le serveur POP. Indique qu'il n'y a pas de papier dans le magasin papier. Indique qu'il reste très peu de papier dans le magasin papier. Indique que le Mode Sécurité Avancée est actif. Indique qu'un périphérique de mémoire externe est connecté à la machine. Indique qu'une mémoire externe non standard a été connecté sur cette machine et que la connexion USB n'est donc pas activée. Indique que la tâche se trouve dans l'état d'attente pour renumérotation parce que, p. ex. la ligne du destinataire est occupée lors de l'envoi avec la fonction Fax G3 ou Fax Adresse IP. Icône Description No. Nom Description 1 [Liste Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler la tâche en cours d'exécution et consulter le journal des tâches. 2 [Détails Tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations de la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée, ainsi que divers réglages des fonctions Numérisation, Impression et Émission. 3 [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu d'un document enregistré. 1 2 3 bizhub 652/552 3-7 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Liste Tâches Toute commande visant à effectuer une opération comme enregistrer des données dans une boîte ou à imprimer ou à envoyer des documents enregistrés, s'appelle une tâche. Sélectionnez [Liste Tâches] pour afficher la tâche en cours d'exécution. Liste Tâches - Supprimer Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche en cours et annuler l'opération. Sélectionnez la tâche dans la liste des tâches et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Vérifiez le message qui apparaît, puis supprimez la tâche. Aucun document dans une Boîte ne sera supprimé même si la tâche actuellement en cours d'exécution est supprimée. 3 Écran tactile 3-8 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche Appuyez sur cette touche pour voir la liste des tâches en cours d'exécution et le journal des tâches pour confirmation. On distingue les tâches selon les quatre types suivants : Élément Description [Impression] Répertorie toutes les tâches d'impression : copie, impression ordinateur et fax reçus ou rapports. [Env.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission fax et scanner. [Recevoir] Affiche la liste des tâches de réception Fax. [Enregistr.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'enregistrement dans la Boîte Utilisateur. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : L'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/En file d'attente/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/ Erreur d'impression/Enregistr mémoire en cours) est affiché à l'écran. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Augmenter Priorité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer la priorité de la tâche. • Si vous réglez Modifier tâches prioritaires, dans Réglages Administrateur, sur "Interdit", il n'est pas possible de spécifier la priorité des tâches. • S'il est spécifié par réglage que la tâche d'impression en cours peut être suspendue, l'impression s'arrête et l'impression de la tâche devenue prioritaire commence. L'impression de la tâche interrompue redémarre automatiquement une fois que l'impression de la tâche prioritaire est terminée. [Libérer Tâch Att] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier les réglages d'une tâche enregistrée ou pour imprimer ou supprimer la tâche. [Vér. par. Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les paramètres. bizhub 652/552 3-9 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/ le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original, le nombre de copies ou les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Détail] Vous pouvez ainsi vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/ le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, l'heure de fin, le nombre de pages d'original, le nombre de copies, le nombre de pages à imprimer ou les informations sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-10 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : affiche le type de destination (tel que fax, e-mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN ou réglage désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Envoi en cours/En file d'attente/Composition en cours/en attente de recomposition/suppression en cours). Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Temporisation Tâche Émission] Affiche l'état de l'émission réservée en mémoire. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent lorsque deux Kit Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Vérifier Paramètres Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les paramètres. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la transmission, le nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] ne s'affiche que si la destination est un télécopieur, Fax Internet ou Fax adresse IP. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : affiche le type de destination (tel que fax, e-mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN ou réglage désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur). "Erreur détectée" s'affiche aussi pour la diffusion. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. bizhub 652/552 3-11 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la communication, le nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] ne s'affiche que si la destination est un télécopieur, Fax Internet ou Fax adresse IP. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/Composition en cours (Réception en relève)/En file/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur d'impression/Enregistr. mémoire en cours/Suppression en cours). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original reçues. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent lorsque deux Kit Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Faire suivre] Fait suivre le fax reçu et enregistré dans la mémoire (Réception Mémoire Proxy). Indiquez les destinataires en sélectionnant les destinations enregistrées dans le Carnet d'Adresses ou en saisissant l'adresse directement. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, l'heure de transmission, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-12 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images reçues, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat de la tâche, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement et le nombre de pages d'original pour la tâche sélectionnée. [Image reçue] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image reçue. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (réception, enregistrement dans la mémoire, envoi). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, la Boîte Utilisateur, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. bizhub 652/552 3-13 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images enregistrées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Infos Boîte Affiche les infos boîte correspondant à la boîte sélectionnée. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, la Boîte Utilisateur, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image enregistrée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image enregistrée. 3 Écran tactile 3-14 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Utilis/Archiv - Détail Appuyez sur [Détail] en bas à gauche de l'écran Utiliser Document pour vérifier l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom utilisateur, le nom du document, le nombre de pages et le numéro de tâche du document sélectionné. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, utilisez [ ][ ] pour changer de page. dPour info Pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu, voir page 3-16. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche Sélectionnez [Env.] ou [Lier EMI] sur l'onglet Env. pour afficher l'écran de saisie des adresses. [Vérif.Régl. Tâche] s'affiche en bas à gauche de l'écran. Référence - Appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Tâche] pour vérifier les paramètres suivants : – Vérifier Adresse – Contenu Réglage Document – Paramètres de communication (ne s'affiche pas si Combinaison est activé.) – Réglages E-Mail Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse Affiche la liste de destinations enregistrées dans la machine. Référence - Pour ajouter une destination au carnet d'adresses après l'avoir saisie directement, sélectionnez la destination et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Dest.]. - Pour vérifier les informations détaillées, sélectionnez une destination et appuyez sur [Détails]. - Pour supprimer une destination, sélectionnez celle que vous voulez supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 3-15 3.2 Écran tactile 3 dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document Permet de consulter la liste des réglages de résolution, de type de fichier et de couleur. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication Permet de contrôler la configuration de la ligne et les paramètres de la méthode de transmission. Appuyez sur [ Verso] ou sur [Suivt ] pour vérifier les paramètres. 3 Écran tactile 3-16 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail Vérifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour envoyer des messages E-mail. Aperçu Vérifiez l'image d'aperçu du document sélectionné avant d'utiliser ou d'archiver les documents. Appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour sélectionner un document. L'image de la première page s'affiche sur le panneau de gauche. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. Aperçu Appuyez sur [Détail] Pour agrandir l'aperçu de l'image. Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. bizhub 652/552 3-17 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'impression en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Imprimer] ou [Combinaison]. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, il est possible d'obtenir un aperçu de toutes les pages. Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'émission en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Env.] ou [Lier EMI]. Élément Description [ Aperçu Page]/ [Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] : pivote à 180° la page actuellement affichée pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. [Voir Finition] Affiche les réglages spécifiés sous forme d'icônes et de descriptions sur l'image d'aperçu. Annuler [Voir Finition] pour effacer les icônes et texte de sorte que seule l'image apparaisse à l'écran. 3 Écran tactile 3-18 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Reliure EM], la fonction Supprimer Page devient indisponible. - Si vous sélectionnez [Envoyer] pour plusieurs documents, les fonctions de rotation et de suppression de pages deviennent indisponibles. Élément Description [Lecture] Affiche un aperçu des opérations Émission E-mail/PC (FTP)/Émission fichier (SMB)/Émission fichier (WebDAV). [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'aperçu pour les opérations Fax G3, Fax Adresse IP ou Fax Internet opérations. [ Aperçu Page] / [Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] Si [Numériser] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] : pivote à 90° la page dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre pour afficher l'image. : pivote à 90° la page dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : sélectionnez [90° gauche], [90° droite] ou [180°] comme angle de rotation. Lorsque la destination est un fax, une image est envoyée à 180 degrés si [90° gauche] est sélectionné dans [Angle de Rotation] et à 0° si [90° droite] est sélectionné. Si TIFF ou JPEG est sélectionné comme format de fichier pour lire un original long, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le mode de rotation. Lorsque [Fax] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] Une image de page de finition s'affiche en noir et blanc. : pivote à 180° la page actuellement affichée pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. [Suppr. page] S'affiche quand le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages alors que [Envoyer] est sélectionné. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à supprimer. [Pg impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs pour les supprimer. [Pg paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs pour les supprimer. Il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les pages. [Voir Finition] Permet de voir l'image de finition telle qu'elle est déterminée par l'application des réglages spécifiés. Si vous annulez [Voir Finition], seule l'image apparaît à l'écran. 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte bizhub 652/552 4-3 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer des documents dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Enreg. doc.] Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) 4 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4-4 bizhub 652/552 4.1 Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-5 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] Sélectionnez les documents 4 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4-6 bizhub 652/552 4.2 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-5) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de leur impression avec des fonctions supplémentaires, appuyez sur [Combinaison] (p. 7-6) Configurez l'ordre d'impression (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-7) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-17) bizhub 652/552 4-7 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-8 bizhub 652/552 4.3 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour envoyer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] Sélectionnez les documents bizhub 652/552 4-9 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Envoyer]. (p. 7-33) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de spécification du type de fichier ou d'un tampon, appuyez sur [Lier EMI] (p. 7-33) Configurez l'ordre d'émission (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-7) Spécifiez la destination My Address Book Saisie directe Historique des tâches (l'historique des tâches de fax, de fax Internet ou de fax d'adresse IP ne s'affiche pas lorsque Lier EMI est sélectionné) Recherche Adresse Spécifiez aussi un programme Numérisation/Fax. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes Numérisation/ Fax, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-10 bizhub 652/552 4.3 Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-47) Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-47) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-17) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-11 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer les images numérisées dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.] Appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.] Appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4-12 bizhub 652/552 4.4 Référence - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de document portant un nom contenant les caractères suivants : \ / : * ? < > | - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un Nom utilisat. intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-13 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé en mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document conenu dans la mémoire externe vers une Boîte.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez un document et appuyez ensuite sur [Enreg. ds Bte Util] 4 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4-14 bizhub 652/552 4.5 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Spécifiez la Boîte utilisateur et le nom du document (p. 7-101) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-15 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire externe.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez ensuite sur [Mémoire externe] Appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-98) 4 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4-16 bizhub 652/552 4.6 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Configurez les réglages d'impression (p. 7-99) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-17 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour archiver des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez les documents, puis une fonction (p. 7-63) 4 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4-18 bizhub 652/552 4.7 dPour info Pour supprimer les documents, voir page 7-64. Pour renommer les documents, voir page 7-64. Pour déplacer les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-64. Pour copier les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-65. Pour enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe, voir page 7-65. Pour vérifier les informations relatives aux documents ou afficher un aperçu des documents, voir page 7-67. bizhub 652/552 4-19 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique 4 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Impression] Pour vérifier les préférences d'impression, appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Impress.] 4 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda 4-20 bizhub 652/552 4.8 dPour info Pour configurer les réglages d'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, voir page 8-12. Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-102) bizhub 652/552 4-21 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou 4 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util] Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur voulue et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone 4-22 bizhub 652/552 4.9 Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-103) bizhub 652/552 4-23 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte Cette section décrit la configuration et les réglages des fonctions disponibles en mode Boîte. 4.10.1 Enregistrer document Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Haut] [Gauche] [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-24 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Système Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Système. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Annotation] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) bizhub 652/552 4-25 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Mémoire externe] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Enr. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-101) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-26 bizhub 652/552 4.10 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture des menus pour utiliser ou archiver des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe et pour configurer les réglages d'impression. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Tri] (p. 7-10) [Groupe] (p. 7-10) [Décalé] (p. 7-10) [Agraf.] (p. 7-10) [Perfo.] (p. 7-11) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre+Pliage] [Pliage en 3] [Pliage Z] [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] bizhub 652/552 4-27 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Insér. Feuil/Couv/ Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-17) [Couvert. Face] [Couverture Dos] [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Insérer Papier] [Type Encart] [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Papier Chapitre] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Param. Insert Feuille] (p. 7-23) [Position impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position impress.] [Sécurité Copie] [Protection Copie] (p. 7-24) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-28 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [Combinaison] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Décalé] (p. 7-10) [Agraf.] (p. 7-10) [Perfo.] (p. 7-11) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre+ Pliage] [Pliage en 3] [Pliage Z] [Impression continue] (p. 7-15) [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position Impress.] [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Protection Copie] (p. 7-24) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-29 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Envoyer pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Envoyer] [My Address Book] [Recher simple] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [Fax] (p. 7-40) [Numéro de Fax] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [FAX Internet] (p. 7-41) [Capacités RÉC (Destinataire)] (p. 7-41) [Fax Adr. IP] (p. 7-42) [Destinataire] [Numéro de port] [Type Destination Machine] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’acces] [Référence] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’acces] [Réglages détaillés] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-30 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-47) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Cryptage] (p. 7-48) [Surimpression Tampon] (p. 7-50) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-51) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-51) [Couleur] (p. 7-52) [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] [Couleurs] [Niv.Gris] [Noir] [Réglage communication] [Réglages Ligne] (p. 7-53) [EMI Outremer] (p. 7-53) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-53) [V. 34 OFF] (p. 7-53) [Vérif.Dest. & envoyer] (p. 7-54) [Sélect. ligne] (p. 7-54) [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Nom Document] (p. 7-54) [Sujet] (p. 7-55) [De] (p. 7-55) [Corps txte] (p. 7-56) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [My Address Book] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie directe] [Réglages Méthod Comm.] (p. 7-58) [Émission différée] (p. 7-58) [Mot Passe Emission] (p. 7-59) [Fonction TX Code F] (p. 7-59) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-31 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Réglages En-tête Fax] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-61) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Copies] [Recto/ Recto-Verso] [Agrafage] [Lier EMI] [My Address Book] [Recher simple] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Référence] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom d'utilisateur] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Cryptage] (p. 7-48) [Surimpression Tampon] (p. 7-50) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-51) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-51) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-32 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Réglages Archivage pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [Réglage communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Nom Document] (p. 7-54) [Sujet] (p. 7-55) [De] (p. 7-55) [Corps txte] (p. 7-56) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [My Address Book] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie directe] [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-61) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Copies] [Recto/ Recto-Verso] [Agrafage] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Supprimer] (p. 7-64) [Modif. nom] (p. 7-64) [Déplacer] (p. 7-64) [Copie] (p. 7-65) bizhub 652/552 4-33 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Application pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] (p. 7-65) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Modifier document] [Suppr. Page] (p. 7-70) [Pivoter Page] (p. 7-71) [Déplacer Page] (p. 7-73) [Aperçu] (p. 7-75) [Aperçu/Définir Plage] (p. 7-74) [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-76) [Image Surimpression] [Modifier] [Nouveau] (p. 7-77) [Écraser] (p. 7-78) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-79) [Contraste] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-34 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Système Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv pour les boîtes Système. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Bulletin Board Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-80) [Émis. en relève Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-81) [Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-83) [Impression] (p. 7-83) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf.] [Perfor.] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] [Insér.Feuil/ Couv./Chapitre] (p. 7-17) [Paramètres] [Insertion Feuille] [Chapitres] bizhub 652/552 4-35 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] [Numéro de page] [Tampon] [Sécurité Copie] [Tampon répétitif] [Tête/Pied de page] [Surimpression enregistrée] [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-84) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire] [Impression] (p. 7-85) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-85) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Boîte Annotation] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf] [Perfor] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-36 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [Insér. Feuil/ Couv/Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-17) [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Envoyer] - [Env.] [Carnet Adresses] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [FTP] (p. 7-43) [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-47) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Couleur] (p. 7-52) [Réglage communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/Surimpression] (p. 7-61) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Changer Texte] (p. 7-89) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-91) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Applications] [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-76) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-37 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Boîte Retransmission Fax] [Impression] [Epreuve] (p. 7-92) [Envoyer] [Fax] (p. 7-92) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-93) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] [Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe] [Impr/Enreg] [Impr/Enreg] (p. 7-94) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-94) [Détails Document] [Bte Ut. ID & Impr.] [Impression] [Impression] (p. 7-95) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-96) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Mémoire externe] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-99) [Impression] (p. 7-99) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Position Reliure] (p. 7-99) [Haut] [Gauche] [A droite] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf] [Perfor] [Pli/Reliure] [Papier] (p. 7-100) [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Réglages Archivage] [Enreg. ds Bte Util.] [Boîte utilisateur] [Nom Document] [Détails Document] [Mobile/PDA] [Impression] [Vérifier Réglages Impression] (p. 7-102) [Enr. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-103) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-38 bizhub 652/552 4.10 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte bizhub 652/552 5-3 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte Avant de lancer cette procédure, il convient d'allumer cette machine. Une fois que cette machine est disponible pour copier des données, l'écran Fonctions de base apparaît. Pour accéder au mode Boîte, appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle. La fenêtre du mode Boîte apparaît. Appuyez légèrement sur la touche désirée dans la fenêtre pour afficher les menus ou les fonctions. Puis sélectionnez le menu ou la fonction voulue. 5 Menu Opération Boîte 5-4 bizhub 652/552 5.2 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte L'accès au mode Boîte vous permet de sélectionner les menus suivants. 5.2.1 Enregistrer document Numérisez l'original chargé dans cette machine et enregistrez-le dans une boîte. Vous pouvez spécifier le nom ou la qualité image d'un original lors de sont enregistrement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Enregistrer document, voir page 6-4. Pour plus de détails sur la structure du menu Enregistrer document, voir page 4-23. 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv Imprimez ou envoyez un document enregistré dans une boîte. Lors de l'impression d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de jeux ou les marges de page. Lors de l'envoi d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le type de fichier. Au besoin, vous pouvez renommer ou déplacer un document enregistré dans une boîte ou copier un document dans une autre boîte. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Utilis/Archiv, voir page 7-3. Pour plus de détails sur structure de menu Utilis/Archiv, voir page 4-26. 6 Enregistrer document bizhub 652/552 6-3 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6.1.1 Fonctions La fonction Enregistrer document vous permet de spécifier directement une destination Boîte lors de l'enregistrement d'un document en mode Boîte. Avec la fonction Enregistrer document, les documents sont enregistrés de la même manière que pour les données numérisées. Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent de limiter l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. Boîte Annotation Si vous désirez imprimer ou envoyer un document en y faisant figurer la date et l'heure ou l'image du numéro d'archivage, enregistrez le document dans la boîte Annotation. Pour utiliser cette boîte, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Boîte Annotation]. Mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer directement tous les documents numérisés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vérifiez que la mémoire externe est raccordée au connecteur USB de cette machine, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Mémoire externe]. Autrement, sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand la mémoire externe est insérée dans le connecteur USB, appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.]. Référence - Dans les réglages usine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe ou d'enregistrer dans une Boîte un document archivé dans la mémoire externe est réglée sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe disponible, voir page 7-97. 6 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6-4 bizhub 652/552 6.1 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez l'onglet [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Système Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.], spécifiez encore la boîte désirée. bizhub 652/552 6-5 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document Les éléments de réglage disponibles dans l'écran Enregistrer document sont les suivants. Référence - S'il s'agit d'une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de changer la boîte de destination. - Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Élément Description [Boîte Utilis.] Pour les boîtes Public, Privé, Groupe et Annotation, vous pouvez changer de boîte de destination pour enregistrer des documents. Pour changer la boîte, appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.] et sélectionnez une boîte. • Si aucune boîte ne porte le numéro spécifié, une nouvelle boîte Public est automatiquement créée. [Nom Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un clavier permettant d'entrer le nom du document. Entrez le nom du document à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. [Param. Numéris.] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour numériser le document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-6. [Réglages Original] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour le type d'original et l'orientation de l'original. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-19. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-6 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2 Param. Numéris. Appuyez sur [Param. Numéris.] dans l'onglet Enregistrer document pour configurer les réglages de numérisation détaillés. 6.2.1 De base - Type original Sélectionnez le type d'original en fonction du contenu de l'original. Les types d'original disponibles sont les suivants. Si vous sélectionnez [Texte/Photo] ou [Photo], vous pouvez spécifier également le type de photo. Élément Description [Texte] Original constitué de texte seulement. [Texte/Photo] Original constitué à la fois de texte et photos (demi-teinte). [Photo] Original constitué de photos seulement (demi-teinte). [Original Tramé] Original dont l'impression est globalement pâle. [Papier Copié] Original de densité homogène, imprimé par un copieur ou une imprimante. Élément Description [Papier photo] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour une photo imprimée sur du papier photo. [Photo imprimée] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des photos imprimées, comme dans les livres ou les magazines. bizhub 652/552 6-7 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut numériser une face ou les deux faces de l'original. 6.2.3 De base - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Référence - La quantité de données augmente en fonction de la résolution sélectionnée et il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas enregistrer de données dans une mémoire externe. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de données, diminuez la résolution et réessayez de les enregistrer. Élément Description [Recto] Numérise une face de l'original. [Recto-Verso] Numérise les deux faces de l'original. [Couv + Recto/Verso] Numérise la première page de l'original comme couverture en mode recto seul, puis numérise les pages restantes en mode recto-verso. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-8 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier Sélectionnez le type de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Type Fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. dPour info Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. En fonction des réglages Couleur certains formats de fichier ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. Référence - Même si vous avez sélectionné le type de fichier lors de l'enregistrement dans une boîte, vous devez spécifier le type de fichier lors du téléchargement des données du document. - Si vous sélectionnez [JPEG], [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF Compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. Ce format est utilise pour enregistrer des données numérisées en couleurs. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS Compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. Couleur Auto Couleurs Niveau de gris Noir PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o - TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o - XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o - bizhub 652/552 6-9 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Référence - L'écran d'aperçu ne permet pas de vérifier le contenu d'un document crypté. Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque la permission document est spécifiée sur l'écran Cryptage. Élément Description [Niveau de cryptage] Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Code d’accès] Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-10 bizhub 652/552 6.2 Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Impression- Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Basse résolution] apparaît quand Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau Élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. bizhub 652/552 6-11 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 PDF Contours Configurez cet élément quand [PDF compact] est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction procède au traitement des contours des caractères garantissant une image d'affichage lisse. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données avec une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer toutes les pages d'un document dans un fichier ou enregistrer chaque page dans un fichier. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Séparation Page] lors de l'enregistrement du document dans une boîte, la sélection Séparation Page est mémorisée et le document est enregistré comme fichier [Multi Page]. - La sélection de Séparation Page est activée lorsque les données sont envoyées vers une destination E-Mail, PC (SMB) ou FTP. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que [JPEG]. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés comme un (1) e-mail] : joint tous les fichiers à un seul E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : joint un fichier à un E-mail. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-12 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.5 De base - Contraste Ajuster le contraste du document numérisé. 6.2.6 De base - Couleur Spécifiez s'il faut numériser l'original en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Élément Description [Couleur Auto] Détecte automatiquement la couleur de l'original et effectue la numérisation en respectant le réglage de l'original. [Couleurs] Numérise l'original en couleurs. [Échelle gris] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant d'importantes demi-teintes, comme des photos noir et blanc. [Noir] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant des zones noir et blanc bien distinctes comme des dessins au trait. bizhub 652/552 6-13 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Certains réglages Couleur peuvent ne pas être disponibles avec le Type Fichier sélectionné. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. 6.2.7 Format numérisation Sélectionnez le format du papier de l'original à numériser. Format standard Appuyez sur [Auto] pour détecter automatiquement le format de la première feuille de l'original au moment de la numérisation. Pour numériser l'original avec un format papier prédéfini, sélectionnez ce format. Format Perso Entrez les dimensions d'un format personnalisé lorsque celui-ci est différent des formats standard. Référence - Sens X : entrez une valeur comprise entre 30 et 432mm (2 et 17 pouces). - Sens Y : entrez une valeur de 2 à 11-11/16 pouces (30,0 à 297,0mm). Couleur Auto Couleurs Niveau de gris Noir PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o - TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o - XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o - 6 Param. Numéris. 6-14 bizhub 652/552 6.2 Format Photo Sélectionnez le format 3 e 5 ou 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 pour les photographies. 6.2.8 Réglage image Permet de régler la densité du fond ou la netteté du document numérisé. Niveau Suppression Fond Permet de régler la densité de l'original numérisé. Si vous numérisez un original imprimé sur papier couleur, la couleur du fond peut après numérisation donner une image trop sombre. Pour éviter cela, réglez la densité du fond. Sélectionnez la méthode de suppression du fond et spécifiez le niveau. Pour un réglage automatique de la densité, appuyez sur [Auto]. Référence - Pour éviter que les parties foncées du verso ne soient numérisées par transparence comme ombre sur le recto, sélectionnez [Marge perdue]. - Pour numériser un original qui comporte un fond de couleur comme une carte routière, sélectionnez [Réglage Décolor papier]. bizhub 652/552 6-15 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Netteté Ce réglage vous permet d'accentuer le contour des caractères ou autres bords du document numérisé. 6.2.9 Applications - Effacem Bords Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans le réglage Effacem Bords de la fonction Page par page, la même valeur est automatiquement définie pour cette fonction [Effacem Bords]. - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-16 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.10 Applications - Page par page Configurez les réglages pour numériser une double page d'un livre ouvert. Les réglages comprennent la méthode de numérisation, les positions de reliure et l'effacement des zones indésirables. Comme format papier de l'original, sélectionnez le format du livre ouvert. Méthode Page par page Sélectionnez la méthode de numérisation. Effacem. livre - Effacem Bords Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans la fonction Effacem Bords, la même valeur est automatiquement configurée pour ce réglage [Effacem Bords] de la fonction Page par page - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. Élément Description [Double page] Numérise comme page seule une double page d'un livre ouvert. [Séparation] Numérise sur deux pages séparées la double page d'un livre ouvert (gauche et droite). [Couvert. Face] Numérise la première page en couverture. [Pages Couv + Dos] Numérise la première page comme couverture, la deuxième comme dos de couverture et la troisième et les suivantes comme corps de texte. bizhub 652/552 6-17 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre Configurez les réglages pour effacer les ombres autour de la reliure intérieure au centre de l'original. Référence - Utilisez le clavier ou appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour entrer une valeur numérique pour entrer une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 1-3/16 pouces (0,1 et 30,0 mm). Position Reliure Si vous avez sélectionné Séparation, Couvert. Face ou Pages Couv + Dos, appuyez sur [Position Reliure], puis sélectionnez la position de reliure. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-18 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.11 Numérisation séparée Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions par types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on place les documents sur la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont mélangés à des documents recto-verso. Appuyez sur [Numér. séparée] pour mettre la touche en surbrillance. bizhub 652/552 6-19 6.3 Réglages Original 6 6.3 Réglages Original Spécifiez le type d'original chargé, par exemple s'il contient des pages de formats différents ou s'il est plié en Z. Sous Réglages Original, il est possible de sélectionner deux éléments ou davantage en même temps. 6.3.1 Original spécial Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 6.3.2 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. Après la numérisation du document, les données sont traitées pour une orientation correcte. Élément Table des matières [Orig. Mixtes] Sélectionnez ce paramètre lorsque des originaux de formats différents sont chargés ensemble dans l'ADF. La vitesse de numérisation est diminuée en raison de la détection de chaque page avant d'être numérisée. [Original plié en Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour détecter le format d'un original plié en Z chargé dans l'ADF. [Original long] Sélectionner ce réglage pour les originaux plus longs que le format standard. 6 Réglages Original 6-20 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.3 Spécifier Direction - Position Reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure de l'original lorsque celui-ci est perforé ou agrafé. Si vous numérisez un original recto-verso, la position de reliure est corrigée sur le verso. 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer Permet de réduire l'effet que la salissure de la vitre d'exposition peut avoir sur l'image de numérisation lorsque un original est chargé dans l'ADF. Référence - Si la fonction Dépoussiérer est spécifiée, cela réduit la vitesse de numérisation. - Si la vitre d'exposition est trop sale, nettoyez-la. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Élément Description [Auto] Définit la position de reliure sur le bord long si le format est 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou inférieur ou sur le bord court dans les autres cas. [Haut] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut. [A gauche] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure à gauche. 7 Utilis/Archiv bizhub 652/552 7-3 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv Imprimer un document Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans une boîte, depuis les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, commande d'impression ou réception Fax. Il est possible d'ajouter des réglages de finition, comme le nombre de copies ou réglages d'impression recto-verso lors de l'impression du document. De plus, vous pouvez spécifier Combinaison pour imprimer en même temps deux documents ou plus. Envoi Vous pouvez distribuer un document enregistré dans une boîte en mode Copie, Fax/Numérisation, commande d'impression ou en mode Réception, par exemple par E-mail ou fax. Vous pouvez ajouter des réglages de finition ou d'émission lors de la distribution du document. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier Lier EMI pour sélectionner deux documents ou plus et les distribuer en même temps. Archivage Cette fonction vous permet d'effectuer diverses opérations de classement comme le déplacement ou la copie de documents entre les boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer dans la mémoire externe un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur. Réglages Application Il est possible de déplacer ou de faire pivoter les pages au sein des documents enregistrés ou d'enregistrer des images de surimpression. 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document Sélectionnez la boîte dont vous voulez imprimer et distribuer les documents. Les écrans suivants s'affichent. Cette section décrit les éléments de réglage et prend la boîte Public comme exemple. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 7 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7-4 bizhub 652/552 7.1 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider]. No. Nom Description 1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-5) 2 [Env.] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-33) 3 [Réglages Archivage] Permet de renommer, déplacer ou copier les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-63) 4 [Applications] Modifier par page le document sélectionné ou enregistrer une image de surimpression. (p. 7-69) 5 [Enreg. doc.] Sélectionnez cet onglet pour afficher l'écran Enregistrer des documents. Les réglages Utilis/Archiv que vous avez configurés sont annulés. 6 - Affiche le numéro et le nom de la boîte spécifiée. 7 - Affiche la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. 8 [ ][ ] Si la boîte spécifiée contient sept documents ou plus, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour faire défiler la liste vers le haut ou vers le bas. 9 [Sélect. Tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 10 [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour initialiser tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 11 [Afficher Liste]/[Vue Vignettes] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer le format d'affichage des documents enregistrés. [Vue Vignettes] : Affiche une image réduite de la première page, le nombre de pages et le nom du document pour chaque document. [Afficher Liste] : Affiche l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom d'utilisateur et le nom du document pour chaque document. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le titre de la colonne [Heure Enreg.], les documents apparaissent alternativement triés dans l'ordre croissant et dans l'ordre décroissant de l'heure d'enregistrement. 12 Réglages Impr./ Réglages Transmission/ Réglages Archivage/Réglages Application Affiche les éléments configurables pour l'onglet sélectionné. 13 [Détails Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou l'image d'aperçu du document. bizhub 652/552 7-5 7.2 Impression 7 7.2 Impression 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression Description de l'onglet Impression Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Impression] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Impression offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. No. Nom Description 1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, la fonction de réglage de l'impression de document n'est pas disponible. (p. 7-6) 2 [Combinaison] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-7) 2 1 No. Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 1 2 7 Impression 7-6 bizhub 652/552 7.2 Combinaison Appuyez sur [Combinaison], puis configurez les réglages Combinaison pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Combinaison offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. 7.2.2 Impression Dans l'écran Impression - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les fonctions suivantes. Référence - Les réglages d'agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si l'unité de finition en option est installée. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. No. Nom Description No. Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. 1 2 Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme tri ou groupe, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Combinaison] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer plusieurs pages (2, 4 ou 8) sur une seule page lors de l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages. Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles par page et l'ordre de combinaison. [Zoom] Configurez les réglages pour agrandir ou réduire une image lors de l'impression de documents. Sélectionnez le taux d'agrandissement. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Insér. Feuil/Couv/ Chapitre] Configurez les réglages pour insérer une couverture, feuilles intercalaires entre les pages sélectionnées ou des feuilles intercalaires pour séparer les chapitres. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. bizhub 652/552 7-7 7.2 Impression 7 - Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de perforation lorsque le Kit de perforation PK-516 ou l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option ou que le Kit de perforation PK-517 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. - Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 7.2.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Combinaison] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre des documents. Les documents seront imprimés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. Si un document possède un filigrane en en-tête, le même filigrane sera également imprimé sur le deuxième document et les suivants. Si un document ne possède pas de filigrane en en-tête, aucun filigrane ne sera imprimé même s'il est spécifié pour le second document et les suivants. Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents Sur l'écran Combinaison - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les réglages des fonctions suivantes. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme décalage, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Impression continue] Configurez cet élément lorsque [Recto-Verso] est sélectionné dans [Impression]. Spécifiez s'il faut, une fois qu'une page impaire d'un document a été imprimée, imprimer la première page du document suivant sur le verso de la dernière page du premier document. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. 7 Impression 7-8 bizhub 652/552 7.2 Référence - Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si l'unité de finition en option est installée. - Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de perforation lorsque le Kit de perforation PK-516 ou l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option ou que le Kit de perforation PK-517 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. - Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. - En mode Combinaison et Impression d'un document, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner la fonction Tri ou Groupe. bizhub 652/552 7-9 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.3.1 Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. La valeur admissible est de 1 à 9999. Référence - Pour ramener le réglage à 1, appuyez sur la touche [C] du panneau de contrôle. 7.3.2 Recto seul/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une face ou les deux faces des feuilles de papier. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-10 bizhub 652/552 7.3 7.3.3 Finition Configurez les réglages Tri, Groupe, Finition ainsi que d'autres réglages. Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel vous vous trouvez. dPour info Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, vous pouvez changer la méthode d'éjection dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour la fonction Décalage, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Tri/Groupe Le réglage Tri éjecte les copies par jeux. Le réglage Groupe éjecte les copies par pages. Décalage Sélectionnez Oui pour trier les feuilles par jeux ou par pages de manière à ce que l'utilisateur sache à quel endroit le document est séparé. Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées et décalées à chaque séparation de document. Lorsque l'unité de finition n'est pas installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées par tri alterné à chaque séparation de document. Agrafage Les feuilles imprimées sont agrafées en coin ou en deux points. bizhub 652/552 7-11 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglage Position - Agrafage Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. L'écran suivant montre un exemple de [2 points]. Perforer Les feuilles imprimées sont perforées pour archivage. Perforation - Réglage Position Spécifiez les positions des trous. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-12 bizhub 652/552 7.3 Pli/Reliure Les réglages suivants sont disponibles lorsqu'une unité de finition est installée. Élément Description [Pliage en 2] Plie les feuilles imprimées avant de les éjecter. [Agraf. Centre+ Pliage] Agrafe les feuilles imprimées en deux points centraux et les plie en deux avant de les éjecter. [Pliage en 3] Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous voulez utiliser du papier dans le sens de la largeur w. Les feuilles imprimées sont pliées en trois sur la longueur. • Cet élément est disponible lorsque l'unité de finition FS-526 est installée. [Pliage Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous voulez utiliser du papier dans le sens de la largeur w. Les feuilles imprimées sont pliées en Z sur la longueur. • Cet élément est disponible lorsque l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installée. bizhub 652/552 7-13 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Sélectionnez la fonction désirée. Lorsque l'unité de finition FS-527 est installée Lorsque l'unité de finition FS-526 et l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 sont installés : 7.3.4 Combinaison Permet de combiner et d'imprimer sur une seule page un original multi-page. Élément Description [2 en 1] Combine 2 pages d'un original sur une seule page. [4 en 1] Combine 4 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-14 bizhub 652/552 7.3 7.3.5 Zoom Les images peuvent être agrandies ou réduites lors de l'impression. Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement. Référence - Indépendamment des réglages Utiliser réglage couleur existant ou Type original, les documents enregistrés au format A4 v peuvent être agrandis pour être imprimés au format A3 w. Pour pivoter et agrandir l'image comme indiqué dans l'exemple, vous devez préalablement régler [Rotation Agrandissement] sur [Permis] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails sur la Rotation Agrandissement, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [8 en1] Combine 8 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. Élément Description Élément Description [Réglage existant] Imprime un document selon taux d'agrandissement qui était spécifié lors de l'enregistrement. [Manuel] Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement entre 25,0% et 400,0% par incréments de 0,1%. Entrez directement au clavier le taux d'agrandissement. [Tous formats] Imprime un document au format spécifié lors de l'enregistrement, sans agrandissement ou réduction. [Minimal] Réduit légèrement un document pour ménager une marge autour de l'image. [+][-] Appuyez sur cette touche pour régler le taux zoom de l'image par incréments de 0,1%. [Zoom fixe] Spécifiez le taux fixe d'agrandissement prédéfini sur cette machine. Ce réglage est utile pour agrandir ou réduire des documents à un format standard. [Définir Taux Zoom] En plus d'agrandissements fixes, vous pouvez prédéfinir des taux d'agrandissement fréquemment utilisés afin de les utiliser par la suite. • Vous pouvez spécifier au maximum trois taux d'agrandissement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'agrandissements prédéfinis, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. bizhub 652/552 7-15 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.3.6 Impression continue Vous pouvez sélectionner ce réglage si vous avez sélectionné Impression recto verso lors de la combinaison et l'impression de documents. Plusieurs documents peuvent être imprimés en continu lorsqu'ils sont combinés et imprimés. Lors de l'impression en mode recto-verso, sélectionnez si la fin d'un document doit être imprimée sur le recto d'une feuille et le début du document suivant sur le recto de la même feuille ou sur le recto de la feuille suivante. Référence - [Oui] : le document suivant est imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière page du document précédent. - [No] : le document suivant est imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-16 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.4.1 Marge page La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Elle peut assurer un espace de perforation ou d'agrafage. Marge page Décalage Image Si vous créez une marge de page, l'image peut être décalée en fonction de la position de la marge. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. Élément Description [Position Marge] Sélectionnez la position de la marge. [Auto] : une marge de page placée sur le bord long du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original est de 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou moins. Une marge de page placée sur le bord court du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original dépasse 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm). [Haut] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge en haut. [A gauche] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à gauche. [A droite] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à droite. [Ajuster valeur] Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page entre 1/16 et 3/4 pouces (0,1 et 20,0 mm). Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Aucune]. bizhub 652/552 7-17 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso Pour créer une marge de page en mode Impression recto verso, appuyez sur [Changer Décalage verso] pour spécifier la distance de décalage sur le verso. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre Permet de configurer la fonction Couverture, Insertion Feuille ou Chapitres. 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture Les documents sont imprimés avec face et dos de couverture. Élément Description [Paramètres] Imprime les documents avec insertion de faces et dos de couverture. [Insertion Feuille] Lors de l'impression des documents, insère des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier avant les pages spécifiées. [Chapitres] Configurez ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-18 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Voici les réglages Face et Dos de couverture. Référence - Chargez préalablement dans le magasin les feuilles pour les faces et dos de couverture. - Pour pouvoir ajouter une couverture lors de l'impression du document copié et enregistré dans une boîte, l'une des conditions suivantes doit avoir été satisfaite lors de l'enregistrement du document. – Un magasin papier a été spécifié – Les réglages Couverture ont été configurés Élément Description [Couvert. Face]/ [Couverture Dos] Configurez les réglages pour face et dos de couverture. Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. [Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans les cas suivants. • Si [Face (copiée)] ou [Face (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couvert. Face] • Si [Dos (copiée)] ou [Dos (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couverture Dos] Élément Description Couvert. Face Aucune Aucune couverture n'est jointe au document. Face (copiée) La première page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. La seconde page du document est imprimée au verso de la page de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Face (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée avant la première page d'un document. Couverture Dos Aucune Aucun dos de couverture n'est joint au document. Dos (copié) La dernière page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. Les deux dernières pages sont imprimées sur le recto et le verso du dos de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Dos (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée après la dernière page d'un document. bizhub 652/552 7-19 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Lors de l'impression des documents, des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier sont insérées avant les pages spécifiées. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Sélectionnez [Copié] ou [Vierge] dans Type Encart. Configurez le réglage de la manière suivante, en fonction de la sélection effectuée : Impression recto ou Impression recto verso. Exemple : Spécification de la page "6" Élément Description Spécification page/[ Tri] Spécifiez une page à laquelle vous voulez insérer une feuille. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Insérer Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans lequel seront chargées les feuilles à insérer. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. [Type Encart] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un document sur les feuilles insérées (Copie) ou les laisser en blanc (Vierge). Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. Élément Description [Copie] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille est insérée en tant que sixième feuille et la sixième page du document est imprimée sur cette feuille. [Copie] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Le verso de la troisième feuille est laissé vierge. Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille la sixième et septième pages du document sont imprimées sur cette feuille. [Vierge] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée après la sixième page. [Vierge] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille. Lorsque vous spécifiez une page impaire, le verso de la feuille insérée est laissé vierge. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-20 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Vous pouvez configurer ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression Sur l'écran Tampon/Surimpression, les fonctions suivantes peuvent être configurées. Élément Description Spécification page/[Tri] Spécifiez les pages recto. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Papier Chapitre] Pour copier les données du document sur des feuilles de chapitre, sélectionnez [Insertion copie] et sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier destiné aux feuilles de chapitre. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. Élément Description [Date/Heure] Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. [Numéro de page] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page d'un document. [Tampon] Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. [Protection copie] Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. [Pare-copie] Un tampon est imprimé sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie. bizhub 652/552 7-21 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. [Copie Prot. MdP] Un document est imprimé avec un mot de passe intégré sur toutes les pages pour empêcher la copie non autorisée. [Tampon répétitif] Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. [Tête/Pied de page] Les pages sont imprimées avec une tête ou un pied de page. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si une tête ou un pied de page ne sont pas enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une en-tête ou d'un pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] ou le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. [Surimpression enregistrée] Une image enregistrée est incrustée sur les pages imprimées. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si aucune image de surimpression n'est enregistrée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-76. Élément Description Élément Description [Type date] Sélectionnez le format de la date. [Type heure] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ajouter l'heure et sélectionnez le format d'affichage de celle-ci. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-22 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page du document. Réglages Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. Élément Description [Numéro Première Page] Spécifiez la première page de la numérotation. [N° 1er chapitre] Spécifiez le numéro du premier chapitre. [Type Numéro Page] Sélectionnez le type d'affichage des numéros de page. [Param. Insert Feuille] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur une feuille insérée. Pour les réglages disponibles, voir page 7-23. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. bizhub 652/552 7-23 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Param. Insert Feuille Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur les feuilles insérées. 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Couverture] [Imprimer sur la face et le dos] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur la face et le dos de couverture. [Imprimer sur le dos seulement] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face de couverture. [Ne pas imprimer le número de page] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face ou le dos de couverture. [Copie Feuille Insert] [Imprimer Page #] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées copiées ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. [Encart (vierge)] [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles vierges insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées vierges ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-24 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie -Protection Copie Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. Lorsqu'un document imprimé avec du texte protégé est copié, le texte masqué apparaît clairement sur toutes les pages des copies de façon à ce que le lecteur sache qu'il s'agit d'une copie. Configurez le réglage de la protection copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Protection Copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Position d'impression] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). Élément Description Élément Description [Type Protection Copie] Sélectionnez un type de Protection Copie à imprimer. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le contraste et la taille de texte des Protections Copie à imprimer. [Position] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier l'inclinaison et l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie à imprimer. bizhub 652/552 7-25 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Protection Copie Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. Position Dans l'écran de réglage Protection Copie, appuyez sur [Position] pour spécifier la position d'impression angulaire du tampon sélectionné ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison de la Protection Copie dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre Protections Copie - Réorganisation de l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie - Suppression de la Protection Copie ou de l'espace Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Trame Protect Copie] Sélectionnez la trame motif et le contraste à appliquer lorsque la copie est reproduite. Sélectionnez la trame entre Texte en relief ou Fond en relief. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Ecraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre Face (Écraser) ou Dos. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon de protection copie à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/[Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer]. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-26 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction imprime un texte tel que "Copie invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie (informations d'interdiction de copie) lors de l'impression. Une page comportant un élément pare-copie ne peut pas être copié ni enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur. Configurez le réglage de l'élément pare-copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 éléments pare-copie. Pour Pare-copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Type Pare-copie Élément Description [Type Pare-copie] Sélectionnez un type de pare-copie. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille de texte du pare-copie sélectionné. Élément Description [Tampon prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. bizhub 652/552 7-27 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction configure les paramètres de tampon pour un texte tel que "Copie Invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages du document et imprime avec un mot de passe intégré. Quand une feuille de papier comportant un mot de passe intégré est copiée, numérisée ou enregistrée dans une Boîte Utilisateur, la tâche actuellement en cours est suspendue et l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Dans ce cas, entrez le mot de passe pour exécuter l'opération souhaitée. Pour activer Copie Prot. MdP, sélectionnez [Oui] et appuyez sur [Code d'accès] pour spécifier le mot de passe. Référence - Pour confirmer, entrez le mot de passe deux fois sur le panneau de contrôle. Si un mot de passe est spécifié, vous pouvez configurer un tampon. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 tampons Élément Description [Trame Pare-copie] Spécifiez le contraste d'un élément pare-copie. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon] Sélectionnez le type de tampon. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille de texte de la copie protégée par mot de passe sélectionnée. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-28 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Type Tampon Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. Les tampons de Protection Copie permettent d'éviter la recopie. En revanche, les tampons répétitifs peuvent être recopiés. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Tampon répétitif, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Trame Copie Prot. MdP] Spécifiez le contraste d'un motif. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon répétitif] Sélectionnez un type de Tampon répétitif à imprimer. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la couleur, la densité et taille du texte du tampon répétitif à imprimer. bizhub 652/552 7-29 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Tampon répétitif Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la taille de caractère et d'autres éléments. Position Dans l'écran Tampon répétitif, appuyez sur [Position] pour déterminer la position d'impression du tampon, par exemple, en inclinant le tampon ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison du Tampon répétitif dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre tampons répétitifs - Modification de l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif - Suppression du tampon répétitif ou de l'espace [Position] Sélectionnez l'inclinaison ou l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif à imprimer. Élément Description Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Ecraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre [Devant (Écraser)], [Transparent] ou [Derrière]. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon répétitif à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/ [Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer] pour spécifier. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-30 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Configurez les réglages pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page. Pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page, le contenu doit avoir été préalablement enregistré dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur Contrôle/Modif. temp. pour changer temporairement et imprimer le contenu de la tête et du pied de page enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Contrôle/Modif. temp. Dans l'écran Régl. En-tête/Pied de page, appuyez sur [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] pour changer la tête ou le pied de page enregistrés. Élément Description [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] Sélectionnez la tête ou le pied de page parmi ceux qui sont enregistrés. [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler ou changer la tête ou le pied de page sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-30. [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche annuler l'utilisation de la tête et du pied de page temporairement modifiés. bizhub 652/552 7-31 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Réglages Une image enregistrée est incrustée lors de l'impression des pages spécifiées. Sélectionnez [Oui] pour utiliser une image de surimpression. Référence - Les images de surimpression peuvent être enregistrées en mode Copie ainsi qu'en mode Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée en mode Copie peut être utilisée pour imprimer un document conservé dans la Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée depuis une image conservée dans la Boîte peut être utilisée en mode Copie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-76. Élément Description [Réglages En-tête], [Réglages Pied de page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non imprimer un en-tête/un pied de page. Appuyez sur [Impression] pour configurer le réglage suivant. • [Texte] : Spécifiez sur l'écran tactile le texte pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Date/Heure] : Configurez la date et l'heure pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Autres] : Configurez le réglage permettant d'ajouter le numéro de contrôle de distribution, le numéro de tâche ou le numéro de série à la tête ou au pied de page. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. [Pages] Indiquez si vous voulez imprimer la tête et le pied de page sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. Élément Description [Rappel image surimpression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer une image de surimpression enregistrée sur le recto ou le verso. Appuyez sur un élément pour sélectionner une image de surimpression et configurer ses réglages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. [Pages] Sélectionnez si l'image de surimpression sélectionnée doit être imprimée sur toutes sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-32 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Réglage Surimpression Sélectionnez une image de surimpression et configurez ses réglages. L'image peut aussi être affichée sous forme d'aperçu. Référence - Voici les trois méthodes permettant de composer une surimpression. – [Transparent] : augmente la luminosité de l'image de surimpression à superposer. Ce réglage permet d'éviter que l'original ne soit masqué par l'image de surimpression composée. – [Composition Fond (Original)] : compose l'original comme fond. L'image de surimpression est superposée à l'original lors de l'impression. – [Derrière] : compose l'image de surimpression comme fond. L'original est superposé à l'image de surimpression lors de l'impression. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes]/ [Affichage Nom] La vue Vignette permet de contrôler les images de surimpression. En mode Nom d'affichage, les images de surimpression peuvent être contrôlées au moyen de leurs noms de fichier. Sélectionnez l'image de surimpression désirée. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. • [Contraste] : entrez au clavier le contraste d'une image de surimpression (au moyen d'une valeur comprise entre 20 et 100%). • [Composition] : sélectionnez Transparent, Composition Fond (Original) ou Derrière pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. [Détails Image] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les détails de l'image de surimpression y compris l'aperçu image, la taille et la couleur. bizhub 652/552 7-33 7.5 Envoyer 7 7.5 Envoyer 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission Les fonctions suivantes vous permettent d'envoyer un document enregistré dans une boîte. Grâce à elles, vous pourrez envoyer aisément des données simplement en enregistrant des destinations dans cette machine sans avoir les transférer via des ordinateurs. Description de l'onglet Env. Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Transmission] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Fax Permet d'envoyer par fax les données du document. E-mail Envoie les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Internet Envoie via un intranet ou Internet les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Adresse IP Envoie des données de document à la destination spécifiée par l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. Èmis. Fichier (SMB) Envoie les données du document dans le dossier partagé de l'ordinateur spécifié. FTP Envoie les données de document au serveur FTP spécifié. WebDAV Envoie au serveur spécifié les données de document, via le réseau. No. Élément Description 1 [Envoyer] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, [Réglages Document] et [Applications] ne sont pas disponibles. (p. 7-35) 2 [Lier EMI] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-36) 1 2 7 Envoyer 7-34 bizhub 652/552 7.5 Envoyer Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Vous pouvez configurer la destination de l'émission ainsi que d'autres fonctions. Lier EMI Appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran suivant après avoir spécifié l'ordre de reliure. Certains types de destination ou de fonction ne s'affichent pas puisque l'émission concerne plusieurs documents. No. Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 No. Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 bizhub 652/552 7-35 7.5 Envoyer 7 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission Appuyez sur [Env.] pour spécifier les destinations et les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutées lors de l'envoi de documents. Référence - [Saisie dir.] ne s'affiche pas lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Interdit dans [Paramètres Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur. No. Élément Description 1 [Carnet Adresses] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le destinataire parmi les destinations préenregistrées. 2 [Saisie dir.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour entrer directement des destinations non enregistrées. 3 [Vérif. histor] Sélectionnez les destinataires dans le journal d'émission. 4 [Rech. Adresse] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher l'adresse enregistrée lorsque le serveur LDAP est utilisé. 5 [Groupe] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste des adresses Groupe enregistrées. 6 [Recher simple] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. 7 [Réglages Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier ou la couleur lors de l'envoi d'un document. 8 [Réglage de communication] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages de communication. 9 [Applications] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires comme Tampon ou Impression par page. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 7 Envoyer 7-36 bizhub 652/552 7.5 7.5.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Lier ÉMI] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre de liaison. Les documents seront envoyés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. bizhub 652/552 7-37 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple Permet de rechercher des destinations d'émission. Les méthodes suivantes sont disponibles pour rechercher les destinations enregistrées. Type d'adresse Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination par le type d'adresse qui a été spécifié lors de l'enregistrement de la destination. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Carnet adresses par défaut], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. L'écran [Recher simple] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Index] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. No. Élément Description 1 [Type d'adresse] Enregistre les adresses par type enregistré. 1 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-38 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Index L'écran Index apparaît à la lettre qui a été spécifiée lors de l'enregistrement. L'écran [Index] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Type d'adresse] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. Recherche détaillée Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinataire] et entrez une lettre d'index. No. Élément Description 1 [Index] Affiche les destinations pour chaque index enregistré. 1 bizhub 652/552 7-39 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche A l'écran Option Recherche, sélectionnez une condition pour l'affichage des options de recherche. Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche supplémentaires et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Pour configurer l'affichage de l'écran option recherche et des options correspondantes, utilisez [Paramètres Option Recherche] au menu Réglage. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.2 Saisie directe Permet d'entrer comme destinataire une destination non enregistrée. Référence - Lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Gestion Individuelle dans [Réglages Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur, la saisie directe n'est pas disponible sauf pour Fax. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-40 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : vous êtes invité à ressaisir le numéro de fax après avoir appuyé sur [OK]. Réintroduisez le numéro de fax et appuyez sur [Départ]. Référence - [Prochaine Dest.] peut être sélectionné sur le deuxième écran de saisie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss), voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-Mail Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. bizhub 652/552 7-41 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Capacité Réception Récepteur Sélectionnez les réglages recevables au niveau de la destination du Fax Internet. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs paramètres appropriés. Élément Description [Type Compression] Sélectionnez JPEG (couleur), JPEG (niv. de gris), MMR, MR ou MH. [Format papier] Sélectionnez A3, B4 ou A4. [Définition] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fin), 400e400 dpi (Super Fin), 200e200 dpi (Fin) ou 200e100 dpi (standard). 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-42 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adr. IP Entrez la destination du Fax Adresse IP. 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) Entrez directement l'adresse du PC (SMB). Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Élément Description [Destinataire] Entrez l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. [No. de port] Entrez au clavier le numéro de port d'envoi (entrez une valeur de 1 à 65535). [Type Destination Machine] Sélectionnez [Couleur] si la machine de destination accepte l'impression couleur. [Prochaine Destination] Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. bizhub 652/552 7-43 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Référence Vérifiez les informations du dossier sur l'ordinateur de destination. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP Permet d'entrer directement l'adresse FTP. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez sur [Anonyme] puis entrez "Anonyme". Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No de port] Entrez un numéro de port. [Mode PASV] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser le mode PASV (Passif). [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-44 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV Entrez directement la destination WebDAV. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No de port] Entrez un numéro de port. [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. [Paramètres SSL] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le protocole SSL pour l'envoi. bizhub 652/552 7-45 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.10 Vérif. histor L'Historique des tâches affiche les cinq dernières destinations de fax envoyés par cette machine. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations dans cet historique. 7.6.11 Recherche Adresse L'onglet [Rech. Adresse] s'affiche lorsque le serveur LDAP est configuré dans Réglages Administrateur. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du serveur LDAP, voir [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] - Activation LDAP. - La position d'affichage de l'onglet [Rech. Adresse] varie en fonction des réglages utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-46 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple Entrez un mot-clé de recherche et appuyez sur [Lancer recherche] pour rechercher l'adresse de destination sur le serveur LDAP spécifié. 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Spécifiez plusieurs conditions de recherche pour chercher l'adresse cible. Nom Entrez le nom sur l'écran tactile. Adr. E-Mail Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Numéro de Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Nom Entrez le nom de famille sur l'écran tactile. Prénom Entrez le prénom sur l'écran tactile. Ville Entrez le nom de la ville sur l'écran tactile. bizhub 652/552 7-47 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Nom Entreprise Entrez le nom de la société sur l'écran tactile. Département Entrez le département sur l'écran tactile. OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche parmi OU, ET, DÉBUT ou FINIT PAR. Si aucune condition n'est spécifiée, appuyez sur [Non]. 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document Configurez les réglages document comme la résolution ou le type de fichier. 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution pour l'émission de fax. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier EMI. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-48 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Spécifiez le type de fichier des données à transmettre. Type Fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - JPEG ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. - Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. - Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Impossible de sélectionner un PDF compact pendant l'envoi d'une tâche enregistrée dans une boîte depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF Compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS Compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. bizhub 652/552 7-49 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque les autorisations relatives au document permission sont spécifiées dans [Cryptage]. Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Niveau de cryptage] Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Mot de passe] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Basse résolution] apparaît quand Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau Élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-50 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Surimpression Tampon Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la manière de composer le contenu à intégrer au Tampon/Surimpression. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. bizhub 652/552 7-51 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 PDF Contours PDF Outline peut être sélectionné quand PDF compact est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction procède au traitement des contours des caractères garantissant une image d'affichage lisse. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données avec une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez un ensemble de données. Élément Description [Image] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte sous forme d'image. [Texte] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte en tant que texte. • La date, l'heure, le numéro de page, la tête ou le pied de page est intégré comme texte. • Le tampon est composé comme une image. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que le type de fichier JPEG. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. • [Séparation Page] ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés comme un (1) e-mail] : joint tous les fichiers à un seul E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : joint un fichier à un E-mail. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-52 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur Configurez les réglages couleur pour les documents à envoyer. Les données qui ont été enregistrés avec cette machine contiennent les données couleur même si elles sont enregistrées en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc ; elles peuvent donc être changées en couleur lors de l'envoi. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier EMI. - Un document qui a été enregistré en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc avec une autre machine ne contient pas les données couleur ; il ne peut donc pas être changé en couleur lors de l'envoi. 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication Configurez les lignes de communication, la signature numérique et autres réglages de communication. Élément Description [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] Envoie les documents avec le réglage couleur utilisé lors de l'enregistrement. [Couleurs] Envoie les documents en couleurs. [Niv.Gris] Envoie les documents en niveaux de gris. [Noir] Envoie les documents en noir et blanc. bizhub 652/552 7-53 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne Description des réglages Ligne Configurez les réglages Ligne pour la transmission fax. EMI Outremer Permet d'envoyer des fax à des destinations où les conditions de communication sont médiocres et où la vitesse de transmission est faible. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Émission en relève (TX) – Réception en relève – Bulletin d'affichage ECM OFF Le Mode de Correction d'erreurs (ECM) est désactivé pour l'envoi des données. L'ECM est un mode de correction d'erreur défini par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Les télécopieurs équipés d'un dispositif ECM communiquent entre-eux en confirmant que les données envoyées sont sans erreurs. Ainsi, la communication peut être facilitée par l'absence de perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne, etc. Si la présence de bruits est fréquente, la communication peut prendre un tout petit peu plus de temps que lorsque l'ECM est désactivé. A la fin de l'opération d'envoi, la machine active automatiquement ECM ON. Référence - Cette machine envoie des fax avec la fonction ECM activée (ECM ON) par défaut sauf si ECM OFF est spécifié. - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) – V.34 Désactivé – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin V.34 Désactivé Le mode de communication V34 est utilisée pour les communications Super G3 par télécopie. Toutefois lorsque la machine distante ou cette machine est connectée à une ligne via un standard (autocommutateur PBX), les conditions de la ligne téléphonique peuvent faire obstacle à l'établissement d'une communication en mode Super G3 mode. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de désactiver le mode V34 pour envoyer les données. Une fois l'émission terminée, cette machine repasse automatiquement en mode V34. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-54 bizhub 652/552 7.6 – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin – ECM OFF Vérif. Dest. & envoyer Le numéro de fax spécifié est comparé au numéro de fax distant (CSI) et les données ne sont envoyées que lorsque ces numéros de fax correspondent. S'ils ne correspondent pas, la communication échoue, évitant ainsi une erreur d'émission. Référence - Pour utiliser la fonction Vérif.Dest.& envoyer, il faut préalablement enregistrer le numéro de fax local dans la machine distante. Sélection ligne Vous pouvez spécifier [Ligne 1] ou [Ligne 2] pour envoyer des données quand deux kits Fax en option sont installés. Spécifiez la ligne utilisée pour la transmission. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], c'est la Ligne 1 ou la Ligne 2 qui sera utilisée pour la transmission, selon celle qui est disponible. Si les deux lignes sont libres, la Ligne 1 est utilisée en premier. Référence - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier une ligne quand [Configuration Ligne 2] est réglé sur [Récept. seulement] dans [Réglage multi lignes]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réglage multi lignes, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Dans le cas de l'utilisation de deux lignes extérieures ou d'extension, veillez à spécifier la ligne que vous utiliserez. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], une erreur d'envoi peut survenir. 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail Paramètres E-Mail Spécifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour l'envoi de messages E-mail. Nom Document Le nom du fichier à enregistrer est affiché. Ce nom du document peut aussi être spécifié sur l'écran [Classer document]. Le nom du document y compris celui spécifié par la suite sera appliqué à cette colonne. Le nombre maximum de caractères autorisé est de 30. bizhub 652/552 7-55 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Titre Le texte spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 64. De Affiche l'adresse E-mail de l'Administrateur spécifié dans le menu Utilitaires. Référence - L'adresse e-mail de cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet. - Il n'est pas possible de saisir directement l'adresse lorsque [Changer l'adresse expéditeur] est réglé sur Interdit dans les réglages Administrateur - [Réglage Système] - [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] - [Accès Restreint à Param. Tâches]. Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Changer l'adresse expéditeur], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-56 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Corps de texte Le corps du texte de l'e-mail tel que spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. La saisie peut comporter 256 caractères maximum. 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Paramètres URL Dest. URL Dest. La fonction URL Destination permet de spécifier l'adresse E-mail à laquelle l'achèvement d'une tâche et l'emplacement des données peuvent être notifiées. L'URL contient des informations pointant vers une boîte. Cliquez sur le lien inclus dans le texte pour accéder directement à l'écran de la boîte. Référence - Les destinations que vous pouvez spécifier pour le réglage de l'URL de notification englobent les destinations Boîte de la machine principale, FTP, PC (SMB) et WebDAV. - Paramètres URL Dest. n'est pas actif lors de l'envoi de messages E-mail ou de fax. - Si le mode d'authentification ou le code d'accès Boîte est activé, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès correspondant au mode d'authentification en vigueur apparaît. À l'issue de tous les processus d'authentification, l'écran Boîte apparaît. bizhub 652/552 7-57 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Recherche détaillée Vous pouvez faire une recherche d'adresses e-mail a partir des destinations enregistrées. Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinat.] et entrez une lettre d'index. Saisie directe Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-58 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm. Spécifiez la méthode d'émission ou de réception des données. Émission différée Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi. L'envoi des fax aux heures de tarif réduit tel que la nuit ou le matin tôt peut réduire les coûts de communication. Utilisez le clavier pour spécifier l'heure de début de la communication. Référence - Elle est spécifiée en heures et en minutes. - Il n'est pas possible de spécifier la date. bizhub 652/552 7-59 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Transmission par code (Mot Passe Émission) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer un document en y joignant le code d'accès. Si le télécopieur du destinataire est paramétré pour les réceptions en réseau fermé, le télécopieur de l'expéditeur devrait envoyer un fax avec le même mot de passe que le mot de passe de réception en réseau fermé. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si la machine distante est un de nos modèles et si elle est compatible avec la réception en réseau fermé. - Entrez le code d'accès au clavier. Transmission F-Code (FonctionTX Code F) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des documents à une Boîte utilisateur spécifique de la machine distante, en entrant l'Adresse Secondaire et le Mot de passe. La transmission F-Code peut être utilisée pour les transmissions sécurisées et les transmissions relais. Référence - Pour pouvoir utiliser F-Code pour l'émission, la machine distante doit être compatible avec cette fonction. Élément Description Émiss. sécurisée Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte de réception confidentielle de la machine distante. Entrez le numéro de la Boîte de destination dans la boîte d'adresse secondaire et entrez le mot de passe dans la boîte Mot de passe. Émission relais Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte utilisateur de distribution relais de la machine distante, lorsque la machine distante est compatible avec la fonction de distribution relais. Entrez le numéro de la boîte Relais dans le champ Adresse SUB et le code d'accès dans la case Code d'accès. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-60 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Spécifiez s'il faut crypter les e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter une signature numérique aux e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. Référence - En fonction des Réglages Communication S/MIME, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas ajouter de signature numérique ou que vous soyez obligé d'en ajouter une. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax Spécifiez s'il faut joindre l'identifiant de l'expéditeur (TTI) lors de l'envoi des documents. Sélectionnez le nom de l'expéditeur dans la liste des noms d'expéditeur. Référence - Pour enregistrer le contenu des Informations d'en-tête à ajouter à l'original, utilisez [Informations En-tête] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour enregistrer les modalités d'intégration des Informations d'en-tête, utilisez [Position En-tête/Pied pag] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. bizhub 652/552 7-61 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications Configurez les autres réglages (Tampon/Surimpression et Impress. par page) disponibles pour envoyer les documents. 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. Pages Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Couleur texte] Sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan et Magenta. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-62 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-30. 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer les documents lors de l'émission. Configurez aussi les réglages d'impression. Élément Description [Copies] Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. [Recto/ Recto-Verso] Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. [Agraf.] Sélectionnez s'il faut agrafer les feuilles imprimées. [Réglage] - [Position - Agrafage] Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. bizhub 652/552 7-63 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage Vous pouvez renommer ou supprimer les documents enregistrés dans une Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe afin de pouvoir organiser les documents dans la boîte. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage Appuyez sur [Réglages Archivage] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Archivage] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Supprimer Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà envoyé ou imprimé. Modif. Nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Déplacer Déplace dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Copie Copie dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Enregistrer dans mémoire externe Enregistre un document d'une boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. No. Élément Description 1 [Supprimer] Supprime le document sélectionné. 2 [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer le document sélectionné. 3 [Déplacer] Configurez les réglages permettant de déplacer le document sélectionné. 4 [Copie] Configurez les réglages permettant de copier le document sélectionné. 5 [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] Enregistre le document sélectionné dans la mémoire externe. 2 3 4 5 1 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-64 bizhub 652/552 7.7 7.7.2 Suppression de documents Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers devenus inutiles, comme les fichiers déjà imprimés. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer en une seule fois. Après avoir vérifié les détails du document, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7.7.3 Modif. Nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Entrez un nouveau nom sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Une fois défini, le nouveau nom du document sera utilisé comme nom de fichier. Notez que si vous renommez le document que vous envisagez d'envoyer, il faut tenir compte des critères de nom et autres conditions incontournables établies par le serveur de destination. - Au besoin, il est possible de renommer le document juste avant de l'envoyer. 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents Permet de déplacer dans une autre boîte un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. bizhub 652/552 7-65 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7.5 Copie Copie dans une autre boîte les données d'un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe. Appuyez sur [Réglages Document] pour configurer les réglages d'un document à enregistrer. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe, voir page 7-97. - Vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs documents ensemble. - Il est impossible de renommer un document pendant qu'il est en cours d'enregistrement. Avant d'enregistrer un document, changez le nom du fichier comme vous le souhaitez. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-66 bizhub 652/552 7.7 Réglages Document Vous pouvez spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier et la couleur du document à enregistrer. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, les réglages s'appliquent à tous les documents. Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la définition du document à enregistrer. bizhub 652/552 7-67 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Lors de la spécification du type de fichier, sélectionnez [Oui]. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-52. 7.7.7 Détails Document Vérifiez les détails d'un document enregistré sur l'écran tactile. Affichage des Informations détaillées Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour en vérifier les informations. Les informations suivantes sont affichées. Élément Description [Type Fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Cryptage] Si le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-48. [PDF Contours] Configurez cet élément quand vous sélectionnez PDF compact comme type de fichier. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-51. Élément Description [Heure Enreg.] Affiche la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du document. [Nom utilisat.] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur ou le mode (NUMÉRIS., COPIE ou IMPRESSION) dans lequel le document a été enregistré. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-68 bizhub 652/552 7.7 Aperçu Sur l'écran Détails du Document, appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour afficher un aperçu du document enregistré. Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [No. de pages] Affiche le nombre de pages du document. [N° Tâche] Affiche le numéro de tâche d'enregistrement du document. [ ][ ] Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour passer d'un document à l'autre. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l'écran Aperçu. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-68. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 7-69 7.8 Applications 7 7.8 Applications 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications Vous pouvez modifier un document enregistré dans une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe en changeant l'ordre des pages ou supprimer des pages du document. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer l'image d'un document enregistré à superposer aux données imprimées. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Applications Appuyez sur [Applications] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Application] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Modifier document Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. Enregistrer la surimpression Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. No. Élément Description 1 [Modif. document] Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. 2 [Enregistrer la surimpression] Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. 1 2 7 Applications 7-70 bizhub 652/552 7.8 7.8.2 Modif. document Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Modifier document]. L'écran Modifier document s'affiche. Pour voir l'image d'un document avant de le modifier, appuyez sur [Aperçu/Déf. Plage]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-74. Modifier document - Suppr. page Vous pouvez supprimer une page spécifique d'un document enregistré. Vous pouvez par exemple supprimer les pages vierges afin de réduire le volume des données. 0 Si vous supprimez la page unique d'un document, c'est le document en entier qui sera supprimé. 0 Il vous sera impossible d'annuler la suppression ou de restaurer les pages supprimées car elles seront écrasées lors de la suppression. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 1 Sélectionnez une page à supprimer et appuyez sur [Suppr. page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Pg paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Pg paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. 2 Vérifiez que la page spécifiée a été supprimée de l'écran. % Pour l'instant, la page spécifiée page n'est pas supprimée du document. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1, 3 et 4) ont été supprimées. 3 Pour supprimer définitivement les pages, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à l'écran Application. bizhub 652/552 7-71 7.8 Applications 7 4 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour supprimer les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont supprimées et le document est enregistré. Modifier document - Pivoter Page Vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages spécifiées dans un document enregistré. Si vous avez numérisé un original recto-verso, le haut et le bas peuvent être inversés d'une page à l'autre ou l'orientation peut être différente en fonction de l'orientation de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées de manière à visualiser l'intégralité du document plus facilement. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de rotation. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 1 Sélectionnez une page à faire pivoter et appuyez sur [Pivoter Page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Pg paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Pg paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. Les images d'aperçu des pages sélectionnées s'affichent en même temps que l'écran de réglage de rotation. 7 Applications 7-72 bizhub 652/552 7.8 2 En contrôlant l'image d'aperçu, sélectionnez l'angle de rotation. % Vous pouvez sélectionner un angle de rotation de 90 degrés à gauche, 90 degrés à droite ou 180 degrés. % Dans cet exemple, c'est [90° à gauche] qui est sélectionné. 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1 et 2) ont fait l'objet d'une rotation. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour pivoter les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le pivotement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont pivotées et le document est enregistré. bizhub 652/552 7-73 7.8 Applications 7 Modifier document - Déplacer Page Vous pouvez changer l'ordre des pages d'un document enregistré en déplaçant les pages spécifiées. 0 Il n'est pas possible de faire pivoter la page unique d'un document. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de déplacement. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 0 Vous pouvez entrer directement le numéro de page correspondant à l'endroit où vous voulez déplacer la page sélectionnée. Ceci est utile lorsqu'un document se compose de plusieurs pages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-75. 1 Sélectionnez une page à déplacer et appuyez sur [Déplacer Page]. % Le déplacement ne peut s'appliquer qu'à une seule page à la fois. Pour déplacer deux pages ou plus, répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour chacune des pages que vous voulez déplacer. % L'exemple montre comment déplacer la page 6 et l'insérer entre les pages 2 et 3. L'écran de réglage de la destination s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez la position de déplacement en vérifiant sur l'écran. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée au début du document, appuyez sur [Haut]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée à la fin du document, appuyez sur [Dern Page]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée et l'insérer entre deux pages, appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Applications 7-74 bizhub 652/552 7.8 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire déplacer la page sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour déplacer la page, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le déplacement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. La page sélectionnée est déplacée et le document est enregistré. Aperçu/Définir Plage Vous pouvez spécifier une étendue de pages et contrôler les images d'aperçu lorsque le document sélectionné comporte plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez aussi changer le format d'affichage. bizhub 652/552 7-75 7.8 Applications 7 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Déplacer Page] est sélectionné. Lorsque trop de pages sont enregistrées, spécifiez la page de destination en entrant le numéro de page. Voici la procédure permettant de spécifier la destination de l'opération de déplacement. 1 Dans l'écran Déplacer page, appuyez sur [Aperçu]. L'écran Aperçu/Spécifier par saisie s'affiche. 2 Affiche la page précédente ou la page suivante de la destination. % Appuyez sur [ Aperçu Page] ou [Page suiv. ] ou entrez le numéro de page au clavier et appuyez sur [Voir]. % Vous pouvez utiliser [Zoom] pour afficher les pages sélectionnées à la taille réelle ou agrandies 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. 3 Spécifiez la position d'insertion. Élément Description [ Aperçu Page] Permet un déplacement à la page précédente. [Page suiv. ] Appuyez sur cette touche un déplacement à la page suivante. [Zoom] Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. [Régler Plage Pages] Spécifiez l'étendue des pages à vérifier. Entrez au clavier un numéro dans les champs respectifs [De:] et [A:]. Puis, appuyez sur [Afficher page] pour afficher un aperçu de la page de début ou de fin spécifiée. Pour définir les champs [De:] ou [A:] concernant la page en cours d'aperçu, sélectionnez la touche et appuyez sur [Adapter Affichage]. 7 Applications 7-76 bizhub 652/552 7.8 % Pour déplacer la page avant la page affichée, appuyez sur [Avant]. % Pour déplacer la page après la page affichée, appuyez sur [Après]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression Permet d'enregistrer comme image de surimpression un document conservé dans une boîte. Vous pouvez superposer à un document l'image sélectionnée au moyen de [Tampon/Surimpression] dans l'onglet Impression. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous désirez imprimer les images (comme les logos d'une société ou d'un produit) qui ne sont pas proposées par cette machine (les éléments proposés par cette machine sont les tampons et numéros de page). Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 images de surimpression. - Si vous sélectionnez un document de plusieurs pages, c'est la première page qui est enregistrée comme image de surimpression. bizhub 652/552 7-77 7.8 Applications 7 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau Permet d'enregistrer une nouvelle image de surimpression. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur une touche image non enregistrée et appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 3 Entrez le nom de l'image de surimpression à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Valider]. % Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 16. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 7 Applications 7-78 bizhub 652/552 7.8 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser Vous pouvez écraser l'image de surimpression enregistrée par une nouvelle. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche de l'image à écraser et appuyez sur [Écraser]. 3 Vérifiez le message qui s'affiche, sélectionnez [Écraser]. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'image de surimpression est écrasée. bizhub 652/552 7-79 7.8 Applications 7 Paramètres Détaillés Configurez le contraste de la dernière image de surimpression enregistrée ou écrasée. % Sélectionnez la touche de l'image de surimpression cible et appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés]. Après avoir configuré les réglages, appuyez sur [Valider]. Élément Description [Contraste] Spécifiez la densité de l'image. Entrez au clavier une valeur de densité entre 20 et 100%. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7-80 bizhub 652/552 7.9 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord La boîte Bulletin permet d'enregistrer un document à parcourir. Un document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin est envoyé par la fonction Émission en relève lorsqu'une invitation à émettre est envoyée par la machine distante. 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord Sélectionnez la [Bulletin Board Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] pour afficher les boîtes Bulletin enregistrées. Sélectionnez la boîte Bulletin qui contient le document enregistré dans cette machine. 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin Un seul document peut être enregistré dans une boîte Bulletin. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin, supprimez le document qu'elle contient et envoyez un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-81 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève La boîte Émission en relève sert à enregistrer un document à envoyer en réponse à une demande de la part d'un destinataire. Le processus d'envoi et d'enregistrement d'un document spécifique dans la boîte Émission Dépôt s'appelle Émission en relève. 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer un document dans la boîte Émission en relève en tant qu'image de surimpression. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-77. 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Un seul document peut être enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Émission en relève, supprimez le document existant et procédez à l'émission en relève, du nouveau document. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'émission en relève, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-82 bizhub 652/552 7.11 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé La boîte Document Sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été imprimé avec spécification de l'ID et du code d'accès. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. La procédure d'authentification varie selon le réglage Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité]. Pour plus de détails, contactez l'Administrateur de cette machine. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 1] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 2] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. Référence - En cas de sélection de [Mode 2], entrez le code d'accès pour chaque document même si l'ID est identique. C'est parce que vous devez d'abord sélectionner le document avant de saisir le code d'accès. C'est pour cette raison que le niveau de sécurité dans ce mode est plus élevé qu'en mode 1. Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et procédez aux réglages d'impression Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé bizhub 652/552 7-83 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7 7.11.4 Impression - Impression Vous pouvez ajouter certaines fonctions à un document enregistré dans la boîte Document sécurisé lors de l'impression du document. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10. Combinaison Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-13. Zoom Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14. Marge page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17. Tampon/Surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-84 bizhub 652/552 7.11 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage Permet de gérer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé. Référence - Pour supprimer en une seule fois tous les documents dans la boîte Document sécurisé, sélectionnez [Réglages Boîte] - [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-19. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. bizhub 652/552 7-85 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système) 7 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système) 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. La boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. permet d'enregistrer dans la mémoire un document reçu et de l'imprimer selon les besoins. Lorsque la Réception Mémoire obligatoire est activée, un document reçu est automatiquement enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Pour vérifier un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig., sélectionnez [Réception Mémoire Obligat. Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système], puis entrez le code d'accès qui a été spécifié lorsque la réception Mémoire obligatoire a été activée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la spécification du code d'accès pour la Réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.12.2 Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. Une fois que le document spécifié a été imprimé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé. [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-86 bizhub 652/552 7.13 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation Les boîtes Annotation servent à attribuer automatiquement un numéro aux documents enregistrés et à ajouter ce numéro lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer le numéro à attribuer lors de la création de la boîte et le changer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Pour les fonctions que vous pouvez configurer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi de documents, voir page 7-9 et les sections qui suivent. Sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Annotation enregistrées s'affichent. Référence - Pour enregistrer la boîte Annotation, procédez depuis Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-16. - En ce qui concerne les types de numéros qui peuvent être imprimés dans les boîtes Annotation, voir page 7-89. - Pour imprimer les numéros spécifiés dans la boîte Annotation sans enregistrer un document dans la boîte, réglez le Délai suppression auto document sur [Rejeter]. Cette fonction est utile pour gérer les numéros qui sont ajoutés aux documents copiés. Spécifiez le Délai suppression auto document lorsque vous créez une boîte Annotation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-16. Si vous ouvrez une boîte, vous pouvez configurer les réglages d'impression et d'émission. 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-9. 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. bizhub 652/552 7-87 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre- Couverture Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17. 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-19. 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20. 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-31. 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-33. 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-40. 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB) Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-42. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-88 bizhub 652/552 7.13 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-43. 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-44. 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-45. 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46. 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46. 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47. 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-48. 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-52. 7.13.26 Env. - Réglage communication - Réglages E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-54. 7.13.27 Env. - Réglage communication - Paramètres URL Dest. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-56. 7.13.28 Env. - Réglage communication - Cryptage E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-60. 7.13.29 Env. - Réglage communication - Signature numérique Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-60. 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. bizhub 652/552 7-89 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62. 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte Texte Numérotation Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. Date/Heure Sélectionnez le format de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. Contraste Sélectionnez le contraste des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-90 bizhub 652/552 7.13 Type Numéro Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. Position d'impression Sélectionnez la position d'impression. bizhub 652/552 7-91 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Annotation. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-76. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. 7 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7-92 bizhub 652/552 7.14 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax La boîte Retransmission Fax sert à enregistrer pour une durée prédéterminée, un document, qui n'a pu être envoyé, à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié dans Réglage Paramètre Ligne, parce que la machine distante était occupée. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer ultérieurement un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. Sélectionnez [Ré-émission Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Avant qu'un document ne puisse être enregistré dans la boîte Retransmission Fax, il faut activer la boîte Retransmission Fax dans [Réglage fax] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur ces réglages, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve Avant de retransmettre un document enregistré, vous pouvez l'imprimer pour confirmation. Les données ne sont pas supprimées après avoir été imprimées. Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Épreuve]. Vérifiez les informations du document et appuyez sur [Départ]. 7.14.3 Env. - Fax Permet de retransmettre un document enregistré. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] et appuyez sur [Fax]. Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier une nouvelle destination lors de la retransmission d'un document. Vous pouvez spécifier la nouvelle destination dans Carnet d'adresses, Saisie dir. ou Historique tâches. - Vous pouvez configurer les Réglages Transmission lorsque vous retransmettez un document enregistré. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Ligne et les réglages En-tête Fax. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-53 et page 7-60. - Une fois que le document spécifié a été entièrement envoyé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. bizhub 652/552 7-93 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Arrête la retransmission et supprime le document voulu. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) 7-94 bizhub 652/552 7.15 7.15 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe Si vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection ou PageScope Direct Print pour imprimer un fichier PDF enregistré avec un mot de passe spécifié ou si vous imprimez des données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans la mémoire externe, les données sont automatiquement conservées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe. Sélectionnez [PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine, seules s'affichent les données PDF cryptées avec mot de passe qui ont été enregistrées par l'utilisateur connecté. 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg Sélectionnez un document à imprimer ou enregistrer et appuyez sur [Impr/Enreg]. Lors de l'impression ou de l'enregistrement d'un document, entrez le mot de passe attribué au fichier PDF. Une fois l'impression ou l'enregistrement terminé, les documents de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe sont automatiquement supprimés. Référence - La commande d'impression émise par votre ordinateur spécifie s'il faut imprimer ou enregistrer. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier une commande d'impression en commande d'enregistrement ou inversement. 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Vous pouvez supprimer un document enregistré si vous n'avez plus besoin de l'imprimer. Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-95 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer Voir documents Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Un document enregistré dans cette boîte peut être imprimé par l'utilisateur du document lorsque l'utilisateur est connecté à cette machine. Lorsque vous imprimez sur cette machine un document depuis un ordinateur via le réseau en entrant le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe, le document est temporairement enregistré dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. % Sélectionnez [ID & Imprimer Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Lorsque des documents enregistrés sont présents dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, les touches suivantes s'affichent dans l'écran de connexion. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe et appuyez sur la touche désirée. – [Lancer Impression] : appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer sans se connecter à cette machine. – [Impress. & Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine et imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. – [Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine mais sans imprimer les documents. Une fois connecté, vous pouvez imprimer ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. - Les documents peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer même lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activée. De plus, les travaux enregistrés par des utilisateur Publics peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. - Une fois l'impression des documents terminée, les données de la boîte ID & Imprimer sont automatiquement supprimées. Un écran permettant de confirmer si vous voulez vraiment supprimer les données apparaît en fonction de la configuration des Réglages Administrateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'impression d'un document depuis un ordinateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7.16.2 Impression - Impression 1 Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7-96 bizhub 652/552 7.16 2 Sélectionnez si le document doit être supprimé après impression. 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-97 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge Les critères relatifs aux dispositifs de mémoire externe pour cette machine sont les suivants. - Dispositif Mémoire Flash USB compatible avec l'interface USB (1.1/2.0) - Dispositif Mémoire formatée FAT32 - Une capacité mémoire jusqu'à 2 Go est recommandée. - La fonction Sécurité n'a pas été ajoutée, ou elle a été désactivée. Référence - Si la capacité mémoire excède 4 Go, la mémoire USB peut ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsqu'elle est connectée à cette machine. - La mémoire USB ne sera pas utilisable si elle est reconnue comme lecteur multiple par l'ordinateur. Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe 0 Utilisez le connecteur USB situé du côté le plus proche du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez pas le connecteur USB situé près du côté arrière car il sert pour les périphériques en option. 0 Ne pas déconnecter le dispositif de mémoire externe pendant l'enregistrement d'un document dans la mémoire externe ou pendant l'impression d'un document enregistré dans la mémoire externe. 0 N'utilisez pas de dispositif USB autre que la mémoire Flash USB (comme un disque dur ou hub USB). 0 Ne pas connecter ni déconnecter la mémoire USB tant que le sablier est visible sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la machine est active. 0 ne pas déconnecter la mémoire USB juste après l'avoir connectée. % Raccordez le dispositif de mémoire externe au connecteur USB sur le côté latéral de la machine. Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est raccordé, une icône apparaît en bas de l'écran et l'écran suivant s'affiche. Si vous voulez immédiatement utiliser la mémoire externe, sélectionnez le but prévu. Si vous n'utilisez pas la mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Fermer]. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-98 bizhub 652/552 7.17 Référence - L'objet prévu de la mémoire externe à afficher varie en fonction des réglages de l'administrateur. 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est connecté, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] pour afficher la structure des dossiers. Entrer un chemin de fichier Sur l'écran tactile, vous pouvez spécifier le chemin de fichier pointant vers le dossier contenant le document à imprimer. Appuyez sur [Chemin Fichier] et entrez le chemin de fichier. Référence - Assurez-vous que la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier n'excède pas 250 caractères. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse cette limite, le fichier ne s'affiche pas. Sélectionner un fichier Vous pouvez imprimer les types de fichier suivants : PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. Sélectionnez la liste un document de l'un de ces types. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. - L'impression n'est pas possible quand l'impression est interdite par les paramètres de sécurité d'un fichier PDF. - Cette machine prend en charge l'impression de fichiers PDF de Version 1.6 ou antérieure. - Seuls les fichiers d'un type autorisant l'impression s'affichent dans la liste. - L'accès au fichier échoue lorsque la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier dépasse 250 caractères. - Au maximum, 200 fichiers imprimables peuvent être affichés dans le dossier du chemin de fichier spécifié. Si le dossier contient 200 fichiers ou plus, l'affichage de l'écran de la liste des fichiers risque de prendre plus de temps. Imprimer des données PDF cryptées Pour imprimer les données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans le dispositif de mémoire externe, sélectionnez les données sur l'écran Mémoire externe et imprimez les données. Lorsque la commande d'impression est émise, les données PDF cryptées de la mémoire externe sont enregistrées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe de cette machine. Accédez à la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de passe de cette machine et imprimez le document. dPour info Pour la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe, voir page 7-94. bizhub 652/552 7-99 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 Déplacement vers le dossier parent Pour déplacer un fichier vers le dossier parent, appuyez sur [Haut]. Ouvrir un dossier Pour vérifier le contenu d'un dossier spécifique, appuyez sur [Ouvrir]. Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. L'écran Détails Impression s'affiche. Détails Document Vous pouvez vérifier la date de modification, le nom de fichier et autres propriétés du document sélectionné. 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Position Reliure Si vous sélectionner Recto-Verso dans [Impression], sélectionnez la position de reliure. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-100 bizhub 652/552 7.17 Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. Papier Sélectionnez un magasin destiné au papier d'impression. 7.17.4 Impression - Applications Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. bizhub 652/552 7-101 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.17.5 Réglages Archivage - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer dans une Boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans la mémoire externe. Spécifiez la Boîte Utilisateur et le nom du document et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique via une communication Bluetooth ou d'enregistrer ce même document dans une Boîte utilisateur. 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation Les téléphones cellulaires et les agendas électroniques connectables sur cette machine et le fichier imprimable doivent remplir les conditions suivantes. Référence - Pour imprimer des documents à partir d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique, il vous fait le kit d'interface local EK-605. De même qu'il faut activer les réglages pour une communication Bluetooth. Contactez votre S.A.V au préalable. - Si vous ne pouvez pas accéder au fichier lien en essayant d'afficher un fichier XHTML, soit le document ne sera pas imprimé soit il sera imprimé dans un cadre noir selon le paramétrage dans les [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier]. - Pour accéder au fichier de lien pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, les [Réglages WebDAV] de cette machine sont requis. - Pour utiliser un proxy pour la connexion, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages WebDAV] - [Réglages Client WebDAV] - [Adresse d'hôte] et réglez [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Activé]. - La vitesse de communication risque de chuter ou la communication risque d'être coupée en raison d'obstacles, d'un champ magnétique ou de l'électricité statique. - Les documents protégés et les données d'image risquent de ne pas être envoyés en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Élément Description [Boîte utilis.] Sélectionnez la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe pour y enregistrer des données. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document à enregistrer. • Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le nom du document. Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de prise en charge OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier pris en charge PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • Pour les types XHTML de fichier, la machine prend en charge le code de caractère d'UTF-8/Shift-JIS/ISO-8859 ainsi que les extensions de fichier de JPEG/ JPG/PNG. • Cette machine prend en charge RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7-102 bizhub 652/552 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer Référence - Pour enregistrer dans une Boîte un fichier archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ou pour imprimer ce fichier, configurez à l'avance le réglage approprié dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Pour utiliser une communication Bluetooth, le paramètre Bluetooth doit être activé sur cette machine. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Si l'authentification utilisateur est spécifiée sur cette machine, même un utilisateur enregistré ne peut imprimer de document à moins que l'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ne soit autorisée dans le réglage de la machine. Pour les questions relatives à l'authentification utilisateur, contactez l'administrateur de cette machine. Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'impression. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Vérifier les préférences d'impression Vous pouvez vérifier un aperçu des réglages pour imprimer les données reçues. dPour info Pour configurer les paramètres d'impression, sélectionnez [Configuration Téléphone Cellulaire//PDA] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-12. bizhub 652/552 7-103 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. 7 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7-104 bizhub 652/552 7.18 8 Réglages Boîte bizhub 652/552 8-3 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte Voici les menus et éléments permettant de configurer les réglages Boîte dans le menu Utilitaires. 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-6) 1 [Boîte Utilisat. Public/Privé] (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 2 [Boîte Utilisat.] (p. 8-7) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 2 [Régl. Utilisateur] 2 [Param. Affichage Perso] 3 [Réglages Boîte] (p. 8-10) [Onglet par Défaut] [Touche Raccourci 1] [Touc. Raccourci 2] [Réglage Mobile/ PDA] [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier] (p. 8-11) [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] (p. 8-11) [Impression] (p. 8-12) [Impression] [Papier] [Finition] [Marge page] [Tampon/ Surimpression] 8 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8-4 bizhub 652/552 8.1 8.1.2 Réglages Administrateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Réglage Système] 0 [Réglages Boîte] (p. 8-19) 1 [Supprimer Bte util. inutilisée] (p. 8-19) 2 [Supprimer Docs. Impr. sécurisée] (p. 8-19) 3 [Délai suppress Impress. sécuris] (p. 8-20) 4 [Délai suppress PDF cryptés] (p. 8-20) 5 [Délai suppress ID & Imprimer] (p. 8-21) 6 [Réglage attente doc] (p. 8-21) 7 [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe] (p. 8-22) [Enregistrer document] [Imprimer Document] [Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe] 8 [Boîte Util. Autor./Interd.] (p. 8-22) 9 [Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression] (p. 8-23) 0 [Réglage Délai Suppression Doc] (p. 8-23) bizhub 652/552 8-5 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 3 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-15) 1 [Boîte Public/ Privé] (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] [Supprimer Boîte Vide] (p. 8-7) 2 [Boîte Utilisat.] (p. 8-7) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 4 [Boîte Annotation] (p. 8-16) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 4 [Réglage Maxi. Boîtes] (p. 8-17) [Gestion Boîte maximum] [Réglage Maxi. Boîtes] 4 [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] 2 [Système d'Authentification] 1 [Paramètres admin.] [Paramètres ID & Imprimer] (p. 8-24) 9 [Connexion système] 5 [Réglage Mobile/PDA] (p. 8-24) 0 [Paramètres Sécurité] 2 [Régl Admin Boîte Utilisat] (p. 8-25) 4 [Détails Sécurité] [Impression Sécurisée seulem.] (p. 8-26) 6 [Paramétrage HDD] 1 [Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur] (p. 8-26) 2 [Écraser données Disque Dur] (p. 8-27) [Méthode écrasement] [Priorité cryptage] [Priorité écrasement] 3 [Écraser toutes les données] (p. 8-28) 4 [Code d’accès DD] (p. 8-29) 5 [Formater disque dur.] (p. 8-30) 6 [Réglage cryptage DD] (p. 8-30) 8 [Réglages Tampon] 1 [Régl. Horodatage] (p. 8-31) [Impress.] [Envoi] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-6 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Permet de créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/2) Élément Description [N° Boite] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Index] Sélectionnez le type d'index. [Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. bizhub 652/552 8-7 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Page (2/2) Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) Recherche et supprime automatiquement une boîte vide si la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe a été créée dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur [Supprimer Boîte Vide] dans l'écran Créer boîte. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Créer Boîte Bulletin. Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes Bulletin. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • La possibilité de cette opération est subordonnée aux Réglages Administrateur. [Récept. confid.] Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter la fonction Réception confidentielle à une boîte utilisateur. Lors de l'attribution de la fonction Réception confidentielle, entrez le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. • Pour confirmation, entrez une nouvelle fois le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-8 bizhub 652/552 8.2 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Élément Description [N° Boite] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Type Boîte] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. bizhub 652/552 8-9 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Boîte Relais Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à cinq boîtes relais. Les éléments de réglage de création et de modification sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description [N° Boîte.] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Destination Relais] Sélectionnez une destination relais pour envoyer les données depuis la boîte relais. Enregistrez à l'avance la destination relais en tant que destination groupe. • Lors de l'enregistrement d'une destination groupe comme destination relais, veillez à appliquer préalablement la numérotation abrégée à la destination groupe. [Mot de passe EMI Relais] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Mot de passe EMI Relais] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-10 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte Vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Boîte afin de l'adapter à votre environnement de travail. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez la page Boîte qui doit s'afficher lorsque la touche [Boite] a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - [Public] : affiche la page Boîte Public. - [Privé] : affiche la page Boîte Privé lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. - [Système] : affiche la page Boîte Système. - [Groupe] : affiche la page Boîte Groupe lorsque Compte Département est activé. Touche de raccourci Cette fonction vous permet d'ajouter 2 touches raccourci au maximum dans la zone en bas à droite de la page. Elle est disponible lors de l'enregistrement de la boîte Système fréquemment utilisée comme touche de raccourci. Référence - Un touche de raccourci s'affiche seulement en mode Boîte une fois que la touche [Boite] a été actionnée. En cas de passage au mode Numérisation/Fax ou Copie, la touche de raccourci de la boîte concernée n'apparaît pas. - Si la Touche de Raccourci 1 est configurée, [Sélection Langue] ne s'affiche pas. bizhub 652/552 8-11 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier le traitement à effectuer s'il vous est impossible d'accéder à un fichier de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [MARCHE]) - [MARCHE] : imprime une partie de fichier lien dans un cadre noir. - [ARRÊT] : n'imprime pas un fichier de lien. 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser un serveur proxy pour accéder à un fichier de lien lors de l'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [ARRÊT]) - [MARCHE] : utilise un serveur proxy. - [ARRET] : n'utilise pas de serveur proxy. Référence - En cas d'utilisation d'un serveur proxy pour la connexion, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Param. WebDAV] - [Paramètres Client WebDAV] - [Adresse du serveur proxy] pour enregistrer le serveur proxy désiré. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-12 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression En cas d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique pour imprimer un document via cette machine, configurez les réglages d'impression. De base - Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. De base - Papier Sélectionnez le format du papier d'impression si les données envoyées ne contiennent pas d'informations sur le format du papier. De base - Finition Spécifiez Pli/Reliure, Agraf. ou Perfo. bizhub 652/552 8-13 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Référence - Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel vous vous trouvez. Applications - Marge Sélectionnez la position de la marge. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-14 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte Types d'utilisateurs Cette machine est destinée aux utilisateurs de plusieurs niveaux. C'est pourquoi la fonction Boîte propose en plus de l'Administrateur de cette machine, l'élément "Administrateur de boîtes". Voici les types de boîtes accessibles en fonction des types d'utilisateur. Référence - Pour se connecter à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, effectuez les étapes suivantes lors du réglage Authentification utilisateur. – Entrez "boxadmin" dans la case Nom utilisateur. – Entrez le code d'accès spécifié à la page 8-25 dans la case Code d'accès. Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe Voici les fonctions disponibles de la (1) boîte Public accessibles à tous les utilisateurs et de la (2) boîte Privé ou Groupe accessibles à certains utilisateurs seulement. *1 Les utilisateurs enregistrés ne peuvent gérer que les boîtes qu'ils ont créées. *2 L'Administrateur de boîtes et l'administrateur peuvent gérer les boîtes sans avoir à entrer le code d'accès même si son introduction a été spécifiée pour les boîtes. Élément Description Utilisateur public Si l'Authentification utilisateur est désactivée, chaque utilisateur est connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public. Utilisateur enregistré Il s'agit de l'utilisateur enregistré par l'Administrateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Administrateur de boîtes Public Il s'agit de l'utilisateur qui se connecte comme Administrateur de boîtes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Cet utilisateur peut accéder à toutes les boîtes, qu'un code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Administrateur C'est l'utilisateur responsable de cette machine. Cet utilisateur peut créer, modifier ou supprimer toutes les boîtes utilisateur, qu'elles soient protégées par un code d'accès ou non. Fonction Créer Boîte utilisateur Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer un document Réglage Changer Boîte Supprimer boîte utilisateur Type Boîte Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Utilisateur public o - o - o - o - Utilisateur enregistré o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 Administrateur de boîtes Public o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrateur o o - - o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 bizhub 652/552 8-15 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte Vous pouvez enregistrer une nouvelle boîte. Voici les types de boîtes qui peuvent être enregistrées. Référence - Si l'Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont désactivées, la boîte enregistrée comme boîte Privé ou Groupe est sauvegardée comme boîte Public. Cependant le nom de la boîte reste inchangé. - Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé, entrez l'ID et le code d'accès pour vous connecter à cette machine. Après cela, veillez à appuyer sur [Connexion] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle pour achever le processus d'authentification. Si l'authentification n'est pas complète, il n'est pas possible de créer une boîte Privé ou Groupe. - Si le Kit Fax en option est installé, vous pouvez configurer les réglages Réception confidentielle (Fonction TX code F) comme fonction d'extension d'une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réception confidentielle, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Si le réglage Authentification utilisateur est configuré, vous pouvez spécifier un Administrateur de boîtes. Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Public, Privé et Groupe. Référence - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer Règles Mot Pass. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-7. 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-9. Élément Description Boîte Utilisateur Public Une boîte Public est accessible à tous. Boîte Privé Il s'agit d'une boîte Privé accessible seulement par l'utilisateur connecté lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Boîte Groupe Il s'agit d'une boîte accessible seulement par l'utilisateur appartenant au compte connecté lorsque Compte Département est activée. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Il s'agit d'une boîte utilisée pour l'émission Dépôt/Réception Relève Bulletin avec F-codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Relais Il s'agit d'une boîte servant à enregistrer les données relais lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme station relais pour les transmissions relais avec F codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Annotation Il s'agit d'une boîte qui sert à imprimer ou envoyer un document enregistré avec la date/heure ou image du numéro d'archivage. Spécifiez le type de texte à ajouter lorsque cette boîte est utilisée. Lors de l'enregistrement de cette boîte, spécifiez le mode Administrateur. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-16 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation Permet de créer une boîte Annotation. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/3) Référence - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer Règles Mot Pass. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Page (2/3) Élément Description [N° Boîte.] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). bizhub 652/552 8-17 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Page (3/3) 8.3.7 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes Spécifiez le nombre maximum de boîtes qui peuvent être créées pour chaque utilisateur. Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Élément Description [Compte Haut] Sélectionnez si le numéro d'annotation doit être appliqué par tâche ou par page. [Texte Numérotation] Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer (20 caractères max.). [Date/Heure] Sélectionnez le format d'affichage de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Type Numéro] Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Position d'impression] Sélectionnez la position d'impression. [Texte] Permet d'entrer un texte libre (maximum 40 caractères). Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • Si vous désirez attribuer une annotation à un document mais sans enregistrer ou copier le document, sélectionnez [Rejeter]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-18 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Gestion Boîte maximum Pour spécifier le nombre maximum de boîtes, sélectionnez [MARCHE]. Pour ne pas spécifier de limite et autoriser les utilisateurs à créer un nombre indéfini de boîtes, sélectionnez [ARRET]. Réglage Maxi. Boîtes La plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes est 0 à 1 000. Entrez au clavier le nombre maximum de boîtes et appuyez sur [Appliquer] pour le valider. Référence - Si le nombre maximum de boîtes est réglé sur "0", aucune nouvelle boîte ne peut être créée. - Si l'utilisateur sélectionné fixe déjà le nombre de boîtes à 3, la plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes passe de 3 à 1 000. bizhub 652/552 8-19 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.8 Réglages Boîte Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée Supprime une boîte qui ne contient aucun document, laquelle devient inutile. Pour supprimer une boîte, confirmez le message qui apparaît et sélectionnez [Oui]. Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée Cette fonction supprime tous les documents enregistrés dans la Boîte Document sécurisé. Pour supprimer la boîte, confirmez le message et sélectionnez [Oui]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-20 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document sécurisé dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. Délai suppress PDF cryptés Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document PDF crypté dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. bizhub 652/552 8-21 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans la Boîte ID & Imprimer et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. Réglage attente doc. Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer un document dans une Boîte en cas d'envoi ou d'impression. Référence - Lors de la suppression d'un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Oui]. Pour afficher un écran de confirmation de suppression lors de l'envoi ou de l'impression, sélectionnez [ON] sur l'écran de sélection de suppression. - Pour supprimer un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [No]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-22 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe Réglez la fonction Mémoire externe connectée à cette machine sur MARCHE ou ARRET. Référence - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). Elle est aussi réglée sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement) dans le réglage des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser les fonctions permettant à l'utilisateur de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Référence - Pour permettre à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Permis]. - Pour interdire à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Interdire]. Seul l'administrateur peut alors de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Élément Description [Enregistrer document] Sélectionnez s'il faut enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas enregistrer (ARRET) en mémoire externe des documents numérisés ou des documents archivés dans une Boîte. [Imprimer Document] Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer (MARCHE) ou ne pas imprimer (ARRET) des documents archivés en mémoire externe en utilisant la fonction [Utilis/Archiv]. [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] Numérisez un document en mémoire externe et sélectionnez s'il faut l'enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas l'enregistrer (ARRET) dans une Boîte. bizhub 652/552 8-23 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression Sélectionnez s'il faut vérifier si le document conservé dans la boîte ID & Imprimer a bien été supprimé après impression. Référence - Pour vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur si le document concerné doit être supprimé, sélectionnez [Confirm.avec Util.]. - Pour supprimer le document concerné après impression sans vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur, sélectionnez [Toujours supprimer]. Réglage Délai suppression Document Cette fonction permet à l'administrateur de spécifier la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique de ce dernier si l'utilisateur ne peut pas spécifier l'heure/la date de suppression du document. Pour spécifier automatiquement l'heure/la date de suppression d'un document, sélectionnez [Oui] et entrez l'heure de suppression. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-24 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Paramètres ID & Imprimer Configurez les réglages pour la Boîte ID & Imprimer. Référence - Un tâche d'un utilisateur Public est imprimée ou enregistrée. - Une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur est imprimée ou enregistrée lorsque Imprimer sans Authentification est activé. - Pour plus de détails sur l'impression par des utilisateurs publics et la fonction Imprimer sans Authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur - Opérations Impression]. 8.3.9 Réglage Mobile/PDA Sélectionnez s'il faut autoriser/interdire la fonction d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique. Élément Description [ID & Imprimer] [MARCHE] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer toutes les tâches d'impression normale et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. [ARRET] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer les tâches et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. La tâche d'impression normale est réalisée sans être enregistrée dans la boîte. [Utilisat. public] [Imprimer immédiatem.] : Imprime une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur sans l'enregistrer dans la boîte. [Enregistr.] : Enregistre une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. bizhub 652/552 8-25 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.10 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur L'Administrateur de boîtes est disponible lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Si vous vous connectez à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, vous pouvez référencer le contenu de toutes les boîtes utilisateur crées, que le code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Pour Définir un administrateur de boîtes, sélectionnez [Permis] et appuyez sur [Réglage Code] pour enregistrer le mot de passe de l'administrateur des boîtes. Référence - Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer "Règles Mot Pass". Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes Entrez les éléments suivants sur l'écran de connexion. Nom Utilisateur : boxadmin Mot de passe : code d'accès déterminé dans l'écran Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Fonctions Administrateur disponibles Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles lorsque vous vous connectez comme Administrateur de boîtes. - Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe - Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans toutes les boîtes - Changer tous les réglages Boîte - Supprimer toutes les boîtes 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-26 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3.11 DétailsSécurité Impression sécurisée seulement Utilisez ce réglage pour spécifier l'activation d'Impression Sécurisée seulement, lorsque la commande d'impression est émise depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. 8.3.12 Paramétrage HDD Vérifier Capacité HDD Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le disque dur. bizhub 652/552 8-27 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Écraser données Disque Dur Vous pouvez spécifier les modalités d'écrasement et de suppression des données du disque dur. Lorsque les données image enregistrées sur le disque dur ne sont plus utiles, cette fonction permet d'écraser ces données dans toutes les zones où elles se trouvent afin de supprimer les données de l'original. Cette fonction supprime aussi la structure des données non-image afin qu'elles ne puissent pas être divulguées même si par exemple le disque dur installé est volé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. (Par défaut : Mode 1) Référence - Si vous changez le réglage Priorité cryptage ou le réglage Priorité Écrasement, formatez le disque dur après avoir redémarré cette machine. Dans ce cas, les données seront supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. - En ce qui concerne les données supprimées par le formatage du disque dur, voir page 8-30. Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par la lettre "A" (0x61) Vérifié [Priorité cryptage] Permet d'effectuer un cryptage à un niveau de sécurité plus élevé. Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue différemment des réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. Spécifiez toujours [Priorité cryptage]. [Priorité écrasement] Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue conformément aux réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-28 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Écraser données Cette fonction écrase et supprimer toutes les données contenues dans le disque dur. 0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V. 0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des données. % Pour écraser et supprimer les données, sélectionnez la Méthode écrasement données disque dur et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - L'exécution du Mode 1 prend 40 minutes environ. Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 [Mode 3] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Vérifié [Mode 4] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 5] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 6] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par données spécifiées de 512 octets [Mode 7] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa [Mode 8] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa Vérifié bizhub 652/552 8-29 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Mot de passe accès disque dur Vous pouvez spécifier le code d'accès permettant de verrouiller le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un code d'accès tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. En effet, la perte du code d'accès entraînerait un travail de récupération très important. % Spécifiez le code d'accès et redémarrez cette machine. Le code d'accès du disque dur est spécifié. Référence - Entrez un code d'accès disque dur de 20 caractères. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Si vous avez déjà spécifié code d'accès du disque dur, [Changer] et [Désactive] apparaissent. Vous pouvez changer ou désactiver le code d'accès du disque dur. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-30 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Formatage DD Cette fonction permet de formater le disque dur. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine. Référence - L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de PageScope Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, consulter l'Aide en ligne de PageScope Web Connection. - Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. – Programme – My ress Book – Réglage Méthode d'authentification – Réglage Auth. Utilis. – Réglage Compte Département – Boîte Utilisateur – Réglages Boîte – Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur – Réglage boîte Confidentielle – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord Réglage cryptage DD Vous pouvez configurer le réglage du cryptage du disque dur. L'utilisation d'une chaîne de 20 caractères comme mot de passe du disque dur évite qu'un utilisateur prenne facilement connaissance des données conservées dans le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un mot de passe tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. 0 Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage doit être configuré par l'administrateur de cette machine. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Spécifiez le mot de passe de cryptage et redémarrez cette machine. Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient alors disponible. Référence - Entrez les 20 caractères du mot de passe de cryptage. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient disponible une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. bizhub 652/552 8-31 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.13 Réglages Tampon Réglages Horodatage Cette fonction permet d'appliquer par mesure de sécurité un tampon prédéfini à tous les documents à produire à partir de cette machine. Spécifiez si un tampon doit être appliqué lors de l'impression ou de l'émission. Pour appliquer les tampons, sélectionnez [Appliquer], puis configurez les réglages du tampon à ajouter en continu. Référence - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données imprimées. – Date/Heure – Numéro de page – Tampon – Sécurité Copie (Protection Copie, Pare-copie, Copie Prot. MdP) – Tampon répétitif – Tête/Pied de page – Surimpression enregistrée - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données envoyées. – Date/Heure – Numéro de page – Tampon – Tête/Pied de page dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage Tampon, voir page 7-20. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-32 bizhub 652/552 8.3 9 PageScope Web Connection bizhub 652/552 9-3 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 9 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Vous pouvez par l'intermédiaire d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, configurer les paramètres de la machine et contrôler l'état de la machine. Cet utilitaire permet de configurer depuis votre ordinateur, certains réglages gérés sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine et facilite la saisie des données. 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation 9.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 0 Lancez le navigateur Web pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 0 Si l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, entrez le nom utilisateur et le code. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-11. 0 Pour plus d'informations sur le paramétrage de l'adresse IP de cette machine, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 0 PageScope Web Connection dispose de deux modes d'affichage : Flash et HTML. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet. 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine dans la barre d'adresse URL, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. http:/// Exemple : Si l'adresse IP de cette machine est 192.168.1.20 : - http://192.168.1.20/ Si IPv6 est défini sur "ACTIVE" lorsqu'un navigateur autre que Internet Explorer 6 est utilisé : - Entrez l'adresse IPv6 dans les crochets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 adresse de la machine]/ Exemple : lorsque l'adresse IPv6 de cette machine est fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16 : - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - Si IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et que vous utilisez Internet Explorer, ajoutez préalablement "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" au fichier serveurs et spécifiez l'adresse avec le nom d'hôte. La page de connexion ou du menu principal apparaît. Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Navigateur Web : • Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6/7/8 (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) Adobe® Flash® Player • Plug-in Ver. 7.0 ou supérieure requis pour sélectionner Flash en tant que format d'affichage. • Plug-in Ver. 9.0 ou supérieure requis pour utiliser Data Management Utility (gestion de données Polices/Macros). 9 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 9-4 bizhub 652/552 9.1 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Le navigateur Web dispose de la fonction cache ; par conséquent, il se peut que les dernières informations ne s'affichent pas sur la page lors de l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. L'utilisation du cache peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez la fonction cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - En fonction des versions, les navigateur Web peuvent proposer des menus et noms de rubriques différents. Pour plus d'informations, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet. - Lorsque la fonction cache est activée, une déconnexion pour dépassement se produit en mode administrateur et cette déconnexion se répète à chaque tentative de connexion. Cela aboutit au blocage du panneau de contrôle de la machine auquel vous n'avez plus accès. Dans ce cas, éteignez puis rallumez la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactiver la fonction de cache. Pour Internet Explorer 1 Sélectionnez [Options Internet] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 À l'onglet [Général], sélectionnez [Fichiers Internet Temporaires] - [Paramètres]. 3 Sélectionnez [A chaque visite de la page] et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour Netscape Navigator 1 Sélectionnez [Préférences] dans le menu [Édition]. 2 Sous [Catégorie] à gauche, sélectionnez [Avancé] - [Cache]. 3 Sous [Comparer le document en mémoire cache au document du réseau], sélectionnez [Chaque fois]. Pour Mozilla Firefox 1 Sélectionnez [Options] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 Sélectionnez [Confidentialité] puis cliquez sur [Paramètres] dans la section Vie privée. 3 Cochez la case [Cache] sous [Vie privée], cochez la case [Toujours effacer mes traces personnelles à la fermeture de Firefox] sous [Paramètres] puis cliquez sur [OK]. 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne Après connexion à PageScope Web Connection et avoir cliqué , vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne pour la fonction en cours de configuration. Référence - Pour afficher l'aide en ligne, connectez votre ordinateur à Internet. bizhub 652/552 9-5 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion À l'ouverture de PageScope Web Connection, une page de connexion s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont activés et la page de connexion s'affiche en mode Utilisateur public si Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département ne sont pas activés. En cas de nouvelle connexion sur cette machine en tant qu'utilisateur différent ou en tant qu'administrateur, déconnectez-vous une fois puis connectez-vous à nouveau Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé L'utilisateur se connecte automatiquement comme utilisateur public. Pour se connecter comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-6 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Il est alors possible de se reconnecter en tant qu'Administrateur. bizhub 652/552 9-7 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé pour l'authentification, demandez à votre administrateur serveur de vous indiquer la procédure de connexion. La page Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département s'affiche. Entrer les informations demandées pour vous connecter. Pour se connecter comme utilisateur différent ou comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-8 bizhub 652/552 9.2 9.2.2 Déconnexion Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] ou [Vers Écran de connexion] en haut à droite dans la fenêtre. Une page de confirmation de déconnexion apparaît. Cliquez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. Référence - La page de connexion qui s'affiche peut être différente selon si l'Authentification est activée ou non sur cette machine. - Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. - En cas de dépassement du délai d'attente dû à l'absence d'opérations pendant la période spécifiée de connexion ou dû à un changement de l'authentification au niveau du panneau de contrôle lors de la connexion en mode utilisateur, vous êtes automatiquement déconnecté du mode en cours. - Pour plus d'information sur la manière de définir le délai d'attente des modes utilisateur ou administrateur, voir page 9-38. Reconnectez-vous. bizhub 652/552 9-9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2.3 Connexion PageScope Web Connection permet de se connecter en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. Si nécessaire, vous avez la possibilité de vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur ou Administrateur boîte utilisateur, selon le réglage de l'authentification utilisateur ou de l'Administrateur Boîte Utilisateur. Référence - Vous pouvez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur boîte utilisateur lorsque Administrateur boîte utilisateur est activé au niveau du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Administrateur de boîtes, les permissions et le mot de passe, voir page 8-25. - La connexion au mode utilisateur comme Administrateur vous permet des opérations de suppression de travaux, option non disponible en mode administrateur. - A la page de connexion, sélectionnez l'utilitaire de Data Management Utility que vous souhaitez. Pour plus d'informations sur Data Management Utility, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Options de Connexion Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de connexion. Référence - Si la case Flash est cochée au Mode vue, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec la fonction Flash. – Icônes et messages d'état – État de [Magasin Papier] dans [Information] - [Infos Périphérique] – État de [Tâche] Élément Description Langue Sélectionnez la langue d'affichage des informations. Mode vue Sélectionnez Flash ou HTML. • Pour utiliser le logiciel d'affichage, sélectionnez HTML. • Dans un environnement IPv6, sélectionner HTML. • Pour sélectionnez Flash, préparez Flash Player. Aide utilisateur Cochez la case [Affiche une boîte de dialogue lors de l'avertissement.] pour afficher une boîte de dialogue en cas d'avertissement ou pendant une opération après connexion. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-10 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public Si Authentification utilisateur n'a pas été activé sur la machine, l'utilisateur sera connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Utilisateur public] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. bizhub 652/552 9-11 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré Spécifier le nom d'utilisateur enregistré et le mot de passe pour se connecter lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé sur cette machine. % Dans la page d'accueil, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [Connexion]. Référence - Si Compte Département est activé, entrez également le nom et le code d'accès du compte. - Pour sélectionner un nom d'utilisateur dans une liste, cliquez sur la touche [Liste Utilisateurs]. - Si l'authentification par serveur externe est activée, choisissez un serveur. - Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] des Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et qu'un utilisateur introduit un code d'accès incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, cet utilisateur sera bloqué et ne pourra plus utiliser la machine. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - [Liste Utilisateurs] n'est disponible que lorsque Liste noms utilis. est réglé sur [ON]. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-12 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Se connecter en mode Administrateur Pour configurer le système ou les paramètres réseau, connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 1 Sélectionnez [Administrateur], puis cliquez sur [Connexion]. 2 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. % La connexion en mode administrateur provoque le blocage du panneau de contrôle et ne vous permet pas de l'utiliser. % En fonction de l'état de la machine, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous connecter en mode administrateur. % Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans les Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et si un utilisateur entre un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, il n'est plus possible de se connecter en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. % La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. % Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. bizhub 652/552 9-13 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Affichage du mode en mode administrateur Dans [Réglages Système] - [Réglage Affichage], le mode d'affichage en mode administrateur peut être sélectionné entre [Affichage Fonction Onglet] ou [Affichage Fonction Liste]. Ce manuel montre un exemple où l'[Affichage Fonction Liste] est configuré comme mode d'affichage. Dans l'autre mode d'affichage, les éléments disponibles sont les mêmes. Dans le réglage par défaut, l'écran est affiché en [Affichage Fonction Onglet]. Dans [Affichage Fonction Onglet], cliquez sur l'icône souhaitée pour changer de menu. Dans [Affichage Fonction Liste], changer de menu dans la zone de liste déroulante. Sélectionnez le menu souhaité dans la zone de liste déroulante, cliquez sur [Afficher]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-14 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte Vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur afin de supprimer une tâche, si Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte, lorsque Administrateur de boîte est activé à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. % Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Administrateur] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. % Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur de boîte, sélectionnez [Administrateur de boîte] puis entrez le mot de passe pour l'administrateur de boîte. Référence - Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans les Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et si un utilisateur entre un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, il n'est plus possible de se connecter en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. - Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. – [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. – [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. bizhub 652/552 9-15 9.3 Organisation de la page 9 9.3 Organisation de la page Toute connexion sur PageScope Web Connection affiche la page qui est configurée comme illustré ci-dessous. L'exemple ci-après illustre les rubriques de Information - Info sur le périphérique. Référence - Le contenu des pages de PageScope Web Connection dépend des options installées sur la machine ou des réglages. No. Élément Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Cliquez sur ce logo pour accéder directement au site Web Konica Minolta à l'adresse suivante : http://www.konicaminolta.com/ 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur ce logo pour afficher les informations de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône et le nom utilisateur du mode de connexion actuel (utilisateur public, utilisateur enregistré, nom de compte, administrateur, administrateur de boîtes). Cliquez sur le nom d'utilisateur pour afficher le nom de l'utilisateur connecté. 4 Affichage des états Affiche les symboles et les messages indiquant l'état des sections imprimante et scanner de la machine. En cliquant sur l'icône désirée lors de l'apparition d'une erreur, vous affichez les informations (Page Info Consommables, Magasin ou Enregistrement utilisateur page) associées à l'icône vous permettant de vérifier l'état. 5 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de la machine. 3 4 5 6 12 7 8 9 1 2 10 11 9 Organisation de la page 9-16 bizhub 652/552 9.3 6 [Vers Écran de connexion]/ [Déconnexion] Cliquez sur cette touche pour se déconnecter du mode en cours et se reconnecter. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. 7 [Modif. Mot Passe] Cliquez sur cette touche pour accéder à la page de changement du mot de passe utilisateur. Ce bouton apparaît seulement dans la page du mode utilisateur à laquelle vous êtes connecté comme utilisateur enregistré. 8 Aide Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne pour la fonction actuellement configurée. Vous pouvez spécifier l'URL d'aide en ligne dans l'[Assistance en ligne] aux page 9-37. 9 Rafraîchir Cliquez sur cette icône pour actualiser les informations affichées sur la page. 10 Icône Sélectionner la catégorie de la rubrique à afficher. Les icônes suivantes s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Information • Tâche • Boîte Utilisateur • Impression directe • Enregistrement Destination • Personnaliser 11 Assistence en ligne Affiche des informations et réglages pour l'icône sélectionnée. Le menu qui apparaît dans cette zone dépend de l'icône sélectionnée. 12 Informations et paramètres Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu. No. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 9-17 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur La connexion en mode utilisateur vous permet de configurer les fonctions suivantes. 9.4.1 Information dPour info Vous pouvez aussi vérifier l'explication du mode utilisateur dans l'aide en ligne de PageScope Web Connection ou le manuel de PageScope Web Connection figurant sur le DVD-ROM d'application. Pour plus d'informations sur l'aide en ligne, voir page 9-4. Élément Description [Info sur le périphérique] Permet de vérifier les composants, les options, les consommables et les compteurs de cette machine. [Assistance en ligne] Permet de vérifier l'assistance en ligne concernant ce produit. [Changer mot de passe utilisateur] Change le mot de passe de l'utilisateur [Information sur l'autorisation des fonctions] Permet de vérifier les information sur les fonction autorisées à l'utilisateur ou au compte. [Informations Configuration Réseau] Permet de vérifier les paramètres réseau de cette machine. [Informations Configuration Impression] Permet de vérifier les réglages du contrôleur d'imprimante de cette machine. [Informations d'impression] Imprime les informations sur les polices ou la configuration. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-18 bizhub 652/552 9.4 9.4.2 Tâche 9.4.3 Boîtes dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la gestion des boîtes utilisateur, voir page 9-22. Élément Description [Tâches en cours] Permet de vérifier la tâche en cours d'exécution ou les tâches en file d'attente. [Historiques tâches] Permet de vérifier les tâches exécutées. [Liste communications] Permet de vérifier les tâches d'émission et de réception achevées. Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) pour vous permettre d'imprimer, envoyer ou télécharger un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. bizhub 652/552 9-19 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4.4 Impression directe Référence - [Impression Directe] risque de ne pas s'afficher en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. - Un original en couleur est converti en noir et blanc pour l'impression, même si le réglage Impression Directe est défini. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction ouvre la boîte Système (Bulletin, Émission dépôt, Réception mémoire ou Boîte relais) pour permettre une opération sur un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] s'affiche lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction vous permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin ou une nouvelle boîte Relais. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] s'affiche lorsque le Kit Fax est installé. Élément Description Élément Description [Impression directe] Spécifiez un fichier enregistré dans l'ordinateur pour imprimer sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez sélectionner Application pour enregistrer un document dans la boîte Utilisateur spécifié. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-20 bizhub 652/552 9.4 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination [Enregistrement Destination] risque de ne pas s'afficher en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. Élément Description [Carnet d’adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Vous permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 objets pour l'envoi d'e-mails. [Texte] Vous permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 corps de texte pour l'envoi d'e-mails. bizhub 652/552 9-21 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4.6 Personnaliser Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier l'écran de départ après la connexion. Élément Description [Option] Permet de configurer les réglages affichés sur la page initiale qui apparaît après connexion à cette machine. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-22 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte Le menu [Connexion de boîte] offre les fonctions suivantes. - Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte - Imprimer un document - Envoyer un document à une autre machine - Télécharger et enregistrer les données du document dans votre ordinateur - Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur - Supprimer un document 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte À la connexion, la liste des boîtes utilisateur (boîtes Publique, Personnelle et Groupe) créées dans la MFP connectée. Connexion de boîte Sélectionnez le nom de la boîte désirée dans la liste des boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi entrer le numéro de boîte et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Référence - Sélectionner un nom de la boîte avec mot de passe affiche la page de saisie du mot de passe. "Connexion de boîte" s'affiche comme illustré ci-dessous en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. - [Connexion de boîte (Public)] s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Privé)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Groupe)] : s'affiche lorsque Compte Département est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Groupe/Privé)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. bizhub 652/552 9-23 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 < Liste des boîtes> Liste de fichiers Sélectionner une boîte affiche ses informations de base ainsi qu'une liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur pour chaque index, qui a été sélectionné lors de la création d'une boîte. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. [Liste des boîtes] Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de la boîte, le type de boîte et la date et l'heure de création. Une boîte avec mot de passe est indiquée par une icône en forme de clé. Élément Description [Réglages Boîte] Cliquez sur cette touche pour changer le nom de la boîte, son index, son extension ou le mot de passe. [Supprimer boîte utilisat] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer la boîte utilisateur affichée. • La suppression d'une boîte efface tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Vue Vignettes Pour afficher chaque document sous forme de vignette, cliquez sur [ON]. Pour ne pas afficher les vignettes, cliquez sur [OFF]. Spécifier l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération voulue, par exemple, imprimer, déplacer, copier ou supprimer un document, l'envoyer à une autre machine ou le télécharger sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-24. [Modifier l'affichage] Sélectionnez l'opération voulue et cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher la case à cocher "Sélectionner" pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction cible. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-24 bizhub 652/552 9.5 Référence - Si 11 documents ou plus sont enregistrés, [Page (Afficher par 10)] s'affiche. 9.5.2 Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Impression] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents imprimables. Sélectionner Affiche une case à cocher pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction sélectionnée. Vignette Affiche l'image de la première page lorsque la fonction Vue Vignettes est activée. Nom Document Affiche un nom de document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. Nom] Cliquez sur cette touche pour renommer un document. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 9-25 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglage impression]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-26 bizhub 652/552 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'impression. % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Combinaison est réglé sur [OFF], les paramètres De base et Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles. % [Enregistrer les paramètres d'impression] ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression démarre. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'impression. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Combinaison] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction imprime les documents sélectionnés comme un seul travail d'impression. [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les réglages Nombre de copies, Impression recto verso, Impression continue et Finition. • Impression continue ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Marge de page ou Tampon. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Enregistrer Réglages Impression] Sélectionnez si les réglages doivent être enregistrés. bizhub 652/552 9-27 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Envoyer à un autre périphérique] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents qui peuvent être envoyés. 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglages Émiss.]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-28 bizhub 652/552 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'émission. Élément Description [Spécifier destination] Cliquez sur [Chercher dans la liste] pour sélectionner la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour consulter la liste des destinations, cliquez sur [Vérifier Adresse]. bizhub 652/552 9-29 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Lier EMI est réglé sur [OFF], les paramètres Type Fichier ou Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'émission commence. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Télécharger vers PC] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'émission. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Lier EMI] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction envoie les documents sélectionnés comme une seule tâche d'émission. [Type fichier] Spécifiez le type de fichier et le niveau de cryptage d'un fichier à envoyer. [Réglage communication] Configurez les réglages E-Mail ou spécifiez l'Adresse URL de Notification. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Tampon ou Impress. par page. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. Élément Description 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-30 bizhub 652/552 9.5 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Configuration téléchargement]. 3 Configurez les réglages. bizhub 652/552 9-31 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Quand le message [La préparation au téléchargement s'est bien terminée] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Télécharger]. La page File Download apparaît. 6 Cliquez sur [Save] (Enregistrer). 7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de destination et le nom de fichier et cliquez sur [Save]. 8 Cliquez sur [Back]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction recueille les pages dans l'ordre où elles sont affichées et les imprime comme un seul document. Au besoin, vous pouvez changer cet ordre. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Format du fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Plage de pages] Téléchargez toutes les pages ou spécifiez l'étendue des pages successives. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-32 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Déplacer/Copier] et cliquez [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. bizhub 652/552 9-33 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Paramètre Copier/Déplacer]. % Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner plusieurs documents. 3 Configurez les réglages. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Déplace ou copie le document. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Sélectionnez dans la Liste des boîtes la boîte d'où déplacer ou copier un document. [Copie] Cochez cette case pour copier le document dans la boîte utilisateur désirée. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-34 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5.6 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Supprimer] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. bizhub 652/552 9-35 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Supprimer]. % Pour sélectionner ou désélectionner tous les documents, cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher]. 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime le ou les documents et vous ramène à la page Liste de fichiers. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-36 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur La connexion en mode administrateur vous permet d'utiliser les fonctions suivantes. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Administrateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Les modes administrateur sont classés en deux modes d'affichage : [Affichage Fonction Onglet] et [Affichage Fonction Liste]. Ce manuel donne un exemple de l'emplacement où se définit l'[Affichage Fonction Liste]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-13. 9.6.1 Entretien Élément Description [Compteur] Permet de vérifier le compteur de cette machine. [Version ROM] Permet de vérifier la version ROM. [Importer/Exporter] Permet d'enregistrer (exportation) les informations de réglage de cette machine dans un fichier ou de les enregistrer (importer) dans cette machine depuis un fichier. [Paramètres notification statut] Configurez la fonction devant faire l'objet d'un rapport à un utilisateur enregistré, en cas d'erreur sur cette machine. Spécifiez la destination et éléments à notifier à un utilisateur enregistré en cas d'erreur. [Compteur total Réglages de notification] Configurez les réglages pour la notification à l'utilisateur cible du Compteur total par E-mail et enregistrez l'adresse e-mail de la destination. [Réglage date/heure] Spécifiez la date et l'heure affichées sur cette machine. [Configuration Programmateur] Configurez le mode Économie d'énergie ou le Réglage Programmateur hebdomadaire sur cette machine. [Réglage Affichage Code erreur Réseau] Indiquer s'il faut afficher le code d'erreur réseau. bizhub 652/552 9-37 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.2 Réglage Système Référence - Pour utiliser cette machine comme scanner avec le logiciel d'application sous TWAIN, installez le pilote dédiéKONICA MINOLTA TWAIN. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel du pilote TWAIN sur le DVD livré avec cette machine. [Initialiser] Efface tous les réglages relatifs au réseau, au contrôleur et aux destinations. [Paramètres de Licence] Permet de délivrer une licence et d'activer des fonctions. Vous pouvez aussi émettre un code de requête. [Modifier Police/Macro] Permet d'ajouter une police ou une macro. [Journal de tâches] Vous permet de créer et de télécharger des données de journal des tâches exécutées sur cette machine. Élément Description Élément Description [Paramètres Machine] Change les informations d'enregistrement de la machine. [Enregistrer Information Assistance] Spécifiez les informations d'assistance (comme le nom de contact, l'URL d'entreprise ou l'URL manuelle en ligne) de cette machine. Pour afficher cette information, sélectionnez [Information] - [Assistance en ligne]. [Réseau TWAIN] Spécifiez l'heure à laquelle désactiver le verrouillage des opérations lors de la numérisation (excepté pour la numérisation PUSH). Si nécessaire, configurez les réglages pour activer l'enregistrement ou la lecture d'un document dans ou depuis la mémoire externe. [Configurer la boîte] Permet de définir les fonctions Boîte, comme supprimer des boîtes inutiles ou spécifier le délai de suppression de document. Si nécessaire, configurez les réglages pour activer l'enregistrement ou la lecture d'un document dans ou depuis la mémoire externe. [Réglages Tampon] Permet d'enregistrer un en-tête ou un pied de page. En outre, les [Réglages EMI Fax] permettent d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Tampon pour l'émission fax. [Réglages Impression Page vierge] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le contenu de [Tampon/Surimpression] sur des pages vierges. [Régl. Opération Ignorer Tâche] Permet de spécifier s'il faut ignorer une tâche. [Réglage Affichage Flash] Spécifiiez s'il faut autoriser ou interdire l'affichage Flash. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-38 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.3 Sécurité [Réglage Mot de passe Administrateur] ne s'affiche pas dans les cas suivants : - Le certificat SSL n'est pas installé - Le mode Sécurité Avancée est réglé sur "ON" - [Mode utilisant SSL/TLS] est réglé sur [Aucun] dans [Sécurité] - [Réglages PKI] - [Réglage SSL] même si un certificat de périphérique est déjà enregistré [Réglage Coopération Système] Configurez le réglage automatique de Préfixe/Suffixe ou le réglage d'impression de données dans un téléphone cellulaire. Dans [Application Connection Setting], spécifiez si la connexion entre cette machine et le gestionnaire PageScope My Panel Manager doit être annulée. [Réglage Affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage en mode administrateur entre [Affichage Fonction Onglet] ou [Affichage Fonction Liste]. [Réglage navigateur PDF Outline] Spécifiez s'il faut détourer le texte. Élément Description Élément Description [Réglages PKI] Enregistrez les certificats de périphérique et configurez les réglages SSL, protocole ou certificat externe. [Réglages Vérification Certificat] Permet de spécifier les éléments pour la validation d'un certificat. [Définition adresse de référence] Lors de l'octroi d'une autorisation d'accès destination, spécifiez un groupe autorisé de référence ou un niveau autorisé d'accès. [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] Permet de spécifie la fonction de restriction des opérations utilisateur. [Sécurité Copie] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser la fonction pare-copie ou de protection copie. [Déconnexion auto] Permet d'indiquer l'heure de déconnexion automatique du mode administrateur ou utilisateur. [Réglage du mot de passe administrateur] Permet de spécifier le mot de passe de connexion au mode administrateur. bizhub 652/552 9-39 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département Élément Description [Système d’authentification] Permet de configurer les réglages d'Authentification utilisateur ou de Compte Département sur cette machine. Pour activer l'authentification, configurez le réglage pour le nombre de comptes assignés ou Opération après crédit maximum. [Système Authentific.] Lors de l'activation de l'Authentification utilisateur, permet d'enregistrer l'utilisateur concerné ou de configurer le réglage utilisateur. [Réglage Compte Département] Lors de l'activation de Compte Département, permet d'enregistrer et de modifier le compte concerné. [Paramètres Serveur Externe] Lors de l'activation de l'authentification serveur externe, permet d'enregistrer les réglages du serveur externe. [Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Publique] Permet de spécifier la limite maximum du nombre de Boîte. [Régl. Scan to Home] Configurez le réglage pour envoyer un fichier dans Dossier Accueil. [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] Configurez les réglages pour interdire les destinations d'émission manuelles. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-40 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.5 Réseau Élément Description [Paramètre TCP/IP] Configurez le paramètre TCP/IP lorsque vous connectez cette machine via réseau. [Réglage E-Mail] Configurez les réglages pour envoyer ou recevoir des E-mails (y compris des fax Internet) et spécifiez la fonction d'extension comme l'authentification E-mail. [Paramètre LDAP] Configurez les réglages pour enregistrer le serveur LDAP. [Paramètre IPP] Permet de configurer le paramètre d'impression IPP. [Paramètre FTP] Configurez les paramètres permettant d'utiliser cette machine comme client ou serveur FTP. [Activation SNMP] Configurez le paramètre SNMP. [Paramètre SMB] Configurez le réglage SMB client, WINS, Impression SMB ou Réglage Hébergement Direct. [Paramètres Services Web] Configurez les réglages pour la numérisation ou l'impression par services Web. [Paramètre Bonjour] Configurez le paramètre Bonjour. [Paramètre NetWare] Configurez le paramètre NetWare. bizhub 652/552 9-41 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.6 Boîtes La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet de manipuler une boîte sans entrer le mot de passe pour l'ouvrir. [Paramètre AppleTalk] Configurez les paramètres AppleTalk. [Paramètre Network Fax] Configurez les réglages Émission directe SMTP ou Réception directe SMTP. [Paramètres WebDAV] Configurez les réglages WebDAV. [Réglage OpenAPI] Configurez les réglages OpenAPI. [Paramètre TCP Socket] Configurez les réglages Socket TCP pour activer la communication de données entre cette machine et l'application installée sur votre ordinateur. [Paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X] Permet de configurer les paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X. [Réglage LLTD] Sélectionner s'il faut activer ou non LLTD. [Réglages SSDP] Configurez les réglages SSDP. [Réglage Bluetooth] Sélectionner s'il faut activer ou non Bluetooth. • Pour activer une communication Bluetooth, contactez au préalable votre S.A.V. Élément Description Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Groupe ou Personnelle) pour vous permettre de changer le réglage de la boîte. • Les opérations sur les documents ne sont pas disponibles en mode Administrateur. • Les opérations sur les boîtes sont disponibles même si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte concernée. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Ouvrez la Boîte Système (boîte Bulletin, Relais ou Annotation) pour vous permettre de traiter un document enregistré dans la Boîte ou pour changer les paramètres de la boîte utilisateur. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte utilisateur Bulletin, Relay ou Annotation. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-42 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante Élément Description [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante. [Configuration PCL] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PCL. [Configuration PS] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PS. [Configuration TIFF] Spécifiez le papier pour imprimer les images TIFF. [Paramètre XPS] Configurez les réglages d'impression XPS. [Réglage d'interface] Spécifiez le délai avant déconnexion de l'interface. [Réglages Impression Directe] Configurez les réglages pour activer l'impression directe avec PageScope Web Connection. [Assigner Compte pour Acquérir Infos Périphérique] Sélectionnez s'il faut spécifier un mot de passe pour obtenir les informations de périphérique par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante. Si [ON] est sélectionné, spécifiez le mot de passe. bizhub 652/552 9-43 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination Élément Description [Carnet d’adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum de 10 titres pour l'envoi d'E-mails. [Texte] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum 10 corps de messages à utiliser lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. [Enregistrement de l'application] Permet d'enregistrer les réglages de l'application et les adresses serveur en cas d'utilisation d'applications telles que RightFax Server enregistrées sur le serveur externe. L'enregistrement des applications et des serveurs permet de se connecter automatiquement au serveur de l'application sélectionnée. • [Enregistrement de l'application] ne s'affiche pas si le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Préfixe/Suffixe] Enregistre le préfixe ou le suffixe à ajouter comme informations de destination lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-44 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.9 Réglage Fax Élément Description [Position En-tête/Pied pag] Configurez le réglage permettant d'imprimer les informations relatives à l'expéditeur ou au destinataire. [Réglage Paramètre Ligne] Permet de spécifier la ligne fax tel que pour la Méthode de numérotation. [Paramètres Émission/Réception] Permet de configurer les réglages Papier, Boîte ou autres, pour l'envoi ou la réception de données. [Réglage Fonction] Permet de configurer les réglages fax pour Récept Mémoire ou Fax Réseau. [Réglage Connexion PBX] Permet de spécifier la ligne extérieure pour la connexion PBX. [Réglage Rapports] Permet de configurer les réglages d'un rapport, comme par exemple le Rapport activité, à produire lors de l'envoi ou de la réception de données. [Réglage multi-lignes] Permet de spécifier les paramètres et fonction de la ligne étendue. • L'élément s'affiche en présence d'une ligne étendue. [Paramètre Network Fax] Permet de configurer le réglage pour l'utilisation du fax réseau. [Informations En-tête] Permet d'enregistrer les informations de l'expéditeur et son numéro de fax, lors de l'envoi de données. [Réglages Qualité Impression Fax] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez corriger un fax G3 reçu en fonction de la définition. • La basse définition équivaut à 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e 200 dpi ou 300 dpi e 300 dpi, la haute définition équivaut à 400 dpi e 400 dpi. bizhub 652/552 9-45 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.10 Réglage pour chaque utilisation Pour un élément nécessitant plusieurs réglages, configurez-les en fonction des instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. - Configurez les réglages pour envoyer un document numérisé - Configurez les réglages d'impression réseau - Interdire l'utilisation de cette machine à certains utilisateurs Référence - Au fur et à mesure que la procédure de réglage progresse, sa progression s'affiche sur la gauche. - En cas d'annulation du réglage, vous serez renvoyé vers l'écran Assistant après que les éléments configurés avant l'annulation ont été appliqués. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-46 bizhub 652/552 9.6 10 Annexe bizhub 652/552 10-3 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur 10 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur apparaît, exécutez l'opération correspondante décrite ci-dessous. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages réseau, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 10.2 Glossaire Message Cause et dépannage Impossible de se connecter au réseau. Vérifiez que le câble du réseau est correctement branché. Assurez- vous par ailleurs de la configuration correcte des paramètres réseau dans Réglage Administrateur. Sélection impossible de l'adresse pour la méthode de communication, pour cause de dépassement du maximum admis d'adresses pour la diffusion. Le nombre de destinations spécifié dépasse le nombre possible de diffusion générale. Réduisez le nombre de destinations de diffusion ou envoyez la transmission en lots multiples. Le document n'a pu être enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur par manque d'espace sur DD. Vérifiez le journal. Le disque dur est plein. Supprimez les données inutiles et réessayez d'enregistrer les données. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilisateur qu'il est possible d'enregistrer a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents qu'il est possible d'enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de tâches programmées a atteint le maximum admissible. Patienter jusqu'à l'achèvement d'une tâche programmée. Le nombre de tâches qu'il est possible de programmer a atteint son maximum. Veuillez attendre qu'une tâche soit terminée ou supprimez une tâche en cours. Terme Description 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ensemble de caractéristiques appartenant aux normes Ethernet. On utilise des câbles à deux fils torsadés en cuivre. La vitesse de transmission est de 10 Mbps avec 10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec 100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec 1000Base-T. Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier développé par Adobe Systems Inc. (anciennement Macromedia, Inc.), utilisé pour la création d'animations vectorielles. Le logiciel permet de gérer le contenu interactif à partir du clavier ou de la souris. Les fichiers restent relativement compacts et on peut y accéder à partir d'un navigateur Web équipé du logiciel plug-in dédié. Adresse IP Adresse ou code utilisé pour identifier les périphériques individuels du réseau sur Internet. IPv4 (Protocole Internet version 4), protocole largement utilisé aujourd'hui, adopte un nombre de 32 bits divisé en quatre sections pour une adresse IP. 192.168.1.10 est un exemple d'adresse IP IPv4. En revanche, dans la génération suivante IPv6 (Protocole Internet version 6), les adresses IP sont de 128 bits. Une adresse IP est affectée à chaque ordinateur ou autre périphérique connecté à Internet. 10 Glossaire 10-4 bizhub 652/552 10.2 Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Authentification & Impression Fonction vous permettant d'imprimer le travail envoyé par le pilote de l'imprimante au cours de l'authentification utilisateur. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension du fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format comprimé. Compact PDF Méthode de compression pour réduire le volume des données grâce au format PDF et servant à numériser les documents en couleurs. Le PDF compact présente des performances élevées en termes de compression et pour cela, il identifie les zones de texte et d'images et applique la résolution et la méthode de compression optimisée pour chaque zone. La méthode Compact PDF peut être sélectionnée pour convertir des documents en données à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation de la machine. Compensation de densité C'est une fonction de correction de teinte de couleur utilisée pour les périphériques de sortie, comme les imprimantes et les écrans. Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation Clair/Foncé). "Faible contraste" indique une image à faible variation clair/foncé, alors que "Contraste élevé" indique une image à grande variation clair/foncé. Contraste La quantité de densité d'une image. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée Demi-teinte Méthode d'expression des ombres d'une image en utilisant différentes tailles de points noirs et blancs. Désinstaller Permet de désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur DHCP Acronyme de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ; utilisé pour un ordinateur client sur le réseau TCP/IP afin de télécharger automatiquement la configuration réseau à partir d'un serveur. La simple utilisation d'un serveur DHCP pour centraliser la gestion des adresses IP des clients DHCP, permet de construire un réseau sans conflits d'adresses IP ou autres problèmes. Disque dur Un périphérique de stockage de masse pour enregistrer les données. Les données sont conservées même après coupure de l'alimentation. DNS Acronyme de Domain Name System. Le système DNS permet d'obtenir l'adresse IP correspondante à un nom d'hôte dans un environnement réseau. Il permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateur du réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'utiliser des adresses IP évasives et non-intuitives. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Inch (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Ethernet Norme pour les lignes de transmission LAN. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée au nom après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image. FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour le transfert de fichiers sur un réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. Terme Description bizhub 652/552 10-5 10.2 Glossaire 10 FTP anonyme Alors que des sites FTP normaux sont protégés par un nom de compte et un mot de passe, ce type de site FTP est accessible à tout le monde sans mot de passe en saisissant Anonyme comme nom de compte. HTTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (comme navigateur Web). Le protocole HTTP permet d'échanger des fichiers image, son et vidéo associés à des documents y compris leurs formats de présentation et autres informations. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. IP Auto Fonction permettant d'obtenir automatiquement une adresse IP. Si l'acquisition d'une adresse IP a échoué auprès du DHCP, IP auto permet d'obtenir une adresse IP depuis l'adresse "169.254.0.0". JPEG Acronyme de Joint Photographic Experts Groupe, un des formats de fichier permettant d'enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".jpg".) Le taux de compression est généralement 1/10 à 1/100. JPEG est une méthode efficace de compression des photographies et d'autres images naturelles. Kerberos Système d'authentification réseau utilisé par les systèmes d'exploitation MS à partir de Windows 2000, utilisé comme authentification du répertoire actif. Kerberos met en place un site authentique au sein du réseau proposant des processus d'authentification en deux phases d'ID utilisateurs et l'utilisation de ressources réseau, permettant aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés en toute sécurité et de manière efficace. LAN Acronyme de Local Area Network. Ce réseau connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment ou dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Acronyme de Lightweight Directory Access Protocol ; protocole utilisé pour l'accès à une base de données capable de gérer des adresses électroniques et des informations d'environnement réseau des utilisateurs sur le réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. Masque sous-réseau Une valeur utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Ceci permet d'identifier le nombre de bits supérieurs de l'adresse IP utilisés pour l'adresse réseau. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Mode PASV Abréviation de PASsiVe, mode servant à connecter un serveur FTP derrière un pare-feu. Si ce mode de connexion n'est pas sélectionné, le firewall considère l'accès comme non autorisé et bloque la connexion, empêchant toute transmission de fichiers. Navigateur Web Logiciel utilisé pour afficher les pages Web. Les navigateurs Web typiques comprennent Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator. Niveau de gris Forme expressive d'une image monochrome utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir. Numérisation Lecture d'une image lors d'une numérisation par le scanner, par le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs d'image. Le sens des capteurs d'image mobiles est appelé Direction de numérisation principale et la direction de l'alignement des capteurs d'image est appelée Sens secondaire de lecture. Numéro de port Numéro utilisé pour identifier un port de communication assigné pour chaque processus basé sur un ordinateur du réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Un octet indique une unité d'information (quantité de données) traitée par un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un octet comporte huit bits. Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-6 bizhub 652/552 10.2 OS Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows, MacOS et Unix sont des systèmes d'exploitation. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs se trouvant sur divers réseaux LAN. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement avec comme extension de fichier ".pdf". PDF est basé sur le format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour visionner des documents PDF. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pixel Pixel correspond à pixel d'image, unité la plus petite constituant une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Police Bitmap Police utilisant une juxtaposition de points pour présenter les caractères. Les caractères Bitmap de grande taille aggravent de manière non négligeable les irrégularités de contour des caractères. PPI Acronyme de Pixels Per Inch, unité de mesure de la résolution, particulièrement pour les écrans et les scanners. Il indique combien il y a de pixels par pouce. Propriétés Informations d'attribut Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règle qui permet à un ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet. SMB Abréviation de Serveur Message Block. Il s'agit de protocole de partage des fichiers et des imprimantes principalement sur un réseau Windows. SSL/TLS Acronyme de Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security ; méthode de codage utilisée pour transférer en toute sécurité les données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Acronyme de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard de facto utilisé par Internet. Chaque périphérique du réseau est identifié par une adresse IP. TIFF Acronyme de Tagged Image File Format ; un des formats de fichier utilisé pour enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est .tif.) En fonction du "tag" indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF plusieurs pages Fichier TIFF comportant plusieurs pages. TIFF Simple page Fichier TIFF qui ne contient qu'une seule page Tramage Une méthode de présentation du quasi-ombrage de gris en utilisant les couleurs noir et blanc. Cette méthode est plus facile à appliquer que la diffusion d'erreur mais peut conférer une certaines irrégularité à l'image. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. Terme Description bizhub 652/552 10-7 10.2 Glossaire 10 TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. Vignette Fonction permettant d'afficher le contenu d'un fichier image ou document sous forme d'image réduite (l'image affichée lorsque le fichier est ouvert). Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-8 bizhub 652/552 10.2 11 Index bizhub 652/552 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 9-3 Adr. E-Mail 7-46 Affichage des Informations détaillées 7-67 Agraf. - Réglage Position 7-11 Agrafage 7-10 Aide en ligne 9-4 Aperçu 3-16, 7-68 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-75 Applications 7-61, 7-69 Applications - Effacem Bords 6-15 Applications - Page par page 6-16 Archivage 4-17 Assemblé 7-10 Authentification Utilisateur 2-8 Authentification Utilisateur/ Compte Département 9-39 B Boîte 9-18, 9-41 Boîte Annotation 6-3, 7-86, 8-16 Boîte Bulletin Board 7-80, 8-7 Boîte Émission relève 7-81 Boîte impression Document Sécurisé 7-82 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe 7-94 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Ré-émission Fax 7-92 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-22 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire 7-85 Bte Ut. ID & Impr. 7-95 C Cache du navigateur Internet 9-4 Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-41 Carnet Adresse - Recherche simple 7-37 Changer Texte 7-89 Chapitres 7-20 Chemin fichier 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-98 Combinaison 7-6, 7-13 Configuration de la page 9-15 Contraste 7-89 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-65 Copies 7-9 Corps de texte 7-56 Couleur 7-67 Créer une boîte utilisateur 8-6, 8-15 Cryptage 6-9, 7-48 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-49 Cryptage E-Mail 7-60 D Date/Heure 7-21 De 7-55 De base - Couleur 6-12 De base - Type original 6-6 Décalage 7-10 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso 7-17 Définition 7-47, 7-66 Délai de suppression des PDF cryptés 8-20 Délai Suppr. Doc. Impr. Sécurisée 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Imprimer 8-21 Département 7-47 Déplacer les documents 7-64 Déplacer Page 7-73 Déplacer/Copier 9-32 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-12 Détails Document 7-67, 7-99 Détails Sécurité 8-26 Données PDF cryptées 7-98 E ECM OFF 7-53 Effacem. Livre - Effacem Bords 6-16 Effacement Livre - Effacement Centre 6-17 E-mail 7-40 EMI Outremer 7-53 Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur 7-101 Enregistrement 4-3, 4-11 Enregistrement Destination 9-20, 9-43 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 7-65 Enregistrer des documents 2-3, 6-3 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-76 Entretien 9-36 Environnement d'exploitation 9-3 Envoi 4-8 Envoyer 7-33, 7-34, 9-27 É Écran tactile 3-5 Écraser 7-78 Écraser données 8-28 Écraser données Disque Dur 8-27 Émission différée 7-58 Émission sur mot de passe 7-59 11-4 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des éléments 11.1 È Èmis. Fichier (SMB) 7-42 F Fax 7-40 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 FAX Internet 7-41 Finition 7-10 Format de Numérisat. 6-13 Format Perso 6-13 Format Photo 6-14 Format standard 6-13 Formatage DD 8-30 FTP 7-43 G Glossaire 10-3 Groupe 7-10 H Historique tâches 7-45 I Icônes 3-5 Impr/Enreg 7-94 Impress. par page 7-62 Impression 4-5, 4-15, 7-5, 7-6, 9-24 Impression - Application 7-16 Impression - Fonction de base 7-9, 7-99 Impression continue 7-15 Impression directe 9-19 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-26 Index 7-38 Information 9-17 Insertion Feuille 7-19 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre 7-17 L Lier EMI 7-34 Liste de fichiers 9-23 Liste des messages d'erreur 10-3 Liste Tâches 3-7 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche 3-8 Liste Tâches - Supprimer 3-7 M Marge 6-17 Marge page 7-16 Mémoire externe 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-97 Méthode Page par page 6-16 Mobile/PDA 7-101 Modif. document 7-70 Modif. Nom 7-64 Mot de passe 7-43, 7-44 Mot de passe Accès DD 8-29 N Netteté 6-15 Nom 7-46 Nom d'hôte 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom d'utilisateur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom de fichier 2-10 Nom du Document 7-54 Nom Entreprise 7-47 Nombre maximum de boîtes 8-17 Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier 8-11 Nouveau 7-77 Numérisation séparée 6-18 Numéro de page 7-22 Numéro Fax 7-46 O Onglet par Défaut 8-10 Options de recherche 7-39 Organisation des documents 2-6 Original spécial 6-19 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-47 P PageScope Web Connection 9-3 Panneau de contrôle 3-3 Papier 7-100 Param. Insert Feuille 7-23 Paramétrage cryptage DD 8-30 Paramétrage HDD 8-26 Paramètres 7-17 Paramètres Affichage Perso 8-10 Paramètres Détaillés 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-43, 7-44, 7-79 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-24 Paramètres Numérisation 6-6 Paramètres URL Dest. 7-56 PDF Contours 6-11, 7-51 Perforation - Réglage Position 7-11 Perforer 7-11 Personnaliser 9-21 Pivoter Page 7-71 Pli/Reliure 7-12 Position 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-90 Prénom 7-46 Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44 Protection copie 7-24 R Rech. Adresse 7-45 Recherche détaillée 7-38, 7-57 Recherche LDAP - Recher simple 7-46 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée 7-46 Recto seul/Recto-Verso 7-9 Référence 7-43 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-25 Réglage attente doc. 8-21 bizhub 652/552 11-5 11.1 Index des éléments 11 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 8-10, 8-19 Réglage de base - Contraste 6-12 Réglage de base - Définition 6-7 Réglage de base - Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7 Réglage de base - Type Fichier 6-8 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-23 Réglage Fax 9-44 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-23 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Ligne 7-53 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-18 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-58 Réglage Mobile/PDA 8-12, 8-24 Réglage Numérisation 6-11, 7-51 Réglage pour chaque utilisation 9-45 Réglage Surimpression 7-32 Réglage Système 9-37 Réglages Administrateur 8-4, 8-14 Réglages Archivage 7-63 Réglages de Communication 7-52 Réglages E-Mail 7-54 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-60 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-22 Réglages Horodatage 8-31 Réglages imprimante 9-42 Réglages Original 6-19 Réglages Tampon 8-31 Réseau 9-40 S Saisie directe 7-39, 7-57 Saisie du code PIN 7-102 Sécurité 9-38 Sélection ligne 7-54 Signature numérique 7-60 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original 6-19 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure 6-20 Structure des menus 1-7, 4-23, 8-3 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-19 Suppr. page 7-70 Suppression de documents 7-64 Suppression Fond 6-14 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) 8-7 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée 8-19 Surimpr. enreg. 7-31 Surimpression Tampon 7-50 Système 6-4 T Tampon 7-23 Tampon répétitif 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-20 Tâche 9-18 Texte Numérotation 7-89 Téléchargement 9-29 Tête/Pied de page 7-30 Titre 7-55 Touche de raccourci 8-10 Transmission F-Code 7-59 Type d'adresse 7-37 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-48, 7-67 Type Numéro 7-90 Type Pare-copie 7-26 Type Tampon 7-28 U Utilis/Archiv 7-3 Utilis/Archiv - Détails 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse 3-14 Utilisation des documents 2-4 Utilisation serveur proxy 8-11 V V.34 Désactivé 7-53 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer 7-54 Vérification Capacité HDD 8-26 Vérifier les préférences d'impression 7-102 Ville 7-46 Volet de gauche 3-6 W WebDAV 7-44 Z Zoom 7-14 11-6 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches 2 en 1 7-13 4in1 7-13 8in1 7-14 A Adr. E-Mail 7-46 Afficher Liste 7-4 Afficher Nom 7-32 Agraf. Centre/Pliage 7-12 Aperçu 3-6, 3-16, 7-68 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-75 Applications 7-35 Assemblé 7-19, 7-20 Augmenter Priorité 3-8 Auto 6-20 Autre 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 B Boîte Annotation 7-86, 8-16 Boîte Emission en relève 7-81 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe 7-94 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe 8-6 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Réception mémoire 7-85 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-22 Boîte Utilisateur 6-5 Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé 7-82 Bte Ut. ID & Impr. 7-95 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. 7-80, 8-7 C Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-41 Changer Position/Supprimer 7-25, 7-29 Changer Texte 7-89 Chapitres 7-17 Chemin fichier 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Combinaison 7-5, 7-6, 7-13 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-48 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-48 Contraste 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-79, 7-89, 8-17 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-19, 7-63, 7-65 Copie livre 6-16 Corps de texte 7-56 Couleur 6-12, 7-52 Couleur Auto 6-12 Couleur Texte 7-61 Couleurs 6-12, 7-52 Couvert. Face 6-16 Couverture + Recto/Verso 6-7 Cryptage 6-9, 7-48 Cryptage E-Mail 7-60 D Date/Heure 7-20, 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-89, 8-17 De 7-55 Destination Relais 8-9 Décalage Image 7-16 Définition 6-7, 7-47 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. 8-20 Délai suppress PDF cryptés 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-21 Département 7-47 Déplacer 7-63 Déplacer les documents 7-64 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Détails Document 7-4, 7-63, 7-67, 7-69, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91, 7-99 Détails Image 7-32 Détails tâche 3-8 Détails Texte 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Dos (copié) 7-18 Dos (vierge) 7-18 Double page 6-16 E ECM OFF 7-53 Ecraser Trame 7-25, 7-29 Effacement bords 6-15, 6-16 Effacement centre 6-17 E-mail 7-40 EMI Outremer 7-53 Enregistrer document 7-4, 8-22 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-69, 7-76, 7-91 É Écraser 7-78 Écraser données 8-28 Émission différée 7-58 Émission sur mot de passe 7-59 È Èmis. Fichier (SMB) 7-42 F Face (copiée) 7-18 Face (vierge) 7-18 Faire suivre 3-11 Fax 3-18, 7-40, 7-92 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 Fax Internet 7-41 Finition 7-6, 7-7 Format numérisation 6-13 Format Perso 6-13 Format Photo 6-14 Formatage DD 8-30 FTP 7-43 bizhub 652/552 11-7 11.2 Index des touches 11 G Gauche 6-20 Groupe 7-35 H Haut 6-20 I Ignorer Page(s) 7-23 Image 7-51 Impress. par page 7-62 Impression 7-5, 7-95, 7-99 Impression continue 7-7, 7-15 Impression épreuve 7-92 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-26 Imprimer Document 8-22 Imprimer Page # 7-23 Imprimer sur la face et le dos 7-23 Imprimer sur le dos seulement 7-23 Index 7-38, 8-6 Initialiser 7-4 Insertion Feuille 7-17 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre 7-6 Insérer Papier 7-19 J JPEG 6-8, 7-48 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Lecture 3-18 Libérer Tâch Att 3-8 Lier EMI 7-33 Liste Comm. 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Liste Tâches 3-6, 3-7 M Manuel 7-14 Marge page 7-6, 7-7, 7-16 Mémoire externe 7-97 Minimal 7-14 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Modif. document 7-69 Modif. Nom 7-63, 7-64, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91 Mot de passe 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-49, 8-6, 8-8, 8-16 Mot de passe accès disque dur 8-29 Mot de passe EMI Relais 8-9 Multi Page 6-11, 7-51 N N° Bte Ut. 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 Ne pas imprimer # 7-23 Netteté 6-15 Niv.Gris 6-12, 7-52 Niveau de cryptage 6-9 Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14 Noir 6-12, 7-52 Nom 7-46 Nom Boîte 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 Nom d'utilisateur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom Document 6-5, 7-54 Nom Entreprise 7-47 Nom Serveur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nouveau 7-77 Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe 8-22 Numérisation séparée 6-18 Numéro de Fax 7-46 Numéro de page 7-20, 7-22 O Onglet par Défaut 8-10 Orientation original 6-19 Orig. Mixtes 6-19 Original long 6-19 Original plié en Z 6-19 Original Tramé 6-6 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-47 P Page précédente 3-17, 3-18, 7-75 Page suivante 3-17, 3-18, 7-75 Pages Couv. + Dos 6-16 Papier 7-100 Papier Chapitre 7-20 Papier Copié 6-6 Param. Insert Feuille 7-22 Param. Numéris. 6-5 Paramétrage HDD 8-26 Paramètres 7-17 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte 8-10 Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-32, 7-43, 7-44, 7-79 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-24 Paramètres URL Dest. 7-56 PDF 6-8, 7-48 Permissions Document 6-9, 7-49 Photo 6-6 Pli/Reliure 7-12 Pliage en 2 7-12 Pliage en 3 7-12 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-61, 7-90, 8-17 Position Reliure 6-17, 6-20 Prénom 7-46 Priorité cryptage 8-27 Priorité écrasement 8-27 Prochaine Destination 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Protection copie 7-20, 7-21, 7-24 11-8 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 R Recherche 7-35, 7-37, 7-46 Recherche Avancée 7-46 Recherche détaillée 7-38 Recomposer 3-10, 3-11 Recto seul 6-7 Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7 Recto-Verso 6-7 Référence 7-43 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-25 Réglage attente doc. 8-21 Réglage communication 7-35 Réglage cryptage DD 8-30 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-23 Réglage existant 7-14 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-23 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-17 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-58 Réglage Position 7-11 Réglages Boîte 8-19 Réglages Document 7-35 Réglages E-Mail 7-54 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-60 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-22 Réglages Horodatage 8-31 Réglages Ligne 7-53 Réglages Original 6-5, 6-19 S Sélect. Tout 7-4 Séparation 6-16 Séparation Page 6-11, 7-51 Signature numérique 7-60 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-19 Suppr. page 3-18 Suppression 7-64 Supprimer 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-63, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91, 7-93, 7-94, 7-96 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée 8-19 Surimpression enregistrée 7-21, 7-31 Surimpression Tampon 7-50 T Taille Texte 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-61 Tampon 7-20, 7-23 Tampon enregistré 7-25, 7-29 Tampon prédéfini 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Tampon répétitif 7-21, 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-6, 7-7, 7-61 Tâche 3-6 Tâches effacées 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Tâches terminées 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Temporisation Tâche Émission 3-10 Texte 6-6, 7-51, 8-17 Texte Numérotation 7-89, 8-17 Texte/Photo 6-6 Tête/Pied de page 7-21, 7-30 TIFF 6-8, 7-48 Titre 7-55 Touche de raccourci 8-10 Tous formats 7-14 Toutes tâches 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Trame Copie Prot. MdP 7-28 Trame du fond 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Trame Pare-copie 7-27 Trame Protect Copie 7-25 Transmission F-Code 7-59 Type d'adresse 7-37 Type Encart 7-19 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-48 Type Numéro 7-90, 8-17 Type original 6-6 U Utiliser réglage couleur existant 7-52 V V.34 Désactivé 7-53 Vérifier Capacité HDD 8-26 Vérifier les réglages Tâche 3-14 Vérifier Paramètres Tâches 3-8, 3-10 Vierge 7-19 Ville 7-46 Voir Finition 3-17, 3-18 Vue Vignettes 7-4, 7-32 W WebDAV 7-44 X XPS 6-8, 7-48 Z Zoom Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge ............................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles ................................................................................................. 2-4 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Application] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2...................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] ............................................................................................................ 3-5 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web................................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................. 4-3 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web................................................................................................. 4-3 Restrictions avec Flash Player ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web ........................................................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web ........................................ 4-5 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction...................................... 4-5 [Réglage Navigateur Web] ................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée................................................................ 4-6 [Autoriser fonction]............................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux.......................................................................................... 4-7 [Accès au contenu du navigateur Web] ............................................................................................. 4-7 4.4 Fonctionnement de base................................................................................................................ 4-8 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation ..................................................................................................................... 4-9 Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile ................................................................................................... 4-9 Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique............................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.3 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran ............................................................................................................ 4-10 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 652/552 [Rendu Parfait] ................................................................................................................................. 4-10 [Rendu intelligent] ............................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur................................................................................................. 4-10 4.5 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils ........................................................................................................ 4-11 4.5.2 [Signet] - [Affichage]......................................................................................................................... 4-12 Liste des favoris ............................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.3 [Signet] - [Ajout] ............................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.4 [Destinataire] .................................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.5 [Histor.]............................................................................................................................................. 4-13 [Afficher Historique].......................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.6 [Impr.] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web............................................................................... 4-15 4.6.1 [Opération Page] .............................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6.2 [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Gérér fenêtres] ................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.4 [Réglages] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document ............................................ 4-18 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document.......................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document............................................................................................................ 4-20 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document....................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document ....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Envoi d'un fichier document numérisé ............................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Envoyer un fichier document vers une Boîte utilisateur................................................................... 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 5-3 5.1.1 Contrôle préalable.............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.2 Comment accéder à PageScope Web Connection........................................................................... 5-4 5.2 Composition de l'écran .................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte ................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte............................................................................................................................ 5-7 [Connexion de boîte].......................................................................................................................... 5-7 [Liste de fichiers] ................................................................................................................................ 5-8 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document .............................................................................................................. 5-9 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 5-9 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 5-11 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Opérations générales......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document...................................................................................................................... 6-8 Numérisation d'un document ............................................................................................................ 6-8 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur .................................................................................................. 6-9 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe ............................................................................ 6-10 Utilisation des données archivées dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ......... 6-11 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-3 6.3.4 Editer le document........................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Aperçu]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Modifier document].......................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Combiner Documents]..................................................................................... 6-14 [Document/Page] - [Réglages Document] ....................................................................................... 6-15 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] ................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination ................................................................................................................. 6-16 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Spécifier des destinations................................................................................................................ 6-17 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe...................................................................... 6-17 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi ............................................................................................................... 6-18 Magasin Envoi.................................................................................................................................. 6-18 [Vérifier Mag. EMI]............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA............................................................... 6-20 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses...................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo .................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo........................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel .......................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données ................................................................................ 6-24 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document ................................................................................. 6-25 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée................................................................................ 6-26 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF.................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique ................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe ............................................................................................ 7-5 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique ............................................................................................ 7-6 7.4 Impression directe .......................................................................................................................... 7-9 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables................................................ 8-3 Taille de caractère reconnaissable .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR....................................................... 8-4 [Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR]........................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable ................................................................................... 8-5 9 Fonction Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec Mon Panneau ...................................................................................... 9-3 Eléments personnalisables ................................................................................................................ 9-3 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web .................................................................................... 9-3 Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Panneau......................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon Panneau....................................................................... 9-5 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.1 Menu Comm ...................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal .............................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau.......................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] ................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] ............................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] ............................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure]................................................................................................................. 9-9 Table des matières-4 bizhub 652/552 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-10 [Régl. rapides 1] - [Régl. rapides 4].................................................................................................. 9-11 [Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut] .............................................................................................. 9-11 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] ....................................................................................................... 9-12 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut]........................................................................................................ 9-12 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-13 [Carnet adresses par défaut]............................................................................................................ 9-13 [Type d’adresse par défaut] ............................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] ............................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] .............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] ............................................................................................................... 9-16 Touche Menu principal .................................................................................................................... 9-16 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal ............................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran d'accueil] ................................................................................................................ 9-17 10 Fonction Mon adresse 10.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses ............................................................................................. 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................. 10-3 Mon Carnet Adresses ...................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses .......................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon adresse...................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination .................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Mon Carnet Adresses ...................................................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses.................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans Mon Carnet Adresses.......................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du Mon Carnet Adresses dans le carnet d'adresses public ...................... 10-9 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document..................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations.............................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations ......................................................................................................... 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 652/552 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option sur la machine. Il décrit aussi les fonctions disponibles dès qu'une application est connectée. La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux chacune de ces fonctions. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à suivre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine ainsi que des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions de boîte recourant au disque dur. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission WebDAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection 1 Conditions d'utilisation 1-4 bizhub 652/552 1.2 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à tous les types d'utilisateurs, depuis les utilisateurs novices jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Veuillez noter qu'une connaissance de base du produit est requise afin de permettre aux utilisateurs d'effectuer les opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 vous permet d'accéder à Internet à partir du panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. Les contenus auxquels les utilisateurs ont accès et qu'ils téléchargent et transmettent à l'aide du navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction ou par tout autre moyen restent de leur responsabilité. Les utilisateurs doivent respecter les règles de l'entreprise et les lois en vigueur dans le pays d'implantation de la machine. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. et les sociétés du groupe n'assumeront aucune responsabilité pour l'exploitation d'Internet par les utilisateurs. L'i-Option LK-103 v2 peut ne pas être disponible selon la zone. Pour plus de détails, contactez le S.A.V. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation bizhub 652/552 1-5 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Suivez les instructions pour éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Le chiffre "1" ainsi formaté représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle pour accéder à l'élément de menu souhaité. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures opératoires sont décrites à l'aide d'illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 652/552 1.3 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle. 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 2 Présentation bizhub 652/552 2-3 2.1 Présentation des fonctions 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Référence - La disponibilité de la fonction avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau UK-203 fourni en option. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement du kit de licence et sur l'activation de fonctions sur les imprimantes multifonction, reportez-vous au [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/ Numérisation]. - Pour associer la fonction à l'application, vous devez l'activer depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, reportez-vous au manuel relatif à l'application. 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions prises en charge pour les kits licence et les applications. 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau modifie l'utilisation des touches Boîte, Fax/Numérisation et Copie du panneau de contrôle. - La touche Boîte fonctionne comme une touche du Menu Application et les touches Fax/Numérisation et Copie fonctionnent comme des touches d'application. - Appuyez sur Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application] qui vous permet de basculer vers la fonction ajoutée. - Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier la fonction qui doit être assignée à la touche d'application. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-3. Navigateur Web Image Panel Traitement PDF PDF adressable i-Option LK-101 v2 o o - - i-Option LK-102 - - o - i-Option LK-103 v2 o o o - i-Option LK-105 - - - o Mon Panneau Mon adresse PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Présentation des fonctions 2-4 bizhub 652/552 2.1 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous à la référence décrite ci-dessous. Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de compte est installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible. Fonction Présentation Référence Navigateur Web Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. p. 6-3 Traitement PDF Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant l'i-Option LK-102 ou LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Exécute le cryptage de PDF commandé par mot de passe ou ID numérique, ajoute une signature numérique et configure les réglages des propriétés pour la distribution de documents au format PDF à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. p. 7-3 PDF adressable Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en collant les données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF à l'aide des fonctions Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. p. 8-3 Mon Panneau Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur en fonction de l'application (Mon Panneau), puis obtention de Mon Panneau sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 9-3 Mon adresse Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée du carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet Adresses) par le serveur, puis obtention de Mon Carnet Adresses sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 10-3 3 Attribution des touches d'application bizhub 652/552 3-3 3.1 Présentation 3 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation La description suivante présente la distribution des touches et le [menu Application] du panneau de contrôle. 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau permet à la touche Boîte de fonctionner comme une touche Menu Application et à Fax/Numérisation et Copie comme des touches d'application. Référence - Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel en enregistrant l'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifunction. - La fonction Mon Panneau est utilisée en association avec PageScope My Panel Manager. N°. Nom Description 1 Menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous ajoutez une fonction, fixez un autocollant Menu Application (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour modifier le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-4. 3 Présentation 3-4 bizhub 652/552 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Application] Appuyez sur la touche Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Si vous désirez utiliser une fonction qui n'est pas affectée à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez permuter les fonctions de la touche concernée dans le [Menu Application]. 2 Touche d'application 1 La fonction Fax/Numérisation est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. 3 Touche d'application 2 La fonction Copie est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. N°. Nom Description bizhub 652/552 3-5 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier les fonctions qui doivent être assignées aux touches d'application 1 et 2. 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] Pour attribuer une fonction aux touches d'application 1 et 2, utilisez [Réglage Touche Application]. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Système]. 5 Dans [Réglage Système] (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. 6 Sélectionnez une touche d'application ([Touche 1] ou [Touche 2]) pour y attribuer une fonction. 3 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3-6 bizhub 652/552 3.2 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. La fonction est attribuée à la touche d'application. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 652/552 4-3 4.1 Présentation 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web imprime, affiche et enregistre des contenus Internet ou Intranet en y accédant depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Afficher et imprimer les contenus Web sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Afficher, imprimer et enregistrer un fichier document sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Envoyer un fichier document numérisé ou un fichier document enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur vers un serveur sur Internet ou Intranet. - Partager les documents des boîtes utilisateur des imprimantes multifonction sur le réseau à l'aide PageScope Web Connection. - Lorsque la fonction Mon Panneau est disponible, vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à Mon Panneau. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection depuis le panneau de contrôle, voir page 5-3. Pour plus d'informations sur Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction sont les suivantes. Élément Caractéristiques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Langage de balisage pris en charge HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/De base Feuille de style prise en charge Partie de CSS1 et 2 Langage script pris en charge Partie de JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3e édition, Ajax (limité au contenu pris en charge par JavaScript) DOM pris en charge Partie du niveau 1 et 2 Format pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 et antérieur Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Maj_JIS), japonais (ISO-2022-JP), japonais (EUC-JP), chinois simplifié (GB2312), chinois traditionnel (Big5), Europe occidentale (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Mode d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 4 Affichage du Navigateur Web 4-4 bizhub 652/552 4.2 Restrictions avec Flash Player Les restrictions liées au module Flash Player installé dans le Navigateur Web. - La fonction permettant de générer un événement par une pression de touche n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant de coller ou d'obtenir des données telles que des chaînes de caractères du presse-papier ne sont pas prises en charge. - Le menu contextuel n'est pas pris en charge. - La fonction d'impression de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou d'exploiter Flash depuis JavaScript ne sont pas prises en charge. - Les écrans ne comportant pas de fenêtres instantanées ne sont pas pris en charge. - La fonction Signet de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction de communication via XMLSocket n'est pas prise en charge. 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Navigateur Web]. La page spécifiée comme page d'accueil apparaît. Référence - Si un utilisateur connecté utilise le navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau et que cet utilisateur appuie sur [Navigateur Web], le réglage Navigateur Web et les informations associées à l'utilisateur sont téléchargés du serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction. Si l'utilisateur a défini une page d'accueil personnelle, celle-ci s'affiche. - Au lancement du navigateur Web, vous pouvez spécifier l'affichage de la page d'accueil ou de la dernière page visitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-17. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le menu [Application], voir page 3-4. Pour plus d'informations sur Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. bizhub 652/552 4-5 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. Vous pouvez également interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. [Réglage Navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Réseau]. 5 Dans [Réglages Réseau] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Navigateur Web]. 6 Sélectionnez [Non valide] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Si [Réglage Navigateur Web] est réglé sur [Non valide], [Navigateur Web] est masqué dans le [Menu Application]. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 652/552 4.3 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée Si la gestion des utilisateurs est effectuée sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. [Autoriser fonction] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]. 5 Dans [Système d'Authentification], appuyez sur [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 6 Sélectionnez l'utilisateur auquel vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web et appuyez sur [Modifier]. % Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web aux utilisateurs publics, appuyez sur [ ] et sélectionnez [Public]. 7 Appuyez sur [Autoriser Fonction]. 8 Dans [Autoriser Fonction] (3/3), réglez [Navigateur Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Le réglage n'est pas disponible si [Non valide] est spécifié dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglage Navigateur Web]. - La configuration de l'autorisation de la fonction aux utilisateurs publics est disponible lorsque l'accès utilisateur public est autorisé dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'authentification] ö [Accès util. Public]. - Si la gestion des utilisateurs est réalisée sur le serveur externe, vous pouvez configurer les réglages par défaut d'autorisation de la fonction pour les utilisateurs qui se connectent à l'imprimante multifonction en utilisant l'Authentification Serveur Externe la première fois. Pour configurer les réglages, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Param. admin.] ö [Autoris. par défaut Fonction] ö [Navigateur Web]. Pour plus d'informations sur [Autoris. par défaut Fonction], reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. bizhub 652/552 4-7 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux Si le navigateur Web est utilisé en interaction avec une application, vous pouvez accéder par le navigateur Web aux fichiers (contenus préinstallés, fichiers d'images, fichiers d'aide, etc.) enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction. L'administrateur peut interdire l'utilisation des fichiers enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction depuis le navigateur Web selon les besoins. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur l'interaction de l'application avec le navigateur Web, contactez le SAV. [Accès au contenu du navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Param. Sécurité]. 5 Appuyez sur [Détails Sécurité]. 6 Dans [Détails Sécurité] (4/4), réglez [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-8 bizhub 652/552 4.4 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants. Référence - Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Vous pouvez régler le son du haut-parleur avec l'icône. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-10. N°. Nom Description 1 Barre d'outils Permet d'exploiter le Navigateur Web ou de configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Elle est affichée en permanence sur l'écran Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. 2 Barre de défilement Apparaît à droite de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran verticalement. Apparaît en bas de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran horizontalement. 3 Fenêtre En cas d'affichage de plusieurs fenêtres, vous pouvez changer de fenêtre en vous servant des onglets situés au bas de l'écran. Appuyez sur [e] de l'onglet actif pour fermer la fenêtre. 4 Icône L'icône qui représente l'état de connexion apparaît au chargement du contenu. L'icône apparaît si le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction. 1 4 3 2 bizhub 652/552 4-9 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations à partir du pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Le stylet procure un confort d'utilisation sur l'écran tactile. Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. - Pour sélectionner un élément, il suffit d'appuyer dessus. - Si un lien figure dans le contenu, appuyez dessus pour y accéder. - Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Tapez les caractères sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur [ ], [ ], [ ] ou sur [ ] de la barre de défilement. Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique Vous pouvez utiliser le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour entrer des valeurs numériques ou sélectionner des articles dans la liste. 4.4.3 Saisie de texte Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Saisie de texte Appuyez sur le caractère que vous voulez saisir sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. - Vous pouvez aussi saisir des nombres à l'aide du pavé numérique. Référence - Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, puis appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. - Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle. - Pour annuler le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. - Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. - Si la saisie de codes de caractères sur plusieurs lignes est autorisée, le bouton de saut de ligne apparaît. 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-10 bizhub 652/552 4.4 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran Il existe trois types de mode d'affichage de l'écran Navigateur Web. [Normal] Ce mode d'affichage correspond à celui d'un navigateur Web normal. L'affichage du contenu n'est pas ajusté à la taille de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. (Le défaut est réglé sur [Normal]). [Rendu Parfait] La disposition du contenu est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. [Rendu intelligent] Le tableau est divisé et redistribué verticalement pour correspondre à la largeur de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. La disposition peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir page 4-16. 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Si un haut-parleur est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction, l'icône haut-parleur s'affiche en bas à gauche du navigateur Web. Appuyez sur l'icône haut-parleur pour afficher l'écran Volume qui vous permet de régler le volume du haut-parleur. - Pour augmenter le volume au niveau supérieur, appuyez sur [Plus clair] ou sur la touche # du panneau de contrôle. - Pour réduire le volume au niveau inférieur, appuyez sur [Plus foncé] ou sur la touche * du panneau de contrôle. - Appuyer sur [Sourdine] désactive le son. L'icône de haut-parleur change d'apparence. bizhub 652/552 4-11 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer différentes opérations et de configurer différents paramètres. 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions des touches de la barre d'outils. Icône Nom Description Verso Retour à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/ Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche pendant que vous chargez une page, le chargement est interrompu. Home Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" est la page enregistrée par défaut. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir page 4-15. [Signet] - [Affichage] Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. [Signet] - [Ajout] Ajoute l'URL de la page actuellement affichée à la liste des favoris. L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. [Adresse] Affiche l'écran de saisie des URL. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Histor.] Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Impr.] Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Menu] Configuration des paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. 4 Barre d'outils 4-12 bizhub 652/552 4.5 4.5.2 [Signet] - [Affichage] Appuyez sur [Liste] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés à l'aide de vignettes. La sélection d'un favori permet d'accéder à l'URL correspondante. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des favoris de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Liste des favoris Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. 4.5.3 [Signet] - [Ajout] (L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur). En appuyant sur [Ajout], vous êtes invité(e) à entrer le mot de passe administrateur. Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'écran d'enregistrement apparaît. Vérifiez le contenu et appuyez sur [OK]. L'URL de la page affichée est ajoutée à la liste des favoris. L'imprimante multifonction peut gérer 100 favoris au maximum. - Pour enregistrer les vignettes de la pages à ajouter aux favoris, cochez la case [Enregistrer Vignette] dans l'écran d'enregistrement. - L'enregistrement est effectué sous le titre donné précédemment au contenu. Pour changer le titre, appuyez sur le champ de saisie du titre dans l'écran d'enregistrement et modifiez le titre. Référence - L'accès au navigateur Web en association avec Mon Panneau ne nécessite pas l'autorité administrateur. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 favoris par utilisateur. Élément Description [Vue Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Permet de choisir entre afficher la liste des favoris ou leurs vignettes. [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher les favoris en visualisant au choix leur adresse ou leur titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme la liste des favoris. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Ouvre le favori sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Editer] Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. La modification de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Haut] Vous positionne au-dessus du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Bas] Vous positionne au-dessous du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Supprimer] Supprime le favori sélectionné. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. bizhub 652/552 4-13 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.4 [Destinataire] Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie de l'adresse. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. Entrez l'URL de la page à afficher et appuyez sur [Valider] or [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste de l'historique de saisie. Vous pouvez référencer les saisies précédentes. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique de saisie. Référence - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrées de données. - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des dossiers d'historique de saisie de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique de saisie par utilisateur. 4.5.5 [Histor.] Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran Afficher Historique. Dans la liste d'affichage de l'historique, sélectionnez la page que vous voulez afficher à nouveau. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique d'affichage. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des dossiers d'historique d'affichage de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique d'affichage par utilisateur. [Afficher Historique] Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. Élément Description [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher l'historique en visualisant au choix l'adresse ou le titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime toutes les entrées enregistrées dans l'affichage de l'historique. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Ferme la liste d'affichage de l'historique. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Charge l'affichage d'historique sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Supprimer] Supprime l'affichage d'historique sélectionné. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. 4 Barre d'outils 4-14 bizhub 652/552 4.5 4.5.6 [Impr.] Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le contenu affiché est imprimé. Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer une page Web ou une image JPEG ou autre qui utilise une grande partie de la mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4.5.7 [Menu] Appuyez sur [Menu] pour configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le [Titre], l'[URL], la [Date/Heure], ainsi que le [Numéro Page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. bizhub 652/552 4-15 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web Le fait d'appuyer sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils permet d'afficher le menu de l'utilisateur. Les utilisateurs peuvent seulement visualiser les réglages opératoires et les informations du navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer l'environnement d'exploitation et les paramètres sécurité en plus des réglages opératoires du navigateur Web. Pour afficher le menu administrateur, appuyez sur [Administrateur] dans l'écran du menu, puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. 4.6.1 [Opération Page] Configurez les réglages opération page sous l'onglet [Opération Page]. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - L'élément [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil] ne s'affiche uniquement que pour les utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en association avec Mon Panneau. Élément Description [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil]* Enregistre la page affichée comme page d'accueil. [Mémo Page] Affiche la page enregistrée comme mémo page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page correspondante. Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. [Enreg. comme Mémo Page] Enregistre la page affichée telle quelle. [Affichage Zoom] Appuyez sur [Affichage Zoom] pour faire apparaître la touche permettant d'agrandir ou réduire le format d'affichage de la page. Appuyez sur la touche pour modifier le format d'affichage de la page. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 bizhub 652/552 4.6 4.6.2 [Affichage] Sous l'onglet [Affichage], configurez les réglages d'affichage des contenus. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages afin de masquer ou non les images ou animations, activer ou désactiver JavaScript et effectuer des réglages détaillés d'affichage des contenus. 4.6.3 [Gérér fenêtres] L'onglet [Gérer fenêtres] permet de gérer l'affichage des fenêtres. Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq fenêtres. Élément Description [Mode d'affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre [Normal], [Rendu Parfait] et [Rendu intelligent]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-10. [Codage] Spécifiez le type de codage à utiliser pour l'affichage des contenus. [Paramètres Détaillés] Configurez les paramètres d'affichage des contenus. • [Image] : cochez cette case pour afficher les images. • [Animation] : cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. • [Tableau] : cochez cette case pour identifier le tableau en HTML et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. • [JavaScript] : cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript du contenu. • [CSS] : cochez cette case pour activer le CSS du contenu. • [Retour ligne auto] : cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto du contenu. • [Contrô Conto Ligne Caract] : cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle de délimitation du nombre de caractères par ligne dans le contenu. • [Rendu Rapide] : cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. • [Fenêtre instantanée] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'affichage de la fenêtre instantanée. • [Autorisation hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'utilisation des contenus hors ligne. • [Lecture Auto Flash] : cochez cette case pour lire automatiquement un contenu Flash. • [Activer Affichage hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour activer la visualisation des contenus hors ligne. Cette commande est affichée lorsque l'[Autorisation hors ligne] est accordée par l'administrateur. [Réglage Sélection des couleurs] Déterminez une couleur pour l'élément sélectionné ([Vert], [Bleu], [Jaune], or [Orange]). Élément Description [Créer nouvelle fenêtre] Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Ouvrir ds nlle fenêtre] Affiche la liste de liens dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Fermer la fenêtre active] Ferme la fenêtre active. [Fermer les autres fenêtres] Ferme toutes les fenêtres. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'une seule fenêtre d'ouverte. bizhub 652/552 4-17 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6.4 [Réglages] L'onglet [Réglages] vous permet de vérifier et de réinitaliser les informations concernant le navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages opératoires et de sécurité du navigateur Web. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - Les réglages suivants sont accessibles aux utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en se connectant à Mon Panneau. – [Réglage Démarrage] – Réglage de suppression des [Cookies] – Réglage de suppression des [Informations d'authentification] - Mon Panneau peut contenir jusqu'à 20 éléments de cookies et d'informations d'authentification par utilisateur. Élément Description [Réglage Démarrage]* Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée en fin de session. [Sécurité]* Permet de configurer le paramètre SSL ou TLS, ou d'afficher un certificat racine ou un certificat CA. [Cookies]* Permet de configurer les réglages de réception et de suppression des cookies. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les cookies enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Cache]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation et de suppression des caches. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les caches enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Proxy]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation du serveur proxy. Enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy, utilisez-le. Si l'authentification proxy est nécessaire, enregistrez l'ID et le code d'accès à utiliser dans l'authentification proxy. [Informations d'authentification]* Spécifiez le délai au bout duquel supprimer les informations d'authentification entrées dans les contenus. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer toutes les informations d'authentification enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Journal Accès]* Permet d'établir l'historique des accès de tous les utilisateurs. Vous pouvez vérifier par [ID], [Nom d'utilisateur], [URL] et par [Accès]. [Infos Navigateur Web] Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web [Initialis.] Redémarrez le navigateur Web. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-18 bizhub 652/552 4.7 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document Vous pouvez imprimer, afficher ou enregistrer un fichier document si le lien d'accès vers ce document figure dans le contenu affiché. - Les formats PDF et XPS sont pris en charge pour les fichiers documents. - Vous ne pouvez pas afficher un fichier XPS. Appuyez sur le lien du fichier document dans le contenu pour afficher le premier écran du fichier document. 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le fichier document est téléchargé et imprimé. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] En appuyant sur cette touche vous pouvez préciser si vous souhaitez imprimer la [date et l'heure] et les [numéros de page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. bizhub 652/552 4-19 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer un fichier document qui utilise une grande quantité de mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - Si le PDF téléchargé est crypté, il est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF crypté sans être imprimé. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-20 bizhub 652/552 4.7 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher le fichier PDF de destination. La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, réduire, imprimer ou enregistrer le fichier PDF. Touche Description Retour à la première page. Retour à la page précédente. Affiche la page suivante. Affiche la dernière page. Rotation de l'affichage de 90° dans le sens horaire. Augmente le taux de zoom. Réduit le taux de zoom. Affiche en fonction de la largeur de la zone d'affichage. Affiche la page entière. Sélection de la Boîte Utilisateur pour enregistrer le fichier document. Configure les réglages d'impression et imprime le fichier document. Affiche la fenêtre Splash (affichage momentané pendant l'activation du logiciel). Ferme l'écran. bizhub 652/552 4-21 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Enregistr.]. L'écran de sélection des boîtes est affiché. Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier, appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Départ] ou Départ. Le fichier document est alors enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur. Référence - La boîte doit être enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction préalablement à l'enregistrement d'un fichier document. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. - Pendant l'impression d'un fichier document (en couleur) enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur à partir du navigateur Web, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier la commande [Zoom] ou [Combinaison]. 4 Envoyer un fichier document 4-22 bizhub 652/552 4.8 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document Si des fichiers documents sont partagés sur le serveur, vous pouvez envoyer un fichier document numérisé ou un fichier document contenu dans une boîte utilisateur vers le serveur à l'aide du navigateur Web. Cette section explique comment envoyer un fichier document en s'appuyant sur l'exemple du site de téléchargement. Exemple 4.8.1 Restrictions L'utilisation de cette fonction est soumise aux restrictions suivantes. - PDF, TIFF ou XPS correspond au type d'un fichier document pouvant être envoyé. Un document ne peut pas être divisé pour être envoyé. - Il n'est pas possible d'envoyer plusieurs fichiers documents simultanément. - L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier manuellement le nom du fichier. - Si vous exécutez l'une des opérations suivantes après avoir sélectionné un fichier document à envoyer, la tâche est supprimée avec le fichier document sélectionné. – La fonction Réinit. Système Auto a démarré. – Le navigateur Web a été fermé. – Le site de téléchargement a été mis à jour à l'aide de la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. – Le navigateur Web a été redémarré. – L'utilisateur s'est déconnecté lors du processus de connexion. – L'interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire a été désactivé. – Initialis. a réinitialisé le panneau. 4.8.2 Envoi d'un fichier document numérisé La procédure suivante explique comment envoyer un fichier document numérisé. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible aux utilisateurs ne pouvant pas numériser de données. - Le fichier ne peut pas être défini au format JPEG pendant la numérisation d'un original à envoyer. 1 Affichez le site de téléchargement dans le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction. 2 Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. Élément Description [Parcourir] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. le "type" est défini sur "file" dans la balise HTML INPUT. [OK] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour envoyer un fichier document. le "type" est défini sur "submit" dans la balise HTML INPUT. bizhub 652/552 4-23 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document 4 3 Appuyez sur [Numérisation]. 4 Placez l'original à envoyer sur l'imprimante multifonction. 5 Configurez les paramètres de numérisation, puis appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ. % Si Epreuve est sélectionné, vous pouvez vérifier la finition. Une fois la numérisation terminée, le nom de fichier s'affiche dans la zone de texte. 6 Appuyez sur le bouton pour lancer l'envoi. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Envoyer un fichier document, puis démarrer. 4.8.3 Envoyer un fichier document vers une Boîte utilisateur La procédure suivante explique comment envoyer un fichier document récupéré à partir d'une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible aux utilisateurs n'ayant pas accès aux documents enregistrés. - Avant d'envoyer un fichier document dans une boîte utilisateur, créez une boîte utilisateur pour y enregistrer le fichier document. - Vous pouvez sélectionner uniquement la Boîte Utilisateur Public et la Boîte Utilisateur Privé. - Le fichier ne peut pas être défini sous le format JPEG pendant la sélection d'un fichier document à envoyer à partir d'une boîte utilisateur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un fichier document JPEG enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, le format de fichier passe en PDF. Si nécessaire, spécifiez le format de fichier approprié avant d'envoyer un fichier document. - Pendant l'envoi d'un fichier document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur avec le paramètre Séparation Page activé, ce paramètre passe à Multi Page. 4 Envoyer un fichier document 4-24 bizhub 652/552 4.8 1 Affichez le site de téléchargement dans le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction. 2 Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Boîte Utilis.]. 4 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [Utiliser Doc.]. 5 Sélectionnez un fichier document à envoyer, puis appuyez sur [Réglages Fichier]. % Sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers documents, puis appuyez sur [Combinaison] ; vous pouvez ensuite les combiner en un fichier unique. L'ordre de combinaison peut être modifié si nécessaire. % Sélectionnez un fichier document, puis appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour vérifier la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du fichier document et prévisualiser l'image. 6 Configurez les paramètres du fichier, puis appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ. % Appuyez sur [Application] pour configurer le tampon ou le nombre de pages. Le nom de fichier apparaît dans la zone de texte. 7 Appuyez sur le bouton pour lancer l'envoi. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Envoyer un fichier document, puis démarrer. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) bizhub 652/552 5-3 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP incorpore à la machine. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire, accédez directement à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau à l'aide de Navigateur Web. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire à l'aide du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, seule la fonction Boîte est disponible. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser les documents de la boîte de l'imprimante multifonction sur le réseau en exploitant PageScope Web Connection au moyen du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction. - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée également dans la destination d'accès de l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, voir page 4-3. - Pour utiliser PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un Navigateur Web installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs fonctions de l'imprimante multifonction telles que les fonctions de vérification d'état, de modification de réglages et de paramétrage du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 5.1.1 Contrôle préalable Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les écrans de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - La modification des réglages du cache nécessite l'autorité administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du Navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages] et sélectionnez [Cache]. 5 Décochez la case [Utiliser cache] et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5-4 bizhub 652/552 5.1 5.1.2 Comment accéder à PageScope Web Connection Lancez le navigateur Web et spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre. 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. Référence - Si vous avez dénié la réception de cookies dans les paramètres du navigateur Web, l'écran de PageScope Web Connection n'apparaît pas. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages cookies, voir page 4-17. - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrée URL. bizhub 652/552 5-5 5.2 Composition de l'écran 5 5.2 Composition de l'écran La conception de l'écran PageScope Web Connection est la suivante. N°. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, utilisateur ou compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode en cours. 5 Affichage du contenu Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 5 Connexion et déconnexion 5-6 bizhub 652/552 5.3 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si vous avez spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran de connexion apparaît après l'affichage de PageScope Web Connection. Référence - Si vous n'avez pas spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. - Lorsque vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection à l'aide du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, le mode administrateur n'est pas disponible. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. Si vous avez précisé une authentification par serveur externe, sélectionnez un serveur externe d'identification. Entrez les informations requises et appuyez sur [Connexion]. Sélectionnez le cas échéant une langue d'affichage. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte département connecté. 5.3.2 Déconnexion Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran pour afficher un écran de confirmation de déconnexion. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran de connexion réapparaît. bizhub 652/552 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Exploitation des documents de la boîte utilisateur de l'imprimante multifonction en cours d'utilisation par une différente imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. - Utilisation des types de boîte publique, privée ou de groupe. - Affichage, impression et suppression d'un document de la boîte utilisateur. 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte La connexion avec PageScope Web Connection affiche la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et de groupes) enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction à laquelle on accède. [Connexion de boîte] Sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) dans la liste de boîtes. Alternativement, vous pouvez saisir directement un numéro de boîte ([N° Bte Ut.]) et un mot de passe de boîte ([Mot de passe de boîte]), puis appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Lorsque vous sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) pour laquelle il est spécifié un mot de passe dans la [Liste des boîtes], l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. [Connexion de boîte] [Liste des boîtes] Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Change l'affichage de l'index selon les index sélectionnés lors de la création d'une boîte utilisateur. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. Liste des boîtes Affiche le [N° Bte Ut.], le [Nom Bte Util.], le [Type] et le l'[Heure enregistrée]. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté de chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-8 bizhub 652/552 5.4 [Liste de fichiers] Sélectionnez une boîte dans [Connexion de boîte]. Les informations de base de la boîte s'affichent ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes] Permet d'afficher les vignettes des documents. Réglez sur [OFF (NON)] pour l'affichage de liste. [Spécifiez l'opération] Permet la sélection d'une opération. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-9. [Modifier l'affichage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la case [Sélectionner] à côté de tous les documents pour lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Sélectionner] Affiche une case à côté de tous les documents avec lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Vignette] Affiche le document sous forme de vignette. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [Nombre d'originaux] Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document. bizhub 652/552 5-9 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Le document sélectionné peut être imprimé ou supprimé. Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Impression] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît en regard de tous les documents imprimables. 2 Cochez la case du document à imprimer et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-10 bizhub 652/552 5.4 3 Configurez les réglages nécessaires et appuyez sur [OK]. % Dans la [Plage de pages], sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifier les pages à imprimer. % Dans [Changer l'ordre], vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression en cas d'impression de plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher un fichier PDF. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . 6 Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Si la [Version Fonction] de l'imprimante multifonction de destination n'est ni la [Version 3] ni la [Version 4], appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier] dans l'étape 4 pour afficher le fichier PDF sur le panneau. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . Pour vérifier la version actuelle de l'imprimante multifonction, sélectionnez [Info sur le périphérique] dans [Utilitaires]. bizhub 652/552 5-11 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Supprimer] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. % Cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)] pour sélectionner tous les documents. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-12 bizhub 652/552 5.4 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et appuyez sur [OK]. Le document est supprimé. 6 Image Panel bizhub 652/552 6-3 6.1 Présentation 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction. - L'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible si [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] ö [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] est réglé sur [Limiter] dans [Réglages Administrateur]. Fonctions Image Panel divise le processus d'opération en trois séquences, à savoir la "lecture d'un document", la "modification d'un document" et la "spécification d'un destinataire", qui peuvent être exécutées sur un seul écran. Ceci permet d'appréhender facilement à la fois le processus dans son ensemble et l'opération en cours. Image Panel se concentre sur l'opérabilité. Pour cette raison, les fonctions disponibles dans Image Panel sont limitées en comparaison avec le panneau conventionnel. Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 6 Afficher Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Image Panel] pour afficher le premier écran Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 652/552 6-5 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants. N°. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone de lecture des données Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. 3 Zone Desktop Les documents lus dans la zone de lecture des données sont affichés en vue Vignettes ou en vue Liste. 4 Echange Affichage Liste/Vue Vignettes Permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone bureau en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche un message auxiliaire tel que les instructions d'utilisation. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. En cas d'alerte, une icône d'alerte apparaît. 7 Zone Outil d'édition Modifie la page, combine et modifie les paramètres du document après numérisation. 8 Echange Magasin Envoi/Affichage Outil d'édition Permet d'interchanger l'affichage Magasin Envoi et Outil d'édition. Pour plus de détails sur le magasin envoi, voir page 6-18. 9 Zone Destinataire Document Spécifiez une destination du document lu dans [Impression] ou [Liste destination]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.2 Opérations générales Cette section décrit le processus des opérations depuis la lecture du document jusqu'au traitement d'envoi en présentant les séquences d'Image Panel en commençant par la "lecture d'un document", puis la "modification d'un document" et enfin la "spécification d'un destinataire". Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire avant de lire le document. La zone Lecture des données permet de numériser ou de récupérer un document. • Pour numériser un document, placez-le et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation souhaités et lancez la lecture du document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-8. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-9. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-10. • Pour utiliser des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-11. Sélectionnez [Numéris.] Sélectionnnez [Liste Source Document]. Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-12. Dans la zone Destinataire Document, sélectionnez le destinataire du document numérisé. • Pour imprimer, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-16. • Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez un destinataire dans [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. • Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] sur l'écran Liste destination. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. bizhub 652/552 6-7 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Sélectionnez [Impression]. Sélectionnez [Liste Destinat.] Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Pour plus d'informations,voir page 6-18. Appuyez sur Départ pour envoyer le document. • Pour envoyer les données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, appuyez sur Départ pour afficher un code PIN. Entrez le code PIN dans le téléphone cellulaire ou le PDA pour envoyer les données à l'imprimante multifonction. Les données sont envoyées à la destination spécifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-20. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. Numérisation d'un document Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran des paramètres de numérisation. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Référence - Vous ne pouvez numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Élément Description [Type original] Sélectionnez la qualité d'image dans [Texte], [Texte/Photo], [Photo], [Original Tramé] et [Papier copié] en fonction du contenu de l'original à numériser. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Permet de spécifier un original recto ou recto-verso. [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [200 e 100 dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'i-Option LK-102-103 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Contraste] Réglez la densité de numérisation. [Couleur] Sélection de la couleur de numérisation entre [Couleur Auto], [Couleurs], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document. [Numér. Séparée] Appuyez sur cette touche pour diviser la numérisation du document en plusieurs fois. Utile dans les cas suivants. • Lorsque le nombre de pages du document dépasse la capacité du chargeur ADF • En cas d'utilisation de la vitre d'exposition • En cas d'originaux mixtes recto et recto-verso bizhub 652/552 6-9 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher l'écran Utiliser document. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte sélectionnée, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. - Vous pouvez récupérer jusqu'à 10 documents à la fois. - Si vous spécifiez une boîte utilisateur comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Si [Impression] est spécifié comme destination et que les paramètres d'impression sont modifiés, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier comme destination la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle vous avez récupéré le document. Élément Description [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 652/552 6.3 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher la liste des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Pour récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe, vous devez configuer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction en fonction du propos du document à utiliser. – Pour imprimer un document récupéré, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Imprimer Document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser fonction] ö [Impression] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. – Pour enregistrer un document récupéré dans une boîte utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Numérisation Document Mémoire externe] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Numérisation Document Mémoire externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Les formats de fichiers disponibles pour l'impression sont PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. - Il est possible de récupérer jusqu'à 200 documents provenant d'une mémoire externe. - Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. - La spécification simultanée d'un document JPEG et d'un autre format est impossible. - Vous ne pouvez pas lire un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez seulement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre qu'une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. bizhub 652/552 6-11 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Utilisation des données archivées dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Après sélection de [Mobile/PDA] et pression de la touche [OK], l'icône téléphone cellulaire s'affiche dans la zone du bureau. Référence - Pour connecter l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA, installez l'option Kit d'interface locale EK-605 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez également les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction. – Définissez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglage Bluetooth] sur [Activer]. Définissez également [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Connexion Système] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] sur [Permis]. – Pour effectuer une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Mobile/PDA] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous sélectionnez [Mobile/PDA], vous ne pouvez pas lire un document à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre que [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mobile]. - Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. - Pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, vous devez configurer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante au préalable, dans la mesure où un fichier de liaison est récupéré à l'aide de la fonction client WebDAV. – Définissez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Paramètres WebDAV] ö [Paramètres Client WebDAV] sur [ON (OUI)]. – Pour établir la connexion via un serveur mandataire, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Adresse du serveur proxy] des [Réglages Client WebDAV]. Réglez aussi [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Oui]. – Dans [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier], spécifiez l'opération que la machine doit exécuter si elle ne peut pas récupérer le fichier lié. Élément Caractéristiques Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier de support PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Fichier XHTML de support Code de caractère : UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension du fichier de liaison : JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 652/552 6.3 dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, voir page 6-20. La fonction permettant la connexion de l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA est disponible même si le kit de licence n'est pas enregistré. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] et au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 6.3.4 Editer le document Editer le document en lecture. Référence - Lorsque vous utilisez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, vous ne pouvez pas vérifier l'image d'aperçu ni modifier les données. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. Référence - La fonction [Aperçu] n'est pas disponible dans le cas de documents récupérés d'une mémoire externe. - Dans le cas de combinaison de documents, la fonction d'aperçu est disponible uniquement pour le premier document. bizhub 652/552 6-13 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Modifier document] Editer les pages d'un document sélectionné. Vous avez la possibilité de pivoter les pages numérisées dans le mauvais sens ou de supprimer les pages inutiles. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre des pages d'un document composé de plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez également faire un aperçu des pages pour vérifier leur contenu. Référence - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible en cas de combinaison de documents. Élément Description [Pg Impaire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages impaires. [Page paire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages paires. [Aperçu/Déf. Plage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour faire visualiser les pages. [Suppr. page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la page sélectionnée. [Pivoter Page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour pivoter la page sélectionnée. Les angles de rotation autorisée sont 90° à gauche, 90° à droite et 180°. [Déplacer Page] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier l'ordre de pagination en déplaçant la page sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner la position désirée en déplaçant la vignette de la page correspondante à l'endroit voulu. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 652/552 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Combiner Documents] Cette fonction permet de combiner plusieurs documents sélectionnés. Vous pouvez utiliser la touche [Déplacer] pour modifier l'ordre de combinaison. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner [Impression] ou [Liste Destinat.] comme destination d'un document combiné. - Vous pouvez combiner un maximum de 10 documents à la fois. - Vous ne pouvez combiner un document numérisé à un document récupéré d'une boîte utilisateur. bizhub 652/552 6-15 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Réglages Document] Permet de configurer les réglages pour l'envoi du document sélectionné. Vous pouvez modifier la résolution du document, le type de fichier et ajuster les couleurs. Référence - La fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - Si vous avez sélectionné un document provenant d'une mémoire externe, la fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible. [Retour à Dest. Numér.] Appuyez sur [Retour à Dest. Numér.] pour restaurer la localisation source du document sélectionné. - Le document numérisé est supprimé de l'imprimante multifonction. - Le document provenant d'une boîte retourne dans la boîte source. Élément Description [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [Réglages pendant l'enregistrement], [200 e 100 dpi (Par défaut)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'i-Option LK-102-103 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Couleur] Sélection des couleurs de numérisation entre [Utiliser réglage couleur existant], [Couleur], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination Spécifie le destinataire du document en lecture. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer des données directement de l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - La fonction Réglage impression n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas compatibles avec l'impression de documents combinés. - Lorsque vous imprimez un document à mot de passe intégré à l'aide de la fonction Copie via mot de passe, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier [Combinaison] ni [Zoom]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Copie via mot de passe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - Si vous imprimez un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe, les options [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas disponibles. - L'option [Recto-Verso] n'est pas disponible à l'impression d'un document au format JPEG, XPS ou XPS Compact XPS provenant d'une mémoire externe. Les paramètres Agrafage et Perforation sont également inaccessibles dans les réglages de [Finition]. - Lorsque vous imprimez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, seuls les réglages d'impression vous sont accessibles. Pour changer les réglages d'impression, sélectionnez [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Impression]. Référence - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction de l'option installée. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. - [Impression continue] s'affiche lorsque vous combinez plusieurs documents avec l'outil d'édition et que vous sélectionnez [Impression] comme destination. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer à l'aide du pavé numérique. [Impression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Finition] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages Assemblé, Groupe, Agrafage ou Perforation. [Combinaison] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la combinaison de pages. Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule page. [Zoom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le taux de zoom du document. [Impression continue] Cette fonction est disponible à l'impression de documents combinés en mode recto-verso. Les documents combinés sont imprimés en continu. En cas d'impression en mode recto-verso, précisez si vous souhaitez démarrer l'impression du document suivant au verso ou au recto d'une nouvelle page lorsque la dernière page du document en cours d'impression figure au recto. bizhub 652/552 6-17 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Spécifier des destinations Dans [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez une adresse à laquelle vous souhaitez envoyer un document. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recher simple] pour vous reporter aux destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées dans l'unité principale. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Groupe] pour vous reporter à la liste des groupes enregistrés dans l'unité principale. Référence - En cas de lecture de plusieurs documents, la fonction Boîte n'est pas disponible. - Si la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez visualiser votre carnet d'adresses en appuyant sur [Mon adresse]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. - Si vous avez spécifié une adresse, vous pouvez vérifier le magasin d'envoi en appuyant sur [Vérifier Réglage Bac Adresse/Adresse distante]. - Les adresses E-mail pour lesquelles un certificat est enregistré, sont affichées avec une touche à icône. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier des boîtes utilisateur comme destination de carnet d'adresse d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe ou d'un document enregistré sur un téléphone cellulaire ou sur un PDA. Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Destinat.] et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Enregistrer document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous choisissez [Impression] ou un destinataire comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi Magasin Envoi Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Le magasin d'envoi affiche l'icône de la destination spécifiée. N°. Nom Description 1 Icône Paramètre Destination Appuyez sur l'icône Vérifier Adresse pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. 2 Icône Destination Affiche les icônes des destinations. Appuyez sur l'icône de la destination désirée pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Envoi dans lequel vous pouvez vérifier les informations détaillées de la destination. 1 2 bizhub 652/552 6-19 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Vérifier Mag. EMI] Appuyez sur l'icône du magasin d'envoi pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. Si la destination spécifiée est une adresse E-mail, vous pouvez spécifier les réglages de cryptage E-mail et d'insertion de signature numérique. Référence - Pour crypter un message E-mail et joindre une signature numérique à l'aide de S/MIME, réglez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglages E-Mail] ö [Réglages Communication S/MIME] sur [ON (OUI)]. - Un certificat doit être enregistré dans l'adresse E-mail pour pouvoir crypter un E-mail. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique à un message E-mail, le certificat de périphérique doit être enregistré sur cette machine. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglages E-Mail] ö [Réglages Communication S/MIME] ö [Signature numérique] sur [Toujours signer] ou [Sélect. à l'envoi]. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Élément Description [Réglages Adresse Distante] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour configurer les réglages de cryptage selon le protocole S/MIME et de la signature numérique. Ce réglage est disponible si vous sélectionnez [ON (Oui)] pour [Réglages Communication S/MIME] des [Réglages Administrateur] et si vous sélectionnez E-mail. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées de l'adresse. [Eff.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-20 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA La sélection d'une destination et la pression de la touche Départ affichent le code PIN sur le panneau de contrôle. Spécifiez les données que vous voulez utiliser et l'imprimante multifonction où envoyer les données du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. Entrez ensuite le code PIN pour envoyer les données sur l'imprimante multifonction. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. – Pour plus d'information sur la manière de créer une boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - À propos du fonctionnement d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du téléphone ou du PDA correspondant. - La vitesse de communication peut être réduite ou la communication peut être interrompue par des obstacles, la qualité des signaux, un champ magnétique ou l'électricité statique. - Les documents et les données d'image peuvent ne pas être envoyés correctement en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. bizhub 652/552 6-21 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Le navigateur Web de votre ordinateur vous permet d'accéder à PageScope Web Connection pour ajouter des données photo à des destinations enregistrées en numérotation abrégée. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la [Liste Destinat.] d'Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo Les spécifications nécessaires à l'enregistrement des données photo sont indiquées ci-dessous. Référence - Pendant le processus d'enregistrement des données photo, celles-ci ne sont pas agrandies ni réduites. Élément Caractéristiques Type Fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6966 octets 6 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6-22 bizhub 652/552 6.4 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo Enregistrer des données photo en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir du navigateur Web de votre ordinateur. Référence - Pour ajouter des données photo au carnet d'adresses, vous devez enregistrer à l'avance des destinations en numérotation abrégée. - Lorsque la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - Vous devez être connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré pour pouvoir ajouter des données photo dans Mon Carnet Adresses. 1 Connectez-vous en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez [Enr. Dest.]. 3 Sélectionnez [Photo/Icône.] 4 Sélectionnez la destination en numérotation abrégée à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des données photo, puis cliquez sur [Editer]. % Lorsque les données photo sont enregistrées, [Photo/Icône] est affiche dans [Photo]. bizhub 652/552 6-23 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 5 Sélectionnez [Enregistrer photo]. 6 Cliquez sur [Browse] et spécifiez le dossier où sont enregistrées les données photo que vous souhaitez ajouter. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les données photo sont ajoutées à la destination en numérotation abrégée. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 652/552 6.5 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, les conditions requises sont les suivantes. - Les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré dans l'authentification utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone de lecture des données pour les boîtes fréquemment utilisées. 1 Dans [Source Données], appuyez sur [Liste Source Document]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur que vous voulez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de lecture des données. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une boîte utilisateur déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. bizhub 652/552 6-25 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone Destinataire Document pour les destinations fréquemment utilisées. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.] dans la zone [Destin. Données]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination que vous souhaitez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de destination des documents. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-26 bizhub 652/552 6.5 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'icône de raccourci est supprimée. 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF bizhub 652/552 7-3 7.1 Présentation 7 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet de spécifier le niveau de sécurité pour la distribution de documents numérisés et enregistrés dans une boîte utilisateur, comme le cryptage du document ou l'ajout de signature numérique s'il y a lieu. Référence - Cette fonction peut être utilisée sur l'imprimante multifonction si l'Option internet LK-102 ou LK-103 v2 est enregistrée. Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Configuration des réglages des propriétés du document pour sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-4). - Cryptage d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique (touche Public) lors de sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-5). - Ajout d'une signature numérique lors d'une distribution sous forme de document PDF crypté (p. 7-5). - Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe (p. 7-9). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 7 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 bizhub 652/552 7.2 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte vous permet de configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande [Enregistrer document] de la fonction Boîte, vous ne pouvez pas configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. - Lorsque vous envoyez un document de boîte au format PDF dans un autre périphérique à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Élément Description [Titre] Si vous sélectionnez [Non] pour [Appliq. Nom fichier], spécifiez le titre du document PDF (jusqu'à 64 caractères). [Appliq. Nom fichier] Permet d'appliquer le nom de fichier comme nom du document PDF. [Auteur] Entrée de l'auteur du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). Lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est exécutée, le nom de connexion est entré comme nom d'auteur. [Sujet] Entrée du sous-titre du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). [Mots-clés] Entrée ds mots-clés du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). bizhub 652/552 7-5 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte permet d'améliorer la sécurité des documents PDF en les cryptant à l'aide du mot de passe ou de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (touche Public). L'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur l'imprimante permet d'ajouter une signature numérique aux documents PDF distribués. L'ajout d'une signature numérique certifie l'auteur (imprimante multifonction) du document envoyé et garantit que le document n'a pas été modifié après la signature. Référence - Avec PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez procéder au cryptage d'un document et y ajouter une signature numérique pour l'envoyer dans une boîte utilisateur vers un autre périphérique au format PDF. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique, il est nécessaire de crypter le document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique. 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe Pour crypter un document par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] ne vous permet pas de sélectionner un [niveau faible] de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau faible] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits), gérée par Acrobat 3.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur [Code d’accès] Entrez le mot de passe requis pour ouvrir un document PDF. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le même mot de passe que celui spécifié sous [Code d'accès]. Après avoir configuré les permissions du document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour configurer les réglages détaillés des autorisations. Les valeurs définies dépendent du niveau de cryptage. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-6 bizhub 652/552 7.3 [Paramètres Détaillés] 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. Permettre seulement [Basse résolution] peut être sélectionné si le niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé 1] ou [Niveau élevé 2]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Spécifier Mise en page, Entrer Texte + Insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter les pages, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à faible niveau de sécurité. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. bizhub 652/552 7-7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 Configurez les réglages suivants pour crypter un document à l'aide de l'ID numérique d'un utilisateur. [Paramètres Détaillés] Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner des destinations. L'écran de sélection d'adresse affiche la liste des adresses E-mail dotées d'ID numériques enregistrés pour l'envoi S/MIME. Spécifiez l'ID numérique à utiliser pour le cryptage en sélectionnant une adresse E-mail. La sélection de [Même que destination] utilise l'ID numérique de l'adresse ; vous n'avez pas besoin de spécifier un ID numérique sur cet écran. La spécification de cet ID numérique est indépendante de la spécification d'une adresse ; vous devez donc spécifier une adresse séparément. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. Le cryptage d'un document avec un ID numérique ne permet pas de sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour le niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-8 bizhub 652/552 7.3 Référence - Le cryptage commandé par ID numérique nécessite l'enregistrement préalable du certificat de l'utilisateur dans l'adresse E-mail. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat d'utilisateur dans une adresse E-mail, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. - L'ID numérique spécifiable dépend du niveau appliqué à l‘utilisateur. - Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans une boîte, il n'est pas possible de le crypter par un ID numérique. - Lors du cryptage d'un document PDF et de la création simultanée d'un document PDF adressable, les réglages suivants ne sont pas disponibles si [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre du PDF adressable. [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] par défaut. Modifiez le réglage en fonction des besoins. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction PDF adressable, voir page 8-3. bizhub 652/552 7-9 7.4 Impression directe 7 7.4 Impression directe Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe. Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour imprimer les documents en mode d'impression directe. Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez [Impression directe]. Cliquez sur [Browse] pour localiser le fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7 Impression directe 7-10 bizhub 652/552 7.4 8 Fonction PDF adressable bizhub 652/552 8-3 8.1 Présentation 8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation PDF adressable renvoie à une fonction qui crée un fichier PDF adressable en collant des données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF ou PDF compact à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. La fonction PDF adressable prend en charge plusieurs langues. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF adressable, sélectionnez la langue appropriée à l'original pour permettre un traitement de lecture optique correct. Vous pouvez aussi améliorer la précision du traitement de lecture optique en corrigeant automatiquement l'orientation des pages. Si vous souhaitez gérer des documents papier au format électronique, il est recommandé d'utiliser la fonction PDF adressable pour convertir les documents en fichier PDF adressable. Référence - Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables Selon l'état des originaux, la reconnaissance du texte peut être problématique, le texte risque d'être tronqué ou d'autres problèmes peuvent se produire. Exemple - Les caractères qui ne sont pas pris en charge par l'imprimante multifonction ne seront pas reconnus correctement. - Si une langue différente de celle de l'original est sélectionnée à la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, le texte ne sera pas reconnu correctement. - Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de correction automatique d'orientation des pages, voir page 8-5. Taille de caractère reconnaissable Référence - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, la numérisation ne peut pas être effectuée si la définition est supérieure à 300 dpi. Langue européenne Japonais Langue asiatique Définition 200 dpi 9 pt à 142 pt 12 pt à 142 pt 20 pt à 142 pt 300 dpi 6 pt à 96 pt 8 pt à 96 pt 12 pt à 96 pt 8 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR Avant de créer un fichier PDF adressable, vous pouvez spécifier si vous donnez la priorité à la précision ou la vitesse d'exécution pour le traitement OCR. [Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 2 Appuyez sur [Régl. Utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax]. 4 Dans [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Opération ROC]. 5 Sélectionnez le traitement OCR et appuyez sur [Valider]. % [Priorité Qualité] : priorité est donnée à la précision de reconnaissance d'un texte original. L'inclinaison des originaux est aussi réglée automatiquement. % [Priorité Vitesse] : priorité est donnée à la vitesse d'exécution du traitement OCR. L'inclinaison des originaux n'est pas réglée automatiquement. bizhub 652/552 8-5 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en sélectionnant [PDF] ou [PDF compact] comme type de fichier lorsque vous enregistrez ou envoyez un original au format PDF en utilisant les fonctions Numérisation et Boîte Utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Boîte Utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [PDF compact] comme [Type Fichier] pour créer un fichier PDF adressable, la vitesse de traitement OCR peut être plus grande que lorsque vous sélectionnez [PDF]. - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, [Définition] ne peut pas être réglé sur [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] ou [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. - Pour créer un fichier PDF adressable tout en cryptant un fichier PDF, si l'un des réglages suivants est spécifié, [Ajuster Rotation] ne peut pas être réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre de cryptage du PDF. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus de détails sur le cryptage d'un fichier PDF, voir page 7-5. - Pour le [Japanese], le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], l'orientation du texte (écriture verticale ou horizontale) est reconnue automatiquement. Toutefois, pour le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], si les deux orientations de texte verticale et horizontale sont utilisées sur la même page, le traitement de l'original repose sur l'une ou l'autre orientation. - Le téléchargement ou l'envoi d'un document configuré comme un fichier PDF recherchable et enregistré dans une Boîte Utilisateur avec PageScope Web Connection entraîne l'annulation du paramètre du PDF recherchable et la désactivation d'une recherche de texte. Élément Description [Sélection Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser pour créer un fichier PDF adressable. Pour une reconnaissance correcte du texte, la langue sélectionnée doit être appropriée à l'original. [Ajuster Rotation] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez la rotation automatique de chaque page pour corriger l'orientation en fonction de l'orientation du texte détectée par la reconnaissance optique OCR. Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. 8 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8-6 bizhub 652/552 8.3 9 Fonction Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 9-3 9.1 Présentation 9 9 Fonction Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation La fonction Mon Panneau permet la gestion centrale de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur conformément à l'application (Mon Panneau) et la mise à disposition de Mon Panneau sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. L'utilisation de Mon Panneau procure la même opérationnalité sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction en réseau. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Mon Panneau à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec Mon Panneau Mon Panneau vous permet de personnaliser le panneau de contrôle pour afficher de préférence les fonctions les plus fréquemment utilisées. Par ailleurs, si le navigateur Web ou Image Panel est disponible, vous pouvez l'associer à PageScope My Panel Manager pour gérer les réglages du navigateur Web et les informations de chaque utilisateur et personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. Eléments personnalisables Mon Panneau vous permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Spécification de la langue affichée sur le panneau de contrôle - Spécification d'une unité de mesure à afficher lors de la saisie de nombres - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Spécification de la couleur des touches sélectionnées du panneau de contrôle - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web Vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à Mon Panneau. My Panel vous permet de gérer les réglages suivants et les informations de chaque utilisateur. - Page d'accueil - Favoris - Historique d'affichage des contenus - Historique de saisie URL - Cookie - Informations d'authentification dPour info Enregistrez une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide du navigateur Web. L'historique d'affichage et de saisie, les cookies et les informations d'authentification sont automatiquement sauvegardées dans le serveur au fur et à mesure que l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du navigateur Web, voir page 4-3. 9 Présentation 9-4 bizhub 652/552 9.1 Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'enregistrement d'une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel En associant Image Panel à Mon Panneau ou Mon Carnet Adresses, vous pouvez enregistrer des raccourcis de source document et de destination dans l'écran de base d'Image Panel afin de personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation d'Image Panel. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à Mon Carnet Adresses pour spécifier une destination à laquelle envoyer des données. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation de l'écran, voir page 6-24. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Panneau Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de Mon Panneau pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. Mon Panneau n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. Mon Panneau est disponible Mon Panneau est disponible Serveur (gestion de Mon Panneau) (3) Obtention de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification Mon Panneau n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 9-5 9.1 Présentation 9 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon Panneau Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à l'utilisation de Mon Panneau. - Les fonctions d'enregistrement, d'édition et de suppression de Mon Panneau sont uniquement accessibles aux utilisateurs disposant de Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Lorsque vous accédez à Mon Panneau pour la première fois, les réglages de langue, d'unité de mesure et de couleur sont conformes aux réglages de l'imprimante multfonction. - Lorsque vous accédez à Mon Panneau pour la première fois, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seule la mémoire de réglage (programme Copie et programme Fax/Numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction que vous utilisez est disponible. - Selon les fonctions ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9 Afficher Mon Panneau 9-6 bizhub 652/552 9.2 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Menu Comm Le menu principal apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages. Dans le menu principal, vous pouvez enregistrer 12 types de touches de raccourci. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des réglages du menu principal, voir page 9-16. 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé à la fonction Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. Pour afficher le menu principal de Mon Panneau depuis un écran initial différent, utilisez le [Menu Application]. Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] pour afficher le menu principal de Mon Panneau. dPour info L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans les réglages [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-17. Pour plus de détails sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 652/552 9-7 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau Personnalisez Mon Panneau dans [Réglages Mon Panneau] des [Utilitaires]. 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] Les éléments personnalisables sont les suivants. Élément Description [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure à utiliser pour afficher les valeurs dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-10. [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-12. [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-14. [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglages Menu Principal] Enregistrez les touches du menu principal sur l'écran Menu principal de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-17. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-8 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] Lorsque la fonction Mon Panneau est disponible, [Réglages Mon Panneau] figure dans [Utilitaires]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. bizhub 652/552 9-9 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans Mon Panneau parmi les langues disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de longueur à utiliser dans Mon Panneau. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-10 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut pour l'écran De base en mode Copie. [De base] propose un affichage normal de base. [Copie rapide] affiche les éléments de réglage de l'écran des réglages de base sur un seul écran. Cette commande peut servir à spécifier plusieurs réglages à la fois. [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application copie les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2], [OFF (NON)] s'affiche lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. (Exemple : [Contraste], [Suppression Fond]) En outre, si une page avec laquelle enregistrer une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2] est affichée lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible, [OFF (NON)] sera sélectionné. Si [OK] est sélectionné, [OFF (NON)] est réglé sur [Touche Raccourci 1] et [Touche Raccourci 2]. Par conséquent, les touches raccourcis ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez sur un autre modèle. bizhub 652/552 9-11 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 [Régl. rapides 1] - [Régl. rapides 4] Attribuent les valeurs de réglage des touches de programme de copie et de la fonction Copie dans l'écran de base. L'attribution des valeurs de réglages les plus fréquemment utilisées et des touches de programme copie dans l'écran de base vous permet de configurer facilement les réglages copie par une simple pression de la touche. Vous pouvez attribuer un maximum de quatre touches. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4], [OFF (NON)] s'affiche pour cette machine lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec cette machine. (Exemple : [Couleur]) Si une page avec laquelle enregistrer une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4] lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible, [OFF (NON)] sera sélectionné. Si [OK] est sélectionné, [OFF (NON)] est réglé sur [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4]. Par conséquent, les réglages rapides ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez sur un autre modèle. dPour info Pour attribuer un programme copie dans l'écran de base, vous devez enregistrer ce programme au préalable. Pour plus d'information sur l'enregistrement d'un programme copie, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut] Ajuster le contraste de la copie sur l'écran de base sur la barre de réglage. Référence - Lors du réglage du contraste sur l'écran de base, [Régl. Rapides 3] et [Régl. Rapides 4] ne sont pas disponibles. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-12 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation. [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut] Pour utiliser le carnet d'adresse public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher initialement dans [Carnet Adresses]. Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. bizhub 652/552 9-13 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application fax/numérisation les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. [Carnet adresses par défaut] Configurez les réglages de l'écran par défaut de [Carnet Adresses]. [Type d’adresse par défaut] Pour afficher un carnet d'adresses par type d'adresse, spécifiez un type d'adresse à afficher par défaut. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-14 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut de l'écran de base (après pression de la touche Boîte sur le panneau de contrôle) en mode Boîte. [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Disposez les touches de raccourci des boîtes fréquemment utilisées pour les documents boîtes sur l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. bizhub 652/552 9-15 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans Mon Panneau. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-16 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] Personnalise le menu principal de Mon Panneau. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages (programmes Copie et programmes Fax/Numérisation). Touche Menu principal La touche de raccourci affichée dans le menu principal est appelée touche du menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types. Pour enregistrer la mémoire des réglages (programmes copie et programmes fax/numérisation) comme touches du menu principal, appuyez sur la touche [Icône] pour sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal [Fonction], [Réglages Fonction Copie], [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax], [Réglage Programme Copie] et [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] peuvent constituer des touches du menu principal. Élément Description [Fonction] Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions [Copie], [Numéris./Fax], [Boîte Utilis.], [Image Panel] et [Navigateur Web]. L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans le menu principal n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Fonction Copie] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci dans les réglages Fonction Copie pour chaque réglage [Paramètre Papier], [Zoom], [R-Verso/Combin.] et [Finition]. [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci des réglages de la fonction Numérisation/Fax pour chaque réglage [Réglages Numérisation], [Réglages Original] et [Réglages Comm.]. [Réglage Programme Copie] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. bizhub 652/552 9-17 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran d'accueil] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Par défaut, le menu principal Mon Panneau est affiché comme écran initial. Référence - L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans l'écran initial n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages de fax/ numérisation (programme fax/numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages de fax/numérisation (programme fax/numérisation), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-18 bizhub 652/552 9.3 10 Fonction Mon adresse bizhub 652/552 10-3 10.1 Présentation 10 10 Fonction Mon adresse 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon adresse, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet Adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet Adresses de l'imprimante sélectionnée. L'utilisation de Mon Carnet Adresses vous permet de vous servir du même carnet d'adresses sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction de votre réseau sans avoir à enregistrer les adresses individuellement sur chacune des imprimantes. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des entrées à Mon Carnet Adresses à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses Lorsque la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les deux sortes de carnets d'adresses suivantes. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresse public propose les fonctions suivantes. - Dans le carnet d'adresses public, il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations en numérotation abrégée, des groupes et des programmes. - Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré dans l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction, les destinations disponibles dépendent de l'imprimante sélectionnée. - L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer le carnet d'adresses public. - Si l'administrateur a activé l'interdiction des fonctions d'enregistrement et d'édition de destinations par les utilisateurs, l'enregistrement ou l'édition du carnet d'adresses public est impossible. Mon Carnet Adresses Mon Carnet Adresses est un carnet d'adresses géré par le serveur et accessible uniquement par l'utilisateur. Mon Carnet Adresses propose les fonctions suivantes. - Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - Du fait que la fonction Mon adresse est retournée par le serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, elle est disponible sur n'importe quelle imprimante multifonction pour peu qu'elle dispose de la fonction Mon adresse. - Seul l'utilisateur spécifié peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. 10 Présentation 10-4 bizhub 652/552 10.1 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Address Book à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de Mon Carnet Adresses pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Address Book n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon adresse Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à Mon Carnet Adresses. - Seul l'utilisateur qui dispose de Mon Carnet Adresses peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer Mon Carnet Adresses. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet Adresses. - Mon Carnet Adresses peut contenir 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée et 10 groupes maximum (100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe maximum). - Si le nombre de destinations enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses correspond à la valeur maximale autorisée, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer une nouvelle destination. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - La recherche de destinations par index est impossible dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - L'opération Boîte est disponible uniquement sur les imprimantes multifonction sur lesquelles des destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction laquelle Mon Carnet Adresses est utilisés, l'émission spécifiée dans le carnet d'adresses peut ne pas être possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Carnet Adresses peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet Adr. est disponible Mon Carnet Adresses est disponible Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet Adr.) (3) Obtention de Mon C. Adr. (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification Mon Carnet Adr. n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination Mon Carnet Adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Vous pouvez enregistrer les adresses au moyen de l'une des méthodes suivantes. - Par le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction - Par PageScope Web Connection depuis un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans Mon Carnet Adresses. Cette section décrit la modalité d'enregistrement des adresses sur le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. 10.2.1 Mon Carnet Adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer les numéros de fax et les adresses E-mail f ainsi que les boîtes enregistrées fréquemment utilisés en numérotation abrégée. Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses jusqu'à 100 destinataires en numérotation abrégée. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. % Pour ajouter des destinations en numérotation abrégée au carnet d'adresses partagé, appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 10 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10-6 bizhub 652/552 10.2 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier une destination enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches]. 7 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à enregistrer, puis configure les réglages des éléments requis. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les entrées du carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10.2.2 Groupe Vous pouvez regrouper et enregistrer plusieurs destinations en numérotation abrégée du carnet d'adresses en tant que groupe. Mon Carnet Adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 groupes (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des groupes apparaît. bizhub 652/552 10-7 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches.]. % Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les groupes publics. 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner un groupe privé comme destination d'enregistrement, puis configurez les réglages des éléments requis. % Sélectionnez [Régl. Groupe Destina]. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses sont affichées. Sélectionnez une destination en numérotation abrégée à inclure dans un groupe. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le contenu d'enregistrement du groupe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10-8 bizhub 652/552 10.3 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses Les destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet Adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. Référence - Les groupes ne peuvent pas être copiés de Mon Carnet Adresses d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans Mon Carnet Adresses Les adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées dans Mon Carnet Adresses. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à copier. La liste des carnets d'adresses enregistrés du type d'adresse sélectionné apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. bizhub 652/552 10-9 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du Mon Carnet Adresses dans le carnet d'adresses public Les destinations enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses peuvent être copiées dans le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document 10-10 bizhub 652/552 10.4 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document Utilisez Mon Carnet Adresses pour spécifier une destination lorsque vous envoyez un document avec les fonctions Fax/Numérisation ou lorsque vous envoyez un document dans une boîte. 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon adresse, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses apparaissent par type d'adresse. Sélectionnez la destination souhaitée. Pour sélectionner une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations Si vous ne trouvez pas une adresse, vous pouvez lancer une recherche. Dans l'écran de spécification d'adresse, appuyez sur [Recher simple]. Pour rechercher des destinations d'après le type d'adresse enregistrée, appuyez sur [Type d'adresse]. Pour effectuer une recherche de destinations sur le nom et une partie du contenu d'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Recherche détaillée]. 11 Index bizhub 652/552 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 5-4 Accès aux boîtes 5-7 Acquérir Mon Panneau 9-4 Acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses 10-4 Affichage 4-20 B Barre d'outils 4-11 Boîte utilisateur 5-7, 6-9 C Cache 5-3 Caractéristiques 4-3, 6-21 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web 4-3 Carnet d'adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Code PIN 6-20 Composition de l'écran d'Image Panel 6-5 Composition de l'écran de PageScope Web Connection 5-5 Composition de l'écran Navigateur Web 4-8 Connexion 5-6 D Déconnexion 5-6 E Enregistrement 4-21 Envoi 4-22 F Flash Player 4-4 Fonction Mon Panneau 9-1 G Groupe 10-6 H Haut-parleur 4-10 I Image Panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-24 Impression 4-18, 5-9, 6-16 Infos Navigateur Web 4-17 Interdiction du navigateur Web 4-5 M Magasin Envoi 6-18 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Comm 9-6 Mémoire externe 6-17 Mode d'affichage du Navigateur Web 4-10 Mon adresse 2-4, 10-3 Mon Carnet Adresses 10-3, 10-10 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3, 9-6 N Navigateur Web 2-4, 4-3, 4-4 Numérisation 6-8 O OCR 8-4 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 Paramètres Navigateur Web 4-15 PDF adressable 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Personnalisation 3-5, 6-24, 9-7 Photo 6-21 R Rendu intelligent 4-10 Rendu Parfait 4-10 Restrictions dans Mon adresse 10-4 Restrictions sur Mon Panneau 9-5 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-7 S Saisie de texte dans Navigateur Web 4-9 Suppression 5-11 T Téléphone cellulaire/PDA 6-11, 6-20 Touche d'application 3-3, 3-5 Traitement PDF 2-4, 7-3 U Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 Utiliser le Navigateur Web 4-9 11-4 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches A Accès au contenu du navigateur Web 4-7 Aperçu 6-12 C Cache 4-17 Carnet Adresses (Privé) 10-5 Carnet d'Adresses par Défaut 9-12 Carnet d'adresses par défaut 9-13 Combiner Documents 6-14 Cookie 4-17 Copier vers Carnet partagé 10-9 Copier vers Carnet privé 10-8 Cryptage 7-5 D Document/Page 6-13, 6-14, 6-15 F Favoris (Voir) 4-12 G Gestion des fenêtres 4-16 Groupe 10-6 H Histor. 4-13 I ID numérique 7-6 Impression 4-14 Impression directe 7-9 Informations d'authentification 4-17 J Journal Accès 4-17 L Lecture 6-8 Liste des destinations 6-17 Liste Source Document 6-9 M Menu 4-15 Menu Application 3-4 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-17 Modif. document 6-13 Mot de passe 7-5 O Onglet par Défaut 9-10, 9-12, 9-14 Opération Page 4-15 P Param. Sélection Couleur 9-15 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-12 Permission Fonction 4-6 Photo/Icône 6-22 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 Proxy 4-17 R Retour à Dest. Numér. 6-15 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 9-14 Réglage Ecran par défaut 9-17 Réglage facile 9-11 Réglage Langue 9-9 Réglage Navigateur Web 4-5 Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 Réglage Touche Application 3-5 Réglage Unité de mesure 9-9 Réglages 4-17 Réglages Copieur 9-10 Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut 9-11 Réglages Document 6-15 Réglages Impres. 6-16 Réglages Menu Principal 9-16 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-7 S Saisir l'adresse 4-13 Sécurité 4-17 Signet (Ajout) 4-12 T Téléphone cellulaire 6-11 Touche d'application 1 3-4 Touche d'application 2 3-4 Touche de raccourci 9-10, 9-13, 9-14 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Type d'adresse par défaut 9-13 V Voir Guide de l’utilisateur x Table des matières bizhub 162/210 x-3 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Notre objectif : vous satisfaire ........................................................ 1-3 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-3 1.3 Notices de réglementation .............................................................. 1-4 Marquage Ce (Déclaration de conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union Européenne (UE) ........................................................... 1-4 Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B ..................................................... 1-4 Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays non soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B ............................................... 1-4 Sécurité laser ................................................................................. 1-5 Rayonnement laser interne ............................................................ 1-5 CDRH regulation ............................................................................ 1-6 Pour les utilisateurs européens ...................................................... 1-6 Pour les utilisateurs danois ............................................................ 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois ........................................... 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens ..................................................... 1-8 Etiquette Sécurité Laser ................................................................. 1-9 Émission d'ozone ........................................................................... 1-9 Niveau sonore .............................................................................. 1-10 1.4 Conseils de sécurité ....................................................................... 1-11 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution ............................... 1-11 Signification des symboles .......................................................... 1-12 Démontage et modification .......................................................... 1-12 Cordon d'alimentation ................................................................. 1-13 Alimentation ................................................................................. 1-14 Fiche d'alimentation ..................................................................... 1-15 Mise à la terre ............................................................................... 1-16 Installation .................................................................................... 1-17 Ventilation .................................................................................... 1-18 En cas de problèmes ................................................................... 1-19 Consommables ............................................................................ 1-20 En cas de déplacement de l'appareil ........................................... 1-21 En cas d’absence prolongée ....................................................... 1-21 1.5 Energy Star® ................................................................................... 1-22 Partenaire Energy Star® .............................................................. 1-22 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® ..................................... 1-22 x-4 bizhub 162/210 1.6 Explication des conventions ...........................................................1-23 Conseils de sécurité .....................................................................1-23 Séquence des actions ..................................................................1-23 Conseils ........................................................................................1-24 Marquages de texte spéciaux ......................................................1-24 1.7 Explication des concepts de base et symboles ...........................1-25 Alimentation papier .......................................................................1-25 Largeur et longueur .......................................................................1-26 Sens longitudinal et sens transversal ...........................................1-26 2 Précautions 2.1 Précautions d'installation .................................................................2-3 Site d'installation .............................................................................2-3 Alimentation ....................................................................................2-3 Espace requis .................................................................................2-3 2.2 Précautions d'utilisation ...................................................................2-5 Environnement ................................................................................2-5 Utilisation correcte ..........................................................................2-5 Transport de l'appareil ....................................................................2-6 Conservation des consommables ..................................................2-6 Stockage de copies ........................................................................2-6 2.3 Réglementation en matière de copie ..............................................2-8 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3.1 Les composants et leurs fonctions .................................................3-3 3.2 Nomenclature et fonctions ...............................................................3-5 Unité principale ...............................................................................3-5 Intérieur de l'unité principale ...........................................................3-7 Introducteur de documents (en option) ..........................................3-8 Multi-introducteur manuel (en option) .............................................3-9 Unité d'alimentation de papier (en option) ....................................3-10 Séparateur travaux (en option) .....................................................3-11 3.3 Panneau de contrôle .......................................................................3-12 Noms des touches du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions ....3-12 Indications affichées .....................................................................3-15 Ajustement angulaire de l'écran ...................................................3-16 3.4 Alimentation électrique ...................................................................3-17 Allumer la machine ........................................................................3-17 Eteindre la machine ......................................................................3-17 3.5 Sélections par défaut ......................................................................3-18 bizhub 162/210 x-5 3.6 Fonctions pratiques ........................................................................ 3-19 Initialisation automatique ............................................................. 3-19 Mode Economie d'énergie ........................................................... 3-19 Auto coupure ............................................................................... 3-20 Tâches copie en file d'attente ...................................................... 3-20 3.7 Papier ............................................................................................... 3-21 Types de papier ........................................................................... 3-21 Formats papier ............................................................................. 3-22 Capacité de papier ....................................................................... 3-23 Papier à ne pas utiliser ................................................................. 3-24 3.8 Zone d'impression .......................................................................... 3-25 3.9 Stockage du papier ........................................................................ 3-26 3.10 Copier avec introduction manuelle du papier .............................. 3-27 Papiers acceptés en introduction manuelle ................................. 3-27 Réglage du multi-introducteur manuel ........................................ 3-28 Chargement de papier ordinaire dans le plateau d'introduction . 3-29 Chargement de cartes postales dans le plateau d'introduction .. 3-30 Chargement d'enveloppes dans le plateau d'introduction .......... 3-31 Chargement de transparents dans le plateau d'introduction ...... 3-33 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes dans le plateau d'introduction ............................................................................... 3-34 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via l'introducteur manuel ... 3-35 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel .......................................................................................... 3-38 3.11 Sélection de la source papier ........................................................ 3-41 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Papier Auto ........................ 3-41 Réaliser une copie avec sélection manuelle du format papier .... 3-42 Chargement du papier dédié dans le 1er magasin ...................... 3-42 Sélection automatique de la source papier ................................. 3-43 Ordre de basculement automatique des magasins papier .......... 3-44 3.12 Documents originaux ..................................................................... 3-45 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents .................................. 3-45 Types de document ..................................................................... 3-45 Document de formats uniformes ................................................. 3-46 Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605) .................. 3-46 Précautions relatives aux originaux ............................................. 3-47 3.13 Spécifier une sélection Zoom ........................................................ 3-48 Paramètres Zoom ........................................................................ 3-48 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre zoom AUTO ................... 3-49 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom fixe ...................... 3-50 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom spécifique ........... 3-51 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Zoom X/Y .......................... 3-52 x-6 bizhub 162/210 3.14 Spécifier la densité de copie ..........................................................3-54 Réaliser des copies après spécification de la densité copie ........3-55 3.15 Interrompre des tâches de copie ...................................................3-56 Interrompre une tâche de copie ..................................................3-56 4 Opérations de copie 4.1 Copies de base ..................................................................................4-3 Opérations élémentaires de copie ..................................................4-3 4.2 Chargement du papier ......................................................................4-5 Chargement du papier dans le 1er magasin papier ........................4-6 Chargement du papier dans le 2ème magasin papier ....................4-8 4.3 Chargement du document ..............................................................4-10 Chargement des documents dans l'introducteur de documents .4-10 Positionnement d'une feuille de document sur la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................4-12 Positionnement des documents transparents sur la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................4-13 Positionnement des livres sur la vitre d'exposition .......................4-14 Chargement d'originaux de formats mixtes dans l'introducteur de documents ...............................................................................4-15 4.4 Arrêter une tâche de copie .............................................................4-18 Arrêter/Reprendre/Annuler une tâche de copie ............................4-18 4.5 Vérification des compteurs de la machine ....................................4-19 Pour vérifier les compteurs ...........................................................4-19 4.6 Economiser l'électricité ..................................................................4-21 Spécifier le mode d'économie d'énergie et le mode auto coupure .................................................................................4-21 5 Fonctions utiles 5.1 Spécifier une sélection Zoom ...........................................................5-3 Effectuer un zoom d'un document de format standard et le convertir à un format standard différent .....................................5-3 5.2 Utilisation de la fonction Auto/Photo ..............................................5-5 Réaliser des copies précises d'illustrations ou de photos .............5-5 5.3 Copies sur divers types de supports ...............................................5-7 Pour copier sur des transparents de rétroprojection ......................5-7 Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes .....................................5-9 Copier sur des enveloppes (de format non standard) ..................5-12 Copier sur des cartes postales .....................................................5-15 bizhub 162/210 x-7 6 Copies complexes 6.1 Copies recto ...................................................................................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres pour les copies 2en1 (ou 4en1) .............. 6-3 Sur la vitre d'exposition ................................................................. 6-3 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents .................................... 6-5 Spécifier les réglages pour des copies Séparation livre ................ 6-6 6.2 Copies recto-verso ........................................................................... 6-8 Types de copies recto-verso ......................................................... 6-8 Précautions relatives à la copie recto/verso .................................. 6-9 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso sur la vitre d'exposition ..... 6-10 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso avec l'introducteur de documents ................................................................................... 6-11 6.3 Finition des copies .......................................................................... 6-12 Fonctions de finition ..................................................................... 6-12 Considérations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de Tri et de Groupe ................................................................................ 6-13 Tri décalé ...................................................................................... 6-14 Tri croisé ...................................................................................... 6-14 Groupe décalé .............................................................................. 6-14 Groupe croisé .............................................................................. 6-14 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (tri à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition) ................................................................................. 6-15 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (à l'aide de l'introducteur de documents) .................................................................................. 6-16 6.4 Effacer des portions de copies ..................................................... 6-17 Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge effacée ....... 6-17 Réaliser des copies avec un réglage d'effacement ..................... 6-18 6.5 Copie avec inversion Nég./Pos. .................................................... 6-19 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction inversion positif/négatif ..... 6-19 6.6 Réaliser des copies pour archivage .............................................. 6-20 Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge de reliure .... 6-20 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Marge ................................ 6-21 6.7 Travaux copie programmés ........................................................... 6-22 Mémoriser un programme de copie ............................................. 6-22 Rappeler un programme copie .................................................... 6-24 6.8 Codes d'accès ................................................................................ 6-25 Entrer un code d'accès ................................................................ 6-25 x-8 bizhub 162/210 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Paramètres machine .........................................................................7-4 Sélection du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE ................................7-5 Spécifier REIN. T de BORD ............................................................7-6 Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG. ...................................................7-7 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE ............................................................7-8 Spécifier la DENSITE (ADF) .............................................................7-9 Spécifier la DENSITE (LIVRE) ........................................................7-10 Spécifier la DENSITE IMPRESSION .............................................7-10 Spécifier le CONTRASTE LCD ......................................................7-11 Spécifier la LANGUE .....................................................................7-11 7.2 Réglages source papier ..................................................................7-12 Sélection du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. ...................................7-13 Spécifier INCH/METRIC ................................................................7-14 Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1 ......................................................7-15 Spécifier le TYPE DE PAPIER .......................................................7-17 7.3 Paramètres de gestion utilisateur ..................................................7-18 Sélection du menu GESTION UTILISATEUR ................................7-18 Procéder à une déshumidification du tambour PC .......................7-19 Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER .................................................7-19 7.4 Paramètres d'administration ..........................................................7-20 Sélection du menu GESTION ADMIN. ..........................................7-21 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE ..........................................................7-22 Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur ........................................7-23 Enregistrement des codes d'accès utilisateur ..............................7-24 Modifier/Supprimer des codes d'accès utilisateur .......................7-25 Afficher/Effacer le comptage total pour un compte donné ..........7-27 Effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes ......................7-29 7.5 Paramètres copie ............................................................................7-30 Sélection du menu PARAM COPIE 1 ............................................7-32 Spécifier la PRIORITE PAPIER ......................................................7-33 Spécifier la PRIORITE DENSITE ...................................................7-34 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (A) .....................................................7-35 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (M) ....................................................7-35 Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE .............................................7-36 Spécifier le REGLAGE MARGE .....................................................7-36 Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT ..........................................7-37 Spécifier PETIT ORIGINAL ............................................................7-38 Sélection du menu PARAM. COPIE 2 ...........................................7-39 Spécifier les ORIGINAUX MIXTES ................................................7-40 Spécifier la PRIORITE COPIE .......................................................7-40 Spécifier SORTIE PRIORITAIRE ...................................................7-41 Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 .....................................................7-41 bizhub 162/210 x-9 Spécifier le MODE CROISE .......................................................... 7-42 Spécifier COPIE RECTO/VERSO ................................................. 7-42 8 Messages d'erreur 8.1 Le message TONER VIDE s'affiche ................................................. 8-3 Message TONER VIDE ................................................................... 8-3 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner ....................................... 8-4 8.2 Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche ....................................... 8-6 Message SERRAGE PAPIER ......................................................... 8-6 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso ..................... 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité principale ou 1er magasin .................................................................................... 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 2ème/3ème/4ème/5ème magasin ........................................................................................ 8-10 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel ... 8-11 8.3 Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche ................................. 8-13 Message SERRAGE ORIGINAL ................................................... 8-13 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur automatique de documents (DF-502) .................................................................... 8-13 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents (DF-605) .......................................... 8-16 8.4 Quelle est la signification de chaque message ? ........................ 8-18 8.5 Si l'on obtient des copies de mauvaise qualité ........................... 8-21 8.6 En cas de copie insatisfaisante ..................................................... 8-23 9 Divers 9.1 Caractéristiques ............................................................................... 9-3 Unité principale bizhub 162/210 .................................................... 9-3 Unité automatique recto-verso AD-504 ......................................... 9-4 Introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 ....... 9-5 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 ......................... 9-6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-502 ............................................... 9-6 Magasin de décalage SF-501 ........................................................ 9-7 Séparateur travaux JS-503 ............................................................ 9-7 Multi-introducteur manuel MB-501 ................................................ 9-7 9.2 Entretien de l'appareil ...................................................................... 9-8 Nettoyage ....................................................................................... 9-8 Revêtement .................................................................................... 9-8 Vitre d'exposition ........................................................................... 9-8 Couvre-document .......................................................................... 9-8 Panneau de contrôle ...................................................................... 9-9 x-10 bizhub 162/210 9.3 Tableau d'association des fonctions .............................................9-10 Matrice de combinaison de fonctions pour le bizhub 162 ............9-10 Matrice de combinaison de fonctions pour le bizhub 210 ............9-11 Codes de combinaison de fonctions ............................................9-11 9.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom ............................................9-12 Formats papier ..............................................................................9-12 Taux de zoom ...............................................................................9-13 10 Index 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-3 1 Introduction 1.1 Notre objectif : vous satisfaire Merci d'avoir choisi le 162/210. Ce manuel utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement, les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du bizhub 162/ 210. Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, lisez entièrement ce manuel utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu le manuel utilisateur, placez-le dans le porte-documents pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment. Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur votre machine. 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques commerciales de Netscape Communications Corporation. PageScope Box Operator : Ce logiciel est partiellement basé sur le travail du Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 162/210 1.3 Notices de réglementation Marquage Ce (Déclaration de conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union Européenne (UE) Ce produit est conforme aux directives UE suivantes : Directives 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC. La présente déclaration est valable pour la zone de l'Union Européenne. 7 ATTENTION Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B 7 ATTENTION Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation d'un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences avec les communications radio ; ceci est interdit aux termes des règlements CISPR 22 et des réglementations nationales. Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays non soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B 7 AVERTISSEMENT Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil appartient à la Classe A. Utilisé dans un environnement domestique, ce produit peut provoquer des interférences radio auxquelles il appartient à l'utilisateur de remédier. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation d'un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences avec les communications radio ; ceci est interdit aux termes des règlements CISPR 22 et des réglementations nationales. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-5 Sécurité laser Ceci est un appareil numérique qui fonctionne au moyen d'un laser. Ce laser ne présente aucun risque à condition d'être utilisé conformément aux instructions de ce manuel. Le rayonnement émis par le laser étant entièrement confiné dans une enceinte de protection, aucune fuite du faisceau laser ne peut se produire à l'extérieur de la machine à quelque phase de l'utilisation que ce soit. Cet appareil est homologué comme produit laser de Classe 1 : En d'autres termes, la machine n'émet aucun rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3b qui émet un rayon laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Toute manipulation incorrecte risque d'entraîner une exposition dangereuse aux radiations. % La tête d'impression n'est pas un élément réparable sur site. % Par conséquent, l'unité de tête d'impression ne doit être ouverte en aucune circonstance. Spécifications Puissance de rayonnement maximum moyen 6,32 μW au niveau de l'ouverture laser du bloc tête d'impression Longueur d'onde 770-795 nm Tête d'impression Ouverture laser de la tête d'impression 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 162/210 CDRH regulation This machine is certified as a class 1 laser product under radiation performance standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 1-9 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. 7 CAUTION Incorrect handling may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs européens 7 ATTENTION Toute manipulation incorrecte risque d'entraîner une exposition dangereuses aux radiations. % L'application de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures autres que ceux spécifiés dans ce manuel peut entraîner une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement. Cet appareil comporte un laser à semi-conducteurs. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 5 mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-795 nm. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs danois 7 ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. % Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 5 mW og bølgelængden er 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT 7 VAROITUS Tämä on puolijohdelaser. % Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5 mW ja aallonpituus on 770-795 nm. 7 VARNING Det här är en halvledarlaser. % Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 5 mW och våglängden är 770-795 nm. 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 162/210 7 VAROITUS Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. % Älä katso säteeseen. 7 VARNING Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. % Betrakta ej strålen. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens 7 ADVARSEL! Dette en halvleder laser. % Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW og bølgelengde er 770-795 nm. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-9 Etiquette Sécurité Laser Une Etiquette Sécurité Laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d'ozone 7 ATTENTION Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l’appareil quand celuici est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour garantir un environnement de travail réunissant confort, santé et sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. 7 ATTENTION Une quantité négligeable d’ozone est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 162/210 Niveau sonore Pour les utilisateurs européens Décret relatif aux bruits des machines 3. GPSGV : Le niveau de pression acousitique max. est de 70 dB(A) ou moins conformément à la norme EN ISO 7779. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-11 1.4 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire le chapitre suivant avant de raccorder l'appareil au secteur. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de main et à proximité de la machine. Veillez à respecter impérativement toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce manuel. KM_Ver.01E_C 2 Remarque Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans ce manuel pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 162/210 Signification des symboles Démontage et modification 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. Symbole Signification Exemple Signification Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N’essayez pas d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne modifiez pas ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-13 Cordon d'alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni avec le produit, n'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation et la fiche préconisés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne grattez ni érodez jamais le cordon d'alimentation, ne placez pas d'objet lourd dessus, éviter de le chauffer, de le tordre, de le plier, de tirer dessus, de l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (âme unifilaire exposée, fil cassé, etc.) pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une panne. En présence de l'une de ces conditions, ETEIGNEZ immédiatement l'appareil, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale et appelez votre technicien SAV. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 162/210 Alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N'utilisez que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Un incendie ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Branchez la fiche d'alimentation directement dans la prise murale présentant la même configuration que la fiche. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur entraîne le branchement de l'appareil à une source d'alimentation inappropriée (tension, capacité électrique, mise à la terre) et peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. En l'absence d'une prise murale appropriée, le client doit en demander l'installation par un électricien qualifié. • En principe, n’utilisez pas d'adapteur de sortie multiple ni de rallonge. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. • Veuillez consulter votre technicien SAV agréé avant de brancher un autre équipement sur la même prise murale. La surcharge pourrait déclencher un feu. ATTENTION Symbole • La prise doit se situer à proximité de l'équipement et être aisément accessible. Sinon, vous ne pourrez pas débrancher la fiche d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-15 Fiche d'alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne branchez ou débranchez jamais le cordon avec les mains humides sous peine d’électrocution. • Insérez la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution. ATTENTION Symbole • Ne tirez pas directement sur le cordon d'alimentation pour débrancher l'appareil. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution. • Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyez la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 162/210 Mise à la terre 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Branchez le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-17 Installation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne posez pas de vase ou autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur de l'appareil pourraient déclencher un incendie, causer une électrocution ou une panne. Si une pièce métallique, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger similaire devait tomber dans le produit, COUPEZ immédiatement le courant, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise et appelez votre technicien SAV. ATTENTION Symbole • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • N’installez pas ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne placez pas ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Ne laissez pas le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • N’utilisez pas d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. 1 Introduction 1-18 bizhub 162/210 Ventilation 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. ATTENTION Symbole • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérez la pièce à intervalles réguliers. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-19 En cas de problèmes 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Cessez toute utilisation de l’appareil s’il devient exceptionnellement chaud, dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu ou être source d'électrocution. • Cessez toute utilisation de l’appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Aprèsvente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION Symbole • L'intérieur de ce produit est constitué de zones soumises à de fortes températures susceptibles de causer des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de l'unité à la recherche de défauts comme un serrage papier, ne touchez pas les emplacements (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) identifiés par une étiquette d'avertissement “Caution HOT”. 1 Introduction 1-20 bizhub 162/210 Consommables 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne jetez pas la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION Symbole • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne stockez pas les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-21 En cas de déplacement de l'appareil 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. En cas d’absence prolongée Quand le kit Fax FK-505 en option n'est pas installé : 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. ATTENTION Symbole • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours au niveau des zones spécifiées dans le Manuel de l'Utilisateur ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. ATTENTION Symbole • Débranchez l'appareil quand vous ne voulez pas l'utiliser pendant de longues périodes. 1 Introduction 1-22 bizhub 162/210 1.5 Energy Star® Partenaire Energy Star® En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en “mode d'économie d'énergie” à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-23 1.6 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Conseils de sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT Les instructions ainsi mises en valeur doivent être respectées sous peine de blessures graves ou de dommages matériels. % Observez tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir une utilisation sûre du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Les instructions ainsi mises en valeur doivent être respectées sous peine de blessures légères ou de dommages matériels. % Observez toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir une utilisation sûre du copieur. Séquence des actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. 1 Introduction 1-24 bizhub 162/210 Conseils 2 Remarque Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des informations utiles et des conseils pour utiliser votre copieur en toute sécurité. 2 Rappel Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des informations à ne pas oublier. ! Détails Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Marquages de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes de l'écran d'affichage sont rédigés comme illustré ci-dessus. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-25 1.7 Explication des concepts de base et symboles On trouvera ci-dessous la signification des mots et symboles utilisés dans le présent manuel. Alimentation papier En impression, l'alimentation papier se fait du côté droit de l'appareil et le papier sort dans le plateau de sortie du haut ou dans l'option de sortie à gauche, face imprimée vers le bas. Le sens d'introduction du papier est illustré par les flèches dans le schéma ci-dessous. 1 Introduction 1-26 bizhub 162/210 Largeur et longueur A chaque fois que des formats de papier sont mentionnés dans ce manuel, la première valeur représente toujours la largeur du papier et la seconde la longueur. A : Largeur B : Longueur Sens longitudinal et sens transversal Si la largeur (A) du papier est plus longue que la longueur (B), le papier est orienté Paysage, indiqué par w. Si la largeur (A) du papier est plus courte que la longueur (B), le papier est orienté Portrait, indiqué par v. 2 Précautions Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-3 2 Précautions Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans les meilleures conditions possibles. 2.1 Précautions d'installation Site d'installation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables. - à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides. - à l'abri du soleil. - à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées. - dans un lieu bien ventilé. - dans un lieu ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - à l’abri de la poussière. - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations. - sur un support stable et horizontal. - dans un lieu où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique. - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents émanant de l'appareil. - dans un lieu éloigné de tout appareil de chauffage. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Variations de tension : 220-240 V CA ±10% - Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ±3 Hz Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation en tension ou en fréquence. Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l’intervention du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable de respecter les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous. 2 Précautions 2-4 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque En raison de la présence d'une bouche d'aération sur le côté gauche de la machine, veillez à ménager un espace de *100 mm ou plus sur ce côté. Ménagez aussi un dégagement de **400 mm ou plus sur le côté droit de la machine de manière à permettre l'ouverture de la porte latérale. Unité : mm 1069 1100 1099 599 **400 1475 375 356 *100 L'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 est installé. Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-5 2.2 Précautions d'utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10 °C à 30 °C (50 °F à 86 °F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront pas 10 °C (18 °F) en une heure. - Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions ci-dessous : - Ne posez jamais d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservez la des coups. - N'ouvrez jamais les portes de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime, un serrage papier pourrait en résulter. - N’approchez pas d'objets magnétiques, et n’utilisez jamais d'aérosols ou de liquides inflammables près de l'appareil. - Assurez-vous que la fiche secteur est en permanence branchée correctementà la prise de courant. - Assurez-vous que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible. - Débranchez toujours l'appareil de la prise de courant lors de longues périodes d'inutilisation. - Maintenez toujours une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Si la bouche d'aération sur le côté gauche de la machine est obstruée, la chaleur s'accumule à l'intérieur de la machine, ce qui peut provoquer une panne ou un incendie. % Veillez à ménager un espace de 100 mm ou plus sur le côté gauche de la machine pour la bouche d'aération. 2 Précautions 2-6 bizhub 162/210 7 AVERTISSEMENT Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que celles indiquées dans ce manuel. Faites particulièrement attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité. % En cas de brûlure, rincez la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. Transport de l'appareil Si vous devez transporter l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez au préalable votre S.A.V. Conservation des consommables Lors de la manipulation des consommables (toner, papier, etc.), respectez les consignes suivantes : - Stockez les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : – A l'abri des rayons directs du soleil – Eloigné de tout appareil de chauffage – A l'abri de l'humidité excessive – A l'abri d'un environnement poussiéreux - Conservez dans un sac en plastique le papier déballé mais non chargé dans le magasin et placez-le dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. N’utilisez jamais d'autres types de toner. - Gardez tous les consommables hors de portée des enfants. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. % Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. % En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, rincez les immédiatement à l'eau puis consulter un médecin. Stockage de copies Si vous devez conserver les copies pendant une longue période, stockez les à l’abri de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-7 Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. 2 Précautions 2-8 bizhub 162/210 2.3 Réglementation en matière de copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur Documents officiels - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété Divers - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-3 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3.1 Les composants et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Couvre-original OC-504 Permet de maintenir en place le document chargé. Egalement désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “couvre-original”. De série sur le bizhub 162 En option sur le bizhub 210 2 Introducteur automatique de document DF-502 (en option) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numériser. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “introducteur de documents”. 3 Introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 (en option seulement pour le bizhub 210) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numérisation du recto, puis retourne automatiquement la feuille du document pour la numérisation du verso. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents”. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-4 bizhub 162/210 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 4 Unité automatique recto-verso AD-504 (en option pour le bizhub 210 seulement) Retourne automatiquement les pages afin qu'elles puissent être imprimées sur les deux faces. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto-verso”. 5 Multi-introducteur manuel MB-501 (en option) Peut recevoir 100 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “multi-introducteur manuel”. 6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-502 (en option) Equipé d'un bac d'alimentation papier qui contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier. Vous pouvez en installer jusqu'à quatre sur l'unité principale. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “2ème magasin”, “3ème magasin”, “4ème magasin” et “5ème magasin”. 7 Meuble DK-703 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 8 Meuble DK-702 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 9 Meuble DK-701 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 10 Séparateur travaux JS-503 (en option) Permet de séparer les pages imprimées. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “séparateur travaux”. 11 Magasin de décalage SF-501* (en option) Permet de décaler les copies et les pages imprimées qui sont éjectées. Si le séparateur travaux est installé, l'unité de décalage ne pourra pas être adjointe. 12 Contrôleur image IC-205* (en option) Contrôleur d'imprimante interne permettant à la machine d'être utilisée comme imprimante d'ordinateur (PCL) Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel utilisateur du contrôleur image IC-205. 13 Carte interface réseau NC-502* (en option) Carte réseau interne autorisant l'impression réseau à partir de Windows ou d'un environnement réseau NetWare Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilisateur de la carte interface réseau NC-502. 14 Unité scanner SU-502* (en option) Unité de scanner interne permettant à la machine d'être utilisée comme un scanner configuré au sein d'un réseau informatique Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel utilisateur de l'unité scanner SU-502. 2 Remarque L'unité scanner ne fonctionne pas si le kit Fax FK-505 en option n'est pas installé. 15 Kit Fax FK-505* (en option) Permet à cette machine de fonctionner comme un télécopieur 16 Unité d'extension de mémoire EM-101* (en option) Extension 32 Mo de mémoire augmentant le nombre de pages qui peuvent être traitées par la machine. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “extension de mémoire”. 17 Unité d'extension de mémoire EM-102* (en option) Extension 64 Mo de mémoire augmentant le nombre de pages qui peuvent être traitées par la machine. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “extension de mémoire”. No. Nom de la pièce Description Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-5 3.2 Nomenclature et fonctions Unité principale 1 2 3 6 4 5 13 14 15 12 9 10 11 8 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau de sortie des copies Réceptionne les copies et les documents imprimés partie imprimée vers le bas. 2 Porte frontale Ouvez-la pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. (p. 8-4) 3 1er magasin • Contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier. • Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier. • Peut aussi recevoir du papier dédié. (p. 7-13) 4 Introducteur manuel • Sert à l'alimentation manuelle du papier. • L'introduction du papier se fait une feuille à la fois. • Peut aussi recevoir du papier dédié. (p. 3-27) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-6 bizhub 162/210 5 Levier de déverrouillage Sert à ouvrir et fermer la porte latérale. 6 Porte latérale Ouvrez-la pour dégager un serrage papier. 7 Compteur mécanique (en option) Indique le nombre de copie et de pages d'impression imprimées. 8 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre l'appareil. (p. 3-17) 9 Connecteur d'interface parallèle Permet de raccorder le câble parallèle d'un ordinateur. 10 Connecteur RJ45 pour mise en réseau Permet de raccorder le câble réseau lorsque cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet, l'impression réseau et la numérisation réseau. 11 Connecteur USB imprimante Permet de raccorder le câble USB d'un ordinateur. 12 Réglette document Utilisée pour aligner le document. (p. 4-12) 13 Couvre-original (en option) Appuie sur le document placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 14 Vitre d'exposition En chargement manuel du document, placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition de manière à ce qu'il puisse être numérisé. Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d’exposition. (p. 4-12) 15 Panneau de contrôle Permet de démarrer la copie ou de spécifier diverses sélections. (p. 3-12) No. Nom de la pièce Description Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-7 Intérieur de l'unité principale 2 1 3 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Unité image Crée l'image pour la copie. Le remplacement de l'unité image doit être réalisé par un technicien agréé. 2 Support de la bouteille de toner Ouvrez-le pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. 3 Levier d'appui Permet de dégager les serrages papier dans l'unité de fixation. (p. 8-6) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-8 bizhub 162/210 Introducteur de documents (en option) 1 2 3 4 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau de sortie documents Récupère les documents numérisés. 2 Guide latéraux des originaux S'ajuste à la largeur du document. (p. 4-10) 3 Capot de l'introducteur de documents Ouvrez-le pour dégager un serrage papier. (p. 8-13) 4 Plateau d'introduction documents Permet de maintenir les documents à numériser ; chargez les documents recto vers le haut. (p. 4-10) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-9 Multi-introducteur manuel (en option) 1 2 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau d'introduction manuelle Accepte un chargement de 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles de papier dédié, ou 10 enveloppes. (p. 3-29) 2 Extension introducteur manuel Tirez lorsque vous chargez du papier de grand format. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-10 bizhub 162/210 Unité d'alimentation de papier (en option) 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 2ème magasin Contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire. Vous pouvez installer jusqu'à quatre unités d'alimentation papier. 2 3ème magasin 3 4ème magasin 4 5ème magasin 5 Porte latérale Ouvrez la pour dégager un serrage papier. (p. 8-10) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-11 Séparateur travaux (en option) Avec le séparateur travaux installé 1 2 3 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Voyant du plateau de copie S'allume quand le papier reste dans le plateau de sortie des copies et que le plateau de sortie supérieur est déplacé vers le haut. 2 Plateau de sortie des copies supérieur Recueille les pages imprimées commandées par l'ordinateur. 3 Plateau de sortie des copies inférieur Recueille les copies. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-12 bizhub 162/210 3.3 Panneau de contrôle Noms des touches du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions 4 5 6 7 18 14 13 12 10 8 15 1716 1 2 3 19 20 11 9 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 1 Voyant “Erreur” S'allume ou clignote en cas d'erreur. Voir “Messages d'erreur” à la page 8-3. 2 Touche/voyant [Imprimante] S'allume lorsque les données sont imprimées à partir de l'ordinateur et clignote quand les données sont en cours d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le Manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. 3 Touche [Etat] Permet de visualiser les compteurs. 4 Touche [Utilitaires] Permet de passer en mode Utilitaires et d'en afficher le premier écran. • PARAMETRES MACHINE, REGL. SOURCE PAPI., GESTION UTILISAT., GESTION ADMINIST., PARAM. COPIE 1 & 2 5 Afficheur Permet d'afficher les menus de réglage, les messages d'erreur, ainsi que les paramètres spécifiés comme le nombre de copies et le taux zoom. 6 Touche [Non / C] Efface les caractères saisis. Permet de revenir à l'écran précédent. 7 Touche [Oui] Confirme le réglage actuel. 8 Touche [Papier Auto/Taux Auto] Permet de sélectionner la fonction Papier Auto ou la fonction Taux Auto. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-13 9 Touche [Zoom] , et touches + • Servent à sélectionner un taux prédéfini d'agrandissement ou de réduction. • Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom compris entre × 0,25 et × 4,00 en cas de sélection manuelle du format papier. (Sélection papier manuelle) • Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00 en cas de sélection automatique du format papier. (Papier Auto) • Permettent aussi de spécifier la sélection supérieure ou la sélection inférieure dans les écrans de réglage et les menus. 10 Touche [Papier] Permet de sélectionner le format du papier à imprimer. 11 Touche [Auto/Photo] * et touches ) • Permet de spécifier la densité de numérisation pour les copies. • Permettent aussi de spécifier la sélection à gauche ou la sélection à droite dans les écrans de réglage. 12 Touche [Effacement] Permet de sélectionner la zone de document à effacer. 13 Touche [Marge] Appuyez pour choisir le mode Marge. 14 Touche [Finition] Permet de sélectionner une fonction Finition pour les copies. 15 Touche [Zoom X/Y] Permet de spécifier différentes échelles sur l'axe vertical et l'axe horizontal. 16 Touche [Neg. Pos.] Permet d'effectuer des copies en dont les zones foncées et les zones claires sont inversées par rapport au document. 17 Touche Copie Permet de choisir entre les fonctions copie 2en1 et 4en1. 18 Touche [Programme Copie] • Permet d'enregistrer des programmes copie. • Ces programmes copie peuvent ensuite être sélectionnés et rappelés. 19 Touche [Séparation Livre] Permet de sélectionner la fonction Séparation Livre. 20 Touche [Original] Permet de choisir la fonction Orig. Recto/Verso et la fonction Orig. Mixtes. No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-14 bizhub 162/210 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 31 30 29 28 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 21 Touche Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Numérisation. (Disponible seulement lorsque la carte interface réseau NC-502, le kit Fax FK-505 et l'unité scanner SU-502 sont installés.) 22 Touche Fax Inutilisée sur cette machine. 23 Touche Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Copie. 24 Touche Code S'utilise en Gestion Utilisateur. (p. 6-25) 25 Touche Economie d'énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Economie d'énergie. (p. 3-19) 26 Touche Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Interruption. Appuyez une nouvelle fois pour annuler le mode Interruption et revenir au mode précédent l'activation du mode Interruption. (p. 3-56) 27 Touche [123/ABC] Inutilisée sur cette machine. 28 Touche Initialisation • Annule toutes les fonctions de copie et en restaure les sélections par défaut. • Supprime toutes les tâches en file d'attente. 29 Touche Stop Arrête l'opération de copie multi-pages. 30 Touche Copie • Démarre l'opération de copie. • Si cette touche est activée pendant que la machine est en préchauffage, la tâche de copie sera placée en file d'attente. (p. 3-20) • Le voyant s'allume en rouge pour indiquer que la machine est prête pour l'opération de copie ou en orange pour indiquer qu'elle n'est pas encore prête. 31 Clavier numérique • Permet de spécifier le nombre de copies. • Permet aussi de saisir des valeurs de réglage. • Les touches [˜] et [#] sont inutilisées sur cette machine. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-15 Indications affichées 1 2 6 7 5 4 3 Ecran du mode Copie Ecran du mode Utilitaires No. Indication à l'écran Description 1 Densité copie (type de document) Indique le type de document pour le réglage de la densité copie. PHOTO, TEXTE, ou TEXTE/P 2 Densité copie (niveau de densité) Indique le niveau de densité pour le réglage de densité copie. 3 Source papier Indique le magasin papier sélectionné. Si on sélectionne papier dédié, le type de papier s'affiche. AUTO, ainsi que le magasin papier et le format papier, ou le type papier. 4 Nombre de copies Indique le nombre de copies qui a été spécifié. 5 Taux zoom Indique le taux zoom actuel. Affiche AUTO ou le réglage actuel du taux zoom. × [X/Y] indique que la fonction Zoom X/Y est sélectionnée. 6 Menu ou nom de fonction • Affiche le menu, la fonction ou les sélections en vigueur. • Affiche les messages lorsqu'une erreur se produit. 7 Messages Affiche les messages relatifs à l'utilisation. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-16 bizhub 162/210 Ajustement angulaire de l'écran L'afficheur peut être réglé selon trois angles d'inclinaison. Réglez l'afficheur à l'inclinaison qui convient le mieux à l'utilisation. % Appuyez sur un bord de l'écran pour en ajuster l'inclinaison. Position haute Position intermédiaire Position inférieure Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-17 3.4 Alimentation électrique Allumer la machine Placez l'interrupteur principal en position “n”. Le voyant de la touche [Copie] s'allume en orange et le message ATTENDRE SVP! s'affiche à l'écran. 2 Remarque Le bizhub 162 a fini de chauffer au bout de 30 secondes et le bizhub 210 a fini de chauffer au bout de 15 secondes (à température ambiante normale (23 °C)). Une tâche de copie peut être placée en file d'attente pendant que la machine est en cours de chauffe. Eteindre la machine 1 Vérifiez que toutes les tâches sont terminées. 2 Placez l'interrupteur principal en position “o”. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-18 bizhub 162/210 3.5 Sélections par défaut Les paramètres qui sont automatiquement sélectionnés à l'extinction de la machine ou lorsque la touche [Initialisation] est activée, s'appellent les “sélections par défaut”. Elles servent de référence à toutes les fonctions. Mode Copie - Nombre de copies : 1 - Densité copie : AUTO - Taux zoom : taille réelle (× 1,00) - Source papier : AUTO (avec l'introducteur de documents installé) - Fonction finition : Non-Tri Vous pouvez personnaliser les sélections par défaut à partir du mode Utilitaires. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Paramètres copie” à la page 7-30. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-19 3.6 Fonctions pratiques Initialisation automatique Même si l'on n'appuie pas sur la touche [Initialisation], la machine ramènera automatiquement toutes les fonctions et sélections à leurs valeurs par défaut 1 minute après la fin d'un cycle de copie ou après la dernière activation d'une touche quelconque. Le délai avant que l'appareil s'initialise automatiquement peut être réglé sur 30 secondes ou de 1 à 5 minutes. La fonction d'initialisation automatique peut même être désactivée. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier REIN. T de BORD” à la page 7-6. Mode Economie d'énergie Vous pouvez, au lieu de mettre l'appareil hors tension, le mettre en attente (Mode Economie d'énergie). Si la machine n'est pas utilisée pendant une période de temps définie, le mode Économie d'énergie est activé automatiquement. La période d'inutilisation par défaut est de 15 minutes. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du panneau de contrôle pour annuler le mode Economie d'énergie. Le délai avant que la machine ne passe en mode Economie d'énergie peut être réglé de 1 à 240 minutes. Quand la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche [Copie] reste allumé en vert, mais l'écran s'éteint. 2 Remarque Si la fonction Auto coupure est activée pendant le mode Economie d'énergie, la machine s'éteint. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG.” à la page 7-7. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-20 bizhub 162/210 Auto coupure Avec la fonction Auto coupure, la machine s'éteint automatiquement si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un délai spécifié, ceci afin d'économiser l'énergie. Le réglage par défaut est OFF. Tâches copie en file d'attente Vous pouvez placer des tâches de copie en file d'attente en chargeant et en appuyant sur la touche [Copie] pendant que CHAUFFE apparaît dans le coin inférieur droit de l'afficheur. Quand le message CHAUFFE disparaît, la numérisation du document commence et les copies sont réalisées. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-21 3.7 Papier Utilisez un papier conforme aux caractéristiques suivantes. Types de papier o : Disponible — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support dédié Papier recyclé Poids (g/m2) Source papier, etc. 60 à 90 g/m2 91 à 157 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Introducteur manuel o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o 1er magasin papier o o o 2ème magasin papier o — o 3ème magasin papier o — o 4ème magasin papier o — o 5ème magasin papier o — o Copie recto-verso o — o Type de papier Support dédié Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d'étiquettes Enveloppes Source papier, etc. Introducteur manuel o o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o o 1er magasin papier o o o o 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 5ème magasin papier — — — — Copie recto-verso — — — — 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-22 bizhub 162/210 Formats papier Papier de format non-standard Papier de format standard o : Disponible — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Source papier Largeur papier Longueur papier Introducteur manuel 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm Multi-introducteur manuel 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 1er magasin papier 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 2ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 3ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 4ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 5ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm Format du papier A3 w B4 w A4 w A4 v B5 w B5 v A5 w A5 v Source papier, etc. Introducteur manuel o o o o o o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o o o o o o 1er magasin papier o o o o o o o o 2ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 3ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 4ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 5ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o Copie recto-verso o o o o o o — o Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-23 Capacité de papier — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support dédié Papier recyclé Poids (g/m2) Source papier, etc. 60 à 90 g/m2 91 à 157 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Introducteur manuel 1 feuille 1 feuille 1 feuille Multi-introducteur manuel 100 feuilles 20 feuilles 100 feuilles 1er magasin papier 250 feuilles 20 feuilles 250 feuilles 2ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 3ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 4ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 5ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles Type de papier Support dédié Source papier, etc. Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d'étiquettes Enveloppes Introducteur manuel 1 feuille 1 carte postale 1 feuille 1 enveloppe Multi-introducteur manuel 20 feuilles 20 cartes postales 20 feuilles 10 envel. 1er magasin papier 20 feuilles 20 cartes postales 20 feuilles 10 envel. 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 5ème magasin papier — — — — 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-24 bizhub 162/210 Papier à ne pas utiliser Les types de papier suivants ne doivent pas être utilisés. Ils pourraient altérer la qualité d'impression, entraîner des serrages papier ou une détérioration de la machine. - Transparents de rétroprojection ayant déjà été introduits dans la machine Même si le transparent est toujours vierge, ne le réutilisez pas. - Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre - Papier extrêmement épais ou extrêmement fin - Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré - Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps. - Papier humide - Papier perforé - Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal - Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible - Papier torsadé ou gaufré - Papier hors norme (non rectangulaire) - Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones - Papier étiqueté - Papier accolé de rubans, crochets, boutons, etc. - Papier gondolé ou froissé - Papier dessin, papier couché ou papier pour imprimante jet d'encre Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-25 3.8 Zone d'impression Toute partie de l'image qui se trouve dans la zone indiquée ci-dessous ne peut être copiée. - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) à partir de la queue du papier (A) - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) à partir de la tête du papier (B) - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) sur les deux bords du papier (C) Pour plus de détails sur l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur, veuillez consulter le manuel utilisateur du Contrôleur d'imprimante. Si le contrôleur image IC-205 en option est installé, consultez le manuel utilisateur du Contrôleur image IC-205. B A C C A : 4 mm (à taille réelle) B : 4 mm (à taille réelle) C : 4 mm (à taille réelle) Sens de sortie du papier 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-26 bizhub 162/210 3.9 Stockage du papier Respectez les précautions suivantes pour le stockage du papier. - Stockez le papier dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : – A l'abri de la lumière directe du soleil – A l'abri des flammes – A l'abri de l'humidité excessive – A l'abri de la poussière - Le papier sorti de son emballage doit être placé dans un sac en plastique et entreposé dans un endroit frais et obscur. - Gardez le papier hors de la portée des enfants. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-27 3.10 Copier avec introduction manuelle du papier Vous pouvez introduire le papier à la main si vous souhaitez faire des copies sur du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, ou sur du papier dédié, comme les transparents, les cartes ou les cartes postales. Papiers acceptés en introduction manuelle Types de papier : - Papier ordinaire ou recyclé (épaisseur : 60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) - Papier dédié – Cartes (épaisseur : 91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2) – Transparents pour rétroprojecteur – Cartes postales – Feuilles d'étiquettes – Enveloppes Formats papier : - Maximum : 297 mm × 432 mm - Minimum : 90 mm × 140 mm 2 Remarque Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une page à la fois. Pour plus de détails, voir “Capacité de papier” à la page 3-23. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-28 bizhub 162/210 Réglage du multi-introducteur manuel Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction selon le format du papier, comme illustré ci-dessous. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-29 Chargement de papier ordinaire dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 100 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Le papier ne doit pas être chargé dans le multi-introducteur manuel au-delà du repère de , hauteur. 1 Chargez le papier dans le plateau d'introduction. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Chargez le papier recto vers le bas. % Vérifiez que le papier n'est pas gondolé. 2 Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction ainsi que les guides papier selon le format du papier. 2 Remarque Si l'on utilise du papier autre que du papier ordinaire, il faut alors en spécifier le type. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-30 bizhub 162/210 Chargement de cartes postales dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Lors du chargement de cartes postales, chargez-les dans le sens w (sens longitudinal), comme indiqué sur l'illustration et face à imprimer orientée vers le bas. 2 Remarque Ne pas charger de cartes postales dans le sens v (sens transversal). Après avoir chargé les cartes postales, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-31 Chargement d'enveloppes dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 10 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les enveloppes, rabat orienté vers le haut, comme représenté sur l'illustration. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-32 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque Avant de charger des enveloppes, appuyez fermement sur le paquet afin d'en expulser l'air qu'il contient, et veillez à bien aplatir les rabats, car dans le cas contraire les enveloppes pourraient se froisser ou entraîner un serrage papier. Après avoir chargé les enveloppes, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. 2 Remarque Ne chargez pas les enveloppes dans le sens v (sens transversal). Ne chargez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le bas. Ne chargez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers l'arrière. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-33 Chargement de transparents dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les transparents dans le même sens que le document. 2 Remarque Après avoir chargé les transparents, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-34 bizhub 162/210 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les planches d'étiquettes dans le même sens que le document. Placez les documents la face à imprimer étant orientée vers le bas. 2 Remarque Après avoir chargé les planches d'étiquettes, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-35 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via l'introducteur manuel 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier. 3 Insérez une feuille de papier recto vers le bas, en la poussant légèrement aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction. Le symbole de l'introducteur manuel ( ) s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. ? Une carte ou une carte postale est-elle chargée ? % Vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas gondolée. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le type de papier chargé. Sélectionnez l'un des quatre réglages papier suivants. NORMAL OHP CARTE ENVELOPPE 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-36 bizhub 162/210 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le format de papier chargé. ? OHP a-t-il été sélectionné à l'étape 5 ? % Faites votre sélection parmi les quatre formats de papier suivants : A4 w A4 v Letter w Letter v ? Avez-vous chargé du papier de format non-standard ? % Appuyez sur la touche [,] et tapez le format papier sur le clavier numérique. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes” à la page 5-9. ? Connaîssez-vous le format du papier FLS ? % Le format FLS par défaut est de 210 mm × 330 mm. Pour modifier le format FLS, veuillez prendre contact avec le service après-vente. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 9 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarredémarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-37 2 Remarque Pour effectuer des copies sur davantage de pages avec les mêmes réglages, introduisez le papier dans l'introducteur manuel pour commencer à réaliser automatiquement les copies. Pour effectuer des copies en continu sur des cartes, des cartes postales, des transparents ou des enveloppes, chargez-les dans le 1er magasin. Si vous spécifiez un papier autre que papier ordinaire et que vous utilisez l'introducteur manuel, l'écran change en conséquence, comme représenté ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-38 bizhub 162/210 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction ainsi que les guides papier selon le format du papier. 3 Insérez le papier recto vers le bas, en la poussant légèrement aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction. Le symbole de l'introducteur manuel ( ) s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. ? Des planches de cartes ou de cartes postales sont-elles chargées ? % Vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas gondolées. 4 Vérifiez que la mention OUI/NON s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran, puis appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. OUI/NON s'affiche pendant environ 5 secondes une fois que le papier a été chargé dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le type de papier chargé. Sélectionnez l'un des quatre réglages papier suivants. NORMAL OHP CARTE ENVELOPPE 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-39 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le format de papier chargé. ? OHP a-t-il été sélectionné à l'étape 5 ? % Faites votre sélection parmi les quatre formats de papier suivants : A4 w A4 v Letter w Letter v ? Avez-vous chargé du papier de format non-standard ? % Appuyez sur la touche [,] et tapez le format papier sur le clavier numérique. Pour plus de détails, voir “Copies sur divers types de supports” à la page 5-7. ? Connaîssez-vous le format du papier FLS ? % Le format FLS par défaut est de 210 mm × 330 mm. Pour modifier le format FLS, veuillez prendre contact avec le service après-vente. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 9 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-40 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque Si vous spécifiez un papier autre que papier ordinaire et que vous utilisez le multi-introducteur manuel, l'écran change en conséquence, comme représenté ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-41 3.11 Sélection de la source papier Il y a deux méthodes pour sélectionner le papier copie. - Papier Auto : Si la fonction Papier Auto est sélectionnée, le magasin contenant le papier au format le plus approprié sera sélectionné en fonction du format de l'original et du taux zoom spécifié. - Sélection manuelle du papier : Permet de choisir le papier copie que vous désirez. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Papier Auto 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto / Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Papier Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si APS ERR FORMAT s'affiche immédiatement après que la touche [Copie] a été enfoncée, cela indique qu'aucun magasin ne contient de papier au format le plus approprié. Chargez du papier de format approprié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez le format désiré, puis appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Copie]. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-42 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser une copie avec sélection manuelle du format papier 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier], puis sélectionnez le format papier désiré. Le format de papier sélectionné s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Chargement du papier dédié dans le 1er magasin Si du papier spécial (transparents, cartes postales ou cartes) est chargé dans le 1er magasin, réglez d'abord la fonction du 1er magasin dans le menu de réglage de la source de papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1” à la page 7-15. L'écran change selon le type papier défini pour la fonction papier magasin 1, comme illustré ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-43 Sélection automatique de la source papier Avec la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin, l'impression peut continuer à partir d'un magasin papier différent si le papier venait à manquer dans le magasin actuellement sélectionné. Elle ne peut être activée que si le magasin papier actuel ainsi qu'un autre magasin papier remplissent les conditions suivantes. - Le papier est du même format. - Le papier est du même type. - Le papier est positionné selon la même orientation. - La fonction type de papier est réglée sur ORDINAIRE, RECYCLE ou RECTO SEUL pour les deux magasins papier. 2 Remarque Si du papier est chargé dans l'introducteur manuel, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin ne peut être activée. Si le multi-introducteur manuel et le 5ème magasin papier sont installés, vous pouvez imprimer un maximum de 1500 copies sans vous arrêter. Pour réaliser un grand nombre de copies en continu, chargez tous les magasins (à l'exception de l'introducteur manuel) avec du papier qui remplit toutes les conditions ci-dessus. Si aucun magasin ne contient de papier, un message s'affiche pour indiquer que la machine doit être réapprovisionnée en papier. Les opérations de copie peuvent ne pas se poursuivre si du papier est chargé dans d'autres magasins papier que celui indiqué dans le message. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-44 bizhub 162/210 Ordre de basculement automatique des magasins papier Lorsqu'un magasin différent est sélectionné automatiquement, c'est le magasin suivant dans la liste ci-après qui est choisi en priorité. 1er magasin papier % 2ème magasin papier % 3ème magasin papier % 4ème magasin papier % 5ème magasin papier % Multi-introducteur manuel 2 Remarque Si des supports dédiés, des transparents ou des planches d'étiquettes par exemple, sont chargés dans le 1er magasin ou dans le multi-introducteur manuel, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin peut entraîner une introduction incorrecte du papier. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de modifier les réglages comme suit. Pour le premier magasin papier, changer le type de papier à l'aide de la fonction Papier Mag.1 du menu Réglage source papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1” à la page 7-15. Pour le multi-introducteur manuel, spécifiez le type de papier après avoir chargé le papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel” à la page 3-38. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-45 3.12 Documents originaux Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents L'introducteur de documents introduit, numérise et éjecte une page à la fois d'un document multi-feuilles. Pour que l'introducteur de documents puisse fonctionner correctement, il convient de charger le type correct de document. L'utilisation d'un document de type incorrect peut entraîner un serrage papier ou endommager le document ou la machine. 2 Remarque Pour copier des documents recto-verso, l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 (pour le bizhub 210) doit être installé. Types de document Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Document de formats mixtes 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-46 bizhub 162/210 Document de formats uniformes Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605) o : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Méthode d’introduction document Type de document Format du document Introducteur de documents Documents en feuilles • Documents recto DF-502 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 110 g/m2 DF-605 Capacité : 35 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Documents recto-verso DF-605 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Documents de formats différents DF-502 Capacité : 60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 DF-605 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 DF-502 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v DF-605 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w Largeur de document : 90 mm à 297 mm Longueur de document : 210 mm à 432 mm • Avec documents de largeurs mixtes DF-502 A3 w et A4 v B4 w et B5 v DF-605 Veuillez vous reporter au tableau ci-dessous. Vitre d'exposition Documents en feuilles, livres et objets de grandes dimensions Poids maximum : 3 kg A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v Largeur de document : jusqu'à 297 mm Longueur de document : jusqu'à 432 mm Largeur maximale du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 182 mm Détection de document de largeur mixte A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w 297 mm A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — 257 mm B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — 210 mm A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v o o o o o o — — 182 mm B5 w — — o o o o o — 148 mm A5 w — — — — — — o o Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-47 Précautions relatives aux originaux Les types de documents suivants ne doivent pas être chargés dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document. Sinon, l'original pourrait être endommagé ou un serrage papier pourrait se produire. Il vaut mieux placer ces documents sur la vitre d'exposition. Documents sur papier dédié - Documents pliés (pliés en deux ou en accordéon) - Documents très translucides ou transparents, comme du papier photosensible diazo - Documents comportant des perforations de reliure - Documents avec de nombreuses perforations de classeur, comme du papier volant - Documents revêtus, comme du papier thermosensible ou du papier carbone - Papier pour imprimante à jet d'encre - Documents qui viennent juste d'être imprimés avec ce copieur Documents sur du papier qui ne se prête pas à l'introduction - Documents gondolés - Documents froissés ou déchirés - Transparents de rétroprojection Si du papier de format non-standard présente un format proche d'un format standard, la copie est possible en utilisant la fonction Papier Auto ou Taux Auto. 2 Remarque Si un document de format non standard est placé sur la vitre d'exposition, les fonctions Papier Auto et Taux Auto ne seront pas disponibles. Après avoir chargé un document de format non standard, appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner un format papier ou appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner un taux zoom. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-48 bizhub 162/210 3.13 Spécifier une sélection Zoom La définition d'un taux zoom permet l'agrandissement ou la réduction de copie. Paramètres Zoom Paramètre Zoom Description 1:1 Les copies produites sont de mêmes dimensions que le document (× 1,00). Taux zoom AUTO Permet de sélectionner automatiquement le taux zoom le plus adapté au format du document chargé et au format spécifié pour le papier. Taux zoom prédéfinis Voici les taux zoom les plus fréquents disponibles pour copier sur des formats papier standard, des documents de divers formats standard. × 0,25 × 0,50 × 0,70 (A3 %A4 et B4% B5) × 0,81 (B4 %A4 et B5 %A5) × 1,15 (B4 %A3 et B5 %A4) × 1,41 (A4 %A3 et B5 %B4) × 2,00 × 4,00 × 0,25 et × 4,00 possible uniquement quand le format papier est sélectionné manuellement. Ces paramètres ne sont pas disponibles quand le papier est sélectionné automatiquement. Taux zoom sélectionnéa avec les touches zoom [,] et [+] Les touches [,] et [+] permettent de régler le taux zoom (augmenter ou réduire) par incréments de 0,01. En cas de sélection manuelle du format papier : réglage possible d'un taux zoom compris entre × 0,25 et × 4,00. (Sélection papier manuelle) En cas de sélection automatique du format papier : réglage possible d'un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. (Papier Auto) Fonction Zoom X/Y Permet d'effectuer des copies à l'aide de différentes valeurs d'échelle dans le sens vertical et dans le sens horizontal. Les touches [,] et [+] permettent de régler le taux zoom (augmenter ou réduire) par incréments de 0,01. Sens vertical : réglage possible d'un taux zoom entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. Sens horizontal : réglage possible d'un taux zoom entre × 0,50 et × 1,00. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-49 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre zoom AUTO 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto/ Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Taux Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la première ligne de l'écran. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le format papier désiré. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-50 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom fixe 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 1,15 % × 1,41 % × 2,00 % × 4,00 % × 0,25 % × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 ... Les taux zoom × 0,25 et × 4,00 n'apparaissent pas si la fonction Papier Auto est sélectionnée. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-51 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom spécifique 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour spécifier le taux zoom désiré Le taux zoom se règle par pas de 0,01. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-52 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Zoom X/Y 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom X/Y] jusqu'à ce que le voyant Zoom X/Y s'allume. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré pour la longueur (X). Le taux zoom augmente et diminue par pas de 0,01. ou Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 % × 0,50 ... ? Voulez-vous revenir à l'écran principal ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Voulez-corriger le taux zoom spécifié ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et répétez l'opération à partir de l'étape 2. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Largeur (Y) Longueur (X) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-53 5 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré pour la largeur (X). Le taux zoom augmente et diminue par pas de 0,01. ou Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 % × 1,15 % × 1,41 % × 2,00 % × 0,50 .... ? Voulez-vous revenir à l'écran principal ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Voulez-corriger le taux zoom spécifié ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et répétez l'opération à partir de l'étape 2. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 8 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Largeur (Y) Longueur (X) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-54 bizhub 162/210 3.14 Spécifier la densité de copie Réglages Types de document et Densité copie - Réglage TEXTE : Sélectionnez le réglage TEXTE pour copier des documents contenant du texte. Ce réglage permet d'améliorer les contours et de reproduire le texte avec netteté. Ce réglage offre un niveau automatique de densité et 9 niveaux manuels de densité. – Niveau automatique de densité [A] : Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé en fonction du document à copier. – Niveaux manuels de densité : Sélectionnez un niveau entre le plus clair et le plus foncé, en fonction du document à copier. - Réglage PHOTO : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents comportant des zones en demi-teintes (couleurs intermédiaires) comme dans des photographies. Le niveau automatique de densité [A] ne peut pas être sélectionné si le réglage PHOTO est sélectionné. - Réglage TEXTE/P : Sélectionnez le réglage TEXTE/P pour copier des documents comportant à la fois du texte et des photos. Le niveau automatique de densité et 9 niveaux manuels de densité sont disponibles. – Niveau automatique de densité [A] : Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé en fonction du document à copier. – Niveaux manuels de densité : Afin d'éviter que l'image au dos d'articles de journaux ou de magazines ne transparaisse sur la copie, appuyez sur la touche [*] pour sélectionner un niveau de densité plus clair. Pour reproduire des couleurs pâles dans les zones vives de l'image, appuyez sur la touche [)] pour sélectionner un niveau de densité plus foncé. 2 Remarque Sélectionner un niveau de densité trop foncé pourrait résulter en une reproduction sur la copie de la couleur du support du document et sélectionner un niveau de densité trop clair pourrait donner des copies très pâles. Il convient par conséquent de sélectionner le niveau approprié en fonction du document. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-55 Réaliser des copies après spécification de la densité copie 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Auto/Photo] pour choisir l'un des réglages suivants TEXTE/P[A] (AUTO), TEXTE[A] (AUTO), PHOTO, TEXTE/P, ou TEXTE. Le réglage en vigueur s'affiche sur le côté gauche de l'écran. 3 Si le paramètre PHOTO, TEXTE ou TEXTE/P est sélectionné, appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour régler le niveau de densité. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Pour réaliser des copies avec un niveau densité clair Pour réaliser des copies avec un niveau de densité foncé 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-56 bizhub 162/210 3.15 Interrompre des tâches de copie Vous pouvez rapidement suspendre des tâches de copies longues et continues en appuyant sur la touche [Interruption] afin d'entreprendre la copie d'un document différent. 2 Remarque Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas être interrompues. En outre, certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsqu'une tâche de copie est suspendue. Pour plus de détails, voir “Tableau d'association des fonctions” à la page 9-10. Si le document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition pour produire des copies 2en1 ou 4en1, il n'est pas possible d'interrompre la tâche de copie. Interrompre une tâche de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant d'interruption s'allume. L'opération de copie en cours est suspendue. Toutes les fonctions reviennent à leurs réglages par défaut. 2 Sortez le document actuel. Positionnez l'autre document que vous voulez copier. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-57 6 Une fois que l'autre document est copié, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant d'interruption s'éteint. Toutes les fonctions de copie reprennent leurs anciens paramètres. 7 Rechargez le document qui a été retiré à l'étape 2. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. La tâche de copie suspendue reprend. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-58 bizhub 162/210 4 Opérations de copie Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-3 4 Opérations de copie 4.1 Copies de base La procédure suivante décrit comment placer le document pour en faire une copie directe. Opérations élémentaires de copie 1 Positionnez l'original. Pour plus détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres copie voulus. – Papier (p. 3-41) – Zoom (p. 3-48) – Densité copie (p. 3-54) – Copies complexes (p. 6-3) 4 Opérations de copie 4-4 bizhub 162/210 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. – Le nombre de copies peut être spécifié entre 1 et 99. – Pour effacer la valeur saisie, appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression] pour démarrer le cycle copie. – Pour arrêter la copie avant que le nombre spécifié ne soit atteint, appuyez sur la touche [Stop]. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-5 4.2 Chargement du papier Lors du chargement du papier veillez à observer les précautions suivantes. Précautions Illustration Si le papier est gondolé, aplatissez-le avant de le charger. Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère , pour la pile de papier ou au-delà du nombre de feuilles spécifié. Poussez fermement les guides papier contre les bords de la ramette de papier. Si vous procédez à un chargement complémentaire, retirez d'abord tout le papier qui reste dans le magasin, placez-le sur la nouvelle pile de papier, puis chargez-le après en avoir égalisé les bords. 4 Opérations de copie 4-6 bizhub 162/210 Chargement du papier dans le 1er magasin papier 1 Tirez le 1er magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour tirer le magasin ? % Veillez à ne pas toucher de vos mains la surface du rouleau prise papier. 2 Appuyez vers le bas la plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. 3 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. 4 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Rouleau prise papier Plaque guide documents Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-7 5 Refermez le 1er magasin. 4 Opérations de copie 4-8 bizhub 162/210 Chargement du papier dans le 2ème magasin papier La chargement du papier dans les magasins 3, 4 et 5 s'effectue selon la même méthode, décrite ci-dessous. 1 Tirez le 2ème magasin. 2 Appuyez vers le bas la plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. 3 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. 4 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Plaque guide documents Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-9 5 Refermez le 2ème magasin. 4 Opérations de copie 4-10 bizhub 162/210 4.3 Chargement du document Vous pouvez placer le document sur la vitre d'exposition ou le charger dans l'introducteur de documents (en option). Positionnez correctement le document en fonction du type de document à copier. Chargement des documents dans l'introducteur de documents 7 ATTENTION Serrage papier dû à un introducteur de documents surchargé. % DF-502 : Chargement de 50 pages de document maximum. % DF-605 : Chargement de 80 pages de document maximum. % N’empilez pas de pages au delà du repère ,. % Veillez à ajuster les guides-document en butée contre les bords du document sinon l'introduction pourrait ne pas se faire dans l'axe correct. 1 Faites coulisser vers l'extérieur les guides latéraux des originaux. 2 Chargez dans l'introducteur les pages du document à copier, recto vers le haut. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-11 3 Ramenez les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document à copier. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers. 4 Opérations de copie 4-12 bizhub 162/210 Positionnement d'une feuille de document sur la vitre d'exposition Suivez la procédure suivante pour positionner du papier normal ou un original qui ne peut être utilisé avec l'introducteur automatique de documents. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Positionnez le document contre les réglettes en haut et à gauche de la vitre d'exposition. 4 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-13 Positionnement des documents transparents sur la vitre d'exposition Lorsque vous faites des copies à partir de transparents pour rétroprojecteur, de papier translucide ou d'originaux fortement transparents, placez l'original de la manière suivante. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Positionnez le document contre les réglettes en haut et à gauche de la vitre d'exposition. 4 Placez une feuille de papier vierge de même format au dessus de l'original. 5 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 4 Opérations de copie 4-14 bizhub 162/210 Positionnement des livres sur la vitre d'exposition Pour copier un livre ou un magazine ouvert, placez l'original de la manière suivante. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Vitre d'exposition cassée suite à une manipulation incorrecte. % Ne placez pas sur la vitre d'exposition des livres de plus de 3 kg. Il est également recommandé de ne pas exercer de pression excessive sur l'original, cela pourrait endommager la machine. 2 Placez le livre ouvert contre la vitre d'exposition, le haut du livre orienté vers l'arrière de la machine, et l'axe de reliure aligné avec le repère situé sur la réglette des originaux. 3 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Séparation livre]. Le voyant de séparation livre s'allume. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-15 Chargement d'originaux de formats mixtes dans l'introducteur de documents Il est possible de charger en même temps dans l'introducteur de documents un document constitué de pages de différents formats. Précautions pour le chargement de documents de formats mixtes : DF-502 Les documents de formats différents peuvent être copiés seulement si toutes les pages sont de la même largeur. Par exemple : un document composé de pages A3 w- et A4 v. DF-605 Voir “Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605)” à la page 3-46. 7 ATTENTION Serrage papier dû à un introducteur de documents surchargé. % DF-502 : Chargement de 50 pages de document maximum. % DF-605 : Chargement de 80 pages de document maximum. % N’empilez pas de pages au delà du repère ,. % Veillez à ajuster les guides-document en butée contre les bords du document sinon l'introduction pourrait ne pas se faire dans l'axe correct. 1 Faites coulisser vers l'extérieur les guides latéraux des originaux. (Papier Auto) Documents Copies 4 Opérations de copie 4-16 bizhub 162/210 2 Chargez, recto vers le haut, les pages du document à copier. 3 Ramenez les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document à copier. 4 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Original]. Le voyant orig. mixtes s'allume. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto / Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Papier Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la dernière page de l'écran. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-17 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers. 4 Opérations de copie 4-18 bizhub 162/210 4.4 Arrêter une tâche de copie Pour arrêter une tâche de copie, procédez comme suit. Arrêter/Reprendre/Annuler une tâche de copie 1 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre 3 Pendant l'impression, appuyez sur la touche [Stop]. Le message ATTENDRE SVP! s'affiche et l'impression s'arrête. ? Comment reprendre la tâche arrêtée ? % Quand le message PRESS. TOUCHE COPIE REPRENDRE s'affiche, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'impression reprend. ? Comment annuler la tâche arrêtée ? % Quand le message PRESS. TOUCHE COPIE POUR REPRENDRE apparaît, appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message COPIE ANNULEE s'affiche et la tâche est annulée. Arrêt Reprise Annulation Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-19 4.5 Vérification des compteurs de la machine Il est possible de contrôler le nombre d'opérations effectuées par cette machine depuis sa mise en service, en utilisant les fonctions rendues disponibles par l'activation de la touche [Etat]. Voici les éléments qui peuvent être vérifiés à partir du menu compteur de la machine. Pour vérifier les compteurs 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Etat]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu Compteur Machine apparaît. Compteur machine Description TOTAL COMPT Ce compteur indique le nombre total d'impressions réalisées depuis l’installation de la machine. COMPT FORM Ce compteur indique le nombre total d'impressions réalisées sur le format de papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le technicien du S.A.V.) TOTAL SCAN Ce compteur indique le nombre total de numérisations réalisées depuis l’installation de la machine. Cependant, le nombre de pages numérisées pour la réalisation de copies n'est pas pris en compte. 4 Opérations de copie 4-20 bizhub 162/210 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le compteur que vous voulez vérifier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. TOTAL PAGES? apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-21 4.6 Economiser l'électricité Le mode Veille et le mode Auto coupure sont extrêmement utiles pour économiser l'énergie. La procédure permettant de spécifier le mode Economie d'énergie et le mode Auto coupure est décrite ci-après. Spécifier le mode d'économie d'énergie et le mode auto coupure 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. Le message PARAMETRES MACHINE apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. MODE ECO. ENERG. apparaît. 3 A l'aide du clavier numérique, spécifiez la durée d'inactivité de la machine avant que le mode d'économie d'énergie ne soit activé. La temporisation est réglable de 1 minute à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [3]. AUTO COUPURE apparaît. 4 Opérations de copie 4-22 bizhub 162/210 Si la fonction AUTO COUPURE du menu GESTION ADMIN. est réglée sur ACTIVER, l'écran représenté cicontre s'affiche. Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Oui]. 6 A l'aide du clavier numérique, spécifiez la durée d'inactivité de la machine avant qu'elle ne s'éteigne. La temporisation est réglable de 15 minutes à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-3 5 Fonctions utiles 5.1 Spécifier une sélection Zoom Effectuer un zoom d'un document de format standard et le convertir à un format standard différent A titre d'exemple, voici la procédure permettant d'agrandir un document de format B5 au format A4. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom]. B5 > A4 apparaît sur l'écran. A chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom], le taux zoom prédéfini affiché change un réglage à la fois. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-4 bizhub 162/210 3 Vérifiez le réglage du format du papier à imprimer. – Si AUTO est affiché, assurezvous que du papier de format A4 est chargé dans le magasin. – Si AUTO n'est pas affiché, appuyez sur la touche [Papier] jusqu'à ce que AUTO apparaisse à l'écran. – Pour plus de détails sur le changement de la sélection du format de papier relatif au magasin, voir “Réglages source papier” à la page 7-12. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-5 5.2 Utilisation de la fonction Auto/Photo Réaliser des copies précises d'illustrations ou de photos Sélectionnez le réglage approprié (TEXTE, PHOTO, ou TEXTE/P) correspondant à la qualité du document à copier afin d'en réaliser la copie la plus précise possible. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Auto/Photo] pour sélectionner PHOTO ou TEXTE/P. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner la densité appropriée pour la couleur et la densité du texte et du papier du document. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-6 bizhub 162/210 4 Vérifiez le réglage du format du papier à imprimer. – Pour sélectionner AUTO ou une source papier spécifique, continuez à appuyer sur la touche [Papier] jusqu'à ce que le format papier désiré s'affiche. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-7 5.3 Copies sur divers types de supports Pour copier sur des transparents de rétroprojection A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des transparents chargés dans le 1er magasin. 1 Positionnez les documents format A4. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Réglez les guides papier du premier magasin et charger les transparents dans le même sens que le document. Vous pouvez charger un maximum de 20 transparents. 3 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. REGL. SOURCE PAPI.? apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-8 bizhub 162/210 4 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. PAPIER MAG. 1 apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner OHP. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner AUTO. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le 1er magasin. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-9 Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des planches d'étiquettes de 200 mm x 250 mm chargées dans le 1er magasin. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier du premier magasin et chargez les feuilles pour étiquettes de manière à ce que la surface à imprimée soit orientée vers le haut. 3 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. L'indication REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-10 bizhub 162/210 4 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. PAPIER MAG. 1 apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur le touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner CARTE. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner “FORMAT ENTRE”. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “200” pour la longueur (x). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 11 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “250” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-11 13 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 14 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le premier magasin. 15 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 16 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-12 bizhub 162/210 Copier sur des enveloppes (de format non standard) A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des enveloppes de 200 mm x 150 mm chargées dans l'introducteur manuel. Notez les précautions suivantes : 0 Avant de charger des documents et du papier de format non standard, assurez-vous de mesurer leurs dimensions. Les réglettes originaux sur les bords de la vitre d'exposition permettent de mesurer les documents et le papier. 0 Avant de charger des enveloppes, appuyez dessus pour en chasser l'air qu'elles contiennent et veillez à ce que les plis des rabats soient bien aplatis. 0 Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une enveloppe à la fois. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier pour l'introducteur manuel et chargez les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le haut de manière à ce que la face à imprimée soit tournée vers le bas. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-13 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner ENVELOPPE. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [,]. Le réglage Longueur (x) apparaît. 7 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “200” pour la longueur (X). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. x y 5 Fonctions utiles 5-14 bizhub 162/210 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “150” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. x y Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-15 Copier sur des cartes postales A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des cartes postales de 148 mm x 100 mm chargées dans l'introducteur manuel ou le multi-introducteur manuel. Notez les précautions suivantes : 0 Chargez les cartes postales de manière à ce que la face à imprimer soit orientée vers le bas. 0 Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une carte postale à la fois. 0 Vous pouvez insérer un maximum de 20 cartes postales dans le multi-introducteur manuel. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-16 bizhub 162/210 2 Ajustez les guides papier de l'introducteur manuel ou du multi-introducteur manuel et chargez les cartes postales, côté court en avant. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'indication REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner ENVELOPPE. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [,]. Le réglage Longueur (x) apparaît. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-17 7 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “148” pour la longueur (X). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “100” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. x y x y 5 Fonctions utiles 5-18 bizhub 162/210 6 Copies complexes Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-3 6 Copies complexes 6.1 Copies recto Spécifier les paramètres pour les copies 2en1 (ou 4en1) Sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant 2en1 (ou 4en1) s'allume. Documents Copie 2en1 Documents Copie 4en1 6 Copies complexes 6-4 bizhub 162/210 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. ? Connaissez-vous la séquence de copie de la fonction copie 4en1 ? % Il est possible de régler la séquence de copie sur l'un ou l'autre des motifs représentés cicontre. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1” à la page 7-41. La sélection par défaut est PATTERN1. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. – Si vous devez imprimer plusieurs copies, appuyez sur la touche [Finition] jusqu'à ce que Tri soit sélectionné. 6 Placez la page de document suivante sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. – Répétez cette étape pour toutes les pages du document. – Le nombre de pages de document numérisées s'affiche. 7 Une fois que vous avez numérisé toutes les pages du document, appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. 2 Remarque Si le document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition pour produire des copies 2en1 ou 4en1, il n'est pas possible d'interrompre la tâche de copie. 1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-5 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant 2en1 (ou 4en1) s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. ? Connaissez-vous la séquence de copie de la fonction copie 4en1 ? % Il est possible de régler la séquence de copie sur l'un ou l'autre des motifs représentés cicontre. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1” à la page 7-41. La sélection par défaut est PATTERN1. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 6 Copies complexes 6-6 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les réglages pour des copies Séparation livre 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Séparation livre]. Le voyant de séparation livre s'allume. 3 Pour effacer autour du texte ou le long de la reliure, appuyez sur la touche [Effacer]. ou Pour commencer à copier, poursuivez à l'étape 5. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la zone d'effacement ? % La largeur de la zone qui sera effacée, en ce qui concerne le réglage BORDS, est réglable de 5 mm à 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone d'effacement en ce qui concerne le réglage CENTRE est fixé à 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone effacée pour le paramètre BORDS peut être modifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT” à la page 7-37. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-7 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Le réglage de reliure par défaut concerne les livre avec reliure à gauche. Pour copier des livres reliés à droite, changez le type de document à l'aide de la fonction position de reliure. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE” à la page 7-36. Trois options d'effacement sont disponibles. REGLAGE EFFACEM. Description Finition CADRE Les pages copiées comportent un cadre vierge autour du texte. CENTRE Les pages copiées comportent une bande vierge le long de la reliure. TOUT Les pages copiées comportent un cadre vierge autour du texte ainsi qu'une bande vierge le long de la reliure. Documents Copies Documents Copies Documents Copies 6 Copies complexes 6-8 bizhub 162/210 6.2 Copies recto-verso En plus des copies 2en1 ou 4en1 recto-verso, vous popuvez également réaliser des copies recto-verso à partir de documents recto ou recto-verso. 2 Remarque L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installée (bizhub 210 uniquement). Le type de copie recto-verso qui peut être réalisé dépend des options qui sont installées. Pour effectuer des copies 2en1 et 4en1, utilisez l'introducteur de documents. Lors de la copie de documents recto-verso, utilisez l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605. Types de copies recto-verso Méthodes de copie rectoverso Affichage Couvreoriginal OC-504 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 Introducteur/ retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 Documents recto % Copie recto/verso o o o Document recto/verso % Copie recto/verso o × o Documents recto % Copie 2en1 recto/verso × o o 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-9 Précautions relatives à la copie recto/verso La copie recto-verso n'est pas possible dans les cas suivants : - Les documents recto-verso sont chargés dans l'introducteur automatique de document DF-502. - L'introducteur manuel a été sélectionné. - Du papier dédié (cartes, transparents, enveloppes ou planches d'étiquettes) est chargé. - La fonction TYPE PAPIER est réglée sur RECTO SEUL. - Du papier d'une largeur inférieur à 140 mm a été sélectionné. Documents recto % Copie 4en1 recto/verso × o o Documents recto/verso % Copie 2en1 recto/verso × × o Documents recto/verso % Copie 4en1 recto/verso × × o Méthodes de copie rectoverso Affichage Couvreoriginal OC-504 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 Introducteur/ retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 8 1 1 1 7 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 7 1 5 1 3 1 2 1 1 7 1 2 5 6 3 1 2 1 2 2 15 2 1 1 15 3 4 3 12 1 2 9 10 7 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 6 Copies complexes 6-10 bizhub 162/210 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Positionnez le premier document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant Recto/Verso s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Une fois que la page du document est numérisée, le message AUTRE PAGE SCAN=OUI s'affiche. 6 Positionnez le deuxième document. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Une fois que la page de document est numérisée, une copie recto-verso est produite. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-11 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso avec l'introducteur de documents 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Sélectionnez ainsi la fonction de copie voulue. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Copies complexes 6-12 bizhub 162/210 6.3 Finition des copies Pour copier ou imprimer plus d'un jeu de document, les pages peuvent être réparties par jeux contenant une copie de chaque page (tri) ou par jeux contenant toutes les copies de la même page (groupe). Fonctions de finition Fonction Exemple Fonction Non-tri Les copies s'empilent l'une sur l'autre dans l'ordre où elles sont éjectées. Fonction Tri Les copies sont automatiquement séparées en jeux, chacun d'entre eux contenant une copie de chaque page. Fonction Groupe Les copies sont automatiquement divisées en piles contenant toutes les copies de la même page. Documents Copies Documents Copies Documents Copies Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-13 Considérations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de Tri et de Groupe Conditions pour le tri - Le nombre de copies doit être réglé sur 2 ou plus. Conditions pour le tri croisé - Utiliser du papier de format A4 ou B5. - Du papier de même type et de même format doit être chargé horizontalement dans un magasin et verticalement dans un autre magasin. - Le réglage Papier Auto doit être sélectionné. - La fonction Orig. Mixtes ne doit pas être sélectionnée. - La fonction MODE CROISE du mode Utilitaires doit être réglée sur ON. (p. 7-42) - Le plateau de décalage, en option, ne doit pas être installé. 6 Copies complexes 6-14 bizhub 162/210 Tri décalé Chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. 2 Remarque Le plateau de décalage, en option, doit être installé. Tri croisé Chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Groupe décalé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. 2 Remarque Le plateau de décalage, en option, doit être installé. Groupe croisé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-15 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (tri à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition) 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition] jusqu'à ce que Tri apparaisse. Le voyant “Tri” s'allume. ? Ni le voyant Tri ni le voyant Groupe ne s'allume ? % Le réglage Non-tri est sélectionné. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Placez la page de document suivante sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. – Répétez cette étape pour toutes les pages du document. – Le nombre de pages de document numérisées s'affiche. 7 Une fois que vous avez numérisé toutes les pages du document, appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. 6 Copies complexes 6-16 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (à l'aide de l'introducteur de documents) 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition]. Le voyant de la fonction de finition s'allume. ? Ni le voyant Tri ni le voyant Groupe ne s'allume ? % Le réglage Non-tri est sélectionné. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-17 6.4 Effacer des portions de copies Il est possible d'effacer autour des copies, les zones qui semblent manquer de propreté. Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge effacée L'emplacement de la zone d'effacement sur la copie dépend du positionnement du document. Réglage Effacement Vitre d'exposition Introducteur de documents GAUCHE SUP. CADRE 6 Copies complexes 6-18 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec un réglage d'effacement 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Effacement]. Le voyant Effacement s'allume. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE, SUP. ou BORDS pour spécifier la zone à effacer. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la zone d'effacement ? % La largeur de la zone qui sera effacée, en ce qui concerne les réglages GAUCHE, SUP. et CADRE est réglable, de 5 mm à 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone effacée pour les paramètres GAUCHE, SUP. et BORDS peut être modifiée à l'aide de la fonction de réglage effacement. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT” à la page 7-37. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-19 6.5 Copie avec inversion Nég./Pos. Il est possible de produire des copies sur lesquelles les zones les plus claires (la couleur du support) et les plus sombres (texte) sont inversées par rapport au document original. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction inversion positif/négatif 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez la touche [Nég. Pos.]. Le voyant Nég. Pos. s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Documents Copies 6 Copies complexes 6-20 bizhub 162/210 6.6 Réaliser des copies pour archivage Il est possible de réaliser des copies qui comportent une marge afin d'en faciliter l'archivage dans des classeurs. Reliure à gauche : Les copies sont imprimées de manière à ce que le corps du document soit légèrement décalé vers la droite afin de créer la marge du côté gauche. Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge de reliure L'emplacement de la marge de reliure sur la copie dépend du positionnement du document. Documents Copies Vitre d'exposition Introducteur de documents Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-21 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Marge 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Marge]. Le voyant Marge s'affiche. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la marge qui est créée ? % La largeur de la marge de reliure peut être réglée entre 0 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % Vous pouvez changer la largeur de la marge de reliure à l'aide de la fonction réglage marge. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE” à la page 7-36. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Copies complexes 6-22 bizhub 162/210 6.7 Travaux copie programmés Cette fonction permet de mémoriser les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. 2 Remarque Les programmes copie ne peuvent pas être mémorisés pendant que la machine est en préchauffage ou quand une tâche copie est suspendue (mode Interruption). Mémoriser un programme de copie 1 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. – Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Programme Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ENREGIST.. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 A l'aide des touches [*] et [)], sélectionnez le numéro de programme vers lequel vous voulez stocker le programme de copie. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-23 2 Remarque Si deux programmes copie ont déjà été enregistrés, les paramètres copie précédemment mémorisés sous le numéro de programme actuellement sélectionné seront supprimés et remplacés par les nouveaux. 6 Copies complexes 6-24 bizhub 162/210 Rappeler un programme copie 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Programme Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner RAPPEL. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le numéro de programme du programme de copie que vous voulez rappeler. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-25 6.8 Codes d'accès Si des codes d'accès ont été spécifiés, l'utilisation de la machine peut être limitée à un utilisateur particulier et le nombre de copies par utilisateur peut être contrôlé. A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment saisir le code d'accès pour pouvoir effectuer des copies. 2 Remarque Si des codes d'accès ont été spécifiés, la machine ne peut pas être utilisée tant que le code d'accès n'a pas été tapé. Afin d'utiliser cette fonction, les codes d'accès doivent être spécifiés avec la fonction trace copie. Pour plus de détails, voir “Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur” à la page 7-23. Entrer un code d'accès 1 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez les 3 chiffres du code d'accès du compte utilisateur. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès saisi ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran du mode Copie s'affiche. 3 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 7 Lorsque vous avez terminé l'opération de copie, appuyez sur la touche [Code]. 6 Copies complexes 6-26 bizhub 162/210 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-3 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires Le mode Utilitaires comprend six menus. 2 Remarque Selon les options qui sont installées, certaines fonctions peuvent ne pas être disponibles. Si une fonction indisponible est sélectionnée, un message d'erreur s'affiche. No. Nom Description 1 PARAMETRES MACHINE Permet de spécifier le paramétrage de l'environnement d'exploitation de la machine. 2 REGL. SOURCE PAPI. Permet de spécifier différents réglages pour chaque magasin papier. 3 GESTION UTILISATEUR Permet de procéder à différentes opérations d'entretien pour préserver l'efficacité de la machine. 4 GESTION ADMIN. Permet de contrôler l'utilisation de la machine. 5 PARAM COPIE 1 Permet de spécifier les réglages par défaut pour chaque fonction de copie. 6 Paramètre Copie 2 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-4 bizhub 162/210 7.1 Paramètres machine A partir du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE, vous pouvez spécifier les divers paramètres de l'environnement d'exploitation de la machine. Veuillez vous reporter au tableau suivant pour chaque fonction. No. Nom Description 1 REIN. T de BORD Permet d'activer la fonction Initialisation Auto ou de sélectionner le délai (0,5 min, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, ou 5 min) après lequel la machine se réinitialise, soit après l'achèvement d'une opération de copie ou d'impression, soit après la dernière opération. Si la fonction Initialisation Auto est activée, toutes les fonctions sont automatiquement ramenées à leurs valeurs par défaut. • Réglage par défaut : 1 min. 2 MODE ECO. ENERG. Si la machine n'est pas utilisée pendant une période de temps définie, le mode Économie d'énergie est activé automatiquement. Le délai après lequel la machine passe en mode Economie d'énergie peut être réglé de 1 à 240 min (par pas d'une minute). • Réglage par défaut : 15 min. 3 AUTO COUPURE Cette fonction sert à définir le délai après lequel la machine s'éteint automatiquement à compter de la fin de la dernière opération. • Le réglage par défaut est “OFF”. 4 DENSITE (ADF) Permet de régler la densité de numérisation lors de l'utilisation de l'introducteur de documents en option. Mode 1 : Pour imprimer des copies éclaircies de documents foncés, afin d'éviter d'obtenir des copies trop sombres. Mode 2 : Pour imprimer des copies de même densité que l'original. • Réglage par défaut : Mode 1 5 DENSITE (LIVRE) Permet de régler la densité lors de la numérisation sur la vitre d'exposition. Mode 1 : Pour imprimer des copies de même densité que l'original. Mode 2 : Pour imprimer des copies éclaircies de documents foncés, afin d'éviter d'obtenir des copies trop sombres. • Réglage par défaut : Mode 1 6 DENSITE IMPRESS. Permet de régler la densité de copie/d'impression sur l'un des 5 niveaux. • Réglage par défaut : . 7 CONTRASTE LCD La luminosité de l'écran peut se régler selon l'un des quatre niveaux. • Réglage par défaut : . 8 LANGUE Permet de sélectionner la langue d'affichage. • Réglage par défaut : anglais. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-5 Sélection du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAMETRES MACHINE? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [8] selon la fonction de paramètres machine que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAMETRES MACHINE sont les suivantes : 1 REIN. T de BORD 2 MODE ECO. ENERG. 3 AUTO COUPURE 4 DENSITE (ADF) 5 DENSITE (LIVRE) 6 DENSITE IMPRESS. 7 LCD CONTRASTE 8 LANGAGE ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres machine ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-6 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier REIN. T de BORD 1 Sélectionnez REIN. T de BORD dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF, puis appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. ? Voulez-vous désactiver la fonction d'initialisation du panneau ? % Sélectionnez OFF. La fonction d'initialisation automatique est désactivée. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le délai désiré (min). 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-7 Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG. 1 Sélectionnez MODE ECO. ENERG. dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le délai voulu à l'issue duquel la machine passera en mode Economie d'énergie. La temporisation est réglable de 1 minute à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-8 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE C'est le réglage de la fonction AUTO COUPURE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN qui détermine si l'auto coupure est possible ou non. 1 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. ? La fonction AUTO COUPURE du menu GESTION ADMIN est-elle réglée sur DESACT ? % Passez à l'étape 4. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le délai voulu à l'issue duquel la machine s'éteindra automatiquement. La temporisation est réglable de 15 minutes à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si la fonction Auto-coupure se déclenche et que la machine s'éteint, il n’est plus possible d'effectuer des copies ou d'imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur. Pour effectuer des copies ou imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur, allumez la machine. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-9 Spécifier la DENSITE (ADF) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE (ADF) dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner Mode 1 ou Mode 2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si l'introducteur de documents n'est pas installé, la mention NON DISPONIBLE apparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-10 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la DENSITE (LIVRE) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE (LIVRE) dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner Mode 1 ou Mode 2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Spécifier la DENSITE IMPRESSION 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE IMPRESS. dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des sept niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-11 Spécifier le CONTRASTE LCD 1 Sélectionnez CONTRASTE LCD dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des quatre niveaux de contraste d'affichage de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Spécifier la LANGUE 1 Sélectionnez LANGUE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner la langue voulue. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-12 bizhub 162/210 7.2 Réglages source papier A partir du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI., vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de chaque magasin. No. Nom Description 1 INCH/METRIC Cette fonction sert à spécifier le système de mesure de format du papier chargé dans chaque magasin. Elle sert à déterminer si le papier chargé est mesuré en centimètres (METRIC), comme les formats A4 et B5, ou mesuré en pouces (INCH), comme le format Letter. Si aucune option particulière n'est sélectionnée, le format sera détecté automatiquement. • Réglage par défaut : système métrique. 2 PAPIER MAG. 1 Cette fonction sert à définir le type de papier (NORMAL, OHP, CARTE ou ENVELOPPE) chargé dans le 1er magasin, ainsi que le format du papier (AUTO ou FORMAT ENTRE). Si le format papier est réglé sur FORMAT ENTRE, entrez le format du papier. • Sélection par défaut : NORMAL et AUTO. 3 TYPE PAPIER Cette fonction sert à spécifier le type du papier chargé dans un magasin, ce qui détermine si le papier sera ou non disponible dans la fonction Papier Auto ou si le magasin sera pris en compte par la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin. Sélectionnez le type de papier (STANDARD, RECYCLE ou DEDIE) afin de spécifier si le papier sera disponible dans la fonction Papier Auto ou si le magasin sera pris en compte par la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin. Si du papier dédié est chargé dans le magasin, il faut sélectionner STANDARD, RECYCLE, DEDIE ou RECTO SEUL. NORMAL La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est disponible et la copie recto-verso est possible. RECYCLE La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est disponible et la copie recto-verso est possible. SPECIAL La fonction Papier Auto ne peut pas être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est indisponible mais la copie recto-verso est possible. RECTO SEUL La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est uniquement disponible lorsque vous faites des copies recto. De plus, il est toujours possible d'effectuer des copies recto-verso. • Réglage par défaut : NORMAL. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-13 Sélection du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. 1 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. REGL. SOURCE PAPI.? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] ou [3] selon la fonction de réglage de la source papier que vous désirez ajuster. Les fonctions REGL. SOURCE PAPI. sont les suivantes : 1 INCH/METRIC 2 PAPIER MAG 1 3 TYPE PAPIER ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de source papier ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-14 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier INCH/METRIC 1 Sélectionnez INCH/METRIC dans le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner un magasin papier. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner METRIC ou INCH. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-15 Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1 1 Sélectionnez PAPIER MAG.1 dans le menu REGLAGE SOURCE PAPIER. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] jusqu'à ce que le type de papier chargé soit sélectionné. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AUTO ou FORMAT ENTRE. – AUTO : Le menu REGL SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. – FORMAT ENTRE : un écran s'affiche pour vous permettre de spécifier le format du papier. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur (Y) du papier chargé. La plage des longueurs papier admises s'étend de 140 mm à 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour saisir le format du papier ? % Reportez-vous au schéma cicontre et assurez-vous de spécifier correctement les valeurs de longueur et de largeur. y x 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-16 bizhub 162/210 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur (Y) du papier chargé. La plage des largeurs papier admises s'étend de 90 mm à 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. 2 Remarque Quand la longueur du papier est définie entre 421 mm et 432 mm, la largeur maximale qui peut être spécifiée est de 279 mm. Quand la largeur du papier est définie entre 280 mm et 297 mm, la longueur maximale qui peut être spécifiée est de 420 mm. y x 421 mm à 432 mm Moins de 297 mm (Largeur) ( Longueur) Moins de 420 mm 280 mm à 297 mm (Largeur) (Longueur) Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-17 Spécifier le TYPE DE PAPIER 1 Sélectionnez TYPE PAPIER dans le menu REGLAGE SOURCE PAPIER. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner un magasin papier. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit NORMAL, RECYCLE ou SPECIAL, RECTO SEUL. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. 2 Remarque RECTO SEUL ne s'affiche que si la machine est équipée de l'unité rectoverso (option uniquement pour le bizhub 210). 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-18 bizhub 162/210 7.3 Paramètres de gestion utilisateur Le menu GESTION UTILISATE permet d'effectuer certaines opérations visant à maintenir les performances de la machine. Sélection du menu GESTION UTILISATEUR 1 Appuyez trois fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. GESTION UTILISATEUR ? apparaît. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [,] ou [+] pour la fonction de gestion utilisateur que vous voulez effectuer. Les fonctions de gestion utilisateur sont les suivantes : 1 DESHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON 2 TONER REPLENISHER No. Nom Description 1 DEHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON. Lorsque la température ambiante change de manière considérable (quand le chauffage est allumé en hiver par exemple) ou lorsque la machine fonctionne dans un endroit très humide, il peut se former de la condensation sur la surface du tambour PC à l'intérieur de la machine, avec pour effet une dégradation de la qualité d'impression de la machine. Si cela se produit, utilisez cette fonction pour sécher le tambour et éliminer la condensation. L'opération de déshumidification du tambour ne prend que trois minutes. 2 TONER REPLENISHER A la suite de l'impression de nombreux documents comportant d'importantes zones imprimées (photos par exemple) ou de l'impression de nombreuses copies avec inversion négatif/positif, la densité d'impression peut provisoirement devenir plus pâle si un appoint toner n'est pas effectué automatiquement. Si cela se produit, utilisez cette fonction pour forcer l'appoint toner et restaurer la densité à son niveau normal. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-19 Procéder à une déshumidification du tambour PC 1 Sélectionnez DEHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON dans le menu GESTION UTILISATEUR. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-18. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le séchage du tambour commence et l'écran principal apparaît. Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER 1 Sélectionnez TONER REPLENISHER dans le menu GESTION UTILISATEUR. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-18. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'appoint toner commence et l'écran principal apparaît. 2 Remarque Pendant que l'appoint toner a lieu, n'éteignez pas la machine et n'ouvrez par la porte frontale. Ne procédez pas à un appoint toner si la densité toner est satisfaisante. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-20 bizhub 162/210 7.4 Paramètres d'administration A partir du menu GESTION ADMIN., vous pouvez régler différentes fonctions de contrôle de l'utilisation de la machine. Pour régler la fonction GESTION ADMIN., il faut saisir le code d'accès administrateur. 2 Remarque L'enregistrement et la configuration du code d'accès administrateur doivent être assurés par le technicien de maintenance. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre Service Après-Vente. L'administrateur de cette machine doit veiller à ne pas égarer le code d'accès administrateur. No. Nom Description 1 AUTO COUPURE Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la fonction Auto Coupure sera ou non active. • Sélection par défaut : ACTIVER 2 TRACE COPIE Il est possible de spécifier 20 comptes au maximum en vue de contrôler l'utilisation de la machine. • Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la gestion utilisateur. • Permet d'enregistrer des codes d'accès aux comptes. • Permet de modifier ou supprimer les codes d'accès aux comptes. • Permet d'afficher ou d'effacer le compteur total d'un compte spécifique. • Permet d'effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-21 Sélection du menu GESTION ADMIN. 1 Appuyez quatre fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. GESTION ADMIN. ? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] ou [2] selon la fonction de gestion administrateur que vous désirez ajuster. Les fonctions GESTION ADMINIST. sont les suivantes : 1 AUTO COUPURE 2 TRACE COPIE ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les réglages de gestion administrateur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez les 6 chiffres du code d'accès administrateur. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès administrateur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction désirée apparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-22 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE 1 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ACTIVER. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu GESTION ADMIN. réapparaît. 4 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner OFF. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si la fonction auto coupure du menu GESTION ADMIN. est réglée sur DESACT., il n’est plus possible de faire de copies ni d'imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur une fois la fonction Auto Coupure exécutée et la machine éteinte. Pour effectuer des copies ou imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur, rallumez la machine. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-23 Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner MODE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction MODE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-24 bizhub 162/210 Enregistrement des codes d'accès utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner ENREG. NO. ACCES?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code d'accès désiré (3 chiffres) pour le compte. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Un écran s'affiche pour vous permettre de saisir le code d'accès suivant à enregistrer. ? Voulez-vous arrêter d'enregistrer les codes d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. La fonction Enreg. NO. Accès réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si vous essayez d'enregistrer plus de 20 codes d'accès, le message PLUS DE 20 COMPTES apparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-25 Modifier/Supprimer des codes d'accès utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner ENREG. NO. ACCES ?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code d'accès (3 chiffres que vous voulez modifier/supprimer. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message de confirmation qui apparaît vous demande si vous voulez garder ou non le code d'accès enregistré. ? Voulez-vous conserver le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner EDITER. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-26 bizhub 162/210 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. – EDITER : Un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de modifier le code d'accès. – SUPPRIMER : Le code d'accès actuel est supprimé. Le message NO. ACCES XXX SUPPRIME apparaît. Pour modifier ou supprimer d'autres codes d'accès, revenez à l'étape 4. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nouveau code. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Aprés l'apparition du message NO. ACCES XXX EDITE, un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de saisir le code d'accès suivant à modifier/supprimer. ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier/supprimer les codes d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. La fonction Enreg. NO. Accès réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si le nouveau code d'accès est déjà enregistré, le message NO. ACCES EST UTIL. apparaît. Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez un code d'accès différent. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-27 Afficher/Effacer le comptage total pour un compte donné 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner DONNEE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AFFICH.. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 6 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le code d'accès du compteur que voulez contrôler. ou Tapez le code d'accès désiré sur le clavier numérique. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le comptage total du compte sélectionné s'affiche. ? Voulez-vous quitter sans effacer le compteur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction DONNEE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-28 bizhub 162/210 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le compteur est effacé. ? Voulez-vous rétablir le précédent comptage du compteur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction DONNEE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-29 Effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner DONNEE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner EFFACEM.. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message qui apparaît vous demande de confirmer ou non l'effacement de tous les compteurs. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message COMPTEURS EFFACES apparaît. La fonction Données Trace Copie réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-30 bizhub 162/210 7.5 Paramètres copie A l'allumage de la machine ou lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Initialisation], les paramètres par défaut de la machine sont rétablis. En modifiant les paramètres par défaut, vous pouvez changer le mode Initial. Veuillez vous reporter aux tableaux suivants pour les paramètres par défaut de chaque fonction. Menu PARAM. COPIE 1 No. Nom Description 1 PRIORITE PAPIER Cette fonction sert à spécifier le magasin qui sera prioritaire quand le réglage Zoom AUTO est sélectionné. • Sélection par défaut : 1ER 2 PRIORITE DENSITE Cette fonction sert à sélectionner le réglage densité qui sera restauré (TEXTE, PHOTO ou TEXTE/P) après extinction de la machine et après que la touche [Initialisation] ait été activée. • Sélection par défaut : TEXTE/P 3 DENSITE NIVEAU(A) Cette fonction sert à régler le paramètre Densité AUTO sur l'un des trois niveaux entre CLAIR et FONCE. • Sélection par défaut : 4 DENSITE NIVEAU(M) Cette fonction sert à régler le paramètre de Densité manuelle sur l'un des neuf niveaux entre CLAIR et FONCE. • Sélection par défaut : 5 POS. ATTACHEMENT Cette fonction sert à spécifier si la première page d'un livre à numériser se trouve à gauche (reliure à gauche) ou à droite (reliure à droite). • Sélection par défaut : GAUCHE 6 REGLAGE MARGE Cette fonction sert à spécifier la largeur de la zone de reliure (marge) à une valeur comprise entre 0 mm et 20 mm (réglage par pas de 1 mm) pour la copie de documents destinés à être reliés. • Sélection par défaut : 10 mm 7 REGLAGE EFFACEM. Cette fonction sert à spécifier, entre 5 mm et 20 mm (par pas de 1 mm), la largeur d'effacement sur des copies réalisées avec la fonction Effacement réglée sur GAUCHE, SUP. ou CADRE. • Sélection par défaut : les paramètres d'effacement GAUCHE, SUP. et BORDS sont de 10 mm. 8 PETIT ORIGINAL Cette fonction sert à spécifier si la copie est ou non possible après le chargement d'un document dont le format ne peut être automatiquement détecté. • Sélection par défaut : est ACTIVE. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-31 Menu PARAM. COPIE 2 No. Nom Description 1 ORIGINAUX MIXTES Cette fonction sert à définir si la fonction Orig. Mixtes sera ou non sélectionnée au démarrage de la machine ou lorsque le panneau de contrôle est réinitialisé. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un introducteur de documents, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : OFF. 2 PRIORITE COPIE Cette fonction sert à définir si la fonction Papier Auto ou taux zoom Auto sera ou non sélectionnée au démarrage de la machine ou lorsque le panneau de contrôle est réinitialisé. • Sélection par défaut : AP (sélection papier auto). 3 SORTIE PRIORITA. Cette fonction permet de spécifier si l'un des modes de finition suivants NON, TRI ou GROUPE sera sélectionné lorsque la machine a été éteinte ou que la touche [Initialisation] a été activée. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un introducteur de documents, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : NON. 4 ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 Cette fonction sert à spécifier l'une des options suivantes relatives à l'ordre des pages quand le mode Copie 4en1 a été sélectionné. • Sélection par défaut : PATTERN1. 5 MODE CROISE Cette fonction sert à définir si les copies seront ou non éjectées en tri croisé si par ailleurs les conditions d'une sortie en mode croisé sont remplies. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un magasin décalé, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : ON. 6 COPIE RECTO/ VERSO Cette fonction permet de définir si l'impression recto-verso peut être utilisée. L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installée (en option pour le bizhub 210 seulement). • Sélection par défaut : OFF. 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-32 bizhub 162/210 Sélection du menu PARAM COPIE 1 1 Appuyez cinq fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAM COPIE 1? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [8] selon la fonction de paramètres de copie 1 que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAM. COPIE 1 sont les suivantes : 1 PRIORITE PAPIER 2 PRIORITE DENSITE 3 DENSITE NIVEAU (A) 4 DENSITE NIVEAU (M) 5 POS.ATTACHEMENT 6 REGLAGE MARGE 7 REGLAGE EFFACEMENT 8 PETIT ORIGINAL ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de copie 1 ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-33 Spécifier la PRIORITE PAPIER 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE PAPIER dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner un format de papier ou un magasin papier. 1er magasin, 2ème magasin, 3ème magasin, 4ème magasin, 5ème magasin, multi-introducteur manuel 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si plusieurs magasins sont chargés avec du papier de même format et de même type que dans le magasin qui est prioritaire en vertu du réglage de la fonction PRIORITE PAPIER, et si le papier de tous ces magasins est épuisé, un message peut apparaître pour indiquer que le papier soit chargé dans un magasin qui n'est pas prioritaire. Dans ce cas, procédez au chargement du papier selon les indications du message. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-34 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la PRIORITE DENSITE 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE DENSITE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner TEXTE, PHOTO ou encore TEXTE/P. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Si vous sélectionnez TEXTE ou TEXTE/P : un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de sélectionner AUTO ou MANUEL. ou Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 4 seulement si TEXTE ou TEXTE/P sont sélectionnés Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AUTO ou MANUEL et appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-35 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (A) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE NIVEAU (A) dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des trois niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (M) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE NIVEAU (M) dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des neuf niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-36 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE 1 Sélectionnez POS. ATTACHEMENT dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE ou DROITE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Spécifier le REGLAGE MARGE 1 Sélectionnez REGLAGE MARGE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur de reliure (marge). La largeur de reliure peut être spécifiée entre 0 mm et 20 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage de la marge ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-37 Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT 1 Sélectionnez REGLAGE EFFFACEM. dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE, SUP. ou BORDS. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur de la zone à effacer. La largeur de la zone à effacer peut être réglée entre 5 mm et 20 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage d'effacement ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-38 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier PETIT ORIGINAL 1 Sélectionnez PETIT ORIGINAL dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner DESACT. ou ACTIVER. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si un document qui ne peut être détecté est chargé et que la fonction est réglée sur ACTIVER, c'est le papier prioritaire qui sera utilisé pour la copie. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-39 Sélection du menu PARAM. COPIE 2 1 Appuyez six fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAM COPIE 2? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [6] selon la fonction de paramètres de copie 2 que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAM. COPIE 2 sont les suivantes : 1 ORIGINAUX MIXTES 2 PRIORITE COPIE 3 SORTIE PRIORITA. 4 ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 5 MODE CROISE 6 COPIE RECTO/VERSO ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de copie 2 ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-40 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les ORIGINAUX MIXTES 1 Sélectionnez ORIGINAUX MIXTES dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier la PRIORITE COPIE 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE COPIE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AP (Sélection papier auto), AS (taux zoom auto) ou MANUEL. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-41 Spécifier SORTIE PRIORITAIRE 1 Sélectionnez SORTIE PRIORITAIRE dans le menu PARAM COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner NON, TRI ou GROUPE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 1 Sélectionnez ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner PATTERN1 ou PATTERN2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-42 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier le MODE CROISE 1 Sélectionnez MODE CROISE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier COPIE RECTO/VERSO 1 Sélectionnez COPIE RECTO/VERSO dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. 8 Messages d'erreur Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-3 8 Messages d'erreur 8.1 Le message TONER VIDE s'affiche Message TONER VIDE Lorsque le toner est sur le point d'être épuisé, le message ci-dessous apparaît. Quand ce message s'affiche, remplacez la cartouche de toner par une neuve. 7 ATTENTION Cartouches toner usagées. % Conservez la cartouche usagée dans la boîte pour éviter de possibles souillures. % Mettez au rebut la cartouche usagée conformément à la réglementation locale. % Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. N'utilisez jamais d'autres types de toner, cela pourrait entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre Service Après-Vente. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-4 bizhub 162/210 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Basculez la cartouche vers l'extérieur, puis retirez-la. 3 En tenant vers le haut la partie operculée de la cartouche, retirez doucement l'adhésif de protection en tirant vers vous. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour retirer l'adhésif ? % Lors du retrait de l'adhésif, procédez doucement afiin d’éviter toute projection de toner. 4 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support de cartouche toner, extrémitße marquée "UP" orientée vers le haut.. ? Avez-vous observé les précautions nécessaires pour insérer la cartouche de toner ? % Comme illustré ci-contre, la languette située sur la cartouche de toner doit s'insérer solidement dans l'encoche du support de cartouche toner. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-5 5 Tapez légèrement trois ou quatre fois le fond de la cartouche de toner. 6 Refermez le support de la cartouche de toner, puis refermez la porte frontale. Quand la porte frontale est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. ? Les copies sont-elles pâles immédiatement après le remplacement de la cartouche de toner ? % Exécutez la fonction Toner Replenisher du mode Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir “Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER” à la page 7-19. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-6 bizhub 162/210 8.2 Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche Message SERRAGE PAPIER Si un serrage papier se produit pendant la copie ou l'impression, le message ci-dessous apparaît tandis que la copie ou l'impression s'arrêtent. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour dégager le serrage papier. Un message s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran pour indiquer l'emplacement du serrage. 7 ATTENTION Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincez la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. Message Emplacement du serrage papier OUVRIR 1.PORTE COTE Multi-introducteur manuel (p. 8-11) A l'intérieur de l'unité principale ou 1er magasin (p. 8-7) OUVRIR 2. (3./4./5.) PORTE COTE 2ème magasin (3ème/4ème/5ème magasin) (p. 8-10) Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installé. (bizhub 210 seulement) 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité recto-verso. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Fermez la porte de l'unité recto-verso. Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité principale ou 1er magasin 1 Ouvrez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 2 Tirez vers le bas les leviers d'appui. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour tirer vers le bas les leviers d'appui ? % Saisissez les leviers d'appui uniquement par leur partie verte pour les tirer vers le bas. 3 Retirez lentement le papier. Leviers d'appui 8 Messages d'erreur 8-8 bizhub 162/210 4 Tout en maintenant la plaque guide appuyée, retirez lentement le papier. 7 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur. 5 Tout en tournant la molette du rouleau, retirez lentement le papier. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour faire tourner le rouleau ? % Ne manoeuvrez que la molette verte pour faire tourner le rouleau. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur. Tambour PC Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-9 6 Refermez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 7 Tirez le 1er magasin. 8 Enlevez tout le papier du magasin et replacez-le. 9 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. 10 Refermez le 1er magasin. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-10 bizhub 162/210 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 2ème/3ème/4ème/5ème magasin 1 Ouvrez le cache latéral du 2ème/ 3ème/4ème/5ème magasin. 2 Retirez lentement le papier. 3 Fermez le cache latéral du 2ème/ 3ème/4ème/5ème magasin. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-11 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel 7 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image. 1 Enlevez tout le papier du multi-introducteur manuel. 2 Ouvrez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. Rouleau de transfert image 8 Messages d'erreur 8-12 bizhub 162/210 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 5 Rechargez le papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-13 8.3 Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche Message SERRAGE ORIGINAL Si un serrage document se produit pendant son introduction, le message cidessous apparaît tandis que la copie ou l'impression s'arrête. En suivant la procédure suivante, retirez le document mal introduit. Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur automatique de documents (DF-502) 1 Ouvrez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 2 Enlevez le document du plateau. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-14 bizhub 162/210 3 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents. 4 En tournant la molette d'introduction de document dans le sens de la flèche, extrayez doucement l'original. 5 Fermez l'introducteur automatique de documents ainsi que le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-15 6 Rechargez dans le plateau les documents que vous avez enlevés à l'étape 2. 2 Remarque Si le message RETOUR 1 (2) ORIG. dans ADF et PRESSER IMPRES. s'affiche à l'écran, chargez également l'une ou les deux pages à l'origine du serrage. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-16 bizhub 162/210 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents (DF-605) 1 Tirez en levant le levier du couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 2 Retirez avec soin tout document coincé. 3 Relevez le levier du guide document. 4 Tournez la molette d'introduction de document pour éjecter tout document serré. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-17 5 En soutenant de la main droite le plateau d'introduction de document, retirez tous les documents qui pourraient avoir été coincés. 6 Ramenez le levier du guide document à sa position d'origine et refermez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-18 bizhub 162/210 8.4 Quelle est la signification de chaque message ? Message Cause Remède SERRAGE PAPIER Un serrage papier s'est produit dans l'unité principale. Ouvrez le couvercle à l'endroit indiqué, puis retirez le papier serré. (“Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche” à la page 8-6) (En alternance et clignotant) OUVRIR XXX PORTE COTE Tout le papier serré n'a pas été retiré de l'unité principale. Vérifiez dans le message affiché à l'écran, l'emplacement du papier serré et retirez ce dernier. (“Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche” à la page 8-6) SERRAGE ORIGINAL Un serrage papier s'est produit dans l'introducteur de documents. Tout le papier serré n'a pas été retiré de l’introducteur de documents. Ouvrez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents, puis retirez le papier serré. (“Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche” à la page 8-13) (En alternance et clignotant) CAPOT ADF OUVERT RETIRER PAPIER DE L'INTRO MANUELLE Du papier est chargé dans le plateau d'introduction manuelle. Enlevez le papier du plateau d'introduction manuelle. CARTER FRONT. OUVERT La porte frontale de l'unité principale est ouverte ou n'est pas correctement fermée. Refermez correctement la porte frontale. (En alternance et clignotant) FERMER CARTER FRONT. PORTE R/V OUVERTE Le couvercle de l'unité rectoverso est ouverte. Refermez correctement le couvercle de l'unité recto-ver- (En alternance so. et clignotant) FERMER PORTE R/V COUVRE ORIGI. OUVERT L'introducteur de documents est relevé alors qu'il contient un document. Refermez correctement l'introducteur de documents. (En alternance et clignotant) FERMER CACHE ORIGI. CAPOT ADF OUVERT Le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents est ouvert. Refermez correctement le couvercle de l'introducteur de (En alternance documents. et clignotant) FERMER CAPOT ADF TONER VIDE Le toner est épuisé. La copie et l'impression ne sont plus possibles. Remplacez la cartouche toner par une cartouche neuve. (“Remplacement de la cartouche de toner” à la page 8-4) (En alternance et clignotant) REMPLACER TONER Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-19 MAGASIN VIDE Le magasin sélectionné n'a plus de papier. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Chargez le papier du format spécifié dans le magasin pa- (En alternance pier spécifié. et clignotant) CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX) POS. ORIGI. DANS ADF Aucun document n'a été chargé dans l'introducteur de documents préalablement au lancement d'une fonction de copie (comme “2en1” ou “Orig.mixtes”) qui fait appel à l'introducteur de documents. Sinon, c'est l'introducteur de documents qui est relevé. Chargez un document dans l'introducteur de documents. Refermez correctement l'introducteur de documents. ENLEVER PAPIER Lors de l'interruption d'une tâche de copie en vue d'effectuer une opération différente de copie, à l'exception de la fonction “Séparation Livre”, le document relatif à la tâche interrompue a été laissé dans l'introducteur de documents. Retirez le document de l'introducteur automatique de documents. TEXTE/P×1,00 ¦[A]§#XXX:EMPTY (Lors de la spécification des sélections copie) Le magasin sélectionné n'a plus de papier. “#” indique le magasin papier, et “XXX” indique le format papier. Chargez du papier du format spécifié dans le magasin indiqué, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. PAPIER NON CONFORME • Pendant la copie, le format du papier contenu dans le magasin sélectionné a changé. • Pendant la copie de documents de formats mixtes avec la fonction Papier Auto, le papier de format approprié n'a pas pu être trouvé. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Chargez du papier du format spécifié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. (En alternance et clignotant) CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX) APS ERR FORMAT Pendant la copie avec la fonction Papier Auto, le papier de format approprié n'a pu être trouvé. Chargez du papier de format approprié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. AMS ERR FORMAT Pendant la copie avec la fonction Taux Auto, la combinaison du format du document et du format du papier a pour résultat d'excéder les limites ×0,5 et ×2,0 du taux zoom. Chargez du papier de format approprié ou servez-vous des touches [,] et [+] pour spécifier le taux zoom. Message Cause Remède 8 Messages d'erreur 8-20 bizhub 162/210 ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER Le papier chargé dans le magasin papier a provoqué une erreur de format. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin papier qui présente l'erreur format, puis refermez-le. Vérifiez si un format personnalisé a été spécifié, et corrigez le format papier à l'aide de la fonction appropriée du mode Utilitaires. (En alternance et clignotant) REINI. PAPIER (#XXX) MEMOIRE PLEINE Le volume des données de l'image numérisée a dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche, ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Cela permet d'effacer de la mémoire les données de numérisation.) (En alternance et clignotant) PRESSER UNE TOUCHE IMPRESSION PC MEMOIRE PLEINE Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur ont dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche, ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Cela permet d'effacer de la mémoire les données image.) SET PLUG-IN COUNTER Un compteur clé n'est pas inséré. Insérez le compteur clé. RECEPTACLE SUP PLEIN Si le séparateur travaux, en option, est installé et que le plateau copie supérieur a atteint sa capacité maximum, l'impression ne peut pas se poursuivre. Enlevez tout le papier du plateau copie supérieur du sépa- (En alternance rateur travaux. et clignotant) ENLEVER PAPIER ERR. MOUV. PLATEAU Le séparateur travaux, en option, est installé et le papier contenu dans le plateau copie supérieur ou dans le plateau copie inférieur a atteint la capacité maximale au démarrage de la machine, ou quand la copie ou l'impression commence. Enlevez tout le papier du plateau copie supérieur ou dans le plateau copie inférieur du séparateur travaux, puis appuyez sur une touche. (En alternance et clignotant) PRESSER UNE TOUCHE APPEL MAINTENAN.(M1) Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. APPEL MAINTENAN.(M2) L'unité image doit être remplacée. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. PROBLEME MACHINE Un problème s'est produit sur la machine. Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. Si le message d'erreur s'affiche encore, contactez votre service après vente. (En alternance et clignotant) (C####) Message Cause Remède Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-21 8.5 Si l'on obtient des copies de mauvaise qualité Symptôme Cause possible Remède La copie est trop claire. La densité de copie est réglée sur Clair. Avec la touche Auto/Photo [)], sélectionnez une densité copie plus foncée (p. 3-54). Le papier est humide. Changez le papier (p. 4-6). La copie est trop sombre. La densité copie est réglée sur Foncé Avec la touche Auto/Photo [*], sélectionnez une densité copie plus claire (p. 3-54). L'original n'est pas suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit fermement plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition (p. 4-12). La copie est floue. Le papier est humide. Changez le papier (p. 4-6) L'original n'est pas suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit fermement plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition (p. 4-12). La copie présente des tâches ou des souillures. La copie présente des lignes. La surface de la vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. (p. 9-8) Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 9-8) L'original est très transparent. Placez une feuille de papier blanc par dessus l'original (p. 4-13). L'original est recto-verso. En cas de copie d'un original recto-verso fin, l'information contenue au verso de l'original risque d'apparaître au recto de la copie. Avec la touche Auto/Photo [*], sélectionnez une densité copie plus claire pour le fond (p. 3-54). L'unité image a atteint la fin de sa durée de service. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre (p. 9-8). 8 Messages d'erreur 8-22 bizhub 162/210 L'image n'est pas alignée correctement sur le papier. L'original n'est pas correctement positionné. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document (p. 4-12). Si l'introducteur de documents est installé, ajustez correctement les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document (p. 4-10). Le document n'est pas placé correctement dans l'introducteur de documents. Ouvrez l'introducteur de documents, et placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document (p. 4-12). Les guides latéraux des originaux ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les guides latéraux des originaux contre les bords du document. Le papier est trop gondolé. Lissez le papier gondolé et rechargez la pile de papier dans le magasin. Le bord de la copie est sale. Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre (p. 9-8). Le format papier sélectionné est supérieur à celui du document (avec un facteur zoom e × 1,00). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original (p. 3-41). Sinon, sélectionnez la fonction Taux Auto pour agrandir et adapter la copie au format de papier sélectionné (p. 3-48). L'orientation du document est différente de l'orientation de la copie (le paramètre zoom étant réglé sur × 1,00). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien sélectionnez une orientation copie identique à celle du document. La copie a été réduite à une taille inférieure à celle du papier (avec un taux zoom de réduction). Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui fasse correspondre le format de la copie avec celui du papier sélectionné (p. 3-48). Sinon, sélectionnez la fonction Taux Auto pour réduire et adapter la copie au format de papier sélectionné (p. 3-41). Symptôme Cause possible Remède Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-23 8.6 En cas de copie insatisfaisante Symptôme Cause possible Remède L'afficheur reste vierge. Le voyant [Impression] est-il allumé en vert ? Le mode Economie d'énergie est activé. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du panneau de contrôle pour annuler le mode Economie d'énergie (p. 3-19). La fonction “AUTO COUPURE” a été activée. Placez l'interrupteur principal sur o (p. 3-17). Le voyant [Impression] ne s'allume pas en vert. Un code d'accès utilisateur (section) n'a pas été entré. Tapez le code d'accès utilisateur (section) selon les instructions figurant dans Codes d'accès (p. 6-25). Aucune copie n'est produite même s'il l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. Si le voyant “Erreur” du panneau de contrôle s'allume, c'est qu'une erreur s'est produite. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. La machine vient juste d'être allumée et se trouve en préchauffage. A la mise sous tension, il faut patienter moins de 30 secondes avant que la machine ne soit prête à réaliser des copies. Veuillez patienter. La machine ne peut pas être mise en mode Copie. La machine est en mode Interruption (le voyant Interruption est allumé). Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption] pour annuler le mode Interruption (p. 3-56). La machine ne fonctionne pas lorsqu'on l'allume. Le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas branché. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Le disjoncteur de la pièce s'est déclenché. Réarmer le disjoncteur. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-24 bizhub 162/210 9 Divers Divers 9 bizhub 162/210 9-3 9 Divers 9.1 Caractéristiques Unité principale bizhub 162/210 Caractéristique bizhub 162 bizhub 210 Type Bureau/Console* Plateau Fixe Revêtement du tambour OPC Système copie Système d'impression électro photographique Système de développement Système HMT Système fixation Système de rouleaux chauffés Résolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi Document • Types : Feuilles, livres, et autres objets en trois dimensions • Format : maximum A3 w, Ledger w (11 × 17 w) • Poids : 3 kg Types de papier • Papier ordinaire (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), papier recyclé (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) • Papier dédié : Papier épais (91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2), transparents, cartes postales, enveloppes et planches d'étiquettes